CONTENTS

Table

of Contents

Preface

List of Figures

Acknowledgments

List of Tables

Part One: The Publishing Process

Index

1 Books and Journals

2 Manuscript Preparation, Manuscript Editing, and Proofreading

3 Illustrations and Tables

4 Rights, Permissions, and Copyright Administration by William S. Strong

Part Two: Style and Usage

5 Grammar and Usage by Bryan A. Garner

6 Punctuation

7 Spelling, Distinctive Treatment of Words, and Compounds

8 Names and Terms

9 Numbers

10 Abbreviations

11 Foreign Languages

12 Mathematics in Type

13 Quotations and Dialogue

Part Three: Documentation

14 Documentation I: Notes and Bibliography

15 Documentation II: Author-Date References

16 Indexes

Appendix A: Production and Digital Technology

Appendix B: Glossary

Bibliography

Index

PREFACE

Table

of Contents

This, the sixteenth edition of The Chicago Manual of Style, marks the first edition to be prepared and

List of Figures

published simultaneously in print and online. As opportunities for publishing have grown

List of Tables

dramatically in an era of electronic publication and distribution, the guiding principles for this edition

have been twofold: to recognize the continuing evolution in the way authors, editors, and publishers

Index

do their work, on the one hand, and to maintain a focus on those aspects of the process that are

independent of the medium of publication, on the other.

In service of the former principle, this edition assumes that all publishers might benefit from an

extended discussion of the organizational and proofreading requirements of electronic publications

(chapters 1 and 2). More attention has also been given to the role of software for manuscript editors—

for example, with the addition of a manuscript cleanup checklist intended to benefit authors and

editors alike. Complementing chapters 1 and 2 is an overview (in appendix A) of production

technologies and in particular the role of electronic markup in a publishing workflow. Coverage of

copyright and permissions (chapter 4) includes new information on fair use and electronic rights,

including a discussion of the NIH Public Access Policy for journal articles, and the treatment of bias-

free language in chapter 5 has been significantly expanded. The chapters on documentation (14 and

15) offer updated information on citing electronic sources, including many more examples, and an

updated glossary (appendix B) includes more terms related to electronic publishing.

Also new to this edition is an introduction to Unicode (in chapter 11), a widely adopted

computing standard that defines many of the letters and symbols required by the world's writing

systems. Unicode identifiers and descriptions are included alongside special characters in the chapters

on foreign languages and math and elsewhere to aid authors, editors, and publishers in the positive

identification and proper implementation of these characters. More generally, an effort has been made

to acknowledge organizations that publish their standards and guidelines online—in an era when

this has become routine. For example, we defer not only to the website of the Unicode Consortium for

more information on the tens of thousands of characters defined by that organization thus far but also

to the romanization tables published online by the Library of Congress for guidelines on

transliteration. And, though we continue to present guidance on abbreviating country names in

general contexts—including our new preference for US over U.S.—we also direct readers to the

International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for the latest two- and three-letter country codes

for the 250-odd areas of the world for which these have been defined.

With an eye to facilitating navigation and streamlining our recommendations, a few

organizational changes have been made. Part titles organize the body of the manual into three

sections: on the process of writing, editing, and publishing; on matters of style and usage; and on

documentation (including indexing). Titles of individual paragraphs have been expanded to become

more meaningful, and many smaller paragraphs that treated different aspects of the same issue have

been combined. To facilitate finding related discussions and for faster navigation online, more cross-

references have been added. To recognize the overlapping roles of authors, editors, and proofreaders,

the discussion of manuscript preparation and editing has been combined with that of proofreading

into a single chapter, as have the discussions on illustrations and tables, which are typically prepared

and edited separately from the text. In response to overwhelming reader input, our hyphenation

guidelines (chapter 7) are now presented as a four-part table. And, in a significant departure from

previous editions, Chicago now recommends a uniform stylistic treatment for the main elements of a

citation—authors' names, titles of works, and so forth—in both its systems of documentation. The

differences between the notes and bibliography system (chapter 14) and the author-date system

(chapter 15) are now a simple matter of arrangement of elements, eliminating the need for repetitive

examples.

Though most of the fundamental principles of the manual remain in place, a few changes were

once again in order. In response mainly to comments from our readers (on our Q&A page and on e-

mail lists for editors), this edition has moved toward recommending a single rule for a given stylistic

matter rather than presenting multiple options. We now recommend, for example, a single approach

to ellipses—a three- or four-dot method (chapter 13, where we also explain the European preference

for bracketed ellipses). And we have eliminated most of the exceptions to the rules for forming the

possessive of proper names (chapter 7) as well as those for implementing headline-style capitalization

(chapter 8). We have come to understand that even in the case of somewhat arbitrary rules, writers

and editors tend to look to this manual for the most efficient, logical, and defensible solution to a

given editorial problem. On the other hand, none of our recommendations are meant to foreclose

breaking or bending rules to fit a particular case, something we continue to do ourselves. Once again,

we have looked to what has become a maxim (from the first edition of the manual in 1906): "Rules

and regulations such as these, in the nature of the case, cannot be endowed with the fixity of rock-

ribbed law. They are meant for the average case, and must be applied with a certain degree of

elasticity."

This edition marks an evolution of more than forty years, starting with the landmark twelfth

edition, published in 1969. As part of this evolution, and as with the fifteenth edition, Chicago

consulted a broad range of scholars and professionals in the fields of publishing and academics

throughout the revision process. We also continued to benefit from the many helpful comments and

suggestions sent to us by our readers, many of whom come from fields outside of scholarly

publishing. Their input, in particular, helped us to keep in mind those principles of writing and

editing that remain true regardless of the medium or field of publication.

On behalf of the University of Chicago Press

Russell David Harper

Spring 2010

WHAT’S NEW IN THE 16TH EDITION

Comprehensive updates reflecting the latest style and usage, technology, and professional

practice

Expanded coverage of electronic publications, including procedures for proofreading web-based

and other electronic documents

Electronic-editing checklist for editors and writers

Expanded section on bias-free language

Expanded coverage of fair use and electronic rights, including an overview of the NIH Public

Access Policy

New section on parallel structure

New and improved hyphenation guide, presented in an easy-to-use tabular format

An introduction to Unicode, the international computing standard for letters and symbols

required by the world’s languages, including tables with Unicode numbers

More references to organizations that publish their own guidelines and standards online

Newly uniform stylistic treatment of elements in the two major systems of documentation

Updated advice on DOIs versus URLs, including more examples

More tips for citing blogs, podcasts, and other electronic sources

Streamlined advice on citing legal and public documents

Thoroughly revised coverage of production processes, including an overview of electronic

markup and XML

An updated glossary that includes more terms related to electronic publishing

Expanded headings on numbered paragraphs and more cross-references for ease of navigation,

especially online

A logical and intuitive reorganization by chapter and paragraph that brings together closely

related concepts wherever possible, to help readers find what they’re looking for

Firmer rules and clearer recommendations, to help authors and editors make the right choices

First-ever simultaneous publication of print and online editions, to give all users access to full-

text searches of the new edition and other online tools

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Table

of Contents

An undertaking such as the publication of The Chicago Manual of Style, which strives to codify the best

List of Figures

practices of an institution and an industry, must be an effort of many hands and many voices if it is

List of Tables

to succeed. This edition has benefited from the carefully crafted recommendationsâ€”some broad,

some minute, all essentialâ€”of a legion of publishing professionals. At the same time, it was equally

Index

essential that those recommendations be compared, vetted, and applied in a consistent manner and

with a clear vision, a challenging task performed in exemplary fashion by this edition's principal

reviser, Russell David Harper.

A preliminary outline as well as the entire penultimate draft of the manuscript was read and

commented on by an advisory board representing various communities of readers:

David Bevington, Department of English, University of Chicago

William Germano, The Cooper Union for the Advancement of Science and Art

John Hevelin, Publications Consultant

Alex Holzman, Temple University Press

Beth Luey, Editorial Consultant

Evan Owens, Portico

Margaret Perkins, New England Journal of Medicine

Nancy Perry, Bedford/St. Martin's

Oona Schmid, American Anthropological Association

Sem Sutter, University of Chicago Library

Robert Wald, Department of Physics, University of Chicago

We would like to thank the many experts who contributed to our coverage of languages: T.

David Brent, Erik Carlson, Wendy Doniger, Teresa Fagan, Ariela Finkelstein, Victor Friedman,

Kathleen Hansell, Wadad Kadi, Elsi Kaiser, Kathryn Krug, John Lipski, Line Mikkelsen, Carol Neidle,

Christina von Nolcken, Eizaburo Okuizumi, David Pharies, Thomas Shannon, Malynne Sternstein,

Anna Szabolcsi, Ivey Pittle Wallace, and Yuan Zhou. We are indebted to Brian Albrecht, Dean

Blobaum, Michael Brehm, Deborah Bruner, Anthony Crouch, Keir Graf, Rich Hendel, Todd Pollak,

and Deb Wong for their formative input on coverage of production for both print and electronic

publications; to Diana Gillooly, Michael Koplow, Diane Lang, and Sharon Jennings for their advice on

mathematics; and to Leslie Keros and Carol Anne Meyer for their guidance on documentation. We are

also grateful to Perry Cartwright and Lolly Gasaway for their review of copyright and permissions

material; to Molly Balikov, Michael Brondoli, Jean Eckenfels, Fred Kameny, Randy Petilos, and Angela

Yokoe for their insights on a variety of particular style matters; and to others, too many to name

individually, who responded to queries and informal polls about specific sections of the manual. We

also owe a particular debt to Bryan A. Garner and William S. Strong for their authorship of whole

chapters.

Within the University of Chicago Press, special thanks go to Mary E. Laur and David Morrow,

who oversaw the revision process, reviewed the many incarnations of the manuscript, and kept the

print and online editions on track for simultaneous publication; to Susan Allan, Carol Kasper, Sylvia

Mendoza, John Muenning, Carol Fisher Saller, Anita Samen, and Jill Shimabukuro for their essential

role in shaping the manuscript; to Rossen Angelov, Eric Gamazon, Ellen Gibson, Debra D. Hebda,

and Courtney Turlington for their leadership in developing the online edition; to Paul Schellinger,

who sponsored the project; and to Garrett Kiely, who fostered the environment of collegiality and

professionalism within which this effort took place. Many other staff members contributed their

knowledge and skills at various stages of the process: Laura Andersen, Matt Avery, Kira Bennett, Erik

Carlson, Lindsay Dawson, Erin C. DeWitt, Katherine M. Frentzel, Mary Gehl, Ruth Goring, Sandra

Hazel, David Jiambalvo, Dustin Kilgore, Kailee R. Kremer, Ryan Li, Renaldo Migaldi, David

O'Connor, Patricia O'Shea, Mark Reschke, Christopher Rhodes, Maia Rigas, Christina Samuell, Joel

Score, Ed Scott, Rhonda Smith, Isaac Tobin, Maia Wright, and Aiping Zhang. On behalf of the press,

Christine Gever proofread the book, and Margie Towery prepared the index.

On a final note, this edition is in many ways most indebted to Catharine Seybold (1915--2008) and

Bruce Young (1917--2004), who compiled the landmark twelfth edition of this manual as well as the

thirteenth, to John Grossman, who compiled the fourteenth edition, and to Margaret Mahan, who was

responsible for the fifteenth. It is to their high standard for what has come to be known as "Chicago

style" that we have looked in preparing this, the sixteenth edition of the manual.

The University of Chicago Press Staff

Spring 2010

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

of Contents

Overview

List of Figures

1.1

Books and journals as the core of scholarly publishing

List of Tables

1.2

Electronic publishing

Index

The Parts of a Book

Introduction

1.3

Rectos and versos

1.4

Outline of divisions and parts of a book

Page Numbers

1.5

Pages and folios

1.6

Roman numerals for front matter

1.7

Arabic numbers for text and back matter

1.8

Separate versus consecutive pagination across more than one volume

Running Heads

1.9

Running heads defined

1.10

Running heads for front matter

1.11

Running heads for text

1.12

Subheads as running heads

1.13

Running heads for back matter

1.14

Running heads for endnotes

1.15

Omission of running heads

Front Matter

Title Pages

1.16

Half title

1.17

Series title or frontispiece

1.18

Title page

Copyright Page

1.19

Components of a copyright page

1.20

Biographical note

1.21

Publisher's address

1.22

Copyright notice

1.23

Copyright dates of previous editions

1.24

Copyright renewal or other changes

1.25

Publishing history

1.26

What constitutes a new edition?

1.27

Country of printing

1.28

Impression number

1.29

Indication of original-language edition for translations

1.30

Acknowledgments, permissions, and other credits

1.31

Acknowledgment of grants

1.32

International Standard Book Number (ISBN)

1.33

Cataloging-in-Publication (CIP) data

1.34

Paper durability statement

Dedication and Epigraph

1.35

Dedication

1.36

Epigraph and epigraph source

Table of Contents and List of Illustrations or Tables

1.37

Table of contents

1.38

List of illustrations or tables

Foreword, Preface and Acknowledgments, and Introduction

1.39

Foreword

1.40

Preface and acknowledgments

1.41

Separate acknowledgments

1.42

Introduction belonging to front matter

Other Front Matter

1.43

List of abbreviations

1.44

Publisher's, translator's, and editor's notes

Text

1.45

Determining page 1

Text Divisions

1.46

Introduction belonging to main text

1.47

Division into parts

1.48

Division into chapters

1.49

Division into chapters by multiple authors

1.50

Divisions for poetry

1.51

Divisions for letters and diaries

1.52

Concluding elements

Text Subdivisions

1.53

Subheadsâ€”general principles

1.54

Subhead levels and placement

1.55

Numbered subheads

1.56

Ornamental or typographic breaks in text

Back Matter

1.57

Appendixes

1.58

Chronology

1.59

Endnotes

1.60

Glossary

1.61

Bibliography or reference list

1.62

List of contributors

1.63

Index

1.64

Colophon

1.65

Errata

Covers and Jackets

1.66

Clothbound covers

1.67

Paperback covers

1.68

Endpapers

1.69

Dust jackets

1.70

Credit lines for cover art

1.71

ISBN and bar codes on covers

The Parts of a Journal

Introduction

1.72

Print and electronic formats for journals

1.73

Noting differences between print and electronic versions

1.74

Unique identifiers for electronic journals

Page Numbers and Running Heads

1.75

Volume as organizing principle

1.76

Page numbers for journals

1.77

Running heads or running feet in journals

Covers and Home Pages

1.78

Covers for printed journals

1.79

Home pages for electronic journals

1.80

Maintaining the context of electronic articles

Front Matter

1.81

Front matter in printed journals

1.82

Front matter and home pages for electronic journals

1.83

Journal table of contents

1.84

Information for contributors

1.85

Acknowledgments, announcements, and calls for papers

1.86

Journals errata

Articles and Other Components

1.87

Majors and minors

1.88

Article title, authorship, and other first-page information

1.89

Hyperlinks within electronic articles

1.90

Article abstracts

1.91

Article subheads

1.92

Book review and book notes sections

1.93

Journal announcements

1.94

Journal contributors

1.95

Letters to the editor

1.96

Journal editorials

1.97

Journal copyright lines

1.98

Publication history for electronic-first articles

Tables and Illustrations

1.99

Tables in journal articles

1.100 Illustrations in journal articles

Documentation

1.101 Notes or author-date citations in journals

1.102 Links to citations and to outside resources

Index

1.103 Indexes to printed volumes

1.104 Electronic indexes and indexed searches

Version Control and Material Not Available in Print

1.105 Corrections to journal articles

1.106 Preprints

1.107 Material not available in print

Design and Style

1.108 Journal design

1.109 Editorial style

1.110 Redesign

Considerations for Web-Based Publications

1.111 Suitability for the web

1.112 Functional features

1.113 Navigation as the primary organizing principle for web-based publications

1.114 Hyperlinks

1.115 "Front matter" for web-based publications

1.116 Folios, running heads, and other "print" elements

1.117 Indexes, notes, and other "back matter"

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

1.1 BOOKS AND JOURNALS AS THE CORE OF SCHOLARLY PUBLISHING

List of Tables

Printed-and-bound books and journals and their electronic counterparts constitute the core of

Index

scholarly publishing. Book-length works in particular--in their breadth and variety, not to mention

their long history--provide an overview of the anatomy of a scholarly work that, in conjunction with

the discussion of journals (see 1.72-110), can be usefully applied to other types of published works.

1.1:

Books and journals

as the core of

scholarly publishing

1.2:

Electronic

publishing

1.3:

Rectos and versos

1.4:

Outline of divisions

and parts of a book

1.5:

Pages and folios

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

1.2 ELECTRONIC PUBLISHING

List of Tables

Electronic publication of scholarly books and journals in various formats is increasingly common.

Index

Most journals at Chicago have implemented a simultaneous print and electronic publishing model

(see 1.72)--a model that has become the industry standard. For books, if print has remained the most

common format, publishers are increasingly gravitating toward a simultaneous print and electronic

1.1:

model. In general, electronic books tend to emulate the organization and structure of their printed-

Books and journals

as the core of

and-bound counterparts, whether they are offered as page images or in an e-book format, proprietary

scholarly publishing

or not--and whether or not they incorporate hyperlinks, search engines, and other features that are

1.2:

unique to the electronic environment. In fact, the industry-wide goal for e-book versions of printed

Electronic

publishing

monographs has been one of approximating on-screen the experience of reading the printed book.

1.3:

The discussion on the parts of a book--though it assumes electronic publication is an option for any

Rectos and versos

scholarly book--therefore includes special considerations for electronic book formats only where these

1.4:

might differ from those for print. But see 1.111--17.

Outline of divisions

and parts of a book

1.5:

Pages and folios

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

1.3 RECTOS AND VERSOS

List of Tables

Publishers refer to the trimmed sheets of paper that you turn in a printed-and-bound book as leaves,

Index

and a page is one side of a leaf. The front of the leaf, the side that lies to the right in an open book, is

called the recto. The back of the leaf, the side that lies to the left when the leaf is turned, is the verso.

Rectos are always odd-numbered, versos always even-numbered. In an electronic book, the

1.1:

distinction between rectos and versos can be represented or simulated but need not be.

Books and journals

as the core of

scholarly publishing

1.2:

Electronic

publishing

1.3:

Rectos and versos

1.4:

Outline of divisions

and parts of a book

1.5:

Pages and folios

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

1.4 OUTLINE OF DIVISIONS AND PARTS OF A BOOK

List of Tables

Books are traditionally organized into three major divisions: the front matter (also called preliminary

Index

matter, or prelims), the text, and the back matter (or end matter). The front matter presents

information about a book's title, publisher, and copyright; it acknowledges debts to the work of

others; it provides a way to navigate the structure of the book; and it introduces the book and sets its

1.2:

tone. The text proper comprises the narrative--including arguments, data, illustrations, and so forth--

Electronic

publishing

often divided into chapters and other meaningful sections. The back matter presents sources or source

1.3:

notes, appendixes, and other types of documentation supporting the text but outside its central focus

Rectos and versos

or narrative. This section discusses the parts of a book according to a standard outline of these

1.4:

divisions and their components, starting with the list below. Few books contain all these elements,

Outline of divisions

and parts of a book

and some books have components not on the list. Books published electronically may depart

1.5:

especially from the order or presentation of elements. The list that follows presents the traditional

Pages and folios

arrangement, using lowercase roman numerals for pages in the front matter and arabic numerals for

1.6:

all the rest, including the back matter. Indications of recto (right-hand page) or verso (left-hand page)

Roman numerals

for front matter

may be applicable only to printed-and-bound books; starting pages that cannot be assigned at

manuscript stage are simply indicated as recto, the right-hand page being the traditional choice. Every

page is counted in the page sequence, even those on which no number actually appears, such as the

title and half-title pages, copyright page, and blank pages (see 1.5--8).

FRONT MATTER

Book half title

i

Series title, frontispiece, or blank

ii

Title page

iii

Copyright page

iv

Dedication

v

Epigraph

v or vi

(Table of) Contents

v or vii

(List of) Illustrations

recto or

verso

(List of) Tables

recto or

verso

Foreword

recto

Preface

recto

Acknowledgments (if not part of preface) recto

Introduction (if not part of text)

recto

Abbreviations (if not in back matter)

recto or

verso

Chronology (if not in back matter)

recto

TEXT

First text page (introduction or chapter 1) 1

or

Second half title or first part title

1

Blank

2

First text page

3

BACK MATTER

Acknowledgments (if not in front matter) recto

Appendix (or first, if more than one)

recto

Second and subsequent appendixes

recto or

verso

Chronology (if not in front matter)

recto

Abbreviations (if not in front matter)

recto

Notes

recto

Glossary

recto

Bibliography or References

recto

(List of) Contributors

recto

Illustration Credits (if not in captions or recto

elsewhere)

Index(es)

recto

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Page Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

1.5 PAGES AND FOLIOS

List of Tables

Modern books are paginated consecutively, and all pages except endpapers (see 1.68) are counted in

Index

the pagination whether or not the numbers appear. The page number, or folio, is most commonly

found at the top of the page, flush left verso, flush right recto. The folio may also be printed at the

bottom of the page, and in that location it is called a drop folio. Drop folios usually appear either

1.3:

centered on each page or flush left verso and flush right recto. A page number that does not appear is

Rectos and versos

sometimes referred to as a blind folio. Not paginated are pages that are inserted into printed books

1.4:

Outline of divisions

after pages have been made up--for example, color illustrations or photo galleries printed on a

and parts of a book

different type of paper (see 1.38).

1.5:

Pages and folios

1.6:

Roman numerals

for front matter

1.7:

Arabic numbers for

text and back

matter

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Page Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

1.6 ROMAN NUMERALS FOR FRONT MATTER

List of Tables

The front matter of a book is paginated with lowercase roman numerals (see 1.4). This traditional

Index

practice prevents renumbering the remainder of a book when, for example, a dedication page or

additional acknowledgments are added at the last moment. By convention, no folio appears on blank

pages or on "display" pages (i.e., such stand-alone pages as those for the half title, title, copyright,

1.4:

dedication, and epigraph), and a drop folio (or no folio) is used on the opening page of each

Outline of divisions

and parts of a book

succeeding section of the front matter (e.g., table of contents, foreword, preface).

1.5:

Pages and folios

1.6:

Roman numerals

for front matter

1.7:

Arabic numbers for

text and back

matter

1.8:

Separate versus

consecutive

pagination across

more than one

volume

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Page Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

1.7 ARABIC NUMBERS FOR TEXT AND BACK MATTER

List of Tables

The text, or the central part of a book, begins with arabic page 1. If the text is introduced by a second

Index

half title or opens with a part title, the half title or part title counts as page 1, its verso counts as page

2, and the first arabic number to appear is the drop folio 3 on the first page of text (see 1.45, 1.48).

(Some publishers ignore the second half title in paginating their books, counting the first page of text

1.5:

as p. 1.) Page numbers generally do not appear on part titles, but if text appears on a part-title page

Pages and folios

(see 1.47), a drop folio may be used. Arabic numbering continues for the back matter. As in the front

1.6:

Roman numerals

matter, the opening page of each chapter in the text and each section in the back matter carries either

for front matter

a drop folio or no page number. On pages containing only illustrations or tables, page numbers are

1.7:

usually omitted, except in the case of a long sequence of figures or tables.

Arabic numbers for

text and back

matter

1.8:

Separate versus

consecutive

pagination across

more than one

volume

1.9:

Running heads

defined

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Page Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

1.8 SEPARATE VERSUS CONSECUTIVE PAGINATION ACROSS MORE THAN ONE VOLUME

List of Tables

Publishers weighing pagination schemes for works that run to more than one volume should consider

Index

the index and the projected number of volumes. If an index to two volumes is to appear at the end of

volume 2, consecutive pagination saves index entries from having to refer to volume as well as page

number. In rare cases where back matter, such as an index, must be added to volume 1 later in the

1.6:

production process, lowercase roman folios may be used; these should continue the sequence from the

Roman numerals

for front matter

front matter in that volume (including a final blank page)--if, for example, the last page of the front

1.7:

matter is xii, the back matter would start with page xiii. Multivolume works that run into the

Arabic numbers for

thousands of pages are usually paginated separately to avoid unwieldy page numbers. Index entries

text and back

matter

and other references to such works must include volume as well as page number. In either scenario--

1.8:

consecutive or separate pagination across volumes--the front matter in each volume begins anew with

Separate versus

consecutive

page i.

pagination across

more than one

volume

1.9:

Running heads

defined

1.10:

Running heads for

front matter

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Running Heads

of Contents

List of Figures

1.9 RUNNING HEADS DEFINED

List of Tables

Running heads--the headings at the tops of pages--function, like page numbers, as signposts.

Index

Especially useful in scholarly books and textbooks, they are sometimes omitted for practical or

aesthetic reasons--in a novel or a book of poems, for example. Running heads are sometimes placed at

the bottom of the page, where they are referred to as running feet, or, more rarely, in the left- and

1.7:

right-hand margins. In endnotes and other places where the information conveyed by these signposts

Arabic numbers for

text and back

is essential to readers, placement at the tops of pages is preferred. In this manual, running head is used

matter

for this element wherever it appears. For preparation of running-head copy, see 2.73.

1.8:

Separate versus

consecutive

pagination across

more than one

volume

1.9:

Running heads

defined

1.10:

Running heads for

front matter

1.11:

Running heads for

text

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Running Heads

of Contents

List of Figures

1.10 RUNNING HEADS FOR FRONT MATTER

List of Tables

Running heads are never used on display pages (half title, title, copyright, dedication, epigraph) or on

Index

the first page of the table of contents, preface, and so forth (see also 1.15). Any element that runs

more than one page usually carries running heads. Each element in the front matter normally carries

the same running head on verso and recto pages.

1.8:

Separate versus

consecutive

VERSO

RECTO

pagination across

more than one

Contents

Contents

volume

Preface

Preface

1.9:

Running heads

defined

1.10:

Running heads for

front matter

1.11:

Running heads for

text

1.12:

Subheads as

running heads

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Running Heads

of Contents

List of Figures

1.11 RUNNING HEADS FOR TEXT

List of Tables

Chapter openings and other display pages carry no running heads (see also 1.15). The choice of

Index

running heads for other text pages is governed chiefly by the structure and nature of the book.

Among acceptable arrangements are the following:

1.9:

VERSO

RECTO

Running heads

defined

Part title

Chapter title

1.10:

Chapter number

Chapter title

Running heads for

front matter

Chapter title

Subhead

1.11:

Chapter title

Chapter subtitle

Running heads for

text

Chapter title

Chapter title

1.12:

Subhead

Subhead

Subheads as

Chapter author

Chapter title

running heads

1.13:

Running heads for

See also 2.73. Chicago generally advises against putting the book title on the verso (partly to minimize

back matter

complications from a last-minute change to a title)--though the practice of doing so has persisted,

especially for works of fiction. In electronic books, verso and recto running heads, when they are not

the same, are sometimes combined and separated by a colon or a slash or other device.

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Running Heads

of Contents

List of Figures

1.12 SUBHEADS AS RUNNING HEADS

List of Tables

When subheads in the text are used as running heads on recto pages and more than one subhead falls

Index

on a single page, the last one on the page is used as the running head. When subheads are used as

running heads on versos, however, the first subhead on the page is used as the running head. (The

principle is the same as for dictionary running heads.)

1.10:

Running heads for

front matter

1.11:

Running heads for

text

1.12:

Subheads as

running heads

1.13:

Running heads for

back matter

1.14:

Running heads for

endnotes

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Running Heads

of Contents

List of Figures

1.13 RUNNING HEADS FOR BACK MATTER

List of Tables

Running heads for back matter follow the same pattern as those for front matter and text (but see

Index

1.14). If there is an appendix, Appendix (or Appendix 1 or Appendix A, etc.) appears verso, the

appendix title recto. If there is more than one index, it is essential that the running heads so indicate

(Index of Names, Index of Subjects, etc.).

1.11:

Running heads for

text

1.12:

Subheads as

running heads

1.13:

Running heads for

back matter

1.14:

Running heads for

endnotes

1.15:

Omission of running

heads

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Running Heads

of Contents

List of Figures

1.14 RUNNING HEADS FOR ENDNOTES

List of Tables

The running heads for a section of notes in the back of the book should give the inclusive page

Index

numbers or (much less useful for readers but more expedient for the publisher) the chapter where the

relevant note references are found in the text. If chapter numbers are used, it is essential that the

verso running heads in the text also give chapter numbers. Thus, two facing running heads might

1.12:

read:

Subheads as

running heads

1.13:

VERSO

RECTO

Running heads for

Notes to Pages 2--10

Notes to Pages 11--25

back matter

1.14:

or

Running heads for

endnotes

Notes to Chapter One

Notes to Chapter Two

1.15:

Omission of running

heads

For a fuller explanation, see 14.42.

1.16:

Half title

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Running Heads

of Contents

List of Figures

1.15 OMISSION OF RUNNING HEADS

List of Tables

Besides display pages in the front matter (see 1.10), running heads are omitted on part titles, chapter

Index

openings, and any page containing only an illustration or a table. (For the omission of page numbers,

see 1.7.) Pages that include lines of text in addition to an illustration or table should include running

heads. Running heads may also be included in long sequences of illustrations or tables to keep

1.13:

readers oriented.

Running heads for

back matter

1.14:

Running heads for

endnotes

1.15:

Omission of running

heads

1.16:

Half title

1.17:

Series title or

frontispiece

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Title Pages

of Contents

List of Figures

1.16 HALF TITLE

List of Tables

The half title (p. i in a printed book, no folio) normally consists only of the main title (less any

Index

subtitle) and is usually counted as the very first page in a printed-and-bound book. All other

information--including author name, publisher, and edition--is omitted.

1.14:

Running heads for

endnotes

1.15:

Omission of running

heads

1.16:

Half title

1.17:

Series title or

frontispiece

1.18:

Title page

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Title Pages

of Contents

List of Figures

1.17 SERIES TITLE OR FRONTISPIECE

List of Tables

The verso following the half-title page (p. ii in a printed book) is usually blank. But if the book is part

Index

of a series, it may include the title and volume number of the series, the name of the general editor of

the series, and sometimes the titles of previously published books in the series. (A series title may

appear on the title page instead.) If the book is the published proceedings of a symposium, the title of

1.15:

the symposium and the date it was held and other relevant details may appear on page ii. Some

Omission of running

heads

publishers list an author's previous publications on page ii; Chicago generally lists these on the

1.16:

copyright page and on the jacket or cover (see 1.20). Alternatively, page ii might carry an illustration,

Half title

called a frontispiece. If the frontispiece is printed on a different stock from the text, and thus is

1.17:

inserted separately, it will not constitute page ii, though it will still appear opposite the title page,

Series title or

frontispiece

which is normally page iii (see 1.18). Page ii might also be used for a title page across pages ii and iii.

1.18:

Title page

1.19:

Components of a

copyright page

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Title Pages

of Contents

List of Figures

1.18 TITLE PAGE

List of Tables

The title page (p. iii or sometimes pp. ii and iii) presents the full title of the book; the subtitle, if any;

Index

the name of the author, editor, or translator; and the name and location of the publisher. If the type

size or style of the subtitle differs from that of the main title, no colon or other mark of punctuation is

needed to separate them. In a new edition of a work previously published, the number of the edition

1.16:

(e.g., Third Edition) should also appear on the title page, usually following the title (see also 1.25,

Half title

1.26). The author's name, or authors' names (see also 1.62), may appear below or above the title.

1.17:

Series title or

Given first names should not be shortened to initials unless the author's name is widely known in

frontispiece

such a form (e.g., P. D. James, J. M. Coetzee), or unless the author prefers initials (see 14.73). Chicago

1.18:

does not print academic degrees or affiliations after an author's name on the title page (though

Title page

exceptions have been made for MD in medical publications). Editors or translators should be listed in

1.19:

Components of a

the form "Edited by" or "Translated by." The publisher's full name (imprint) should be given on the

copyright page

title page and is usually followed by the name of the city (or cities) where the principal offices are

1.20:

located. The publisher's logo may also appear there. The year of publication is best omitted from the

Biographical note

title page, particularly if it conflicts with copyright information on page iv (see 1.22).

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.19 COMPONENTS OF A COPYRIGHT PAGE

List of Tables

The Copyright Act of 1989 does not require that published works carry a copyright notice in order to

Index

secure copyright protection; nevertheless, most publishers continue to carry the notice to discourage

infringement. The copyright notice is just one of several items typically included on the copyright

page (p. iv). The University of Chicago Press includes the following:

1.17:

Series title or

frontispiece

Biographical note on author

1.18:

Publisher's address

Title page

Copyright notice--including, if applicable, copyright dates of previous editions and indication

1.19:

Components of a

of copyright renewal or other changes, and followed by the statement "All rights reserved"

copyright page

Publication date, including publishing history

1.20:

Biographical note

Country of printing

1.21:

Publisher's address

Impression line, indicating number and year of current printing

International Standard Book Number (ISBN)

International Standard Serial Number (ISSN), if applicable

For translations, indication of original-language title, publisher, and copyright

Acknowledgments, permissions, and other credits, including acknowledgment of grants, if

applicable and space permitting

Cataloging-in-Publication (CIP) data

Paper durability statement

For an example, see figure 1.1. These items are discussed in more detail in the paragraphs that follow.

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.20 BIOGRAPHICAL NOTE

List of Tables

A brief note on the author or authors (including any editors, compilers, and translators) lists previous

Index

publications and, if relevant, academic affiliation. The details, if not the wording, must be consistent

with any related information on the jacket or cover. Though such a note typically appears at the top

of the copyright page, it may appear instead on a separate page, either in the front matter or the back

1.18:

matter, according to the publisher's preference.

Title page

1.19:

Components of a

copyright page

1.20:

Biographical note

1.21:

Publisher's address

1.22:

Copyright notice

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.21 PUBLISHER'S ADDRESS

List of Tables

The address of the publisher--and sometimes the addresses of overseas agents--is typically, though

Index

not always, given on the copyright page. An address may be abbreviated, consisting, for example,

only of a city and perhaps a postal code. A publisher's URL (uniform resource locator) may also be

included.

1.19:

Components of a

copyright page

1.20:

Biographical note

1.21:

Publisher's address

1.22:

Copyright notice

1.23:

Copyright dates of

previous editions

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.22 COPYRIGHT NOTICE

List of Tables

The usual notice consists of three parts: the symbol Â©, the first year the book is published, and the

Index

name of the copyright owner (see fig. 1.1). This may be followed by the phrase "All rights reserved"

and a statement of publication date or publishing history (see 4.40, 1.25). The year of publication

should correspond to the copyright date. If a book is physically available near the end of a year but

1.20:

not formally published until the beginning of the next, the later date is preferred as both copyright

Biographical note

and publication date. Books published by the University of Chicago Press are usually copyrighted in

1.21:

Publisher's address

the name of the university ("Â© 2010 by The University of Chicago"). Some authors, however, prefer

1.22:

to copyright their works in their own names ("Â© 2006 by Alison A. Author"), a preference discussed

Copyright notice

in 4.41. For information on copyright notices for journals, see 1.97; for a full discussion, see 4.38--45.

1.23:

Copyright dates of

previous editions

1.24:

Copyright renewal

or other changes

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.23 COPYRIGHT DATES OF PREVIOUS EDITIONS

List of Tables

Each new edition of a book (as distinct from a new impression, or reprinting, but including an

Index

electronic edition of a printed book) is copyrighted, and the copyright dates of at least the most recent

previous editions should appear in the copyright notice (see fig. 1.2). If the new edition is so extensive

a revision that it virtually constitutes a new publication, previous copyright dates may be omitted.

1.21:

See also 1.25, 4.40.

Publisher's address

1.22:

Copyright notice

1.23:

Copyright dates of

previous editions

1.24:

Copyright renewal

or other changes

1.25:

Publishing history

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.24 COPYRIGHT RENEWAL OR OTHER CHANGES

List of Tables

The date of copyright renewal or a change in the name of the copyright owner is sometimes reflected

Index

in the copyright notice if the work is reprinted. Copyright renewal is shown in the following manner

(note the second period; see 1.25):

1.22:

Â© 1943 by Miriam Obermerker. Â© renewed 1971 by Miriam Obermerker.

Copyright notice

1.23:

To indicate a change in copyright ownership (e.g., if copyright is assigned to the author or someone

Copyright dates of

else after the initial copyright has been registered and printed in the first impression), the name of the

previous editions

new copyright owner is substituted for that of the previous owner. The copyright date remains the

1.24:

Copyright renewal

same unless the copyright has been renewed. Copyrights remain legally valid even if renewal or

or other changes

reassignment information cannot, for some reason, appear in a new edition or printing (see also

1.25:

4.30--32).

Publishing history

1.26:

What constitutes a

new edition?

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.25 PUBLISHING HISTORY

List of Tables

The publishing history of a book, which usually follows the copyright notice, begins with the date

Index

(year) of original publication, followed by the number and date of any new edition. In books with a

long publishing history, it is acceptable to present only the original edition and the latest edition in

the publishing history. (A previous publisher's name need not be given unless the licensing

1.23:

agreement requires that it appear in the new edition.) Items in the publishing history may appear on

Copyright dates of

previous editions

separate lines; periods separate multiple items on the same line. In a departure from former usage,

1.24:

Chicago now recommends a final period at the end of a line with two or more items separated by

Copyright renewal

periods.

or other changes

1.25:

First edition published 1906. Sixteenth edition 2010.

Publishing history

1.26:

Revised edition originally published 1985

What constitutes a

new edition?

University of Chicago Press edition 2002

1.27:

Country of printing

If a book is reprinted, the number and date of the current impression may be indicated in the

publishing history (e.g., Fifth Printing, 2010), but Chicago usually indicates these separately, in an

impression line (see 1.28).

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.26 WHAT CONSTITUTES A NEW EDITION?

List of Tables

Edition (as opposed to impression, or printing) is used in at least two senses. (1) A new edition may be

Index

defined as one in which a substantial change has been made in one or more of the essential elements

of the work (e.g., text, notes, appendixes, or illustrations). As a general rule, at least 20 percent of a

new edition should consist of new or revised material. A work that is republished with a new preface

1.24:

or afterword but is otherwise unchanged except for corrections of typographical errors is better

Copyright renewal

or other changes

described as a new impression or a reissue; the title page may include such words as "With a New

1.25:

Preface." (2) Edition may be used to designate a reissue in a different format--for example, a

Publishing history

paperback, deluxe, or illustrated version, or an electronic edition of a printed work--or under the

1.26:

imprint of a different publisher. A new edition is best designated on the title page: Second Edition,

What constitutes a

new edition?

Third Edition, and so forth. Such phrases as "revised and expanded" are redundant on the title page,

1.27:

since the nature and extent of the revision are normally described in the prefatory material or on the

Country of printing

cover.

1.28:

Impression number

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.27 COUNTRY OF PRINTING

List of Tables

The country in which a book is printed is traditionally identified inside the work. In addition, if a

Index

book is printed in a country other than the country of publication, the jacket or cover must so state:

for example, "Printed in China."

1.25:

Publishing history

1.26:

What constitutes a

new edition?

1.27:

Country of printing

1.28:

Impression number

1.29:

Indication of

original-language

edition for

translations

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.28 IMPRESSION NUMBER

List of Tables

Each new printing of a book, or impression, may be identified by a line of numerals running below

Index

the publishing history (see fig. 1.1). The first group of numerals, reading from right to left, represents

the last two digits of succeeding years starting with the date of original publication (see 1.22). The

second set, following at least an em space (see A.22) and reading from left to right, represents the

1.26:

numbers of possible new impressions. The lowest number in each group indicates the present

What constitutes a

new edition?

impression and date. In figure 1.1, therefore, the impression is identified as the first, and the year of

1.27:

printing as 2008; in figure 1.2, the numbers indicate a third printing in 2010. This method is expedient

Country of printing

for printed books, as printers need only delete the lowest number(s) rather than generate new text.

1.28:

Impression lines work to the advantage of readers and publishers both--a new impression not only

Impression number

reflects the sales record of a book but also signals that corrections may have been made. (Note that

1.29:

Indication of

impression lines for print-on-demand titles are typically changed not with each new order but only to

original-language

signal that corrections have been made.)

edition for

translations

1.30:

Acknowledgments,

permissions, and

other credits

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.29 INDICATION OF ORIGINAL-LANGUAGE EDITION FOR TRANSLATIONS

List of Tables

If a book is a translation from another language, the original title, publisher, and copyright

Index

information should be recorded on the copyright page (see fig. 1.3).

1.27:

Country of printing

1.28:

Impression number

1.29:

Indication of

original-language

edition for

translations

1.30:

Acknowledgments,

permissions, and

other credits

1.31:

Acknowledgment of

grants

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.30 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS, PERMISSIONS, AND OTHER CREDITS

List of Tables

The copyright page, if space permits, may include acknowledgments of previously published parts of

Index

a book, illustration credits, and permission to quote from copyrighted material (fig. 1.4), unless such

acknowledgments appear elsewhere in the book--as in an acknowledgments section (see 2.43) or in

source notes (see 14.49).

1.28:

Impression number

The illustration on the title page is a detail from a photograph of Nietzsche in Basel, ca. 1876. Photo Stiftung

1.29:

Weimarer Klassik. GSA 101/17.

Indication of

original-language

edition for

For more on illustration credits, see 3.28--36. For a full discussion of permissions, see chapter 4.

translations

1.30:

Acknowledgments,

permissions, and

other credits

1.31:

Acknowledgment of

grants

1.32:

International

Standard Book

Number (ISBN)

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.31 ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF GRANTS

List of Tables

Publishers should acknowledge grants of financial assistance toward publication on the copyright

Index

page. Acknowledgments requiring more space or greater prominence may appear elsewhere, in a

separate section in the front or back matter. Wording should be as requested (or at least approved) by

the grantors (see fig. 1.1). Financial assistance made to authors is usually mentioned as part of the

1.29:

author's acknowledgments (see 1.40, 1.41).

Indication of

original-language

edition for

translations

1.30:

Acknowledgments,

permissions, and

other credits

1.31:

Acknowledgment of

grants

1.32:

International

Standard Book

Number (ISBN)

1.33:

Cataloging-in-

Publication (CIP)

data

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.32 INTERNATIONAL STANDARD BOOK NUMBER (ISBN)

List of Tables

An ISBN is assigned to each book by its publisher under a system set up in the late 1960s by the R. R.

Index

Bowker Company and the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). The ISBN uniquely

identifies the book, thus facilitating order fulfillment and inventory tracking. In addition to appearing

on the copyright page (see fig. 1.1), the ISBN should also be printed on the book jacket or cover (see

1.30:

1.71). Each format or binding must have a separate ISBN (i.e., for hardcover, paperbound, CD-ROM,

Acknowledgments,

permissions, and

e-book format, etc.). Electronic publications should include the ISBN on the screen that displays the

other credits

title or its equivalent, or on the first display. Additional information about the assignment and use of

1.31:

ISBNs may be obtained from the US ISBN Agency, R. R. Bowker, or from the International ISBN

Acknowledgment of

grants

Agency. Some books that are part of a monograph series may be assigned an ISSN (International

1.32:

Standard Serial Number) in addition to an ISBN; for more information, contact the Library of

International

Standard Book

Congress. (For the use of ISSNs in journal copyright statements, see 1.97.)

Number (ISBN)

1.33:

Cataloging-in-

Publication (CIP)

data

1.34:

Paper durability

statement

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.33 CATALOGING-IN-PUBLICATION (CIP) DATA

List of Tables

Since 1971 most publishers have printed the Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication (CIP) data

Index

on the copyright pages of their books. An example of CIP data may be found in figure 1.1. To apply

for CIP data, and for up-to-date information about the program, consult the Library of Congress's

online resources for publishers.

1.31:

Acknowledgment of

grants

1.32:

International

Standard Book

Number (ISBN)

1.33:

Cataloging-in-

Publication (CIP)

data

1.34:

Paper durability

statement

1.35:

Dedication

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Copyright Page

of Contents

List of Figures

1.34 PAPER DURABILITY STATEMENT

List of Tables

Durability standards for paper have been established by the American National Standards Institute

Index

(ANSI), which since 1984 has issued statements to be included in books meeting these standards. In

1992 the standards were revised by the National Information Standards Organization (NISO) to

extend to coated paper. Under this revision, coated and uncoated papers that meet the standards for

1.32:

alkalinity, folding and tearing, and paper stock are authorized to carry the following notice (or any

International

Standard Book

reasonable variation thereof), which should include the circled infinity symbol:

Number (ISBN)

1.33:

This paper meets the requirements of ANSI/NISO Z39.48-1992 (Permanence of Paper).

Cataloging-in-

Publication (CIP)

data

1.34:

Paper durability

statement

1.35:

Dedication

1.36:

Epigraph and

epigraph source

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Dedication and Epigraph

of Contents

List of Figures

1.35 DEDICATION

List of Tables

Choice of dedication--including whether to include one or not--is up to the author. It may be

Index

suggested, however, that the word dedicated is superfluous. Editors of contributed volumes do not

customarily include a dedication unless it is jointly offered by all contributors. Nor do translators

generally offer their own dedication unless it is made clear that the dedication is not that of the

1.33:

original author. The dedication usually appears by itself, preferably on page v.

Cataloging-in-

Publication (CIP)

data

1.34:

Paper durability

statement

1.35:

Dedication

1.36:

Epigraph and

epigraph source

1.37:

Table of contents

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Dedication and Epigraph

of Contents

List of Figures

1.36 EPIGRAPH AND EPIGRAPH SOURCE

List of Tables

An author may wish to include an epigraph--a quotation that is pertinent but not integral to the text--

Index

at the beginning of the book. If there is no dedication, the epigraph may be placed on page v (see 1.4);

otherwise, it is usually placed on page vi, opposite the table of contents. Epigraphs are also

occasionally used at chapter openings and, more rarely, at the beginnings of sections within chapters.

1.34:

The source of an epigraph is usually given on a line following the quotation, sometimes preceded by

Paper durability

statement

a dash (see 13.34). Only the author's name (in the case of a well-known author, only the last name)

1.35:

and, usually, the title of the work need appear; beyond this, it is customary not to annotate book

Dedication

epigraphs. If a footnote or an endnote to a chapter epigraph is required, the reference number should

1.36:

follow the source, or, to avoid the intrusion of a number, the supplementary documentation may be

Epigraph and

epigraph source

given in an unnumbered note (see 14.47).

1.37:

Table of contents

1.38:

List of illustrations

or tables

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Table of Contents and List of Illustrations or Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

1.37 TABLE OF CONTENTS

List of Tables

The table of contents for a printed work usually begins on page v or, if page v carries a dedication or

Index

an epigraph, page vii. It should include all preliminary material that follows it but exclude anything

that precedes it. It should list the title and beginning page number of each section of the book: front

matter, text divisions, and back matter, including the index (see fig. 1.5). If the book is divided into

1.35:

parts as well as chapters, the part titles appear in the contents, but their page numbers are omitted,

Dedication

unless the parts include separate introductions. Subheads within chapters are usually omitted from

1.36:

Epigraph and

the table of contents, but if they provide valuable signposts for readers, they may be included. In a

epigraph source

volume consisting of chapters by different authors, the name of each author should be given in the

1.37:

table of contents with the title of the chapter:

Table of contents

1.38:

The Supreme Court as Republican Schoolmaster

List of illustrations

or tables

Ralph Lerner 127

1.39:

or

Foreword

Self-Incrimination and the New Privacy, Robert B. McKay 193

In a book containing illustrations that are printed together in a gallery or galleries (see 3.6), it is

seldom necessary to list them separately in a list of illustrations. Their location may be noted at the

end of the table of contents; for example, "Illustrations follow pages 130 and 288."

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Table of Contents and List of Illustrations or Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

1.38 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS OR TABLES

List of Tables

In a book with very few illustrations or tables or one with very many, all tied closely to the text, it is

Index

not essential to list them in the front matter. Multiauthor books, proceedings of symposia, and the

like commonly do not carry lists of illustrations or tables. Where a list is appropriate (see 3.37), the list

of illustrations (usually titled Illustrations but entered in the table of contents as List of Illustrations to

1.36:

avoid ambiguity) should match the table of contents in type size and general style. In books

Epigraph and

epigraph source

containing various kinds of illustrations, the list may be divided into sections headed, for example,

1.37:

Figures, Tables (see fig. 1.6), or Plates, Drawings, Maps. Page numbers are given for all illustrations

Table of contents

printed with the text and counted in the pagination, even when the numbers do not actually appear

1.38:

on the text page. When pages of illustrations are printed on different stock and not counted in the

List of illustrations

or tables

pagination, their location is indicated by "Facing page 000" or "Following page 000" in the list of

1.39:

illustrations (see fig. 1.7) or, more commonly, in the table of contents (fig. 1.5). A frontispiece, because

Foreword

of its prominent position at the front of the book, is not assigned a page number; its location is simply

1.40:

given as frontispiece. Titles given in lists of illustrations and tables may be shortened or otherwise

Preface and

acknowledgments

adjusted (see 3.39). For treatment of titles, see 8.155--65.

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >>

of Contents

Foreword, Preface and Acknowledgments, and Introduction

List of Figures

List of Tables

1.39 FOREWORD

Index

The term foreword should be reserved for prefatory remarks by someone other than the author--

including those of an editor or compiler, especially if a work already includes an author's preface (see

1.40). The publisher may choose to mention the foreword on the title page (e.g., "With a Foreword by

1.37:

Conor Cruise O'Brien"). A foreword, which is set in the same size and style of type as the text,

Table of contents

normally runs only a few pages, and its author's name usually appears at the end, often flush right,

1.38:

with a line space (or less) between it and the text. The title or affiliation of the author of a foreword

List of illustrations

or tables

may appear under the name, often in smaller type. If a place and date are included, these are

1.39:

sometimes set across from the author's name, flush left. If a foreword runs to a substantial length,

Foreword

with or without a title of its own, its author's name may be given at the beginning instead of at the

1.40:

end. See also 1.42.

Preface and

acknowledgments

1.41:

Separate

acknowledgments

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >>

of Contents

Foreword, Preface and Acknowledgments, and Introduction

List of Figures

List of Tables

1.40 PREFACE AND ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Index

The author's own statement about a work is usually called a preface. It is set in the same size and

style of type as the text and includes reasons for undertaking the work, method of research (if this has

some bearing on readers' understanding of the text), brief acknowledgments (but see 1.41), and

1.38:

sometimes permissions granted for the use of previously published material. A preface need not be

List of illustrations

or tables

signed; if there might be some doubt about who wrote it, however, or if an author wishes to sign the

preface (sometimes just with initials), the signature normally appears at the end (see 1.39). When a

1.39:

Foreword

new preface is written for a new edition or for a reprinting of a book long out of print, it should

1.40:

precede the original preface. The original preface is then usually retitled Preface to the First Edition,

Preface and

acknowledgments

and the new preface may be titled Preface to the Second Edition, Preface to the Paperback Edition,

Preface 2010, or whatever fits. In a book containing both an editor's preface and an author's preface,

1.41:

Separate

the editor's preface, which may be titled as such or retitled Editor's Foreword, comes first and should

acknowledgments

bear the editor's name at its conclusion.

1.42:

Introduction

belonging to front

matter

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >>

of Contents

Foreword, Preface and Acknowledgments, and Introduction

List of Figures

List of Tables

1.41 SEPARATE ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Index

If the author's acknowledgments are long, they may be put in a separate section following the

preface; if a preface consists only of acknowledgments, its title should be changed to

Acknowledgments. Acknowledgments are occasionally put at the back of a book, preceding the other

1.39:

back matter. Acknowledgments that apply to all volumes of a multivolume work may be presented

Foreword

only in the first. See also 4.98--99.

1.40:

Preface and

acknowledgments

1.41:

Separate

acknowledgments

1.42:

Introduction

belonging to front

matter

1.43:

List of

abbreviations

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >>

of Contents

Foreword, Preface and Acknowledgments, and Introduction

List of Figures

List of Tables

1.42 INTRODUCTION BELONGING TO FRONT MATTER

Index

Most introductions belong not in the front matter but at the beginning of the text, paginated with

arabic numerals (see 1.46). Material about the book--its origins, for example--rather than about the

subject matter should be included in the preface or in the acknowledgments (see 1.40). A substantial

1.40:

introduction by someone other than the author is usually included in the front matter, following the

Preface and

acknowledgments

acknowledgments, but if it is not more than three to five pages, it may more appropriately be called a

foreword (see 1.39) and placed before the preface.

1.41:

Separate

acknowledgments

1.42:

Introduction

belonging to front

matter

1.43:

List of

abbreviations

1.44:

Publisher's,

translator's, and

editor's notes

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Other Front Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.43 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

Not every work that includes abbreviations needs a separate list of abbreviations with the terms or

Index

names they stand for. If many are used, or if a few are used frequently, a list is useful (see fig. 1.8); its

location should always be given in the table of contents. If abbreviations are used in the text or

footnotes, the list may appear in the front matter. If they are used only in the back matter, the list

1.41:

should appear before the first element in which abbreviations are used, whether the appendixes, the

Separate

acknowledgments

endnotes, or the bibliography. A list of abbreviations is generally not a substitute for using the full

1.42:

form of a term at its first occurrence in the text (see 10.3). In the list, alphabetize terms by the

Introduction

abbreviation, not by the spelled-out form. See also 14.55.

belonging to front

matter

1.43:

List of

abbreviations

1.44:

Publisher's,

translator's, and

editor's notes

1.45:

Determining page 1

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Front Matter >> Other Front Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.44 PUBLISHER'S, TRANSLATOR'S, AND EDITOR'S NOTES

List of Tables

Notes on the text are usually treated typographically in the same way as a preface or foreword. A

Index

publisher's note--used rarely and only to state something that cannot be included elsewhere--should

either precede or immediately follow the table of contents. A translator's note, like a foreword, should

precede any element, such as a preface, that is by the original author. An explanation of an editor's

1.42:

method or a discussion of variant texts, often necessary in scholarly editions, may appear either in the

Introduction

belonging to front

front matter (usually as the last item there) or in the back matter (as an appendix or in place of one).

matter

Brief remarks about editorial method, however--such as noting that spelling and capitalization have

1.43:

been modernized--are often better incorporated into an editor's preface, if there is one.

List of

abbreviations

1.44:

Publisher's,

translator's, and

editor's notes

1.45:

Determining page 1

1.46:

Introduction

belonging to main

text

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Text

of Contents

List of Figures

1.45 DETERMINING PAGE 1

List of Tables

The first page of the first chapter or the introduction (see 1.46) is usually counted as arabic page 1.

Index

Where the front matter is extensive, however, a second half title, identical to the one on page i, may

be added before the text. The second half title should be counted as page 1, the first of the pages to be

counted with an arabic page number (though the page number does not appear). The page following

1.43:

the second half title (its verso) is usually blank, though it may contain an illustration or an epigraph.

List of

abbreviations

A second half title is also useful when the book design specifies a double-page spread for chapter

1.44:

openings; in such a case, chapter 1 starts on page 2. If a book begins with a part title, the part title

Publisher's,

page is treated as arabic page 1 in the same manner as a second half title. See also 1.3, 1.5.

translator's, and

editor's notes

1.45:

Determining page 1

1.46:

Introduction

belonging to main

text

1.47:

Division into parts

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Text >> Text Divisions

of Contents

List of Figures

1.46 INTRODUCTION BELONGING TO MAIN TEXT

List of Tables

Unlike the kind of introduction that may be included in the front matter (see 1.42), a text introduction

Index

is integral to the subject matter of the book and should not include acknowledgments, an outline of

the contents ("In the first two chapters I discuss . . ."), or other material that belongs in the front or

back matter. (This rule may not apply in the case of a reprint or facsimile edition, where the front

1.44:

matter is furnished by a volume editor.) A text introduction carries arabic page numbers. A new

Publisher's,

translator's, and

introduction to a classic work may be considered a text introduction even if it includes biographical

editor's notes

or other material about the original author. If titled simply Introduction, it does not normally carry a

1.45:

chapter number and is usually considerably shorter than a chapter. An author who has titled chapter

Determining page 1

1 Introduction should be encouraged to give the chapter a more evocative title.

1.46:

Introduction

belonging to main

text

1.47:

Division into parts

1.48:

Division into

chapters

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Text >> Text Divisions

of Contents

List of Figures

1.47 DIVISION INTO PARTS

List of Tables

Some books are divided into parts (see fig. 1.5). Each part usually carries a number and a title and

Index

should contain at least two chapters (an exception may be made for a part that includes only an

introductory or concluding chapter). Chapters are numbered consecutively throughout the book; they

do not begin with 1 in each part. Parts are sometimes called sections, though section is more

1.45:

commonly used for a subdivision within a chapter. Part titles that do not include introductions

Determining page 1

usually begin recto, followed by a blank verso and a recto chapter opening. If a part includes an

1.46:

Introduction

introduction--usually short, titled or untitled--it may begin on a new recto following the part title, or

belonging to main

on the verso of the part title, or on the part title itself. A text introduction to a book that is divided

text

into parts precedes the part title to part 1 and needs no part title of its own. Also, no part title need

1.47:

Division into parts

precede the back matter of a book divided into parts, though one may be useful before a series of

1.48:

appendixes or a notes section.

Division into

chapters

1.49:

Division into

chapters by

multiple authors

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Text >> Text Divisions

of Contents

List of Figures

1.48 DIVISION INTO CHAPTERS

List of Tables

Most nonfiction prose works are divided into numbered chapters of a more or less consistent length.

Index

Authors should aim for short, descriptive titles, which tend to give readers a better overview of a

book's contents than longer, more whimsical titles. Each chapter normally starts on a new page, verso

or recto, and its opening page should carry a drop folio (see 1.3, 1.5)--or sometimes no folio--and no

1.46:

running head (see 1.9--15). (Recto openers may facilitate the production of individual chapter

Introduction

belonging to main

offprints.) The first chapter ordinarily begins on a recto (but see 1.45). Chapter openers usually consist

text

of the chapter number ( chapter is often omitted), the chapter title, and the chapter subtitle, if any;

1.47:

together, these are referred to as the chapter display. Footnote reference numbers or symbols should

Division into parts

not appear anywhere in the chapter display. A note that refers to the chapter as a whole should be

1.48:

Division into

unnumbered and should precede the numbered notes, whether it appears on the first page of the

chapters

chapter or in the endnotes (see 14.47). A chapter epigraph, sometimes considered part of the chapter

1.49:

display, may include a note reference, though traditionalists will prefer an unnumbered note.

Division into

chapters by

multiple authors

1.50:

Divisions for poetry

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Text >> Text Divisions

of Contents

List of Figures

1.49 DIVISION INTO CHAPTERS BY MULTIPLE AUTHORS

List of Tables

In multiauthor books, the chapter author's name is usually given at the head of the chapter. An

Index

affiliation or other identification is put in an unnumbered footnote on the first page of the chapter (see

14.50) or in a list of contributors (1.62). An unnumbered footnote is also used to disclose the source of

a chapter or other contribution that is being reprinted from an earlier publication. When both the

1.47:

author's affiliation and the source of the contribution are given in the note, it is customary, but not

Division into parts

essential, that the affiliation come first.

1.48:

Division into

chapters

1.49:

Division into

chapters by

multiple authors

1.50:

Divisions for poetry

1.51:

Divisions for letters

and diaries

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Text >> Text Divisions

of Contents

List of Figures

1.50 DIVISIONS FOR POETRY

List of Tables

In a book of previously unpublished poetry, each poem usually begins on a new page. Any part titles

Index

provided by the poet should appear on separate pages (rectos) preceding the poems grouped under

them. In a collection of previously published poems, more than one poem, or the end of one and the

beginning of another, may appear on the same page.

1.48:

Division into

chapters

1.49:

Division into

chapters by

multiple authors

1.50:

Divisions for poetry

1.51:

Divisions for letters

and diaries

1.52:

Concluding

elements

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Text >> Text Divisions

of Contents

List of Figures

1.51 DIVISIONS FOR LETTERS AND DIARIES

List of Tables

Letters and diaries are usually presented in chronological order, so they are seldom amenable to

Index

division into chapters or parts. For diary entries, dates may be used as headings, and in published

correspondence the names of senders or recipients of letters (or both) may serve as headings. The

date of a letter may be included in the heading if it does not appear in the letter itself. Such headings

1.49:

in diaries and correspondence do not usually begin a new page.

Division into

chapters by

multiple authors

1.50:

Divisions for poetry

1.51:

Divisions for letters

and diaries

1.52:

Concluding

elements

1.53:

Subheadsâ

€”general

principles

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Text >> Text Divisions

of Contents

List of Figures

1.52 CONCLUDING ELEMENTS

List of Tables

Epilogues and afterwords are relatively brief sections that sometimes end a text. They bear no chapter

Index

numbers. Conclusions tend to be more extensive and may assume the significance and proportions of

final chapters, with or without a chapter number. In such concluding sections, the author may make

some final statement about the subject presented, the implications of the study, or questions inviting

1.50:

further investigation. Epilogues, afterwords, and conclusions may begin either recto or verso unless

Divisions for poetry

the book is divided into parts, in which case they must begin recto so that they do not appear to

1.51:

Divisions for letters

belong to the final part only. Typographically they are usually treated like forewords or prefaces.

and diaries

1.52:

Concluding

elements

1.53:

Subheadsâ

€”general

principles

1.54:

Subhead levels and

placement

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Text >> Text Subdivisions

of Contents

List of Figures

1.53 SUBHEADS--GENERAL PRINCIPLES

List of Tables

Subheads within a chapter should be short and meaningful and, like chapter titles, parallel in

Index

structure and tone. It is rarely imperative that a subhead begin a new page. The first sentence of text

following a subhead should not refer syntactically to the subhead; words should be repeated where

necessary. For example:

1.51:

Divisions for letters

SECONDARY SPONGIOSA

and diaries

The secondary spongiosa, a vaulted structure. . .

1.52:

Concluding

not

elements

1.53:

SECONDARY SPONGIOSA

Subheadsâ

€”general

This vaulted structure . . .

principles

1.54:

Subhead levels and

placement

1.55:

Numbered

subheads

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Text >> Text Subdivisions

of Contents

List of Figures

1.54 SUBHEAD LEVELS AND PLACEMENT

List of Tables

Many works require only one level of subhead throughout the text. Some, particularly scientific or

Index

technical works, require further subdivision. Where more than one level is used, the subheads are

sometimes referred to as the A-level subhead (the first-level heading after the chapter title), B-level,

C-level, and so on (or A-head, B-head, C-head, etc.). Only the most complicated works need more

1.52:

than three levels. The number of subhead levels required may vary from chapter to chapter. A lower-

Concluding

elements

level subhead may follow an upper-level subhead with no intervening text, but when a section of text

1.53:

is subdivided, there should ordinarily be at least two subsections. A single subhead in a chapter or a

Subheadsâ

single B-level subhead under an A-level subhead may be viewed as illogical and asymmetrical.

€”general

principles

(There are cases, however, when a single subdivision is needed--e.g., for a notes section at the end of

1.54:

a chapter.) Subheads are generally set on a line separate from the following text, the levels

Subhead levels and

placement

differentiated by type style and placement. The lowest level, however, may be run in at the beginning

of a paragraph, usually set in italics and followed by a period. It is then referred to as a run-in

1.55:

Numbered

subhead (or run-in sidehead). Run-in heads are usually capitalized sentence-style (see 8.156).

subheads

1.56:

Ornamental or

typographic breaks

in text

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Text >> Text Subdivisions

of Contents

List of Figures

1.55 NUMBERED SUBHEADS

List of Tables

Unless sections in a chapter are cited in cross-references elsewhere in the text, numbers are usually

Index

unnecessary with subheads. In general, subheads are more useful to a reader than section numbers

alone. In scientific and technical works, however, the numbering of sections, subsections, and

sometimes sub-subsections provides easy reference. There are various ways to number sections. The

1.53:

most common is double numeration or multiple numeration. In this system, sections are numbered

Subheadsâ

€”general

within chapters, subsections within sections, and sub-subsections within subsections. The number of

principles

each division is preceded by the numbers of all higher divisions, and all division numbers are

1.54:

separated by periods, colons, or hyphens. Thus, for example, the numbers 4.8 and 4.12 signify,

Subhead levels and

placement

respectively, the eighth section and the twelfth section of chapter 4. 1 The series 4.12.3 signifies the

1.55:

third subsection in the twelfth section of chapter 4, and so on. The system employed by this manual is

Numbered

subheads

chapter number followed by paragraph number for easy cross-referencing. The multiple-numeration

system may also be used for illustrations, tables, and mathematical equations (see, respectively, 3.11,

1.56:

Ornamental or

3.51, and 12.24--25).

typographic breaks

in text

1.57:

Appendixes

1. Multiple numeration using periods should not be confused with decimal fractions. Paragraph or section 4.9 may be followed

by 4.10--quite unlike the decimal fraction system.

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Text >> Text Subdivisions

of Contents

List of Figures

1.56 ORNAMENTAL OR TYPOGRAPHIC BREAKS IN TEXT

List of Tables

Where a break stronger than a paragraph but not as strong as a subhead is required, a set of asterisks

Index

or a type ornament, or simply a blank line, may be inserted between paragraphs. Using a blank line

has the disadvantage that it may be missed if the break falls at the bottom of a page. This quandary

can be solved by differentiating the first few words of each paragraph that follows a break--for

1.54:

example, by using small capitals.

Subhead levels and

placement

1.55:

Numbered

subheads

1.56:

Ornamental or

typographic breaks

in text

1.57:

Appendixes

1.58:

Chronology

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Back Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.57 APPENDIXES

List of Tables

An appendix may include explanations and elaborations that are not essential parts of the text but are

Index

helpful to a reader seeking further clarification, texts of documents, long lists, survey questionnaires,

or sometimes even charts or tables. The appendix should not, however, be a repository for odds and

ends that the author could not work into the text. Relevant information that is too unwieldy or

1.55:

expensive to produce in print may be suitable for presentation on the publisher's website and under

Numbered

subheads

its aegis (a practice more common with online journals, including some University of Chicago Press

1.56:

journals). Appendixes usually follow the last book chapter, though an appendix may be included at

Ornamental or

the end of a chapter (introduced by an A-level subhead) if what it contains is essential to

typographic breaks

in text

understanding the chapter. In multiauthor books and in books from which offprints of individual

1.57:

chapters will be required, any appendix must follow the chapter it pertains to. When two or more

Appendixes

appendixes are required, they should be designated by either numbers (Appendix 1, Appendix 2, etc.)

1.58:

or letters (Appendix A, Appendix B, etc.), and each should be given a title as well. Appendixes may

Chronology

be set either in the same type size as the text proper or in smaller type.

1.59:

Endnotes

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Back Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.58 CHRONOLOGY

List of Tables

A chronological list of events may be useful in certain works. It may appear in the back matter under

Index

its own heading, but if it is essential to readers, it is better placed in the front matter, immediately

before the text. For an example, see figure 1.9.

1.56:

Ornamental or

typographic breaks

in text

1.57:

Appendixes

1.58:

Chronology

1.59:

Endnotes

1.60:

Glossary

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Back Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.59 ENDNOTES

List of Tables

Endnotes, simply headed Notes, follow any appendix material and precede the bibliography or

Index

reference list (if there is one). The notes to each chapter are introduced by a subhead indicating the

chapter number and sometimes the chapter title. The running heads to the endnotes should identify

the text pages the notes apply to (see 1.14). Endnotes are normally set smaller than the text but larger

1.57:

than footnotes. Notes may have to be placed at the ends of chapters in multiauthor books (see 14.38).

Appendixes

For unnumbered notes and notes keyed to line or page numbers, see 14.47, 14.48. For endnotes versus

1.58:

Chronology

footnotes, see 14.38--43.

1.59:

Endnotes

1.60:

Glossary

1.61:

Bibliography or

reference list

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Back Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.60 GLOSSARY

List of Tables

A glossary is a useful tool in a book containing many foreign words or unfamiliar terms. Words to be

Index

defined should be arranged in alphabetical order, each on a separate line and followed by its

definition (see, for example, the list of key terms in appendix B). A glossary usually precedes a

bibliography or reference list.

1.58:

Chronology

1.59:

Endnotes

1.60:

Glossary

1.61:

Bibliography or

reference list

1.62:

List of contributors

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Back Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.61 BIBLIOGRAPHY OR REFERENCE LIST

List of Tables

Bibliographies (except for bibliographical essays) and reference lists are normally set smaller than the

Index

text and in flush-and-hang style. For a discussion of the various kinds of bibliographies, see 14.59; for

reference lists, see 15.10. For a full discussion and examples, see chapters 14 and 15.

1.59:

Endnotes

1.60:

Glossary

1.61:

Bibliography or

reference list

1.62:

List of contributors

1.63:

Index

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Back Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.62 LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS

List of Tables

A list of contributors may be appropriate for a work by many authors in which only the volume

Index

editor's name appears on the title page. The list (usually headed Contributors) may appear in the

front matter of a printed book, but the preferred location is in the back matter, immediately before the

index. Names are arranged alphabetically by last name but not inverted ("Koren D. Writer," not

1.60:

"Writer, Koren D."). Brief biographical notes and academic affiliations may accompany the names. See

Glossary

figure 1.10. A work by only a handful of authors whose names appear on the title page does not

1.61:

Bibliography or

require a list of contributors if biographical data can be included on the copyright page or elsewhere

reference list

in the book (see 1.20, 1.49, 14.49).

1.62:

List of contributors

1.63:

Index

1.64:

Colophon

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Back Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.63 INDEX

List of Tables

The index, or the first of several indexes, begins on a recto; subsequent indexes begin verso or recto.

Index

In a book with both name and subject indexes, the name index should precede the subject index.

Indexes in printed books are normally set two columns to a page and in smaller type than the text.

For a full discussion of indexes and indexing, see chapter 16.

1.61:

Bibliography or

reference list

1.62:

List of contributors

1.63:

Index

1.64:

Colophon

1.65:

Errata

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Back Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.64 COLOPHON

List of Tables

The last page of a specially designed and produced book occasionally contains a colophon--an

Index

inscription including the facts of production. For an example, see the last page of the print edition of

this manual. For another meaning of colophon, see 1.66.

1.62:

List of contributors

1.63:

Index

1.64:

Colophon

1.65:

Errata

1.66:

Clothbound covers

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Back Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.65 ERRATA

List of Tables

An errata sheet should never be supplied to correct simple typographical errors (which may be

Index

corrected in a later printing, if there is one) or to insert additions to, or revisions of, the printed text

(which should wait for a subsequent edition of the book). It should be used only in extreme cases

where errors severe enough to cause misunderstanding are detected too late to correct in the normal

1.63:

way but before the finished book is distributed. If the corrected material can be pasted over the

Index

incorrect material, it should be printed on adhesive paper. A bound-in errata page may be justified

1.64:

Colophon

when all or part of a book is photographically reproduced from an earlier publication. It may be

1.65:

placed either at the end of the front matter or at the end of the book and should be listed in the table

Errata

of contents. Publishers may also choose to post significant errata online; for electronic projects, links

1.66:

to and from any documentation of corrections should be provided. The following form may be

Clothbound covers

adapted to suit the particulars:

1.67:

Paperback covers

Errata

PAGE

FOR

READ

37, line 5

Peter W. Smith

John Q. Jones

182, line 15

is subject to

is not subject to

195, line 8

figure 3

figure 15

23, 214

Transpose captions of plates 2 and 51.

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Covers and Jackets

of Contents

List of Figures

1.66 CLOTHBOUND COVERS

List of Tables

The traditional clothbound hardcover book--so-called for the integument of cloth stretched over a

Index

laminated cardboard cover--may include a paper dust jacket (see 1.69). Underneath the jacket, on the

cloth itself, the spine is generally imprinted with the author's (or editor's) full name, or the last name

only if space is tight; the title of the book (and any edition number); and the publisher's name. The

1.64:

subtitle is usually omitted. The publisher's name is often shortened or replaced by an emblem or

Colophon

device known as a colophon or logo. (For another meaning of colophon, see 1.64.) Considering a book

1.65:

Errata

as it stands upright on a shelf, spine copy on American publications is most commonly printed

1.66:

vertically (and read from the top down), but when space allows (as with longer books with wider

Clothbound covers

spines), it may be printed horizontally (for easier reading on the shelf). The front cover may be blank,

1.67:

but it sometimes bears stamped or printed material, such as the title and author's name or the

Paperback covers

publisher's colophon or some other decoration. The back cover is usually blank, though a product

1.68:

Endpapers

code may be necessary for books with no jacket (see 1.71). For credit lines, see 1.70, 3.28--36.

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Covers and Jackets

of Contents

List of Figures

1.67 PAPERBACK COVERS

List of Tables

The spine of paperback covers (and other flexible covers) usually carries the author's or editor's name,

Index

the publisher's name or colophon or both, and the title. The front cover carries the author's or editor's

name, the title and (usually) the subtitle, and sometimes the name of a translator, a contributor of a

foreword, an edition number, or the like. The back cover usually carries promotional copy, such as a

1.65:

description of the book or quotations from reviews or signed blurbs, a brief biographical statement

Errata

about the author, the series title if the book is part of a series, and, sometimes, information about the

1.66:

Clothbound covers

publisher. (Some paperbacks include gatefolds, also called French flaps--extensions to the front and

1.67:

back covers that are folded into the book just like the dust jacket to a hardcover book; see 1.69.)

Paperback covers

1.68:

Endpapers

1.69:

Dust jackets

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Covers and Jackets

of Contents

List of Figures

1.68 ENDPAPERS

List of Tables

An endpaper is one of two folded sheets of paper appearing at the beginning and end of a hardcover

Index

book (or, more rarely, a book with a sturdy paperback or other flexible binding). Half of each sheet is

glued against the inside of the cover, one to the front and one to the back; the base of each is then

glued, at the fold (near the spine), to the first and last page of the book. Endpapers help secure a book

1.66:

within its covers. The free half of each sheet is called a flyleaf. Endpapers, sometimes colored, are

Clothbound covers

usually of a heavier stock than the book pages, and they sometimes feature printed text or

1.67:

Paperback covers

illustrations.

1.68:

Endpapers

1.69:

Dust jackets

1.70:

Credit lines for

cover art

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Covers and Jackets

of Contents

List of Figures

1.69 DUST JACKETS

List of Tables

Hardcover books are often protected by a coated paper jacket (or dust jacket). In addition to the three

Index

parts to be found on the book cover itself, the jacket also has flaps that tuck inside the front and back

covers. The front and spine carry the same kind of material as the front and spine of paperback covers

(see 1.67). The material included on the back of a paperback cover is begun on the front flap of the

1.67:

hardcover jacket and completed on the back flap. The back panel is sometimes used to promote other

Paperback covers

books by the publisher.

1.68:

Endpapers

1.69:

Dust jackets

1.70:

Credit lines for

cover art

1.71:

ISBN and bar codes

on covers

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Covers and Jackets

of Contents

List of Figures

1.70 CREDIT LINES FOR COVER ART

List of Tables

If a credit line is required for artwork included on a jacket or cover, it normally appears on the back

Index

flap of the jacket or the back cover of a paperback or other book without a jacket. Credit for artwork

on a paperback cover or on the actual cover (as opposed to the jacket) of a hardcover book may also

appear inside the book, usually on the copyright page, since the cover is a permanent part of the

1.68:

bound book. See 3.28--36 for styling of credit lines.

Endpapers

1.69:

Dust jackets

1.70:

Credit lines for

cover art

1.71:

ISBN and bar codes

on covers

1.72:

Print and

electronic formats

for journals

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Book >> Covers and Jackets

of Contents

List of Figures

1.71 ISBN AND BAR CODES ON COVERS

List of Tables

In addition to the International Standard Book Number (ISBN; see 1.32), book covers need to include

Index

product and price codes (bar codes). These should appear at the foot of the back cover or dust jacket

or any other protective case or wrapper. A detailed overview of the process and related resources can

be found at the website of the US ISBN Agency, R. R. Bowker, or the International ISBN Agency.

1.69:

Dust jackets

1.70:

Credit lines for

cover art

1.71:

ISBN and bar codes

on covers

1.72:

Print and

electronic formats

for journals

1.73:

Noting differences

between print and

electronic versions

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

1.72 PRINT AND ELECTRONIC FORMATS FOR JOURNALS

List of Tables

The majority of scholarly journals are produced either in print and electronic versions or as electronic-

Index

only journals, though many print-only journals persist, mainly in nonscientific fields. Electronically

published journals usually contain all the material included in any printed counterpart except, in

some cases, advertising. Electronic journals typically present the material in one of two ways (and

1.70:

often both): (1) as searchable page images suitable for printing by the end user and corresponding to

Credit lines for

cover art

the pages of the journal's print issues (i.e., as a PDF); or (2) as full-text HTML versions suitable for

1.71:

viewing in a web browser and containing features and supplementary materials not available in the

ISBN and bar codes

print edition. (For definitions of PDF, HTML, and related terms, see appendix B.)

on covers

1.72:

Print and

electronic formats

for journals

1.73:

Noting differences

between print and

electronic versions

1.74:

Unique identifiers

for electronic

journals

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

1.73 NOTING DIFFERENCES BETWEEN PRINT AND ELECTRONIC VERSIONS

List of Tables

Although a printed article should include all elements that are essential to understanding,

Index

interpreting, and documenting the text, many journals publish special materials electronically that are

not available in the print version. These features may include very large tables, supplemental reading

lists, audiovisual components, large data sets that can be exported to third-party software for

1.71:

analysis, or color versions of figures published in black and white in the printed journal; some of this

ISBN and bar codes

on covers

material may constitute the basis of an online-only appendix. In addition, some journals release

1.72:

unedited "in press" versions of manuscripts that have been accepted for publication (see 1.106). With

Print and

the exception of these "preprints," electronic-only articles, appendixes, and other features must be

electronic formats

for journals

listed in the print version (either in the table of contents or on the first page of the applicable article),

1.73:

and differences between the print and electronic versions must be made apparent in the latter. See

Noting differences

between print and

also 3.26.

electronic versions

1.74:

Unique identifiers

for electronic

journals

1.75:

Volume as

organizing principle

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

1.74 UNIQUE IDENTIFIERS FOR ELECTRONIC JOURNALS

List of Tables

Print journals are usually identified by volume and date. Electronic journals and their components

Index

must be further identified by means of stable and unique identifiers. Articles in Chicago's electronic

journals are identified in three ways: (1) by page ranges for their published articles, either print pages

or e-pages; (2) by the inclusion of numbers that can be found in the Copyright Clearance Center code,

1.72:

which includes the ISSN and other information, including an article number (see 1.97; electronic

Print and

electronic formats

journals are also assigned an eISSN, distinct from any counterpart for print); and (3) by Digital Object

for journals

Identifiers (DOIs). The DOI is a unique, persistent identification string assigned to journals and their

1.73:

components--including articles, images, and other "objects"--and can be used as the basis of a

Noting differences

between print and

persistent URL. See also 14.6.

electronic versions

1.74:

Unique identifiers

for electronic

journals

1.75:

Volume as

organizing principle

1.76:

Page numbers for

journals

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Page Numbers and Running Heads

of Contents

List of Figures

1.75 VOLUME AS ORGANIZING PRINCIPLE

List of Tables

A volume of a journal usually comprises the issues published in a calendar year, though some

Index

journals (such as Modern Philology) prefer the academic year beginning in the autumn. For a journal

published quarterly, a volume has four issues; for one published monthly, twelve issues. Some

journals, however, publish two or more volumes in one year, depending on the frequency and length

1.73:

of issues.

Noting differences

between print and

electronic versions

1.74:

Unique identifiers

for electronic

journals

1.75:

Volume as

organizing principle

1.76:

Page numbers for

journals

1.77:

Running heads or

running feet in

journals

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Page Numbers and Running Heads

of Contents

List of Figures

1.76 PAGE NUMBERS FOR JOURNALS

List of Tables

Page numbers in a printed journal usually start with 1 in the volume's first issue and run

Index

continuously to the end of the volume. An issue always begins on a right-hand page (recto) and ends

on a left-hand page (verso); thus the last page of an issue is an even number and the first page an

odd one. If issue 1 ends with page 264, then issue 2 starts on page 265. Electronic versions of printed

1.74:

journals should use the printed pagination scheme, indicating page ranges for full-text versions of

Unique identifiers

for electronic

articles that are not presented as page images. (Articles published electronically ahead of print may

journals

need to employ "dummy folios"--e.g., 000--000--until the print issue has been paginated.) For articles

1.75:

that are published only in electronic form but can be printed as pages formatted to look like those in

Volume as

organizing principle

the print journal, a separate page-numbering system is used (such as E1, E2, etc.), again running

1.76:

continuously to the end of the volume.

Page numbers for

journals

1.77:

Running heads or

running feet in

journals

1.78:

Covers for printed

journals

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Page Numbers and Running Heads

of Contents

List of Figures

1.77 RUNNING HEADS OR RUNNING FEET IN JOURNALS

List of Tables

Running heads or feet bear the name of the journal (either spelled out or in abbreviated form); the

Index

author's surname or, for more than one author, a shortened version of the author list (such as Aldrich

et al.); the title of the article, usually shortened, or the name of the journal section (such as Brief

Reports). Arrangement of these pieces of information across rectos and versos varies among journals.

1.75:

Full-text, scrollable electronic articles will not have running heads per se; printable page images,

Volume as

organizing principle

however, generally reproduce the format of articles in a printed-and-bound journal.

1.76:

Page numbers for

journals

1.77:

Running heads or

running feet in

journals

1.78:

Covers for printed

journals

1.79:

Home pages for

electronic journals

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Covers and Home Pages

of Contents

List of Figures

1.78 COVERS FOR PRINTED JOURNALS

List of Tables

A printed journal is usually bound in soft covers, like a paperback, and each issue generally uses the

Index

same overall design and color scheme. A journal's spine contains the name of the journal, the volume

and issue numbers, and the date, month, or season and year of publication. It may also note the

beginning and ending page numbers of that issue. Each of the remaining four sides of the cover also

1.76:

contains important information, as follows:

Page numbers for

journals

1.77:

Cover 1, the front cover, displays the name of the journal; the volume and issue numbers; the

Running heads or

date, month, or season and the year of the issue; the publisher's name; and sometimes the table

running feet in

journals

of contents or an illustration. The title of a special issue, along with the name(s) of the editor(s)

1.78:

of the special issue, appears on cover 1. The front cover may be offered as an image on the

Covers for printed

journals

home page of the online version for each issue.

1.79:

Cover 2, the inside front cover, usually contains the masthead with the names of the editor(s)

Home pages for

electronic journals

and staff, the editorial board, the journal's International Standard Serial Number (ISSN), its

dates or frequency of publication, subscription information, addresses for business and editorial

1.80:

Maintaining the

correspondence, and the copyright line for the entire issue (see also 1.97). Cover 2 may also

context of

electronic articles

include information about postage; a statement about paper durability; a statement about

copying beyond fair use; information about obtaining microfilm copies of back issues; mention

of a submission fee, if that is part of the journal's practice; information about indexing of the

journal's articles; a statement about advertising policy; and a caption for any illustration that

appears on cover 1. It may also list the URL of the electronic version. If the journal is sponsored

by a scholarly society or other organization, cover 2 may supply the name and address of the

society and the names of officers. Occasionally on cover 2 but more often in the front or back

matter of each issue (see 1.81--86), there may be a statement of editorial policy for the journal

indicating what kind of articles the journal publishes as well as information for contributors

about how and in what form to submit a manuscript.

Cover 3, the inside back cover, is often given over to advertising, or it may be used for

information for contributors. If the table of contents begins on the back cover, it may be

completed on cover 3.

Cover 4, the back cover, carries the bar code for the journal issue in the lower right-hand corner.

It may also carry the table of contents or titles of articles scheduled to appear in a forthcoming

issue, or advertising. (If there is advertising on cover 4, the bar code may be put on cover 2 or

cover 3.) If the table of contents begins on cover 1, it may be completed on cover 4.

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Covers and Home Pages

of Contents

List of Figures

1.79 HOME PAGES FOR ELECTRONIC JOURNALS

List of Tables

The home page for an electronic journal--in addition to identifying such essential information as the

Index

volume number and date of the current issue--generally features a table of contents for navigating the

articles in that issue and navigational aids for getting to other issues and to information about the

journal. Chicago also includes links to full citation information with each article, which consists of

1.77:

author name(s), article title, page range, volume and issue number, and the DOI for the article. Links

Running heads or

running feet in

to information typically included on the covers of printed journals--such as a statement of copyright,

journals

frequency of publication, and ISSN--should also be provided on the front page of each issue and with

1.78:

each full-text presentation of individual articles (see also 1.81--86).

Covers for printed

journals

1.79:

Home pages for

electronic journals

1.80:

Maintaining the

context of

electronic articles

1.81:

Front matter in

printed journals

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Covers and Home Pages

of Contents

List of Figures

1.80 MAINTAINING THE CONTEXT OF ELECTRONIC ARTICLES

List of Tables

Information may be lost when articles are uncoupled from the electronic issues of a journal. Editors of

Index

electronic journals should seek to preserve the historical context by maintaining, in connection with

each article, information that might affect interpretation of its contents or its selection for publication.

Information such as the names of the editors and editorial board, any sponsors or advertisers in the

1.78:

journal, and the information for contributors--as they existed at the time of the article's publication--

Covers for printed

journals

are as relevant as the date of publication in assessing the import of a work.

1.79:

Home pages for

electronic journals

1.80:

Maintaining the

context of

electronic articles

1.81:

Front matter in

printed journals

1.82:

Front matter and

home pages for

electronic journals

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Front Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.81 FRONT MATTER IN PRINTED JOURNALS

List of Tables

Many of the elements discussed in 1.78 can equally occur in the front matter, or preliminary

Index

("prelim") pages. Some journals, because they have a large staff and a large number of editors on their

advisory board, have space on cover 2 only for the masthead and advisory board editors; the other

items then appear in the front matter.

1.79:

Home pages for

electronic journals

1.80:

Maintaining the

context of

electronic articles

1.81:

Front matter in

printed journals

1.82:

Front matter and

home pages for

electronic journals

1.83:

Journal table of

contents

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Front Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.82 FRONT MATTER AND HOME PAGES FOR ELECTRONIC JOURNALS

List of Tables

Most journal home pages include hypertext links to all materials typically found in the front matter of

Index

a printed journal. Journal home pages may also provide (or provide links to) some or all of the

following resources:

1.80:

A fuller description of the journal and its policies

Maintaining the

context of

Information about the history of the journal and, if applicable, the sponsoring society

electronic articles

More extensive information about preparation and submission of electronic text, tables, math,

1.81:

Front matter in

art, and other files (e.g., video files or large data sets)

printed journals

Links to other home pages (e.g., the publisher's home page, the sponsoring society's home page,

1.82:

Front matter and

other relevant societies' home pages, and databases or other online resources associated with the

home pages for

electronic journals

journal or the field)

1.83:

Individual and institutional subscription forms

Journal table of

contents

Lists of institutional subscribers

1.84:

Site license agreement and registration forms

Information for

contributors

Links to tables of contents for all issues of the journal or for those currently available online

Lists of articles scheduled for upcoming issues, or links to articles published electronically

ahead of upcoming issues

A link to a journal-specific or broader search engine

Society meeting abstracts and information about upcoming meetings

Society membership information and application forms

Information about special services for subscribers (e.g., tables of contents distributed by e-mail

before publication in print)

Mail-to links for questions about manuscript submission and review, subscriptions, back issues,

advertising, copyright and permissions, books and new media for review, passwords and other

technical issues, and other topics

These resources typically are not associated with a particular issue of the journal but are simply

updated as needed.

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Front Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.83 JOURNAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

List of Tables

The table of contents, usually headed Contents, appears in the front matter or on the cover(s) of the

Index

print issue (see 1.78) and is typically the main feature of a journal's home page. The table of contents

should include the title of the journal (or, for a special issue, the title of a special issue and the names

of its editors); the date, month, or season and the year of publication; the volume and issue numbers;

1.81:

and the titles of the articles in the issue along with the authors' names and, for the print issue, the

Front matter in

printed journals

page number on which each article begins. It may contain section titles, such as Reviews, or subheads

1.82:

for specific content areas. Additional items listed may include review articles, book reviews, book

Front matter and

notes, commentaries, editorials, or other substantive items, and should include a list of articles

home pages for

electronic journals

published in electronic form only (e-articles) or direct readers to the journal's website for a list of

1.83:

those articles. See figure 1.11. The electronic table of contents, in addition to providing links to each

Journal table of

contents

format of each item in the list, will include links to any abstracts, which can usually be viewed

without a subscription. Some journals also include options for downloading and customizing citations

1.84:

Information for

to individual articles for use in citation management software (see also 14.13).

contributors

1.85:

Acknowledgments,

announcements,

and calls for papers

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Front Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.84 INFORMATION FOR CONTRIBUTORS

List of Tables

Information for potential contributors can vary in length from a sentence to several pages. Some

Index

journals also include a statement of editorial policy. These components--when they do not appear on

cover 2 or cover 3 in a printed journal (see 1.78)--may appear in an issue's front or back matter. In

many cases, the print journal will contain a brief version of these components and point the potential

1.82:

author to the electronic version for more details.

Front matter and

home pages for

electronic journals

1.83:

Journal table of

contents

1.84:

Information for

contributors

1.85:

Acknowledgments,

announcements,

and calls for papers

1.86:

Journals errata

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Front Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.85 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS, ANNOUNCEMENTS, AND CALLS FOR PAPERS

List of Tables

Acknowledgments of reviewers, announcements of awards or conferences, and calls for papers are

Index

published periodically, and may appear in the preliminary pages or at the end of a journal issue. If

the issue is a supplement or special issue on a single topic, perhaps representing the proceedings of a

conference or symposium, the print issue may begin with a title page that contains the title of the

1.83:

supplement, the name(s) of any guest editor(s), information about the source of the articles (perhaps a

Journal table of

contents

conference or symposium), and sponsorship information, if any.

1.84:

Information for

contributors

1.85:

Acknowledgments,

announcements,

and calls for papers

1.86:

Journals errata

1.87:

Majors and minors

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Front Matter

of Contents

List of Figures

1.86 JOURNALS ERRATA

List of Tables

Journals periodically publish errata, which, in print issues, may appear in the front or the back

Index

matter. Electronic journals should provide two-way links from errata to the articles that contain the

errors; in other words, the articles themselves should be updated to link to or otherwise indicate the

relevant errata. The entries in the issue table of contents for the original articles should also contain

1.84:

links to the errata. Small errors in online articles that are corrected after the original publication date

Information for

contributors

(e.g., broken images and typographical errors) are best accompanied by a note indicating the nature of

1.85:

the changes and when they were made. See also 1.105.

Acknowledgments,

announcements,

and calls for papers

1.86:

Journals errata

1.87:

Majors and minors

1.88:

Article title,

authorship, and

other first-page

information

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Articles and Other Components

of Contents

List of Figures

1.87 MAJORS AND MINORS

List of Tables

Items published in a journal are often described as being majors or minors. The majors, principally the

Index

articles, are so named because these items have been traditionally set in the major (or regular) type

size and style of the printed journal. Special kinds of articles--such as review essays, survey articles,

or articles grouped as a symposium--are typically treated as majors. Minors, often set in smaller type,

1.85:

are items such as brief reports, letters to the editor, book reviews, book notes, announcements, calls

Acknowledgments,

announcements,

for papers, errata, and notes on contributors.

and calls for papers

1.86:

Journals errata

1.87:

Majors and minors

1.88:

Article title,

authorship, and

other first-page

information

1.89:

Hyperlinks within

electronic articles

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Articles and Other Components

of Contents

List of Figures

1.88 ARTICLE TITLE, AUTHORSHIP, AND OTHER FIRST-PAGE INFORMATION

List of Tables

An article should include--on the first page or, in the full-text version, at or near the top of the article--

Index

the title of the article, the author's or authors' name(s), and the copyright line for the particular article

(see 1.97). Depending on the journal or on the needs of a given article, the first page may also include

the affiliation of each author (and any relevant financial interests or potential conflicts of interest), an

1.86:

address for correspondence and reprints, dates of submission and acceptance of the article (most

Journals errata

commonly in scientific journals), an abstract, an acknowledgment note, and sometimes an editor's

1.87:

Majors and minors

note. Of course, the first page will also include any footnotes that are referenced on that page and,

1.88:

depending on the length of the other information, the beginning of the text. A general section heading

Article title,

such as Articles, Review Essay, or Symposium or a specific heading such as Medical Microbiology

authorship, and

other first-page

may appear above the article title.

information

1.89:

Hyperlinks within

electronic articles

1.90:

Article abstracts

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Articles and Other Components

of Contents

List of Figures

1.89 HYPERLINKS WITHIN ELECTRONIC ARTICLES

List of Tables

Full-text electronic journal articles typically contain links to other elements within the document

Index

(perhaps illustrations, tables, and the reference list, notes, or bibliography) and often to outside

resources such as field-specific indexes or databases. Articles are also typically accompanied by other

linked items, including an article-specific list (or menu) that allows readers to move directly to other

1.87:

sections or elements of the article and a standard menu that allows them to move to the issue's table

Majors and minors

of contents, to the previous or next article in the issue, to the journal's home page, to a search page, or

1.88:

Article title,

elsewhere. The display may also include thumbnail versions of the article's tables and illustrations

authorship, and

(see 1.99--100).

other first-page

information

1.89:

Hyperlinks within

electronic articles

1.90:

Article abstracts

1.91:

Article subheads

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Articles and Other Components

of Contents

List of Figures

1.90 ARTICLE ABSTRACTS

List of Tables

Many journals--particularly in the sciences but also in the social sciences--include abstracts. These

Index

summaries, sometimes as much as a few hundred words but usually somewhat shorter, appear at the

beginning of an article and are generally offered without cost to subscribers and nonsubscribers alike

by online journals and third-party hosts and search engines. (Some abstracts are supplemented by

1.88:

targeted keywords intended to increase visibility to search engines.) The content of an abstract is

Article title,

authorship, and

extremely important because it can influence decisions made by researchers and other potential

other first-page

information

readers. Some journals have strict guidelines for what an abstract must include and how it should be

structured--especially those that publish the results of original research. Abstracts are not typically

1.89:

Hyperlinks within

required for letters, reviews, and other minors.

electronic articles

1.90:

Article abstracts

1.91:

Article subheads

1.92:

Book review and

book notes sections

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Articles and Other Components

of Contents

List of Figures

1.91 ARTICLE SUBHEADS

List of Tables

An article, like a chapter in a book, may be divided into sections and subsections headed by

Index

subheads, sub-subheads, and so on (see 1.53--56). The number of subhead levels required may vary

from article to article.

1.89:

Hyperlinks within

electronic articles

1.90:

Article abstracts

1.91:

Article subheads

1.92:

Book review and

book notes sections

1.93:

Journal

announcements

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Articles and Other Components

of Contents

List of Figures

1.92 BOOK REVIEW AND BOOK NOTES SECTIONS

List of Tables

Many journals include a book review section. Such sections, usually headed Reviews or Book

Index

Reviews, vary greatly in length from journal to journal. Within a section, each review carries a

heading that lists information about the book being reviewed. The heading includes the author's

name, the title of the book, place and date of publication, publisher's name, number of pages

1.90:

(including front matter), and price. If the book is part of a series, the series name may be given. Some

Article abstracts

journals include reviews of other journals and of other media. The name of the reviewer usually

1.91:

Article subheads

appears at the end of the review but occasionally follows the heading. Book notes use the same form

1.92:

of headings as book reviews, but the text is much shorter and reviewers may be listed by their

Book review and

initials. Some journals also publish a list of books or other materials received for review from

book notes sections

publishers.

1.93:

Journal

announcements

1.94:

Journal

contributors

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Articles and Other Components

of Contents

List of Figures

1.93 JOURNAL ANNOUNCEMENTS

List of Tables

Announcements include such items as notices of future conferences and symposia; calls for papers,

Index

award nominations, or research subjects; and employment opportunities.

1.91:

Article subheads

1.92:

Book review and

book notes sections

1.93:

Journal

announcements

1.94:

Journal

contributors

1.95:

Letters to the

editor

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Articles and Other Components

of Contents

List of Figures

1.94 JOURNAL CONTRIBUTORS

List of Tables

Some journals have a special section with information about the contributors to the issue, such as

Index

their affiliations and publications or fields of study. The names must be checked against the authors'

names on the first page of every article and in the table of contents to be sure they are spelled

correctly (see also 2.29--31).

1.92:

Book review and

book notes sections

1.93:

Journal

announcements

1.94:

Journal

contributors

1.95:

Letters to the

editor

1.96:

Journal editorials

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Articles and Other Components

of Contents

List of Figures

1.95 LETTERS TO THE EDITOR

List of Tables

Letters to the editor are usually treated as a minor. In some scientific journals, on the other hand,

Index

letters appear as a regular, prominent feature, often with replies, and may contain equations, tables,

and figures.

1.93:

Journal

announcements

1.94:

Journal

contributors

1.95:

Letters to the

editor

1.96:

Journal editorials

1.97:

Journal copyright

lines

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Articles and Other Components

of Contents

List of Figures

1.96 JOURNAL EDITORIALS

List of Tables

An editorial is not a regular feature in most academic journals but appears on a particular occasion.

Index

When there is a change of some sort--a new editor, modifications in editorial policy or style, features

added or dropped, or graphic redesign of the journal (see 1.110)--an editorial announces and explains

the change. A journal may provide an annual editorial summing up the year's activity. Some journals

1.94:

publish invited editorials, written by someone who is neither the journal's editor in chief nor a

Journal

contributors

member of its editorial board, that comment on a particular article or group of articles. A special issue

1.95:

usually includes an introduction by the special issue's editor(s). The heading Editorial or Introduction

Letters to the

is used, and the editor's name appears at the end of the piece.

editor

1.96:

Journal editorials

1.97:

Journal copyright

lines

1.98:

Publication history

for electronic-first

articles

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Articles and Other Components

of Contents

List of Figures

1.97 JOURNAL COPYRIGHT LINES

List of Tables

In addition to the copyright line that appears on cover 2, each substantive article or element in the

Index

journal normally carries its own copyright line. This usually appears at the bottom of the first page of

the article, below any footnotes on that page, or, for electronic articles, at the head of the article or

some other prominent location. It contains three basic parts: (1) information on the current issue,

1.95:

including the name of the journal, the volume number, the date, month, or season and year of

Letters to the

editor

publication, and the inclusive page numbers of the article; (2) the actual copyright notice, containing

1.96:

the copyright symbol, the year, and the name of the copyright owner (usually either the publisher or

Journal editorials

the sponsoring society); and (3) a series of numbers (the Copyright Clearance Center code) containing

1.97:

the journal's unique identification number (its International Standard Serial Number, or ISSN), the

Journal copyright

lines

year, the volume and issue numbers, the article number (assigned by the publisher), and the per copy

1.98:

fee for photocopying, payable through the Copyright Clearance Center (CCC; see below). Chicago

Publication history

also includes a fourth element--the article's DOI (see 14.6).

for electronic-first

articles

The Journal of Modern History 78 (March 2006): 1--36

1.99:

Tables in journal

Â© 2006 by The University of Chicago. All rights reserved.

articles

0022-2801/2006/7801-0001$10.00

doi:10.1086/499793

Most but not all US journals use the CCC, which provides systems through which copyright owners

can license the reproduction and distribution of materials in both print and electronic form. Its

relations with equivalent agencies in other countries enable the CCC to collect fees for uses in those

countries. Note that fees apply only to copyrighted material and not to articles in the public domain.

See also 4.55--58, 4.91.

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Articles and Other Components

of Contents

List of Figures

1.98 PUBLICATION HISTORY FOR ELECTRONIC-FIRST ARTICLES

List of Tables

For all articles that are published electronically before they are published in print, the date of

Index

electronic publication should appear as part of the article's history, in both the print and the electronic

versions, on the first page or otherwise near the head of the article. This date is also part of the

context for interpretation of the article; in the sciences, especially, what is known--or at least what has

1.96:

been reported--can change rapidly.

Journal editorials

1.97:

Journal copyright

lines

1.98:

Publication history

for electronic-first

articles

1.99:

Tables in journal

articles

1.100:

Illustrations in

journal articles

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Tables and Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

1.99 TABLES IN JOURNAL ARTICLES

List of Tables

Tables in electronic articles can be presented in multiple formats--for example, as an image of the

Index

typeset table, as a searchable hypertext version with links, or as a machine-readable version that

allows readers to download the data and either repeat the analyses used in the article or use the data,

perhaps in combination with data from other sources, for their own analyses. Table footnote citations

1.97:

can be linked to the table footnotes themselves; this is especially useful for navigation in very large

Journal copyright

lines

tables. Links also allow readers to move freely from text to tables and back again, as well as from one

1.98:

table to another. Very large tables may be published in electronic form only; if there is also a print

Publication history

version of the article, both versions should make this difference explicit (see 1.73). For a full

for electronic-first

articles

discussion of tables, see 3.46--85. See also A.33.

1.99:

Tables in journal

articles

1.100:

Illustrations in

journal articles

1.101:

Notes or author-

date citations in

journals

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Tables and Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

1.100 ILLUSTRATIONS IN JOURNAL ARTICLES

List of Tables

An electronic article might display the same illustrations available in the print version of the article,

Index

though they may be presented in the text as thumbnail versions linked to larger, higher-resolution

images. These images may contain additional navigational aids like the ones described for tables (see

1.99). Moreover, a greater range of illustrations can be offered in electronic journals, which can

1.98:

include more illustrations than would be practical in print. Color can be used freely, without the costs

Publication history

for electronic-first

associated with color printing (although color accuracy can vary considerably between display

articles

devices). High-resolution images can allow readers to see more detail, and electronic illustrations may

1.99:

include an audio component. Videos and animations can go beyond conventional illustrations to

Tables in journal

articles

allow readers to view movement and understand processes. For a full discussion of illustrations, see

1.100:

3.3--45; see also A.32.

Illustrations in

journal articles

1.101:

Notes or author-

date citations in

journals

1.102:

Links to citations

and to outside

resources

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Documentation

of Contents

List of Figures

1.101 NOTES OR AUTHOR-DATE CITATIONS IN JOURNALS

List of Tables

One of the fundamental identifying marks of a journal is its documentation style--either notes

Index

(sometimes accompanied by a bibliography) or author-date citations. Notes still prevail in many

humanities journals. Author-date citations--used mostly by journals in science and the social sciences-

-consist of parenthetical text citations keyed to a reference list, which appears at the end of the article.

1.99:

Notes may be footnotes or endnotes; if the latter, they appear at the end of the article, with the

Tables in journal

articles

heading Notes. For a discussion of different styles of documentation, see chapters 14 and 15.

1.100:

Illustrations in

journal articles

1.101:

Notes or author-

date citations in

journals

1.102:

Links to citations

and to outside

resources

1.103:

Indexes to printed

volumes

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Documentation

of Contents

List of Figures

1.102 LINKS TO CITATIONS AND TO OUTSIDE RESOURCES

List of Tables

In full-text electronic articles, text citations typically link to references, notes, or items in a

Index

bibliography, as the case may be, allowing readers to move from the text citation to the cited item and

back to the text. Reference lists and bibliographies may also contain links to resources outside the

article--for example, to cited articles or to an outside index or database (see 1.104).

1.100:

Illustrations in

journal articles

1.101:

Notes or author-

date citations in

journals

1.102:

Links to citations

and to outside

resources

1.103:

Indexes to printed

volumes

1.104:

Electronic indexes

and indexed

searches

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Index

of Contents

List of Figures

1.103 INDEXES TO PRINTED VOLUMES

List of Tables

At the end of a volume, most journals publish an index to the articles and other pieces published in

Index

that volume. The index appears in the volume's last issue. Names of authors, titles of articles, and

titles and authors of books reviewed are indexed. In the sciences, subject indexes are sometimes

included (but see 1.104).

1.101:

Notes or author-

date citations in

journals

1.102:

Links to citations

and to outside

resources

1.103:

Indexes to printed

volumes

1.104:

Electronic indexes

and indexed

searches

1.105:

Corrections to

journal articles

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Index

of Contents

List of Figures

1.104 ELECTRONIC INDEXES AND INDEXED SEARCHES

List of Tables

Some electronic journals, especially in the sciences, have dispensed with subject indexes; in some

Index

fields, journal subject indexes have been almost completely superseded by large online databases

(such as the National Library of Medicine's bibliographic database of journal articles, PubMed) that

allow readers to search an entire field of indexed journals, perhaps using terms from a standard list of

1.102:

keywords, rather than searching individually at each journal's or each journal publisher's website. In

Links to citations

and to outside

some fields, more readers may reach an article by this means than by subscribing to the journal

resources

(though they will typically need to have a subscription to gain access to the full article). A subject

1.103:

index may nonetheless appear as part of a larger collection in something like PubMed, or journals

Indexes to printed

volumes

may offer it individually.

1.104:

Electronic indexes

and indexed

searches

1.105:

Corrections to

journal articles

1.106:

Preprints

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Version Control and Material Not Available in Print

of Contents

List of Figures

1.105 CORRECTIONS TO JOURNAL ARTICLES

List of Tables

For many of its journals, Chicago considers the electronic version of an article to be the version of

Index

record; the print version, which should contain all elements that are essential to the article, may

nevertheless include only a subset of the material available electronically. Whenever the electronic

version is considered the version of record, it is extremely important not to make undocumented

1.103:

changes to the file after the electronic publication date. Note that release of electronic articles before

Indexes to printed

volumes

they are published in print means that errors may turn up well before the print issue has been

1.104:

assembled; consequently, a print issue may include an erratum that concerns an article in the same

Electronic indexes

issue. In this case, the erratum should state that the article is in the current issue and should specify

and indexed

searches

the date of electronic publication. See also 1.86. For more information on best practices related to

1.105:

version control for journal articles, consult Journal Article Versions (JAV): Recommendations of the

Corrections to

journal articles

NISO/ALPSP JAV Technical Working Group, published by the National Information Standards

Organization and available from its website (bibliog. 2.7).

1.106:

Preprints

1.107:

Material not

available in print

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Version Control and Material Not Available in Print

of Contents

List of Figures

1.106 PREPRINTS

List of Tables

Manuscripts are sometimes released before publication: authors themselves may circulate drafts

Index

within a research community, or they may circulate versions submitted to a journal. They may post

drafts on a preprint server--as is standard practice in the physics community--or on their own web

pages. Some journals post accepted but not yet edited articles on their websites. Preprints are not to

1.104:

be confused with final, edited electronic articles published in advance of the print issue (see 1.105).

Electronic indexes

and indexed

See also 1.73, 4.64.

searches

1.105:

Corrections to

journal articles

1.106:

Preprints

1.107:

Material not

available in print

1.108:

Journal design

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Version Control and Material Not Available in Print

of Contents

List of Figures

1.107 MATERIAL NOT AVAILABLE IN PRINT

List of Tables

In addition to preprints (see 1.106), electronic journals often publish material not available in print or

Index

not applicable to print (e.g., audiovisual components, large data sets). It is essential that publishers

provide this content in a way that ensures its ongoing availability and accessibility; any electronic-

only material published under the imprimatur of a journal is every bit as much a part of the scholarly

1.105:

record as a printed-and-bound volume. To this end, the role of publishers and third-party archival

Corrections to

journal articles

services is crucial because, unlike the case with printed journals, libraries may not physically own a

1.106:

copy of the material or the journals it supplements. By implementing standard practices for document

Preprints

structure and markup and for the inclusion and identification of supplemental media such as video

1.107:

and audio files, publishers can help to ensure the permanence and accessibility of their material in

Material not

available in print

libraries and other archives even as software evolves and archives grow and migrate. Publishers

1.108:

should remain abreast of the latest standards for archival practices by consulting such groups as the

Journal design

International Organization for Standardization and the Digital Library Federation.

1.109:

Editorial style

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Design and Style

of Contents

List of Figures

1.108 JOURNAL DESIGN

List of Tables

A journal's design features--physical, visual, and editorial--are determined when the journal is

Index

founded. At that time, a designer creates a design for the cover and the overall look of a journal and

specifications for all of its regular features. Because the designer designs not for a specific text but for

categories of text--article title, author's name, text, heads, subheads, and such--the design of a journal

1.106:

should be simple and flexible as well as being visually pleasing and easy to read. It is then the job of

Preprints

the manuscript editor and production personnel to fit the items for a particular issue into the overall

1.107:

Material not

design.

available in print

1.108:

Journal design

1.109:

Editorial style

1.110:

Redesign

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Design and Style

of Contents

List of Figures

1.109 EDITORIAL STYLE

List of Tables

A journal's editorial style (see 2.46) governs such things as when to use numerals or percent signs,

Index

how to treat abbreviations or special terms, and how tables are typically organized. Consistency of

design and style contributes to a journal's identity; readers know what to expect, and the substantive

contribution of each article stands out more sharply when typographical distractions are at a

1.107:

minimum.

Material not

available in print

1.108:

Journal design

1.109:

Editorial style

1.110:

Redesign

1.111:

Suitability for the

web

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Parts of a Journal >> Design and Style

of Contents

List of Figures

1.110 REDESIGN

List of Tables

A long-running journal may occasionally be redesigned typographically. More rarely in print but

Index

commonly in electronic journals--where the pace of software development will drive new possibilities

or require adjustments to formats--the editors may introduce minor alterations in style to

accommodate changing needs. Once established, however, a new design or style must be adhered to

1.108:

as carefully as the one it replaces.

Journal design

1.109:

Editorial style

1.110:

Redesign

1.111:

Suitability for the

web

1.112:

Functional features

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Considerations for Web-Based Publications

of Contents

List of Figures

1.111 SUITABILITY FOR THE WEB

List of Tables

A web-based publication is any publication designed to be consulted online through a web browser

Index

or similar application. Any book or journal article may be published on the web, and many scholarly

journals, in particular, offer full-text HTML versions of their articles (see 1.72). Because of their

relative brevity and because they are often consulted without reference to a particular issue, journal

1.109:

articles have adapted well to this model. Reference works such as manuals, encyclopedias, and

Editorial style

dictionaries are, to an even greater degree, designed in any medium to be consulted in a piecemeal

1.110:

Redesign

fashion, making them particularly suitable for publishing on the web. This section highlights some

1.111:

basic organizational differences between print and web-based publications.

Suitability for the

web

1.112:

Functional features

1.113:

Navigation as the

primary organizing

principle for web-

based publications

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Considerations for Web-Based Publications

of Contents

List of Figures

1.112 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES

List of Tables

As even a casual user of the Internet knows, web-based publications involve much more than content.

Index

Any discussion of the parts of a web-based publication must also consider the functional features it

will have--search engines, note-taking capability, user-controlled display options, and so forth. The

process of determining, designing, and implementing such features, while driven largely by technical

1.110:

expertise, must also be guided by editorial sensibilities. This type of work represents a significant

Redesign

departure from traditional editorial duties, but it is nonetheless essential that functional features be

1.111:

Suitability for the

developed with a clear understanding of the content and how the user will interact with that content.

web

Editors involved in any work being developed as a web-based publication may therefore reasonably

1.112:

be asked to play a role in the development of the publication's functional features.

Functional features

1.113:

Navigation as the

primary organizing

principle for web-

based publications

1.114:

Hyperlinks

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Considerations for Web-Based Publications

of Contents

List of Figures

1.113 NAVIGATION AS THE PRIMARY ORGANIZING PRINCIPLE FOR WEB-BASED PUBLICATIONS

List of Tables

A web-based reference work must take into account the fact that readers will typically consult smaller

Index

pieces of content and will expect to be able to click through many parts of a work in a very short

period of time. Books and journals designed for the web also need to take this reality into account.

Nonetheless, not every publication needs to be modeled on the perfect online dictionary--in which

1.111:

any term within a definition is hyperlinked to the entry for that term and so on, providing endless

Suitability for the

web

pathways through a significant subset of a single written language. Some readers will want the option

1.112:

merely to browse. At the very least, cross-references, by being hyperlinked, will become more useful

Functional features

in any online publication, and most web publications will need to augment or even replace standard

1.113:

tables of contents with a search engine--one that may need to accommodate complex queries.

Navigation as the

primary organizing

Furthermore, any web-based work that allows full-text searching will benefit from context-sensitive

principle for web-

based publications

keyword indexing (see 16.8). Readers will also want to know where they've been and perhaps where

other readers have been (or where the majority have chosen to land). They may want to take notes

1.114:

Hyperlinks

that they can return to later--through a search or other means. They may want to send comments to

1.115:

the author or publisher, and they may want to read and comment on the comments of others. Finally,

"Front matter" for

web-based

readers of web publications may expect links to related resources. All these items will need to be

publications

made accessible through a clear and consistent navigational hierarchy.

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Considerations for Web-Based Publications

of Contents

List of Figures

1.114 HYPERLINKS

List of Tables

In a web-based publication, cross-references become one of the primary ways in which a reader can

Index

expect to move quickly from one part of a work to another. There is no cost to following a hyperlink,

provided there is a means of stepping or linking back and forth between the hyperlink and the item it

points to. But if there are too many links, or if they do not tend to lead to strongly related content--or,

1.112:

worse, if they fail--a publication risks irritating its readers. Beyond cross-references and hyperlinked

Functional features

tables of contents and indexes or other navigational items, a link can of course be made to point to

1.113:

Navigation as the

almost anything. Words might be linked to their definitions--either in a glossary or through a third-

primary organizing

party dictionary. Authors' names might contain mail-to links or lead to their networking pages or to

principle for web-

based publications

lists of their other works. URLs or other identifiers can be embedded in any piece of content. All of

1.114:

these must be maintained and updated, however, often at significant cost. Internal cross-references are

Hyperlinks

the most stable type of hyperlink because they need only be tested against and updated along with

1.115:

the work itself--a process that can be at least partly automated. Most other types of text-based links

"Front matter" for

web-based

need to be weighed for their utility and persistence. On the other hand, some links can be generated

publications

programmatically--for example, links to related titles or related subjects generated by matching

1.116:

Folios, running

author, title, or subject metadata against an evolving database each time a user calls up a specific

heads, and other

piece of content (see also A.10).

"print" elements

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Considerations for Web-Based Publications

of Contents

List of Figures

1.115 "FRONT MATTER" FOR WEB-BASED PUBLICATIONS

List of Tables

Readers of web-based publications will want to be able to navigate primarily to the core content of

Index

the publication (and the content that it generates) rather than to ancillary elements such as prefaces,

copyright information, or information about the publication or its authors. Online, these elements can

be demoted from their usual position in the front of a printed-and-bound book and made accessible

1.113:

through a link at the edge of the screen or the base of a document, from which they can be consulted

Navigation as the

primary organizing

if need be. Copyright information, however, should usually be included with each subdocument, and

principle for web-

based publications

help and related documentation should also be available from any part of a publication. Much of the

usual taxonomy for printed works--from copyright page to table of contents to preface, foreword, and

1.114:

Hyperlinks

introduction--will benefit from a different set of categories (e.g., "about us" links, site maps, help

1.115:

menus and other tools, search engines, and the other elements mentioned in 1.113). The table of

"Front matter" for

web-based

contents, however, especially in works that can be read in larger chunks--such as an online journal or

publications

this manual--may be a significant driver in the top-level navigation of a web-based publication.

1.116:

Folios, running

heads, and other

"print" elements

1.117:

Indexes, notes, and

other "back

matter"

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Considerations for Web-Based Publications

of Contents

List of Figures

1.116 FOLIOS, RUNNING HEADS, AND OTHER "PRINT" ELEMENTS

List of Tables

One of the primary advantages of a traditional printed-and-bound book or journal is the presence of

Index

page numbers. Page numbers allow students and researchers to make precise citations to the works

they consult, allowing readers in turn to retrace their steps. Web-based publications should keep this

in mind when designing and organizing content. Dictionaries and encyclopedias have a de facto

1.113:

organizing principle: readers cite material sub verbo--or "under the word"--that is, by entry or entry

Navigation as the

primary organizing

title (14.247). But other types of publications broken into scrollable sections or articles (including

principle for web-

based publications

encyclopedias with longer articles)--though they may be designed for convenient navigation online--

do not necessarily include page numbers to which readers can refer when documenting a specific

1.114:

Hyperlinks

quotation or idea. Publishers are encouraged to incorporate stable page numbers--as in PDF versions

1.115:

of a journal article--or to otherwise number the elements in their web-based publications (e.g.,

"Front matter" for

web-based

through paragraph or section numbers) whenever possible. Running heads, on the other hand, almost

publications

always have an analogous presence in the basic navigational elements of a web-based publication.

1.116:

Readers require clear indications not only of "where" they are within a publication at any moment

Folios, running

heads, and other

(not to mention an indication of the size and scope of each of its elements) but also where they have

"print" elements

been and where they might go--for example, to a related portion of the alphabet in a dictionary or, in

1.117:

any type of work, to a section with related content (or, for that matter, to another publication with

Indexes, notes, and

other "back

related content).

matter"

1: BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Considerations for Web-Based Publications

of Contents

List of Figures

1.117 INDEXES, NOTES, AND OTHER "BACK MATTER"

List of Tables

Any web-based project can benefit from keyword-enhanced searches, cross-references to related

Index

content, and other navigational cues. Web-based works that have a printed counterpart complete with

index, on the other hand, should take advantage of the intellectual labor that went into choosing and

arranging the index entries and marry it to the linking capabilities of an electronic work. An index

1.113:

prepared with human input--whether it is "embedded" and shows up only in the results of keyword

Navigation as the

primary organizing

searches (see 16.7) or is prepared as a separate list according to the guidelines in chapter 16--is an

principle for web-

based publications

asset in any electronic work, whether or not it has a printed counterpart. Note references are

hyperlinked to the text in electronic works, solving the problem of footnotes versus endnotes that

1.114:

Hyperlinks

arises in printed books (see 14.38--43). Other traditional back matter--such as appendixes and

1.115:

bibliographies--may benefit in web-based works from electronic enhancements (e.g., downloadable

"Front matter" for

web-based

data sets) or links out to other resources (e.g., through a database such as CrossRef; see 14.6).

publications

1.116:

Folios, running

heads, and other

"print" elements

1.117:

Indexes, notes, and

other "back

matter"

1 : BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 1.1

List of Figures

A typical copyright page, including biographical note, copyright notice, impression date and number

List of Tables

(denoting 2008 for the first impression), International Standard Book Number (ISBN), publisher's

Index

acknowledgment of a subvention, Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication (CIP) data, and

paper durability statement. See 1.19.

1 : BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 1.2

List of Figures

Copyright notice of a second edition (2007), with impression line indicating that this edition was

List of Tables

reprinted for the third time in 2010. See 1.23. PDF Version >>

Index

1 : BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 1.3

List of Figures

The copyright page of a translation, including title and copyright of the original edition (as required

List of Tables

by contract with the original publisher), and biographical notes on both author (Georges Didi-

Index

Huberman) and translator (Shane B. Lillis). See 1.29.

1 : BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 1.4

List of Figures

A copyright page acknowledging earlier publication of certain chapters. See 1.30. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

1 : BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 1.5

List of Figures

Table of contents showing front matter, introduction, parts, chapters, back matter, and location of

List of Tables

photo gallery. See 1.37. PDF Version >>

Index

1 : BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 1.6

List of Figures

Partial list of illustrations, with subheads. If the book contained no tables, the subhead "Figures"

List of Tables

would be omitted. If it contained many tables, these would probably be listed on a new page under

Index

the heading "Tables." How best to list illustrations of various sorts depends as much on space as on

logic. See 1.38.

1 : BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 1.7

List of Figures

Partial list of illustrations showing numbers, titles, and placement of unpaginated plates. (Compare

List of Tables

fig. 1.5.) See 1.38. PDF Version >>

Index

1 : BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 1.8

List of Figures

A list of abbreviations. See 1.43. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

1 : BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 1.9

List of Figures

Opening page of a chronology. See 1.58. For date style, see 6.45. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

1 : BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 1.10

List of Figures

Partial list of contributors to an edited collection. See 1.62. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

1 : BOOKS AND JOURNALS

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 1.11

List of Figures

Table of contents for an issue of an online scholarly journal. Note that the page numbers, as in most

List of Tables

scholarly journals, are sequential throughout a volume. See 1.83. PDF Version >>

Index

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

of Contents

Overview and Process Outline

List of Figures

2.1

Overview—authors, manuscript editors, and proofreaders

List of Tables

2.2

Process outline—from approved manuscript to published work

Index

Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors

Basic Submission Requirements

2.3

Elements to be furnished

2.4

Submitting electronic manuscripts

2.5

Later changes—version control

2.6

Submitting paper-only manuscripts

Formatting

2.7

Publishers' manuscript-preparation guidelines

2.8

Line spacing

2.9

Word spacing—one space or two?

2.10

Justification and margins

2.11

Spaces, tabs, and hard returns within paragraphs

2.12

Hyphenation

2.13

Dashes

2.14

Italics, underline, and boldface

2.15

Special characters

2.16

Chapter and other titles

2.17

Subheads

2.18

Prose extracts

2.19

Poetry extracts

2.20

Footnotes and endnotes

2.21

Glossaries and lists of abbreviations

2.22

Bibliographies and reference lists

Illustrations and Tables

2.23

Separate files for illustrations, captions, and tables

2.24

Prints of artwork versus scans

2.25

Numbering illustrations

2.26

Numbering tables

2.27

Text references and callouts to tables and illustrations

2.28

Table notes and source notes

Cross-Checking

2.29

Items to cross-check

2.30

Checking quotations

2.31

Checking URLs

2.32

Checking cross-references

Naming and Saving the Electronic Files

2.33

Creating separate files

2.34

Naming files

2.35

Numbering manuscript pages

2.36

Embedded comments and revision marks

2.37

Backing up the final manuscript

Preparing a Manuscript for a Multiauthor Book or Journal

2.38

Volume editor's manuscript preparation responsibilities

2.39

Additional responsibilities of the volume editor

Compiling a Manuscript from Previously Published Material

2.40

Preparing previously published material

2.41

Permissible changes to published material

2.42

Footnotes or endnotes in previously published material

2.43

Source notes for previously published material

2.44

Reproducing previously published illustrations

Manuscript Editing

Principles of Manuscript Editing

2.45

Manuscript editing as opposed to developmental editing

2.46

Mechanical editing

2.47

Substantive editing

2.48

Discretion in substantive editing

2.49

Estimating editing time

2.50

Stages of editing

2.51

Choosing a dictionary and other reference works

2.52

Keeping a style sheet

2.53

Fact-checking

Editing Specific Parts of a Manuscript

2.54

Editing front matter

2.55

Editing part titles and chapter or article titles

2.56

Editing subheads

2.57

Editing cross-references

2.58

Editing quotations and previously published material

2.59

Editing notes

2.60

Editing note citations, bibliographies, and reference lists

2.61

Flexibility in citation style

2.62

Editing tables

2.63

Checking illustrations and their placement and editing captions

2.64

Editing indexes

Communicating with Authors

2.65

Establishing early contact with authors

2.66

Writing author comments and queries

2.67

Writing a cover letter to the author

2.68

Sending the edited manuscript to the author

2.69

Checking the author's final changes

Preparing a Final Manuscript for Production

2.70

Ensuring correct markup

2.71

Type specifications and hand markup

2.72

Ensuring correct pagination

2.73

Preparing running heads

2.74

A production checklist

The Mechanics of Electronic Editing

2.75

Making backup copies

2.76

Preparing to make a clean, unedited copy

2.77

Cleaning up electronic files

2.78

Generic markup for electronic manuscripts

2.79

Software-generated styles

2.80

Formal markup languages

2.81

Tracking and showing changes (redlining)

2.82

Document comparison software

2.83

Inserting author queries on electronic manuscripts

2.84

Retaining the version of record

2.85

The author's review of the edited manuscript

2.86

Preparing a final electronic manuscript

The Mechanics of Editing on Paper

2.87

Keeping a clean copy of paper manuscripts

2.88

Marking manuscripts on paper

2.89

Marking author queries on paper manuscripts

2.90

Three uses for circling

2.91

Inserting, deleting, and substituting

2.92

Adding, deleting, or transposing punctuation

2.93

Marking dashes and hyphens

2.94

Capitalizing, lowercasing, and marking for italics or boldface

2.95

Marking paragraph indention, flush left or right, and vertical spacing

2.96

Marking, or coding, elements on a paper manuscript

Proofreading

Introduction

2.97

What is proofreading?

2.98

Who should proofread?

2.99

Proofreading schedule

Stages of Proof

2.100 Keeping a record of each proofreading stage

2.101 First proofs and "galley" proofs

2.102 Revised proofs

2.103 Index proofs

2.104 Prepress and press proofs

2.105 Book cover and jacket proofs

2.106 Journal cover proofs

How to Proofread and What to Look For

2.107 Proofreading against copy

2.108 Proofreading for spelling errors

2.109 Checking word breaks

2.110 Checking typeface and font

2.111 Checking and proofreading page numbers and running heads

2.112 Checking and proofreading illustrations and tables

2.113 Checking overall appearance

2.114 Checking facing pages for text alignment

2.115 Proofreading for sense

How to Mark Proofs

2.116 Proofreaders' marks

2.117 Where to mark proofs

2.118 Circling comments and instructions

2.119 Communicating extensive changes

2.120 Making marks legible

2.121 Marking copy for deletion

2.122 Adding or deleting space between letters or words

2.123 Indicating changes to paragraphing or indention

2.124 Indicating adjustments to position or alignment (justification)

2.125 Marking items to be transposed

2.126 Marking items to be spelled out

2.127 Using "stet" to revert corrections or deletions

2.128 Marking changes to capitalization and font

2.129 Indicating changes to punctuation and accents

Double-Checking and Assigning Responsibility for Errors

2.130 Double-checking proofs

2.131 Assigning responsibility for errors on proofs

2.132 Author's alterations (AAs) versus editor's alterations (EAs)

Proofing and Testing Electronic Publications

2.133 Checklist for proofing electronic publications

2.134 Testing web-based publications

2.135 Documentation for testing

2.136 Communicating changes to web-based publications

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview and Process Outline

of Contents

List of Figures

2.1 OVERVIEW--AUTHORS, MANUSCRIPT EDITORS, AND PROOFREADERS

List of Tables

This chapter is divided into three parts. The first part (2.3--44) is addressed primarily to authors,

Index

conceived broadly to include compilers, translators, volume editors, editors of journals, and

contributors to journals or books. It provides guidelines for preparing manuscripts that have been

Go to ¶

accepted for publication. As in the discussion of parts in chapter 1, the book-length work is used as

2.1:

the primary model, though considerations for journals are included where applicable. Scholarly

Overview—authors,

manuscript editors,

journals and periodicals tend to have very specific requirements for manuscript preparation; those

and proofreaders

writing for such publications will need to consult the specific publication's instructions for authors.

2.2:

The second part of the chapter (2.45--96) gives a detailed look at what happens to a manuscript once

Process outline—

from approved

it has been submitted to a publisher. Specifically, the role of manuscript editors (also called

manuscript to

published work

copyeditors) is discussed. The third part (2.97--136) deals with proofreading--essentially, the steps

2.3:

authors and publishers must take to ensure that their publications are ready to be presented to the

Elements to be

public.

furnished

2.4:

Submitting

electronic

manuscripts

2.5:

Later changes—

version control

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview and Process Outline

of Contents

List of Figures

2.2 PROCESS OUTLINE--FROM APPROVED MANUSCRIPT TO PUBLISHED WORK

List of Tables

The following outline highlights the basic steps of the publication process from approved manuscript

Index

to published work. These steps are broadly modeled on a typical manuscript editing and

proofreading schedule for a book-length work; the procedures for journals will vary. For a more

Go to ¶

detailed look at manuscript preparation, editing, and proofreading, see the discussions in the

2.1:

remainder of this chapter. For sample timetables for producing a book and a journal, see figures 2.1

Overview—authors,

manuscript editors,

and 2.2. For an overview of production procedures, including design, see appendix A.

and proofreaders

2.2:

1. Manuscript submission. In addition to the final, unedited manuscript, the author submits to the

Process outline—

from approved

publisher all artwork and any necessary permissions to reproduce illustrations or previously

manuscript to

published material or to cite unpublished data or personal communications. See 2.3--6.

published work

2. Manuscript editing. The manuscript editor makes changes to the manuscript (and, where

2.3:

Elements to be

necessary, queries the author) and demarcates or checks the order and structure of the elements

furnished

(e.g., illustrations, headings, text extracts). See 2.54--64, 2.66.

2.4:

3. Author review. The author reviews the edited manuscript and answers any queries. All

Submitting

electronic

remaining changes and adjustments to the manuscript need to be indicated by the author at this

manuscripts

stage. See 2.85.

2.5:

Later changes—

4. Final manuscript. The manuscript editor produces a final manuscript, incorporating the results

version control

of the author's review of the edited manuscript and, among other things, double-checking each

element in the manuscript against a design template for completeness, consistency, and proper

markup. See 2.70--74.

5. Proofreading and indexing. Once the final manuscript has been converted to its final form--for

example, typeset and paginated book or journal pages ( page proofs or proof) or the full text of an

electronic publication--it will need to be checked by the author and any additional proofreaders

for errors and inconsistencies. See 2.97--136. It is also at this stage that an index may be

prepared and subsequently edited (see chapter 16; for journal indexes, see 1.103--4).

6. Final revisions. As the publisher makes sure all necessary corrections have been made, the

index, if there is one, is proofread in its final format and corrected as needed (see 2.103). Book

pages, especially, may go through several rounds of revision, though publishers usually set firm

limits on changes beyond the first round of revisions. See 2.102.

7. Prepress or final review. For a printed-and-bound book, publishers usually review the

typesetter's final files--either as an inexpensive printout or on-screen--before ink is committed to

paper. Once the job is on the press, an initial set of folded and gathered sheets may be sent from

the printer to the publisher for review before the job is finished (see 2.104). For electronic

publications, a final version must be reviewed before it is posted or otherwise made available to

the public (see 2.133--36).

8. Publication. In the stages leading up to publication it is critically important to make all possible

efforts to eliminate any errors or inconsistencies (typographical or otherwise) or other problems.

The occasional error in a published work is inevitable, but even minor errors reflect badly on

publishers and authors alike.

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Basic Submission Requirements

of Contents

List of Figures

2.3 ELEMENTS TO BE FURNISHED

List of Tables

Before manuscript editing begins (see 2.45--96), an author should plan to provide the publisher with

Index

any of the elements in the list that follows that are to be included in the work. This list is modeled on

the parts of a book (see 1.3--71). An author contributing to a journal should consult the journal's

specific submission requirements.

2.1:

Overviewâ

€”authors,

Title page

manuscript editors,

and proofreaders

Dedication

2.2:

Epigraph

Process outlineâ

€”from approved

Table of contents

manuscript to

published work

List of illustrations

2.3:

Elements to be

List of tables

furnished

Preface

2.4:

Submitting

Acknowledgments

electronic

manuscripts

Any other front matter

2.5:

All text matter, including introduction and part titles

Later changesâ

€”version control

Notes

Appendixes

Glossary

Bibliography or reference list

Any other back matter

All illustrations and all tables

Illustration captions

A list of special characters used in the manuscript

An abstract (required for some books)

All permissions, in writing, that may be required to reproduce illustrations or previously

published material or to cite unpublished data or personal communications (see chapter 4)

All elements should be final and up to date--including any URLs cited in the work (see 14.4--13). The

publisher usually furnishes the half-title page (see 1.16), the copyright page (see 1.19--34), and copy

for the running heads (see 1.9--15, 2.73).

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Basic Submission Requirements

of Contents

List of Figures

2.4 SUBMITTING ELECTRONIC MANUSCRIPTS

List of Tables

Publishers usually require the latest version of the electronic file(s) for the work, and authors are

Index

advised to make a secure backup of this final manuscript and to avoid making any further changes to

it. Many publishers also require hard copy as a safeguard against any glitches in the electronic files--

especially for book-length works. (Some publishers will want a PDF version--the electronic equivalent

2.2:

of hard copy--instead.) To ensure that the hard copy is identical to the electronic files, any last-minute

Process outlineâ

€”from approved

changes made to the electronic files must be reflected in the hard copy--either by means of a new

manuscript to

published work

printout or marked by hand (see also 2.5). Authors are advised to include a cover letter specifying the

author's name, the title of the work, the electronic file names, and the software used. Any material

2.3:

Elements to be

(such as artwork) that cannot be included in electronic form must be noted and described.

furnished

Conversely, any material that cannot be printed out (such as videos, animations, or large data files

2.4:

Submitting

that might be included in an electronic journal or web-based publication) must also be noted and

electronic

described; for all such material, the software used, the number of items, their type(s), and the

manuscripts

individual file names must be specified. For any additional instructions, authors should check with

2.5:

Later changesâ

their publishers. For advice on manuscript formatting, see 2.7--22. For advice on preparing index

€”version control

manuscripts, see chapter 16. For paper-only manuscripts, see 2.6. For manuscripts consisting largely of

2.6:

previously published material, see 2.40.

Submitting paper-

only manuscripts

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Basic Submission Requirements

of Contents

List of Figures

2.5 LATER CHANGES--VERSION CONTROL

List of Tables

Once an author has submitted a final manuscript to the publisher, the publisher is responsible for

Index

maintaining the version of record. An author who needs to make further changes after submitting the

files must therefore alert the publisher immediately. Minor changes can usually be indicated later, on

the edited document that the manuscript editor will send to the author for review (see 2.85). For

2.3:

major changes, the author may need to send a revised manuscript to the publisher before editing

Elements to be

furnished

begins. For journals, major changes are rarely permitted after an article has been accepted; schedules

2.4:

do not allow for them. Peer-reviewed articles that require major changes may also require additional

Submitting

review.

electronic

manuscripts

2.5:

Later changesâ

€”version control

2.6:

Submitting paper-

only manuscripts

2.7:

Publishers'

manuscript-

preparation

guidelines

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Basic Submission Requirements

of Contents

List of Figures

2.6 SUBMITTING PAPER-ONLY MANUSCRIPTS

List of Tables

In the increasingly rare case of the typewritten manuscript, authors are typically required to submit

Index

two paper copies of the manuscript; they should keep a third copy for themselves. All copy must be

vertically double-spaced (double line spacing) to leave sufficient room for pencil-editing marks. It is

essential, moreover, that everything in a paper-only manuscript be legible. Anything added in

2.4:

handwriting before the manuscript is submitted to the publisher must be clearly written, in upper-

Submitting

electronic

and lowercase letters, directly above the line or in the margin. Avoid writing on the backs of pages in

manuscripts

case the publisher photocopies the manuscript. Any correction longer than a short phrase should be

2.5:

provided as a separate document and inserted in the manuscript following the page to which it

Later changesâ

€”version control

pertains--clearly labeled in both places to show where it should be inserted. Finally, to facilitate

2.6:

photocopying, use good-quality paper in a standard size--8Â½ Ã— 11 inches or A4 (210 Ã

Submitting paper-

only manuscripts

— 297 mm). See also 2.40.

2.7:

Publishers'

manuscript-

preparation

guidelines

2.8:

Line spacing

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.7 PUBLISHERS' MANUSCRIPT-PREPARATION GUIDELINES

List of Tables

Many publishers have specific requirements or preferences regarding choice of software and typeface,

Index

as well as formats for submitting illustrations and tables along with your manuscript. These should be

followed to the letter. Consistency and simplicity in all matters is essential: authors should know that

their manuscripts will almost always be converted into another software environment for publication

2.5:

and that, therefore, the consistency and accuracy of the content (i.e., the words themselves) are more

Later changesâ

€”version control

important than the style of presentation. A simple presentation is always preferable to an elaborately

2.6:

formatted manuscript. Authors who want a more explicit idea of what publishers look for in the

Submitting paper-

format and structure of a manuscript would do well to consider the steps in a manuscript editor's

only manuscripts

typical cleanup routine (see 2.77).

2.7:

Publishers'

manuscript-

preparation

guidelines

2.8:

Line spacing

2.9:

Word spacingâ

€”one space or

two?

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.8 LINE SPACING

List of Tables

Though authors may prefer to use minimal line spacing on the screen, publishers have customarily

Index

required that any printout be double-spaced--including all extracts, notes, bibliography, and other

material. The extra line spacing is crucial for manuscripts edited with pencil on paper, and some

publishers will choose to edit the paper copy and update the electronic files based on this edited copy.

2.6:

(Authors concerned about saving paper are encouraged to consult with their publishers about line-

Submitting paper-

only manuscripts

spacing requirements.) Avoid extra space or blank lines between paragraphs. If such a break is

2.7:

intended to appear in the printed version, indicate this explicitly with three asterisks set on a line by

Publishers'

themselves (see also 1.56).

manuscript-

preparation

guidelines

2.8:

Line spacing

2.9:

Word spacingâ

€”one space or

two?

2.10:

Justification and

margins

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.9 WORD SPACING--ONE SPACE OR TWO?

List of Tables

Like most publishers, Chicago advises leaving a single character space, not two spaces, between

Index

sentences and after colons used within a sentence (but see 14.121), and this recommendation applies

to both the manuscript and the published work.

2.7:

Publishers'

manuscript-

preparation

guidelines

2.8:

Line spacing

2.9:

Word spacingâ

€”one space or

two?

2.10:

Justification and

margins

2.11:

Spaces, tabs, and

hard returns within

paragraphs

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.10 JUSTIFICATION AND MARGINS

List of Tables

To avoid the appearance of inconsistent spacing between words and sentences, all text in a

Index

manuscript should be presented flush left (ragged right)--that is, lines should not be "justified" to the

right margin. To leave enough room for handwritten queries, margins of at least one inch should

appear on all four sides of the hard copy.

2.8:

Line spacing

2.9:

Word spacingâ

€”one space or

two?

2.10:

Justification and

margins

2.11:

Spaces, tabs, and

hard returns within

paragraphs

2.12:

Hyphenation

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.11 SPACES, TABS, AND HARD RETURNS WITHIN PARAGRAPHS

List of Tables

A well-structured electronic document will never include more than one consecutive character space.

Index

To indent the first line of a paragraph or items in a vertical list, use the Tab key or your software's

paragraph indention features rather than the space bar. (Also eliminate any extra character space or

tab after the final punctuation at the end of a paragraph; the hard return should follow the

2.9:

punctuation immediately.) To achieve hanging indention for runover lines (as in a bibliography or

Word spacingâ

€”one space or

index), use your software's indent features--not hard returns and tabs or spaces (see 2.22). A tab or a

two?

hard return (i.e., a paragraph break, generally made with the Enter key) should never appear within a

2.10:

paragraph. For prose extracts, see 2.18; for poetry, see 2.19.

Justification and

margins

2.11:

Spaces, tabs, and

hard returns within

paragraphs

2.12:

Hyphenation

2.13:

Dashes

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.12 HYPHENATION

List of Tables

The hyphenation function on your word processor should be turned off. The only hyphens that

Index

should appear in the manuscript are hyphens that would appear regardless of where they appeared

on the page (e.g., in compound forms). Do not worry if such hyphens happen to fall at the end of a

line or if the right-hand margin is extremely ragged. By the same token, do not attempt to manually

2.10:

break excessively long words (e.g., long URLs) with a hyphen. See also 2.93.

Justification and

margins

2.11:

Spaces, tabs, and

hard returns within

paragraphs

2.12:

Hyphenation

2.13:

Dashes

2.14:

Italics, underline,

and boldface

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.13 DASHES

List of Tables

For an em dash--one that indicates a break in a sentence like this--either use the em dash character on

Index

your word processor or type two hyphens (leave no space on either side). For the long dash (three-em

dash) in bibliographies, use three consecutive em dashes or six unspaced hyphens. (For more on the

em dash, see 6.82--89, 6.90--91.) Ensuring proper use of the en dash--a shorter dash that has special

2.11:

significance in certain types of compounds and in number ranges--is usually considered the

Spaces, tabs, and

hard returns within

manuscript editor's responsibility; authors can generally avoid the en dash and use hyphens instead.

paragraphs

(For more on the en dash, see 6.78--81.)

2.12:

Hyphenation

2.13:

Dashes

2.14:

Italics, underline,

and boldface

2.15:

Special characters

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.14 ITALICS, UNDERLINE, AND BOLDFACE

List of Tables

Though underlining will generally be construed by publishers to mean italics, italics should be used

Index

instead wherever italics are intended. (In an electronically redlined manuscript, underlining may

denote editorial changes; see 2.81 and fig. 2.4.) An author who in fact intends underlining rather than

italics to appear in certain instances in the published work must make these instances clear in a letter

2.12:

to the publisher (or a note to the manuscript editor). Use boldface only for words that must appear

Hyphenation

thus in the published version.

2.13:

Dashes

2.14:

Italics, underline,

and boldface

2.15:

Special characters

2.16:

Chapter and other

titles

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.15 SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

As far as your software allows, use the character that you intend rather than any keyboard substitute.

Index

For example, if you want a prime symbol, use the prime symbol from your word processor's list of

special characters rather than an apostrophe. Since the advent of the Unicode standard for character

encoding (see 11.2), many software environments include a wide array of special characters without

2.13:

the need for special fonts or other add-ons. Nonetheless, if you run up against a character that is not

Dashes

available to you, enclose a descriptive shorthand in angle brackets; for example, <bhook>aci might

2.14:

Italics, underline,

indicate that the publisher should render the Hausa word É“aci. In either case, include a list of special

and boldface

characters used in your manuscript. See tables 11.1 and 11.2, which list some special characters and

2.15:

their names. If you plan to use a special font that may not support Unicode, consult your publisher

Special characters

first. For some caveats related to quotation marks and apostrophes, see 6.112, 6.114.

2.16:

Chapter and other

titles

2.17:

Subheads

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.16 CHAPTER AND OTHER TITLES

List of Tables

Titles for chapters and other parts of a manuscript usually begin on a new page. Use upper- and

Index

lowercase letters rather than full capitals. The titles should match the entries in the table of contents.

"Chapter 1," "Chapter 2," and so on should appear above the titles to numbered chapters.

2.14:

Italics, underline,

and boldface

2.15:

Special characters

2.16:

Chapter and other

titles

2.17:

Subheads

2.18:

Prose extracts

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.17 SUBHEADS

List of Tables

Set subheads on a new line, flush left. Each level of subhead must be distinguished by type size and

Index

style, such as larger boldface for first-level subheads versus smaller italics for second-level heads. (A

word processor's style palette can be useful in managing subhead levels.) Use upper- and lowercase

letters rather than full capitals (see 8.157). Except for run-in heads, which are usually italicized and

2.15:

given initial capitals for the first word and proper names only (sentence style; see 8.156), subheads are

Special characters

almost never followed by a period. See also 1.54.

2.16:

Chapter and other

titles

2.17:

Subheads

2.18:

Prose extracts

2.19:

Poetry extracts

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.18 PROSE EXTRACTS

List of Tables

Prose extracts (also known as block quotations) should have double line spacing and be indented

Index

from the left margin using your word processor's indent feature. The first line should not have an

additional paragraph indent. If there is more than one paragraph within the extract, new paragraphs

should have an additional first-line paragraph indent, which can be created using the Tab key or your

2.16:

software's paragraph indention feature. Use hard returns (i.e., the Enter key) only at the end of the

Chapter and other

titles

extract and after any paragraphs within the extract. See also 13.20--22. For ellipses, see 13.48--56.

2.17:

Subheads

2.18:

Prose extracts

2.19:

Poetry extracts

2.20:

Footnotes and

endnotes

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.19 POETRY EXTRACTS

List of Tables

Poetry extracts should be double-spaced and indented, not centered (even if they are to appear

Index

centered in the printed version). Let runover lines wrap to the next line normally; do not use the Tab

key to indent them. Use a hard return only at the end of each full line of poetry. Only if certain new

lines of a poem are to receive deeper indention than others should you use the Tab key, at the

2.17:

beginning of the indented line. You must clearly distinguish between runover lines and indented

Subheads

lines of poetry. If there are either runover or double-indented lines, or if there is any unusual spacing

2.18:

Prose extracts

or indention in your hard copy, append a photocopy of the original printed poem. For ellipses, see

2.19:

13.55. Indicate a stanza break with an extra hard return. The source, if given after the extract, should

Poetry extracts

appear in parentheses on a separate line, aligned vertically with the beginning of the first line of the

2.20:

poem. (In the printed version, the source may appear flush right.) See also 13.23--27.

Footnotes and

endnotes

2.21:

Glossaries and lists

of abbreviations

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.20 FOOTNOTES AND ENDNOTES

List of Tables

To take advantage of automatic renumbering, create notes that are linked to the text by using the

Index

footnote or endnote function on your word processor. For the printout, they must be double-spaced

throughout. Unless your publisher requests otherwise, in the manuscript they may appear either as

footnotes or as chapter or book endnotes (starting over at 1 for each chapter), regardless of how they

2.18:

are to appear in the published version. Avoid appending note references to chapter titles (see 1.48).

Prose extracts

Notes to tables should be numbered separately (see 2.28). For note form, see 14.19--55. For some

2.19:

Poetry extracts

caveats regarding source citation software, see 14.13.

2.20:

Footnotes and

endnotes

2.21:

Glossaries and lists

of abbreviations

2.22:

Bibliographies and

reference lists

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.21 GLOSSARIES AND LISTS OF ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

Each entry in a glossary or list of abbreviations should begin on a new line, capitalized only if the

Index

term is capitalized in the text. Separate each term from the definition that follows with a period, a

colon, or an em dash. In a glossary, begin the definition with a capital letter, as if it were a new

sentence; in a list of abbreviations, the expanded term should be capitalized or lowercased as it would

2.19:

be in text. Glossary entries need closing punctuation unless all definitions consist of incomplete

Poetry extracts

sentences. Any term or abbreviation that is consistently italicized in the text (not just on first use)

2.20:

Footnotes and

should also be italicized in the glossary or list of abbreviations. (Abbreviations of consistently

endnotes

italicized terms should generally themselves be italicized; see also 14.55.) Entries should be double-

2.21:

spaced and may be formatted in flush-and-hang style (see 2.22) or with ordinary first-line paragraph

Glossaries and lists

of abbreviations

indents. Avoid multiple columns. (For an example of a glossary, see appendix B.) See also 1.43 and

2.22:

1.60.

Bibliographies and

reference lists

2.23:

Separate files for

illustrations,

captions, and

tables

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

2.22 BIBLIOGRAPHIES AND REFERENCE LISTS

List of Tables

Although a bibliography or reference list will often appear in flush-and-hang (or hanging-indention)

Index

style in the published version (like the bibliography in this manual), you may either use the hanging-

indention function on your word processor or format each entry like a normal paragraph with a first-

line indent. Never use the Tab key to indent runover lines. As with all parts of your manuscript, use

2.20:

double line spacing. For capitalization, use of italics, and other matters of bibliographic style, see

Footnotes and

endnotes

chapter 14. For some caveats regarding source citation software, see 14.13.

2.21:

Glossaries and lists

of abbreviations

2.22:

Bibliographies and

reference lists

2.23:

Separate files for

illustrations,

captions, and

tables

2.24:

Prints of artwork

versus scans

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Illustrations and Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

2.23 SEPARATE FILES FOR ILLUSTRATIONS, CAPTIONS, AND TABLES

List of Tables

Publishers usually prefer separate files for illustrations. Many publishers also prefer tables in separate

Index

files, but those created in the same application as the rest of your manuscript may not need to be;

consult your publisher. The approximate placement of illustrations or tables submitted as separate

files should be called out in the text, keeping in mind that the exact locations of figures in a

2.21:

manuscript will be determined during typesetting (see 2.27). Captions for all illustrations (as distinct

Glossaries and lists

of abbreviations

from a list of illustrations following the table of contents; see 1.38) should be furnished in a separate

2.22:

file. For manuscripts of journal articles, consult the specific journal's instructions for authors. For a

Bibliographies and

more detailed overview of illustrations and tables, see chapter 3.

reference lists

2.23:

Separate files for

illustrations,

captions, and

tables

2.24:

Prints of artwork

versus scans

2.25:

Numbering

illustrations

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Illustrations and Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

2.24 PRINTS OF ARTWORK VERSUS SCANS

List of Tables

Text figures that are to be reproduced by scanning a hard-copy original--such as paintings, maps, and

Index

photographic prints--should be furnished in whatever form the publisher requests. Publishers often

prefer to do their own scans. Glossy prints must be clearly labeled, usually on the back of the print or

on a self-sticking label, in a manner that does not impair their quality (see 3.16). For further

2.22:

discussion, see 3.15--20.

Bibliographies and

reference lists

2.23:

Separate files for

illustrations,

captions, and

tables

2.24:

Prints of artwork

versus scans

2.25:

Numbering

illustrations

2.26:

Numbering tables

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Illustrations and Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

2.25 NUMBERING ILLUSTRATIONS

List of Tables

Illustrations may be consecutively numbered, or, in scientific and technical books, heavily illustrated

Index

books, and books with chapters by different authors, double numeration may be used. In double

numeration, provide the chapter number, followed by a period, followed by the figure number (e.g.,

fig. 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, . . . , 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, . . . , etc.). In the event a figure is dropped or added, double

2.23:

numeration will help simplify the work needed to renumber not just the illustrations but any

Separate files for

illustrations,

applicable cross-references, especially in a heavily illustrated book. Illustrations are enumerated

captions, and

tables

separately from tables. Plates to be grouped in a gallery are numbered separately from figures

interspersed in the text (see 3.14). Even if numbers are not to appear with the illustrations in the

2.24:

Prints of artwork

published version, working numbers should be assigned for identification and should accompany the

versus scans

captions (see 3.13). For more details, see 3.8--14.

2.25:

Numbering

illustrations

2.26:

Numbering tables

2.27:

Text references

and callouts to

tables and

illustrations

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Illustrations and Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

2.26 NUMBERING TABLES

List of Tables

Tables may be numbered consecutively throughout a book or, in a book with many tables or with

Index

chapters by different authors, double numeration may be used (e.g., table 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, . . . , 2.1, 2.2, 2.3,

. . . , etc.). In a book with many tables, double numeration can simplify the task of renumbering in the

event a table is dropped or added. Tables are enumerated separately from illustrations. Very simple

2.24:

tabular material (e.g., a two-column list) may be presented, unnumbered, along with the text. See also

Prints of artwork

versus scans

3.51.

2.25:

Numbering

illustrations

2.26:

Numbering tables

2.27:

Text references

and callouts to

tables and

illustrations

2.28:

Table notes and

source notes

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Illustrations and Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

2.27 TEXT REFERENCES AND CALLOUTS TO TABLES AND ILLUSTRATIONS

List of Tables

A text reference is addressed to the reader ("see table 5," or "fig. 3.2") and will appear in the published

Index

version. A callout is an instruction, which will not appear in the published work, telling where a table

or an illustration is to appear. In the manuscript, a callout should be enclosed in angle brackets or

some other delimiter and placed on a separate line following the paragraph in which the table or

2.25:

illustration is first referred to ("<table 5 here>"; "<fig. 3.2 here>") or, if a later location is preferable,

Numbering

illustrations

where the table or illustration is to appear. Tables and such illustrations as graphs and diagrams

2.26:

require both a text reference and a placement callout, unless they are to be grouped in a section

Numbering tables

separate from the regular text. Photographs and maps--at least in printed books--do not always need

2.27:

to be referred to in the text but do need a placement callout if they are to appear with the text (see

Text references

and callouts to

3.8--14).

tables and

illustrations

2.28:

Table notes and

source notes

2.29:

Items to cross-

check

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Illustrations and Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

2.28 TABLE NOTES AND SOURCE NOTES

List of Tables

Source notes appear at the foot of the table before any other notes. They are preceded by the word

Index

"Source" followed by a colon. Other notes to the table as a whole follow any source note and may be

preceded by the word "Note" followed by a colon. Specific notes follow any other notes and must

carry their own numbering (preferably letters; see 3.77), keyed to parts of the table. They must never

2.26:

be numbered along with the notes to the text. For a fuller discussion of notes to tables, see 3.74--78.

Numbering tables

2.27:

Text references

and callouts to

tables and

illustrations

2.28:

Table notes and

source notes

2.29:

Items to cross-

check

2.30:

Checking

quotations

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Cross-Checking

of Contents

List of Figures

2.29 ITEMS TO CROSS-CHECK

List of Tables

Before submitting a manuscript for publication, an author must cross-check all of its parts to avoid

Index

discrepancies. The following list includes major items to check:

All titles and subtitles (introduction, parts, chapters, etc.) against table of contents

2.27:

Text references

Subheads against table of contents (if subheads are included there; see 1.37)

and callouts to

tables and

Illustrations against their captions, text references, and callouts

illustrations

Illustration captions against list of illustrations

2.28:

Table notes and

Tables against their text references and callouts

source notes

Table titles against list of tables

2.29:

Items to cross-

All cross-references (see also 2.32)

check

2.30:

In an electronic work, all hyperlinks

Checking

quotations

Notes against their text references

2.31:

Notes against bibliography

Checking URLs

Parenthetical text citations against reference list

Abbreviations against list of abbreviations

In a multiauthor work, authors' names in table of contents against chapter headings and list of

contributors

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Cross-Checking

of Contents

List of Figures

2.30 CHECKING QUOTATIONS

List of Tables

All quoted matter should be checked against the original source, for both content and citation, before

Index

a manuscript is submitted for publication. This authorial task is crucial because manuscript editors

will not have access to all the sources that the author has used.

2.28:

Table notes and

source notes

2.29:

Items to cross-

check

2.30:

Checking

quotations

2.31:

Checking URLs

2.32:

Checking cross-

references

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Cross-Checking

of Contents

List of Figures

2.31 CHECKING URLS

List of Tables

Any URLs cited in a manuscript--including any mentioned in the text--need to be checked before a

Index

manuscript is submitted for publication. Those that no longer point to the intended source should be

updated. By a similar token, authors should consider not including any URLs that seem potentially

unstable or subject to change. See also 14.4--13.

2.29:

Items to cross-

check

2.30:

Checking

quotations

2.31:

Checking URLs

2.32:

Checking cross-

references

2.33:

Creating separate

files

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Cross-Checking

of Contents

List of Figures

2.32 CHECKING CROSS-REFERENCES

List of Tables

All cross-references, whether to a chapter, a section, an appendix, or even a sentence of text, should

Index

be verified before a manuscript is submitted for publication. A chapter number or title may have been

changed, or a passage deleted, after the original reference to it. Cross-references are best made to

chapter or section numbers, which can be entered at the manuscript stage. (Keep in mind that

2.30:

references to whole chapters are often gratuitous and unhelpful; it's best to avoid peppering a

Checking

quotations

manuscript with "see chapter 2 above" and "see chapter 4 below.") References to page numbers are

2.31:

generally discouraged because the pagination of a published work will not correspond to that of the

Checking URLs

manuscript, and the correct number will have to be supplied later in the process (usually by the

2.32:

author). Where absolutely necessary, use three bullets (e.g., "see p. â€¢â€¢â€¢") to signal the need to

Checking cross-

references

supply the final page number.

2.33:

Creating separate

files

2.34:

Naming files

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Naming and Saving the Electronic Files

of Contents

List of Figures

2.33 CREATING SEPARATE FILES

List of Tables

For book-length projects, publishers may prefer to get separate electronic files for each of the various

Index

elements--front matter through table of contents, preface, chapters, appendixes, and so on (some of

which will include embedded notes). It is recognized, however, that some authors will prefer to work

in one file. Nonetheless, appropriately named separate files--especially for complex works--can help

2.31:

publishers get a sense of a book's component parts. Illustrations, which publishers handle separately

Checking URLs

from the text, should always be in separate files; tables created in an author's word-processing

2.32:

Checking cross-

software may not need to be; see 2.23. Many journals specify that all elements of an article

references

manuscript, including tables but excluding other illustrations, should be stored in a single file. Always

2.33:

consult your publisher's manuscript preparation guidelines before submitting a final manuscript.

Creating separate

files

2.34:

Naming files

2.35:

Numbering

manuscript pages

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Naming and Saving the Electronic Files

of Contents

List of Figures

2.34 NAMING FILES

List of Tables

For books with more than a few parts, it may be helpful to choose file names that will line up in book

Index

order in an alphanumerically sorted directory. The names "chapter 01, Code as Consciousness,"

"chapter 02, Unmediated Scripts," and "chapter 03, Electricity as Messenger" will not only stay ordered

together in a directory sorted alphanumerically by name (some operating systems will require the

2.32:

zeros to properly order more than nine numbered elements) but will also indicate the name or subject

Checking cross-

references

of each chapter--an additional organizational cue. File names should correspond more or less to the

2.33:

parts of the manuscript as listed in the table of contents. A complete list of all submitted files,

Creating separate

including lists of illustrations or tables and any electronic-only elements, should accompany the

files

manuscript. (In the hard copy the various divisions should be arranged in the order specified in the

2.34:

Naming files

table of contents, which is not necessarily the order of the electronic directory.) Files for color

2.35:

illustrations may include the word color in their names, especially if black-and-white prints have also

Numbering

been submitted.

manuscript pages

2.36:

Embedded

comments and

revision marks

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Naming and Saving the Electronic Files

of Contents

List of Figures

2.35 NUMBERING MANUSCRIPT PAGES

List of Tables

Each page of a manuscript, whether electronic or hard copy, must be numbered. Manuscripts

Index

submitted as multiple files need not be numbered consecutively from page 1 through to the end of

the book. Instead, to ensure that no two pages in the manuscript are numbered the same, descriptive

page headers can be added next to the page numbers in each file (e.g., "Introduction: 1,"

2.33:

"Introduction: 2," etc.; "chapter 1: 1," "chapter 1: 2," etc.). Arabic numerals may be used for the front

Creating separate

files

matter even though these pages may take on roman numerals in the published work. The manuscript

2.34:

editor will indicate the appropriate roman numerals for the book designer (see 2.72). Manuscripts

Naming files

submitted as one file, on the other hand, can be numbered consecutively across the book starting with

2.35:

page 1. In a paper-only manuscript, pages added after the initial numbering may be numbered with a

Numbering

manuscript pages

or b (e.g., 55, 55a, 55b).

2.36:

Embedded

comments and

revision marks

2.37:

Backing up the

final manuscript

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Naming and Saving the Electronic Files

of Contents

List of Figures

2.36 EMBEDDED COMMENTS AND REVISION MARKS

List of Tables

Authors should delete any comments embedded in their electronic manuscripts before submitting

Index

them for publication. This includes any text formatted as "hidden" and any comments generated using

the commenting feature in a word processor. Any outstanding queries should be addressed in a cover

letter. Moreover, it is crucial that any revision marks (or "tracked changes") be removed before the

2.34:

manuscript is submitted--and that the final manuscript represent the very latest version. (Manuscript

Naming files

editors should always check for hidden text, comments, and revision marks and alert the author or

2.35:

Numbering

publisher about any potential problems.)

manuscript pages

2.36:

Embedded

comments and

revision marks

2.37:

Backing up the

final manuscript

2.38:

Volume editor's

manuscript

preparation

responsibilities

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >> Naming and Saving the Electronic Files

of Contents

List of Figures

2.37 BACKING UP THE FINAL MANUSCRIPT

List of Tables

In addition to saving a separate electronic copy of each crucial stage of work on their manuscripts,

Index

authors are advised to save a backup copy of the version sent to the publisher for editing and

publication. Prudence dictates keeping at least two copies for yourself (e.g., on a computer hard drive

and on a disk or portable hard drive) and, if practical, uploading another copy to a trusted Internet

2.35:

storage vendor.

Numbering

manuscript pages

2.36:

Embedded

comments and

revision marks

2.37:

Backing up the

final manuscript

2.38:

Volume editor's

manuscript

preparation

responsibilities

2.39:

Additional

responsibilities of

the volume editor

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >>

of Contents

Preparing a Manuscript for a Multiauthor Book or Journal

List of Figures

List of Tables

2.38 VOLUME EDITOR'S MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION RESPONSIBILITIES

Index

The specific responsibilities of the volume editor, contributors, and publisher (including manuscript

editor) must be determined before a multiauthor manuscript is submitted. If there is more than one

volume editor, the responsibilities of each must be spelled out. After ensuring that the contributors

2.36:

furnish their papers in a uniform style agreed to by all parties, the volume editor is usually

Embedded

comments and

responsible for the following:

revision marks

2.37:

Getting manuscripts, including illustrations, from all contributors in a form acceptable to the

Backing up the

final manuscript

publisher well before the date for submitting the volume

2.38:

Getting written permission from copyright owners to reproduce material in copyrighted works

Volume editor's

manuscript

published elsewhere, illustrations taken from another work, and the like (see chapter 4)

preparation

responsibilities

Editing each contribution for sense and checking references and other documentation for

2.39:

uniformity of style, then sending edited manuscripts to the contributors for their approval

Additional

before the volume is submitted to the publisher (an activity distinct from the manuscript editing

responsibilities of

the volume editor

that will be done later by the publisher)

2.40:

Providing a list of contributors with their affiliations and brief biographical notes to be included

Preparing

previously

in the volume

published material

Providing a title page, table of contents, and any necessary prefatory material

Sending the complete manuscript to the publisher in a form acceptable for publication (having

first made sure that the manuscript includes only the latest version of each contributor's

chapter)

Adhering to the publisher's schedule, ensuring that contributors do likewise, keeping track of

the contributors' whereabouts at all stages of publication, and assuming the responsibilities of

any contributor who cannot fulfill them

Most if not all of these responsibilities also apply to journal editors.

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >>

of Contents

Preparing a Manuscript for a Multiauthor Book or Journal

List of Figures

List of Tables

2.39 ADDITIONAL RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE VOLUME EDITOR

Index

Depending on the arrangement with the publisher, the volume editor may also be responsible for the

following:

2.37:

Sending a publishing agreement (provided by the publisher) to each contributor and returning

Backing up the

final manuscript

the agreements, fully executed, to the publisher (see 4.53)

2.38:

Checking the edited manuscript and responding to all queries, or distributing the edited

Volume editor's

manuscript

manuscript to the contributors and checking it after their review to ensure that all queries have

preparation

been answered

responsibilities

Proofreading the final version of the volume or delegating proofreading to the contributors and

2.39:

Additional

then checking their corrections

responsibilities of

the volume editor

Preparing the index

2.40:

Preparing

previously

published material

2.41:

Permissible changes

to published

material

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >>

of Contents

Compiling a Manuscript from Previously Published Material

List of Figures

List of Tables

2.40 PREPARING PREVIOUSLY PUBLISHED MATERIAL

Index

Manuscripts for an anthology or other work comprising previously published material are said to

have been compiled. If the compiler retypes or scans the original source (i.e., using character-

recognition software), the resulting text should be incorporated into a manuscript that follows the

2.38:

formatting requirements outlined in paragraphs 2.7--22. Such manuscripts must be proofread word

Volume editor's

manuscript

for word against the original material before the final manuscript is submitted to the publisher for

preparation

editing; in addition, publishers may request copies of the originals. If the original material is

responsibilities

submitted on paper only, make sure the material is entirely legible (publishers may prefer legible

2.39:

Additional

single-sided photocopies to pages from the original source). Unless there is ample space to insert

responsibilities of

corrections above the printed lines, any corrections should be written in the margins (see 2.116--29).

the volume editor

See also 4.101.

2.40:

Preparing

previously

published material

2.41:

Permissible changes

to published

material

2.42:

Footnotes or

endnotes in

previously

published material

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >>

of Contents

Compiling a Manuscript from Previously Published Material

List of Figures

List of Tables

2.41 PERMISSIBLE CHANGES TO PUBLISHED MATERIAL

Index

The compiler of previously published material may make the following changes to the published

material without editorial comment: notes may be renumbered; cross-references to parts of the

original work that are no longer relevant may be deleted; obvious typographical errors and

2.39:

inadvertent grammatical slips may be silently corrected. See also 13.7--8. If wholesale changes have

Additional

responsibilities of

been made--for example, in spelling or capitalization conventions or notes style--the compiler should

the volume editor

note such changes in a preface or elsewhere. For deletions indicated by ellipsis points, see 13.48--56.

2.40:

Preparing

previously

published material

2.41:

Permissible changes

to published

material

2.42:

Footnotes or

endnotes in

previously

published material

2.43:

Source notes for

previously

published material

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >>

of Contents

Compiling a Manuscript from Previously Published Material

List of Figures

List of Tables

2.42 FOOTNOTES OR ENDNOTES IN PREVIOUSLY PUBLISHED MATERIAL

Index

Footnotes that appear as such in the original pages may be presented as footnotes or endnotes in the

published version. If a compiler's or volume editor's notes are being added along with the original

footnotes or endnotes, the new notes should be intermingled with but distinguished from the original

2.40:

notes (see 14.46); if the original material is being submitted to the publisher on paper only, it may be

Preparing

previously

preferable to produce a separate electronic document for the notes.

published material

2.41:

Permissible changes

to published

material

2.42:

Footnotes or

endnotes in

previously

published material

2.43:

Source notes for

previously

published material

2.44:

Reproducing

previously

published

illustrations

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >>

of Contents

Compiling a Manuscript from Previously Published Material

List of Figures

List of Tables

2.43 SOURCE NOTES FOR PREVIOUSLY PUBLISHED MATERIAL

Index

Each selection of previously published material should be accompanied by either a headnote (a brief

introduction preceding the selection) or, more commonly, an unnumbered footnote on the first page

of text, giving the source (see 14.49), the name of the copyright owner if the selection is in copyright

2.41:

(see chapter 4, esp. 4.2--49), and the original title if it has been changed. If a selection has previously

Permissible changes

to published

appeared in various places and different versions, the source note need not give the entire publishing

material

history but must state which version is being reprinted.

2.42:

Footnotes or

endnotes in

previously

published material

2.43:

Source notes for

previously

published material

2.44:

Reproducing

previously

published

illustrations

2.45:

Manuscript editing

as opposed to

developmental

editing

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors >>

of Contents

Compiling a Manuscript from Previously Published Material

List of Figures

List of Tables

2.44 REPRODUCING PREVIOUSLY PUBLISHED ILLUSTRATIONS

Index

Compilers should contact their publisher about how to obtain illustrations from previously published

material in a format suitable for printing. Photocopies of illustrations are not acceptable for

reproduction. The compiler should procure glossy prints or the original publisher's scans. If these are

2.42:

unavailable, it may be possible to reproduce an illustration from the original publication; consult your

Footnotes or

endnotes in

publisher.

previously

published material

2.43:

Source notes for

previously

published material

2.44:

Reproducing

previously

published

illustrations

2.45:

Manuscript editing

as opposed to

developmental

editing

2.46:

Mechanical editing

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Principles of Manuscript Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.45 MANUSCRIPT EDITING AS OPPOSED TO DEVELOPMENTAL EDITING

List of Tables

Manuscript editing, also called copyediting or line editing, requires attention to every word and mark

Index

of punctuation in a manuscript, a thorough knowledge of the style to be followed, and the ability to

make quick, logical, and defensible decisions. It is undertaken by the publisher when a manuscript

has been accepted for publication. It may include both mechanical editing (see 2.46) and substantive

2.43:

editing (see 2.47). It is distinct from developmental editing (not discussed in this manual), which more

Source notes for

previously

directly shapes the content of a work, the way material should be presented, the need for more or less

published material

documentation and how it should be handled, and so on. Since editing of this kind may involve total

2.44:

rewriting or reorganization of a work, it should be done--if needed-- before manuscript editing begins.

Reproducing

previously

For more on developmental editing, consult Scott Norton's Developmental Editing: A Handbook for

published

illustrations

Freelancers, Authors, and Publishers (bibliog. 2.1).

2.45:

Manuscript editing

as opposed to

developmental

editing

2.46:

Mechanical editing

2.47:

Substantive editing

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Principles of Manuscript Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.46 MECHANICAL EDITING

List of Tables

Mechanical editing involves the consistent application of a particular style to a written work--

Index

including text and documentation and any tables and illustrations. The central focus of part 2 in this

manual, style is used here to refer to rules related to capitalization, spelling, hyphenation, and

abbreviations; punctuation, including ellipsis points, parentheses, and quotation marks; and the way

2.44:

numbers are treated. Mechanical editing also includes attention to grammar, syntax, and usage. The

Reproducing

previously

rules set forth in a style manual like this one may be supplemented by a publisher's house style or the

published

illustrations

style of a particular discipline. Journal editors in particular follow a journal's established style,

augmented by additional resources specific to the subject area. Books in a series or multivolume

2.45:

Manuscript editing

works should all follow one style consistently, as should separately authored chapters in a

as opposed to

developmental

multiauthor book. The style of any work, as well as occasional deviations from it, must be determined

editing

by author, editor, and publisher before editing begins. For substantive editing, see 2.47, 2.48. See also

2.46:

2.52.

Mechanical editing

2.47:

Substantive editing

2.48:

Discretion in

substantive editing

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Principles of Manuscript Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.47 SUBSTANTIVE EDITING

List of Tables

Substantive editing deals with the organization and presentation of content. It involves rewriting to

Index

improve style or to eliminate ambiguity, reorganizing or tightening, recasting tables, and other

remedial activities. (It should not be confused with developmental editing, a more drastic process; see

2.45.) In general, no substantive editing should be undertaken without agreement between publisher

2.45:

and editor, especially for book-length works; if major substantive work is needed, the author should

Manuscript editing

as opposed to

be consulted and perhaps invited to approve a sample before the editing proceeds. A journal's

developmental

editing

manuscript editors, however, working on rigid schedules, may need to do substantive editing without

prior consultation with authors if problems of organization, presentation, and verbal expression have

2.46:

Mechanical editing

not been addressed at earlier stages.

2.47:

Substantive editing

2.48:

Discretion in

substantive editing

2.49:

Estimating editing

time

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Principles of Manuscript Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.48 DISCRETION IN SUBSTANTIVE EDITING

List of Tables

A light editorial hand is nearly always more effective than a heavy one. An experienced editor will

Index

recognize and not tamper with unusual figures of speech or idiomatic usage and will know when to

make an editorial change and when simply to suggest it, whether to delete a repetition or an

unnecessary recapitulation or simply to point it out to the author, and how to suggest tactfully that

2.46:

an expression may be inappropriate. An author's own style should be respected, whether flamboyant

Mechanical editing

or pedestrian. All manuscript editors should be aware of any requirements of house style that are

2.47:

Substantive editing

essential to the publisher--for example, those covering bias-free language (see 5.221--30). For

2.48:

communicating with the author and querying, see 2.65--69.

Discretion in

substantive editing

2.49:

Estimating editing

time

2.50:

Stages of editing

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Principles of Manuscript Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.49 ESTIMATING EDITING TIME

List of Tables

Estimates for how long the job of manuscript editing should take--a figure generally determined by

Index

the publisher and agreed to by the manuscript editor--usually start with the length of the manuscript.

Because of inevitable variations in typefaces and margins and other formatting characteristics from

one manuscript to another, the length is best determined by a word count rather than a page count

2.47:

(though a word count can be derived from a page count for paper-only manuscripts). A 100,000-word

Substantive editing

book manuscript, edited by an experienced editor, might take seventy-five to one hundred hours of

2.48:

Discretion in

work before being sent to the author, plus ten to twenty additional hours after the author's review.

substantive editing

This rough estimate may need to be adjusted to take into account any complexities in the text or

2.49:

documentation, the presence and characteristics of any tables and illustrations, and the degree of

Estimating editing

time

electronic formatting and markup that an editor will need to remove or impose (see 2.77). If in doubt,

2.50:

edit a small sample to serve as the basis of an estimate. An additional factor is of course the

Stages of editing

publication schedule, which will determine how many days are available for the editing stage. Also

2.51:

pertinent is information about the author's availability to review the edited manuscript, amenability to

Choosing a

dictionary and

being edited, propensity to revise, and so forth.

other reference

works

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Principles of Manuscript Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.50 STAGES OF EDITING

List of Tables

Editors usually go through a manuscript three times--once to do the initial editing, easily the longest

Index

stage; a second time to review, refine, and sometimes correct the editing; and a third time after the

author's review (see 2.69). Editors working on electronic manuscripts may also be required to perform

an initial, systematic cleanup (see 2.77)--though a publisher's manuscript editing or production

2.48:

department may perform such a cleanup before turning a manuscript over to an editor. Careful

Discretion in

substantive editing

editors begin the initial editing stage--sometimes in conjunction with the electronic cleanup--by

2.49:

looking through the entire document to assess the nature and scope of the work that will be required,

Estimating editing

to identify any matters that should be clarified with the author before editing begins, and to reduce

time

the number of surprises that could cause delays if discovered later in the process. Some edit each

2.50:

Stages of editing

element in a work (text, notes, tables, bibliography, etc.) separately to help attain consistency; others

2.51:

edit the apparatus, or a part of it, along with the text. Whatever the procedure, all elements must be

Choosing a

compared to ensure that the notes match their text references and correspond in turn to the entries in

dictionary and

other reference

the bibliography or reference list, the tables correspond to any discussion of them in the text, and so

works

on.

2.52:

Keeping a style

sheet

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Principles of Manuscript Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.51 CHOOSING A DICTIONARY AND OTHER REFERENCE WORKS

List of Tables

A good dictionary is essential. Chicago recommends Webster's Third New International Dictionary and

Index

the latest edition of its chief abridgment, Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary; both are available in

print and online (see bibliog. 3.1). Editors also need reference works that furnish reliable spellings and

identifications of persons, places, historical events, technical terminology, and the like. If a system of

2.49:

documentation other than Chicago is to be used, the applicable style manual should be at hand (see

Estimating editing

time

bibliog. 1.1). For some basic reference works, see section 4 of the bibliography. For a complete

2.50:

discussion of names and terms, see chapter 8.

Stages of editing

2.51:

Choosing a

dictionary and

other reference

works

2.52:

Keeping a style

sheet

2.53:

Fact-checking

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Principles of Manuscript Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.52 KEEPING A STYLE SHEET

List of Tables

To ensure consistency, for each manuscript the editor must keep an alphabetical list of words or

Index

terms to be capitalized, italicized, hyphenated, spelled, or otherwise treated in any way unique to the

manuscript. Changes that are made simply for consistency with house style need not be noted on the

style sheet. It is enough to note, for example, "In all other respects, Chicago style is followed." (For

2.50:

paper-only manuscripts it is useful to add the page number of the first occurrence of each item.)

Stages of editing

Special punctuation, unusual diacritics, and other items should also be noted on the style sheet. Not

2.51:

Choosing a

only the author but also the publisher may need to refer to the style sheet at various stages of editing

dictionary and

and production. See figure 2.3.

other reference

works

2.52:

Keeping a style

sheet

2.53:

Fact-checking

2.54:

Editing front

matter

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Principles of Manuscript Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.53 FACT-CHECKING

List of Tables

In book publishing, the author is finally responsible for the accuracy of a work; most book publishers

Index

do not perform fact-checking in any systematic way or expect it of their manuscript editors unless

specifically agreed upon up front. Nonetheless, obvious errors, including errors in mathematical

calculations, should always be pointed out to the author, and questionable proper names,

2.51:

bibliographic references, and the like should be checked and any apparent irregularities queried.

Choosing a

dictionary and

Editors need to be systematic about what they fact-check to avoid being distracted from the work at

other reference

works

hand. It will sometimes be efficient to point out and correct obvious errors of fact that can be easily

double-checked against reliable sources. For anything beyond that, however, fact-checking should be

2.52:

Keeping a style

limited to what is needed to form an effective and judicious query to the author (see 2.66).

sheet

2.53:

Fact-checking

2.54:

Editing front

matter

2.55:

Editing part titles

and chapter or

article titles

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Editing Specific Parts of a Manuscript

of Contents

List of Figures

2.54 EDITING FRONT MATTER

List of Tables

An editor should check any half title, title page, table of contents, and list of illustrations against the

Index

text and captions and against any applicable documentation included with the manuscript;

discrepancies should be queried. If subheads are to be dropped from the table of contents, the author

should be consulted (see 1.37). The editor should insert comments on the manuscript pages to indicate

2.52:

where particular elements are to begin (e.g., "dedication, p. v") and which pages are to remain blank

Keeping a style

sheet

(e.g., "page ii blank"). For the sequence and form of front matter for books, see 1.16--44; for items

2.53:

always or sometimes required on the copyright page, see 1.19--34.

Fact-checking

2.54:

Editing front

matter

2.55:

Editing part titles

and chapter or

article titles

2.56:

Editing subheads

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Editing Specific Parts of a Manuscript

of Contents

List of Figures

2.55 EDITING PART TITLES AND CHAPTER OR ARTICLE TITLES

List of Tables

The editor of a book manuscript should ensure that part and chapter titles, and their subtitles if any,

Index

are consistent with the text in spelling, hyphenation, and italics. Part and chapter titles must be

checked against the table of contents, and any discrepancy must be queried. Chicago recommends

that all titles be in headline style unless a work is part of a series or journal that follows some other

2.53:

capitalization style (see 8.157). All elements should be tagged or otherwise identified according to the

Fact-checking

publisher's requirements (for electronic manuscripts, see 2.78--80; for paper manuscripts, see 2.96).

2.54:

Editing front

matter

2.55:

Editing part titles

and chapter or

article titles

2.56:

Editing subheads

2.57:

Editing cross-

references

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Editing Specific Parts of a Manuscript

of Contents

List of Figures

2.56 EDITING SUBHEADS

List of Tables

Subheads should be checked for consistency with the text in spelling, hyphenation, and italics, and

Index

for parallel structure and tone. If there is more than one level of subhead, the hierarchy needs to be

checked for sense and each level clearly tagged or otherwise labeled (for electronic manuscripts, see

2.78--80; for paper manuscripts, see 2.96). If there are more than three levels of subhead, determine

2.54:

whether the lowest level can be eliminated. For electronic manuscripts, it may be wise to tag the

Editing front

matter

different subhead levels based on the author's typographic distinctions at the outset, lest these

2.55:

distinctions be eliminated by any cleanup routine (see 2.77). If subheads are to appear in the table of

Editing part titles

contents, they must be cross-checked for consistency. Chicago recommends that all subheads be in

and chapter or

article titles

headline style unless a work is part of a series or journal that follows some other capitalization style

2.56:

(see 8.157). But if an author has consistently used sentence style for subheads (see 8.156), that style

Editing subheads

should not be altered without consultation with the author and publisher, since it may be more

2.57:

appropriate in a particular work. Where subheads consist of full sentences, sentence-style

Editing cross-

references

capitalization is preferable.

2.58:

Editing quotations

and previously

published material

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Editing Specific Parts of a Manuscript

of Contents

List of Figures

2.57 EDITING CROSS-REFERENCES

List of Tables

All references to tables, figures, appendixes, bibliographies, or other parts of a work should be

Index

checked by the manuscript editor. If the author, for example, mentions a statistic for 2008 and refers

readers to table 4, which gives statistics only through 2007, the editor must point out the discrepancy.

Place-names on a map that illustrate the text must be spelled as in the text. Cross-references to

2.55:

specific pages--the numbering of which is subject to change in the published version--should be

Editing part titles

and chapter or

minimized or eliminated. See also 2.32.

article titles

2.56:

Editing subheads

2.57:

Editing cross-

references

2.58:

Editing quotations

and previously

published material

2.59:

Editing notes

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Editing Specific Parts of a Manuscript

of Contents

List of Figures

2.58 EDITING QUOTATIONS AND PREVIOUSLY PUBLISHED MATERIAL

List of Tables

Aside from adjusting quotation marks and ellipsis points to conform to house style (see 13.7--8), the

Index

editor must do nothing to quoted material unless the author is translating it from another language

(or modernizing it), in which case it may be lightly edited (see 13.78). Misspelled words and apparent

transcription errors should be queried. An author who appears to have been careless in transcribing

2.56:

should be asked to check all quotations for accuracy, including punctuation. The editor should ensure

Editing subheads

that sources are given for all quoted material, whether following the quotation or in a note. In editing

2.57:

Editing cross-

previously published material, especially if it has been abridged, the editor should read for sense to

references

ensure that nothing is out of order or has been inadvertently omitted. Discrepancies should be

2.58:

queried. If the previously published material has been provided on paper only, any ambiguous end-

Editing quotations

and previously

of-line hyphens should be clarified (see 2.93). For field notes, see 13.47. See also 2.40.

published material

2.59:

Editing notes

2.60:

Editing note

citations,

bibliographies, and

reference lists

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Editing Specific Parts of a Manuscript

of Contents

List of Figures

2.59 EDITING NOTES

List of Tables

Each note must be checked against the text to ensure that its text reference is correct and in the right

Index

place and that any terms used in the note are treated the same way as in the text. When notes are to

be printed as footnotes, the author may be asked to shorten an excessively long note or to incorporate

some of the note into the text. Lists, tables, and figures should be placed not in footnotes but in the

2.57:

text or in an appendix. Manuscript editors may sometimes request an additional note to

Editing cross-

references

accommodate a needed source or citation. More frequently, in consultation with the author, they will

2.58:

combine notes or delete unneeded ones. See 14.51--55. An editor working on paper must take special

Editing quotations

care in renumbering notes. Editors working on-screen may need to make sure that citations in the

and previously

published material

notes are free of any underlying codes generated by the author in creating or organizing them (see

2.59:

14.13).

Editing notes

2.60:

Editing note

citations,

bibliographies, and

reference lists

2.61:

Flexibility in

citation style

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Editing Specific Parts of a Manuscript

of Contents

List of Figures

2.60 EDITING NOTE CITATIONS, BIBLIOGRAPHIES, AND REFERENCE LISTS

List of Tables

Citations in notes, bibliographies, and reference lists must be carefully checked for documentation

Index

style (chapters 14 and 15; but see 2.61). Further, every subsequent reference to a work previously cited

in the text or in a note must be given in the same form as the first reference or in the same shortened

form (see 14.24--31). In a work containing a bibliography as well as notes, each citation in the notes

2.58:

should be checked against the bibliography and any discrepancy resolved or, if necessary, queried in

Editing quotations

and previously

both contexts so that the author can easily compare them (see 2.66). A bibliography need not include

published material

every work cited in the notes and may properly include some entries that are not cited. If a reference

2.59:

list is used, the editor will have checked all text citations against the list while editing the text and will

Editing notes

have queried or resolved discrepancies. Bibliographies and reference lists should be checked for

2.60:

Editing note

alphabetical order and, where applicable, for chronological order. For bibliographies, see 14.56--67;

citations,

bibliographies, and

for reference lists and text citations, see 15.10--30. Many editors find it helpful to edit the bibliography

reference lists

or reference list before the text and notes. Editors working on-screen may need to make sure that the

2.61:

source citations and related text are free of any underlying codes generated by the author in creating

Flexibility in

citation style

or organizing them (see 14.13).

2.62:

Editing tables

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Editing Specific Parts of a Manuscript

of Contents

List of Figures

2.61 FLEXIBILITY IN CITATION STYLE

List of Tables

Imposing house style on notes prepared in another style can be immensely time-consuming and, if

Index

the existing form is consistent and clear to the reader, is often unnecessary. This is especially true of

books, many of which are intended to stand alone. Before making sweeping changes, the manuscript

editor should consult with the author or the publisher or both. In journal editing, on the other hand,

2.59:

such flexibility is generally not acceptable. This has become more true in the era of electronic

Editing notes

publication; because citations may be linked to an outside database, absolute consistency of format is

2.60:

Editing note

essential.

citations,

bibliographies, and

reference lists

2.61:

Flexibility in

citation style

2.62:

Editing tables

2.63:

Checking

illustrations and

their placement

and editing

captions

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Editing Specific Parts of a Manuscript

of Contents

List of Figures

2.62 EDITING TABLES

List of Tables

Tables are usually best edited together, as a group, to ensure consistent style and presentation. Tables

Index

should also be checked for consistent numbering and correspondence with the text--including text

references and placement callouts (see 2.27). For specific guidelines on editing tables, see 3.79--85.

2.60:

Editing note

citations,

bibliographies, and

reference lists

2.61:

Flexibility in

citation style

2.62:

Editing tables

2.63:

Checking

illustrations and

their placement

and editing

captions

2.64:

Editing indexes

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Editing Specific Parts of a Manuscript

of Contents

List of Figures

2.63 CHECKING ILLUSTRATIONS AND THEIR PLACEMENT AND EDITING CAPTIONS

List of Tables

Wording on a diagram or chart should conform to the spelling and capitalization used in the caption

Index

or the text. (If the wording on the illustration cannot be changed, it is sometimes acceptable to adjust

the spelling in the caption or text.) Captions must conform to the style of the text. Source information

should be edited in consultation with the publisher and in conformance with any letters of

2.61:

permission. (If permissions are outstanding, the publisher, not the editor, should take up the matter

Flexibility in

citation style

with the author.) Illustrations may be added, dropped, or renumbered during editing; therefore, it is

2.62:

essential to make a final check of all illustrations against their text references and callouts and against

Editing tables

the captions and list of illustrations to be sure that they match and that the illustrations show what

2.63:

they say they do. For details on preparing illustrations and captions, see 3.33--45. For checking

Checking

illustrations and

credits, see 3.28--36.

their placement

and editing

captions

2.64:

Editing indexes

2.65:

Establishing early

contact with

authors

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Editing Specific Parts of a Manuscript

of Contents

List of Figures

2.64 EDITING INDEXES

List of Tables

The schedule for editing an index--which, if it depends on page number locators rather than

Index

paragraph numbers, is almost never prepared before book or journal pages have been composed--

must usually correspond to the schedule for reviewing corrections to proofs. For a more detailed

discussion, including an index-editing checklist, see 16.132--34.

2.62:

Editing tables

2.63:

Checking

illustrations and

their placement

and editing

captions

2.64:

Editing indexes

2.65:

Establishing early

contact with

authors

2.66:

Writing author

comments and

queries

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Communicating with Authors

of Contents

List of Figures

2.65 ESTABLISHING EARLY CONTACT WITH AUTHORS

List of Tables

Editors of book-length works are urged to contact their authors early on, after an initial review of the

Index

manuscript. This is especially important if an editor has questions or plans to make significant

changes that, in the event the author proves not to be amenable, might take time and effort to undo.

Likewise, to expedite production, a journal's manuscript editors may notify authors of systematic

2.63:

changes early in the game. Most authors are content to submit to a house style; those who are not

Checking

illustrations and

may be willing to compromise. Unless usage is determined by journal or series style, the author's

their placement

and editing

wishes should generally be respected. For a manuscript that requires extensive changes, it may be

captions

wise, if the schedule allows, to send a sample of the editing for the author's approval before

2.64:

proceeding (see 2.47).

Editing indexes

2.65:

Establishing early

contact with

authors

2.66:

Writing author

comments and

queries

2.67:

Writing a cover

letter to the author

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Communicating with Authors

of Contents

List of Figures

2.66 WRITING AUTHOR COMMENTS AND QUERIES

List of Tables

Editors may generally impose a consistent style and correct errors without further comment--

Index

assuming these changes are apparent on the edited manuscript. Corrections to less obvious problems

may warrant a comment. Comments should be concise, and they should avoid sounding casual,

pedantic, condescending, or indignant; often, a simple "OK?" is enough. Comments that are not

2.64:

answerable by a yes or a no may be more specific: "Do you mean X or Y?" Examples of instances in

Editing indexes

which an editor might comment or query include the following:

2.65:

Establishing early

contact with

To note, on an electronic manuscript, that a particular global change has been corrected silently

authors

after the first instance

2.66:

Writing author

To point out a discrepancy, as between two spellings in a name, or between a source cited

comments and

queries

differently in the notes than in the bibliography

2.67:

To point out an apparent omission, such as a missing quotation mark or a missing source

Writing a cover

letter to the author

citation

2.68:

To point out a possible error in a quotation

Sending the edited

manuscript to the

To point out repetition (e.g., "Repetition intentional?" or "Rephrased to avoid repetition; OK?")

author

To ask for verification, as of a name or term whose spelling cannot be easily verified

To ask for clarification where the text is ambiguous or garbled

To point to the sources an editor has consulted in correcting errors of fact (but see 2.53)

For the mechanics of entering queries on a manuscript, see 2.83 (for electronic manuscripts) and 2.89

(for paper manuscripts).

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Communicating with Authors

of Contents

List of Figures

2.67 WRITING A COVER LETTER TO THE AUTHOR

List of Tables

The letter sent to the author with the edited manuscript, or sometimes separately, should include

Index

some or all of the following items (unless already communicated):

An explanation of the nature and scope of the editing--for example, adjustment of spelling and

2.65:

punctuation to conform to house style, occasional rephrasing for clarity or to eliminate

Establishing early

contact with

inadvertent repetition, and so forth

authors

If the editing has been shown, an indication of how this has been done--that is, with change-

2.66:

Writing author

tracking (redlining) software (see 2.81) or with pencil and paper--and brief instructions for

comments and

queries

interpreting the marks

2.67:

Instructions as to how the author should respond to queries, veto any unwanted editing, and

Writing a cover

make any further adjustments to the edited manuscript (see 2.84, 2.88)

letter to the author

2.68:

A warning that the author's review of the edited manuscript constitutes the last opportunity to

Sending the edited

make any substantive changes, additions, or deletions and that quoted matter and citations

manuscript to the

author

should be checked if necessary

2.69:

A reminder to review the editing carefully, since even editors are fallible, and the correction of

Checking the

author's final

any errors missed in editing and not caught until proofs may be deemed "author's alterations"

changes

and charged to the author (see 2.132)

A reminder to retain a copy of the reviewed and corrected manuscript (to refer to at the

proofreading stage)

The deadline for return of the edited copy

A brief discussion about the index, if any--whether the author is to prepare it, whether

instructions are needed (see chapter 16), or whether a freelance indexer is to be engaged at the

author's expense

A request for confirmation of the author's contact information for the rest of the publishing

process

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Communicating with Authors

of Contents

List of Figures

2.68 SENDING THE EDITED MANUSCRIPT TO THE AUTHOR

List of Tables

An electronically edited book manuscript--because of its length and, often, its complexity--may be

Index

sent to the author as hard copy (or, alternatively, as a PDF that the author is asked to print out). The

author reads and marks this printout as necessary, then returns it to the editor, who incorporates the

author's marks into the electronic manuscript. The author may instead review the electronic

2.66:

manuscript (using the same software that the editor has used)--a procedure that saves printing and

Writing author

comments and

shipping costs. An editor working with an author in this manner needs to have procedures in place

queries

for making sure the author does not make any undocumented changes--inadvertently or otherwise. A

2.67:

pencil-edited manuscript should be photocopied before being sent to the author; likewise, authors are

Writing a cover

letter to the author

advised to photocopy paper manuscripts with their handwritten comments before sending them back

2.68:

to the editor. Any manuscript that has been pencil edited--as well as electronically edited printouts

Sending the edited

manuscript to the

that have been marked up by hand--is one of a kind; if lost, the work must be done over.

author

2.69:

Checking the

author's final

changes

2.70:

Ensuring correct

markup

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Communicating with Authors

of Contents

List of Figures

2.69 CHECKING THE AUTHOR'S FINAL CHANGES

List of Tables

When the manuscript comes back from the author, the editor goes through it once again to see what

Index

the author has done, checking that all queries have been answered and editing any new material.

Except for style adjustments, the author's version should prevail; if that version is unacceptable for

any reason, a compromise should be sought. As a part of this process, the editor updates the

2.67:

electronic files or, if a manuscript is to be updated or typeset from a pencil-edited paper copy, clarifies

Writing a cover

letter to the author

or retypes the new material and crosses out the queries.

2.68:

Sending the edited

manuscript to the

author

2.69:

Checking the

author's final

changes

2.70:

Ensuring correct

markup

2.71:

Type specifications

and hand markup

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Preparing a Final Manuscript for Production

of Contents

List of Figures

2.70 ENSURING CORRECT MARKUP

List of Tables

From the standpoint of production, a manuscript consists of two levels of information: content and

Index

structure. The content generally includes all the text and any figures that are to appear in the

published book or article. The structure describes the manuscript's component parts--such as heads

and subheads, text, extracts, footnote reference numbers and footnotes, illustrations and tables, and so

2.68:

forth. These parts are identified on the manuscript by electronic or handwritten codes or instructions

Sending the edited

manuscript to the

(for electronic manuscripts, see 2.78--80; for paper manuscripts, see 2.96). When a manuscript is

author

typeset--that is, when book or article pages or full-text HTML is produced from the manuscript--each

2.69:

identified element is formatted or displayed according to specifications in a design template (which

Checking the

author's final

are often encoded into an electronic style sheet). The design specifies the typeface, type size, color,

changes

and line spacing for each element in the text and any tables, as well as sizing and placement

2.70:

Ensuring correct

parameters for figures. Final manuscripts must therefore be reviewed to make sure markup has been

markup

consistently and correctly applied and that it corresponds to the elements in the design template. For

2.71:

a fuller discussion of markup and design, see appendix A.

Type specifications

and hand markup

2.72:

Ensuring correct

pagination

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Preparing a Final Manuscript for Production

of Contents

List of Figures

2.71 TYPE SPECIFICATIONS AND HAND MARKUP

List of Tables

In the rare event that no designer's layout or list of specifications is available, an editor may need to

Index

mark up the hard copy with appropriate type specifications at the first occurrence of the element they

apply to. For example, in the margin next to the first block of regular text, "text: 10/12 Times Roman Ã

— 26" (meaning 10-point type with 12-point leading, each line 26 picas wide); and next to the first

2.69:

extract, "extract: 9/11 Times Roman; indent 2 pi from left." As long as all extracts have been coded

Checking the

author's final

"ext," all first-level subheads "A," and so forth, markup can be kept to a minimum. For more on hand

changes

markup, see 2.87--96.

2.70:

Ensuring correct

markup

2.71:

Type specifications

and hand markup

2.72:

Ensuring correct

pagination

2.73:

Preparing running

heads

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Preparing a Final Manuscript for Production

of Contents

List of Figures

2.72 ENSURING CORRECT PAGINATION

List of Tables

Editors should indicate on the manuscript where roman page numbers end and arabic numbers

Index

begin--whether or not the number will actually appear (i.e., whether the folio is to be "expressed" or

"blind"; see 1.45). Furthermore, if there is a part title and the first chapter begins on page 3, "arabic p.

3" should be specified at the chapter opening. The editor should also specify whether subsequent

2.70:

elements are to begin on a recto or on a verso (see 1.4). Repagination of typeset, printed books is

Ensuring correct

markup

expensive; the editor should check that all elements--in the front matter, the text, and the back matter-

2.71:

-are in their correct order and that the order is reflected in the table of contents. For journals, see 1.76.

Type specifications

and hand markup

2.72:

Ensuring correct

pagination

2.73:

Preparing running

heads

2.74:

A production

checklist

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Preparing a Final Manuscript for Production

of Contents

List of Figures

2.73 PREPARING RUNNING HEADS

List of Tables

The editor usually provides a list of copy for running heads (or feet) (see 1.9--15). The list must clearly

Index

indicate which heads are to appear on versos (left-hand pages) and which on rectos (right-hand

pages). To fit on a single line, usually containing the page number as well, a chapter or article title

may have to be shortened for a running head but must include the key terms in the title. (In some

2.71:

cases, the keywords will be in the chapter subtitle.) The author's approval may be needed; if possible,

Type specifications

and hand markup

the editor should send the running-head copy to the author along with the edited manuscript. In

2.72:

shortened foreign-language titles, no word may be omitted that governs the case ending of another

Ensuring correct

word in the running head. Running-head copy normally accompanies the manuscript to the typesetter

pagination

and should be included with the other electronic files. If the running heads are to reflect the content

2.73:

Preparing running

of particular pages (rather than chapters or sections), the exact copy must be determined after (or as)

heads

the pages are typeset. For example, running heads to notes that include page ranges can be

2.74:

determined only from the typeset pages (see 1.14). These are typically indicated by the publisher on

A production

checklist

the first proofreading copy.

2.75:

Making backup

copies

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> Preparing a Final Manuscript for Production

of Contents

List of Figures

2.74 A PRODUCTION CHECKLIST

List of Tables

Manuscripts that are ready to be typeset are usually accompanied by a checklist of vital statistics that

Index

includes information about the project and how it is to be produced. Such a checklist, especially

necessary for one-of-a-kind book-length works, might consist of the following information:

2.72:

Name of author(s) and title of work

Ensuring correct

pagination

A list of component parts of the project: electronic files, printout, illustrations, and so forth

2.73:

An indication of the software used to prepare the final manuscript and a list of file names

Preparing running

heads

An indication of how the electronic files have been coded for typesetting, a list of codes, and

2.74:

A production

any special instructions, including a list of any special characters or fonts

checklist

A list of any material that is still to come

2.75:

Making backup

An indication of how notes are to be set--for example, as footnotes or chapter endnotes or

copies

endnotes to the book

2.76:

Preparing to make

A list of elements to be included in the front matter, the text, and the end matter, and an

a clean, unedited

indication of which elements must start recto (see 1.4)

copy

For book-length manuscripts, an indication of how many paper sets of proofs should be

produced, if any

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Electronic Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.75 MAKING BACKUP COPIES

List of Tables

It is best to back up a manuscript in stages by saving separate copies of each significant version. The

Index

author's original, unedited copy should be archived (i.e., saved without further changes), as should

every significant stage of the editing process. Some editors make daily backups and weekly

sequential backups--so that an earlier stage of the editing can be consulted if necessary. Each major

2.73:

stage should be saved with a different name (e.g., by appending A, B, C, etc., or something more

Preparing running

heads

descriptive, to the file names) and in a different directory (or folder), and care should be taken to

2.74:

avoid saving over--or inadvertently working on--an earlier version of a file. During editing, open

A production

documents should be saved frequently. Finally, it may be wise, as an extra precaution, to send backup

checklist

copies to an offsite server.

2.75:

Making backup

copies

2.76:

Preparing to make

a clean, unedited

copy

2.77:

Cleaning up

electronic files

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Electronic Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.76 PREPARING TO MAKE A CLEAN, UNEDITED COPY

List of Tables

Some publishers provide manuscript editors with a cleaned-up version of the author's electronic

Index

file(s)--converted (if necessary), formatted (including, in some cases, electronic markup), and ready to

edit, usually in a specific word-processing program or specialized text-editing environment.

(Publishers may instead give editors hard copy only, updating the electronic files from the pencil-

2.74:

edited copy as part of the production process; for paper editing, see 2.87--96.) Many editors, however,

A production

checklist

are required to clean up and format the author's electronic files themselves. All editors working on

2.75:

electronic files should have more than a passing familiarity with the software they are required to use.

Making backup

Even standard, "out of the box" word-processing programs have become powerful text editors; at the

copies

very least, it is important to learn about macros (short for macroinstructions) and to become thoroughly

2.76:

Preparing to make

versed in search-and-replace options (including the use of pattern matching or "wildcards"), which,

a clean, unedited

copy

used properly and with care, can save many steps. A good place to begin is with a software's "help"

documentation. More advanced users will customize their software--sometimes with the help of sets

2.77:

Cleaning up

of macros written especially for editors by third-party companies.

electronic files

2.78:

Generic markup for

electronic

manuscripts

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Electronic Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.77 CLEANING UP ELECTRONIC FILES

List of Tables

Before editing the manuscript, the editor must be certain that the files represent the author's latest

Index

version (the presence of embedded revision marks may be a sign that this is not the case; see 2.36).

The next step is to get the electronic files ready to edit--if the publisher has not done this already. The

following checklist suggests a set of steps that can be adapted as necessary to become part of an

2.75:

editor's detailed electronic manuscript cleanup routine. Not all manuscripts will require each step,

Making backup

copies

and the suggested order need not be adhered to. Moreover, though many editors will want to

2.76:

automate at least some of these steps and perform them up front, most of the checklist can also be

Preparing to make

accomplished manually--that is, considered case by case, as part of the first read-through (see 2.50).

a clean, unedited

copy

Indeed, some of these steps will not lend themselves to wholesale transformation without first

2.77:

weighing the exceptions. (The value of performing this checklist up front is that any exceptions not

Cleaning up

electronic files

considered can be fixed later, in the first read-through. Nonetheless, beware of unintended

consequences, and always review--and be prepared to undo--any global change before saving a

2.78:

Generic markup for

permanent version of a file.) Finally, this checklist should be modified as needed to accord not only

electronic

manuscripts

with the requirements of a specific manuscript but also with those of the publisher. In general,

2.79:

automatic redlining should be turned off during these steps (see 2.81).

Software-generated

styles

1. Convert files for use in the editing software required by the publisher, if necessary.

2. If necessary, change the language settings of the manuscript and any subdocuments (e.g., from

British English to American English, or vice versa). This will ensure, among other things, that

the main dictionary gives appropriate suggestions.

3. For book-length works, which may arrive as a directory (or folder) of separate files for each

chapter and other components, assembling the text into a single electronic file can save a

significant amount of time. (Care must be taken to produce a complete manuscript, in the

proper order and with no inadvertent deletions; always double-check the beginning and ending

of each component and any notes thereto both when combining multiple files and when

breaking a single file into smaller components.) Another option is to use macros that work

across multiple files in a single directory.

4. Scroll through the whole manuscript (with the editing software set to display formatting and

any markup--including marks for such "invisible" elements as spaces and hard returns), looking

for and fixing any obvious conversion errors (e.g., with special characters) and formatting

problems (e.g., hard returns in the middle of a paragraph), with reference to the original

manuscript as necessary.

5. Identify any graphic elements and tables and handle appropriately--for example, moving

figures or tables to separate files (see 2.23, 2.27).

6. Apply tags or other codes, as required, to any elements that are easy to identify at the outset

(such as chapter titles, subheads, epigraphs, text extracts, poetry and stanza breaks, intentional

instances of extra line space that may require an ornament or other device, etc.) but whose

visual cues may be lost as the text is formatted. See also 2.78--80.

7. Delete or fix extraneous spaces and tabs, including instances of two or more consecutive spaces

(between sentences or anywhere else) or spaces or tabs at the ends of paragraphs. Multiple

spaces used to create first-line paragraph and other indents should be replaced either with tabs

or with software-defined indents (be consistent).

8. Change instances of multiple hard returns to single hard returns.

9. Change underlining to italics. Some underlining, however, may be intended to represent true

underscore--in, for example, a collection that transcribes handwritten letters; this should be

preserved, with a note to the publisher explaining the exception. See also 6.2.

10. Fix quotation marks and apostrophes; make sure that apostrophes at the beginning of words

are correct (e.g., 'em not â€˜em for "them"). But first determine, as applicable, that left and right

single quotation marks have not been used by the author to stand in for breathing marks or

other orthographic devices in transliterated languages (see chapter 11). See also 6.112, 6.114.

11. Fix commas and periods relative to quotation marks (see table 6.1).

12. Regularize em dashes and ellipses. For proper use of em dashes, see 6.82--89. For ellipses, see

13.48--56.

13. Replace hyphens between numerals with en dashes as appropriate. If you are using a macro to

do this, it may be more efficient to let the macro run and to fix or add any exceptions during

the first editing pass. For proper use of en dashes, see 6.78--81.

14. Convert footnotes to endnotes, or vice versa.

15. Delete any optional or conditional hyphens (i.e., software-dependent hyphens that allow words

to break across the end of a line whether or not the hyphenation feature is turned on). Most

word processors will allow you to search for these.

16. Find any lowercase els used as ones and any ohs (capital or lowercase) used as zeros--or vice

versa--and fix. This can be done by using pattern matching to search for two-character

combinations containing either an el or an oh next to an expression that will find any numeral.

17. Fix any other global inconsistencies that might be amenable to pattern-matching strategies. For

example, in a bibliography in which two- or three-letter initials in names have been closed up,

you can search for and evaluate capital letter combinations and replace as necessary with the

same combination plus a space (e.g., changing E.B. White to E. B. White).

18. Adjust line spacing, font, and margins as desired.

As a final step--assuming these steps have been applied before editing--save a backup copy of the

resulting clean, unedited manuscript.

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Electronic Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.78 GENERIC MARKUP FOR ELECTRONIC MANUSCRIPTS

List of Tables

Each element of a manuscript--chapter display, subheads, text, prose extracts, poetry, notes, captions,

Index

and so forth--must be identified using consistent markup. A common way of doing this is with

generic codes modeled on the descriptive identifiers used on pencil-edited manuscripts (see 2.96).

Generic codes should be enclosed in angle brackets (< >), curly brackets ({ }), or some other delimiters

2.76:

such that they can be systematically identified and replaced for publication by formal typesetting

Preparing to make

a clean, unedited

codes. (This generic application of delimiters must not be mistaken for the tags used in formal

copy

markup languages such as XML.) Except for codes meant to be replaced with a character or string of

2.77:

characters, they are usually applied at the beginning and end of each element to which they apply.

Cleaning up

electronic files

Publishers differ not only in what codes they recommend but also in what elements they code. Some

2.78:

require that every element be coded, including body text; others regard body text as a default. Most

Generic markup for

electronic

do not require codes for character-level formatting (e.g., italics, small capitals, boldface) because a

manuscripts

word-processing software's built-in formatting codes can be manipulated as necessary. Editors may

2.79:

need to invent codes for unusual elements. Consistency and accuracy are crucial. Moreover, editors

Software-generated

styles

must supply a complete list of codes with the manuscript. Some sample codes are as follows:

2.80:

Formal markup

<cn> . . . chapter number

languages

</cn>

<ct> . . . chapter title

</ct>

<a> . . .

first-level subhead (A-head)

</a>

<b> . . . second-level subhead (B-head)

</b>

<ext> . . . block quotation (prose extract)

</ext>

<po> . . . poetry extract

</po>

<note-a> first-level subhead in endnotes section

. . .

</note-

a>

<tdotb> t with dot below (i.e., when the Unicode

character for is not available in the

font being used to prepare the

manuscript; see 11.2)

<! . . . !> instruction to the typesetter--for example,

to consult hard copy or page image for

proper alignment or other formatting

The end tags--those that include a forward slash (/) and that indicate the end of a coded element--

may be unnecessary for elements that consist of an entire paragraph. Consult the publisher's or

typesetter's requirements. (For using a word processor's built-in styles, see 2.79; for formal markup

languages such as XML, see 2.80.)

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Electronic Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.79 SOFTWARE-GENERATED STYLES

List of Tables

Many word-processing programs allow users to apply named styles to the elements in a manuscript

Index

instead of, or in addition to, generic codes. Each style carries a unique name (included with the

software or defined by the user) and is applied either at the paragraph level or at the character level,

usually from a menu. (A "paragraph" is any string of text that follows a hard return and ends with a

2.77:

hard return.) Each paragraph style should have a descriptive name (e.g., "Chapter number," "Chapter

Cleaning up

electronic files

title," "First-level subhead," "Second-level subhead," "Body text," "Extract"). On the other hand, it is

2.78:

usually unnecessary to define styles at the character level: a word processor's built-in formatting

Generic markup for

options for italics, boldface, and so forth can be used instead. Type size, line spacing, and other

electronic

manuscripts

formatting options can be defined for each paragraph style as desired; it is helpful to be able to

2.79:

distinguish visually, for example, between different levels of subheads. On the other hand, accuracy

Software-generated

styles

and consistency in applying styles is more important than any formatting because the styles will

eventually be mapped to a design template for the published work. If there are any text elements that

2.80:

Formal markup

do not lend themselves easily to styles, it may be necessary to combine styles and generic codes with

languages

instructions or messages to the typesetter. A list of styles and any generic codes should always

2.81:

Tracking and

accompany the manuscript.

showing changes

(redlining)

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Electronic Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.80 FORMAL MARKUP LANGUAGES

List of Tables

Some manuscripts, especially those that will be published in electronic as well as printed form, may

Index

be written or edited in or converted to a formal markup language such as XML (extensible markup

language). In this type of markup, each element, including the document as a whole, is identified by a

pair of opening and closing tags according to the rules of the particular markup language. Tags are

2.78:

"nested"; for example, the body of the document, enclosed between an opening and a closing "body"

Generic markup for

electronic

tag, will include all sections and subsections of the document, with each of those parts also enclosed

manuscripts

between an opening and a closing tag that identify the element and its place in the hierarchy. The

2.79:

names of larger elements are typically used to indicate what the elements are rather than how they

Software-generated

styles

are to be presented; this practice streamlines subsequent presentation of the document in various

2.80:

forms. Smaller portions of text may be marked according to how they are to be presented (e.g., in

Formal markup

languages

italic type), though it is often better to mark such text instead according to the intent of the

presentation (e.g., emphasis). If editing takes place after conversion to a formal markup language, the

2.81:

Tracking and

editor can help to ensure that the tags have been applied correctly, usually with the help of tools

showing changes

(redlining)

designed to identify certain types of errors. For an extended discussion of formal markup languages,

2.82:

including XML, see appendix A.

Document

comparison

software

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Electronic Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.81 TRACKING AND SHOWING CHANGES (REDLINING)

List of Tables

To show their work and thus facilitate the author's review, many editors use the change-tracking

Index

feature available in some word processors and in some more specialized text-editing environments to

produce what is sometimes referred to as a redlined version (a name that invokes, in another

medium, the editor's red pencil). Depending on the software and a user's or publisher's preferences,

2.79:

material that has been changed--added, deleted, moved, reformatted--may appear in a variety of

Software-generated

styles

ways (see fig. 2.4). Added material, for example, may appear in red, underlined or double-

2.80:

underlined, shaded, or boldface--or some consistent combination thereof. Deleted material may

Formal markup

appear in a different color and be struck through, singly or doubly. (Care must be taken, however,

languages

that all editing marks remain legible on a black-and-white printout.) The editor may use a word

2.81:

Tracking and

processor's commenting function to make queries to the author (see 2.83). Whether all the editing,

showing changes

(redlining)

mechanical as well as substantive, is shown depends on a number of factors, including the editor's

and publisher's preferences. Some editors, for example, will prefer to alert the author to global

2.82:

Document

changes (such as capitalization of a certain term) the first time each such change is made and to show

comparison

software

only changes the author must approve individually. Certain adjustments should almost never be

2.83:

shown--for example, changes to margins or global changes to directional or "smart" quotation marks.

Inserting author

In general, most of the things listed on the cleanup checklist (see 2.77) may be done silently. If an

queries on

electronic

element such as a bibliography has been heavily edited, the editor may send a clean version of that

manuscripts

element for the author to approve, as well as a version showing the edits for reference. If changes are

not shown, the editor must let the author know what has been done to the manuscript (see 2.67).

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Electronic Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.82 DOCUMENT COMPARISON SOFTWARE

List of Tables

Document comparison software can highlight the differences between two versions of a document.

Index

Best results are had with shorter documents in which the latest version is compared against an earlier

version that has already been cleaned up and formatted (see 2.77). Comparing an edited document

against the author's original manuscript may result in too many changes being reported or, worse,

2.80:

may result in an unintelligible document. Editors should use document comparison software only

Formal markup

languages

occasionally--for example, to make sure they are working on the latest version of a document. For

2.81:

communicating changes to the author, which requires a more predictable presentation in which every

Tracking and

change is spelled out as clearly as possible, editors should instead track their changes as they edit (see

showing changes

(redlining)

2.81).

2.82:

Document

comparison

software

2.83:

Inserting author

queries on

electronic

manuscripts

2.84:

Retaining the

version of record

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Electronic Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.83 INSERTING AUTHOR QUERIES ON ELECTRONIC MANUSCRIPTS

List of Tables

Queries in electronic manuscripts may take one of several forms. Most word processors and

Index

specialized text editors include some sort of comment mechanism or syntax. Some editors instead use

the footnote function to enter their queries (see fig. 2.4). Alternatively, queries may be run in to the

text in an easily searchable form that will not be confused by humans or computers for any other

2.81:

element in the text (e.g., enclosed in brackets or other delimiters and appearing in boldface or some

Tracking and

showing changes

font not used elsewhere in the text). This latter method, especially, must be used with care to ensure

(redlining)

that such comments are deleted from the final manuscript; moreover, inserting more than a few in-

2.82:

text queries risks cluttering the run of text and making the author's review arduous.

Document

comparison

software

2.83:

Inserting author

queries on

electronic

manuscripts

2.84:

Retaining the

version of record

2.85:

The author's review

of the edited

manuscript

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Electronic Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.84 RETAINING THE VERSION OF RECORD

List of Tables

Many authors will prefer to review a printout of their edited manuscript, pencil in hand. Time and

Index

shipping can be saved by e-mailing a PDF of the edited manuscript for the author to print out--if the

publisher and author are amenable to this. One advantage of having the author review hard copy is

that the editor--whose job it is to produce the final manuscript--retains the version of record. In some

2.82:

cases, however, the author might instead be asked to review and return the editor's electronic files.

Document

comparison

Authors who do this must highlight their changes in such a way that they are distinct from the

software

editor's changes, and editors will want to consider password-protecting the edited manuscript from

2.83:

silent alteration. See also 2.68.

Inserting author

queries on

electronic

manuscripts

2.84:

Retaining the

version of record

2.85:

The author's review

of the edited

manuscript

2.86:

Preparing a final

electronic

manuscript

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Electronic Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.85 THE AUTHOR'S REVIEW OF THE EDITED MANUSCRIPT

List of Tables

Authors should mark their changes (or, if necessary, stets; see 2.127) in a bright color, fully legible, in

Index

upper- and lowercase. If the author adds more than a sentence or two, the new material may be

furnished either as a printout or in electronic form with a hard copy, but the printout or file must

contain only the new material; it must never be a revised form of the chapter or article, which could

2.83:

require a total reediting. (If a recalcitrant author were to do such a thing, an electronic comparison of

Inserting author

queries on

the author's revised version against the author's original final manuscript might save an editor from

electronic

manuscripts

having to do a total reedit; see 2.82.) The editor should make this procedure clear to the author when

sending the edited manuscript. Moreover, the editor should remind the author that a careful review at

2.84:

Retaining the

this stage will reduce the number of errors later, during proofreading.

version of record

2.85:

The author's review

of the edited

manuscript

2.86:

Preparing a final

electronic

manuscript

2.87:

Keeping a clean

copy of paper

manuscripts

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Electronic Editing

of Contents

List of Figures

2.86 PREPARING A FINAL ELECTRONIC MANUSCRIPT

List of Tables

Editors should double-check that all changes have been made and all queries resolved; that any

Index

markup has been consistently applied; and that a final spelling check has been performed (including a

check for mistakes that might fall outside the purview of a spelling checker--e.g., it's for its, led for

lead, breath for breathe). In addition, all changes tracked in the document must be resolved--either

2.84:

accepted or rejected--in the final electronic manuscript. Before sending the final manuscript to be

Retaining the

version of record

typeset, editors should archive at least one electronic copy. For proofreading purposes, publishers

2.85:

may also require a printout matching the final electronic manuscript. (Authors will sometimes be

The author's review

asked to proofread against the copy of the redlined, edited manuscript that they reviewed earlier to

of the edited

manuscript

ensure that their revisions made it into the typeset copy.)

2.86:

Preparing a final

electronic

manuscript

2.87:

Keeping a clean

copy of paper

manuscripts

2.88:

Marking

manuscripts on

paper

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Editing on Paper

of Contents

List of Figures

2.87 KEEPING A CLEAN COPY OF PAPER MANUSCRIPTS

List of Tables

An editor working on paper should always keep a clean copy of the unedited manuscript to refer to--

Index

or as a backup in case any reediting is necessary. If the paper copy is a printout of an electronic

manuscript, it is enough to archive a copy of the latter.

2.85:

The author's review

of the edited

manuscript

2.86:

Preparing a final

electronic

manuscript

2.87:

Keeping a clean

copy of paper

manuscripts

2.88:

Marking

manuscripts on

paper

2.89:

Marking author

queries on paper

manuscripts

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Editing on Paper

of Contents

List of Figures

2.88 MARKING MANUSCRIPTS ON PAPER

List of Tables

Editing a manuscript on paper--whether it is to be typeset from scratch or used to update the author's

Index

electronic manuscript--requires a technique that is similar to that of marking corrections on proofs

(see 2.116--29). To allow for the more extensive changes typical of the editing stage, however, paper

manuscripts are usually double-spaced so that editing can appear above the word or words it

2.86:

pertains to, rather than in the margin. (Manuscripts that consist of photocopies of tightly spaced

Preparing a final

electronic

previously published material are edited in the manner of page proofs.) All editorial changes should

manuscript

be made in a color that will reproduce clearly if the edited manuscript is photocopied or faxed, and

2.87:

the author should be asked to respond to the editing in a color distinct from that used by the editor.

Keeping a clean

copy of paper

For marking queries, see 2.89. For a sample of a correctly marked manuscript, see figure 2.5.

manuscripts

2.88:

Marking

manuscripts on

paper

2.89:

Marking author

queries on paper

manuscripts

2.90:

Three uses for

circling

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Editing on Paper

of Contents

List of Figures

2.89 MARKING AUTHOR QUERIES ON PAPER MANUSCRIPTS

List of Tables

In manuscripts edited on paper, queries are best written in the margin. When the author has

Index

responded, they can simply be crossed out. Chicago discourages the use of gummed slips for queries:

they cannot be easily photocopied, and they may have to be detached in the process of updating the

electronic files or (for paper-only manuscripts) typesetting the final pages (and thus may no longer be

2.87:

in place when the pencil-edited manuscript is sent back to the author with the proofs). For more

Keeping a clean

copy of paper

extensive queries that require more space than the margin affords, a separate sheet, keyed by letter or

manuscripts

symbol to a specific place in the manuscript, may be prepared.

2.88:

Marking

manuscripts on

paper

2.89:

Marking author

queries on paper

manuscripts

2.90:

Three uses for

circling

2.91:

Inserting, deleting,

and substituting

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Editing on Paper

of Contents

List of Figures

2.90 THREE USES FOR CIRCLING

List of Tables

Circling has three meanings on a manuscript. (1) Circling a number or an abbreviation in the text

Index

means that the element is to be spelled out. If a number can be spelled out in different ways, or if an

abbreviation could possibly be misconstrued, the editor should write out the form required. (2)

Circling a comma or a colon means that a period is to replace the comma or colon; when a period is

2.88:

inserted by hand, it should be circled so it will not be missed by whoever is updating or typesetting

Marking

manuscripts on

the manuscript. (3) Circling a marginal comment shows that the comment is not to be set in type (or

paper

incorporated into the manuscript) but is either a query to the author or an instruction for typesetting

2.89:

or updating the manuscript.

Marking author

queries on paper

manuscripts

2.90:

Three uses for

circling

2.91:

Inserting, deleting,

and substituting

2.92:

Adding, deleting,

or transposing

punctuation

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Editing on Paper

of Contents

List of Figures

2.91 INSERTING, DELETING, AND SUBSTITUTING

List of Tables

A regular caret (â‹€), used to indicate an insertion point for added text but also used to indicate

Index

subscripts (and, similarly, to indicate an added comma), should be carefully distinguished from an

inverted caret (â‹), used to mark superscripts, apostrophes, and the like. But, in general, do not use a

caret to indicate added text that is being substituted for deleted text; simply cross out the deleted text

2.89:

and write the text to be substituted above it. See fig. 2.5.

Marking author

queries on paper

manuscripts

2.90:

Three uses for

circling

2.91:

Inserting, deleting,

and substituting

2.92:

Adding, deleting,

or transposing

punctuation

2.93:

Marking dashes and

hyphens

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Editing on Paper

of Contents

List of Figures

2.92 ADDING, DELETING, OR TRANSPOSING PUNCTUATION

List of Tables

Special attention should be paid to punctuation when words are transposed or deleted; the new

Index

position of commas, periods, and the like must be clearly shown. Likewise, any punctuation at the

beginning or end of text marked for transposition must be clearly marked for deletion or inclusion, as

the case may be. More generally, any added or changed punctuation should be clearly marked--for

2.90:

example, by circling an added period, placing a caret over an added comma, or placing an inverted

Three uses for

circling

caret under added quotation marks. If necessary, write (and circle) "colon," "exclamation point," or

2.91:

whatever applies, either in the margin or close to the punctuation change.

Inserting, deleting,

and substituting

2.92:

Adding, deleting,

or transposing

punctuation

2.93:

Marking dashes and

hyphens

2.94:

Capitalizing,

lowercasing, and

marking for italics

or boldface

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Editing on Paper

of Contents

List of Figures

2.93 MARKING DASHES AND HYPHENS

List of Tables

Two hyphens with no space between or on either side clearly signal em dashes and need not be

Index

marked on a paper-only manuscript. Actual em dashes, which may be mistaken for en dashes in

some typefaces, should be marked. Two- or three-em dashes, even if consistently typed, should also

be marked, as should en dashes, which might be mistaken for hyphens. Alternatively, a global

2.91:

instruction may be issued--for example, "all hyphens between inclusive numbers are to be set as en

Inserting, deleting,

and substituting

dashes." End-of-line hyphens should be marked to distinguish between soft (i.e., conditional, or

2.92:

"optional") and hard hyphens. Soft hyphens are those hyphens that are invoked only to break a word

Adding, deleting,

at the end of a line; hard hyphens are permanent (such as those in cul-de-sac) and must remain no

or transposing

punctuation

matter where the hyphenated word or term appears. See also 2.12.

2.93:

Marking dashes and

hyphens

2.94:

Capitalizing,

lowercasing, and

marking for italics

or boldface

2.95:

Marking paragraph

indention, flush

left or right, and

vertical spacing

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Editing on Paper

of Contents

List of Figures

2.94 CAPITALIZING, LOWERCASING, AND MARKING FOR ITALICS OR BOLDFACE

List of Tables

To indicate that a lowercase letter should be capitalized, triple underline it; to make it a small capital,

Index

double underline it. To lowercase a capital letter, run a slanted line through it. To mark for italics,

underscore the word(s) to be italicized with a straight line; for boldface, make the underscoring wavy.

For manuscripts that are to be typeset from scratch, there is usually no need to underline words that

2.92:

appear in italics in the manuscript, as long as the typesetter is instructed to italicize them. (Italics in

Adding, deleting,

or transposing

some fonts are difficult to distinguish at a glance; underlining may reduce the incidence of missed

punctuation

italics.) If an author has used both underlining and italics, special instructions are needed (see 2.14).

2.93:

For mathematical copy, see 12.61--67.

Marking dashes and

hyphens

2.94:

Capitalizing,

lowercasing, and

marking for italics

or boldface

2.95:

Marking paragraph

indention, flush

left or right, and

vertical spacing

2.96:

Marking, or coding,

elements on a

paper manuscript

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Editing on Paper

of Contents

List of Figures

2.95 MARKING PARAGRAPH INDENTION, FLUSH LEFT OR RIGHT, AND VERTICAL SPACING

List of Tables

Use a three-sided rectangular mark to indicate that text or other elements should be moved to the left

Index

( ) or to the right ( ). A line may be drawn from the open side of the mark to the element to be

moved (see fig. 2.5). To indicate paragraph indention, use the symbol ¶. To mark vertical space, use a

rectangular mark that "points" up ( ) or down ( ); adjust the width to accommodate the element. To

2.93:

indicate a blank line, write "one-line #" and circle it. (In typographic usage the sign # means space, not

Marking dashes and

hyphens

number.)

2.94:

Capitalizing,

lowercasing, and

marking for italics

or boldface

2.95:

Marking paragraph

indention, flush

left or right, and

vertical spacing

2.96:

Marking, or coding,

elements on a

paper manuscript

2.97:

What is

proofreading?

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Manuscript Editing >> The Mechanics of Editing on Paper

of Contents

List of Figures

2.96 MARKING, OR CODING, ELEMENTS ON A PAPER MANUSCRIPT

List of Tables

Indications of elements on a paper manuscript--chapter number and title, subheads, prose extracts,

Index

poetry, and so forth--are circled and placed at the beginning of the element or in the margin next to

it. For example, a circled "A" may be used to indicate a first-level subhead (see fig. 2.5). For these and

other elements that need coding, and for examples of codes, see 2.78. See also 2.90.

2.94:

Capitalizing,

lowercasing, and

marking for italics

or boldface

2.95:

Marking paragraph

indention, flush

left or right, and

vertical spacing

2.96:

Marking, or coding,

elements on a

paper manuscript

2.97:

What is

proofreading?

2.98:

Who should

proofread?

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

2.97 WHAT IS PROOFREADING?

List of Tables

Proofreading is the process of reading a text and scrutinizing all its components to find errors and

Index

mark them for correction. Each major stage of a manuscript intended for publication--especially the

final version the author submits to the publisher and, later, the copyedited version of the same--is

generally proofread. Proofreading here, however, applies to the review of the manuscript after it has

2.95:

been converted to its final form--for example, the typeset and (usually) paginated pages of a printed

Marking paragraph

indention, flush

book or journal article (referred to as proofs or proof), or the full-text format of an electronic book or

left or right, and

vertical spacing

journal article--but before publication. Also subject to a proofreading stage are covers and jackets or

other packaging and electronic components such as navigational aids that frame an electronic

2.96:

Marking, or coding,

publication. For an illustration of how the stages described in this chapter fit into the overall

elements on a

paper manuscript

publishing process for books and journals, see the outline at 2.2. For proofreading electronic

2.97:

publications, see 2.133--36.

What is

proofreading?

2.98:

Who should

proofread?

2.99:

Proofreading

schedule

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

2.98 WHO SHOULD PROOFREAD?

List of Tables

For the majority of publications, authors are considered the primary proofreaders, and it is they who

Index

bear final responsibility for any errors in the published work. To help mitigate this responsibility, a

professional proofreader may be hired by either the author or the publisher. Moreover, the

manuscript editor and book designer and other publishing personnel generally ensure that the

2.96:

author's corrections (and those of any other proofreader) are successfully incorporated into the work

Marking, or coding,

elements on a

before it gets published and that all related materials (promotional copy, website apparatus, etc.) are

paper manuscript

free of errors and inconsistencies.

2.97:

What is

proofreading?

2.98:

Who should

proofread?

2.99:

Proofreading

schedule

2.100:

Keeping a record

of each

proofreading stage

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

2.99 PROOFREADING SCHEDULE

List of Tables

Since many people are involved in the production of a book, a few days' delay in returning proofs to

Index

the publisher or typesetter can cause a major delay in publication. When the time scheduled for

proofreading appears to conflict with the demands of accuracy, or if any other problem arises that

might affect the schedule, the proofreader should immediately confer with the publisher. For journals,

2.97:

where there is little room for delays of any kind, proofreading deadlines are generally nonnegotiable.

What is

proofreading?

See also 2.2.

2.98:

Who should

proofread?

2.99:

Proofreading

schedule

2.100:

Keeping a record

of each

proofreading stage

2.101:

First proofs and

"galley" proofs

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Stages of Proof

of Contents

List of Figures

2.100 KEEPING A RECORD OF EACH PROOFREADING STAGE

List of Tables

A record must be kept by the publisher of when each stage of proof has been corrected and by

Index

whom. For printed books, the best record for the first proofreading stage is a master set--usually the

laser printout read and marked for corrections by the author and marked with additional corrections

by the publisher and any others who have read or reviewed the master set or copies thereof. (Some

2.98:

publishers send a duplicate set of page proofs to the author and then transfer the author's corrections

Who should

proofread?

to the master set.) At the next stage, revised proofs are usually reviewed by the publisher, who retains

2.99:

the master set and a record of each additional round of corrections until the work has been

Proofreading

published. For electronic publications, the author and other proofreaders should each be required to

schedule

sign off before a corrected version is delivered for further review. Likewise, for covers and jackets or

2.100:

Keeping a record

other packaging, each person assigned to proofread should be required to sign off on the

of each

proofreading stage

proofreading copy before a corrected version is routed for further review.

2.101:

First proofs and

"galley" proofs

2.102:

Revised proofs

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Stages of Proof

of Contents

List of Figures

2.101 FIRST PROOFS AND "GALLEY" PROOFS

List of Tables

The author and sometimes a designated proofreader read the first proofreading copy ( first proofs or

Index

first pages), usually against the edited manuscript (see 2.107). For books, an index may be prepared

from this first set of page proofs, either by the author or by a professional indexer (see chapter 16).

For some complex book-length works, first proofs are issued in the form of "galleys." Strictly

2.99:

speaking, the term galley proofs is an anachronism, dating from the era when printers would arrange

Proofreading

schedule

type into "galleys" from which long, narrow prints were prepared to proofread or edit type before the

2.100:

arduous task of composing it, by hand, into the form of book pages. Today, if a complex project

Keeping a record

presents a danger of extensive corrections at the page-proof stage, a publisher might request galley

of each

proofreading stage

proofs (loosely paginated and with or without such elements as illustrations in place), since

2.101:

corrections to galleys will not entail having to redo page references in an index. These galleys are

First proofs and

"galley" proofs

generated from the same electronic files as first proofs would be. (As an alternative to the galley

stage, publishers might choose to undertake a proofreading of the final electronic manuscript.) The

2.102:

Revised proofs

index is prepared not from the galleys, since pagination is not final, but from the "first" proofs that are

2.103:

issued at the next stage.

Index proofs

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Stages of Proof

of Contents

List of Figures

2.102 REVISED PROOFS

List of Tables

After corrections to the first proofs have been made, the revisions must be checked to be sure all

Index

corrections have been made accurately. For print publications, this usually involves comparing a set

of revised proofs for all pages against the first set (now known as "foul" proofs). These revised proofs

should also be checked for any other differences between them and the first proofs and to make sure

2.100:

hyphenation errors or other page makeup problems have not been introduced. If the typesetter has

Keeping a record

of each

circled or bracketed or otherwise indicated any changes to page makeup resulting from the

proofreading stage

corrections, the proofreader can check revised proofs more efficiently. Any corrections that have

2.101:

resulted in repagination may require adjustment to page references in the index. To maintain a

First proofs and

"galley" proofs

proper record, nothing must be marked on the foul proofs at this stage; any further corrections must

2.102:

be marked only on the revised set. Any additional rounds of revision should be kept to a minimum.

Revised proofs

2.103:

Index proofs

2.104:

Prepress and press

proofs

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Stages of Proof

of Contents

List of Figures

2.103 INDEX PROOFS

List of Tables

Most indexes are prepared from the paginated first set of proofs (unless they reference paragraph

Index

numbers rather than page numbers, in which case they can be prepared from the final manuscript).

Indexes must be proofread quickly, in the same time that the revisions to the first proofs are being

checked. For the sake of efficiency, editors rather than authors usually proofread indexes. For a full

2.101:

discussion of indexes, see chapter 16.

First proofs and

"galley" proofs

2.102:

Revised proofs

2.103:

Index proofs

2.104:

Prepress and press

proofs

2.105:

Book cover and

jacket proofs

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Stages of Proof

of Contents

List of Figures

2.104 PREPRESS AND PRESS PROOFS

List of Tables

For works that will be printed and bound, publishers usually review prepress proofs. Prepress proofs

Index

present an inexpensive image of what will come off the printing press--generated either from

negative film or, more commonly, from electronic files. (The final typesetter's files--usually PDF--can

generally be considered equivalent to prepress proofs.) These proofs--a "now or never" opportunity to

2.102:

look at what will be published, before ink is committed to paper--are normally checked for

Revised proofs

completeness of contents; page sequence; margins; location, sizing, position, and cropping (if any) of

2.103:

Index proofs

illustrations; and, for contact proofs made from film, any spots or smudges. For reasons of press

2.104:

schedule and expense, publishers will generally allow only the correction of grave errors at this stage,

Prepress and press

such as an incorrect title or a misspelled author's name. One additional look--at actual press sheets,

proofs

folded and gathered into the proper page sequence (and called F&Gs)--is sometimes also granted

2.105:

Book cover and

book and journal publishers. (Press sheets that include full-color illustrations are occasionally sent to

jacket proofs

the publisher to approve before the entire work is printed.) By the time the publisher sees a complete

2.106:

set of F&Gs, copies of the work are off the press and may be in the bindery. Since any correction at

Journal cover

proofs

this stage would involve reprinting an entire signature, the publisher may prefer to turn a blind eye.

See also 1.65.

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Stages of Proof

of Contents

List of Figures

2.105 BOOK COVER AND JACKET PROOFS

List of Tables

Jackets and covers are the most viewed part of any printed book. Whereas most publishers (and

Index

authors) will live, if not happily, with the inevitable typo inside a book, an error on the cover is liable

to halt the presses. Proofs of die copy--author's name, title, publisher's imprint, and any other matter

to be stamped on the spine or cover of a hardbound book--should therefore be checked with extreme

2.103:

care. Likewise, proofs of jacket copy and paperback cover copy should be read and checked word for

Index proofs

word (if not letter by letter), with special attention paid as follows:

2.104:

Prepress and press

proofs

Anything on the cover should be consistent with the interior of the work in content and style.

2.105:

For example, the author's name and the title of the work--everywhere they appear, including

Book cover and

jacket proofs

cover, spine, and jacket flaps--must match those on the title page of the book (though the

2.106:

subtitle may be omitted from the cover or jacket). An author's full name is sometimes shortened

Journal cover

in the running text of flap copy.

proofs

2.107:

Biographical material on the author should be checked against any biographical material inside

Proofreading

the book, though the wording need not be identical.

against copy

If the work is part of a series or a multivolume set, the series title or volume number must

match its counterpart inside the book.

The price (if it is to appear), the ISBN, and any necessary credit line for a photograph of the

author or for artwork used on the cover or jacket must be verified.

Jacket and cover proofs and each stage of revisions thereto should be reviewed by everyone involved

in the production of the book--including authors, editors, designers, and marketing personnel.

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Stages of Proof

of Contents

List of Figures

2.106 JOURNAL COVER PROOFS

List of Tables

Although the elements that appear on the covers of academic journals vary considerably, the

Index

following suggestions should apply to most journals. The front cover (called cover 1) must be checked

carefully to ensure that elements that change with each issue, such as the volume and issue numbers

and the month, date, or season of publication, are accurate and up to date. The spine must be

2.104:

similarly checked. If the contents of the issue are listed on cover 1, they must be checked against the

Prepress and press

proofs

interior to be sure that authors' names and article titles match exactly and, for journals that publish

2.105:

various types of articles, that articles have been listed in the correct section of the journal. If inclusive

Book cover and

page numbers appear on the spine, these must be verified. The inside of the front cover (cover 2)

jacket proofs

often includes subscription prices and information on how to subscribe, names of editors and

2.106:

Journal cover

members of the editorial board, or copyright information; all such information must be checked.

proofs

Covers 3 (inside of back cover) and 4 (back cover) may contain advertisements, instructions to

2.107:

authors on submitting articles, or a list of articles to appear in future issues. They all must be verified

Proofreading

against copy

by the proofreader.

2.108:

Proofreading for

spelling errors

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Proofread and What to Look For

of Contents

List of Figures

2.107 PROOFREADING AGAINST COPY

List of Tables

In proofreading parlance, copy refers to the edited manuscript. Proofs should be checked against the

Index

version of the manuscript that contains the author's final changes and responses to queries (see 2.69).

In the event that the page proofs were typeset from a paper-only manuscript, the proofreader must

read word for word against the edited manuscript, noting all punctuation, paragraphing,

2.105:

capitalization, italics, and so forth and ensuring that any handwritten editing has been correctly

Book cover and

jacket proofs

interpreted by the typesetter. Likewise, any element in an otherwise electronic manuscript that has

2.106:

been set from edited hard copy (e.g., math or tables) should be proofread carefully against the hard

Journal cover

copy. Whether type has been set from electronic files or from paper, the proofreader must mark only

proofs

the proofs, never the manuscript, which is now known as "dead" (or "foul") copy. To assign

2.107:

Proofreading

responsibility for error correctly (see 2.131), the manuscript as earlier approved by the author must be

against copy

kept intact. For checking revised proofs, see 2.102.

2.108:

Proofreading for

spelling errors

2.109:

Checking word

breaks

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Proofread and What to Look For

of Contents

List of Figures

2.108 PROOFREADING FOR SPELLING ERRORS

List of Tables

The proofreader should remain alert for the kind of errors that are typically missed by computerized

Index

systems for checking spelling--from common typos such as it's where its is meant or out where our is

meant, to more subtle errors like lead for led or breath for breathe--as well as other misspellings. (See

also 2.86.) The manuscript editor's style sheet (see 2.52) may be a useful reference. Note that a change

2.106:

to the spelling of a particular term should never be indicated globally; instead, each change must be

Journal cover

proofs

marked throughout the manuscript.

2.107:

Proofreading

against copy

2.108:

Proofreading for

spelling errors

2.109:

Checking word

breaks

2.110:

Checking typeface

and font

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Proofread and What to Look For

of Contents

List of Figures

2.109 CHECKING WORD BREAKS

List of Tables

End-of-line hyphenation should be checked, especially in proper names and foreign terms. The first

Index

set of proofs is usually the first time that words have been divided, conditionally, at the ends of lines.

Chicago recommends the word breaks given in Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary (see

bibliog. 3.1). (There are electronic dictionaries, including Webster's, that can be used in conjunction

2.107:

with automated typesetting systems.) For words or names not listed in a dictionary, a liberal

Proofreading

against copy

approach is advisable, since formal usage varies widely and any change requested may entail further

2.108:

breaks or create tight or loose lines (lines with too little or too much space between words). Such

Proofreading for

problems may be avoided if a list of nondictionary words and their preferred hyphenation (or an

spelling errors

editor's style sheet if it includes this information) is submitted to the typesetter along with the

2.109:

Checking word

manuscript. When it is a question of an intelligible but nonstandard word break for a line that would

breaks

otherwise be too loose or too tight, the nonstandard break (such as the hyphenation of an already

2.110:

hyphenated term) may be preferred. No more than three succeeding lines should end in a hyphen

Checking typeface

and font

(see 7.43). See also 2.12, 7.31--43. For dividing URLs at the ends of lines, see 7.42.

2.111:

Checking and

proofreading page

numbers and

running heads

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Proofread and What to Look For

of Contents

List of Figures

2.110 CHECKING TYPEFACE AND FONT

List of Tables

Each element in proofs--for example, chapter numbers and titles, subheads, text, extracts, figure

Index

captions--should be checked to ensure that it is presented in a consistent typeface and style in

accordance with the design for the publication. Heads and subheads, in particular, should be checked

for the typographic style assigned to their level (see 2.17, 2.56), and all set-off material (excerpts,

2.108:

poetry, equations, etc.) should be checked for font, size, and indention. All material in italics,

Proofreading for

spelling errors

boldface, small capitals, or any font different from that of the surrounding text should be looked at to

2.109:

be sure the new font starts and stops as intended. Note that the conversion of electronic manuscript

Checking word

files into typeset pages or full-text electronic presentations can result in unexpected errors, such as the

breaks

dropping or transmutation of a special character throughout the work or the inadvertent

2.110:

Checking typeface

incorporation of a comment or other "invisible" electronic material into the text. For a systematic error,

and font

it may be preferable to indicate a single, or "global," instruction for making the change--to avoid

2.111:

cluttering the proofs with corrections of each instance. When a systemic problem is identified--

Checking and

proofreading page

especially one on proofs for a printed work that will affect pagination across more than a few pages

numbers and

running heads

and therefore the index--the publisher should be alerted immediately in case new first proofs are

2.112:

needed.

Checking and

proofreading

illustrations and

tables

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Proofread and What to Look For

of Contents

List of Figures

2.111 CHECKING AND PROOFREADING PAGE NUMBERS AND RUNNING HEADS

List of Tables

Page numbers and running heads must be checked to ensure that they are present where they are

Index

supposed to be and absent where they are not (see 1.5--8, 1.9--15, 2.73), that the correct page number

appears following a blank page, and that the typesetter has followed instructions as to what should

appear on a recto, a verso, or a double-page spread. Running heads must be both proofread and

2.109:

checked for placement. For running heads to endnotes, the page numbers may need to be verified or

Checking word

breaks

supplied by checking the text pages the notes pertain to (see 1.14).

2.110:

Checking typeface

and font

2.111:

Checking and

proofreading page

numbers and

running heads

2.112:

Checking and

proofreading

illustrations and

tables

2.113:

Checking overall

appearance

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Proofread and What to Look For

of Contents

List of Figures

2.112 CHECKING AND PROOFREADING ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

List of Tables

The proofreader must verify that all illustrations appear in the right location in the text, in the right

Index

size, right side up, not "flopped" (turned over left to right, resulting in a mirror image) or distorted,

and with their own captions. Captions should be read as carefully as the text. Tables must be

proofread both for content and for alignment. Where an illustration or a table occupies a full page, no

2.110:

running head or page number should appear; but if several full pages of illustrations or tables appear

Checking typeface

and font

in sequence, the proofreader may request that page numbers, and sometimes running heads as well,

2.111:

be added to better orient readers (see 1.15). For a table presented as a two-page broadside, the

Checking and

proofreader should make sure it falls on facing pages (i.e., verso and recto; see also 3.85). If there are

proofreading page

numbers and

lists of illustrations and tables, all captions and titles should be checked against the lists, and page

running heads

numbers must be verified or added.

2.112:

Checking and

proofreading

illustrations and

tables

2.113:

Checking overall

appearance

2.114:

Checking facing

pages for text

alignment

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Proofread and What to Look For

of Contents

List of Figures

2.113 CHECKING OVERALL APPEARANCE

List of Tables

For printed works, each page or, better, each pair of facing pages should be checked for length (see

Index

2.114), vertical spacing, position of running heads and page numbers, and so forth. Conformity to the

design specifications must be verified. Such apparent impairments as fuzzy type, incomplete letters,

and blocks of type that appear lighter or darker than the surrounding text may be due to poor

2.111:

photocopying or a faulty printout. If in doubt, the proofreader may query "Type OK?" or "Too dark?"

Checking and

proofreading page

Four or more consecutive lines that end with a hyphen or the same word should be pointed out and,

numbers and

running heads

if possible, appropriate adjustments indicated. A page should not begin with the last line of a

paragraph unless it is full measure. (A page can, however, end with the first line of a new paragraph.)

2.112:

Checking and

Nor should the last word in any paragraph be broken--that is, hyphenated, with the last part of the

proofreading

illustrations and

word beginning a new line. To correct any of these occurrences, page length may be adjusted. (A

tables

short last line of a paragraph carried over to the top of a page is sometimes referred to as a "widow";

2.113:

when the first line of a paragraph appears at the bottom of a page, it is sometimes called an

Checking overall

appearance

"orphan.")

2.114:

Checking facing

pages for text

alignment

2.115:

Proofreading for

sense

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Proofread and What to Look For

of Contents

List of Figures

2.114 CHECKING FACING PAGES FOR TEXT ALIGNMENT

List of Tables

Although facing pages of text must align, it is usually acceptable for both pages to run a line long or

Index

short to avoid widows (see 2.113) or to accommodate corrections. For example, if a correction on page

68 requires an added line, the typesetter may be asked to add space above a subhead on page 69 so

that the two pages wind up the same length. Type can sometimes be rerun more loosely or more

2.112:

tightly to add ( save) or eliminate ( lose) a line.

Checking and

proofreading

illustrations and

tables

2.113:

Checking overall

appearance

2.114:

Checking facing

pages for text

alignment

2.115:

Proofreading for

sense

2.116:

Proofreaders' marks

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Proofread and What to Look For

of Contents

List of Figures

2.115 PROOFREADING FOR SENSE

List of Tables

The proofreader must query--or correct, if possible--illogical, garbled, repeated, or missing text. Any

Index

rewriting, however, must be limited to the correction of fact or of gross syntactical error, since all

source checking and substantive and stylistic changes should have been done at the editing stage.

Changes that would alter page makeup across more than a couple of pages in printed works should

2.113:

be avoided, since repagination not only is expensive but, for books, can affect the index.

Checking overall

appearance

2.114:

Checking facing

pages for text

alignment

2.115:

Proofreading for

sense

2.116:

Proofreaders' marks

2.117:

Where to mark

proofs

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Mark Proofs

of Contents

List of Figures

2.116 PROOFREADERS' MARKS

List of Tables

The marks explained in the following paragraphs and illustrated in figures 2.6 and 2.7 are commonly

Index

understood by typesetters and other publishing and printing personnel working in English.

Moreover, these marks and conventions form the basis of online proofreading tools (though paper

remains the gold standard for proofreading--especially for book-length works). Other instructions

2.114:

provided by printers and publishers are unlikely to differ substantially from what is given here. Note

Checking facing

pages for text

that all verbal instructions to the typesetter are best circled (see 2.118).

alignment

2.115:

Proofreading for

sense

2.116:

Proofreaders' marks

2.117:

Where to mark

proofs

2.118:

Circling comments

and instructions

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Mark Proofs

of Contents

List of Figures

2.117 WHERE TO MARK PROOFS

List of Tables

Corrections to proofs must always be written in the margin, left or right, next to the line concerned. A

Index

mark must also be placed in the text--a caret for an addition, a line through a letter or word to be

deleted or replaced--to indicate where a correction is to be made. Never should a correction be

written between the lines, where it could be missed. If a line requires two or more corrections, these

2.115:

should be marked in the margin in the order in which they occur, separated by | s (see fig. 2.7). A

Proofreading for

sense

guideline or an arrow should be used only when a correction cannot be written next to the line in

2.116:

which it occurs.

Proofreaders' marks

2.117:

Where to mark

proofs

2.118:

Circling comments

and instructions

2.119:

Communicating

extensive changes

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Mark Proofs

of Contents

List of Figures

2.118 CIRCLING COMMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS

List of Tables

As with queries and instructions handwritten on a paper manuscript (see 2.90), verbal instructions

Index

written on proofs--such as "see attached typescript" or "ital" or "rom"--should be circled. Such circling

indicates that these are instructions and that the words and abbreviations themselves should not be

incorporated into the actual work.

2.116:

Proofreaders' marks

2.117:

Where to mark

proofs

2.118:

Circling comments

and instructions

2.119:

Communicating

extensive changes

2.120:

Making marks

legible

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Mark Proofs

of Contents

List of Figures

2.119 COMMUNICATING EXTENSIVE CHANGES

List of Tables

Wherever the marks required to fix a line or two threaten to become byzantine, cross out the whole

Index

passage and rewrite it correctly in the margin. If there is not enough room in the margin, make a

separate document and include it with the proofs; the insertion point should be indicated in both

places. To avoid repagination of print works, every effort must be made to match the word count of

2.117:

new material to that of the old. For material to be transposed from one page to another, circle or

Where to mark

proofs

otherwise mark the passage and make a note in the margin; clearly mark the new location and make

2.118:

a note in that margin as well. Most types of global changes should be marked individually to ensure

Circling comments

that each change is made correctly (see also 2.110).

and instructions

2.119:

Communicating

extensive changes

2.120:

Making marks

legible

2.121:

Marking copy for

deletion

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Mark Proofs

of Contents

List of Figures

2.120 MAKING MARKS LEGIBLE

List of Tables

All corrections must be written clearly (such that they can be spotted at a glance) in upper- and

Index

lowercase letters. Red proof markings are often preferred for visibility, but any color will do as long

as the proofreader's corrections are distinct from any made by the publisher or typesetter. Either a

pen or a pencil may be used; in either case, the proofreader must be prepared to eradicate unwanted

2.118:

marks. Messy corrections may lead to further errors; indistinct corrections may be overlooked. If a

Circling comments

and instructions

small number of late-stage, hand-marked corrections to proofs must be transmitted to the typesetter

2.119:

electronically, the marks must be dark enough to scan or fax clearly, and they must not extend to the

Communicating

edges of the paper lest they be incomplete on the recipient's copy.

extensive changes

2.120:

Making marks

legible

2.121:

Marking copy for

deletion

2.122:

Adding or deleting

space between

letters or words

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Mark Proofs

of Contents

List of Figures

2.121 MARKING COPY FOR DELETION

List of Tables

To remove a letter, a word, or more, draw a diagonal line through a letter or a straight line through a

Index

word or phrase and write the delete mark (see fig. 2.6) in the margin. No part of the text should be

obliterated, and a punctuation mark that is to be removed should be circled rather than crossed

through, so that it is still visible. The form of the delete mark in the margin need not be exactly as

2.119:

shown in figure 2.6, but it should be made in such a way as not to be confused with a d, an e, or an l.

Communicating

extensive changes

The mark for "delete and close up" should be used when a letter or a hyphen is deleted from within a

2.120:

word, or, in the case of longer deletions, when the material that remains is to be joined with no

Making marks

intervening space. The delete mark is used only when something is to be removed. When something

legible

is to be substituted for the deleted matter, only the substitution is written in the margin next to the

2.121:

Marking copy for

line or lines that have been struck through (see fig. 2.7).

deletion

2.122:

Adding or deleting

space between

letters or words

2.123:

Indicating changes

to paragraphing or

indention

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Mark Proofs

of Contents

List of Figures

2.122 ADDING OR DELETING SPACE BETWEEN LETTERS OR WORDS

List of Tables

All words in the same line should be separated by the same amount of space, though the spacing will

Index

vary from line to line in justified setting. When word spaces within a line are unequal, insert carets in

the problem areas of the text and write the equal-space mark (eq #) in the margin. To delete space

between letters or words, use the close-up mark (see fig. 2.6) in the text as well as in the margin. To

2.120:

call for more space between words or letters, insert a | in the text where the space is to be inserted

Making marks

legible

and make a space mark (#) in the margin. The space mark is also used to show where more vertical

2.121:

space (or leading, a term derived from the lead that was used in hot-metal typesetting) is needed

Marking copy for

between lines. See also 2.95.

deletion

2.122:

Adding or deleting

space between

letters or words

2.123:

Indicating changes

to paragraphing or

indention

2.124:

Indicating

adjustments to

position or

alignment

(justification)

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Mark Proofs

of Contents

List of Figures

2.123 INDICATING CHANGES TO PARAGRAPHING OR INDENTION

List of Tables

To indicate a new paragraph, insert an L-shaped mark in the text to the left and partly under the

Index

word that is to begin a new paragraph and write the paragraph mark (Â¶) in the margin. To run two

paragraphs together, draw a line in the text from the end of one paragraph to the beginning of the

next and write "run in" in the margin. To indent a line one em space (see A.22) from the left or right

2.121:

margin, draw a small square (â–¡) to the left of the material to be indented and repeat the square in

Marking copy for

deletion

the margin. To indent two or more ems, draw a rectangle divided into two or more squares. To repeat

2.122:

the indention for more than one consecutive line, draw a line down from the square to the level of the

Adding or deleting

baseline of the last affected line.

space between

letters or words

2.123:

Indicating changes

to paragraphing or

indention

2.124:

Indicating

adjustments to

position or

alignment

(justification)

2.125:

Marking items to

be transposed

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Mark Proofs

of Contents

List of Figures

2.124 INDICATING ADJUSTMENTS TO POSITION OR ALIGNMENT (JUSTIFICATION)

List of Tables

If a line of type, a title, an item in a table, or any other text appears too far to the left or right, use the

Index

marks for moving type right ( ) or left ( ). If text that is supposed to be centered appears not to be,

use both marks (

)--one on each side--to indicate centering. Use the marks for moving type up ( )

or down ( ) when something appears vertically out of place. All these marks must be inserted in the

2.122:

text as well as in the margin. To indicate that an indented line of type should start flush left (at the

Adding or deleting

space between

left-hand margin), insert a move-left ( ) mark at the left of the first word in that line and write "fl"

letters or words

(flush left) in the margin, circled (see fig. 2.7). To indicate that an element should appear flush right--

2.123:

or that a line of type should be justified at the right margin--do the same thing but with the move-

Indicating changes

to paragraphing or

right ( ) mark and marginal "fr" (flush right) or "justify." Finally, to indicate inaccurate alignment in

indention

tabular matter, use the mark for vertical alignment (||) or horizontal alignment (==), as the case may

2.124:

Indicating

be. To apply any of these marks to more than one consecutive line, make the mark long enough to

adjustments to

encompass each affected line.

position or

alignment

(justification)

2.125:

Marking items to

be transposed

2.126:

Marking items to

be spelled out

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Mark Proofs

of Contents

List of Figures

2.125 MARKING ITEMS TO BE TRANSPOSED

List of Tables

To move letters, words, or phrases from one place to another, circumscribe them in a way that

Index

precisely demarcates the items (including any punctuation) to be interchanged and write and circle

"tr" (transpose) in the margin (see fig. 2.7). For transposition of larger chunks of text or other

elements, it may be best to draw a bracket or other mark around each item and include a circled

2.123:

instruction in the margin.

Indicating changes

to paragraphing or

indention

2.124:

Indicating

adjustments to

position or

alignment

(justification)

2.125:

Marking items to

be transposed

2.126:

Marking items to

be spelled out

2.127:

Using "stet" to

revert corrections

or deletions

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Mark Proofs

of Contents

List of Figures

2.126 MARKING ITEMS TO BE SPELLED OUT

List of Tables

When an abbreviation or numeral is to be spelled out, circle the item and write the spell-out mark

Index

(circled "sp") in the margin. If there is any ambiguity about the spelling, write the full word in the

margin. See also 2.90.

2.124:

Indicating

adjustments to

position or

alignment

(justification)

2.125:

Marking items to

be transposed

2.126:

Marking items to

be spelled out

2.127:

Using "stet" to

revert corrections

or deletions

2.128:

Marking changes to

capitalization and

font

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Mark Proofs

of Contents

List of Figures

2.127 USING "STET" TO REVERT CORRECTIONS OR DELETIONS

List of Tables

To undelete or restore something that has earlier been marked for deletion or correction, place a row

Index

of dots in the text under the material that is to remain, cross out the marginal mark or correction, and

write "stet" ("let it stand")--or to avoid any ambiguity, "stet as set"--in the margin, circled.

2.125:

Marking items to

be transposed

2.126:

Marking items to

be spelled out

2.127:

Using "stet" to

revert corrections

or deletions

2.128:

Marking changes to

capitalization and

font

2.129:

Indicating changes

to punctuation and

accents

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Mark Proofs

of Contents

List of Figures

2.128 MARKING CHANGES TO CAPITALIZATION AND FONT

List of Tables

Mark changes to capitalization and font as follows, and remember to circle all marginal instructions

Index

(see 2.118 and figs. 2.6 and 2.7):

To lowercase a capital letter, draw a slash through the letter and write "lc" in the margin.

2.126:

Marking items to

To capitalize a lowercase letter, draw three lines under it and write "cap" in the margin.

be spelled out

For small capital letters, draw two lines under the letters or words and write "sc" in the margin.

2.127:

Using "stet" to

For italics, draw a single line under the letter or words and write "ital" in the margin.

revert corrections

or deletions

To remove italics, circle the italicized letter or words and write "rom" in the margin.

2.128:

For boldface, draw a wavy line under the letter or words and write "bf" in the margin.

Marking changes to

capitalization and

To remove boldface, circle the boldface letter or words and write "not bf" in the margin.

font

2.129:

Indicating changes

to punctuation and

accents

2.130:

Double-checking

proofs

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> How to Mark Proofs

of Contents

List of Figures

2.129 INDICATING CHANGES TO PUNCTUATION AND ACCENTS

List of Tables

To change a punctuation mark, circle it and write the correct mark in the margin. To add a mark,

Index

insert a caret and write the mark in the margin. Lest they be missed or misinterpreted, all

punctuation marks in the margin should be clarified thus: a comma should have a caret over it; an

apostrophe or a quotation mark should have an inverted caret under it; a parenthesis should have

2.127:

two short horizontal lines through it; a period should be circled; semicolons and colons should be

Using "stet" to

revert corrections

followed by a short | ; question marks and exclamation points should be accompanied by the circled

or deletions

word "set"; and hyphens, en dashes, and em dashes should be differentiated by their appropriate

2.128:

symbols (see fig. 2.6). If an accent or a diacritical mark is missing or incorrect, the entire letter should

Marking changes to

capitalization and

be crossed out in the text and written in the margin with its correct accent; never must the accent

font

alone appear in the margin. For clarity, the name of any unusual accent or diacritical mark (e.g.,

2.129:

Indicating changes

"breve") should also be written and circled in the margin (see 11.2).

to punctuation and

accents

2.130:

Double-checking

proofs

2.131:

Assigning

responsibility for

errors on proofs

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Double-Checking and Assigning Responsibility for Errors

of Contents

List of Figures

2.130 DOUBLE-CHECKING PROOFS

List of Tables

In addition to the tasks outlined in 2.107--15, the proofreader must perform the following checks,

Index

according to the needs of the particular work:

1. Check article or chapter titles and, if necessary, subheads or other heads against the table of

2.128:

contents to ensure consistent wording, and verify or add beginning page numbers in the table

Marking changes to

of contents. Query--or delete, if necessary--any item listed in the table of contents that does not

capitalization and

font

appear in the work.

2.129:

2. If footnotes are used, ensure that each footnote appears, or at least begins, on the page that

Indicating changes

to punctuation and

includes its superscripted reference number or symbol.

accents

3. Complete any cross-references (see 2.32).

2.130:

4. For a book, check the half title and the title page to be sure the title is correct and the author's or

Double-checking

proofs

volume editor's name is spelled right; verify that the information on the copyright page is

2.131:

accurate and complete.

Assigning

5. For a journal, check the covers, spine, and any front or back matter copy that is unique to the

responsibility for

errors on proofs

particular journal; with the previous year's volume at hand, check the elements that change

2.132:

with each issue, such as volume and issue numbers and date, month, or season of publication;

Author's alterations

ensure that the inclusive page numbers that appear on the spine are accurate; check front and

(AAs) versus

editor's alterations

back matter for any elements that may have changed, such as subscription prices or names of

(EAs)

editors and members of the editorial board; ensure that copyright lines are included and

accurate on all individual articles or other elements of the journal that carry them.

For additional checking required for electronic works, see 2.133--36.

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Double-Checking and Assigning Responsibility for Errors

of Contents

List of Figures

2.131 ASSIGNING RESPONSIBILITY FOR ERRORS ON PROOFS

List of Tables

The proofreader may be asked to distinguish between errors introduced by the typesetting process

Index

and errors that were left uncorrected in the manuscript or those that were introduced during editorial

cleanup after the author has reviewed the editing. In such cases, corrections should be accompanied

by abbreviations determined by the publisher or typesetter, such as PE (printer's error--the customary

2.129:

term for what is generally a typesetter's error), AA (author's alteration), EA (editor's alteration), and

Indicating changes

to punctuation and

DA (designer's alteration). All such indications should be circled to prevent their being incorporated

accents

into the corrected proofs.

2.130:

Double-checking

proofs

2.131:

Assigning

responsibility for

errors on proofs

2.132:

Author's alterations

(AAs) versus

editor's alterations

(EAs)

2.133:

Checklist for

proofing electronic

publications

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Double-Checking and Assigning Responsibility for Errors

of Contents

List of Figures

2.132 AUTHOR'S ALTERATIONS (AAS) VERSUS EDITOR'S ALTERATIONS (EAS)

List of Tables

For books, a publisher's contract may allow an author to make, without penalty, alterations in proofs

Index

in terms of a percentage of the initial cost of the typesetting. Since the cost of corrections is far higher

relative to the cost of the original typesetting, an AA allowance of (for example) 5 percent does not

mean that 5 percent of the proofs may be altered. An author may be asked to pay the cost of AAs

2.130:

beyond the AA allowance stipulated in the contract. Page numbers added to cross-references in

Double-checking

proofs

proofs are usually considered AAs. Corrections of errors uncaught or even introduced in editing are

2.131:

considered AAs if the author reviewed and approved the edited manuscript. Correction of an error

Assigning

introduced into the manuscript by the publisher after the author's review--made by the manuscript

responsibility for

errors on proofs

editor, for example, in entering the author's final adjustments--is an EA and not chargeable to the

2.132:

author. Supplying page numbers in lists of tables and illustrations and in running heads to notes

Author's alterations

(AAs) versus

constitutes an EA. For articles, consult the journal publisher.

editor's alterations

(EAs)

2.133:

Checklist for

proofing electronic

publications

2.134:

Testing web-based

publications

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Proofing and Testing Electronic Publications

of Contents

List of Figures

2.133 CHECKLIST FOR PROOFING ELECTRONIC PUBLICATIONS

List of Tables

Every element in an electronic publication must be proofread, checked, and tested in its final form-

Index

- before it gets published. No element should be overlooked. In addition to many of the tasks outlined

in 2.107--15 and 2.130, a thorough check will include some or all of the following steps:

2.131:

1. Look carefully at the layout to make sure that no elements are missing, that all elements are

Assigning

presented as intended, and that no markup added for another purpose (e.g., for a print version)

responsibility for

errors on proofs

adversely affects the electronic version.

2.132:

2. Confirm that all special characters have been converted correctly (see 2.110; see also 11.2).

Author's alterations

(AAs) versus

Characters that have been treated as bitmapped images must be checked for correctness,

editor's alterations

legibility, and proper appearance (see also A.34).

(EAs)

3. Verify that all hypertext links and other clickable features work--including links and features

2.133:

Checklist for

within the work and those that lead to other sites or resources. For web publications, a site map

proofing electronic

(i.e., a list or chart of all navigable pages) may facilitate this process.

publications

4. Make sure that any illustrations or other nontext features of the work are present and function

2.134:

Testing web-based

and appear as desired.

publications

5. For a work that will be published in print and online, make sure that the forms either match

2.135:

exactly--if that is the intent--or vary as intended, and that such variation is noted explicitly in

Documentation for

testing

both versions (see 1.73).Proofread any recent changes for spelling and sense.

Although initial checking and testing will have been done during the editing stage, the person (or

persons) responsible for proofreading electronic copy must look at every element of the publication

systematically--preferably according to a larger checklist that will have been created during the

development stages of the project.

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Proofing and Testing Electronic Publications

of Contents

List of Figures

2.134 TESTING WEB-BASED PUBLICATIONS

List of Tables

In addition to comprising well-edited, accurate, error-free information, a web-based publication (see

Index

1.111) must function as intended--usually across a variety of platforms. This functionality must be

tested at several stages in the development of a project--not just at the end and not only by a team of

editors or proofreaders. By the time the content for a web-based publication has been finalized, the

2.132:

interface will usually have gone through several stages of editorial review to scrutinize basic design

Author's alterations

(AAs) versus

elements and navigational structure and to edit ancillary items such as error messages, label text (as

editor's alterations

(EAs)

on buttons), and metadata (see A.10). Some publications will also benefit from a beta test stage in

which potential users are invited to report errors and suggest changes before the official release date.

2.133:

Checklist for

More specific testing routines should adhere to use-case documents (see 2.135). Testing after the

proofing electronic

publications

release date will include editorial oversight of any new content generated by the publication such as

2.134:

readers' comments. At all stages, procedures should be in place for regression testing--that is, testing

Testing web-based

that safeguards against unforeseen errors caused by the correction of other errors or by the

publications

introduction of new features or content or other changes. For online journals and other periodical

2.135:

Documentation for

publications, it is not necessary to repeat all of these testing stages on the recurring design elements

testing

and features every time new content is added, but the new content itself should be checked before

2.136:

publication as described in 2.133.

Communicating

changes to web-

based publications

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Proofing and Testing Electronic Publications

of Contents

List of Figures

2.135 DOCUMENTATION FOR TESTING

List of Tables

Thorough testing of a web-based publication should involve checking it against various documents

Index

that describe its intended functionality, behavior, and navigation. Several types of documents are

typically created as part of a publication's development process. Feature definition documents, for

example, provide detailed descriptions of how the various features of the website will function.

2.132:

Feature definition for a search engine would specify how search results are ordered and displayed on

Author's alterations

(AAs) versus

the page, how users are able to limit the search to certain kinds of results, how terms with diacritics

editor's alterations

(EAs)

are handled, and so forth. Use-case documents provide a more complete description of a feature's

behavior, specifying exactly how the feature will respond to the user's every mouse click and

2.133:

Checklist for

keystroke. Wire frames or design mockups provide visual representations of the page's design and

proofing electronic

publications

layout, and user interface specifications may provide additional guidelines. Finally, test-case documents

2.134:

provide step-by-step instructions on exactly how a given feature or page will be tested.

Testing web-based

publications

2.135:

Documentation for

testing

2.136:

Communicating

changes to web-

based publications

2: MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

Chapter Contents >> Proofreading >> Proofing and Testing Electronic Publications

of Contents

List of Figures

2.136 COMMUNICATING CHANGES TO WEB-BASED PUBLICATIONS

List of Tables

Just as manuscript editors redline changes and keep a style sheet for a book manuscript and

Index

proofreaders use a specific set of marks to communicate changes, those involved in producing a web-

based publication will need to follow a system for tracking and implementing changes and stylistic

decisions. Whereas such matters for a printed book are traditionally recorded on a series of printouts,

2.132:

a web-based project generally benefits from the use of a centralized database. Procedures for using

Author's alterations

(AAs) versus

such a system should be developed (and fully documented) with the input of the web developers,

editor's alterations

(EAs)

designers, editors, proofreaders, and testers who will use it. In any single project, the entries in such a

database--in conjunction with the documentation for testing described in 2.135--can serve as a contract

2.133:

Checklist for

between editors and the production team to ensure that changes get implemented properly and

proofing electronic

publications

elements function as they should. Responsibility, revision dates, and other information should be

2.134:

complemented by checklists for testers that follow the same guidelines. Editorial oversight of the

Testing web-based

project database is crucial, and to allow for this oversight, every change, no matter how trivial, must

publications

be documented. Finally, changes made after the initial development stage should generally be subject

2.135:

Documentation for

not only to editorial oversight but also to authorization.

testing

2.136:

Communicating

changes to web-

based publications

2 : MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 2.1

List of Figures

Sample design and production schedule for a printed book. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

2 : MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 2.2

List of Figures

Sample production schedule for a quarterly journal published in both print and electronic forms.

List of Tables

PDF Version >>

Index

2 : MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 2.3

List of Figures

Manuscript editor's style sheet. When prepared for a pencil-edited manuscript, the style sheet usually

List of Tables

indicates the page number for the first appearance of each item. PDF Version >>

Index

2 : MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 2.4

List of Figures

A manuscript page illustrating the principles of on-screen revision marks (redlining) and author

List of Tables

queries. See 2.81. PDF Version >>

Index

2 : MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 2.5

List of Figures

An example of a hand-marked manuscript page. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

2 : MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 2.6

List of Figures

Proofreaders' marks. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

2 : MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION, MANUSCRIPT EDITING, AND PROOFREADING

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 2.7

List of Figures

Marked proofs. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

Overview

List of Figures

3.1

Illustrations defined

List of Tables

3.2

Tables defined

Index

Illustrations

Types of Illustrations and Their Parts

3.3

Continuous tone versus halftone

3.4

Line art

3.5

Text figures and plates

3.6

Galleries

3.7

Captions, legends, keys, and labels

Placement and Numbering of Illustrations

3.8

Placement of illustrations relative to text

3.9

Text references to numbered illustrations

3.10

Continuous versus separate numbering of illustrations

3.11

Double numeration of illustrations

3.12

Identifying the parts of an illustration

3.13

Working numbers for unnumbered illustrations

3.14

Numbering illustrations in a gallery

Preparation of Artwork

3.15

Submitting artwork to the publisher

3.16

Identifying artwork for the publisher

3.17

Author's inventory of artwork

3.18

Publisher's inventory of artwork

3.19

Cropping and scaling and shading

3.20

Artwork to be redrawn by the publisher

Captions

3.21

Syntax, punctuation, and capitalization

3.22

Formal titles in captions

3.23

Separating illustration numbers from captions

3.24

Using locators in captions

3.25

Identifying symbols or patterns used in figures

3.26

Identifying electronic enhancements in captions

3.27

Including original dimensions in captions

Credit Lines

3.28

Sources and permissions

3.29

Placement of credit lines

3.30

Crediting author as source of illustration

3.31

Crediting material that requires permission

3.32

Crediting commissioned material

3.33

Crediting material obtained free of charge

3.34

Crediting material in the public domain

3.35

Crediting agency material

3.36

Crediting adapted material

Lists of Illustrations

3.37

When to include a list of illustrations

3.38

Listing illustrations from a gallery

3.39

Shortening captions for a list of illustrations

Charts

3.40

What is a chart?

3.41

Consistency among charts

3.42

Axes and curves in graphs

3.43

Chart titles and labels

3.44

Abbreviations in labels

3.45

Genealogical and pedigree charts

Tables

Introduction

3.46

Table preparation

3.47

Use of tables

3.48

Consistency among tables

The Parts of a Table

3.49

Table structure and use

3.50

Horizontal and vertical rules

3.51

Numbering tables

3.52

Table titles

3.53

Parenthetical information in table titles

3.54

Column heads

3.55

Spanner heads

3.56

Cut-in heads

3.57

Stub entries

3.58

Stub entries with subheads

3.59

Runover lines in stub columns

3.60

Abbreviations in stub columns

3.61

Totals

3.62

Using leaders with stub entries

3.63

Table body and cells

3.64

Column data

3.65

Empty cells

3.66

Matrixes

3.67

Presenting multiple values in a single cell

Cell Alignment and Formatting

3.68

Alignment of rows

3.69

Alignment of column heads

3.70

Alignment of numbers within columns

3.71

Alignment of columns consisting of words

3.72

Format for totals, averages, and means

3.73

When to use totals

Notes to Tables

3.74

Order and placement of notes to tables

3.75

Acknowledging data in source notes to tables

3.76

Notes applying to the whole table

3.77

Notes to specific parts of a table

3.78

Notes on significance levels

Editing Tables

3.79

Editing table content

3.80

"Percent" versus "percentage"

3.81

Number ranges

3.82

Signs and symbols in tables

3.83

"N" versus "n"

3.84

Adjusting and checking tables

3.85

Indicating "continued" and specifying repeating column heads

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

3.1 ILLUSTRATIONS DEFINED

List of Tables

Illustrations, also called figures, consist of artwork--which is to say, anything that is represented by

Index

means of an image rather than by the letters and other orthographic symbols that make up the text of

a book or an article. Illustrations, then, include paintings, photographs, line drawings, maps, charts,

and examples from musical scores. This list is sometimes extended to include audio and video files

3.1:

presented as enhancements to electronic publications. For a full discussion of illustrations--including

Illustrations

defined

guidelines on preparation, placement, numbering, and captioning, with examples drawn from

3.2:

University of Chicago Press publications--see 3.3--45.

Tables defined

3.3:

Continuous tone

versus halftone

3.4:

Line art

3.5:

Text figures and

plates

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

3.2 TABLES DEFINED

List of Tables

A table is a more or less complex list presented as an array of vertical columns and horizontal rows.

Index

Like illustrations, tables are presented separately from the run of text. Tables are also related to

illustrations in that both can be said to constitute a visual representation of data. Because they consist

of alphanumeric text, however, tables are usually typeset along with the text rather than produced

3.1:

separately as artwork (but see A.33). For a full discussion of tables--including guidelines on

Illustrations

defined

preparation, placement, numbering, and editing, with examples drawn from University of Chicago

3.2:

Press publications--see 3.46--85.

Tables defined

3.3:

Continuous tone

versus halftone

3.4:

Line art

3.5:

Text figures and

plates

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Types of Illustrations and Their Parts

of Contents

List of Figures

3.3 CONTINUOUS TONE VERSUS HALFTONE

List of Tables

Continuous-tone art is any image such as a painting or a photograph that contains gradations of

Index

shading from light to dark--in black and white (grayscale) or color (see fig. 3.1). In order to duplicate

continuous-tone images in offset printing, which uses one ink color (black) for black and white and

four for color (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black--abbreviated CMYK), a halftone reproduction must

3.1:

be produced (see fig. 3.2). (Color images intended for the screen are rendered in RGB--red, green, and

Illustrations

defined

blue--mode.) A halftone breaks the image into an equally spaced array of dots that vary in size to

3.2:

create the illusion of continuous tone from dark to light. For black-and-white halftone reproduction,

Tables defined

authors should submit glossy prints of original art. For illustrations to be reproduced in color, which

3.3:

involves a four-color process, color transparencies are usually preferred. Authors submitting digital

Continuous tone

versus halftone

photographs or scans should consult their publisher's guidelines for preparing electronic artwork.

3.4:

(Chicago offers such guidelines on its books and journals websites.)

Line art

3.5:

Text figures and

plates

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Types of Illustrations and Their Parts

of Contents

List of Figures

3.4 LINE ART

List of Tables

Artwork containing only black on a white background, with no gray screens (i.e., shading)--such as a

Index

pen-and-ink drawing--is traditionally known as line art (or, less commonly, line copy). See figures 3.3

and 3.4. Line art may be published in black and white or in color. For the purpose of reproduction or

presentation in both printed and electronic works, charts may also be treated as line art, though

3.2:

strictly speaking they are often typeset using specialized software applications, even if the result is

Tables defined

output as an image. (For more on charts, see 3.40--45.) Musical examples may be treated as line art

3.3:

Continuous tone

and scanned if they are not typeset from scratch for publication--generally by specialists. See

versus halftone

figure 3.5. Publishers can often reproduce computer-generated line art without having to remake it as

3.4:

long as it has been properly prepared; authors should obtain guidelines from the publisher. For the

Line art

use of shading in line art, see 3.19. For more on the conventions related to musical notation, see

3.5:

Text figures and

7.66--71.

plates

3.6:

Galleries

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Types of Illustrations and Their Parts

of Contents

List of Figures

3.5 TEXT FIGURES AND PLATES

List of Tables

Illustrations--whether halftones or line art--that are interspersed in the text are referred to as text

Index

figures. (Occasionally, a special type of illustration, such as a map or a musical example, will be

referred to in a work by type rather than by the generic term figure. See fig. 3.5.) The term plate,

strictly speaking, refers to a full-page illustration that is printed separately, typically on coated paper;

3.3:

plates can appear individually between certain pages of text but are more often gathered into galleries

Continuous tone

versus halftone

(see 3.6). (In a work that contains both photographs and line art, plate is sometimes used--a little

3.4:

loosely--for the former and figure for the latter.)

Line art

3.5:

Text figures and

plates

3.6:

Galleries

3.7:

Captions, legends,

keys, and labels

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Types of Illustrations and Their Parts

of Contents

List of Figures

3.6 GALLERIES

List of Tables

A gallery is a section of a printed work devoted to illustrations--usually halftones. If printed on stock

Index

different from that used for the text, a gallery is not paginated; for example, an eight-page gallery

could appear between pages 134 and 135. Such a gallery will typically consist of four, eight, twelve,

or more pages (for purposes of printing and binding, it is always a number that can be divided by

3.4:

four). If the gallery is printed along with the text, on the same paper, its pages may be included in the

Line art

numbering, even if the numbers do not actually appear (see 1.38). A gallery always begins on a recto

3.5:

Text figures and

(a right-hand page) and must fall between signatures (see A.49).

plates

3.6:

Galleries

3.7:

Captions, legends,

keys, and labels

3.8:

Placement of

illustrations

relative to text

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Types of Illustrations and Their Parts

of Contents

List of Figures

3.7 CAPTIONS, LEGENDS, KEYS, AND LABELS

List of Tables

The terms caption and legend are sometimes used interchangeably for the explanatory text that appears

Index

with an illustration--usually immediately below but sometimes above or to the side. (In a distinction

rarely made today, the term caption once referred strictly to a phrasal title or a headline, whereas

legend referred to the full-sentence explanation immediately following the caption. This manual uses

3.5:

caption to refer to both.) A key (also sometimes called a legend) appears within the illustration itself

Text figures and

plates

and not as part of the caption; it identifies the symbols used in a map or a chart. For more on

3.6:

captions, see 3.21--27. Labels are any descriptive terms that appear within an illustration. They may

Galleries

also be symbols (often letters) used to indicate an illustration's parts. See figures 3.3, 3.4, 3.6. See also

3.7:

3.12, 3.43.

Captions, legends,

keys, and labels

3.8:

Placement of

illustrations

relative to text

3.9:

Text references to

numbered

illustrations

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Placement and Numbering of Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

3.8 PLACEMENT OF ILLUSTRATIONS RELATIVE TO TEXT

List of Tables

Unless they are presented separately (as in a gallery; see 3.6, 3.14), each illustration should appear as

Index

soon as possible after the first text reference to it. In an electronic work, a captioned thumbnail image

linked to its larger counterpart(s) may appear after the paragraph in which the image is first

referenced. In printed works, to accommodate page makeup, the image may precede the reference

3.6:

only if it appears on the same page or same two-page spread as the reference or if the text is too short

Galleries

to permit placing all figures and tables after their references. If illustrations or thumbnail images are

3.7:

Captions, legends,

interspersed in the text, the author or (if the author has not done so) the editor must provide callouts

keys, and labels

that indicate in the manuscript the preferred location for each (see 2.27). Note that a callout (e.g., "fig.

3.8:

5 about here") is an instruction for typesetting or production and will not appear in the published

Placement of

illustrations

work (compare text references, which are addressed to readers; see 3.9). In a printed work, most

relative to text

illustrations will appear at either the top or the bottom of a page. No callouts are needed for

3.9:

illustrations that are to appear together in a printed gallery. In a work published online, callouts may

Text references to

numbered

be obviated or superseded by the electronic markup for text references and their associated figures

illustrations

and captions.

3.10:

Continuous versus

separate numbering

of illustrations

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Placement and Numbering of Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

3.9 TEXT REFERENCES TO NUMBERED ILLUSTRATIONS

List of Tables

If there are more than a handful of illustrations in a work, they normally bear numbers (but see 3.13),

Index

and all text references to them should be by the numbers: "as figure 1 shows . . . ," "compare figures 4

and 5." If an online version of a work contains figures not available in a printed counterpart, the text

references in the print version may refer readers to the figures in the online version (thereby avoiding

3.7:

separate numbering for illustrations in each version; see 1.73). An illustration should never be referred

Captions, legends,

keys, and labels

to in the text as "the photograph opposite" or "the graph on this page," for such placement may not be

3.8:

possible in the final version (but see 3.24). In text, the word figure is typically set roman, lowercased,

Placement of

and spelled out except in parenthetical references ("fig. 10"). Plate, however, should not be abbreviated

illustrations

relative to text

to pl. In captions, these terms are sometimes distinguished typographically from the rest of the

3.9:

caption (see 3.23).

Text references to

numbered

illustrations

3.10:

Continuous versus

separate numbering

of illustrations

3.11:

Double numeration

of illustrations

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Placement and Numbering of Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

3.10 CONTINUOUS VERSUS SEPARATE NUMBERING OF ILLUSTRATIONS

List of Tables

All types of illustrations may be numbered together in one continuous sequence throughout a work.

Index

In book-length works, maps are sometimes numbered separately (e.g., map 1, map 2, . . .) as a

convenience to readers; illustrations in a different medium are always numbered separately (e.g.,

video 1, video 2, . . .). In a work published in both print and electronic versions, illustrations that

3.8:

appear only in the electronic version sometimes necessitate separate enumeration in the two versions

Placement of

illustrations

(but see 3.9). For double numeration, see 3.11. For illustrations in a gallery, see 3.6, 3.14.

relative to text

3.9:

Text references to

numbered

illustrations

3.10:

Continuous versus

separate numbering

of illustrations

3.11:

Double numeration

of illustrations

3.12:

Identifying the

parts of an

illustration

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Placement and Numbering of Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

3.11 DOUBLE NUMERATION OF ILLUSTRATIONS

List of Tables

In scientific and technical books, heavily illustrated books, and books with chapters by different

Index

authors, double numeration may be employed. Each illustration carries the number of the chapter

followed by the illustration number, usually separated by a period. Thus, for example, figure 9.6 is the

sixth figure in chapter 9. Should a chapter contain only one illustration, a double number would still

3.9:

be used (e.g., figure 10.1). Appendix figures may be numbered A.1, A.2, and so on, or, if there are

Text references to

numbered

several appendixes and each bears a letter, A.1, A.2, B.1, B.2, and so on. At the editing stage, double

illustrations

numeration makes it easier to handle multiple illustrations and, should any be added or removed,

3.10:

involves far less renumbering. It also makes it easier for readers to find a particular illustration. This

Continuous versus

separate numbering

manual uses double numeration for illustrations and tables as well as for text paragraphs. See also

of illustrations

1.55.

3.11:

Double numeration

of illustrations

3.12:

Identifying the

parts of an

illustration

3.13:

Working numbers

for unnumbered

illustrations

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Placement and Numbering of Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

3.12 IDENTIFYING THE PARTS OF AN ILLUSTRATION

List of Tables

Chicago recommends the use of arabic numerals for illustrations of all kinds: "figure 12," "fig. 10.7."

Index

Where a figure consists of several parts, the parts may carry letters ( A, B, C, etc.); a single caption,

keying the letters to the parts, suffices (see figs. 3.4, 3.6). Text references may then refer, for example,

to "fig. 10.7 C" (note that the letters are usually italicized--with the number and when referred to

3.10:

alone). Parts may also be described according to their relative positions on a printed page (see fig. 3.7;

Continuous versus

separate numbering

see also 3.24); the relative positions must be maintained in an electronic version if the same

of illustrations

description is to be used. (In the rare and undesirable event that a figure has to be added at a late

3.11:

stage to a work destined for print, when it is no longer feasible to renumber all the other figures, "fig.

Double numeration

of illustrations

10.7 A" might refer to a figure inserted between figures 10.7 and 10.8.)

3.12:

Identifying the

parts of an

illustration

3.13:

Working numbers

for unnumbered

illustrations

3.14:

Numbering

illustrations in a

gallery

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Placement and Numbering of Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

3.13 WORKING NUMBERS FOR UNNUMBERED ILLUSTRATIONS

List of Tables

In some works, where illustrations are neither integral to the text nor specifically referred to, numbers

Index

are unnecessary. In the editing and production stages, however, all illustrations should carry working

numbers, as should their captions, to ensure that they are correctly placed. As a further measure of

insurance for printed books, after page proofs have been approved, copies of scans and prints might

3.11:

also be labeled with page numbers or other relevant information (e.g., "fig. 1, page 47, top" or "plate

Double numeration

of illustrations

3, gallery").

3.12:

Identifying the

parts of an

illustration

3.13:

Working numbers

for unnumbered

illustrations

3.14:

Numbering

illustrations in a

gallery

3.15:

Submitting artwork

to the publisher

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Placement and Numbering of Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

3.14 NUMBERING ILLUSTRATIONS IN A GALLERY

List of Tables

When illustrations are gathered together in a gallery, they need not be numbered unless referred to in

Index

the text, although in the editing and production stages they should carry working numbers to ensure

the correct order (see 3.13). If numbers are required and the work also contains illustrations

interspersed in the text, two number sequences must be adopted. For example, text illustrations may

3.12:

be referred to as "figure 1" and so on and gallery illustrations as "plate 1" and so on.

Identifying the

parts of an

illustration

3.13:

Working numbers

for unnumbered

illustrations

3.14:

Numbering

illustrations in a

gallery

3.15:

Submitting artwork

to the publisher

3.16:

Identifying artwork

for the publisher

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Preparation of Artwork

of Contents

List of Figures

3.15 SUBMITTING ARTWORK TO THE PUBLISHER

List of Tables

Authors preparing illustrations electronically must consult their publishers before submitting the files.

Index

Most publishers require hard copies along with artwork submitted in electronic form. (A still image

may be required for an audiovisual file submitted as an enhancement to an electronic work.) A list of

the software programs used to create the digital artwork should also be furnished, and the publisher

3.13:

should be made aware of any special fonts used in the construction of drawings, diagrams, maps, and

Working numbers

for unnumbered

so forth; the publisher may need the author to supply these fonts. See also 2.4, 2.33. Any author-

illustrations

supplied scans must be made in accordance with the publisher's guidelines, preferably by a

3.14:

professional graphic arts service; Chicago offers such guidelines on its books and journals websites.

Numbering

illustrations in a

(Publishers usually prefer to scan illustrations themselves, to ensure consistent quality and to

gallery

facilitate subsequent stages in the publication process.) For color art intended for print, transparencies

3.15:

Submitting artwork

are usually preferred. (Authors should check their contracts to ensure that color illustrations are

to the publisher

permitted.) Images obtained from the Internet--barring the unlikely scenario that they have been

3.16:

optimized for print--are usually not acceptable.

Identifying artwork

for the publisher

3.17:

Author's inventory

of artwork

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Preparation of Artwork

of Contents

List of Figures

3.16 IDENTIFYING ARTWORK FOR THE PUBLISHER

List of Tables

Artwork submitted in electronic form should be saved in separate files with descriptive names that

Index

accurately identify each file; these names should be included on the corresponding hard copies along

with the numbers that correspond to the figure callouts in the manuscript. Original artwork

submitted as hard copy (e.g., photographic prints) must be clearly identified by the author or, failing

3.14:

that, by the publisher, in a manner that does not harm the original. Each item should be numbered on

Numbering

illustrations in a

the back in pencil, very gently, making sure no mark is visible on the other side. If the paper does not

gallery

accept lead pencil, a self-sticking label should be used. To be avoided are ballpoint pens, grease

3.15:

pencils, felt-tip markers, staples, or paper clips. For numbering, see 3.8--14; for captions, see 3.21--27.

Submitting artwork

to the publisher

3.16:

Identifying artwork

for the publisher

3.17:

Author's inventory

of artwork

3.18:

Publisher's

inventory of

artwork

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Preparation of Artwork

of Contents

List of Figures

3.17 AUTHOR'S INVENTORY OF ARTWORK

List of Tables

Along with artwork, the author should supply a complete list of illustrations, noting any that are to

Index

appear in color, any duplicates or extras, and any that are still to come. (Note, however, that for both

books and journals, it is always expected and often mandatory that all illustrations be supplied at the

time a manuscript is submitted; see 2.3.) If the work is to be published in print and electronic versions

3.15:

that will vary in the number of illustrations or in the use of color, that information must be noted in

Submitting artwork

to the publisher

the inventory.

3.16:

Identifying artwork

for the publisher

3.17:

Author's inventory

of artwork

3.18:

Publisher's

inventory of

artwork

3.19:

Cropping and

scaling and shading

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Preparation of Artwork

of Contents

List of Figures

3.18 PUBLISHER'S INVENTORY OF ARTWORK

List of Tables

As soon as the illustrations arrive from the author, publishers should check each one against the

Index

author's inventory (see 3.17). If an illustration is damaged or otherwise may not be reproducible, a

better copy will need to be requested. (Missing illustrations will also need to be tracked down.) Each

illustration should also be checked to be sure that it is properly numbered and labeled and that it

3.16:

corresponds correctly to each caption. (Authors should supply captions as a separate file; see 2.23.) If

Identifying artwork

for the publisher

the author has not already done so, a photocopy should be made of each illustration furnished as a

3.17:

print, including all numbering and other information. (Publishers should beware, however, of using

Author's inventory

such photocopies to prepare or check caption or credit information unless the copies reproduce the

of artwork

original with total clarity. For these purposes, originals or high-resolution digital prints are best.)

3.18:

Publisher's

Finally, publishers should check for any necessary permissions (see 4.69--91, 4.92--101).

inventory of

artwork

3.19:

Cropping and

scaling and shading

3.20:

Artwork to be

redrawn by the

publisher

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Preparation of Artwork

of Contents

List of Figures

3.19 CROPPING AND SCALING AND SHADING

List of Tables

To make suggestions for reframing, or cropping, an image--that is, cutting it down to remove

Index

extraneous parts--authors should mark a printout or photocopy, or on an original print, use a tissue

overlay to avoid damaging it. For images that need to be scaled, finished dimensions must be

computed from the dimensions of the original. Authors need to be aware of this especially when

3.17:

preparing line art that contains labels or a key. The relations between font size, line weight (thickness,

Author's inventory

of artwork

measured in points), and final printed size should be considered when drawings are created to ensure

3.18:

legibility. By scaling the image to its intended size and printing it out (or by using a photocopying

Publisher's

machine), it is possible to get an idea of what the printed version will look like. Avoid hairline rules,

inventory of

artwork

which may disappear when printed. Likewise, avoid shading, which may print out poorly when

3.19:

reduced; use stripes, spots, and other black-and-white fill patterns in charts to distinguish areas from

Cropping and

scaling and shading

plain black or white. Many publishers, however, allow shading within line art submitted

electronically in specific formats; consult your publisher's manuscript submission guidelines before

3.20:

Artwork to be

preparing final art. See also 3.40--45.

redrawn by the

publisher

3.21:

Syntax,

punctuation, and

capitalization

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Preparation of Artwork

of Contents

List of Figures

3.20 ARTWORK TO BE REDRAWN BY THE PUBLISHER

List of Tables

Authors submitting line art (e.g., a line drawing or a chart) that the publisher has agreed to redraw

Index

should clearly mark any labels (words or symbols) to be altered or added on a photocopy or, if there

are more than a few, in a separate document, keyed to the illustration. Where possible, wording,

abbreviations, and symbols should be consistent with those used in the text. By a similar token,

3.18:

capitalization should be reserved for those terms that would be capitalized in running text. All names

Publisher's

inventory of

on a map that is to be redrawn should be prepared as a separate list, in which countries, provinces,

artwork

cities, rivers, and so forth are divided into separate groups, each group arranged alphabetically.

3.19:

Cropping and

scaling and shading

3.20:

Artwork to be

redrawn by the

publisher

3.21:

Syntax,

punctuation, and

capitalization

3.22:

Formal titles in

captions

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Captions

of Contents

List of Figures

3.21 SYNTAX, PUNCTUATION, AND CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

A caption--the explanatory material that appears outside (usually below) an illustration--is distinct

Index

from a key and from a label, which appear within an illustration (see 3.7; see also 3.43). A caption

may consist of a word or two, an incomplete or a complete sentence, several sentences, or a

combination. No punctuation is needed after a caption consisting solely of an incomplete sentence. If

3.19:

one or more full sentences follow it, each (including the opening phrase) has closing punctuation. In a

Cropping and

scaling and shading

work in which most captions consist of full sentences, incomplete ones may be followed by a period

3.20:

for consistency. Captions should be capitalized in sentence style (see 8.156), but formal titles of works

Artwork to be

included in captions should be capitalized in headline style (see 3.22).

redrawn by the

publisher

Wartime visit to Australia, winter 1940

3.21:

Syntax,

punctuation, and

The White Garden, reduced to its bare bones in early spring. The box hedges, which are still cut by hand,

capitalization

have to be carefully kept in scale with the small and complex garden as well as in keeping with the plants

3.22:

inside the "boxes."

Formal titles in

captions

3.23:

Separating

illustration

numbers from

captions

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Captions

of Contents

List of Figures

3.22 FORMAL TITLES IN CAPTIONS

List of Tables

Titles of works should be presented according to the rules set forth in chapter 8 (see 8.154--95),

Index

whether standing alone or incorporated into a caption. Accordingly, most titles in English will appear

in headline style (see 8.157), and many titles--including those for paintings, drawings, photographs,

statues, and books--will be italicized; others will appear in roman type, enclosed in quotation marks

3.20:

(see 8.161). For foreign titles, see 11.3--8. Generic titles, however (as in the last example below), are not

Artwork to be

redrawn by the

usually capitalized.

publisher

3.21:

Frontispiece of Christian Prayers and Meditations (London: John Daye, 1569), showing Queen Elizabeth at

Syntax,

prayer in her private chapel. Reproduced by permission of the Archbishop of Canterbury and the Trustees

punctuation, and

capitalization

of the Lambeth Palace Library.

3.22:

Formal titles in

The head of Venus--a detail from Botticelli's Birth of Venus.

captions

3.23:

Francis Bedford, Stratford on Avon Church from the Avon, 1860s. Albumen print of collodion negative, 18.8 Ã

Separating

— 28.0 cm. Rochester, International Museum of Photography at George Eastman House.

illustration

numbers from

captions

Friedrich Overbeck and Peter Cornelius, double portrait, pencil drawing, 1812. Formerly in the Collection

3.24:

Lehnsen, Scarsdale, New York.

Using locators in

captions

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Captions

of Contents

List of Figures

3.23 SEPARATING ILLUSTRATION NUMBERS FROM CAPTIONS

List of Tables

Illustration numbers should be distinct from the captions they introduce. A period after the number

Index

usually suffices. If the number is distinguished typographically--for example, by boldface--the period

may not be necessary. Extra space may be added between the number and the caption to ensure

legibility, as in the second example. Whether figure is spelled out or abbreviated as fig. may be

3.21:

specified by journal style or, for books, may be up to the designer or editor or both.

Syntax,

punctuation, and

capitalization

Figure 3. Detailed stratigraphy and geochronology of the Dubawnt Supergroup.

3.22:

Formal titles in

PLATE 5â€ƒPalace of the Governors, Santa Fe, New Mexico. Undated photograph, circa 1900.

captions

3.23:

The word figure or plate is occasionally omitted--for example, in a book whose illustrations consist of a

Separating

illustration

long series of continuously numbered photographs.

numbers from

captions

3.24:

Using locators in

captions

3.25:

Identifying symbols

or patterns used in

figures

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Captions

of Contents

List of Figures

3.24 USING LOCATORS IN CAPTIONS

List of Tables

Italicize such terms as top, bottom, left, right, above, below, left to right, clockwise from left, or inset to

Index

identify elements within a single illustration or parts of a composite or, in print publications, an

illustration that does not appear on the same page as the caption. If the term precedes the element it

identifies, it should be followed by a comma or, if a list follows, a colon. When it appears in

3.22:

midsentence or follows the element, it may appear in parentheses. See figure 3.7.

Formal titles in

captions

Fig. 4. Above left, William Livingston; above right, Henry Brockholst Livingston; below left, John Jay; below

3.23:

Separating

right, Sarah Livingston Jay

illustration

numbers from

captions

Left to right: Madeleine K. Albright, Dennis Ross, Ehud Barak, and Yasir Arafat

3.24:

Overleaf: The tall trees of the valley, planted by Russell Page, are reflected among the water lilies, Nymphaea,

Using locators in

captions

and pickerelweed, Pontederia cordata.

3.25:

Identifying symbols

Figure 2. Schematic block diagram showing upper plate ( top) and lower plate ( bottom) of the Battle Lake

or patterns used in

thrust-tear fault system.

figures

3.26:

If the various parts of a figure have been assigned letters, these are used in a similar way, usually

Identifying

electronic

italicized (see also 3.12). Likewise, descriptive terms used to identify parts of a figure are usually

enhancements in

captions

italicized.

Figure 3. DNA sequence from a small region within the PC gene, showing the Gâ†’T transition at nucleotide

2229. The partial sequence of intron 13 is also shown. A, wild-type sequence; B, sequence from a PC-

deficient Micmac homozygous for the mutation.

Figure 2. Duration of hospital stay for 22 patients colonized or infected with extended-spectrum Î²-

lactamase-producing Escherichia coli isolates belonging to clonally related groups A ( gray bars) and B ( white

bars). The black point represents the date when the microorganism was isolated, and the asterisk indicates

stay in the geriatric care hospital.

In the last example, the letters identify the study groups and not parts of the figure and are therefore

not italicized.

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Captions

of Contents

List of Figures

3.25 IDENTIFYING SYMBOLS OR PATTERNS USED IN FIGURES

List of Tables

When symbols or patterns are used in a map or chart, they must be identified either in a key within

Index

the figure or in the caption. See figures 3.8, 3.9.

Fig. 9.4. Photosynthetic light response. Data are presented from shade-grown (â– ) and open-grown (â–¡)

3.23:

culms of the current year.

Separating

illustration

or

numbers from

captions

Fig. 9.4. Photosynthetic light response. Data are presented from shade-grown ( solid squares) and open-grown

3.24:

( open squares) culms of the current year.

Using locators in

captions

3.25:

Identifying symbols

or patterns used in

figures

3.26:

Identifying

electronic

enhancements in

captions

3.27:

Including original

dimensions in

captions

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Captions

of Contents

List of Figures

3.26 IDENTIFYING ELECTRONIC ENHANCEMENTS IN CAPTIONS

List of Tables

The caption to an illustration published both in print and online should add in the print version an

Index

indication of any electronic enhancement--such as color or video--available in the online version.

Fig. 3. Highlighting orbital lines in the Virtual Solar System (Gazit et al. 2005; Yair et al. 2001). This figure

3.24:

appears in color in the online version of this article.

Using locators in

captions

Video 1. Still photograph from a video (available in the online edition of the American Naturalist) depicting a

3.25:

juvenile gorilla sniffing, tasting, and discarding Nauclea fruits. Apes are often very choosy about the fruits

Identifying symbols

or patterns used in

they eat, which can result in many discarded food items at "magnet" resources that have been handled or

figures

tested by previous visitors. Video by Thomas Breuer (Max Planck Institute and Wildlife Conservation

3.26:

Society).

Identifying

electronic

The online version should generally specify which features are available only online--for example, in a

enhancements in

captions

list of an online journal article's contents, under a subheading "Enhancements" or "Online-Only

3.27:

Supplements." See also 1.73.

Including original

dimensions in

captions

3.28:

Sources and

permissions

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Captions

of Contents

List of Figures

3.27 INCLUDING ORIGINAL DIMENSIONS IN CAPTIONS

List of Tables

When a caption provides the dimensions of an original work of art, these follow the work's medium

Index

and are listed in order of height, width, and (if applicable) depth. This information need appear only

if relevant to the text, unless the rights holder requests that it be included (see 3.31).

3.25:

Oil on canvas, 45 Ã— 38 cm

Identifying symbols

Bronze, 49 Ã— 22 Ã— 16 in.

or patterns used in

figures

See also the example in 3.22. Photomicrographs, in scientific publications, may include in their

3.26:

Identifying

captions information about the degree of magnification (e.g., original magnification, Ã—400; bar,

electronic

enhancements in

100 Î¼m).

captions

3.27:

Including original

dimensions in

captions

3.28:

Sources and

permissions

3.29:

Placement of

credit lines

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Credit Lines

of Contents

List of Figures

3.28 SOURCES AND PERMISSIONS

List of Tables

A brief statement of the source of an illustration, known as a credit line, is usually appropriate and

Index

sometimes required by the owner of the illustration. Illustrative material under copyright, whether

published or unpublished, usually requires permission from the copyright owner before it can be

reproduced. You cannot simply snap a photo of your favorite Monet and use it to illustrate your

3.26:

history of the haystack; before attempting to reproduce the painting, you must write to obtain written

Identifying

electronic

permission, as well as a print of the work, from the museum, or person, that owns it. Nor may you

enhancements in

captions

use a photograph or other portrayal of an identifiable human subject without the consent of that

person or someone acting on his or her behalf. Although it is the author's responsibility, not the

3.27:

Including original

publisher's, to obtain permissions, the publisher should be consulted about what needs permission

dimensions in

captions

and the best way to obtain it. For a fuller discussion of permissions, see 4.83, 4.92--101. For a work

3.28:

that will be published in electronic as well as printed form, see 4.60.

Sources and

permissions

3.29:

Placement of

credit lines

3.30:

Crediting author as

source of

illustration

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Credit Lines

of Contents

List of Figures

3.29 PLACEMENT OF CREDIT LINES

List of Tables

A credit line usually appears at the end of a caption, sometimes in parentheses or in different type

Index

(or both). A photographer's name occasionally appears in small type parallel to the bottom or side of

a photograph.

3.27:

Fig. 37. The myth that all children love dinosaurs is contradicted by this nineteenth-century scene of a visit

Including original

to the monsters at Crystal Palace. (Cartoon by John Leech. "Punch's Almanac for 1855," Punch 28 [1855]: 8.

dimensions in

captions

Photo courtesy of the Newberry Library, Chicago.)

3.28:

Sources and

If most or all of the illustrations in a work are from a single source, that fact may be stated in a note

permissions

or, in the case of a book, in the preface or acknowledgments or on the copyright page. In a heavily

3.29:

illustrated book, all credits are sometimes listed together in the back matter (see 1.4) or, more rarely,

Placement of

credit lines

in the front matter--sometimes as part of a list of illustrations (see 3.37). Note, however, that some

3.30:

permissions grantors stipulate placement of the credit with the illustration itself; others may charge a

Crediting author as

higher fee if the credit appears elsewhere.

source of

illustration

3.31:

Crediting material

that requires

permission

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Credit Lines

of Contents

List of Figures

3.30 CREDITING AUTHOR AS SOURCE OF ILLUSTRATION

List of Tables

Although illustrations created by the author do not need credit lines, such wording as "Photo by

Index

author" may be appropriate if other illustrations in the same work require credit. In works with more

than one author, such wording may include the name of a particular author.

3.28:

Sources and

permissions

3.29:

Placement of

credit lines

3.30:

Crediting author as

source of

illustration

3.31:

Crediting material

that requires

permission

3.32:

Crediting

commissioned

material

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Credit Lines

of Contents

List of Figures

3.31 CREDITING MATERIAL THAT REQUIRES PERMISSION

List of Tables

Unless fair use applies (see 4.77--87), an illustration reproduced from a published work under

Index

copyright always requires formal permission. In addition to author, title, publication details, and

(occasionally) copyright date, the credit line should include any page or figure number. If the work

being credited is listed in the bibliography or reference list, only a shortened form need appear in the

3.29:

credit line (see third example). For material acquired from a commercial agency, see 3.35. For proper

Placement of

credit lines

citation style, see chapters 14 and 15.

3.30:

Crediting author as

Reproduced by permission from Mark Girouard, Life in the English Country House: A Social and Architectural

source of

History (New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1978), 162.

illustration

3.31:

Reproduced by permission from George B. Schaller et al., The Giant Pandas of Wolong (Chicago: University of

Crediting material

that requires

Chicago Press, 1985), 52. Â© 1985 by the University of Chicago.

permission

3.32:

Reprinted by permission from Duncan (1999, fig. 2).

Crediting

commissioned

material

Some permissions grantors request specific language in the credit line. In a work with many

illustrations, such language in one or two credit lines may conflict with consistent usage in the rest.

3.33:

Crediting material

Editorial discretion should then be exercised; in giving full credit to the source, an editor may follow

obtained free of

charge

the spirit rather than the letter. (Where the grantor is intractable, it may be simpler to use the

language requested.)

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Credit Lines

of Contents

List of Figures

3.32 CREDITING COMMISSIONED MATERIAL

List of Tables

Work commissioned by the author--such as maps, photographs, drawings, or charts--is usually

Index

produced under a "work made for hire" contract (see 4.9--12). Even if no credit is required under such

an arrangement, professional courtesy dictates mentioning the creator (unless the illustration is legibly

signed and the signature reproduced).

3.30:

Crediting author as

Map by Kevin Hand

source of

illustration

Photograph by Ted Lacey

3.31:

Drawing by Barbara Smith

Crediting material

that requires

permission

3.32:

Crediting

commissioned

material

3.33:

Crediting material

obtained free of

charge

3.34:

Crediting material

in the public

domain

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Credit Lines

of Contents

List of Figures

3.33 CREDITING MATERIAL OBTAINED FREE OF CHARGE

List of Tables

For material that the author has obtained free and without restrictions on its use, the credit line may

Index

use the word courtesy.

Photograph courtesy of Ford Motor Company

3.31:

Crediting material

Mies at the groundbreaking ceremony of the National Gallery, September 1965. Courtesy of Reinhard

that requires

Friedrich.

permission

3.32:

Crediting

commissioned

material

3.33:

Crediting material

obtained free of

charge

3.34:

Crediting material

in the public

domain

3.35:

Crediting agency

material

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Credit Lines

of Contents

List of Figures

3.34 CREDITING MATERIAL IN THE PUBLIC DOMAIN

List of Tables

Illustrations from works in the public domain (see 4.19--32) may be reproduced without permission.

Index

For readers' information, however, a credit line is appropriate.

Illustration by Joseph Pennell for Henry James, English Hours (Boston, 1905), facing p. 82.

3.32:

Crediting

Reprinted from John D. Shortridge, Italian Harpsichord-Building in the 16th and 17th Centuries, US National

commissioned

Museum Bulletin 225 (Washington, DC, 1960).

material

3.33:

Crediting material

obtained free of

charge

3.34:

Crediting material

in the public

domain

3.35:

Crediting agency

material

3.36:

Crediting adapted

material

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Credit Lines

of Contents

List of Figures

3.35 CREDITING AGENCY MATERIAL

List of Tables

Photographs of prints, drawings, paintings, and the like obtained from a commercial agency usually

Index

require a credit line.

Woodcut from Historical Pictures Service, Chicago

3.33:

Photograph from Wide World Photos

Crediting material

obtained free of

charge

3.34:

Crediting material

in the public

domain

3.35:

Crediting agency

material

3.36:

Crediting adapted

material

3.37:

When to include a

list of illustrations

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Credit Lines

of Contents

List of Figures

3.36 CREDITING ADAPTED MATERIAL

List of Tables

An author creating an illustration adjusted from, or using data from, another source should credit

Index

that source for reasons of professional courtesy and readers' information.

Figure 1.2. Weight increase of captive pandas during the first years of life. (Data from New York Zoological

3.34:

Park; National Zoological Park; Giron 1980.)

Crediting material

in the public

Adapted from Pauly (2001, fig. 5.5).

domain

3.35:

Crediting agency

material

3.36:

Crediting adapted

material

3.37:

When to include a

list of illustrations

3.38:

Listing illustrations

from a gallery

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Lists of Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

3.37 WHEN TO INCLUDE A LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

List of Tables

For book-length printed works, the criterion for when to include a list of illustrations is whether the

Index

illustrations are of intrinsic interest apart from the text they illustrate. A book on Roman architecture,

illustrated by photographs of ancient buildings, would benefit from a list. Electronic works as a

matter of course, on the other hand, will often include a list as an aid to navigation. In a printed work,

3.35:

a list of illustrations, if included, usually follows the table of contents. A list of illustrations may

Crediting agency

material

occasionally double as a list of credits if these do not appear with the illustrations themselves (see

3.36:

3.29). For guidelines and examples, see 1.38 and figures 1.6, 1.7.

Crediting adapted

material

3.37:

When to include a

list of illustrations

3.38:

Listing illustrations

from a gallery

3.39:

Shortening captions

for a list of

illustrations

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Lists of Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

3.38 LISTING ILLUSTRATIONS FROM A GALLERY

List of Tables

Illustrations that are to appear in printed galleries are not always listed separately. For example, in a

Index

book containing interspersed line art and two photo galleries, a line reading "Photographs follow

pages 228 and 332" might be inserted after the detailed list of figures. If all the illustrations were in

galleries, that line could appear at the end of the table of contents (see fig. 1.5). (All illustrations,

3.36:

including those in galleries, should be listed if integral to the text.)

Crediting adapted

material

3.37:

When to include a

list of illustrations

3.38:

Listing illustrations

from a gallery

3.39:

Shortening captions

for a list of

illustrations

3.40:

What is a chart?

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Lists of Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

3.39 SHORTENING CAPTIONS FOR A LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

List of Tables

In the list of illustrations, long captions should be shortened to a single line (or two at the most). The

Index

number at the end of each of the two entry examples indicates the page on which the illustration

would be found.

3.37:

[ Caption] Fig. 18. The White Garden, reduced to its bare bones in early spring. The box hedges, which are

When to include a

still cut by hand, have to be carefully kept in scale with the small and complex garden as well as in keeping

list of illustrations

with the plants inside the "boxes."

3.38:

Listing illustrations

from a gallery

[ Entry in list] 18. The White Garden in early springâ€ƒ43

3.39:

Shortening captions

[ Caption] Plate 21. The tall trees of the valley, planted by Russell Page, are reflected among the water lilies,

for a list of

Nymphaea, and pickerelweed, Pontederia cordata.

illustrations

3.40:

[ Entry in list] 21. Page's tall trees reflected among water liliesâ€ƒ75

What is a chart?

3.41:

Consistency among

charts

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Charts

of Contents

List of Figures

3.40 WHAT IS A CHART?

List of Tables

A chart, also called a graph, is a device that presents data in a simple, comprehensible form--often

Index

along a set of x and y axes. A chart is considered line art and should be numbered and labeled as a

figure (fig. 1, fig. 2, etc.). It should be used only if it summarizes the data more effectively than mere

words can. While integral to the text, it should, like a table, make sense on its own terms. For

3.38:

guidance in chart design, consult Edward R. Tufte, The Visual Display of Quantitative Information

Listing illustrations

from a gallery

(bibliog. 2.2). Charts intended for black-and-white reproduction should not be produced in color. For

3.39:

an example of a typical chart, see figure 3.8. Figure 3.9--essentially a three-part graph--is a less typical

Shortening captions

example.

for a list of

illustrations

3.40:

What is a chart?

3.41:

Consistency among

charts

3.42:

Axes and curves in

graphs

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Charts

of Contents

List of Figures

3.41 CONSISTENCY AMONG CHARTS

List of Tables

Where two or more charts are used within a work, especially if they deal with comparable material,

Index

they should follow a consistent style in graphics and typography. Whatever graphic device is used,

elements of the same kind must always be represented in the same way. Different visual effects

should be used only to distinguish one element from another, never just for variety.

3.39:

Shortening captions

for a list of

illustrations

3.40:

What is a chart?

3.41:

Consistency among

charts

3.42:

Axes and curves in

graphs

3.43:

Chart titles and

labels

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Charts

of Contents

List of Figures

3.42 AXES AND CURVES IN GRAPHS

List of Tables

Both the x (horizontal) and the y (vertical) axes should be labeled (as in fig. 3.8); the axes serve a

Index

function similar to that of column heads and stubs in a table (see 3.49). The label on the y axis is read

from the bottom up. Curves are usually presented in graphically distinct forms--for example, one may

be a continuous line, another a broken line. The elements in a bar chart or a pie chart that correspond

3.40:

to curves--the bars or the wedges--are also usually distinct. Black-and-white fill elements should be

What is a chart?

used rather than shading unless the publisher allows shading in specially prepared electronic files

3.41:

Consistency among

(see 3.19). All such elements should be labeled or else identified in a key or in the caption (see 3.7,

charts

3.25).

3.42:

Axes and curves in

graphs

3.43:

Chart titles and

labels

3.44:

Abbreviations in

labels

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Charts

of Contents

List of Figures

3.43 CHART TITLES AND LABELS

List of Tables

The title of a chart appears as part of the caption, immediately following the figure number, and is

Index

capitalized sentence-style (see 8.156). See 3.7; compare 3.52. Labels, the descriptive items within a

chart, are normally lowercased (with the exception of proper nouns or other terms that would be

capitalized in running text); if phrases, they may be capitalized sentence-style. Labels may be

3.41:

explained or discussed in a caption as needed (as in fig. 3.9).

Consistency among

charts

3.42:

Axes and curves in

graphs

3.43:

Chart titles and

labels

3.44:

Abbreviations in

labels

3.45:

Genealogical and

pedigree charts

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Charts

of Contents

List of Figures

3.44 ABBREVIATIONS IN LABELS

List of Tables

Abbreviations and symbols may be used in labels as long as they are easily recognizable or explained

Index

in a key or in the caption. A form such as "US$millions" may be more appropriate for nonspecialized

(or non-English-speaking) readers than "US$M," but the shorter form is acceptable if readers will find

it clear and it is used consistently. Numbers and abbreviations are covered in chapters 9 and 10.

3.42:

Axes and curves in

graphs

3.43:

Chart titles and

labels

3.44:

Abbreviations in

labels

3.45:

Genealogical and

pedigree charts

3.46:

Table preparation

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Illustrations >> Charts

of Contents

List of Figures

3.45 GENEALOGICAL AND PEDIGREE CHARTS

List of Tables

Some charts show relationships between elements in a way that cannot be conveniently arranged

Index

along axes or into rows and columns. Charts that show family or genetic structure, in particular, may

require a different visual arrangement that highlights multiple relationships. A genealogical chart

(often called a table and treated as such in previous editions of this manual), for example, attempts to

3.43:

show important relationships within a family or several families by means of branching and

Chart titles and

labels

connecting lines. Figure 3.10, for instance, illustrates the complicated connection of Constantine the

3.44:

Great to Hilderic, King of the Vandals. These charts require careful planning to illustrate relationships

Abbreviations in

with minimal crossing of lines or extraneous data and, for a printed work, to remain within a

labels

reproducible shape and size. Similar to the genealogical chart is the pedigree chart, used mainly in

3.45:

Genealogical and

genealogical works. These fan-shaped diagrams illustrate the ancestry of a given person, typically

pedigree charts

detailing the two parents, four grandparents, eight great-grandparents, and sixteen great-great-

3.46:

grandparents. They may also show several generations of offspring from a single pair of ancestors

Table preparation

and can be used to trace the inheritance of a trait or disorder. These special types of charts should be

3.47:

Use of tables

checked carefully for sense, consistency, and correlation to the surrounding text.

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

3.46 TABLE PREPARATION

List of Tables

This section describes and illustrates the basic elements of a table and accepted ways of editing,

Index

arranging, and typesetting these elements. No one table in this chapter should be taken as a

prototype; all merely illustrate workable patterns and may be adapted according to the data and the

potential users of the tables. Though most tables can be created using the table editor in a word

3.44:

processor, they are nonetheless expensive (i.e., time-consuming) both to typeset and to correct in

Abbreviations in

labels

proofs and should therefore be designed and constructed with care. It is wise to consult the publisher

3.45:

on the appropriate number, size, and physical form of any tables to be included in a work. A table

Genealogical and

should be as simple as the material allows and understandable on its own; even a reader unfamiliar

pedigree charts

with the material presented should be able to make general sense of a table. The text may highlight

3.46:

Table preparation

the main points in a table and summarize its message but should not duplicate the details. For

3.47:

excellent advice on table preparation, consult the Publication Manual of the American Psychological

Use of tables

Association (bibliog. 1.1). For specific instructions on preparing electronic table files, consult your

3.48:

publisher. Chicago offers instructions for table preparation on its journals website.

Consistency among

tables

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

3.47 USE OF TABLES

List of Tables

A table offers an excellent means of presenting a large number of individual, similar facts so that they

Index

are easy to scan and compare. A simple table can give information that would require several

paragraphs to present textually, and it can do so more clearly. An electronic table allows presentation

of even more data, well beyond what may be practical in print. Tables are most appropriate for

3.45:

scientific, statistical, financial, and other technical material. In certain contexts--if, for example, exact

Genealogical and

pedigree charts

values are not essential to an author's argument--a graph or a bar chart (see 3.40), or plain text, may

3.46:

more effectively present the data.

Table preparation

3.47:

Use of tables

3.48:

Consistency among

tables

3.49:

Table structure

and use

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

3.48 CONSISTENCY AMONG TABLES

List of Tables

Because a prime virtue of tables is easy comparison, consistency in style is indispensable both within

Index

one table and among several. A consistent style for titles, column heads, abbreviations, and the like

should be selected and followed for all tables in a single work. Similarly, choices related to line

spacing, indention, fonts, rules, and other distinguishing features must be made uniformly for all

3.46:

tables in a work. Certain tables, however, may require rules or other devices not needed in other

Table preparation

tables in the same work.

3.47:

Use of tables

3.48:

Consistency among

tables

3.49:

Table structure

and use

3.50:

Horizontal and

vertical rules

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.49 TABLE STRUCTURE AND USE

List of Tables

A table normally consists of rows and columns, which are analogous to the horizontal ( x) and vertical

Index

( y) axes of a graph, respectively. The data in most tables include two sets of variables. One set of

variables is defined in the top row of a table, in the column headings (see 3.54); the other set is

defined along the far left-hand column of the table by the stub headings (see 3.57). If the data consist

3.47:

of dependent and independent variables, the independent variables are usually presented in the stub

Use of tables

column, though this choice is sometimes limited by the physical dimensions of the table (see 3.84).

3.48:

Consistency among

The intersection between a row defined by a stub head and a column defined by a column head is a

tables

cell (sometimes called a data cell). See figure 3.11.

3.49:

Table structure

and use

3.50:

Horizontal and

vertical rules

3.51:

Numbering tables

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.50 HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL RULES

List of Tables

To produce a clear, professional-looking table, rules should be used sparingly. Many tables will

Index

require just three rules, all of them horizontal--one at the very top of the table, below the title and

above the column heads; one just below the column heads; and one at the bottom of the table, along

the bottom of the last row, above any notes to the table. Additional horizontal rules may be required

3.48:

to separate spanner heads from column heads (see 3.55) or to enclose cut-in heads (see 3.56). A rule

Consistency among

tables

above a row of totals is traditional but not essential (unless required by a journal or series style). See

3.49:

also 3.61. The double rule traditionally used between title and column heads, still used by some

Table structure

journals, is seen less than it once was. Vertical rules should be used sparingly--for example, when a

and use

table is doubled up (see 3.84) or as an aid to comprehension in an especially long or complex table

3.50:

Horizontal and

(such as the ten-page hyphenation guide at the end of chapter 7 of this manual; see 7.85).

vertical rules

3.51:

Numbering tables

3.52:

Table titles

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.51 NUMBERING TABLES

List of Tables

Tables should be numbered separately from any illustrations (table 1, table 2, etc.). In a book with

Index

many tables, or with chapters by different authors, double numeration by chapter is often used, as it

is for illustrations (table 1.1, table 1.2, . . . , table 2.2, table 2.3, . . . , etc.; see 3.11). For table titles, see

3.52. Every table should be cited in the text by the number, either directly or parenthetically.

3.49:

Table structure

The first column of table 2 displays the results of a model predicting the age trajectory of health, controlling

and use

for differences by cohort and excluding all other predictors.

3.50:

Horizontal and

vertical rules

Ethnographic observation brought to light four analytically distinct but empirically interrelated types of

3.51:

worker response to the new regimes (see table 5.3).

Numbering tables

Note that the word table is lowercased in text references. Table numbers follow the order in which the

3.52:

Table titles

tables are to appear in the text, and first mentions should follow that order as well. (But where

3.53:

context demands a reference to a table in a subsequent chapter of a book, such wording as "A

Parenthetical

information in

different set of variables is presented in chapter 5, table 10" may be appropriate.) Each table, even in a

table titles

closely related set, should be given its own number (tables 14, 15, and 16, rather than tables 14A--C). A

simple list or other tabular matter that requires only two columns can usually be presented in the run

of text and left unnumbered and untitled (see, e.g., the two-column list at 1.4 in this manual).

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.52 TABLE TITLES

List of Tables

Titles should be as succinct as possible and should not suggest any interpretation of the data. For

Index

example, a title such as "Recidivism among reform school parolees" is preferable to "High degree of

recidivism among reform school parolees." Titles should be in noun form, and participles are

preferred to relative clauses: for example, "Families subscribing to weekly news magazines," not

3.50:

"Families that subscribe to weekly news magazines." Table titles may be capitalized in sentence style

Horizontal and

vertical rules

(see 8.156), as in the examples in this chapter, or in the more traditional headline style (see 8.157) as

3.51:

long as one style prevails throughout the work. The title, which appears above the table, usually

Numbering tables

follows the number on the same line, separated by punctuation or by space and typographic

3.52:

distinction. (Less commonly, the number appears on a line by itself, the title starting a new line.) The

Table titles

number is always preceded by the word table.

3.53:

Parenthetical

information in

Table 6. Ratios of parental income coefficients to SAT score coefficients

table titles

3.54:

Table 12â€ƒFertilizer treatment effects on Lythrum salicaria and Penthorum sedoides

Column heads

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.53 PARENTHETICAL INFORMATION IN TABLE TITLES

List of Tables

Important explanatory or statistical information is often included in parentheses in a title. Such

Index

material should be set in sentence style even if the main title is in headline style. More detailed

information should go in a note to the table (see 3.76, 3.77).

3.51:

Federal employees in the Progressive Era (total plus selected agencies)

Numbering tables

Scan statistics S L of varying lengths L for sib-pair data (broad diagnosis)

3.52:

Gender as a factor in successful business transactions ( N = 4,400)

Table titles

3.53:

For the significance of N used in statistical tables, see 3.83.

Parenthetical

information in

table titles

3.54:

Column heads

3.55:

Spanner heads

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.54 COLUMN HEADS

List of Tables

Space being at a premium, column heads should be as brief as possible and are best capitalized

Index

sentence-style (as in all examples in this chapter). As long as their meaning is clear to readers,

abbreviations may be used as needed. The first column (the stub) does not always require a head (see

3.57). In a work that includes a number of tables, column heads should be treated consistently. Like

3.52:

table titles, a column head may require an indication of the unit of measurement used or some other

Table titles

clarification of the data in the column. Such material, which may consist of a symbol or an

3.53:

Parenthetical

abbreviation ($, %, km, n, and so on), should follow the column head in parentheses. See figure 3.12.

information in

Parentheses may also be used in column heads when some of the data in the cells are in parentheses.

table titles

For example, a column head might read "Children with positive results, % (no. positive/no. tested)"

3.54:

Column heads

and a cell under this head could contain "27.3 (6/22)." If columns must be numbered for text reference,

3.55:

use arabic numerals in parentheses, centered immediately below the column head, above the rule

Spanner heads

separating the head from the column (see also 3.84).

3.56:

Cut-in heads

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.55 SPANNER HEADS

List of Tables

When a table demands column heads of two or more levels--when related columns require both a

Index

collective head and individual heads--spanner heads, or spanners (sometimes called decked heads),

are used. A horizontal rule, called a spanner rule (or straddle), appears between the spanner and the

column heads to show which columns the spanner applies to (see fig. 3.13). For ease of reading,

3.53:

spanner heads should seldom exceed two levels.

Parenthetical

information in

table titles

3.54:

Column heads

3.55:

Spanner heads

3.56:

Cut-in heads

3.57:

Stub entries

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.56 CUT-IN HEADS

List of Tables

Cut-in heads, spanning all columns but the first, may be used as subheads within a table. They

Index

usually appear between horizontal rules (see fig. 3.14), though extra vertical space above each head

may be used instead. An exceptionally long table with one or more cut-in heads may be a candidate

for division into two or more tables.

3.54:

Column heads

3.55:

Spanner heads

3.56:

Cut-in heads

3.57:

Stub entries

3.58:

Stub entries with

subheads

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.57 STUB ENTRIES

List of Tables

The left-hand column of a table, known as the stub, is usually a vertical listing of categories about

Index

which information is given in the following columns. If all the entries are of like kind, the stub

usually carries a column head (e.g., "Tort reform" in fig. 3.12); even a general head such as

"Characteristic" or "Variable" or "Year" aids readers. If the entries are self-explanatory (as in figs. 3.11

3.55:

and 3.14), a head may be omitted from the stub; a head may also be omitted if the entries are too

Spanner heads

unlike (as in fig. 3.16). If the stub entries are words, they are capitalized sentence-style. Unless they

3.56:

Cut-in heads

are questions, they carry no end punctuation. They should be consistent in syntax: Authors,

3.57:

Publishers, Printers ( not Authors, Publishing concerns, Operates printshop).

Stub entries

3.58:

Stub entries with

subheads

3.59:

Runover lines in

stub columns

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.58 STUB ENTRIES WITH SUBHEADS

List of Tables

Items in the stub may form a straight sequential list (e.g., all the states in the Union listed

Index

alphabetically) or a classified list (e.g., the states listed by geographic region, with a subhead above

each region). The first word in a subentry as well as in a main entry is capitalized, to avoid confusion

with runover lines. Subentries are further distinguished from main entries by being indented (as in

3.56:

fig. 3.12), or italics may be used for the main entries and roman for the subentries. A combination of

Cut-in heads

italics and indention may also be used, especially if sub-subentries are required. There is generally no

3.57:

Stub entries

need for colons following main entries, but a particular journal style may require them. See also 3.59.

3.58:

Stub entries with

subheads

3.59:

Runover lines in

stub columns

3.60:

Abbreviations in

stub columns

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.59 RUNOVER LINES IN STUB COLUMNS

List of Tables

If there are no subentries, runover lines in stub entries should be indented (typically by one em in

Index

typeset copy). Only if there is extra space between rows should runovers be set flush left. If there are

indented subentries, any runover lines must be more deeply indented than the lowest level of

subentry (see fig. 3.12). Runovers from main entries and subentries carry the same indention from the

3.57:

left margin (in typeset copy, typically one em farther to the right than the indent for the lowest level

Stub entries

of subentry).

3.58:

Stub entries with

subheads

3.59:

Runover lines in

stub columns

3.60:

Abbreviations in

stub columns

3.61:

Totals

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.60 ABBREVIATIONS IN STUB COLUMNS

List of Tables

As in column heads (see 3.54), where space is at a premium, symbols or abbreviations ($, %, km, n,

Index

and so on) are acceptable in the stub. Ditto marks (â€³ â€³) to indicate information that repeats from

one row to the next are not, however, since they save no space and make work for readers. Any

nonstandard abbreviations must be defined in a table footnote (see 3.77).

3.58:

Stub entries with

subheads

3.59:

Runover lines in

stub columns

3.60:

Abbreviations in

stub columns

3.61:

Totals

3.62:

Using leaders with

stub entries

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.61 TOTALS

List of Tables

When the word Total appears at the foot of the stub, it is often indented more deeply than the greatest

Index

indention above (see fig. 3.21) or distinguished typographically (see fig. 3.15). See also 3.72, 3.73.

3.59:

Runover lines in

stub columns

3.60:

Abbreviations in

stub columns

3.61:

Totals

3.62:

Using leaders with

stub entries

3.63:

Table body and

cells

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.62 USING LEADERS WITH STUB ENTRIES

List of Tables

Leaders--several spaced periods following a stub entry--are sometimes used in a table where the

Index

connection between the stub entries and the rows they apply to would otherwise be unclear. Some

journals routinely use leaders in stubs (see fig. 3.16); books use them more rarely. Another practice--

used routinely by some journals--is to apply shading to every other row.

3.60:

Abbreviations in

stub columns

3.61:

Totals

3.62:

Using leaders with

stub entries

3.63:

Table body and

cells

3.64:

Column data

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.63 TABLE BODY AND CELLS

List of Tables

Strictly speaking, the table body includes all rows, columns, and heads. Nonetheless, it is often

Index

convenient to consider the body of a table as consisting of the points of intersection between the stub

entries and the column headings--the real substance of the table. These intersections are called cells

(or data cells). The fifth cell in the fourth column of the table in figure 3.12, for example, contains the

3.61:

datum "+14,160." Though cells are usually occupied by data, they may be empty (see 3.65).

Totals

3.62:

Using leaders with

stub entries

3.63:

Table body and

cells

3.64:

Column data

3.65:

Empty cells

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.64 COLUMN DATA

List of Tables

Whenever possible, columns should carry the same kinds of information. For instance, amounts of

Index

money should appear in one column, percentages in another, and information expressed in words in

another (though two types of data can share the same column, as in the table in fig. 3.13; see 3.67). No

column should contain identical information in all the cells; such information is better handled in a

3.62:

footnote.

Using leaders with

stub entries

3.63:

Table body and

cells

3.64:

Column data

3.65:

Empty cells

3.66:

Matrixes

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.65 EMPTY CELLS

List of Tables

If a column head does not apply to one of the entries in the stub, the cell should either be left blank

Index

or, better, filled in by an em dash or three unspaced ellipsis dots. If a distinction is needed between

"not applicable" and "no data available," a blank cell may be used for the former and an em dash or

ellipsis dots for "no data" (see fig. 3.15). If this distinction is not clear from the text, a note may be

3.63:

added to the table. (Alternatively, the abbreviations n/a and n.d. may be used, with definitions given

Table body and

cells

in a note.) A zero means literally that the quantity in a cell is zero (see figs. 3.13, 3.16).

3.64:

Column data

3.65:

Empty cells

3.66:

Matrixes

3.67:

Presenting multiple

values in a single

cell

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.66 MATRIXES

List of Tables

A matrix is a tabular structure designed to show reciprocal relationships within a group of

Index

individuals, concepts, or whatever. In a matrix, the stub entries are identical to the column heads;

therefore, the cells present two identical sets of intersections. The cells that would contain repeated

data may be left blank if the relational order is not significant (see fig. 3.17); in some matrixes, the

3.64:

intersection of matching heads may be left blank or marked with an em dash or ellipsis dots (as in

Column data

fig. 3.18).

3.65:

Empty cells

3.66:

Matrixes

3.67:

Presenting multiple

values in a single

cell

3.68:

Alignment of rows

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> The Parts of a Table

of Contents

List of Figures

3.67 PRESENTING MULTIPLE VALUES IN A SINGLE CELL

List of Tables

To allow for fewer columns, a single cell may contain two values, with one appearing in parentheses

Index

(see fig. 3.13). Such cases should be clarified in the column heading (see 3.54) or in a note.

3.65:

Empty cells

3.66:

Matrixes

3.67:

Presenting multiple

values in a single

cell

3.68:

Alignment of rows

3.69:

Alignment of

column heads

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Cell Alignment and Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

3.68 ALIGNMENT OF ROWS

List of Tables

Each cell in a row aligns with the stub entry it applies to. If the stub entry occupies more than one

Index

line, the cell entry is normally aligned on the last line of the stub entry (see fig. 3.13). But if both the

stub and one or more cells contain more than one line, the first lines are aligned throughout the body

of the table. First lines are also aligned in a table where the content of each column is of the same

3.66:

sort--in other words, where the first column is not a stub as described in 3.57 (see fig. 3.19). See also

Matrixes

3.69.

3.67:

Presenting multiple

values in a single

cell

3.68:

Alignment of rows

3.69:

Alignment of

column heads

3.70:

Alignment of

numbers within

columns

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Cell Alignment and Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

3.69 ALIGNMENT OF COLUMN HEADS

List of Tables

Column heads that share a row align on the baseline; if any head occupies more than one line, all the

Index

heads in that row align on the last (lowest) line. Each column head except in the stub column is

normally centered on the longest (i.e., widest) cell entry. If the latter is unusually long, adjustment

may be necessary to give an appearance of balance. If centering does not work, align column heads

3.67:

and cells on the left. The stub head and entries are always aligned on the left.

Presenting multiple

values in a single

cell

3.68:

Alignment of rows

3.69:

Alignment of

column heads

3.70:

Alignment of

numbers within

columns

3.71:

Alignment of

columns consisting

of words

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Cell Alignment and Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

3.70 ALIGNMENT OF NUMBERS WITHIN COLUMNS

List of Tables

Within a column, numbers without decimal points are usually aligned on the last digit, "ranged right"

Index

(see fig. 3.16). If the numbers include decimal points, they are typically aligned on the decimal point

(see fig. 3.13). For quantities less than 1.0, zeros do not need to be added before the decimal in a table

unless prescribed by a journal or series style (though they would usually be required in running text).

3.68:

See also 9.19. Where spaces rather than commas are used to separate groups of digits (see 9.20),

Alignment of rows

alignment is made on the implicit comma. In all these arrangements, the column of numerals as a

3.69:

Alignment of

whole is usually centered within the column on the longest (i.e., widest) numeral. A column including

column heads

different kinds of numbers is best aligned on the ones that occur most frequently (as in the table in

3.70:

fig. 3.20, in which most of the values are aligned on the decimal point, but the values for N are

Alignment of

numbers within

centered; see also 3.83). Ellipses and em dashes are centered (see fig. 3.15).

columns

3.71:

Alignment of

columns consisting

of words

3.72:

Format for totals,

averages, and

means

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Cell Alignment and Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

3.71 ALIGNMENT OF COLUMNS CONSISTING OF WORDS

List of Tables

When a column consists of words, phrases, or sentences, appearance governs left-right alignment. If

Index

no runover lines are required, entries may be centered. Longer entries usually look better if they

begin flush left. Runover lines may be indented or, if enough space is left between entries, aligned

flush left with the first line (as in fig. 3.19).

3.69:

Alignment of

column heads

3.70:

Alignment of

numbers within

columns

3.71:

Alignment of

columns consisting

of words

3.72:

Format for totals,

averages, and

means

3.73:

When to use totals

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Cell Alignment and Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

3.72 FORMAT FOR TOTALS, AVERAGES, AND MEANS

List of Tables

Extra vertical space or short rules sometimes appear above totals at the foot of columns but may

Index

equally well be omitted. No rules, however, should appear above averages or means. Consistency

must be maintained and, where applicable, journal or series style followed. The word Total in the stub

is often indented. Subtotals are similarly treated. See figure 3.21. See also 3.61, 3.73.

3.70:

Alignment of

numbers within

columns

3.71:

Alignment of

columns consisting

of words

3.72:

Format for totals,

averages, and

means

3.73:

When to use totals

3.74:

Order and

placement of notes

to tables

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Cell Alignment and Formatting

of Contents

List of Figures

3.73 WHEN TO USE TOTALS

List of Tables

Totals and subtotals may be included or not, according to how useful they are to the presentation.

Index

When the percentages in a column are based on different n's, a final percentage based on the total N

may be informative and, if so, should be included (see 3.83). Note that rounding often causes a

percentage total to be slightly more or less than 100. In such cases the actual value (e.g., 99% or 101%)

3.71:

should be given--if it is given at all--and a footnote should explain the apparent discrepancy. See also

Alignment of

columns consisting

3.61, 3.72.

of words

3.72:

Format for totals,

averages, and

means

3.73:

When to use totals

3.74:

Order and

placement of notes

to tables

3.75:

Acknowledging

data in source

notes to tables

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Notes to Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

3.74 ORDER AND PLACEMENT OF NOTES TO TABLES

List of Tables

Footnotes to a table are of four general kinds and, where two or more kinds are needed, should

Index

appear in this order: (1) source notes, (2) other notes applying to the whole table, (3) notes applying

to specific parts of the table, and (4) notes on significance levels. Table footnotes always appear

immediately below the table they belong to and must be numbered separately from the text notes.

3.72:

But if a multipage table contains no general notes and any specific notes pertain only to a single page,

Format for totals,

averages, and

these notes may appear at the foot of the printed pages they apply to. In an electronic version that

means

includes hypertext links, all footnotes are usually grouped at the bottom of the table.

3.73:

When to use totals

3.74:

Order and

placement of notes

to tables

3.75:

Acknowledging

data in source

notes to tables

3.76:

Notes applying to

the whole table

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Notes to Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

3.75 ACKNOWLEDGING DATA IN SOURCE NOTES TO TABLES

List of Tables

If data for a table are not the author's own but are taken from another source or other sources,

Index

professional courtesy requires that full acknowledgment be made in an unnumbered footnote. The

note is introduced by Source or Sources, in italics and followed by a colon (see fig. 3.20), though other

treatments are acceptable if consistently followed.

3.73:

When to use totals

Sources: Data from Richard H. Adams Jr., "Remittances, Investment, and Rural Asset Accumulation in

3.74:

Pakistan," Economic Development and Cultural Change 47, no. 1 (1998): 155--73; David Bevan, Paul Collier, and

Order and

placement of notes

Jan Gunning, Peasants and Government: An Economic Analysis (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1989), 125--28.

to tables

3.75:

If the sources are listed in the bibliography or reference list, a shortened form may be used:

Acknowledging

data in source

Sources: Data from Adams (1998); Bevan, Collier, and Gunning (1989).

notes to tables

3.76:

Unless fair use applies (see 4.77--87), a table reproduced without change from a published work

Notes applying to

the whole table

under copyright requires formal permission. Credit should be given in a source note. See 3.31 for

3.77:

more information about styling credit lines, including examples. For more on source citations, see

Notes to specific

parts of a table

chapters 14 and 15.

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Notes to Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

3.76 NOTES APPLYING TO THE WHOLE TABLE

List of Tables

A note applying to the table as a whole follows any source note, is also unnumbered, and is

Index

introduced by the word Note, in italics and followed by a colon, though other treatments are

acceptable if consistently followed. See figures 3.11, 3.12, 3.14, 3.17, 3.20. If the substance of a general note can be expressed as a brief phrase, it may be added parenthetically to the title (for examples, see

3.74:

3.53).

Order and

placement of notes

to tables

3.75:

Acknowledging

data in source

notes to tables

3.76:

Notes applying to

the whole table

3.77:

Notes to specific

parts of a table

3.78:

Notes on

significance levels

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Notes to Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

3.77 NOTES TO SPECIFIC PARTS OF A TABLE

List of Tables

For notes that apply to specific parts of a table, superior (superscript) letters, numbers, or symbols

Index

may be used; one system should be used consistently across all tables. Though superior letters are

generally preferred, the choice may depend on context. Numerals may be preferred for tables whose

data consist mainly of words or letters (e.g., tables 11.3, 11.4, and 11.5 in this manual), whereas

3.75:

symbols may be preferred for tables that include mathematical or chemical equations, where superior

Acknowledging

data in source

letters or numerals might be mistaken for exponents. Each table should have its own series of notes--

notes to tables

beginning with a, 1, or *--separate from the text notes and the notes to other tables. The sequence runs

3.76:

from left to right, top to bottom, as in text. Unlike note reference numbers in text, however, the same

Notes applying to

the whole table

letter, number, or symbol is used on two or more elements if the corresponding note applies to them.

3.77:

(A footnote reference attached to a column head is assumed to apply to the items in the column

Notes to specific

parts of a table

below it; a reference attached to a stub head applies to that row.) The superior letter, number, or

symbol is repeated at the foot of the table at the beginning of the corresponding note and is followed

3.78:

Notes on

neither by a period nor, usually, by a space. See figures 3.13, 3.14, 3.24. Where symbols are used, the

significance levels

sequence is as follows:

3.79:

Editing table

content

1. * (asterisk; but do not use if p values occur in the table; see 3.78)

2. † (dagger)

3. ‡ (double dagger)

4. § (section mark)

5. || (parallels)

6. # (number sign, or pound)

When more symbols are needed, these may be doubled and tripled in the same sequence:

*, †, ‡, etc., **, ††, ‡‡, etc., ***, †††, ‡‡‡, and so on.

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Notes to Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

3.78 NOTES ON SIGNIFICANCE LEVELS

List of Tables

If a table contains notes on significance levels (also called probability notes), asterisks may be used as

Index

reference marks. If two or three standard significance levels are noted, a single asterisk is used for the

least significant level, two for the next higher, and three for the third. If values other than these three

are given, however, footnote letters are preferable to asterisks, to avoid misleading the reader. In the

3.76:

note, the letter p (probability) is usually lowercase and in italics. Zeros are generally omitted before

Notes applying to

the whole table

the decimal point. Probability notes follow all other notes (see fig. 3.22).

3.77:

Notes to specific

* p < .05

parts of a table

** p < .01

3.78:

*** p < .001

Notes on

significance levels

These short notes may be set on the same line; if they are spaced, no intervening punctuation is

3.79:

Editing table

needed, but if they are run together, they should be separated by semicolons. For more on p values,

content

consult the Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association (bibliog. 1.1). Some journals

3.80:

capitalize p, and some give probability values in regular table footnotes.

"Percent" versus

"percentage"

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Editing Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

3.79 EDITING TABLE CONTENT

List of Tables

Tables should be edited for style--with special attention to matters of capitalization, spelling,

Index

punctuation, abbreviations, numbers, and use of symbols. They should be checked for internal

consistency, consistency across multiple tables (e.g., to ensure uniform treatment of column heads and

stub entries), and consistency with the style of the surrounding text. Any totals should be checked

3.77:

and discrepancies referred to the author for resolution. As in the text, footnote references must be

Notes to specific

parts of a table

checked against the footnotes, and the correct sequence of letters or symbols must be verified (see

3.78:

3.77). Tables should be checked for relevance vis-Ã -vis the text, and they should be checked

Notes on

alongside each other for redundancy. A lay reader or a nontechnical editor should be able to make

significance levels

logical sense of a table, even if the material is highly technical.

3.79:

Editing table

content

3.80:

"Percent" versus

"percentage"

3.81:

Number ranges

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Editing Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

3.80 "PERCENT" VERSUS "PERCENTAGE"

List of Tables

Despite changing usage, Chicago continues to regard percent as an adverb ("per, or out of, each

Index

hundred," as in 10 percent of the class)--or, less commonly, an adjective ( a 10 percent raise)--and to use

percentage as the noun form ( a significant percentage of her income). The symbol %, however, may stand

for either word. See also 3.82.

3.78:

Notes on

significance levels

3.79:

Editing table

content

3.80:

"Percent" versus

"percentage"

3.81:

Number ranges

3.82:

Signs and symbols

in tables

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Editing Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

3.81 NUMBER RANGES

List of Tables

Anyone preparing or editing a table must ensure that number ranges do not overlap, that there are

Index

no gaps between them, and that they are as precise as the data require. It must be clear whether "up

to" or "up to and including" is meant. Dollar amounts, for example, might be given as "less than $5,

$5--$9, $10--$14, and $15--$19" (not "$1--$5, $5--10," etc.). If greater precision is needed, they might be

3.79:

given as "$1.00--$4.99, $5.00--$9.99," and so forth. The symbols < and > must be used only to mean

Editing table

content

less than and more than. In a table including age ranges, >60 means "more than 60 years old" ( not "60

3.80:

and up," which would be represented by â‰¥60).

"Percent" versus

"percentage"

3.81:

Number ranges

3.82:

Signs and symbols

in tables

3.83:

"N" versus "n"

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Editing Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

3.82 SIGNS AND SYMBOLS IN TABLES

List of Tables

In a column consisting exclusively of, for example, dollar amounts or percentages, the signs should be

Index

omitted from the cells and included in the column head (see 3.54 and figs. 3.12, 3.13) or, occasionally,

in the stub head (see fig. 3.22). Mathematical operational signs preceding quantities in a column of

numbers are not necessarily aligned with other such signs but should appear immediately to the left

3.80:

of the numbers they belong to (see fig. 3.12).

"Percent" versus

"percentage"

3.81:

Number ranges

3.82:

Signs and symbols

in tables

3.83:

"N" versus "n"

3.84:

Adjusting and

checking tables

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Editing Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

3.83 "N" VERSUS "N"

List of Tables

An italic capital N is used in many statistical tables to stand for the total number of a group from

Index

which data are drawn (see fig. 3.20). An italic lowercase n stands for a portion of the total group (see

fig. 3.13). For example, if N refers to the total number of subjects (of both sexes) in a study, a

lowercase n might be used when specifying the number of males and the number of females in the

3.81:

study.

Number ranges

3.82:

Signs and symbols

in tables

3.83:

"N" versus "n"

3.84:

Adjusting and

checking tables

3.85:

Indicating

"continued" and

specifying

repeating column

heads

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Editing Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

3.84 ADJUSTING AND CHECKING TABLES

List of Tables

When preparing a table for publication, editors and compositors may need to adjust or check its

Index

format according to the following general guidelines:

1. Adjusting long tables and wide tables. Tables that are long and narrow with few columns but many

3.81:

rows, on the one hand, and very wide tables with many columns but few rows, on the other,

Number ranges

may not work well--if at all--especially in print. The remedy for a long, skinny table is to

3.82:

double it up, running the table in two halves, side by side, with the column heads repeated over

Signs and symbols

in tables

the second half. This approach can also allow a narrow but not necessarily long table to run the

3.83:

width of a page (see fig. 3.23). For a wide, shallow table, the remedy is to turn it around,

"N" versus "n"

making column heads of the stub items and stub items of the column heads; if the table turns

3.84:

out to be too narrow that way, it can then be doubled up. Some tables may need to be

Adjusting and

checking tables

presented broadside (rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise and read left to right from the bottom

3.85:

to the top of a page); see figure 3.16. See also 3.49. For long tables, the editor may need to

Indicating

specify whether and where "continued" lines and repeated column heads are allowed (see 3.85)

"continued" and

specifying

and where footnotes should appear (see 3.77).

repeating column

heads

2. Adjusting oversize tables--other options. If an oversize table cannot be accommodated in a printed

work by the remedies suggested above, further editorial or typographic adjustments will be

needed. Wording may be shortened or abbreviations used. Omitting the running head when a

table takes a full page (see 1.15) allows more space for the table itself. A wide table may extend

a little into the left margin if on a verso or the right margin if on a recto or, if it looks better,

equally on both sides. For a particularly large table, the publisher may decide to reduce the type

size or to publish the table in electronic form only, if that is an option. To reduce excessive

width, two other measures (neither very convenient for readers) are worth considering: (1)

numbers are used for column heads, and the text of the heads is relegated to footnotes, as

illustrated in figure 3.24; or (2) column heads are turned on their sides so that they read up the

printed page rather than across.

3. Checking rules. The editor should ensure that rules appear as needed and that spanner rules are

the right length and are distinct from underlining (so that a rule and not italicized text appears

in the typeset version). See 3.50, 3.55.

4. Checking alignment of numbers and text. Alignment of rows and columns must be clearly specified

in the manuscript. Editors should check to make sure that numbers have been aligned properly

(e.g., by decimal point) and that stub heads are aligned with and correspond to the rows to

which they apply. See 3.68--73. Old-style numbers (like this:

), though elegant as page

numbers or in text that contains few numerals, should be avoided in tabular matter because

they do not align as well as (and can be harder to read than) regular "lining" numbers (like this:

1938).

5. Checking running heads on full-page tables. The editor should be sure that running heads are

omitted on full-page and multipage tables (but see 1.15, 2.112).

6. Checking typefaces and markup. In a book that is not part of a series, the designer will set the

typographic style for tables, as for the text and other elements. Journals follow their own

established style for presentation and markup. Editors should make sure tables are edited in

accord with the design, and formatting and markup for electronically prepared tables should be

checked to make sure they have been consistently and correctly applied. For a useful discussion

of table design, see Richard Eckersley et al., Glossary of Typesetting Terms (bibliog. 2.7).

3: ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Tables >> Editing Tables

of Contents

List of Figures

3.85 INDICATING "CONTINUED" AND SPECIFYING REPEATING COLUMN HEADS

List of Tables

For a vertical table of more than one page, the column heads are repeated on each page. For a two-

Index

page broadside table--which should be presented on facing pages if at all possible--column heads

need not be repeated; for broadside tables that run beyond two pages, column heads are repeated

only on each new verso (see also 2.112). Where column heads are repeated, the table number and

3.81:

"continued" should also appear. See figure 3.25. For any table that is likely to run to more than one

Number ranges

page, the editor should specify whether "continued" lines and repeated column heads will be needed

3.82:

Signs and symbols

and where footnotes should appear (usually at the end of the table as a whole; but see 3.74). The

in tables

editor should also be sure that running heads are omitted on full-page and multipage tables (see 1.15).

3.83:

"N" versus "n"

3.84:

Adjusting and

checking tables

3.85:

Indicating

"continued" and

specifying

repeating column

heads

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.1

List of Figures

A halftone image of an original photo (see also fig. 3.2). PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.2

List of Figures

Detail of figure 3.1 showing the halftone dot pattern. See 3.3. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.3

List of Figures

A line drawing with descriptive labels (see 3.4, 3.7). The surrounding text of the work from which this

List of Tables

unnumbered and uncaptioned figure was drawn identifies the plant as a Sinarundinaria stem.

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.4

List of Figures

A line drawing, including figure number and caption (see 3.4, 3.8--14, 3.21--27). The drawing's three

List of Tables

parts, labeled with capital letters, are discussed in the caption (see 3.7). PDF Version >>

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.5

List of Figures

Musical examples carry their captions above the illustration rather than below. Such examples can be

List of Tables

reproduced photographically (e.g., from a published score) or typeset by specialists (see 3.4).

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.6

List of Figures

A figure consisting of a photograph and a line drawing, each with descriptive labels and identified by

List of Tables

the letters A and B, respectively (see 3.12, 3.7). PDF Version >>

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.7

List of Figures

The relative position of each part in this composite figure is identified in the caption (see 3.24).

List of Tables

PDF Version >>

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.8

List of Figures

A bar chart (also called a bar graph) with a key to the three types of bars (see 3.25). The caption

List of Tables

includes the standard deviation (sd) for the T-shaped error bars. See also 3.40--45. PDF Version >>

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.9

List of Figures

The symbols in this graph are identified in the caption. Compare figure 3.8 and the examples in 3.25.

List of Tables

See also 3.40--45. PDF Version >>

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.10

List of Figures

A genealogical chart (see 3.45). PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.11

List of Figures

A four-column table with three column headings ( top row), three stub headings ( far left-hand column),

List of Tables

and nine data cells (see 3.49). PDF Version >>

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.12

List of Figures

A four-column table with two levels of stub headings ( first column). Note the parenthetical indication

List of Tables

in the second column head, specifying percentages for the values in that column (see 3.54).

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.13

List of Figures

A four-column table with a spanner head across the second and third columns, separated from the

List of Tables

column heads by a horizontal rule (see 3.55). Note the three levels of stub headings (see 3.58). Note

Index

also that the spanner head specifies two units for each columnâ€”number and, in parentheses,

percentage (see 3.54).

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.14

List of Figures

A four-column table with two cut-in heads ("OLS estimates" and "MLE estimates") across three

List of Tables

columns, separated by horizontal rules (see 3.56); a general note (see 3.76); and two lettered footnotes

Index

(see 3.77).

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.15

List of Figures

Four-column table with Total appearing in italics, to distinguish it from the stub entries above and

List of Tables

below. Compare figure 3.21. See also 3.61. Also note the use of ellipsis dots for cells with no data; cells

Index

for which data is not applicable are blank. See 3.65.

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.16

List of Figures

An eleven-column table with three levels of column heads, separated by spanner rules (see 3.55), and with leader dots from stub

List of Tables

entries (see 3.62). Note also the two rows of totals; the rule above these rows is common but by no means required (see 3.61).

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.17

List of Figures

A seven-column matrix, in which the six column heads are identical to the six stub entries. Those cells

List of Tables

that repeat order-independent relationships from other cells are left blank. See 3.65. PDF Version >>

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.18

List of Figures

An eight-column matrix. The intersections of like columns and stub entries are marked with ellipsis

List of Tables

dots. See 3.66. PDF Version >>

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.19

List of Figures

Three-column table with no stub headings (see 3.57, 3.68). PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.20

List of Figures

Three-column table in which values are aligned on the decimal point except for N values ( last row);

List of Tables

see 3.70. PDF Version >>

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.21

List of Figures

Five-column table with subtotals and total (see 3.61, 3.72). PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.22

List of Figures

Four-column table with notes on significance, or probability, levels ( p), following a general note (see

List of Tables

3.78). PDF Version >>

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.23

List of Figures

Three-column table doubled into two columns (see 3.84). PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.24

List of Figures

Eight-column table with numbers replacing column heads to reduce width. The heads are defined in

List of Tables

a general note to the table. Notes to specific parts of the table are indicated by superior (superscript)

Index

letters. See 3.84, 3.77.

3 : ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 3.25

List of Figures

Six-column table with repeated column heads and "continued" indication following a page break (see

List of Tables

3.85). PDF Version >>

Index

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

of Contents

Overview

List of Figures

4.1

The scope of this chapter

List of Tables

Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights

Index

4.2

Relevant law

4.3

How copyright comes into being

4.4

Registration and notice not required

4.5

Original expression

4.6

Author the original owner

Varieties of Authorship

4.7

Individual and joint authors

4.8

Collective works

Works Made for Hire

4.9

Employer as author

4.10

The three categories of work made for hire

4.11

Ineligible works

4.12

Joint authorship

Rights of the Copyright Owner

4.13

Rights of reproduction, distribution, and display

4.14

Derivative work and performance rights

4.15

Moral rightsâ€”integrity of copyright management information

4.16

Trademark protection of titles and other elements

4.17

Basic versus subsidiary rights

4.18

Author retention of subsidiary rights

Copyright and the Public Domain

4.19

Copyright duration before 1978

4.20

Lengthening of copyright duration in 1978

4.21

Uses of public-domain works

Duration of Copyright for Works Created after 1977

4.22

"Life plus seventy"

4.23

Works made for hire

4.24

Anonymous and pseudonymous works

Duration of Copyright for Works Created before 1978

4.25

Pre-1978 unpublished works

4.26

Pre-1978 published US works

4.27

New copyright for new editions

4.28

Pre-1978 published foreign works

4.29

Definition of "foreign"

Renewing Copyright in Pre-1978 Works

4.30

Benefits of renewal

4.31

Renewal by the author

4.32

Renewal if the author is deceased

Assigning or Licensing Copyright

4.33

Subdividing a copyright

4.34

Exclusive versus nonexclusive licenses

4.35

Goals of the parties to a license

4.36

Payment

4.37

Termination of transfers

Copyright Notice

4.38

Changes to the rules

4.39

Three different regimes

Content of Notice

4.40

Three elements of the notice

4.41

Name used in the notice

4.42

Placement of notice

4.43

United States government materials

4.44

Notice on derivative works

4.45

Correcting mistakes

Deposit and Registration

4.46

Deposit requirements

4.47

Registration forms and fees

4.48

Need for accuracy and candor

4.49

Benefits of registration

The Publishing Agreement

4.50

Basic rights

New Books

4.51

Basic book-contract provisions

4.52

Option clauses

4.53

Edited works

4.54

Other contracts

Journal Articles

4.55

Transfers of rights

4.56

Less than full rights

4.57

New alternative licensing arrangements

4.58

Journal editors

Contributions to Symposia

4.59

Symposium proceedings

Subsidiary Rights and Permissions

Handling Subsidiary Rights

4.60

Categories

4.61

Electronic-rights licensing

4.62

Authors' electronic use of their own works

4.63

University licenses

4.64

The NIH Public Access Policy

4.65

Economic considerations

Granting Permission

4.66

Handling permission requests

4.67

The rights file

The Author's Responsibilities

4.68

Author's warranties

Obtaining Permissions

4.69

General principles

4.70

Author's role in obtaining permissions

4.71

Author's own work

4.72

Fees and record keeping

4.73

Permissions beyond the immediate use

4.74

Unpublished works

4.75

The missing copyright owner

4.76

Noncopyright restrictions on archives

Fair Use: Quoting without Permission

4.77

Overview of the legal doctrine

4.78

Validity of "rules of thumb"

4.79

A few general rules

4.80

Epigraphs and interior monologues

4.81

Unpublished works

4.82

Paraphrasing

4.83

Pictorial and graphic materials

4.84

Charts, tables, and graphs

4.85

Importance of attribution

4.86

Unnecessary permissions

4.87

Chicago's fair-use guidelines

Library and Educational Copying as Fair Use

4.88

The Copyright Act

4.89

Library photocopying

4.90

Educational photocopying

4.91

Digitizing and automating the permissions process

Requesting Permission

4.92

Information required

4.93

Sample permissions letters

Illustrations

4.94

Rights holders

4.95

Stock agencies and image archives

4.96

Information required

4.97

Fees

Acknowledging Sources

4.98

Credit lines

4.99

Acknowledgments sections

Fees

4.100 Responsibility for payment

4.101 Anthologies

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

4.1 THE SCOPE OF THIS CHAPTER

List of Tables

The foundation on which the entire publishing industry rests is the law of copyright, and a basic

Index

knowledge of it is essential for both authors and editors. This chapter gives readers that basic

knowledge: how copyright is acquired, how it is owned, what it protects, what rights it comprises,

how long it lasts, how it is transferred from one person to another. Once that foundation is laid, the

4.1:

key elements of publishing contracts are discussed, as well as the licensing of rights (what publishers

The scope of this

chapter

call the "rights and permissions" function). The treatment of rights and permissions includes some

4.2:

guidelines for "fair use." While every effort is made here to be accurate, copyright law is both wide

Relevant law

and intricate, and this chapter makes no claim to be exhaustive. Also, this chapter should not be

4.3:

considered legal advice or substitute for a consultation with a knowledgeable attorney in any

How copyright

comes into being

particular circumstance. (For more detailed treatment of specific issues, see the works listed in sec. 2.2

4.4:

of the bibliography.)

Registration and

notice not required

4.5:

Original expression

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights

of Contents

List of Figures

4.2 RELEVANT LAW

List of Tables

For most publishing purposes the relevant law is the Copyright Act of 1976 (Public Law 94-553),

Index

which took effect on January 1, 1978, and the various amendments enacted since then. The 1976 act

was a sweeping revision, superseding previous federal law and eliminating (though not retroactively)

the body of state law known as common-law copyright. It did not, however, make old learning

4.1:

obsolete. Because prior law continues to govern most pre-1978 works in one way or another, anyone

The scope of this

chapter

involved with publishing should understand both the old and the new regimes. Both will affect

4.2:

publishing for decades to come. Note that the law discussed in this chapter is that of the United

Relevant law

States. The United States and most other countries are members of the Berne Convention, the oldest

4.3:

international copyright treaty. While the Berne Convention and certain other treaties have fostered

How copyright

comes into being

significant uniformity around the world, anyone dealing with foreign copyrights should bear in mind

4.4:

that, conventions aside, the laws of other countries may contain significant differences from US law.

Registration and

notice not required

4.5:

Original expression

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights

of Contents

List of Figures

4.3 HOW COPYRIGHT COMES INTO BEING

List of Tables

Whenever a book or article, poem or lecture, database or drama comes into the world, it is

Index

automatically covered by copyright so long as it is "fixed" in some "tangible" form and embodies

original expression. The term tangible applies to more than paper and traditional media; it includes

things such as electronic memory. A copyrightable work is "fixed" as long as it is stored in some

4.1:

manner that is not purely transitory. Thus an e-mail message that is stored in the sender's computer

The scope of this

chapter

is fixed and copyrightable, but an extemporaneous lecture that is broadcast without being recorded is

4.2:

not.

Relevant law

4.3:

How copyright

comes into being

4.4:

Registration and

notice not required

4.5:

Original expression

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights

of Contents

List of Figures

4.4 REGISTRATION AND NOTICE NOT REQUIRED

List of Tables

Although it is advisable to register works with the United States Copyright Office, registration is not a

Index

prerequisite to legal protection. The practical reasons for registering are discussed in 4.49. Copyright

notice is no longer required but is recommended.

4.2:

Relevant law

4.3:

How copyright

comes into being

4.4:

Registration and

notice not required

4.5:

Original expression

4.6:

Author the original

owner

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights

of Contents

List of Figures

4.5 ORIGINAL EXPRESSION

List of Tables

Copyright protects the original expression contained in a work. The term expression means the words,

Index

sounds, or images that an author uses to express an idea or convey information. Copyright protects

the expression but not the underlying conceptual or factual material. Originality for copyright

purposes has a very low threshold. Only a modicum of creativity is required; the law protects such

4.3:

minimal intellectual effort as the selection and arrangement of entries in a guide to prices of used

How copyright

comes into being

automobiles. What counts is not quality or novelty but only that the work be original with the author

4.4:

and not copied, consciously or unconsciously, from some other source. When a work includes

Registration and

material that is not original, only the original material is protected. Thus, copyright in a new,

notice not required

annotated edition of an eighteenth-century book will cover only the annotations.

4.5:

Original expression

4.6:

Author the original

owner

4.7:

Individual and joint

authors

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights

of Contents

List of Figures

4.6 AUTHOR THE ORIGINAL OWNER

List of Tables

Whoever is the author (a term not synonymous with creator, as will be seen) controls copyright at the

Index

outset and automatically possesses certain rights in the work. How these rights are owned,

transferred, and administered is the focus of this chapter.

4.4:

Registration and

notice not required

4.5:

Original expression

4.6:

Author the original

owner

4.7:

Individual and joint

authors

4.8:

Collective works

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Varieties of Authorship

of Contents

List of Figures

4.7 INDIVIDUAL AND JOINT AUTHORS

List of Tables

In popular (or "trade") publishing and in the humanities, the typical author is likely to be an

Index

individual. In scientific, technical, and medical publishing, especially in the realm of journals, a work

will more likely than not involve the efforts of more than one author. Such works are typically joint

works. As defined by the statute, a joint work is "a work prepared by two or more authors with the

4.5:

intention that their contributions be merged into inseparable or interdependent parts of a unitary

Original expression

whole."

4.6:

Author the original

owner

4.7:

Individual and joint

authors

4.8:

Collective works

4.9:

Employer as author

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Varieties of Authorship

of Contents

List of Figures

4.8 COLLECTIVE WORKS

List of Tables

Works in which the independent contributions of two or more authors are combined are considered

Index

collective rather than joint works. Copyright in a collective work as such, which covers the selection

and arrangement of materials, belongs to the compiler or editor and is separate from the copyright in

each of the various components. Typical examples of collective works are newspapers, anthologies,

4.6:

journal issues, and the proceedings of academic conferences (see 4.59).

Author the original

owner

4.7:

Individual and joint

authors

4.8:

Collective works

4.9:

Employer as author

4.10:

The three

categories of work

made for hire

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Varieties of Authorship >> Works Made for Hire

of Contents

List of Figures

4.9 EMPLOYER AS AUTHOR

List of Tables

Another type of authorship is work made for hire. The law regards the employer or other controlling

Index

party as the "author" of any such work and hence as the initial owner of the copyright. Some works

are considered made for hire by definition; some can be treated as such by agreement.

4.7:

Individual and joint

authors

4.8:

Collective works

4.9:

Employer as author

4.10:

The three

categories of work

made for hire

4.11:

Ineligible works

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Varieties of Authorship >> Works Made for Hire

of Contents

List of Figures

4.10 THE THREE CATEGORIES OF WORK MADE FOR HIRE

List of Tables

Present law defines much more stringently than pre-1978 law the conditions that must be met for a

Index

work to be considered made for hire. First, the work may be prepared within the scope of a person's

employment. Common examples of this type of work made for hire include the editorial column in a

scholarly journal, a story in a newspaper or weekly magazine, or the entry for "aardvark" written by a

4.8:

person on an encyclopedia's paid staff. Second, someone not on the payroll will in certain instances be

Collective works

treated as an "employee" in determining authorship if that person is acting as the agent of another

4.9:

Employer as author

party. Determining agency is a difficult and somewhat ad hoc task, and involves considerations such

4.10:

as the control of one party over the other party's hours, assignments, and tools used in creating the

The three

work. The third type of work made for hire is the specially ordered or commissioned work that both

categories of work

made for hire

hiring party and creator agree in writing to treat as such. This sort of arrangement is available for only

4.11:

a few narrowly defined types of work:

Ineligible works

4.12:

contributions to collective works, such as a book review commissioned for a journal

Joint authorship

contributions to motion pictures or sound recordings

translations

instructional texts

tests

atlases

compilations of existing materials such as anthologies

"supplementary works" such as forewords, bibliographies, indexes, appendixes, textual notes,

illustrations, and answer material for tests

A work that qualifies for such treatment will not be considered made for hire unless the written

agreement between the commissioning party and the creative party expressly says so. The written

agreement can be signed retroactively, although the safer practice is to obtain the parties' signatures

before the work is created.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Varieties of Authorship >> Works Made for Hire

of Contents

List of Figures

4.11 INELIGIBLE WORKS

List of Tables

It bears emphasizing that many kinds of works that could conceivably be commissioned do not

Index

qualify as works made for hire no matter what agreement may be made between writer and

publisher. Monographs and novels, for example, are not eligible because they are not in any of the

specific categories listed above. Thus, copyright in such a work remains with the writer unless

4.9:

expressly assigned. Although for most purposes an assignment of copyright from the author is

Employer as author

indistinguishable in practical effect from a work-for-hire agreement, they have different implications

4.10:

The three

for copyright duration (see 4.23) and termination (see 4.37).

categories of work

made for hire

4.11:

Ineligible works

4.12:

Joint authorship

4.13:

Rights of

reproduction,

distribution, and

display

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Varieties of Authorship >> Works Made for Hire

of Contents

List of Figures

4.12 JOINT AUTHORSHIP

List of Tables

Although the law is not entirely clear on this point, it appears that any work that is partially made for

Index

hire will be treated as made for hire for copyright duration (see 4.22--24) and certain other purposes,

even though a joint coauthor might be independent and not writing "for hire."

4.10:

The three

categories of work

made for hire

4.11:

Ineligible works

4.12:

Joint authorship

4.13:

Rights of

reproduction,

distribution, and

display

4.14:

Derivative work

and performance

rights

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Rights of the Copyright Owner

of Contents

List of Figures

4.13 RIGHTS OF REPRODUCTION, DISTRIBUTION, AND DISPLAY

List of Tables

The author of a work possesses, at the beginning, a bundle of rights that collectively make up

Index

copyright. They belong originally to the author, who can sell, rent, give away, will, or transfer them

in some other way, individually or as a package, to whomever the author wishes. When a work is to

be published, the author normally transfers some or all of these rights to the publisher, by formal

4.11:

agreement. Two of these rights are basic from the publisher's point of view: the right to make copies

Ineligible works

of the work (traditionally by printing and now often by digital reproduction) and the right to

4.12:

Joint authorship

distribute such copies to the public--in sum, to publish the work. In the case of online publishing,

4.13:

reproduction and distribution blend into the act of transmitting the work on demand to the reader's

Rights of

computer. A third right--the right of public display--applies to online exploitation of works. A work is

reproduction,

distribution, and

publicly displayed when made viewable online; if the user downloads or prints out the material

display

concerned, a distribution of a copy also occurs.

4.14:

Derivative work

and performance

rights

4.15:

Moral rightsâ

€”integrity of

copyright

management

information

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Rights of the Copyright Owner

of Contents

List of Figures

4.14 DERIVATIVE WORK AND PERFORMANCE RIGHTS

List of Tables

A fourth and very important right is the right to make what the law terms derivative works--that is,

Index

works based on or derived from the original work, such as translations, abridgments, dramatizations,

or other adaptations. A revised edition of a published work is generally noticeably different enough

from the prior edition to qualify as a derivative work with a separate copyright (see 4.27). The fifth

4.12:

basic copyright right, the right of public performance, has only limited relevance for literary works as

Joint authorship

such; it applies, for example, when a poet gives a public reading of a poem. However, it has great

4.13:

Rights of

significance for other works, such as motion pictures, that may spring from literary works.

reproduction,

distribution, and

display

4.14:

Derivative work

and performance

rights

4.15:

Moral rightsâ

€”integrity of

copyright

management

information

4.16:

Trademark

protection of titles

and other elements

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Rights of the Copyright Owner

of Contents

List of Figures

4.15 MORAL RIGHTS--INTEGRITY OF COPYRIGHT MANAGEMENT INFORMATION

List of Tables

In addition to the foregoing rights, the law gives the creators of certain works of fine art a so-called

Index

moral right against mutilation and misattribution. A dozen or more states have enacted legislation to

roughly the same effect as the federal law but generally broader. This moral right, however, whether

federal or state, has little effect on publishers (except perhaps while in possession of original artwork)

4.13:

and will not be dealt with further here. Authors may also be able under common law to prevent the

Rights of

reproduction,

attribution to them of things that they did not write. In addition, federal law protects the integrity of

distribution, and

display

"copyright management information." This information, for publications, consists of the following:

4.14:

Derivative work

the title and other information identifying the work, including the content of the copyright

and performance

rights

notice

4.15:

the name of, and other identifying information about, the author

Moral rightsâ

€”integrity of

the name of, and other identifying information about, the copyright owner, including the

copyright

management

content of the copyright notice

information

terms and conditions for use of the work

4.16:

Trademark

identifying numbers or symbols referring to such information or links to such information

protection of titles

and other elements

Specifically, the law prevents intentional removal or alteration of copyright management information,

4.17:

Basic versus

or intentional use of false copyright management information, if done with intent to induce, enable,

subsidiary rights

facilitate, or conceal infringement. This prohibition has seen little exercise in the courts and is likely to

be of less use to publishers than to industries that deal frequently with counterfeit goods.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Rights of the Copyright Owner

of Contents

List of Figures

4.16 TRADEMARK PROTECTION OF TITLES AND OTHER ELEMENTS

List of Tables

Copying only the title of a work likely would not be considered a copyright infringement. But a title

Index

may be entitled to trademark protection under federal or state law or both. Book titles are harder to

protect as trademarks than journal or lecture titles, because of judicial and administrative reluctance

to give trademark protection to names that are used on only one specific product. Nevertheless, it is

4.14:

fair to say that some book titles are clearly protectable; Gone with the Wind and Winnie-the-Pooh are

Derivative work

and performance

titles that cannot be used without permission, at least so long as the books remain under copyright.

rights

And active franchising such as has occurred with both of those books will enable the trademark to

4.15:

survive long after that, although not in such a way as to prevent reproduction of the book itself, title

Moral rightsâ

€”integrity of

and all. The same principles would apply to the names of characters or imaginary locales used in a

copyright

management

work.

information

4.16:

Trademark

protection of titles

and other elements

4.17:

Basic versus

subsidiary rights

4.18:

Author retention of

subsidiary rights

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Rights of the Copyright Owner

of Contents

List of Figures

4.17 BASIC VERSUS SUBSIDIARY RIGHTS

List of Tables

Whoever controls the copyright in a work, whether author or publisher, may not only exercise those

Index

rights directly but also empower or authorize others to exercise them. If, for example, the author of a

book has transferred the whole bundle of rights to a publishing house, the publishing house will itself

exercise the basic rights of reproducing and distributing (i.e., publishing) the book. It will also be

4.15:

responsible for administering subsidiary rights. These rights (discussed in 4.60) usually involve

Moral rightsâ

€”integrity of

exploiting markets in which the publishing house is not active. For example, foreign-language, book-

copyright

management

club, and motion-picture rights involve specialized markets and require special expertise. For this

information

reason, subsidiary rights are likely to be exercised by third parties under license from the publisher,

4.16:

although, if the publisher is part of a large media conglomerate, licensing is often intramural. Part of

Trademark

protection of titles

the publisher's responsibility to the author should be to see that subsidiary rights are exploited as

and other elements

effectively as possible. Licensing subsidiary rights also includes granting what the publishing industry

4.17:

calls permissions, a term that refers to such things as the licensing of photocopying for classroom use

Basic versus

subsidiary rights

and allowing others to quote or reproduce small portions of the book in a new work.

4.18:

Author retention of

subsidiary rights

4.19:

Copyright duration

before 1978

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Rights of the Copyright Owner

of Contents

List of Figures

4.18 AUTHOR RETENTION OF SUBSIDIARY RIGHTS

List of Tables

Authors of "trade" books--fiction, biography, cookbooks, and other books for the general reader--are

Index

more likely than scholarly authors to be represented by agents and more likely to retain some or all

subsidiary rights. In such cases, subsidiary rights are licensed directly by the author (through his or

her agent) to foreign publishers, motion-picture producers, and the like. Typically, however,

4.16:

permissions are still handled by the publisher rather than the agent or author.

Trademark

protection of titles

and other elements

4.17:

Basic versus

subsidiary rights

4.18:

Author retention of

subsidiary rights

4.19:

Copyright duration

before 1978

4.20:

Lengthening of

copyright duration

in 1978

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright and the Public Domain

of Contents

List of Figures

4.19 COPYRIGHT DURATION BEFORE 1978

List of Tables

Until January 1, 1978, a dual system of copyright existed in the United States. Common-law

Index

copyright, created by the individual states, protected works from the time of their creation until

publication, however long that might be. A personal letter written in the eighteenth century but never

published was protected as effectively as a 1977 doctoral thesis in the making. In neither case could

4.17:

the document be copied and distributed (that is, published) without the express permission of either

Basic versus

subsidiary rights

the creator of the work or the creator's legal heirs. Statutory, or federal, copyright protected works at

4.18:

the moment of publication and for twenty-eight years thereafter, provided that a proper copyright

Author retention of

notice appeared in the published work. Thereafter, copyright in the work could be renewed for

subsidiary rights

another twenty-eight years if the original copyright claim had been registered with the United States

4.19:

Copyright duration

Copyright Office (a division of the Library of Congress) and if a renewal claim was filed by the

before 1978

appropriate person(s) during the final year of the first term of copyright. Thus in the normal course of

4.20:

things federal copyright in a work was intended to last for a total of fifty-six years from the date of

Lengthening of

copyright duration

publication, after which time the work went into the public domain--that is, it became public property

in 1978

and could be reproduced freely. See 4.20--21, 4.45. Works created by employees of the US government

4.21:

Uses of public-

in the course of their official duties are in the public domain.

domain works

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright and the Public Domain

of Contents

List of Figures

4.20 LENGTHENING OF COPYRIGHT DURATION IN 1978

List of Tables

To enter the public domain is of course the ultimate fate of all copyrighted works. However, the

Index

elaborate system described in 4.19 was replaced as of 1978 by a unitary federal copyright of

substantially greater length. Subsequent amendments have lengthened the term yet further and

eliminated a number of formalities that used to be required. All these changes have made entering the

4.18:

public domain almost theoretical for works currently being created. As will be discussed below, other

Author retention of

subsidiary rights

changes to the law have given many older works, particularly those of foreign origin, an unexpected

4.19:

reprieve (see 4.28).

Copyright duration

before 1978

4.20:

Lengthening of

copyright duration

in 1978

4.21:

Uses of public-

domain works

4.22:

"Life plus seventy"

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright and the Public Domain

of Contents

List of Figures

4.21 USES OF PUBLIC-DOMAIN WORKS

List of Tables

Once in the public domain, a work is free for all to use. The use may be direct and simple; for

Index

example, Mark Twain's novels have now lost their copyrights and may be republished free of royalty.

Or the public-domain works may be the compost from which new works, adaptations or other

derivative works, spring in due course. Such new works are entitled to copyright, but their copyright

4.19:

is limited to the new material they contain. Determining whether a work is in the public domain

Copyright duration

before 1978

requires attention to complex rules. These are discussed at 4.25--29 and 4.38--45. The rules are also set

4.20:

out in tabular form at the website of the University of Chicago Press.

Lengthening of

copyright duration

in 1978

4.21:

Uses of public-

domain works

4.22:

"Life plus seventy"

4.23:

Works made for

hire

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright and the Public Domain >>

of Contents

Duration of Copyright for Works Created after 1977

List of Figures

List of Tables

4.22 "LIFE PLUS SEVENTY"

Index

Enacted in 1976 and effective on January 1, 1978, the present copyright law did away with the dual

system of federal/common-law copyright. Present law is both simpler and more complex regarding

copyright duration. It is simpler in that now one unified, federal system protects all works fixed in

4.20:

tangible form from the moment so fixed. It is more complex in that terms of protection differ

Lengthening of

copyright duration

depending on authorship, and in that works existing before 1978 are subject to a variety of special

in 1978

rules. The paradigmatic copyright term, under the new law, is "life plus seventy"--that is, life of the

4.21:

author plus seventy years. (In the case of joint authors, the seventy years are added to the life of the

Uses of public-

domain works

last author to die.) As will be seen below, however, there are many exceptions to this rule.

4.22:

"Life plus seventy"

4.23:

Works made for

hire

4.24:

Anonymous and

pseudonymous

works

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright and the Public Domain >>

of Contents

Duration of Copyright for Works Created after 1977

List of Figures

List of Tables

4.23 WORKS MADE FOR HIRE

Index

Since the owner of the copyright in a work made for hire is not the actual creator of the work (often,

indeed, the copyright owner is a corporate entity), the law specifies a fixed term of years for the

duration of copyright. This term is 95 years from the date of publication or 120 years from the date of

4.21:

creation, whichever is the shorter.

Uses of public-

domain works

4.22:

"Life plus seventy"

4.23:

Works made for

hire

4.24:

Anonymous and

pseudonymous

works

4.25:

Pre-1978

unpublished works

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright and the Public Domain >>

of Contents

Duration of Copyright for Works Created after 1977

List of Figures

List of Tables

4.24 ANONYMOUS AND PSEUDONYMOUS WORKS

Index

The regular rule for duration of copyright cannot be applied if an author publishes anonymously or

under a pseudonym. The law prescribes the same fixed term of copyright for these works as for

works made for hire--95 years from the date of publication or 120 years from creation, whichever is

4.22:

the shorter. If after publication, however, such an author's name is revealed and recorded in the

"Life plus seventy"

documents of the Copyright Office, the regular "life plus seventy" rule takes over, unless, of course,

4.23:

the work is made for hire.

Works made for

hire

4.24:

Anonymous and

pseudonymous

works

4.25:

Pre-1978

unpublished works

4.26:

Pre-1978 published

US works

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright and the Public Domain >>

of Contents

Duration of Copyright for Works Created before 1978

List of Figures

List of Tables

4.25 PRE-1978 UNPUBLISHED WORKS

Index

For unpublished works that were still under common-law copyright when the new law went into

effect, there is a transitional rule. Such works are given the same copyright terms as post-1977 works,

but in recognition of the fact that their authors might have died so long ago as to make life-plus-

4.23:

seventy meaningless, Congress added two provisos. First, such works were granted protection at least

Works made for

hire

until December 31, 2002. Second, any such work that was ultimately published before December 31,

2002, is protected at least until December 31, 2047. Thus, these late-published works have a copyright

4.24:

Anonymous and

term of not less than seventy years from the date the new law went into effect.

pseudonymous

works

4.25:

Pre-1978

unpublished works

4.26:

Pre-1978 published

US works

4.27:

New copyright for

new editions

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright and the Public Domain >>

of Contents

Duration of Copyright for Works Created before 1978

List of Figures

List of Tables

4.26 PRE-1978 PUBLISHED US WORKS

Index

Works published before January 1, 1923, are now in the public domain. Works published during the

years 1923 through 1963 are still under copyright if their copyrights were properly renewed in the

twenty-eighth year after first publication. (The safest way to determine this is to commission a search

4.24:

of the Copyright Office records through a copyright attorney or a reputable search firm.) The renewal

Anonymous and

pseudonymous

term for such works is now sixty-seven years rather than twenty-eight. Works published from 1964

works

through 1977 will be protected without fail for ninety-five years from first publication, because

4.25:

renewal for such works is automatic. All the above assumes that these works were at all times

Pre-1978

unpublished works

published with proper copyright notice. For a discussion of copyright notice, see 4.38--45.

4.26:

Pre-1978 published

US works

4.27:

New copyright for

new editions

4.28:

Pre-1978 published

foreign works

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright and the Public Domain >>

of Contents

Duration of Copyright for Works Created before 1978

List of Figures

List of Tables

4.27 NEW COPYRIGHT FOR NEW EDITIONS

Index

When deciding whether a work may be republished without permission, bear in mind that each time

a work is materially revised a new copyright comes into being, covering the new or revised material.

Thus a seminal treatise published in 1920 is now in the public domain, but the author's revision

4.25:

published in 1934 may not be. One is free to republish the 1920 version, but that may be an empty

Pre-1978

unpublished works

privilege.

4.26:

Pre-1978 published

US works

4.27:

New copyright for

new editions

4.28:

Pre-1978 published

foreign works

4.29:

Definition of

"foreign"

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright and the Public Domain >>

of Contents

Duration of Copyright for Works Created before 1978

List of Figures

List of Tables

4.28 PRE-1978 PUBLISHED FOREIGN WORKS

Index

The rules just described do not apply to foreign works. Such works are generally protected in their

own countries for the life of the author plus fifty or seventy years, depending on the country

concerned. In the United States, a pre-1978 foreign work automatically receives the same term of

4.26:

copyright as a pre-1978 US work, but without regard to whether proper copyright notice ever

Pre-1978 published

US works

appeared on it or whether copyright was renewed in the twenty-eighth year after publication. This is

so because, effective January 1, 1996, Congress restored to copyright all foreign works that had

4.27:

New copyright for

forfeited copyright as a result of noncompliance with US notice and renewal requirements but that

new editions

were still protected in their home country. Copyrights restored in this manner are subject to certain

4.28:

Pre-1978 published

protections given to those who produced copies or derivative works before December 8, 1994, relying

foreign works

on the apparent forfeiture of copyright. Two points should be noted here, however. First, an

4.29:

anomalous decision in the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals has held that foreign works published

Definition of

"foreign"

abroad prior to 1923 may still be eligible for copyright protection in the United States, if no effort was

4.30:

made at the time to comply with US copyright law. This is out of sync with the rest of US copyright

Benefits of renewal

jurisprudence, but it remains the law in California and other states in the Ninth Circuit. Second, it

should be noted that the US copyright term for foreign works, even after restoration, does not

synchronize with the protection of those works outside the United States. If a French author of a

work published in 1922 lived until 1970, the work would now be in the public domain in the United

States but would remain under copyright in France until 2040. If the same author had published

another work in 1923, that work would retain copyright in the United States until 2018, still twenty-

two years less than in France. Publishers who wish to reissue or otherwise make use of foreign

public-domain works need to be aware that foreign markets may be foreclosed to them.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright and the Public Domain >>

of Contents

Duration of Copyright for Works Created before 1978

List of Figures

List of Tables

4.29 DEFINITION OF "FOREIGN"

Index

For purposes of the special restoration rules discussed in 4.28, a work is a foreign work if it was first

published outside the United States. The only substantial exception is for works published in the

United States within thirty days after foreign publication, as used to be done by some US publishers

4.27:

to get Berne Convention treatment "by the back door" before the United States became a member of

New copyright for

new editions

Berne. Such works are not eligible for copyright restoration.

4.28:

Pre-1978 published

foreign works

4.29:

Definition of

"foreign"

4.30:

Benefits of renewal

4.31:

Renewal by the

author

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright and the Public Domain >>

of Contents

Renewing Copyright in Pre-1978 Works

List of Figures

List of Tables

4.30 BENEFITS OF RENEWAL

Index

Although renewal is now automatic, the law gives certain benefits to those who take the trouble to

file actively for renewal. Filing for renewal fixes the ownership of the second-term copyright on the

date of filing; automatic renewal fixes ownership in whoever could have renewed on the last day of

4.28:

the first term. A renewal that has been actively obtained constitutes prima facie evidence of copyright

Pre-1978 published

foreign works

and its ownership; the evidentiary value of an automatically renewed copyright is discretionary with

the courts. Finally, and most important, if the renewal is allowed to happen automatically, existing

4.29:

Definition of

derivative works can continue to be exploited for the second term of copyright, whereas active

"foreign"

renewal gives the renewal-term owner--unless he or she signed a derivative work license explicitly

4.30:

Benefits of renewal

covering the renewal term--the right to relicense derivative-work rights.

4.31:

Renewal by the

author

4.32:

Renewal if the

author is deceased

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright and the Public Domain >>

of Contents

Renewing Copyright in Pre-1978 Works

List of Figures

List of Tables

4.31 RENEWAL BY THE AUTHOR

Index

The author, if living, is the person entitled to file for renewal. Publishers who have obtained renewal-

term rights from authors should continue to file for renewal on the author's behalf as they have

traditionally done.

4.29:

Definition of

"foreign"

4.30:

Benefits of renewal

4.31:

Renewal by the

author

4.32:

Renewal if the

author is deceased

4.33:

Subdividing a

copyright

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright and the Public Domain >>

of Contents

Renewing Copyright in Pre-1978 Works

List of Figures

List of Tables

4.32 RENEWAL IF THE AUTHOR IS DECEASED

Index

Whether renewal occurs by filing or automatically, if the author is not alive the law allocates the

copyright to his or her surviving spouse, children, or other heirs according to complex rules that will

not be parsed here.

4.30:

Benefits of renewal

4.31:

Renewal by the

author

4.32:

Renewal if the

author is deceased

4.33:

Subdividing a

copyright

4.34:

Exclusive versus

nonexclusive

licenses

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Assigning or Licensing Copyright

of Contents

List of Figures

4.33 SUBDIVIDING A COPYRIGHT

List of Tables

Copyright is often referred to as a "bundle" of rights. The basic components, as noted above, are the

Index

right to reproduce the work, the right to distribute copies of a work to the public, the right to make

derivative works, and the rights to perform and display a work publicly. Each of these rights may be

separately licensed or assigned. Furthermore, each of them may be carved up into smaller rights

4.31:

along lines of geography, time, or medium. Thus, for example, the right to publish a treatise may be

Renewal by the

author

carved up so that Publisher A gets North American rights while Publisher B gets United Kingdom

4.32:

rights. A French translation license may be given to Librairie C for a ten-year fixed term. Or Publisher

Renewal if the

A may receive print rights while D-DISC gets CD-ROM rights and E-NET gets online publication

author is deceased

rights. There is theoretically no end to the ways of subdividing a copyright, other than the limits of

4.33:

Subdividing a

human ingenuity and the marketplace.

copyright

4.34:

Exclusive versus

nonexclusive

licenses

4.35:

Goals of the

parties to a license

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Assigning or Licensing Copyright

of Contents

List of Figures

4.34 EXCLUSIVE VERSUS NONEXCLUSIVE LICENSES

List of Tables

Licenses may be exclusive or nonexclusive. Typically, anyone making a substantial investment will

Index

insist on exclusive rights, whereas persons making ephemeral use at low marginal cost--a typical case

being classroom photocopying--need no more than nonexclusive rights. An exclusive licensee is

treated in general like an owner of copyright and has standing to sue any infringer of that right. A

4.32:

nonexclusive licensee is more like the holder of a personal privilege than the holder of a property

Renewal if the

author is deceased

interest, and cannot sue infringers or even, without the permission of the licensor, transfer the license

4.33:

to someone else. While most authorities believe that, by contrast, an exclusive licensee has the power

Subdividing a

to assign and sublicense the right concerned, a federal court opinion in mid-2002 cast doubt on that

copyright

presumption. As a precaution, anyone drafting an exclusive license should expressly state that the

4.34:

Exclusive versus

license may be assigned and sublicensed at the discretion of the licensee.

nonexclusive

licenses

4.35:

Goals of the

parties to a license

4.36:

Payment

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Assigning or Licensing Copyright

of Contents

List of Figures

4.35 GOALS OF THE PARTIES TO A LICENSE

List of Tables

Many issues in license negotiation are common to all contracts: payment terms, duration, allocation of

Index

risk, remedies for default, and so on. But in drafting a copyright license the parties need to be very

careful to define clearly the scope of the license, taking into account possible evolution of technologies

and markets. The goal of a licensor is to define the licensed right narrowly so as to preserve flexibility

4.33:

for future licensing. The licensee also wants flexibility and so seeks to define the licensed right

Subdividing a

copyright

broadly. Both sides, though, have a common interest in seeing that the license is clear and

4.34:

understandable. Drafting a license demands and deserves care and skill, as well as good

Exclusive versus

communication between lawyers and their clients.

nonexclusive

licenses

4.35:

Goals of the

parties to a license

4.36:

Payment

4.37:

Termination of

transfers

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Assigning or Licensing Copyright

of Contents

List of Figures

4.36 PAYMENT

List of Tables

A license and the obligation to pay for that license are usually treated as reciprocal obligations, not

Index

mutually dependent ones. Thus the failure of a licensee to pay royalties does not automatically

terminate the license and turn the licensee into an infringer. It gives the licensor a claim for contract

damages, not a copyright infringement claim. Shrewd licensors will whenever possible reverse this

4.34:

presumption in their contracts, and shrewd licensees will usually resist.

Exclusive versus

nonexclusive

licenses

4.35:

Goals of the

parties to a license

4.36:

Payment

4.37:

Termination of

transfers

4.38:

Changes to the

rules

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Assigning or Licensing Copyright

of Contents

List of Figures

4.37 TERMINATION OF TRANSFERS

List of Tables

Apart from contractual rights, the statute itself gives individual authors the right to terminate licenses

Index

and assignments of copyright under certain conditions. The law specifically grants authors the right

to terminate any post-1977 copyright arrangement after thirty-five years, and a roughly comparable

termination right applies to licenses signed before 1978. The mechanics of termination, including the

4.35:

determination of who has the right to terminate, are extraordinarily complicated and are of

Goals of the

parties to a license

importance to only the most lucrative of copyrights, so no more will be said here. The termination

4.36:

right does not apply to agreements stipulating that a work is made for hire. See 4.10.

Payment

4.37:

Termination of

transfers

4.38:

Changes to the

rules

4.39:

Three different

regimes

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright Notice

of Contents

List of Figures

4.38 CHANGES TO THE RULES

List of Tables

No aspect of copyright has caused more grief than the rules of copyright notice. These rules have been

Index

responsible for most forfeitures of copyright. Largely a trap for the unwary, they were softened

somewhat in 1978 and removed almost entirely in 1989. They were not without purpose or utility, but

the rules prevented the United States from joining the Berne Convention, and in the end this and

4.36:

other disadvantages outweighed their utility.

Payment

4.37:

Termination of

transfers

4.38:

Changes to the

rules

4.39:

Three different

regimes

4.40:

Three elements of

the notice

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright Notice

of Contents

List of Figures

4.39 THREE DIFFERENT REGIMES

List of Tables

Congress could not easily dispense with the rules retroactively, however, and the resulting 1989

Index

legislation means that we now operate simultaneously under three doctrines: (1) for works first

published on or after March 1, 1989, no copyright notice is required; (2) for works first published in

the United States between January 1, 1978, and February 28, 1989, copyright notice must have been

4.37:

used on all copies published before March 1, 1989, with the proviso that certain steps could be taken

Termination of

transfers

to redeem deficient notice (see 4.45); and (3) for US works first published before January 1, 1978, the

4.38:

copyright was almost certainly forfeited if the notice was not affixed to all copies; few excuses were or

Changes to the

are available. (As noted above, foreign works have been retroactively exempted from these rules.)

rules

Notwithstanding the liberality of the new law, continued use of notice is strongly advised to deprive

4.39:

Three different

infringers of any possible defense of ignorance. The rules in 4.40--45 should therefore still be

regimes

followed.

4.40:

Three elements of

the notice

4.41:

Name used in the

notice

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright Notice >> Content of Notice

of Contents

List of Figures

4.40 THREE ELEMENTS OF THE NOTICE

List of Tables

Under present law, as under the old law, the notice consists of three parts: (1) either the symbol Â©

Index

(preferred because it also suits the requirements of the Universal Copyright Convention), or the word

copyright, or the abbreviation copr. ; (2) the year of first publication; and (3) the name of the copyright

owner. Many publishers also add the phrase "all rights reserved," and there is no harm in doing so,

4.38:

but the putative advantages of it (which were limited to Latin America) have all but vanished. The

Changes to the

rules

year of first publication is not needed for greeting cards, postcards, stationery, and certain other

4.39:

works not germane to the publishing industry. Where a work is in its renewal term of copyright, it is

Three different

customary, but not required, to include the year of renewal as well as the year of first publication. See

regimes

also 1.19--34.

4.40:

Three elements of

the notice

4.41:

Name used in the

notice

4.42:

Placement of

notice

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright Notice >> Content of Notice

of Contents

List of Figures

4.41 NAME USED IN THE NOTICE

List of Tables

The name used in the notice should be the name of the author unless the author has assigned all

Index

rights to the publisher. However, it is not uncommon to see the publisher's name in the notice even

when it does not own all rights. Conversely, authors sometimes insist on notice in their names even

when they have assigned all rights--and publishers often acquiesce, thereby giving up something that

4.39:

has no value except to the ego of the author. Such vagaries are regrettable but harmless, except where

Three different

regimes

they mislead those seeking permission to use the copyrighted material.

4.40:

Three elements of

the notice

4.41:

Name used in the

notice

4.42:

Placement of

notice

4.43:

United States

government

materials

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright Notice >> Content of Notice

of Contents

List of Figures

4.42 PLACEMENT OF NOTICE

List of Tables

The copyright notice should be placed so as to give reasonable notice to the consumer. The old law

Index

was very specific about its location: for books, on either the title page or the page immediately

following, and for journals and magazines, on the title page, the first page of text, or the front cover.

Present law simply states that the notice should be so placed as "to give reasonable notice of the claim

4.40:

of copyright," but most publishers continue to place it in the traditional locations required by the old

Three elements of

the notice

law. See also 1.78, 1.88, 1.97.

4.41:

Name used in the

notice

4.42:

Placement of

notice

4.43:

United States

government

materials

4.44:

Notice on

derivative works

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright Notice >> Content of Notice

of Contents

List of Figures

4.43 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT MATERIALS

List of Tables

When a work consists "preponderantly" of materials created by the federal government, this must be

Index

stated in the notice. This may be done either positively (e.g., "Copyright is claimed only in the

introduction, notes, appendixes, and index of the present work") or negatively (e.g., "Copyright is not

claimed in â€˜Forest Management,' a publication of the United States government reprinted in the

4.41:

present volume"). Works produced by state or local governments or by foreign governments are not

Name used in the

notice

per se in the public domain and are not subject to this notice provision.

4.42:

Placement of

notice

4.43:

United States

government

materials

4.44:

Notice on

derivative works

4.45:

Correcting mistakes

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright Notice >> Content of Notice

of Contents

List of Figures

4.44 NOTICE ON DERIVATIVE WORKS

List of Tables

The new copyright in a derivative work entitles its publisher to use a new copyright notice with the

Index

current year date, and nothing requires that such notice delineate what is and is not covered by the

copyright. This sometimes has the unfortunate by-product (not always unintended, let it be said) of

making users think that the scope of copyright extends to the public-domain material. However, the

4.42:

better practice, at least where the derivative work is a revised edition, is to include the publication

Placement of

notice

years of various editions. See 1.23.

4.43:

United States

government

materials

4.44:

Notice on

derivative works

4.45:

Correcting mistakes

4.46:

Deposit

requirements

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Copyright Notice >> Content of Notice

of Contents

List of Figures

4.45 CORRECTING MISTAKES

List of Tables

Under pre-1978 law, no mechanism was available to cure the effects of a defective notice: copyright

Index

was forfeited and that was that, unless the omission of notice was accidental and occurred in a very

small number of copies. For publication between January 1, 1978, and March 1, 1989 (when the notice

requirement was finally dropped altogether), a more lenient regime prevailed. A mistake in the

4.43:

owner's name, or a mistake by no more than a year in the date element of the notice, was largely

United States

government

excused. Any more serious mistake was treated as an omission of notice. Any omission of one or

materials

more of the necessary three elements would be excused if the omission was from a "relatively small"

4.44:

number of copies. If more extensive omission occurred, the copyright owner could still save the

Notice on

derivative works

copyright from forfeiture by registering it (see 4.46--49) within five years after the defective

4.45:

publication and making a "reasonable effort" to add the notice to all copies distributed to the public

Correcting mistakes

after the omission was discovered. Very few cases have discussed what a "reasonable effort" is, and

4.46:

their explanations, being somewhat ad hoc, give limited guidance to anyone trying to determine

Deposit

requirements

whether a work in this category is still protected by copyright.

4.47:

Registration forms

and fees

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Deposit and Registration

of Contents

List of Figures

4.46 DEPOSIT REQUIREMENTS

List of Tables

The law requires copyright owners to send copies of their published works to the Copyright Office

Index

for deposit and use in the Library of Congress. The copies must be sent within three months of

publication. Although failure to make the required deposit does not forfeit the copyright, the

copyright owner is subject to a fine for noncompliance if a specific request from the Library of

4.44:

Congress is ignored. For printed works, the deposit of two copies of the "best edition" is required. If,

Notice on

derivative works

for example, clothbound and paperback editions of a book are published simultaneously, the

4.45:

publisher should submit two copies of the cloth edition. If the work is a very expensive or limited

Correcting mistakes

edition, one may apply to the Library of Congress for permission to submit only one copy. Databases

4.46:

published only online are exempt. When sending deposit copies to the Copyright Office, publishers

Deposit

requirements

usually have the copyright registered as well. In the case of printed materials, the deposit copies also

4.47:

serve the requirements for registration. In the case of electronic publications, the submission of certain

Registration forms

"identifying material" will suffice.

and fees

4.48:

Need for accuracy

and candor

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Deposit and Registration

of Contents

List of Figures

4.47 REGISTRATION FORMS AND FEES

List of Tables

To register a work the author or other claimant must fill out the appropriate application, either in

Index

paper form or online. The Copyright Office offers online registration through its eCO service, using

an interactive application form. For paper registration there are several forms, tailored to different

types of works. Form TX is used for books and other works in the broad category called literary

4.45:

works, other than periodicals. For all periodicals, including but not limited to newspapers, magazines,

Correcting mistakes

newsletters, journals, and even annuals, use form SE. As an alternative, one may use form CO for any

4.46:

Deposit

type of work; this form can be filled out electronically, printed out, and submitted by mail. The

requirements

Copyright Office offers all these forms and intelligible explanations of its registration rules, including

4.47:

its complex deposit requirements, on its website. The fees for registration vary depending on which

Registration forms

and fees

process one uses, but by far the least expensive is online registration. For a group of works, one fee

4.48:

covers the entire group. Group registration is available for multiple photographs or multiple

Need for accuracy

contributions to periodicals by a single author, and for certain serial publications. Publishers with

and candor

large lists tend to keep funds on deposit at the Copyright Office and to charge their registration fees

4.49:

Benefits of

against their deposit accounts.

registration

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Deposit and Registration

of Contents

List of Figures

4.48 NEED FOR ACCURACY AND CANDOR

List of Tables

It is important to answer all questions on the application accurately. Copyright owners have been

Index

sanctioned by courts for misleading the Copyright Office by (for example) failing to disclose that a

work is based on preexisting materials. Statements on the application do not need to be exhaustive,

but they must be correct and not evasive. However, in contrast to patent applications, there is no

4.46:

requirement for disclosure of adverse claims or any other information not specifically called for on

Deposit

requirements

the form.

4.47:

Registration forms

and fees

4.48:

Need for accuracy

and candor

4.49:

Benefits of

registration

4.50:

Basic rights

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights >> Deposit and Registration

of Contents

List of Figures

4.49 BENEFITS OF REGISTRATION

List of Tables

Registration is not necessary to obtain a copyright (which exists in the work from the moment it is

Index

fixed in tangible form; see 4.3) or to ensure its validity. However, the prudent course is to register

copyright because of the added protection registration affords. In cases of infringement, registration is

a prerequisite to bringing suit unless the work was written by a non-US author and first published

4.47:

abroad. Registering at the time of publication avoids a scramble to register later if infringement is

Registration forms

and fees

discovered. Moreover, if registration has been made within three months of publication, or before an

4.48:

infringement begins, the copyright owner, instead of going through the difficulties of proving actual

Need for accuracy

damages, can sue for "statutory damages" (in effect, an award of damages based on equity rather than

and candor

on proof of loss) and, most significantly, is eligible to be reimbursed for attorney's fees. Publishers

4.49:

Benefits of

fearing prepublication piracy of books in development should also consider the "preregistration"

registration

procedure at the website of the United States Copyright Office.

4.50:

Basic rights

4.51:

Basic book-contract

provisions

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Publishing Agreement

of Contents

List of Figures

4.50 BASIC RIGHTS

List of Tables

No publishing house may legally publish a copyrighted work unless it first acquires the basic rights

Index

to copy the work and distribute it to the public. Although in theory a publisher could proceed with

no more than a nonexclusive license of these rights--and this is done in rare circumstances--for

obvious reasons publishers generally insist on exclusive rights. In most instances these rights are

4.48:

acquired from the author by means of a contract called the publishing agreement.

Need for accuracy

and candor

4.49:

Benefits of

registration

4.50:

Basic rights

4.51:

Basic book-contract

provisions

4.52:

Option clauses

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Publishing Agreement >> New Books

of Contents

List of Figures

4.51 BASIC BOOK-CONTRACT PROVISIONS

List of Tables

In book publishing the publisher typically draws up the contract for a new book, to be signed by both

Index

the publisher and the author or, in the case of a joint work, by all authors. In this contract the

publisher and author agree to certain things. The publisher undertakes to publish the book after

acceptance of the manuscript and to pay the author for the rights conveyed. Usually, publishers pay

4.49:

book authors a stipulated royalty out of the proceeds, but in some cases a publisher will instead pay a

Benefits of

registration

lump-sum fee. The author, in addition to granting rights to the publisher, typically guarantees that

4.50:

the work is original and has never before been published and that it does not violate copyright or libel

Basic rights

anyone or otherwise expose the publisher to legal liability. The author usually agrees to correct and

4.51:

return proofs and to cooperate in future revisions of the work. Book-publishing agreements are

Basic book-contract

provisions

generally fairly lengthy and detailed documents and include many other points of agreement. Among

4.52:

the common areas of negotiation are royalty schedules; royalty advances and (for certain types of

Option clauses

books, such as textbooks) expense allowances; the standards for acceptance of the manuscript; the

4.53:

period following acceptance within which the publisher must issue the work; what rights, beyond

Edited works

North American print rights, are granted to the publisher; what share of royalties the author receives

for revised editions to which he or she does not contribute; how rights revert to the author if the book

goes out of print; and on what terms the author may audit the publisher's financial records to ensure

full payment of royalties due. Typically, publishing agreements prohibit the author from publishing

works that compete with the work under contract.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Publishing Agreement >> New Books

of Contents

List of Figures

4.52 OPTION CLAUSES

List of Tables

In former years publishing agreements often contained legally binding options on the author's next

Index

book. These are almost a thing of the past. Some publishers insist on a right of first refusal or a right

to match outstanding offers on the author's next book, but such provisions are becoming rare.

4.50:

Basic rights

4.51:

Basic book-contract

provisions

4.52:

Option clauses

4.53:

Edited works

4.54:

Other contracts

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Publishing Agreement >> New Books

of Contents

List of Figures

4.53 EDITED WORKS

List of Tables

The agreement just described is intended for books with one or a few authors. Another type of book,

Index

common in scholarly but not in trade publishing, is one in which the chapters are contributed by

various authors, chosen and guided by an editor who is an authority in the relevant field. The editor,

by selecting and arranging the contributions included in the work, adds another layer of authorship.

4.51:

As author of the collective work, the book as a whole, he or she should sign an agreement similar to

Basic book-contract

provisions

the standard author agreement described above. In dealing with the chapter contributors, a publisher

4.52:

may in some circumstances use an agreement of the same type, especially if the contributors are to

Option clauses

receive royalty shares. All such agreements, though, need to be modified to reflect the particular

4.53:

allocation of responsibilities between editor and contributors. Alternatively, in appropriate

Edited works

circumstances, publishers can use simpler forms (such as that in fig. 4.1), closer in style to journal

4.54:

Other contracts

author forms (see fig. 4.2). Finally, it is possible to use work-made-for-hire agreements for all these

4.55:

persons, although that is the least common solution. For symposia, see 4.59.

Transfers of rights

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Publishing Agreement >> New Books

of Contents

List of Figures

4.54 OTHER CONTRACTS

List of Tables

In scholarly publishing, in addition to contracts with the authors of new books, several other types of

Index

agreement are in use for special kinds of works. Two of the common ones cover contributions to

scholarly journals (see 4.55--58 and fig. 4.2) and to symposia (see 4.59 and fig. 4.1).

4.52:

Option clauses

4.53:

Edited works

4.54:

Other contracts

4.55:

Transfers of rights

4.56:

Less than full

rights

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Publishing Agreement >> Journal Articles

of Contents

List of Figures

4.55 TRANSFERS OF RIGHTS

List of Tables

Contributors to a journal possess at the beginning exactly the same rights in their work as authors of

Index

books. Consequently, when an article has been accepted for publication in a scholarly journal, the

publisher usually asks the author to sign a formal transfer of rights in the contribution. In the absence

of a written copyright transfer agreement, all that the publisher acquires is the privilege of printing

4.53:

the contribution in the context of that journal. Contributors frequently do not know this and do not

Edited works

understand that without broad rights the publisher cannot license anthology, database, classroom

4.54:

Other contracts

photocopying, or other uses that spread the author's message. Explaining this will often overcome the

4.55:

author's reluctance to sign the transfer. In the agreement currently in use at the University of Chicago

Transfers of rights

Press, the publisher returns to the contributor the right to reprint the article in other scholarly works

4.56:

(see fig. 4.2). Such a provision is fair to both sides and is to be encouraged.

Less than full

rights

4.57:

New alternative

licensing

arrangements

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Publishing Agreement >> Journal Articles

of Contents

List of Figures

4.56 LESS THAN FULL RIGHTS

List of Tables

Some journal publishers, when an author refuses to transfer copyright in toto, ask instead for a

Index

license more closely tailored to their specific needs. Care must be taken in such cases to ensure that

the contract covers all the subsidiary rights that the publisher may want to exercise or sublicense and

that the publisher's rights are exclusive where they need to be. This is especially important for

4.54:

electronic database rights. The right to publish an article in a journal does not carry with it ipso facto

Other contracts

the right to include that article in an electronic database. Journal publishers who wish to put their

4.55:

Transfers of rights

publications up on their own websites, or license them to database publishers, need to ensure that

4.56:

their contracts give them that right. In general, the trend toward narrowing or customization of

Less than full

licenses from journal authors to their publishers imposes on publishers a need to keep careful records

rights

of what rights they have obtained in each article, so they do not grant subsidiary rights that they do

4.57:

New alternative

not in fact control.

licensing

arrangements

4.58:

Journal editors

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Publishing Agreement >> Journal Articles

of Contents

List of Figures

4.57 NEW ALTERNATIVE LICENSING ARRANGEMENTS

List of Tables

Quite early in the evolution of the software industry a movement emerged of people anxious to

Index

eliminate copyright control over software and replace it with a system geared toward sharing and free

distribution. More recently this ethos, combined with antipathy to the publishing industry in some

circles, has led to efforts to restrict the licenses given to publishers of scholarly journals (see 4.63,

4.55:

4.64), and to the development of an "open source" model for other types of copyrighted works. The

Transfers of rights

latter, called Creative Commons, offers a number of alternatives to standard copyright distribution.

4.56:

Less than full

While authors (particularly of journal articles) may show enthusiasm for this model, publishers

rights

should approach it with caution. The basic Creative Commons license throws any work subject to it

4.57:

open to public use of all kinds. It allows any member of the public to carry out unlimited free

New alternative

licensing

redistribution of copies of a work and to alter and otherwise create derivatives of works. The only

arrangements

requirement it imposes on the licensee is that he or she give the most elementary sort of credit to the

4.58:

author/copyright owner of the original work. However, Creative Commons also offers variants of the

Journal editors

basic model that allow the publisher to prohibit both commercial uses and the creation of derivative

4.59:

Symposium

works. (All these license forms may be found at the Creative Commons website.) Thus, if an author

proceedings

of a journal article presses for the article to be subjected to a Creative Commons license, the publisher

in turn may wish to insist that the license include a "noncommercial" clause so that the article may

not be published by commercial competitors. In licensing entire journal issues under a Creative

Commons license, the publisher will normally also wish to include a "no derivatives" clause;

otherwise it will have no control over how others rearrange and otherwise alter the collective work.

And as with any license, the publisher should be certain the author has the necessary clearances for

any third-party material included in the work. A photographer, for example, may be willing to license

electronic distribution of a photograph in the context of a particular journal in online form but balk at

inclusion in an electronic version subject to a Creative Commons license. If a work is going to be

distributed under a Creative Commons license, that should be disclosed to any licensor of material

included in the work.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Publishing Agreement >> Journal Articles

of Contents

List of Figures

4.58 JOURNAL EDITORS

List of Tables

The role of the journal editor must not be forgotten. Unless he or she is an employee or agent of the

Index

company or society that owns the journal, the editor has a separate copyright in each issue as a

collective work. Journal publishers should make sure that ownership of that separate copyright is

clearly agreed on.

4.56:

Less than full

rights

4.57:

New alternative

licensing

arrangements

4.58:

Journal editors

4.59:

Symposium

proceedings

4.60:

Categories

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Publishing Agreement >> Contributions to Symposia

of Contents

List of Figures

4.59 SYMPOSIUM PROCEEDINGS

List of Tables

Symposium proceedings, made up of papers by different authors, are sometimes published as special

Index

issues of journals and sometimes as stand-alone books. The editor of the proceedings, in either case,

has a separate status as author because the proceedings, as a whole, are a collective work. If the

proceedings are being published as a journal issue, the publisher needs to make clear who owns

4.57:

copyright in the editor's work and to secure from every contributor a contract more or less identical

New alternative

licensing

to that used for authors of articles published in regular issues of the journal concerned. If the

arrangements

proceedings are being published as a book, the editor should sign a standard book author agreement,

4.58:

modified as appropriate, and the contributors should sign separate forms covering their own papers

Journal editors

(see fig. 4.1). Either the volume editor or the publisher will send these forms to all contributors. When

4.59:

Symposium

these have been signed, they are returned to the publisher and filed with the contract for the volume.

proceedings

See also 4.53.

4.60:

Categories

4.61:

Electronic-rights

licensing

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Subsidiary Rights and Permissions >> Handling Subsidiary Rights

of Contents

List of Figures

4.60 CATEGORIES

List of Tables

Subsidiary rights are usually thought of as including the following categories, some applicable to all

Index

types of published works and others to books only:

Foreign rights, whereby a foreign publisher may be licensed to sell the book in its original version in

4.58:

that publisher's own territory. Where the license is for the English-language version, the licensor

Journal editors

should be careful to limit the license to the print medium, because electronic distribution cannot

4.59:

easily, if at all, be limited geographically. (And a work that the original publisher makes available

Symposium

proceedings

online will be of less appeal to foreign print distributors.)

4.60:

Categories

Translation rights, whereby a foreign publisher may be licensed to translate the work into another

4.61:

language and to have standard publisher's rights in the translation (other than live-stage rights,

Electronic-rights

licensing

motion-picture rights, and perhaps electronic rights).

4.62:

Authors' electronic

Serial rights, whereby a magazine or newspaper publisher may be licensed to publish the book or

use of their own

excerpts from it in a series of daily, weekly, or monthly installments. First serial rights refers to

works

publication before the work has come out in book form, second serial rights to publication afterward.

Paperback rights, whereby a publisher is licensed to produce and sell a paperback version of the book.

So-called quality, or trade, paperbacks are normally sold in bookstores, like clothbound books. Mass-

market paperbacks are typically marketed through newsstands and supermarkets, although many

now find their way into bookstores. Where the publisher of the paperback is the original publisher,

paperback rights are not subsidiary but primary, usually with their own royalty scale. Some books are

published only in paper, with no previously published clothbound version; these are called original

paperbacks.

Book-club rights, whereby a book club is given the right to distribute the book to its members for less

than the regular trade price. Copies generally are sold to the book club in bulk at a steep discount.

Reprint rights, whereby another publisher is licensed to reprint the work, in whole or in part, in an

anthology or some other collection or (usually if the work has gone out of print in English) in a cheap

reprint edition. This category also includes licensing document-delivery companies to reproduce

chapters of works on demand.

Live-stage rights, whereby a theatrical producer is given the right to produce a play or musical based

on the work.

Motion-picture rights, whereby a movie producer or studio is given the right to make a motion picture

based on the work. This applies primarily to works of fiction, but motion-picture producers will often

license rights to biographies and other nonfiction works so as to avoid possible infringement claims.

Audio rights, whereby the work is licensed for recording on compact disc, for audio delivery over the

Internet, or the like.

Electronic rights, whereby the work, or portions of it, is licensed for distribution online, in CD-ROM

format, or via other electronic means. However, if the publisher itself intends to issue the work in e-

book or other electronic form, electronic rights should be considered not subsidiary rights but part of

the publisher's basic publication right and subject to a primary royalty. Publishers should normally

assign new ISBNs for the electronic versions of their works, just as they have always done when (for

example) issuing a hardcover work in paperback form (see 1.32). Publishers should bear in mind that

electronic versions may sometimes be considered derivative works rather than mere copies of the

print version. The addition of substantial hyperlinks, video data, and the like may create a derivative

work. If the publisher is for any reason not acquiring general derivative work rights in the contract, it

should make sure to obtain the right to enhance the electronic version of the work with such features.

The publisher should also be sure to obtain the right to license electronic educational use (see 4.61,

4.90).

Rights for scholarly use, whereby the publisher grants others permission to quote text or copy charts

and other illustrations from the original.

Rights for educational use, whereby teachers are permitted to make copies of the work for their classes

or to include excerpts from the work in course-specific anthologies ("course packs"). Until recently,

photocopying was the standard medium for classroom use, but electronic reproduction is becoming

more common and blurring some of the boundaries of subsidiary rights. Educational use may also

include such things as inclusion in electronic reserves in libraries or distribution over campus

intranets.

Subsidiary rights in the context of journals also include microform (including microfilm and

microfiche) and the right to make summaries of articles in so-called abstract form. Reproduction by

document-delivery houses and licensing of electronic database rights are particularly relevant to

journals.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Subsidiary Rights and Permissions >> Handling Subsidiary Rights

of Contents

List of Figures

4.61 ELECTRONIC-RIGHTS LICENSING

List of Tables

The term electronic rights covers a wide range of possibilities, and the number is constantly growing.

Index

Among the users of electronic rights are aggregators, who make available online a large number of

publications in a given field or fields; research services, both current and archival, that permit access

to databases of publications, often by subscription; and services that allow users to purchase or

4.59:

"borrow" electronic copies of works. The decision whether to license some or all of such uses is both

Symposium

proceedings

an economic and a strategic one. For the most part, electronic delivery services are too new for

4.60:

publishers to predict with any certainty what income may flow from them. Rather, the economic

Categories

issue is whether the availability of a work through these services may "cannibalize" the publisher's

4.61:

projected print sales. The strategic issue is even harder to quantify, involving the need to be on the

Electronic-rights

licensing

cutting edge of publishing or, at least, not to be seen as a laggard in such matters. In entering into

4.62:

electronic-rights licenses, the publisher should satisfy itself that the delivery mechanism of the

Authors' electronic

particular licensee has safeguards against excessive downloading--or that such downloading is

use of their own

works

something the publisher can tolerate. The publisher should also ensure that no electronic license lasts

4.63:

more than a few years, for the pace of change is such that all these issues need to be revisited

University licenses

frequently.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Subsidiary Rights and Permissions >> Handling Subsidiary Rights

of Contents

List of Figures

4.62 AUTHORS' ELECTRONIC USE OF THEIR OWN WORKS

List of Tables

Where books are concerned, the author seldom retains any right of electronic publication. In scholarly

Index

journals, on the other hand, the right of authors to make electronic use of their own works has

become contentious. For example, publishers that have traditionally allowed their authors to make

unlimited photocopies for their own students now face an analogous demand: that authors be

4.60:

permitted to post their works on campus websites. If the website is accessible only by password and

Categories

only to members of the university, the risk of lost revenue is probably modest and probably less

4.61:

Electronic-rights

important than retaining the goodwill of the author. More problematic is the demand, increasingly

licensing

frequent, that the author be permitted to post the article on his or her personal website, or on an

4.62:

open-access university website or other "institutional repository." While such dissemination may not

Authors' electronic

use of their own

necessarily affect sales of the journal as such, it is likely to diminish licensing revenues. The fact that

works

licensing revenue helps support the publication of important scholarly work seems to have escaped

4.63:

general notice.

University licenses

4.64:

The NIH Public

Access Policy

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Subsidiary Rights and Permissions >> Handling Subsidiary Rights

of Contents

List of Figures

4.63 UNIVERSITY LICENSES

List of Tables

Several universities have adopted policies under which they presumptively receive nonexclusive

Index

licenses of journal articles written by their faculty, with the right to post those articles on the Internet

and to make and license "noncommercial" uses. (Commonly, faculty are permitted but not encouraged

to opt out of this arrangement on a case-by-case basis.) Where this arrangement applies, a faculty

4.61:

author is supposed to present his or her publisher with an addendum to the publisher's standard

Electronic-rights

licensing

contract, listing rights granted to the university. There are various forms of addenda in circulation; all

4.62:

are problematic. One, for example, contains the following provision:

Authors' electronic

use of their own

works

Notwithstanding any terms in the Publication Agreement to the contrary, AUTHOR and PUBLISHER agree

that in addition to any rights under copyright retained by Author in the Publication Agreement, Author

4.63:

University licenses

retains: (i) the rights to reproduce, to distribute, to publicly perform, and to publicly display the Article in

any medium for noncommercial purposes; (ii) the right to prepare derivative works from the Article; and

4.64:

The NIH Public

(iii) the right to authorize others to make any noncommercial use of the Article so long as Author receives

Access Policy

credit as author and the journal in which the Article has been published is cited as the source of first

4.65:

publication of the Article. For example, Author may make and distribute copies in the course of teaching

Economic

considerations

and research and may post the Article on personal or institutional websites and in other open-access digital

repositories.

Among its faults, this language (i) does not make clear what the author can, and cannot, do with

derivative works that he or she creates; (ii) does not make clear whether what the author can

distribute, display, and otherwise use is the author's own manuscript or the finished, published work;

and (iii) does not prevent the author from licensing the article to a competing journal, if the latter is

"noncommercial" (a word that has no commonly accepted legal meaning). Another problem is that

only the publisher as copyright owner has the ability to police compliance with whatever

"noncommercial" licenses the author or university may give--yet the publisher has no control over the

licensing activity. Publishers would be well advised to develop their own addenda to use when

presented with author requests for nonexclusive rights. Such addenda might give the author and his

or her employer unlimited rights to use the article internally, the right to post manuscript versions of

the article on the author's website, and the right to post a PDF or similar file of the final published

version on the author's website after a decent interval of time.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Subsidiary Rights and Permissions >> Handling Subsidiary Rights

of Contents

List of Figures

4.64 THE NIH PUBLIC ACCESS POLICY

List of Tables

In a similar vein to the university policies addressed in the previous paragraph, a "Public Access

Index

Policy" has been adopted by the National Institutes of Health pursuant to congressional mandate.

This policy requires submission, for posting on the National Library of Medicine's PubMed Central, of

the final manuscripts of all peer-reviewed articles derived from NIH-funded research. Manuscripts

4.62:

are to be submitted upon final acceptance for publication--that is, after the entire peer review and

Authors' electronic

use of their own

editorial process is complete and the article is ready for publication. This policy, unlike the university

works

policies discussed above, is not subject to any opt-out and cannot be altered by any addendum.

4.63:

(Publishers may, however, choose to substitute their own published versions of articles for such

University licenses

manuscripts.) Authors' contracts with their publishers must stipulate a time, no later than twelve

4.64:

The NIH Public

months after the official date of publication, when their articles will be posted for public access. If

Access Policy

publishers believe that licensing revenue will be directly affected once an article is available at no cost

4.65:

from PubMed Central, they will wish to push for the maximum delay (i.e., twelve months) on public

Economic

considerations

posting.

4.66:

Handling

permission requests

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Subsidiary Rights and Permissions >> Handling Subsidiary Rights

of Contents

List of Figures

4.65 ECONOMIC CONSIDERATIONS

List of Tables

The list above by no means exhausts the various forms of subsidiary rights the publisher may handle,

Index

but it includes the major ones. Depending on the administrative structure of the publishing house and

the importance and marketability of the work involved, various persons or departments may handle

different aspects of subsidiary rights work--a special rights and permissions department, the sales or

4.63:

marketing department, the acquiring editor, or even the chief executive officer. When the publisher

University licenses

sells or licenses rights to others, money is paid, either in a lump sum or as a royalty, and these

4.64:

The NIH Public

proceeds are normally split between the publisher and the author according to whatever terms are

Access Policy

specified in the publishing contract. In a typical book-publishing agreement the author receives at

4.65:

least 50 percent of such income. Some publishers have tried to avoid paying the author so much by

Economic

considerations

licensing at an artificially low royalty to a sister company or other affiliate, but such "sweetheart"

4.66:

arrangements are suspect and of doubtful legality. In general, licenses between related companies

Handling

should be handled in the same way as those between unrelated companies unless the author agrees

permission requests

otherwise in advance.

4.67:

The rights file

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Subsidiary Rights and Permissions >> Granting Permission

of Contents

List of Figures

4.66 HANDLING PERMISSION REQUESTS

List of Tables

A publisher with a relatively large backlist of books and journals, such as the University of Chicago

Index

Press, may receive dozens of communications every day from people seeking to license material from

its list. Some requests are for standard subsidiary rights licenses, as described above. Others are for

permission to reproduce snippets of prose or verse, or an illustration or two, from a book or journal.

4.64:

Most publishers have a "rights and permissions" staff to handle these requests. Rights and

The NIH Public

Access Policy

permissions can be a major source of income but also a major item of expense. Strategies for

4.65:

streamlining the permissions function are discussed later in this chapter.

Economic

considerations

4.66:

Handling

permission requests

4.67:

The rights file

4.68:

Author's warranties

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Subsidiary Rights and Permissions >> Granting Permission

of Contents

List of Figures

4.67 THE RIGHTS FILE

List of Tables

One prerequisite to an efficient and legally safe rights and permissions program is a complete and

Index

accurate record of what rights the publisher has. This is especially sensitive where third-party

materials such as illustrations are embedded in the material to be licensed. The publisher's rights file

should also record any other conditions that might restrict the publisher's ability to license, such as a

4.65:

requirement that the author's approval be obtained.

Economic

considerations

4.66:

Handling

permission requests

4.67:

The rights file

4.68:

Author's warranties

4.69:

General principles

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities

of Contents

List of Figures

4.68 AUTHOR'S WARRANTIES

List of Tables

In signing a contract with a publisher an author warrants (guarantees) that the work is original, that

Index

the author owns it, that no part of it has been previously published, and that no other agreement to

publish it or part of it is outstanding. The author should also warrant that the work does not libel

anyone or infringe any person's right of privacy. If the work contains scientific formulas or practical

4.66:

advice, the author should also be asked to warrant that no instructions in the work will, if accurately

Handling

permission requests

followed, cause injury to anyone. Some publishers ask for a further warranty that any statement of

4.67:

fact in the work is indeed accurate.

The rights file

4.68:

Author's warranties

4.69:

General principles

4.70:

Author's role in

obtaining

permissions

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions

of Contents

List of Figures

4.69 GENERAL PRINCIPLES

List of Tables

Budget permitting, an author may wish to commission illustrations on a work-made-for-hire basis,

Index

using forms supplied by the publisher. With this exception, an author must obtain permission to use

any copyrighted material created by others, unless the intended use is a "fair use" (see 4.77--87).

Technically, permission need not be in writing, but it would be most unwise to rely on oral

4.67:

permission. No permission is required to quote from works of the United States government or works

The rights file

for which copyright has expired. See 4.25--29 for guidelines to determine whether copyright for old

4.68:

Author's warranties

material has expired. Bear in mind that although the original text of a classic reprinted in a modern

4.69:

edition may be in the public domain, recent translations and abridgments, as well as editorial

General principles

introductions, notes, and other apparatus, are protected by copyright. But whether permission is

4.70:

needed or not, the author should always, as a matter of good practice (and to avoid any possible

Author's role in

obtaining

charge of plagiarism), credit any sources used. See 4.98.

permissions

4.71:

Author's own work

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions

of Contents

List of Figures

4.70 AUTHOR'S ROLE IN OBTAINING PERMISSIONS

List of Tables

Publishing agreements place on the author the responsibility to request any permission needed for the

Index

use of material owned by others. In the course of writing a book or article, the author should keep a

record of all copyright owners whose permission may be necessary before the work is published. For

a book containing many illustrations, long prose passages, or poetry, obtaining permissions may take

4.68:

weeks, even months. For example, the author may find that an American publisher holds rights only

Author's warranties

for distribution in the United States and that European and British Commonwealth rights are held by

4.69:

General principles

a British publisher. The author, wishing worldwide distribution for the book (world rights), must

4.70:

then write to the British publisher requesting permission to reprint, mentioning (if true) that

Author's role in

permission has already been obtained from the US publisher. If the author of copyrighted material

obtaining

permissions

has died, or if the copyright owner has gone out of business, a voluminous correspondence may

4.71:

ensue before anyone authorized to grant permission can be found (see 4.75). The author should

Author's own work

therefore begin requesting permissions as soon as a manuscript is accepted for publication. Most

4.72:

publishers wisely decline to start setting type for a book until all the author's permissions are in

Fees and record

1

keeping

hand.

1. It is possible to engage professional help in obtaining permissions for a large project. Specialists in this work are listed under

"Consultants" in the annual publication LMP ( Literary Market Place; see bibliog. 2.8). Note also that the allocation of

responsibility described here may not apply in some cases, such as large-market college textbooks, for which the publisher may

take on the permissions paperwork. See 4.100.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions

of Contents

List of Figures

4.71 AUTHOR'S OWN WORK

List of Tables

The author should remember that permission is sometimes needed to reuse or even to revise his or

Index

her own work. If the author has already allowed a chapter or other significant part to appear in print

elsewhere--as a journal article, for example--then written permission to reprint it, or to update or

revise it, will need to be secured from the copyright owner of the other publication, unless the author

4.69:

secured the right of reuse in the contract with that earlier publisher. The law does not require that the

General principles

prior publication be credited in the new publication, but it is a common courtesy to give credit on the

4.70:

Author's role in

copyright page of the book, in a footnote on the first page of the reprinted material, or in a special list

obtaining

of acknowledgments. And if the first publisher owns copyright in the material, it may make credit a

permissions

condition of permission to reprint. Also, if the first publisher owns copyright, the new publisher will

4.71:

Author's own work

need to flag its files so that subsequent permissions requests for that material are referred to the

4.72:

original copyright owner.

Fees and record

keeping

4.73:

Permissions beyond

the immediate use

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions

of Contents

List of Figures

4.72 FEES AND RECORD KEEPING

List of Tables

Most publishing agreements stipulate that any fees to be paid will be the author's responsibility.

Index

(Textbooks are a rare exception; see 4.100.) When all permissions have been received, the author

should send them, or copies of them, to the publisher, who will note and comply with any special

provisions they contain. The publisher will file all permissions with the publishing contract, where

4.70:

they may be consulted in the event of future editions or of requests for permission to reprint from the

Author's role in

obtaining

work. The copyeditor will check the permissions against the manuscript to be sure all necessary

permissions

credits have been given. See 1.30, 2.43, 4.98, 14.49.

4.71:

Author's own work

4.72:

Fees and record

keeping

4.73:

Permissions beyond

the immediate use

4.74:

Unpublished works

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions

of Contents

List of Figures

4.73 PERMISSIONS BEYOND THE IMMEDIATE USE

List of Tables

Many publishers, when giving permission to reprint material they control, will withhold the right to

Index

sublicense that material. In such a case the publisher of the later work will not be able to give third

parties free and clear permission to use material in which content from the earlier work is embedded;

they will have to go back to the original source. Some publishers will also limit their licenses to a

4.71:

single edition, sometimes even with a maximum print run stipulated, or to a specific time period such

Author's own work

as five or seven years. Where this is so, the publisher receiving the permission will have to go back to

4.72:

Fees and record

the source for new permission, usually for an additional fee, for any new edition, paperback reprint,

keeping

serialization, or whatever. Alternatively, the publisher granting permission can stipulate up front

4.73:

what fees are to be paid for further uses and permit the new publisher to secure such permission

Permissions beyond

the immediate use

automatically on payment of the agreed-on fee.

4.74:

Unpublished works

4.75:

The missing

copyright owner

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions

of Contents

List of Figures

4.74 UNPUBLISHED WORKS

List of Tables

Getting permission for unpublished material presents an entirely different problem. Instead of a

Index

publishing corporation or licensing agent, one must deal with the author or author's heirs, who may

not be easily identified or found. If the writer is dead, it may be especially difficult to determine who

controls the copyrights.

4.72:

Fees and record

keeping

4.73:

Permissions beyond

the immediate use

4.74:

Unpublished works

4.75:

The missing

copyright owner

4.76:

Noncopyright

restrictions on

archives

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions

of Contents

List of Figures

4.75 THE MISSING COPYRIGHT OWNER

List of Tables

The problem presented by unpublished works whose authors are dead is, in a larger sense, just an

Index

example of the problem of the missing copyright owner. Another typical example is the publisher

that has gone out of business or at least is no longer doing business under a given imprint. This

problem has come to be known as the "orphan works" problem and has been the subject of proposed

4.73:

legislation. The draft bills suggest practices that a publisher would do well to follow in dealing with

Permissions beyond

the immediate use

an orphan work. The most important thing is to conduct a reasonable (and well-documented) effort

4.74:

to locate the copyright owner. The elements of a bona fide search will vary with the circumstances

Unpublished works

but would probably include a search of the Copyright Office records, an Internet search, and queries

4.75:

to both private and public databases that might reasonably be expected to contain information as to

The missing

copyright owner

the owner of the copyright. If such efforts yield no results, there is still some risk in going forward.

4.76:

Technically, use of the work might still be ruled an infringement of copyright should a copyright

Noncopyright

owner surface, but it is unlikely that any court would do more than require the payment of a

restrictions on

archives

reasonable permissions fee. Anyone proceeding with publication under these conditions should

4.77:

certainly be prepared to offer and pay a reasonable fee on receiving any objection from the

Overview of the

legal doctrine

rediscovered owner.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions

of Contents

List of Figures

4.76 NONCOPYRIGHT RESTRICTIONS ON ARCHIVES

List of Tables

Authors who wish to include unpublished material in their works should be aware that private

Index

restrictions, unrelated to copyright, may limit its use. The keeper of a collection, usually a librarian or

an archivist, is the best source of such information, including what permissions must be sought and

from whom. Bear in mind that copyright in a manuscript is different from ownership of the actual

4.74:

paper. Most often a library or collector will own the physical object itself but not the right to

Unpublished works

reproduce it. Thus there may be two permissions required: one for access to the material and one for

4.75:

The missing

the right to copy. It is important not to mistake one for the other.

copyright owner

4.76:

Noncopyright

restrictions on

archives

4.77:

Overview of the

legal doctrine

4.78:

Validity of "rules of

thumb"

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions >> Fair Use: Quoting without Permission

of Contents

List of Figures

4.77 OVERVIEW OF THE LEGAL DOCTRINE

List of Tables

The doctrine of fair use was originally developed by courts as an equitable limit on the absolute rights

Index

of copyright. Although incorporated into the new copyright law, the doctrine still does not attempt to

define the exact limits of the fair use of copyrighted work. It does state, however, that in determining

whether the use made of a work in any particular case is fair, the factors to be considered must

4.75:

include the following:

The missing

copyright owner

1. The purpose and character of the use, including whether such use is of a commercial nature or

4.76:

Noncopyright

is for nonprofit educational purposes

restrictions on

archives

2. The nature of the copyrighted work

4.77:

3. The amount and substantiality of the portion used in relation to the copyrighted work as a

Overview of the

whole

legal doctrine

4. The effect of the use on the potential market for, or value of, the copyrighted work

4.78:

Validity of "rules of

thumb"

Essentially, the doctrine excuses copying that would otherwise be infringement. For example, it

4.79:

allows authors to quote from other authors' work or to reproduce small amounts of graphic or

A few general rules

pictorial material for purposes of review or criticism or to illustrate or buttress their own points.

Authors invoking fair use should transcribe accurately and give credit to their sources. They should

not quote out of context, making the author of the quoted passage seem to be saying something

opposite to, or different from, what was intended.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions >> Fair Use: Quoting without Permission

of Contents

List of Figures

4.78 VALIDITY OF "RULES OF THUMB"

List of Tables

Although the law lays out no boundaries or ironclad formulas for fair use, some publishers have their

Index

own rules of thumb. Such rules, of course, have no legal force: courts, not publishers, adjudicate fair

use. The rules exist in part to give an overworked permissions department, which often cannot tell

whether a proposed use of a quotation is actually fair, something to use as a yardstick. See also 4.87.

4.76:

Noncopyright

restrictions on

archives

4.77:

Overview of the

legal doctrine

4.78:

Validity of "rules of

thumb"

4.79:

A few general rules

4.80:

Epigraphs and

interior monologues

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions >> Fair Use: Quoting without Permission

of Contents

List of Figures

4.79 A FEW GENERAL RULES

List of Tables

Fair use is use that is fair--simply that. Uses that are tangential in purpose to the original, and uses

Index

that transform the copied material by changing its context or the way it is perceived, will always be

judged more leniently than those that merely parallel or parrot the original. For example, substantial

quotation of the original is acceptable in the context of a critique but may well not be acceptable if

4.77:

one is simply using the first author's words to reiterate the same argument or embellish one's own

Overview of the

legal doctrine

prose. Use of any literary work in its entirety--a poem, an essay, a chapter of a book--is hardly ever

4.78:

acceptable. Use of less than the whole will be judged by whether the second author appears to be

Validity of "rules of

taking a free ride on the first author's labor. As a general rule, one should never quote more than a

thumb"

few contiguous paragraphs of prose or lines of poetry at a time or let the quotations, even if scattered,

4.79:

A few general rules

begin to overshadow the quoter's own material. Quotations or graphic reproductions should not be so

4.80:

substantial that they substitute for, or diminish the value of, the copyright owner's own publication.

Epigraphs and

Proportion is more important than the absolute length of a quotation: quoting five hundred words

interior monologues

from an essay of five thousand is likely to be riskier than quoting that amount from a work of fifty

4.81:

Unpublished works

thousand. But an even smaller percentage can be an infringement if it constitutes the heart of the

work being quoted.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions >> Fair Use: Quoting without Permission

of Contents

List of Figures

4.80 EPIGRAPHS AND INTERIOR MONOLOGUES

List of Tables

Quotation in the form of an epigraph does not fit neatly into any of the usual fair-use categories but

Index

is probably fair use by virtue of scholarly and artistic tradition. The same can be said of limited

quotation of song lyrics, poetry, and the like in the context of an interior monologue or fictional

narrative. Of course, this would not excuse the publication of a collection of epigraphs or lyrics

4.78:

without permission of the various authors being quoted.

Validity of "rules of

thumb"

4.79:

A few general rules

4.80:

Epigraphs and

interior monologues

4.81:

Unpublished works

4.82:

Paraphrasing

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions >> Fair Use: Quoting without Permission

of Contents

List of Figures

4.81 UNPUBLISHED WORKS

List of Tables

Where the work to be quoted has never been published, the same considerations apply. But if the

Index

author or the author's spouse or children are still living, some consideration should be given to their

interest in controlling when the work is disclosed to the public.

4.79:

A few general rules

4.80:

Epigraphs and

interior monologues

4.81:

Unpublished works

4.82:

Paraphrasing

4.83:

Pictorial and

graphic materials

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions >> Fair Use: Quoting without Permission

of Contents

List of Figures

4.82 PARAPHRASING

List of Tables

Bear in mind that although fair use will protect verbatim copying, unfair use will not be excused by

Index

paraphrasing. Traditional copyright doctrine treats extensive paraphrase as merely disguised copying.

Thus, fair-use analysis will be the same for both. Paraphrase of small quantities of material, on the

other hand, may not constitute copying at all, so that fair-use analysis would never come into play.

4.80:

Epigraphs and

interior monologues

4.81:

Unpublished works

4.82:

Paraphrasing

4.83:

Pictorial and

graphic materials

4.84:

Charts, tables, and

graphs

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions >> Fair Use: Quoting without Permission

of Contents

List of Figures

4.83 PICTORIAL AND GRAPHIC MATERIALS

List of Tables

With respect to pictorial and graphic materials, there is little legal precedent to navigate by. At the

Index

level of intuition, it seems that a monograph on Picasso should be free to reproduce details from his

paintings in order, for example, to illustrate the critic's discussion of Picasso's brushwork.

Reproducing the entire image in black and white may also be reasonably necessary to illustrate the

4.81:

author's analysis of Picasso's techniques of composition. Reproducing "thumbnail sketches" of images

Unpublished works

has been held to be a fair use since they are so small and of such poor resolution that they cannot

4.82:

Paraphrasing

reduce the commercial value of the original. However, justification wears thin when a painting is

4.83:

reproduced in vivid color occupying a full page; the result begins to compete with large-scale

Pictorial and

reproductions of artwork that have no scholarly purpose. Likewise, reproduction on the cover would

graphic materials

in almost all cases count as commercial rather than scholarly use and therefore be unjustified. As for

4.84:

Charts, tables, and

photographs, using them merely as illustrations would require permission, but use as described

graphs

above in a scholarly treatment of photography might not.

4.85:

Importance of

attribution

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions >> Fair Use: Quoting without Permission

of Contents

List of Figures

4.84 CHARTS, TABLES, AND GRAPHS

List of Tables

Reproduction of charts, tables, and graphs presents a difficult judgment call. An aggressive approach

Index

would justify copying a single item on the ground that one chart is the pictorial equivalent of a few

sentences. A more conservative approach would argue that a graph is a picture worth a thousand

words and that reproducing it without permission is taking a free ride on the first author's work. This

4.82:

latter approach has the flaw of being too absolute in practice, for it is difficult under this rationale to

Paraphrasing

imagine any fair use of such an image. Where the item in question represents a small portion of the

4.83:

Pictorial and

original work and a small portion of the second work, the harm seems minimal, outweighed by the

graphic materials

benefits of open communication. Certainly, reproduction of a single graph, table, or chart that simply

4.84:

presents data in a straightforward relationship, in contrast to reproduction of a graph or chart

Charts, tables, and

graphs

embellished with pictorial elements, should ordinarily be considered fair use. Indeed, some graphs

4.85:

that merely present facts with little or no expressive input--the equivalent, in two dimensions, of a

Importance of

mere list--may even be beyond the protection of copyright.

attribution

4.86:

Unnecessary

permissions

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions >> Fair Use: Quoting without Permission

of Contents

List of Figures

4.85 IMPORTANCE OF ATTRIBUTION

List of Tables

With all reuse of others' materials, it is important to identify the original as the source. This not only

Index

bolsters the claim of fair use but also helps avoid any accusation of plagiarism. Nothing elaborate is

required; a standard footnote will suffice, or (in the case of a graph or table, for example) a simple

legend that says "Source: [author, title, and date of earlier work]." Note that such a legend is not

4.83:

always clear: Does it mean that the data are taken from the original but reformatted by the second

Pictorial and

graphic materials

author or that the graph or table has itself been copied? If the latter, it is preferable to say "Reprinted

4.84:

from [author, title, and date of earlier work]" rather than merely "Source." See also 3.28--36, 3.75,

Charts, tables, and

14.49.

graphs

4.85:

Importance of

attribution

4.86:

Unnecessary

permissions

4.87:

Chicago's fair-use

guidelines

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions >> Fair Use: Quoting without Permission

of Contents

List of Figures

4.86 UNNECESSARY PERMISSIONS

List of Tables

Given the ad hoc nature of fair use and the absence of rules and guidelines, many publishers tend to

Index

seek permission if they have the slightest doubt whether a particular use is fair. This is unfortunate.

The right of fair use is valuable to scholarship, and it should not be allowed to decay because scholars

fail to employ it boldly. Furthermore, excessive permissions processing tends to slow down the

4.84:

gestation of worthwhile writings. Even if permission is sought and denied, that should not necessarily

Charts, tables, and

graphs

be treated as the end of the matter. The US Supreme Court has held that requesting permission

4.85:

should not be regarded as an admission that permission is needed. In other words, where permission

Importance of

is denied, or granted but for an unreasonable price, there is an opportunity for a second look.

attribution

4.86:

Unnecessary

permissions

4.87:

Chicago's fair-use

guidelines

4.88:

The Copyright Act

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions >> Fair Use: Quoting without Permission

of Contents

List of Figures

4.87 CHICAGO'S FAIR-USE GUIDELINES

List of Tables

To reduce the expense of responding to permissions requests, and to reduce the friction in scholarly

Index

publishing that permissions handling can create, the University of Chicago Press posts guidelines on

its website for what it considers to be fair use of excerpts from its own publications. These guidelines

are intended to be generous and fair to all parties. They are beginning to be adopted by other

4.85:

publishers.

Importance of

attribution

4.86:

Unnecessary

permissions

4.87:

Chicago's fair-use

guidelines

4.88:

The Copyright Act

4.89:

Library

photocopying

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions >>

of Contents

Library and Educational Copying as Fair Use

List of Figures

List of Tables

4.88 THE COPYRIGHT ACT

Index

Fair use has been much in dispute as applied to photocopying for classroom and library use. The

Copyright Act contains specific guidelines for library photocopying, and the legislative history of the

act includes specific, though not official, guidelines for classroom photocopying.

4.86:

Unnecessary

permissions

4.87:

Chicago's fair-use

guidelines

4.88:

The Copyright Act

4.89:

Library

photocopying

4.90:

Educational

photocopying

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions >>

of Contents

Library and Educational Copying as Fair Use

List of Figures

List of Tables

4.89 LIBRARY PHOTOCOPYING

Index

The new law does attempt to define minimum fair-use limitations on machine copying by libraries, in

a long section with many exemptions and caveats too complex to discuss here. In general, it allows

libraries to make single copies of copyrighted works, provided each copy bears the original copyright

4.87:

notice and provided the copies are made for one of the purposes specifically defined in the statute,

Chicago's fair-use

guidelines

including the following:

4.88:

The Copyright Act

1. If the copy is made for a library's own use because the library's own copy of the work is

damaged or missing and a replacement cannot be obtained at a fair price

4.89:

Library

2. If the copy is made for a patron's use and is limited to an article or a small part of a larger

photocopying

work--or the whole of a larger work if a printed copy cannot be obtained at a fair price--and

4.90:

Educational

only if the copy is intended for use by the patron in "private study, scholarship, or research"

photocopying

4.91:

The law specifically forbids "systematic" copying by libraries. Presumably this includes but is not

Digitizing and

limited to (1) making copies of books or periodicals as a substitute for buying them and (2) making

automating the

permissions process

copies for patrons indiscriminately without regard to the patrons' identities or intended use of the

material.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions >>

of Contents

Library and Educational Copying as Fair Use

List of Figures

List of Tables

4.90 EDUCATIONAL PHOTOCOPYING

Index

The Copyright Act does not include similar guidelines for educational photocopying. But a

congressional report published at the time the law was being written includes privately negotiated

guidelines, implicitly approved by Congress, for fair use of copyrighted material. These guidelines are

4.88:

available at the website of the United States Copyright Office. "Brevity" and "spontaneity" are the

The Copyright Act

guiding principles; the latter reflects the premise that photocopying for classroom use should be done

4.89:

only when there is too little time to obtain permission. Multiple copies should not exceed the number

Library

photocopying

of students in the class. They should not substitute for anthologies or regular school purchases. The

4.90:

same items should not be copied from year to year or semester to semester, but once only and at the

Educational

photocopying

instance of a particular teacher for immediate use in the classroom. Workbooks and other consumable

materials should not be copied, and the students should not be charged more than the actual copying

4.91:

Digitizing and

cost. Any copy must include the copyright notice used in the original. As for the widespread practice

automating the

permissions process

of making customized anthologies ("course packs") for individual teachers' classes, cases subsequent

4.92:

to the guidelines make clear that this is an infringement if express permission is not received from the

Information

copyright owners of the materials included in them. More recently, the legality of posting digital

required

copies of published materials on campus intranets for so-called e-reserve purposes has been the

subject of hotly contested litigation.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Obtaining Permissions >>

of Contents

Library and Educational Copying as Fair Use

List of Figures

List of Tables

4.91 DIGITIZING AND AUTOMATING THE PERMISSIONS PROCESS

Index

The technologies of photocopying and electronic reproduction present a major institutional challenge

to publishers. The volume of license requests under these headings exceeds the ability of traditional

techniques to process them. Publishers have customarily processed such requests by hand, case by

4.89:

case, evaluating each request on its own merits and often tailoring a fee to the specific circumstances.

Library

photocopying

Whether this approach can or should survive is an open question. The Internet--the very electronic

technology that publishers have often regarded as a threat--provides a powerful tool for handling

4.90:

Educational

requests rapidly and with little or no staff involvement. A properly designed website, coupled with

photocopying

the adoption of standard, publicly quoted fees, can create a highly efficient marketplace for copying,

4.91:

Digitizing and

to the benefit of both the publisher and its customers. Authors seeking permission for use of other

automating the

authors' work can obtain that permission immediately and can realistically budget for permissions

permissions process

fees in advance. The marketplace can be even more efficient when a royalty-rights organization such

4.92:

Information

as the Copyright Clearance Center (see 1.97) enables users to obtain online permissions from multiple

required

publishers through a single website. Whether these services become the standard, or inspire

4.93:

publishers to move their own rights and permissions work to the web, remains to be seen.

Sample permissions

letters

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Requesting Permission

of Contents

List of Figures

4.92 INFORMATION REQUIRED

List of Tables

Would-be users can help reduce delay and miscommunication by submitting their requests for

Index

permission in the best possible form. All requests for permission to reprint should be sent to the

copyright holder in writing and in duplicate. The request should contain the following explicit

information:

4.90:

Educational

photocopying

1. The title of the original work and exact identification, with page numbers, of what is to be

reprinted. Identification should include, in the case of a table or figure, its number and the page

4.91:

Digitizing and

it appears on (e.g., fig. 6 on p. 43); in the case of a poem, the title and the page on which the

automating the

permissions process

poem appears; in the case of a prose passage, the opening and closing phrases in addition to

the page numbers (e.g., "from â€˜The military genius of Frederick the Great' on p. 110 through â

4.92:

Information

€˜until the onset of World War I' on p. 112"). The requester should be sure to cite the original

required

source of the material, not any subsequent reprinting of it.

4.93:

Sample permissions

2. Information about the publication in which the author wishes to reproduce the material: title,

letters

approximate number of printed pages, form of publication (clothbound book, paperback book,

4.94:

journal, electronic journal), publisher, probable date of publication, approximate print run, and

Rights holders

list price (if available).

3. The kind of rights requested. The most limited rights a user ought to accept are "nonexclusive

world rights in the English language, for one edition." The best opening gambit would be

"nonexclusive world rights in all languages and for all editions in print and other media,

including the right to grant customary permissions requests but only where the licensed

material is incorporated in [the requester's work]." The request for "the rights to grant

customary permissions" would, if granted, greatly simplify the downstream licensing of the

new work. Unfortunately, such a right is not implicit in any nonexclusive license (see 4.34) and

is seldom granted, and licensees of works in which earlier material is used end up needing to

get multiple layers of permission.

Submitting a request in this form does not guarantee that the copyright owner will sign and return it-

-the owner may well have its own standard form that it returns to the requester--but it at least helps

both parties by clearly defining what is under discussion. It is up to the copyright owner to state

clearly what fee is demanded for the proposed use and what special conditions apply to the grant.

When agreement on all terms is reached, the requester and the copyright owner should both retain

copies of the final agreement, and a third copy (with original signature, if the process has been done

on paper rather than electronically) should go to the publisher.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Requesting Permission

of Contents

List of Figures

4.93 SAMPLE PERMISSIONS LETTERS

List of Tables

The University of Chicago Press supplies authors or editors of books requiring many permissions

Index

with a model request letter (fig. 4.3) but suggests that they write on their own personal or (when

appropriate) institutional letterhead. Every publisher would be well advised to adopt some variation

of this practice, for authors typically are rudderless at sea without it.

4.91:

Digitizing and

automating the

permissions process

4.92:

Information

required

4.93:

Sample permissions

letters

4.94:

Rights holders

4.95:

Stock agencies and

image archives

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Requesting Permission >> Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

4.94 RIGHTS HOLDERS

List of Tables

Permission to reproduce pictorial works--as opposed to charts, graphs, or the like, which are usually

Index

created by the same author(s) as the text--will sometimes, but not reliably, be available from the

publisher. A publisher who has used the pictorial work to illustrate text that someone is seeking to

reprint may very well not have the right to sublicense use of the illustration. Even a publisher of, say,

4.92:

a collection of the artist's work may not have rights to the individual images. In such a case the

Information

required

permission seeker must deal with the owner of the object or the artist or both. Copyright ownership

4.93:

of artworks sold before 1978 is not always easy to determine, because before 1978 the law generally,

Sample permissions

but not always, assumed that so long as an original artwork remained unpublished, its copyright

letters

passed from hand to hand with ownership of the object itself. For post-1977 works, copyright belongs

4.94:

Rights holders

to the artist unless the artist has explicitly assigned it to someone else. But even for such works, the

4.95:

person seeking permission to reproduce the artwork in a book or journal may, as a practical matter,

Stock agencies and

need to deal with a museum that expects a fee for the privilege of allowing reproduction. Where the

image archives

museum can deny permission to photograph the object, such a fee is the tariff one pays for physical

4.96:

Information

access if nothing else. Where the museum is licensing its own reproduction or photograph of the

required

work, it has less justification, for the law denies copyright to photographs that merely reproduce

another two-dimensional image. Be that as it may, authors and publishers are generally loath to

antagonize museums by challenging their positions.

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Requesting Permission >> Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

4.95 STOCK AGENCIES AND IMAGE ARCHIVES

List of Tables

The only kind of pictorial work for which permissions are easily granted is photographs, at least

Index

where one is dealing with a stock agency or other commercial image archive. Such agencies have vast

inventories of images and published, easy-to-understand fee structures. There are also websites that

act as clearinghouses for photographic permissions.

4.93:

Sample permissions

letters

4.94:

Rights holders

4.95:

Stock agencies and

image archives

4.96:

Information

required

4.97:

Fees

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Requesting Permission >> Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

4.96 INFORMATION REQUIRED

List of Tables

A permission request for an illustration should be sent to the picture agency, museum, artist, or

Index

private individual controlling reproduction rights. Again, the request should be as specific as possible

regarding the identity of what is to be reproduced, the form of publication in which it will appear,

and the kind of rights requested. If the author making the request knows that the illustration will also

4.94:

be used elsewhere than in the text proper (such as on the jacket or in advertising), this fact should be

Rights holders

noted.

4.95:

Stock agencies and

image archives

4.96:

Information

required

4.97:

Fees

4.98:

Credit lines

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Requesting Permission >> Illustrations

of Contents

List of Figures

4.97 FEES

List of Tables

Fees paid for reproducing material, especially illustrations procured from a stock-photo agency,

Index

usually cover one-time use only--in, say, the first edition of a book. If an illustration is also to be used

on the jacket or in advertising, a higher fee is customary. And if a book is reprinted as a paperback or

goes into a second edition, another fee is usually charged. Ideally such a fee should be agreed upon in

4.95:

advance, at the time of the initial permission. Whether the publisher or the author should pay

Stock agencies and

image archives

whatever additional fee is charged for cover use is a matter for negotiation.

4.96:

Information

required

4.97:

Fees

4.98:

Credit lines

4.99:

Acknowledgments

sections

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Requesting Permission >> Acknowledging Sources

of Contents

List of Figures

4.98 CREDIT LINES

List of Tables

Whether or not the use of others' material requires permission, an author should give the exact source

Index

of such material: in a note or internal reference in the text, in a source note to a table, or in a credit

line under an illustration. Where formal permission has been granted, the author should, within

reason, follow any special wording stipulated by the grantor. For a text passage complete in itself,

4.96:

such as a poem, or for a table, the full citation to the source may be followed by this simple

Information

required

acknowledgment:

4.97:

Fees

Reprinted by permission of the publisher.

4.98:

Credit lines

A credit line below an illustration may read, for example, as follows:

4.99:

Acknowledgments

Courtesy of the Newberry Library, Chicago, Illinois.

sections

4.100:

For examples of various kinds of credit lines, see 3.28--36, 3.75, 14.49.

Responsibility for

payment

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Requesting Permission >> Acknowledging Sources

of Contents

List of Figures

4.99 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS SECTIONS

List of Tables

In a work that needs many permissions, acknowledgments are often grouped in a special

Index

acknowledgments section at the front or back of the work (see 1.41). Some citation of the source

should still, however, be made on the page containing the relevant material.

4.97:

Fees

4.98:

Credit lines

4.99:

Acknowledgments

sections

4.100:

Responsibility for

payment

4.101:

Anthologies

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Requesting Permission >> Fees

of Contents

List of Figures

4.100 RESPONSIBILITY FOR PAYMENT

List of Tables

As noted above, publishing agreements generally make the author responsible for any fees charged

Index

for use of others' material. A publisher may agree to pay the fees and to deduct them from the

author's royalties or--in rare instances--to split the fees with the author. If it appears that a book

would be enhanced by illustrations not provided by the author, many publishing agreements enable

4.97:

the publisher to find the illustrations and (with the author's consent) charge any fees involved to the

Fees

author's royalty account. One exception to these generalizations is school and college textbooks,

4.98:

Credit lines

where it is common for the publisher to provide a certain amount of its own funds to pay for

4.99:

illustrations.

Acknowledgments

sections

4.100:

Responsibility for

payment

4.101:

Anthologies

4: RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Author's Responsibilities >> Requesting Permission >> Fees

of Contents

List of Figures

4.101 ANTHOLOGIES

List of Tables

A book made up entirely of other authors' copyrighted materials--stories, essays, poems, documents,

Index

selections from larger works--depends for its existence on permissions from the various copyright

owners. The compiler of such a volume therefore should begin seeking permissions as soon as a

contract for publication of the volume has been executed or a letter of intent has been received from

4.97:

the prospective publisher. Informal inquiries to copyright owners may be initiated before that time,

Fees

but no sensible publisher of material to be anthologized is likely to grant permission for its use or to

4.98:

Credit lines

set fees without knowing the details of eventual publication. Once those details are known, the

4.99:

compiler must act quickly. Permission for a selection may be refused, or the fee charged may be so

Acknowledgments

high that the compiler is forced to drop that selection and substitute another. And until all

sections

permissions have been received and all fees agreed on, the table of contents cannot be considered

4.100:

Responsibility for

final.

payment

4.101:

Anthologies

4 : RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 4.1

List of Figures

Agreement, or consent, for publication of an article or a chapter commissioned as a contribution to a collective work, such as a symposium. Different forms of

List of Tables

agreement are required for "works made for hire," such as translations, forewords, or indexes. PDF Version >>

Index

4 : RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 4.2

List of Figures

Agreement for publication of a journal article, currently in use by the University of Chicago Press. Here the author transfers all copyright rights to the publisher

List of Tables

of the journal, and the publisher transfers back to the author the right to reprint the article in other scholarly contexts. PDF Version >>

Index

4 : RIGHTS, PERMISSIONS, AND COPYRIGHT ADMINISTRATION

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 4.3

List of Figures

Suggestions for a letter seeking permission to reprint material in a scholarly book. Some of the

List of Tables

information about the proposed book may be lacking when the author begins to request permissions,

Index

but as much information as possible should be supplied. Note that spaces are left so that the person

addressed can use the letter itself for granting or denying the request or for referring the author

elsewhere.

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

of Contents

Grammar

List of Figures

Introduction

List of Tables

5.1

Grammar defined

Index

5.2

Schools of grammatical thought

5.3

Parts of speech

Nouns

Definitions

5.4

Nouns generally

5.5

Common nouns

5.6

Proper nouns

5.7

Count nouns

5.8

Mass nouns

5.9

Mass noun followed by a prepositional phrase

5.10

Noun-equivalents and substantives

Properties of Nouns

5.11

Noun properties

5.12

Noun case

5.13

Noun number

5.14

Noun gender

5.15

Noun person

Case

5.16

Function of case

5.17

Common case, nominative function

5.18

Common case, objective function

5.19

Genitive case

5.20

The "of"-genitive

Appositives

5.21

Appositives defined; use

Functional Variation

5.22

Nouns as adjectives

5.23

Nouns as verbs

5.24

Adverbial functions

5.25

Other functional shifts

Pronouns

Definition and Uses

5.26

Pronouns defined

5.27

Antecedents of pronouns

5.28

Pronouns without antecedents

5.29

Adjective as antecedent

Properties of Pronouns

5.30

Four properties of pronouns

5.31

Pronoun number and antecedent

5.32

Exceptions regarding pronoun number

5.33

Pronoun with multiple antecedents

5.34

Antecedents of different genders

5.35

Pronoun case

5.36

Nominative case misused for objective

Classes of Pronouns

5.37

Six classes of pronouns

Personal Pronouns

5.38

Form of personal pronoun

5.39

Changes in form

5.40

Agreement of pronoun with noun

5.41

Pronoun and gender

5.42

Personal pronoun case

5.43

Pronoun case after linking verb

5.44

Pronoun case after "than" or "as . . . as"

5.45

Special uses of personal pronouns

5.46

The singular "they"

Possessive Pronouns

5.47

Possessive pronouns

5.48

Compound personal pronouns; â€‘self forms

5.49

Reflexive and intensive pronouns

5.50

Possessive pronouns versus contractions

Demonstrative Pronouns

5.51

Demonstrative pronouns defined

Interrogative Pronouns

5.52

Interrogative pronouns defined

5.53

Referent of interrogative pronouns

Relative Pronouns

5.54

Relative pronouns defined

5.55

Case with relative pronouns

5.56

Positional nuances with relative pronouns

5.57

Antecedent of relative pronoun

5.58

Omitted antecedent of relative pronoun

5.59

Relative pronoun after "one"

5.60

Possessive forms of relative pronouns

5.61

"Whose" and "of which"

5.62

Compound relative pronouns

5.63

"Who" versus "whom"

Other Types of Pronouns

5.64

Indefinite pronouns

5.65

Adjective pronouns

Adjectives

Definitions

5.66

Adjectives defined

5.67

Proper adjectives

Articles as Limiting Adjectives

5.68

Articles defined

5.69

Definite article

5.70

Indefinite article

5.71

Indefinite article in specific reference

5.72

Choosing "a" or "an"

5.73

Articles with coordinate nouns

5.74

Effect of article on meaning

5.75

Zero article

5.76

Omitted article

5.77

Article as pronoun substitute

Position of Adjectives

5.78

Basic rules

5.79

After possessive pronoun

5.80

Adjective modifying pronoun

5.81

Predicate adjective

5.82

Dates as adjectives

Degrees of Adjectives

5.83

Three adjectival degrees

5.84

Comparative adjectives

5.85

Superlative adjectives

5.86

Forming comparatives and superlatives

5.87

Equal and unequal comparisons

5.88

Uncomparable adjectives

Special Types of Adjectives

5.89

Participial adjectives

5.90

Coordinate adjectives

5.91

Phrasal adjectives

Functional Variation

5.92

Adjectives as nouns

5.93

Adjectives as verbs

5.94

Other parts of speech functioning as adjectives

Verbs

Definitions

5.95

Verbs generally

5.96

Transitive and intransitive verbs

5.97

Ergative verbs

5.98

Regular and irregular verbs

5.99

Linking verbs

5.100 Phrasal verbs

5.101 Principal and auxiliary verbs

5.102 Verb phrases

5.103 Contractions

Infinitives

5.104 Infinitives defined

5.105 Uses of the infinitive

5.106 Split infinitive

5.107 Dangling infinitive

Participles and Gerunds

5.108 Forming participles

5.109 Participial phrases

5.110 Gerunds

5.111 Distinguishing between participles and gerunds

5.112 Dangling participles

5.113 Dangling gerunds

Properties of Verbs

5.114 Five properties of verbs

5.115 Active and passive voice

5.116 Progressive conjugation and voice

5.117 Mood

5.118 Indicative mood

5.119 Imperative mood

5.120 Subjunctive mood

5.121 Indicative instead of subjunctive

5.122 Tenses generally

5.123 Present tense

5.124 Past tense

5.125 Future tense

5.126 Present perfect tense

5.127 Past perfect tense

5.128 Future perfect tense

5.129 Person

5.130 Number

5.131 Agreement in person and number

5.132 False attraction to predicate nominative

5.133 Misleading connectives: "as well as," "along with," "together with," and so forth

Conjugation of Verbs

5.134 Conjugation defined

5.135 Verb stem (present indicative)

5.136 Forming present participles

5.137 Present subjunctive

5.138 Past indicative

5.139 Forming past participles

5.140 Past subjunctive

5.141 Imperative

Auxiliary Verbs

5.142 Auxiliary verbs defined

5.143 "Can"

5.144 "Do"

5.145 "Have"

5.146 "May" and "might"

5.147 "Must"

5.148 "Ought"

5.149 "Shall" and "should"

5.150 "Will" and "would"

"Be"-Verbs

5.151 Forms of "be"-verbs

5.152 Conjugation of "be"-verbs

Adverbs

Definition and Formation

5.153 Adverbs defined

5.154 Adverbs with suffixes

5.155 Adverbs without suffixes

5.156 Adverbs distinguished from adjectives

Simple versus Compound Adverbs

5.157 Simple and flat adverbs

5.158 Phrasal and compound adverbs

Adverbial Degrees

5.159 Three adverbial degrees

5.160 Comparative forms

5.161 Superlative forms

5.162 Irregular adverbs

5.163 Uncomparable adverbs

5.164 Intensifiers

Position of Adverbs

5.165 Placement of adverbs

5.166 Adverbs modifying intransitive verbs

5.167 Adverbs and linking verbs

5.168 Adverb within a verb phrase

Prepositions

Definition and Types

5.169 Prepositions defined

5.170 Simple and compound prepositions

5.171 Participial prepositions

5.172 Phrasal prepositions

Prepositional Phrases

5.173 Prepositional phrases defined

5.174 Prepositional function

5.175 Placement of prepositional phrases

5.176 Ending a sentence with a preposition

5.177 Clashing prepositions

5.178 Elliptical prepositional phrases

5.179 Effect of prepositional phrase on pronoun

Other Prepositional Issues

5.180 Prepositions and functional variation

5.181 Use and misuse of "like"

5.182 Use and misuse of "only"

Limiting Prepositional Phrases

5.183 Avoiding overuse of prepositions

5.184 Cutting prepositional phrases

5.185 Cutting unnecessary prepositions

5.186 Replacing prepositional phrases with adverbs

5.187 Replacing prepositional phrases with genitives

5.188 Using active voice to eliminate prepositions

Prepositional Idioms

5.189 Idiomatic uses of prepositions

5.190 Shifts in prepositional idiom

5.191 List of words and the prepositions construed with them

Conjunctions

5.192 Conjunctions defined

5.193 Simple versus compound conjunctions

5.194 Coordinating conjunctions

5.195 Correlative conjunctions

5.196 Copulative conjunctions

5.197 Adversative conjunctions

5.198 Disjunctive conjunctions

5.199 Final conjunctions

5.200 Subordinating conjunctions

5.201 Special uses of subordinating conjunctions

5.202 Adverbs as conjunctions

5.203 Relative pronouns as conjunctions

5.204 Expletive conjunctions

5.205 Disguised conjunctions

5.206 Beginning a sentence with a conjunction

5.207 Beginning a sentence with "however"

Interjections

5.208 Interjections defined

5.209 Interjections as informal and colloquial

5.210 Interjections and functional variation

5.211 Words that are exclusively interjections

Parallel Structure

5.212 Parallel structure generally

5.213 Prepositions and parallel structure

5.214 Paired joining terms and parallel structure

5.215 Auxiliary verbs and parallel structure

Word Usage

Introduction

5.216 Grammar versus usage

5.217 Standard Written English

5.218 Dialect

5.219 Focus on tradition

Glossary of Problematic Words and Phrases

5.220 Good usage versus common usage

Bias-Free Language

5.221 Maintaining credibility

5.222 Gender bias

5.223 Other biases

5.224 Bias and the editor's responsibility

5.225 Nine techniques for achieving gender neutrality

5.226 Sex-specific labels as adjectives

5.227 Gender-neutral singular pronouns

5.228 Problematic suffixes

5.229 Necessary gender-specific language

5.230 Avoiding other biased language

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

5.1 GRAMMAR DEFINED

List of Tables

Grammar consists of the rules governing how words are put together into sentences. These rules,

Index

which native speakers of a language learn largely by osmosis, govern most constructions in a given

language. The small minority of constructions that lie outside these rules fall mostly into the category

of idiom and usage.

5.1:

Grammar defined

5.2:

Schools of

grammatical

thought

5.3:

Parts of speech

5.4:

Nouns generally

5.5:

Common nouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

5.2 SCHOOLS OF GRAMMATICAL THOUGHT

List of Tables

There are many schools of grammatical thought--and differing vocabularies for describing grammar.

Index

Grammatical theories have been in great flux in recent years. And the more we learn the less we seem

to know: "An entirely adequate description of English grammar is still a distant target and at present

seemingly an unreachable one, the complications being what they are." 1 In fact, the more detailed the

5.1:

grammar (it can run to many large volumes), the less likely it is to be of any use to most writers and

Grammar defined

speakers.

5.2:

Schools of

grammatical

thought

5.3:

Parts of speech

1. Robert W. Burchfield, Unlocking the English Language (New York: Hill and Wang, 1991), 22.

5.4:

Nouns generally

5.5:

Common nouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

5.3 PARTS OF SPEECH

List of Tables

As traditionally understood, grammar is both a science and an art. Often it has focused--as it does

Index

here--on parts of speech and their syntax. Each part of speech performs a particular function in a

sentence or phrase. Traditional grammar has held that there are eight parts of speech: nouns,

pronouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, and interjections.2 Somewhat

5.1:

surprisingly, modern grammarians cannot agree on precisely how many parts of speech there are in

Grammar defined

English. At least one grammarian says there are as few as three. 3 Another insists that there are "about

5.2:

4

Schools of

fifteen," noting that "the precise number is still being debated." This section deals with the traditional

grammatical

eight; each part of speech is treated below. The purpose here is to sketch some of the main lines of

thought

English grammar using traditional grammatical terms.

5.3:

Parts of speech

5.4:

Nouns generally

5.5:

2. See Robert L. Allen, English Grammars and English Grammar (New York: Scribner, 1972), 7.

Common nouns

3. Ernest W. Gray, A Brief Grammar of Modern Written English (Cleveland: World, 1967), 70.

4. R. L. Trask, Language: The Basics (London: Routledge, 1995), 37.

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.4 NOUNS GENERALLY

List of Tables

A noun is a word that names something, whether abstract (intangible) or concrete (tangible). It may

Index

be a common noun (the name of a generic class or type of person, place, thing, process, activity, or

condition) or a proper noun (the formal name of a specific person, place, or thing).

5.2:

Schools of

grammatical

thought

5.3:

Parts of speech

5.4:

Nouns generally

5.5:

Common nouns

5.6:

Proper nouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.5 COMMON NOUNS

List of Tables

A common noun is the generic name of one item in a class or group {a chemical} {a river} {a

Index

pineapple}.5 It is not capitalized unless it begins a sentence or appears in a title. Common nouns are

often broken down into three subcategories: concrete nouns, abstract nouns, and collective nouns. A

concrete noun denotes something solid or real, something perceptible to the physical senses {a

5.3:

building} {the wind} {honey}. An abstract noun denotes something you cannot see, feel, taste, hear, or

Parts of speech

smell {joy} {expectation} {neurosis}. A collective noun--which can be viewed as a concrete noun but is

5.4:

Nouns generally

often separately categorized--refers to a group or collection of people or things {a crowd of people} {a

5.5:

flock of birds} {a committee}.

Common nouns

5.6:

Proper nouns

5.7:

5. The examples in this chapter are presented in curly brackets to save space.

Count nouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.6 PROPER NOUNS

List of Tables

A proper noun is the specific name of a person, place, or thing {John Doe} {Moscow} {the Hope

Index

Diamond}, or the title of a work { Citizen Kane}. A proper noun is always capitalized, regardless of

how it is used. A common noun may become a proper noun {Old Hickory} {the Big Easy}, and

sometimes a proper noun may be used figuratively and informally, as if it were a common noun {like

5.4:

Moriarty, he is a Napoleon of crime} ( Napoleon here connoting an ingenious mastermind who is

Nouns generally

ambitious beyond limits). Proper nouns may be compounded when used as a unit to name something

5.5:

Common nouns

{the Waldorf-Astoria Hotel} { Saturday Evening Post}. Over time, some proper nouns (called eponyms)

5.6:

have developed common-noun counterparts, such as sandwich (from the Earl of Sandwich) and china

Proper nouns

(from China, where fine porcelain was produced).

5.7:

Count nouns

5.8:

Mass nouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.7 COUNT NOUNS

List of Tables

A count noun has singular and plural forms and expresses enumerable things {dictionary--

Index

dictionaries} {hoof--hooves} {newspaper--newspapers}. As the subject of a sentence, a singular count

noun takes a singular verb {the jar is full}; a plural count noun takes a plural verb {the jars are full}.

5.5:

Common nouns

5.6:

Proper nouns

5.7:

Count nouns

5.8:

Mass nouns

5.9:

Mass noun followed

by a prepositional

phrase

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.8 MASS NOUNS

List of Tables

A mass noun (sometimes called a noncount noun) is one that denotes something uncountable, either

Index

because it is abstract {cowardice} {evidence} or because it refers to an indeterminate aggregation of

people or things {the faculty} {the bourgeoisie}; the latter type is also called a collective noun. As the

subject of a sentence, a mass noun usually takes a singular verb {the litigation is varied}. But in a

5.6:

collective sense, it may take either a singular or a plural verb form {the ruling majority is unlikely to

Proper nouns

share power} {the majority are nonmembers}. A singular verb emphasizes the group; a plural verb

5.7:

Count nouns

emphasizes the individual members.

5.8:

Mass nouns

5.9:

Mass noun followed

by a prepositional

phrase

5.10:

Noun-equivalents

and substantives

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.9 MASS NOUN FOLLOWED BY A PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE

List of Tables

Mass nouns are sometimes followed by a prepositional phrase, such as number of plus a plural noun.

Index

The article that precedes the mass noun signals whether the mass noun or the number of the noun in

the prepositional phrase controls the number of the verb. If a definite article ( the) precedes, the mass

noun controls, and typically a singular verb is used {the quantity of pizzas ordered this year has

5.7:

increased}. If an indefinite article ( a or an) precedes, then the number of the noun in the prepositional

Count nouns

phrase controls {a small percentage of the test takers have failed the exam}.

5.8:

Mass nouns

5.9:

Mass noun followed

by a prepositional

phrase

5.10:

Noun-equivalents

and substantives

5.11:

Noun properties

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.10 NOUN-EQUIVALENTS AND SUBSTANTIVES

List of Tables

A noun-equivalent is a phrase or clause that serves the function of a noun in a sentence { To serve your

Index

country is honorable} {Bring whomever you like}. Nouns and noun-equivalents collectively are called

substantives.

5.8:

Mass nouns

5.9:

Mass noun followed

by a prepositional

phrase

5.10:

Noun-equivalents

and substantives

5.11:

Noun properties

5.12:

Noun case

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Properties of Nouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.11 NOUN PROPERTIES

List of Tables

Nouns have properties of case and number. Some grammarians also consider gender and person

Index

properties of nouns.

5.9:

Mass noun followed

by a prepositional

phrase

5.10:

Noun-equivalents

and substantives

5.11:

Noun properties

5.12:

Noun case

5.13:

Noun number

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Properties of Nouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.12 NOUN CASE

List of Tables

In English, only nouns and pronouns have case. Case denotes the relationship between a noun (or

Index

pronoun) and other words in a sentence. Grammarians disagree about the number of cases English

nouns possess. Those who consider inflection (word form) the defining characteristic tend to say that

there are two: common, which is the uninflected form, and genitive (or possessive), which is formed

5.10:

by adding 's or just an apostrophe. But others argue that it's useful to distinguish how the common-

Noun-equivalents

and substantives

case noun is being used in the sentence, whether it is playing a nominative role {the doctor is in} or an

5.11:

objective role {go see the doctor}. Except with personal pronouns ( who/ whom, she/ her, etc.), this

Noun properties

distinction makes no practical difference in word use. See also 5.16--20.

5.12:

Noun case

5.13:

Noun number

5.14:

Noun gender

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Properties of Nouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.13 NOUN NUMBER

List of Tables

Number shows whether one object or more than one object is referred to, as with clock (singular) and

Index

clocks (plural). For a discussion of plurals, see 7.5--14.

5.11:

Noun properties

5.12:

Noun case

5.13:

Noun number

5.14:

Noun gender

5.15:

Noun person

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Properties of Nouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.14 NOUN GENDER

List of Tables

English nouns have no true gender as that property is understood in many other languages. For

Index

example, whether a noun refers to a masculine or feminine person or thing does not determine the

form of the accompanying article as it does in French, German, Spanish, and other languages. Still,

some English words--almost exclusively nouns denoting a person or an animal--are inherently

5.12:

masculine {uncle} {rooster} {lad} or feminine {aunt} {hen} {lass} and take the gender-appropriate

Noun case

pronouns. But by far, most English nouns are common in gender and may refer to either sex

5.13:

Noun number

{relative} {chicken} {child}. Many words that once were considered strictly masculine--especially

5.14:

words associated with jobs and professions--have been accepted as common in gender over time

Noun gender

{author} {executor} {proprietor}. Similarly, many forms made feminine by the addition of a suffix

5.15:

{aviatrix} have been abandoned. See 5.221--30.

Noun person

5.16:

Function of case

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Properties of Nouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.15 NOUN PERSON

List of Tables

A few grammarians attribute the property of person to nouns, distinguishing first person {I, Dan

Index

Walls, do swear that . . .}, second person {you, the professor, are key}, and third person {she, the

arbiter, decides}. While those examples all use nouns in apposition to pronouns, that fact is not

closely relevant to the question whether nouns have the property of person in the traditional

5.13:

grammatical sense.

Noun number

5.14:

Noun gender

5.15:

Noun person

5.16:

Function of case

5.17:

Common case,

nominative

function

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Case

of Contents

List of Figures

5.16 FUNCTION OF CASE

List of Tables

Case denotes the relationship between a noun or pronoun and other words in a sentence.

Index

5.14:

Noun gender

5.15:

Noun person

5.16:

Function of case

5.17:

Common case,

nominative

function

5.18:

Common case,

objective function

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Case

of Contents

List of Figures

5.17 COMMON CASE, NOMINATIVE FUNCTION

List of Tables

The nominative (sometimes called the "subjective") function denotes the person, place, or thing about

Index

which an assertion is made in a clause, as in the governor delivered a speech ( governor being the subject)

or the shops are crowded because the holiday season has begun ( shops and season being the subjects of their

respective clauses). A noun in a nominative function controls the verb and usually precedes it {the

5.15:

troops retreated in winter} ( troops is the subject), but it can appear anywhere in the sentence {high up

Noun person

in the tree sat a leopard} ( leopard is the subject). A noun or pronoun that follows a be-verb and refers

5.16:

Function of case

to the same thing as the subject is called a predicate nominative {my show dogs are Australian

5.17:

shepherds} ( Australian shepherds is a predicate nominative). Generally, a sentence's predicate is the part

Common case,

that contains a verb and makes an assertion about the subject.

nominative

function

5.18:

Common case,

objective function

5.19:

Genitive case

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Case

of Contents

List of Figures

5.18 COMMON CASE, OBJECTIVE FUNCTION

List of Tables

The objective (sometimes called the "accusative") function denotes either (1) the person or thing acted

Index

on by a transitive verb in the active voice {the balloon carried a pilot and a passenger} ( pilot and

passenger are objective) or (2) the person or thing related to another element by a connective, such as a

preposition {place the slide under the microscope} ( under is a preposition, microscope is objective). A

5.16:

noun in an objective function usually follows the verb {the queen consulted the prime minister} ( queen

Function of case

is nominative and prime minister is objective). But with an inverted construction, the objective can

5.17:

Common case,

appear elsewhere in the sentence {everything else was returned; the medicine the villain withheld}

nominative

( medicine is objective and villain is nominative). A noun in the objective case is never the subject of the

function

following verb and usually does not control the number of the verb (but see 5.9).

5.18:

Common case,

objective function

5.19:

Genitive case

5.20:

The "of"-genitive

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Case

of Contents

List of Figures

5.19 GENITIVE CASE

List of Tables

The genitive case denotes (1) ownership, possession, or occupancy {the architect's drawing board}

Index

{Arnie's room}; (2) a relationship {the philanthropist's secretary}; (3) agency {the company's

representative}; (4) description {a summer's day}; (5) the role of a subject {the boy's application} (the

boy applied); (6) the role of an object {the prisoner's release} (someone released the prisoner); or (7) an

5.17:

idiomatic shorthand form of an of-phrase (e.g., one hour's delay is equal to a delay of one hour). The

Common case,

nominative

genitive case is also called the possessive case, but possessive is a misleadingly narrow term, given the

function

seven different functions of this case. The genitive is formed in different ways, depending on the noun

5.18:

or nouns and their usage in a sentence. The genitive of a singular noun is formed by adding 's

Common case,

objective function

{driver's seat} {engineer's opinion}. The genitive of a plural noun that ends in â€‘s or â€‘es is formed

5.19:

by adding an apostrophe {parents' house} {foxes' den}. The genitive of an irregular plural noun is

Genitive case

formed by adding 's {women's rights} {mice's cage}. The genitive of a compound noun is formed by

5.20:

adding the appropriate ending to the last word in the compound {parents-in-law's message}. See also

The "of"-genitive

7.15--28.

5.21:

Appositives

defined; use

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Case

of Contents

List of Figures

5.20 THE "OF"-GENITIVE

List of Tables

The preposition of may precede a noun or proper name to express relationship, agency, or possession.

Index

The choice between a genitive ending and an of construction depends mostly on style. Compare the

perils of Penelope with the saucer of the chef. Some nouns can readily take either the genitive form or the

of-genitive {the theater's name} {the name of the theater}, but others sound right only in the of-

5.18:

genitive. Compare everything's end with the end of everything. The of-genitive is also useful when a

Common case,

objective function

double genitive is called for {an idea of Hill's} {an employee of my grandfather's business}.

5.19:

Genitive case

5.20:

The "of"-genitive

5.21:

Appositives

defined; use

5.22:

Nouns as adjectives

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Appositives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.21 APPOSITIVES DEFINED; USE

List of Tables

An appositive noun or noun phrase is one that immediately follows another noun or noun phrase in

Index

order to define or further identify it {George Washington, our first president, was born in Virginia}

( our first president is an appositive of the proper noun George Washington). Commas frame an

appositive noun or noun phrase unless it is restrictive--for example, compare Robert Burns, the poet,

5.19:

wrote many songs about women named Mary ( poet is a nonrestrictive appositive noun) with the poet

Genitive case

Robert Burns wrote many songs about women named Mary ( Robert Burns restricts poet by precisely

5.20:

The "of"-genitive

identifying which poet). A restrictive appositive cannot be removed from a sentence without

5.21:

obscuring the identity of the word or phrase that the appositive relates to. See also 6.22.

Appositives

defined; use

5.22:

Nouns as adjectives

5.23:

Nouns as verbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Functional Variation

of Contents

List of Figures

5.22 NOUNS AS ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

Words that are ordinarily nouns sometimes function as other parts of speech, such as adjectives or

Index

verbs. A noun-to-adjective shift takes place when a noun modifies another noun {the morning

newspaper} {a state legislature} {a varsity sport} ( morning, state, and varsity function as adjectives).

These are also termed attributive nouns. Occasionally the use of a noun as an adjective can produce an

5.20:

ambiguity. For example, the phrase fast results can be read as meaning either "rapid results" or (less

The "of"-genitive

probably but possibly) "the outcome of a fast." Sometimes the noun and its adjectival form can be

5.21:

Appositives

used interchangeably--for example, prostate cancer and prostatic cancer both refer to cancer of the

defined; use

prostate gland. But sometimes the use of the noun instead of the adjective may alter the meaning--for

5.22:

instance, a study group is not necessarily a studious group. A preposition may be needed to indicate a

Nouns as adjectives

noun's relationship to other sentence elements. But if the noun functions as an adjective, the

5.23:

Nouns as verbs

preposition must be omitted; at times this can result in a vague phrase--for example, voter awareness

5.24:

(awareness of voters or by them?). Context might suggest what preposition is implied, but a reader

Adverbial functions

may have to deduce the writer's meaning.

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Functional Variation

of Contents

List of Figures

5.23 NOUNS AS VERBS

List of Tables

It is (and always has been) fairly common in English for nouns to pass into use as verbs. For example,

Index

in 1220 the noun husband meant one who tilled and cultivated the earth {the husband has worked

hard to produce this crop}. It became a verb meaning to till, cultivate, and tend crops around 1420

{you must husband your land thoughtfully}. New noun-to-verb transitions often occur in dialect or

5.21:

jargon. For example, the noun mainstream is used as a verb in clauses such as more school districts are

Appositives

defined; use

mainstreaming pupils with special needs. In formal prose, such recently transformed words should be

5.22:

used cautiously if at all.

Nouns as adjectives

5.23:

Nouns as verbs

5.24:

Adverbial functions

5.25:

Other functional

shifts

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Functional Variation

of Contents

List of Figures

5.24 ADVERBIAL FUNCTIONS

List of Tables

Words that are ordinarily nouns occasionally function as adverbs {we rode single file} {Sam walked

Index

home}. This shift usually happens when a preposition is omitted {we rode in a single file} {Sam

walked to his home}.

5.22:

Nouns as adjectives

5.23:

Nouns as verbs

5.24:

Adverbial functions

5.25:

Other functional

shifts

5.26:

Pronouns defined

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Nouns >> Functional Variation

of Contents

List of Figures

5.25 OTHER FUNCTIONAL SHIFTS

List of Tables

Words that ordinarily function as other parts of speech, as well as various types of phrases, may

Index

function as nouns. Aside from the obvious instance of pronouns (see 5.26), these include adjectives

such as poor {the poor are always with us} (see 5.92), adverbs such as here and now {we cannot avoid

the here and now}, participles (gerunds) such as swimming {swimming in that lake can be dangerous}

5.23:

(see 5.110), infinitives such as to discover {to discover the truth is our goal} (see 5.105), phrases

Nouns as verbs

indicating monetary amounts {six million dollars went toward restoring the arena}, and clauses such

5.24:

Adverbial functions

as what the people want {what the people want is justice}. Such functional shifts are normal and

5.25:

acceptable.

Other functional

shifts

5.26:

Pronouns defined

5.27:

Antecedents of

pronouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Definition and Uses

of Contents

List of Figures

5.26 PRONOUNS DEFINED

List of Tables

A pronoun is a word used as a substitute for a noun or, sometimes, another pronoun. It is used in one

Index

of two ways: (1) A pronoun may substitute for an expressed noun or pronoun, especially to avoid

needless repetition. For example, most of the nouns in the sentence The father told the father's daughter

that the father wanted the father's daughter to do some chores can be replaced with pronouns: The father told

5.24:

his daughter that he wanted her to do some chores. (2) A pronoun may also stand in the place of an

Adverbial functions

understood noun. For example, if the person addressed has been identified elsewhere, the question

5.25:

Other functional

Susan, are you bringing your boots? can be more simply stated as Are you bringing your boots? And in the

shifts

sentence It is too hot, the indefinite it is understood to mean the temperature (of something).

5.26:

Pronouns defined

5.27:

Antecedents of

pronouns

5.28:

Pronouns without

antecedents

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Definition and Uses

of Contents

List of Figures

5.27 ANTECEDENTS OF PRONOUNS

List of Tables

A pronoun typically refers to an antecedent--that is, an earlier noun, pronoun, phrase, or clause in the

Index

same sentence or, if the reference is unambiguous, in a previous sentence. An antecedent may be

explicit or implicit, but it must be clear. Miscues and ambiguity commonly arise from (1) a missing

antecedent (as in the clown's act with his dog made it a pleasure to watch, where it is intended to refer to

5.25:

the circus, not explicitly mentioned in context); (2) multiple possible antecedents (as in Scott visited

Other functional

shifts

Eric after his discharge from the army, where it is unclear who was discharged--Eric or Scott); and (3)

5.26:

multiple pronouns and antecedents in the same sentence (e.g., when the bottle is empty or the baby stops

Pronouns defined

drinking, it must be sterilized with hot water because if it drinks from a dirty bottle it could become ill--where

5.27:

one hopes that the hot-water sterilization is for the bottle).

Antecedents of

pronouns

5.28:

Pronouns without

antecedents

5.29:

Adjective as

antecedent

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Definition and Uses

of Contents

List of Figures

5.28 PRONOUNS WITHOUT ANTECEDENTS

List of Tables

Some pronouns do not require antecedents. The first-person pronoun I stands for the speaker, so it

Index

almost never has an antecedent. Similarly, the second-person pronoun you usually needs no

antecedent {Are you leaving?}, although one is sometimes supplied in direct address {Katrina, do you

need something?}. Expletives (some of which are pronouns) have no antecedents {it's time to go} {this

5.26:

is a fine mess}. And the relative pronoun what and the interrogative pronouns who, which, and what

Pronouns defined

never take an antecedent {Who cares what I think?}. In colloquial usage, they often appears without an

5.27:

Antecedents of

antecedent {they say that she's a good golfer}, but vigilant listeners and readers often demand to

pronouns

know who "they" are.

5.28:

Pronouns without

antecedents

5.29:

Adjective as

antecedent

5.30:

Four properties of

pronouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Definition and Uses

of Contents

List of Figures

5.29 ADJECTIVE AS ANTECEDENT

List of Tables

A pronoun normally requires a noun or another pronoun as its antecedent. And because possessives

Index

function as adjectives, some writers have argued that possessives should not serve as antecedents of

pronouns used in the nominative or objective case. But compare Mr. Blain's background qualified him for

the job with Mr. Blain had a background that qualified him for the job. Not only is the identity of "him"

5.27:

perfectly clear in either construction, but the possessive in the first--a usage blessed by respected

Antecedents of

pronouns

authorities--makes for a more economical sentence.

5.28:

Pronouns without

antecedents

5.29:

Adjective as

antecedent

5.30:

Four properties of

pronouns

5.31:

Pronoun number

and antecedent

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Properties of Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.30 FOUR PROPERTIES OF PRONOUNS

List of Tables

A pronoun has four properties: number, person, gender, and case. (See 5.11--15.) A pronoun must

Index

agree with its antecedent in number, person, and gender. A few special uses of pronouns should be

noted.

5.28:

Pronouns without

antecedents

5.29:

Adjective as

antecedent

5.30:

Four properties of

pronouns

5.31:

Pronoun number

and antecedent

5.32:

Exceptions

regarding pronoun

number

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Properties of Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.31 PRONOUN NUMBER AND ANTECEDENT

List of Tables

A pronoun's number is guided by that of its antecedent noun or nouns {a book and its cover} {the

Index

dogs and their owner}. A collective noun takes a singular pronoun if the members are treated as a

unit {the audience showed its appreciation} but a plural if they act individually {the audience rushed

back to their seats}. A singular noun that is modified by two or more adjectives to denote different

5.29:

varieties, uses, or aspects of the object may take a plural pronoun {British and American writing differ

Adjective as

antecedent

in more ways than just their spelling} (where writing may be thought of as an understood noun after

5.30:

British). Two or more singular nouns or pronouns that are joined by and are taken jointly and referred

Four properties of

to by a plural pronoun {the boy and girl left their bicycles outside}.

pronouns

5.31:

Pronoun number

and antecedent

5.32:

Exceptions

regarding pronoun

number

5.33:

Pronoun with

multiple

antecedents

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Properties of Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.32 EXCEPTIONS REGARDING PRONOUN NUMBER

List of Tables

There are several refinements to the rules stated just above: (1) When two or more singular

Index

antecedents denote the same thing and are connected by and, the pronoun referring to the antecedents

is singular {a lawyer and role model received her richly deserved recognition today}. (2) When two or

more singular antecedents are connected by and and modified by each, every, or no, the pronoun

5.30:

referring to the antecedents is singular {every college and every university encourages its students to

Four properties of

pronouns

succeed}. (3) When two or more singular antecedents are connected by or, nor, either--or, or neither--

5.31:

nor, they are treated separately and referred to by a singular pronoun {neither the orange nor the

Pronoun number

peach smells as sweet as it should}. (4) When two or more antecedents of different numbers are

and antecedent

connected by or or nor, the pronoun's number agrees with that of the nearest (usually the last)

5.32:

Exceptions

antecedent; if possible, cast the sentence so that the plural antecedent comes last {neither the singer

regarding pronoun

number

nor the dancers have asked for their paychecks}. (5) When two or more antecedents of different

numbers are connected by and, they are usually referred to by a plural pronoun regardless of the

5.33:

Pronoun with

nouns' order {the horses and the mule kicked over their water trough}.

multiple

antecedents

5.34:

Antecedents of

different genders

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Properties of Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.33 PRONOUN WITH MULTIPLE ANTECEDENTS

List of Tables

When a pronoun's antecedents differ from the pronoun in person, and the antecedents are connected

Index

by and, or, or nor, the pronoun must take the person of only one antecedent. The first person is

preferred to the second, and the second person to the third. For example, in you or I should get to work

on our experiment the antecedents are in the second and first person. The following pronoun our is in

5.31:

the first person, as is the antecedent I. In you and she can settle your dispute, the antecedents are in the

Pronoun number

and antecedent

second and third person, so the following pronoun your takes the second person. If the pronoun

5.32:

refers to only one of the connected nouns or pronouns, it takes the person of that noun {you and

Exceptions

Marian have discussed her trip report}.

regarding pronoun

number

5.33:

Pronoun with

multiple

antecedents

5.34:

Antecedents of

different genders

5.35:

Pronoun case

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Properties of Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.34 ANTECEDENTS OF DIFFERENT GENDERS

List of Tables

If the antecedents are of different genders and are joined by and, a plural pronoun is normally used to

Index

refer to them {the sister and brother are visiting their aunt}. But if a pronoun refers to only one of the

antecedent nouns connected by and, the pronoun's gender is that of the noun referred to {the uncle

and niece rode in his car}. A special problem arises when the antecedent nouns are singular, are of

5.32:

different genders or an indeterminate gender, and are joined by or or nor. Using he, his, and him as a

Exceptions

regarding pronoun

common-sex pronoun is now widely considered sexist, and picking the gender of the nearest

number

antecedent may be misleading (e.g., some boy or girl left her lunch box on the bus). A good writer can

5.33:

usually recast the sentence to eliminate the need for any personal pronoun at all {some child left a

Pronoun with

multiple

lunch box on the bus}. See 5.41, 5.221--30.

antecedents

5.34:

Antecedents of

different genders

5.35:

Pronoun case

5.36:

Nominative case

misused for

objective

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Properties of Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.35 PRONOUN CASE

List of Tables

A pronoun that is the subject of a finite verb is in the nominative case {they went to town}. A personal

Index

pronoun in the genitive case is governed by the gender of the possessor {President George W. Bush

invited his advisers to Crawford}. A pronoun that functions as the object of a verb or preposition is in

the objective case {they gave her a farewell party} {they gave it to him}. A pronoun put after an

5.33:

intransitive verb or participle agrees in case with the preceding noun or pronoun referring to the

Pronoun with

multiple

same thing {it is I} (see 5.43, 5.44).

antecedents

5.34:

Antecedents of

different genders

5.35:

Pronoun case

5.36:

Nominative case

misused for

objective

5.37:

Six classes of

pronouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Properties of Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.36 NOMINATIVE CASE MISUSED FOR OBJECTIVE

List of Tables

The objective case governs personal pronouns used as direct objects of verbs {call me tomorrow},

Index

indirect objects of verbs {write me a letter}, or objects of prepositions {makes sense to me}. One of the

most persistent slips in English is to misuse the nominative case of a personal pronoun in a

compound object:

5.34:

Antecedents of

WRONG: The test would be simple for you and I.

different genders

RIGHT: The test would be simple for you and me.

5.35:

Pronoun case

WRONG: Read this and tell Laura or I what you think.

RIGHT: Read this and tell Laura or me what you think.

5.36:

Nominative case

misused for

The error arises in compounds so exclusively that the foolproof way to check for it is to read the

objective

sentence with the personal pronoun alone: no one would mistake "The test would be simple for I" or

5.37:

Six classes of

"Read this and tell I what you think" for correct grammar.

pronouns

5.38:

Form of personal

pronoun

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Classes of Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.37 SIX CLASSES OF PRONOUNS

List of Tables

There are six classes of pronouns:

Index

personal-- I, you, he, she, it, we, and they

demonstrative-- that, this

interrogative-- what, which, and who

5.35:

Pronoun case

relative-- that, what, which, and who

5.36:

indefinite--for example, another, any, each, either, and none

Nominative case

adjective--for example, any, each, that, this, what, and which

misused for

objective

Many pronouns, except personal pronouns, may function as more than one type--for instance, that

5.37:

Six classes of

may be a demonstrative, relative, or adjective pronoun--depending on its use in a particular sentence.

pronouns

5.38:

Form of personal

pronoun

5.39:

Changes in form

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Personal Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.38 FORM OF PERSONAL PRONOUN

List of Tables

A personal pronoun shows by its form whether it is referring to the speaker, the person or thing

Index

spoken to, or the person or thing spoken of. It also displays number, gender, and case by form. As

with nouns, the first person is the speaker or speakers {I need some tea} {we heard the news}. The

first-person singular pronoun I is always capitalized no matter where it appears in the sentence {if

5.36:

possible, I will send you an answer today}. All other pronouns are capitalized only at the beginning

Nominative case

misused for

of a sentence, unless they are part of an honorific title {Her Majesty, the Queen of England}. The

objective

second person shows who is spoken to {you should write that essay tonight}. And the third person

5.37:

shows who or what is spoken of {she is at work} {it is in the glove compartment}.

Six classes of

pronouns

5.38:

Form of personal

pronoun

5.39:

Changes in form

5.40:

Agreement of

pronoun with noun

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Personal Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.39 CHANGES IN FORM

List of Tables

Personal pronouns change form ("decline") according to person, number, and case. Apart from the

Index

second person, all personal pronouns show number by taking a singular or plural form. Although the

second-person pronoun you is both singular and plural, it always takes a plural verb, even if only a

single person or thing is addressed.

5.37:

Six classes of

pronouns

SINGULAR PRONOUNS

5.38:

Nominative Objective

Genitive

Form of personal

pronoun

First Person

I

me

my, mine

5.39:

Second Person

you

you

your, yours

Changes in form

Third Person

he, she, it him, her, it his, her, hers, its

5.40:

Agreement of

PLURAL PRONOUNS

pronoun with noun

Nominative Objective

Genitive

5.41:

Pronoun and

First Person

we

us

our, ours

gender

Second Person

you

you

your, yours

Third Person

they

them

their, theirs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Personal Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.40 AGREEMENT OF PRONOUN WITH NOUN

List of Tables

A personal pronoun agrees with the noun for which it stands in both gender and number {John

Index

writes, and he will soon write well} {Sheila was there, but she couldn't hear what was said}.

5.38:

Form of personal

pronoun

5.39:

Changes in form

5.40:

Agreement of

pronoun with noun

5.41:

Pronoun and

gender

5.42:

Personal pronoun

case

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Personal Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.41 PRONOUN AND GENDER

List of Tables

Only the third-person singular pronouns directly express gender. In the nominative and objective

Index

cases, the pronoun takes the antecedent noun's gender {the president is not in her office today; she's at

a seminar}. In the genitive case, the pronoun always takes the gender of the possessor, not of the

person or thing possessed {the woman loves her husband} {Thomas is visiting his sister} {the kitten

5.39:

disobeyed its mother}. Some nouns may acquire gender through personification, a figure of speech

Changes in form

that refers to a nonliving thing as if it were a person. Pronouns enhance personification when a

5.40:

Agreement of

feminine or masculine pronoun is used as if the antecedent represented a female or male person (as

pronoun with noun

was traditionally done, for example, when a ship or other vessel was referred to with the pronoun she

5.41:

or her).

Pronoun and

gender

5.42:

Personal pronoun

case

5.43:

Pronoun case after

linking verb

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Personal Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.42 PERSONAL PRONOUN CASE

List of Tables

Some special rules apply to personal pronouns. (1) If a pronoun is the subject of a clause, it must be in

Index

the nominative case {she owns a tan briefcase} {Delia would like to travel, but she can't afford to}. (2)

If a pronoun is the object of a verb or of a preposition, it must be in the objective case {the rustic

setting soothed him} {that's a matter between him and her}. (3) If a prepositional phrase contains more

5.40:

than one personal-pronoun object, then all the objects must be in the objective case {Will you send an

Agreement of

pronoun with noun

invitation to him and me?}. (4) If a pronoun is the subject of an infinitive, it must be in the objective

5.41:

case {Does Tina want me to leave?}.

Pronoun and

gender

5.42:

Personal pronoun

case

5.43:

Pronoun case after

linking verb

5.44:

Pronoun case after

"than" or "as . . .

as"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Personal Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.43 PRONOUN CASE AFTER LINKING VERB

List of Tables

Strictly speaking, a pronoun serving as the complement of a be-verb or other linking verb should be in

Index

the nominative case {it was she who asked for a meeting}. In formal writing, some fastidious readers

will consider the objective case to be incorrect in every instance. But in many sentences, the

nominative pronoun sounds pedantic or eccentric to the modern ear {Was that he on the phone?}.

5.41:

Pronoun and

gender

5.42:

Personal pronoun

case

5.43:

Pronoun case after

linking verb

5.44:

Pronoun case after

"than" or "as . . .

as"

5.45:

Special uses of

personal pronouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Personal Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.44 PRONOUN CASE AFTER "THAN" OR "AS . . . AS"

List of Tables

The case of a pronoun following this kind of comparative structure, typically at the end of a sentence,

Index

depends on who or what is being compared. In my sister looks more like our father than I [or me], for

example, if the point is whether the sister or the speaker looks more like their father, the pronoun

should be nominative because it is the subject of an understood verb: my sister looks more like our father

5.42:

than I do. But if the point is whether the sister looks more like the father or the speaker, the pronoun

Personal pronoun

case

should be objective because it is the object of a preposition in an understood sentence: my sister looks

5.43:

more like our father than she looks like me. Whatever the writer's intent, the reader can't be certain about

Pronoun case after

the meaning. It would be better to reword the sentence and avoid the elliptical construction.

linking verb

5.44:

Pronoun case after

"than" or "as . . .

as"

5.45:

Special uses of

personal pronouns

5.46:

The singular "they"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Personal Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.45 SPECIAL USES OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS

List of Tables

Some personal pronouns have special uses. (1) He, him, and his have traditionally been used as

Index

pronouns of indeterminate gender equally applicable to a male or female person {if the finder returns

my watch, he will receive a reward}. Because these pronouns are also masculine-specific, they have

long been regarded as sexist when used generically, and their indeterminate-gender use is declining.

5.43:

(See 5.34, 5.221--30.) (2) It eliminates gender even if the noun's sex could be identified. Using it does

Pronoun case after

linking verb

not mean that the noun has no sex--only that the sex is unknown or unimportant {the baby is smiling

5.44:

at its mother} {the mockingbird is building its nest}. (3) We, you, and they can be used indefinitely--

Pronoun case after

that is, without antecedents--in the sense of "persons," "one," or "people in general." We is sometimes

"than" or "as . . .

as"

used by an individual who is speaking for a group {the magazine's editor wrote, "In our last issue, we

5.45:

covered the archaeological survey of Peru"}. This latter use is called the editorial we. You can apply

Special uses of

personal pronouns

indefinitely to any person or all persons {if you read this book, you will learn how to influence

people} ( you is indefinite--anyone who reads the book will learn). The same is true of they {they say

5.46:

The singular "they"

that Stonehenge may have been a primitive calendar} ( they are unidentified and, perhaps,

5.47:

unimportant). This use of they, however, is objectionable in scholarly writing: it unjustifiably avoids

Possessive pronouns

specificity. (4) It also has several uses as an indefinite pronoun: (a) it may refer to a phrase, clause,

sentence, or implied thought {he said that the website is down, but I don't believe it} (without the

pronoun it, the clause might be rewritten I don't believe what he said); (b) it can be the subject of a verb

(usually a be-verb) without an antecedent noun {it was too far}, or an introductory word or expletive

for a phrase or clause that follows the verb {it is possible that Dody is on vacation}; (c) it can be the

grammatical subject in an expression about time, weather, or distance and the like {it is almost

midnight} {it is beginning to snow}; and (d) it may be an expletive that anticipates the true

grammatical subject or object {I find it hard to accept this situation}.

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Personal Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.46 THE SINGULAR "THEY"

List of Tables

A singular antecedent requires a singular referent pronoun. Because he is no longer accepted as a

Index

generic pronoun referring to a person of either sex, it has become common in speech and in informal

writing to substitute the third-person plural pronouns they, them, their, and themselves, and the

nonstandard singular themself. While this usage is accepted in casual contexts, it is still considered

5.44:

ungrammatical in formal writing. Avoiding the plural form by alternating masculine and feminine

Pronoun case after

"than" or "as . . .

pronouns is awkward and only emphasizes the inherent problem of not having a generic third-person

as"

pronoun. Employing an artificial form such as s/he is distracting at best, and most readers find it

5.45:

ridiculous. There are several better ways to avoid the problem. For example, use the traditional,

Special uses of

personal pronouns

formal he or she, him or her, his or her, himself or herself. Stylistically, this device is usually awkward or

5.46:

even stilted, but if used sparingly it can be functional. For other techniques, see 5.225.

The singular "they"

5.47:

Possessive pronouns

5.48:

Compound personal

pronouns; â€‘self

forms

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Possessive Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.47 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS

List of Tables

The possessive pronouns, my, our, your, his, her, its, and their, are used as limiting adjectives to qualify

Index

nouns {my dictionary} {your cabin} {his diploma}. Each has a corresponding absolute (also called

independent) form that can stand alone without a noun: mine, ours, yours, his, hers, its, and theirs. The

independent form does not require an explicit object: the thing possessed may be either an antecedent

5.45:

or something understood {this dictionary is mine} {this cabin of yours} {Where is hers?}. An

Special uses of

personal pronouns

independent possessive pronoun can also stand alone and be treated as a noun: it can be the subject or

5.46:

object of a verb {hers is on the table} {pass me yours} or the object of a preposition {put your coat with

The singular "they"

theirs}. When it is used with the preposition of, a double possessive is produced: that letter of Sheila's

5.47:

becomes that letter of hers. Such a construction is unobjectionable. Note that none of the possessive

Possessive pronouns

personal pronouns are spelled with an apostrophe.

5.48:

Compound personal

pronouns; â€‘self

forms

5.49:

Reflexive and

intensive pronouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Possessive Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.48 COMPOUND PERSONAL PRONOUNS; -SELF FORMS

List of Tables

Several personal pronouns form compounds by taking the suffix -self or -selves. These are my--myself;

Index

our--ourselves; your--yourself; your--yourselves; him--himself; her--herself; it--itself; and them--themselves.

The indefinite pronoun one forms the compound pronoun oneself. All these compound personal

pronouns are the same in both the nominative and the objective case. They have no possessive forms.

5.46:

They are used for two purposes: (1) for emphasis (in which case they are termed intensive pronouns)

The singular "they"

{I saw Queen Beatrice herself} {I'll do it myself} and (2) to refer to the subject of the verb (in which

5.47:

Possessive pronouns

case they are termed reflexive pronouns) {he saved himself the trouble of asking} {we support

5.48:

ourselves}.

Compound personal

pronouns; -self

forms

5.49:

Reflexive and

intensive pronouns

5.50:

Possessive pronouns

versus contractions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Possessive Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.49 REFLEXIVE AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS

List of Tables

Both reflexive and intensive personal pronouns are â€‘self forms, but the distinction between them is

Index

useful and important. A reflexive pronoun reflects the action described by the verb by renaming the

subject as either an object or an indirect object {she gave herself a pat on the back}. It is similar in

appearance to an intensive pronoun but differs in function. An intensive pronoun is used in

5.47:

apposition to its referent to add emphasis {I myself have won several writing awards}. Intensive

Possessive pronouns

pronouns lend force to a sentence. And unlike reflexive pronouns, they are in the nominative case.

5.48:

Compound personal

Compare the intensive pronoun in I burned the papers myself (in which the object of burned is papers)

pronouns; â€‘self

with the reflexive pronoun in I burned myself (in which the object of burned is myself). Constructions in

forms

which the â€‘self form does not serve either of those functions are common but nonstandard, whether

5.49:

Reflexive and

it is serving as subject or as object:

intensive pronouns

5.50:

WRONG: The staff and myself thank you for your contribution.

Possessive pronouns

RIGHT: The staff and I thank you for your contribution.

versus contractions

WRONG: Deliver the equipment to my partner or myself.

5.51:

Demonstrative

RIGHT: Deliver the equipment to my partner or me.

pronouns defined

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Possessive Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.50 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS VERSUS CONTRACTIONS

List of Tables

The possessive forms of personal pronouns are my, mine, our, ours, your, yours, his, her, hers, its, their,

Index

theirs. None of them takes an apostrophe. Nor does the possessive form of who ( whose). These

exceptions aside, the apostrophe is a universal signal of the possessive in English, so it is a natural

tendency (and a common error) to insert an apostrophe in the forms that end in -s (or the sibilant -se).

5.48:

Aggravating that tendency is the fact that some possessive personal pronouns have homophones that

Compound personal

pronouns; -self

are contractions--forms that are also signaled by apostrophes. The pronouns that don't sound like

forms

legitimate contractions seldom present problems, even if they do end in -s ( hers, yours, ours). But

5.49:

several do require special attention, specifically its (the possessive of it) and it's ("it is"); your (the

Reflexive and

intensive pronouns

possessive of you) and you're ("you are"); whose (the possessive of who) and who's ("who is"); and the

5.50:

three homophones their (the possessive of they), there ("in that place" or "in that way"), and they're

Possessive pronouns

versus contractions

("they are").

5.51:

Demonstrative

pronouns defined

5.52:

Interrogative

pronouns defined

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Demonstrative Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.51 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS DEFINED

List of Tables

A demonstrative pronoun (or, as it is sometimes called, a deictic pronoun) is one that points directly

Index

to its antecedent: this and that for singular antecedents {this is your desk} {that is my office}, and these

and those for plural antecedents {these have just arrived} {those need to be answered}. This and these

point to objects that are close by in space, time, or thought, while that and those point to objects that

5.49:

are comparatively remote in space, time, or thought. The antecedent of a demonstrative pronoun can

Reflexive and

intensive pronouns

be a noun, phrase, clause, sentence, or implied thought, as long as the antecedent is clear. Kind and

5.50:

sort, each referring to "one class," are often used with an adjectival this or that {this kind of magazine}

Possessive pronouns

{that sort of school}. The plural forms kinds and sorts should be used with the plural demonstratives

versus contractions

{these kinds of magazines} {those sorts of schools}.

5.51:

Demonstrative

pronouns defined

5.52:

Interrogative

pronouns defined

5.53:

Referent of

interrogative

pronouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Interrogative Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.52 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS DEFINED

List of Tables

An interrogative pronoun asks a question. The three interrogatives are who, what, and which. Only one,

Index

who, declines: who (nominative), whom (objective), whose (possessive) {Who starred in Casablanca?} {To

whom am I speaking?} {Whose cologne smells so strong?}. In the nominative case, who is used in two

ways: (1) as the subject of a verb {Who washed the dishes today?} and (2) as a predicate nominative

5.50:

after a linking verb {It was who?}. In the objective case, whom is used two ways: (1) as the object of a

Possessive pronouns

versus contractions

verb {Whom did you see?} and (2) as the object of a preposition {For whom is this building named?}.

5.51:

Demonstrative

pronouns defined

5.52:

Interrogative

pronouns defined

5.53:

Referent of

interrogative

pronouns

5.54:

Relative pronouns

defined

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Interrogative Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.53 REFERENT OF INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS

List of Tables

To refer to a person, either who or which can be used. But they are not interchangeable. Who is

Index

universal or general: it asks for any one or more persons among all persons. The answer may

potentially include any person, living or dead, present or absent {Who wants to see that movie?}

{Who were your greatest inspirations?}. Who also asks for a particular person's identity {Who is that

5.51:

person standing near the samovar?}. Which is usually selective or limited; it asks for a particular

Demonstrative

pronouns defined

member of a group, and the answer is limited to the group addressed or referred to {Which explorers

5.52:

visited China in the sixteenth century?}. To refer to a person, animal, or thing, either which or what

Interrogative

may be used {Which one of you did this?} {What kind of bird is that?}. When applied to a person,

pronouns defined

animal, or thing, what asks about character, occupation, qualities, and the like {What do you think of

5.53:

Referent of

our governor?}. When applied to a thing, what often asks for one or more items in a category {What is

interrogative

pronouns

your quest?} {What is your favorite color?}.

5.54:

Relative pronouns

defined

5.55:

Case with relative

pronouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Relative Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.54 RELATIVE PRONOUNS DEFINED

List of Tables

A relative pronoun is one that introduces a dependent (or relative) clause and relates it to the

Index

independent clause. Relative pronouns in common use are who, which, what, and that. Who is the only

relative pronoun that declines: who (nominative), whom (objective), whose (possessive) {the woman

who presented the award} {a source whom he declined to name} {the writer whose book was a best

5.52:

seller}. Who, which normally refers to a person, can be used in the first, second, or third person. Which

Interrogative

pronouns defined

normally refers to an animal or a thing. What generally refers to a nonliving thing. Which and what are

5.53:

used only in the second and third persons. That refers to a person, animal, or thing, and can be used

Referent of

in the first, second, or third person. See also 5.61.

interrogative

pronouns

5.54:

Relative pronouns

defined

5.55:

Case with relative

pronouns

5.56:

Positional nuances

with relative

pronouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Relative Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.55 CASE WITH RELATIVE PRONOUNS

List of Tables

A personal pronoun does not govern the case of a relative pronoun. Hence, an objective pronoun such

Index

as me may be the antecedent of the nominative pronoun who, although a construction formed in this

way sounds increasingly archaic or (to the nonliterary) incorrect {she was referring to me, who never

graduated from college}. When a construction is technically correct but sounds awkward or artificial

5.53:

{I, who am wronged, have a grievance}, the best course may be to use "preventive grammar" and find

Referent of

interrogative

a different construction {I have a grievance, for I have been wronged} {having been wronged, I have a

pronouns

grievance}.

5.54:

Relative pronouns

defined

5.55:

Case with relative

pronouns

5.56:

Positional nuances

with relative

pronouns

5.57:

Antecedent of

relative pronoun

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Relative Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.56 POSITIONAL NUANCES WITH RELATIVE PRONOUNS

List of Tables

A relative pronoun is in the nominative case when no subject comes between it and the verb {the

Index

professor who lectured was brilliant}. When a subject comes between the relative pronoun and the

verb, the relative is governed by the following verb or by some other word in its own clause {he

whom I called is no longer there} {she, whom I believed to be very bright, failed her exams} {it was

5.54:

John who they thought was in the bleachers}.

Relative pronouns

defined

5.55:

Case with relative

pronouns

5.56:

Positional nuances

with relative

pronouns

5.57:

Antecedent of

relative pronoun

5.58:

Omitted

antecedent of

relative pronoun

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Relative Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.57 ANTECEDENT OF RELATIVE PRONOUN

List of Tables

Usually a relative pronoun's antecedent is a noun or pronoun in the independent clause on which the

Index

relative clause depends. For clarity it should immediately precede the pronoun {the diadem that I told

you about is in this gallery}. The antecedent may also be a noun phrase or a clause, but the result can

sometimes be ambiguous: in the bedroom of the villa, which was painted pink, does which refer to the

5.55:

bedroom or to the villa?

Case with relative

pronouns

5.56:

Positional nuances

with relative

pronouns

5.57:

Antecedent of

relative pronoun

5.58:

Omitted

antecedent of

relative pronoun

5.59:

Relative pronoun

after "one"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Relative Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.58 OMITTED ANTECEDENT OF RELATIVE PRONOUN

List of Tables

If no antecedent noun is expressed, what can be used to mean that which {Is this what you were

Index

looking for?}. But if there is an antecedent, use a different relative pronoun: who {Where is the man

who spoke?}, that (if the relative clause is restrictive, i.e., essential to the sentence's basic meaning)

{Where are the hunters that Jones told us about?}, or which (if the relative clause is nonrestrictive, i.e.,

5.56:

could be deleted without affecting the sentence's basic meaning) {the sun, which is shining brightly,

Positional nuances

with relative

feels warm on my face}. See also 6.22.

pronouns

5.57:

Antecedent of

relative pronoun

5.58:

Omitted

antecedent of

relative pronoun

5.59:

Relative pronoun

after "one"

5.60:

Possessive forms of

relative pronouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Relative Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.59 RELATIVE PRONOUN AFTER "ONE"

List of Tables

A relative pronoun takes its number from its antecedent. That's easy enough when the antecedent is

Index

simply one {this is one that everybody likes}. But if one is part of a noun phrase with a plural noun

such as one of the few or one of those, the relative pronoun's antecedent is usually not one but the noun

in the genitive construction {one of the few countries that cultivate farm-raised fish as a staple} {she is

5.57:

one of those people who are famous just for being famous}. Always read carefully, though; in some

Antecedent of

relative pronoun

constructions like these the antecedent is still one {he is the one among them who is trustworthy}.

5.58:

Omitted

antecedent of

relative pronoun

5.59:

Relative pronoun

after "one"

5.60:

Possessive forms of

relative pronouns

5.61:

"Whose" and "of

which"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Relative Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.60 POSSESSIVE FORMS OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS

List of Tables

The forms of whom and of which are possessives {the child, the mother of whom we talked about, is in

Index

kindergarten} {this foal, the sire of which Belle owns, will be trained as a hunter-jumper}. (These

forms have an old-fashioned sound and can often be rephrased more naturally {the child whose

mother we talked about is in kindergarten}.)

5.58:

Omitted

antecedent of

relative pronoun

5.59:

Relative pronoun

after "one"

5.60:

Possessive forms of

relative pronouns

5.61:

"Whose" and "of

which"

5.62:

Compound relative

pronouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Relative Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.61 "WHOSE" AND "OF WHICH"

List of Tables

The relatives who and which can both take whose as a possessive form ( whose substitutes for of which) {a

Index

movie the conclusion of which is unforgettable} {a movie whose conclusion is unforgettable}. Some

writers object to using whose as a replacement for of which, especially when the subject is not human,

but the usage is centuries old and widely accepted as preventing unnecessary awkwardness. Compare

5.59:

the company whose stock rose faster with the company the stock of which rose faster. Either form is

Relative pronoun

after "one"

acceptable, but the possessive whose lends greater smoothness.

5.60:

Possessive forms of

relative pronouns

5.61:

"Whose" and "of

which"

5.62:

Compound relative

pronouns

5.63:

"Who" versus

"whom"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Relative Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.62 COMPOUND RELATIVE PRONOUNS

List of Tables

Who, whom, what, and which form compound relative pronouns by adding the suffix â€‘ever. The

Index

compound relatives whoever, whomever, whichever, and whatever apply universally to any or all persons

or things {whatever you do, let me know} {whoever needs to write a report about this book may

borrow it}.

5.60:

Possessive forms of

relative pronouns

5.61:

"Whose" and "of

which"

5.62:

Compound relative

pronouns

5.63:

"Who" versus

"whom"

5.64:

Indefinite pronouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Relative Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.63 "WHO" VERSUS "WHOM"

List of Tables

Who and whoever are the nominative forms, used as subjects {Whoever said that?} or predicate

Index

nominatives {It was who?}. Whom and whomever are the objective forms, used as the object of a verb

{You called whom?} or a preposition {To whom are you referring?}. Three problems arise with

determining the correct case. First, because the words are so often found in the inverted syntax of an

5.61:

interrogative sentence, their true function in the sentence can be hard to see unless one sorts the

"Whose" and "of

which"

words into standard subject--verb--object syntax. In this example, sorting the syntax into "I should say

5.62:

who is calling" makes the case easier to determine:

Compound relative

pronouns

WRONG: Whom should I say is calling?

5.63:

RIGHT: Who should I say is calling?

"Who" versus

"whom"

Second, determining the proper case can be confusing when the pronoun serves a function (say,

5.64:

Indefinite pronouns

nominative) in a clause that itself serves a different function (say, objective) in the main sentence. It is

5.65:

the pronoun's function in its clause that determines its case. In the first example below, the entire

Adjective pronouns

clause whoever will listen is the object of the preposition to. But in the clause itself, whoever serves as

the subject, and that function determines its case. Similarly, in the second sentence whomever is the

object of choose in the clause, so it must be in the objective case even though the clause itself serves as

the subject of the sentence.

WRONG: I'll talk to whomever will listen.

RIGHT: I'll talk to whoever will listen.

WRONG: Whoever you choose will suit me.

RIGHT: Whomever you choose will suit me.

As the second example above shows, a further distraction can arise when the who clause contains a

nested clause, typically of attribution or identification (here, you choose).

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Other Types of Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.64 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS

List of Tables

An indefinite pronoun is one that generally or indefinitely represents an object, usually one that has

Index

already been identified or doesn't need specific identification. The most common are another, any, both,

each, either, neither, none, one, other, some, and such. There are also compound indefinite pronouns, such

as anybody, anything, anyone, everybody, everyone, everything, nobody, no one, oneself, somebody, and

5.62:

someone. Each, either, and neither are also called distributive pronouns because they separate the

Compound relative

pronouns

objects referred to from others referred to nearby. Indefinite pronouns have number. When an

5.63:

indefinite pronoun is the subject of a verb, it is usually singular {everyone is enjoying the dinner}

"Who" versus

{everybody takes notes during the first week}. But sometimes an indefinite pronoun carries a plural

"whom"

sense {nobody could describe the music; they hadn't been listening to it} {everyone understood the

5.64:

Indefinite pronouns

risk, but they were lured by promises of big returns}. The forms of indefinite pronouns are not

5.65:

affected by gender or person, and the nominative and objective forms are the same. To form the

Adjective pronouns

possessive, the indefinite pronoun may take 's {that is no one's fault} {Is this anyone's jacket?} or the

5.66:

adverb else plus 's {don't interfere with anybody else's business} {no one else's cups were broken}.

Adjectives defined

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Pronouns >> Other Types of Pronouns

of Contents

List of Figures

5.65 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS

List of Tables

An adjective pronoun (also called a pronominal adjective) functions as a noun modifier. It must agree

Index

in number with the noun to which it belongs {all people} {these sorts of favors} {those kinds of

indulgences}. All pronouns other than nonpossessive personal pronouns, who, and none may serve as

adjectives {those windows} {some coyotes}. The adjective no is used instead of none {no one astronaut}

5.63:

{no other paradise}.

"Who" versus

"whom"

5.64:

Indefinite pronouns

5.65:

Adjective pronouns

5.66:

Adjectives defined

5.67:

Proper adjectives

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.66 ADJECTIVES DEFINED

List of Tables

An adjective is a word that modifies a noun or pronoun; it is often called a "describing word." An

Index

adjective tells you what sort, how many, how large or small, whose, and so on. An adjective may add

a new idea to a noun or pronoun by describing it more definitely or fully {red wagon} {human error}.

Or it may be limiting {three pigs} {this time}. Most adjectives derive from nouns, as plentiful derives

5.64:

from plenty or as stylish derives from style; some derive from verbs, roots, or other adjectives. Usually

Indefinite pronouns

a suffix creates the adjective. Among the suffixes that often distinguish adjectives are -able

5.65:

Adjective pronouns

{manageable}, -al {mystical}, -ary {elementary}, -ed {hammered}, -en {wooden}, -esque {statuesque}, -ful

5.66:

{harmful}, -ible {inaccessible}, -ic {artistic}, -ish {foolish}, -ive {demonstrative}, -less {helpless}, -like

Adjectives defined

{childlike}, -ly {ghostly}, -ous {perilous}, -some {lonesome}, and -y {sunny}. But many adjectives do not

5.67:

have distinctive endings and are recognizable only by their function {old} {tall} {brilliant}.

Proper adjectives

5.68:

Articles defined

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.67 PROPER ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

A proper adjective is one that, being or deriving from a proper name, always begins with a capital

Index

letter {a New York minute} {a Cuban cigar} {a Canadian dollar}. (But see 8.60.) The proper name used

attributively is still capitalized, but it does not cause the noun it modifies to be capitalized. A place-

name containing a comma--such as Toronto, Ontario, or New Delhi, India--should generally not be used

5.65:

as an adjective because a second comma may be deemed obligatory {we met in a Toronto, Ontario,

Adjective pronouns

restaurant} (the comma after Ontario being somewhat awkward). Compare the readability of a New

5.66:

Adjectives defined

Delhi, India, marketplace with that of a New Delhi marketplace or a marketplace in New Delhi, India

5.67:

(substituting a prepositional phrase for the proper adjective).

Proper adjectives

5.68:

Articles defined

5.69:

Definite article

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Articles as Limiting Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.68 ARTICLES DEFINED

List of Tables

An article is a limiting adjective that precedes a noun or noun phrase and determines the noun or

Index

phrase's use to indicate something definite ( the) or indefinite ( a or an). An article might stand alone or

be used with other adjectives {a road} {a brick road} {the yellow brick road}.

5.66:

Adjectives defined

5.67:

Proper adjectives

5.68:

Articles defined

5.69:

Definite article

5.70:

Indefinite article

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Articles as Limiting Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.69 DEFINITE ARTICLE

List of Tables

A definite article points to a definite object that (1) is so well understood that it does not need

Index

description (e.g., the package is here is a shortened form of the package that you expected is here); (2) is a

thing that is about to be described {the sights of Chicago}; or (3) is important {the grand prize}. The

definite article belongs to nouns in the singular {the star} or the plural number {the stars}.

5.67:

Proper adjectives

5.68:

Articles defined

5.69:

Definite article

5.70:

Indefinite article

5.71:

Indefinite article in

specific reference

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Articles as Limiting Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.70 INDEFINITE ARTICLE

List of Tables

An indefinite article points to nonspecific objects, things, or persons that are not distinguished from

Index

the other members of a class. The thing may be singular {a student at Princeton}, or uncountable {a

multitude}, or generalized {an idea inspired by Milton's Paradise Lost}.

5.68:

Articles defined

5.69:

Definite article

5.70:

Indefinite article

5.71:

Indefinite article in

specific reference

5.72:

Choosing "a" or "an"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Articles as Limiting Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.71 INDEFINITE ARTICLE IN SPECIFIC REFERENCE

List of Tables

In a few usages, the indefinite article provides a specific reference {I saw a great movie last night} and

Index

the definite article a generic reference {the Scots are talking about independence} (generalizing by

nationality).

5.69:

Definite article

5.70:

Indefinite article

5.71:

Indefinite article in

specific reference

5.72:

Choosing "a" or "an"

5.73:

Articles with

coordinate nouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Articles as Limiting Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.72 CHOOSING "A" OR "AN"

List of Tables

With the indefinite article, the choice of a or an depends on the sound of the word it precedes. A

Index

comes before words with a consonant sound, including /y/, /h/, and /w/, no matter how the word is

spelled {a eulogy} {a historic occasion} {a Ouachita tribe member}. An comes before words with a

vowel sound {an LSAT exam room} {an X-Files episode} {an hour ago}. See 5.220, under a; an. See also

5.70:

7.44, 10.9.

Indefinite article

5.71:

Indefinite article in

specific reference

5.72:

Choosing "a" or "an"

5.73:

Articles with

coordinate nouns

5.74:

Effect of article on

meaning

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Articles as Limiting Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.73 ARTICLES WITH COORDINATE NOUNS

List of Tables

With a series of coordinate nouns, an article may appear before each noun but is not necessary {the

Index

rose bush and hedge need trimming}. If the things named make up a single idea, an article need not

be repeated {in the highest degree of dressage, the horse and rider appear to be one entity}. And if the

named things are covered by one plural noun, the definite article should not be repeated {in the first

5.71:

and second years of college}.

Indefinite article in

specific reference

5.72:

Choosing "a" or "an"

5.73:

Articles with

coordinate nouns

5.74:

Effect of article on

meaning

5.75:

Zero article

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Articles as Limiting Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.74 EFFECT OF ARTICLE ON MEANING

List of Tables

Because articles have a demonstrative value, the meaning of a phrase may shift depending on the

Index

article used. For example, an officer and gentleman escorted Princess Plum to her car suggests (though

ambiguously) that the escort was one man with two descriptive characteristics. But an officer and a

friend escorted Princess Plum to her car suggests that two people acted as escorts. Similarly, Do you like

5.72:

the red and blue cloth? suggests that the cloth contains both red and blue threads. But Do you like the red

Choosing "a" or "an"

and the blue cloth? suggests that two different fabrics are being discussed. The clearest way to express

5.73:

Articles with

the idea that the cloth contains both red and blue is to hyphenate the phrase as a compound modifier:

coordinate nouns

red-and-blue cloth; and with two kinds of cloth, clarity requires either repeating the word cloth ( the red

5.74:

cloth and the blue cloth) or using cloth with the first adjective rather than the second ( the red cloth and the

Effect of article on

meaning

blue).

5.75:

Zero article

5.76:

Omitted article

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Articles as Limiting Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.75 ZERO ARTICLE

List of Tables

Some usages call for a zero article, an article implicitly present, usually before a mass or plural noun

Index

{although both new and washed bottles are stacked nearby, cider is poured into new bottles only} ( the

is implicit before new bottles). The zero article usually occurs in idiomatic references to time, illness,

transportation, personal routines, and meals {by sunset} {has cancer} {travel by train} {go to bed}

5.73:

{make breakfast}.

Articles with

coordinate nouns

5.74:

Effect of article on

meaning

5.75:

Zero article

5.76:

Omitted article

5.77:

Article as pronoun

substitute

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Articles as Limiting Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.76 OMITTED ARTICLE

List of Tables

The absence of an article may alter a sentence's meaning--for example, the meaning of the news

Index

brought us little comfort (we weren't comforted) changes if a is inserted before little: the news brought us

a little comfort (we felt somewhat comforted).

5.74:

Effect of article on

meaning

5.75:

Zero article

5.76:

Omitted article

5.77:

Article as pronoun

substitute

5.78:

Basic rules

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Articles as Limiting Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.77 ARTICLE AS PRONOUN SUBSTITUTE

List of Tables

An article may sometimes substitute for a pronoun. For example, the blanks in a patient who develops

Index

the described rash on ___ hands should inform ___ doctor may be filled in with the pronoun phrase his or

her or the article the.

5.75:

Zero article

5.76:

Omitted article

5.77:

Article as pronoun

substitute

5.78:

Basic rules

5.79:

After possessive

pronoun

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Position of Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.78 BASIC RULES

List of Tables

An adjective that modifies a noun, noun phrase, or pronoun usually precedes it {perfect storm}

Index

{spectacular view} {a good bowl of soup}. An adjective may follow the noun if (1) special emphasis is

needed {reasons innumerable} {captains courageous}; (2) it occurs in this position in standard usage

{court-martial} {notary public}; (3) it is a predicate adjective following a linking verb {I am ready}; or

5.76:

(4) the pronoun is of a type usually followed by the adjective {anything good} {everything yellow}

Omitted article

{nothing important} {something wicked}. Some adjectives are always in the predicate and never

5.77:

Article as pronoun

appear before what they modify {the city is asleep} {the door was ajar}. Others appear uniformly

substitute

before the nouns they modify {utter nonsense} {a mere child}. Phrasal adjectives may precede or

5.78:

follow what they modify. See 5.91.

Basic rules

5.79:

After possessive

pronoun

5.80:

Adjective

modifying pronoun

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Position of Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.79 AFTER POSSESSIVE PRONOUN

List of Tables

When a noun phrase includes a possessive noun, as in children's shoes or the company's president, the

Index

adjective follows the possessive {children's athletic shoes} {the company's former president} (unless

they're athletic children or it's a former company).

5.77:

Article as pronoun

substitute

5.78:

Basic rules

5.79:

After possessive

pronoun

5.80:

Adjective

modifying pronoun

5.81:

Predicate adjective

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Position of Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.80 ADJECTIVE MODIFYING PRONOUN

List of Tables

When modifying a pronoun, an adjective usually follows the pronoun {the searchers found him

Index

unconscious} {some like it hot}, sometimes as a predicate adjective {it was insensitive} {Who was so

jealous?}.

5.78:

Basic rules

5.79:

After possessive

pronoun

5.80:

Adjective

modifying pronoun

5.81:

Predicate adjective

5.82:

Dates as adjectives

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Position of Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.81 PREDICATE ADJECTIVE

List of Tables

A predicate adjective is an adjective that follows a linking verb (see 5.99) but modifies the subject {the

Index

child is afraid} {the night became colder} {this tastes delicious} {I feel bad}. If an adjective in the

predicate modifies a noun or pronoun in the predicate, it is not a predicate adjective. For example, in

the train will be late the adjective late modifies the subject train. But in the train will be here at a late hour

5.79:

the adjective late modifies the noun hour, not the subject train. So even though it occurs in the

After possessive

pronoun

predicate, it is not known as a predicate adjective, which by definition follows a linking verb.

5.80:

Adjective

modifying pronoun

5.81:

Predicate adjective

5.82:

Dates as adjectives

5.83:

Three adjectival

degrees

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Position of Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.82 DATES AS ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

Dates are often used as descriptive adjectives, more often today than in years past. If a month-year or

Index

month-day date is used as an adjective, no hyphen or comma is needed {October 31 festivities}

{December 2003 financial statement}. If a full month-day-year date is used, then a comma is

considered necessary both before and after the year {the May 18, 2002, commencement ceremonies}.

5.80:

But this construction is awkward because the adjective (which is forward looking) contains two

Adjective

modifying pronoun

commas (which are backward looking); the construction is therefore best avoided {commencement

5.81:

ceremonies on May 18, 2002}.

Predicate adjective

5.82:

Dates as adjectives

5.83:

Three adjectival

degrees

5.84:

Comparative

adjectives

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Degrees of Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.83 THREE ADJECTIVAL DEGREES

List of Tables

An adjective has three degrees: the positive or absolute {hard}, the comparative {harder}, and the

Index

superlative {hardest}. A positive adjective simply expresses an object's quality without reference to

any other thing {a big balloon} {bad news}.

5.81:

Predicate adjective

5.82:

Dates as adjectives

5.83:

Three adjectival

degrees

5.84:

Comparative

adjectives

5.85:

Superlative

adjectives

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Degrees of Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.84 COMPARATIVE ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

A comparative adjective expresses the relationship between a specified quality shared by two things,

Index

often specifying which has more or less of that quality {a cheaper ticket} {a happier ending}. The

suffix -er usually signals the comparative form of a common adjective having one or two syllables

{light--lighter} {merry--merrier}. An adjective with three or more syllables takes more instead of a

5.82:

suffix to form the comparative {intelligent--more intelligent} {purposeful--more purposeful}. Some

Dates as adjectives

adjectives with two syllables take the -er suffix {lazy--lazier} {narrow--narrower}, but most two-

5.83:

Three adjectival

syllable adjectives take more {more hostile} {more careless}. Two-syllable adjectives ending in -er, -le,

degrees

-ow, -ure, or -y can typically use either the -er suffix or more.

5.84:

Comparative

adjectives

5.85:

Superlative

adjectives

5.86:

Forming

comparatives and

superlatives

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Degrees of Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.85 SUPERLATIVE ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

A superlative adjective expresses the relationship between at least three things and denotes an

Index

extreme of intensity or amount in a particular shared quality {the biggest house on the block} {the

bitterest pill of all}. The suffix â€‘est usually signals the superlative form of a common adjective

having one or two syllables {lighter--lightest}. An adjective with three or more syllables takes most

5.83:

instead of a suffix to form the superlative {quarrelsome--most quarrelsome} {humorous--most

Three adjectival

degrees

humorous}. Some adjectives with two syllables take the â€‘est suffix {holy--holiest} {noble--noblest},

5.84:

but most two-syllable adjectives take most {most fruitful} {most reckless}.

Comparative

adjectives

5.85:

Superlative

adjectives

5.86:

Forming

comparatives and

superlatives

5.87:

Equal and unequal

comparisons

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Degrees of Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.86 FORMING COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES

List of Tables

There are a few rules for forming a short regular adjective's comparative and superlative forms. (1) If

Index

the adjective is a monosyllable ending in a single vowel followed by a single consonant, the final

consonant is doubled before the suffix is attached {red--redder--reddest}. (2) If the adjective ends in a

silent â€‘e, the â€‘e is dropped before the suffix is added {polite--politer--politest}. (3) Participles used

5.84:

as adjectives require more or most before the participle; no suffix is added to form the comparative or

Comparative

adjectives

the superlative {this teleplay is more boring than the first one} {I am most tired on Fridays}. (4) A few

5.85:

one-syllable adjectives--such as real, right, and wrong--can take only more and most. Even then, these

Superlative

combinations occur only in informal speech. (5) Eager, proper, and somber, unlike many two-syllable

adjectives

adjectives, also take only more and most; none can take a suffix. (6) Two-syllable adjectives to which

5.86:

Forming

the negative prefix un- has been added can usually either take a suffix or take more or most, even if the

comparatives and

superlatives

total number of syllables is three {unhappiest} {most unhappy}. (7) Many adjectives are irregular--

there is no rule that guides their comparative and superlative forms {good--better--best} {less--lesser--

5.87:

Equal and unequal

least}. A good dictionary will show the forms of an irregular adjective.

comparisons

5.88:

Uncomparable

adjectives

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Degrees of Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.87 EQUAL AND UNEQUAL COMPARISONS

List of Tables

A higher degree of comparison is signaled by a suffix ( -er or â€‘est), or by more or most. (See 5.84,

Index

5.85.) A lower degree is shown by less (comparative) or least (superlative) {cold--less cold} {less cold--

least cold}. Equivalence is shown by the use of the as . . . as construction {this is as old as that} and

sometimes by so {that test was not so hard as the last one}.

5.85:

Superlative

adjectives

5.86:

Forming

comparatives and

superlatives

5.87:

Equal and unequal

comparisons

5.88:

Uncomparable

adjectives

5.89:

Participial

adjectives

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Degrees of Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.88 UNCOMPARABLE ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

An adjective that, by definition, describes an absolute state or condition--such as entire, impossible,

Index

pregnant, unique--is called uncomparable. It cannot take a comparative suffix and cannot be coupled

with the comparative terms more, most, less, or least. Nor can it be intensified by words like very,

largely, or quite. But on the rare occasion when a particular emphasis is needed, a good writer may

5.86:

depart from this rule and use a phrase like more perfect, as the framers of the United States

Forming

comparatives and

Constitution did in composing its preamble {We the People of the United States, in order to form a

superlatives

more perfect Union . . .}.

5.87:

Equal and unequal

comparisons

5.88:

Uncomparable

adjectives

5.89:

Participial

adjectives

5.90:

Coordinate

adjectives

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Special Types of Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.89 PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

A participial adjective is simply a verb's participle that modifies a noun or pronoun. It can be a

Index

present participle (verb ending in â€‘ing) {the dining room} {a walking stick} {a rising star} or a past

participle (usually a verb ending in â€‘ed) {an endangered species} {a completed assignment} {a

proven need}. Some past-participial forms have only this adjectival function, the past-participial verb

5.87:

having taken a different form {a shaven face} {a graven image}. A past participle functioning as an

Equal and unequal

comparisons

adjective may be modified with an adverb such as quite {quite surprised}, barely {barely concealed}, or

5.88:

little {little known}, or an adverbial phrase such as very much {very much distrusted}. If the past

Uncomparable

participle has gained a strong adjectival quality, very will do the job alone without the quantitative

adjectives

much {very tired} {very drunk}. But if the participial form seems more like a verb, very needs much to

5.89:

Participial

help do the job {very much appreciated} {very much delayed}. A few past participles (such as bored,

adjectives

interested, pleased, satisfied) are in the middle of the spectrum between those having mostly adjectival

5.90:

qualities and those having mostly verbal qualities. With these few, the quantitative much is normally

Coordinate

adjectives

omitted. See also 5.108, 5.139.

5.91:

Phrasal adjectives

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Special Types of Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.90 COORDINATE ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

A coordinate adjective is one that appears in a sequence with one or more related adjectives to

Index

modify the same noun. Coordinate adjectives should be separated by commas or by and {skilled,

experienced chess player} {nurturing and loving parent}. But if one adjective modifies the noun and

another adjective modifies the idea expressed by the combination of the first adjective and the noun,

5.88:

the adjectives are not considered coordinate and should not be separated by a comma. For example, a

Uncomparable

adjectives

lethargic soccer player describes a soccer player who is lethargic. Likewise, phrases such as red brick

5.89:

house and wrinkled canvas jacket are unpunctuated because the adjectives are not coordinate: they have

Participial

no logical connection in sense (a red house could be made of many different materials; so could a

adjectives

wrinkled jacket). The most useful test is this: if and would fit between the two adjectives, a comma is

5.90:

Coordinate

necessary.

adjectives

5.91:

Phrasal adjectives

5.92:

Adjectives as nouns

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Special Types of Adjectives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.91 PHRASAL ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

A phrasal adjective (also called a compound modifier) is a phrase that functions as a unit to modify a

Index

noun. A phrasal adjective follows these basic rules: (1) Generally, if it is placed before a noun, you

should hyphenate the phrase to avoid misdirecting the reader {dog-eat-dog competition}. There may

be a considerable difference between the hyphenated and the unhyphenated forms. For example,

5.89:

compare small animal hospital with small-animal hospital. (2) If a compound noun is an element of a

Participial

adjectives

phrasal adjective, the entire compound noun must be hyphenated to clarify the relationship among

5.90:

the words {time-clock-punching employees}. (3) If more than one phrasal adjective modifies a single

Coordinate

noun, hyphenation becomes especially important {nineteenth-century song-and-dance numbers}

adjectives

{state-inspected assisted-living facility}. (4) If two phrasal adjectives end in a common element, the

5.91:

Phrasal adjectives

ending element should appear only with the second phrase, and a suspension hyphen should follow

5.92:

the unattached words to show that they are related to the ending element {middle- and upper-class

Adjectives as nouns

operagoers}. But if two phrasal adjectives begin with a common element, a hyphen is usually

5.93:

inappropriate, and the element should be repeated {left-handed and left-brained executives}. (5) If the

Adjectives as verbs

phrasal adjective denotes an amount or a duration, plurals should be dropped. For instance, pregnancy

lasts nine months but is a nine-month pregnancy, and a shop open twenty-four hours a day requires a

twenty-four-hour-a-day schedule. The plural is retained only for fractions {a two-thirds majority}. (6) If a

phrasal adjective becomes awkward, the sentence should probably be recast. For example, The news

about the lower-than-expected third-quarter earnings disappointed investors could become The news about the

third-quarter earnings, which were lower than expected, disappointed investors. Or perhaps this: Investors

were disappointed by the third-quarter earnings, which were lower than expected. There are exceptions for

hyphenating phrasal adjectives: (1) If the phrasal adjective follows a verb, it is usually unhyphenated-

-for example, compare a well-trained athlete with an athlete who is well trained. (2) When a proper name

begins a phrasal adjective, the name is not hyphenated {the Monty Python school of comedy}. (3) A

two-word phrasal adjective that begins with an adverb ending in â€‘ly is not hyphenated {a sharply

worded reprimand} (but a not-so-sharply-worded reprimand). For a full discussion of hyphenation--

including treatment of compound noun forms and other parts of speech--see 7.77--85.

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Functional Variation

of Contents

List of Figures

5.92 ADJECTIVES AS NOUNS

List of Tables

Adjective-to-noun transitions are relatively common in English. Some adjectives are well established

Index

as nouns and are perfectly suitable for most contexts. For example, a postmortem examination is often

called a postmortem; collectible objects are collectibles; and French people are the French. Any but the most

established of these, however, should be used only after careful consideration. If there's an alternative,

5.90:

it will almost certainly be better. For example, there is probably no good reason to use the adjective

Coordinate

adjectives

collaborative as a noun (i.e., a shortened form of collaborative enterprise) when the perfectly good

5.91:

collaboration is available. See also 5.22--25.

Phrasal adjectives

5.92:

Adjectives as nouns

5.93:

Adjectives as verbs

5.94:

Other parts of

speech functioning

as adjectives

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Functional Variation

of Contents

List of Figures

5.93 ADJECTIVES AS VERBS

List of Tables

Adjective-to-verb transitions occur in English only once in a while, usually as jargon or slang {the

Index

cargo tanks were inerted by introducing carbon dioxide into them} {it would be silly to low-key the

credit for this achievement}. They are not acceptable in formal prose.

5.91:

Phrasal adjectives

5.92:

Adjectives as nouns

5.93:

Adjectives as verbs

5.94:

Other parts of

speech functioning

as adjectives

5.95:

Verbs generally

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adjectives >> Functional Variation

of Contents

List of Figures

5.94 OTHER PARTS OF SPEECH FUNCTIONING AS ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

Words that ordinarily function as other parts of speech, but sometimes as adjectives, include nouns

Index

(see 5.22), pronouns (see 5.47), and verbs (see 5.105).

5.92:

Adjectives as nouns

5.93:

Adjectives as verbs

5.94:

Other parts of

speech functioning

as adjectives

5.95:

Verbs generally

5.96:

Transitive and

intransitive verbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.95 VERBS GENERALLY

List of Tables

A verb denotes the performance or occurrence of an action or the existence of a condition or a state of

Index

being, such as an emotion. Action verbs include walk, shout, taste, and fly. Nonaction verbs include

imagine, exist, and dread. The verb is the most essential part of speech--the only one that can express a

thought by itself (with the subject understood) {Run!} {Enjoy!} {Think!}.

5.93:

Adjectives as verbs

5.94:

Other parts of

speech functioning

as adjectives

5.95:

Verbs generally

5.96:

Transitive and

intransitive verbs

5.97:

Ergative verbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.96 TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS

List of Tables

Depending on its relationship with objects, a verb is classified as transitive or intransitive. A transitive

Index

verb requires an object to express a complete thought; the verb indicates what action the subject exerts

on the object. For example, the cyclist hit a curb states what the subject cyclist did to the object curb. An

intransitive verb does not require an object to express a complete thought {the rescuer jumped},

5.94:

although it may be followed by a prepositional phrase serving an adverbial function {the rescuer

Other parts of

speech functioning

jumped to the ground}. Many verbs may be either transitive or intransitive, the different usages often

as adjectives

distinguishable by their meanings. For example, when used transitively, as in the king's heir will

5.95:

succeed him, succeed means "to follow and take the place of"; when used intransitively, as in the chemist

Verbs generally

will succeed in identifying the toxin, it means "to accomplish a task." With other verbs, no such

5.96:

Transitive and

distinction is possible. For example, in I will walk; you ride, ride is intransitive. In I will walk; you ride

intransitive verbs

your bike, ride is transitive, but its meaning is unchanged. A verb that is normally used transitively

5.97:

may sometimes be used intransitively to emphasize the verb and leave the object undefined or

Ergative verbs

unknown {the patient is eating poorly} ( how well the patient eats is more important than what the

5.98:

Regular and

patient eats).

irregular verbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.97 ERGATIVE VERBS

List of Tables

Some verbs, called ergative verbs, can be used transitively or intransitively with a noun that becomes

Index

the object when the verb's use is transitive and the subject when the verb's use is intransitive. For

example, with the noun door and the verb open, one can say I opened the door (transitive) or the door

opened (intransitive). Many words undergo ergative shifts. For example, the verb ship was once

5.95:

exclusively transitive {the company shipped the books on January 16}, but in commercial usage it is

Verbs generally

now often intransitive {the books shipped on January 16}. Likewise, grow (generally an intransitive

5.96:

Transitive and

verb) was transitive only in horticultural contexts {the family grew several types of crops}, but

intransitive verbs

commercial usage now makes it transitive in many other contexts {how to grow your business}.

5.97:

Careful writers and editors employ such usages cautiously if at all, preferring well-established idioms.

Ergative verbs

5.98:

Regular and

irregular verbs

5.99:

Linking verbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.98 REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS

List of Tables

The past-tense and past-participle forms of most English words are formed by appending -ed to the

Index

basic form {draft--drafted--drafted}. If the verb ends in -e, only a -d is appended, and sometimes a

final consonant is doubled. These verbs are classified as regular, or weak (the latter is a term used in

philology to classify forms of conjugation). But a few common verbs have maintained forms derived

5.96:

mostly from Old English roots {begin--began--begun} {bet--bet--bet} {bind--bound--bound} {bite--bit--

Transitive and

intransitive verbs

bitten}. These verbs are called irregular, or strong. The various inflections of strong verbs defy simple

5.97:

classifications, but many past-tense and past-participle forms (1) change by changing the vowel sound

Ergative verbs

of the base verb (as begin); (2) keep the same form as the base verb (as bet); (3) share an irregular form

5.98:

(as bind); or (4) change endings (as bite). The verb be is highly irregular, with eight forms { be, am, are,

Regular and

irregular verbs

is, was, were, been, being}. Because no system of useful classification is possible for irregular verbs, a

5.99:

reliable memory and a general dictionary are essential tools for using the correct forms consistently.

Linking verbs

Further complicating the spelling of irregular verbs is the fact that the form may vary according to

5.100:

the sense of the word. When used to mean "to offer a price," for example, bid keeps the same form in

Phrasal verbs

the past tense and past participle, but when it means "to offer a greeting" it forms bade and bidden.

The form may also depend on whether the verb is being used literally {wove a rug} or figuratively

{weaved in traffic}. Finally, a few verbs that are considered regular have an alternative past tense and

past participle that is formed by adding -t to the simple verb form {dream--dreamed} {dream--

dreamt}. When these alternatives are available, American English tends to prefer the forms in -ed (e.g.,

dreamed, learned, spelled), while British English tends to prefer the forms in -t ( dreamt, learnt, spelt).

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.99 LINKING VERBS

List of Tables

A linking verb (also called a copula or connecting verb) is one that links the subject to an equivalent

Index

word in the sentence--a predicate pronoun, predicate noun, or predicate adjective. The linking verb

itself does not take an object. There are two kinds of linking verbs: be-verbs and intransitive verbs that

are used in a weakened sense, such as seem, smell, appear, feel, and look. When used as a link, the

5.97:

weakened intransitive verb often has a figurative sense akin to that of became, as in he fell heir to a large

Ergative verbs

fortune (he didn't physically fall on or into anything) or the river ran dry (a waterless river doesn't run--

5.98:

Regular and

it just dries up). See 5.167.

irregular verbs

5.99:

Linking verbs

5.100:

Phrasal verbs

5.101:

Principal and

auxiliary verbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.100 PHRASAL VERBS

List of Tables

A phrasal verb is usually a verb plus a preposition (or particle) {settle down} {get up}. A phrasal verb

Index

is not hyphenated, even though its equivalent noun or phrasal adjective might be--compare to flare up

with a flare-up, and compare to step up the pace with a stepped-up pace. Three rules apply: (1) if the

phrasal verb has a sense distinct from the component words, use the entire phrase--for example, hold

5.98:

up means "to rob" or "to delay," and get rid of and do away with mean "to eliminate"; (2) avoid the

Regular and

irregular verbs

phrasal verb if the verb alone conveys essentially the same meaning--for example, rest up is essentially

5.99:

equivalent to rest; and (3) don't compress the phrase into a one-word verb, especially if it has a

Linking verbs

corresponding one-word noun form--for example, one burns out and suffers burnout.

5.100:

Phrasal verbs

5.101:

Principal and

auxiliary verbs

5.102:

Verb phrases

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.101 PRINCIPAL AND AUXILIARY VERBS

List of Tables

Depending on its uses, a verb is classified as principal or auxiliary (also termed modal). A principal

Index

verb is one that can stand alone to express an act or state {he jogs} {I dreamed about Xanadu}. If

combined with another verb, it expresses the combination's leading thought {a tiger may roar}. An

auxiliary verb is used with a principal verb to form a verb phrase that indicates mood, tense, or voice

5.99:

{You must study for the exam!} {I will go to the store} {the show was interrupted}. The most

Linking verbs

commonly used auxiliaries are be, can, do, have, may, must, ought, shall, and will. For more on auxiliary

5.100:

Phrasal verbs

verbs, see 5.142--50.

5.101:

Principal and

auxiliary verbs

5.102:

Verb phrases

5.103:

Contractions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.102 VERB PHRASES

List of Tables

The combination of an auxiliary verb with a principal verb is a verb phrase, such as could happen, must

Index

go, or will be leaving. When a verb phrase is modified by an adverb, the modifier typically goes

directly after the first auxiliary verb, as in could certainly happen, must always go, and will soon be

leaving. The idea that verb phrases should not be "split" in this way is quite mistaken (see 5.168). A

5.100:

verb phrase is negated by placing the negative adverb not after the first auxiliary {we have not called

Phrasal verbs

him}. In an interrogative sentence, the first auxiliary begins the sentence and is followed by the subject

5.101:

Principal and

{Must I repeat that?} {Do you want more?}. An interrogative can be negated by placing not after the

auxiliary verbs

subject {Do you not want more?}; contractions are often more natural but may paradoxically serve as

5.102:

positive intensifiers {Don't you want more?} {Isn't the sunset beautiful?}. Most negative forms can be

Verb phrases

contracted {we do not--we don't} {I will not--I won't} {he has not--he hasn't} {she does not--she

5.103:

Contractions

doesn't}, but I am not is contracted to I'm not (never I amn't). The corresponding interrogative form is

5.104:

Aren't I? Sometimes the negative is emphasized if the auxiliary is contracted with the pronoun and

Infinitives defined

the negative is left standing alone {he is not--he isn't--he's not} {we are not--we aren't--we're not} {they

have not--they haven't--they've not}.

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Definitions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.103 CONTRACTIONS

List of Tables

Most types of writing benefit from the use of contractions. If used thoughtfully, contractions in prose

Index

sound natural and relaxed and make reading more enjoyable. Be-verbs and most of the auxiliary

verbs are contracted when followed by not: are--aren't; was--wasn't; cannot--can't; could not--couldn't; do

not--don't; and so on. A few, such as ought not--oughtn't, look or sound awkward and are best avoided.

5.101:

Pronouns can be contracted with auxiliaries, forms of have, and some be-verbs. Think before using one

Principal and

auxiliary verbs

of the less common contractions, which often don't work well in prose, except perhaps in dialogue or

5.102:

quotations. Some examples are I'd've (I would have), she'd've (she would have) it'd (it would),

Verb phrases

should've (should have), there're (there are), who're (who are), and would've (would have). Also, some

5.103:

contracted forms can have more than one meaning. For instance, there's may be there is or there has,

Contractions

and I'd may be I had or I would. The particular meaning may not always be clear from the context.

5.104:

Infinitives defined

5.105:

Uses of the

infinitive

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Infinitives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.104 INFINITIVES DEFINED

List of Tables

An infinitive verb, also called the verb's root or stem, is a verb that in its principal uninflected form

Index

may be preceded by to {to dance} {to dive}. In the active voice, to is generally dropped when the

infinitive follows an auxiliary verb {you must flee} and can be dropped after several principal verbs,

such as bid, dare, feel, hear, help, let, make, need, and see {You dare say that to me!}. But when the

5.102:

infinitive follows one of these verbs in the passive voice, to should be retained {he cannot be heard to

Verb phrases

deny it} {they cannot be made to listen}. The to should also be retained after ought (see 5.148).

5.103:

Contractions

5.104:

Infinitives defined

5.105:

Uses of the

infinitive

5.106:

Split infinitive

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Infinitives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.105 USES OF THE INFINITIVE

List of Tables

The infinitive has great versatility. It is sometimes called a verbal noun because it can function as a

Index

verb or a noun. The infinitive also has limited uses as an adjective or an adverb. As a verb, it can take

(1) a subject {we wanted the lesson to end}; (2) an object {to throw the javelin}; (3) a predicate

complement {to race home}; or (4) an adverbial modifier {to think quickly}. As a noun, the infinitive

5.103:

can perform as (1) the subject of a finite verb {to fly is a lofty goal} or (2) the object of a transitive verb

Contractions

or participle {I want to hire a new assistant}. An infinitive may be governed by a verb {cease to do

5.104:

Infinitives defined

evil}, noun {we all have a talent to be improved}, adjective {she is eager to learn}, or pronoun {give it

5.105:

to them to do}.

Uses of the

infinitive

5.106:

Split infinitive

5.107:

Dangling infinitive

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Infinitives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.106 SPLIT INFINITIVE

List of Tables

Although from about 1850 to 1925 many grammarians stated otherwise, it is now widely

Index

acknowledged that adverbs sometimes justifiably separate an infinitive's to from its principal verb

{they expect to more than double their income next year}. See also 5.168.

5.104:

Infinitives defined

5.105:

Uses of the

infinitive

5.106:

Split infinitive

5.107:

Dangling infinitive

5.108:

Forming participles

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Infinitives

of Contents

List of Figures

5.107 DANGLING INFINITIVE

List of Tables

An infinitive phrase can be used, often loosely, to modify a verb--in which case there must be an

Index

express or implied logical subject in the sentence. If there is none, then the sentence may be confusing.

For example, in to repair your car properly, it must be sent to a mechanic, the infinitive repair does not

have a logical subject; the infinitive phrase to repair your car is left dangling. But if the sentence is

5.105:

rewritten as to repair your car properly, you must take it to a mechanic, the logical subject is you.

Uses of the

infinitive

5.106:

Split infinitive

5.107:

Dangling infinitive

5.108:

Forming participles

5.109:

Participial phrases

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Participles and Gerunds

of Contents

List of Figures

5.108 FORMING PARTICIPLES

List of Tables

A participle is a nonfinite verb that is not limited by person, number, or mood, but does have tense.

Index

Two participles are formed from the verb stem: the present participle invariably ends in â€‘ing, and

the past participle usually ends in â€‘ed. The present participle denotes the verb's action as in

progress or incomplete at the time expressed by the sentence's principal verb {watching intently for a

5.106:

mouse, the cat settled in to wait} {hearing his name, Jon turned to answer}. The past participle

Split infinitive

denotes the verb's action as completed {planted in the spring} {written last year}.

5.107:

Dangling infinitive

5.108:

Forming participles

5.109:

Participial phrases

5.110:

Gerunds

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Participles and Gerunds

of Contents

List of Figures

5.109 PARTICIPIAL PHRASES

List of Tables

A participial phrase is made up of a participle plus any closely associated word or words, such as

Index

modifiers or complements. It can be used (1) as an adjective to modify a noun or pronoun {nailed to

the roof, the slate stopped the leaks} or (2) as an adverb to modify the predicate, or any adverb or

adjective in the predicate {she succeeded, persevering despite discouragement} {she pointed to the

5.107:

chef drooping behind the counter}. For more on participial adjectives, see 5.89, 5.112.

Dangling infinitive

5.108:

Forming participles

5.109:

Participial phrases

5.110:

Gerunds

5.111:

Distinguishing

between participles

and gerunds

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Participles and Gerunds

of Contents

List of Figures

5.110 GERUNDS

List of Tables

A gerund is a present participle used as a noun. It is not limited by person, number, or mood, but

Index

does have tense. Being a noun, the gerund can be used as (1) the subject of a verb {complaining about

it won't help}; (2) the object of a verb {I don't like your cooking}; (3) a predicate nominative or

complement {his favorite hobby is sleeping}; or (4) the object of a preposition {reduce erosion by

5.108:

terracing the fields}. In some sentences, a gerund may substitute for an infinitive. Compare the

Forming participles

infinitive to lie used as a noun in to lie is wrong with the gerund lying in lying is wrong.

5.109:

Participial phrases

5.110:

Gerunds

5.111:

Distinguishing

between participles

and gerunds

5.112:

Dangling participles

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Participles and Gerunds

of Contents

List of Figures

5.111 DISTINGUISHING BETWEEN PARTICIPLES AND GERUNDS

List of Tables

Because participles and gerunds are both derived from verbs, the difference between them depends

Index

on their function. A participle is used as a modifier {the running water} or as part of a verb phrase

{the meter is running}. A gerund is used as a noun {running is great exercise}.

5.109:

Participial phrases

5.110:

Gerunds

5.111:

Distinguishing

between participles

and gerunds

5.112:

Dangling participles

5.113:

Dangling gerunds

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Participles and Gerunds

of Contents

List of Figures

5.112 DANGLING PARTICIPLES

List of Tables

Both participles and gerunds are subject to dangling. A participle that has no syntactical relationship

Index

with the nearest subject is called a dangling participle or a dangler. Often, the sentence is illogical,

ambiguous, or even incoherent {frequently used in early America, experts suggest that shaming is an

effective punishment} ( used does not modify the closest noun, experts; it modifies shaming); {being a

5.110:

thoughtful mother, I believe Meg gives her children good advice} (the writer at first seems to be

Gerunds

attesting to his or her own thoughtfulness rather than Meg's). Recasting the sentence so that the

5.111:

Distinguishing

misplaced modifier is associated with the correct noun is a serviceable cure {experts suggest that

between participles

shaming, often used in early America, is an effective punishment}. But rewording to avoid the

and gerunds

participle or gerund may be preferable {I believe that because Meg is a thoughtful mother, she gives

5.112:

Dangling participles

her children good advice}. A careful writer will likewise avoid using it or there as the subject of the

5.113:

independent clause after a participial phrase, for this produces a dangler without a logical subject

Dangling gerunds

{reviewing the suggestions, it is clear that no consensus exists} (a possible revision: our review of the

5.114:

suggestions shows that no consensus exists). See also 5.171.

Five properties of

verbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Participles and Gerunds

of Contents

List of Figures

5.113 DANGLING GERUNDS

List of Tables

When the participle in a dangling gerund is the object of a preposition, it functions as a noun rather

Index

than as a modifier. For example, after finishing the research, the screenplay was easy to write (who did the

research and who wrote the screenplay?). The best way to correct a dangling gerund is to give the

sentence its proper subject. The example above could be revised as after finishing the research, Pooks

5.111:

found the screenplay easy to write. Dangling gerunds can result in improbable statements. Consider while

Distinguishing

between participles

driving to San Antonio, my map was lost. The map was not the driver. Clarifying the subject makes the

and gerunds

sentence work {while driving to San Antonio, I lost my map}. Of course a gerund phrase as object of a

5.112:

preposition can function perfectly well, without dangling, in a sentence whose sense allows it {after

Dangling participles

dining with royalty, the next item on my to-do list is picnicking on the Eiffel Tower}.

5.113:

Dangling gerunds

5.114:

Five properties of

verbs

5.115:

Active and passive

voice

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.114 FIVE PROPERTIES OF VERBS

List of Tables

A verb has five properties: voice, mood, tense, person, and number.

Index

5.112:

Dangling participles

5.113:

Dangling gerunds

5.114:

Five properties of

verbs

5.115:

Active and passive

voice

5.116:

Progressive

conjugation and

voice

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.115 ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICE

List of Tables

Voice shows whether the subject acts (active voice) or is acted on (passive voice)--that is, whether the

Index

subject performs or receives the action of the verb. Only transitive verbs are said to have voice. The

clause the judge levied a $50 fine is in the active voice because the subject judge is acting. But the tree's

branch was broken by the storm is in the passive voice because the subject branch does not break itself--it

5.113:

is acted on by the object storm. The passive voice is always formed by joining an inflected form of be

Dangling gerunds

(or, in colloquial usage, get) with the verb's past participle. Compare the ox pulls the cart (active voice)

5.114:

Five properties of

with the cart is pulled by the ox (passive voice). A passive-voice verb in a modifying phrase often has

verbs

an implied be-verb: in the advice given by the novelist, the implied (or understood) words that was come

5.115:

before given; so the passive construction is was given. Although the be-verb is sometimes implied, the

Active and passive

voice

past participle must always be expressed. Sometimes the agent isn't named {his tires were slashed}. As

5.116:

a matter of style, passive voice {the matter will be given careful consideration} is typically, though not

Progressive

always, inferior to active voice {we will consider the matter carefully}. The choice between active and

conjugation and

voice

passive voice may depend on which point of view is desired. For instance, the mouse was caught by the

5.117:

cat describes the mouse's experience, whereas the cat caught the mouse describes the cat's.

Mood

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.116 PROGRESSIVE CONJUGATION AND VOICE

List of Tables

If an inflected form of be is joined with another verb's present participle, a progressive conjugation is

Index

produced {the ox is pulling the cart}. The progressive conjugation is in the active voice because the

subject is performing the action, not being acted on.

5.114:

Five properties of

verbs

5.115:

Active and passive

voice

5.116:

Progressive

conjugation and

voice

5.117:

Mood

5.118:

Indicative mood

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.117 MOOD

List of Tables

Mood (or mode) indicates the manner in which the verb expresses an action or state of being. The

Index

three moods are indicative, imperative, and subjunctive.

5.115:

Active and passive

voice

5.116:

Progressive

conjugation and

voice

5.117:

Mood

5.118:

Indicative mood

5.119:

Imperative mood

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.118 INDICATIVE MOOD

List of Tables

The indicative mood is the most common in English. It is used to express facts and opinions and to

Index

ask questions {amethysts cost very little} {the botanist lives in a garden cottage} {Does that bush

produce yellow roses?}.

5.116:

Progressive

conjugation and

voice

5.117:

Mood

5.118:

Indicative mood

5.119:

Imperative mood

5.120:

Subjunctive mood

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.119 IMPERATIVE MOOD

List of Tables

The imperative mood expresses commands {Go away!}, direct requests {bring the tray in here}, and,

Index

sometimes, permission {Come in!}. The subject of the verb, you, is understood although the sentence

might include a direct address {give me the magazine} {Cindy, take good care of yourself} ( Cindy is a

direct address, not the subject). Use the imperative mood cautiously: in some contexts it could be too

5.117:

blunt or unintentionally rude. You can soften the imperative by using words such as please {please

Mood

stop at the store}. If that isn't satisfactory, recast the sentence in the indicative {Will you stop at the

5.118:

Indicative mood

store please?}.

5.119:

Imperative mood

5.120:

Subjunctive mood

5.121:

Indicative instead

of subjunctive

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.120 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD

List of Tables

Although the subjunctive mood is not often used in American English, it is useful when you want to

Index

express an action or state not as a reality but as a mental conception. Typically the subjunctive

expresses an action or state as doubtful, imagined, desired, conditional, hypothetical, or otherwise

contrary to fact. In addition to the hypothetical {if I were you}, the subjunctive mood can be used to

5.118:

signal wishes {if I were a rich man}, conjectures {oh, were it so}, demands {the landlord insists that the

Indicative mood

dog go}, and suggestions {I recommend that she take a vacation}. And despite its decline, the

5.119:

Imperative mood

subjunctive mood persists in stock expressions such as perish the thought, heaven help us, or be that as it

5.120:

may.

Subjunctive mood

5.121:

Indicative instead

of subjunctive

5.122:

Tenses generally

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.121 INDICATIVE INSTEAD OF SUBJUNCTIVE

List of Tables

Although the subjunctive mood is often signaled by if, not every if takes a subjunctive verb. When the

Index

action or state might be true but the writer does not know, the indicative is called for instead of the

subjunctive {if I am right about this, please call} {if Napoleon was in fact poisoned with arsenic,

historians will need to reevaluate his associates}.

5.119:

Imperative mood

5.120:

Subjunctive mood

5.121:

Indicative instead

of subjunctive

5.122:

Tenses generally

5.123:

Present tense

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.122 TENSES GENERALLY

List of Tables

Tense shows the time in which an act, state, or condition occurs or occurred. The three major

Index

divisions of time are present, past, and future. (Some modern grammarians hold that English has no

future tense; see 5.125.) Each division of time includes a perfect tense that indicates a comparatively

more remote time: present perfect, past perfect, and future perfect.

5.120:

Subjunctive mood

5.121:

Indicative instead

of subjunctive

5.122:

Tenses generally

5.123:

Present tense

5.124:

Past tense

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.123 PRESENT TENSE

List of Tables

The present tense is the infinitive verb's stem, also called the present indicative {walk} {drink}. It

Index

primarily denotes acts, conditions, or states that occur in the present {the dog howls} {the air is cold}

{the water runs}. It is also used (1) to express a habitual action or general truth {cats prowl nightly}

{polluted water is a health threat}; (2) to refer to timeless facts, such as memorable persons and to

5.121:

works of the past that are still extant or enduring {Julius Caesar describes his strategies in The Gallic

Indicative instead

of subjunctive

War} {the Pompeiian mosaics are exquisite}; and (3) to narrate a fictional work's plot {the scene takes

5.122:

place aboard the Titanic}. This third point is important for those who write about literature.

Tenses generally

Characters in books, plays, and films do things--not did them. If you want to distinguish between

5.123:

present action and past action in literature, the present perfect tense is helpful {Hamlet, who has

Present tense

spoken with his father's ghost, reveals what he has learned to no one but Horatio}. See 5.126.

5.124:

Past tense

5.125:

Future tense

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.124 PAST TENSE

List of Tables

The past tense is formed by inflection (see 5.98); the basic inflected form is called the past indicative

Index

{walked} {drank}. It denotes an act, state, or condition that occurred or existed at some explicit or

implicit point in the past {the auction ended yesterday} {we returned the shawl}.

5.122:

Tenses generally

5.123:

Present tense

5.124:

Past tense

5.125:

Future tense

5.126:

Present perfect

tense

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.125 FUTURE TENSE

List of Tables

The future tense is formed by using will with the verb's stem form {will walk} {will drink}. It refers to

Index

an expected act, state, or condition {the artist will design a wall mural} {the restaurant will open

soon}. Shall may be used instead of will, but in American English it typically appears only in first-

person questions involving choice {Shall we go?} and in legal commands {the debtor shall pay within

5.123:

30 days}. In most contexts, will is preferred. Incidentally, most linguists are now convinced that,

Present tense

technically speaking, English has no future tense at all--that will is simply a modal verb that should

5.124:

6

Past tense

be treated with all the others. Yet the future tense remains a part of traditional grammar and is

5.125:

discussed here in the familiar way.

Future tense

5.126:

Present perfect

tense

6. Trask, Language, 60.

5.127:

Past perfect tense

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.126 PRESENT PERFECT TENSE

List of Tables

The present perfect tense is formed by using have or has with the principal verb's past participle {have

Index

walked} {has drunk}. It denotes an act, state, or condition that is now completed or continues up to

the present {I have put away the clothes} {it has been a long day}. The present perfect is distinguished

from the past tense because it refers to (1) a time in the indefinite past {I have played golf there

5.124:

before} or (2) a past action that comes up to and touches the present {I have played cards for the last

Past tense

eighteen hours}. The past tense, by contrast, indicates a more specific or a more remote time in the

5.125:

Future tense

past.

5.126:

Present perfect

tense

5.127:

Past perfect tense

5.128:

Future perfect

tense

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.127 PAST PERFECT TENSE

List of Tables

The past perfect (or pluperfect) tense is formed by using had with the principal verb's past participle

Index

{had walked} {had drunk}. It refers to an act, state, or condition that was completed before another

specified or implicit past time or past action {the engineer had driven the train to the roundhouse

before we arrived} {by the time we stopped to check the map, the rain had begun falling} {the movie

5.125:

had ended already}.

Future tense

5.126:

Present perfect

tense

5.127:

Past perfect tense

5.128:

Future perfect

tense

5.129:

Person

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.128 FUTURE PERFECT TENSE

List of Tables

The future perfect tense is formed by using will have with the verb's past participle {will have walked}

Index

{will have drunk}. It refers to an act, state, or condition that is expected to be completed before some

other future act or time {the entomologist will have collected sixty more specimens before the

semester ends} {the court will have adjourned by five o'clock}. Shall can also form the future perfect,

5.126:

but usually only for the first person, and it is not preferred {I shall have finished by tomorrow} {we

Present perfect

tense

shall have written before we embark}.

5.127:

Past perfect tense

5.128:

Future perfect

tense

5.129:

Person

5.130:

Number

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.129 PERSON

List of Tables

A verb's person shows whether the act, state, or condition is that of (1) the person speaking (first

Index

person, I or we); (2) the person spoken to (second person, you); or (3) the person spoken of (third

person, he, she, it, or they).

5.127:

Past perfect tense

5.128:

Future perfect

tense

5.129:

Person

5.130:

Number

5.131:

Agreement in

person and number

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.130 NUMBER

List of Tables

The number of a verb must agree with the number of the noun or pronoun used with it. In other

Index

words, the verb must be singular or plural. Only the third-person present-indicative singular changes

form to indicate number and person {you sketch, they sketch, but she sketches}. The second-person

verb is always plural in form, whether one person or more than one person is spoken to {you are a

5.128:

wonderful person} {you are wonderful people}.

Future perfect

tense

5.129:

Person

5.130:

Number

5.131:

Agreement in

person and number

5.132:

False attraction to

predicate

nominative

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.131 AGREEMENT IN PERSON AND NUMBER

List of Tables

A finite verb agrees with its subject in person and number. When a verb has two or more subjects

Index

connected by and, it agrees with them jointly and is plural {Socrates and Plato were wise}. When a

verb has two or more singular subjects connected by or or nor, it is singular {Jill or Jan is prepared to

speak} {neither Bob nor John has learned his lesson}. When the subject is a collective noun conveying

5.129:

the idea of unity or multitude, the verb is singular {the nation is powerful}. When the subject is a

Person

collective noun conveying the idea of plurality, the verb is plural {the faculty were divided in their

5.130:

Number

sentiments}.

5.131:

Agreement in

person and number

5.132:

False attraction to

predicate

nominative

5.133:

Misleading

connectives: "as

well as," "along

with," "together

with," and so forth

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.132 FALSE ATTRACTION TO PREDICATE NOMINATIVE

List of Tables

A plural predicate nominative after a singular subject may mislead a writer by suggesting a plural

Index

verb. When this occurs, the simple correction of changing the number of the verb may make the

sentence awkward, and the better approach then is to rework the sentence:

5.130:

WRONG: My downfall are sweets.

Number

RIGHT: My downfall is sweets.

5.131:

BETTER: Sweets are my downfall.

Agreement in

person and number

5.132:

False attraction to

predicate

nominative

5.133:

Misleading

connectives: "as

well as," "along

with," "together

with," and so forth

5.134:

Conjugation

defined

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Properties of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.133 MISLEADING CONNECTIVES: "AS WELL AS," "ALONG WITH," "TOGETHER WITH," AND SO FORTH

List of Tables

Adding to a singular subject by using phrasal connectives such as along with, as well as, in addition to,

Index

together with, and the like does not make the subject plural. This type of distraction can be doubly

misleading because the intervening material seems to create a compound subject, and the modifying

prepositional phrase may itself contain one or more plural objects. If the singular verb sounds

5.131:

awkward in such a sentence, it may be better to use the conjunction and instead:

Agreement in

person and number

WRONG: The bride as well as her bridesmaids were dressed in mauve.

5.132:

False attraction to

RIGHT: The bride as well as her bridesmaids was dressed in mauve.

predicate

BETTER: The bride and her bridesmaids were dressed in mauve.

nominative

5.133:

Misleading

connectives: "as

well as," "along

with," "together

with," and so forth

5.134:

Conjugation

defined

5.135:

Verb stem (present

indicative)

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Conjugation of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.134 CONJUGATION DEFINED

List of Tables

Conjugation means changing (inflecting) a verb's form to reflect voice, mood, tense, person, and

Index

number. A verb has seven conjugated parts: the present indicative, the present participle, the present

subjunctive, the past indicative, the past participle, the past subjunctive, and the imperative. The rules

for conjugation of all verbs except auxiliaries are explained in the following sections.

5.132:

False attraction to

predicate

nominative

5.133:

Misleading

connectives: "as

well as," "along

with," "together

with," and so forth

5.134:

Conjugation

defined

5.135:

Verb stem (present

indicative)

5.136:

Forming present

participles

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Conjugation of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.135 VERB STEM (PRESENT INDICATIVE)

List of Tables

The present indicative is the verb stem for all persons, singular and plural, in the present tense--

Index

except for the third-person singular, which adds an -s to the stem {takes} {strolls} {says}. If the verb

ends in -o, an -es is added {goes} {does}. If the verb ends in a consonant followed by -y, the -y is

changed to -i and then an -es is added {identify--identifies} {carry--carries}.

5.133:

Misleading

connectives: "as

well as," "along

with," "together

with," and so forth

5.134:

Conjugation

defined

5.135:

Verb stem (present

indicative)

5.136:

Forming present

participles

5.137:

Present subjunctive

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Conjugation of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.136 FORMING PRESENT PARTICIPLES

List of Tables

The present participle is formed by adding -ing to the stem of the verb {reaping} {wandering}. If the

Index

stem ends in -ie, the -ie usually changes to -y before the -ing is added {die--dying} {tie--tying}. If the

stem ends in a silent -e, that -e is usually dropped before the -ing is added {giving} {leaving}. There are

two exceptions to this rule. The silent -e is retained when (a) the word ends with -oe {toe--toeing}

5.134:

{hoe--hoeing} {shoe--shoeing} or (b) the verb has a participle that would resemble another word but

Conjugation

defined

for the distinguishing -e (e.g., dyeing means something different from dying, and singeing means

5.135:

something different from singing). Regular and irregular verbs both form the present participle in the

Verb stem (present

same way. The present participle is the same for all persons and numbers.

indicative)

5.136:

Forming present

participles

5.137:

Present subjunctive

5.138:

Past indicative

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Conjugation of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.137 PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE

List of Tables

Apart from a few set phrases (e.g., so be it, be they, she need not), in present-day English the present

Index

subjunctive typically appears in the form if I [ he, she, it] were {if I were king} {if she were any

different}. That is, the present subjunctive ordinarily uses a past-tense verb (e.g., were) to connote

uncertainty, impossibility, or unreality. Compare if I am threatened, I will quit (indicative) with if I were

5.135:

threatened, I would quit (subjunctive), or if the canary sings, I smile (indicative) with if the canary sang [or

Verb stem (present

indicative)

should sing, or were to sing], I would smile (subjunctive). See also 5.120.

5.136:

Forming present

participles

5.137:

Present subjunctive

5.138:

Past indicative

5.139:

Forming past

participles

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Conjugation of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.138 PAST INDICATIVE

List of Tables

The past indicative of a regular verb is formed by adding â€‘ed to its base form {like--liked} {spill--

Index

spilled}. In words of more than one syllable, the final consonant is doubled if it is part of the syllable

that is stressed both before and after the inflection {prefer--preferred} but not otherwise {travel--

traveled}. In British English there is no such distinction: all such consonants are doubled. Irregular

5.136:

verbs form the past tense in various ways {give--gave} {stride--strode} {read--read}. A good dictionary

Forming present

participles

will show an irregular verb's past indicative form.

5.137:

Present subjunctive

5.138:

Past indicative

5.139:

Forming past

participles

5.140:

Past subjunctive

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Conjugation of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.139 FORMING PAST PARTICIPLES

List of Tables

With regular verbs, the past participle is formed in the same way as the past indicative--that is, the

Index

past-indicative and past-participial forms are always identical {stated--stated} {pulled--pulled}. For

irregular verbs, the forms are sometimes the same {paid--paid} {sat--sat} and sometimes different

{forsook--forsaken} {shrank--shrunk}. A good dictionary will show the past participles.

5.137:

Present subjunctive

5.138:

Past indicative

5.139:

Forming past

participles

5.140:

Past subjunctive

5.141:

Imperative

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Conjugation of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.140 PAST SUBJUNCTIVE

List of Tables

The past subjunctive typically appears in the form if I [ he, she, it] had been {if I had gone} {if he had

Index

been there}. That is, the past subjunctive ordinarily uses a past-perfect verb (e.g., had been) to connote

uncertainty or impossibility. Compare if it arrived, it was not properly filed (indicative) with if it had

arrived, it could have changed the course of history (subjunctive).

5.138:

Past indicative

5.139:

Forming past

participles

5.140:

Past subjunctive

5.141:

Imperative

5.142:

Auxiliary verbs

defined

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Conjugation of Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.141 IMPERATIVE

List of Tables

The imperative is the verb's stem used to make a command, a request, an exclamation, or the like

Index

{Come here!} {Give me a clue.} {Help!}.

5.139:

Forming past

participles

5.140:

Past subjunctive

5.141:

Imperative

5.142:

Auxiliary verbs

defined

5.143:

"Can"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Auxiliary Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.142 AUXILIARY VERBS DEFINED

List of Tables

An auxiliary verb (sometimes termed a modal or helping verb) is a highly irregular verb that is used

Index

with other verbs to form voice, tense, and mood. The main ones are explained in the following

sections. See also 5.101.

5.140:

Past subjunctive

5.141:

Imperative

5.142:

Auxiliary verbs

defined

5.143:

"Can"

5.144:

"Do"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Auxiliary Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.143 "CAN"

List of Tables

This verb uses only its stem form in the present indicative {I can} {it can} {they can}. In the past

Index

indicative, can becomes could for all persons {he could see better with glasses}. Can does not have an

infinitive form ( to be able to is substituted) or a present or past participle. When it denotes ability,

capacity, or permission, can is always followed by an explicit or implicit principal verb {you can carry

5.141:

this trunk}. When used in the sense of permission, can is colloquial for may {Can I go to the movies?}.

Imperative

Can also connotes an actual possibility {spring storms can be severe} {days can pass before a decision

5.142:

Auxiliary verbs

is announced}.

defined

5.143:

"Can"

5.144:

"Do"

5.145:

"Have"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Auxiliary Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.144 "DO"

List of Tables

This verb has two forms in the present indicative: does for the third-person singular and do for all

Index

other persons. In the past indicative, the only form for all persons is did. The past participle is done. As

an auxiliary verb, do is used only in the present and past indicative {Did you speak?} {we do plan

some charity work}. When the verb in an imperative statement is coupled with not, do also appears

5.142:

{Do not touch!} {Don't be an idiot!}. When denoting performance, do can also act as a principal verb

Auxiliary verbs

defined

{he does well in school} {they do good work}. Do can sometimes substitute for another verb as a

5.143:

means of avoiding repetition {Marion dances well, and so do you} {he caught fewer mistakes than

"Can"

you did}.

5.144:

"Do"

5.145:

"Have"

5.146:

"May" and "might"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Auxiliary Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.145 "HAVE"

List of Tables

This verb has two forms in the present indicative: has for the third-person singular and have for all

Index

other persons. In the past indicative, the only form for all persons is had; the past participle is also had.

When the present or past indicative of the auxiliary have precedes the past participle of any verb, that

verb's present-perfect or past-perfect indicative mood is formed {I have looked everywhere} {he had

5.143:

looked for a better rate}. When denoting possession, have can also be a sentence's principal verb {she

"Can"

has a car and a boat} {you have a mosquito on your neck}. When have got precedes to plus an

5.144:

"Do"

infinitive, it means must {I have got to pass this test!}. Had plus to and an infinitive expresses the past

5.145:

form of must {I had to leave yesterday afternoon}.

"Have"

5.146:

"May" and "might"

5.147:

"Must"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Auxiliary Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.146 "MAY" AND "MIGHT"

List of Tables

May denotes permission {you may go to the movies}. In its negative form, may not is sometimes

Index

displaced by the more intensive must not. Compare you may not climb that tree with you must not climb

that tree. May sometimes connotes an uncertain possibility {you may find that assignment too

difficult} and often becomes might {you might find that assignment too difficult}. This verb has only

5.144:

its stem form in the present indicative {I may} {it may} {they may}. In the past indicative, may often

"Do"

becomes might, especially to connote uncertainty {the jeweler might have forgotten to call}. May does

5.145:

"Have"

not have an infinitive form, or a present or past participle. As an auxiliary, may, denoting wishfulness

5.146:

or purpose, forms a subjunctive equivalent {may you always be happy} {give so that others may live}.

"May" and "might"

5.147:

"Must"

5.148:

"Ought"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Auxiliary Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.147 "MUST"

List of Tables

Must denotes a necessity that arises from someone's will {we must obey the rules} or from

Index

circumstances {you must ask what the next step is}. Must also connotes a logical conclusion {that must

be the right answer} {that must be the house we're looking for} {it must have been Donna who

phoned}. This verb does not vary its form in either the present or past indicative. It does not have an

5.145:

infinitive form ( to have to is substituted) or a present or past participle. Denoting obligation, necessity,

"Have"

or inference, must is always used with an express or implied infinitive {we must finish this design}

5.146:

"May" and "might"

{everyone must eat} {the movie must be over by now}.

5.147:

"Must"

5.148:

"Ought"

5.149:

"Shall" and "should"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Auxiliary Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.148 "OUGHT"

List of Tables

Ought denotes what is reasonably expected of a person or circumstances {they ought to fix the fence}

Index

{they left at dawn, so they ought to be here soon}. It is more emphatic than should. This verb does not

vary its form in either the present or past indicative. It has no infinitive form, or present or past

participle. Denoting a duty or obligation, ought is always used with an infinitive, even in the negative

5.146:

{we ought to invite some friends} {the driver ought not to have ignored the signal}. To is occasionally

"May" and "might"

omitted after not {you ought not worry}, but the better usage is to include it {you ought not to worry}.

5.147:

"Must"

See also 5.104.

5.148:

"Ought"

5.149:

"Shall" and "should"

5.150:

"Will" and "would"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Auxiliary Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.149 "SHALL" AND "SHOULD"

List of Tables

Shall uses only its stem form in the present indicative. It is a relatively rare word in present-day

Index

American English, except in first-person jocular uses {Shall we dance?} {Shall I fetch you some coffee?

}. The past indicative form, should, is used for all persons and always with a principal verb {they

should be at home} {Should you read that newspaper?} (note that these verbs do not actually function

5.147:

as past indicatives). Should does not have an infinitive form, or a present or past participle. Should

"Must"

often carries a sense of duty, compulsion, or expectation {I should review those financial-planning

5.148:

"Ought"

tips} {you should clean the garage today} {it should be ready by now}; sometimes it carries a sense of

5.149:

inference {the package should have been delivered today}; and sometimes it conveys the speaker's

"Shall" and "should"

attitude {How should I know?} {you shouldn't have to deal with that}.

5.150:

"Will" and "would"

5.151:

Forms of "be"-verbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> Auxiliary Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.150 "WILL" AND "WOULD"

List of Tables

In its auxiliary uses, will has several senses. This verb uses only its stem form in the present indicative

Index

{she will} {they will}. In the past indicative, the only form for all persons is would {we would go

fishing on Saturdays} {She would say that!}. Would sometimes expresses a condition {I would slide

down the hill if you lent me your sled}. Will often carries a sense of the future {she will be at her desk

5.148:

tomorrow} or, in the past form would, expresses a conditional statement {I would recognize the house

"Ought"

if I saw it again}.

5.149:

"Shall" and "should"

5.150:

"Will" and "would"

5.151:

Forms of "be"-verbs

5.152:

Conjugation of

"be"-verbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> "Be"-Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.151 FORMS OF "BE"-VERBS

List of Tables

The verb be has eight forms ( be, is, are, was, were, been, being, and am) and has several special uses.

Index

First, it is sometimes a sentence's principal verb meaning "exist" {I think, therefore I am}. Second, it is

more often used as an auxiliary verb {I was born in Lubbock}. When joined with a verb's present

participle, it denotes continuing or progressive action {the train is coming} {the passenger was

5.149:

waiting}. When joined with a past participle, the verb becomes passive {a signal was given} {an

"Shall" and "should"

earring was dropped} (see 5.115). Often this type of construction can be advantageously changed to

5.150:

"Will" and "would"

active voice {he gave the signal} {she dropped her earring}. Third, be is the most common linking verb

5.151:

that connects the subject with something affirmed of the subject {truth is beauty} {we are the

Forms of "be"-verbs

champions}. Occasionally a be-verb is used as part of an adjective {a rock star wannabe [want to be]}

5.152:

{a would-be hero} or noun {a has-been}.

Conjugation of

"be"-verbs

5.153:

Adverbs defined

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Verbs >> "Be"-Verbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.152 CONJUGATION OF "BE"-VERBS

List of Tables

Be is conjugated differently from other verbs. (1) The stem is not used in the present indicative form.

Index

Instead, be has three forms: for the first-person singular, am; for the third-person singular, is; and for

all other persons, are. (2) The present participle is formed by adding â€‘ing to the root be {being}. It is

the same for all persons, but the present perfect requires also using am, is, or are {I am being} {it is

5.150:

being} {you are being}. (3) The past indicative has two forms: the first- and third-person singular use

"Will" and "would"

was; all other persons use were {she was} {we were}. (4) The past participle for all persons is been {I

5.151:

Forms of "be"-verbs

have been} {they have been}. (5) The imperative is the verb's stem {Be yourself!}.

5.152:

Conjugation of

"be"-verbs

5.153:

Adverbs defined

5.154:

Adverbs with

suffixes

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Definition and Formation

of Contents

List of Figures

5.153 ADVERBS DEFINED

List of Tables

An adverb is a word that qualifies, limits, describes, or modifies a verb, an adjective, or another

Index

adverb {she studied constantly} ( constantly qualifies the verb studied); {the juggler's act was really

unusual} ( really qualifies the adjective unusual); {the cyclist pedaled very swiftly} ( very qualifies the

adverb swiftly). An adverb may also qualify a preposition, a conjunction, or a clause {the birds flew

5.151:

right over the lake} ( right qualifies the preposition over); {this is exactly where I found it} ( exactly

Forms of "be"-verbs

qualifies the conjunction where); {apparently you forgot to check your references} ( apparently qualifies

5.152:

Conjugation of

the rest of the clause). Finally, grammarians have traditionally used the term adverb as a catch-all

"be"-verbs

category to sweep in words that aren't readily put into categories (such as the infinitival to [see 5.104]

5.153:

and the particle in a phrasal verb [see 5.100]).

Adverbs defined

5.154:

Adverbs with

suffixes

5.155:

Adverbs without

suffixes

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Definition and Formation

of Contents

List of Figures

5.154 ADVERBS WITH SUFFIXES

List of Tables

Many adjectives have corresponding adverbs distinguished by the suffix -ly or, after most words

Index

ending in -ic, -ally {slow--slowly} {careful--carefully} {public--publicly} {pedantic--pedantically}. Most

adjectives ending in -y preceded by a consonant change the -y to -i when the suffix is added, but some

do not {happy--happily} {shy--shyly}. A few adjectives ending in -e drop the vowel {true--truly}

5.152:

{whole--wholly}. If an adjective ends in -le and it is sounded as part of a syllable, it is replaced with

Conjugation of

"be"-verbs

-ly {terrible--terribly} {simple--simply}. An adjective that ends in a double -l takes only a -y suffix

5.153:

{dull--dully}. Many adjectives ending in -le or -ly do not make appealing adverbs {juvenile--juvenilely}

Adverbs defined

{silly--sillily}. If an -ly adverb looks clumsy (e.g., ghastlily or uglily), either rephrase the sentence or use

5.154:

a phrase (e.g., in a ghastly manner or in an ugly way). Adverbial suffixes are sometimes added to

Adverbs with

suffixes

phrases {replied matter-of-factly}. Some terms are compounded with nouns to form adverbs {he rides

5.155:

cowboy-style}; a few nouns form adverbs by taking the ending -ways {side--sideways}, -ward {sky--

Adverbs without

skyward}, or -wise {clock--clockwise}.

suffixes

5.156:

Adverbs

distinguished from

adjectives

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Definition and Formation

of Contents

List of Figures

5.155 ADVERBS WITHOUT SUFFIXES

List of Tables

Many adverbs do not have an identifying suffix (e.g., almost, never, here, now, just, seldom, late, near,

Index

too). And not every word ending in â€‘ly is an adverb--some are adjectives (e.g., lovely, curly).

5.153:

Adverbs defined

5.154:

Adverbs with

suffixes

5.155:

Adverbs without

suffixes

5.156:

Adverbs

distinguished from

adjectives

5.157:

Simple and flat

adverbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Definition and Formation

of Contents

List of Figures

5.156 ADVERBS DISTINGUISHED FROM ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

Unlike an adjective, an adverb doesn't modify a noun or pronoun {we made an early start and arrived

Index

at the airport early} (the first early is an adjective modifying the noun start; the second is an adverb

modifying arrived). Some adverbs are identical to prepositions (e.g., up or off) but are distinguishable

because they are not attached to a following noun {he ran up a large bill} {let's cast off}. These

5.154:

prepositional adverbs (sometimes called particles or particle adverbs) are typically parts of phrasal

Adverbs with

suffixes

verbs. See 5.100.

5.155:

Adverbs without

suffixes

5.156:

Adverbs

distinguished from

adjectives

5.157:

Simple and flat

adverbs

5.158:

Phrasal and

compound adverbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Simple versus Compound Adverbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.157 SIMPLE AND FLAT ADVERBS

List of Tables

A simple adverb is a single word that qualifies a single part of speech {hardly} {now} {deep}. A flat or

Index

bare adverb is one that has an â€‘ly form but whose adjectival form may work equally well or even

better, especially when used with an imperative in an informal context {drive slow} {hold on tight}

{tell me quick}. Some flat adverbs are always used in their adjectival form {work fast} because the â

5.155:

€‘ly has become obsolete (although it may linger in other words--e.g., steadfast and steadfastly). And

Adverbs without

suffixes

the flat adverb may have a different meaning from the â€‘ly adverb. Compare I am working hard with I

5.156:

am hardly working.

Adverbs

distinguished from

adjectives

5.157:

Simple and flat

adverbs

5.158:

Phrasal and

compound adverbs

5.159:

Three adverbial

degrees

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Simple versus Compound Adverbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.158 PHRASAL AND COMPOUND ADVERBS

List of Tables

A phrasal adverb consists of two or more words that function together as an adverb {in the

Index

meantime} {for a while} {here and there}. A compound adverb appears to be a single word but is a

compound of several words {notwithstanding} {heretofore} {thereupon}. Compound adverbs should

be used cautiously and sparingly because they make the tone stuffy.

5.156:

Adverbs

distinguished from

adjectives

5.157:

Simple and flat

adverbs

5.158:

Phrasal and

compound adverbs

5.159:

Three adverbial

degrees

5.160:

Comparative forms

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Adverbial Degrees

of Contents

List of Figures

5.159 THREE ADVERBIAL DEGREES

List of Tables

Like adjectives (see 5.83), adverbs have three degrees: the positive, the comparative, and the

Index

superlative. A positive adverb simply expresses a quality without reference to any other thing {the

nurse spoke softly} {the choir sang merrily}.

5.157:

Simple and flat

adverbs

5.158:

Phrasal and

compound adverbs

5.159:

Three adverbial

degrees

5.160:

Comparative forms

5.161:

Superlative forms

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Adverbial Degrees

of Contents

List of Figures

5.160 COMPARATIVE FORMS

List of Tables

Most one-syllable adverbs that do not end in -ly form the comparative by taking the suffix -er {sooner}

Index

{harder}. Multisyllable adverbs usually form the comparative with more or less {the Shakespearean

villain fenced more ineptly than the hero} {the patient is walking less painfully today}. But there are

exceptions for adverbs that end in -ly if the -ly is not a suffix {early--earlier}. A comparative adverb

5.158:

compares the quality of a specified action or condition shared by two things {Bitey worked longer

Phrasal and

compound adverbs

than Arachne} {Rachel studied more industriously than Edith}.

5.159:

Three adverbial

degrees

5.160:

Comparative forms

5.161:

Superlative forms

5.162:

Irregular adverbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Adverbial Degrees

of Contents

List of Figures

5.161 SUPERLATIVE FORMS

List of Tables

Most one-syllable adverbs that do not end in -ly form the superlative by taking the suffix -est

Index

{soonest} {hardest}. Multisyllable adverbs usually form the superlative with most or least {everyone's

eyesight was acute, but I could see most acutely} {of all the people making choices, he chose least

wisely}. But there are exceptions for adverbs that end in -ly if the -ly is not a suffix {early--earliest}. A

5.159:

superlative adverb compares the quality of a specified action or condition shared by at least three

Three adverbial

degrees

things {Sullie bowled fastest of all the cricketers} {of the three doctoral candidates, Rebecca defended

5.160:

her dissertation the most adamantly}. In a loose sense, the superlative is sometimes used for emphasis

Comparative forms

rather than comparison {the pianist played most skillfully}.

5.161:

Superlative forms

5.162:

Irregular adverbs

5.163:

Uncomparable

adverbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Adverbial Degrees

of Contents

List of Figures

5.162 IRREGULAR ADVERBS

List of Tables

A few adverbs have irregular comparative and superlative forms {badly--worse--worst} {little--less--

Index

least}. A good dictionary is the best resource for finding an irregular adverb's forms of comparison.

5.160:

Comparative forms

5.161:

Superlative forms

5.162:

Irregular adverbs

5.163:

Uncomparable

adverbs

5.164:

Intensifiers

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Adverbial Degrees

of Contents

List of Figures

5.163 UNCOMPARABLE ADVERBS

List of Tables

Many adverbs are uncomparable. Some, by definition, are absolute and cannot be compared

Index

{eternally} {never} {singly} {uniquely} {universally}. Most adverbs indicating time {now} {then},

position {on}, number {first} {finally}, or place {here} are also uncomparable.

5.161:

Superlative forms

5.162:

Irregular adverbs

5.163:

Uncomparable

adverbs

5.164:

Intensifiers

5.165:

Placement of

adverbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Adverbial Degrees

of Contents

List of Figures

5.164 INTENSIFIERS

List of Tables

An adverb can be intensified with words like very and quite {the very fashionably dressed actor}

Index

{everyone ate quite heartily}.

5.162:

Irregular adverbs

5.163:

Uncomparable

adverbs

5.164:

Intensifiers

5.165:

Placement of

adverbs

5.166:

Adverbs modifying

intransitive verbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Position of Adverbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.165 PLACEMENT OF ADVERBS

List of Tables

The adverb should generally be placed as near as possible to the word it is intended to modify. For

Index

example, in the marathoners submitted their applications to compete immediately, what does immediately

modify-- compete or submitted? Placing the adverb with the word it modifies makes the meaning clear--

for instance, the marathoners immediately submitted their applications to compete. A misplaced adverb can

5.163:

completely change a sentence's meaning. For example, we nearly lost all our camping equipment states

Uncomparable

adverbs

that the equipment was saved; we lost nearly all our camping equipment states that almost everything

5.164:

was lost.

Intensifiers

5.165:

Placement of

adverbs

5.166:

Adverbs modifying

intransitive verbs

5.167:

Adverbs and linking

verbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Position of Adverbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.166 ADVERBS MODIFYING INTRANSITIVE VERBS

List of Tables

If the adverb qualifies an intransitive verb, it should immediately follow the verb {the students sighed

Index

gloomily when homework was assigned} {the owl perched precariously on a thin branch}. Some

exceptions are always, never, often, generally, rarely, and seldom, which may precede the verb

{mountaineers seldom succeed in climbing K2}.

5.164:

Intensifiers

5.165:

Placement of

adverbs

5.166:

Adverbs modifying

intransitive verbs

5.167:

Adverbs and linking

verbs

5.168:

Adverb within a

verb phrase

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Position of Adverbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.167 ADVERBS AND LINKING VERBS

List of Tables

Adverbs do not generally modify linking verbs (see 5.99), such as be-verbs, appear, seem, become, look,

Index

smell, taste, hear, and feel. These verbs connect a descriptive word with the clause's subject; the

descriptive word applies to the subject, not the verb {he seems modest}. To determine whether a verb

is a linking verb, the writer must consider whether the descriptive word describes the action or

5.165:

condition, or the subject. For example, the sculptor feels badly literally describes the act of feeling or

Placement of

adverbs

touching as not done well. But the sculptor feels bad describes the sculptor as unwell or perhaps

5.166:

experiencing guilt.

Adverbs modifying

intransitive verbs

5.167:

Adverbs and linking

verbs

5.168:

Adverb within a

verb phrase

5.169:

Prepositions

defined

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Adverbs >> Position of Adverbs

of Contents

List of Figures

5.168 ADVERB WITHIN A VERB PHRASE

List of Tables

When an adverb qualifies a verb phrase, the natural place for the adverb is between the auxiliary verb

Index

and the principal verb {the administration has consistently repudiated this view} {the reports will

soon generate controversy} {public opinion is sharply divided}. (See 5.102.) Some adverbs may follow

the principal verb {you must go quietly} {Are you asking rhetorically?}. There is no rule against

5.166:

adverbial modifiers between the parts of a verb phrase. In fact, it's typically preferable to put them

Adverbs modifying

intransitive verbs

there {the heckler was abruptly expelled} {the bus had been seriously damaged in the crash}. And

5.167:

sometimes it is perfectly appropriate to split an infinitive verb with an adverb to add emphasis or to

Adverbs and linking

produce a natural sound. (See 5.106.) A verb's infinitive or to form is split when an intervening word

verbs

immediately follows to {to bravely assert}. If the adverb bears the emphasis in a phrase {to boldly go}

5.168:

Adverb within a

{to strongly favor}, then leave the split infinitive alone. But if moving the adverb to the end of the

verb phrase

phrase doesn't suggest a different meaning or impair the sound, then it's an acceptable way to avoid

5.169:

splitting the verb. Recasting a sentence just to eliminate a split infinitive or avoid splitting the

Prepositions

defined

infinitive can alter its nuance or meaning--for instance, it's best to always get up early ( always modifies

5.170:

get up) is not quite the same as it's always best to get up early ( always modifies best). Moreover,

Simple and

compound

sometimes "fixing" a split infinitive makes the sentence sound unnatural, as in it's best to get up early

prepositions

always.

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Definition and Types

of Contents

List of Figures

5.169 PREPOSITIONS DEFINED

List of Tables

A preposition is a word or phrase that links an object and an antecedent to show the relationship

Index

between them. A preposition's object is usually a noun, or else a pronoun in the objective case

{between me and them}, but an adjective, adverb, verb, or phrase may follow instead. Usually a

preposition comes before its object, but there are exceptions. For example, the preposition can end a

5.167:

clause, especially a relative clause, or sentence {this isn't the pen that Steve writes with}. And a

Adverbs and linking

verbs

preposition used with the relative pronoun that (or with that understood) always follows the object

5.168:

{this is the moment [that] I've been waiting for}. It also frequently, but not always, follows the relative

Adverb within a

pronouns which {Which alternative is your decision based on?} {this is the alternative on which my

verb phrase

decision is based} and whom {there is a banker [whom] I must speak with} {I can't tell you to whom

5.169:

Prepositions

you should apply}.

defined

5.170:

Simple and

compound

prepositions

5.171:

Participial

prepositions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Definition and Types

of Contents

List of Figures

5.170 SIMPLE AND COMPOUND PREPOSITIONS

List of Tables

Many prepositions are relatively straightforward. A simple preposition consists of a single

Index

monosyllabic word--for example, as, at, by, down, for, from, in, like, of, off, on, plus, since, through, to, toward, up, and with. A compound preposition has two or more syllables; it may be made up of two

or more words {into} {outside} {upon}. Some examples are about, above, across, after, against, alongside,

5.168:

around, before, below, beneath, between, despite, except, inside, onto, opposite, throughout, underneath, until,

Adverb within a

verb phrase

and without.

5.169:

Prepositions

defined

5.170:

Simple and

compound

prepositions

5.171:

Participial

prepositions

5.172:

Phrasal

prepositions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Definition and Types

of Contents

List of Figures

5.171 PARTICIPIAL PREPOSITIONS

List of Tables

A participial preposition is a participial form that functions as a preposition (or sometimes as a

Index

subordinating conjunction). Examples include assuming, barring, concerning, considering, during,

notwithstanding, owing to, provided, regarding, respecting, and speaking. Unlike other participles, these

words do not create danglers when they have no subject {considering the road conditions, the trip

5.169:

went quickly} {regarding Watergate, he had nothing to say}. See 5.112.

Prepositions

defined

5.170:

Simple and

compound

prepositions

5.171:

Participial

prepositions

5.172:

Phrasal

prepositions

5.173:

Prepositional

phrases defined

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Definition and Types

of Contents

List of Figures

5.172 PHRASAL PREPOSITIONS

List of Tables

A phrasal preposition (sometimes called a complex preposition) is two or more separate words used

Index

as a prepositional unit. These include according to, because of, by means of, by reason of, by way of, contrary

to, for the sake of, in accordance with, in addition to, in apposition with, in case of, in consideration of, in front

of, in regard to, in respect to, in spite of, instead of, on account of, out of, with reference to, with regard to, and

5.170:

with respect to. Many of these phrasal prepositions are symptoms of officialese, bureaucratese, or other

Simple and

compound

types of verbose style. If a one-word preposition will do in context, use it. For example, if about will

prepositions

serve as well as with regard to or in connection with, a judicious editor will inevitably prefer to use the

5.171:

simpler expression.

Participial

prepositions

5.172:

Phrasal

prepositions

5.173:

Prepositional

phrases defined

5.174:

Prepositional

function

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Prepositional Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

5.173 PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES DEFINED

List of Tables

A prepositional phrase consists of a preposition, its object, and any words that modify the object. A

Index

prepositional phrase can be used as a noun {for James to change his mind would be a miracle}, an

adverb (also called an adverbial phrase) {we strolled through the glade}, or an adjective (also called

an adjectival phrase) {the cathedrals of Paris}.

5.171:

Participial

prepositions

5.172:

Phrasal

prepositions

5.173:

Prepositional

phrases defined

5.174:

Prepositional

function

5.175:

Placement of

prepositional

phrases

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Prepositional Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

5.174 PREPOSITIONAL FUNCTION

List of Tables

Prepositions signal many kinds of relationships. For example, a preposition may express a spatial

Index

relationship {to} {from} {out of} {into}, time {at} {for} {throughout} {until}, cause {because of} {on

account of}, means {like} {with} {by}, possession {without} {of}, exceptions {but for} {besides} {except},

support {with} {for}, opposition {against}, or concession {despite} {for all} {notwithstanding}.

5.172:

Phrasal

prepositions

5.173:

Prepositional

phrases defined

5.174:

Prepositional

function

5.175:

Placement of

prepositional

phrases

5.176:

Ending a sentence

with a preposition

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Prepositional Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

5.175 PLACEMENT OF PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES

List of Tables

A prepositional phrase with an adverbial or adjectival function should be as close as possible to the

Index

word it modifies to avoid awkwardness, ambiguity, or unintended meanings {Is a person with blond

hair named Sandy here?} {the woman with the Popular Front circulates petitions}. If a prepositional

phrase equally modifies all the elements of a compound construction, the phrase follows the last

5.173:

element in the compound {the date, the place, and the budget for the wedding have been decided}.

Prepositional

phrases defined

Note that if a prepositional phrase with plural objects follows the singular subject of a sentence, the

5.174:

predicate must still be singular--compare the predicate in the man and two daughters have arrived with

Prepositional

that in the man with two daughters has arrived and in the man has arrived with his two daughters.

function

5.175:

Placement of

prepositional

phrases

5.176:

Ending a sentence

with a preposition

5.177:

Clashing

prepositions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Prepositional Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

5.176 ENDING A SENTENCE WITH A PREPOSITION

List of Tables

The traditional caveat of yesteryear against ending sentences with prepositions is, for most writers, an

Index

unnecessary and pedantic restriction. As Winston Churchill famously said, "That is the type of arrant

pedantry up with which I shall not put." A sentence that ends in a preposition may sound more

natural than a sentence carefully constructed to avoid a final preposition. Compare, for example, this

5.174:

is the case I told you about with this is the case about which I told you. The "rule" prohibiting terminal

Prepositional

function

prepositions was an ill-founded superstition. Today many grammarians use the dismissive term pied-

5.175:

piping for this phenomenon.

Placement of

prepositional

phrases

5.176:

Ending a sentence

with a preposition

5.177:

Clashing

prepositions

5.178:

Elliptical

prepositional

phrases

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Prepositional Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

5.177 CLASHING PREPOSITIONS

List of Tables

If a phrasal verb {give in} precedes a prepositional phrase using the same term {in every argument},

Index

the adverb will clash with the preposition {he gives in in every argument}. Recast the sentence when

possible to avoid such repetition--for example, rather than continue arguing, he always gives in, or in

every argument, he gives in (see also 6.44). For more on phrasal verbs, see 5.100.

5.175:

Placement of

prepositional

phrases

5.176:

Ending a sentence

with a preposition

5.177:

Clashing

prepositions

5.178:

Elliptical

prepositional

phrases

5.179:

Effect of

prepositional

phrase on pronoun

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Prepositional Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

5.178 ELLIPTICAL PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES

List of Tables

Sometimes a prepositional phrase is elliptical--that is, an independent expression without an

Index

antecedent. Often such a phrase starts a clause and can be detached from the statement without

affecting the meaning. Elliptical prepositional phrases include for example, for instance, in a word, in any

event, in the last analysis, and in the long run {in any event, call me when you arrive}.

5.176:

Ending a sentence

with a preposition

5.177:

Clashing

prepositions

5.178:

Elliptical

prepositional

phrases

5.179:

Effect of

prepositional

phrase on pronoun

5.180:

Prepositions and

functional variation

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Prepositional Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

5.179 EFFECT OF PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE ON PRONOUN

List of Tables

A pronoun that appears in a prepositional phrase is usually in the objective case (see 5.18). There are

Index

exceptions. Than may function either as a conjunction {he's taller than I [am]} or as a preposition {he's

taller than me}. Traditional grammarians prefer the nominative than I [ am] over the objective than me,

even though the latter represents common usage. In formal prose, treat than as a conjunction requiring

5.177:

a nominative pronoun {she is a more careful researcher than he}.

Clashing

prepositions

5.178:

Elliptical

prepositional

phrases

5.179:

Effect of

prepositional

phrase on pronoun

5.180:

Prepositions and

functional variation

5.181:

Use and misuse of

"like"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Other Prepositional Issues

of Contents

List of Figures

5.180 PREPOSITIONS AND FUNCTIONAL VARIATION

List of Tables

Some words that function as prepositions may also function as other parts of speech. The

Index

distinguishing feature of a preposition is that it always has an object. A word such as above, behind,

below, by, down, in, off, on, or up can be used as either an adverb or a preposition. When used as a

preposition, it takes an object {let's slide down the hill}. When used as an adverb, it does not {we sat

5.178:

down}. (Sometimes such a term may appear to have an object {I looked up his biography}. To test,

Elliptical

prepositional

detach the apparent prepositional phrase and see if it makes sense; up his biography does not and

phrases

therefore up is an adverb here.) Likewise, some conjunctions may serve as prepositions (e.g., than and

5.179:

but). Such a conjunction points to an explicit or implied separate action. Compare the prepositional

Effect of

prepositional

but in everyone but Fuzzy traveled abroad last summer ( but is used to mean "except") with the conjunctive

phrase on pronoun

but in I like the cut but not the color ( but joins a clause containing an implied separate action: I don't like

5.180:

Prepositions and

the color).

functional variation

5.181:

Use and misuse of

"like"

5.182:

Use and misuse of

"only"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Other Prepositional Issues

of Contents

List of Figures

5.181 USE AND MISUSE OF "LIKE"

List of Tables

Like is probably the least understood preposition. Its traditional function is adjectival, not adverbial, so

Index

that like is governed by a noun or a noun phrase {teens often see themselves as star-crossed lovers like

Romeo and Juliet}. As a preposition, like is followed by a noun or pronoun in the objective case {the

person in that old portrait looks like me}. Increasingly (but loosely) today in ordinary speech, like

5.179:

displaces as or as if as a conjunction to connect clauses. For example, in it happened just like I said it

Effect of

prepositional

would happen, like should read as; and in you're looking around like you've misplaced something, like should

phrase on pronoun

read as if. Because as and as if are conjunctions, they are followed by nouns in the nominative case {Do

5.180:

you work too hard, as I do?}. Although like as a conjunction has been considered nonstandard since

Prepositions and

functional variation

the seventeenth century, today it is common in dialectal and colloquial usage {he ran like he was

5.181:

really scared}. Consider context and tone when deciding whether to impose standard English, as in

Use and misuse of

"like"

the examples above.

5.182:

Use and misuse of

"only"

5.183:

Avoiding overuse of

prepositions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Other Prepositional Issues

of Contents

List of Figures

5.182 USE AND MISUSE OF "ONLY"

List of Tables

Only functions as an adjective, an adverb, and a conjunction, and it can modify any part of speech. It

Index

is probably poorly placed in sentences more often than any other word. Only emphasizes the word or

phrase that immediately follows it. When only appears too early in the sentence, it has a

deemphasizing effect; it can also alter the meaning of the sentence or produce ambiguity. Compare I

5.180:

bought only tomatoes at the market (I bought nothing else) with I bought tomatoes only at the market (I

Prepositions and

functional variation

bought nothing other than tomatoes or I didn't buy tomatoes from any other place?). In idiomatic

5.181:

spoken English, only is placed before the verb, regardless of what it modifies: I only bought tomatoes at

Use and misuse of

the market. This may be acceptable in speech because the speaker can use intonation to make the

"like"

meaning clear. But since in writing there is no guidance from intonation, rigorous placement of only is

5.182:

Use and misuse of

preferable to aid the reader's comprehension.

"only"

5.183:

Avoiding overuse of

prepositions

5.184:

Cutting

prepositional

phrases

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Limiting Prepositional Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

5.183 AVOIDING OVERUSE OF PREPOSITIONS

List of Tables

Prepositions can easily be overused. Stylistically, a good ratio to strive for is one preposition for every

Index

ten to fifteen words. There are five editorial methods that can reduce the number of prepositions in a

sentence.

5.181:

Use and misuse of

"like"

5.182:

Use and misuse of

"only"

5.183:

Avoiding overuse of

prepositions

5.184:

Cutting

prepositional

phrases

5.185:

Cutting

unnecessary

prepositions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Limiting Prepositional Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

5.184 CUTTING PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES

List of Tables

If the surrounding prose's context permits, a prepositional phrase can be eliminated--for instance,

Index

within a passage focused on a particular recipe, the most important ingredient in this recipe could be

reduced to the most important ingredient.

5.182:

Use and misuse of

"only"

5.183:

Avoiding overuse of

prepositions

5.184:

Cutting

prepositional

phrases

5.185:

Cutting

unnecessary

prepositions

5.186:

Replacing

prepositional

phrases with

adverbs

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Limiting Prepositional Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

5.185 CUTTING UNNECESSARY PREPOSITIONS

List of Tables

Many nouns ending in -ance, -ence, -ity, -ment, -sion, or -tion are formed from a verb {qualification--

Index

qualify} {performance--perform}. Such nouns are sometimes called nominalizations or buried verbs,

and they often require additional words, especially prepositions (that is, during her performance of the

concerto is essentially equivalent to while she performed the concerto, but it is somewhat more abstract

5.183:

and requires the preposition of). Using the noun's verb form may eliminate one or two prepositions.

Avoiding overuse of

prepositions

For example, our efforts toward maximization of profits failed might be edited down to our efforts to

5.184:

maximize profits failed.

Cutting

prepositional

phrases

5.185:

Cutting

unnecessary

prepositions

5.186:

Replacing

prepositional

phrases with

adverbs

5.187:

Replacing

prepositional

phrases with

genitives

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Limiting Prepositional Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

5.186 REPLACING PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES WITH ADVERBS

List of Tables

A strong adverb may replace a weaker prepositional phrase. For example, the cyclist pedaled with fury

Index

is weak compared with the cyclist pedaled furiously.

5.184:

Cutting

prepositional

phrases

5.185:

Cutting

unnecessary

prepositions

5.186:

Replacing

prepositional

phrases with

adverbs

5.187:

Replacing

prepositional

phrases with

genitives

5.188:

Using active voice

to eliminate

prepositions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Limiting Prepositional Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

5.187 REPLACING PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES WITH GENITIVES

List of Tables

A genitive may replace a prepositional phrase, especially an of-genitive. For example, I was dismayed

Index

by the complexity of the street map essentially equals the street map's complexity dismayed me. See 5.19.

5.185:

Cutting

unnecessary

prepositions

5.186:

Replacing

prepositional

phrases with

adverbs

5.187:

Replacing

prepositional

phrases with

genitives

5.188:

Using active voice

to eliminate

prepositions

5.189:

Idiomatic uses of

prepositions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Limiting Prepositional Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

5.188 USING ACTIVE VOICE TO ELIMINATE PREPOSITIONS

List of Tables

Changing from passive voice to active almost always eliminates a preposition--that is, whenever the

Index

actor appears in a by-phrase. For example, the ship was sailed by an experienced crew equals an

experienced crew sailed the ship.

5.186:

Replacing

prepositional

phrases with

adverbs

5.187:

Replacing

prepositional

phrases with

genitives

5.188:

Using active voice

to eliminate

prepositions

5.189:

Idiomatic uses of

prepositions

5.190:

Shifts in

prepositional idiom

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Prepositional Idioms

of Contents

List of Figures

5.189 IDIOMATIC USES OF PREPOSITIONS

List of Tables

Among the most persistent word-choice issues are those concerning prepositions. Which prepositions

Index

go with which words? You fill A with B but instill B into A; you replace A with B but substitute B for A;

you prefix A to B but preface B with A; you force A into B but enforce B on A; finally, A implies B, so you

infer B from A. And that's only the beginning of it.

5.187:

Replacing

prepositional

phrases with

genitives

5.188:

Using active voice

to eliminate

prepositions

5.189:

Idiomatic uses of

prepositions

5.190:

Shifts in

prepositional idiom

5.191:

List of words and

the prepositions

construed with

them

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Prepositional Idioms

of Contents

List of Figures

5.190 SHIFTS IN PREPOSITIONAL IDIOM

List of Tables

Prepositional idioms often give nonnative speakers of English nightmares, and even native speakers

Index

of English need to double-check them at times. The language occasionally shifts. There may be a

difference between traditional literary usage ( oblivious of) and prevailing contemporary usage ( oblivious

to). Sometimes the writer may choose one or the other preposition for reasons of euphony. (Is it

5.188:

better, in a given context, to ruminate on, about, or over a specified problem?) Sometimes, too, the

Using active voice

to eliminate

denotative and connotative differences can be striking: it's one thing to be smitten with another and

prepositions

quite a different thing to be smitten by another.

5.189:

Idiomatic uses of

prepositions

5.190:

Shifts in

prepositional idiom

5.191:

List of words and

the prepositions

construed with

them

5.192:

Conjunctions

defined

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Prepositions >> Prepositional Idioms

of Contents

List of Figures

5.191 LIST OF WORDS AND THE PREPOSITIONS CONSTRUED WITH THEM

List of Tables

The list below contains the words that most often give writers trouble. Note that some of the words

Index

included here--such as verbs that can be used transitively {the tire abutted the curb} or words that can

be used without further qualification {she refused to acquiesce} {his words were considered

blasphemy}--do not always take prepositions.

5.189:

Idiomatic uses of

prepositions

abide (vb.): with ("stay"); by ("obey"); none (transitive)

5.190:

Shifts in

abound (vb.): in, with [resources]

prepositional idiom

absolve (vb.): from [guilt]; of [obligation]

5.191:

abut (vb.): on, against [land]; none (transitive)

List of words and

the prepositions

accompanied (adj.): by (not with) [something or someone else]

construed with

accord (vb.): in or with [an opinion]; to [a person]

them

acquiesce (vb.): in [a decision]; to [pressure]

5.192:

Conjunctions

acquit (vb.): of (not from) [a charge]; none (transitive)

defined

adept (vb.): at [an activity]; in [an art]

5.193:

admit (vb.) ("acknowledge"): none (not to) (transitive)

Simple versus

compound

admit (vb.) ("let in"): to, into

conjunctions

admit (vb.) ("allow"): of

anxious (adj.): about, over (preferably not to) [a concern]

badger (vb.): into [doing something]; about [a situation]

ban (vb.): from [a place]

ban (n.): on [a thing; an activity]; from [a place]

based (adj.): on (preferably not upon) [a premise]; in [a place; a field of study]; at [a place]

becoming (adj.): on, to [a person]; of [an office or position]

bestow (vb.): on (preferably not upon) [an honoree]

binding (adj.): on (preferably not upon) [a person]

blasphemy (n.): against [a religious tenet]

center (vb.): on, upon (not around) [a primary issue]

chafe (vb.): at [doing something]; under [an irritating authority]

coerce (vb.): into [doing something]

cohesion (n.): between [things; groups]

collude (vb.): with [a person to defraud another]

commiserate (vb.): with [a person]

compare (vb.): with (literal comparison); to (poetic or metaphorical comparison)

comply (vb.): with (not to) [a rule; an order]

confide (vb.): to, in [a person]

congruence (n.): with [a standard]

connive (vb.): at [a bad act]; with [another person]

consider (vb.): none (transitive); as [one of several possible aspects ( not as a substitute for "to be")];

for [a position]

consist (vb.): of [components (said of concrete things)]; in [qualities (said of abstract things)]

contemporary (adj.): with [another event]

contemporary (n.): of [another person]

contiguous (adj.): with, to [another place]

contingent (adj.): on (preferably not upon)

contrast (vb.): to, with [a person or thing]

conversant (adj.): with, in [a field of study]

convict (vb.): of, for (not in)

depend (vb.): on (preferably not upon)

differ (vb.): from [a thing or quality]; with [a person]; about, over, on [an issue]

different (adj.): from (but when a dependent clause follows different, the conjunction than is a

defensible substitute for from what: "movies today are different than they were in the fifties")

dissent (n. & vb.): from, against (preferably not to or with)

dissimilar (adj.): to (not from)

dissociate (vb.): from

enamored (adj.): of (not with)

equivalent (adj.): to, in (preferably not with)

excerpt (n.): from (not of)

forbid (vb.): to (formal); from (informal)

foreclose (vb.): on [mortgaged property]

hale (vb.): to, into [a place]; before [a magistrate]

hegemony (n.): over [rivals]; in [a region]

identical (adj.): with (preferred by purists), to [something else]

impatience (n.): with [a person]; with, at, about [a situation]

impose (vb.): on (preferably not upon) [a person]

inaugurate (vb.): as [an officer]; into [an office]

inculcate (vb.): into, in [a person]

independent (adj.): of (not from) [something else]

infringe (vb.): none (transitive); on (preferably not upon) [a right]

inhere (vb.): in (not within) [a person; a thing]

inquire (vb.): into [situations]; of [people]; after [people]

instill (vb.): in, into (not with) [a person]

juxtapose (vb.): to (not with)

mastery (n.): of [a skill or knowledge]; over [people]

militate (vb.): against [a harsher outcome]

mitigate (vb.): none (transitive)

oblivious (adj.): of (preferred), to [a danger; an opportunity]

off (prep. & adv.): none (not of)

predilection (n.): for [a preferred thing]

predominate (vb.) (not transitive): in, on, over [a field; rivals]

preferable (adj.): to (not than); over [an alternative]

pretext (n.): for [a true intention]

reconcile (vb.): with [a person]; to [a situation]

reticent (adj.): about [speaking; a topic]

sanction (n.): for [misbehavior]; of [a sponsoring body]; to [a person; an event]

shiver (vb.): from [cold]; at [something frightening]

stigmatize (vb.): none (transitive); as [dishonorable]

subscribe (vb.): to [a periodical or an opinion]; for [stock]

trade (vb.): for ("swap"); in ("sell"); with ("do business with"); at ("patronize"); in [certain goods]; on

("buy and sell at")

trust (n.): in [faith]; for ("beneficial trust")

undaunted (adj.): in [a task]; by [obstacles]

unequal (adj.): to [a challenge]; in [attributes]

used (adj.): to ("accustomed"); for ("applied to")

vexed (adj.): with [someone]; about, at [something]

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.192 CONJUNCTIONS DEFINED

List of Tables

A conjunction connects sentences, clauses, or words within a clause {My daughter graduated from

Index

college in December. And my son will graduate from high school in May.} ( and connects two

sentences); {I said hello, but no one answered} ( but connects two clauses); {we're making progress

slowly but surely} ( but joins two adverbs within an adverbial clause). Conjunctions connect pronouns

5.190:

in the same case {he and she are colleagues} {the teacher encouraged her and me}.

Shifts in

prepositional idiom

5.191:

List of words and

the prepositions

construed with

them

5.192:

Conjunctions

defined

5.193:

Simple versus

compound

conjunctions

5.194:

Coordinating

conjunctions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.193 SIMPLE VERSUS COMPOUND CONJUNCTIONS

List of Tables

A conjunction may be simple, a single word such as and, but, if, or, or through. Most are derived from

Index

prepositions. Compound conjunctions are single words formed by combining two or more words.

Most are relatively modern formations and include words such as although, because, nevertheless,

notwithstanding, and unless. Phrasal conjunctions are connectives made up of two or more separate

5.191:

words. Examples include as though, inasmuch as, in case that, provided that, so that, and supposing that.

List of words and

the prepositions

construed with

them

5.192:

Conjunctions

defined

5.193:

Simple versus

compound

conjunctions

5.194:

Coordinating

conjunctions

5.195:

Correlative

conjunctions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.194 COORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS

List of Tables

The two main classes of conjunctions are coordinating and subordinating. Coordinating conjunctions

Index

join words or groups of words of equal grammatical rank, such as two nouns, two verbs, two phrases,

or two clauses {Are you speaking to him or to me?} {the results are disappointing but not

discouraging}. Coordinating conjunctions are further broken down into copulative, adversative,

5.192:

disjunctive, and final. A coordinating conjunction may be either a single word or a correlative

Conjunctions

defined

conjunction. For subordinating conjunctions, see 5.200, 5.201.

5.193:

Simple versus

compound

conjunctions

5.194:

Coordinating

conjunctions

5.195:

Correlative

conjunctions

5.196:

Copulative

conjunctions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.195 CORRELATIVE CONJUNCTIONS

List of Tables

Correlative conjunctions are conjunctions used in pairs, often to join successive clauses that depend

Index

on each other to form a complete thought. Some examples of correlative conjunctions are as--as; if--

then; either--or, neither--nor; both--and; where--there; so--as; and not only--but also. Correlative

conjunctions must frame structurally identical or matching sentence parts {an attempt both to win the

5.193:

gold medal and to set a new record}; in other words, each member of the pair should immediately

Simple versus

compound

precede the same part of speech {they not only read the book but also saw the movie} {if the first

conjunctions

claim is true, then the second claim must be false}.

5.194:

Coordinating

conjunctions

5.195:

Correlative

conjunctions

5.196:

Copulative

conjunctions

5.197:

Adversative

conjunctions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.196 COPULATIVE CONJUNCTIONS

List of Tables

Copulative or additive coordinating conjunctions denote addition. The second element states an

Index

additional fact that is related to the first element. The conjunctions include and, also, moreover, and no

less than {one associate received a raise, and the other was promoted} {the jockeys' postrace party was

no less exciting than the race itself}.

5.194:

Coordinating

conjunctions

5.195:

Correlative

conjunctions

5.196:

Copulative

conjunctions

5.197:

Adversative

conjunctions

5.198:

Disjunctive

conjunctions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.197 ADVERSATIVE CONJUNCTIONS

List of Tables

Adversative or contrasting coordinating conjunctions denote contrasts or comparisons. The second

Index

element usually qualifies the first element in some way. The conjunctions include but, still, yet, and

nevertheless {the message is sad but inspiring} {she's earned her doctorate, yet she's still not satisfied

with herself}.

5.195:

Correlative

conjunctions

5.196:

Copulative

conjunctions

5.197:

Adversative

conjunctions

5.198:

Disjunctive

conjunctions

5.199:

Final conjunctions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.198 DISJUNCTIVE CONJUNCTIONS

List of Tables

Disjunctive or separative coordinating conjunctions denote separation or alternatives. Only one of the

Index

statements joined by the conjunction may be true; both may be false. The conjunctions include either,

or, else, but, nor, neither, otherwise, and other {that bird is either a heron or a crane} {you can wear the

blue coat or the green one}.

5.196:

Copulative

conjunctions

5.197:

Adversative

conjunctions

5.198:

Disjunctive

conjunctions

5.199:

Final conjunctions

5.200:

Subordinating

conjunctions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.199 FINAL CONJUNCTIONS

List of Tables

Final or illative coordinating conjunctions denote inferences or consequences. The second element

Index

gives a reason for the first element's statement, or it shows what has been or ought to be done in

view of the first element's content. The conjunctions include consequently, for, hence, so, thus, therefore,

as a consequence, as a result, so that, and so then {he had betrayed the king; therefore he was banished}

5.197:

{it's time to leave, so let's go}.

Adversative

conjunctions

5.198:

Disjunctive

conjunctions

5.199:

Final conjunctions

5.200:

Subordinating

conjunctions

5.201:

Special uses of

subordinating

conjunctions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.200 SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS

List of Tables

A subordinating conjunction connects clauses of unequal grammatical rank. The conjunction

Index

introduces a clause that is dependent on the independent clause {follow this road until you reach the

highway} {that squirrel is friendly because people feed it} {Marcus promised that he would help}. A

pure subordinating conjunction has no antecedent and is not a pronoun or an adverb {take a message

5.198:

if someone calls}.

Disjunctive

conjunctions

5.199:

Final conjunctions

5.200:

Subordinating

conjunctions

5.201:

Special uses of

subordinating

conjunctions

5.202:

Adverbs as

conjunctions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.201 SPECIAL USES OF SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS

List of Tables

Subordinating conjunctions or conjunctive phrases often denote the following relationships: (1)

Index

Comparison or degree--for example, than (if it follows comparative adverbs or adjectives, or if it

follows else, rather, other, or otherwise), as, else, otherwise, rather, as much as, as far as, and as well as {Is a

raven less clever than a magpie?} {these amateur musicians play as well as professionals} {it's not true

5.199:

as far as I can discover}. (2) Time--for instance, since, until, as long as, before, after, when, as, and while

Final conjunctions

{while we waited, it began to snow} {the tire went flat as we were turning the corner} {we'll start the

5.200:

Subordinating

game as soon as everyone understands the rules} {the audience returned to the auditorium after the

conjunctions

concert's resumption was announced}. (3) Condition or assumption--for example, if, though, unless,

5.201:

except, without, and once {once we agree on a design, we can begin remodeling the house} {your thesis

Special uses of

subordinating

must be presented next week unless you have a good reason to postpone it} {I'll go on this business

conjunctions

trip if I can fly first class}. (4) Reason or concession--for example, as, inasmuch as, why, because, for,

5.202:

since, though, although, and albeit {since you won't share the information, I can't help you} {Sir John

Adverbs as

conjunctions

decided to purchase the painting although it was very expensive} {she deserves credit because it was

5.203:

her idea}. (5) Purpose or result--for instance, that, so that, in order that, and such that {we dug up the

Relative pronouns

as conjunctions

yard so that a new water garden could be laid out} {he sang so loudly that he became hoarse}. (6)

Place--such as where {I found a great restaurant where I didn't expect one to be}. (7) Manner--for

example, as if and as though {he swaggers around the office as if he were an executive}. (8)

Appositions--for instance, and, or, what, and that {the buffalo, or American bison, was once nearly

extinct}. (9) Indirect questions--for instance, whether, why, and when {he could not say whether we

were going the right way}.

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.202 ADVERBS AS CONJUNCTIONS

List of Tables

Many adverbs are used as conjunctions to connect a dependent clause to an independent clause

Index

{Robin arrived after we had eaten dinner}. Such an adverb may appear to modify the verb in the

clause it introduces, but its primary function is to connect the two clauses. Adverbs functioning as

conjunctions typically denote time {Jay returned before we could find the vitamin E} or place {I know

5.200:

the river where the largest trout can be caught}.

Subordinating

conjunctions

5.201:

Special uses of

subordinating

conjunctions

5.202:

Adverbs as

conjunctions

5.203:

Relative pronouns

as conjunctions

5.204:

Expletive

conjunctions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.203 RELATIVE PRONOUNS AS CONJUNCTIONS

List of Tables

In addition to its pronoun function, a relative pronoun serves a conjunctive function. In fact, relative

Index

pronouns may be treated as a special class of subordinating conjunctions when they join sentences. A

conjunctive relative pronoun is one that has an antecedent in the independent clause {bring me the

suitcase that is upstairs} ( that refers to suitcase).

5.201:

Special uses of

subordinating

conjunctions

5.202:

Adverbs as

conjunctions

5.203:

Relative pronouns

as conjunctions

5.204:

Expletive

conjunctions

5.205:

Disguised

conjunctions

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.204 EXPLETIVE CONJUNCTIONS

List of Tables

An expletive conjunction is a conjunction that connects two thoughts that are not expressed in the

Index

same sentence. The conjunction refers back to a preceding sentence and often, but not always, begins

the sentence {but then the professor pointed out the flaws in their reasoning} {survival is thus the

most important motivation}.

5.202:

Adverbs as

conjunctions

5.203:

Relative pronouns

as conjunctions

5.204:

Expletive

conjunctions

5.205:

Disguised

conjunctions

5.206:

Beginning a

sentence with a

conjunction

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.205 DISGUISED CONJUNCTIONS

List of Tables

So-called disguised conjunctions are participles that have long been used as subordinating

Index

conjunctions; examples are barring, considering, regarding, speaking, supposing, and provided. Unlike a

verb, a disguised conjunction does not have a subject {we traveled swiftly, considering the poor road

conditions} ( considering as a disguised conjunction), {the committee is considering a budget increase}

5.203:

( considering as a verb).

Relative pronouns

as conjunctions

5.204:

Expletive

conjunctions

5.205:

Disguised

conjunctions

5.206:

Beginning a

sentence with a

conjunction

5.207:

Beginning a

sentence with

"however"

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.206 BEGINNING A SENTENCE WITH A CONJUNCTION

List of Tables

There is a widespread belief--one with no historical or grammatical foundation--that it is an error to

Index

begin a sentence with a conjunction such as and, but, or so. In fact, a substantial percentage (often as

many as 10 percent) of the sentences in first-rate writing begin with conjunctions. It has been so for

centuries, and even the most conservative grammarians have followed this practice. Charles Allen

5.204:

Lloyd's 1938 words fairly sum up the situation as it stands even today:

Expletive

conjunctions

Next to the groundless notion that it is incorrect to end an English sentence with a preposition, perhaps the

5.205:

Disguised

most wide-spread of the many false beliefs about the use of our language is the equally groundless notion

conjunctions

that it is incorrect to begin one with "but" or "and." As in the case of the superstition about the prepositional

5.206:

ending, no textbook supports it, but apparently about half of our teachers of English go out of their way to

Beginning a

handicap their pupils by inculcating it. One cannot help wondering whether those who teach such a

sentence with a

conjunction

monstrous doctrine ever read any English themselves. 7

5.207:

Beginning a

Still, but as an adversative conjunction can occasionally be unclear at the beginning of a sentence.

sentence with

"however"

Evaluate the contrasting force of the but in question, and see whether the needed word is really and; if

and can be substituted, then but is almost certainly the wrong word. Consider this example: He went to

5.208:

Interjections

school this morning. But he left his lunch box on the kitchen table. Between those sentences is an elliptical

defined

idea, since the two actions are in no way contradictory. What is implied is something like this: He

went to school, intending to have lunch there, but he left his lunch behind. Because and would have made

sense in the passage as originally stated, but is not the right word--the idea for the contrastive but

should be explicit. To sum up, then, but is a perfectly proper word to open a sentence, but only if the

idea it introduces truly contrasts with what precedes. For that matter, but is often an effective word

for introducing a paragraph that develops an idea contrary to the one preceding it.

7. Charles Allen Lloyd, We Who Speak English: And Our Ignorance of Our Mother Tongue (New York: Thomas Y. Crowell, 1938), 19.

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Conjunctions

of Contents

List of Figures

5.207 BEGINNING A SENTENCE WITH "HOWEVER"

List of Tables

However has been used as a conjunction since the fourteenth century. Like other conjunctions, it can be

Index

used at the beginning of a sentence. But however is more ponderous and has less impact than the

simple but. However is more effectively used within a sentence to emphasize the word or phrase that

precedes it {The job seemed exciting at first. Soon, however, it turned out to be exceedingly dull.}.

5.205:

Disguised

conjunctions

5.206:

Beginning a

sentence with a

conjunction

5.207:

Beginning a

sentence with

"however"

5.208:

Interjections

defined

5.209:

Interjections as

informal and

colloquial

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Interjections

of Contents

List of Figures

5.208 INTERJECTIONS DEFINED

List of Tables

An interjection or exclamation is a word, phrase, or clause that denotes strong feeling {Never again!}

Index

{You don't say!}. An interjection has little or no grammatical function in a sentence; it is used

absolutely {Really, I can't understand why you put up with the situation.} {Oh no, how am I going to

fix the damage?} {Hey, it's my turn next!}. It is frequently allowed to stand as a sentence by itself: {Oh!

5.206:

I've lost my wallet!} {Ouch! I think my ankle is sprained!} {Get out!} {Whoa!}. Introductory words like

Beginning a

sentence with a

well and why may also act as interjections when they are meaningless utterances {Well, I tried my

conjunction

best.} {Why, I would never do that!}. The punctuation offsetting the interjections distinguishes them

5.207:

(see 6.39, 6.37). Compare the different meanings of Well, I didn't know him with I didn't know him well,

Beginning a

sentence with

and Why, here you are! with I have no idea why you are here and Why? I have no idea.

"however"

5.208:

Interjections

defined

5.209:

Interjections as

informal and

colloquial

5.210:

Interjections and

functional variation

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Interjections

of Contents

List of Figures

5.209 INTERJECTIONS AS INFORMAL AND COLLOQUIAL

List of Tables

Interjections are natural in speech {your order should be shipped, oh, in eight to ten days} and

Index

frequently used in poetry and dialogue. But an interjection may impede the flow of some types of

prose when an informal and colloquial tone is inappropriate {because our business case was, ahem,

poorly presented, our budget will not be increased this year}.

5.207:

Beginning a

sentence with

"however"

5.208:

Interjections

defined

5.209:

Interjections as

informal and

colloquial

5.210:

Interjections and

functional variation

5.211:

Words that are

exclusively

interjections

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Interjections

of Contents

List of Figures

5.210 INTERJECTIONS AND FUNCTIONAL VARIATION

List of Tables

Because interjections are usually grammatically independent of the rest of the sentence, most parts of

Index

speech may be used as interjections. A word that is classified as some other part of speech but used

with the force of an interjection is called an exclamatory noun, exclamatory adjective, and so forth.

Some examples are Good! (adjective); Idiot! (noun); Help! (verb); Indeed! (adverb); Dear me! (pronoun);

5.208:

If only! (conjunction); How wonderful! (adverb).

Interjections

defined

5.209:

Interjections as

informal and

colloquial

5.210:

Interjections and

functional variation

5.211:

Words that are

exclusively

interjections

5.212:

Parallel structure

generally

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Interjections

of Contents

List of Figures

5.211 WORDS THAT ARE EXCLUSIVELY INTERJECTIONS

List of Tables

Some interjections are used only as such. Words like ouch, whew, ugh, psst, and oops are not used as

Index

any other parts of speech.

5.209:

Interjections as

informal and

colloquial

5.210:

Interjections and

functional variation

5.211:

Words that are

exclusively

interjections

5.212:

Parallel structure

generally

5.213:

Prepositions and

parallel structure

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Parallel Structure

of Contents

List of Figures

5.212 PARALLEL STRUCTURE GENERALLY

List of Tables

Parallel constructions--series of like sentence elements--are common in good writing. Compound

Index

structures may link words {win, lose, or draw}, phrases {government of the people, by the people, for

the people}, dependent clauses {that all men are created equal; that they are endowed by their creator

with certain inalienable rights; that among these are life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness}, or

5.210:

sentences {I came; I saw; I conquered}. Every element of a parallel series must be a functional match

Interjections and

functional variation

of the others (word, phrase, clause, sentence) and serve the same grammatical function in the sentence

5.211:

(e.g., noun, verb, adjective, adverb). When linked items are not like items, the syntax of the sentence

Words that are

breaks down:

exclusively

interjections

WRONG: She did volunteer work in the community kitchen, the homeless shelter, and taught free ESL

5.212:

Parallel structure

classes offered by her church.

generally

RIGHT: She did volunteer work in the community kitchen and the homeless shelter, and taught free ESL

5.213:

classes offered by her church.

Prepositions and

parallel structure

WRONG: The candidate is a former county judge, state senator, and served two terms as attorney general.

RIGHT: The candidate is a former county judge, state senator, and two-term attorney general.

5.214:

Paired joining

terms and parallel

The examples illustrate how the syntax breaks down when a series is not parallel. In the second one,

structure

for example, the subject, verb, and modifier ( The candidate is a former) fit with the noun phrases county

judge and state senator, but the third item in the series renders nonsense: "The candidate is a former

served two terms as attorney general." The first two elements in the series are nouns, while the third

is a separate predicate. The corrected version makes each item in the series a noun phrase.

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Parallel Structure

of Contents

List of Figures

5.213 PREPOSITIONS AND PARALLEL STRUCTURE

List of Tables

In a parallel series of prepositional phrases, repeat the preposition with every element unless they all

Index

use the same preposition. A common error occurs when a writer lets two or more of the phrases share

a single preposition but inserts a different one with another element:

5.211:

WRONG: I looked for my lost keys in the sock drawer, the laundry hamper, the restroom, and under the

Words that are

bed.

exclusively

interjections

RIGHT: I looked for my lost keys in the sock drawer, in the laundry hamper, in the restroom, and under the

bed.

5.212:

Parallel structure

generally

If the series had not included under the bed, the preposition could have been used once to apply to all

5.213:

the objects:

Prepositions and

parallel structure

RIGHT: I looked for my lost keys in the sock drawer, the laundry hamper, and the restroom.

5.214:

Paired joining

terms and parallel

structure

5.215:

Auxiliary verbs and

parallel structure

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Parallel Structure

of Contents

List of Figures

5.214 PAIRED JOINING TERMS AND PARALLEL STRUCTURE

List of Tables

Correlative conjunctions such as either--or, neither--nor, both--and, and not only--but also and some

Index

adverb pairs such as where--there, as--so, and if--then must join grammatically parallel sentence

elements. It is a common error to put the first correlative term in the wrong position.

5.212:

WRONG: I'd like to either go into business for myself or else to write freelance travel articles.

Parallel structure

RIGHT: I'd like either to go into business for myself or else to write freelance travel articles.

generally

WRONG: Our guests not only ate all the turkey and dressing but both pumpkin pies, too.

5.213:

RIGHT: Our guests ate not only all the turkey and dressing but both pumpkin pies, too.

Prepositions and

parallel structure

The verb ate, when placed after the first correlative, grammatically attaches to all the turkey but not to

5.214:

Paired joining

both pies, too. When moved outside the two phrases containing its direct objects, it attaches to both.

terms and parallel

structure

5.215:

Auxiliary verbs and

parallel structure

5.216:

Grammar versus

usage

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Grammar >> Parallel Structure

of Contents

List of Figures

5.215 AUXILIARY VERBS AND PARALLEL STRUCTURE

List of Tables

If an auxiliary verb appears before a series of verb phrases, it must apply to all of them. A common

Index

error is to include one phrase that takes a different auxiliary verb:

WRONG: The proposed procedure would streamline the application process, speed up admission decisions,

5.213:

and has proved to save money when implemented by other schools.

Prepositions and

RIGHT: The proposed procedure would streamline the application process, speed up admission decisions,

parallel structure

and save money.

5.214:

RIGHT: The proposed procedure would streamline the application process and speed up admission

Paired joining

terms and parallel

decisions. It has proved to save money when implemented by other schools.

structure

5.215:

The auxiliary verb would in that example renders the nonsensical would has proved when parsed with

Auxiliary verbs and

the third element of the predicate series. The first solution resolves that grammatical conflict, while

parallel structure

the second breaks out the third element into a separate sentence--which also avoids shifting from

5.216:

Grammar versus

future tense to past tense in midsentence.

usage

5.217:

Standard Written

English

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Usage >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

5.216 GRAMMAR VERSUS USAGE

List of Tables

The great mass of linguistic issues that writers and editors wrestle with don't really concern grammar

Index

at all--they concern usage: the collective habits of a language's native speakers. It is an arbitrary fact,

but ultimately an important one, that corollary means one thing and correlation something else. And it

seems to be an irresistible law of language that two words so similar in sound will inevitably be

5.214:

confounded by otherwise literate users of language. Some confusions, such as the one just cited, are

Paired joining

terms and parallel

relatively new. Others, such as lay versus lie and infer versus imply, are much older.

structure

5.215:

Auxiliary verbs and

parallel structure

5.216:

Grammar versus

usage

5.217:

Standard Written

English

5.218:

Dialect

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Usage >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

5.217 STANDARD WRITTEN ENGLISH

List of Tables

In any age, careful users of language will make distinctions; careless users of language will blur them.

Index

The words someone uses and the way they go together tell us something about the education and

background of that person. We know whether people speak educated English and write what is

commonly referred to as Standard Written English.

5.215:

Auxiliary verbs and

parallel structure

5.216:

Grammar versus

usage

5.217:

Standard Written

English

5.218:

Dialect

5.219:

Focus on tradition

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Usage >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

5.218 DIALECT

List of Tables

Of course, some writers and speakers prefer to use dialect, and use it to good effect. Will Rogers is a

Index

good example. He had power as a speaker of dialect, as when he said: "Liberty don't work near as

good in practice as it does in speeches." And fiction writers often use dialect in dialogue. They may

even decide to put the narrator's voice in dialect. Such decisions fall outside the scope of this manual.

5.216:

Grammar versus

usage

5.217:

Standard Written

English

5.218:

Dialect

5.219:

Focus on tradition

5.220:

Good usage versus

common usage

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Usage >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

5.219 FOCUS ON TRADITION

List of Tables

In the short space of this section, only the basics of Standard Written English can be covered. Because

Index

no language stands still--because the standards of good usage change, however slowly--no guide

could ever be written to the satisfaction of all professional editors. What is intended here is a guide

that steers writers and editors toward the unimpeachable uses of language--hence it takes a fairly

5.217:

traditional view of usage. For the writer or editor of most prose intended for a general audience, the

Standard Written

English

goal is to stay within the mainstream of literate language as it stands today.

5.218:

Dialect

5.219:

Focus on tradition

5.220:

Good usage versus

common usage

5.221:

Maintaining

credibility

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Usage >> Glossary of Problematic Words and Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

5.220 GOOD USAGE VERSUS COMMON USAGE

List of Tables

Although Chicago recommends Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary, there are several other first-

Index

rate American desktop dictionaries on the market. The best dictionary makers are signaled by the

imprints Merriam-Webster, Webster's New World, American Heritage, Oxford University Press, and

Random House. But one must use care and judgment in consulting any dictionary. The mere presence

5.218:

of a word in the dictionary's pages does not mean that the word is in all respects fit for print. The

Dialect

dictionary merely describes how speakers of English use the language; despite occasional usage notes,

5.219:

Focus on tradition

lexicographers generally disclaim any intent to guide writers and editors on the thorny points of

5.220:

English usage--apart from collecting evidence of what others do. So infer is recorded as meaning, in

Good usage versus

one of its senses, imply; irregardless may mean regardless; restauranteur may mean restaurateur; and on

common usage

and on. That is why, in the publishing world, it is generally necessary to consult a style or usage

5.221:

Maintaining

guide in addition to a dictionary. While common usage can excuse many slipshod expressions, the

credibility

standards of good usage make demands on writers and editors. Even so, good usage should make

5.222:

only reasonable demands without setting outlandishly high standards. The purpose of the following

Gender bias

glossary is to set out the reasonable demands of good usage as it stands today.

a; an. Use the indefinite article a before any word beginning with a consonant sound {a utopian

dream}. Use an before any word beginning with a vowel sound {an officer} {an honorary

degree}. The word historical and its variations cause missteps, but since the h in these words is

pronounced, it takes an a {an hour-long talk at a historical society}. Likewise, an initialism

(whose letters are sounded out) may be paired with one article while an acronym (which is

pronounced as a word) beginning with the same letter is paired with the other {an HTML

website for a HUD program}. See 5.72.

ability; capability; capacity. Ability refers to a person's physical or mental skill or power to achieve

something {the ability to ride a bicycle}. Capability refers more generally to power or ability {she

has the capability to play soccer professionally} or to the quality of being able to use or be used

in a certain way {a jet with long-distance-flight capability}. Capacity refers especially to a vessel's

ability to hold or contain something {a high-capacity fuel tank}. Used figuratively, capacity

refers to a person's physical or mental power to learn {an astounding capacity for mathematics}.

abjure; adjure. To abjure is to deny or renounce under oath {the defendant abjured the charge of

murder} or to declare one's permanent abandonment of a place {abjure the realm}. To adjure is

to require someone to do something as if under oath {I adjure you to keep this secret} or to

urge earnestly {the executive committee adjured all the members to approve the plan}.

about; approximately. When idiomatically possible, use the adverb about instead of approximately.

In the sciences, however, approximately is preferred {approximately thirty coding-sequence

differences were identified}. Avoid coupling either word with other words of approximation,

such as guess or estimate.

abstruse. See obtuse.

access, vb. The use of nouns as verbs has long been one of the most common ways that word-

usage changes happen in English. Today, few people quibble with using contact, debut, and host,

for example, as verbs. Access can be safely used as a verb when referring to computing {access a

computer} {access the Internet} {access a database}. Outside the digital world, though, it is still

best avoided.

accord; accordance. The first word means "agreement" {we are in accord on the treaty's meaning};

the second word means "conformity" {the book was printed in accordance with modern

industry standards}.

accuse; charge. A person is accused of or charged with a misdeed. Accused is less formal than charged

(which suggests official action). Compare Jill accused Jack of eating her chocolate bar with Maynard

was charged with theft.

actual fact, in. Redundant. Try actually instead, or simply omit.

addicted; dependent. One is physically addicted to something but psychologically dependent on

something.

adduce; deduce; induce. To adduce is to give as a reason, offer as a proof, or cite as an example {as

evidence of reliability, she adduced her four years of steady volunteer work as a nurse's aide}.

Deduce and induce are opposite processes. To deduce is to reason from general principles to

specific conclusions, or to draw a specific conclusion from general bases {from these clues about

who committed the crime, one deduces that the butler did it}. To induce is to form a general

principle based on specific observations {after years of studying ravens, the researchers induced

a few of their social habits}.

adequate; sufficient; enough. Adequate refers to the suitability of something in a particular

circumstance {an adequate explanation}. Sufficient refers to an amount that is enough to meet a

need (always with an abstract concept, a mass noun, or a plural) {sufficient water} {sufficient

information} {sufficient cause} {sufficient resources}. Enough, the best word for everyday

purposes, modifies both count nouns {enough people} and mass nouns {enough oil}.

adherence; adhesion. With a few exceptions, the first term is figurative, the second literal. Your

adherence to the transportation code requires the adhesion of an inspection sticker to your

windshield.

adjure. See abjure.

administrator. See executor.

admission; admittance. Admission is figurative, suggesting particularly the rights and privileges

granted upon entry {the student won admission to a first-rate university}. Admittance is purely

physical {no admittance beyond this point}.

adverse; averse. Adverse means either "strongly opposed" or "unfortunate" and typically refers to

things, not people {adverse relations between nations} {an adverse wind blew the ship off

course}. Averse means "feeling negatively about" and refers to people {averse to asking for

directions}.

affect; effect. Affect, almost always a verb, means "to influence, have an effect on" {the adverse

publicity affected the election}. (The noun affect has a specialized meaning in psychology:

manifestation of emotion or mood. Consult your dictionary.) Effect, usually a noun, means

"outcome, result" {the candidate's attempted explanations had no effect}. But it may also be a

verb meaning "to make happen, produce" {the goal had been to effect a major change in campus

politics}.

affirmative, in the; in the negative. These are slightly pompous ways of saying yes and no. They

result in part because people are unsure how to punctuate yes and no. The ordinary way is this:

he said yes (without quotation marks around yes, and without a capital); she said no (ditto).

afflict. See inflict.

affront. See effrontery.

after having past participle]. Though common, this phrasing is redundant. Try instead after

present participle]: change after having passed the audition, she . . . to after passing the audition, she

. . . Or this: having passed the audition, she . . . See 5.108.

afterward, adv.; afterword, n. The first means "later"; the second means "an epilogue." On

afterward(s), see toward.

aged (four) years old. Redundant. Write aged four years, four years old, or four years of age.

aggravate. Traditionally, aggravate means "to intensify (something bad)" {aggravate an injury} {an

aggravated crime}. If the sense is "to bother," use annoy or irritate.

aid; aide. Aid can be a verb (= to help) or a noun (= assistance or a means of assistance)

{audiovisual aids}. Aide is a noun (= helper), as in "teacher's aide," and always denotes a person,

not an object.

alibi. Avoid this as a synonym for excuse. The traditional sense is "the defense of having been

elsewhere when a crime was committed."

all (of). Delete the of whenever possible {all the houses} {all my children}. The only common

exceptions occur when all of precedes a nonpossessive pronoun {all of us} and when it precedes

a genitive {all of North Carolina's players}.

alleged. Traditional usage applies this participial adjective to things, especially acts {alleged

burglary}, not to the actors accused of doing them {alleged burglar}. That distinction is still

observed by some publications, but it has largely been abandoned. Although allegedly /e-LEJ-ed-

lee/ has four syllables, alleged has only two: /e-LEJD/.

all ready. See already.

all right. Two words. Avoid alright.

all together. See altogether.

allude; elude; illude. To allude is to refer to something indirectly {allude to a problem}. It's often

loosely used where refer or quote would be better--that is, where there is a direct mention or

quotation. To elude is to avoid capture {elude the hunters}. To illude (quite rare) is to deceive

{your imagination might illude you}.

allusion; reference. An allusion is an indirect or casual mention or suggestion of something {the

cockroach in this story is an allusion to Kafka}. A reference is a direct or formal mention {the

references in this scholarly article have been meticulously documented}.

alongside. This term, meaning "at the side of," should not be followed by of.

a lot. Two words, not one.

already; all ready. The first refers to time {the movie has already started}; the second refers to

degree of preparation {Are the actors all ready?}.

alright. See all right.

altar, n.; alter, vb. An altar is a table or similar object used for sacramental purposes. To alter is to

change.

alternate, adj. & n.; alternative, adj. & n. Alternate implies (1) substitute for another {we took the

alternate route} or (2) taking turns with another {her alternate chaired the meeting}. Alternative

implies a choice between two or more things {I prefer the second alternative}.

altogether; all together. Altogether means "wholly" or "entirely" {that story is altogether false}. All

together refers to a unity of time or place {the family will be all together at Thanksgiving}.

amend; emend. The first is the general term, meaning "to change or add to" {the city amended its

charter to abolish at-large council districts}. The second means "to correct [text]" {for the second

printing, the author emended several typos}. The noun corresponding to amend is amendment;

the one corresponding to emend is emendation.

amiable; amicable. Both mean "friendly," but amiable refers to people {an amiable waiter} and

amicable to relationships {an amicable divorce}.

amid. See between.

among. See between.

amount; number. Amount is used with mass nouns {a decrease in the amount of pollution}, number

with count nouns {a growing number of dissidents}.

an. See a.

and. Popular belief to the contrary, this conjunction usefully begins sentences, typically

outperforming moreover, additionally, in addition, further, and furthermore. See 5.206.

and/or. Avoid this Janus-faced term. It can often be replaced by and or or with no loss in meaning.

Where it seems needed {take a sleeping pill and/or a warm drink}, try or . . . or both {take a

sleeping pill or a warm drink or both}. But think of other possibilities {take a sleeping pill with

a warm drink}.8

anecdotal. This adjective corresponds to anecdote, but in one sense the words have opposite

connotations. An anecdote is a story that is thought (but not known) to be true. But anecdotal

evidence is suspect because it has not been objectively verified.

anticipate. Avoid this word as a loose synonym for expect. Strictly, it means "to foresee, take care

of in advance, or forestall."

anxious. Avoid it as a synonym for eager. The standard sense is "worried, distressed."

anyone; any one. The one-word anyone is a singular indefinite pronoun {anyone would know that}.

The two-word phrase any one is a more emphatic form of any, referring to a single person or

thing in a group {Do you recognize any one of those boys?} {I don't know any one of those

stories}.

anyplace. See anywhere.

anywhere; any place. The first is preferred for an indefinite location {my keys could be anywhere}.

But any place (two words) is narrower when you mean "any location" {they couldn't find any

place to sit down and rest}. Avoid the one-word anyplace.

appertain. See pertain.

appraise; apprise. To appraise is to put a value on something {the jeweler appraised the necklace}.

To apprise is to inform or notify someone {keep me apprised of any developments}.

appreciate. Three senses: (1) to understand fully; (2) to increase in value; (3) to be grateful for

(something). Sense 3 often results in verbose constructions; instead of I would appreciate it if you

would let me know, use I would appreciate your letting me know or, more simply, please let me know.

apprise. See appraise.

approve; endorse. Approve implies positive thought or a positive attitude rather than action apart

from consent. Endorse implies both a positive attitude and active support.

approve (of). Approve alone connotes official sanction {the finance committee approved the

proposed budget}. Approve of suggests favor {she approved of her sister's new hairstyle}.

approximately. See about.

apt; likely. Both mean "fit, suitable," but apt is used for general tendencies or habits {the

quarterback is apt to drop the football}. Likely expresses probability {because he didn't study, it's

likely that he'll do poorly on the exam}. Although likely is traditional as a synonym of probable,

many writers and editors object to its use as a synonym of probably.

area. Often a nearly meaningless filler word, as in the area of partnering skills. Try deleting the area

of. In the sciences, however, its more literal meaning is often important and should be retained.

as far as. Avoid the nonstandard substitution of as far as for as for--that is, avoid using as far as

without the completing verb is concerned or goes. Even with the verb, though, this is usually a

wordy construction. Compare as far as change is concerned, it's welcome with as for change, it's

welcome.

as is. In reference to an acquisition, as is is framed in quotation marks and refers to the acceptance

of something without guarantees or representations of quality {purchased "as is"}. The phrase on

an "as is" basis is verbose.

as of yet. See as yet.

as per. This phrase, though common in the commercial world, has long been considered

nonstandard. Instead of as per your request, write as you requested or (less good) per your request.

assault; battery. These are popularly given the same meaning. But in law assault refers to a threat

that causes someone to reasonably fear physical violence, and battery refers to a violent or

repugnant intentional physical contact with another person. An assault doesn't involve

touching; a battery does.

assemblage; assembly. An assemblage is an informal collection of people or things. An assembly is a

group of people organized for a purpose.

assent; consent. The meanings are similar, but assent connotes enthusiasm, while consent connotes

mere allowance.

as such. This pronominal phrase is now often loosely used as a synonym for therefore, but in well-

honed writing the such always requires an antecedent {diamond-studded water bottles are a

luxury and, as such, have a limited market}.

assumption; presumption. An assumption is not drawn from evidence; typically, it is a hypothesis

{your assumption can be tested by looking at the public records}. A presumption implies a basis

in evidence; if uncontradicted, a presumption may support a decision {the legal presumption of

innocence}.

assure. See ensure.

as to. This two-word preposition is best used only to begin a sentence that could begin with on the

question of or with regard to {as to those checks, she didn't know where they came from}.

Otherwise, use about or some other preposition.

as yet; as of yet. Stilted and redundant. Use yet, still, so far, or some other equivalent.

attain; obtain. To attain something is to accomplish it through effort (e.g., a goal) or endurance

(e.g., an age); to obtain something is to gain possession of it. So in best usage you attain a degree

and obtain a diploma. It can be a fine distinction, and in common usage the words are often

treated as synonyms.

at the present time; at this time; at present. These are turgid substitutes for now, today, currently, or

even nowadays (a word of perfectly good literary standing). Of the phrasal versions, at present is

least suggestive of bureaucratese.

at the time that; at the time when. Use the plain and simple when instead.

auger; augur. The spellings of these words can be tricky because they are pronounced the same

(/AW-ger/). The tool for boring is an auger. Augur means "a seer" (noun) or "to foretell" (verb).

avenge, vb.; revenge, vb. & n. Avenge connotes an exaction for a wrong {historically, family

grudges were privately avenged}. The corresponding noun is vengeance. Revenge connotes the

infliction of harm on another out of anger or resentment {the team is determined to revenge its

humiliating loss in last year's championship game}. Revenge is much more commonly a noun

{they didn't want justice--they wanted revenge}.

averse. See adverse.

avocation; vocation. An avocation is a hobby {stamp collecting is my weekend avocation}. A

vocation is one's profession or, especially in a religious sense, one's calling {she had a true

vocation and became a nun}.

awhile; a while. The one-word version is adverbial {let's stop here awhile}. The two-word version

is a noun phrase that follows the preposition for or in {she worked for a while before beginning

graduate studies}.

backward(s). See toward.

bale; bail. Bale, a noun or verb, means "a bundle" or "to form into a bundle," as of hay or cotton.

Bail is most often a verb (= to drain by scooping, as in getting water out of a boat using a pail);

it is also a noun or verb meaning "security" or "to post security" (to get out of jail pending

further proceedings). Bail is used informally as well to mean "to leave quickly" or "to escape"

{the couple bailed from the party}.

based on. This phrase has two legitimate and two illegitimate uses. It may unimpeachably have

verbal force ( base being a transitive verb, as in they based their position on military precedent) or, in

a passive sense, adjectival force ( based being read as a past-participial adjective, as in a

sophisticated thriller based on a John le CarrÃ© novel). Two uses, however, are traditionally

considered slipshod. Based on should not have adverbial force {rates are adjusted annually, based

on the 91-day Treasury bill} or prepositional force (as a dangling participle) {based on this

information, we decided to stay}. Try other constructions {rates are adjusted annually on the

basis of the 91-day Treasury bill} {with this information, we decided to stay}.

basis. Much overworked, this word most properly means "foundation." It often appears in the

phrase on a . . . basis or some similar construction. When possible, substitute adverbs ( personally,

not on a personal basis) or simply state the time ( daily, not on a daily basis). The plural is bases {the

legislative bases are complicated}.

battery. See assault.

begging the question. This phrase denotes a logical fallacy of assuming as true what has yet to be

proved--or adducing as proof for some proposition something that's every bit as much in need

of proof as the first proposition. For example, someone might try to "prove" the validity of a

certain religion by quoting from that religion's holy text. But the phrase gets misused in many

ways--as (erroneously) meaning "raising a question," "inviting an obvious question," "evading a

question," and "ignoring a question."

behalf. In behalf of means "in the interest or for the benefit of" {the decision is in behalf of the

patient}. On behalf of means "acting as agent or representative of" {on behalf of Mr. Scott, I

would like to express heartfelt thanks}.

bemused. This word means "bewildered" or "distracted." It is not a synonym of "amused."

beneficence; benevolence. Beneficence is the attribute of being disposed to do or capable of doing

good {the priest's beneficence was plainly evident}. It applies most often to people. Benevolence is

the act of performing a good deed {the villagers thanked him for his benevolence}. The first

term denotes a quality, the second conduct.

between; among; amid. Between indicates one-to-one relationships {between you and me}. Among

indicates undefined or collective relationships {honor among thieves}. Between has long been

recognized as being perfectly appropriate for more than two objects if multiple one-to-one

relationships are understood from the context {trade between members of the European Union}.

Amid is used with mass nouns {amid talk of war}, among with plurals of count nouns {among

the children}. Avoid amidst and amongst.

bi-; semi-. Generally, bi- means "two" ( biweekly means "every two weeks"), while semi- means "half"

( semiweekly means "twice a week"). Because these prefixes are often confounded, writers should

be explicit about the meaning.

biannual; semiannual; biennial. Biannual and semiannual both mean "twice a year" {these roses

bloom biannually}. But biennial means "once every two years" or "every other year" {the state

legislature meets biennially}. To avoid confusion, write semiannual instead of biannual, and

consider writing once every two years instead of biennial.

billion; trillion. The meanings vary in different countries. In the United States, a billion is

1,000,000,000 (a thousand millions). A trillion is a thousand times that (a million millions). In

French-speaking Canada, Germany, and many other non-English-speaking regions--according

to a system that was also until recently preferred by Great Britain--a billion is a million millions;

by extension, a trillion is a million million millions. Writers encountering these terms need to be

aware of the historical and geographic distinctions. See also 9.8.

blatant; flagrant. An act that is blatant is plain for all to see {a blatant error}. One that is flagrant is

done brazenly as well as openly {a flagrant insult}.

bombastic. A bombastic person is pompous in speech or writing. The word has nothing to do with

temper.

born; borne. Born is used only as an adjective {a born ruler} or in the fixed passive-voice verb to be

born {the child was born into poverty}. Borne is the past participle of bear {this donkey has borne

many heavy loads} {she has borne three children}. It is also used to form compound terms in

the sciences {foodborne} {vector-borne}.

breach, n. & vb.; breech, n. A breach is a gap in or violation of something {a breach of contract}. To

breach is to break, break open, or break through {breach the castle walls}. Breech refers to the

lower or back part of something, especially the buttocks {a breech birth} or a firearm {the rifle's

breech}.

bring; take. The distinction may seem obvious, but the error is common. The simple question is,

where is the action directed? If it's toward you, use bring {bring home the bacon}. If it's away

from you, use take {take out the trash}. You take (not bring) your car to the mechanic.

but. Popular belief to the contrary, this conjunction usefully begins contrasting sentences, typically

better than however. See 5.206.

by means of. Often verbose. Use by or with if either one suffices.

by reason of. Use because or because of unless by reason of is part of an established phrase {by reason

of insanity}.

can; could. Can means "to be able to" and expresses certainty {I can be there in five minutes}. Could

is better for a sense of uncertainty or a conditional statement {Could you stop at the cleaners

today?} {if you send a deposit, we could hold your reservation}. See 5.143.

can; may. Can most traditionally applies to physical or mental ability {she can do calculations in

her head} {the dog can leap over a six-foot fence}. In colloquial English, can also expresses a

request for permission {Can I go to the movies?}, but this usage is not recommended in formal

writing. May suggests possibility {the class may have a pop quiz tomorrow} or permission {you

may borrow my car}. A denial of permission is properly phrased formally with may not {you

may not borrow my credit card} or with cannot or can't {you can't use the computer tonight}.

See 5.143, 5.146.

capability. See ability.

capacity. See ability.

capital; capitol. A capital is a seat of government (usually a city) {Austin is the capital of Texas}. A

capitol is a building in which a legislature meets {the legislature opened its new session in the

capitol today}.

carat; karat; caret. Carat measures the weight of a gemstone; karat measures the purity of gold. To

remember the difference, think of "24K." Caret is a mark on a manuscript indicating where

matter is to be inserted.

career; careen. The word career's career as a verb meaning "to go full speed" may be about over. Its

duties have been assumed by careen ("to tip to one side while moving"), even though nothing in

that verb's definition denotes high speed. Still, careful writers recognize the distinction.

caret. See carat.

case. In its abstract sense, this word is often a sign of verbal inflation. For example, in case means if;

in most cases means usually; in every case means always. The word is justifiably used in law (in

which a case is a lawsuit or judicial opinion) and in medicine (in which the word refers to an

instance of a disease or disorder).

cause cÃ©lÃ¨bre. This word most strictly denotes a legal case, especially a prosecution, that draws

great public interest. By extension it refers to a notorious person or event. It does not properly

denote a person's pet cause.

censer; censor, n.; sensor. The correct spellings can be elusive. A censer is either a person who

carries a container of burning incense or the container itself. A censor is a person who

suppresses objectionable subject matter. A sensor is a mechanical or electronic detector.

censor, vb.; censure, vb. To censor is to review and cut out objectionable material--that is, to

suppress {soldiers' letters are often censored in wartime}. To censure is to criticize strongly or

disapprove, or to officially reprimand {the House of Representatives censured the president for

the invasion} {In some countries the government censors the press. In the United States the press

often censures the government.}.

center around. Although this illogical phrasing does have apologists, careful writers tend to use

either center on or revolve around.

certainty; certitude. If you are absolutely sure about something, you display both certainty (firm

conviction) and certitude (assurance of being certain). That fact you are sure about, however, is a

certainty but not a certitude--the latter is a trait applied to people only.

chair; chairman; chairwoman; chairperson. Chair is widely regarded as the best gender-neutral

choice. Since the mid-seventeenth century, chair has referred to an office of authority. See

5.221--30.

charge. See accuse.

childish; childlike. Childlike is used positively to connote innocence, mildness, and freshness {a

childlike smile}. Childish is pejorative; it connotes immaturity and unreasonableness {childish

ranting}.

circumstances. Both in the circumstances and under the circumstances are acceptable, but under is now

much more common.

cite, n.; site. As a noun, cite is colloquial for citation, which refers to a source of information {a cite

to Encyclopaedia Britannica}. A site is a place or location {building site} {grave site} {website}. Cf.

sight.

citizen; subject. In a governmental sense, these are near-synonyms that should be distinguished. A

citizen owes allegiance to a nation whose sovereignty is a collective function of the people {a

citizen of Germany}. A subject owes allegiance to an individual sovereign {a subject of the

queen}.

class. This word denotes a category or group of things {the class of woodwind instruments}, never

one type {an oboe is a type of woodwind} or one kind of thing {a snare drum is one kind of

percussion instrument}.

classic; classical. Classic means "important, authoritative" { The Naked Night is one of Bergman's

classic films}. Classical applies to the traditional "classics" of literature, music, and such (and

sometimes to specific periods and movements) {classical Greek} {a classical composer} or to the

definitive or earliest-characterized form {classical EEC syndrome}.

clean; cleanse. Although various cleaning agents are called cleansers, clean displaced cleanse long

ago in most of the word's literal senses. Cleanse retains the Old English root meaning "purify":

its use today usually refers to spiritual purification.

cleave. This verb was originally two different words, and that difference is reflected in the

opposite meanings that cleave has: (1) to cut apart {to cleave meat} and (2) to cling together

{standing in the rain, his clothes cleaving to his body}. The conjugations are (1) cleave, cleft (or

clove), cloven, and (2) cleave, cleaved, cleaved.

clench; clinch. Clench connotes a physical action {he clenched his hand into a fist}. Clinch generally

has figurative uses {she clinched the victory with her final putt}.

climactic; climatic. Climactic is the adjective corresponding to climax {during the movie's climactic

scene, the projector broke}. Climatic corresponds to climate {the climatic conditions of northern

New Mexico}.

clinch. See clench.

close proximity, in. Redundant. Write either close or in proximity.

cohabit; cohabitate. Cohabit is the traditional verb. Cohabitate, a back-formation from cohabitation, is

best avoided.

collaborate; corroborate. To collaborate means to cooperate on some undertaking; the participants

are collaborators. To corroborate something means to back up its reliability with proof or

evidence.

collegial; collegiate. Collegial answers to colleague; collegiate answers to college.

commendable; commendatory. What is done for a worthy cause is commendable {commendable

dedication to helping the poor}. What expresses praise is commendatory {commendatory plaque}.

common; mutual. What is common is shared by two or more people {borne by different mothers

but having a common father}. What is mutual is reciprocal or directly exchanged by and toward

each other {mutual obligations}. Strictly, friend in common is better than mutual friend in reference

to a third person who is a friend of two others.

commonweal; commonwealth. The commonweal is the public welfare. Traditionally, a

commonwealth was a state established by public compact or by the consent of the people to

promote the general good ("commonweal"), and where the people reserved supreme authority.

In the United States, the word is synonymous with state, four of which are still called

commonwealths: Kentucky, Massachusetts, Pennsylvania, and Virginia.

compare. To compare with is to discern both similarities and differences between things. To compare

to is to note primarily similarities between things.

compelled; impelled. If you are compelled to do something, you have no choice in the matter

{Nixon was compelled by the unanimous Supreme Court decision to turn over the tapes}. If you

are impelled to do something, you may not like it, but you are convinced that it must be done

{the voter disliked some candidates but was impelled by the income-tax issue to vote a straight

party ticket}.

compendious; voluminous. These are not synonyms, as many apparently believe. Compendious

means "concise, abridged." Voluminous, literally "occupying many volumes," most commonly

means "vast" or "extremely lengthy."

complacent; complaisant; compliant. To be complacent is to be content with oneself and one's life--

with the suggestion that one may be smug and unprepared for future trouble. To be complaisant

is to be easygoing and eager to please. To be compliant is to be amenable to orders or to a

regimen.

compliment; complement. A compliment is a flattering or praising remark {a compliment on your

skill}. A complement is something that completes or brings to perfection {the lace tablecloth was

a complement to the antique silver}. The words are also verbs: to compliment is to praise, while

to complement is to supplement adequately or to complete.

comprise; compose. Use these with care. To comprise is "to be made up of, to include" {the whole

comprises the parts}. To compose is "to make up, to form the substance of something" {the parts

compose the whole}. The phrase comprised of, though increasingly common, is poor usage.

Instead, use composed of, consisting of, or made up of.

concept; conception. Both words may refer to an abstract thought, but conception also means "the

act of forming an abstract thought." Avoid using either word as a high-sounding equivalent of

idea, design, thought, or program.

condole, vb.; console, vb. These are closely related but not identical. To condole with is to express

sympathy to {community leaders condoled with the victims' families}. The corresponding noun

is condolence {they expressed their condolences at the funeral}. To console is to comfort {the

players consoled their humiliated coach}. The corresponding noun is consolation {their kind

words were little consolation}.

confidant; confidante; confident. A confidant is a close companion, someone (male or female) you

confide in. Confidante is a fading alternative spelling of confidant (used only in reference to a

female confidant). Confident is the adjective meaning "having faith, being certain."

congruous; congruent. Both terms mean "in harmony, in agreement." The first is seen most often in

its negative form, incongruous. The second is used in math to describe triangles that are

identical in their angles as well as in the length of their sides; in psychology it refers to the

consistency and appropriateness of a person's words and behavior.

connote; denote. To connote (in reference to language) is to convey an additional meaning,

especially an emotive nuance {the new gerund parenting and all that it connotes}. To denote

(again in reference to language) is to specify the literal meaning of something {the phrase

"freezing point" denotes 32 degrees Fahrenheit or 0 degrees Celsius}. Both words have figurative

uses {all the joy that parenthood connotes} {a smile may not denote happiness}.

consent. See assent.

consequent; subsequent. The first denotes causation; the second does not. A consequent event

always happens after the event that caused it, as does a subsequent event. But a subsequent event

is not necessarily a consequence of the first event.

consider. Add as only when you mean "to examine or discuss for [a particular purpose]"

{handshaking considered as a means of spreading disease}. Otherwise, omit as {we consider him

qualified}.

consist. There are two distinct phrases: consist of and consist in. The first applies to the physical

components that make up a tangible thing {the computer-system package consists of software,

the CPU, the monitor, and a printer}. The second refers to the essence of a thing, especially in

abstract terms {moral government consists in rewarding the righteous and punishing the

wicked}.

console. See condole.

contact, vb. If you mean write or call or e-mail, say so. But contact is undeniably a brief way of

referring to communication without specifying the means.

contagious; infectious. A contagious disease spreads by direct contact with an infected person or

animal {rabies is a contagious disease}. An infectious disease is spread by germs on a

contaminated object or element, such as earth or water {tetanus is infectious but not

contagious}. In nonliteral usage the terms are synonymous {his pessimism is contagious} {her

smile is infectious}.

contemporary; contemporaneous. Both express coinciding time, but contemporary usually applies to

people, and contemporaneous applies to things or actions. Because contemporary has the

additional sense "modern," it is unsuitable for contexts involving multiple times. That is, a

reference to Roman, Byzantine, and contemporary belief systems is ambiguous; change contemporary

to modern.

contemptuous; contemptible. If you are contemptuous you are feeling contempt for someone or

something. If you are contemptible, others will have that attitude toward you.

content; contents. Content applies to the information or ideas contained in a written or oral

presentation {the lecture's content was offensive to some who were present}. Contents usually

denotes physical ingredients {the package's contents were difficult to discern by x-ray}. If the

usage suggests many items, material or nonmaterial, contents is correct {table of contents} {the

investigative report's contents}.

continual; continuous. What is continual is intermittent or frequently repeated. What is continuous

never stops--it remains constant or uninterrupted.

contravene; controvert. To contravene is to conflict with or violate {the higher speed limit

contravenes our policy of encouraging fuel conservation}. To controvert is to challenge or

contradict {the testimony controverts the witness's prior statement}.

convince. See persuade.

copyright, vb. The verb is conjugated copyright--copyrighted--copyrighted. Note the spelling, which

has nothing to do with write. ( Copywriting is a term used in marketing.)

corollary; correlation. A corollary is either (1) a subsidiary proposition that follows from a proven

mathematical proposition, often without requiring additional evidence to support it, or (2) a

natural or incidental result of some action or occurrence. A correlation is a positive connection

between things or phenomena. If used in the context of physics or statistics, it denotes the

degree to which the observed interactions and variances are not attributable to chance alone.

corporal; corporeal. What is corporal relates in some way to the body {corporal punishment}; what

is corporeal has a body {not our spiritual but our corporeal existence}.

corps; core. A corps is a body of like workers {Marine Corps} {press corps} but is often misspelled

like its homonym, core.

correlation. See corollary.

could. See can.

couldn't care less. This is the standard phrasing. Avoid the illogical form could care less.

councillor; counselor. A councillor is one who sits on a council {city councillor}. A counselor is a

person who gives advice {personal counselor}.

couple of. Using couple as an adjective is poor phrasing. Add of {we watched a couple of movies}.

court-martial. This is two words joined by a hyphen, whether the phrase functions as a noun or as

a verb. Because martial acts as an adjective meaning "military," the plural of the noun is courts-

martial.

credible; credulous. Credible means "believable"; credulous means "gullible." The most common

error involving cognate forms of these words is in the malapropism "strains credulity." If that

clichÃ© must be used, it should read "strains credibility."

crevice; crevasse. Size matters. A crack in the sidewalk is a crevice (accent on the first syllable); a

fissure in a glacier or a dam is a crevasse (accent on the second syllable).

criminal. See unlawful.

criteria. This is the plural form of criterion ("a standard for judging"): one criterion, two criteria.

damp, vb.; dampen. Both words convey the sense "to moisten." Damp also means "to reduce with

moisture" {damp the fire} or "to diminish vibration or oscillation of [a wire or voltage]" {damp

the voltage}. In a figurative sense, dampen means "to depress, curtail" {dampen one's hopes}.

data. Though originally this word was a plural of datum, it is now commonly treated as a mass

noun and coupled with a singular verb. In formal writing (and always in the sciences), use data

as a plural.

deadly; deathly. Deadly means "capable of causing death" {deadly snake venom}. Deathly means

"deathlike" {deathly silence}.

decide whether; decide if. See determine whether.

decimate. This word literally means "to kill every tenth person," a means of repression that goes

back to Roman times. But the word has come to mean "to inflict heavy damage," and that use is

accepted. Avoid decimate when (1) you are referring to complete destruction or (2) a percentage

other than 10 percent is specified. That is, don't say that a city was "completely decimated," and

don't say that some natural disaster "decimated 23 percent of the city's population."

deduce. See adduce.

defamation; libel; slander. Defamation is the communication of a falsehood that damages

someone's reputation. If it is recorded, especially in writing, it is libel; otherwise it is slander.

definite; definitive. Definite means "clear, exact" {a definite yes}. Definitive means "conclusive, final,

most authoritative" {a definitive treatise}.

delegate. See relegate.

deliberate; deliberative. As an adjective, deliberate means either "carefully thought out" {a

deliberate response} or "slow and steady" {deliberate progress}. Deliberative means "of or

characterized by debate"; the word most often applies to an assembly {deliberative body} or a

process.

denote. See connote.

denounce; renounce. To denounce is either to criticize harshly or to accuse. To renounce is either to

relinquish or to reject.

dependent. See addicted.

deprecate. In general, to deprecate is to disapprove. But in the phrase self-deprecating--which began

as a mistaken form of self-depreciating but is now standard--the sense of deprecate is "to belittle."

In the computer-software world, deprecate serves as a warning: a deprecated feature or function is

one that will be phased out of future release of software, so users should quickly begin looking

for alternatives.

derisive; derisory. What is derisive ridicules {derisive laughter}. What is derisory invites or deserves

ridicule {that derisory "banana" hat}.

deserts; desserts. The first are deserved {your just deserts}, the second eaten {the many desserts on

the menu}.

despite; in spite of. For brevity, prefer despite.

determine whether; determine if. The first phrasing is irreproachable style; the second is

acceptable as a colloquialism. The same is true of decide whether versus decide if. See also if.

different. The phrasing different from is generally preferable to different than {this company is

different from that one}, but sometimes the adverbial phrase differently than is all but required

{she described the scene differently than he did}.

differ from; differ with. Differ from is the usual construction denoting a contrast {the two species

differ from each other in subtle ways}. Differ with regards differences of opinion {the state's

senators differ with each other on many issues}.

disburse; disperse. To disburse is to distribute money. To disperse can be (1) to distribute other

things or (2) to break up, as an unruly crowd.

disc. See disk.

discomfort; discomfit. Discomfort is a noun meaning "ill at ease." It can also be used as a verb

meaning "to put ill at ease." But doing so often invites confusion with discomfit, which originally

meant "to defeat utterly." Today it means "to thwart or confuse" {the ploy discomfited the

opponent}. The distinction has become a fine one, since a discomfited person is also

uncomfortable. Discomfiture is the corresponding noun.

discreet; discrete. Discreet means "circumspect, judicious" {a discreet silence}. Discrete means

"separate, distinct, unconnected" {six discrete parts}.

discriminating, adj.; discriminatory. The word discrimination can be used in either a negative or a

positive sense, and these adjectives reflect that ambivalence. Discriminatory means "reflecting a

biased treatment" {discriminatory employment policy}. Discriminating means "analytical,

discerning, tasteful" {a discriminating palate}.

disinterested. This word should be reserved for the sense "not having a financial personal interest

at stake, impartial." Avoid it as a replacement for uninterested (which means "unconcerned,

bored").

disk; disc. Disk is the usual spelling {floppy disk}. But disc is preferred in a few specialized

applications {compact disc} {disc brakes} {disc harrow}.

disorganized; unorganized. Both mean "not organized," but disorganized suggests a group in

disarray, either thrown into confusion or inherently unable to work together {the disorganized

1968 Democratic National Convention in Chicago}.

disperse. See disburse.

distinctive; distinguished; distinguishable. A distinctive feature is something that makes a person

(or place or thing) easy to distinguish (pick out) from others. But it does not necessarily make

that person distinguished (exalted) {the distinguished professor wears a distinctive red bow tie}.

It does, however, make the person distinguishable, a term that does not carry the positive

connotation of distinguished.

dive, vb. The preferred conjugation is dive--dived--dived. The form dove, though common in certain

regions and possibly on the rise, has not traditionally been considered good form.

doctrinal; doctrinaire. Doctrinal means "of, relating to, or constituting a doctrine"; it is neutral in

connotation {doctrinal differences}. Doctrinaire shares the pejorative sense of dogmatic,

suggesting that the person described is stubborn and narrow-minded {a doctrinaire ideologue}.

doubtless, adv. Use this form--not doubtlessly.

doubt that; doubt whether; doubt if. Doubt that conveys a negative sense of skepticism or

questioning {I doubt that you'll ever get your money back}. Doubt whether also conveys a sense

of skepticism {the official says that he doubts whether the company could survive}. Doubt if is a

casual phrasing for doubt that.

drag. Conjugated drag--dragged--dragged. The past form drug is dialectal.

dream. Either dreamed (more typical in American English) or dreamt (more typical in British

English) is acceptable for the past-tense and past-participial forms.

drink, vb. Correctly conjugated drink--drank--drunk {they had not drunk any fruit juice that day}.

drown, vb. Conjugated drown--drowned--drowned.

drunk, adj.; drunken. Drunk describes a current state of intoxication {drunk driver}. (By contrast, a

drunk--like a drunkard--is someone who is habitually intoxicated.) Drunken describes either a

trait of habitual intoxication {drunken sot} or intoxicated people's behavior {a drunken brawl}.

due to. In strict traditional usage, due to should be interchangeable with attributable to {the erratic

driving was due to some prescription drugs that the driver had taken}. When used adverbially,

due to is often considered inferior to because of or owing to. So in the sentence due to the parents'

negligence, the entire family suffered, the better phrasing would be because of [or owing to] the

parents' negligence, the entire family suffered.

due to the fact that. Use because instead.

dumb. This word means either "stupid" or "unable to speak." In the second sense, mute is clearer

for most modern readers.

dying; dyeing. Dying is the present participle of die ("to cease living"); dyeing is the present

participle of dye ("to color with a liquid").

each other; one another. Traditionalists use each other when two things or people are involved, one

another when more than two are involved.

eatable. See edible.

economic; economical. Economic means "of or relating to large-scale finances" {federal economic

policy}. Economical means "thrifty; financially efficient" {an economical purchase}.

edible; eatable. What is edible is fit for human consumption {edible flowers}. What is eatable is at

least minimally palatable {the cake is slightly burned but still eatable}.

effect. See affect.

effete. Traditionally, it has meant "decadent, worn out, sterile." Today it is often used to mean

either "snobbish" or "effeminate." Because of its ambiguity, the word is best avoided altogether.

effrontery; affront. Effrontery is an act of shameless impudence or audacity. An affront is a

deliberate insult.

e.g. See i.e.

elemental; elementary. Something that is elemental is an essential constituent {elemental

ingredients} or a power of nature {elemental force}. Something that is elementary is basic,

introductory, or easy {an elementary math problem}.

elicit; illicit. Elicit ("to draw out [an answer, information, etc.]") is a verb {to elicit responses}; illicit

("illegal") is an adjective {an illicit scheme}. Writers often mistakenly use illicit when they mean

elicit.

elude. See allude.

emend. See amend.

emigrate. See immigrate.

empathy; sympathy. Empathy is putting oneself in someone else's shoes to understand that

person's situation. Sympathy is compassion and sorrow one feels for another.

endemic. See epidemic.

endorse. See approve.

enervate; innervate. These words are antonyms. To enervate is to weaken or drain of energy. To

innervate is to stimulate or provide with energy.

enormity; enormousness. Enormity means "monstrousness, moral outrageousness, atrociousness"

{the enormity of the Khmer Rouge's killings}. Enormousness means "abnormally great size" {the

enormousness of Alaska}.

enough. See adequate.

ensure; insure; assure. Ensure is the general term meaning to make sure something will (or won't)

happen. In best usage, insure is reserved for underwriting financial risk. So we ensure that we

can get time off for a vacation and insure our car against an accident on the trip. We ensure

events and insure things. But we assure people that their concerns are being addressed.

enthused, adj. Use enthusiastic instead.

enumerable; innumerable. What's enumerable is countable. What's innumerable can't be counted, at

least not practically {innumerable stars in the sky}.

envy. See jealousy.

epidemic; endemic; pandemic. An epidemic disease breaks out, spreads through a limited area

(such as a state), and then subsides {an epidemic outbreak of measles}. (The word is frequently

used as a noun {a measles epidemic}.) An endemic disease is perennially present within a region

or population {malaria is endemic in parts of Africa}. (Note that endemic describes a disease and

not a region: it is incorrect to say this region is endemic for [a disease].) A pandemic disease is

prevalent over a large area, such as a nation or continent, or the entire world {the 1918--19 flu

pandemic}.

equally as. This is typically faulty phrasing. Delete as.

et al. This is the abbreviated form of et alii ("and others")--the others being people, not things. Since

al. is an abbreviation, the period is required. Cf. etc.

etc. This is the abbreviated form of et cetera ("and other things"); it should never be used in

reference to people. Etc. implies that a list of things is too extensive to recite (and indeed it

should be used only after at least two items, never just one). But often writers seem to run out

of thoughts and tack on etc. for no real purpose. Also, two redundancies often appear with this

abbreviation: (1) and etc. , which is poor style because et means "and," and (2) etc. at the end of a

list that begins with e.g. , which properly introduces a short list of examples. Cf. et al.; see also

6.20.

event. The phrase in the event that is a long and formal way of saying if.

eventuality. This term often needlessly displaces more specific everyday words such as event,

result, and possibility.

every day, adv.; everyday, adj. The first is adverbial, the second adjectival. One may wear one's

everyday clothes every day.

every one; everyone. The two-word version is an emphatic way of saying "each" {every one of

them was there}; the second is a pronoun equivalent to everybody {everyone was there}.

evoke; invoke. To evoke something is to bring it out {evoke laughter} or bring to mind {evoke

childhood memories}. Invoke has a number of senses, including to assert (something) as

authority {invoke martial law}, to appeal (to someone or a higher power) for help {invoke an

ally to intervene}, or to conjure up {invoke spirits of the past}.

exceptional; exceptionable. What is exceptional is uncommon, superior, rare, or extraordinary {an

exceptional talent}. What is exceptionable is objectionable or offensive {an exceptionable slur}.

executor; administrator. In a will, a person designates an executor to distribute the estate after

death. When a person dies without a will or without specifying an executor, the court will

appoint an administrator to do the same. The feminine forms administratrix and executrix are

unnecessary and should be avoided.

explicit; implicit. If something is explicit it is deliberately spelled out, as in the writing of a contract

or the text of a statute. If it is implicit it is not specifically stated but either is suggested in the

wording or is necessary to effectuate the purpose. Avoid implicit to mean "complete,

unmitigated."

fact that, the. This much-maligned phrase is not always avoidable. But hunt for a substitute before

deciding to use it. Sometimes that alone suffices.

farther; further. The traditional distinction is to use farther for a physical distance {we drove farther

north to see the autumn foliage} and further for a figurative distance {let's examine this further}

{look no further}.

fax, n. & vb. Derived from facsimile transmission, the foreshortened fax is almost universally

preferred for convenience. The plural is faxes. Note that the word is governed by the same rules

of capitalization as other common nouns. FAX is incorrect: the word is not an acronym.

faze; phase, vb. To faze is to disturb or disconcert {Jones isn't fazed by insults}. To phase (usually

phase in or phase out) is to schedule or perform a plan, task, or the like in stages {phase in new

procedures} {phase out the product lines that don't sell}.

feel. This verb is weak when used as a substitute for think or believe.

feel bad. Invariably, the needed phrase is feel bad (not badly). See 5.167.

fewer. See less.

fictional; fictitious; fictive. Fictional (from fiction as a literary genre) means "of, relating to, or

characteristic of imagination" {a fictional story}. Fictitious means "imaginary; counterfeit; false" {a

fictitious name}. Fictive means "possessing the talent for imaginative creation" {fictive gift}; it can

also be a synonym for fictional but in that sense is a needless variant. Also, anthropologists

apply fictive to relationships in which people are treated as family members despite having no

bond of blood or marriage {fictive kin}.

finalize. Meaning "to make final or bring to an end," this word has often been associated with

inflated jargon. Although its compactness may recommend it in some contexts, use finish when

possible.

first. In enumerations, use first, second, third, and so on. Avoid the â€‘ly forms.

fit. This verb is undergoing a shift. It has traditionally been conjugated fit--fitted--fitted, but today

fit--fit--fit is prevalent in American English {when she tried on the dress, it fit quite well}. In the

passive voice, however, fitted is still normal {the horse was fitted with a new harness}.

flair. See flare.

flammable; inflammable. Flammable was invented as an alternative to the synonymous word

inflammable, which some people misunderstood--dangerously--as meaning "not combustible."

Today flammable is the standard term.

flare; flair. A flare is an unsteady and glaring light {an emergency flare} or a sudden outburst {a

flare-up of fighting}. A flair is an outstanding talent {a flair for mathematics} or originality and

stylishness {performed with flair}.

flaunt; flout. Flaunt, meaning "to show off ostentatiously" {they flaunted their wealth}, should not

be confused with flout, meaning "to treat with disdain or contempt" {flouting the rules}.

flounder; founder. Keep the figurative meanings of these terms straight by remembering their

literal meanings. To flounder is to struggle awkwardly, as though walking through deep mud

{the professor glared while the unprepared student floundered around for an answer}. To

founder is to sink or fall to the ground {without any editorial expertise, the publisher soon

foundered}.

following. Avoid this word as an equivalent of after. Consider: Following the presentation, there was a

question-and-answer session. After is both simpler and clearer. But following is unobjectionable in

meaning "next" {the following example illustrates the point}.

forbear, vb.; forebear, n. The terms are unrelated, but the spellings are frequently confused. To

forbear is to refrain {he wanted to speak but decided to forbear}. (The conjugation is forbear--

forbore--forborne.) A forebear is an ancestor {the house was built by Murray's distant forebears}.

forego; forgo. To forego is to go before {the foregoing paragraph}. (The word appears most

commonly in the phrase foregone conclusion.) To forgo, by contrast, is to do without or renounce

{they decided to forgo that opportunity}.

foreword; preface. A foreword (not forward) is a brief essay of endorsement that is written by

someone other than the book's author. An introductory essay about the book written by the

book's author is called a preface and is usually shorter and more personal than the book's

introduction, which gives an overview of the book's content. See 1.39, 1.40, 1.42, 1.46.

forgo. See forego.

former; latter. In the best usage, these words apply only to pairs. The former is the first of two, the

latter the second of two.

fortuitous; fortunate. Fortuitous means "by chance," whether the fortune is good or bad {the rotten

tree could have fallen at any time; it was just fortuitous that the victims drove by when they

did}. Fortunate means "by good fortune" {we were fortunate to win the raffle}.

forward(s). See toward.

founder. See flounder.

fulsome, adj. This word does not preferably mean "very full" but "too much, excessive to the point

of being repulsive." Its slipshod use arises most often in the phrase fulsome praise, which

suggests the opposite of what the writer probably intends.

further. See farther.

future, in the near. Use soon or shortly instead.

gantlet; gauntlet. See run the gantlet.

gentleman. This word is a vulgarism when used as a synonym for man {two gentlemen were in the

car} (better to use men there). When used in reference to a cultured, refined man, it is

susceptible to some of the same objections as those leveled against lady. Use it cautiously. Cf.

lady.

get. Though shunned by many writers as too casual, get often sounds more natural than obtain or

procure {get a job}. It can also substitute for a stuffy become {get hurt}. The verb is conjugated get-

-got--gotten in American English, get--got--got in British English.

gibe, n.; jibe, vb. A gibe is a biting insult or taunt; gibes are figuratively thrown at their target {the

angry crowd hurled gibes as the suspect was led into the courthouse}. Jibe means to fit, usually

with negation {the verdict didn't jibe with the judge's own view of the facts}.

gild. See guild.

go. This verb is conjugated go--went--gone. Went appears as a past participle only in dialect.

gourmet; gourmand. Both are aficionados of good food and drink. But a gourmet knows and

appreciates the fine points of food and drink, whereas a gourmand is a glutton.

grateful; gratified. To be grateful is to be thankful or appreciative. To be gratified is to be pleased,

satisfied, or indulged.

grisly; grizzly. What is grisly is gruesome or horrible {grisly details}. What is grizzly is grayish

{grizzly hair} or bearish {the North American grizzly bear}.

guild, n.; gild, vb. A guild is an organization of persons with a common interest or profession {a

guild of fine carpenters}. To gild is to put a thin layer of gold on something {gild a picture

frame}.

half (of). Delete the of whenever possible {half the furniture}.

handful. If handful applies to a mass noun, use a singular verb {a handful of trouble is ahead}. But

if handful applies to a plural count noun, use a plural verb {there are only a handful of walnut

trees lining Main Street}.

hangar; hanger. One finds hangars at an airport {airplane hangars}. Everywhere else, one finds

hangers {clothes hangers} {picture hangers}.

hanged; hung. Hanged is used as the past participle of hang only in its transitive form when

referring to the killing (just or unjust) of a human being by suspending the person by the neck

{criminals were hanged at Tyburn Hill}. But if death is not intended or likely, or if the person is

suspended by a body part other than the neck, hung is correct {he was hung upside down as a

cruel prank}. In most senses, of course, hung is the past form of hang {Mark hung up his

clothes}. All inanimate objects, such as pictures and Christmas stockings, are hung.

hanger. See hangar.

harass; embarrass. The first word has one â€‘r-; the second has two. The pronunciation of harass

also causes confusion. The dominant American pronunciation stresses the second syllable, while

British English stresses the first.

harebrained. So spelled (after the timid, easily startled animal)--not hairbrained.

healthy; healthful. Traditionally, a living thing that is healthy enjoys good health; something that is

healthful promotes health {a healthful diet will keep you healthy}. But gradually healthy is taking

over both senses.

help (to). Omit the to when possible {talking will help resolve the problem}.

he or she. To avoid sexist language, many writers use this alternative phrasing (in place of the

generic he). Use it sparingly--preferably after exhausting all the less obtrusive methods of

achieving gender neutrality. In any event, he or she is much preferable to he/she, s/he, (s)he, and

the like. See also 5.46.

historic; historical. The shorter word refers to what is momentous in history {January 16, 1991,

was a historic day in Kuwait}. Historical, meanwhile, refers simply to anything that pertains to

or occurred in history.

hoard; horde. A hoard is a supply, usually secret and often valuable. Hoard is also a verb meaning

"to amass" such a cache. A horde was originally a tribe of Asian nomads; today a horde is a large

crowd.

hoi polloi. The hoi polloi are the common people, not the elite. This term is a plural. Although hoi is

Greek for "the," the phrase is commonly rendered "the hoi polloi" and has been at least since it

was used by John Dryden in 1668.

holocaust. When capitalized, this word refers to the Nazi genocide of European Jews in World

War II. When not capitalized, it refers (literally or figuratively) to extensive devastation caused

by fire, or to the systematic and malicious killings of human beings on a vast scale.

home in. This phrase is frequently misrendered hone in. ( Hone means "to sharpen.") Home in refers

to what homing pigeons do; the meaning is "to come closer and closer to a target."

homicide. See murder.

hopefully. The old meaning of the word ("in a hopeful manner") seems unsustainable; the newer

meaning ("I hope" or "it is to be hoped") seems here to stay. But many careful writers deplore

the new meaning.

horde. See hoard.

hung. See hanged.

I; me. When you need the first-person singular, use it. It's not immodest to use it; it's superstitious

not to.

idyllic. An idyll is a short pastoral poem, and by extension idyllic means charming or picturesque.

It is not synonymous with ideal (perfect).

i.e.; e.g. The first is the abbreviation for id est ("that is"); the second is the abbreviation for exempli

gratia ("for example"). The English equivalents are preferable in formal prose; Chicago style is to

use these two-character abbreviations only within parentheses or in notes. Always put a comma

after either of them.

if; whether. While if is conditional, whether introduces an alternative, often in the context of an

indirect question. Use whether in two circumstances: (1) to introduce a noun clause {he asked

whether his tie was straight} (the answer is either yes or no), and (2) when using if would

produce ambiguity. In the sentence He asked if his tie was straight, the literal meaning is

"whenever his tie was straight, he asked"; the popular meaning "he wanted someone to tell him

whether his tie needed straightening" may not be understood by all readers. More tellingly, call

me to let me know if you can come means that you should call only if you're coming; call to let me

know whether you can come means that you should call regardless of your answer. Avoid

substituting if for whether unless your tone is intentionally informal or you are quoting someone.

See also determine whether.

illegal. See unlawful.

illegible; unreadable. Handwriting or printing that is illegible is not clear enough to be read

{illegible scrawls}. Writing that is unreadable is so poorly composed as to be either

incomprehensible or intolerably dull.

illicit. See elicit; unlawful.

illude. See allude.

immigrate; emigrate. To immigrate is to enter a country to live, leaving a past home. To emigrate is

to leave one country to live in another one. The cognate forms also demand attention. Someone

who moves from Ireland to the United States is an immigrant here and an emigrant there. An

emigrÃ© is also an emigrant, but especially one in political exile.

impact. Resist using this word as a verb. Try affect or influence instead. Besides being hyperbolic,

impact used as a verb is widely considered a solecism (though it is gaining ground).

impeachment. Impeachment is the legislative equivalent of an indictment, not a conviction. In the

US federal system, the House of Representatives votes on impeachment and the Senate votes on

removal from office.

impelled. See compelled.

implicit. See explicit.

imply; infer. The writer or speaker implies (hints, suggests); the reader or listener infers (deduces).

Writers and speakers often use infer as if it were synonymous with imply, but careful writers

always distinguish between the two words.

in actual fact. See actual fact, in.

inasmuch as. Because or since is almost always a better choice.

in behalf of. See behalf.

in connection with. This is a vague, fuzzy phrase {she explained the financial consequences in

connection with the transaction} {a liking for everything in connection with golf} {Phipson was

compensated in connection with its report}. Try replacing the phrase with of, related to, or

associated with {she explained the financial consequences of the transaction}, about {a liking for

everything about golf}, or for {Phipson was compensated for its report}.

incredible; incredulous. Incredible properly means "unbelievable." Colloquially, it is used to mean

"astonishing (in a good way)" {it was an incredible trip}. Incredulous means "disbelieving,

skeptical" {people are incredulous about the rising gas costs}.

inculcate; indoctrinate. One inculcates values into a child but indoctrinates the child with values.

That is, inculcate always takes the preposition into and a value or values as its object {inculcate

courage into soldiers}. Indoctrinate takes a person as its object {indoctrinate children with the

habit of telling the truth}.

indicate. Often vague. When possible, use a more direct verb such as state, comment, show, suggest,

or say.

individual. Use this word to distinguish a single person from a group. When possible, use person

or a more specific term such as adult, child, man, or woman.

indoctrinate. See inculcate.

induce. See adduce.

in excess of. Try replacing this verbose phrase with more than or over.

infectious. See contagious.

infer. See imply.

inference. Use the verb draw, not make, with inference {they drew the wrong inferences}. Otherwise,

readers may confuse inference with implication.

inflammable. See flammable.

inflict; afflict. Events, illnesses, punishments, and the like are inflicted on living things or entities

{an abuser inflicts cruelty}. The sufferers are afflicted with or by disease or troubles {agricultural

communities afflicted with drought}.

ingenious; ingenuous. These words are similar in form but not in meaning. Ingenious describes

what is intelligent, clever, and original {an ingenious invention}. Ingenuous describes what is

candid, naive, and without dissimulation {a hurtful but ingenuous observation}.

innate; inherent. An innate characteristic is one that a living thing has from birth; it should be

distinguished, then, from a talent or disposition that one acquires from training or experience.

An inherent characteristic is also part of a thing's nature, but life is not implied; a rock, for

example, has an inherent hardness.

innervate. See enervate.

innocent; not guilty. If you are innocent, you are without blame. If you are not guilty, you have

been exonerated by a jury. Newspapers avoid the "not guilty" phrase, though, because the

consequences of accidentally leaving off the "not" could be serious.

innumerable. See enumerable.

in order to; in order for. Often these expressions can be reduced to to and for. When that is so, and

rhythm and euphony are preserved or even heightened, use to or for.

in proximity. See close proximity, in.

in regard to. This is the phrase, not in regards to. Try a single-word substitute instead: about,

regarding, concerning.

insidious; invidious. What is insidious involves deceit and treachery {an insidious conspiracy};

what is invidious involves malice but not necessarily deceit {invidious discrimination}.

in spite of. See despite.

insure. See ensure.

intense; intensive. Intense is preferred in reference to colors, emotions, and personal efforts.

Intensive describes concentration of attention and resources and is more often used to refer to

work or study methods {labor-intensive} {intensive care}.

interpretive; interpretative. Although interpretative was considered the preferred form through the

mid-twentieth century, it has largely fallen into disuse. Today interpretive is the standard term.

in the affirmative. See affirmative, in the.

in the event that. See event.

in the near future. See future.

in the negative. See affirmative, in the.

inveigh; inveigle. To inveigh is to protest, usually against something {picketers inveighed against

annexation}. To inveigle is to cajole or ensnare {inveigle into attending the party}.

invidious. See insidious.

irregardless. An error. Use regardless (or possibly irrespective).

it is I; it is me. Both are correct and acceptable. The first phrase is strictly grammatical (and stuffy);

the second is idiomatic (and relaxed), and it is often contracted to it's me. In the third-person

constructions, however, a greater stringency holds sway in good English {this is he} {it isn't she

who has caused such misery}.

its; it's. Its is the possessive form of it; it's is the contraction for it is {it's a sad dog that scratches its

fleas}.

jealousy; envy. Jealousy connotes feelings of resentment toward another, particularly in matters

relating to an intimate relationship. Envy refers to covetousness of another's advantages,

possessions, or abilities.

jibe. See gibe.

karat. See carat.

lady. When used as a synonym for woman--indeed when used anywhere but in the phrase ladies

and gentlemen--this word will be considered objectionable by some readers who think that it

refers to a patronizing stereotype. This is especially true when it is used for unprestigious jobs

{cleaning lady} or as an adjective {lady lawyer}. Some will insist on using it to describe a refined

woman. If they've consulted this entry, they've been forewarned. Cf. gentleman.

latter. See former.

laudable; laudatory. Laudable means "praiseworthy" {a laudable effort}. Laudatory means

"expressing praise" {laudatory phone calls}.

lay; lie. Lay is a transitive verb--that is, it demands a direct object {lay your pencils down}. It is

inflected lay--laid--laid {I laid the book there yesterday} {these rumors have been laid to rest}.

(The children's prayer Now I lay me down to sleep is a good mnemonic device for the transitive

lay.) Lie is an intransitive verb--that is, it never takes a direct object {lie down and rest}. It is

inflected lie--lay--lain {she lay down and rested} {he hasn't yet lain down}.

leach; leech. To leach is to percolate or to separate out solids in solution by percolation. A leech is a

bloodsucker (both literal and figurative).

lease; let. Many Americans seem to think that let is colloquial and of modern origin. In fact, the

word is three hundred years older than lease and just as proper. One distinction between the two

words is that either the owner or the tenant can be said to lease property, but only the owner

can be said to let it.

led. This is the correct spelling of the past tense and past participle of the verb lead. It is often

misspelled lead, maybe in part because of the pronunciation of the noun lead (the metal) or the

past tense and past participle read, which rhyme with led.

lend, vb.; loan, vb. & n. Lend is the correct term for letting someone use something with the

understanding that it (or its equivalent) will be returned. The verb loan is standard only when

money is the subject of the transaction. Loan is the noun corresponding to both lend and loan, vb.

The past-tense and past-participial form of lend is lent.

less; fewer. Reserve less for amounts or mass nouns--for example, less salt, dirt, water. Reserve fewer

for countable things--for example, fewer people, calories, suggestions. One easy guideline is to use

less with singular nouns {less money} and fewer with plural nouns {fewer dollars}.

let. See lease.

libel. See defamation.

lie. See lay.

life-and-death; life-or-death. The problem of logic aside (life and death being mutually exclusive),

the first phrase is the standard idiom {a life-and-death decision}.

like; as. The use of like as a conjunction (as in the old jingle "like a cigarette should") has long been

a contentious issue. Purists insist that as must introduce a clause and like must always be a

preposition coupled with a noun {cool like springwater}. The fall of that old rule has been

predicted for five decades, but today like as a conjunction is still not standard. See also 5.181.

likely. See apt.

literally. This word means "actually; without exaggeration." It should not be used loosely as an

intensifier, as in they were literally glued to their seats (unless glue had in fact been applied).

loan. See lend.

loathe, vb.; loath, adj. To loathe something is to detest it or to regard it with disgust {I loathe

tabloid television}. Someone who is loath is reluctant {Tracy seems loath to admit mistakes}.

lose; loose, vb.; loosen. To lose something is to be deprived of it. To loose something is to release it

from fastenings or restraints. To loosen is to make less tight or to ease a restraint. Loose conveys

the idea of complete release, whereas loosen refers to only a partial release.

luxuriant; luxurious. The two terms are fairly often confused. What is luxuriant is lush and grows

abundantly {a luxuriant head of hair}. What is luxurious is lavish and extravagant {a luxurious

resort}.

malevolent; maleficent. Malevolent means "evil in mind" {with malevolent intent}. Maleficent means

"evil in deed" {a maleficent bully}.

malodorous. See odious.

maltreatment. See mistreatment.

manslaughter. See murder.

mantle; mantel. A mantle is a long, loose garment like a cloak. A mantel is a wood or stone

structure around a fireplace.

masterful; masterly. Masterful describes a person who is dominating and imperious. Masterly

describes a person who has mastered a craft, trade, or profession; the word often means

"authoritative" {a masterly analysis}. Because masterly does not readily make an adverb

( masterlily being extremely awkward [see 5.154]), try in a masterly way.

may; can. See can.

may; might. May expresses what is possible, is factual, or could be factual {I may have turned off

the stove, but I can't recall doing it}. Might suggests something that is uncertain, hypothetical, or

contrary to fact {I might have won the marathon if I had entered}. See 5.146.

me. See I.

media; mediums. In scientific contexts and in reference to mass communications, the plural of

medium is media {some bacteria flourish in several types of media} {the media are now issuing

reports}. But if medium refers to a spiritualist, the plural is mediums {several mediums have held

sÃ©ances here}.

memoranda; memorandums. Although both plural forms are correct, memoranda is more common.

Memoranda is sometimes misused as if it were singular.

minuscule. Something that is minuscule is "very small." Probably because of the spelling of the

modern word mini (and the prefix of the same spelling, which is recorded only from 1936), it is

often misspelled miniscule (which is treated as a variant in some dictionaries). In printing,

minuscules and majuscules are lowercase and capital letters, respectively.

mistreatment; maltreatment. Mistreatment is the more general term. Maltreatment denotes a harsh

form of mistreatment, involving abuse by rough or cruel handling.

mitigate; militate. Mitigate, like its synonym extenuate, means "to lessen or soften"; so mitigating

circumstances lessen the seriousness of a crime. Militate, by contrast, means "to have a marked

effect on" and is usually followed by against {his nearsightedness militated against his ambition

to become a commercial pilot}.

moot; mute. Mute means silent {he remained mute}. Moot traditionally meant debatable, so that a

moot point was an arguable one, but today a moot point, in American English, is one that has no

practical significance because it is hypothetical. The shift in meaning resulted from American

legal usage.

much; very. Much generally intensifies past-participial adjectives {much obliged} {much

encouraged} and some comparatives {much more} {much worse} {much too soon}. Very

intensifies adverbs and most adjectives {very carefully} {very bad}, including past-participial

adjectives that have more adjectival than verbal force {very bored}. See 5.89.

murder; manslaughter; homicide. All three words denote the killing of one person by another.

Murder and manslaughter are both unlawful killings, but murder is done maliciously and

intentionally. Homicide includes killings that are not unlawful, such as by a police officer acting

properly in the line of duty. Homicide also refers to a person who kills another.

mutual. See common.

myself. Avoid using myself as a pronoun in place of I or me. Use it reflexively {I did myself a

favor} or emphatically {I myself have tried to get through that tome!}. See also 5.48.

naturalist; naturist. Naturalist most often denotes a person who studies natural history, especially a

field biologist or an amateur who observes and photographs, sketches, or writes about nature.

Naturist denotes a nature worshiper or a nudist.

nauseous; nauseated. Whatever is nauseous induces a feeling of nausea--it makes us feel sick to our

stomachs. To feel sick is to be nauseated. The use of nauseous to mean nauseated may be too

common to be called error anymore, but strictly speaking it is poor usage. Because of the

ambiguity in nauseous, the wisest course may be to stick to the participial adjectives nauseated

and nauseating.

necessary; necessitous. Necessary means "required under the circumstances" {the necessary

arrangements}. Necessitous means "impoverished" {living in necessitous circumstances}.

no. See affirmative, in the.

noisome. This word has nothing to do with noise. It means noxious, offensive, foul-smelling {a

noisome factory}.

none. This word may take either a singular or a plural verb. A guideline: if it is followed by a

singular noun, treat it as a singular {none of the building was painted}; if by a plural noun, treat

it as a plural {none of the guests were here when I arrived}. But for special emphasis, it is quite

proper (though possibly stilted) to use a singular verb when a plural noun follows {none of the

edits was accepted}.

notable; noticeable; noteworthy. Notable ("readily noticed") applies both to physical things and to

qualities {notable sense of humor}. Noticeable means "detectable with the physical senses" {a

noticeable limp}. Noteworthy means "remarkable" {a noteworthy act of kindness}.

notwithstanding. One word. Less formal alternatives include despite, although, and in spite of. The

word notwithstanding may precede or follow a noun {notwithstanding her bad health, she

decided to run for office} {her bad health notwithstanding, she decided to run for office}.

number. See amount.

numerous. This is typically a bloated word for many.

observance; observation. Observance means "obedience to a rule or custom" {the family's

observance of Passover}. Observation means either "a study of something" or "a remark based on

such a study" {a keen observation about the defense strategy}. Each term is sometimes used

when the other would be the better word.

obtain. See attain.

obtuse; abstruse. Obtuse describes a person who can't understand; abstruse describes an idea that is

hard to understand. A person who is obtuse is dull and, by extension, dull-witted. What is

abstruse is incomprehensible or nearly so.

odious; odorous; odoriferous; malodorous. Odious means hateful {odious Jim Crow laws}. It is not

related to the other terms, but it is sometimes misused as if it were. Odorous means detectable

by smell, for better or worse. Odoriferous means essentially the same thing, although it has

meant "fragrant" as often as it has meant "foul." Malodorous means smelling quite bad. The

mistaken form odiferous is often used as a jocular equivalent of smelly--but most dictionaries

don't record it.

odoriferous. See odious.

off. Never put of after this word {we got off the bus}.

officious. A person who is officious is aggressively nosy and meddlesome. The word has nothing to

do with an officer and should not be confused with official.

on; upon. Prefer on to upon unless introducing an event or condition {put that on the shelf, please}

{upon the job's completion, you'll get paid}. For more about on, see onto.

on behalf of. See behalf.

one another. See each other.

oneself. One word--not one's self.

onto; on to; on. When is on a preposition and when is it an adverb? The sense of the sentence

should tell, but the distinction can be subtle. Onto implies a movement, so it has an adverbial

flavor even though it is a preposition {the gymnast jumped onto the bars}. When on is part of the

verbal phrase, it is an adverb and to is the preposition {the gymnast held on to the bars}. One

trick is to mentally say "up" before on: if the sentence still makes sense, then onto is probably the

right choice. Alone, on does not imply motion {the gymnast is good on the parallel bars}.

oppress; repress. Oppress, meaning "to persecute or tyrannize," is more negative than repress,

meaning "to restrain or subordinate."

oral. See verbal.

oration. See peroration.

ordinance; ordnance. An ordinance is a municipal regulation or an authoritative decree. Ordnance is

military armament, especially artillery but also weapons and ammunition generally.

orient; orientate. To orient is to get one's bearings or point another in the right direction (literally

to find east) {it took the new employee a few days to get oriented to the firm's suite}. Unless

used in the sense "to face or turn to the east," orientate is a poor variation to be avoided. It is a

back-formation from the noun orientation, analogous to the illegitimate interpretate for interpret.

ought; should. Both express a sense of duty, but ought is stronger. Unlike should, ought requires a

fully expressed infinitive, even in the negative {you ought not to see the movie}. See 5.148,

5.149.

outside. In spatial references, no of is necessary--or desirable--after this word unless it is used as a

noun {outside the shop} {the outside of the building}. But outside of is acceptable as a

colloquialism meaning "except for" or "aside from."

over. As an equivalent of more than, this word is perfectly good idiomatic English.

overly. Avoid this word, which is widely considered poor usage. Try over- as a prefix or unduly.

pair. This is a singular form, despite the inherent sense of twoness. The plural is pairs {three pairs

of shoes}.

pandemic. See epidemic.

parameters. Though it may sound elegant or scientific, this word is usually just pretentious when

it is used in nontechnical contexts. Stick to boundaries, limits, guidelines, grounds, elements, or

some other word.

partake in; partake of. To partake in is to participate in {the new student refused to partake in class

discussions}. To partake of is either to get a part of {partake of the banquet} or to have a quality,

at least to some extent {this assault partakes of revenge}.

partly; partially. Both words convey the sense "to some extent; in part" {partly disposed of}. Partly

is preferred in that sense. But partially has the additional senses of "incompletely" {partially

cooked} and "unfairly; in a way that shows bias toward one side" {he treats his friends

partially}.

pastime. This word combines pass (not past) and time, and is spelled with a single t.

peaceable; peaceful. A peaceable person or nation is inclined to avoid strife {peaceable kingdom}. A

peaceful person, place, or event is serene, tranquil, and calm {a peaceful day free from demands}.

peak; peek; pique. These three sometimes get switched through writerly blunders. A peak is an

apex, a peek is a quick or illicit glance, and a fit of pique is an episode of peevishness and

wounded vanity. To pique is to annoy or arouse: an article piques (not peaks) one's interest.

pendant, n.; pendent, adj. A pendant is an item of dangling jewelry, especially one worn around

the neck. What is pendent is hanging or suspended.

penultimate. This word means "the next to last." Many people have started misusing it as a fancy

equivalent of ultimate.

people; persons. The traditional view is that persons is used for smaller numbers {three persons}

and people with larger ones {millions of people}. But today most people use people even for small

groups {only three people were there}.

period of time; time period. Avoid these phrases. Try period or time instead.

peroration; oration. A peroration, strictly speaking, is the conclusion of an oration (speech). Careful

writers avoid using peroration to refer to a rousing speech or text.

perpetuate; perpetrate. To perpetuate something is to sustain it or prolong it indefinitely

{perpetuate the species}. To perpetrate is to commit or perform (an act) {perpetrate a crime}.

personally. Three points. First, use this word only when an actor does something that would

normally be done through an agent {the president personally signed this invitation} or to limit

other considerations {Jean was affected by the decision but was not personally involved in it}.

Second, personally is redundant when combined with an activity that requires the actor's

presence ( personally shook hands should be simply shook hands). Third, personally shouldn't appear

with I when stating an opinion; it weakens the statement and doesn't reduce the speaker's

liability for the opinion. The only exception arises if a person is required to advance someone

else's view but holds a different personal opinion {in the chamber I voted to lower taxes

because of the constituencies I represented; but I personally believed that taxes should have

been increased}.

persons. See people.

persuade; convince. Persuade is associated with actions {persuade him to buy a suit}. Convince is

associated with beliefs or understandings {she convinced the auditor of her honesty}. The

phrase persuade to [ do] has traditionally been considered better than convince to [ do]. But either

verb will take a that-clause {the committee was persuaded that an all-night session was

necessary} {my three-year-old is convinced that Santa Claus exists}.

pertain; appertain. Pertain to, the more common term, means "to relate to" {the clause pertains to

assignment of risk}. Appertain to means "to belong to by right" {Fifth Amendment rights

appertaining to the defendant}.

phase. See faze.

phenomenon. This is a singular form. The plural is phenomena.

pique. See peak.

pitiable; pitiful. To be pitiable is to be worthy of pity. To be pitiful is to be contemptible.

pleaded; pled. The first is the standard past-tense and past-participial form {he pleaded guilty}

{they have pleaded with their families}. Avoid pled.

pore. To pore over something written is to read it intently. Some writers mistakenly substitute pour.

practicable; possible; practical. These terms differ in shading. What is practicable is capable of

being done; it's feasible. What is possible might be capable of happening or being done, but there

is some doubt. What is practical is fit for actual use.

precipitate, adj.; precipitous. What is precipitate occurs suddenly or rashly; the term describes

demands, actions, or movements. What is precipitous is dangerously steep; this term describes

cliffs and inclines.

precondition. Try condition or prerequisite instead.

predominant; predominate. Like dominant, predominant is an adjective {a predominant point of

view}. Like dominate, predominate is a verb {a point of view that predominates throughout the

state}. Using predominate as an adjective is common but loose usage--and the adverb

predominately (for the correct predominantly) is likely to make the literary person's teeth hurt.

preface. See foreword.

prejudice, vb. Although prejudice is a perfectly normal English noun to denote an all-too-common

trait, the verb is a legalism. For a plain-English equivalent, use harm or hurt.

preliminary to. Make it before, in preparing for, or some other natural phrasing.

prescribe. See proscribe.

presently. This word is ambiguous. Write now or soon, whichever you really mean.

presumption. See assumption.

preventive. Although the corrupt form preventative (with the superfluous syllable in the middle) is

fairly common, the strictly correct form is preventive.

previous to. Make it before.

principle; principal. A principle is a natural, moral, or legal rule {the principle of free speech}. The

corresponding adjective is principled {a principled decision}. A principal is a person of high

authority or prominence {a school principal} or a loan amount requiring repayment {principal

and interest}. A principal role is a primary one.

prior to. Make it before or until.

process of, in the. You can almost always delete this phrase without affecting the meaning.

propaganda. This is a singular noun {propaganda was everywhere}. The plural is propagandas.

prophesy; prophecy. Prophesy is the verb {the doomsayers prophesied widespread blackouts for

Y2K}. Prophecy is the noun {their prophecies did not materialize}. Prophesize is an erroneous

form sometimes encountered.

proscribe; prescribe. To proscribe something is to prohibit it {legislation that proscribes drinking

while driving}. To prescribe is to appoint or dictate (a rule or course of action) {Henry VIII

prescribed the order of succession to include three of his children} or to specify a medical

remedy {the doctor prescribed anti-inflammatory pills and certain exercises}.

protuberance. So spelled. Perhaps because protrude means "to stick out," writers want to spell

protuberance (something that bulges out) with an extra r (after the t). But the words are from

different roots.

proved; proven. Proved is the preferred past-participial form of prove {it was proved to be true}.

Use proven as an adjective {a proven success}.

proximity. See close proximity, in.

purposely; purposefully. What is done purposely is done intentionally, or "on purpose." What is

done purposefully is done with a certain goal in mind. An action may be done purposely without

any particular interest in a specific result--that is, not purposefully.

question whether; question of whether; question as to whether. The first phrasing is the best, the

second is next best, and the third is to be avoided. See as to.

quick(ly). Quickly is the general adverb. But quick is properly used as an adverb in the idiomatic

phrases get rich quick and come quick. See 5.157.

quote; quotation. Traditionally a verb, quote is often used as an equivalent of quotation in speech

and informal writing. Also, there is a tendency for writers (especially journalists) to think of

quotes as contemporary remarks usable in their writing and of quotations as being wisdom of the

ages expressed pithily.

rack. See wrack.

reason why. Although some object to the supposed redundancy of this phrase, it is centuries old

and perfectly acceptable English. And reason that is not always an adequate substitute.

reek. See wreak.

refrain; restrain. To refrain is to restrain yourself (to refrain from or stop doing something); it is

typically an act of self-discipline. Other people restrain you {if you don't refrain from the

disorderly conduct, the police will restrain you}.

regrettable; regretful. What is regrettable is unfortunate or deplorable. A person who is regretful

feels regret or sorrow for something done or lost. The adverb regrettably, not regretfully, is the

synonym of unfortunately.

rein; reign. A rein (usu. plural) controls a horse; it is the right word in idioms such as "take the

reins," "give free rein," and, as a verb, "rein in." A reign is a state of or term of dominion,

especially that of a monarch but by extension dominance in some field. This is the right word in

idioms such as "reign of terror" and, as a verb, "reign supreme."

relegate; delegate. To relegate is to assign a lesser position {the officer was relegated to desk duty

pending an investigation} or to hand over for decision or execution {the application was

relegated to the human services committee}. To delegate is to authorize another to act on one's

behalf {Congress delegated environmental regulation to the EPA}.

renounce. See denounce.

repellent; repulsive. Repellent and repulsive both denote the character of driving others away. But

repulsive has strong negative connotations of being truly disgusting.

repetitive; repetitious. Both mean "occurring over and over." But whereas repetitive is fairly neutral

in connotation, repetitious has taken on the nuance of tediousness.

repulsive. See repellent.

restive; restful. Restive has two senses: (1) "impatient, stubborn" and (2) "restless, agitated." Restful

means "conducive to rest."

restrain. See refrain.

reticent. This word should not be used as a synonym for reluctant. It means "inclined to be silent;

reserved; taciturn" {when asked about the incident, the congressional representative became

uncharacteristically reticent}.

revenge. See avenge.

rob; steal. Both verbs mean "to wrongfully take [something from another person]." But rob also

includes a threat or act of harming, usually but not always to the person being robbed.

run the gantlet; throw down the gauntlet. These are the traditional idioms, a gantlet being a path

between two lines of tormentors and a gauntlet being a knight's glove. The first idiom refers to a

means of punishment, the second to a dare (which the challenger accepts by picking up the

gauntlet). Purists object to the frequently seen run the gauntlet.

sacrilegious. This is the correct spelling, though there is a tendency by some to switch the i and e

on either side of the l. In fact, the word is related to sacrilege, not religion and religious.

seasonal; seasonable. Seasonal means either "dependent on a season" {snow skiing is a seasonal

hobby} or "relating to the seasons or a season" {the seasonal aisle stays stocked most of the year,

starting with Valentine's Day gifts in January}. Seasonable means "timely" {seasonable motions

for continuance} or "fitting the season" {it was unseasonably cold for July}.

self-deprecating. See deprecate.

semi-. See bi-.

semiannual. See biannual.

sensor. See censor.

sensual; sensuous. What is sensual involves indulgence of the senses--especially sexual

gratification. What is sensuous usually applies to aesthetic enjoyment; only hack writers imbue

the word with salacious connotations.

sewer; sewage; sewerage. Sewer denotes wastewater pipes; sewage denotes the matter carried

through those pipes. Sewerage is the better term for the sewer system as a whole, including

treatment plants and other facilities, and for the function of the disposal of sewage and

wastewater in general.

shine. When this verb is intransitive, it means "to give or make light"; the past tense is shone {the

stars shone dimly}. When it is transitive, it means "to cause to shine"; the past tense is shined

{the caterer shined the silver}.

sight; site. A sight may be something worth seeing {the sights of London} or a device to aid the

eye {the sight of a gun}, among other things. A site is a place, whether physical {a mall will be

built on this site} or electronic {website}. The figurative expression meaning "to focus on a goal"

is to set one's sights. Cf. cite.

since. This word may relate either to time {since last winter} or to causation {since I'm a golfer, I

know what "double bogey" means}. Some writers erroneously believe that the word relates

exclusively to time. But the causal since was a part of the English language before Chaucer

wrote in the fourteenth century, and it is useful as a slightly milder way of expressing causation

than because. But where there is any possibility of confusion with the temporal sense, use

because.

site. See cite; sight.

slander. See defamation.

slew; slough; slue. Slew is an informal word equivalent to many or lots {you have a slew of cattle}.

It is sometimes misspelled slough (a legitimate noun meaning "a grimy swamp" and pronounced

to rhyme with now) or slue (a legitimate verb meaning "to swing around"). The phrase slough of

despond (from Bunyan's Pilgrim's Progress [1678]) means a state of depression. This is

etymologically different from slough (/slÉ™f/), meaning "to discard" {slough off dry skin}.

slow. This word, like slowly, may be an adverb. Generally, prefer slowly {go slowly}. But when

used after the verb in a pithy statement, especially an injunction, slow often appears in

colloquial usage {Go slow!} {take it slow}. See 5.157.

slue. See slew.

sneak. This verb is conjugated sneak--sneaked--sneaked. Reserve snuck for dialect and tongue-in-

cheek usages.

spit. If used to mean "to expectorate," the verb is inflected spit--spat--spat {he spat a curse}. But if

used to mean "to skewer," it's spit--spitted--spitted {the hens have been spitted for broiling}.

stanch. See staunch.

stationary; stationery. Stationary describes a state of immobility or of staying in one place {if it's

stationary, paint it}. Stationery denotes writing materials {love letters written on perfumed

stationery}. To remember the two, try associating the â€‘er in stationery with the â€‘er in paper; or

remember that a stationer is someone who sells the stuff.

staunch; stanch. Staunch is an adjective meaning "ardent and faithful" {a staunch Red Sox

supporter}. Stanch is a verb meaning "to stop the flow"; it is almost always used in regard to

bleeding, literally or metaphorically {after New Hampshire the campaign was hemorrhaging;

only a big win in South Carolina could stanch the bleeding}.

steal. See rob.

strait; straight. A strait (often pl.) is (1) literally, a narrow channel between two large bodies of

water {Strait of Magellan} or (2) figuratively, a difficult position {dire straits} {straitened

circumstances}. This is the word used in compound terms with the sense of constriction

{straitlaced} {straitjacket}. Straight is most often an adjective meaning unbent, steady, sober,

candid, honest, or heterosexual.

strategy; tactics. A strategy is a long-term plan for achieving a goal. Tactics are shorter-term plans

for achieving an immediate but limited success. A strategy might involve several tactics.

subsequent. See consequent.

subsequently. Try later.

subsequent to. Make it after.

such. This word, when used to replace this or that--as in "such building was later condemned"--is

symptomatic of legalese. Such is actually no more precise than the, this, that, these, or those. It is

perfectly acceptable, however, to use such with a mass noun or plural noun when the meaning

is "of that type" or "of this kind" {such impudence galled the rest of the family} {such vitriolic

exchanges became commonplace in the following years}.

sufficient. See adequate.

supersede. This word derives from sedeo, the Latin word for "to sit, to be established," not cedo,

meaning "to yield." Hence the spelling variation from words such as concede, recede, and secede.

sympathy. See empathy.

systematic; systemic. Systematic means "according to a plan or system, methodical, or arranged in

a system." Systemic is limited in use to physiological systems {a systemic disease affecting

several organs} or, by extension, other systems that may be likened to the body {systemic

problems within the corporate hierarchy}.

tactics. See strategy.

take. See bring.

tantalizing; titillating. A tantalizing thing torments us because we want it badly and it is always

just out of reach. A titillating thing tickles us pleasantly, literally or figuratively.

thankfully. This word traditionally means "appreciatively; gratefully." It is not in good use as a

substitute for thank goodness or fortunately. Cf. hopefully.

that; which. These are both relative pronouns (see 5.54--63). In polished American prose, that is

used restrictively to narrow a category or identify a particular item being talked about {any

building that is taller must be outside the state}; which is used nonrestrictively--not to narrow a

class or identify a particular item but to add something about an item already identified

{alongside the officer trotted a toy poodle, which is hardly a typical police dog}. Which should

be used restrictively only when it is preceded by a preposition {the situation in which we find

ourselves}. Otherwise, it is almost always preceded by a comma, a parenthesis, or a dash. In

British English, writers and editors seldom observe the distinction between the two words. See

also 6.22.

there; their; they're. There denotes a place or direction {stay there}. Their is the possessive pronoun

{all their good wishes}. They're is a contraction of they are {they're calling now}.

therefore; therefor. The words have different senses. Therefore, the common word, means "as a

consequence; for that reason" {the evidence of guilt was slight; therefore, the jury acquitted the

defendant}. Therefor, a legalism, means "in return for" or "for it" {he brought the unworn shirt

back to the store and received a refund therefor}.

thus. This is the adverb--not thusly.

till. This is a perfectly good preposition and conjunction {open till 10 p.m.}. It is not a contraction of

until and should not be written 'til.

timbre; timber. Timbre is a musical term meaning tonal quality. Timber is the correct spelling in all

other uses.

time period. See period of time.

titillating. See tantalizing.

tolerance; toleration. Tolerance is the habitual quality of being tolerant; toleration is a particular

instance of being tolerant.

torpid. See turbid.

tortious; tortuous; torturous. What is tortious relates to torts (civil wrongs) or to acts that give rise

to legal claims for torts {tortious interference with a contract}. What is tortuous is full of twists

and turns {a tortuous path through the woods}. What is torturous involves torture or severe

discomfort {a torturous exam}.

toward; towards. The preferred form is without the â€‘s in American English, with it in British

English. The same is true for other directional words, such as upward, downward, forward, and

backward, as well as afterward. The use of afterwards and backwards as adverbs is neither rare nor

incorrect. But for the sake of consistency, it is better to stay with the simpler form.

transcript; transcription. A transcript is a written record, as of a trial or a radio program.

Transcription is the act or process of creating a transcript.

trillion. See billion.

triumphal; triumphant. Things are triumphal {a triumphal arch}, but only people feel triumphant {a

triumphant Caesar returned to Rome}.

turbid; turgid; torpid. Turbid water is thick and opaque from churned-up mud {a turbid pond}; by

extension turbid means "unclear, confused, or disturbed" {a turbid argument}. Turgid means

"swollen," and by extension "pompous and bombastic" {turgid prose}. Torpid means "idle and

lazy" {a torpid economy}.

unique. Reserve this word for the sense "one of a kind." Avoid it in the sense "special, unusual."

Phrases such as very unique, more unique, somewhat unique, and so on--in which a degree is

attributed to unique--are poor usage. See also 5.88.

unlawful; illegal; illicit; criminal. This list is in ascending order of negative connotation. An

unlawful act may even be morally innocent (for example, letting a parking meter expire). But an

illegal act is something society formally condemns, and an illicit act calls to mind moral

degeneracy {illicit drug use}. Unlike criminal, the first three terms can apply to civil wrongs.

unorganized. See disorganized.

unreadable. See illegible.

upon. See on.

use; usage; utilize. Use is usually the best choice for simplicity. Usage refers to a customary

practice. Utilize is usually an overblown alternative of use, but it is occasionally the better choice

when the distinct sense is "to use to best effect."

venal; venial. A person who is venal is mercenary or open to bribery {a venal government official};

a thing that is venal is purchasable {venal livestock}. What is venial is pardonable or excusable {a

venial offense} {a venial error}.

verbal; oral. If something is put into words, it is verbal. Technically, verbal covers both written and

spoken utterance. But if you wish to specify that something was conveyed through speech, use

oral.

very. See much.

vocation. See avocation.

voluminous. See compendious.

whether. Generally, use whether alone--not with the words or not tacked on {they didn't know

whether to go}. The or not is necessary only when you mean to convey the idea of "regardless of

whether" {we'll finish on time whether or not it rains}. See also if.

which. See that.

while. While may substitute for although or whereas, especially if a conversational tone is desired

{while many readers may disagree, the scientific community has overwhelmingly adopted the

conclusions here presented}. Yet because while can denote either time or contrast, the word is

occasionally ambiguous; when a real ambiguity exists, although or whereas is the better choice.

who; whom. Here are the traditional rules. Who is a nominative pronoun used as (1) the subject of

a finite verb {it was Jim who bought the coffee today} or (2) a predicate nominative when it

follows a linking verb {that's who}. Whom is an objective pronoun that may appear as (1) the

object of a verb {I learned nothing about the man whom I saw} or (2) the object of a preposition

{the woman to whom I owe my life}. Today there are two countervailing trends: first, there's a

decided tendency to use who colloquially in most contexts; second, among those insecure about

their grammar, there's a tendency to overcorrect oneself and use whom when who would be

correct. Writers and editors of formal prose often resist the first of these; everyone should resist

the second. See also 5.63.

whoever; whomever. Avoid the second unless you are certain of your grammar {give this book to

whoever wants it} {I cook for whomever I love}. If you are uncertain why these examples are

correct, use anyone who or (as in the second example) anyone.

who's; whose. The first is a contraction {Who's on first?}, the second a possessive {Whose life is it,

anyway?}. Unlike who and whom, whose may refer to things as well as people {the Commerce

Department, whose bailiwick includes intellectual property}. See 5.61.

whosever; whoever's. The first is correct (though increasingly rare) in formal writing {whosever

bag that is, it needs to be moved out of the way}; the second is acceptable in casual usage

{whoever's dog got into our garbage can, he or she should clean up the mess}.

wrack; rack. To wrack is to severely or completely destroy {a storm-wracked ship}. ( Wrack is also a

noun denoting wreckage {the storm's wrack}.) To rack is to torture by means of stretching with

an instrument {rack the prisoner until he confesses} or to stretch beyond capacity {to rack one's

brain}.

wreak; reek. Wreak means "to force (something) on" in the sense of causing damage or revenge; the

past tense is wreaked, not wrought. (The latter is an archaic form of the past tense and past

participle of work.) Reek can be a verb meaning "to stink" or a noun meaning "stench."

wrong; wrongful. These terms are not interchangeable. Wrong has two senses: (1) "immoral,

unlawful" {it's wrong to bully smaller children} and (2) "improper, incorrect, unsatisfactory" {the

math answers are wrong}. Wrongful likewise has two senses: (1) "unjust, unfair" {wrongful

conduct} and (2) "unsanctioned by law; having no legal right" {it was a wrongful demand on the

estate}.

yes. See affirmative, in the.

your; you're. Your is the possessive form of you. You're is the contraction for you are.

8. See Bryan A. Garner, Legal Writing in Plain English (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2001), 112--13.

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Usage >> Bias-Free Language

of Contents

List of Figures

5.221 MAINTAINING CREDIBILITY

List of Tables

Discussions of bias-free language--language that is neither sexist nor suggestive of other conscious or

Index

subconscious prejudices--have a way of descending quickly into politics. But there is a way to avoid

the political quagmire: if we focus solely on maintaining credibility with a wide readership, the

argument for eliminating bias from published works becomes much simpler. Biased language that is

5.219:

not central to the meaning of a work distracts readers, and in their eyes the work is less credible. Few

Focus on tradition

texts warrant the deliberate display of linguistic biases. Nor is it ideal, however, to call attention to

5.220:

Good usage versus

the supposed absence of linguistic biases, since this will also distract readers and weaken credibility.

common usage

5.221:

Maintaining

credibility

5.222:

Gender bias

5.223:

Other biases

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Usage >> Bias-Free Language

of Contents

List of Figures

5.222 GENDER BIAS

List of Tables

Consider the issue of gender-neutral language. On the one hand, it is unacceptable to a great many

Index

reasonable readers to use the generic masculine pronoun ( he in reference to no one in particular). On

the other hand, it is unacceptable to a great many readers (often different readers) either to resort to

nontraditional gimmicks to avoid the generic masculine (by using he/she or s/he, for example) or to use

5.220:

they as a kind of singular pronoun. Either way, credibility is lost with some readers.

Good usage versus

common usage

5.221:

Maintaining

credibility

5.222:

Gender bias

5.223:

Other biases

5.224:

Bias and the

editor's

responsibility

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Usage >> Bias-Free Language

of Contents

List of Figures

5.223 OTHER BIASES

List of Tables

The same is true of other types of biases, such as slighting allusions or stereotypes based on

Index

characteristics such as race, ethnicity, disability, religion, sexual orientation, or birth or family status.

Careful writers avoid language that reasonable readers might find offensive or distracting--unless the

biased language is central to the meaning of the writing.

5.221:

Maintaining

credibility

5.222:

Gender bias

5.223:

Other biases

5.224:

Bias and the

editor's

responsibility

5.225:

Nine techniques for

achieving gender

neutrality

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Usage >> Bias-Free Language

of Contents

List of Figures

5.224 BIAS AND THE EDITOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

List of Tables

A careful editor points out to authors any biased terms or approaches in the work (knowing, of

Index

course, that the bias may have been unintentional), suggests alternatives, and ensures that any biased

language that is retained is retained by choice. Although some publishers prefer to avoid certain

terms or specific usages in all cases, Chicago's editors do not maintain a list of words or usages

5.222:

considered unacceptable. Rather, they adhere to the reasoning presented here and apply it to

Gender bias

individual cases. They consult guides to avoiding bias in writing (see bibliography) and work with

5.223:

Other biases

authors to use the most appropriate language. What you should strive for--if you want readers to

5.224:

focus on your ideas and not on the political subtext--is a style that doesn't even hint at the issue. So

Bias and the

unless you're involved in a debate about, for example, sexism, you'll probably want a style, on the one

editor's

responsibility

hand, that no reasonable person could call sexist and, on the other hand, that never suggests you're

5.225:

contorting your language to be nonsexist.

Nine techniques for

achieving gender

neutrality

5.226:

Sex-specific labels

as adjectives

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Usage >> Bias-Free Language

of Contents

List of Figures

5.225 NINE TECHNIQUES FOR ACHIEVING GENDER NEUTRALITY

List of Tables

There are many ways to achieve gender-neutral language, but it takes some thought and often some

Index

hard work. Nine methods are suggested below because no single method will work for every writer.

And one method won't neatly resolve every gender-bias problem. Some of them--for example,

repeating the noun or using "he or she"--will irritate readers if overused. All of them risk changing

5.223:

the intended meaning: though slight changes in meaning are inevitable, additional rewording may be

Other biases

necessary.

5.224:

Bias and the

editor's

1. Omit the pronoun: the programmer should update the records when data is transferred to her by the

responsibility

head office becomes the programmer should update the records when data is transferred by the head

5.225:

office.

Nine techniques for

achieving gender

2. Repeat the noun: a writer should be careful not to needlessly antagonize readers, because her credibility

neutrality

will suffer becomes a writer should be careful not to needlessly antagonize readers, because the writer's

5.226:

Sex-specific labels

credibility will suffer.

as adjectives

3. Use a plural antecedent: a contestant must conduct himself with dignity at all times becomes

5.227:

contestants must conduct themselves with dignity at all times.

Gender-neutral

singular pronouns

4. Use an article instead of a personal pronoun: a student accused of cheating must actively waive his

right to have his guidance counselor present becomes a student accused of cheating must actively waive

the right to have a guidance counselor present.

5. Use the neutral singular pronoun one: an actor in New York is likely to earn more than he is in

Paducah becomes an actor in New York is likely to earn more than one in Paducah.

6. Use the relative pronoun who (works best when it replaces a personal pronoun that follows if):

employers presume that if an applicant can't write well, he won't be a good employee becomes employers

presume that an applicant who can't write well won't be a good employee.

7. Use the imperative mood: a lifeguard must keep a close watch over children while he is monitoring the

pool becomes keep a close watch over children while monitoring the pool.

8. Use he or she (sparingly): if a complainant is not satisfied with the board's decision, then he can ask for

a rehearing becomes if a complainant is not satisfied with the board's decision, then he or she can ask

for a rehearing.

9. Revise the clause: a person who decides not to admit he lied will be considered honest until someone

exposes his lie becomes a person who denies lying will be considered honest until the lie is exposed.

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Usage >> Bias-Free Language

of Contents

List of Figures

5.226 SEX-SPECIFIC LABELS AS ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

When gender is relevant, it's acceptable to use the noun woman as a modifier {woman judge}. In

Index

recent decades, woman has been rapidly replacing lady in such constructions. The adjective female is

also often used unobjectionably. In isolated contexts it may strike some readers as being dismissive or

derogatory (perhaps because it's a biological term used for animals as well as humans), but when

5.224:

parallel references to both sexes are required, the adjectives male and female are typically the most

Bias and the

editor's

serviceable choices {the police force has 834 male and 635 female officers}.

responsibility

5.225:

Nine techniques for

achieving gender

neutrality

5.226:

Sex-specific labels

as adjectives

5.227:

Gender-neutral

singular pronouns

5.228:

Problematic

suffixes

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Usage >> Bias-Free Language

of Contents

List of Figures

5.227 GENDER-NEUTRAL SINGULAR PRONOUNS

List of Tables

The only gender-neutral third-person singular personal pronoun in English is it, which doesn't refer

Index

to humans (with very limited exceptions). Clumsy artifices such as s/he and (wo)man or artificial

genderless pronouns have been tried--for many years--with no success. They won't succeed. And

those who use them invite credibility problems. Indefinite pronouns such as anybody and someone

5.225:

don't always satisfy the need for a gender-neutral alternative because they are traditionally regarded

Nine techniques for

achieving gender

as singular antecedents that call for a third-person singular pronoun. Many people substitute the

neutrality

plural they and their for the singular he or she. Although they and their have become common in

5.226:

informal usage, neither is considered acceptable in formal writing, so unless you are given guidelines

Sex-specific labels

as adjectives

to the contrary, do not use them in a singular sense.

5.227:

Gender-neutral

singular pronouns

5.228:

Problematic

suffixes

5.229:

Necessary gender-

specific language

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Usage >> Bias-Free Language

of Contents

List of Figures

5.228 PROBLEMATIC SUFFIXES

List of Tables

The trend in American English is toward eliminating sex-specific suffixes. Words with feminine

Index

suffixes such as -ess and -ette are easily replaced with the suffix-free forms, which are increasingly

accepted as applying to both men and women. For example, author and testator are preferable to

authoress and testatrix. Compounds with -man are more problematic. The word person rarely functions

5.226:

well in such a compound; chairperson and anchorperson sound more pompous and wooden than the

Sex-specific labels

as adjectives

simpler (and correct) chair or anchor. Unless a word is established (such as salesperson, which dates

5.227:

from 1901), don't automatically substitute -person for -man. English has many alternatives that are not

Gender-neutral

necessarily newly coined, including police officer (first recorded in 1797), firefighter (1903), and mail

singular pronouns

carrier (1788).

5.228:

Problematic

suffixes

5.229:

Necessary gender-

specific language

5.230:

Avoiding other

biased language

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Usage >> Bias-Free Language

of Contents

List of Figures

5.229 NECESSARY GENDER-SPECIFIC LANGUAGE

List of Tables

It isn't always necessary or desirable to use gender-neutral terms and phrasings. If you're writing

Index

about something that clearly concerns only one sex (e.g., women's studies; men's golf championship) or

an inherently single-sex institution (e.g., a sorority; a Masonic lodge), trying to use gender-neutral

language may lead to absurd prose {be solicitous of a pregnant friend's comfort; he or she will need

5.226:

your support}.

Sex-specific labels

as adjectives

5.227:

Gender-neutral

singular pronouns

5.228:

Problematic

suffixes

5.229:

Necessary gender-

specific language

5.230:

Avoiding other

biased language

5: GRAMMAR AND USAGE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Usage >> Bias-Free Language

of Contents

List of Figures

5.230 AVOIDING OTHER BIASED LANGUAGE

List of Tables

Comments that betray a writer's conscious or unconscious biases or ignorance may cause readers to

Index

lose respect for the writer and interpret the writer's words in ways that were never intended. In

general, emphasize the person, not a characteristic. A characteristic is a label. It should preferably be

used as an adjective, not as a noun. Instead of referring to someone as, for instance, a Catholic or a

5.226:

deaf-mute, put the person first by writing a Catholic man or he is Catholic, and a deaf-and-mute child or

Sex-specific labels

as adjectives

the child is deaf and mute. Avoid irrelevant references to personal characteristics such as sex, race,

5.227:

ethnicity, disability, age, religion, sexual orientation, or social standing. Such pointless references may

Gender-neutral

affect a reader's perception of you or the person you are writing about or both. They may also invoke

singular pronouns

a reader's biases and cloud your meaning. When it is important to mention a characteristic because it

5.228:

Problematic

will help the reader develop a picture of the person you are writing about, use care. For instance, in

suffixes

the sentence Shirley Chisholm was probably the finest African American woman member of the House of

5.229:

Representatives that New York has ever had, the phrase African American woman may imply to some

Necessary gender-

specific language

readers that Chisholm was a great representative "for a woman" but may be surpassed by many or all

5.230:

men, that she stands out only among African American members of Congress, or that it is unusual

Avoiding other

biased language

for a woman or an African American to hold high office. But in Shirley Chisholm was the first African

American woman to be elected to Congress and one of New York's all-time best representatives, the purpose of

the phrase African American woman is not likely to be misunderstood.

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

of Contents

Overview

List of Figures

6.1

The role of punctuation and the scope of this chapter

List of Tables

Punctuation in Relation to Surrounding Text

Index

6.2

Punctuation and italics

6.3

Punctuation and boldface or color

6.4

Punctuation and fontâ€”aesthetic considerations

6.5

Parentheses and brackets in relation to surrounding text

6.6

Quotation marks in relation to surrounding text

6.7

Punctuation and spaceâ€”one space or two?

6.8

Punctuation with URLs and e-mail addresses

Punctuation in Relation to Closing Quotation Marks

6.9

Periods and commas in relation to closing quotation marks

6.10

Other punctuation in relation to closing quotation marks

6.11

Single quotation marks next to double quotation marks

Periods

6.12

Use of the period

6.13

Periods in relation to parentheses and brackets

6.14

When to omit a period

6.15

Periods in ellipses and suspension points

Commas

6.16

Use of the comma

6.17

Commas in pairs

Series and the Serial Comma

6.18

Serial commas

6.19

Using semicolons instead of commas in a series

6.20

Commas with "etc." and "et al."

6.21

Omitting serial commas before ampersands

Commas with Relative Clauses

6.22

Restrictive and nonrestrictive clausesâ€”"which" versus "that"

Commas with Appositives

6.23

Restrictive and nonrestrictive appositives

Commas with Parenthetical and Descriptive Phrases

6.24

Commas with parenthetical elements

6.25

Commas with "however," "therefore," "indeed," and so forth

6.26

Commas with restrictive and nonrestrictive phrases

6.27

Commas with "such as" and "including"

Commas with Independent Clauses

6.28

Commas with independent clauses joined by conjunctions

6.29

Commas with compound predicates

Commas with Dependent Clauses

6.30

Comma preceding main clause

6.31

Comma following main clause

6.32

"And if," "that if," and the like

Commas with Two or More Adjectives Preceding a Noun

6.33

Commas with coordinate adjectives

6.34

Commas with repeated adjectives

Commas with Introductory Words and Phrases

6.35

Commas with introductory participial phrases

6.36

Commas with introductory adverbial phrases

6.37

Commas with "oh" and "ah"

6.38

Commas with direct address

6.39

"Yes," "no," and the like

Other Uses of the Comma

6.40

Commas with "not" phrases

6.41

Commas with "not . . . but," "not only . . . but," and the like

6.42

Commas with "the more," "the less," and so on

6.43

Commas with "that is," "namely," "for example," and similar expressions

6.44

Commas between homonyms

6.45

Commas with dates

6.46

Commas with addresses and place-names in text

6.47

"Jr.," "Sr.," and the like

6.48

"Inc.," "Ltd.," and the like

6.49

Commas to indicate elision

6.50

Commas with quotations

6.51

Commas with maxims and proverbs

6.52

Commas with questions

6.53

Commas relative to parentheses and brackets

Semicolons

6.54

Use of the semicolon

6.55

Semicolons with "however," "therefore," "indeed," and the like

6.56

Semicolons with "that is," "for example," "namely," and the like

6.57

Semicolons before a conjunction

6.58

Semicolons in a complex series

Colons

6.59

Use of the colon

6.60

Space after colon

6.61

Lowercase or capital letter after a colon

6.62

Colons with "as follows" and other introductory phrases

6.63

Colons to introduce speech or quotations

6.64

Colons with formal direct address

6.65

Some common misuses of colons

Question Marks

6.66

Use of the question mark

6.67

Question mark within a sentence

6.68

Indirect questions

6.69

Requests as questions

6.70

Question marks in relation to surrounding text and punctuation

Exclamation Points

6.71

Use of the exclamation point

6.72

Exclamation rather than question

6.73

Exclamation point as editorial protest or amusement

6.74

Exclamation points with quotation marks, parentheses, or brackets

Hyphens and Dashes

6.75

Hyphens and dashes compared

Hyphens

6.76

Hyphens in compound words

6.77

Hyphens as separators

En Dashes

6.78

En dash as "to"

6.79

En dash with an unfinished number range

6.80

En dashes with compound adjectives

6.81

Other uses for the en dash

Em Dashes

6.82

Em dashes instead of commas, parentheses, or colons

6.83

Em dash between noun and pronoun

6.84

Em dashes to indicate sudden breaks

6.85

Em dashes with "that is," "namely," "for example," and similar expressions

6.86

Em dashes in place of commas

6.87

Em dashes with other punctuation

6.88

Em dashes in lieu of quotation marks

6.89

Em dashes in indexes

2-Em and 3-Em Dashes

6.90

2-em dash

6.91

3-em dash

Parentheses

6.92

Use of parentheses

6.93

Parentheses for glosses or translations

6.94

Parentheses to enclose numbers or letters

6.95

Parentheses within parentheses

6.96

Parentheses with other punctuation

Brackets and Braces

6.97

Use of square brackets

6.98

Square brackets in translated text

6.99

Square brackets for parentheses within parentheses

6.100 Square brackets in phonetics

6.101 Square brackets with other punctuation

6.102 Angle brackets and braces

Slashes

6.103 Other names for the slash

6.104 Slashes to signify alternatives

6.105 Slashes with two-year spans

6.106 Slashes with dates

6.107 Slashes in abbreviations

6.108 Slashes as fraction bars

6.109 Slashes to show line breaks in quoted poetry

6.110 Slashes in URLs and other paths

Quotation Marks

6.111 Quotation marks relative to other punctuation and text

6.112 Typographer's or "smart" quotation marks

Apostrophes

6.113 Use of the apostrophe

6.114 "Smart" apostrophes

6.115 Apostrophes relative to other punctuation

Multiple Punctuation Marks

6.116 Likely combinations

6.117 Abbreviation-ending periods with other punctuation

6.118 Periods with question marks or exclamation points

6.119 Commas with question marks or exclamation points

6.120 Question mark with exclamation point

Lists and Outline Style

6.121 Lists and outlinesâ€”general principles

6.122 Run-in versus vertical lists

6.123 Run-in lists

6.124 Vertical listsâ€”punctuation and format

6.125 Vertical lists punctuated as a sentence

6.126 Vertical lists with subdivided items (outlines)

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

6.1 THE ROLE OF PUNCTUATION AND THE SCOPE OF THIS CHAPTER

List of Tables

Punctuation should be governed by its function, which in ordinary text is to promote ease of reading

Index

by clarifying relationships within and between sentences. This function, although it allows for a

degree of subjectivity, should in turn be governed by the consistent application of some basic

principles lest the subjective element obscure meaning. The principles set forth in this chapter are

6.1:

based on a logical application of traditional American practice. For the special punctuation

The role of

punctuation and

requirements of mathematics, foreign languages, source citations, bibliographies, indexes, and so on,

the scope of this

chapter

see the appropriate chapters in this manual and consult the index.

6.2:

Punctuation and

italics

6.3:

Punctuation and

boldface or color

6.4:

Punctuation and

fontâ€”aesthetic

considerations

6.5:

Parentheses and

brackets in relation

to surrounding text

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuation in Relation to Surrounding Text

of Contents

List of Figures

6.2 PUNCTUATION AND ITALICS

List of Tables

All punctuation marks should appear in the same font--roman or italic--as the main or surrounding

Index

text, except for punctuation that belongs to a title in a different font (usually italics). So, for example,

the word and, which in this sentence is in italics, is followed by a comma in roman type; the comma,

strictly speaking, does not belong to and, which is italicized because it is a word used as a word (see

6.1:

7.58). Of course, it may be difficult to tell whether a comma is in italics or not (to say nothing of

The role of

punctuation and

periods); for other marks it will be more evident. Readers of the online edition of this manual can

the scope of this

chapter

look at the underlying source coding, and all those who prepare manuscripts in electronic

environments will need to pay attention to this level of detail (see 2.77). In the first four examples that

6.2:

Punctuation and

follow, the punctuation marks next to italic text belong with the surrounding sentence and are

italics

therefore presented in roman. In the last two examples, the two punctuation marks that belong with

6.3:

Punctuation and

the italic titles--the exclamation mark following "Help" and the comma following "Eats"--are in italics

boldface or color

(the comma following "Leaves" is in roman).

6.4:

Punctuation and

For light amusement he turns to the Principia Mathematica!

fontâ€”aesthetic

considerations

How can they be sure that the temperature was in fact rising?

The letters a, b, and c are often invoked as being fundamental.

6.5:

Parentheses and

I had yet to consider the central thesis of Malthus's Essay: the imperfectibility of humankind.

brackets in relation

to surrounding text

but

The Beatles' Help! was released long before the heyday of the music video.

I love Eats, Shoots & Leaves, but I would have preferred to see "and" in the title rather than the ampersand--

which would allow for a serial comma after "Shoots."

For parentheses and brackets, see 6.5; for quotation marks, see 6.6. For a different approach, see 6.4.

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuation in Relation to Surrounding Text

of Contents

List of Figures

6.3 PUNCTUATION AND BOLDFACE OR COLOR

List of Tables

The choice of boldface (or, by extension, type in a different color), unlike that of italics (see 6.2), is

Index

more often an aesthetic than a purely logical decision. Punctuation marks following boldface or color

should be dealt with case by case, depending on how the boldface is used. In the first example, the

period following "line spacing" belongs with the boldface glossary term and is therefore set in bold;

6.1:

the period following "leading" is part of the surrounding sentence and is therefore not set in bold. In

The role of

punctuation and

the middle two examples, the punctuation next to the boldface terms belongs with them, like the first

the scope of this

chapter

period in the first example. In the final example, the question mark belongs to the surrounding

sentence and not to the boldface word.

6.2:

Punctuation and

italics

line spacing. See leading.

6.3:

Figure 6. Title page from an apocryphal Second Poetics.

Punctuation and

For sale: three ten-year-old CPUs and five refurbished monitors.

boldface or color

Will the installation remain stalled until I choose I accept?

6.4:

Punctuation and

fontâ€”aesthetic

considerations

6.5:

Parentheses and

brackets in relation

to surrounding text

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuation in Relation to Surrounding Text

of Contents

List of Figures

6.4 PUNCTUATION AND FONT--AESTHETIC CONSIDERATIONS

List of Tables

According to a more traditional system, periods, commas, colons, and semicolons should appear in

Index

the same font as the word, letter, character, or symbol immediately preceding them if different from

that of the main or surrounding text. In the third and fourth examples in 6.2, the commas following a

and b and the colon following the Malthus title would be italic, as would the comma following the

6.2:

book title ( Eats, Shoots & Leaves) in the last example. A question mark or exclamation point, however,

Punctuation and

italics

would appear in the same font as the immediately preceding word only if it belonged to that word, as

6.3:

in the title Help! in 6.2. This system, once preferred by Chicago and still preferred by some as more

Punctuation and

aesthetically pleasing, should be reserved--if it must be used--for publications destined for print only.

boldface or color

In electronic publications, where typeface may be determined by content as well as appearance (e.g., a

6.4:

Punctuation and

book title might be tagged as such, separate from any surrounding punctuation), the more logical

fontâ€”aesthetic

considerations

system described in 6.2 should be preferred.

6.5:

Parentheses and

brackets in relation

to surrounding text

6.6:

Quotation marks in

relation to

surrounding text

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuation in Relation to Surrounding Text

of Contents

List of Figures

6.5 PARENTHESES AND BRACKETS IN RELATION TO SURROUNDING TEXT

List of Tables

Parentheses and brackets should appear in the same font--roman or italic--as the surrounding text,

Index

not in that of the material they enclose. This system, though it may occasionally cause typefitting

problems when a slanting italic letter touches a nonslanting roman parenthesis or bracket, has two

main virtues: it is easy to use, and it has long been practiced. For printed works, a thin space or hair

6.3:

space may need to be added between overlapping characters. For electronic works, where type

Punctuation and

boldface or color

display will vary depending on hardware and software, no such adjustments should normally be

6.4:

made.

Punctuation and

fontâ€”aesthetic

considerations

The Asian long-horned beetle ( Anoplophora glabripennis) attacks maples.

The letter stated that my check had been "recieved [ sic] with thanks."

6.5:

Parentheses and

brackets in relation

When a phrase in parentheses or brackets appears on a line by itself, however, the parentheses or

to surrounding text

brackets are usually in the same font as the phrase.

6.6:

Quotation marks in

relation to

surrounding text

6.7:

Punctuation and

spaceâ€”one space

or two?

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuation in Relation to Surrounding Text

of Contents

List of Figures

6.6 QUOTATION MARKS IN RELATION TO SURROUNDING TEXT

List of Tables

Like parentheses and brackets (see 6.5), quotation marks should appear in the same font--roman or

Index

italic--as the surrounding text, which may or may not match that of the material they enclose. In the

second example, the quotation marks, as part of the italicized title, are in italics.

6.4:

The approach to the runway was, they reported, " extremely dangerous" (italics in original).

Punctuation and

I just finished reading Sennacherib's "Palace without Rival" at Nineveh, by John Malcolm Russell.

fontâ€”aesthetic

considerations

As with parentheses and brackets, when a sentence or phrase in quotation marks appears on a line by

6.5:

Parentheses and

itself, the quotation marks are usually in the same font as the sentence or phrase. See also 13.60.

brackets in relation

to surrounding text

6.6:

Quotation marks in

relation to

surrounding text

6.7:

Punctuation and

spaceâ€”one space

or two?

6.8:

Punctuation with

URLs and e-mail

addresses

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuation in Relation to Surrounding Text

of Contents

List of Figures

6.7 PUNCTUATION AND SPACE--ONE SPACE OR TWO?

List of Tables

In typeset matter, one space, not two, should be used between two sentences--whether the first ends

Index

in a period, a question mark, an exclamation point, or a closing quotation mark or parenthesis. By the

same token, one space, not two, should follow a colon. When a particular design layout calls for more

space between two elements--for example, between a figure number and a caption--the design should

6.5:

specify the exact amount of space (e.g., em space).

Parentheses and

brackets in relation

to surrounding text

6.6:

Quotation marks in

relation to

surrounding text

6.7:

Punctuation and

spaceâ€”one space

or two?

6.8:

Punctuation with

URLs and e-mail

addresses

6.9:

Periods and

commas in relation

to closing

quotation marks

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuation in Relation to Surrounding Text

of Contents

List of Figures

6.8 PUNCTUATION WITH URLS AND E-MAIL ADDRESSES

List of Tables

Sentences that include an e-mail address or a uniform resource identifier such as a URL should be

Index

punctuated normally. Though angle brackets or other "wrappers" are standard in some applications,

these are generally unnecessary in normal prose (see 6.102). Readers of print sources should assume

that any punctuation at the end of an e-mail address or URL belongs to the sentence. URLs as

6.6:

hypertext should point to the URL, ignoring the surrounding punctuation (some applications do this

Quotation marks in

relation to

automatically). For dividing e-mail addresses and URLs at the end of a line, see 7.42.

surrounding text

6.7:

Chicago's Q&A forum, which can be found at http://www.chicagomanualofstyle.org, has attracted much

Punctuation and

constructive comment.

spaceâ€”one space

or two?

Write to me at grammar88@parsed-out.edu.

6.8:

Punctuation with

URLs and e-mail

addresses

6.9:

Periods and

commas in relation

to closing

quotation marks

6.10:

Other punctuation

in relation to

closing quotation

marks

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuation in Relation to Surrounding Text >>

of Contents

Punctuation in Relation to Closing Quotation Marks

List of Figures

List of Tables

6.9 PERIODS AND COMMAS IN RELATION TO CLOSING QUOTATION MARKS

Index

Periods and commas precede closing quotation marks, whether double or single. (An apostrophe at

the end of a word should never be confused with a closing single quotation mark; see 6.115.) This is a

traditional style, in use well before the first edition of this manual (1906). For an exception, see 7.75.

6.7:

See also table 6.1.

Punctuation and

spaceâ€”one space

or two?

Growing up, we always preferred to "bear those ills we have."

"Thus conscience does make cowards of us all," she replied.

6.8:

Punctuation with

URLs and e-mail

In an alternative system, sometimes called British style (as described in The Oxford Style Manual; see

addresses

bibliog. 1.1), single quotation marks are used, and only those punctuation points that appeared in the

6.9:

Periods and

original material should be included within the quotation marks; all others follow the closing

commas in relation

quotation marks. (Exceptions to the rule are widespread: periods, for example, are routinely placed

to closing

quotation marks

inside any quotation that begins with a capital letter and forms a grammatically complete sentence.)

6.10:

Double quotation marks are reserved for quotations within quotations. This system or a variation

Other punctuation

in relation to

may be appropriate in some works of textual criticism. See also 7.50, 7.55, 13.7--8, 13.28--29.

closing quotation

marks

6.11:

Single quotation

marks next to

double quotation

marks

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuation in Relation to Surrounding Text >>

of Contents

Punctuation in Relation to Closing Quotation Marks

List of Figures

List of Tables

6.10 OTHER PUNCTUATION IN RELATION TO CLOSING QUOTATION MARKS

Index

Colons and semicolons--unlike periods and commas--follow closing quotation marks; question marks

and exclamation points follow closing quotation marks unless they belong within the quoted matter.

(This rule applies the logic that is often absent from the US style described in 6.9.) See also table 6.1.

6.8:

Punctuation with

Take, for example, the first line of "To a Skylark": "Hail to thee, blithe spirit!"

URLs and e-mail

addresses

I was invited to recite the lyrics to "Sympathy for the Devil"; instead I read from the Op-Ed page of the New

York Times.

6.9:

Periods and

Which of Shakespeare's characters said, "All the world's a stage"?

commas in relation

to closing

but

quotation marks

6.10:

"Timber!"

Other punctuation

"What's the rush?" she wondered.

in relation to

closing quotation

marks

6.11:

Single quotation

marks next to

double quotation

marks

6.12:

Use of the period

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuation in Relation to Surrounding Text >>

of Contents

Punctuation in Relation to Closing Quotation Marks

List of Figures

List of Tables

6.11 SINGLE QUOTATION MARKS NEXT TO DOUBLE QUOTATION MARKS

Index

When single quotation marks nested within double quotation marks appear next to each other, no

space need be added between the two except as a typographical nicety subject to the publisher's

requirements. For example, most typesetters will use a thin space between the two marks to enhance

6.9:

readability (as in the print edition of this manual). In online works, a nonbreaking space should be

Periods and

commas in relation

used (as in the online edition of this manual). See also 13.28. In the example that follows, note that the

to closing

period precedes the single quotation mark (see also 6.9).

quotation marks

6.10:

"Admit it," she said. "You haven't read â€˜The Simple Art of Murder.' "

Other punctuation

in relation to

closing quotation

marks

6.11:

Single quotation

marks next to

double quotation

marks

6.12:

Use of the period

6.13:

Periods in relation

to parentheses and

brackets

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periods

of Contents

List of Figures

6.12 USE OF THE PERIOD

List of Tables

A period marks the end of a declarative or an imperative sentence. Between sentences, it is followed

Index

by a single space (see 2.9, 6.7). A period may also follow a word or phrase standing alone, as in the

third example. For the many other uses of the period, consult the index.

6.10:

The two faced each other in silence.

Other punctuation

Wait here.

in relation to

closing quotation

My answer? Never.

marks

6.11:

Single quotation

marks next to

double quotation

marks

6.12:

Use of the period

6.13:

Periods in relation

to parentheses and

brackets

6.14:

When to omit a

period

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periods

of Contents

List of Figures

6.13 PERIODS IN RELATION TO PARENTHESES AND BRACKETS

List of Tables

When an entire independent sentence is enclosed in parentheses or square brackets, the period

Index

belongs inside the closing parenthesis or bracket. When matter in parentheses or brackets, even a

grammatically complete sentence, is included within another sentence, the period belongs outside (but

see also 6.96). Avoid enclosing more than one complete sentence within another sentence. For the

6.11:

location of a period with quotation marks, see 6.9.

Single quotation

marks next to

double quotation

Fiorelli insisted on rewriting the paragraph. (His newfound ability to type was both a blessing and a curse.)

marks

Farnsworth had left an angry message for Isadora on the mantel (she noticed it while glancing in the

6.12:

mirror).

Use of the period

"All the evidence pointed to the second location [the LÃ¡szlÃ³s' studio]."

6.13:

Periods in relation

to parentheses and

brackets

6.14:

When to omit a

period

6.15:

Periods in ellipses

and suspension

points

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periods

of Contents

List of Figures

6.14 WHEN TO OMIT A PERIOD

List of Tables

No period should follow display lines (chapter titles, subheads, and similar headings), running heads,

Index

column heads in tables, phrases used as captions (but see 3.21), datelines in correspondence,

signatures, or addresses. (Likewise, a comma is sometimes omitted for aesthetic reasons at the ends of

lines set in large display type; see 8.163.) A run-in subhead at the beginning of a paragraph, however,

6.12:

is followed by a period (see 1.54). When an expression that ends in a period (e.g., an abbreviation)

Use of the period

falls at the end of a sentence, no additional period follows (see 6.117). For use or omission of the

6.13:

Periods in relation

period in outline style, see 6.121--26. For punctuation with URLs and e-mail addresses, see 6.8.

to parentheses and

brackets

6.14:

When to omit a

period

6.15:

Periods in ellipses

and suspension

points

6.16:

Use of the comma

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periods

of Contents

List of Figures

6.15 PERIODS IN ELLIPSES AND SUSPENSION POINTS

List of Tables

For the use of an ellipsis (a series of periods) to indicate an omission in quoted material, see 13.48--56.

Index

For the use of suspension points to indicate interruptions or breaks in thought in foreign-language

material, see 11.10, 11.35, 11.54, 11.81, 11.122.

6.13:

Periods in relation

to parentheses and

brackets

6.14:

When to omit a

period

6.15:

Periods in ellipses

and suspension

points

6.16:

Use of the comma

6.17:

Commas in pairs

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas

of Contents

List of Figures

6.16 USE OF THE COMMA

List of Tables

The comma, aside from its technical uses in mathematical, bibliographical, and other contexts,

Index

indicates the smallest break in sentence structure. Especially in spoken contexts, it usually denotes a

slight pause. In formal prose, however, logical considerations come first. Effective use of the comma

involves good judgment, with ease of reading the end in view.

6.14:

When to omit a

period

6.15:

Periods in ellipses

and suspension

points

6.16:

Use of the comma

6.17:

Commas in pairs

6.18:

Serial commas

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas

of Contents

List of Figures

6.17 COMMAS IN PAIRS

List of Tables

Whenever a comma is used to set off an element (such as "1928" or "Minnesota" in the first two

Index

examples below), a second comma is required if the phrase or sentence continues beyond the element

being set off. This principle applies to many of the uses for commas described in this section. An

exception is made for commas within the title of a work (third example).

6.15:

Periods in ellipses

June 5, 1928, lives on in the memories of only a handful of us.

and suspension

points

Sledding in Duluth, Minnesota, is facilitated by that city's hills and frigid winters.

6.16:

but

Use of the comma

6.17:

Look Homeward, Angel was not the working title of the manuscript.

Commas in pairs

6.18:

Serial commas

6.19:

Using semicolons

instead of commas

in a series

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Series and the Serial Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.18 SERIAL COMMAS

List of Tables

Items in a series are normally separated by commas (but see 6.58). When a conjunction joins the last

Index

two elements in a series of three or more, a comma--known as the serial or series comma or the

Oxford comma--should appear before the conjunction. Chicago strongly recommends this widely

practiced usage, blessed by Fowler and other authorities (see bibliog. 1.2), since it prevents ambiguity.

6.16:

If the last element consists of a pair joined by and, the pair should still be preceded by a serial comma

Use of the comma

and the first and (see the last two examples below).

6.17:

Commas in pairs

She took a photograph of her parents, the president, and the vice president.

6.18:

Serial commas

Before heading out the door, she took note of the typical outlines of sweet gum, ginkgo, and elm leaves.

I want no ifs, ands, or buts.

6.19:

Using semicolons

Paul put the kettle on, Don fetched the teapot, and I made tea.

instead of commas

Their wartime rations included cabbage, turnips, and bread and butter.

in a series

John was singing, Jean was playing guitar, and Alan was running errands and furnishing food.

6.20:

Commas with "etc."

and "et al."

Note that the phrase as well as is not equivalent to and.

The team fielded one Mazda, two Corvettes, and three Bugattis, as well as a battered Plymouth Belvedere.

not

The team fielded one Mazda, two Corvettes, three Bugattis, as well as a battered Plymouth Belvedere.

In a series whose elements are all joined by conjunctions, no commas are needed unless the elements

are long and delimiters would be helpful.

Would you prefer Mendelssohn or Schumann or Liszt?

You can turn left at the second fountain and right when you reach the temple, or turn left at the third

fountain and left again at the statue of Venus, or just ask a local person how to get there.

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Series and the Serial Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.19 USING SEMICOLONS INSTEAD OF COMMAS IN A SERIES

List of Tables

When elements in a series include internal punctuation, or when they are very long and complex,

Index

they may need to be separated by semicolons rather than by commas (see 6.58). For a simple list,

however--even if it is introduced with a colon--commas are preferred.

6.17:

Commas in pairs

6.18:

Serial commas

6.19:

Using semicolons

instead of commas

in a series

6.20:

Commas with "etc."

and "et al."

6.21:

Omitting serial

commas before

ampersands

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Series and the Serial Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.20 COMMAS WITH "ETC." AND "ET AL."

List of Tables

Traditional use dictates that the abbreviation etc. ( et cetera, literally "and others of the same kind") is

Index

preceded and (unless it ends a sentence) followed by a comma when it is the final item in a series.

Such equivalents as and so forth and and the like are usually treated the same way. (In formal prose, etc.

should be avoided, though it is usually acceptable in lists and tables, in notes, and within

6.18:

parentheses.) See also 5.220 under etc.

Serial commas

6.19:

Proper technique (with attention paid to posture, wrist position, distance from the keyboard, etc., in the later

Using semicolons

instead of commas

performances) is not in and of itself sufficient to explain Rubinstein's endurance.

in a series

The philosopher's population studies, classic textbooks, stray notes, and so forth, were found in the attic.

6.20:

Commas with "etc."

The abbreviation et al. ( et alia [neut.], et alii [masc.], or et aliae [fem.], literally "and others"), whether

and "et al."

used in regular text or (more often) in bibliographical references, should be treated like etc. If et al.

6.21:

Omitting serial

follows a single item, however (e.g., "Jones et al."), it requires no preceding or following comma. Note

commas before

that neither etc. nor et al. is italicized in normal prose (see the first example above).

ampersands

6.22:

Restrictive and

nonrestrictive

clausesâ€”"which"

versus "that"

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Series and the Serial Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.21 OMITTING SERIAL COMMAS BEFORE AMPERSANDS

List of Tables

When an ampersand is used instead of the word and (as in company names), the serial comma is

Index

omitted.

Winken, Blinken & Nod is a purveyor of nightwear.

6.19:

Using semicolons

instead of commas

in a series

6.20:

Commas with "etc."

and "et al."

6.21:

Omitting serial

commas before

ampersands

6.22:

Restrictive and

nonrestrictive

clausesâ€”"which"

versus "that"

6.23:

Restrictive and

nonrestrictive

appositives

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Relative Clauses

of Contents

List of Figures

6.22 RESTRICTIVE AND NONRESTRICTIVE CLAUSES--"WHICH" VERSUS "THAT"

List of Tables

A relative clause is said to be restrictive if it provides information that is essential to the meaning of

Index

the sentence. Restrictive relative clauses are usually introduced by that (or who/whom/whose) and are

never set off by commas from the rest of the sentence. The pronoun that may occasionally be omitted

(but need not be) if the sentence is just as clear without it, as in the second example (before "I").

6.20:

Commas with "etc."

The version of the manuscript that the editors submitted to the publisher was well formatted.

and "et al."

The book I have just finished is due back tomorrow; the others can wait.

6.21:

Omitting serial

I prefer to share the road with drivers who focus on the road rather than on what they happen to be

commas before

reading.

ampersands

6.22:

A relative clause is said to be nonrestrictive if it could be omitted without obscuring the identity of

Restrictive and

nonrestrictive

the noun to which it refers or otherwise changing the meaning of the rest of the sentence.

clausesâ€”"which"

Nonrestrictive relative clauses are usually introduced by which (or who/whom/whose) and are set off

versus "that"

from the rest of the sentence by commas.

6.23:

Restrictive and

nonrestrictive

The final manuscript, which was well formatted, was submitted to the publisher on time.

appositives

Ulysses, which I finished early this morning, is due back on June 16.

6.24:

I prefer to share the road with illiterate drivers, who are unlikely to read books while driving.

Commas with

parenthetical

elements

Although which can be substituted for that in a restrictive clause (a common practice in British

English), many writers preserve the distinction between restrictive that (with no commas) and

nonrestrictive which (with commas). See also 5.220 under that; which.

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Appositives

of Contents

List of Figures

6.23 RESTRICTIVE AND NONRESTRICTIVE APPOSITIVES

List of Tables

A word, abbreviation, phrase, or clause that is in apposition to a noun (i.e., provides an explanatory

Index

equivalent) is normally set off by commas if it is nonrestrictive--that is, if it can be omitted without

obscuring the identity of the noun to which it refers.

6.21:

K. Lester's only collection of poems, An Apocryphal Miscellany, first appeared as a series of mimeographs.

Omitting serial

This year's poet laureate, K. Lester, spoke first.

commas before

ampersands

Ursula's husband, Jan, is also a writer.

Ursula's son, Clifford, had been a student of Norman Maclean's. (Ursula has only one son.)

6.22:

Restrictive and

nonrestrictive

If, however, the word or phrase is restrictive--that is, provides essential information about the noun

clausesâ€”"which"

versus "that"

(or nouns) to which it refers--no commas should appear.

6.23:

Restrictive and

O'Neill's play The Hairy Ape was being revived. (O'Neill wrote a number of plays.)

nonrestrictive

The renowned poet and historian K. Lester scheduled a six-city tour for April.

appositives

Caligula's sister Drusilla has been the subject of much speculation. (Caligula had more than one sister.)

6.24:

Commas with

parenthetical

See also 5.21.

elements

6.25:

Commas with

"however,"

"therefore,"

"indeed," and so

forth

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Parenthetical and Descriptive Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

6.24 COMMAS WITH PARENTHETICAL ELEMENTS

List of Tables

If only a slight break is intended, commas should be used to set off a parenthetical element inserted

Index

into a sentence as an explanation or comment. If a stronger break is needed or if there are commas

within the parenthetical element, em dashes (6.82) or parentheses (6.92) should be used.

6.22:

All the test participants, in spite of our initial fears, recovered.

Restrictive and

The Hooligan Report was, to say the least, a bombshell.

nonrestrictive

clausesâ€”"which"

The most provocative, if not the most important, part of the statement came last.

versus "that"

Most children fail to consider the history behind new technologies, if they think of it at all.

6.23:

Restrictive and

nonrestrictive

appositives

6.24:

Commas with

parenthetical

elements

6.25:

Commas with

"however,"

"therefore,"

"indeed," and so

forth

6.26:

Commas with

restrictive and

nonrestrictive

phrases

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Parenthetical and Descriptive Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

6.25 COMMAS WITH "HOWEVER," "THEREFORE," "INDEED," AND SO FORTH

List of Tables

Commas--sometimes paired with semicolons (see 6.55)--are traditionally used to set off adverbs such

Index

as however, therefore, and indeed. When the adverb is essential to the meaning of the clause, or if no

pause is intended or desired, commas are not needed (as in the last two examples).

6.23:

A truly efficient gasoline-powered engine remains, however, a pipe dream.

Restrictive and

Indeed, not one test subject accurately predicted the amount of soup in the bowl.

nonrestrictive

appositives

but

6.24:

Commas with

If you cheat and are therefore disqualified, you may also risk losing your scholarship.

parenthetical

elements

That was indeed the outcome of the study.

6.25:

Commas with

"however,"

"therefore,"

"indeed," and so

forth

6.26:

Commas with

restrictive and

nonrestrictive

phrases

6.27:

Commas with "such

as" and "including"

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Parenthetical and Descriptive Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

6.26 COMMAS WITH RESTRICTIVE AND NONRESTRICTIVE PHRASES

List of Tables

A phrase that is restrictive--that is, essential to the meaning (and often the identity) of the noun it

Index

belongs to--should not be set off by commas. A nonrestrictive phrase, however, should be enclosed in

commas (or, if at the end of a sentence, preceded by a comma). See also 6.22.

6.24:

The woman with the guitar over her shoulder is my sister.

Commas with

parenthetical

but

elements

6.25:

My sister, with her guitar over her shoulder, turned to the drummer and gave the signal to begin.

Commas with

"however,"

"therefore,"

"indeed," and so

forth

6.26:

Commas with

restrictive and

nonrestrictive

phrases

6.27:

Commas with "such

as" and "including"

6.28:

Commas with

independent

clauses joined by

conjunctions

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Parenthetical and Descriptive Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

6.27 COMMAS WITH "SUCH AS" AND "INCLUDING"

List of Tables

The principles delineated in 6.26 apply also to phrases introduced by such as or including. Phrases

Index

introduced by these terms are set off by commas when they are used nonrestrictively (as in the first

two examples below) but not when they are used restrictively (as in the last example).

6.25:

The entire band, including the matutinal lead singer, overslept the noon rehearsal.

Commas with

Some words, such as matutinal and onomatopoetic, are best avoided in everyday speech.

"however,"

"therefore,"

"indeed," and so

but

forth

Words such as matutinal and onomatopoetic are best avoided in everyday speech.

6.26:

Commas with

restrictive and

nonrestrictive

phrases

6.27:

Commas with "such

as" and "including"

6.28:

Commas with

independent

clauses joined by

conjunctions

6.29:

Commas with

compound

predicates

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Independent Clauses

of Contents

List of Figures

6.28 COMMAS WITH INDEPENDENT CLAUSES JOINED BY CONJUNCTIONS

List of Tables

When independent clauses are joined by and, but, or, so, yet, or any other conjunction, a comma

Index

usually precedes the conjunction. If the clauses are very short and closely connected, the comma may

be omitted unless the clauses are part of a series. These recommendations apply equally to imperative

sentences, in which the subject ( you) is omitted but understood (as in the fifth and last examples). (For

6.26:

the use of a semicolon between independent clauses, see 6.54.)

Commas with

restrictive and

nonrestrictive

We activated the alarm, but the intruder was already inside.

phrases

All watches display the time, and some of them do so accurately.

6.27:

Do we want to foster creativity, or are we interested only in our intellectual property?

Commas with "such

as" and "including"

The bus never came, so we took a taxi.

Wait for me at the bottom of the hill on Buffalo Street, or walk up to Eddy Street and meet me next to the

6.28:

Commas with

yield sign.

independent

Donald cooked, Sally trimmed the tree, and Maddie and Cammie offered hors d'oeuvres.

clauses joined by

conjunctions

but

6.29:

Commas with

Electra played the guitar and Tambora sang.

compound

predicates

Raise your right hand and repeat after me.

6.30:

Comma preceding

main clause

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Independent Clauses

of Contents

List of Figures

6.29 COMMAS WITH COMPOUND PREDICATES

List of Tables

A comma is not normally used between the parts of a compound predicate--that is, two or more verbs

Index

having the same subject, as distinct from two independent clauses (see 6.28). A comma may

occasionally be needed, however, to prevent a misreading (as in the last example).

6.27:

He printed out a week's worth of crossword puzzles and arranged them on his clipboard.

Commas with "such

Kelleher tried to contact the mayor but was informed that she had stopped accepting unsolicited calls.

as" and "including"

6.28:

but

Commas with

independent

She recognized the man who entered the room, and gasped.

clauses joined by

conjunctions

6.29:

Commas with

compound

predicates

6.30:

Comma preceding

main clause

6.31:

Comma following

main clause

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Dependent Clauses

of Contents

List of Figures

6.30 COMMA PRECEDING MAIN CLAUSE

List of Tables

A dependent clause that precedes a main clause should be followed by a comma.

Index

If you accept our conditions, we shall agree to the proposal.

6.28:

Commas with

independent

clauses joined by

conjunctions

6.29:

Commas with

compound

predicates

6.30:

Comma preceding

main clause

6.31:

Comma following

main clause

6.32:

"And if," "that if,"

and the like

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Dependent Clauses

of Contents

List of Figures

6.31 COMMA FOLLOWING MAIN CLAUSE

List of Tables

A dependent clause that follows a main clause should not be preceded by a comma if it is restrictive,

Index

that is, essential to the meaning of the main clause. For instance, in the first example below, it is not

necessarily true that "we will agree to the proposal"; it is, however, true that "we will agree" to it "if

you accept our conditions."

6.29:

Commas with

We will agree to the proposal if you accept our conditions.

compound

predicates

Paul was astonished when he heard the terms.

6.30:

He wasn't running because he was afraid; he was running because he was late.

Comma preceding

main clause

If the dependent clause is merely supplementary or parenthetical, it should be preceded by a comma.

6.31:

Such distinctions are occasionally tenuous. In fact, as the third example below makes clear, the

Comma following

main clause

meaning in such cases can depend entirely on the presence or absence of a comma (compare with the

6.32:

third example above). If in doubt, rephrase.

"And if," "that if,"

and the like

I'd like the tom yum, if you don't mind.

6.33:

At last she arrived, when the food was cold.

Commas with

coordinate

He didn't run, because he was afraid to move.

adjectives

or

Because he was afraid to move, he didn't run.

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Dependent Clauses

of Contents

List of Figures

6.32 "AND IF," "THAT IF," AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

When two conjunctions appear next to each other (e.g., and if, but if), they need not be separated by a

Index

comma. See also 6.30, 6.31.

Burton examined the documents for over an hour, and if Smedley had not intervened, the forgery would

6.30:

have been revealed.

Comma preceding

They decided that if it rained, they would reschedule the game.

main clause

6.31:

Comma following

main clause

6.32:

"And if," "that if,"

and the like

6.33:

Commas with

coordinate

adjectives

6.34:

Commas with

repeated

adjectives

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Two or More Adjectives Preceding a Noun

of Contents

List of Figures

6.33 COMMAS WITH COORDINATE ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

As a general rule, when a noun is preceded by two or more adjectives that could, without affecting

Index

the meaning, be joined by and, the adjectives are normally separated by commas. Such adjectives,

which are called coordinate adjectives, can also usually be reversed in order and still make sense. If,

on the other hand, the adjectives are not coordinate--that is, if one or more of the adjectives is

6.31:

essential to (i.e., forms a unit with) the noun being modified--no commas are used.

Comma following

main clause

Shelly had proved a faithful, sincere friend. (Shelly's friendship has proved faithful and sincere.)

6.32:

"And if," "that if,"

It is going to be a long, hot, exhausting summer. (The summer is going to be long and hot and exhausting.)

and the like

She has a young, good-looking friend. (Her friend is young and good-looking.)

6.33:

Commas with

but

coordinate

adjectives

She has many young friends.

6.34:

He has rejected traditional religious affiliations.

Commas with

She opted for an inexpensive quartz watch.

repeated

adjectives

6.35:

Commas with

introductory

participial phrases

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Two or More Adjectives Preceding a Noun

of Contents

List of Figures

6.34 COMMAS WITH REPEATED ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

When an adjective is repeated before a noun, a comma normally appears between the pair.

Index

Many, many people have enjoyed the book.

6.32:

"And if," "that if,"

and the like

6.33:

Commas with

coordinate

adjectives

6.34:

Commas with

repeated

adjectives

6.35:

Commas with

introductory

participial phrases

6.36:

Commas with

introductory

adverbial phrases

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Introductory Words and Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

6.35 COMMAS WITH INTRODUCTORY PARTICIPIAL PHRASES

List of Tables

An introductory participial phrase should be set off by a comma unless the sentence is inverted and

Index

the phrase immediately precedes the verb.

Exhilarated by the morning's work, she skipped lunch and headed for the ocean.

6.33:

Failing in their quest, the team resolved to train harder in the off-season.

Commas with

coordinate

but

adjectives

6.34:

Running along behind the wagon was the archduke himself!

Commas with

repeated

adjectives

6.35:

Commas with

introductory

participial phrases

6.36:

Commas with

introductory

adverbial phrases

6.37:

Commas with "oh"

and "ah"

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Introductory Words and Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

6.36 COMMAS WITH INTRODUCTORY ADVERBIAL PHRASES

List of Tables

An introductory adverbial phrase is often set off by a comma but need not be unless misreading is

Index

likely. Shorter adverbial phrases are less likely to merit a comma than longer ones.

After reading the note, Henrietta turned pale.

6.34:

On the other hand, his vices could be considered virtues.

Commas with

After 1956 such complaints about poor fidelity became far less common.

repeated

adjectives

but

6.35:

Commas with

Before eating, the members of the committee met in the assembly room.

introductory

participial phrases

To Anthony, Blake remained an enigma.

6.36:

A comma should not be used if the introductory adverbial phrase immediately precedes the verb it

Commas with

introductory

modifies.

adverbial phrases

6.37:

Before the footlights stood one of the most notorious rakes of the twenty-first century.

Commas with "oh"

and "ah"

6.38:

Commas with

direct address

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Introductory Words and Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

6.37 COMMAS WITH "OH" AND "AH"

List of Tables

A comma usually follows an exclamatory oh or ah unless it is followed by an exclamation mark or

Index

forms part of a phrase (e.g., "oh boy," "ah yes"). No comma follows vocative oh or (mainly poetic and

largely archaic) O. See also 7.45.

6.35:

Oh, you're right!

Commas with

Ah, here we are at last!

introductory

participial phrases

Oh no! Ah yes! Oh yeah?

Oh mighty king!

6.36:

Commas with

"O wild West Wind . . ."

introductory

adverbial phrases

6.37:

Commas with "oh"

and "ah"

6.38:

Commas with

direct address

6.39:

"Yes," "no," and the

like

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Introductory Words and Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

6.38 COMMAS WITH DIRECT ADDRESS

List of Tables

A comma is used to set off names or words used in direct address and informal correspondence (in

Index

formal correspondence, a colon usually follows the name).

Ms. Jones, please come in.

6.36:

James, your order is ready.

Commas with

I am not here, my friends, to discuss personalities.

introductory

adverbial phrases

Hello, Ms. Philips.

Dear Judy, . . .

6.37:

Commas with "oh"

and "ah"

6.38:

Commas with

direct address

6.39:

"Yes," "no," and the

like

6.40:

Commas with "not"

phrases

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Commas with Introductory Words and Phrases

of Contents

List of Figures

6.39 "YES," "NO," AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

A comma should follow an introductory yes, no, well, and the like, except in certain instances more

Index

likely to be encountered in informal prose or dialogue.

Yes, it is true that 78 percent of the subjects ate 50 percent more than they reported.

6.37:

No, neither scenario improved the subjects' accuracy.

Commas with "oh"

Well then, we shall have to take a vote.

and "ah"

6.38:

but

Commas with

direct address

No you will not!

6.39:

"Yes," "no," and the

like

6.40:

Commas with "not"

phrases

6.41:

Commas with "not

. . . but," "not only

. . . but," and the

like

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Other Uses of the Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.40 COMMAS WITH "NOT" PHRASES

List of Tables

When a phrase beginning with not is interjected in order to clarify a particular noun, commas should

Index

be used to set off the phrase. See also 6.41.

We hoped the mayor herself, not her assistant, would attend the meeting.

6.38:

It's you they want, not him.

Commas with

direct address

6.39:

"Yes," "no," and the

like

6.40:

Commas with "not"

phrases

6.41:

Commas with "not

. . . but," "not only

. . . but," and the

like

6.42:

Commas with "the

more," "the less,"

and so on

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Other Uses of the Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.41 COMMAS WITH "NOT . . . BUT," "NOT ONLY . . . BUT," AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

With an interjected phrase of the type not . . . but or not only . . . but, commas are usually unnecessary.

Index

They marched to Washington not only armed with petitions and determined to get their senators' attention

but also hoping to demonstrate their solidarity with one another.

Being almost perfectly ambidextrous, she wore not one watch but two.

6.39:

"Yes," "no," and the

like

If, however, such a phrase seems to require special emphasis or clarification (usually a matter of

6.40:

editorial judgment), commas may be used to set off the not phrase. Alternatively, a dash may be used

Commas with "not"

phrases

in place of the first comma.

6.41:

Commas with "not

She was in the habit of placing her orders months ahead of the competition--not only as a matter of personal

. . . but," "not only

pride, but also to bolster her credibility as an early adopter.

. . . but," and the

like

6.42:

Commas with "the

more," "the less,"

and so on

6.43:

Commas with "that

is," "namely," "for

example," and

similar expressions

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Other Uses of the Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.42 COMMAS WITH "THE MORE," "THE LESS," AND SO ON

List of Tables

A comma is customarily used between clauses of the more . . . the more type. Shorter phrases of that

Index

type, however, rarely merit commas.

The more I discover about the workings of mechanical movements, the less I seem to care about the holy

6.40:

grail of perfectly accurate timekeeping.

Commas with "not"

phrases

but

6.41:

Commas with "not

The more the merrier.

. . . but," "not only

. . . but," and the

like

6.42:

Commas with "the

more," "the less,"

and so on

6.43:

Commas with "that

is," "namely," "for

example," and

similar expressions

6.44:

Commas between

homonyms

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Other Uses of the Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.43 COMMAS WITH "THAT IS," "NAMELY," "FOR EXAMPLE," AND SIMILAR EXPRESSIONS

List of Tables

Expressions of the type that is are traditionally followed by a comma. They may be preceded by an

Index

em dash or a semicolon, or the entire phrase they introduce may be enclosed in parentheses or em

dashes.

6.41:

There are simple alternatives to the stigmatized plastic shopping bag--namely, reusable cloth bags and

Commas with "not

foldable carts.

. . . but," "not only

. . . but," and the

The committee (that is, its more influential members) wanted to drop the matter.

like

Keesler managed to change the subject; that is, he introduced a tangential issue.

6.42:

Bones from various small animals--for example, a squirrel, a cat, a pigeon, and a muskrat--were found in the

Commas with "the

doctor's cabinet.

more," "the less,"

and so on

When or is used in a sense analogous to that is (to mean "in other words"), the phrase it introduces is

6.43:

Commas with "that

usually set off by commas.

is," "namely," "for

example," and

similar expressions

The compass stand, or binnacle, must be situated within the helmsman's field of vision.

6.44:

Commas between

The abbreviations i.e. ("that is") and e.g. ("for example"), if used in formal writing, should be confined

homonyms

to parentheses or notes and followed by a comma.

6.45:

Commas with dates

The most noticeable difference between male and female ginkgo trees (i.e., the presence of berries in the

latter) is also the species' most controversial feature.

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Other Uses of the Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.44 COMMAS BETWEEN HOMONYMS

List of Tables

For ease of reading and subject to editorial discretion, two words that are spelled alike but have

Index

different functions may be separated by a comma if such clarification seems desirable.

Let us march in, in twos.

6.42:

Whatever is, is good.

Commas with "the

more," "the less,"

but

and so on

6.43:

"It depends on what means means."

Commas with "that

is," "namely," "for

example," and

similar expressions

6.44:

Commas between

homonyms

6.45:

Commas with dates

6.46:

Commas with

addresses and

place-names in

text

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Other Uses of the Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.45 COMMAS WITH DATES

List of Tables

In the month-day-year style of dates, commas must be used to set off the year. In the day-month-year

Index

system--useful in material that requires many full dates (and standard in British English)--no commas

are needed. Where month and year only are given, or a specific day (such as a holiday) with a year,

neither system uses a comma. For dates used adjectivally, see 5.82. See also 9.30--37. For the year-

6.43:

month-day (ISO) date style, see 9.37.

Commas with "that

is," "namely," "for

example," and

The performance took place on February 2, 2006, at the State Theatre in Ithaca.

similar expressions

Bradford gradually came to accept the verdict. (See his journal entries of 6 October 1999 and 4 January

6.44:

2000.)

Commas between

homonyms

In March 2008 she turned seventy-five.

On Thanksgiving Day 1998 they celebrated their seventy-fifth anniversary.

6.45:

Commas with dates

6.46:

Commas with

addresses and

place-names in

text

6.47:

"Jr.," "Sr.," and the

like

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Other Uses of the Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.46 COMMAS WITH ADDRESSES AND PLACE-NAMES IN TEXT

List of Tables

Commas are used to set off the individual elements in addresses or place-names that are run in to the

Index

text. In a mailing address, commas should be used as sparsely as possible (e.g., no comma appears

between a street name and an abbreviation such as SW or before a postal code; see first example); if in

doubt, consult the applicable postal service. For place-names used adjectivally, see 5.67.

6.44:

Commas between

Proofs were sent to the author at 743 Olga Drive NE, Ashtabula, OH 44044, on May 2.

homonyms

Waukegan, Illinois, is not far from the Wisconsin border.

6.45:

Commas with dates

The plane landed in Kampala, Uganda, that evening.

6.46:

Commas with

Some institutional names include place-names set off by commas. When such a name appears in the

addresses and

middle of a clause, a second comma is required to set off the place-name. See also 6.81.

place-names in

text

California State University, Northridge, has an enrollment of . . .

6.47:

"Jr.," "Sr.," and the

like

but

6.48:

The University of Wisconsin--Madison has an enrollment of . . .

"Inc.," "Ltd.," and

the like

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Other Uses of the Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.47 "JR.," "SR.," AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

Commas are not required around Jr. and Sr. , and they are never used to set off II, III, and the like

Index

when these are used as part of a name. In an inverted name, however (as in an index; see 16.41), a

comma is required before such an element, which comes last.

6.45:

John Doe Sr. continues to cast a shadow over his son.

Commas with dates

Jason Deer III has turned over stewardship of the family business to his cousin.

6.46:

Commas with

but

addresses and

place-names in

Doe, John, Sr.

text

Stag, Jason, III

6.47:

"Jr.," "Sr.," and the

like

If commas must be used with Jr. or Sr. , rephrase as needed to avoid the possessive.

6.48:

"Inc.," "Ltd.," and

the like

6.49:

Commas to

indicate elision

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Other Uses of the Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.48 "INC.," "LTD.," AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

Commas are not required around Inc. , Ltd. , and such as part of a company's name. A particular

Index

company may use such commas in its corporate documentation; articles and books about such

companies, however, should generally opt for a consistent style rather than make exceptions for

particular cases.

6.46:

Commas with

QuartzMove Inc. was just one such company named in the suit.

addresses and

place-names in

text

6.47:

"Jr.," "Sr.," and the

like

6.48:

"Inc.," "Ltd.," and

the like

6.49:

Commas to

indicate elision

6.50:

Commas with

quotations

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Other Uses of the Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.49 COMMAS TO INDICATE ELISION

List of Tables

A comma is often used to indicate the omission of a word or words readily understood from the

Index

context.

In Illinois there are seventeen such schools; in Ohio, twenty; in Indiana, thirteen.

6.47:

Thousands rushed to serve him in victory; in defeat, none.

"Jr.," "Sr.," and the

like

The comma may be omitted if the elliptical construction is clear without it.

6.48:

"Inc.," "Ltd.," and

One student excels at composition, another at mathematics, and the third at sports.

the like

Jasper missed her and she him.

6.49:

Commas to

indicate elision

6.50:

Commas with

quotations

6.51:

Commas with

maxims and

proverbs

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Other Uses of the Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.50 COMMAS WITH QUOTATIONS

List of Tables

Material quoted in the form of dialogue or from text is traditionally introduced with a comma (but

Index

see 6.63, 13.17). If a quotation is introduced by that, whether, or a similar conjunction, no comma is

needed.

6.48:

It was Thoreau who wrote, "One generation abandons the enterprises of another like stranded vessels."

"Inc.," "Ltd.," and

She replied, "I hope you aren't referring to us."

the like

Was it Stevenson who said that "the cruelest lies are often told in silence"?

6.49:

He is now wondering whether "to hold, as 'twere, the mirror up to nature."

Commas to

indicate elision

For the location of a comma in relation to closing quotation marks, see 6.9. For quoted maxims and

6.50:

Commas with

proverbs, see 6.51. For detailed discussion and illustration of the use or omission of commas before

quotations

and after quoted material, including dialogue, see 13.18, 13.48--56, and the examples throughout

6.51:

Commas with

chapter 13.

maxims and

proverbs

6.52:

Commas with

questions

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Other Uses of the Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.51 COMMAS WITH MAXIMS AND PROVERBS

List of Tables

With maxims, proverbs, mottoes, and other familiar expressions, commas are used or omitted in the

Index

same way as with appositives (6.23), unless an expression is being attributed directly to a speaker or

writer (in which case the rules in 6.50 and 13.18 apply). Whether such expressions are enclosed in

quotation marks depends largely on the syntax of the sentence in which they appear. See also 8.197.

6.49:

Commas to

The motto "All for one and one for all" appears over the door.

indicate elision

Tom's favorite proverb, "A rolling stone gathers no moss," proved wrong.

6.50:

Commas with

It is untrue that a rolling stone gathers no moss.

quotations

6.51:

Commas with

maxims and

proverbs

6.52:

Commas with

questions

6.53:

Commas relative to

parentheses and

brackets

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Other Uses of the Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.52 COMMAS WITH QUESTIONS

List of Tables

A question is sometimes included within another sentence either directly or indirectly--not as a

Index

quotation but as part of the sentence as a whole. A direct question (unless it comes at the beginning

of a sentence) is usually introduced by a comma. A direct question may take an initial capital letter if

it is relatively long or has internal punctuation.

6.50:

Commas with

Suddenly he asked himself, where am I headed?

quotations

The question on everyone's mind was, how are we going to tell her?

6.51:

Commas with

Legislators had to be asking themselves, Can the fund be used for the current emergency, or must it remain

maxims and

dedicated to its original purpose?

proverbs

6.52:

If the result seems awkward, rephrase as an indirect question. An indirect question does not require a

Commas with

questions

question mark, nor does it need to be set off with a comma. Indirect questions are never capitalized

6.53:

(except at the beginning of a sentence). See also 6.66--70.

Commas relative to

parentheses and

Suddenly he asked himself where he was headed.

brackets

The question of how to tell her was on everyone's mind.

6.54:

Use of the

Ursula wondered why her watch had stopped ticking.

semicolon

Where to find a reliable clock is the question of the hour.

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Commas >> Other Uses of the Comma

of Contents

List of Figures

6.53 COMMAS RELATIVE TO PARENTHESES AND BRACKETS

List of Tables

When the context calls for a comma at the end of material in parentheses or brackets, the comma

Index

should follow the closing parenthesis or bracket. A comma never precedes a closing parenthesis. (For

its rare appearance before an opening parenthesis, see the examples in 6.123.) Rarely, a comma may

appear inside and immediately before a closing bracket as part of an editorial interpolation (as in the

6.51:

last example; see also 13.57).

Commas with

maxims and

proverbs

After several drummers had tried out for the part (the last having destroyed the kit), the band decided that

6.52:

a drum machine was their steadiest option.

Commas with

Her delivery, especially when she would turn to address the audience (almost as if to spot a long-lost

questions

friend), was universally praised.

6.53:

"Conrad told his assistant [Martin], who was clearly exhausted, to rest."

Commas relative to

parentheses and

"The contents of the vault included fennel seeds, tweezers, [straight-edged razors,] and empty Coca-Cola

brackets

cans."

6.54:

Use of the

semicolon

6.55:

Semicolons with

"however,"

"therefore,"

"indeed," and the

like

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Semicolons

of Contents

List of Figures

6.54 USE OF THE SEMICOLON

List of Tables

In regular prose, a semicolon is most commonly used between two independent clauses not joined by

Index

a conjunction to signal a closer connection between them than a period would.

She spent much of her free time immersed in the ocean; no mere water- resistant watch would do.

6.52:

Though a gifted writer, Miqueas has never bothered to master the semicolon; he insists that half a colon is

Commas with

no colon at all.

questions

6.53:

For the use of the semicolon in index entries, see 16.96, 16.17. For its use in parenthetical text citations,

Commas relative to

parentheses and

see 15.29. For its use with a second subtitle of a work, see 14.98.

brackets

6.54:

Use of the

semicolon

6.55:

Semicolons with

"however,"

"therefore,"

"indeed," and the

like

6.56:

Semicolons with

"that is," "for

example,"

"namely," and the

like

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Semicolons

of Contents

List of Figures

6.55 SEMICOLONS WITH "HOWEVER," "THEREFORE," "INDEED," AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

Certain adverbs, when they are used to join two independent clauses, should be preceded by a

Index

semicolon rather than a comma. These transitional adverbs include however, thus, hence, indeed,

accordingly, besides, therefore, and sometimes then (see also 6.56). A comma usually follows the adverb

but may be omitted if the sentence seems just as effective without it (see also 6.36).

6.53:

Commas relative to

The accuracy of Jesse's watch was never in question; besides, he was an expert at intuiting the time of day

parentheses and

brackets

from the position of the sun and stars.

6.54:

Kallista was determined not to miss anything on her voyage; accordingly, she made an appointment with

Use of the

her ophthalmologist.

semicolon

The trumpet player developed a painful cold sore; therefore plans for a third show were scrapped.

6.55:

Semicolons with

"however,"

"therefore,"

"indeed," and the

like

6.56:

Semicolons with

"that is," "for

example,"

"namely," and the

like

6.57:

Semicolons before

a conjunction

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Semicolons

of Contents

List of Figures

6.56 SEMICOLONS WITH "THAT IS," "FOR EXAMPLE," "NAMELY," AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

A semicolon may be used before expressions such as that is, for example, or namely when they

Index

introduce an independent clause. For an example, see 6.43. See also 6.55.

6.54:

Use of the

semicolon

6.55:

Semicolons with

"however,"

"therefore,"

"indeed," and the

like

6.56:

Semicolons with

"that is," "for

example,"

"namely," and the

like

6.57:

Semicolons before

a conjunction

6.58:

Semicolons in a

complex series

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Semicolons

of Contents

List of Figures

6.57 SEMICOLONS BEFORE A CONJUNCTION

List of Tables

Normally, an independent clause introduced by a conjunction is preceded by a comma (see 6.28). In

Index

formal prose, a semicolon may be used instead--either to effect a stronger, more dramatic separation

between clauses or when the second independent clause has internal punctuation.

6.55:

Frobisher had always assured his grandson that the house would be his; yet there was no provision for this

Semicolons with

bequest in his will.

"however,"

"therefore,"

Garrett had insisted on remixing the track; but the engineer's demands for overtime pay, together with the

"indeed," and the

band's reluctance, persuaded him to accept the original mix.

like

6.56:

Semicolons with

"that is," "for

example,"

"namely," and the

like

6.57:

Semicolons before

a conjunction

6.58:

Semicolons in a

complex series

6.59:

Use of the colon

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Semicolons

of Contents

List of Figures

6.58 SEMICOLONS IN A COMPLEX SERIES

List of Tables

When items in a series themselves contain internal punctuation, separating the items with semicolons

Index

can aid clarity. If ambiguity seems unlikely, commas may be used instead (see 6.18). See also 6.123.

The membership of the international commission was as follows: France, 4; Germany, 5; Great Britain, 1;

6.56:

Italy, 3; United States, 7.

Semicolons with

The defendant, in an attempt to mitigate his sentence, pleaded that he had recently, on doctor's orders, gone

"that is," "for

example,"

off his medications; that his car--which, incidentally, he had won in the late 1970s on Let's Make a Deal--

"namely," and the

had spontaneously caught on fire; and that he had not eaten for several days.

like

6.57:

but

Semicolons before

a conjunction

She decided to buy three watches--an atomic watch for travel within the United States, a solar-powered,

6.58:

water-resistant quartz for international travel, and an expensive self-winding model for special occasions.

Semicolons in a

complex series

6.59:

Use of the colon

6.60:

Space after colon

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Colons

of Contents

List of Figures

6.59 USE OF THE COLON

List of Tables

A colon introduces an element or a series of elements illustrating or amplifying what has preceded

Index

the colon. Between independent clauses it functions much like a semicolon, and in some cases either

mark may work as well as the other; use a colon sparingly, however, and only to emphasize that the

second clause illustrates or amplifies the first. (The colon should generally convey the sense of "as

6.57:

follows.") The colon may sometimes be used instead of a period to introduce a series of related

Semicolons before

a conjunction

sentences (as in the third example below).

6.58:

Semicolons in a

The watch came with a choice of three bands: stainless steel, plastic, or leather.

complex series

They even relied on a chronological analogy: just as the Year II had overshadowed 1789, so the October

6.59:

Revolution had eclipsed that of February.

Use of the colon

Yolanda faced a conundrum: She could finish the soup, pretending not to care that what she had thought

6.60:

until a moment ago was a vegetable broth was in fact made from chicken. She could feign satiety and

Space after colon

thank the host for a good meal. Or she could use this opportunity to assert her preference for a vegan

6.61:

diet.

Lowercase or

capital letter after

a colon

For use of the em dash instead of a colon, see 6.82. For the use of colons with subtitles, see 14.97. For

the use of colons in indexes, see 16.95. For other uses of the colon--in source citations, URLs,

mathematical expressions, and other settings--consult the index or search the online edition of this

manual.

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Colons

of Contents

List of Figures

6.60 SPACE AFTER COLON

List of Tables

In typeset matter, no more than one space should follow a colon. Further, in some settings--as in a

Index

source citation between a volume and page number with no intervening date or issue number (see

14.186), a biblical citation, or a ratio-- no space should follow a colon. See also 6.7.

6.58:

Semicolons in a

complex series

6.59:

Use of the colon

6.60:

Space after colon

6.61:

Lowercase or

capital letter after

a colon

6.62:

Colons with "as

follows" and other

introductory

phrases

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Colons

of Contents

List of Figures

6.61 LOWERCASE OR CAPITAL LETTER AFTER A COLON

List of Tables

When a colon is used within a sentence, as in the first two examples in 6.59, the first word following

Index

the colon is lowercased unless it is a proper name. When a colon introduces two or more sentences

(as in the third example in 6.59), when it introduces a speech in dialogue or an extract (as in the

examples in 6.63), or when it introduces a direct question, the first word following it is capitalized.

6.59:

Use of the colon

6.60:

Space after colon

6.61:

Lowercase or

capital letter after

a colon

6.62:

Colons with "as

follows" and other

introductory

phrases

6.63:

Colons to introduce

speech or

quotations

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Colons

of Contents

List of Figures

6.62 COLONS WITH "AS FOLLOWS" AND OTHER INTRODUCTORY PHRASES

List of Tables

A colon is normally used after as follows, the following, and similar expressions. (For lists, see

Index

6.121--26.)

The steps are as follows: first, make grooves for the seeds; second, sprinkle the seeds; third, push the earth

6.60:

back over the grooves; fourth, water generously.

Space after colon

Kenzie's results yield the following hypotheses: First, . . . Second, . . . Third, . . .

6.61:

Lowercase or

capital letter after

a colon

6.62:

Colons with "as

follows" and other

introductory

phrases

6.63:

Colons to introduce

speech or

quotations

6.64:

Colons with formal

direct address

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Colons

of Contents

List of Figures

6.63 COLONS TO INTRODUCE SPEECH OR QUOTATIONS

List of Tables

A colon is often used to introduce speech in dialogue.

Index

Michael: The incident has already been reported.

Timothy: Then, sir, all is lost!

6.61:

Lowercase or

A colon may also be used instead of a comma to introduce a quotation, either where the syntax of the

capital letter after

introduction requires it or to more formally introduce the quotation. For the use of the comma with

a colon

quotations, see 6.50. See also 13.17.

6.62:

Colons with "as

follows" and other

Julian Duguid, author of Green Hell (1931), starts his book boldly: "When a man yields to the urge of Ishmael

introductory

phrases

. . ."

6.63:

Colons to introduce

speech or

quotations

6.64:

Colons with formal

direct address

6.65:

Some common

misuses of colons

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Colons

of Contents

List of Figures

6.64 COLONS WITH FORMAL DIRECT ADDRESS

List of Tables

At the beginning of a speech or a formal communication, a colon usually follows the identification of

Index

those addressed. For use of a comma, see 6.38.

Ladies and Gentlemen:

6.62:

To Whom It May Concern:

Colons with "as

Dear Credit and Collections Manager:

follows" and other

introductory

phrases

6.63:

Colons to introduce

speech or

quotations

6.64:

Colons with formal

direct address

6.65:

Some common

misuses of colons

6.66:

Use of the question

mark

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Colons

of Contents

List of Figures

6.65 SOME COMMON MISUSES OF COLONS

List of Tables

Many writers assume--wrongly--that a colon is always needed before a series or a list. In fact, if a

Index

colon intervenes in what would otherwise constitute a grammatical sentence--even if the introduction

appears on a separate line, as in a list (see 6.121--26)--it is probably being used inappropriately. A

colon, for example, should not be used before a series that serves as the object of a verb. When in

6.63:

doubt, apply this test: to merit a colon, the words that introduce a series or list must themselves

Colons to introduce

speech or

constitute a grammatically complete sentence.

quotations

6.64:

The menagerie included cats, pigeons, newts, and deer ticks.

Colons with formal

direct address

not

6.65:

Some common

The menagerie included: cats, pigeons, newts, and deer ticks.

misuses of colons

6.66:

Nor should a colon normally be used after namely, for example, and similar expressions (see 6.43).

Use of the question

mark

6.67:

Question mark

within a sentence

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Question Marks

of Contents

List of Figures

6.66 USE OF THE QUESTION MARK

List of Tables

The question mark, as its name suggests, is used to indicate a direct question. It may also be used to

Index

indicate editorial doubt (e.g., regarding a date or facts of publication; see 14.138) or (occasionally) at

the end of a declarative or imperative sentence in order to express surprise, disbelief, or uncertainty.

See also 6.72, 6.116, 6.118.

6.64:

Colons with formal

Who will represent the poor?

direct address

Thomas Kraftig (1610?--66) was the subject of the final essay.

6.65:

Some common

This is your reply?

misuses of colons

6.66:

Use of the question

mark

6.67:

Question mark

within a sentence

6.68:

Indirect questions

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Question Marks

of Contents

List of Figures

6.67 QUESTION MARK WITHIN A SENTENCE

List of Tables

A question mark is used to mark the end of a direct question within a sentence. If the question does

Index

not begin the sentence, it need not start with a capital letter (but see 6.52).

Is it worth the risk? he wondered.

6.65:

Some common

For the omission of a comma following a question mark, see 6.119.

misuses of colons

6.66:

Use of the question

mark

6.67:

Question mark

within a sentence

6.68:

Indirect questions

6.69:

Requests as

questions

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Question Marks

of Contents

List of Figures

6.68 INDIRECT QUESTIONS

List of Tables

An indirect question never takes a question mark. See also 6.52.

Index

He wondered whether it was worth the risk.

How the two could be reconciled was the question on everyone's mind.

6.66:

Use of the question

When a question within a sentence consists of a single word, such as who, when, how, or why, a

mark

question mark may be omitted, and the word is sometimes italicized.

6.67:

Question mark

She asked herself why.

within a sentence

The question was no longer how but when.

6.68:

Indirect questions

6.69:

Requests as

questions

6.70:

Question marks in

relation to

surrounding text

and punctuation

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Question Marks

of Contents

List of Figures

6.69 REQUESTS AS QUESTIONS

List of Tables

A request disguised as a question does not require a question mark. Such formulations can usually be

Index

reduced to the imperative.

Would you kindly respond by March 1.

6.67:

or

Question mark

within a sentence

Please respond by March 1.

6.68:

Indirect questions

6.69:

Requests as

questions

6.70:

Question marks in

relation to

surrounding text

and punctuation

6.71:

Use of the

exclamation point

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Question Marks

of Contents

List of Figures

6.70 QUESTION MARKS IN RELATION TO SURROUNDING TEXT AND PUNCTUATION

List of Tables

A question mark should be placed inside quotation marks, parentheses, or brackets only when it is

Index

part of (i.e., applies to) the quoted or parenthetical matter. See also 6.10, 6.120.

The ambassador asked, "Has the Marine Corps been alerted?"

6.68:

Why was Farragut trembling when he said, "I'm here to open an inquiry"?

Indirect questions

Emily (had we met before?) winked at me.

6.69:

Why did she tell him only on the morning of his departure (March 18)?

Requests as

"What do you suppose he had in mind," inquired Newman, "when he said, â€˜You are all greater fools than

questions

I thought'?"

6.70:

Question marks in

relation to

surrounding text

and punctuation

6.71:

Use of the

exclamation point

6.72:

Exclamation rather

than question

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Exclamation Points

of Contents

List of Figures

6.71 USE OF THE EXCLAMATION POINT

List of Tables

An exclamation point (which should be used sparingly to be effective) marks an outcry or an

Index

emphatic or ironic comment. See also 6.116, 6.118.

Heads up!

6.69:

The procedure resulted in a 3 percent increase--a far cry from the 50 percent predicted by the doomsayers!

Requests as

questions

6.70:

Question marks in

relation to

surrounding text

and punctuation

6.71:

Use of the

exclamation point

6.72:

Exclamation rather

than question

6.73:

Exclamation point

as editorial protest

or amusement

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Exclamation Points

of Contents

List of Figures

6.72 EXCLAMATION RATHER THAN QUESTION

List of Tables

A sentence in the form of a direct question can often be styled as an exclamation simply by using an

Index

exclamation point rather than a question mark.

How could you possibly believe that!

6.70:

When will I ever learn!

Question marks in

relation to

surrounding text

and punctuation

6.71:

Use of the

exclamation point

6.72:

Exclamation rather

than question

6.73:

Exclamation point

as editorial protest

or amusement

6.74:

Exclamation points

with quotation

marks,

parentheses, or

brackets

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Exclamation Points

of Contents

List of Figures

6.73 EXCLAMATION POINT AS EDITORIAL PROTEST OR AMUSEMENT

List of Tables

Writers and editors should be aware that an exclamation point added in brackets to quoted matter to

Index

indicate editorial protest or amusement is likely to be interpreted as contemptuous; unless such a

sentiment is intended, this device should be avoided. The Latin expression sic ("thus") should be

reserved to indicate an error in the source that might be taken as an error of transcription. See 13.59.

6.71:

Use of the

exclamation point

6.72:

Exclamation rather

than question

6.73:

Exclamation point

as editorial protest

or amusement

6.74:

Exclamation points

with quotation

marks,

parentheses, or

brackets

6.75:

Hyphens and

dashes compared

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Exclamation Points

of Contents

List of Figures

6.74 EXCLAMATION POINTS WITH QUOTATION MARKS, PARENTHESES, OR BRACKETS

List of Tables

An exclamation point should be placed inside quotation marks, parentheses, or brackets only when it

Index

is part of the quoted or parenthetical matter.

The performer walked off the stage amidst cries of "Brava!"

6.72:

She actually wants me to believe the manufacturer's claim that her watch is "water resistant to 300 meters"!

Exclamation rather

Alex Ramirez (I could have had a stroke!) repeated the whole story.

than question

6.73:

Exclamation point

as editorial protest

or amusement

6.74:

Exclamation points

with quotation

marks,

parentheses, or

brackets

6.75:

Hyphens and

dashes compared

6.76:

Hyphens in

compound words

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.75 HYPHENS AND DASHES COMPARED

List of Tables

Hyphens and the various dashes all have their specific appearance (shown below) and uses (discussed

Index

in the following paragraphs). The hyphen, the en dash, and the em dash are the most commonly used.

Though many readers may not notice the difference--especially between an en dash and a hyphen--

correct use of the different types is a sign of editorial precision and care. These characters are easy

6.73:

enough to create with modern software, but publications must be proofread carefully for any

Exclamation point

as editorial protest

conversion errors along the way from manuscript to published work. See also 2.12, 2.13, 2.93.

or amusement

6.74:

hyphen -

Exclamation points

en dash --

with quotation

marks,

em dash --

parentheses, or

2-em dash

brackets

——

3-em dash ———

6.75:

Hyphens and

dashes compared

6.76:

Hyphens in

compound words

6.77:

Hyphens as

separators

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> Hyphens

of Contents

List of Figures

6.76 HYPHENS IN COMPOUND WORDS

List of Tables

The use of the hyphen in compound words and names and in word division is discussed in 5.91 and

Index

in chapter 7, especially 7.31--43 and 7.77--85. See also 6.80.

6.74:

Exclamation points

with quotation

marks,

parentheses, or

brackets

6.75:

Hyphens and

dashes compared

6.76:

Hyphens in

compound words

6.77:

Hyphens as

separators

6.78:

En dash as "to"

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> Hyphens

of Contents

List of Figures

6.77 HYPHENS AS SEPARATORS

List of Tables

A hyphen is used to separate numbers that are not inclusive, such as telephone numbers, social

Index

security numbers, and ISBNs. (For hyphens with dates, see 9.37.) It is also used to separate letters

when a word is spelled out letter by letter, in dialogue, in reference to American Sign Language (see

11.144--54), and elsewhere.

6.75:

Hyphens and

1-800-621-2376 or (1-800) 621-2376

dashes compared

0-226-10389-7

6.76:

Hyphens in

"My name is Phyllis; that's p-h-y-l-l-i-s."

compound words

A proficient signer can fingerspell C-O-L-O-R -A-D-O in less than two seconds.

6.77:

Hyphens as

Hyphens can also appear in URLs and e-mail addresses. A hyphen must not be added to such a

separators

string when it breaks at the end of a line (see 2.12, 7.42).

6.78:

En dash as "to"

6.79:

En dash with an

unfinished number

range

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> En Dashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.78 EN DASH AS "TO"

List of Tables

The principal use of the en dash is to connect numbers and, less often, words. With continuing

Index

numbers--such as dates, times, and page numbers--it signifies up to and including (or through). For the

sake of parallel construction, the word to, never the en dash, should be used if the word from precedes

the first element in such a pair; similarly, and, never the en dash, should be used if between precedes

6.76:

the first element.

Hyphens in

compound words

The years 1993--2000 were heady ones for the computer literate.

6.77:

Hyphens as

For documentation and indexing, see chapters 14--16.

separators

In Genesis 6:13--21 we find God's instructions to Noah.

6.78:

Join us on Thursday, 11:30 a.m.--4:00 p.m., to celebrate the New Year.

En dash as "to"

I have blocked out December 2009--March 2010 to complete my manuscript.

6.79:

Her articles appeared in Postwar Journal (3 November 1945--4 February 1946).

En dash with an

unfinished number

but

range

6.80:

She was in college from 1998 to 2002 ( not from 1998--2002).

En dashes with

compound

adjectives

In other contexts, such as with scores and directions, the en dash signifies, more simply, to.

The London--Paris train leaves at two o'clock.

On November 20, 1966, Green Bay defeated Chicago, 13--6.

The legislature voted 101--13 to adopt the resolution.

For more on dates and times, see 9.30--37, 9.38--41. For more on number ranges, see 9.60. For the

slash, see 6.105.

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> En Dashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.79 EN DASH WITH AN UNFINISHED NUMBER RANGE

List of Tables

An en dash may be used to indicate a number range that is ongoing--for example, to indicate the

Index

dates of a serial publication or to give the birth date of a living person. No space intervenes between

the en dash and the mark of punctuation that follows.

6.77:

The Chicago translation of The MahÄbhÄrata (1973--) is projected to run to ten volumes.

Hyphens as

Jack Stag (1950--) or Jack Stag (b. 1950)

separators

6.78:

En dash as "to"

6.79:

En dash with an

unfinished number

range

6.80:

En dashes with

compound

adjectives

6.81:

Other uses for the

en dash

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> En Dashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.80 EN DASHES WITH COMPOUND ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

The en dash can be used in place of a hyphen in a compound adjective when one of its elements

Index

consists of an open compound or when both elements consist of hyphenated compounds (see 7.78).

This editorial nicety may go unnoticed by the majority of readers; nonetheless, it is intended to signal

a more comprehensive link than a hyphen would. It should be used sparingly, and only when a more

6.78:

elegant solution is unavailable. As the first two examples illustrate, the distinction is most helpful

En dash as "to"

with proper compounds, whose limits are established within the larger context by capitalization. The

6.79:

En dash with an

relationship in the third example, though clear enough, depends to some small degree on an en dash

unfinished number

that many readers will perceive as a hyphen connecting music and influenced. The relationships in the

range

fourth example, though also clear enough, are less awkwardly conveyed with a comma.

6.80:

En dashes with

compound

the post--World War II years

adjectives

Chuck Berry--style lyrics

6.81:

country music--influenced lyrics ( or lyrics influenced by country music)

Other uses for the

en dash

a quasi-public--quasi-judicial body ( or, better, a quasi-public, quasi-judicial body)

6.82:

Em dashes instead

A single word or prefix should be joined to a hyphenated compound by another hyphen rather than

of commas,

an en dash; if the result is awkward, reword.

parentheses, or

colons

non-English-speaking peoples

a two-thirds-full cup ( or, better, a cup that is two-thirds full)

An abbreviated compound is treated as a single word, so a hyphen, not an en dash, is used in such

phrases as "US-Canadian relations" (Chicago's sense of the en dash does not extend to between).

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> En Dashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.81 OTHER USES FOR THE EN DASH

List of Tables

The en dash is sometimes used as a minus sign, but minus signs and en dashes are distinct characters

Index

(defined by the Unicode standard as U+2212 and U+2013, respectively; see 11.2, 12.9). Both the

characters themselves and the spacing around them may differ; moreover, substituting any character

for another may hinder searches in electronic publications. Thus it is best to use the correct character,

6.79:

especially in mathematical copy. In certain scientific disciplines, the en dash may sometimes be used

En dash with an

unfinished number

where one would normally expect a hyphen (see Scientific Style and Format; bibliog. 1.1). Some

range

universities that have more than one campus use the en dash to link the campus location to the name

6.80:

of the university.

En dashes with

compound

adjectives

the University of Wisconsin--Madison

6.81:

the University of Wisconsin--Milwaukee

Other uses for the

en dash

6.82:

Em dashes instead

of commas,

parentheses, or

colons

6.83:

Em dash between

noun and pronoun

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> Em Dashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.82 EM DASHES INSTEAD OF COMMAS, PARENTHESES, OR COLONS

List of Tables

The em dash, often simply called the dash, is the most commonly used and most versatile of the

Index

dashes. Em dashes are used to set off an amplifying or explanatory element and in that sense can

function as an alternative to parentheses (second and third examples), commas (fourth and fifth

examples), or a colon (first example)--especially when an abrupt break in thought is called for.

6.80:

En dashes with

It was a revival of the most potent image in modern democracy--the revolutionary idea.

compound

adjectives

The influence of three impressionists--Monet, Sisley, and Degas--is obvious in her work.

6.81:

The chancellor--he had been awake half the night--came down in an angry mood.

Other uses for the

She outlined the strategy--a strategy that would, she hoped, secure the peace.

en dash

My friends--that is, my former friends--ganged up on me.

6.82:

Em dashes instead

of commas,

To avoid confusion, the em dash should never be used within or immediately following another

parentheses, or

element set off by an em dash (or pair of em dashes). Use parentheses or commas instead.

colons

6.83:

The Whipplesworth conference--which had already been interrupted by three demonstrations (the last

Em dash between

noun and pronoun

bordering on violence)--was adjourned promptly.

6.84:

or

Em dashes to

indicate sudden

breaks

The Whipplesworth conference--which had already been interrupted by three demonstrations, the last

bordering on violence--was adjourned promptly.

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> Em Dashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.83 EM DASH BETWEEN NOUN AND PRONOUN

List of Tables

An em dash is occasionally used to set off an introductory noun, or a series of nouns, from a pronoun

Index

that introduces the main clause.

Consensus--that was the will-o'-the-wisp he doggedly pursued.

6.81:

Broken promises, petty rivalries, and false rumors--such were the obstacles he encountered.

Other uses for the

Darkness, thunder, a sudden scream--nothing alarmed the child.

en dash

Kingston, who first conceived the idea; Barber, who organized the fundraising campaign; and West, who

6.82:

conducted the investigation--those were the women most responsible for the movement's early success.

Em dashes instead

of commas,

parentheses, or

colons

6.83:

Em dash between

noun and pronoun

6.84:

Em dashes to

indicate sudden

breaks

6.85:

Em dashes with

"that is," "namely,"

"for example," and

similar expressions

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> Em Dashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.84 EM DASHES TO INDICATE SUDDEN BREAKS

List of Tables

An em dash or a pair of em dashes may indicate a sudden break in thought or sentence structure or

Index

an interruption in dialogue. (Where a faltering rather than sudden break is intended, suspension

points may be used; see 13.39.)

6.82:

"Will he--can he--obtain the necessary signatures?" asked Mill.

Em dashes instead

"Well, I don't know," I began tentatively. "I thought I might--"

of commas,

parentheses, or

"Might what?" she demanded.

colons

6.83:

If the break belongs to the surrounding sentence rather than to the quoted material, the em dashes

Em dash between

must appear outside the quotation marks.

noun and pronoun

6.84:

"Someday he's going to hit one of those long shots, and"--his voice turned huffy--"I won't be there to see it."

Em dashes to

indicate sudden

breaks

6.85:

Em dashes with

"that is," "namely,"

"for example," and

similar expressions

6.86:

Em dashes in place

of commas

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> Em Dashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.85 EM DASHES WITH "THAT IS," "NAMELY," "FOR EXAMPLE," AND SIMILAR EXPRESSIONS

List of Tables

An em dash may be used before expressions such as that is or namely. For examples, see 6.43; see also

Index

6.56.

6.83:

Em dash between

noun and pronoun

6.84:

Em dashes to

indicate sudden

breaks

6.85:

Em dashes with

"that is," "namely,"

"for example," and

similar expressions

6.86:

Em dashes in place

of commas

6.87:

Em dashes with

other punctuation

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> Em Dashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.86 EM DASHES IN PLACE OF COMMAS

List of Tables

In modern usage, if the context calls for an em dash where a comma would ordinarily separate a

Index

dependent clause from an independent clause, the comma is omitted. Likewise, if an em dash is used

at the end of quoted material to indicate an interruption, the comma can be safely omitted before the

words that identify the speaker.

6.84:

Em dashes to

Because the data had not been fully analyzed--let alone collated--the publication of the report was delayed.

indicate sudden

breaks

"I assure you, we shall never--" Sylvia began, but Mark cut her short.

6.85:

Em dashes with

"that is," "namely,"

"for example," and

similar expressions

6.86:

Em dashes in place

of commas

6.87:

Em dashes with

other punctuation

6.88:

Em dashes in lieu

of quotation marks

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> Em Dashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.87 EM DASHES WITH OTHER PUNCTUATION

List of Tables

In modern usage, a question mark or an exclamation point--but never a comma, a colon, or a

Index

semicolon, and rarely a period (see 14.46)--may precede an em dash.

Without further warning--but what could we have done to stop her?--she left the plant, determined to stop

6.85:

the union in its tracks.

Em dashes with

Only if--heaven forbid!--you lose your passport should you call home.

"that is," "namely,"

"for example," and

similar expressions

6.86:

Em dashes in place

of commas

6.87:

Em dashes with

other punctuation

6.88:

Em dashes in lieu

of quotation marks

6.89:

Em dashes in

indexes

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> Em Dashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.88 EM DASHES IN LIEU OF QUOTATION MARKS

List of Tables

Em dashes are occasionally used instead of quotation marks to set off dialogue (Ã la writers in some

Index

European languages). Each speech starts a new paragraph. No space follows the dash.

--Will he obtain the necessary signatures?

6.86:

--Of course he will!

Em dashes in place

of commas

6.87:

Em dashes with

other punctuation

6.88:

Em dashes in lieu

of quotation marks

6.89:

Em dashes in

indexes

6.90:

2-em dash

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> Em Dashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.89 EM DASHES IN INDEXES

List of Tables

For the use of em dashes in an index, see 16.27.

Index

6.87:

Em dashes with

other punctuation

6.88:

Em dashes in lieu

of quotation marks

6.89:

Em dashes in

indexes

6.90:

2-em dash

6.91:

3-em dash

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> 2-Em and 3-Em Dashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.90 2-EM DASH

List of Tables

A 2-em dash represents a missing word or part of a word, either omitted to disguise a name (or

Index

occasionally an expletive) or else missing from or illegible in quoted or reprinted material. When a

whole word is missing, space appears on both sides of the dash. When only part of a word is missing,

no space appears between the dash and the existing part (or parts) of the word; when the dash

6.88:

represents the end of a word, a space follows it (unless a period or other punctuation immediately

Em dashes in lieu

of quotation marks

follows). See also 7.62, 13.57.

6.89:

Em dashes in

"The region gives its —— to the language spoken there."

indexes

Admiral N—— and Lady R—— were among the guests.

6.90:

David H——h [Hirsch?] voted aye.

2-em dash

6.91:

Although a 2-em dash sometimes represents material to be supplied, it should not be confused with a

3-em dash

blank line to be filled in; a blank in a form should appear as an underscore (e.g., ____).

6.92:

Use of parentheses

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Hyphens and Dashes >> 2-Em and 3-Em Dashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.91 3-EM DASH

List of Tables

In a bibliography, a 3-em dash followed by a period represents the same author or editor named in

Index

the preceding entry (see 14.63--67, 15.17--19).

McCloskey, Deirdre N. The Bourgeois Virtues. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2006.

6.89:

â€”â€”â€” . Crossing: A Memoir. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1999.

Em dashes in

indexes

6.90:

2-em dash

6.91:

3-em dash

6.92:

Use of parentheses

6.93:

Parentheses for

glosses or

translations

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Parentheses

of Contents

List of Figures

6.92 USE OF PARENTHESES

List of Tables

Parentheses--stronger than a comma and similar to the dash--are used to set off material from the

Index

surrounding text. Like dashes but unlike commas, parentheses can set off text that has no

grammatical relationship to the rest of the sentence.

6.90:

He suspected that the noble gases (helium, neon, etc.) could produce a similar effect.

2-em dash

Intelligence tests (e.g., the Stanford-Binet) are no longer widely used.

6.91:

Our final sample (collected under difficult conditions) contained an impurity.

3-em dash

Wexford's analysis (see chapter 3) is more to the point.

6.92:

Dichtung und Wahrheit (also known as Wahrheit und Dichtung) has been translated as Poetry and Truth.

Use of parentheses

The disagreement between Johns and Evans (its origins have been discussed elsewhere) ultimately destroyed

6.93:

the organization.

Parentheses for

glosses or

translations

For parenthetical references to a list of works cited, see 15.20--30. For parenthetical references

6.94:

following quoted material, see 13.62--70. For parentheses in notes and bibliographies, see chapter 14.

Parentheses to

enclose numbers or

For parentheses in mathematics, see chapter 12, especially 12.26--35. For roman versus italic type, see

letters

6.5.

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Parentheses

of Contents

List of Figures

6.93 PARENTHESES FOR GLOSSES OR TRANSLATIONS

List of Tables

Parentheses are used to enclose glosses of unfamiliar terms or translations of foreign terms--or, if the

Index

term is given in English, to enclose the original word. In quoted matter, brackets should be used (see

6.97). See also 7.50, 11.6.

6.91:

A drop folio (a page number printed at the foot of a page) is useful on the opening page of a chapter.

3-em dash

The term you should use for 1,000,000,000 is mil millones (billion), not billÃ³n (trillion).

6.92:

German has two terms for eating--one for the way humans eat ( essen) and another for the way animals eat

Use of parentheses

( fressen).

6.93:

Parentheses for

glosses or

translations

6.94:

Parentheses to

enclose numbers or

letters

6.95:

Parentheses within

parentheses

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Parentheses

of Contents

List of Figures

6.94 PARENTHESES TO ENCLOSE NUMBERS OR LETTERS

List of Tables

Parentheses are used to enclose numerals or letters marking divisions in lists that are run in to the

Index

text (see 6.123) or to mark certain sublevels in an outline (see 6.126).

6.92:

Use of parentheses

6.93:

Parentheses for

glosses or

translations

6.94:

Parentheses to

enclose numbers or

letters

6.95:

Parentheses within

parentheses

6.96:

Parentheses with

other punctuation

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Parentheses

of Contents

List of Figures

6.95 PARENTHESES WITHIN PARENTHESES

List of Tables

Although the use of parentheses within parentheses (usually for bibliographic purposes) is permitted

Index

in some publications--especially in law--Chicago prefers brackets within parentheses (see 6.99).

(British style is to use parentheses within parentheses.) For parentheses in mathematics, see 12.26.

6.93:

Parentheses for

glosses or

translations

6.94:

Parentheses to

enclose numbers or

letters

6.95:

Parentheses within

parentheses

6.96:

Parentheses with

other punctuation

6.97:

Use of square

brackets

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Parentheses

of Contents

List of Figures

6.96 PARENTHESES WITH OTHER PUNCTUATION

List of Tables

An opening parenthesis should be preceded by a comma or a semicolon only in an enumeration (see

Index

6.123); a closing parenthesis should never be preceded by a comma, a semicolon, or a colon. A

question mark, an exclamation point, and closing quotation marks precede a closing parenthesis if

they belong to the parenthetical matter; they follow it if they belong to the surrounding sentence. A

6.94:

period precedes the closing parenthesis if the entire sentence is in parentheses; otherwise it follows.

Parentheses to

enclose numbers or

(Avoid enclosing more than one sentence within another sentence; see 6.13.) Parentheses may appear

letters

back to back (with a space in between) if they enclose entirely unrelated material; sometimes,

6.95:

however, such material can be enclosed in a single set of parentheses, usually separated by a

Parentheses within

parentheses

semicolon. See also table 6.1. For parentheses in documentation, see chapters 14 and 15.

6.96:

Parentheses with

Having entered (on tiptoe), we sat down on the nearest seats we could find.

other punctuation

Come on in (quietly, please!) and take a seat.

6.97:

On display were the watchmakers' five latest creations (all of which Shellahan coveted).

Use of square

brackets

Five new watches were on display. (Shellahan coveted the battery-powered quartz model.)

Strabo is probably referring to instruction (διδασκαλία) (Jones et al. 2008).

6.98:

Square brackets in

translated text

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Brackets and Braces

of Contents

List of Figures

6.97 USE OF SQUARE BRACKETS

List of Tables

Square brackets (in the United States usually just called brackets) are used in scholarly prose mainly

Index

to enclose material--usually added by someone other than the original writer--that does not form a

part of the surrounding text. Specifically, in quoted matter, reprints, anthologies, and other

nonoriginal material, square brackets enclose editorial interpolations, explanations, translations of

6.95:

foreign terms, or corrections. Sometimes the bracketed material replaces rather than amplifies the

Parentheses within

parentheses

original word or words. For brackets in mathematical copy, see 12.26. See also 13.57--61.

6.96:

Parentheses with

"They [the free-silver Democrats] asserted that the ratio could be maintained."

other punctuation

"Many CF [cystic fibrosis] patients have been helped by the new therapy."

6.97:

Satire, Jebb tells us, "is the only [form] that has a continuous development."

Use of square

brackets

[This was written before the discovery of the Driscoll manuscript.--Ed.]

6.98:

Square brackets in

If quoted matter already includes brackets of its own, the editor should so state in the source citation

translated text

(e.g., "brackets in the original"); see 13.60 for an analogous situation with italics.

6.99:

Square brackets for

parentheses within

parentheses

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Brackets and Braces

of Contents

List of Figures

6.98 SQUARE BRACKETS IN TRANSLATED TEXT

List of Tables

In a translated work, square brackets are sometimes used to enclose a word or phrase in the original

Index

language to avoid ambiguity. (Translators should use this device sparingly.)

The differences between society [ Gesellschaft] and community [ Gemeinschaft] will now be analyzed.

6.96:

Parentheses with

other punctuation

6.97:

Use of square

brackets

6.98:

Square brackets in

translated text

6.99:

Square brackets for

parentheses within

parentheses

6.100:

Square brackets in

phonetics

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Brackets and Braces

of Contents

List of Figures

6.99 SQUARE BRACKETS FOR PARENTHESES WITHIN PARENTHESES

List of Tables

Chicago prefers square brackets as parentheses within parentheses, usually for bibliographic

Index

purposes. For mathematical groupings, see 12.26.

(For further discussion see Richardson's excellent analysis [1999] and Danneberger's survey [2000].)

6.97:

Use of square

brackets

6.98:

Square brackets in

translated text

6.99:

Square brackets for

parentheses within

parentheses

6.100:

Square brackets in

phonetics

6.101:

Square brackets

with other

punctuation

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Brackets and Braces

of Contents

List of Figures

6.100 SQUARE BRACKETS IN PHONETICS

List of Tables

Square brackets may be used to enclose a phonetic transcription.

Index

The verb entretenir [Ã£trÉ™tnir], like keep, is used in many idioms.

6.98:

Square brackets in

translated text

6.99:

Square brackets for

parentheses within

parentheses

6.100:

Square brackets in

phonetics

6.101:

Square brackets

with other

punctuation

6.102:

Angle brackets and

braces

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Brackets and Braces

of Contents

List of Figures

6.101 SQUARE BRACKETS WITH OTHER PUNCTUATION

List of Tables

For brackets with other punctuation, most of the same principles apply as for parentheses (see 6.96).

Index

For their use in enclosing editorial interpolations, however, the appearance of other punctuation and

its position relative to the brackets will depend on the source.

6.99:

The original letter, the transcription of which was incomplete, probably read as follows: "[Dear Jacob,] It's

Square brackets for

been seventy years since I last set eyes on you [. . .]"

parentheses within

parentheses

6.100:

Square brackets in

phonetics

6.101:

Square brackets

with other

punctuation

6.102:

Angle brackets and

braces

6.103:

Other names for

the slash

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Brackets and Braces

of Contents

List of Figures

6.102 ANGLE BRACKETS AND BRACES

List of Tables

The term angle brackets is used here to denote the mathematical symbols for less than (<) and greater

Index

than (>) paired to work as delimiters (<. . .>). (True mathematical angle brackets, and , not readily

available from most keyboards, are reserved for mathematical notation; see, for example, 12.55.)

Angle brackets are most often used to enclose tags in certain markup languages (e.g., XML). By

6.100:

extension, some manuscript editors opt for angle brackets--unlikely to appear elsewhere in a typical

Square brackets in

phonetics

word-processed manuscript--to enclose generic instructions for typesetting (see 2.78). Although angle

6.101:

brackets are sometimes used to set off URLs and e-mail addresses (e.g., in message headers in e-mail

Square brackets

applications), Chicago discourages this practice for regular prose. Angle brackets are also occasionally

with other

punctuation

used instead of brackets in textual studies to indicate missing or illegible material (see 6.97). Braces, {},

6.102:

often called curly brackets, provide yet another option for enclosing data and are used in various

Angle brackets and

braces

ways in certain programming languages. They are also used in mathematical and other specialized

writing (see, e.g., 12.28). They are not interchangeable with parentheses or brackets. See the example

6.103:

Other names for

phrases throughout chapter 5 for one possible use of braces.

the slash

6.104:

Slashes to signify

alternatives

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Slashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.103 OTHER NAMES FOR THE SLASH

List of Tables

The slash (/)--also known as virgule, solidus, slant, or forward slash, to distinguish it from a

Index

backward slash, or backslash (\)--has various distinct uses. For a discussion of the niceties associated

with the various terms, see Richard Eckersley et al., Glossary of Typesetting Terms (bibliog. 2.7).

6.101:

Square brackets

with other

punctuation

6.102:

Angle brackets and

braces

6.103:

Other names for

the slash

6.104:

Slashes to signify

alternatives

6.105:

Slashes with two-

year spans

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Slashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.104 SLASHES TO SIGNIFY ALTERNATIVES

List of Tables

A slash most commonly signifies alternatives. In certain contexts it is a convenient (if somewhat

Index

informal) shorthand for or. It is also used for alternative spellings or names. Where one or more of

the terms separated by slashes is an open compound, a space before and after the slash can be helpful.

6.102:

he/she

Angle brackets and

his/her

braces

and/or

6.103:

Hercules/Heracles

Other names for

the slash

Margaret/Meg/Maggie

6.104:

World War I / First World War

Slashes to signify

alternatives

Occasionally a slash can signify and--though still usually conveying a sense of alternatives.

6.105:

Slashes with two-

an insertion/deletion mutation

year spans

an MD/PhD program

6.106:

Slashes with dates

a Jekyll/Hyde personality

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Slashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.105 SLASHES WITH TWO-YEAR SPANS

List of Tables

A slash is sometimes used in dates instead of an en dash (see 6.78), or even in combination with an

Index

en dash, to indicate the last part of one year and the first part of the next. See also 9.63.

The winter of 1966/67 was especially severe.

6.103:

Enrollment has increased between 1998/99 and 2001/2.

Other names for

The fiscal years 2005/6--2009/10 were encouraging in several respects.

the slash

6.104:

Slashes to signify

alternatives

6.105:

Slashes with two-

year spans

6.106:

Slashes with dates

6.107:

Slashes in

abbreviations

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Slashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.106 SLASHES WITH DATES

List of Tables

Slashes (or periods or hyphens) are used informally in all-numeral dates (e.g., 3/10/02), but this

Index

device should be avoided in formal publications to prevent ambiguity: Americans usually put the

month first, but other countries do not (e.g., Canadians and Europeans put the day first). If an all-

numeral format must be used, use the ISO standard date format (year, month, date, in the form

6.104:

YYYY-MM-DD; see 9.37).

Slashes to signify

alternatives

6.105:

Slashes with two-

year spans

6.106:

Slashes with dates

6.107:

Slashes in

abbreviations

6.108:

Slashes as fraction

bars

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Slashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.107 SLASHES IN ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

A slash may stand as shorthand for per, as in "110 km/sec," "$450/week," or, in certain abbreviations,

Index

in lieu of periods, as in "c/o" (in care of).

6.105:

Slashes with two-

year spans

6.106:

Slashes with dates

6.107:

Slashes in

abbreviations

6.108:

Slashes as fraction

bars

6.109:

Slashes to show

line breaks in

quoted poetry

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Slashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.108 SLASHES AS FRACTION BARS

List of Tables

A slash can be used to mean "divided by" when a fraction bar is inappropriate or impractical. When

Index

available, single-glyph fractions may be used (e.g., Â½ rather than 1/2). See also 12.45.

6.106:

Slashes with dates

6.107:

Slashes in

abbreviations

6.108:

Slashes as fraction

bars

6.109:

Slashes to show

line breaks in

quoted poetry

6.110:

Slashes in URLs and

other paths

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Slashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.109 SLASHES TO SHOW LINE BREAKS IN QUOTED POETRY

List of Tables

When two or more lines of poetry are quoted in regular text, slashes with space on each side are used

Index

to show line breaks. See also 13.27.

"Thou hast not missed one thought that could be fit, / And all that was improper dost omit."

6.107:

Slashes in

abbreviations

6.108:

Slashes as fraction

bars

6.109:

Slashes to show

line breaks in

quoted poetry

6.110:

Slashes in URLs and

other paths

6.111:

Quotation marks

relative to other

punctuation and

text

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Slashes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.110 SLASHES IN URLS AND OTHER PATHS

List of Tables

Slashes are used in URLs and other paths to separate directories and file names. Spaces are never

Index

used in such contexts. In typeset paths, line breaks may occur before a slash but not between two

slashes (see 7.42). Some operating systems use backward slashes (or backslashes, \) or colons rather

than, or in addition to, slashes. See also 14.11.

6.108:

Slashes as fraction

http://www.loc.gov/index.html

bars

6.109:

Slashes to show

line breaks in

quoted poetry

6.110:

Slashes in URLs and

other paths

6.111:

Quotation marks

relative to other

punctuation and

text

6.112:

Typographer's or

"smart" quotation

marks

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks

of Contents

List of Figures

6.111 QUOTATION MARKS RELATIVE TO OTHER PUNCTUATION AND TEXT

List of Tables

For the location of closing quotation marks in relation to other punctuation, see 6.9--11. For the use of

Index

quotation marks with a comma, see 6.50; with a colon, 6.63; with a question mark, 6.70; with an

exclamation point, 6.74. For a full discussion of quotation marks with dialogue and quoted matter, see

13.9--10, 13.17--19, 13.28--47. For the use of quotation marks with single words or phrases to signal

6.109:

some special usage, see 7.55, 7.57, 7.58. For quotation marks in French, see 11.32, 11.33; in German,

Slashes to show

line breaks in

11.44; in Italian, 11.52; in Spanish, 11.79. For quotation marks with titles of certain types of works, see

quoted poetry

the examples in chapter 8.

6.110:

Slashes in URLs and

other paths

6.111:

Quotation marks

relative to other

punctuation and

text

6.112:

Typographer's or

"smart" quotation

marks

6.113:

Use of the

apostrophe

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks

of Contents

List of Figures

6.112 TYPOGRAPHER'S OR "SMART" QUOTATION MARKS

List of Tables

Published works should use directional (or "smart") quotation marks, sometimes called typographer's

Index

or "curly" quotation marks. These marks, which are available in any modern word processor,

generally match the surrounding typeface. For a variety of reasons, including the limitations of

typewriter-based keyboards and of certain software programs, these marks are often rendered

6.110:

incorrectly. Care must be taken that the proper mark--left or right, as the case may be--has been used

Slashes in URLs and

other paths

in each instance. All software also includes a "default" mark ("); in published prose this unidirectional

6.111:

mark, far more portable than typographer's marks, nonetheless signals a lack of typographical

Quotation marks

sophistication. Proper directional characters should also be used for single quotation marks (â€˜'). The

relative to other

punctuation and

Unicode numbers are as follows: left double quotation mark ("), U+201C; right double quotation mark

text

("), U+201D; left single quotation mark (â€˜), U+2018; right single quotation mark or apostrophe ('),

6.112:

Typographer's or

U+2019 (see 11.2). See also 6.114.

"smart" quotation

marks

6.113:

Use of the

apostrophe

6.114:

"Smart" apostrophes

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Apostrophes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.113 USE OF THE APOSTROPHE

List of Tables

The apostrophe has three main uses: to indicate the possessive case, to stand in for missing letters or

Index

numerals, and--more rarely--to form the plural of certain expressions. For more on the possessive

case, see 7.15--28, 5.19. For contractions, see 7.29. For plurals, see 7.5--14--especially 7.14.

6.111:

Quotation marks

relative to other

punctuation and

text

6.112:

Typographer's or

"smart" quotation

marks

6.113:

Use of the

apostrophe

6.114:

"Smart" apostrophes

6.115:

Apostrophes

relative to other

punctuation

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Apostrophes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.114 "SMART" APOSTROPHES

List of Tables

Published works should use directional (or "smart") apostrophes. In most typefaces, this mark will

Index

appear as a raised (but not inverted) comma. The apostrophe is the same character as the right single

quotation mark (defined for Unicode as U+2019; see 6.112). Thanks to the limitations of conventional

keyboards and many software programs, the apostrophe has been one of the most abused marks in

6.112:

punctuation--especially in the last generation or so. There are two common pitfalls: using the

Typographer's or

"smart" quotation

"default" unidirectional mark ('), on the one hand, and using the left single quotation mark, on the

marks

other. The latter usage in particular should always be construed as an error. Some software programs

6.113:

automatically turn a typed apostrophe at the beginning of a word into a left single quotation mark;

Use of the

apostrophe

authors and editors need to be vigilant in overriding such automation and producing the correct

6.114:

mark, and typesetters need to take care not to introduce errors of their own. (If necessary, consult

"Smart" apostrophes

your software's help documentation or special characters menu.)

6.115:

Apostrophes

relative to other

We spent the '90s ( not â€˜90s) in thrall to our gadgets.

punctuation

Where'd you get 'em ( not â€˜em)?

6.116:

Likely combinations

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Apostrophes

of Contents

List of Figures

6.115 APOSTROPHES RELATIVE TO OTHER PUNCTUATION

List of Tables

An apostrophe (') is considered part of the word (or number) in which it appears. An apostrophe

Index

should not be confused with a single closing quotation mark; when a word ends in an apostrophe, no

period or comma should intervene between the word and the apostrophe.

6.113:

The last car in the lot was the Smiths'.

Use of the

apostrophe

6.114:

"Smart" apostrophes

6.115:

Apostrophes

relative to other

punctuation

6.116:

Likely combinations

6.117:

Abbreviation-

ending periods with

other punctuation

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Multiple Punctuation Marks

of Contents

List of Figures

6.116 LIKELY COMBINATIONS

List of Tables

The use of more than one mark of punctuation at the same location usually involves quotation marks,

Index

em dashes, parentheses, or brackets in combination with periods, commas, colons, semicolons,

question marks, or exclamation points. For quotation marks see 6.9--11, 6.50, 6.63, 6.70, 6.74. For em dashes see 6.86, 6.91. For parentheses and brackets see 6.82, 6.95, 6.96, 6.99, 6.101, 6.123. See also

6.114:

table 6.1.

"Smart" apostrophes

6.115:

Apostrophes

relative to other

punctuation

6.116:

Likely combinations

6.117:

Abbreviation-

ending periods with

other punctuation

6.118:

Periods with

question marks or

exclamation points

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Multiple Punctuation Marks

of Contents

List of Figures

6.117 ABBREVIATION-ENDING PERIODS WITH OTHER PUNCTUATION

List of Tables

When an expression (such as an abbreviation) that takes a period ends a sentence, no additional

Index

period follows (see 6.14). Of course, when any other mark of punctuation is needed immediately after

the period, both the period and the additional mark appear.

6.115:

The study was funded by Mulvehill & Co.

Apostrophes

Johnson et al., in How to Survive, describe such an ordeal.

relative to other

punctuation

6.116:

Likely combinations

6.117:

Abbreviation-

ending periods with

other punctuation

6.118:

Periods with

question marks or

exclamation points

6.119:

Commas with

question marks or

exclamation points

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Multiple Punctuation Marks

of Contents

List of Figures

6.118 PERIODS WITH QUESTION MARKS OR EXCLAMATION POINTS

List of Tables

A period (aside from an abbreviating period; see 6.117) never accompanies a question mark or an

Index

exclamation point. The latter two marks, being stronger, take precedence over the period. This

principle continues to apply when the question mark or exclamation point is part of the title of a

work, as in the final example (cf. 6.119).

6.116:

Likely combinations

Their first question was a hard one: "Who is willing to trade oil for water?"

6.117:

What did she mean when she said, "The foot now wears a different shoe"?

Abbreviation-

ending periods with

She owned two copies of Will You Please Be Quiet, Please?

other punctuation

6.118:

Periods with

question marks or

exclamation points

6.119:

Commas with

question marks or

exclamation points

6.120:

Question mark with

exclamation point

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Multiple Punctuation Marks

of Contents

List of Figures

6.119 COMMAS WITH QUESTION MARKS OR EXCLAMATION POINTS

List of Tables

When a question mark or exclamation point appears at the end of a quotation where a comma would

Index

normally appear, the comma is omitted (as in the first example below; see also 6.52). When, however,

the title of a work ends in a question mark or exclamation point, a comma should also appear if the

grammar of the sentence would normally call for one. This departure from previous editions of the

6.117:

manual overrides aesthetic considerations not only to recognize the syntactic independence of titles

Abbreviation-

ending periods with

but also the potential for clearer sentence structure--especially apparent in the final example, where

other punctuation

the comma after Help! separates it from the following title. (The occasional awkward result may

6.118:

require rewording.) Compare 6.118. See also 14.105, 14.178.

Periods with

question marks or

exclamation points

"Are you a doctor?" asked Mahmoud.

6.119:

Commas with

but

question marks or

exclamation points

"Are You a Doctor?," the fifth story in Will You Please Be Quiet, Please? , treats modern love.

6.120:

All the band's soundtracks-- A Hard Day's Night, Help! , Yellow Submarine, and Magical Mystery Tour--were

Question mark with

popular.

exclamation point

6.121:

Lists and outlinesâ

€”general

principles

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Multiple Punctuation Marks

of Contents

List of Figures

6.120 QUESTION MARK WITH EXCLAMATION POINT

List of Tables

In the rare case of a question or exclamation ending with a title or quotation that ends in a question

Index

mark or exclamation point, include both marks only if they are different and the sentence punctuation

seems essential. See also 6.72.

6.118:

Have you seen Help! ?

Periods with

Who shouted, "Long live the king!"?

question marks or

exclamation points

I just love Who's Afraid of Virginia Woolf? !

6.119:

but

Commas with

question marks or

exclamation points

Who starred opposite Richard Burton in Who's Afraid of Virginia Woolf?

Who wrote "Are You a Doctor?"

6.120:

Question mark with

Where were you when you asked, "Why so blue?"

exclamation point

6.121:

Lists and outlinesâ

€”general

principles

6.122:

Run-in versus

vertical lists

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Lists and Outline Style

of Contents

List of Figures

6.121 LISTS AND OUTLINES--GENERAL PRINCIPLES

List of Tables

All items in a list should be constructed of parallel elements. Unless introductory numerals or letters

Index

serve a purpose--to indicate the order in which tasks should be done, to suggest chronology or

relative importance among the items, to facilitate text references, or, in a run-in list, to clearly separate

the items--they may be omitted. Where similar lists are fairly close together, consistent treatment is

6.119:

essential.

Commas with

question marks or

exclamation points

6.120:

Question mark with

exclamation point

6.121:

Lists and outlinesâ

€”general

principles

6.122:

Run-in versus

vertical lists

6.123:

Run-in lists

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Lists and Outline Style

of Contents

List of Figures

6.122 RUN-IN VERSUS VERTICAL LISTS

List of Tables

Lists may be either run in to the text or set vertically (outline style). Short, simple lists are usually

Index

better run in, especially if the introduction and the items form a complete grammatical sentence (see

6.123). Lists that require typographic prominence, that are relatively long, or that contain items of

several levels (see 6.126) should be set vertically.

6.120:

Question mark with

exclamation point

6.121:

Lists and outlinesâ

€”general

principles

6.122:

Run-in versus

vertical lists

6.123:

Run-in lists

6.124:

Vertical listsâ

€”punctuation and

format

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Lists and Outline Style

of Contents

List of Figures

6.123 RUN-IN LISTS

List of Tables

If numerals or letters are used to mark the divisions in a run-in list, enclose them in parentheses. If

Index

letters are used, they are sometimes italicized (within roman parentheses; see 6.5). If the introductory

material forms a grammatically complete sentence, a colon should precede the first parenthesis (see

also 6.59, 6.62, 6.65). The items are separated by commas unless any of the items requires internal

6.121:

commas, in which case all the items will usually need to be separated by semicolons (see 6.58). When

Lists and outlinesâ

€”general

each item in a list consists of a complete sentence or several sentences, the list is best set vertically (see

principles

6.124).

6.122:

Run-in versus

vertical lists

The qualifications are as follows: a doctorate in physics, five years' experience in a national laboratory, and

an ability to communicate technical matter to a lay audience.

6.123:

Run-in lists

Compose three sentences to illustrate analogous uses of (1) commas, (2) em dashes, and (3) parentheses.

6.124:

Vertical listsâ

€”punctuation and

For the duration of the experiment, the dieters were instructed to avoid (a) meat, (b) bottled drinks, (c)

format

packaged foods, and (d) nicotine.

6.125:

Vertical lists

Data are available on three groups of counsel: (1) the public defender of Cook County, (2) the member

punctuated as a

sentence

attorneys of the Chicago Bar Association's Defense of Prisoners Committee, and (3) all other attorneys.

You are advised to pack the following items: ( a) warm, sturdy outer clothing and enough underwear to last

ten days; ( b) two pairs of boots, two pairs of sneakers, and plenty of socks; and ( c) three durable paperback

novels.

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Lists and Outline Style

of Contents

List of Figures

6.124 VERTICAL LISTS—PUNCTUATION AND FORMAT

List of Tables

A vertical list is best introduced by a complete grammatical sentence, followed by a colon (but see

Index

6.125). Items carry no closing punctuation unless they consist of complete sentences. If the items are

numbered, a period follows the numeral and each item begins with a capital letter. (When items in a

numbered list consist of very long sentences, or of several sentences, and the list does not require

6.122:

typographic prominence, the items may be set in regular text style as numbered paragraphs, with

Run-in versus

vertical lists

only the first line indented, punctuated as normal prose.) To avoid long, skinny lists, short items may

6.123:

be arranged in two or more columns. If items run over a line, the second and subsequent lines are

Run-in lists

usually indented (flush-and-hang style, also called hanging indention, as used in bibliographies and

6.124:

indexes). In a numbered or bulleted list, runover lines are aligned with the first word following the

Vertical lists—

punctuation and

numeral or bullet. An alternative to indenting runover lines is to insert extra space between the items.

format

6.125:

Your application must include the following documents:

Vertical lists

punctuated as a

sentence

a full résumé

three letters of recommendation

6.126:

Vertical lists with

all your diplomas, from high school to graduate school

subdivided items

a brief essay indicating why you want the position and why you consider yourself qualified for it

(outlines)

two forms of identification

. . . . .

An administrative facility can be judged by eight measures:

image

quality

security

functional organization

access

design efficiency

flexibility

environmental systems

Each of these measures is discussed below.

. . . . .

Compose three sentences:

1. To illustrate the use of commas in dates

2. To distinguish the use of semicolons from the use of periods

3. To illustrate the use of parentheses within dashes

. . . . .

To change the date display from "31" to "1" on the day following the last day of a thirty-day month, the

following steps are recommended:

1. Pull the stem out to the time-setting position (i.e., past the date-setting position).

2. Make a mental note of the exact minute (but see step 4).

3. Turn the stem repeatedly in a clockwise direction through twenty-four hours.

4. If you are able to consult the correct time, adjust the minute hand accordingly, and press the stem all the way

in on the exact second. If you are not able to consult the correct time, settle on a minute or so past the time

noted in step 2.

. . . . .

Use the control panel on your printer to manage basic settings:

Control toner usage by turning EconoMode on or off.

Adjust print quality by changing the Resolution Enhancement technology and Print Density settings.

Manage printer memory by changing the Image Adapt and Page Protect settings.

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Lists and Outline Style

of Contents

List of Figures

6.125 VERTICAL LISTS PUNCTUATED AS A SENTENCE

List of Tables

In a numbered vertical list that completes a sentence begun in an introductory element and that

Index

consists of phrases or sentences with internal punctuation, semicolons may be used between the

items, and a period should follow the final item. Each item begins with a lowercase letter. A

conjunction ( and or or) before the final item is optional. Such lists, often better run in to the text,

6.122:

should be set vertically only if the context demands that they be highlighted.

Run-in versus

vertical lists

Reporting for the Development Committee, Jobson reported that

6.123:

Run-in lists

1. a fundraising campaign director was being sought;

6.124:

Vertical listsâ

2. the salary for this director, about $50,000 a year, would be paid out of campaign funds; and

€”punctuation and

format

3. the fundraising campaign would be launched in the spring of 2005.

6.125:

Vertical lists

If bullets were used instead of numbers in the example above, the punctuation and capitalization

punctuated as a

would remain the same.

sentence

6.126:

Vertical lists with

subdivided items

(outlines)

6: PUNCTUATION

Table

Chapter Contents >> Lists and Outline Style

of Contents

List of Figures

6.126 VERTICAL LISTS WITH SUBDIVIDED ITEMS (OUTLINES)

List of Tables

Where items in a numbered list are subdivided, both numerals and letters may be used. Any runover

Index

lines should be aligned with the first word following the numeral.

Applicants will be tested for their skills in the following areas:

6.122:

Run-in versus

1. Punctuation

vertical lists

a. Using commas appropriately

6.123:

b. Deleting unnecessary quotation marks

Run-in lists

c. Distinguishing colons from semicolons

2. Spelling

6.124:

Vertical listsâ

a. Using a dictionary appropriately

€”punctuation and

b. Recognizing homonyms

format

c. Hyphenating correctly

6.125:

3. Syntax

Vertical lists

a. Matching verb to subject

punctuated as a

sentence

b. Recognizing and eliminating misplaced modifiers

c. Distinguishing phrases from clauses while singing the “Conjunction Junction” Song

6.126:

Vertical lists with

subdivided items

In the following example, note that the numerals and letters denoting the top three levels are set off

(outlines)

by periods and those for the lower four by single or double parentheses, thus distinguishing all seven

levels by punctuation as well as indention. Note also that numerals are aligned vertically on the last

digit.

I. Historical introduction

II. Dentition in various groups of vertebrates

A. Reptilia

1. Histology and development of reptilian teeth

2. Survey of forms

B. Mammalia

1. Histology and development of mammalian teeth

2. Survey of forms

a) Primates

(1) Lemuroidea

(2) Anthropoidea

(a) Platyrrhini

(b) Catarrhini

i) Cercopithecidae

ii) Pongidae

b) Carnivora

(1) Creodonta

(2) Fissipedia

(a) Ailuroidea

(b) Arctoidea

(3) Pinnipedia

c) Etc. . . .

In a list with fewer levels, one might dispense with capital roman numerals and capital letters and

instead begin with arabic numerals. What is important is that readers see at a glance the level to

which each item belongs. Note that each division and subdivision should normally contain at least

two items.

6 : PUNCTUATION

Table

of Contents

PDF Version >>

List of Figures

List of Tables

Index

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

of Contents

Overview

List of Figures

7.1

Recommended dictionaries

List of Tables

7.2

Spellings peculiar to particular disciplines

7.3

Non-US spelling

Index

7.4

Supplementing the dictionary

Plurals

7.5

Standard plural forms

7.6

Alternative plural forms

7.7

Plurals of compound nouns

7.8

Plurals of proper nouns

7.9

Plural form for Native American group names

7.10

Singular form used for the plural

7.11

Plural form of italicized words

7.12

Plural form for words in quotation marks

7.13

Plurals of noun coinages

7.14

Plurals for letters, abbreviations, and numerals

Possessives

The General Rule

7.15

Possessive form of most nouns

7.16

Possessive of proper nouns, letters, and numbers

7.17

Possessive of words and names ending in unpronounced "s"

7.18

Possessive of names like "Euripides"

Exceptions to the General Rule

7.19

Possessive of nouns plural in form, singular in meaning

7.20

"For . . . sake" expressions

7.21

An alternative practice for words ending in "s"

Particularities of the Possessive

7.22

Joint versus separate possession

7.23

Compound possessives

7.24

Possessive with genitive

7.25

Possessive versus attributive forms

7.26

Possessive with gerund

7.27

Possessive with "of"

7.28

Possessive with italicized or quoted terms

Contractions and Interjections

7.29

Contractions

7.30

Interjections

Word Division

7.31

Dictionary word division

7.32

Words that should not be divided

7.33

Dividing according to pronunciation

7.34

Dividing after a vowel

7.35

Dividing compounds, prefixes, and suffixes

7.36

Dividing words ending in "ing"

7.37

Two-letter word endings

7.38

Dividing proper nouns and personal names

7.39

Dividing numerals

7.40

Dividing numerals with abbreviated units of measure

7.41

Division in run-in lists

7.42

Dividing URLs and e-mail addresses

7.43

Hyphenation and appearance

A and An, O and Oh

7.44

"A" and "an"

7.45

"O" and "oh"

Ligatures

7.46

When to use ligatures

Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks

Emphasis

7.47

Italics for emphasis

7.48

Capitals for emphasis

Foreign Words

7.49

Italics for unfamiliar foreign words and phrases

7.50

Parentheses and quotation marks for foreign words and phrases

7.51

Proper nouns

7.52

Roman for familiar foreign words

7.53

Roman for Latin words and abbreviations

Highlighting Key Terms and Expressions

7.54

Italics for key terms

7.55

"Scare quotes"

7.56

"So-called"

7.57

Common expressions and figures of speech

Words and Letters Used as Words

7.58

Words and phrases used as words

7.59

Letters as letters

7.60

Scholastic grades

7.61

Plurals of letters

7.62

Letters standing for names

7.63

Letters as shapes

7.64

Names of letters

7.65

Rhyme schemes

Music: Some Typographic Conventions

7.66

Suggested reference for music publishing

7.67

Musical pitches

7.68

Octaves

7.69

Chords

7.70

"Major" and "minor"

7.71

Dynamics

Computer Terms

7.72

Application-specific variations

7.73

Capitalization for keys and menu items

7.74

Keyboard combinations and shortcuts

7.75

Distinguishing words to be typed and other elements

7.76

Terms like "web" and "Internet"

Compounds and Hyphenation

7.77

To hyphenate or not to hyphenate

7.78

Some definitions

7.79

The trend toward closed compounds

7.80

Hyphens and readability

7.81

Compound modifiers before or after a noun

7.82

Adverbs ending in "ly"

7.83

Multiple hyphens

7.84

Omission of part of a hyphenated expression

7.85

Hyphenation guide for compounds and words formed with prefixes

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

7.1 RECOMMENDED DICTIONARIES

List of Tables

For general matters of spelling, Chicago recommends using Webster's Third New International

Index

Dictionary and the latest edition of its chief abridgment, Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary

(referred to below as Webster's). If more than one spelling is given, or more than one form of the

plural (see 7.6), Chicago normally opts for the first form listed (even for equal variants), thus aiding

7.1:

consistency. If, as occasionally happens, the Collegiate disagrees with the Third International, the

Recommended

dictionaries

Collegiate should be followed, since it represents the latest lexical research. For further definitions or

7.2:

alternative spellings, refer to a standard dictionary such as the American Heritage Dictionary of the

Spellings peculiar

English Language or Random House Webster's College Dictionary. At least for spelling, one source should

to particular

disciplines

be used consistently throughout a single work. (For full bibliographic information on these and other

7.3:

English dictionaries, see bibliog. 3.1.)

Non-US spelling

7.4:

Supplementing the

dictionary

7.5:

Standard plural

forms

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

7.2 SPELLINGS PECULIAR TO PARTICULAR DISCIPLINES

List of Tables

Where a variant spelling carries a special connotation within a discipline, the author's preference

Index

should be respected. For example, "archeology," though it is listed as an equal variant of

"archaeology" in Webster's, is the spelling insisted on by certain specialists. In the absence of such a

preference, Chicago prefers the first-listed "archaeology." ( Webster's separates equal variants by or;

7.1:

secondary variants are preceded by also.)

Recommended

dictionaries

7.2:

Spellings peculiar

to particular

disciplines

7.3:

Non-US spelling

7.4:

Supplementing the

dictionary

7.5:

Standard plural

forms

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

7.3 NON-US SPELLING

List of Tables

In English-language works by non-US authors that are edited and produced in the United States,

Index

editors at Chicago generally change spelling used in other English-speaking countries to American

spelling (e.g., colour to color, analyse to analyze). Since consistency is more easily maintained by this

practice, few authors object. In quoted material, however, spelling is left unchanged (see 13.7).

7.1:

Recommended

dictionaries

7.2:

Spellings peculiar

to particular

disciplines

7.3:

Non-US spelling

7.4:

Supplementing the

dictionary

7.5:

Standard plural

forms

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

7.4 SUPPLEMENTING THE DICTIONARY

List of Tables

Much of this chapter is devoted to matters not easily found in most dictionaries: how to form the

Index

plural and possessive forms of certain nouns and compounds; how to break words at the end of a

printed line, especially those that are not listed in the dictionary; when to use capitals, italics, or

quotation marks for distinctive treatment of words and phrases; and, perhaps most important but

7.2:

placed at the end of the chapter for easy reference (7.85), when to use hyphens with compound

Spellings peculiar

to particular

words, prefixes, and suffixes.

disciplines

7.3:

Non-US spelling

7.4:

Supplementing the

dictionary

7.5:

Standard plural

forms

7.6:

Alternative plural

forms

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Plurals

of Contents

List of Figures

7.5 STANDARD PLURAL FORMS

List of Tables

Most nouns form their plural by adding s or--if they end in ch, j, s, sh, x, or z--by adding es. Most

Index

English speakers will not need help with such plural forms as thumbs, churches, fixes, or boys, and

these are not listed in standard dictionary entries, including those in Webster's Collegiate. (All inflected

forms are listed in Webster's Third New International; moreover, the online versions of most dictionaries

7.3:

accommodate the correct plural forms in their search engines.) Most dictionaries do, however, give

Non-US spelling

plural forms for words ending in y that change to ies ( baby, etc.); for words ending in o ( ratio, potato,

7.4:

Supplementing the

etc.); for certain words of Latin or Greek origin such as crocus, datum, or alumna; and for all words

dictionary

with irregular plurals ( child, leaf, etc.).

7.5:

Standard plural

forms

7.6:

Alternative plural

forms

7.7:

Plurals of

compound nouns

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Plurals

of Contents

List of Figures

7.6 ALTERNATIVE PLURAL FORMS

List of Tables

Where Webster's gives two forms of the plural--whether as primary and secondary variants, like zeros

Index

and zeroes, or as equal variants, like millennia and millenniums--Chicago normally opts for the first. In

some cases, however, different forms of the plural are used for different purposes. A book may have

two indexes and a mathematical expression two indices, as indicated in the Webster's entry for index.

7.4:

Supplementing the

dictionary

7.5:

Standard plural

forms

7.6:

Alternative plural

forms

7.7:

Plurals of

compound nouns

7.8:

Plurals of proper

nouns

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Plurals

of Contents

List of Figures

7.7 PLURALS OF COMPOUND NOUNS

List of Tables

Webster's gives the plural form of most compounds that are tricky ( fathers-in-law, coups d'Ã©tat, courts-

Index

martial, chefs d'oeuvre, etc.). For those not listed, common sense can usually provide the answer.

bachelors of science

7.5:

masters of arts

Standard plural

spheres of influence

forms

child laborers

7.6:

Alternative plural

forms

7.7:

Plurals of

compound nouns

7.8:

Plurals of proper

nouns

7.9:

Plural form for

Native American

group names

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Plurals

of Contents

List of Figures

7.8 PLURALS OF PROPER NOUNS

List of Tables

Names of persons and other capitalized nouns normally form the plural by adding s or es. Rare

Index

exceptions, including the last example, are generally listed in Webster's.

Tom, Dick, and Harry; pl. Toms, Dicks, and Harrys

7.6:

the Jones family, pl. the Joneses

Alternative plural

the Martinez family, pl. the Martinezes

forms

the Bruno family, pl. the Brunos

7.7:

Sunday, pl. Sundays

Plurals of

compound nouns

Germany, pl. Germanys

Pakistani, pl. Pakistanis

7.8:

Plurals of proper

nouns

but

7.9:

Romany, pl. Romanies

Plural form for

Native American

group names

An apostrophe is never used to form the plural of a family name: "The Jeffersons live here" ( not

7.10:

"Jefferson's"). For the apostrophe in the possessive form of proper nouns, see 7.16.

Singular form used

for the plural

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Plurals

of Contents

List of Figures

7.9 PLURAL FORM FOR NATIVE AMERICAN GROUP NAMES

List of Tables

According to current preference, names of Native American groups usually form their plural by

Index

adding s. In earlier writings the s was often omitted (indeed, Webster's has continued to present both

forms as equal variants).

7.7:

the Hopis of northeastern Arizona ( not Hopi)

Plurals of

the language spoken by Cherokees

compound nouns

7.8:

but

Plurals of proper

nouns

the languages of the Iroquois

7.9:

Plural form for

Native American

group names

7.10:

Singular form used

for the plural

7.11:

Plural form of

italicized words

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Plurals

of Contents

List of Figures

7.10 SINGULAR FORM USED FOR THE PLURAL

List of Tables

Names ending in an unpronounced s or x are best left in the singular form.

Index

the seventeen Louis of France

the two Dumas, father and son

two Charlevoix ( or, better, two towns called Charlevoix)

7.8:

Plurals of proper

nouns

7.9:

Plural form for

Native American

group names

7.10:

Singular form used

for the plural

7.11:

Plural form of

italicized words

7.12:

Plural form for

words in quotation

marks

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Plurals

of Contents

List of Figures

7.11 PLURAL FORM OF ITALICIZED WORDS

List of Tables

If italicized terms--names of newspapers, titles of books, and the like--are used in the plural, the s is

Index

normally set in roman. A title already in plural form, however, may be left unchanged. In case of

doubt, avoid the plural by rephrasing.

7.9:

two Chicago Tribune s and three Milwaukee Journal-Sentinel s

Plural form for

several Madame Bovary s

Native American

group names

too many sic s

7.10:

but

Singular form used

for the plural

four New York Times

7.11:

Plural form of

italicized words

The plural endings to italicized foreign words should also be set in italics.

7.12:

Plural form for

Blume, Blumen

words in quotation

cheval, chevaux

marks

seÃ±or, seÃ±ores

7.13:

Plurals of noun

coinages

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Plurals

of Contents

List of Figures

7.12 PLURAL FORM FOR WORDS IN QUOTATION MARKS

List of Tables

The plural of a word or phrase in quotation marks may be formed in the usual way (without an

Index

apostrophe--a departure from Chicago's former preference). If the result is awkward, reword. Chicago

discourages a plural ending following a closing quotation mark.

7.10:

How many more "To be continueds" ( not "To be continued"s) can we expect?

Singular form used

for the plural

or, better,

7.11:

Plural form of

How many more times can we expect to see "To be continued"?

italicized words

7.12:

Plural form for

words in quotation

marks

7.13:

Plurals of noun

coinages

7.14:

Plurals for letters,

abbreviations, and

numerals

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Plurals

of Contents

List of Figures

7.13 PLURALS OF NOUN COINAGES

List of Tables

Words and hyphenated phrases that are not nouns but are used as nouns usually form the plural by

Index

adding s or es. (If in doubt, consult an unabridged dictionary like Webster's Third New International,

which indicates the preferred inflected forms for most nouns, including all of the examples below.)

7.11:

ifs and buts

Plural form of

dos and don'ts

italicized words

threes and fours

7.12:

thank-yous

Plural form for

words in quotation

maybes

marks

yeses and nos

7.13:

Plurals of noun

coinages

7.14:

Plurals for letters,

abbreviations, and

numerals

7.15:

Possessive form of

most nouns

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Plurals

of Contents

List of Figures

7.14 PLURALS FOR LETTERS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND NUMERALS

List of Tables

Capital letters used as words, numerals used as nouns, and abbreviations usually form the plural by

Index

adding s. To aid comprehension, lowercase letters form the plural with an apostrophe and an s. For

some exceptions beyond those listed in the last three examples, see 10.43; see also 10.55 (for the

International System). For the omission of periods in abbreviations like "BS," "MA," and "PhD," see

7.12:

10.4. See also 7.58--65.

Plural form for

words in quotation

marks

the three Rs

7.13:

x's and y's

Plurals of noun

the 1990s

coinages

IRAs

7.14:

URLs

Plurals for letters,

abbreviations, and

BSs, MAs, PhDs

numerals

vols.

7.15:

eds.

Possessive form of

most nouns

but

7.16:

Possessive of

p. (page), pp. (pages)

proper nouns,

letters, and

n. (note), nn. (notes)

numbers

MS (manuscript), MSS (manuscripts)

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Possessives >> The General Rule

of Contents

List of Figures

7.15 POSSESSIVE FORM OF MOST NOUNS

List of Tables

The possessive of most singular nouns is formed by adding an apostrophe and an s. The possessive of

Index

plural nouns (except for a few irregular plurals, like children, that do not end in s) is formed by adding

an apostrophe only. For the few exceptions to these principles, see 7.19--21. See also 5.19.

7.13:

the horse's mouth

Plurals of noun

a bass's stripes

coinages

puppies' paws

7.14:

children's literature

Plurals for letters,

abbreviations, and

a herd of sheep's mysterious disappearance

numerals

7.15:

Possessive form of

most nouns

7.16:

Possessive of

proper nouns,

letters, and

numbers

7.17:

Possessive of words

and names ending

in unpronounced "s"

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Possessives >> The General Rule

of Contents

List of Figures

7.16 POSSESSIVE OF PROPER NOUNS, LETTERS, AND NUMBERS

List of Tables

The general rule extends to proper nouns, including names ending in s, x, or z, in both their singular

Index

and plural forms, as well as letters and numbers.

SINGULAR FORMS

7.14:

Kansas's legislature

Plurals for letters,

Chicago's lakefront

abbreviations, and

numerals

Marx's theories

Jesus's adherents

7.15:

Possessive form of

Berlioz's works

most nouns

Tacitus's Histories

7.16:

Borges's library

Possessive of

Dickens's novels

proper nouns,

letters, and

Malraux's masterpiece

numbers

Josquin des Prez's motets

7.17:

Possessive of words

PLURAL FORMS

and names ending

in unpronounced "s"

the Lincolns' marriage

7.18:

the Williamses' new house

Possessive of

the Martinezes' daughter

names like

"Euripides"

dinner at the Browns' ( that is, at the Browns' place)

LETTERS AND NUMBERS

FDR's legacy

1999's heaviest snowstorm

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Possessives >> The General Rule

of Contents

List of Figures

7.17 POSSESSIVE OF WORDS AND NAMES ENDING IN UNPRONOUNCED "S"

List of Tables

In a return to Chicago's earlier practice, words and names ending in an unpronounced s form the

Index

possessive in the usual way (with the addition of an apostrophe and an s). This practice not only

recognizes that the additional s is often pronounced but adds to the appearance of consistency with

the possessive forms of other types of proper nouns.

7.15:

Possessive form of

Descartes's three dreams

most nouns

the marquis's mother

7.16:

Possessive of

FranÃ§ois's efforts to learn English

proper nouns,

Vaucouleurs's assistance to Joan of Arc

letters, and

numbers

Albert Camus's novels

7.17:

Possessive of words

and names ending

in unpronounced "s"

7.18:

Possessive of

names like

"Euripides"

7.19:

Possessive of nouns

plural in form,

singular in meaning

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Possessives >> The General Rule

of Contents

List of Figures

7.18 POSSESSIVE OF NAMES LIKE "EURIPIDES"

List of Tables

In a departure from earlier practice, Chicago no longer recommends the traditional exception for

Index

proper classical names of two or more syllables that end in an eez sound. Such names form the

possessive in the usual way (though when these forms are spoken, the additional s is generally not

pronounced).

7.16:

Possessive of

Euripides's tragedies

proper nouns,

letters, and

the Ganges's source

numbers

Xerxes's armies

7.17:

Possessive of words

and names ending

in unpronounced "s"

7.18:

Possessive of

names like

"Euripides"

7.19:

Possessive of nouns

plural in form,

singular in meaning

7.20:

"For . . . sake"

expressions

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Possessives >> Exceptions to the General Rule

of Contents

List of Figures

7.19 POSSESSIVE OF NOUNS PLURAL IN FORM, SINGULAR IN MEANING

List of Tables

When the singular form of a noun ending in s is the same as the plural (i.e., the plural is uninflected),

Index

the possessives of both are formed by the addition of an apostrophe only. If ambiguity threatens, use

of to avoid the possessive.

7.17:

politics' true meaning

Possessive of words

economics' forerunners

and names ending

in unpronounced "s"

this species' first record ( or, better, the first record of this species)

7.18:

Possessive of

The same rule applies when the name of a place or an organization or a publication (or the last

names like

element in the name) is a plural form ending in s, such as the United States, even though the entity is

"Euripides"

singular.

7.19:

Possessive of nouns

plural in form,

the United States' role in international law

singular in meaning

Highland Hills' late mayor

7.20:

Callaway Gardens' former curator

"For . . . sake"

expressions

the National Academy of Sciences' new policy

7.21:

An alternative

practice for words

ending in "s"

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Possessives >> Exceptions to the General Rule

of Contents

List of Figures

7.20 "FOR . . . SAKE" EXPRESSIONS

List of Tables

For the sake of euphony, a few for . . . sake expressions used with a singular noun that ends in an s

Index

end in an apostrophe alone, omitting the additional s.

for goodness' sake

7.18:

for righteousness' sake

Possessive of

names like

Aside from these traditional formulations, however, the possessive in for . . . sake expressions may be

"Euripides"

formed in the normal way.

7.19:

Possessive of nouns

plural in form,

for expedience's sake

singular in meaning

for appearance's sake ( or for appearances' sake [plural possessive] or for the sake of appearance)

7.20:

for Jesus's sake

"For . . . sake"

expressions

7.21:

An alternative

practice for words

ending in "s"

7.22:

Joint versus

separate possession

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Possessives >> Exceptions to the General Rule

of Contents

List of Figures

7.21 AN ALTERNATIVE PRACTICE FOR WORDS ENDING IN "S"

List of Tables

Some writers and publishers prefer the system, formerly more common, of simply omitting the

Index

possessive s on all words ending in s--hence "Dylan Thomas' poetry," "Etta James' singing," and "that

business' main concern." Though easy to apply and economical, such usage disregards pronunciation

and is therefore not recommended by Chicago.

7.19:

Possessive of nouns

plural in form,

singular in meaning

7.20:

"For . . . sake"

expressions

7.21:

An alternative

practice for words

ending in "s"

7.22:

Joint versus

separate possession

7.23:

Compound

possessives

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Possessives >> Particularities of the Possessive

of Contents

List of Figures

7.22 JOINT VERSUS SEPARATE POSSESSION

List of Tables

Closely linked nouns are considered a single unit in forming the possessive when the thing being

Index

"possessed" is the same for both; only the second element takes the possessive form.

my aunt and uncle's house

7.20:

Gilbert and Sullivan's Iolanthe

"For . . . sake"

Minneapolis and Saint Paul's transportation system

expressions

7.21:

When the things possessed are discrete, both nouns take the possessive form.

An alternative

practice for words

ending in "s"

my aunt's and uncle's medical profiles

7.22:

Dylan's and Jagger's hairlines

Joint versus

New York's and Chicago's transportation systems

separate possession

Gilbert's or Sullivan's mustache

7.23:

Compound

possessives

7.24:

Possessive with

genitive

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Possessives >> Particularities of the Possessive

of Contents

List of Figures

7.23 COMPOUND POSSESSIVES

List of Tables

In compound nouns and noun phrases the final element usually takes the possessive form, even in

Index

the plural.

student assistants' time cards

7.21:

my daughter-in-law's address

An alternative

my sons-in-law's addresses

practice for words

ending in "s"

7.22:

Joint versus

separate possession

7.23:

Compound

possessives

7.24:

Possessive with

genitive

7.25:

Possessive versus

attributive forms

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Possessives >> Particularities of the Possessive

of Contents

List of Figures

7.24 POSSESSIVE WITH GENITIVE

List of Tables

Analogous to possessives, and formed like them, are certain expressions based on the old genitive

Index

case. The genitive here implies of.

in three days' time

7.22:

an hour's delay ( or a one-hour delay)

Joint versus

six months' leave of absence ( or a six-month leave of absence)

separate possession

7.23:

Compound

possessives

7.24:

Possessive with

genitive

7.25:

Possessive versus

attributive forms

7.26:

Possessive with

gerund

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Possessives >> Particularities of the Possessive

of Contents

List of Figures

7.25 POSSESSIVE VERSUS ATTRIBUTIVE FORMS

List of Tables

The line between a possessive or genitive form (see 7.24) and a noun used attributively--to modify

Index

another noun--is sometimes fuzzy, especially in the plural. Although terms such as employees' cafeteria

sometimes appear without an apostrophe, Chicago dispenses with the apostrophe only in proper

names (often corporate names) that do not use one or where there is clearly no possessive meaning.

7.23:

Compound

children's rights

possessives

farmers' market

7.24:

Possessive with

women's soccer team

genitive

boys' clubs

7.25:

taxpayers' associations ( or taxpayer associations)

Possessive versus

consumers' group ( or consumer group)

attributive forms

7.26:

but

Possessive with

gerund

Publishers Weekly

7.27:

Diners Club

Possessive with "of"

Department of Veterans Affairs

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Possessives >> Particularities of the Possessive

of Contents

List of Figures

7.26 POSSESSIVE WITH GERUND

List of Tables

A noun followed by a gerund (see 5.110) may take the possessive form in some contexts. This practice,

Index

usually limited to proper names and personal nouns or pronouns, should be used with caution. For

an excellent discussion, see "Possessive with Gerund," in Fowler's Modern English Usage (bibliog. 1.2).

The possessive is most commonly used when the gerund rather than the noun that precedes it can be

7.24:

considered to be the subject of a clause, as in the first four examples below. In the fifth example,

Possessive with

genitive

Fathers is clearly the subject of the sentence and assuming is a participle (verb form) rather than a

7.25:

gerund (noun form); the possessive would therefore be incorrect.

Possessive versus

attributive forms

Fathers' assuming the care of children has changed the traditional household economy.

7.26:

We all agreed that Jerod's running away from the tigers had been the right thing to do.

Possessive with

gerund

Our finding a solution depends on the nature of the problem.

Eleanor's revealing her secret ( or Eleanor's revelation) resulted in a lawsuit.

7.27:

Possessive with "of"

but

7.28:

Possessive with

Fathers assuming the care of children often need to consult mothers for advice.

italicized or quoted

terms

When the noun or pronoun follows a preposition, the possessive is usually optional.

She was worried about her daughter ( or daughter's) going there alone.

I won't put up with him ( or his) being denigrated.

The problem of authors ( or authors') finding the right publisher can be solved.

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Possessives >> Particularities of the Possessive

of Contents

List of Figures

7.27 POSSESSIVE WITH "OF"

List of Tables

The possessive form may be preceded by of where one of several is implied. "A friend of Dick's" and "a

Index

friend of his" are equally acceptable. See also 5.20.

7.25:

Possessive versus

attributive forms

7.26:

Possessive with

gerund

7.27:

Possessive with "of"

7.28:

Possessive with

italicized or quoted

terms

7.29:

Contractions

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Possessives >> Particularities of the Possessive

of Contents

List of Figures

7.28 POSSESSIVE WITH ITALICIZED OR QUOTED TERMS

List of Tables

As with plurals, when an italicized term appears in roman text, the possessive s should be set in

Index

roman. When the last element is plural in form, add only an apostrophe (see 7.19). Chicago

discourages, however, attempting to form the possessive of a term enclosed in quotation marks (a

practice that is seen in some periodical publications where most titles are quoted rather than

7.26:

italicized).

Possessive with

gerund

the Atlantic Monthly's editor

7.27:

Possessive with "of"

the New York Times' new fashion editor

Gone with the Wind's admirers

7.28:

Possessive with

italicized or quoted

but

terms

admirers of "Ode on a Grecian Urn"

7.29:

Contractions

7.30:

Interjections

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Contractions and Interjections

of Contents

List of Figures

7.29 CONTRACTIONS

List of Tables

In contractions, an apostrophe normally replaces omitted letters. Some contractions, such as won't or

Index

ain't, are formed irregularly. Colloquialisms such as gonna or wanna take no apostrophe (there being

no obvious place for one). Webster's lists many common contractions, along with alternative spellings

and, where appropriate, plurals. Note that an apostrophe--the equivalent of a right single quotation

7.27:

mark (' not â€˜)--is always used to form a contraction (see 6.114).

Possessive with "of"

7.28:

singin'

Possessive with

italicized or quoted

gov't

terms

'tis ( not â€˜tis)

7.29:

dos and don'ts

Contractions

rock 'n' roll

7.30:

Interjections

7.31:

Dictionary word

division

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Contractions and Interjections

of Contents

List of Figures

7.30 INTERJECTIONS

List of Tables

As with contractions, Webster's lists such interjections as ugh, er, um, and sh. For those not found in

Index

the dictionary--or where a different emphasis is required--plausible spellings should be sought in

literature or invented.

7.28:

atchoo!

Possessive with

shhh!

italicized or quoted

terms

7.29:

Contractions

7.30:

Interjections

7.31:

Dictionary word

division

7.32:

Words that should

not be divided

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

7.31 DICTIONARY WORD DIVISION

List of Tables

For end-of-line word breaks, as for spelling and plural forms, Chicago turns to Webster's as its

Index

primary guide. The dots between syllables in Webster's indicate where breaks may be made; in words

of three or more syllables, there is usually a choice of breaks. The paragraphs in this section are

intended merely to supplement, not to replace, the dictionary's system of word division--for example,

7.29:

by suggesting preferred breaks where more than one might be possible. For division of foreign words

Contractions

(other than those given in an English dictionary), see chapter 11. The advice in this section applies

7.30:

Interjections

only to published works, especially print works; word breaks should not be applied at the manuscript

7.31:

stage (see 2.12).

Dictionary word

division

7.32:

Words that should

not be divided

7.33:

Dividing according

to pronunciation

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

7.32 WORDS THAT SHOULD NOT BE DIVIDED

List of Tables

Single-syllable words, including verb forms such as aimed and helped, are never divided. Since one-

Index

letter divisions are not permissible, such words as again, enough, and unite cannot be divided. Words

that may be misread if divided, such as water, women, and prayer, should be divided only with

reluctance.

7.30:

Interjections

7.31:

Dictionary word

division

7.32:

Words that should

not be divided

7.33:

Dividing according

to pronunciation

7.34:

Dividing after a

vowel

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

7.33 DIVIDING ACCORDING TO PRONUNCIATION

List of Tables

In the usage preferred by Chicago and reflected in Webster's, most words are divided according to

Index

pronunciation rather than derivation.

knowl-edge ( not know-ledge)

7.31:

democ-racy or de-mocracy ( not demo-cracy)

Dictionary word

division

Special attention should be paid to breaks in certain words with multiple meanings and

7.32:

pronunciations, such as proj-ect (noun) and pro-ject (verb).

Words that should

not be divided

7.33:

Dividing according

to pronunciation

7.34:

Dividing after a

vowel

7.35:

Dividing

compounds,

prefixes, and

suffixes

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

7.34 DIVIDING AFTER A VOWEL

List of Tables

Unless a resulting break affects pronunciation, words are best divided after a vowel. When a vowel

Index

forms a syllable in the middle of a word, it should run in to the first line if possible. Diphthongs are

treated as single vowels (e.g., the eu in aneurysm).

7.32:

criti-cism ( rather than crit-icism)

Words that should

liga-ture ( rather than lig-ature)

not be divided

an-tipodes or antipo-des ( rather than antip-odes)

7.33:

aneu-rysm ( rather than an-eurysm)

Dividing according

to pronunciation

7.34:

Dividing after a

vowel

7.35:

Dividing

compounds,

prefixes, and

suffixes

7.36:

Dividing words

ending in "ing"

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

7.35 DIVIDING COMPOUNDS, PREFIXES, AND SUFFIXES

List of Tables

Hyphenated or closed compounds and words with prefixes or suffixes are best divided at the natural

Index

breaks.

poverty- / stricken ( rather than pov- / erty-stricken)

7.33:

thanks-giving ( rather than thanksgiv-ing)

Dividing according

dis-pleasure ( rather than displea-sure)

to pronunciation

re-inforce ( rather than rein-force)

7.34:

Dividing after a

vowel

7.35:

Dividing

compounds,

prefixes, and

suffixes

7.36:

Dividing words

ending in "ing"

7.37:

Two-letter word

endings

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

7.36 DIVIDING WORDS ENDING IN "ING"

List of Tables

Most gerunds and present participles may be divided before the ing. When the final consonant before

Index

the ing is doubled, however, the break occurs between the consonants. For words ending in ling,

check the dictionary.

7.34:

certify-ing

Dividing after a

giv-ing

vowel

dab-bing

7.35:

run-ning

Dividing

compounds,

fiz-zling

prefixes, and

bris-tling

suffixes

7.36:

Dividing words

ending in "ing"

7.37:

Two-letter word

endings

7.38:

Dividing proper

nouns and personal

names

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

7.37 TWO-LETTER WORD ENDINGS

List of Tables

Two-letter word endings are best not carried over to a second line.

Index

losses ( rather than loss-es)

sur-prises ( rather than surpris-es)

7.35:

Dividing

It is, however, not only permissible but customary to carry over certain two-letter word endings in

compounds,

some foreign languages.

prefixes, and

suffixes

7.36:

Dividing words

ending in "ing"

7.37:

Two-letter word

endings

7.38:

Dividing proper

nouns and personal

names

7.39:

Dividing numerals

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

7.38 DIVIDING PROPER NOUNS AND PERSONAL NAMES

List of Tables

Proper nouns of more than one element, especially personal names, should be broken, if possible,

Index

between the elements rather than within any of the elements. If a break within a name is needed,

consult the dictionary. Many proper nouns appear, with suggested divisions, in the listings of

biographical and geographical names in Webster's Collegiate. For fuller treatment, consult Merriam-

7.36:

Webster's Biographical Dictionary (bibliog. 4.1) and Merriam-Webster's Geographical Dictionary

Dividing words

ending in "ing"

(bibliog. 4.2). Those that cannot be found in a dictionary should be broken (or left unbroken)

7.37:

according to the guidelines elsewhere in this section. If pronunciation is not known or easily guessed,

Two-letter word

the break should usually follow a vowel.

endings

7.38:

Alek-sis

Dividing proper

nouns and personal

Heitor Villa- / Lobos ( or, better, Heitor / Villa-Lobos)

names

Ana-stasia

7.39:

Dividing numerals

A personal name that includes initials should be broken after the initials. A break before a number or

7.40:

Jr. or Sr. should be avoided.

Dividing numerals

with abbreviated

units of measure

Frederick L. / Anderson

M. F. K. / Fisher

Elizabeth II ( or, if necessary, Eliza- / beth II)

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

7.39 DIVIDING NUMERALS

List of Tables

Large numbers expressed as numerals are best left intact. To avoid a break, reword the sentence. If a

Index

break must be made, however, it should come only after a comma and never after a single digit. See

also 12.23.

7.37:

1,365,- / 000,000 or 1,365,000,- / 000

Two-letter word

endings

7.38:

Dividing proper

nouns and personal

names

7.39:

Dividing numerals

7.40:

Dividing numerals

with abbreviated

units of measure

7.41:

Division in run-in

lists

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

7.40 DIVIDING NUMERALS WITH ABBREVIATED UNITS OF MEASURE

List of Tables

A numeral used with an abbreviated unit of measure is best left intact; either the numeral should be

Index

carried over to the next line or the abbreviation should be moved up. (Numerals used with spelled-

out units of measure, which tend to form longer expressions, may be broken across a line as needed.)

7.38:

345 m

Dividing proper

24 kg

nouns and personal

names

55 BCE

6:35 p.m.

7.39:

Dividing numerals

7.40:

Dividing numerals

with abbreviated

units of measure

7.41:

Division in run-in

lists

7.42:

Dividing URLs and

e-mail addresses

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

7.41 DIVISION IN RUN-IN LISTS

List of Tables

A number or letter, such as (3) or (c), used in a run-in list (see 6.123) should not be separated from the

Index

beginning of what follows it. If it occurs at the end of a line, it should be carried over to the next line.

7.39:

Dividing numerals

7.40:

Dividing numerals

with abbreviated

units of measure

7.41:

Division in run-in

lists

7.42:

Dividing URLs and

e-mail addresses

7.43:

Hyphenation and

appearance

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

7.42 DIVIDING URLS AND E-MAIL ADDRESSES

List of Tables

In printed works, it is often necessary to break an e-mail address or a uniform resource identifier

Index

such as a URL at the end of a line. Such a break should be made between elements if at all possible:

after a colon or a double slash; before or after an equals sign or an ampersand; or before a single slash, a

period, or any other punctuation or symbols. To avoid confusion, an address that contains a hyphen

7.40:

should never be broken at the hyphen; nor should a hyphen be added to break an e-mail address or

Dividing numerals

with abbreviated

URL. If a particularly long element must be broken to avoid a seriously loose line, it should be broken

units of measure

between syllables according to the guidelines offered above. See also 6.8, 14.12. (Authors should not

7.41:

break URLs in their manuscripts; see 2.12.)

Division in run-in

lists

http://

7.42:

Dividing URLs and

www.chicagomanualofstyle.org/

e-mail addresses

or

7.43:

Hyphenation and

appearance

http://www

7.44:

.chicagomanualofstyle.org/

"A" and "an"

or

http://www.chicago

manualofstyle.org/

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

7.43 HYPHENATION AND APPEARANCE

List of Tables

For aesthetic reasons, no more than three succeeding lines should be allowed to end in hyphens.

Index

(Such hyphens are sometimes referred to as a hyphen stack.) And though hyphens are necessary far

more often in justified text, word breaks may be needed in material with a ragged right-hand margin

to avoid exceedingly uneven lines. (In manuscript preparation, however, word breaks should always

7.41:

be avoided; see 2.12, 2.109.) End-of-line hyphenation is rarely necessary in online publications, except

Division in run-in

lists

those modeled on or otherwise representing the printed page.

7.42:

Dividing URLs and

e-mail addresses

7.43:

Hyphenation and

appearance

7.44:

"A" and "an"

7.45:

"O" and "oh"

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> A and An, O and Oh

of Contents

List of Figures

7.44 "A" AND "AN"

List of Tables

The indefinite article a, not an, is used in American English before words beginning with a

Index

pronounced h. See also 5.72.

a hotel

7.42:

a historical study

Dividing URLs and

e-mail addresses

but

7.43:

Hyphenation and

an honor

appearance

an heir

7.44:

"A" and "an"

Before an abbreviation, a numeral, or a symbol, the use of a or an depends on (or, conversely,

7.45:

determines) how the term is pronounced. In the first example below, MS would be pronounced em

"O" and "oh"

ess; in the second, it would be pronounced manuscript. In the last two examples, 007 would be

7.46:

pronounced oh oh seven and double oh seven, respectively.

When to use

ligatures

an MS treatment (a treatment for multiple sclerosis)

a MS in the National Library

an NBC anchor

a CBS anchor

a URL

an @ sign

an 800 number

an 007 field (in a library catalog)

a 007-style agent

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> A and An, O and Oh

of Contents

List of Figures

7.45 "O" AND "OH"

List of Tables

The vocative O (largely obsolete) is always capitalized, whereas the interjection oh is capitalized only

Index

when beginning a sentence or standing alone. See also 6.37.

"Thine arm, O Lord, in days of old . . ."

7.43:

Where, oh where, have you been?

Hyphenation and

Oh! It's you!

appearance

7.44:

"A" and "an"

7.45:

"O" and "oh"

7.46:

When to use

ligatures

7.47:

Italics for emphasis

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ligatures

of Contents

List of Figures

7.46 WHEN TO USE LIGATURES

List of Tables

The ligatures æ ( a + e) and œ ( o + e) should not be used in Latin or transliterated Greek words. Nor

Index

should they be used in words adopted into English from Latin, Greek, or French (and thus to be

found in English dictionaries).

7.44:

aesthetics

"A" and "an"

Encyclopaedia Britannica (contrary to corporate usage)

7.45:

oedipal

"O" and "oh"

a trompe l'oeil mural

7.46:

a tray of hors d'oeuvres

When to use

ligatures

Emily Dickinson's oeuvre

7.47:

Italics for emphasis

The ligature æ (along with other special characters) is, however, needed for spelling Old English

words in an Old English context. And the ligature œ is needed for spelling French words in a French

7.48:

Capitals for

context. (See also 11.12.)

emphasis

Ælfric

es hæl

le nœud gordien

Œuvres complètes

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Emphasis

of Contents

List of Figures

7.47 ITALICS FOR EMPHASIS

List of Tables

Use italics for emphasis only as an occasional adjunct to efficient sentence structure. Overused, italics

Index

quickly lose their force. Seldom should as much as a sentence be italicized for emphasis, and never a

whole passage. In the first example below, the last three words, though clearly emphatic, do not

require italics because of their dramatic position at the end of the sentence.

7.45:

"O" and "oh"

The damaging evidence was offered not by the arresting officer, not by the injured plaintiff, but by the boy's

7.46:

own mother.

When to use

ligatures

On the other hand, the emphasis in the following example depends on the italics:

7.47:

Italics for emphasis

It was Leo!

7.48:

Capitals for

emphasis

7.49:

Italics for

unfamiliar foreign

words and phrases

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Emphasis

of Contents

List of Figures

7.48 CAPITALS FOR EMPHASIS

List of Tables

Initial capitals, once used to lend importance to certain words, are now used only ironically (but see

Index

8.93).

"OK, so I'm a Bad Mother," admitted Mary cheerfully.

7.46:

When to use

Capitalizing an entire word or phrase for emphasis is rarely appropriate. If capitals are wanted--in

ligatures

dialogue or in representing newspaper headlines, for example--small caps rather than full capitals

7.47:

look more graceful. Note that "capitalizing" a word means setting only the initial letter as a capital.

Italics for emphasis

Capitalizing a whole word, LIKE THIS, is known as "setting in full caps." Setting a word in small

7.48:

Capitals for

capitals--or "small caps"--results in THIS STYLE. (For the use of small capitals in representing terms in

emphasis

American Sign Language, see 11.144--54.) See also 10.8.

7.49:

Italics for

unfamiliar foreign

"Be careful--WATCH OUT !" she yelled.

words and phrases

We could not believe the headline: POLAR ICE CAP RETURNS.

7.50:

Parentheses and

quotation marks for

foreign words and

phrases

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Foreign Words

of Contents

List of Figures

7.49 ITALICS FOR UNFAMILIAR FOREIGN WORDS AND PHRASES

List of Tables

Italics are used for isolated words and phrases in a foreign language if they are likely to be

Index

unfamiliar to readers (but see 7.52). If a foreign word becomes familiar through repeated use

throughout a work, it need be italicized only on its first occurrence. If it appears only rarely, however,

italics may be retained.

7.47:

Italics for emphasis

The grÃ¨ve du zÃ¨le is not a true strike but a nitpicking obeying of work rules.

7.48:

Honi soit qui mal y pense is the motto of the Order of the Garter.

Capitals for

emphasis

An entire sentence or a passage of two or more sentences in a foreign language is usually set in

7.49:

Italics for

roman and enclosed in quotation marks (see 13.71).

unfamiliar foreign

words and phrases

7.50:

Parentheses and

quotation marks for

foreign words and

phrases

7.51:

Proper nouns

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Foreign Words

of Contents

List of Figures

7.50 PARENTHESES AND QUOTATION MARKS FOR FOREIGN WORDS AND PHRASES

List of Tables

A translation following a foreign word, phrase, or title is enclosed in parentheses or quotation marks.

Index

See also 6.93, 11.6, 14.109.

The word she wanted was pÃ©cher (to sin), not pÃªcher (to fish).

7.48:

The Prakrit word majjao, "the tomcat," may be a dialect version of either of two Sanskrit words: madjaro, "my

Capitals for

lover," or marjaro, "the cat" (from the verb mrij, "to wash," because the cat constantly washes itself).

emphasis

Leonardo Fioravanti's Compendio de i secreti rationali (Compendium of rational secrets) became a best seller.

7.49:

Italics for

unfamiliar foreign

In linguistic and phonetic studies a definition is often enclosed in single quotation marks with no

words and phrases

intervening punctuation; any following punctuation is placed after the closing quotation mark. (For a

7.50:

similar usage in horticultural writing, see 8.129.)

Parentheses and

quotation marks for

foreign words and

The gap is narrow between mead â€˜a beverage' and mead â€˜a meadow'.

phrases

7.51:

Proper nouns

7.52:

Roman for familiar

foreign words

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Foreign Words

of Contents

List of Figures

7.51 PROPER NOUNS

List of Tables

Foreign proper nouns are not italicized in an English context.

Index

A history of the ComÃ©die-FranÃ§aise has just appeared.

Mexico City's Ãngel de la Independencia is known familiarly as "El Ãngel."

Leghorn--in Italian, Livorno--is a port in Tuscany.

7.49:

Italics for

unfamiliar foreign

words and phrases

7.50:

Parentheses and

quotation marks for

foreign words and

phrases

7.51:

Proper nouns

7.52:

Roman for familiar

foreign words

7.53:

Roman for Latin

words and

abbreviations

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Foreign Words

of Contents

List of Figures

7.52 ROMAN FOR FAMILIAR FOREIGN WORDS

List of Tables

Foreign words and phrases familiar to most readers and listed in Webster's should appear in roman

Index

( not italics) if used in an English context; they should be spelled as in Webster's. German nouns, if in

Webster's, are lowercased. (See also 7.53.)

7.50:

pasha

Parentheses and

weltanschauung

quotation marks for

foreign words and

in vitro

phrases

a priori

7.51:

recherchÃ©

Proper nouns

the kaiser

7.52:

de novo

Roman for familiar

foreign words

eros and agape

7.53:

but

Roman for Latin

words and

abbreviations

He never missed a chance to Ã©pater les bourgeois.

7.54:

If a familiar foreign term, such as mise en scÃ¨ne, should occur in the same context as a less familiar

Italics for key

terms

one, such as mise en bouteille (not listed in Webster's), either both or neither should be italicized, so as

to maintain internal consistency.

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Foreign Words

of Contents

List of Figures

7.53 ROMAN FOR LATIN WORDS AND ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

Commonly used Latin words and abbreviations should not be italicized.

Index

ibid.

et al.

ca.

7.51:

Proper nouns

passim

7.52:

Roman for familiar

Because of its peculiar use in quoted matter, sic is best italicized.

foreign words

7.53:

"mindful of what has been done here by we [ sic] as agents of principle"

Roman for Latin

words and

abbreviations

7.54:

Italics for key

terms

7.55:

"Scare quotes"

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Highlighting Key Terms and Expressions

of Contents

List of Figures

7.54 ITALICS FOR KEY TERMS

List of Tables

Key terms in a particular context are often italicized on their first occurrence. Thereafter they are best

Index

set in roman.

The two chief tactics of this group, obstructionism and misinformation, require careful analysis.

7.52:

Roman for familiar

foreign words

7.53:

Roman for Latin

words and

abbreviations

7.54:

Italics for key

terms

7.55:

"Scare quotes"

7.56:

"So-called"

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Highlighting Key Terms and Expressions

of Contents

List of Figures

7.55 "SCARE QUOTES"

List of Tables

Quotation marks are often used to alert readers that a term is used in a nonstandard (or slang), ironic,

Index

or other special sense. Nicknamed scare quotes, they imply, "This is not my term" or "This is not how

the term is usually applied." Like any such device, scare quotes lose their force and irritate readers if

overused. See also 7.56, 7.57.

7.53:

Roman for Latin

On a digital music player, a "track" is really just a separately encoded file in a directory.

words and

abbreviations

"Child protection" sometimes fails to protect.

7.54:

Italics for key

In works of philosophy, single quotation marks are sometimes used for similar purposes, but Chicago

terms

discourages that practice unless it is essential to the author's argument and not confusing to readers.

7.55:

"Scare quotes"

7.56:

"So-called"

7.57:

Common

expressions and

figures of speech

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Highlighting Key Terms and Expressions

of Contents

List of Figures

7.56 "SO-CALLED"

List of Tables

A word or phrase preceded by so-called need not be enclosed in quotation marks. The expression itself

Index

indicates irony or doubt. If, however, it is necessary to call attention to only one part of a phrase,

quotation marks may be helpful.

7.54:

So-called child protection sometimes fails to protect.

Italics for key

Her so-called mentor induced her to embezzle from the company.

terms

7.55:

but

"Scare quotes"

These days, so-called "running" shoes are more likely to be seen on the feet of walkers.

7.56:

"So-called"

7.57:

Common

expressions and

figures of speech

7.58:

Words and phrases

used as words

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Highlighting Key Terms and Expressions

of Contents

List of Figures

7.57 COMMON EXPRESSIONS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH

List of Tables

Quotation marks are rarely needed for common expressions or figures of speech (including slang).

Index

Reserve them, if at all, for phrases borrowed verbatim from another context or terms used ironically

(see 7.55).

7.55:

Myths of paradise lost are common in folklore.

"Scare quotes"

I grew up in a one-horse town.

7.56:

Only techies will appreciate this joke.

"So-called"

but

7.57:

Common

expressions and

Though she was a lifetime subscriber to the Journal of Infectious Diseases, she was not one to ask "for whom

figures of speech

the bell tolls."

7.58:

Words and phrases

used as words

7.59:

Letters as letters

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Words and Letters Used as Words

of Contents

List of Figures

7.58 WORDS AND PHRASES USED AS WORDS

List of Tables

When a word or term is not used functionally but is referred to as the word or term itself, it is either

Index

italicized or enclosed in quotation marks. Proper nouns used as words, on the other hand, are usually

set in roman.

7.56:

The term critical mass is more often used metaphorically than literally.

"So-called"

What is meant by neurobotics?

7.57:

The i in the name iPod is supposed to invoke the Internet.

Common

expressions and

figures of speech

Although italics are the traditional choice, quotation marks may be more appropriate in certain

7.58:

contexts. (And in some electronic environments, quotation marks may be more portable or otherwise

Words and phrases

practical than italics.) In the first example below, italics set off the foreign term, and quotation marks

used as words

are used for the English. In the second example, quotation marks help to convey the idea of speech.

7.59:

Letters as letters

The Spanish verbs ser and estar are both rendered by "to be."

7.60:

Scholastic grades

Many people say "I" even when "me" would be more correct.

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Words and Letters Used as Words

of Contents

List of Figures

7.59 LETTERS AS LETTERS

List of Tables

Individual letters and combinations of letters of the Latin alphabet are usually italicized.

Index

the letter q

a lowercase n

a capital W

7.57:

Common

The plural is usually formed in English by adding s or es.

expressions and

He signed the document with an X.

figures of speech

I need a word with two e's and three s's.

7.58:

Words and phrases

used as words

Roman type, however, is traditionally used in two common expressions (see also 7.14).

7.59:

Letters as letters

Mind your p's and q's!

7.60:

dotting the i's and crossing the t's

Scholastic grades

7.61:

Roman type is always used for phonetic symbols. For details, consult Geoffrey K. Pullum and William

Plurals of letters

A. Ladusaw, Phonetic Symbol Guide (bibliog. 5).

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Words and Letters Used as Words

of Contents

List of Figures

7.60 SCHOLASTIC GRADES

List of Tables

Letters used to denote grades are usually capitalized and set in roman type. No apostrophe is

Index

required in the plural (see also 7.14).

She finished with three As, one B, and two Cs.

7.58:

Words and phrases

used as words

7.59:

Letters as letters

7.60:

Scholastic grades

7.61:

Plurals of letters

7.62:

Letters standing for

names

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Words and Letters Used as Words

of Contents

List of Figures

7.61 PLURALS OF LETTERS

List of Tables

As an aid to legibility (compare "two a s in llama" with "two a's in llama"), the plural of single

Index

lowercase letters is formed by adding an apostrophe before the s. The s is roman even when the letter

is italic. Capital letters, however, do not normally require an apostrophe in the plural. To prevent

misreading, avoid beginning a sentence with the plural of "A" or "I." See also 7.14.

7.59:

Letters as letters

There really are two x's in Foxx.

7.60:

the three Rs

Scholastic grades

7.61:

Plurals of letters

7.62:

Letters standing for

names

7.63:

Letters as shapes

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Words and Letters Used as Words

of Contents

List of Figures

7.62 LETTERS STANDING FOR NAMES

List of Tables

A letter used in place of a name is usually capitalized and set in roman type. If it bears no relation to

Index

an actual name, it is not followed by a period.

Let us assume that A sues B for breach of contract . . .

7.60:

Scholastic grades

If a single initial is used to abbreviate an actual name, it is usually followed by a period; if used to

7.61:

conceal a name, it may be followed by a 2-em dash and no period (see 6.90). If no punctuation follows

Plurals of letters

the dash, it must be followed by a space.

7.62:

Letters standing for

Professor D. will be making his entrance shortly.

names

Senator K—— and Representative L—— were in attendance.

7.63:

Letters as shapes

If two or more initials are used as an abbreviation for an entire name, no periods are needed. See also

7.64:

Names of letters

8.4, 10.12.

Kennedy and Johnson soon became known as JFK and LBJ.

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Words and Letters Used as Words

of Contents

List of Figures

7.63 LETTERS AS SHAPES

List of Tables

Letters that are used to represent shapes are capitalized and set in roman type (an S curve, an L-

Index

shaped room). (Using a sans serif font in a serif context, as is sometimes done, does not necessarily

aid comprehension and, unless the sans serif perfectly complements the serif, tends to look clumsy.)

7.61:

Plurals of letters

7.62:

Letters standing for

names

7.63:

Letters as shapes

7.64:

Names of letters

7.65:

Rhyme schemes

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Words and Letters Used as Words

of Contents

List of Figures

7.64 NAMES OF LETTERS

List of Tables

When legibility cannot be counted on, editors and proofreaders occasionally need to name letters ("a

Index

cue, not a gee"). The name of a letter, as distinct from the letter itself, is usually set in roman type,

without quotation marks. The following standard spellings are drawn from Webster's Collegiate. With

vowels, which are not named in standard dictionaries, it may be best to give an example (" a as in

7.62:

apple"). (For the names of special characters, see chapter 11, esp. tables 11.1 and 11.2.)

Letters standing for

names

7.63:

b

bee

Letters as shapes

c

cee

7.64:

d

dee

Names of letters

f

ef

7.65:

Rhyme schemes

g

gee

7.66:

h

aitch

Suggested

reference for music

j

jay

publishing

k

kay

l

el

m

em

n

en

p

pee

q

cue

r

ar

s

ess

t

tee

v

vee

w

double-u

x

ex

y

wye

z

zee

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Words and Letters Used as Words

of Contents

List of Figures

7.65 RHYME SCHEMES

List of Tables

Lowercase italic letters, with no space between, are used to indicate rhyme schemes or similar

Index

patterns.

The Shakespearean sonnet's rhyme scheme is abab, cdcd, efef, gg.

7.63:

Letters as shapes

7.64:

Names of letters

7.65:

Rhyme schemes

7.66:

Suggested

reference for music

publishing

7.67:

Musical pitches

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Music: Some Typographic Conventions

of Contents

List of Figures

7.66 SUGGESTED REFERENCE FOR MUSIC PUBLISHING

List of Tables

Music publishing is too specialized to be more than touched on here. Authors and editors requiring

Index

detailed guidelines may refer to D. Kern Holoman, Writing about Music (bibliog. 1.1). For an

illustration of typeset music, see figure 3.5. For styling the titles of musical works, see 8.188--92. For a

more general reference work, consult The New Grove Dictionary of Music and Musicians and the other

7.64:

Grove musical dictionaries, available from Oxford Music Online (bibliog. 5).

Names of letters

7.65:

Rhyme schemes

7.66:

Suggested

reference for music

publishing

7.67:

Musical pitches

7.68:

Octaves

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Music: Some Typographic Conventions

of Contents

List of Figures

7.67 MUSICAL PITCHES

List of Tables

Letters standing for musical pitches (which in turn are used to identify keys, chords, and so on) are

Index

usually set as roman capitals. The terms sharp, flat, and natural, if spelled out, are set in roman type

and preceded by a hyphen. Editors unfamiliar with musicological conventions should proceed with

caution. In the context of harmony, for example, some authors may regard a hyphenated "C-major

7.65:

triad" as being based on the note rather than the key of C. See also 7.70.

Rhyme schemes

7.66:

middle C

Suggested

reference for music

the key of G major

publishing

the D-major triad or D major triad

7.67:

an F augmented triad (an augmented triad on the note F)

Musical pitches

G-sharp or Gâ™¯

7.68:

the key of B-flat minor or Bâ™ minor

Octaves

Beethoven's E-flat Major Symphony (the Eroica)

7.69:

an E string

Chords

A series of pitches are joined by en dashes.

The initial F--G--F--Bâ™

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Music: Some Typographic Conventions

of Contents

List of Figures

7.68 OCTAVES

List of Tables

In technical works, various systems are used to designate octave register. Those systems that group

Index

pitches by octaves begin each ascending octave on C. In one widely used system, pitches in the octave

below middle C are designated by lowercase letters: c, c♯, d, . . . , a♯, b. Octaves from middle C up are

designated with lowercase letters bearing superscript numbers or primes: c , c

1

,2 and so on, or c′, c″,

7.66:

and so on. Lower octaves are designated, in descending order, by capital letters and capital letters

Suggested

reference for music

with subscript numbers: C, C , C

1

.2 Because of the many systems and their variants in current use,

publishing

readers should be alerted to the system employed (e.g., by an indication early in the text of the

7.67:

symbol used for middle C). Technical works on the modern piano usually designate all pitches with

Musical pitches

capital letters and subscripts, from A at

1

the bottom of the keyboard to C at

88

the top. Scientific works

7.68:

Octaves

on music usually designate octaves by capital letters and subscripts beginning with C (middle

0

C =

7.69:

C ).

4 When pitches are otherwise specified, none of these systems is necessary.

Chords

7.70:

middle C

"Major" and "minor"

A 440

the soprano's high C

To indicate simultaneously sounding pitches (as in chords), the pitches are listed from lowest to

highest and are sometimes joined by plus signs.

C + E + G

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Music: Some Typographic Conventions

of Contents

List of Figures

7.69 CHORDS

List of Tables

In the analysis of harmony, chords are designated by roman numerals indicating what degree of the

Index

scale the chord is based on.

V (a chord based on the fifth, or dominant, degree of the scale)

7

7.67:

V (dominant seventh chord)

Musical pitches

iii (a chord based on the third, or mediant, degree of the scale)

7.68:

Octaves

Harmonic progressions are indicated by capital roman numerals separated by en dashes: IV--I--V--I.

7.69:

While roman numerals for all chords suffice for basic descriptions of chordal movement, in more

Chords

technical writing, minor chords are distinguished by lowercase roman numerals, and other

7.70:

distinctions in chord quality and content are shown by additional symbols and arabic numerals.

"Major" and "minor"

7.71:

Dynamics

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Music: Some Typographic Conventions

of Contents

List of Figures

7.70 "MAJOR" AND "MINOR"

List of Tables

In some works on musical subjects where many keys are mentioned, capital letters are used for major

Index

keys and lowercase for minor. If this practice is followed, the words major and minor are usually

omitted.

7.68:

Octaves

7.69:

Chords

7.70:

"Major" and "minor"

7.71:

Dynamics

7.72:

Application-specific

variations

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Music: Some Typographic Conventions

of Contents

List of Figures

7.71 DYNAMICS

List of Tables

Terms indicating dynamics are usually given in lowercase, often italicized: piano, mezzo forte, and so

Index

on. Where space allows, the spelled-out form is preferred in both text and musical examples. Symbols

for these terms are rendered in lowercase boldface italics with no periods: p, mf, and so on. "Editorial"

dynamics--those added to a composer's original by an editor--are sometimes distinguished by another

7.69:

font or by parentheses or brackets.

Chords

7.70:

"Major" and "minor"

7.71:

Dynamics

7.72:

Application-specific

variations

7.73:

Capitalization for

keys and menu

items

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Computer Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

7.72 APPLICATION-SPECIFIC VARIATIONS

List of Tables

In the realm of computer hardware and software--where nomenclature and function are closely

Index

related--typographic conventions for expressing the names of particular keys, commands, and other

computer terms vary across systems and applications. The paragraphs in this section offer a few

common patterns. It is important not only to practice consistency in using a particular style or font to

7.70:

refer to a particular element but also to consider the usage followed within a specific system or

"Major" and "minor"

application.

7.71:

Dynamics

7.72:

Application-specific

variations

7.73:

Capitalization for

keys and menu

items

7.74:

Keyboard

combinations and

shortcuts

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Computer Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

7.73 CAPITALIZATION FOR KEYS AND MENU ITEMS

List of Tables

The basic alphabet keys as well as all named keys are capitalized even if they are lowercased on a

Index

particular keyboard. Menu items and icon names are usually spelled and capitalized as in a particular

application. Acronyms for file formats are rendered in full capitals.

7.71:

The function key F2 has no connection with the keys F and 2.

Dynamics

The Option key on a Mac is similar to the Alt key on a typical PC.

7.72:

Choosing Cut from the Edit menu is an alternative to pressing Ctrl+X.

Application-specific

Save the file as a PNG or a GIF, not as a JPEG.

variations

7.73:

Capitalization for

keys and menu

items

7.74:

Keyboard

combinations and

shortcuts

7.75:

Distinguishing

words to be typed

and other elements

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Computer Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

7.74 KEYBOARD COMBINATIONS AND SHORTCUTS

List of Tables

To indicate that different keys are to be pressed simultaneously (as in a keyboard shortcut), use the

Index

plus sign or the hyphen--according to the practice of the particular operating system or application in

question--without a space on either side. Spell out Shift, Hyphen, and Space--and anything else that

might otherwise be ambiguous. (The capital S in the first two examples below does not indicate that

7.72:

the Shift key should be pressed as part of the combination.)

Application-specific

variations

To save, press Ctrl+S.

7.73:

Capitalization for

To save, press Command-S.

keys and menu

If the screen freezes, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.

items

To empty the trash without a prompt, press Option-Shift-Command-Delete.

7.74:

Keyboard

combinations and

shortcuts

7.75:

Distinguishing

words to be typed

and other elements

7.76:

Terms like "web"

and "Internet"

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Computer Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

7.75 DISTINGUISHING WORDS TO BE TYPED AND OTHER ELEMENTS

List of Tables

When a greater prominence than capitalization is called for, boldface, italics, color, or some other

Index

scheme may be used to distinguish elements. A single treatment may be applied across different types

of elements. In general, avoid quotation marks lest they be interpreted as part of the element they

enclose. If quotation marks must be used, any punctuation that is not part of the quoted expression

7.73:

should appear outside the quotation marks (as in the second example; see also 6.9).

Capitalization for

keys and menu

items

To insert a thorn, choose Symbol from the Insert tab, then enter 00FE in the character code field.

7.74:

Click on Save As; name your file "appendix A, v. 10".

Keyboard

combinations and

shortcuts

Directory paths, file names, variables, and other computer-related syntax are sometimes distinguished

by a monospaced font such as Courier.

7.75:

Distinguishing

words to be typed

Use $OLDPWD to indicate your previous working directory.

and other elements

7.76:

For related matters in computer writing, see Eric S. Raymond, "Hacker Writing Style," in The New

Terms like "web"

and "Internet"

Hacker's Dictionary (bibliog. 5).

7.77:

To hyphenate or

not to hyphenate

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks >> Computer Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

7.76 TERMS LIKE "WEB" AND "INTERNET"

List of Tables

In keeping with Chicago's recommendations elsewhere (see 8.67), generic terms that are capitalized as

Index

part of the official name of a system or an organization may be lowercased when used alone or in

combination. (In a departure, Chicago now considers web to be generic when used alone or in

combination with other generic terms.) Abbreviations for file formats are normally presented in full

7.74:

capitals (see also 10.52). For treatment of the names of keys and menu items, see 7.73. For terms such

Keyboard

combinations and

as e-mail, see 7.85.

shortcuts

7.75:

Macintosh; PC; personal computer

Distinguishing

hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP); a transfer protocol; hypertext

words to be typed

and other elements

Internet protocol (IP); the Internet; the net; an intranet

7.76:

the Open Source Initiative (the corporation); open-source platforms

Terms like "web"

the World Wide Web Consortium; the World Wide Web; the web; a website; a web page

and "Internet"

7.77:

To hyphenate or

not to hyphenate

7.78:

Some definitions

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Compounds and Hyphenation

of Contents

List of Figures

7.77 TO HYPHENATE OR NOT TO HYPHENATE

List of Tables

Far and away the most common spelling questions for writers and editors concern compound terms--

Index

whether to spell as two words, hyphenate, or close up as a single word. Prefixes (and occasionally

suffixes) can be troublesome also. The first place to look for answers is the dictionary. This section,

including the hyphenation guide in 7.85, offers guidelines for spelling compounds not necessarily

7.75:

found in the dictionary (though some of the examples are drawn from Webster's) and for treatment of

Distinguishing

words to be typed

compounds according to their grammatical function (as nouns, adjectives, or adverbs) and their

and other elements

position in a sentence. See also 5.91.

7.76:

Terms like "web"

and "Internet"

7.77:

To hyphenate or

not to hyphenate

7.78:

Some definitions

7.79:

The trend toward

closed compounds

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Compounds and Hyphenation

of Contents

List of Figures

7.78 SOME DEFINITIONS

List of Tables

An open compound is spelled as two or more words ( high school, lowest common denominator). A

Index

hyphenated compound is spelled with one or more hyphens ( mass-produced, kilowatt-hour, non-English-

speaking). A closed (or solid) compound is spelled as a single word ( birthrate, notebook). A permanent

compound is one that has been accepted into the general vocabulary and can be found in the

7.76:

dictionary (like all but one of the examples in this paragraph thus far). A temporary compound is a

Terms like "web"

and "Internet"

new combination created for some specific, often one-time purpose ( dictionary-wielding, impeachment

7.77:

hound); such compounds, though some eventually become permanent, are not normally found in the

To hyphenate or

dictionary. Not strictly compounds but often discussed with them are words formed with prefixes

not to hyphenate

( antigrammarian, postmodern); these are dealt with in section 4 of 7.85. (For examples of combining

7.78:

Some definitions

forms--a type of prefix in which a word like electric is modified to form a combination like

7.79:

electromagnetic--see section 2 of 7.85, under combining forms.)

The trend toward

closed compounds

7.80:

Hyphens and

readability

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Compounds and Hyphenation

of Contents

List of Figures

7.79 THE TREND TOWARD CLOSED COMPOUNDS

List of Tables

With frequent use, open or hyphenated compounds tend to become closed ( on line to on-line to online).

Index

Chicago's general adherence to Webster's does not preclude occasional exceptions when the closed

spellings have become widely preferred by writers (e.g., website) and pronunciation and readability

are not at stake.

7.77:

To hyphenate or

not to hyphenate

7.78:

Some definitions

7.79:

The trend toward

closed compounds

7.80:

Hyphens and

readability

7.81:

Compound

modifiers before or

after a noun

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Compounds and Hyphenation

of Contents

List of Figures

7.80 HYPHENS AND READABILITY

List of Tables

A hyphen can make for easier reading by showing structure and, often, pronunciation. Words that

Index

might otherwise be misread, such as re-creation or co-op, should be hyphenated. Hyphens can also

eliminate ambiguity. For example, the hyphen in much-needed clothing shows that the clothing is

greatly needed rather than abundant and needed. Where no ambiguity could result, as in public

7.78:

welfare administration or graduate student housing, hyphenation is unnecessary.

Some definitions

7.79:

The trend toward

closed compounds

7.80:

Hyphens and

readability

7.81:

Compound

modifiers before or

after a noun

7.82:

Adverbs ending in

"ly"

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Compounds and Hyphenation

of Contents

List of Figures

7.81 COMPOUND MODIFIERS BEFORE OR AFTER A NOUN

List of Tables

When compound modifiers (also called phrasal adjectives) such as open-mouthed or full-length precede

Index

a noun, hyphenation usually lends clarity. With the exception of proper nouns (such as United States)

and compounds formed by an adverb ending in ly plus an adjective (see 7.82), it is never incorrect to

hyphenate adjectival compounds before a noun. When such compounds follow the noun they modify,

7.79:

hyphenation is usually unnecessary, even for adjectival compounds that are hyphenated in Webster's

The trend toward

closed compounds

(such as well-read or ill-humored).

7.80:

Hyphens and

readability

7.81:

Compound

modifiers before or

after a noun

7.82:

Adverbs ending in

"ly"

7.83:

Multiple hyphens

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Compounds and Hyphenation

of Contents

List of Figures

7.82 ADVERBS ENDING IN "LY"

List of Tables

Compounds formed by an adverb ending in ly plus an adjective or participle (such as largely irrelevant

Index

or smartly dressed) are not hyphenated either before or after a noun, since ambiguity is virtually

impossible. (The ly ending with adverbs signals to the reader that the next word will be another

modifier, not a noun.)

7.80:

Hyphens and

readability

7.81:

Compound

modifiers before or

after a noun

7.82:

Adverbs ending in

"ly"

7.83:

Multiple hyphens

7.84:

Omission of part of

a hyphenated

expression

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Compounds and Hyphenation

of Contents

List of Figures

7.83 MULTIPLE HYPHENS

List of Tables

Multiple hyphens are usually appropriate for such phrases as an over-the-counter drug or a winner-take-

Index

all contest. If, however, the compound modifier consists of an adjective that itself modifies a

compound, additional hyphens may not be necessary. The expressions late nineteenth-century literature

and early twentieth-century growth are clear without a second hyphen. (Similar expressions formed with

7.81:

mid--which Chicago classifies as a prefix--do not follow this pattern; see 7.85, section 4, under mid.)

Compound

modifiers before or

See also section 3, under century.

after a noun

7.82:

Adverbs ending in

"ly"

7.83:

Multiple hyphens

7.84:

Omission of part of

a hyphenated

expression

7.85:

Hyphenation guide

for compounds and

words formed with

prefixes

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Compounds and Hyphenation

of Contents

List of Figures

7.84 OMISSION OF PART OF A HYPHENATED EXPRESSION

List of Tables

When the second part of a hyphenated expression is omitted, the hyphen is retained, followed by a

Index

space.

fifteen- and twenty-year mortgages

7.81:

Chicago- or Milwaukee-bound passengers

Compound

modifiers before or

but

after a noun

7.82:

a five-by-eight-foot rug (a single entity)

Adverbs ending in

"ly"

Omission of the second part of a solid compound follows the same pattern.

7.83:

Multiple hyphens

both over- and underfed cats

7.84:

Omission of part of

but

a hyphenated

expression

overfed and overworked mules ( not overfed and -worked mules)

7.85:

Hyphenation guide

for compounds and

words formed with

prefixes

7: SPELLING, DISTINCTIVE TREATMENT OF WORDS, AND COMPOUNDS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Compounds and Hyphenation

of Contents

List of Figures

7.85 HYPHENATION GUIDE FOR COMPOUNDS AND WORDS FORMED WITH PREFIXES

List of Tables

When using this guide (a return to the tabular format of earlier editions of this manual), consult the

Index

preceding paragraphs in this section (7.77--85)â€”especially if a relevant example cannot be found. In

general, Chicago prefers a spare hyphenation style: if no suitable example or analogy can be found

either in this section or in the dictionary, hyphenate only if doing so will aid readability. Each of the

7.81:

four sections of the following table is arranged alphabetically (by first column). The first section deals

Compound

modifiers before or

with compounds according to category; the second section, with compounds according to parts of

after a noun

speech. The third section lists examples for words commonly used as elements in compounds. The

7.82:

fourth section lists common prefixes, most of which join to another word to form one unhyphenated

Adverbs ending in

"ly"

word; note especially the hyphenated exceptions, not all of which agree with Webster's. (Compounds

7.83:

formed with suffixesâ€”e.g., nationhood, pennilessâ€”are almost always closed.)

Multiple hyphens

7.84:

PDF Version >>

Omission of part of

a hyphenated

expression

7.85:

Hyphenation guide

for compounds and

words formed with

prefixes

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

of Contents

Overview

List of Figures

8.1

Chicago's preference for the "down" style

List of Tables

8.2

Italics and quotation marks

Index

Personal Names

General Principles

8.3

Personal names—additional resources

8.4

Capitalization of personal names

8.5

Names with particles

8.6

Hyphenated and extended names

Non-English Names in an English Context

8.7

French names

8.8

German and Portuguese names

8.9

Italian names

8.10

Dutch names

8.11

Spanish names

8.12

Russian names

8.13

Hungarian names

8.14

Arabic names

8.15

Chinese names

8.16

Japanese names

8.17

Other Asian names

Titles and Offices

8.18

Titles and offices—the general rule

8.19

Exceptions to the general rule

8.20

Titles used in apposition

8.21

Civil titles

8.22

Titles of sovereigns and other rulers

8.23

Military titles

8.24

Quasi-military titles

8.25

Religious titles

8.26

Corporate and organizational titles

8.27

Academic titles

8.28

Other academic designations

8.29

Descriptive titles

8.30

Civic and academic honors

8.31

Titles of nobility

8.32

Honorifics

Epithets, Kinship Names, and Personifications

8.33

Epithets (or nicknames) and bynames

8.34

Epithets as names of characters

8.35

Kinship names

8.36

Personifications

Ethnic, Socioeconomic, and Other Groups

8.37

Ethnic and national groups and associated adjectives

8.38

Compound nationalities

8.39

Color

8.40

Class

8.41

Generation

8.42

Physical characteristics

Names of Places

8.43

Names of places—additional resources

Parts of the World

8.44

Continents, countries, cities, oceans, and such

8.45

Points of the compass

8.46

Regions of the world and national regions

8.47

Popular place-names or epithets

8.48

Urban areas

8.49

Real versus metaphorical names

Political Divisions

8.50

Political divisions—capitalization

8.51

Governmental entities

Topographical Divisions

8.52

Mountains, rivers, and the like

8.53

Generic terms for geographic entities

8.54

Foreign terms for geographic entities

Public Places and Major Structures

8.55

Thoroughfares and the like

8.56

Buildings and monuments

8.57

Rooms, offices, and such

8.58

Foreign names for places and structures

Words Derived from Proper Names

8.59

When to capitalize

8.60

When not to capitalize

Names of Organizations

Governmental Bodies

8.61

Legislative and deliberative bodies

8.62

Administrative bodies

8.63

Judicial bodies

8.64

Government entities that are lowercased

Political and Economic Organizations and Movements

8.65

Organizations, parties, alliances, and so forth

8.66

Adherents of unofficial political groups and movements

Institutions and Companies

8.67

Institutions and companies—capitalization

8.68

Names with unusual capitalization

Associations

8.69

Associations, unions, and the like

Historical and Cultural Terms

Periods

8.70

Numerical designations for periods

8.71

Descriptive designations for periods

8.72

Traditional period names

8.73

Cultural periods

Events

8.74

Historical events and programs

8.75

Speeches

8.76

Meteorological and other natural phenomena

8.77

Sporting events

Cultural Movements and Styles

8.78

Movements and styles—capitalization

Acts, Treaties, and Government Programs

8.79

Formal names of acts, treaties, and so forth

8.80

Generic terms for pending legislation

Legal Cases

8.81

Legal cases mentioned in text

Awards

8.82

Capitalization for names of awards and prizes

Oaths and Pledges

8.83

Lowercase for oaths and pledges

Academic Subjects, Courses of Study, and Lecture Series

8.84

Academic subjects

8.85

Courses of study

8.86

Lectures

Calendar and Time Designations

8.87

Days of the week, months, and seasons

8.88

Holidays

8.89

Time and time zones

Religious Names and Terms

Deities and Revered Persons

8.90

Deities

8.91

Alternative names

8.92

Prophets and the like

8.93

Platonic ideas

8.94

Pronouns referring to religious figures

Religious Groups

8.95

Major religions

8.96

Denominations, sects, orders, and religious movements

8.97

"Church" as institution

8.98

Generic versus religious terms

8.99

Religious jurisdictions

8.100 Buildings

8.101 Councils, synods, and the like

Religious Writings

8.102 Scriptures

8.103 Other names and versions for bibles

8.104 Books of the Bible

8.105 Sections of the Bible

8.106 Prayers, creeds, and such

Religious Events, Concepts, Services, and Objects

8.107 Religious events and concepts

8.108 Heaven, hell, and so on

8.109 Services and rites

8.110 Objects

Military Terms

Forces and Troops

8.111 Armies, battalions, and such

Wars, Revolutions, Battles, and Campaigns

8.112 Wars and revolutions

8.113 Battles and campaigns

Military Awards

8.114 Medals and awards

Names of Ships and Other Vehicles

8.115 Ships and other named vessels

8.116 Other vehicle names

8.117 Pronouns referring to vessels

Scientific Terminology

Scientific Names of Plants and Animals

8.118 Scientific style—additional resources

8.119 Genus and specific epithet

8.120 Abbreviation of genus name

8.121 Subspecies and varieties

8.122 Unspecified species and varieties

8.123 Author names

8.124 Plant hybrids

8.125 Higher divisions

8.126 English derivatives

Vernacular Names of Plants and Animals

8.127 Plants and animals—additional resources

8.128 Domestic animals and horticultural categories

8.129 Horticultural cultivars

Genetic Terms

8.130 Genetic nomenclature—additional resources

8.131 Genes

8.132 Enzymes

Geological Terms

8.133 Geological terms—additional resources

8.134 Formal versus generic geological terms

8.135 Stratigraphy

Astronomical Terms

8.136 Astronomical terms—additional resources

8.137 Celestial bodies

8.138 Catalog names for celestial objects

8.139 "Earth"

8.140 "Sun" and "moon"

8.141 Descriptive terms

Medical Terms

8.142 Medical terms—additional resources

8.143 Diseases, procedures, and such

8.144 Infections

8.145 Drugs

Physical and Chemical Terms

8.146 Physical and chemical terms—additional resources

8.147 Laws and theories

8.148 Chemical names and symbols

8.149 Mass number

8.150 Radiations

8.151 Metric units

Brand Names and Trademarks

8.152 Trademarks

8.153 Names like eBay and iPod

Titles of Works

8.154 Treatment of titles in text and notes—overview

Capitalization, Punctuation, and Italics

8.155 Capitalization of titles of works—general principles

8.156 Principles and examples of sentence-style capitalization

8.157 Principles of headline-style capitalization

8.158 Examples of headline-style capitalization

8.159 Hyphenated compounds in headline-style titles

8.160 Titles containing quotations

8.161 Italics versus quotation marks for titles

8.162 Subtitle capitalization

8.163 Permissible changes to titles

8.164 Titles in relation to surrounding text

8.165 Double titles connected by "or"

Books and Periodicals

8.166 Treatment of book and periodical titles

8.167 An initial "a," "an," or "the" in book titles

8.168 An initial "the" in periodical titles

8.169 "Magazine" and other descriptive terms

8.170 Periodical titles in awards, buildings, and so forth

8.171 Italicized terms and titles within titles

8.172 Title not interchangeable with subject

8.173 Multivolume works

8.174 Series and editions

Articles in Periodicals and Parts of a Book

8.175 Articles, stories, chapters, and so on

8.176 Collected works

8.177 Terms like "foreword," "preface," and so on

8.178 Numbered chapters, parts, and so on

Poems and Plays

8.179 Titles of poems

8.180 Poems referred to by first line

8.181 Titles of plays

8.182 Divisions of plays or poems

Pamphlets and Reports

8.183 Titles of freestanding publications

Unpublished Works

8.184 Titles of unpublished works

Movies, Television, and Radio

8.185 Titles of movies and television and radio programs and series

Electronic Publications

8.186 Websites and web pages

8.187 Blogs and blog entries

Musical Works

8.188 Musical works—additional resources

8.189 Operas, songs, and the like

8.190 Instrumental works

8.191 Opus numbers

8.192 Recordings

Works of Art and Exhibitions

8.193 Paintings, statues, and such

8.194 Cartoons

8.195 Exhibitions and such

Signs and Mottoes

8.196 Signs and notices

8.197 Mottoes

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

8.1 CHICAGO'S PREFERENCE FOR THE "DOWN" STYLE

List of Tables

Proper nouns are usually capitalized, as are some of the terms derived from or associated with proper

Index

nouns. For the latter, Chicago's preference is for sparing use of capitals--what is sometimes referred to

as a "down" style. Although Brussels (the Belgian city) is capitalized, Chicago prefers brussels sprouts--

which are not necessarily from Brussels (see 8.60). Likewise, President Obama is capitalized, but the

8.1:

president is not (see 8.18--32). (In certain nonacademic contexts--e.g., a press release--such terms as

Chicago's

preference for the

president may be capitalized.)

"down" style

8.2:

Italics and

quotation marks

8.3:

Personal namesâ

€”additional

resources

8.4:

Capitalization of

personal names

8.5:

Names with

particles

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

8.2 ITALICS AND QUOTATION MARKS

List of Tables

Chicago prefers italics to set off the titles of major or freestanding works such as books, journals,

Index

movies, and paintings. This practice extends to cover the names of ships and other craft, species

names, and legal cases. Quotation marks are usually reserved for the titles of subsections of larger

works--including chapter and article titles and the titles of poems that have been collected into a

8.1:

series. Some titles--for example, of a book series or a website, under which any number of works or

Chicago's

preference for the

documents may be collected--are neither italicized nor placed in quotation marks. For more on the

"down" style

titles of works, including matters of capitalization and punctuation, see 8.154--95.

8.2:

Italics and

quotation marks

8.3:

Personal namesâ

€”additional

resources

8.4:

Capitalization of

personal names

8.5:

Names with

particles

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Personal Names >> General Principles

of Contents

List of Figures

8.3 PERSONAL NAMES--ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

For names of well-known deceased persons, Chicago generally prefers the spellings in Merriam-

Index

Webster's Biographical Dictionary or the biographical section of Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary

(referred to below as Webster's). For living persons, consult Who's Who or Who's Who in America,

among other sources. (See bibliog. 4.1 for these and other useful reference works.) Where different

8.1:

spellings appear in different sources (e.g., W. E. B. DuBois versus W. E. B. Du Bois), the writer or

Chicago's

preference for the

editor must make a choice and stick with it. The names of known and lesser-known persons not in

"down" style

the standard references can usually be checked and cross-checked at any number of officially

8.2:

sponsored online resources (e.g., for authors' names, online library catalogs or booksellers). The name

Italics and

quotation marks

of a living person should, wherever possible, correspond to that person's own usage.

8.3:

Personal namesâ

€”additional

resources

8.4:

Capitalization of

personal names

8.5:

Names with

particles

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Personal Names >> General Principles

of Contents

List of Figures

8.4 CAPITALIZATION OF PERSONAL NAMES

List of Tables

Names and initials of persons, real or fictitious, are capitalized. A space should be used between any

Index

initials, except when initials are used alone. See also 7.62, 10.12.

Jane Doe

8.2:

George S. McGovern

Italics and

P. D. James

quotation marks

M. F. K. Fisher

8.3:

Malcolm X

Personal namesâ

€”additional

LBJ

resources

8.4:

Unconventional spellings strongly preferred by the bearer of the name or pen name (e.g., bell hooks)

Capitalization of

should usually be respected in appropriate contexts (library catalogs generally capitalize all such

personal names

names). E. E. Cummings can be safely capitalized; it was one of his publishers, not he himself, who

8.5:

Names with

lowercased his name. Most editors will draw the line at beginning a sentence with a lowercased name

particles

and choose either to rewrite or to capitalize the first letter for the occasion.

8.6:

Hyphenated and

extended names

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Personal Names >> General Principles

of Contents

List of Figures

8.5 NAMES WITH PARTICLES

List of Tables

Many names include particles such as de, d' , de la, von, van, and ten. Practice with regard to

Index

capitalizing and spacing the particles varies widely, and confirmation should be sought in a

biographical dictionary or other authoritative source. When the surname is used alone, the particle is

usually retained, capitalized or lowercased and spaced as in the full name (though always capitalized

8.3:

when beginning a sentence). Le, La, and L' are always capitalized when not preceded by de; the, which

Personal namesâ

€”additional

sometimes appears with the English form of a Native American name, is always lowercased. See also

resources

8.7, 8.8, 8.9, 8.10, 8.11, 8.14, 8.33.

8.4:

Capitalization of

personal names

Alfonse D'Amato; D'Amato

Diana DeGette; DeGette

8.5:

Names with

Walter de la Mare; de la Mare

particles

Paul de Man; de Man

8.6:

Thomas De Quincey; De Quincey

Hyphenated and

Page duBois; duBois

extended names

W. E. B. DuBois; DuBois (but see 8.3)

8.7:

French names

Daphne du Maurier; du Maurier

Robert M. La Follette Sr.; La Follette

John Le CarrÃ©; Le CarrÃ©

Pierre-Charles L'Enfant; L'Enfant

Anwar el-Sadat; Sadat

Abraham Ten Broeck; Ten Broeck

the Prophet (Tenskwatawa)

Robert van Gulik; van Gulik

Stephen Van Rensselaer; Van Rensselaer

Wernher von Braun; von Braun

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Personal Names >> General Principles

of Contents

List of Figures

8.6 HYPHENATED AND EXTENDED NAMES

List of Tables

A hyphenated last name or a last name that consists of two or more elements should never be shorn

Index

of one of its elements. For names of prominent or historical figures, Webster's and other reliable

alphabetical listings usually indicate where the last name begins.

8.4:

Victoria Sackville-West; Sackville-West

Capitalization of

Ralph Vaughan Williams; Vaughan Williams ( not Williams)

personal names

Ludwig Mies van der Rohe; Mies van der Rohe ( not van der Rohe); Mies

8.5:

Names with

but

particles

8.6:

John Hope Franklin; Franklin

Hyphenated and

Charlotte Perkins Gilman; Gilman

extended names

8.7:

For unhyphenated compound names of lesser-known persons for whom proper usage cannot be

French names

determined, use only the last element (including any particle[s]; see 8.5). But see 8.11.

8.8:

German and

Portuguese names

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Personal Names >> Non-English Names in an English Context

of Contents

List of Figures

8.7 FRENCH NAMES

List of Tables

The particles de and d' are lowercased (except at the beginning of a sentence). When the last name is

Index

used alone, de (but not d' ) is often dropped. Its occasional retention, in de Gaulle, for example, is

suggested by tradition rather than logic. (When a name begins with closed-up de, such as Debussy, the

d is always capitalized.)

8.5:

Names with

Jean d'Alembert; d'Alembert

particles

Alfred de Musset; Musset

8.6:

Hyphenated and

Alexis de Tocqueville; Tocqueville

extended names

but

8.7:

French names

Charles de Gaulle; de Gaulle

8.8:

German and

When de la precedes a name, la is usually capitalized and is always retained when the last name is

Portuguese names

used alone. The contraction du is usually lowercased in a full name but is retained and capitalized

8.9:

Italian names

when the last name is used alone. (When a name begins with closed-up Du, such as Dupont, the d is

always capitalized.)

Jean de La Fontaine; La Fontaine

RenÃ©-Robert Cavelier de La Salle; La Salle

Philippe du Puy de Clinchamps; Du Puy de Clinchamps

When the article le accompanies a name, it is capitalized with or without the first name.

Gustave Le Bon; Le Bon

Initials standing for a hyphenated given name should also be hyphenated.

Jean-Paul Sartre; J.-P. Sartre; Sartre

Since there is considerable variation in French usage, the guidelines and examples above merely

represent the most common forms.

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Personal Names >> Non-English Names in an English Context

of Contents

List of Figures

8.8 GERMAN AND PORTUGUESE NAMES

List of Tables

In the original languages, particles in German and Portuguese names are lowercased and are usually

Index

dropped when the last name is used alone. But in English contexts, if another form is widely known,

it may be used instead.

8.6:

Alexander von Humboldt; Humboldt

Hyphenated and

Maximilian von Spee; Spee

extended names

Heinrich Friedrich Karl vom und zum Stein; Stein

8.7:

Ludwig van Beethoven; Beethoven

French names

Agostinho da Silva; Silva

8.8:

German and

but

Portuguese names

8.9:

Vasco da Gama; da Gama

Italian names

8.10:

Dutch names

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Personal Names >> Non-English Names in an English Context

of Contents

List of Figures

8.9 ITALIAN NAMES

List of Tables

Particles in Italian names are most often uppercased and retained when the last name is used alone.

Index

Gabriele D'Annunzio; D'Annunzio

Lorenzo Da Ponte; Da Ponte

Luca Della Robbia; Della Robbia

8.7:

French names

In many older aristocratic names, however, the particle is traditionally lowercased and dropped when

8.8:

German and

the last name is used alone.

Portuguese names

8.9:

Beatrice d'Este; Este

Italian names

Lorenzo de' Medici; Medici

8.10:

Dutch names

8.11:

Spanish names

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Personal Names >> Non-English Names in an English Context

of Contents

List of Figures

8.10 DUTCH NAMES

List of Tables

In English usage, the particles van, van den, ter, and the like are lowercased when full names are given

Index

but usually capitalized when only the last name is used.

Joannes van Keulen; Van Keulen

8.8:

Pieter van den Keere; Van den Keere

German and

Vincent van Gogh; Van Gogh

Portuguese names

Gerard ter Borch; Ter Borch

8.9:

Italian names

8.10:

Dutch names

8.11:

Spanish names

8.12:

Russian names

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Personal Names >> Non-English Names in an English Context

of Contents

List of Figures

8.11 SPANISH NAMES

List of Tables

Many Spanish names are composed of both the father's and the mother's family names, usually in

Index

that order, sometimes joined by y (and). When the given name is omitted, persons with such names

are usually referred to by both family names but sometimes by only one (usually, but not always, the

first of the two family names), according to their own preference. It is never incorrect to use both.

8.9:

Italian names

José Ortega y Gasset; Ortega y Gasset or Ortega

8.10:

Pascual Ortiz Rubio; Ortiz Rubio or Ortiz

Dutch names

Federico García Lorca; García Lorca (known among speakers of English, however, as Lorca)

8.11:

Spanish names

Spanish family names that include an article, a preposition, or both are treated in the same way as

8.12:

analogous French names.

Russian names

8.13:

Tomás de Torquemada; Torquemada

Hungarian names

Manuel de Falla; Falla

Bartolomé de Las Casas; Las Casas

Gonzalo Fernández de Oviedo; Fernández de Oviedo

Traditionally, a married woman replaced her mother's family name with her husband's (first) family

name, sometimes preceded by de. If, for example, María Carmen Mendoza Salinas married Juan

Alberto Peña Montalvo, she could change her legal name to María Carmen Mendoza (de) Peña or, if

the husband was well known by both family names, to María Carmen Mendoza (de) Peña Montalvo.

Many modern women in Spanish-speaking countries, however, no longer take their husband's family

name. For alphabetizing, see 16.84.

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Personal Names >> Non-English Names in an English Context

of Contents

List of Figures

8.12 RUSSIAN NAMES

List of Tables

Russian family names, as well as patronymics (the name preceding the family name and derived from

Index

the name of the father), sometimes take different endings for male and female members of the family.

For example, Lenin's real name was Vladimir Ilyich Ulyanov (given name, patronymic, family name);

his sister Maria was Maria Ilyinichna Ulyanova. In Russian sources (and, by extension, their English

8.10:

translations), often only the given name and patronymic are used; in such instances the patronymic

Dutch names

should not be confused either for a middle name or for the family name.

8.11:

Spanish names

8.12:

Russian names

8.13:

Hungarian names

8.14:

Arabic names

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Personal Names >> Non-English Names in an English Context

of Contents

List of Figures

8.13 HUNGARIAN NAMES

List of Tables

In Hungarian practice the family name precedes the given name--for example, Molnár Ferenc, Kodály

Index

Zoltán. In English contexts, however, such names are usually inverted--Ferenc Molnár, Zoltán Kodály.

In some cases, the family name includes an initial--for example, É. Kiss Katalin. When such a name is

inverted for English contexts (i.e., to become Katalin É. Kiss), the initial should not be confused for a

8.11:

middle initial. When such a name is inverted, as for an index, it is properly listed under the initial (see

Spanish names

16.79).

8.12:

Russian names

8.13:

Hungarian names

8.14:

Arabic names

8.15:

Chinese names

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Personal Names >> Non-English Names in an English Context

of Contents

List of Figures

8.14 ARABIC NAMES

List of Tables

Surnames of Arabic origin (which are strictly surnames rather than family names) are often prefixed

Index

by such elements as Abu, Abd, Ibn, al, or el. Since these are integral parts of a name, just as Mc or Fitz

are parts of certain names, they should not be dropped when the surname is used alone.

Capitalization of such elements varies widely, but terms joined with a hyphen may usually be

8.12:

lowercased. See also 11.99, 11.100, 16.76.

Russian names

8.13:

Syed Abu Zafar Nadvi; Abu Zafar Nadvi

Hungarian names

Abdul Aziz Ibn Saud; Ibn Saud

8.14:

Tawfiq al-Hakim; al-Hakim

Arabic names

8.15:

Names of rulers of older times, however, are often shortened to the first part of the name rather than

Chinese names

the second.

8.16:

Japanese names

Harun al-Rashid; Harun (al-Rashid, "Rightly Guided," was Harun's laqab, a descriptive name he took on his

accession to the caliphate)

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Personal Names >> Non-English Names in an English Context

of Contents

List of Figures

8.15 CHINESE NAMES

List of Tables

In Chinese practice, the family name comes before the given name. (This practice should be followed

Index

in English contexts with names of Chinese persons but not with those of persons of Chinese origin

whose names have been anglicized.) For use of the Pinyin and Wade-Giles systems of transliteration,

see 11.102--10.

8.13:

Hungarian names

Chiang Kai-shek; Chiang (Wade-Giles)

8.14:

Mao Tse-tung; Mao (Wade-Giles)

Arabic names

Li Bai; Li (Pinyin)

8.15:

Du Fu; Du (Pinyin)

Chinese names

8.16:

but

Japanese names

Anthony Yu; Yu

8.17:

Other Asian names

Tang Tsou; Tsou

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Personal Names >> Non-English Names in an English Context

of Contents

List of Figures

8.16 JAPANESE NAMES

List of Tables

In Japanese usage the family name precedes the given name. Japanese names are sometimes

Index

westernized, however, by authors writing in English or persons of Japanese origin living in the West.

Tajima Yumiko; Tajima

8.14:

Yoshida Shigeru; Yoshida

Arabic names

but

8.15:

Chinese names

Noriaki Kurosawa; Kurosawa

8.16:

Japanese names

8.17:

Other Asian names

8.18:

Titles and officesâ

€”the general rule

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Personal Names >> Non-English Names in an English Context

of Contents

List of Figures

8.17 OTHER ASIAN NAMES

List of Tables

In some Asian countries, people are usually known by their given name rather than by a surname or

Index

family name. The Indonesian writer Pramoedya Ananta Toer, for example, is referred to in short form

as Pramoedya (not as Toer). For further examples, see 16.77, 16.81, 16.85, 16.86. If in doubt, use the full form of a name in all references or consult an expert or consult the usage in a reputable source

8.15:

that discusses the person in question.

Chinese names

8.16:

Japanese names

8.17:

Other Asian names

8.18:

Titles and officesâ

€”the general rule

8.19:

Exceptions to the

general rule

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Offices

of Contents

List of Figures

8.18 TITLES AND OFFICES--THE GENERAL RULE

List of Tables

Civil, military, religious, and professional titles are capitalized when they immediately precede a

Index

personal name and are thus used as part of the name (typically replacing the title holder's first name).

In formal prose and other generic text (as opposed to promotional or ceremonial contexts or a

heading), titles are normally lowercased when following a name or used in place of a name (but see

8.16:

8.19). For abbreviated forms, see 10.11--27.

Japanese names

8.17:

President Lincoln; the president

Other Asian names

General Bradley; the general

8.18:

Cardinal Newman; the cardinal

Titles and officesâ

€”the general rule

Governors Quinn and Paterson; the governors

8.19:

Exceptions to the

Although both first and second names may be used after a capitalized title (President Abraham

general rule

Lincoln; but see 8.20)--and though it is perfectly correct to do so--Chicago prefers to avoid such usage

8.20:

in formal prose, especially with civil, corporate, and academic titles (see 8.21, 8.26, 8.27). Note also

Titles used in

apposition

that once a title has been given, it need not be repeated each time a person's name is mentioned.

John F. Kerry, senator from Massachusetts; Senator Kerry; Kerry

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Offices

of Contents

List of Figures

8.19 EXCEPTIONS TO THE GENERAL RULE

List of Tables

In promotional or ceremonial contexts such as a displayed list of donors in the front matter of a book

Index

or a list of corporate officers in an annual report, titles are usually capitalized even when following a

personal name. Exceptions may also be called for in other contexts for reasons of courtesy or

diplomacy.

8.17:

Other Asian names

Maria Martinez, Director of International Sales

8.18:

Titles and officesâ

A title used alone, in place of a personal name, is capitalized only in such contexts as a toast or a

€”the general rule

formal introduction, or when used in direct address.

8.19:

Exceptions to the

general rule

Ladies and Gentlemen, the Prime Minister.

8.20:

I would have done it, Captain, but the ship was sinking.

Titles used in

Thank you, Mr. President.

apposition

8.21:

Civil titles

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Offices

of Contents

List of Figures

8.20 TITLES USED IN APPOSITION

List of Tables

When a title is used in apposition before a personal name--that is, not alone and as part of the name

Index

but as an equivalent to it, usually preceded by the or by a modifier--it is considered not a title but

rather a descriptive phrase and is therefore lowercased.

8.18:

the empress Elizabeth of Austria ( but Empress Elizabeth of Austria)

Titles and officesâ

German chancellor Angela Merkel ( but Chancellor Merkel)

€”the general rule

the German-born pope Benedict XVI

8.19:

former president Carter

Exceptions to the

general rule

former presidents Reagan and Ford

8.20:

the then secretary of state Colin Powell

Titles used in

apposition

8.21:

Civil titles

8.22:

Titles of sovereigns

and other rulers

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Offices

of Contents

List of Figures

8.21 CIVIL TITLES

List of Tables

Much of the usage below is contradicted by the official literature typically generated by political

Index

offices, where capitalization of a title in any position is the norm (see 8.19). In formal academic prose,

however, civil titles are capitalized only when used as part of the name (except as noted). See also

10.13.

8.19:

Exceptions to the

the president; George Washington, first president of the United States; President Washington; the

general rule

presidency; presidential; the Washington administration; Washington; Gloria Macapagal Arroyo, president

8.20:

Titles used in

of the Philippines; President Arroyo; Arroyo

apposition

the vice president; John Adams, vice president of the United States; Vice President Adams; vice-presidential

8.21:

duties

Civil titles

the secretary of state; Hillary Clinton, secretary of state; Secretary of State Clinton or Secretary Clinton

8.22:

the senator; the senator from New York; New York senator Kirsten E. Gillibrand (see 8.20); Senator

Titles of sovereigns

Gillibrand; Senators Gillibrand and Schumer; Senator Mikulski, Democrat from Maryland ( or D-MD)

and other rulers

the representative; the congressman; the congresswoman; Jesse Jackson Jr., representative from Illinois or

8.23:

Military titles

congressman from Illinois; Congressman Jackson or Rep. Jesse Jackson Jr. (D-IL); Kay Granger,

representative from Texas; Congresswoman Granger; the congresswoman or the representative;

Representatives Jackson and Granger

the Speaker; Nancy Pelosi, Speaker of the House of Representatives; Speaker Pelosi ( Speaker is best

capitalized in all contexts to avoid conflation with generic speakers)

the chief justice; John G. Roberts Jr., chief justice of the United States; Chief Justice Roberts (see also 8.63)

the associate justice; Ruth Bader Ginsburg, associate justice; Justice Ginsburg; Justices Ginsburg and Stevens

the chief judge; Timothy C. Evans, chief judge; Judge Evans

the ambassador; Robert Holmes Tuttle, ambassador to the Court of St. James's or ambassador to the United

Kingdom; Ambassador Tuttle

the governor; Joe Manchin, governor of the state of West Virginia; Governor Manchin

the mayor; Richard M. Daley, mayor of Chicago; Mayor Daley

the state senator; Teresa Fedor, Ohio state senator; the Honorable Teresa Fedor

the state representative (same pattern as state senator)

the governor general of Canada; the Right Honourable MichaÃ«lle Jean

the finance minister; Pranab Kumar Mukherjee, finance minister of India; Mukherjee

the prime minister; the Right Honourable Pierre Elliott Trudeau, former prime minister of Canada; Gordon

Brown, the British prime minister

the premier (of a Canadian province); the Honourable Brad Wall

the member of Parliament (UK and Canada); Jane Doe, member of Parliament, or, more commonly, Jane Doe,

MP; Jane Doe, the member for West Hamage

the chief whip; Nathi Mthethwa, chief whip of the African National Congress; Mthethwa

the foreign secretary (UK); the foreign minister (other nations); the British foreign secretary; the German

foreign minister (not used as a title preceding the name)

the chancellor; Angela Merkel, chancellor of Germany; Chancellor Merkel

the chancellor of the exchequer (UK); Alistair Darling; Chancellor Darling

the Lord Privy Seal (UK; always capitalized)

For use of the Honorable and similar terms of respect, see 8.32, 10.18.

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Offices

of Contents

List of Figures

8.22 TITLES OF SOVEREIGNS AND OTHER RULERS

List of Tables

Most titles of sovereigns and other rulers are lowercased when used alone. See also 8.31.

Index

King Abdullah II; the king of Jordan

Queen Elizabeth; Elizabeth II; the queen (in a British Commonwealth context, the Queen)

the Holy Roman emperor

8.20:

Titles used in

Nero, emperor of Rome; the Roman emperor

apposition

Hamad ibn Isa al-Khalifah, king of Bahrain; King Hamad

8.21:

the shah of Iran

Civil titles

the sharif of Mecca

8.22:

the paramount chief of Basutoland

Titles of sovereigns

and other rulers

Wilhelm II, emperor of Germany; Kaiser Wilhelm II; the kaiser

the fÃ¼hrer (Adolf Hitler)

8.23:

Military titles

Il Duce (used only of Benito Mussolini; both i and d capitalized)

8.24:

Quasi-military

titles

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Offices

of Contents

List of Figures

8.23 MILITARY TITLES

List of Tables

As is the case with civil titles, military titles are routinely capitalized in the literature of the

Index

organization or government with which they are associated. Nonetheless, in formal academic prose,

most such titles are capitalized only when used as part of a person's name. Occasional exceptions may

be made if ambiguity threatens. See also 10.13.

8.21:

Civil titles

the general; General Ulysses S. Grant, commander in chief of the Union army; General Grant; the

8.22:

commander in chief

Titles of sovereigns

and other rulers

the general of the army; Omar N. Bradley, general of the army; General Bradley

the admiral; Chester W. Nimitz, fleet admiral; Admiral Nimitz, commander in chief of the Pacific Fleet

8.23:

Military titles

the chairman; Michael G. Mullen, chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff; Admiral Mullen

the captain; Captain Frances LeClaire, company commander

8.24:

Quasi-military

the sergeant; Sergeant Carleton C. Singer; a noncommissioned officer (NCO)

titles

the warrant officer; Warrant Officer John Carmichael

8.25:

the chief petty officer; Chief Petty Officer Tannenbaum

Religious titles

the private; Private T. C. Alhambra

the British general; General Sir Guy Carleton, British commander in New York City; General Carleton

For abbreviations, often used when a title precedes a name and appropriate in material in which

many military titles appear, see 10.15.

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Offices

of Contents

List of Figures

8.24 QUASI-MILITARY TITLES

List of Tables

Titles and ranks used in organizations such as the police, the merchant marine, or the Salvation Army

Index

are treated the same way as military titles.

the chief of police; Frederick Day, Parkdale chief of police; Chief Day

8.22:

the warden; Jane Simmons, warden of the state penitentiary; Warden Simmons

Titles of sovereigns

and other rulers

8.23:

Military titles

8.24:

Quasi-military

titles

8.25:

Religious titles

8.26:

Corporate and

organizational

titles

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Offices

of Contents

List of Figures

8.25 RELIGIOUS TITLES

List of Tables

Religious titles are treated much like civil and military titles (see 8.21, 8.23).

Index

the rabbi; Rabbi Avraham Yitzhak ha-Kohen Kuk; the rabbinate

the cantor or hazzan; Deborah Bard, cantor; Cantor Bard

the sheikh; Sheikh Ibrahim el-Zak Zaky

8.23:

Military titles

the imam; Imam Shamil

8.24:

the ayatollah; Ayatollah Khomeini

Quasi-military

the Dalai Lama (traditionally capitalized); but previous dalai lamas

titles

the sadhu; the guru; the shaman

8.25:

the pope; Pope Benedict XVI; the papacy; papal

Religious titles

the cardinal; Francis Cardinal George or, less formally, Cardinal George; the sacred college of cardinals

8.26:

the patriarch; Cyrillus Lucaris, patriarch of Constantinople; the patriarchate

Corporate and

organizational

the archbishop; the archbishop of Canterbury; Archbishop Williams ( or, in this case, Dr. Williams)

titles

the bishop; the bishop of Toledo; Bishop Donnelly; bishopric; diocese

8.27:

the minister; the Reverend Shirley Stoops

Academic titles

the rector; the Reverend James Williams (see also 10.18, 8.32)

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Offices

of Contents

List of Figures

8.26 CORPORATE AND ORGANIZATIONAL TITLES

List of Tables

Titles of persons holding offices such as those listed below are rarely used as part of a name. If a short

Index

form is required, either the generic term or simply a personal name suffices.

the chief executive officer; Pat Beldos, chief executive officer of Caterham Industries; the CEO

8.24:

the director; Gabriel Dotto, director of the Michigan State University Press

Quasi-military

the school superintendent; Janice Bayder, superintendent of Coriander Township High School District

titles

the secretary-treasurer; Georgina Fido, secretary-treasurer of the Kenilworth Kennel Society

8.25:

Religious titles

8.26:

Corporate and

organizational

titles

8.27:

Academic titles

8.28:

Other academic

designations

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Offices

of Contents

List of Figures

8.27 ACADEMIC TITLES

List of Tables

Academic titles generally follow the pattern for civil titles (see 8.21).

Index

the professor; FranÃ§oise Meltzer, professor of comparative literature; Professor Meltzer

the chair; Jonathan M. Hall, chair of the Department of Classics; Professor Hall (but see 8.29)

the provost; Thomas F. Rosenbaum, provost of the University of Chicago; Rosenbaum

8.25:

Religious titles

the president; Robert J. Zimmer, president of the University of Chicago; Zimmer or President Zimmer

8.26:

the dean; John W. Boyer, dean of the College at the University of Chicago ( the College is an official division

Corporate and

of the University of Chicago); Dean Boyer

organizational

titles

named professorships; Wendy Doniger, Mircea Eliade Distinguished Service Professor of the History of

Religions in the Divinity School; Professor Doniger; Anthony Grafton, Dodge Professor of History,

8.27:

Academic titles

Princeton University; Professor Grafton

the professor emeritus (masc.); the professor emerita (fem.); professors emeriti (masc. or masc. and fem.);

8.28:

Other academic

professors emeritae (fem.); Professor Emerita Neugarten (note that emeritus and emerita are honorary

designations

designations and do not simply mean "retired")

8.29:

Descriptive titles

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Offices

of Contents

List of Figures

8.28 OTHER ACADEMIC DESIGNATIONS

List of Tables

Terms denoting student status are lowercased.

Index

freshman or first-year student

sophomore

junior

8.26:

Corporate and

senior

organizational

titles

Names of degrees, fellowships, and the like are lowercased when referred to generically. See also

8.27:

Academic titles

10.20.

8.28:

Other academic

a master's degree; a doctorate; a fellowship; master of business administration (MBA)

designations

8.29:

Descriptive titles

8.30:

Civic and academic

honors

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Offices

of Contents

List of Figures

8.29 DESCRIPTIVE TITLES

List of Tables

When preceding a name, generic titles that describe a person's role or occupation--such as philosopher

Index

or historian--should be lowercased and treated as if in apposition (see 8.20). Compare 8.27.

the historian William McNeill ( not Historian McNeill)

8.27:

Academic titles

8.28:

Other academic

designations

8.29:

Descriptive titles

8.30:

Civic and academic

honors

8.31:

Titles of nobility

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Offices

of Contents

List of Figures

8.30 CIVIC AND ACADEMIC HONORS

List of Tables

Titles denoting civic or academic honors are capitalized when following a personal name. For awards,

Index

see 8.82; for abbreviations, see 10.21.

Laurence L. Bongie, Fellow of the Royal Society of Canada; the fellows

8.28:

Other academic

designations

8.29:

Descriptive titles

8.30:

Civic and academic

honors

8.31:

Titles of nobility

8.32:

Honorifics

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Offices

of Contents

List of Figures

8.31 TITLES OF NOBILITY

List of Tables

Unlike most of the titles mentioned in the previous paragraphs, titles of nobility do not denote offices

Index

(such as that of a president or an admiral). Whether inherited or conferred, they form an integral and,

with rare exceptions, permanent part of a person's name and are therefore usually capitalized. The

generic element in a title, however (duke, earl, etc.), is lowercased when used alone as a short form of

8.29:

the name. (In British usage, the generic term used alone remains capitalized in the case of royal dukes

Descriptive titles

but not in the case of nonroyal dukes; in North American usage such niceties may be disregarded.)

8.30:

Civic and academic

For further advice consult The Times Style and Usage Guide (bibliog. 1.1), and for a comprehensive

honors

listing consult the latest edition of Burke's Peerage, Baronetage, and Knightage (bibliog. 4.1). See also 8.22.

8.31:

Titles of nobility

the prince; Prince Charles; the Prince of Wales

8.32:

the duke; the duchess; the Duke and Duchess of Windsor

Honorifics

the marquess; the Marquess of Bath; Lord Bath

8.33:

the marchioness; the Marchioness of Bath; Lady Bath

Epithets (or

nicknames) and

the earl; the Earl of Shaftesbury; Lord Shaftesbury; Anthony Ashley Cooper, 7th ( or seventh) Earl of

bynames

Shaftesbury; previous earls of Shaftesbury

the countess (wife of an earl); the Countess of Shaftesbury; Lady Shaftesbury

the viscount; Viscount Eccles; Lord Eccles

Baroness Thatcher; Lady Thatcher (a conferred title)

Dame Judi Dench; Dame Judi (a conferred title)

the baron; Lord Rutland

the baronet; the knight; Sir Paul McCartney; Sir Paul ( not Sir McCartney)

Lady So-and-So [husband's last name] (wife of a marquess, earl, baron, or baronet)

Lady Olivia So-and-So (daughter of a duke, marquess, or earl); Lady Olivia

the Honourable Jessica So-and-So (daughter of a baron)

the duc de Guise (lowercased in accordance with French usage); FranÃ§ois de Lorraine, duc de Guise

the count; Count Helmuth von Moltke or Graf Helmuth von Moltke; the Count of Toulouse or the comte de

Toulouse

Note that marquesses, earls, viscounts, barons, and baronesses are addressed, and referred to after

first mention, as Lord or Lady So-and-So, at least in British usage. The following entry, drawn from

Burke's Peerage, Baronetage, and Knightage, illustrates the complexities of British noble nomenclature:

The 5th Marquess of Salisbury (Sir Robert Arthur James Gascoyne-Cecil, K.G., P.C.), Earl of Salisbury, Wilts;

Viscount Cranborne, Dorset, and Baron Cecil of Essendon, Rutland; co-heir to the Barony of Ogle

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Offices

of Contents

List of Figures

8.32 HONORIFICS

List of Tables

Honorific titles and respectful forms of address are capitalized in any context. For the use of many

Index

such terms in formal correspondence, see "Forms of Address," a comprehensive listing at the back of

the print edition of Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary. For abbreviations, see 10.18. See also 8.25.

8.30:

the Honorable Olympia J. Snowe (US senator, member of Congress, etc.)

Civic and academic

the Right Honourable Stephen Harper (Canadian prime minister)

honors

the First Gentleman; the First Lady

8.31:

the Queen Mother

Titles of nobility

Pandit Nehru

8.32:

Honorifics

Mahatma Gandhi

Her (His, Your) Majesty; His (Her, Your) Royal Highness

8.33:

Epithets (or

the Most Reverend William S. Skylstad (Roman Catholic bishop)

nicknames) and

Your (Her, His) Excellency

bynames

Mr. President; Mrs. President; Ms. President

8.34:

Madam Speaker

Epithets as names

of characters

Your Honor

but

sir, ma'am

my lord, my lady

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Epithets, Kinship Names, and Personifications

of Contents

List of Figures

8.33 EPITHETS (OR NICKNAMES) AND BYNAMES

List of Tables

A descriptive or characterizing word or phrase used as part of, or instead of, a person's name is

Index

capitalized. A the used as part of such a name is not capitalized (except, e.g., at the beginning of a

sentence).

8.31:

the Great Emancipator (Abraham Lincoln)

Titles of nobility

the Sun King (Louis XIV)

8.32:

the Wizard of Menlo Park (Thomas Edison)

Honorifics

Stonewall Jackson

8.33:

Old Hickory (Andrew Jackson)

Epithets (or

nicknames) and

the Young Pretender (Charles Edward Stuart)

bynames

the Great Commoner (William Jennings Bryan)

8.34:

Catherine the Great

Epithets as names

Babe Ruth

of characters

the Swedish Nightingale (Jenny Lind)

8.35:

Ivan the Terrible

Kinship names

When used in addition to a name, an epithet is enclosed in quotation marks and placed either within

or after the name. Parentheses are unnecessary.

George Herman "Babe" Ruth

Jenny Lind, "the Swedish Nightingale"

Ivan IV, "the Terrible"

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Epithets, Kinship Names, and Personifications

of Contents

List of Figures

8.34 EPITHETS AS NAMES OF CHARACTERS

List of Tables

In references to works of drama or fiction, epithets or generic titles used in place of names are

Index

normally capitalized.

John Barrymore performed brilliantly as Chief Executioner.

8.32:

Alice encounters the Red Queen and the Mad Hatter.

Honorifics

8.33:

Epithets (or

nicknames) and

bynames

8.34:

Epithets as names

of characters

8.35:

Kinship names

8.36:

Personifications

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Epithets, Kinship Names, and Personifications

of Contents

List of Figures

8.35 KINSHIP NAMES

List of Tables

Kinship names are lowercased unless they immediately precede a personal name or are used alone, in

Index

place of a personal name. Used in apposition, however, such names are lowercased (see 8.20).

my father and mother

8.33:

the BrontÃ« sisters

Epithets (or

Let's write to Aunt Maud.

nicknames) and

bynames

I believe Grandmother's middle name was Marie.

Please, Dad, let's go.

8.34:

Epithets as names

of characters

but

8.35:

She adores her aunt Maud.

Kinship names

8.36:

Kinship terms used in connection with religious offices or callings are treated similarly.

Personifications

8.37:

The note referred to a certain Brother Thomas, one of the brothers from the Franciscan monastery, . . .

Ethnic and national

groups and

associated

adjectives

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Epithets, Kinship Names, and Personifications

of Contents

List of Figures

8.36 PERSONIFICATIONS

List of Tables

The poetic device of giving abstractions the attributes of persons, and hence capitalizing them, is rare

Index

in today's writing. The use of capitals for such a purpose is best confined to quoted material.

"The Night is Mother of the Day, / The Winter of the Spring, / And ever upon old Decay / The greenest

8.34:

mosses cling." (John Greenleaf Whittier)

Epithets as names

of characters

but

8.35:

Kinship names

In springtime, nature is at its best.

It was a battle between head and heart; reason finally won.

8.36:

Personifications

8.37:

Ethnic and national

groups and

associated

adjectives

8.38:

Compound

nationalities

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ethnic, Socioeconomic, and Other Groups

of Contents

List of Figures

8.37 ETHNIC AND NATIONAL GROUPS AND ASSOCIATED ADJECTIVES

List of Tables

Names of ethnic and national groups are capitalized. Adjectives associated with these names are also

Index

capitalized. For hyphenation or its absence, see 8.38.

Aborigines; an Aborigine; Aboriginal art

8.35:

African Americans; African American culture (see also 8.39)

Kinship names

American Indians; an American Indian (see text below)

8.36:

Arabs; Arabian

Personifications

Asians; Asian influence in the West; an Asian American

8.37:

the British; a British person or, colloquially, a Britisher, a Brit

Ethnic and national

Caucasians; a Caucasian (see also 8.39)

groups and

associated

Chicanos; a Chicano; a Chicana

adjectives

European Americans

8.38:

the French; a Frenchman; a Frenchwoman

Compound

nationalities

French Canadians

Hispanics; a Hispanic

8.39:

Color

Hopis; a Hopi; Hopi customs

Inuit; Inuit sculpture

Italian Americans; an Italian American neighborhood

Jews; a Jew; Jewish ethnicity (see also 8.95)

Latinos; a Latino; a Latina; Latino immigration

Native Americans; Native American poetry (see text below)

New Zealanders; New Zealand immigration

Pygmies; a Pygmy; Pygmy peoples

Romanies; a Romany; the Romany people

Many among those who trace their roots to the aboriginal peoples of the Americas prefer American

Indians to Native Americans, and in certain historical works Indians may be more appropriate.

Canadians often speak of First Peoples (and of First Nations). See also 7.9.

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ethnic, Socioeconomic, and Other Groups

of Contents

List of Figures

8.38 COMPOUND NATIONALITIES

List of Tables

Whether terms such as African American, Italian American, Chinese American, and the like should be

Index

spelled open or hyphenated has been the subject of considerable controversy, the hyphen being

regarded by some as suggestive of bias. Chicago doubts that hyphenation represents bias, but since

the hyphen does not aid comprehension in such terms as those mentioned above, it may be omitted

8.36:

unless a particular publisher requires it. See also the table at 7.85, section 2, under proper nouns and

Personifications

adjectives relating to geography or nationality.

8.37:

Ethnic and national

groups and

associated

adjectives

8.38:

Compound

nationalities

8.39:

Color

8.40:

Class

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ethnic, Socioeconomic, and Other Groups

of Contents

List of Figures

8.39 COLOR

List of Tables

Common designations of ethnic groups by color are usually lowercased unless a particular publisher

Index

or author prefers otherwise. See also 8.37.

black people; blacks; people of color

8.37:

white people; whites

Ethnic and national

groups and

associated

adjectives

8.38:

Compound

nationalities

8.39:

Color

8.40:

Class

8.41:

Generation

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ethnic, Socioeconomic, and Other Groups

of Contents

List of Figures

8.40 CLASS

List of Tables

Terms denoting socioeconomic classes or groups are lowercased.

Index

the middle class; a middle-class neighborhood

the upper-middle class; an upper-middle-class family

blue-collar workers

8.38:

Compound

the aristocracy

nationalities

the proletariat

8.39:

homeless people

Color

8.40:

Class

8.41:

Generation

8.42:

Physical

characteristics

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ethnic, Socioeconomic, and Other Groups

of Contents

List of Figures

8.41 GENERATION

List of Tables

Terms denoting generations are best lowercased.

Index

the me generation

baby boomer(s); baby busters

generation X; generation Y; generation Z

8.39:

Color

the MTV generation

8.40:

Class

8.41:

Generation

8.42:

Physical

characteristics

8.43:

Names of placesâ

€”additional

resources

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ethnic, Socioeconomic, and Other Groups

of Contents

List of Figures

8.42 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

List of Tables

Terms describing groups or individuals according to a physical characteristic or a disability are

Index

usually lowercased.

wheelchair users

8.40:

blind persons

Class

deaf children

8.41:

Generation

Some writers capitalize deaf when referring to people who identify themselves as members of the

8.42:

distinct linguistic and cultural group whose primary language is ASL--the Deaf community--and

Physical

characteristics

lowercase it when referring to people who have a hearing loss or to those deaf people who prefer oral

methods of communication. See also 11.144.

8.43:

Names of placesâ

€”additional

resources

8.44:

Continents,

countries, cities,

oceans, and such

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places

of Contents

List of Figures

8.43 NAMES OF PLACES--ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

For the spelling of names of places, consult Merriam-Webster's Geographical Dictionary (bibliog. 4.2).

Index

Since names of countries and cities often change, however, even the most recent edition of such a

reference work cannot be current in every detail. Moreover, not all writers will be in agreement on

the proper form of every place-name (e.g., some will insist on Burma rather than Myanmar). For

8.41:

country names, the US Central Intelligence Agency's World Factbook--continually updated--is a good

Generation

place to start (bibliog. 4.2). For historical works, writers and editors should attempt to use the form of

8.42:

Physical

names appropriate to the period under discussion.

characteristics

8.43:

Names of placesâ

€”additional

resources

8.44:

Continents,

countries, cities,

oceans, and such

8.45:

Points of the

compass

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places >> Parts of the World

of Contents

List of Figures

8.44 CONTINENTS, COUNTRIES, CITIES, OCEANS, AND SUCH

List of Tables

Entities that appear on maps are always capitalized, as are adjectives and nouns derived from them.

Index

An initial the as part of a name is lowercased in running text, except in the rare case of an initial the in

the name of a city.

8.42:

Asia; Asian

Physical

Ireland; Irish

characteristics

California; Californian

8.43:

Chicago; Chicagoan

Names of placesâ

€”additional

Atlantic Ocean; Atlantic

resources

South China Sea

8.44:

the North Pole

Continents,

countries, cities,

the Netherlands; Dutch

oceans, and such

but

8.45:

Points of the

compass

The Hague

8.46:

Regions of the

world and national

regions

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places >> Parts of the World

of Contents

List of Figures

8.45 POINTS OF THE COMPASS

List of Tables

Compass points and terms derived from them are lowercased if they simply indicate direction or

Index

location. But see 8.46.

pointing toward the north; a north wind; a northern climate

8.43:

to fly east; an eastward move; in the southwest of France; southwesterly

Names of placesâ

€”additional

resources

8.44:

Continents,

countries, cities,

oceans, and such

8.45:

Points of the

compass

8.46:

Regions of the

world and national

regions

8.47:

Popular place-

names or epithets

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places >> Parts of the World

of Contents

List of Figures

8.46 REGIONS OF THE WORLD AND NATIONAL REGIONS

List of Tables

Terms that denote regions of the world or of a particular country are often capitalized, as are a few of

Index

the adjectives and nouns derived from such terms. The following examples illustrate not only the

principles sketched in 8.1 but also variations based on context and usage. For terms not included here

or for which no suitable analogy can be made, consult Webster's or an encyclopedia: if an otherwise

8.44:

generic term is not listed there (either capitalized or, for dictionary entries, with the indication

Continents,

countries, cities,

capitalized next to the applicable subentry), opt for lowercase. Note that exceptions based on specific

oceans, and such

regional, political, or historical contexts are inevitable and that an author's strong preference should

8.45:

usually be respected. See also 8.45.

Points of the

compass

the Swiss Alps; the Australian Alps; the Alps; an Alpine village (if in the European or Australian Alps);

8.46:

Regions of the

Alpine skiing; but alpine pastures in the Rockies (see also 8.52)

world and national

Antarctica; the Antarctic Circle; the Antarctic Continent

regions

the Arctic; the Arctic Circle; Arctic waters; a mass of Arctic air ( but lowercased when used metaphorically, as

8.47:

Popular place-

in "an arctic stare"; see 8.60)

names or epithets

Central America, Central American countries; central Asia; central Illinois; central France; central Europe ( but

8.48:

Central Europe when referring to the political division of World War I)

Urban areas

the continental United States; the continent of Europe; but on the Continent (used to denote mainland

Europe); Continental cuisine; but continental breakfast

the East, eastern, an easterner (referring to the eastern part of the United States or other country); the

Eastern Seaboard (or Atlantic Seaboard), East Coast (referring to the eastern United States); the East, the

Far East, Eastern (referring to the Orient and Asian culture); the Middle East ( or, formerly more common,

the Near East), Middle Eastern (referring to Iran, Iraq, etc.); the Eastern Hemisphere; eastern Europe ( but

Eastern Europe when referring to the post--World War II division of Europe); east, eastern, eastward, to

the east (directions)

the equator; equatorial climate; the Equatorial Current; Equatorial Guinea (formerly Spanish Guinea)

the Great Plains; the northern plains; the plains ( but Plains Indians)

the Midwest, midwestern, a midwesterner (as of the United States)

the North, northern, a northerner (of a country); the North, Northern, Northerner (in American Civil War

contexts); Northern California; North Africa, North African countries, in northern Africa; North America,

North American, the North American continent; the North Atlantic, a northern Atlantic route; the

Northern Hemisphere; the Far North; north, northern, northward, to the north (directions)

the Northeast, the Northwest, northwestern, northeastern, a northwesterner, a northeasterner (as of the

United States); the Pacific Northwest; the Northwest Passage

the poles; the North Pole; the North Polar ice cap; the South Pole; polar regions ( see also Antarctica; the

Arctic)

the South, southern, a southerner (of a country); the South, Southern, a Southerner (in American Civil War

contexts); the Deep South; Southern California; the South of France (region); Southeast Asia; South Africa,

South African (referring to the Republic of South Africa); southern Africa (referring to the southern part

of the continent); south, southern, southward, to the south (directions)

the Southeast, the Southwest, southeastern, southwestern, a southeasterner, a southwesterner (as of the

United States)

the tropics, tropical; the Tropic of Cancer; the Neotropics, Neotropical (of the New World biogeographical

region); the subtropics, subtropical

the Upper Peninsula (of Michigan); the upper reaches of the Thames

the West, western, a westerner (of a country); the West Coast; the West, Western (referring to the culture of

the Occident, or Europe and the Western Hemisphere); west, western, westward, to the west (directions)

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places >> Parts of the World

of Contents

List of Figures

8.47 POPULAR PLACE-NAMES OR EPITHETS

List of Tables

Popular names of places, or epithets, are usually capitalized. Quotation marks are not needed. Some

Index

of the following examples may be used of more than one place. None should be used in contexts

where they will not be readily understood. See also 8.33.

8.45:

Back Bay

Points of the

the Badger State

compass

the Badlands

8.46:

the Bay Area

Regions of the

world and national

the Beltway

regions

the Bible Belt

8.47:

the Cape

Popular place-

names or epithets

the Delta

the East End

8.48:

Urban areas

the Eastern Shore

the Eternal City

8.49:

Real versus

the Fertile Crescent

metaphorical

the Gaza Strip

names

the Gulf

the Holy City

the Jewish Quarter

the Lake District

the Left Bank

the Loop (Chicago)

the Old World

the Panhandle

the Promised Land

the Rust Belt

Silicon Valley

Skid Row

the South Seas

the South Side

the Sun Belt

the Twin Cities

the Upper West Side

the Village (Greenwich Village)

the West End

the Wild West

the Windy City

Certain terms considered political rather than geographical need not be capitalized. Some editorial

discretion is advisable, however. In reference to Soviet-era global politics, for example, the following

terms might be suitably capitalized:

the iron curtain or Iron Curtain

the third world or Third World

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places >> Parts of the World

of Contents

List of Figures

8.48 URBAN AREAS

List of Tables

Generic terms used for parts of urban areas are not capitalized.

Index

the business district

the inner city

8.46:

Regions of the

But when greater is used with the name of a city to denote a whole metropolitan area, it is capitalized.

world and national

regions

Greater Chicago ( but the greater Chicago metropolitan area)

8.47:

Greater London

Popular place-

names or epithets

8.48:

Urban areas

8.49:

Real versus

metaphorical

names

8.50:

Political divisionsâ

€”capitalization

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places >> Parts of the World

of Contents

List of Figures

8.49 REAL VERSUS METAPHORICAL NAMES

List of Tables

Mecca is capitalized when referring to the Islamic holy city, as is Utopia when referring to Thomas

Index

More's imaginary country. Both are lowercased when used metaphorically. See also 8.60.

Stratford-upon-Avon is a mecca for Shakespeare enthusiasts.

8.47:

She is trying to create a utopia for her children.

Popular place-

names or epithets

8.48:

Urban areas

8.49:

Real versus

metaphorical

names

8.50:

Political divisionsâ

€”capitalization

8.51:

Governmental

entities

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places >> Political Divisions

of Contents

List of Figures

8.50 POLITICAL DIVISIONS--CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

Words denoting political divisions--from empire, republic, and state down to ward and precinct--are

Index

capitalized when they follow a name and are used as an accepted part of the name. When preceding

the name, such terms are usually capitalized in names of countries but lowercased in entities below

the national level (but see 8.51). Used alone, they are usually lowercased.

8.48:

Urban areas

the Ottoman Empire; the empire

8.49:

the British Commonwealth; Commonwealth nations; the Commonwealth ( but a commonwealth)

Real versus

metaphorical

the United States; the Republic; the Union

names

the United Kingdom; Great Britain; Britain ( not the kingdom)

8.50:

the Russian Federation (formerly the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics; the Soviet Union); Russia; the

Political divisionsâ

federation

€”capitalization

the Republic of South Africa (formerly the Union of South Africa); South Africa; the republic

8.51:

the Fifth Republic (France)

Governmental

entities

the Republic of Indonesia; the republic

8.52:

the Republic of Lithuania; the republic

Mountains, rivers,

the Federal Democratic Republic of Ethiopia; the republic; the State of the Gambella Peoples; the state

and the like

the Commonwealth of Australia; the commonwealth; the state of New South Wales; the Australian Capital

Territory

the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico

Washington State; the state of Washington

the New England states

the province of Ontario

Jiangxi Province

Massachusetts Bay Colony; the colony at Massachusetts Bay

the British colonies; the thirteen colonies

the Indiana Territory; the territory of Indiana

the Northwest Territory; the Old Northwest

the Western Reserve

Lake County; the county of Lake; the county; county Kildare (Irish usage)

New York City; the city of New York

the City (the old city of London, now the financial district, always capitalized)

Shields Township; the township

the Eleventh Congressional District; the congressional district

the Fifth Ward; the ward

the Sixth Precinct; the precinct

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places >> Political Divisions

of Contents

List of Figures

8.51 GOVERNMENTAL ENTITIES

List of Tables

In contexts where a specific governmental body rather than the place is meant, the words state, city,

Index

and the like are usually capitalized when used as part of the full name of the body. See also 8.50.

She works for the Village of Forest Park.

8.49:

That is a City of Chicago ordinance.

Real versus

metaphorical

but

names

8.50:

Residents of the village of Forest Park enjoy easy access to the city of Chicago.

Political divisionsâ

€”capitalization

8.51:

Governmental

entities

8.52:

Mountains, rivers,

and the like

8.53:

Generic terms for

geographic entities

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places >> Topographical Divisions

of Contents

List of Figures

8.52 MOUNTAINS, RIVERS, AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

Names of mountains, rivers, oceans, islands, and so forth are capitalized. The generic term ( mountain,

Index

etc.) is also capitalized when used as part of the name. In the plural, it is capitalized when it is part of

a single name (Hawaiian Islands) and when it is used of two or more names, whether beginning with

the generic term (Mounts Washington and Rainier) or--in a return to earlier editions of this manual--

8.50:

when the generic term comes second and applies to two or more names (e.g., the Illinois and the

Political divisionsâ

€”capitalization

Chicago Rivers). Such capitalization signals unambiguously that the generic term forms part of each

8.51:

proper noun. See also 8.55.

Governmental

entities

Walden Pond

8.52:

Silver Lake

Mountains, rivers,

and the like

Lake Michigan; Lakes Michigan and Erie; the Great Lakes

the Illinois River; the Illinois and the Chicago Rivers

8.53:

Generic terms for

the Nile River valley; the Nile valley; the Nile delta; the Mississippi River valley; the Mississippi delta

geographic entities

(where river forms part of the proper names but valley and delta do not)

8.54:

the Bering Strait

Foreign terms for

geographic entities

the Mediterranean Sea; the Mediterranean

the Pacific Ocean; the Pacific and the Atlantic Oceans

the Great Barrier Reef

the Hawaiian Islands; Hawaii; but the island of Hawaii

the Windward Islands; the Windwards

the Iberian Peninsula

Cape Verde

the Black Forest

Stone Mountain

Mount Washington; Mount Rainier; Mounts Washington and Rainier

the Rocky Mountains; the Rockies (see also 8.46)

Death Valley; the Valley of Kings

the Continental Divide

the Horn of Africa

the Indian subcontinent (a descriptive rather than proper geographical name)

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places >> Topographical Divisions

of Contents

List of Figures

8.53 GENERIC TERMS FOR GEOGRAPHIC ENTITIES

List of Tables

When a generic term is used descriptively (or in apposition; see 8.20) rather than as part of a name, or

Index

when used alone, it is lowercased.

the Amazon basin

8.51:

along the Pacific coast ( but the West Coast; see 8.46)

Governmental

the California desert

entities

the river Thames

8.52:

the Hudson River valley

Mountains, rivers,

and the like

8.53:

Generic terms for

geographic entities

8.54:

Foreign terms for

geographic entities

8.55:

Thoroughfares and

the like

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places >> Topographical Divisions

of Contents

List of Figures

8.54 FOREIGN TERMS FOR GEOGRAPHIC ENTITIES

List of Tables

When a foreign generic term forms part of a geographic name, the equivalent English term should not

Index

be included.

the Rio Grande ( not the Rio Grande River)

8.52:

Fujiyama ( not Mount Fujiyama)

Mountains, rivers,

Mauna Loa ( not Mount Mauna Loa)

and the like

the Sierra Nevada ( not the Sierra Nevada Mountains)

8.53:

Generic terms for

geographic entities

8.54:

Foreign terms for

geographic entities

8.55:

Thoroughfares and

the like

8.56:

Buildings and

monuments

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places >> Public Places and Major Structures

of Contents

List of Figures

8.55 THOROUGHFARES AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

The names of streets, avenues, squares, parks, and so forth are capitalized. The generic term is

Index

lowercased when used alone but--in a return to earlier editions of this manual--capitalized when used

as part of a plural name (see also 8.52).

8.53:

Broadway

Generic terms for

Fifty-Fifth Street; Fifty-Seventh and Fifty-Fifth Streets

geographic entities

Hyde Park Boulevard; the boulevard

8.54:

Interstate 80; I-80; an interstate highway

Foreign terms for

geographic entities

the Ishtar Gate; the gate

8.55:

Jackson Park; the park

Thoroughfares and

London Bridge; the bridge

the like

the Mall (in London)

8.56:

Park Lane

Buildings and

monuments

Pennsylvania Avenue; Carnegie and Euclid Avenues

Piccadilly Circus

8.57:

Rooms, offices, and

the Spanish Steps; the steps

such

Tiananmen Square; the square

US Route 66; Routes 1 and 2; a state route

See also 9.51--53.

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places >> Public Places and Major Structures

of Contents

List of Figures

8.56 BUILDINGS AND MONUMENTS

List of Tables

The names of buildings and monuments are generally capitalized. The generic term is usually

Index

lowercased when used alone but capitalized when used as part of a plural name (as in the fifth

example; see also 8.52, 8.55).

8.54:

the Babri Mosque; the mosque

Foreign terms for

the Berlin Wall; the wall

geographic entities

Buckingham Fountain; the fountain

8.55:

the Capitol (where the US Congress meets, as distinct from the capital city)

Thoroughfares and

the like

the Chrysler Building; the building; the Empire State and Chrysler Buildings

8.56:

the Houses of Parliament

Buildings and

the Jefferson Memorial; the memorial

monuments

the Leaning Tower of Pisa

8.57:

the Pyramids ( but the Egyptian pyramids)

Rooms, offices, and

such

Shedd Aquarium; the aquarium

the Stone of Scone

8.58:

Foreign names for

Symphony Center; the center

places and

Tribune Tower; the tower

structures

the Washington Monument; the monument

Westminster Abbey; the abbey

the White House

Though major works of art are generally italicized, some massive works of sculpture are regarded

primarily as monuments and therefore not italicized (see 8.193).

the Statue of Liberty; the statue

Mount Rushmore National Memorial; Mount Rushmore

the Colossus of Rhodes; the colossus

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places >> Public Places and Major Structures

of Contents

List of Figures

8.57 ROOMS, OFFICES, AND SUCH

List of Tables

Official names of rooms, offices, and the like are capitalized.

Index

the Empire Room ( but room 421)

the Amelia Earhart Suite ( but suite 219)

the Lincoln Bedroom

8.55:

Thoroughfares and

the Oval Office

the like

the West Wing of the White House

8.56:

Buildings and

monuments

8.57:

Rooms, offices, and

such

8.58:

Foreign names for

places and

structures

8.59:

When to capitalize

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Places >> Public Places and Major Structures

of Contents

List of Figures

8.58 FOREIGN NAMES FOR PLACES AND STRUCTURES

List of Tables

Foreign names of thoroughfares and buildings are not italicized and may be preceded by English the

Index

if the definite article would appear in the original language.

the Champs-ElysÃ©es

8.56:

the BibliothÃ¨que nationale

Buildings and

the Bois de Boulogne

monuments

Unter den Linden (never preceded by the)

8.57:

the Marktstrasse

Rooms, offices, and

such

the Piazza delle Terme

8.58:

Foreign names for

places and

structures

8.59:

When to capitalize

8.60:

When not to

capitalize

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Words Derived from Proper Names

of Contents

List of Figures

8.59 WHEN TO CAPITALIZE

List of Tables

Adjectives derived from personal names are normally capitalized. Those in common use may be

Index

found in Webster's, sometimes in the biographical names section (e.g., Aristotelian, Jamesian,

Machiavellian, Shakespearean). If not in the dictionary, adjectives can sometimes be coined by adding

ian (to a name ending in a consonant) or an (to a name ending in e or i)--or, failing these, esque. As

8.57:

with Foucault and Shaw, the final consonant sometimes undergoes a transformation as an aid to

Rooms, offices, and

such

pronunciation. If a name does not seem to lend itself to any such coinage, it is best avoided. See also

8.58:

8.60, 8.78.

Foreign names for

places and

structures

Baudelaire; Baudelairean

Bayes; Bayesian

8.59:

When to capitalize

Dickens; Dickensian

Foucault; Foucauldian

8.60:

When not to

Jordan; Jordanesque (Ã la Michael Jordan)

capitalize

Kafka; Kafkaesque

8.61:

Marx; Marxist

Legislative and

deliberative bodies

Mendel; Mendelian

Rabelais; Rabelaisian

Sartre; Sartrean

Shaw; Shavian

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Words Derived from Proper Names

of Contents

List of Figures

8.60 WHEN NOT TO CAPITALIZE

List of Tables

Personal, national, or geographical names, and words derived from such names, are often lowercased

Index

when used with a nonliteral meaning. For example, the cheese known as "gruyÃ¨re" takes its name

from a district in Switzerland but is not necessarily from there; "swiss cheese" (lowercase s) is a cheese

that resembles Swiss emmentaler (which derives its name from the Emme River valley). Although

8.58:

some of the terms in this paragraph and the examples that follow are capitalized in Webster's, Chicago

Foreign names for

places and

prefers to lowercase them in their nonliteral use. See also 8.78.

structures

8.59:

anglicize

When to capitalize

arabic numerals

8.60:

arctics (boots)

When not to

capitalize

bohemian

brie

8.61:

Legislative and

brussels sprouts

deliberative bodies

cheddar

8.62:

delphic

Administrative

diesel engine

bodies

dutch oven

epicure

frankfurter

french dressing

french fries

french windows

gruyÃ¨re

herculean

homeric

india ink

italic type

italicize

jeremiad

lombardy poplar

manila envelope

morocco leather

pasteurize

pharisaic

philistine, philistinism

platonic (but see 8.78)

quixotic

roman numerals

roman type

scotch whisky; scotch

stilton

swiss cheese (not made in Switzerland)

venetian blinds

vulcanize

wiener

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Organizations >> Governmental Bodies

of Contents

List of Figures

8.61 LEGISLATIVE AND DELIBERATIVE BODIES

List of Tables

The full names of legislative and deliberative bodies, departments, bureaus, and offices are capitalized

Index

(but see 8.64). Adjectives derived from them are usually lowercased, as are many of the generic

names for such bodies when used alone (as on subsequent mentions). For generic names used alone

but not listed here, opt for lowercase. For administrative bodies, see 8.62; for judicial bodies, see 8.63.

8.59:

See also 11.8.

When to capitalize

8.60:

the United Nations General Assembly; the UN General Assembly; the assembly

When not to

capitalize

the League of Nations; the league

the United Nations Security Council; the Security Council; the council

8.61:

Legislative and

the United States Congress; the US Congress; the Ninety-Seventh Congress; Congress; 97th Cong.;

deliberative bodies

congressional

8.62:

the United States Senate; the Senate; senatorial; the upper house of Congress

Administrative

bodies

the House of Representatives; the House; the lower house of Congress

the Electoral College

8.63:

Judicial bodies

the Committee on Foreign Affairs; the Foreign Affairs Committee; the committee

the Illinois General Assembly; the assembly; the Illinois legislature; the state senate

the Chicago City Council; the city council

the British Parliament (or UK Parliament); Parliament; an early parliament; parliamentary; the House of

Commons; the Commons; the House of Lords; the Lords

the Crown (the British monarchy); Crown lands

the Privy Council ( but a Privy Counsellor)

the Parliament of Canada; Parliament; the Senate (upper house); the House of Commons (lower house)

the Legislative Assembly of British Columbia; the National Assembly of Quebec or AssemblÃ©e nationale

du QuÃ©bec

the DÃ¡il Ã‰ireann (lower house of the Irish parliament)

the AssemblÃ©e nationale or the National Assembly (present-day France); the (French) Senate; the

parliamentary system; the Parlement de Paris (historical)

the States General or Estates General (France and Netherlands, historical)

the Cortes (Spain; a plural form in Spanish but used as a singular in English)

the CÃ¡mera de Diputados (the lower house of Mexico's congress)

the Bundestag (German parliament); the Bundesrat (German upper house); the Reichstag (imperial

Germany)

the House of People's Representatives; the House of Federation; the Council of Ministers (Ethiopia)

the Dewan Perwakilan Rakyat or House of Representatives; the Majelis Permusyawaratan Rakyat or People's

Consultative Assembly (Indonesia)

the European Parliament; the Parliament

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Organizations >> Governmental Bodies

of Contents

List of Figures

8.62 ADMINISTRATIVE BODIES

List of Tables

The full names of administrative bodies are capitalized. Adjectives derived from them are usually

Index

lowercased, as are many of the generic names for such bodies when used alone. See also 8.61.

the Bureau of the Census; census forms; the census of 2000

8.60:

the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention; the CDC (abbreviation did not change when "and

When not to

Prevention" was added to name)

capitalize

the Department of the Interior; the Interior

8.61:

the Department of State; the State Department; the department; departmental

Legislative and

deliberative bodies

the Department of the Treasury; the Treasury

the Federal Bureau of Investigation; the bureau; the FBI

8.62:

Administrative

the Federal Reserve System; the Federal Reserve Board; the Federal Reserve

bodies

the National Institutes of Health; the NIH; the National Institute of Mental Health; the NIMH

8.63:

the Occupational Safety and Health Administration; OSHA

Judicial bodies

the Office of Human Resources; Human Resources

8.64:

the Peace Corps

Government

entities that are

the United States Postal Service; the Postal Service; the post office

lowercased

the Illinois State Board of Education; the board of education

the Ithaca City School District; the school district; the district

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Organizations >> Governmental Bodies

of Contents

List of Figures

8.63 JUDICIAL BODIES

List of Tables

The full name of a court, often including a place-name, is capitalized. Subsequent references to a court

Index

(or district court, supreme court, etc.) are lowercased, except when referring to a supreme court at the

national level.

8.61:

the United States ( or US) Supreme Court; the Supreme Court; but the court

Legislative and

the United States Court of Appeals for the Seventh Circuit; the court of appeals

deliberative bodies

the Arizona Supreme Court; the supreme court; the supreme courts of Arizona and New Mexico

8.62:

the District Court for the Southern District of New York; the district court

Administrative

bodies

the Court of Common Pleas (Ohio); the court

8.63:

the Circuit Court of Lake County, Family Division (Illinois); family court

Judicial bodies

the Supreme Court of Canada; the Supreme Court; the court

8.64:

the Birmingham Crown Court; Dawlish Magistrates' Court (England)

Government

the Federal Supreme Court (Ethiopia)

entities that are

lowercased

States, counties, and cities vary in the way they name their courts. For example, court of appeals in

8.65:

Organizations,

New York State and Maryland is equivalent to supreme court in other states; and such terms as district

parties, alliances,

and so forth

court, circuit court, superior court, and court of common pleas are used for similar court systems in

different states. Generic names should therefore be used only after the full name or jurisdiction has

been stated.

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Organizations >> Governmental Bodies

of Contents

List of Figures

8.64 GOVERNMENT ENTITIES THAT ARE LOWERCASED

List of Tables

Certain generic terms associated with governmental bodies are lowercased. Compare 8.50.

Index

administration; the Carter administration

brain trust

cabinet ( but the Kitchen Cabinet in the Jackson administration)

8.62:

Administrative

city hall (the municipal government and the building)

bodies

civil service

8.63:

court (a royal court)

Judicial bodies

executive, legislative, or judicial branch

8.64:

federal; the federal government; federal agencies

Government

entities that are

government

lowercased

monarchy

8.65:

parlement (French; but the Parlement of Paris)

Organizations,

parliament, parliamentary ( but Parliament, usually not preceded by the, in the United Kingdom)

parties, alliances,

and so forth

state; church and state; state powers

8.66:

Adherents of

unofficial political

groups and

movements

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Organizations >> Political and Economic Organizations and Movements

of Contents

List of Figures

8.65 ORGANIZATIONS, PARTIES, ALLIANCES, AND SO FORTH

List of Tables

Official names of national and international organizations, alliances, and political movements and

Index

parties are capitalized (e.g., "the Labor Party in Israel"). Words like party, union, and movement are

capitalized when they are part of the name of an organization. Terms identifying formal members of

or adherents to such groups are also usually capitalized (e.g., "a Socialist"; "a Republican"). Names of

8.63:

the systems of thought and references to the adherents to such systems, however, are often

Judicial bodies

lowercased (e.g., "an eighteenth-century precursor of socialism"; "a communist at heart"). Nonliteral or

8.64:

Government

metaphorical references are also lowercased (e.g., "fascist parenting techniques"; "nazi tendencies").

entities that are

For consistency, however--as in a work about communism in which the philosophy, its adherents, the

lowercased

political party, and party members are discussed--capitalizing the philosophy, together with the

8.65:

Organizations,

organization and its adherents, in both noun and adjective forms, will prevent editorial headaches.

parties, alliances,

and so forth

the African National Congress party ( party is not part of the official name); the ANC

8.66:

Arab Socialist BaÊ¿th Party; the BaÊ¿th Party; the party; BaÊ¿thists

Adherents of

unofficial political

Bahujan Samaj Party; the BSP

groups and

Bolshevik(s); the Bolshevik ( or Bolshevist) movement; bolshevism or Bolshevism (see text above)

movements

Chartist; Chartism

8.67:

Institutions and

the Communist Party ( but Communist parties); the party; Communist(s); Communist countries; communism

companiesâ

or Communism (see text above)

€”capitalization

the Democratic Party; the party; Democrat(s) (party members or adherents); democracy; democratic nations

the Entente Cordiale (signed 1904); the Entente; but an entente cordiale

the Ethiopian Somali Democratic League; the league; the party

the European Union; the EU; the Common Market

the Fascist Party; Fascist(s); fascism or Fascism (see text above)

the Federalist Party; Federalist(s) (US history); federalism or Federalism (see text above)

the Free-Soil Party; Free-Soiler(s)

the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade; GATT

the Green Party; the party; Green(s); the Green movement

the Hanseatic League; Hansa; a Hanseatic city

the Holy Alliance

the Know-Nothing Party; Know-Nothing(s)

the Labour Party; Labourite(s) (members of the British party)

the League of Arab States; the Arab League; the league

the Libertarian Party; Libertarian(s); libertarianism or Libertarianism (see text above)

Loyalist(s) (American Revolution; Spanish Civil War)

Marxism-Leninism; Marxist-Leninist(s)

the National Socialist Party; National Socialism; the Nazi Party; Nazi(s); Nazism

the North American Free Trade Agreement; NAFTA (see 10.6)

the North Atlantic Treaty Organization; NATO

the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development; the OECD; the organization

the Popular Front; the Front; but a popular front

the Populist Party; Populist(s); populism or Populism (see text above)

the Progressive Party; Progressive movement; Progressive(s); progressivism or Progressivism (see text above)

the Quadruple Alliance; the alliance

the Rashtriya Janata Dal; the RJD (National People's Party)

the Republican Party; the party; the GOP (Grand Old Party); Republican(s) (party members or adherents);

republicanism; a republican form of government

the Social Democratic Party; the party; Social Democrat(s)

the Socialist Party ( but Socialist parties); the party; Socialist(s) (party members or adherents); socialism or

Socialism (see text above)

the United Democratic Movement; the movement

the World Health Organization; WHO

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Organizations >> Political and Economic Organizations and Movements

of Contents

List of Figures

8.66 ADHERENTS OF UNOFFICIAL POLITICAL GROUPS AND MOVEMENTS

List of Tables

Names for adherents of political groups or movements other than recognized parties are usually

Index

lowercased.

anarchist(s)

8.64:

centrist(s)

Government

independent(s)

entities that are

lowercased

moderate(s)

mugwump(s)

8.65:

Organizations,

opposition ( but the Opposition, in British and Canadian contexts, referring to the party out of power)

parties, alliances,

and so forth

but

8.66:

Adherents of

the Left; members of the left wing; left-winger(s); on the left

unofficial political

the Right; members of the right wing; right-winger(s); on the right

groups and

movements

the Far Left

the Far Right

8.67:

Institutions and

the radical Right

companiesâ

€”capitalization

8.68:

Names with

unusual

capitalization

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Organizations >> Institutions and Companies

of Contents

List of Figures

8.67 INSTITUTIONS AND COMPANIES--CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

The full names of institutions, groups, and companies and the names of their departments, and often

Index

the shortened forms of such names (e.g., the Art Institute), are capitalized. A the preceding a name,

even when part of the official title, is lowercased in running text. Such generic terms as company and

university are usually lowercased when used alone (though they are routinely capitalized in

8.65:

promotional materials, business documents, and the like).

Organizations,

parties, alliances,

and so forth

the University of Chicago; the university; the University of Chicago and Harvard University; Northwestern

8.66:

and Princeton Universities; the University of Wisconsin--Madison

Adherents of

the Department of History; the department; the Law School

unofficial political

groups and

the University of Chicago Press; the press

movements

the Board of Trustees of the University of Chicago; the board of trustees; the board

8.67:

the Art Institute of Chicago; the Art Institute

Institutions and

the Beach Boys; the Beatles; the Grateful Dead, the Dead; the Who ( but Tha Eastsidaz)

companiesâ

€”capitalization

Captain Beefheart and His Magic Band; the band

8.68:

the Cleveland Orchestra; the orchestra

Names with

the General Foods Corporation; General Foods; the corporation

unusual

capitalization

the Green Bay Packers; the Packers

the Hudson's Bay Company; the company

8.69:

Associations,

the Illinois Central Railroad; the Illinois Central; the railroad

unions, and the

the Library of Congress; the library

like

the Manuscripts Division of the library

the Museum of Modern Art; MOMA; the museum

the New York Stock Exchange; the stock exchange

Skidmore, Owings & Merrill; SOM; the architectural firm

the Smithsonian Institution; the Smithsonian

Miguel Juarez Middle School; the middle school

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Organizations >> Institutions and Companies

of Contents

List of Figures

8.68 NAMES WITH UNUSUAL CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

Parts of names given in full capitals on the letterhead or in the promotional materials of particular

Index

organizations may be given in upper- and lowercase when referred to in other contexts (e.g., "the

Rand Corporation" rather than "the RAND Corporation"). Company names that are spelled in

lowercase letters in promotional materials may be capitalized (e.g., DrKoop.net rather than

8.66:

drkoop.net). Names like eBay and iPod, should they appear at the beginning of a sentence or

Adherents of

unofficial political

heading, need not take an initial capital in addition to the capitalized second letter. See also 8.153.

groups and

movements

8.67:

Institutions and

companiesâ

€”capitalization

8.68:

Names with

unusual

capitalization

8.69:

Associations,

unions, and the

like

8.70:

Numerical

designations for

periods

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Organizations >> Associations

of Contents

List of Figures

8.69 ASSOCIATIONS, UNIONS, AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

The full names of associations, societies, unions, meetings, and conferences, and often the shortened

Index

forms of such names, are capitalized. A the preceding a name, even when part of the official title, is

lowercased in running text. Such generic terms as society and union are usually lowercased when used

alone.

8.67:

Institutions and

the Congress of Industrial Organizations; CIO; the union

companiesâ

€”capitalization

the Fifty-Seventh Annual Meeting of the American Historical Association; the annual meeting of the

8.68:

association

Names with

Girl Scouts of the United States of America; a Girl Scout; a Scout

unusual

capitalization

the Independent Order of Odd Fellows; IOOF; an Odd Fellow

Industrial Workers of the World; IWW; the Wobblies

8.69:

Associations,

the International Olympic Committee; the IOC; the committee

unions, and the

the League of Women Voters; the league

like

the National Conference of Christians and Jews; the conference

8.70:

the National Organization for Women; NOW; the organization

Numerical

designations for

the New-York Historical Society (the hyphen is part of the official name of the society); the society

periods

the Quadrangle Club; the club

8.71:

the Textile Workers Union of America; the union

Descriptive

designations for

periods

On the other hand, a substantive title given to a single meeting, conference, speech, or discussion is

enclosed in quotation marks. For lecture series, see 8.86.

"Making Things Better with XML," a panel discussion presented at the AAUP Annual Meeting on June 27,

2008

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Periods

of Contents

List of Figures

8.70 NUMERICAL DESIGNATIONS FOR PERIODS

List of Tables

A numerical designation of a period is lowercased unless it is considered part of a proper name. For

Index

the use of numerals, see 9.34.

the twenty-first century

8.68:

the nineteen hundreds

Names with

the nineties

unusual

capitalization

the quattrocento

the second millennium BCE

8.69:

Associations,

unions, and the

but

like

the Eighteenth Dynasty (Egypt)

8.70:

Numerical

the Fifth Republic

designations for

periods

8.71:

Descriptive

designations for

periods

8.72:

Traditional period

names

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Periods

of Contents

List of Figures

8.71 DESCRIPTIVE DESIGNATIONS FOR PERIODS

List of Tables

A descriptive designation of a period is usually lowercased, except for proper names. For traditionally

Index

capitalized forms, see 8.72.

ancient Greece

8.69:

the antebellum period

Associations,

antiquity

unions, and the

like

the baroque period

the colonial period

8.70:

Numerical

a golden age

designations for

the Hellenistic period

periods

imperial Rome

8.71:

modern history

Descriptive

designations for

the romantic period (see also 8.78)

periods

the Shang dynasty (considered an era rather than a political division; see 8.50)

8.72:

the Victorian era

Traditional period

names

8.73:

Cultural periods

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Periods

of Contents

List of Figures

8.72 TRADITIONAL PERIOD NAMES

List of Tables

Some names of periods are capitalized, either by tradition or to avoid ambiguity. See also 8.74.

Index

the Augustan Age

the Common Era

the Counter-Reformation

8.70:

Numerical

the Dark Ages

designations for

the Enlightenment

periods

the Gay Nineties

8.71:

Descriptive

the Gilded Age

designations for

the Grand SiÃ¨cle

periods

the High Middle Ages ( but the early Middle Ages, the late Middle Ages)

8.72:

the High Renaissance

Traditional period

names

the Jazz Age

the Mauve Decade

8.73:

Cultural periods

the Middle Ages ( but the medieval era)

8.74:

the Old Kingdom (ancient Egypt)

Historical events

the Old Regime ( but the ancien rÃ©gime)

and programs

the Progressive Era

the Reformation

the Renaissance

the Restoration

the Roaring Twenties

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Periods

of Contents

List of Figures

8.73 CULTURAL PERIODS

List of Tables

Names of prehistoric cultural periods are capitalized. For geological periods, see 8.133--35.

Index

the Bronze Age

the Ice Age

the Iron Age

8.71:

Descriptive

the Stone Age

designations for

periods

Similar terms for modern periods are often lowercased (but see 8.72).

8.72:

Traditional period

names

the age of reason

the age of steam

8.73:

Cultural periods

the information age

8.74:

the nuclear age

Historical events

and programs

8.75:

Speeches

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Events

of Contents

List of Figures

8.74 HISTORICAL EVENTS AND PROGRAMS

List of Tables

Names of many major historical events and programs are conventionally capitalized. Others, more

Index

recent or known by their generic descriptions, are usually lowercased. If in doubt, do not capitalize.

For wars and battles, see 8.112--13; for religious events, 8.107; for acts and treaties, 8.79.

8.72:

the Boston Tea Party

Traditional period

the Cold War ( but a cold war, used generically)

names

the Cultural Revolution

8.73:

the Great Chicago Fire; the Chicago fire; the fire of 1871

Cultural periods

the Great Depression; the Depression

8.74:

Historical events

the Great Fire of London; the Great Fire

and programs

the Great Plague; the Plague ( but plague [the disease])

8.75:

(President Johnson's) Great Society

Speeches

the Industrial Revolution

8.76:

the New Deal

Meteorological and

Prohibition

other natural

phenomena

Reconstruction

the Reign of Terror; the Terror

the South Sea Bubble

the War on Poverty

but

the baby boom

the civil rights movement

the crash of 1929

the Dreyfus affair

the gold rush

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Events

of Contents

List of Figures

8.75 SPEECHES

List of Tables

A very few speeches have attained the status of titles and are thus traditionally capitalized. Others are

Index

usually lowercased.

Washington's Farewell Address

8.73:

the Gettysburg Address

Cultural periods

the annual State of the Union address

8.74:

Franklin Roosevelt's second inaugural address

Historical events

the Checkers speech

and programs

Martin Luther King Jr.'s "I Have a Dream" speech

8.75:

Speeches

8.76:

Meteorological and

other natural

phenomena

8.77:

Sporting events

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Events

of Contents

List of Figures

8.76 METEOROLOGICAL AND OTHER NATURAL PHENOMENA

List of Tables

Named hurricanes and other tropical cyclones are capitalized, as are many other named

Index

meteorological phenomena. If in doubt, consult a dictionary or encyclopedia. Natural phenomena

identified generically by a place-name or a year are usually lowercased.

8.74:

Cyclone Becky; the 2007 cyclone

Historical events

Hurricane Katrina; the 2005 hurricane

and programs

El NiÃ±o

8.75:

the Northridge earthquake of 1994

Speeches

8.76:

Use the pronoun it, not he or she, when referring to named storms, hurricanes, and the like

Meteorological and

other natural

(notwithstanding the practice of using male and female proper names to refer to such events).

phenomena

8.77:

Sporting events

8.78:

Movements and

stylesâ

€”capitalization

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Events

of Contents

List of Figures

8.77 SPORTING EVENTS

List of Tables

The full names of major sporting events are capitalized.

Index

the Kentucky Derby; the derby

the NBA Finals; the finals

the Olympic Games; the Olympics; the Winter Olympics

8.75:

Speeches

the World Cup

8.76:

Meteorological and

other natural

phenomena

8.77:

Sporting events

8.78:

Movements and

stylesâ

€”capitalization

8.79:

Formal names of

acts, treaties, and

so forth

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Cultural Movements and Styles

of Contents

List of Figures

8.78 MOVEMENTS AND STYLES--CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

Nouns and adjectives designating cultural styles, movements, and schools--artistic, architectural,

Index

musical, and so forth--and their adherents are capitalized if derived from proper nouns. (The word

school remains lowercased.) Others may be lowercased, though a few (e.g., Cynic, Scholastic, New

Criticism) are capitalized to distinguish them from the generic words used in everyday speech. Some

8.76:

of the terms lowercased below may appropriately be capitalized in certain works if done consistently-

Meteorological and

other natural

-especially those that include the designation "often capitalized" in Webster's. (But if, for example,

phenomena

impressionism is capitalized in a work about art, other art movements must also be capitalized--which

8.77:

could result in an undesirable profusion of capitals.) For religious movements, see 8.96. See also 8.59.

Sporting events

8.78:

abstract expressionism

Movements and

stylesâ

Aristotelian

€”capitalization

art deco

8.79:

art nouveau

Formal names of

acts, treaties, and

baroque

so forth

Beaux-Arts (derived from Ã‰cole des Beaux-Arts)

8.80:

camp

Generic terms for

Cartesian

pending legislation

Chicago school (of architecture, of economics, of literary criticism)

classicism, classical

conceptualism

cubism

Cynicism; Cynic

Dadaism; Dada

deconstruction

Doric

Epicurean (see text below)

existentialism

fauvism

formalism

Gothic ( but gothic fiction)

Gregorian chant

Hellenism

Hudson River school

humanism

idealism

imagism

impressionism

Keynesianism

mannerism

miracle play

modernism

mysticism; mystic

naturalism

neoclassicism; neoclassical

Neoplatonism

New Criticism

nominalism

op art

Peripatetic (see text below)

philosophe (French)

Platonism

pop art

postimpressionism

postmodernism

Pre-Raphaelite

Reaganomics

realism

rococo

Romanesque

romanticism; romantic

Scholasticism; Scholastic; Schoolmen

scientific rationalism

Sophist (see text below)

Stoicism; Stoic (see text below)

structuralism

Sturm und Drang ( but storm and stress)

surrealism

symbolism

theater of the absurd

transcendentalism

Some words capitalized when used of a school of thought are lowercased when used metaphorically.

epicurean tastes

peripatetic families

she's a sophist, not a logician

a stoic attitude

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Acts, Treaties, and Government Programs

of Contents

List of Figures

8.79 FORMAL NAMES OF ACTS, TREATIES, AND SO FORTH

List of Tables

Formal or accepted titles of pacts, plans, policies, treaties, acts, programs, and similar documents or

Index

agreements are capitalized. Incomplete or generic forms are usually lowercased. For citing the

published text of a bill or law, see 14.294, 14.295.

8.77:

the Fifteenth Amendment (to the US Constitution); the Smith Amendment; the amendment

Sporting events

the Articles of Confederation

8.78:

the Bill of Rights

Movements and

the Brady law

stylesâ

€”capitalization

the Constitution of the United States; the United States ( or US) Constitution; the Constitution (usually

8.79:

capitalized in reference to the US Constitution); Article VI; the article (see also 9.29)

Formal names of

the Illinois Constitution; the constitution

acts, treaties, and

so forth

the Constitution Act, 1982 (Canada)

the Corn Laws (Great Britain)

8.80:

Generic terms for

the Declaration of Independence

pending legislation

the due process clause

8.81:

the Equal Rights Amendment (usually capitalized though not ratified); ERA; but an equal rights amendment

Legal cases

the Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993; FMLA; the 1993 act

mentioned in text

the Food Stamp Act of 1964; food stamps

the Hawley-Smoot ( or Smoot-Hawley) Tariff Act; the tariff act

Head Start

impeachment; the first and second articles of impeachment

the Marshall Plan

the Mayflower Compact; the compact

Medicare (lowercase in Canada); Medicaid

the Monroe Doctrine; the doctrine

the Munich agreement (1938); Munich

the New Economic Policy; NEP (Soviet Union)

the Open Door policy

the Peace of Utrecht

the Reform Bills; the Reform Bill of 1832 (Great Britain)

the Social Security Act; Social Security ( or, generically, social security)

Temporary Assistance for Needy Families; TANF

Title VII or Title 7

Treaty for the Renunciation of War, known as the Pact of Paris or the Kellogg-Briand Pact; the pact

the Treaty of Versailles; the treaty

the Treaty on European Union (official name); the Maastricht treaty (informal name)

the Wilmot Proviso

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Acts, Treaties, and Government Programs

of Contents

List of Figures

8.80 GENERIC TERMS FOR PENDING LEGISLATION

List of Tables

Informal, purely descriptive references to pending legislation are lowercased.

Index

The anti-injunction bill was introduced on Tuesday.

8.78:

Movements and

stylesâ

€”capitalization

8.79:

Formal names of

acts, treaties, and

so forth

8.80:

Generic terms for

pending legislation

8.81:

Legal cases

mentioned in text

8.82:

Capitalization for

names of awards

and prizes

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Legal Cases

of Contents

List of Figures

8.81 LEGAL CASES MENTIONED IN TEXT

List of Tables

The names of legal cases are italicized when mentioned in text. The abbreviation v. (versus)

Index

occasionally appears in roman, but Chicago recommends italics. In footnotes, legal dictionaries, and

contexts where numerous legal cases appear, they are sometimes set in roman. For legal citation style,

see 14.281--317.

8.79:

Formal names of

Bloomfield Village Drain Dist. v. Keefe

acts, treaties, and

so forth

Miranda v. Arizona

8.80:

Generic terms for

In discussion, a case name may be shortened.

pending legislation

8.81:

the Miranda case (or simply Miranda)

Legal cases

mentioned in text

8.82:

Capitalization for

names of awards

and prizes

8.83:

Lowercase for

oaths and pledges

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Awards

of Contents

List of Figures

8.82 CAPITALIZATION FOR NAMES OF AWARDS AND PRIZES

List of Tables

Names of awards and prizes are capitalized, but some generic terms used with the names are

Index

lowercased. For military awards, see 8.114.

the 2010 Nobel Prize in Physiology or Medicine; a Nobel Prize winner; a Nobel Prize--winning physiologist

8.80:

(see 6.80); a Nobel Peace Prize; the Nobel Prize in Literature

Generic terms for

the 2010 Pulitzer Prize for Commentary; a Pulitzer in journalism

pending legislation

an Academy Award; an Oscar

8.81:

an Emmy Award; she has three Emmys

Legal cases

mentioned in text

the Presidential Medal of Freedom

a Guggenheim Fellowship ( but a Guggenheim grant)

8.82:

Capitalization for

an International Music Scholarship

names of awards

National Merit Scholarship awards; Merit Scholarships; Merit Scholar

and prizes

8.83:

Lowercase for

oaths and pledges

8.84:

Academic subjects

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Oaths and Pledges

of Contents

List of Figures

8.83 LOWERCASE FOR OATHS AND PLEDGES

List of Tables

Formal oaths and pledges are usually lowercased.

Index

the oath of citizenship

the Hippocratic oath

the presidential oath of office

8.81:

Legal cases

marriage vows

mentioned in text

but

8.82:

Capitalization for

names of awards

the Pledge of Allegiance

and prizes

8.83:

Lowercase for

oaths and pledges

8.84:

Academic subjects

8.85:

Courses of study

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Academic Subjects, Courses of Study, and Lecture Series

of Contents

List of Figures

8.84 ACADEMIC SUBJECTS

List of Tables

Academic subjects are not capitalized unless they form part of a department name or an official

Index

course name or are themselves proper nouns (e.g., English, Latin).

She has published widely in the history of religions.

8.82:

They have introduced a course in gender studies.

Capitalization for

He is majoring in comparative literature.

names of awards

and prizes

She is pursuing graduate studies in philosophy of science.

8.83:

but

Lowercase for

oaths and pledges

Jones is chair of the Committee on Comparative Literature.

8.84:

Academic subjects

8.85:

Courses of study

8.86:

Lectures

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Academic Subjects, Courses of Study, and Lecture Series

of Contents

List of Figures

8.85 COURSES OF STUDY

List of Tables

Official names of courses of study are capitalized.

Index

I am signing up for Archaeology 101.

A popular course at the Graham School of General Studies is Basic Manuscript Editing.

8.83:

but

Lowercase for

oaths and pledges

His ballroom dancing classes have failed to civilize him.

8.84:

Academic subjects

8.85:

Courses of study

8.86:

Lectures

8.87:

Days of the week,

months, and

seasons

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Historical and Cultural Terms >> Academic Subjects, Courses of Study, and Lecture Series

of Contents

List of Figures

8.86 LECTURES

List of Tables

Names of lecture series are capitalized. Individual lectures are capitalized and usually enclosed in

Index

quotation marks. See also 8.69.

This year's Robinson Memorial Lectures were devoted to the nursing profession. The first lecture, "How

8.84:

Nightingale Got Her Way," was a sellout.

Academic subjects

8.85:

Courses of study

8.86:

Lectures

8.87:

Days of the week,

months, and

seasons

8.88:

Holidays

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Calendar and Time Designations

of Contents

List of Figures

8.87 DAYS OF THE WEEK, MONTHS, AND SEASONS

List of Tables

Names of days and months are capitalized. The four seasons are lowercased (except when used to

Index

denote an issue of a journal; see 14.180). For centuries and decades, see 8.70.

Tuesday

8.85:

November

Courses of study

spring

8.86:

fall

Lectures

the vernal ( or spring) equinox

8.87:

the winter solstice

Days of the week,

months, and

seasons

8.88:

Holidays

8.89:

Time and time

zones

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Calendar and Time Designations

of Contents

List of Figures

8.88 HOLIDAYS

List of Tables

The names of secular and religious holidays or officially designated days or seasons are capitalized.

Index

All Fools' Day

Christmas Day

Earth Day

8.86:

Lectures

Election Day

8.87:

Father's Day

Days of the week,

the Fourth of July, the Fourth

months, and

seasons

Good Friday

Halloween

8.88:

Holidays

Hanukkah

Holy Week

8.89:

Time and time

Inauguration Day

zones

Independence Day

8.90:

Kwanzaa

Deities

Labor Day

Lent

Lincoln's Birthday

Martin Luther King Jr. Day

Memorial Day

Mother's Day

National Poetry Month

New Year's Day

New Year's Eve

Passover

Presidents' Day

Ramadan

Remembrance Day (Canada)

Rosh Hashanah

Saint Patrick's Day

Thanksgiving Day

Yom Kippur

Yuletide

but

D-day

a bank holiday

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Calendar and Time Designations

of Contents

List of Figures

8.89 TIME AND TIME ZONES

List of Tables

When spelled out, designations of time and time zones are lowercased (except for proper nouns).

Index

Abbreviations are capitalized. See also 9.38--41.

eastern standard time; EST

8.87:

central daylight time; CDT

Days of the week,

mountain standard time; MST

months, and

seasons

Pacific daylight time; PDT

Greenwich mean time; GMT

8.88:

Holidays

daylight saving time; DST

8.89:

Time and time

zones

8.90:

Deities

8.91:

Alternative names

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Deities and Revered Persons

of Contents

List of Figures

8.90 DEITIES

List of Tables

Names of deities, whether in monotheistic or polytheistic religions, are capitalized.

Index

Allah

Astarte

Freyja

8.88:

Holidays

God

8.89:

Itzamna

Time and time

Jehovah

zones

Mithra

8.90:

Satan ( but the devil)

Deities

Serapis

8.91:

Yahweh

Alternative names

8.92:

Some writers follow a pious convention of not fully spelling out the name of a deity (e.g., G-d). This

Prophets and the

like

convention should be respected when it is practical to do so.

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Deities and Revered Persons

of Contents

List of Figures

8.91 ALTERNATIVE NAMES

List of Tables

Alternative or descriptive names for God as supreme being are capitalized. See also 8.92.

Index

Adonai

the Almighty

the Deity

8.89:

Time and time

the Holy Ghost or the Holy Spirit or the Paraclete

zones

the Lord

8.90:

Providence

Deities

the Supreme Being

8.91:

the Trinity

Alternative names

8.92:

Prophets and the

like

8.93:

Platonic ideas

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Deities and Revered Persons

of Contents

List of Figures

8.92 PROPHETS AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

Designations of prophets, apostles, saints, and other revered persons are often capitalized.

Index

the Buddha

the prophet Isaiah

Jesus; Christ; the Good Shepherd; the Son ( or son) of man

8.90:

Deities

John the Baptist

8.91:

the Messiah

Alternative names

Muhammad; the Prophet

8.92:

Saint John; the Beloved Apostle

Prophets and the

the Virgin Mary; the Blessed Virgin; Mother of God

like

8.93:

but

Platonic ideas

the apostles

8.94:

Pronouns referring

the patriarchs

to religious figures

the psalmist

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Deities and Revered Persons

of Contents

List of Figures

8.93 PLATONIC IDEAS

List of Tables

Words for transcendent ideas in the Platonic sense, especially when used in a religious context, are

Index

often capitalized. See also 7.48.

Good; Beauty; Truth; the One

8.91:

Alternative names

8.92:

Prophets and the

like

8.93:

Platonic ideas

8.94:

Pronouns referring

to religious figures

8.95:

Major religions

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Deities and Revered Persons

of Contents

List of Figures

8.94 PRONOUNS REFERRING TO RELIGIOUS FIGURES

List of Tables

Pronouns referring to God or Jesus are not capitalized. (Note that they are lowercased in most

Index

English translations of the Bible.)

They prayed to God that he would deliver them.

8.92:

Jesus and his disciples

Prophets and the

like

8.93:

Platonic ideas

8.94:

Pronouns referring

to religious figures

8.95:

Major religions

8.96:

Denominations,

sects, orders, and

religious

movements

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Groups

of Contents

List of Figures

8.95 MAJOR RELIGIONS

List of Tables

Names of major religions are capitalized, as are their adherents and adjectives derived from them.

Index

Buddhism; Buddhist

Christianity; Christian; Christendom (see also 8.97)

Confucianism; Confucian

8.93:

Platonic ideas

Hinduism; Hindu

8.94:

Islam; Islamic; Muslim

Pronouns referring

Judaism; Jew; Jewry; Jewish

to religious figures

Shinto; Shintoism; Shintoist

8.95:

Taoism; Taoist; Taoistic

Major religions

8.96:

but

Denominations,

sects, orders, and

atheism

religious

movements

agnosticism

8.97:

"Church" as

institution

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Groups

of Contents

List of Figures

8.96 DENOMINATIONS, SECTS, ORDERS, AND RELIGIOUS MOVEMENTS

List of Tables

Like the names of major religions, names of denominations, communions, sects, orders, and religious

Index

movements are capitalized, as are their adherents and adjectives derived from them. See also 8.98.

the Amish; Amish communities

8.94:

Anglicanism; the Anglican Communion ( see also Episcopal Church)

Pronouns referring

Baptists; a Baptist church; the Baptist General Convention; the Southern Baptist Convention

to religious figures

Catholicism ( see Roman Catholicism)

8.95:

Christian Science; Church of Christ, Scientist; Christian Scientist

Major religions

the Church of England ( but an Anglican church)

8.96:

the Church of Ireland

Denominations,

sects, orders, and

Conservative Judaism; a Conservative Jew

religious

Dissenter (lowercased when used in a nonsectarian context)

movements

Druidism; Druid (sometimes lowercased)

8.97:

"Church" as

Eastern Orthodox churches; the Eastern Church ( but an Eastern Orthodox church)

institution

the Episcopal Church; an Episcopal church; an Episcopalian

8.98:

the Episcopal Church of Scotland

Generic versus

Essenes; an Essene

religious terms

Gnosticism; Gnostic

Hasidism; Hasid (singular); Hasidim (plural); Hasidic

Jehovah's Witnesses

Jesuit(s); the Society of Jesus; Jesuitic(al) (lowercased when used pejoratively)

Methodism; the United Methodist Church ( but a United Methodist church); Wesleyan

Mormonism; Mormon; the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints (Utah); Community of Christ

(Missouri)

Nonconformism; Nonconformist (lowercased when used in a nonsectarian context)

Old Catholics; an Old Catholic church

the Order of Preachers; the Dominican order; a Dominican

Orthodox Judaism; an Orthodox Jew

Orthodoxy; the (Greek, Serbian, etc.) Orthodox Church ( but a Greek Orthodox church)

Protestantism; Protestant (lowercased when used in a nonsectarian context)

Puritanism; Puritan (lowercased when used in a nonsectarian context)

Quakerism; Quaker; the Religious Society of Friends; a Friend

Reform Judaism; a Reform Jew

Roman Catholicism; the Roman Catholic Church ( but a Roman Catholic church)

Satanism; Satanist

Seventh-Day Adventist; Adventist; Adventism

Shiism; Shia; Shiite

Sufism; Sufi

Sunnism; Sunni; Sunnite

Theosophy; Theosophist; the Theosophical Society

Vedanta

Wicca; Wiccan

Zen; Zen Buddhism

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Groups

of Contents

List of Figures

8.97 "CHURCH" AS INSTITUTION

List of Tables

When used to refer to the institution of religion or of a particular religion, church is usually

Index

lowercased.

church and state

8.95:

the early church

Major religions

the church in the twenty-first century

8.96:

the church fathers

Denominations,

sects, orders, and

religious

Church is capitalized when part of the formal name of a denomination (e.g., the United Methodist

movements

Church; see other examples in 8.96) or congregation (e.g., the Church of St. Thomas the Apostle).

8.97:

"Church" as

institution

8.98:

Generic versus

religious terms

8.99:

Religious

jurisdictions

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Groups

of Contents

List of Figures

8.98 GENERIC VERSUS RELIGIOUS TERMS

List of Tables

Many terms that are lowercased when used generically, such as animism, fundamentalism, or

Index

spiritualism, may be capitalized when used as the name of a specific religion or a sect.

a popular medium in turn-of-the-century Spiritualist circles

8.96:

but

Denominations,

sects, orders, and

religious

liberal versus fundamentalist Christians

movements

8.97:

"Church" as

institution

8.98:

Generic versus

religious terms

8.99:

Religious

jurisdictions

8.100:

Buildings

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Groups

of Contents

List of Figures

8.99 RELIGIOUS JURISDICTIONS

List of Tables

The names of official divisions within organized religions are capitalized. The generic terms used

Index

alone are lowercased.

the Archdiocese of Chicago; the archdiocese

8.97:

the Eastern Diocese of the Armenian Church

"Church" as

the Fifty-Seventh Street Meeting; the (Quaker) meeting

institution

the Holy See

8.98:

the Missouri Synod; the synod

Generic versus

religious terms

8.99:

Religious

jurisdictions

8.100:

Buildings

8.101:

Councils, synods,

and the like

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Groups

of Contents

List of Figures

8.100 BUILDINGS

List of Tables

The names of the buildings in which religious congregations meet are capitalized. The generic terms

Index

used alone are lowercased.

Babri Mosque; the mosque

8.98:

Bethany Evangelical Lutheran Church; the church

Generic versus

Temple Emanuel; the temple; the synagogue

religious terms

Nichiren Buddhist Temple; the temple

8.99:

Religious

jurisdictions

8.100:

Buildings

8.101:

Councils, synods,

and the like

8.102:

Scriptures

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Groups

of Contents

List of Figures

8.101 COUNCILS, SYNODS, AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

The accepted names of historic councils and the official names of modern counterparts are

Index

capitalized.

the Council of Chalcedon ( or the Fourth Ecumenical Council)

8.99:

the General Convention (Episcopal)

Religious

the Second Vatican Council; Vatican II

jurisdictions

the Synod of Whitby

8.100:

Buildings

8.101:

Councils, synods,

and the like

8.102:

Scriptures

8.103:

Other names and

versions for bibles

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Writings

of Contents

List of Figures

8.102 SCRIPTURES

List of Tables

Names of scriptures and other highly revered works are capitalized but not usually italicized (except

Index

when used in the title of a published work).

the Bhagavad Gita ( or Bhagavad GÄ«tÄ)

8.100:

the Bible ( but biblical)

Buildings

the Book of Common Prayer

8.101:

the Dead Sea Scrolls

Councils, synods,

the Hebrew Bible

and the like

Koran; Koranic ( or, less commonly, Qur'an; Qur'anic)

8.102:

the Mahabharata ( or MahÄbhÄrata)

Scriptures

Mishnah; Mishnaic

8.103:

Other names and

Sunna

versions for bibles

Talmud; Talmudic

8.104:

Tripitaka

Books of the Bible

the Upanishads

the Vedas; Vedic

but

sutra(s)

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Writings

of Contents

List of Figures

8.103 OTHER NAMES AND VERSIONS FOR BIBLES

List of Tables

Other names and versions of the Hebrew and Christian bibles are usually capitalized but not

Index

italicized.

the Authorized Version or the King James Version

8.101:

the Breeches ( or Geneva) Bible

Councils, synods,

Codex Sinaiticus

and the like

Complutensian Polyglot Bible

8.102:

the Douay ( or Rheims-Douay) Version

Scriptures

the Holy Bible

8.103:

Holy Writ (sometimes used figuratively)

Other names and

versions for bibles

the New English Bible

8.104:

the New Jerusalem Bible

Books of the Bible

the New Revised Standard Version

8.105:

Peshitta

Sections of the

the Psalter ( but a psalter)

Bible

the Septuagint

the Vulgate

but

scripture(s); scriptural

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Writings

of Contents

List of Figures

8.104 BOOKS OF THE BIBLE

List of Tables

The names of books of the Bible are capitalized but never italicized. The word book is usually

Index

lowercased, and the words gospel and epistle are usually capitalized. But in a work in which all three

terms are used with some frequency, they may all be treated alike, either lowercased or capitalized.

See also 9.27, 10.45--51.

8.102:

Scriptures

Genesis; the book of Genesis

8.103:

Job; the book of Job

Other names and

versions for bibles

2 Chronicles; Second Chronicles; the second book of the Chronicles

Psalms ( but a psalm)

8.104:

Books of the Bible

John; the Gospel according to John

Acts; the Acts of the Apostles

8.105:

Sections of the

1 Corinthians; the First Epistle to the Corinthians

Bible

8.106:

Prayers, creeds,

and such

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Writings

of Contents

List of Figures

8.105 SECTIONS OF THE BIBLE

List of Tables

Names of sections of the Bible are usually capitalized but not italicized.

Index

the Hebrew scriptures or the Old Testament

the Christian scriptures or the New Testament

the Apocrypha; Apocryphal ( or, generically, apocryphal)

8.103:

Other names and

the Epistles; the pastoral Epistles

versions for bibles

the Gospels; the synoptic Gospels

8.104:

the Pentateuch or the Torah; Pentateuchal

Books of the Bible

Hagiographa or Ketuvim; hagiographic

8.105:

Sections of the

Bible

8.106:

Prayers, creeds,

and such

8.107:

Religious events

and concepts

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Writings

of Contents

List of Figures

8.106 PRAYERS, CREEDS, AND SUCH

List of Tables

Named prayers, canticles, creeds, and such, as well as scriptural terms of special importance, are

Index

usually capitalized. Parables and miracles are usually lowercased.

the Decalogue; the Ten Commandments; the first commandment

8.104:

Kaddish; to say Kaddish

Books of the Bible

the Lord's Prayer; the Our Father

8.105:

Luther's Ninety-Five Theses

Sections of the

the Nicene Creed; the creed

Bible

Salat al-Fajr

8.106:

the Sermon on the Mount

Prayers, creeds,

and such

the Shema

8.107:

but

Religious events

and concepts

the doxology

8.108:

Heaven, hell, and

the parable of the prodigal son

so on

the miracle of the loaves and fishes

the star of Bethlehem

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Events, Concepts, Services, and Objects

of Contents

List of Figures

8.107 RELIGIOUS EVENTS AND CONCEPTS

List of Tables

Religious events and concepts of major theological importance are often capitalized. Used generically,

Index

such terms are lowercased.

the Creation

8.105:

the Crucifixion

Sections of the

the Diaspora

Bible

the Exodus

8.106:

the Fall

Prayers, creeds,

and such

the Hegira

the Second Coming

8.107:

Religious events

and concepts

but

8.108:

Most religions have creation myths.

Heaven, hell, and

so on

For the Romans, crucifixion was a common form of execution.

8.109:

Services and rites

Doctrines and principles are usually lowercased.

atonement

dharma

original sin

resurrection

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Events, Concepts, Services, and Objects

of Contents

List of Figures

8.108 HEAVEN, HELL, AND SO ON

List of Tables

Terms for divine dwelling places, ideal states, places of divine punishment, and the like are usually

Index

lowercased (though they are often capitalized in a purely religious context). See also 8.49.

heaven

8.106:

hell

Prayers, creeds,

limbo

and such

nirvana

8.107:

outer darkness

Religious events

and concepts

paradise

the pearly gates

8.108:

Heaven, hell, and

purgatory

so on

but

8.109:

Services and rites

Eden

8.110:

Objects

Elysium

Hades

Olympus

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Events, Concepts, Services, and Objects

of Contents

List of Figures

8.109 SERVICES AND RITES

List of Tables

Names of services and rites are usually lowercased (though they may be capitalized in strictly

Index

religious contexts; if in doubt, consult Webster's).

baptism

8.107:

bar mitzvah

Religious events

bat mitzvah

and concepts

confirmation

8.108:

morning prayer; matins

Heaven, hell, and

so on

the seder

the sun dance

8.109:

Services and rites

vespers

8.110:

Objects

Terms denoting the Eucharistic sacrament, however, are traditionally capitalized, though they may be

8.111:

lowercased in nonreligious contexts.

Armies, battalions,

and such

the Eucharist

Holy Communion

Mass; to attend Mass; High Mass; Low Mass; but three masses are offered daily

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Religious Names and Terms >> Religious Events, Concepts, Services, and Objects

of Contents

List of Figures

8.110 OBJECTS

List of Tables

Objects of religious use or significance are usually lowercased, especially in nonreligious contexts.

Index

altar

ark

chalice and paten

8.108:

Heaven, hell, and

mandala

so on

mezuzah

8.109:

rosary

Services and rites

sacred pipe

8.110:

sanctuary

Objects

stations of the cross

8.111:

Armies, battalions,

and such

8.112:

Wars and

revolutions

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Military Terms >> Forces and Troops

of Contents

List of Figures

8.111 ARMIES, BATTALIONS, AND SUCH

List of Tables

Titles of armies, navies, air forces, fleets, regiments, battalions, companies, corps, and so forth are

Index

capitalized. Unofficial but well-known names, such as Green Berets, are also capitalized. Words such

as army and navy are lowercased when standing alone, when used collectively in the plural, or when

not part of an official title. Note that many of the lowercased terms below are routinely capitalized in

8.109:

official or promotional contexts (see also 8.18).

Services and rites

8.110:

the Allies (World Wars I and II); the Allied forces

Objects

American Expeditionary Force; the AEF

8.111:

Army Corps of Engineers; the corps

Armies, battalions,

and such

Army of Northern Virginia; the army

8.112:

Army of the Potomac

Wars and

Army Special Forces

revolutions

the Axis powers (World War II)

8.113:

Canadian Forces (unified in 1968)

Battles and

campaigns

the Central powers (World War I)

Combined Chiefs of Staff (World War II)

Confederate army (American Civil War)

Continental navy (American Revolution)

Eighth Air Force; the air force

Fifth Army; the army

First Battalion, 178th Infantry; the battalion; the 178th

French Foreign Legion

Green Berets

Joint Chiefs of Staff

the Luftwaffe; the German air force

National Guard

Pacific Fleet (US, World War II)

Red Army (Russian, World War II); Russian army

the Resistance; the French Resistance; a resistance movement

Rough Riders

Royal Air Force; RAF; British air force

Royal Canadian Air Force (until 1968; see Canadian Forces)

Royal Canadian Mounted Police; the Mounties; a Mountie

Royal Canadian Navy (until 1968; see Canadian Forces)

Royal Navy; the British navy

Royal Scots Fusiliers; the fusiliers

Seventh Fleet; the fleet

Thirty-Third Infantry Division; the Thirty-Third Division; the division

Union army (American Civil War)

United States ( or US) Army; the army

United States Coast Guard; the Coast Guard or the coast guard

United States Marine Corps; the Marine Corps or the marine corps; the US Marines; a marine

United States Navy; the navy

United States Army Signal Corps; the Signal Corps or the signal corps

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Military Terms >> Wars, Revolutions, Battles, and Campaigns

of Contents

List of Figures

8.112 WARS AND REVOLUTIONS

List of Tables

Names of most major wars and revolutions are capitalized. The generic terms are usually lowercased

Index

when used alone.

American Civil War; the War between the States

8.110:

American Revolution; American War of Independence; the revolution (sometimes capitalized); the

Objects

Revolutionary War

8.111:

Crusades; the Sixth Crusade; a crusader

Armies, battalions,

French Revolution; the Revolution of 1789; the Revolution (usually capitalized to distinguish the Revolution

and such

of 1789 from the revolutions in 1830 and 1848); revolutionary France

8.112:

Great Sioux War; the Sioux war

Wars and

revolutions

Gulf War

8.113:

Korean War; the war

Battles and

Mexican Revolution; the revolution

campaigns

Napoleonic Wars

8.114:

Norman Conquest; the conquest of England

Medals and awards

the revolution(s) of 1848

Russian Revolution; the revolution

Seven Years' War

Shays's Rebellion

Six-Day War

Spanish-American War

Spanish Civil War

Vietnam War

War of 1812

Whiskey Rebellion

World War I; the First World War; the Great War; the war

World War II; the Second World War; World Wars I and II; the First and Second World Wars; the two world

wars

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Military Terms >> Wars, Revolutions, Battles, and Campaigns

of Contents

List of Figures

8.113 BATTLES AND CAMPAIGNS

List of Tables

Some of the names of major battles and campaigns that have entered the general lexicon are

Index

capitalized. In other, more generic descriptions, only proper names are capitalized. For names not

included here, consult an encyclopedia.

8.111:

Battle of Britain

Armies, battalions,

Battle of the Bulge ( or Battle of the Ardennes)

and such

Battle of Bunker Hill; Bunker Hill; the battle

8.112:

battle of Vimy Ridge

Wars and

revolutions

the Blitz

8.113:

European theater of operations; ETO

Battles and

Mexican border campaign

campaigns

Operation Devil Siphon

8.114:

third battle of Ypres

Medals and awards

Vicksburg Campaign

8.115:

western front (World War I)

Ships and other

named vessels

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Military Terms >> Military Awards

of Contents

List of Figures

8.114 MEDALS AND AWARDS

List of Tables

Specific names of medals and awards are capitalized. For civil awards, see 8.82.

Index

Congressional Medal of Honor; Medal of Honor

Croix de Guerre (sometimes lowercased)

Distinguished Flying Cross; DFC

8.112:

Wars and

Distinguished Service Order; DSO

revolutions

Purple Heart

8.113:

Silver Star

Battles and

campaigns

Victoria Cross; VC

8.114:

Medals and awards

8.115:

Ships and other

named vessels

8.116:

Other vehicle

names

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Ships and Other Vehicles

of Contents

List of Figures

8.115 SHIPS AND OTHER NAMED VESSELS

List of Tables

Names of specific ships and other vessels are both capitalized and italicized. Note that when such

Index

abbreviations as USS (United States ship) or HMS (Her [or His] Majesty's ship) precede a name, the

word ship or other vessel type should not be used. The abbreviations themselves are not italicized. For

much useful information, consult Eric Wertheim, The Naval Institute Guide to Combat Fleets of the World

8.113:

(bibliog. 5).

Battles and

campaigns

Mars global surveyor; Mars polar lander; Phoenix Mars lander; Phoenix

8.114:

Medals and awards

the space shuttle Discovery

the Spirit of St. Louis

8.115:

Ships and other

HMS Frolic; the British ship Frolic

named vessels

SS United States; the United States

8.116:

USS SC-530; the US ship SC-530

Other vehicle

names

Every US Navy ship is assigned a hull number (according to a system formally implemented in 1920),

8.117:

Pronouns referring

consisting of a combination of letters (indicating the type of ship) and a serial number. Where

to vessels

necessary to avoid confusion between vessels of the same name--in a work on naval history, for

example--the numbers should be included at first mention. Smaller ships such as landing craft and

submarine chasers are individually numbered but not named.

USS Enterprise (CVN-65) was already on its way to the Red Sea.

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Ships and Other Vehicles

of Contents

List of Figures

8.116 OTHER VEHICLE NAMES

List of Tables

Names of makes and classes of aircraft, models of automobiles and other vehicles, names of trains or

Index

train runs, and names of space programs are capitalized but not italicized.

Acela Express

8.114:

Boeing 747

Medals and awards

Concorde

8.115:

Metroliner

Ships and other

Project Apollo

named vessels

Toyota Prius

8.116:

Other vehicle

names

8.117:

Pronouns referring

to vessels

8.118:

Scientific styleâ

€”additional

resources

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names of Ships and Other Vehicles

of Contents

List of Figures

8.117 PRONOUNS REFERRING TO VESSELS

List of Tables

When a pronoun is used to refer to a vessel, the neuter it or its (rather than she or her) is preferred.

Index

See also 5.41, 8.76.

8.115:

Ships and other

named vessels

8.116:

Other vehicle

names

8.117:

Pronouns referring

to vessels

8.118:

Scientific styleâ

€”additional

resources

8.119:

Genus and specific

epithet

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Scientific Names of Plants and Animals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.118 SCIENTIFIC STYLE--ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

The following paragraphs offer only general guidelines. Writers or editors requiring detailed

Index

guidance should consult Scientific Style and Format (bibliog. 1.1). The ultimate authorities are the

International Code of Botanical Nomenclature ( ICBN), whose guidelines are followed in the botanical

examples below, and the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature ( ICZN) (see bibliog. 5). Note that

8.116:

some fields, such as virology, have slightly different rules. Writers and editors should try to follow the

Other vehicle

names

standards established within those fields.

8.117:

Pronouns referring

to vessels

8.118:

Scientific styleâ

€”additional

resources

8.119:

Genus and specific

epithet

8.120:

Abbreviation of

genus name

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Scientific Names of Plants and Animals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.119 GENUS AND SPECIFIC EPITHET

List of Tables

Whether in lists or in running text, the Latin names of species of plants and animals are italicized.

Index

Each binomial contains a genus name (or generic name), which is capitalized, and a species name (also

called specific name or specific epithet), which is lowercased (even if it is a proper adjective). Do not

confuse these names with phyla, orders, and such, which are not italicized; see 8.125.

8.117:

Pronouns referring

The Pleistocene saber-toothed cats all belonged to the genus Smilodon.

to vessels

Many species names, such as Rosa caroliniana and Styrax californica, reflect the locale of the first specimens

8.118:

Scientific styleâ

described.

€”additional

The pike, Esox lucius, is valued for food as well as sport.

resources

For the grass snake Natrix natrix, longevity in captivity is ten years.

8.119:

Certain lizard taxa such as Basiliscus and Crotaphytus are bipedal specialists.

Genus and specific

epithet

8.120:

Abbreviation of

genus name

8.121:

Subspecies and

varieties

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Scientific Names of Plants and Animals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.120 ABBREVIATION OF GENUS NAME

List of Tables

After the first use the genus name may be abbreviated to a single capital letter. If two or more species

Index

of the same genus are listed together, the abbreviation may be doubled (to indicate the plural) before

the first species, though repeating the abbreviation with each species is more common. But if species

of different genera beginning with the same letter are discussed in the same context, abbreviations

8.118:

may not be appropriate.

Scientific styleâ

€”additional

resources

Two methods allow us to estimate the maximum speeds obtained by Callisaurus draconoides in the field.

8.119:

Irschick and Jayne (1998) found that stride durations of both C. draconoides and Uma scoparia do not

Genus and specific

change dramatically after the fifth stride during accelerations from a standstill.

epithet

The "quaking" of the aspen, Populus tremuloides, is due to the construction of the petiole; an analogous

8.120:

phenomenon has been noted in the cottonwood, P. deltoides.

Abbreviation of

genus name

Among popular species of the genus Cyclamen are CC. coum, hederifolium, and persicum . . . [or, more

8.121:

commonly, C. coum, C. hederifolium, and C. persicum . . . ]

Subspecies and

Studies of Corylus avellana and Corokia cotoneaster . . . ; in further studies it was noted that Corylus avellana

varieties

and Corokia cotoneaster . . .

8.122:

Unspecified species

and varieties

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Scientific Names of Plants and Animals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.121 SUBSPECIES AND VARIETIES

List of Tables

A subspecific zoological name or epithet, when used, follows the binomial species name and is also

Index

italicized. If the two names are the same, the first one may be abbreviated.

Noctilio labialis labialis (or Noctilio l. labialis)

8.119:

Trogon collaris puella

Genus and specific

epithet

In horticultural usage, the abbreviations "subsp." (or "ssp."), "var.," and "f." (none of them italicized)

8.120:

are inserted before the subspecific epithet or variety or form name. See also 8.122.

Abbreviation of

genus name

Buxus microphylla var. japonica

8.121:

Subspecies and

Hydrangea anomala subsp. petiolaris

varieties

Rhododendron arboreum f. album

8.122:

Unspecified species

and varieties

8.123:

Author names

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Scientific Names of Plants and Animals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.122 UNSPECIFIED SPECIES AND VARIETIES

List of Tables

The abbreviations "sp." and "var.," when used without a following element, indicate that the species

Index

or variety is unknown or unspecified. The plural "spp." is used to refer to a group of species. The

abbreviations are not italicized.

8.120:

Rhododendron spp.

Abbreviation of

Rosa rugosa var.

genus name

Viola sp.

8.121:

Subspecies and

varieties

8.122:

Unspecified species

and varieties

8.123:

Author names

8.124:

Plant hybrids

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Scientific Names of Plants and Animals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.123 AUTHOR NAMES

List of Tables

The name of the person who proposed a specific epithet is sometimes added, often abbreviated, and

Index

never italicized. A capital L. stands for Linnaeus.

Diaemus youngi cypselinus Thomas

8.121:

Euchistenes hartii (Thomas)

Subspecies and

Felis leo Scop.

varieties

Molossus coibensis J. A. Allen

8.122:

Quercus alba L.

Unspecified species

and varieties

The parentheses in the second example mean that Thomas described the species E. hartii but referred

8.123:

Author names

it to a different genus.

8.124:

Plant hybrids

8.125:

Higher divisions

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Scientific Names of Plants and Animals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.124 PLANT HYBRIDS

List of Tables

The crossing of two species is indicated by a multiplication sign (Ã—; not the letter x) between the

Index

two species names, with space on each side. Many older primary plant hybrids are indicated by a

multiplication sign immediately before the specific epithet of the hybrid, with space only before it.

8.122:

Magnolia denudata Ã— M. liliiflora (crossing of species)

Unspecified species

Magnolia Ã— soulangeana (hybrid name)

and varieties

8.123:

Author names

8.124:

Plant hybrids

8.125:

Higher divisions

8.126:

English derivatives

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Scientific Names of Plants and Animals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.125 HIGHER DIVISIONS

List of Tables

Divisions higher than genus--phylum, class, order, and family--are capitalized but not italicized. (The

Index

terms order, family, and so on are not capitalized.) Intermediate groupings are treated similarly.

Chordata (phylum)

8.123:

Chondrichthyes (class)

Author names

Monotremata (order)

8.124:

Ruminantia (suborder)

Plant hybrids

Hominidae (family)

8.125:

Felinae (subfamily)

Higher divisions

Selachii (term used of various groups of cartilaginous fishes)

8.126:

The new species Gleichenia glauca provides further details about the history of Gleicheniaceae.

English derivatives

8.127:

Plants and

animalsâ

€”additional

resources

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Scientific Names of Plants and Animals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.126 ENGLISH DERIVATIVES

List of Tables

English words derived from the taxonomic system are lowercased and treated as English words.

Index

carnivore(s) (from the order Carnivora)

hominid(s) (from the family Hominidae)

irid(s) (from the family Iridaceae)

8.124:

Plant hybrids

feline(s) (from subfamily Felinae)

8.125:

astilbe(s) (from the genus Astilbe)

Higher divisions

mastodon(s) (from the genus Mastodon)

8.126:

English derivatives

8.127:

Plants and

animalsâ

€”additional

resources

8.128:

Domestic animals

and horticultural

categories

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Vernacular Names of Plants and Animals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.127 PLANTS AND ANIMALS--ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

For the correct capitalization and spelling of common names of plants and animals, consult a

Index

dictionary or the authoritative guides to nomenclature, the ICBN and the ICZN, mentioned in 8.118. In

general, Chicago recommends capitalizing only proper nouns and adjectives, as in the following

examples, which conform to Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary:

8.125:

Higher divisions

Dutchman's-breeches

8.126:

jack-in-the-pulpit

English derivatives

mayapple

8.127:

Cooper's hawk

Plants and

animalsâ

rhesus monkey

€”additional

Rocky Mountain sheep

resources

8.128:

Domestic animals

and horticultural

categories

8.129:

Horticultural

cultivars

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Vernacular Names of Plants and Animals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.128 DOMESTIC ANIMALS AND HORTICULTURAL CATEGORIES

List of Tables

Either a dictionary or the guides to nomenclature ICZN and ICBN should be consulted for the proper

Index

spelling of breeds of domestic animals and broad horticultural categories.

German shorthaired pointer

8.126:

Hereford

English derivatives

Maine coon or coon cat

8.127:

Thoroughbred horse ( but purebred dog)

Plants and

Rhode Island Red

animalsâ

€”additional

boysenberry

resources

rambler rose

8.128:

Domestic animals

and horticultural

categories

8.129:

Horticultural

cultivars

8.130:

Genetic

nomenclatureâ

€”additional

resources

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Vernacular Names of Plants and Animals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.129 HORTICULTURAL CULTIVARS

List of Tables

Many horticultural cultivars (cultivated varieties) have fanciful names that must be respected since

Index

they may be registered trademarks.

the Peace rose

8.127:

a Queen of the Market aster

Plants and animals

—additional

In some horticultural publications, such names are enclosed in single quotation marks; any following

resources

punctuation is placed after the closing quotation mark. If the English name follows the Latin name,

8.128:

Domestic animals

there is no intervening punctuation. For examples of this usage, consult any issue of the magazine

and horticultural

categories

Horticulture (bibliog. 5).

8.129:

Horticultural

The hybrid Agastache ‘Apricot Sunrise', best grown in zone 6, mingles with sheaves of cape fuchsia

cultivars

( Phygelius ‘Salmon Leap').

8.130:

Genetic

nomenclature—

additional

resources

8.131:

Genes

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Genetic Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.130 GENETIC NOMENCLATURE--ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

Only the most basic guidelines can be offered here. Writers or editors working in the field of genetics

Index

should consult the AMA Manual of Style or Scientific Style and Format (both in bibliog. 1.1) and online

databases including the HUGO Gene Nomenclature Database and the Mouse Genome Database (both

in bibliog. 5).

8.128:

Domestic animals

and horticultural

categories

8.129:

Horticultural

cultivars

8.130:

Genetic

nomenclatureâ

€”additional

resources

8.131:

Genes

8.132:

Enzymes

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Genetic Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.131 GENES

List of Tables

Names of genes, or gene symbols, including any arabic numerals that form a part of such symbols,

Index

are usually italicized. (Italicization helps differentiate genes from entities with similar names.)

Symbols for genes contain no Greek characters or roman numerals. Human gene symbols are set in

full capitals, as are the gene symbols for other primates. Mouse and rat gene symbols are usually

8.129:

spelled with an initial capital. Gene nomenclature systems for other organisms (yeast, fruit flies,

Horticultural

cultivars

nematodes, plants, fish) vary. Symbols for proteins, also called gene products and often derived from

8.130:

the symbols of the corresponding genes, are set in roman.

Genetic

nomenclatureâ

€”additional

HUMAN GENES

resources

BRCA1

8.131:

GPC3

Genes

IGH@ (the symbol @ indicates a family or cluster)

8.132:

SNRPN

Enzymes

8.133:

MOUSE GENES

Geological termsâ

Cmv1

€”additional

resources

Fgf12

Rom1

Wnt1

NLP3 (gene symbol); NLP3p (encoded protein; note p suffix)

GIF (gene symbol); GIF (gastric intrinsic factor)

Only a very few gene symbols contain hyphens.

HLA-DRB1, for human leukocyte antigen D-related Î² chain 1

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Genetic Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.132 ENZYMES

List of Tables

Enzyme names consist of a string of italic and roman characters. The first three letters, which

Index

represent the name of the organism (usually a bacterium) from which the enzyme has been isolated,

are italicized. The roman numeral that follows represents the series number. Sometimes an upper- or

lowercase roman letter or an arabic numeral (or both), representing the strain of bacterium, intervenes

8.130:

between the name and series number.

Genetic

nomenclatureâ

€”additional

Ava I

resources

Bam HI

8.131:

Cla I

Genes

Eco R

8.132:

Hin dIII

Enzymes

Sau 3AI

8.133:

Geological termsâ

€”additional

resources

8.134:

Formal versus

generic geological

terms

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Geological Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.133 GEOLOGICAL TERMS--ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

The following paragraphs offer only the most general guidelines. Writers or editors working in

Index

geological studies should consult US Geological Survey, Suggestions to Authors of the Reports of the

United States Geological Survey, and Scientific Style and Format (both listed in bibliog. 1.1).

8.131:

Genes

8.132:

Enzymes

8.133:

Geological termsâ

€”additional

resources

8.134:

Formal versus

generic geological

terms

8.135:

Stratigraphy

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Geological Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.134 FORMAL VERSUS GENERIC GEOLOGICAL TERMS

List of Tables

Formal geological terms are capitalized in both noun and adjective forms; terms used generically are

Index

not. The generic terms eon, era, and the like are lowercased or omitted immediately following a formal

name. Eons are divided into eras, eras into periods, periods into epochs, and epochs into stages. The

term ice age is best lowercased in scientific contexts because of the uncertainty surrounding any

8.132:

formal use of the term (cf. Little Ice Age); but see 8.73.

Enzymes

8.133:

the Archean (eon)

Geological termsâ

€”additional

the Mesoproterozoic (era)

resources

the Tertiary period of the Cenozoic (era)

8.134:

the Paleocene (epoch)

Formal versus

Pleistocene-Holocene transition

generic geological

terms

the second interglacial stage or II interglacial

8.135:

Illinoian glaciation

Stratigraphy

8.136:

The modifiers early, middle, or late are capitalized when used formally but lowercased when used

Astronomical

informally.

termsâ€”additional

resources

Early Archean

Middle Cambrian

Late Quaternary

but

early Middle Cambrian

in late Pleistocene times

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Geological Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.135 STRATIGRAPHY

List of Tables

Formal stratigraphic names are capitalized. For prehistoric cultural terms, see 8.73.

Index

Fleur de Lys Supergroup

Ramey Ridge Complex

Niobrara Member

8.133:

Geological termsâ

Morrison Formation

€”additional

resources

8.134:

Formal versus

generic geological

terms

8.135:

Stratigraphy

8.136:

Astronomical

termsâ€”additional

resources

8.137:

Celestial bodies

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Astronomical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.136 ASTRONOMICAL TERMS--ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

The following paragraphs offer only the most general guidelines. Writers or editors working in

Index

astronomy or astrophysics should consult Scientific Style and Format (bibliog. 1.1) and the website of

the International Astronomical Union.

8.134:

Formal versus

generic geological

terms

8.135:

Stratigraphy

8.136:

Astronomical

termsâ€”additional

resources

8.137:

Celestial bodies

8.138:

Catalog names for

celestial objects

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Astronomical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.137 CELESTIAL BODIES

List of Tables

The names of galaxies, constellations, stars, planets, and such are capitalized. For earth, sun, and moon,

Index

see 8.139, 8.140.

Aldebaran

8.135:

Alpha Centauri or Î± Centauri

Stratigraphy

the Big Dipper or Ursa Major or the Great Bear

8.136:

Cassiopeia's Chair

Astronomical

the Crab Nebula

termsâ€”additional

resources

the Magellanic Clouds

the Milky Way

8.137:

Celestial bodies

the North Star or Polaris, polestar

8.138:

85 Pegasi

Catalog names for

Saturn

celestial objects

8.139:

but

"Earth"

Halley's comet

the solar system

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Astronomical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.138 CATALOG NAMES FOR CELESTIAL OBJECTS

List of Tables

Celestial objects listed in well-known catalogs are designated by the catalog name, often abbreviated,

Index

and a number.

Bond 619

8.136:

Lalande 5761

Astronomical

Lynds 1251 or L1251

termsâ€”additional

resources

NGC 6165

8.137:

Celestial bodies

8.138:

Catalog names for

celestial objects

8.139:

"Earth"

8.140:

"Sun" and "moon"

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Astronomical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.139 "EARTH"

List of Tables

In nontechnical contexts the word earth, in the sense of our planet, is usually lowercased when

Index

preceded by the or in such idioms as "down to earth" or "move heaven and earth." When used as the

proper name of our planet, especially in context with other planets, it is capitalized, and the is usually

omitted.

8.137:

Celestial bodies

Some still believe the earth is flat.

8.138:

The gender accorded to the moon, the sun, and the earth varies in different mythologies.

Catalog names for

celestial objects

Where on earth have you been?

The astronauts have returned successfully to Earth.

8.139:

"Earth"

Does Mars, like Earth, have an atmosphere?

8.140:

"Sun" and "moon"

8.141:

Descriptive terms

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Astronomical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.140 "SUN" AND "MOON"

List of Tables

The words sun and moon are usually lowercased in nontechnical contexts and always lowercased in

Index

the plural.

The moon circles the earth, as the earth circles the sun.

8.138:

Some planets have several moons.

Catalog names for

celestial objects

Some publications in the fields of astronomy and related sciences, however, routinely capitalize these

8.139:

words when used as proper nouns. (See also 8.137.)

"Earth"

8.140:

"Sun" and "moon"

8.141:

Descriptive terms

8.142:

Medical termsâ

€”additional

resources

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Astronomical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.141 DESCRIPTIVE TERMS

List of Tables

Merely descriptive terms applied to celestial objects or phenomena are not capitalized.

Index

aurora borealis or northern lights

gegenschein

interstellar dust

8.139:

"Earth"

the rings of Saturn

8.140:

"Sun" and "moon"

8.141:

Descriptive terms

8.142:

Medical termsâ

€”additional

resources

8.143:

Diseases,

procedures, and

such

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Medical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.142 MEDICAL TERMS--ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

The following paragraphs offer only the most general guidelines. Medical writers or editors should

Index

consult the AMA Manual of Style or Scientific Style and Format (both in bibliog. 1.1).

8.140:

"Sun" and "moon"

8.141:

Descriptive terms

8.142:

Medical termsâ

€”additional

resources

8.143:

Diseases,

procedures, and

such

8.144:

Infections

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Medical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.143 DISEASES, PROCEDURES, AND SUCH

List of Tables

Names of diseases, syndromes, diagnostic procedures, anatomical parts, and the like are lowercased,

Index

except for proper names forming part of the term. Acronyms and initialisms are capitalized.

acquired immunodeficiency syndrome or AIDS

8.141:

Alzheimer disease (see below)

Descriptive terms

computed tomography or CT

8.142:

Down syndrome (see below)

Medical termsâ

finger-nose test

€”additional

resources

islets of Langerhans

non-Hodgkin lymphoma (see below)

8.143:

Diseases,

ultrasound; ultrasonography

procedures, and

such

The possessive forms Alzheimer's, Down's, Hodgkin's, and the like, though less common in medical

8.144:

Infections

literature, may be preferred in a general context. For x-rays and radiation, see 8.150.

8.145:

Drugs

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Medical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.144 INFECTIONS

List of Tables

Names of infectious organisms are treated like other specific names (see 8.118--26). Names of

Index

conditions based on such names are neither italicized nor capitalized.

Microorganisms of the genus Streptococcus are present in the blood of persons with streptococcal infection.

8.142:

The larvae of Trichinella spiralis are responsible for the disease trichinosis.

Medical termsâ

€”additional

resources

8.143:

Diseases,

procedures, and

such

8.144:

Infections

8.145:

Drugs

8.146:

Physical and

chemical termsâ

€”additional

resources

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Medical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.145 DRUGS

List of Tables

Generic names of drugs, which should be used wherever possible in preference to brand names, are

Index

lowercased. Brand names must be capitalized; they are often enclosed in parentheses after the first

use of the generic name. For guidance, consult the AMA Manual of Style and Scientific Style and Format

(bibliog. 1.1) and USP Dictionary of USAN and International Drug Names (bibliog. 5). For brand names

8.143:

and trademarks, see 8.152.

Diseases,

procedures, and

such

The patient takes weekly injections of interferon beta-1a (Avonex) to control his multiple sclerosis.

8.144:

Infections

8.145:

Drugs

8.146:

Physical and

chemical termsâ

€”additional

resources

8.147:

Laws and theories

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Physical and Chemical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.146 PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL TERMS--ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

The following paragraphs offer only the most general guidelines for nontechnical editors. Writers or

Index

editors working in physics should consult The AIP Style Manual (bibliog. 1.1) or, among other journals,

Physical Review Letters; those working in chemistry should consult The ACS Style Guide (bibliog. 1.1).

8.144:

Infections

8.145:

Drugs

8.146:

Physical and

chemical termsâ

€”additional

resources

8.147:

Laws and theories

8.148:

Chemical names

and symbols

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Physical and Chemical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.147 LAWS AND THEORIES

List of Tables

Though usage varies widely, Chicago recommends that names of laws, theories, and the like be

Index

lowercased, except for proper names attached to them.

Avogadro's hypothesis ( or Avogadro's law)

8.145:

the big bang theory

Drugs

Boyle's law

8.146:

(Einstein's) general theory of relativity

Physical and

Newton's first law

chemical termsâ

€”additional

resources

8.147:

Laws and theories

8.148:

Chemical names

and symbols

8.149:

Mass number

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Physical and Chemical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.148 CHEMICAL NAMES AND SYMBOLS

List of Tables

Names of chemical elements and compounds are lowercased when written out. Symbols, however,

Index

are capitalized and set without periods; the number of atoms in a molecule appears as a subscript. For

a list of symbols for the elements, including atomic numbers, see 10.66.

8.146:

ozone; O3

Physical and

sodium chloride; NaCl

chemical termsâ

€”additional

sulfuric acid; H2SO4

resources

tungsten carbide; WC

8.147:

Laws and theories

8.148:

Chemical names

and symbols

8.149:

Mass number

8.150:

Radiations

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Physical and Chemical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.149 MASS NUMBER

List of Tables

In formal chemical literature, the mass number appears as a superscript to the left of the symbol. In

Index

work intended for a general audience, however, it may follow the symbol, after a hyphen, in full size.

C

14 (formal style); C-14 or carbon-14 (informal style)

238

8.147:

U (formal style); U-238 or uranium-238 (informal style)

Laws and theories

8.148:

Chemical names

and symbols

8.149:

Mass number

8.150:

Radiations

8.151:

Metric units

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Physical and Chemical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.150 RADIATIONS

List of Tables

Terms for electromagnetic radiations may be spelled as follows:

Index

Î²-ray (noun or adjective) or beta ray (in nonscientific contexts, noun or adjective)

Î³-ray (noun or adjective) or gamma ray (in nonscientific contexts, noun or adjective)

x-ray (noun, verb, or adjective)

8.148:

Chemical names

cosmic ray (noun); cosmic-ray (adjective)

and symbols

ultraviolet ray (noun); ultraviolet-ray (adjective)

8.149:

Mass number

Note that the verb to x-ray, though acceptable in a general context, is not normally used in scholarly

8.150:

medical literature, where writers would more likely speak of obtaining an x-ray film, or a radiograph,

Radiations

of something, or of subjecting something to x-ray analysis.

8.151:

Metric units

8.152:

Trademarks

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scientific Terminology >> Physical and Chemical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

8.151 METRIC UNITS

List of Tables

Although the spellings meter, liter, and so on are widely used in the United States, some American

Index

business, government, or professional organizations have adopted the European spellings ( metre, litre,

etc.). Chicago's publications show a preference for the traditional American spellings. For

abbreviations used in the International System of Units, see 10.54--62.

8.149:

Mass number

8.150:

Radiations

8.151:

Metric units

8.152:

Trademarks

8.153:

Names like eBay

and iPod

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Brand Names and Trademarks

of Contents

List of Figures

8.152 TRADEMARKS

List of Tables

Brand names that are trademarks--often so indicated in dictionaries--should be capitalized if they

Index

must be used. A better choice is to substitute a generic term when available. Although the symbols

and

(for registered and unregistered trademarks, respectively) often accompany trademark names

on product packaging and in promotional material, there is no legal requirement to use these symbols,

8.150:

and they should be omitted wherever possible. (If one of these symbols must be used at the end of a

Radiations

product name, it should appear before any period, comma, or other mark of punctuation.) Note also

8.151:

Metric units

that some companies encourage the use of both the proper and the generic term in reference to their

8.152:

products ("Kleenex facial tissue," not just "Kleenex") and discourage turning product names into

Trademarks

verbs, but these restrictions, while they may be followed in corporate documentation, are not legally

8.153:

binding. (In fact, Webster's includes entries for lowercase verbs google and xerox.) For computer-related

Names like eBay

and iPod

names and terms, see 7.76.

8.154:

Treatment of titles

Bufferin; buffered aspirin

in text and notesâ

Coca-Cola; cola

€”overview

Google; search engine; search

Jacuzzi; whirlpool bath

Kleenex; (facial) tissue

Levi's; jeans

Ping-Pong; table tennis

Pyrex; heat-resistant glassware

Scrabble

Vaseline; petroleum jelly

Xerox; photocopier; copy

More information about registered trademarks can be found on the websites of the

US Patent and Trademark Office and the International Trademark Association.

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Brand Names and Trademarks

of Contents

List of Figures

8.153 NAMES LIKE EBAY AND IPOD

List of Tables

Brand names or names of companies that are spelled with a lowercase initial letter followed by a

Index

capital letter (eBay, iPod, iPhone, etc.) need not be capitalized at the beginning of a sentence or

heading, though some editors may prefer to reword. This departure from Chicago's former usage

recognizes not only the preferred usage of the owners of most such names but also the fact that such

8.151:

spellings are already capitalized (if only on the second letter). Company or product names with

Metric units

additional, internal capitals (sometimes called "midcaps") should likewise be left unchanged

8.152:

Trademarks

(GlaxoSmithKline, HarperCollins, LexisNexis). See also 8.4.

8.153:

Names like eBay

eBay posted strong earnings.

and iPod

User interfaces varied. iTunes and its chief rival, Amazon.com, . . .

8.154:

Treatment of titles

In text that is set in all capitals, such distinctions are usually overridden (e.g., EBAY, IPOD,

in text and notesâ

€”overview

HARPERCOLLINS); with a mix of capitals and small capitals, they are preserved (e.g., EBAY).

8.155:

Capitalization of

titles of worksâ

€”general

principles

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works

of Contents

List of Figures

8.154 TREATMENT OF TITLES IN TEXT AND NOTES--OVERVIEW

List of Tables

The following guidelines apply primarily to titles as they are mentioned or cited in text or notes.

Index

They apply to titles of books, journals, newspapers, and websites as well as to shorter works (stories,

poems, articles, etc.), divisions of longer works (parts, chapters, sections), unpublished works

(lectures, etc.), plays and films, radio and television programs, musical works, and artworks. For

8.152:

details on citing titles in bibliographies and reference lists, see chapters 14 and 15.

Trademarks

8.153:

Names like eBay

and iPod

8.154:

Treatment of titles

in text and notesâ

€”overview

8.155:

Capitalization of

titles of worksâ

€”general

principles

8.156:

Principles and

examples of

sentence-style

capitalization

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Capitalization, Punctuation, and Italics

of Contents

List of Figures

8.155 CAPITALIZATION OF TITLES OF WORKS--GENERAL PRINCIPLES

List of Tables

Titles mentioned or cited in text or notes are usually capitalized headline-style (see 8.157). For

Index

aesthetic purposes, titles appearing on the cover or title page or at the head of an article or chapter

may deviate from Chicago's rules for the capitalization of titles. For capitalization of foreign titles, see

11.3.

8.153:

Names like eBay

and iPod

8.154:

Treatment of titles

in text and notesâ

€”overview

8.155:

Capitalization of

titles of worksâ

€”general

principles

8.156:

Principles and

examples of

sentence-style

capitalization

8.157:

Principles of

headline-style

capitalization

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Capitalization, Punctuation, and Italics

of Contents

List of Figures

8.156 PRINCIPLES AND EXAMPLES OF SENTENCE-STYLE CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

In sentence-style capitalization only the first word in a title, the first word in a subtitle, and any

Index

proper names are capitalized. This style is commonly used in library catalogs and in the reference lists

of some journals (see 15.13) and is the style recommended for most foreign titles (see 11.3). It is also

useful for some types of subheads (see 2.17), including those that include terms (such as species

8.154:

names) that require their own internal capitalization (but note that the specific epithet remains

Treatment of titles

in text and notesâ

lowercase in headline style; see 8.157, rule 7). See also 8.160.

€”overview

8.155:

The house of Rothschild: The world's banker, 1849--1999

Capitalization of

Crossing Magnolia denudata with M. liliiflora to create a new hybrid: A success story

titles of worksâ

€”general

principles

8.156:

Principles and

examples of

sentence-style

capitalization

8.157:

Principles of

headline-style

capitalization

8.158:

Examples of

headline-style

capitalization

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Capitalization, Punctuation, and Italics

of Contents

List of Figures

8.157 PRINCIPLES OF HEADLINE-STYLE CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

The conventions of headline style are governed mainly by emphasis and grammar. The following

Index

rules, though occasionally arbitrary, are intended primarily to facilitate the consistent styling of titles

mentioned or cited in text and notes:

8.155:

1. Capitalize the first and last words in titles and subtitles (but see rule 7), and capitalize all other

Capitalization of

major words (nouns, pronouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, and some conjunctions--but see rule

titles of worksâ

€”general

4).

principles

2. Lowercase the articles the, a, and an.

8.156:

Principles and

3. Lowercase prepositions, regardless of length, except when they are used adverbially or

examples of

adjectivally ( up in Look Up, down in Turn Down, on in The On Button, to in Come To, etc.) or when

sentence-style

capitalization

they compose part of a Latin expression used adjectivally or adverbially ( De Facto, In Vitro, etc.).

8.157:

4. Lowercase the conjunctions and, but, for, or, and nor.

Principles of

headline-style

5. Lowercase to not only as a preposition (rule 3) but also as part of an infinitive ( to Run, to Hide,

capitalization

etc.), and lowercase as in any grammatical function.

8.158:

6. Lowercase the part of a proper name that would be lowercased in text, such as de or von.

Examples of

headline-style

7. Lowercase the second part of a species name, such as fulvescens in Acipenser fulvescens, even if it

capitalization

is the last word in a title or subtitle.

8.159:

Hyphenated

For examples, see 8.158. For hyphenated compounds in titles, see 8.159.

compounds in

headline-style

titles

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Capitalization, Punctuation, and Italics

of Contents

List of Figures

8.158 EXAMPLES OF HEADLINE-STYLE CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

The following examples illustrate the numbered rules in 8.157. All of them illustrate the first rule; the

Index

numbers in parentheses refer to rules 2--7.

Mnemonics That Work Are Better Than Rules That Do Not

8.156:

Singing While You Work

Principles and

A Little Learning Is a Dangerous Thing (2)

examples of

sentence-style

Four Theories concerning the Gospel according to Matthew (2, 3)

capitalization

Taking Down Names, Spelling Them Out, and Typing Them Up (3, 4)

8.157:

Tired but Happy (4)

Principles of

The Editor as Anonymous Assistant (5)

headline-style

capitalization

From Homo erectus to Homo sapiens: A Brief History (3, 7)

Defenders of da Vinci Fail the Test: The Name Is Leonardo (2, 3, 6)

8.158:

Examples of

Sitting on the Floor in an Empty Room (2, 3), but Turn On, Tune In, and Enjoy (3, 4)

headline-style

Ten Hectares per Capita, but Landownership and Per Capita Income (3)

capitalization

Progress in In Vitro Fertilization (3)

8.159:

Hyphenated

compounds in

headline-style

titles

8.160:

Titles containing

quotations

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Capitalization, Punctuation, and Italics

of Contents

List of Figures

8.159 HYPHENATED COMPOUNDS IN HEADLINE-STYLE TITLES

List of Tables

The following rules apply to hyphenated terms appearing in a title capitalized in headline style. For

Index

reasons of consistency and editorial efficiency, Chicago no longer advises making exceptions to these

rules for the rare awkward-looking result (though such niceties may occasionally be observed in

display settings, as on the cover of a book). For rules of hyphenation, see 7.77--85.

8.157:

Principles of

headline-style

1. Always capitalize the first element.

capitalization

2. Capitalize any subsequent elements unless they are articles, prepositions, coordinating

8.158:

conjunctions ( and, but, for, or, nor), or such modifiers as flat or sharp following musical key

Examples of

headline-style

symbols.

capitalization

3. If the first element is merely a prefix or combining form that could not stand by itself as a word

8.159:

( anti, pre, etc.), do not capitalize the second element unless it is a proper noun or proper

Hyphenated

compounds in

adjective.

headline-style

titles

4. Capitalize the second element in a hyphenated spelled-out number ( twenty-one or twenty-first,

etc.) or hyphenated simple fraction ( two-thirds in two-thirds majority). This departure from

8.160:

Titles containing

previous Chicago recommendations recognizes the functional equality of the numbers before

quotations

and after the hyphen.

8.161:

Italics versus

quotation marks for

The examples that follow demonstrate the numbered rules (all the examples demonstrate the first

titles

rule; the numbers in parentheses refer to rules 2--4).

Under-the-Counter Transactions and Out-of-Fashion Initiatives (2)

Bed-and-Breakfast Options in Upstate New York (2)

Record-Breaking Borrowings from Medium-Sized Libraries (2)

Cross-Stitching for Beginners (2)

A History of the Chicago Lying-In Hospital (2; "In" functions as an adverb, not a preposition)

The E-flat Concerto (2)

Self-Sustaining Reactions (2)

Anti-intellectual Pursuits (3)

Does E-mail Alter Thinking Patterns? (3)

A Two-Thirds Majority of Non-English-Speaking Representatives (3, 4)

Ninety-Fifth Avenue Blues (4)

Atari's Twenty-First-Century Adherents (4)

Under another, simplified practice that is not recommended by Chicago, only the first element and

any subsequent element that is a proper noun or adjective are capitalized.

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Capitalization, Punctuation, and Italics

of Contents

List of Figures

8.160 TITLES CONTAINING QUOTATIONS

List of Tables

When a direct quotation of a sentence or an independent clause is used as a title, headline-style

Index

capitalization may be imposed, even for longer quotations. This departure from Chicago's earlier

practice aids identification of titles. See also 14.104.

8.158:

"We All Live More Like Brutes Than Like Humans": Labor and Capital in the Gold Rush

Examples of

headline-style

capitalization

8.159:

Hyphenated

compounds in

headline-style

titles

8.160:

Titles containing

quotations

8.161:

Italics versus

quotation marks for

titles

8.162:

Subtitle

capitalization

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Capitalization, Punctuation, and Italics

of Contents

List of Figures

8.161 ITALICS VERSUS QUOTATION MARKS FOR TITLES

List of Tables

The choice of italics or quotation marks for a title of a work cited in text or notes is determined by the

Index

type of work. Titles of books and periodicals are italicized (see 8.166); titles of articles, chapters, and

other shorter works are set in roman and enclosed in quotation marks (see 8.175).

8.159:

Many editors use The Chicago Manual of Style.

Hyphenated

Refer to the article titled "A Comparison of MLA and APA Style."

compounds in

headline-style

titles

For treatment of book series and editions, see 8.174; for poems and plays, see 8.179--82; for

8.160:

unpublished works, see 8.184; for movies, television, and radio, see 8.185; for websites and blogs, see

Titles containing

quotations

8.186--87; for musical works, see 8.188--92; for works of art and exhibitions, see 8.193--95. For foreign

titles, see 11.3--8.

8.161:

Italics versus

quotation marks for

titles

8.162:

Subtitle

capitalization

8.163:

Permissible changes

to titles

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Capitalization, Punctuation, and Italics

of Contents

List of Figures

8.162 SUBTITLE CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

A subtitle, whether in sentence-style or headline-style capitalization, always begins with a capital

Index

letter. Although on a title page or in a chapter heading a subtitle is often distinguished from a title by

a different typeface, when referred to it is separated from the title by a colon. When an em dash

rather than a colon is used, what follows the em dash is not normally considered to be a subtitle, and

8.160:

the first word is not necessarily capitalized. See also 14.98.

Titles containing

quotations

"Manuals of Style: Guidelines, Not Strangleholds" (headline style)

8.161:

Italics versus

Tapetum character states: Analytical keys (sentence style)

quotation marks for

titles

but

8.162:

Subtitle

Chicago--a Metropolitan Smorgasbord

capitalization

8.163:

Permissible changes

to titles

8.164:

Titles in relation to

surrounding text

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Capitalization, Punctuation, and Italics

of Contents

List of Figures

8.163 PERMISSIBLE CHANGES TO TITLES

List of Tables

When a title is referred to in text or notes or listed in a bibliography or reference list, its original

Index

spelling (including non-Latin letters such as Ï€ or Î³) and hyphenation should be preserved, regardless

of the style used in the surrounding text. Capitalization may be changed to headline style (8.157) or

sentence style (8.156), as applicable. As a matter of editorial discretion, an ampersand (&) may be

8.161:

changed to and, or, more rarely, a numeral may be spelled out (see 14.96). On title pages, commas are

Italics versus

quotation marks for

sometimes omitted from the ends of lines for aesthetic reasons. When such a title is referred to, such

titles

commas should be added, including any comma omitted before a date that appears on a line by itself

8.162:

at the end of a title or subtitle. (Serial commas need be added only if it is clear that they are used in

Subtitle

capitalization

the work itself; see 6.18.) If title and subtitle on a title page are distinguished by typeface alone, a

8.163:

colon must be added when referring to the full title. A dash in the original should be retained;

Permissible changes

to titles

however, a semicolon between title and subtitle may usually be changed to a colon. (For two subtitles

in the original, see 14.98. For older titles, see 14.106.) The following examples illustrate the way titles

8.164:

Titles in relation to

and subtitles are normally punctuated and capitalized in running text, notes, and bibliographies using

surrounding text

headline capitalization. The first three are books, the fourth is an article.

8.165:

Double titles

connected by "or"

Disease, Pain, and Sacrifice: Toward a Psychology of Suffering

Melodrama Unveiled: American Theater and Culture, 1800--1850

Browning's Roman Murder Story: A Reading of "The Ring and the Book"

"Milton Friedman's Capitalism and Freedom--a Best-Seller for Chicago"

For titles within titles (as in the third and fourth examples above), see 8.171, 8.175.

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Capitalization, Punctuation, and Italics

of Contents

List of Figures

8.164 TITLES IN RELATION TO SURROUNDING TEXT

List of Tables

A title, which is considered to be a singular noun, always takes a singular verb. Moreover, any

Index

punctuation that is part of the title should not affect the punctuation of the surrounding text (with the

exception of a sentence-ending period, which should be omitted after a title ending in a question

mark or exclamation point; see 6.118). See also 6.23, 6.119, 8.172.

8.162:

Subtitle

The Waves is not a typical novel. (singular verb in spite of plural in title)

capitalization

Her role in Play It Again, Sam confirmed her stature. (no comma after Sam)

8.163:

Permissible changes

Three stories she never mentioned were "Are You a Doctor?," "The Library of Babel," and "Diamond as Big

to titles

as the Ritz." (comma after first title in spite of the question mark)

8.164:

Titles in relation to

surrounding text

8.165:

Double titles

connected by "or"

8.166:

Treatment of book

and periodical

titles

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Capitalization, Punctuation, and Italics

of Contents

List of Figures

8.165 DOUBLE TITLES CONNECTED BY "OR"

List of Tables

Old-fashioned double titles (or titles and subtitles) connected by or are traditionally referred to as in

Index

the first example, less traditionally but more simply as in the second. Chicago prefers the first form,

but either form is acceptable if used consistently.

8.163:

England's Monitor; or, The History of the Separation

Permissible changes

England's Monitor, or The History of the Separation

to titles

8.164:

Titles in relation to

surrounding text

8.165:

Double titles

connected by "or"

8.166:

Treatment of book

and periodical

titles

8.167:

An initial "a," "an,"

or "the" in book

titles

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Books and Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.166 TREATMENT OF BOOK AND PERIODICAL TITLES

List of Tables

When mentioned in text, notes, or bibliography, the titles and subtitles of books and periodicals are

Index

italicized and capitalized headline-style (see 8.157), though some publications may require sentence

style for reference lists (see 8.156, 15.13). A book title cited in full in the notes or bibliography may be

shortened in text (e.g., a subtitle may be omitted). For short titles in notes, see 14.25.

8.164:

Titles in relation to

surrounding text

8.165:

Double titles

connected by "or"

8.166:

Treatment of book

and periodical

titles

8.167:

An initial "a," "an,"

or "the" in book

titles

8.168:

An initial "the" in

periodical titles

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Books and Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.167 AN INITIAL "A," "AN," OR "THE" IN BOOK TITLES

List of Tables

An initial a, an, or the in running text may be dropped from a book title if it does not fit the

Index

surrounding syntax. When in doubt, or if the article seems indispensable, it should be retained.

Fielding, in his introduction to The History of Tom Jones, a Foundling, announces himself as a professional

8.165:

author.

Double titles

Fielding's History of Tom Jones . . .

connected by "or"

That dreadful Old Curiosity Shop character, Quilp . . .

8.166:

Treatment of book

but

and periodical

titles

In The Old Curiosity Shop, Dickens . . .

8.167:

In L'Amour's The Quick and the Dead . . .

An initial "a," "an,"

or "the" in book

titles

8.168:

An initial "the" in

periodical titles

8.169:

"Magazine" and

other descriptive

terms

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Books and Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.168 AN INITIAL "THE" IN PERIODICAL TITLES

List of Tables

When newspapers and periodicals are mentioned in text, an initial the, even if part of the official title,

Index

is lowercased (unless it begins a sentence) and not italicized. Foreign-language titles, however, retain

the article in the original language--but only if it is an official part of the title. (In citation form, an

initial the is dropped from periodical titles, but foreign-language articles are retained; see 14.210,

8.166:

14.211.)

Treatment of book

and periodical

titles

She reads the Chicago Tribune on the train.

8.167:

We read Le Monde and Die Zeit while traveling in Europe.

An initial "a," "an,"

Did you see the review in the Frankfurter Allgemeine?

or "the" in book

titles

8.168:

An initial "the" in

periodical titles

8.169:

"Magazine" and

other descriptive

terms

8.170:

Periodical titles in

awards, buildings,

and so forth

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Books and Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.169 "MAGAZINE" AND OTHER DESCRIPTIVE TERMS

List of Tables

A word like magazine, journal, or review should be italicized only when it forms part of the official

Index

name of a particular periodical. When such a word functions as an added descriptive term, it is

treated as part of the surrounding text.

8.167:

She used to subscribe to Newsweek and the Partisan Review; now she gets all her information from blogs.

An initial "a," "an,"

I read it both in Time magazine and in the Wall Street Journal.

or "the" in book

titles

but

8.168:

An initial "the" in

His article was reprinted in the New York Times Magazine.

periodical titles

8.169:

"Magazine" and

other descriptive

terms

8.170:

Periodical titles in

awards, buildings,

and so forth

8.171:

Italicized terms

and titles within

titles

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Books and Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.170 PERIODICAL TITLES IN AWARDS, BUILDINGS, AND SO FORTH

List of Tables

When the name of a newspaper or periodical is part of the name of a building, organization, prize, or

Index

the like, it is not italicized.

Los Angeles Times Book Prize

8.168:

Chicago Defender Charities

An initial "the" in

Tribune Tower

periodical titles

8.169:

"Magazine" and

other descriptive

terms

8.170:

Periodical titles in

awards, buildings,

and so forth

8.171:

Italicized terms

and titles within

titles

8.172:

Title not

interchangeable

with subject

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Books and Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.171 ITALICIZED TERMS AND TITLES WITHIN TITLES

List of Tables

Any term within an italicized title that would itself be italicized in running text--such as a foreign

Index

word, a genus name, or the name of a ship--should be set in roman type ( reverse italics). A title of a

work within a title, however, should remain in italics and be enclosed in quotation marks. See also

8.163, 8.115, 8.119, 14.103.

8.169:

"Magazine" and

From Tyrannosaurus rex to King Kong: Large Creatures in Fact and Fiction

other descriptive

terms

The Big E: The Story of the USS Enterprise

8.170:

A Key to Whitehead's "Process and Reality"

Periodical titles in

awards, buildings,

and so forth

8.171:

Italicized terms

and titles within

titles

8.172:

Title not

interchangeable

with subject

8.173:

Multivolume works

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Books and Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.172 TITLE NOT INTERCHANGEABLE WITH SUBJECT

List of Tables

The title of a work should not be used to stand for the subject of a work.

Index

Dostoevsky wrote a book about crime and punishment ( not . . . about Crime and Punishment).

Edward Wasiolek's book on Dostoevsky's Crime and Punishment is titled "Crime and Punishment" and the

Critics.

8.170:

Periodical titles in

In their book The Craft of Translation, Biguenet and Schulte . . . ( not In discussing The Craft of Translation,

awards, buildings,

Biguenet and Schulte . . .)

and so forth

8.171:

Italicized terms

and titles within

titles

8.172:

Title not

interchangeable

with subject

8.173:

Multivolume works

8.174:

Series and editions

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Books and Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.173 MULTIVOLUME WORKS

List of Tables

Titles of multivolume books are treated in the same manner as titles of single-volume works, as are

Index

named titles of individual volumes. The word volume may be abbreviated in parentheses and notes; it

is capitalized (and never abbreviated) only if part of the title. For treatment of multivolume works in

bibliographies and reference lists, see 14.121--27. See also 8.174.

8.171:

Italicized terms

The Day of the Scorpion, volume 2 of The Raj Quartet

and titles within

titles

Art in an Age of Counterrevolution, 1815--1848 (vol. 3, A Social History of Modern Art)

8.172:

the fourth volume of Encyclopaedia Britannica

Title not

interchangeable

with subject

8.173:

Multivolume works

8.174:

Series and editions

8.175:

Articles, stories,

chapters, and so on

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Books and Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

8.174 SERIES AND EDITIONS

List of Tables

Titles of book series and editions are capitalized but not italicized. The words series and edition are

Index

capitalized only if part of the title. See also 14.128--32.

the Loeb Classical Library

8.172:

a Modern Library edition

Title not

Late Editions: Cultural Studies for the End of the Century

interchangeable

with subject

the Crime and Justice series

a book in the Heritage of Sociology Series

8.173:

Multivolume works

8.174:

Series and editions

8.175:

Articles, stories,

chapters, and so on

8.176:

Collected works

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Articles in Periodicals and Parts of a Book

of Contents

List of Figures

8.175 ARTICLES, STORIES, CHAPTERS, AND SO ON

List of Tables

Titles of articles and features in periodicals and newspapers, chapter and part titles, titles of short

Index

stories or essays, and individual selections in books are set in roman type and enclosed in quotation

marks. (If there are quotation marks in the original title, single quotation marks must be used, as in

the fourth example.)

8.173:

Multivolume works

John S. Ellis's article "Reconciling the Celt" appeared in the Journal of British Studies.

8.174:

In chapter 3 of The Footnote, "How the Historian Found His Muse," Anthony Grafton . . .

Series and editions

"Tom Outland's Story," by Willa Cather, . . .

8.175:

The article "Schiller's â€˜Ode to Joy' in Beethoven's Ninth Symphony" received unexpected attention.

Articles, stories,

chapters, and so on

Titles of regular departments or columns in periodicals, however, are set in roman (see also 14.202,

8.176:

Collected works

14.205).

8.177:

Terms like

In this week's Talk of the Town, Lizzie Widdicombe features . . .

"foreword,"

"preface," and so

on

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Articles in Periodicals and Parts of a Book

of Contents

List of Figures

8.176 COLLECTED WORKS

List of Tables

When two or more works, originally published as separate books, are included in a single volume,

Index

often as part of an author's collected works, they are best italicized rather than placed in quotation

marks.

8.174:

The introduction to the Critique of Pure Reason in Kant's Collected Works . . .

Series and editions

8.175:

Articles, stories,

chapters, and so on

8.176:

Collected works

8.177:

Terms like

"foreword,"

"preface," and so

on

8.178:

Numbered

chapters, parts,

and so on

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Articles in Periodicals and Parts of a Book

of Contents

List of Figures

8.177 TERMS LIKE "FOREWORD," "PREFACE," AND SO ON

List of Tables

Such generic terms as foreword, preface, acknowledgments, introduction, appendix, bibliography, glossary,

Index

and index, whether used in cross-references or in reference to another work, are lowercased and set in

roman type.

8.175:

The author states in her preface that . . .

Articles, stories,

For further documentation, see the appendix.

chapters, and so on

Full details are given in the bibliography.

8.176:

The book contains a glossary, a subject index, and an index of names.

Collected works

8.177:

Terms like

"foreword,"

"preface," and so

on

8.178:

Numbered

chapters, parts,

and so on

8.179:

Titles of poems

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Articles in Periodicals and Parts of a Book

of Contents

List of Figures

8.178 NUMBERED CHAPTERS, PARTS, AND SO ON

List of Tables

The words chapter, part, appendix, table, figure, and the like are lowercased and spelled out in text

Index

(though sometimes abbreviated in parenthetical references). Numbers are given in arabic numerals,

regardless of how they appear in the original. If letters are used, they may be upper- or lowercase

(following the original) and are sometimes put in parentheses. See also 9.27--29.

8.176:

Collected works

This matter is discussed in chapters 4 and 5.

8.177:

The Latin text appears in appendix B.

Terms like

"foreword,"

The range is presented numerically in table 4.2 and diagrammed in figure 4.1.

"preface," and so

These connections are illustrated in table A3.

on

Turn to section 5(a) for further examples.

8.178:

Numbered

chapters, parts,

and so on

8.179:

Titles of poems

8.180:

Poems referred to

by first line

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Poems and Plays

of Contents

List of Figures

8.179 TITLES OF POEMS

List of Tables

Titles of most poems are set in roman type and enclosed in quotation marks. A very long poetic work,

Index

especially one constituting a book, is italicized and not enclosed in quotation marks.

Robert Frost's poem "The Housekeeper" in his collection North of Boston

8.177:

Dante's Inferno

Terms like

"foreword,"

In a stand-alone literary study where many poems, short and long, are mentioned, it may be better to

"preface," and so

on

set all their titles in italics.

8.178:

Numbered

chapters, parts,

and so on

8.179:

Titles of poems

8.180:

Poems referred to

by first line

8.181:

Titles of plays

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Poems and Plays

of Contents

List of Figures

8.180 POEMS REFERRED TO BY FIRST LINE

List of Tables

Poems referred to by first line rather than by title are capitalized sentence-style, even if the first word

Index

is lowercased in the original, but any words capitalized in the original should remain capitalized. See

also 8.156, 16.145.

8.178:

E. E. Cummings, in "My father moved through dooms of love," . . . ("my" is lowercased in the original)

Numbered

"Shall I compare thee to a Summer's day?"

chapters, parts,

and so on

8.179:

Titles of poems

8.180:

Poems referred to

by first line

8.181:

Titles of plays

8.182:

Divisions of plays

or poems

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Poems and Plays

of Contents

List of Figures

8.181 TITLES OF PLAYS

List of Tables

Titles of plays, regardless of the length of the play, are italicized.

Index

Shaw's Arms and the Man, in volume 2 of his Plays: Pleasant and Unpleasant

8.179:

Titles of poems

8.180:

Poems referred to

by first line

8.181:

Titles of plays

8.182:

Divisions of plays

or poems

8.183:

Titles of

freestanding

publications

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Poems and Plays

of Contents

List of Figures

8.182 DIVISIONS OF PLAYS OR POEMS

List of Tables

Words denoting parts of long poems or acts and scenes of plays are usually lowercased, neither

Index

italicized nor enclosed in quotation marks. Numbers are arabic, regardless of the original.

canto 2

8.180:

stanza 5

Poems referred to

act 3, scene 2

by first line

8.181:

Titles of plays

8.182:

Divisions of plays

or poems

8.183:

Titles of

freestanding

publications

8.184:

Titles of

unpublished works

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Pamphlets and Reports

of Contents

List of Figures

8.183 TITLES OF FREESTANDING PUBLICATIONS

List of Tables

Titles of pamphlets, reports, and similar freestanding publications are treated much like books (see

Index

8.166, 14.249)--italicized when mentioned or cited in text or notes.

Common Sense, first published anonymously . . .

8.181:

The CDC's Third National Report on Human Exposure to Environmental Chemicals, available online . . .

Titles of plays

8.182:

Divisions of plays

or poems

8.183:

Titles of

freestanding

publications

8.184:

Titles of

unpublished works

8.185:

Titles of movies

and television and

radio programs and

series

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Unpublished Works

of Contents

List of Figures

8.184 TITLES OF UNPUBLISHED WORKS

List of Tables

Titles of unpublished works--theses, dissertations, manuscripts in collections, unpublished transcripts

Index

of speeches, and so on--are set in roman type, capitalized as titles, and enclosed in quotation marks.

Names of manuscript collections take no quotation marks. The title of a not-yet-published book that is

under contract may be italicized, but the word forthcoming (or in press or some other equivalent term),

8.182:

in parentheses, must follow the title. For speeches, see 8.75. See also 15.42.

Divisions of plays

or poems

In a master's thesis, "Charles Valentin Alkan and His Pianoforte Works," . . .

8.183:

Titles of

"A Canal Boat Journey, 1857," an anonymous manuscript in the Library of Congress Manuscripts Division,

freestanding

describes . . .

publications

Letters and other material may be found in the Collis P. Huntington Papers at the George Arents Library of

8.184:

Syracuse University.

Titles of

unpublished works

Gianfranco's Fourth Millennium (forthcoming) continues this line of research.

8.185:

Titles of movies

and television and

radio programs and

series

8.186:

Websites and web

pages

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Movies, Television, and Radio

of Contents

List of Figures

8.185 TITLES OF MOVIES AND TELEVISION AND RADIO PROGRAMS AND SERIES

List of Tables

Titles of movies and of television and radio programs and series are italicized. A single episode in a

Index

television or radio series is set in roman and enclosed in quotation marks.

Gone with the Wind

8.183:

The Godfather, Part II (see also 9.44)

Titles of

PBS's Sesame Street

freestanding

publications

The Ten O'Clock News, WGBH's long-running program

WFMT's From the Recording Horn

8.184:

Titles of

"Casualties," an episode in The Fortunes of War, a Masterpiece Theatre series

unpublished works

but

8.185:

Titles of movies

and television and

the ten o'clock news

radio programs and

series

The names of broadcast networks, channels, and the like are set in roman.

8.186:

Websites and web

pages

Voice of America

Sirius Satellite Radio

8.187:

Blogs and blog

the Discovery Channel

entries

the Sundance and Disney channels

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Electronic Publications

of Contents

List of Figures

8.186 WEBSITES AND WEB PAGES

List of Tables

General titles of websites mentioned or cited in text or notes are normally set in roman, headline-

Index

style, without quotation marks. An initial the in such titles should be lowercased in midsentence.

Titled sections, pages, or special features on a website should be placed in quotation marks. Titles of

the types of works discussed elsewhere in this chapter (i.e., books, journals, etc.) should usually be

8.184:

treated the same whether they are published in print or online. Some websites share the name of a

Titles of

unpublished works

printed counterpart, and others (such as Wikipedia) are analogous to one of the types of works

8.185:

discussed elsewhere in this chapter; these titles should be styled accordingly. See also 14.243--46.

Titles of movies

and television and

radio programs and

Project Gutenberg; Jane Austen's Emma, available as an audiobook from Project Gutenberg

series

the Internet Movie Database; IMDb (note lowercase b); IMDb's page for Live and Let Die; "Roger Moore (I)";

8.186:

the page for well-known Bond portrayer Roger Moore

Websites and web

Google; Google Maps; the "Google Maps Help Center"

pages

Facebook, MySpace, and other social-networking sites

8.187:

The Chicago Manual of Style Online; the online edition of The Chicago Manual of Style; "Chicago Style Q&A";

Blogs and blog

entries

"New Questions and Answers"

8.188:

Encyclopaedia Britannica Online; the online version of Encyclopaedia Britannica

Musical worksâ

Wikipedia; Wikipedia's "Let It Be" entry; Wikipedia's entry on the Beatles' album Let It Be

€”additional

resources

the Oxford English Dictionary Online; the OED Online; the online version of the Oxford English Dictionary

Many websites either do not have a formal title or do not have a title that distinguishes it as a

website. These can usually be identified according to the entity responsible for the site along with a

description of the site and, in some cases, a short form of the URL (e.g., http://www.apple.com/ might

be referred to in running text as Apple.com).

The website for Apple Inc.; Apple.com

Microsoft's website; Microsoft.com

the website for the University of Chicago Press, Books Division

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Electronic Publications

of Contents

List of Figures

8.187 BLOGS AND BLOG ENTRIES

List of Tables

Titles of named blogs, like the titles of journals and other periodicals (see 8.161), should be italicized.

Index

An initial "the" should be treated as part of the title (compare 8.168). Titles of blog entries should be

placed in quotation marks (untitled entries should be referred to by date). For citing blogs (and

comments to blogs) in notes and bibliographies, see 14.243--46.

8.185:

Titles of movies

The Pour; "A Beaujolais Maker's Pain," in The Pour, a blog by Eric Asimov in the New York Times

and television and

radio programs and

Wasted Food; "Friday Buffet," in Wasted Food, a blog by Jonathan Bloom

series

8.186:

The titles of named podcasts, video blogs, and similar electronic formats mentioned or cited in text or

Websites and web

pages

notes can generally be styled according to an analogy to blogs. The name of a regular, ongoing

feature or publication should be italicized; individually titled pieces should be placed in quotation

8.187:

Blogs and blog

marks. For more examples, see 14.221, 14.280.

entries

8.188:

"Visiting Priest Shows Family How Grace Is Done," on Onion Radio News (podcast)

Musical worksâ

€”additional

resources

8.189:

Operas, songs, and

the like

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Musical Works

of Contents

List of Figures

8.188 MUSICAL WORKS--ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

The following paragraphs are intended only as general guidance for citing musical works. Writers or

Index

editors working with highly musicological material should consult D. Kern Holoman, Writing about

Music (bibliog. 1.1). For a more general reference work, consult The New Grove Dictionary of Music and

Musicians and the other Grove musical dictionaries, available from Oxford Music Online (bibliog. 5).

8.186:

For typographic conventions used in musicology, see 7.66--71.

Websites and web

pages

8.187:

Blogs and blog

entries

8.188:

Musical worksâ

€”additional

resources

8.189:

Operas, songs, and

the like

8.190:

Instrumental works

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Musical Works

of Contents

List of Figures

8.189 OPERAS, SONGS, AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

Titles of operas, oratorios, tone poems, and other long musical compositions are italicized and given

Index

standard title capitalization. Titles of songs and other shorter musical compositions are set in roman

and enclosed in quotation marks, capitalized in the same way as poems (see 8.179, 8.180).

8.187:

"La vendetta, oh, la vendetta" from The Marriage of Figaro

Blogs and blog

the "Anvil Chorus" from Verdi's Il Trovatore

entries

Handel's Messiah

8.188:

Rhapsody in Blue

Musical worksâ

€”additional

Finlandia

resources

"All You Need Is Love" (a song by the Beatles)

8.189:

"So What" (a composition by Miles Davis)

Operas, songs, and

the like

"The Star-Spangled Banner"

"Oh, What a Beautiful Mornin' " from Oklahoma!

8.190:

Instrumental works

"Wohin?" from Die schÃ¶ne MÃ¼llerin

8.191:

Opus numbers

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Musical Works

of Contents

List of Figures

8.190 INSTRUMENTAL WORKS

List of Tables

Many instrumental works are known by their generic names-- symphony, quartet, nocturne, and so on--

Index

and often a number or key or both. Such names are capitalized but not italicized. A descriptive title,

however, is usually italicized if referring to a full work, set in roman and in quotation marks if

referring to a section of a work. The abbreviation no. (number; plural nos. ) is set in roman and usually

8.188:

lowercased. (For letters indicating keys, see 7.67.)

Musical worksâ

€”additional

resources

B-flat Nocturne; Chopin's nocturnes

8.189:

the Menuetto from the First Symphony; the third movement

Operas, songs, and

Concerto no. 2 for Piano and Orchestra; the second movement, Allegro appassionato, from Brahms's Second

the like

Piano Concerto; two piano concertos

8.190:

BartÃ³k's Concerto for Orchestra (or Concerto for Orchestra)

Instrumental works

Bach's Mass in B Minor

8.191:

Opus numbers

Hungarian Rhapsody no. 12; the Twelfth Hungarian Rhapsody

Charles Ives's Piano Sonata no. 2 (Concord, Mass., 1840--60); the Concord Sonata

8.192:

Recordings

Symphony no. 6 in F Major; the Sixth Symphony; the Pastoral Symphony

Air with Variations ("The Harmonious Blacksmith") from Handel's Suite no. 5 in E

Elliott Carter's String Quartet no. 5 and his Figment for cello

Augusta Read Thomas's Triple Concerto ( Night's Midsummer Blaze)

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Musical Works

of Contents

List of Figures

8.191 OPUS NUMBERS

List of Tables

The abbreviation op. (opus; plural opp. or opera) is set in roman and usually lowercased. An

Index

abbreviation designating a catalog of a particular composer's works is always capitalized (e.g., BWV

[Bach-Werke-Verzeichnis]; D. [Deutsch] for Schubert; K. [KÃ¶chel] for Mozart; WoO [Werke ohne

Opuszahl], assigned by scholars to certain unnumbered works). When op. or a catalog number is used

8.189:

restrictively (see 6.26), no comma precedes it.

Operas, songs, and

the like

Sonata in E-flat, op. 31, no. 3; Sonata op. 31

8.190:

Instrumental works

Fantasy in C Minor, K. 475; Fantasy K. 475

8.191:

Opus numbers

8.192:

Recordings

8.193:

Paintings, statues,

and such

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Musical Works

of Contents

List of Figures

8.192 RECORDINGS

List of Tables

The official title of an album (and sometimes a title under which it has come to be known) is

Index

italicized; that of the performer or ensemble is set in roman. Individual items on the album--songs,

movements, and the like--are treated as illustrated in the paragraphs above. See also 14.276--77.

8.190:

On The Art of the Trumpet, the New York Trumpet Ensemble plays . . .

Instrumental works

The single "Revolution" should not be confused with "Revolution 1," an earlier take of the song that

8.191:

appeared on The Beatles (aka The White Album).

Opus numbers

Miles Davis's Kind of Blue is one of the most influential jazz records ever made.

8.192:

His Majestie's Clerkes' Hear My Prayer: Choral Music of the English Romantics includes Vaughan Williams's

Recordings

Mass in G Minor.

8.193:

Paintings, statues,

and such

8.194:

Cartoons

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Works of Art and Exhibitions

of Contents

List of Figures

8.193 PAINTINGS, STATUES, AND SUCH

List of Tables

Titles of paintings, drawings, photographs, statues, and other works of art are italicized, whether the

Index

titles are original, added by someone other than the artist, or translated. The names of works of

antiquity (whose creators are often unknown) are usually set in roman.

8.191:

Rothko's Orange Yellow Orange

Opus numbers

Leonardo da Vinci's Mona Lisa and The Last Supper

8.192:

North Dome, one of Ansel Adams's photographs of Kings River Canyon

Recordings

Hogarth's series of drawings The Rake's Progress

8.193:

Michelangelo's David

Paintings, statues,

and such

the Winged Victory

the Venus de Milo

8.194:

Cartoons

8.195:

Exhibitions and

such

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Works of Art and Exhibitions

of Contents

List of Figures

8.194 CARTOONS

List of Tables

Titles of regularly appearing cartoons or comic strips are italicized.

Index

The Far Side

Doonesbury

Rudy Park

8.192:

Recordings

Dilbert

8.193:

Paintings, statues,

and such

8.194:

Cartoons

8.195:

Exhibitions and

such

8.196:

Signs and notices

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles of Works >> Works of Art and Exhibitions

of Contents

List of Figures

8.195 EXHIBITIONS AND SUCH

List of Tables

Titles of world's fairs and other large-scale exhibitions and fairs are capitalized but not italicized.

Index

Smaller exhibitions (e.g., at museums) and the titles of exhibition catalogs (often one and the same)

are italicized.

8.193:

the Great Exhibition of the Works of All Nations; the Great Exhibition of 1851; London's Crystal Palace

Paintings, statues,

Exhibition; the exhibition

and such

the World's Columbian Exposition

8.194:

the Century-of-Progress Expositions (included more than one fair)

Cartoons

the New York World's Fair

8.195:

Exhibitions and

but

such

8.196:

A remarkable exhibition, Motor Cycles, was mounted at the Guggenheim Museum.

Signs and notices

We saw the exhibition Ansel Adams at 100 when visiting the Museum of Modern Art.

8.197:

We decided to buy the catalog Ansel Adams at 100, by John Szarkowski.

Mottoes

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Signs and Mottoes

of Contents

List of Figures

8.196 SIGNS AND NOTICES

List of Tables

Specific wording of common short signs or notices is capitalized headline-style in running text. A

Index

longer notice is better treated as a quotation.

The door was marked Authorized Personnel Only.

8.193:

She encountered the usual Thank You for Not Smoking signs.

Paintings, statues,

We were disturbed by the notice "Shoes and shirt required of patrons but not of personnel."

and such

8.194:

Cartoons

8.195:

Exhibitions and

such

8.196:

Signs and notices

8.197:

Mottoes

8: NAMES AND TERMS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Signs and Mottoes

of Contents

List of Figures

8.197 MOTTOES

List of Tables

Mottoes may be treated the same way as signs. If the wording is in another language, it is usually

Index

italicized and only the first word capitalized. See also 6.51.

The flag bore the motto Don't Tread on Me.

8.193:

My old college has the motto Souvent me souviens.

Paintings, statues,

The motto "All for one and one for all" appears over the door.

and such

8.194:

Cartoons

8.195:

Exhibitions and

such

8.196:

Signs and notices

8.197:

Mottoes

9: NUMBERS

Table

of Contents

Overview

List of Figures

9.1

Overview and additional resources

List of Tables

Numerals versus Words

Index

General Principles

9.2

Chicago's general rule—zero through one hundred

9.3

An alternative rule—zero through nine

9.4

Hundreds, thousands, and hundred thousands

9.5

Number beginning a sentence

9.6

Ordinals

9.7

Consistency and flexibility

Large Numbers

9.8

Millions, billions, and so forth

9.9

Powers of ten

9.10

"Mega-," "giga-," "tera-," and so forth

9.11

Binary systems

9.12

Use of "dex"

Physical Quantities

9.13

Physical quantities in general contexts

9.14

Simple fractions

9.15

Whole numbers plus fractions

9.16

Abbreviations and symbols

9.17

Units for repeated quantities

Percentages and Decimal Fractions

9.18

Percentages

9.19

Decimal fractions and use of the zero

9.20

Decimal places—European practice

Money

9.21

Words versus monetary symbols and numerals

9.22

Non-US currencies using the dollar symbol

9.23

British currency

9.24

Other currencies

9.25

Large monetary amounts

9.26

Currency with dates

Numbered Divisions in Publications and Other Documents

9.27

Page numbers, chapter numbers, and so forth

9.28

Volume, issue, and page numbers for periodicals

9.29

Numbered divisions in legal instruments

Dates

9.30

The year alone

9.31

The year abbreviated

9.32

Month and day

9.33

Centuries

9.34

Decades

9.35

Eras

9.36

All-numeral dates and other brief forms

9.37

ISO style for dates

Time of Day

9.38

Numerals versus words for time of day

9.39

Noon and midnight

9.40

The twenty-four-hour system

9.41

Seconds and dates included

Numbers with Proper Names and Titles

9.42

Numerals for monarchs, popes, and so forth

9.43

Numerals with personal names

9.44

Numbers for sequels

9.45

Vehicle and vessel numbers

9.46

Successive governments

9.47

Numbered political and judicial divisions

9.48

Numbered military units

9.49

Numbered places of worship

9.50

Unions and lodges

Addresses and Thoroughfares

9.51

Numbered highways

9.52

Numbered streets

9.53

Building and apartment numbers

Plurals and Punctuation of Numbers

9.54

Plural numbers

9.55

Comma between digits

9.56

Space between digits

9.57

Numbered lists and outline style

Inclusive Numbers

9.58

When to use the en dash

9.59

When not to use the en dash

9.60

Abbreviating, or condensing, inclusive numbers

9.61

Alternative systems for inclusive numbers

9.62

Inclusive numbers with commas

9.63

Inclusive years

Roman Numerals

9.64

Roman numerals—general principles

9.65

The advent of subtrahends (back counters)

9.66

Chicago's preference for arabic rather than roman numerals

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

9.1 OVERVIEW AND ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

This chapter summarizes some of the conventions Chicago observes in handling numbers, especially

Index

in making the choice between spelling them out and using numerals. Such a choice should be

governed by a number of factors, including whether the number is large or small, whether it is an

approximation or an exact quantity, what kind of entity it stands for, and what context it appears in.

9.1:

Sometimes the goal of consistency must give way to readability (e.g., at the beginning of a sentence;

Overview and

additional

see 9.5). The guidelines in this chapter apply mainly to general works and to scholarly works in the

resources

humanities and social sciences, where numeric quantities are relatively infrequent. But even in

9.2:

scientific and other technical contexts, numerals can never totally replace spelled-out numbers. For

Chicago's general

ruleâ€”zero

more detailed treatment of numbers in technical contexts, consult Scientific Style and Format

through one

hundred

(bibliog. 1.1). See also 9.13--17.

9.3:

An alternative

ruleâ€”zero

through nine

9.4:

Hundreds,

thousands, and

hundred thousands

9.5:

Number beginning

a sentence

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> General Principles

of Contents

List of Figures

9.2 CHICAGO'S GENERAL RULE--ZERO THROUGH ONE HUNDRED

List of Tables

In nontechnical contexts, Chicago advises spelling out whole numbers from zero through one

Index

hundred and certain round multiples of those numbers. Most of the rest of this chapter deals with the

exceptions to this rule and special cases. For hyphens used with spelled-out numbers, see 7.85, section

1. For some additional considerations, consult the index, under numbers. For numerals in direct

9.1:

discourse, see 13.42. For an alternative rule, see 9.3.

Overview and

additional

resources

Thirty-two children from eleven families were packed into eight vintage Beetles.

9.2:

Many people think that seventy is too young to retire.

Chicago's general

The property is held on a ninety-nine-year lease.

ruleâ€”zero

through one

According to a recent appraisal, my house is 103 years old.

hundred

The three new parking lots will provide space for 540 more cars.

9.3:

The population of our village now stands at 5,893.

An alternative

ruleâ€”zero

through nine

9.4:

Hundreds,

thousands, and

hundred thousands

9.5:

Number beginning

a sentence

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> General Principles

of Contents

List of Figures

9.3 AN ALTERNATIVE RULE--ZERO THROUGH NINE

List of Tables

Many publications, including those in scientific or journalistic contexts, follow the simple rule of

Index

spelling out only single-digit numbers and using numerals for all others (but see 9.7). Most of the

exceptions to the general rule (9.2) also apply to this alternative rule.

9.1:

Overview and

additional

resources

9.2:

Chicago's general

ruleâ€”zero

through one

hundred

9.3:

An alternative

ruleâ€”zero

through nine

9.4:

Hundreds,

thousands, and

hundred thousands

9.5:

Number beginning

a sentence

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> General Principles

of Contents

List of Figures

9.4 HUNDREDS, THOUSANDS, AND HUNDRED THOUSANDS

List of Tables

Any of the whole numbers mentioned in 9.2 followed by hundred, thousand, or hundred thousand are

Index

usually spelled out (except in the sciences)--whether used exactly or as approximations. See also 9.8.

Most provincial theaters were designed to accommodate large audiences--from about seven hundred

9.2:

spectators in a small city like Lorient to as many as two thousand in Lyon and Marseille.

Chicago's general

A millennium is a period of one thousand years.

ruleâ€”zero

through one

The population of our city is more than two hundred thousand.

hundred

Some forty-seven thousand persons attended the fair.

9.3:

An alternative

but

ruleâ€”zero

through nine

The official attendance at this year's fair was 47,122.

9.4:

Hundreds,

thousands, and

hundred thousands

9.5:

Number beginning

a sentence

9.6:

Ordinals

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> General Principles

of Contents

List of Figures

9.5 NUMBER BEGINNING A SENTENCE

List of Tables

When a number begins a sentence, it is always spelled out. To avoid awkwardness, a sentence can

Index

often be recast. In the first example, some writers prefer the form one hundred and ten; Chicago's

preference is to omit the and.

9.3:

One hundred ten candidates were accepted.

An alternative

ruleâ€”zero

or

through nine

9.4:

In all, 110 candidates were accepted.

Hundreds,

thousands, and

If a year must begin a sentence, spell it out; it is usually preferable, however, to reword. Avoid and in

hundred thousands

such expressions as two thousand one, two thousand ten, two thousand fifty, and the like (see also 9.30).

9.5:

Number beginning

a sentence

Nineteen thirty-seven was marked, among other things, by the watershed eleventh edition of Bartlett's

9.6:

Familiar Quotations.

Ordinals

or, better,

9.7:

Consistency and

flexibility

The year 1937 . . .

If a number beginning a sentence is followed by another number of the same category, spell out only

the first or reword.

One hundred eighty of the 214 candidates had law degrees; the remaining 34 were doctoral candidates in

fish immunology.

or, better,

Of the 214 candidates, 180 had law degrees; the remaining 34 were doctoral candidates in fish immunology.

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> General Principles

of Contents

List of Figures

9.6 ORDINALS

List of Tables

The general rule applies to ordinal as well as cardinal numbers. Note that Chicago prefers, for

Index

example, 122nd and 123rd (with an n and an r) over 122d and 123d. The latter, however, are common

especially in legal style (see 14.281--317). The letters in ordinal numbers should not appear as

superscripts (e.g., 122nd not 122nd).

9.4:

Hundreds,

Gwen stole second base in the top half of the first inning.

thousands, and

hundred thousands

The restaurant on the forty-fifth floor has a splendid view of the city.

9.5:

She found herself in 125th position out of 360.

Number beginning

The 122nd and 123rd days of the strike were marked by a rash of defections.

a sentence

The ten thousandth child to be born at Mercy Hospital was named Mercy.

9.6:

Ordinals

In the expression " n th degree," Chicago style is to italicize the n (see also 7.59).

9.7:

Consistency and

flexibility

9.8:

Millions, billions,

and so forth

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> General Principles

of Contents

List of Figures

9.7 CONSISTENCY AND FLEXIBILITY

List of Tables

Where many numbers occur within a paragraph or a series of paragraphs, maintain consistency in the

Index

immediate context. If according to rule you must use numerals for one of the numbers in a given

category, use them for all in that category. In the same sentence or paragraph, however, items in one

category may be given as numerals and items in another spelled out. In the first example, the

9.5:

numerals 50, 3, and 4 would normally be spelled out (see 9.2); in the second and third examples,

Number beginning

a sentence

30,000 and 2,000, respectively, would normally be spelled out (see 9.4; see also 9.8). For numerals in

9.6:

direct discourse, see 13.42.

Ordinals

9.7:

A mixture of buildings--one of 103 stories, five of more than 50, and a dozen of only 3 or 4--has been

Consistency and

suggested for the area.

flexibility

In the second half of the nineteenth century, Chicago's population exploded, from just under 30,000 in 1850

9.8:

to nearly 1.7 million by 1900.

Millions, billions,

and so forth

Between 1,950 and 2,000 people attended the concert.

9.9:

Powers of ten

To avoid a thickly clustered group of spelled-out numbers, numerals may be used instead in

exception to the general rule.

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Large Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

9.8 MILLIONS, BILLIONS, AND SO FORTH

List of Tables

Whole numbers used in combination with million, billion, and so forth usually follow the general rule

Index

(see 9.2). See also 9.4. For monetary amounts, see 9.21--26; for the use of superscripts in scientific

contexts, see 9.9.

9.6:

The city had grown from three million in 1960 to fourteen million in 1990.

Ordinals

The survey was administered to more than half of the city's 220 million inhabitants.

9.7:

The population of the United States recently surpassed three hundred million.

Consistency and

flexibility

To express fractional quantities in the millions or more, a mixture of numerals and spelled-out

9.8:

Millions, billions,

numbers is used. In the second example below, the number fourteen is expressed as a numeral for the

and so forth

sake of consistency (see 9.7).

9.9:

Powers of ten

By the end of the fourteenth century, the population of Britain had probably reached 2.3 million.

9.10:

According to some scientists, the universe is between 13.5 and 14 billion years old.

"Mega-," "giga-,"

"tera-," and so

forth

Note that billion in some countries (including, until recently, Great Britain) means a million million (a

trillion in American usage), not, as in American usage, a thousand million; in this alternate system,

the prefix bi- indicates twelve zeros (rather than the American nine), or twice the number of zeros in

one million. Likewise, trillion indicates eighteen zeros (rather than the American twelve), quadrillion

twenty-four (rather than the American fifteen), and so on. Editors working with material by British or

other European writers may need to query the use of these terms. See 5.220 under billion; trillion.

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Large Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

9.9 POWERS OF TEN

List of Tables

Large round numbers may be expressed in powers of ten, especially in scientific writing. This system

Index

is known as scientific notation. For further examples, consult Scientific Style and Format (bibliog. 1.1).

102 = 100

3

9.7:

10 = 1,000

Consistency and

106 = 1,000,000

flexibility

109 = 1,000,000,000

9.8:

12

Millions, billions,

10 = 1,000,000,000,000

and so forth

5.34 × 108 = 534,000,000

9.9:

Powers of ten

Inversely, very small numbers may be expressed in negative powers of ten.

9.10:

"Mega-," "giga-,"

10−2 = 0.01

"tera-," and so

forth

10−3 = 0.001

−6

9.11:

10 = 0.000001

Binary systems

10−9 = 0.000000001

10−12 = 0.000000000001

5.34 × 10−8 = 0.0000000534

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Large Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

9.10 "MEGA-," "GIGA-," "TERA-," AND SO FORTH

List of Tables

According to the International System of Units ( SystÃ¨me international d'unitÃ©s, abbreviated

Index

internationally as SI), very large quantities may also be indicated in some contexts by the use of the

prefixes mega- (million), giga- (billion), tera- (trillion), and so on, as part of the unit of measure.

Inversely, very small numbers may be expressed by milli- (thousandth), micro- (millionth), nano-

9.8:

(billionth), and so on. These expressions are often formed with symbols (e.g., M, for mega-, as in MB,

Millions, billions,

and so forth

megabytes). In astrophysical contexts, the abbreviations Myr and Gyr, standing for megayear (one

9.9:

million years) and gigayear (one billion years), are sometimes used. See also 9.9. For a complete list of

Powers of ten

SI prefixes, see 10.57. See also 9.11.

9.10:

"Mega-," "giga-,"

3 terahertz = 3 Ã— 1012 hertz

"tera-," and so

forth

7 Gyr = 7 Ã— 109 years

9.11:

Binary systems

9.12:

Use of "dex"

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Large Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

9.11 BINARY SYSTEMS

List of Tables

Bases other than ten are common especially in computing, where numbers are usually expressed with

Index

bases that are powers of two (e.g., binary, octal, or hexadecimal). When such numbers are used, the

base if other than ten should be indicated. Abbreviations b (binary), o (octal), and h (hexadecimal) may

precede the number with no intervening space. Alternatively, the base can be expressed as a subscript.

9.9:

In the following example, the four-digit base-ten number is expressed without a comma, following SI

Powers of ten

usage:

9.10:

"Mega-," "giga-,"

"tera-," and so

b11110010001 = 1937

forth

or

9.11:

Binary systems

111100100012 = 193710

9.12:

Use of "dex"

Note that terms such as megabyte, when used as binary multiples, are approximations--a megabyte

9.13:

Physical quantities

was originally equal to 1,048,576 bytes. Current SI usage dictates that such prefixes refer to positive

in general contexts

powers of ten (where a megabyte is equal to 1,000,000 bytes). If binary multiples must be referred to,

the first two letters of the prefix plus bi should be used ( kibibyte, mebibyte, gibibyte, etc.).

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Large Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

9.12 USE OF "DEX"

List of Tables

The term dex is sometimes used in scientific notation as shorthand for decimal exponent.

Index

Errors of 3 dex (i.e., 103) can lead to dangerous misconceptions.

9.10:

"Mega-," "giga-,"

"tera-," and so

forth

9.11:

Binary systems

9.12:

Use of "dex"

9.13:

Physical quantities

in general contexts

9.14:

Simple fractions

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Physical Quantities

of Contents

List of Figures

9.13 PHYSICAL QUANTITIES IN GENERAL CONTEXTS

List of Tables

In nontechnical material, physical quantities such as distances, lengths, areas, and so on are usually

Index

treated according to the general rule (see 9.2). See also 9.15.

Within fifteen minutes the temperature dropped twenty degrees.

9.11:

The train approached at seventy-five miles an hour.

Binary systems

Some students live more than fifteen kilometers from the school.

9.12:

Three-by-five-inch index cards are now seldom used in index preparation.

Use of "dex"

She is five feet nine ( or, more colloquially, five foot nine or five nine).

9.13:

Physical quantities

It is occasionally acceptable to depart from the general rule for certain types of quantities that are

in general contexts

commonly (or more conveniently) expressed as numerals; such a departure, subject to editorial

9.14:

Simple fractions

discretion, must be consistently applied for like quantities across a work. See also 9.7. For the absence

9.15:

of the hyphen in the second example below, see 7.85, section 2, under noun + numeral or enumerator.

Whole numbers

plus fractions

a 40-watt bulb

a size 14 dress

a 32-inch inseam

a fuel efficiency of 80 miles per gallon (or 3 liters per 100 kilometers)

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Physical Quantities

of Contents

List of Figures

9.14 SIMPLE FRACTIONS

List of Tables

Simple fractions are spelled out. For the sake of readability and to lend an appearance of consistency,

Index

they are hyphenated in noun, adjective, and adverb forms. In the rare event that individual parts of a

quantity are emphasized, however, as in the last example, the fraction is spelled open. See also 7.85,

section 1, under fractions, simple. For decimal fractions, see 9.19.

9.12:

Use of "dex"

She has read three-fourths of the book.

9.13:

Four-fifths of the students are boycotting the class.

Physical quantities

in general contexts

I do not want all of your material; two-thirds is quite enough.

A two-thirds majority is required.

9.14:

Simple fractions

but

9.15:

Whole numbers

We divided the cake into four quarters; I took three quarters, and my brother one.

plus fractions

9.16:

Abbreviations and

symbols

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Physical Quantities

of Contents

List of Figures

9.15 WHOLE NUMBERS PLUS FRACTIONS

List of Tables

Quantities consisting of whole numbers and simple fractions may be spelled out if short but are often

Index

better expressed in numerals (especially if a symbol for the fraction is available, as in the examples

here). For decimal fractions, see 9.19. For fractions in mathematical text, see 12.45. See also 9.17, 10.69.

9.13:

We walked for three and one-quarter miles.

Physical quantities

I need 6⅞ yards of the silk fabric.

in general contexts

Lester is exactly 3 feet 5¼ inches tall.

9.14:

Letters are usually printed on 8½″ × 11″ paper.

Simple fractions

9.15:

Whole numbers

plus fractions

9.16:

Abbreviations and

symbols

9.17:

Units for repeated

quantities

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Physical Quantities

of Contents

List of Figures

9.16 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

List of Tables

If an abbreviation or a symbol is used for the unit of measure, the quantity is always expressed by a

Index

numeral. Such usage is standard in mathematical, statistical, technical, or scientific text, where

physical quantities and units of time are expressed in numerals, whether whole numbers or fractions,

and almost always followed by an abbreviated form of the unit (see also 10.52--71). Any writer or

9.14:

editor working with highly technical material should consult Scientific Style and Format or the AMA

Simple fractions

Manual of Style (bibliog. 1.1). Note that hyphens are never used between the numeral and the

9.15:

Whole numbers

abbreviation or symbol, even when they are in adjectival form (see 7.85, section 1, under number +

plus fractions

abbreviation). In the last example, note the use of symbols for prime and double prime, which are not

9.16:

equivalent to the apostrophe and quotation mark.

Abbreviations and

symbols

50 km (kilometers); a 50 km race

9.17:

Units for repeated

21 ha (hectares)

quantities

4.5 L (liters)

9.18:

85 g (grams)

Percentages

240 V (volts)

10Â°C, 10.5Â°C

3â€²6â€³

A unit of measurement used without a numeral should always be spelled out, even in scientific

contexts.

We took the measurements in kilojoules ( not kJ).

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Physical Quantities

of Contents

List of Figures

9.17 UNITS FOR REPEATED QUANTITIES

List of Tables

For expressions including two or more quantities, the abbreviation or symbol is repeated if it is closed

Index

up to the number but not if it is separated. See also 10.52. For the use of spaces with SI units and

abbreviations or symbols, see 10.61.

9.15:

35%--50%

Whole numbers

3°C--7°C

plus fractions

6⅝″ × 9″

9.16:

2 × 5 cm

Abbreviations and

symbols

9.17:

Units for repeated

quantities

9.18:

Percentages

9.19:

Decimal fractions

and use of the zero

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Percentages and Decimal Fractions

of Contents

List of Figures

9.18 PERCENTAGES

List of Tables

Except at the beginning of a sentence, percentages are usually expressed in numerals. In nontechnical

Index

contexts, the word percent is generally used; in scientific and statistical copy, the symbol % is more

common.

9.16:

Fewer than 3 percent of the employees used public transportation.

Abbreviations and

With 90--95 percent of the work complete, we can relax.

symbols

A 75 percent likelihood of winning is worth the effort.

9.17:

Her five-year certificate of deposit carries an interest rate of 5.9 percent.

Units for repeated

quantities

Only 20% of the ants were observed to react to the stimulus.

9.18:

The treatment resulted in a 20%--25% increase in reports of night blindness.

Percentages

9.19:

Note that percent, an adverb, is not interchangeable with the noun percentage (1 percent is a very small

Decimal fractions

percentage). Note also that no space appears between the numeral and the symbol %.

and use of the zero

9.20:

Decimal placesâ

€”European

practice

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Percentages and Decimal Fractions

of Contents

List of Figures

9.19 DECIMAL FRACTIONS AND USE OF THE ZERO

List of Tables

Large or complex fractions are expressed as numeric decimal fractions (compare 9.14). When a

Index

quantity equals less than 1.00, a zero normally appears before the decimal point as an aid to

readability, particularly in scientific contexts and especially if quantities greater than 1.00 appear in

the same context. (Note that a unit of measure with a quantity of less than zero is generally

9.17:

pronounced as if it were plural; see also 10.68.)

Units for repeated

quantities

a mean of 0.73

9.18:

Percentages

the ratio 0.85

The average number of children born to college graduates dropped from 2.3 to 0.95 per couple.

9.19:

Decimal fractions

and use of the zero

In contexts where decimal quantities must be 1.00 or less, as in probabilities, correlation coefficients,

9.20:

and the like, a zero is typically omitted before the decimal point. For zeros with decimal points in

Decimal placesâ

€”European

tables, see 3.70.

practice

9.21:

p < .05

Words versus

R = .10

monetary symbols

and numerals

By a similar token, the zero is routinely omitted in baseball batting averages and firearm calibers.

Ty Cobb's average was .367.

They found and confiscated a .38 police special and a .22-caliber single-shot rifle.

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Percentages and Decimal Fractions

of Contents

List of Figures

9.20 DECIMAL PLACES--EUROPEAN PRACTICE

List of Tables

In European countries, except for Great Britain, the decimal point is represented by a comma. A thin,

Index

fixed space, not a comma, separates groups of three digits, whether to the left or to the right of the

decimal point. (In electronic publications, a nonbreaking space may be used.) This practice reflects

European-style SI usage (see 9.56). Canadians increasingly follow SI usage, retaining the decimal

9.18:

point (or, in French-language contexts, the comma) but using a thin space to separate groups of three

Percentages

digits. In US publications, US style should be followed, except in direct quotations. See also 10.61.

9.19:

Decimal fractions

and use of the zero

36 333,333 (European style)

9.20:

36 333.333 (Canadian style)

Decimal placesâ

36,333.333 (US and British style)

€”European

practice

9.21:

Words versus

monetary symbols

and numerals

9.22:

Non-US currencies

using the dollar

symbol

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Money

of Contents

List of Figures

9.21 WORDS VERSUS MONETARY SYMBOLS AND NUMERALS

List of Tables

Isolated references to amounts of money are spelled out for whole numbers of one hundred or less, in

Index

accordance with the general principle presented in 9.2. See also 9.3.

seventy-five cents = 75Â¢

9.19:

fifteen dollars = $15

Decimal fractions

seventy-five pounds = Â£75

and use of the zero

9.20:

Whole amounts expressed numerically should include zeros and a decimal point only when they

Decimal placesâ

€”European

appear in the same context with fractional amounts (see also 9.19). Note the singular verb in the

practice

second example.

9.21:

Words versus

Children can ride for seventy-five cents.

monetary symbols

and numerals

The eighty-three dollars was quickly spent.

9.22:

The instructor charged â‚¬125 per lesson.

Non-US currencies

Prices ranged from $0.95 up to $10.00.

using the dollar

symbol

For larger amounts, see 9.25.

9.23:

British currency

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Money

of Contents

List of Figures

9.22 NON-US CURRENCIES USING THE DOLLAR SYMBOL

List of Tables

In contexts where the symbol $ may refer to non-US currencies, these currencies should be clearly

Index

identified.

three hundred Canadian dollars = C$300 or Can$300

9.20:

$749 in New Zealand dollars = NZ$749

Decimal placesâ

If you subtract A$15.69 from US$25, . . .

€”European

practice

ninety-eight Mexican pesos = Mex$98

9.21:

Words versus

In more formal usage, the International Organization for Standardization's three-letter currency codes

monetary symbols

(e.g., USD for United States dollars, CAD for Canadian dollars, NZD for New Zealand Dollars, and

and numerals

AUD for Australian dollars) may be more appropriate. See also 9.24. For a complete list, consult the

9.22:

Non-US currencies

ISO website. Also consult Scientific Style and Format or the United States Government Printing Office Style

using the dollar

Manual (bibliog. 1.1). Where the context makes clear what currency is meant, the dollar sign alone is

symbol

enough.

9.23:

British currency

9.24:

Other currencies

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Money

of Contents

List of Figures

9.23 BRITISH CURRENCY

List of Tables

The basic unit of British currency is the pound, or pound sterling, for which the symbol is £. One-

Index

hundredth of a pound is a penny (plural pence), abbreviated as p (no period).

fifteen pounds = £15

9.21:

fifty pence = 50p

Words versus

£4.75, £5.00, and £5.25

monetary symbols

and numerals

Until the decimalization of British currency in 1971, the pound was divided into shillings (s.) and

9.22:

Non-US currencies

pence (d.).

using the dollar

symbol

Ten pounds, fifteen shillings, and sixpence = £10 15s. 6d.

9.23:

twopence halfpenny = 2½d.

British currency

9.24:

Other currencies

9.25:

Large monetary

amounts

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Money

of Contents

List of Figures

9.24 OTHER CURRENCIES

List of Tables

Most other currencies are handled the same way as US currency, with a decimal point between the

Index

main unit and subunits (e.g., EUR 10.75). When letters rather than symbols are used, a space separates

the letter(s) from the numeral.

9.22:

forty euros ( or, in European Union documents, 40 euro) = EUR 40 ( or â‚¬40)

Non-US currencies

95 (euro) cents ( or, in European Union documents, 95 cent)

using the dollar

symbol

725 yen = Â¥725

65.50 Swiss francs = SF 65.50

9.23:

British currency

Before adoption of the euro, monetary symbols included F (French franc), DM (deutsche mark), and

9.24:

Other currencies

Lit (Italian lira), among others. The International Organization for Standardization defines three-letter

9.25:

codes (including EUR) for most countries. See also 9.22.

Large monetary

amounts

9.26:

Currency with

dates

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Money

of Contents

List of Figures

9.25 LARGE MONETARY AMOUNTS

List of Tables

Sums of money of more than one hundred dollars are normally expressed by numerals or, for

Index

numbers of a million or more, by a mixture of numerals and spelled-out numbers, even for whole

numbers (compare 9.4, 9.8).

9.23:

An offer of $1,000 once seemed low; we eventually agreed to pay more than fifteen times that amount.

British currency

Most of the homes that went into foreclosure were valued at more than $95,000.

9.24:

She signed a ten-year, $250 million contract.

Other currencies

The military requested an additional $7.3 billion.

9.25:

The marquess sold his ancestral home for Â£25 million.

Large monetary

amounts

In certain financial contexts, thousands are sometimes represented by K.

9.26:

Currency with

dates

Three-bedroom condominiums are priced at $350K.

9.27:

Page numbers,

chapter numbers,

and so forth

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Money

of Contents

List of Figures

9.26 CURRENCY WITH DATES

List of Tables

In contexts where the value of a currency in any particular year is relevant to the discussion, the date

Index

may be inserted in parentheses, without intervening space, after the currency symbol. When letters

alone are used, spaces intervene before and after the parentheses (see also 9.22, 9.24).

9.24:

US$(1992)2.47

Other currencies

Â£(2002)15,050

9.25:

Large monetary

but

amounts

USD (1992) 2.47

9.26:

Currency with

dates

9.27:

Page numbers,

chapter numbers,

and so forth

9.28:

Volume, issue, and

page numbers for

periodicals

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Numbered Divisions in Publications and Other Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

9.27 PAGE NUMBERS, CHAPTER NUMBERS, AND SO FORTH

List of Tables

Numbers referring to pages, chapters, parts, volumes, and other divisions of a book, as well as

Index

numbers referring to illustrations or tables, are set as numerals. Pages of the front matter are usually

in lowercase roman numerals; those for the rest of the book are in arabic numerals (see 1.5--8). For the

use of en dashes with number ranges, see 6.78. For documentation style, see chapters 14 and 15. See

9.25:

also 8.178.

Large monetary

amounts

The preface will be found on pages vii--xiv and the introduction on pages 1--35.

9.26:

Currency with

See part 3, especially chapters 9 and 10, for further discussion; see also volume 2, table 15 and figures 7--9.

dates

Upon completion of step 3, on page 37, the reader is asked to consult appendix B, table 7.

9.27:

Page numbers,

Biblical references are given in numerals only; chapter and verse are separated by a colon with no

chapter numbers,

and so forth

space following it. For abbreviations, see 10.45--51.

9.28:

Volume, issue, and

Acts 27:1

page numbers for

Exodus 20:3--17

periodicals

Psalm 121; Psalms 146--50

9.29:

Numbered divisions

2 Corinthians 11:29--30

in legal instruments

Gen. 47:12

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Numbered Divisions in Publications and Other Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

9.28 VOLUME, ISSUE, AND PAGE NUMBERS FOR PERIODICALS

List of Tables

References to volumes, issues, and pages of a journal are usually made, in that order, with arabic

Index

numerals; the words volume and page are usually omitted. See also 14.170--217.

Their article appeared in Current Anthropology 49, no. 1 (2008): 87--114.

9.26:

Currency with

dates

9.27:

Page numbers,

chapter numbers,

and so forth

9.28:

Volume, issue, and

page numbers for

periodicals

9.29:

Numbered divisions

in legal instruments

9.30:

The year alone

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Numbered Divisions in Publications and Other Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

9.29 NUMBERED DIVISIONS IN LEGAL INSTRUMENTS

List of Tables

Arabic or roman numerals are sometimes used to distinguish divisions within legal instruments and

Index

other documents. When in doubt about a reference to a legal document, use arabic numerals or, if

possible, consult the document itself for guidance. A mixture of arabic and roman numerals

sometimes distinguishes smaller from larger divisions. For legal style in source citations, see

9.27:

14.281--317.

Page numbers,

chapter numbers,

and so forth

They have filed for Chapter 11 protection from creditors.

9.28:

Proposition 20 will be voted on next week.

Volume, issue, and

A search of Title IX (of the Education Amendments of 1972) turns up no mention of athletics.

page numbers for

periodicals

Do you have a 401(k)?

In paragraph 14(vi) of the bylaws, . . .

9.29:

Numbered divisions

According to the Constitution of the United States, article 2, section 4 ( or Article II, Section 4), . . .

in legal instruments

but

9.30:

The year alone

the Fifth Amendment ( or Amendment V)

9.31:

The year

abbreviated

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Dates

of Contents

List of Figures

9.30 THE YEAR ALONE

List of Tables

Years are expressed in numerals unless they stand at the beginning of a sentence (see 9.5), in which

Index

case rewording may be a better option. For eras, see 9.35.

We all know what happened in 1776.

9.28:

Records for solar eclipses go back at least as far as 3000 BCE.

Volume, issue, and

Twenty twenty ( or Two thousand twenty) should be a good year for clairvoyants.

page numbers for

periodicals

or, better,

9.29:

Numbered divisions

The year 2020 should be a good year for clairvoyants.

in legal instruments

9.30:

The year alone

9.31:

The year

abbreviated

9.32:

Month and day

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Dates

of Contents

List of Figures

9.31 THE YEAR ABBREVIATED

List of Tables

In informal contexts, the first two digits of a particular year are often replaced by an apostrophe (not

Index

an opening single quotation mark).

the spirit of '76 ( not â€˜76)

9.29:

the class of '06

Numbered divisions

in legal instruments

9.30:

The year alone

9.31:

The year

abbreviated

9.32:

Month and day

9.33:

Centuries

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Dates

of Contents

List of Figures

9.32 MONTH AND DAY

List of Tables

When specific dates are expressed, cardinal numbers are used, although these may be pronounced as

Index

ordinals. For the month-day-year date form versus the day-month-year form, see 6.45.

May 26, 2008, was a sad day for film buffs.

9.30:

The Watchmaker's Digest (11 November 2011) praised the new model's precision.

The year alone

9.31:

When a day is mentioned without the month or year, the number is usually spelled out in ordinal

The year

form.

abbreviated

9.32:

On November 5, McManus declared victory. By the twenty-fifth, most of his supporters had deserted him.

Month and day

9.33:

Centuries

9.34:

Decades

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Dates

of Contents

List of Figures

9.33 CENTURIES

List of Tables

Particular centuries are spelled out and lowercased. See also 9.35.

Index

the twenty-first century

the eighth and ninth centuries

from the ninth to the eleventh century

9.31:

The year

the eighteen hundreds (the nineteenth century)

abbreviated

9.32:

Month and day

9.33:

Centuries

9.34:

Decades

9.35:

Eras

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Dates

of Contents

List of Figures

9.34 DECADES

List of Tables

Decades are either spelled out (as long as the century is clear) and lowercased or expressed in

Index

numerals. Chicago calls for no apostrophe to appear between the year and the s.

the nineties

9.32:

the 1980s and 1990s ( or, less formally, the 1980s and '90s)

Month and day

9.33:

Note that the first decade of any century cannot be treated in the same way as other decades. "The

Centuries

1900s," for example, could easily be taken to refer to the whole of the twentieth century. To refer to

9.34:

the second decade (i.e., without writing "second decade"), an expression like "the 1910s" might be

Decades

used if absolutely necessary, but "the teens" should be avoided. Note also that some consider the first

9.35:

Eras

decade of, for example, the twenty-first century to consist of the years 2001--10; the second, 2011--20;

and so on. Chicago defers to the preference of its authors in this matter. See also 8.70, 9.63.

9.36:

All-numeral dates

and other brief

the first decade of the twenty-first century ( or the years 2000--2009)

forms

the second decade of the twenty-first century ( or the years 2010--19)

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Dates

of Contents

List of Figures

9.35 ERAS

List of Tables

Era designations, at least in the Western world, are usually expressed in one of two ways: either CE

Index

("of the Common Era") and BCE ("before the Common Era"), or AD ( anno Domini, "in the year of the

Lord") and BC ("before Christ"). Other forms include AH ( anno Hegirae, "in the year of [Muhammad's]

Hegira," or anno Hebraico, "in the Hebrew year"); AUC ( ab urbe condita, "from the founding of the city

9.33:

[Rome]"); and--for archaeological purposes--BP ("before the present"). Note that the Latin

Centuries

abbreviations AD and AH precede the year number, whereas the others follow it. Choice of the era

9.34:

Decades

designation depends on tradition, academic discipline, or personal preference. These abbreviations

9.35:

often appear in small capitals, sometimes with periods following each letter. For consistency with the

Eras

guidelines in chapter 10, Chicago recommends full capitals and no periods; see also 10.39.

9.36:

All-numeral dates

Herod Antipas (21 BCE--39 CE) was tetrarch of Galilee from 4 BCE until his death.

and other brief

forms

Britain was invaded successfully in 55 BC and AD 1066.

The First Dynasty appears to have lasted from 4400 BP to 4250 BP in radiocarbon years.

9.37:

ISO style for dates

Mubarak published his survey at Cairo in 1886 (AH 1306).

The campsite seems to have been in use by about 13,500 BP.

Rome, from its founding in the eighth century BCE, . . .

Note that the second half of a pair of inclusive dates used with BCE or BC, where the higher number

comes first, should be given in full to avoid confusion (e.g., "350--345 BCE"). See also 9.63.

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Dates

of Contents

List of Figures

9.36 ALL-NUMERAL DATES AND OTHER BRIEF FORMS

List of Tables

For practical reasons, all-numeral styles of writing dates (5/10/99, etc.) should not be used in formal

Index

writing (except with certain dates that may be known that way: e.g., 9/11, for September 11, 2001).

Whereas in American usage the first numeral refers to the month and the second to the day, in the

usage of other English-speaking countries and of most European languages it is the other way

9.34:

around. When quoting letters or other material dated, say, 5/10/03, a writer must first ascertain and

Decades

then make it clear to readers whether May 10 or October 5 is meant (not to mention 1903 or 2003). In

9.35:

Eras

text, therefore, the full date should always be spelled out (see 9.32). In documentation and in tables, if

9.36:

numerous dates occur, months may be abbreviated, and the day-month-year form, requiring no

All-numeral dates

punctuation, may be neater (e.g., 5 Oct 2003). See also 10.40. For ISO style, see 9.37.

and other brief

forms

9.37:

ISO style for dates

9.38:

Numerals versus

words for time of

day

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Dates

of Contents

List of Figures

9.37 ISO STYLE FOR DATES

List of Tables

The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) recommends an all-numeral style consisting

Index

of year-month-day (i.e., from largest component to smallest), hyphenated. The year is given in full,

and the month or day, if one digit only, is preceded by a zero. Thus January 19, 2010, appears as 2010-

01-19. Among other advantages, this style allows dates to be sorted correctly in an electronic

9.35:

spreadsheet and other applications.

Eras

9.36:

All-numeral dates

and other brief

forms

9.37:

ISO style for dates

9.38:

Numerals versus

words for time of

day

9.39:

Noon and midnight

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Time of Day

of Contents

List of Figures

9.38 NUMERALS VERSUS WORDS FOR TIME OF DAY

List of Tables

Times of day in even, half, and quarter hours are usually spelled out in text. With o'clock, the number

Index

is always spelled out. In the third example, the a before quarter is optional.

Her day begins at five o'clock in the morning.

9.36:

The meeting continued until half past three.

All-numeral dates

He left the office at a quarter of four ( or a quarter to four).

and other brief

forms

We will resume at ten thirty.

Cinderella almost forgot that she should leave the ball before midnight. (See also 9.39.)

9.37:

ISO style for dates

Numerals are used (with zeros for even hours) when exact times are emphasized. Chicago

9.38:

Numerals versus

recommends lowercase a.m. ( ante meridiem) and p.m. ( post meridiem), though these sometimes appear

words for time of

day

in small capitals, with or without periods.

9.39:

Noon and midnight

The first train leaves at 5:22 a.m. and the last at 11:00 p.m.

She caught the 6:20 p.m. flight.

9.40:

The twenty-four-

Please attend a meeting in Grand Rapids, Michigan, on December 5 at 10:30 a.m. (EST).

hour system

For more on time zones, see 10.42.

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Time of Day

of Contents

List of Figures

9.39 NOON AND MIDNIGHT

List of Tables

Except in the twenty-four-hour system (see 9.40), numbers should never be used to express noon or

Index

midnight (except, informally, in an expression like twelve o'clock at night). Although noon can be

expressed as 12:00 m. (m. = meridies), very few use that form. And the term 12:00 p.m. is ambiguous, if

not illogical. In the second example below, note the double date for clarity.

9.37:

ISO style for dates

The meeting began at 9:45 a.m. and was adjourned by noon.

9.38:

Rodriguez was born at midnight, August 21--22.

Numerals versus

words for time of

day

9.39:

Noon and midnight

9.40:

The twenty-four-

hour system

9.41:

Seconds and dates

included

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Time of Day

of Contents

List of Figures

9.40 THE TWENTY-FOUR-HOUR SYSTEM

List of Tables

In the twenty-four-hour system of expressing time (used in Europe and in the military), four digits

Index

always appear, often with no punctuation between hours and minutes.

1200 = noon

9.38:

2400 or 0000 = midnight

Numerals versus

0001 = 12:01 a.m.

words for time of

day

1438 = 2:38 p.m.

At 1500 hours ( or 1500h) we started off on our mission.

9.39:

Noon and midnight

General quarters sounded at 0415.

9.40:

The twenty-four-

hour system

9.41:

Seconds and dates

included

9.42:

Numerals for

monarchs, popes,

and so forth

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Time of Day

of Contents

List of Figures

9.41 SECONDS AND DATES INCLUDED

List of Tables

A variation of the twenty-four-hour system shows hours, minutes, and seconds separated by colons; it

Index

also shows fractions of a second following a period. This format may be preceded by an ISO-style

date (see 9.37).

9.39:

09:27:08.6 = 27 minutes, 8.6 seconds after 9:00 a.m.

Noon and midnight

2010-01-19 16:09:41.3 = January 19, 2010, at 9 minutes, 41.3 seconds after 4:00 p.m.

9.40:

The twenty-four-

For further details, consult Scientific Style and Format (bibliog. 1.1).

hour system

9.41:

Seconds and dates

included

9.42:

Numerals for

monarchs, popes,

and so forth

9.43:

Numerals with

personal names

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Numbers with Proper Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

9.42 NUMERALS FOR MONARCHS, POPES, AND SO FORTH

List of Tables

Sovereigns, emperors, popes, and Orthodox patriarchs with the same name are differentiated by

Index

numerals, traditionally roman.

Elizabeth II

9.40:

Benedict XVI

The twenty-four-

hour system

In continental European practice, the numeral is sometimes followed by a period (e.g., Wilhelm II.) or

9.41:

a superscript (e.g., FranÃ§ois Ier) indicating that the number is an ordinal. In an English context, the

Seconds and dates

included

roman numeral alone should appear. See also 11.30.

9.42:

Numerals for

monarchs, popes,

and so forth

9.43:

Numerals with

personal names

9.44:

Numbers for

sequels

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Numbers with Proper Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

9.43 NUMERALS WITH PERSONAL NAMES

List of Tables

Some personal names are followed by a roman numeral or an arabic ordinal numeral. No punctuation

Index

precedes the numeral unless the name is inverted (as in an index entry). For Jr. , see 6.47.

Adlai E. Stevenson III

9.41:

Michael F. Johnson 2nd

Seconds and dates

included

but

9.42:

Numerals for

Stevenson, Adlai E., III

monarchs, popes,

and so forth

9.43:

Numerals with

personal names

9.44:

Numbers for

sequels

9.45:

Vehicle and vessel

numbers

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Numbers with Proper Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

9.44 NUMBERS FOR SEQUELS

List of Tables

Numerals are often used to designate the sequel to a novel or a movie or to differentiate two chapter

Index

titles dealing with the same subject matter. When quoting such titles, follow the usage--roman or

arabic (or spelled out)--reflected in the source itself.

9.42:

The Godfather; The Godfather, Part II; The Godfather, Part III

Numerals for

Jaws; Jaws 2; Jaws 3-D

monarchs, popes,

and so forth

chapter 9, "Alligator Studies in the Everglades--I"

chapter 10, "Alligator Studies in the Everglades--II"

9.43:

Numerals with

personal names

9.44:

Numbers for

sequels

9.45:

Vehicle and vessel

numbers

9.46:

Successive

governments

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Numbers with Proper Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

9.45 VEHICLE AND VESSEL NUMBERS

List of Tables

Boats and the like differentiated by a number usually take a roman numeral, spacecraft an arabic

Index

numeral. See also 8.115--16.

Bluebird III

9.43:

Mariner 9

Numerals with

personal names

9.44:

Numbers for

sequels

9.45:

Vehicle and vessel

numbers

9.46:

Successive

governments

9.47:

Numbered political

and judicial

divisions

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Numbers with Proper Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

9.46 SUCCESSIVE GOVERNMENTS

List of Tables

Ordinal numbers designating successive dynasties, governments, and other governing bodies are

Index

spelled out if one hundred or less.

Eighteenth Dynasty

9.44:

Fifth Republic

Numbers for

Second Continental Congress

sequels

Second International

9.45:

Ninety-Seventh United States Congress

Vehicle and vessel

numbers

111th Congress

9.46:

Successive

governments

9.47:

Numbered political

and judicial

divisions

9.48:

Numbered military

units

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Numbers with Proper Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

9.47 NUMBERED POLITICAL AND JUDICIAL DIVISIONS

List of Tables

Ordinal numbers designating political or judicial divisions are spelled out if one hundred or less.

Index

Fifth Ward

Twelfth Congressional District

Tenth Circuit

9.45:

Vehicle and vessel

101st Precinct

numbers

9.46:

Successive

governments

9.47:

Numbered political

and judicial

divisions

9.48:

Numbered military

units

9.49:

Numbered places

of worship

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Numbers with Proper Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

9.48 NUMBERED MILITARY UNITS

List of Tables

Ordinal numbers designating military units are spelled out if one hundred or less.

Index

Fifth Army

Fourth Infantry Division

First Corps Support Command

9.46:

Successive

101st Airborne Division

governments

9.47:

Numbered political

and judicial

divisions

9.48:

Numbered military

units

9.49:

Numbered places

of worship

9.50:

Unions and lodges

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Numbers with Proper Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

9.49 NUMBERED PLACES OF WORSHIP

List of Tables

Ordinal numbers that are part of the names of places of worship are spelled out.

Index

Fourth Presbyterian Church

Twenty-First Church of Christ, Scientist

9.47:

Numbered political

and judicial

divisions

9.48:

Numbered military

units

9.49:

Numbered places

of worship

9.50:

Unions and lodges

9.51:

Numbered

highways

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Numbers with Proper Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

9.50 UNIONS AND LODGES

List of Tables

Numbers designating local branches of labor unions and fraternal lodges are usually expressed in

Index

arabic numerals after the name. Commas are generally omitted.

Chicago Typographical Union No. 16

9.48:

American Legion Post 21

Numbered military

United Auto Workers Local 890

units

9.49:

Numbered places

of worship

9.50:

Unions and lodges

9.51:

Numbered

highways

9.52:

Numbered streets

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Addresses and Thoroughfares

of Contents

List of Figures

9.51 NUMBERED HIGHWAYS

List of Tables

State, federal, and interstate highways are designated by arabic numerals. Names for state routes vary

Index

from state to state. See also 8.55.

US Route 41 ( or US 41)

9.49:

Interstate 90 ( or I-90)

Numbered places

Illinois Route 50 ( or Illinois 50; IL 50); Route 50

of worship

M6 motorway (England)

9.50:

Unions and lodges

9.51:

Numbered

highways

9.52:

Numbered streets

9.53:

Building and

apartment numbers

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Addresses and Thoroughfares

of Contents

List of Figures

9.52 NUMBERED STREETS

List of Tables

Names of numbered streets, avenues, and so forth are usually spelled out if one hundred or less. For

Index

the use of N, E, SW, and the like, see 10.35. See also 8.55.

First Avenue

9.50:

Ninety-Fifth Street

Unions and lodges

122nd Street

9.51:

Numbered

highways

9.52:

Numbered streets

9.53:

Building and

apartment numbers

9.54:

Plural numbers

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Numerals versus Words >> Addresses and Thoroughfares

of Contents

List of Figures

9.53 BUILDING AND APARTMENT NUMBERS

List of Tables

Building numbers, in arabic numerals, precede the street name. For readability, text usage may differ

Index

slightly from an address on an envelope. For preferred forms of addresses in the United States,

consult the website of the US Postal Service.

9.51:

They lived in Oak Park, at 1155 South Euclid Avenue, for almost ten years.

Numbered

She now lives in unit 114A, 150 Ninth Avenue, with an unrivaled view of the city.

highways

Our office is at 1427 East Sixtieth Street, Chicago, Illinois.

9.52:

Please mail a copy of the German-language edition to 1427 E. 60th St., Chicago, IL 60637.

Numbered streets

9.53:

When a building is referred to in running text by its address, the number is often spelled out.

Building and

apartment numbers

One Thousand Lake Shore Drive

9.54:

Plural numbers

One IBM Plaza

9.55:

Comma between

digits

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Plurals and Punctuation of Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

9.54 PLURAL NUMBERS

List of Tables

Spelled-out numbers form their plurals as other nouns do (see 7.5).

Index

The contestants were in their twenties and thirties.

The family was at sixes and sevens.

9.52:

Numbered streets

Numerals form their plurals by adding s. No apostrophe is needed.

9.53:

Building and

Among the scores were two 240s and three 238s.

apartment numbers

Jazz forms that were developed in the 1920s became popular in the 1930s.

9.54:

Plural numbers

9.55:

Comma between

digits

9.56:

Space between

digits

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Plurals and Punctuation of Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

9.55 COMMA BETWEEN DIGITS

List of Tables

In most numerals of one thousand or more, commas are used between groups of three digits,

Index

counting from the right. (In scientific writing, commas are often omitted from four-digit numbers.)

See also 9.56.

9.53:

1,512

Building and

32,987

apartment numbers

4,000,500

9.54:

Plural numbers

No commas are used in page numbers, line numbers (e.g., in poetry and plays), addresses, and years

9.55:

Comma between

(though years of five digits or more do include the comma). See also 9.35.

digits

9.56:

Punctuation conventions can be found on page 1535 of the tenth edition.

Space between

Our business office is at 11030 South Langley Avenue.

digits

Human artifacts dating from between 35,000 BP and 5000 BP have been found there.

9.57:

Numbered lists and

outline style

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Plurals and Punctuation of Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

9.56 SPACE BETWEEN DIGITS

List of Tables

In the International System of Units (SI units), thin, fixed spaces rather than commas are used to mark

Index

off groups of three digits, both to the left and to the right of the decimal point (represented by a

comma in many non-English settings). (In electronic publications, a nonbreaking space may be used.)

In numbers of only four digits either to the left or the right of the decimal point, no space is used

9.54:

(except in table columns that also include numbers having five or more digits). This system is far

Plural numbers

more common in Europe than in the United States. See also 9.20, 9.55.

9.55:

Comma between

digits

3 426 869

9.56:

0.000 007

Space between

2501.4865 (no space is used with four-digit sequences)

digits

9.57:

For more on SI units, see Ambler Thompson and Barry N. Taylor, Guide for the Use of the International

Numbered lists and

outline style

System of Units (SI), and The International System of Units, a brochure published in English and French

9.58:

by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures and available online (see bibliog. 2.4).

When to use the en

dash

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Plurals and Punctuation of Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

9.57 NUMBERED LISTS AND OUTLINE STYLE

List of Tables

For the use of numerals (arabic and roman) and letters to distinguish items in lists, see 6.121--26.

Index

9.55:

Comma between

digits

9.56:

Space between

digits

9.57:

Numbered lists and

outline style

9.58:

When to use the en

dash

9.59:

When not to use

the en dash

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Inclusive Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

9.58 WHEN TO USE THE EN DASH

List of Tables

An en dash used between two numbers implies up to and including, or through. For more on the use of

Index

the en dash, see 6.78--81.

Please refer to pages 75--110.

9.56:

Here are the figures for 2001--10.

Space between

Campers were divided into age groups 5--7, 8--10, 11--13, and 14--16.

digits

9.57:

Numbered lists and

outline style

9.58:

When to use the en

dash

9.59:

When not to use

the en dash

9.60:

Abbreviating, or

condensing,

inclusive numbers

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Inclusive Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

9.59 WHEN NOT TO USE THE EN DASH

List of Tables

If from or between is used before the first of a pair of numbers, the en dash should not be used; instead,

Index

from should be followed by to or through, between should be followed by and.

from 75 to 110 ( not from 75--110)

9.57:

from 1898 to 1903

Numbered lists and

from January 1, 1898, through December 31, 1903

outline style

between about 150 and 200

9.58:

When to use the en

dash

Inclusive spelled-out numbers should be joined by to, not by an en dash.

9.59:

When not to use

women aged forty-five to forty-nine years

the en dash

sixty- to seventy-year-olds

9.60:

Abbreviating, or

condensing,

inclusive numbers

9.61:

Alternative systems

for inclusive

numbers

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Inclusive Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

9.60 ABBREVIATING, OR CONDENSING, INCLUSIVE NUMBERS

List of Tables

Inclusive numbers are abbreviated according to the principles illustrated below (examples are page or

Index

serial numbers, which do not require commas). This system, used by Chicago in essentially this form

since the first edition of this manual, is efficient and unambiguous. See also 9.61, 6.78.

9.58:

FIRST NUMBER SECOND NUMBER

EXAMPLES

When to use the en

dash

Less than 100

Use all digits

3--10

9.59:

71--72

When not to use

96--117

the en dash

100 or multiples Use all digits

100--104

9.60:

Abbreviating, or

of 100

1100--

condensing,

1113

inclusive numbers

101 through 109, Use changed part only

101--8

9.61:

Alternative systems

201 through

808--33

for inclusive

209, etc.

1103--4

numbers

110 through 199, Use two digits unless more are needed to include 321--28

9.62:

Inclusive numbers

210 through

all changed parts

498--532

with commas

299, etc.

1087--89

1496--

500

11564--

615

12991--

3001

To avoid ambiguity, inclusive roman numerals are always given in full.

xxv--xxviii

cvi--cix

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Inclusive Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

9.61 ALTERNATIVE SYSTEMS FOR INCLUSIVE NUMBERS

List of Tables

A foolproof system is to give the full form of numbers everywhere (e.g., 234--235, 25039--25041).

Index

Another practice, more economical, is to include in the second number only the changed part of the

first (e.g., 234--5, 25000--1). Chicago, however, prefers the system presented in 9.60.

9.59:

When not to use

the en dash

9.60:

Abbreviating, or

condensing,

inclusive numbers

9.61:

Alternative systems

for inclusive

numbers

9.62:

Inclusive numbers

with commas

9.63:

Inclusive years

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Inclusive Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

9.62 INCLUSIVE NUMBERS WITH COMMAS

List of Tables

When inclusive numbers with commas are abbreviated, and only numbers in the hundreds place and

Index

below change, the rules described in 9.60 should apply. If a change extends to the thousands place or

beyond, it is best to repeat all digits.

9.60:

6,000--6,018

Abbreviating, or

12,473--79

condensing,

inclusive numbers

1,247,689--710

1,247,689--1,248,125

9.61:

Alternative systems

for inclusive

numbers

9.62:

Inclusive numbers

with commas

9.63:

Inclusive years

9.64:

Roman numeralsâ

€”general

principles

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Inclusive Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

9.63 INCLUSIVE YEARS

List of Tables

Inclusive years may be abbreviated following the pattern illustrated in 9.60. When the century

Index

changes, however, or when the sequence is BCE, BC, or BP (diminishing numbers), all digits must be

presented. See also 9.35.

9.61:

1897--1901

Alternative systems

the war of 1914--18

for inclusive

numbers

fiscal year 1997--98 ( or 1997/98; see 6.105); FY 1997--98

the winter of 2000--2001

9.62:

Inclusive numbers

in 1504--5

with commas

327--321 BCE (a six-year span)

9.63:

327--21 BCE (a 306-year span)

Inclusive years

115 BC--AD 10

9.64:

15,000--14,000 BP

Roman numeralsâ

€”general

principles

In book titles it is customary but not obligatory to repeat all digits; when mentioning or citing a title,

9.65:

the form of the original should be respected.

The advent of

subtrahends (back

counters)

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Roman Numerals

of Contents

List of Figures

9.64 ROMAN NUMERALS--GENERAL PRINCIPLES

List of Tables

Table 9.1 shows the formation of roman numerals with their arabic equivalents. The general principle

Index

is that a smaller letter before a larger one subtracts from its value, and a smaller letter after a larger

one adds to it; a bar over a letter multiplies its value by one thousand. Roman numerals may also be

written in lowercase letters (i, ii, iii, iv, etc.). In older sources, a final i was often made like a j (vij,

9.62:

viij); citations to roman numeral page numbers in older works should follow the original usage.

Inclusive numbers

with commas

9.63:

Inclusive years

9.64:

Roman numeralsâ

€”general

principles

9.65:

The advent of

subtrahends (back

counters)

9.66:

Chicago's

preference for

arabic rather than

roman numerals

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Roman Numerals

of Contents

List of Figures

9.65 THE ADVENT OF SUBTRAHENDS (BACK COUNTERS)

List of Tables

The use of subtrahends (back counters) was introduced during the Renaissance. Note that IIII, not IV,

Index

still appears on some clock faces. The Romans would have expressed the year 1999, for example, as

MDCCCCLXXXXVIIII. A more modern form, approved by the US government and accepted (if

reluctantly) by classical scholars, is MCMXCIX ( not MIM, considered a barbarism).

9.62:

Inclusive numbers

with commas

9.63:

Inclusive years

9.64:

Roman numeralsâ

€”general

principles

9.65:

The advent of

subtrahends (back

counters)

9.66:

Chicago's

preference for

arabic rather than

roman numerals

9: NUMBERS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Roman Numerals

of Contents

List of Figures

9.66 CHICAGO'S PREFERENCE FOR ARABIC RATHER THAN ROMAN NUMERALS

List of Tables

Chicago uses arabic numerals in many situations where roman numerals were formerly common, as

Index

in references to volume numbers of books and journals or chapters of books (see 9.28). Most of the

exceptions are treated elsewhere, as follows: for the use of roman numerals in the front matter of

books, see 1.4, 1.6, 9.27; in legal instruments, 9.29; with the names of monarchs, prelates, and such,

9.62:

9.42; with personal names, 9.43; in titles of sequels, 9.44; with names of certain vessels, 9.45; and in

Inclusive numbers

with commas

outline style, 6.126.

9.63:

Inclusive years

9.64:

Roman numeralsâ

€”general

principles

9.65:

The advent of

subtrahends (back

counters)

9.66:

Chicago's

preference for

arabic rather than

roman numerals

9 : NUMBERS

Table

of Contents

PDF Version >>

List of Figures

List of Tables

Index

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

of Contents

Overview

List of Figures

10.1

Abbreviations—additional resources

List of Tables

10.2

Acronyms, initialisms, contractions

10.3

When to use abbreviations

Index

10.4

Periods with abbreviations

10.5

Space or no space between elements

10.6

Capitals versus lowercase for acronyms and initialisms

10.7

Italic versus roman type for abbreviations

10.8

Small versus full-size capitals for acronyms and initialisms

10.9

"A," "an," or "the" preceding an abbreviation

10.10 Ampersands

Names and Titles

Personal Names and Titles

10.11 Personal names

10.12 Initials in personal names

10.13 Abbreviating titles before names

10.14 Civil titles

10.15 US military titles

10.16 Social titles

10.17 French social titles

10.18 "Reverend" and "Honorable"

10.19 "Jr.," "Sr.," and the like

10.20 Academic degrees

10.21 Professional, religious, and other designations

Firms and Companies

10.22 Some commonly used generic abbreviations

10.23 Company names

Agencies and Organizations

10.24 Associations and the like

10.25 Broadcasting companies

Saints and Personal Names with "Saint" or "St."

10.26 Names of saints

10.27 Personal names with "Saint" or "St."

Geographical Terms

10.28 US states and territories

10.29 Canadian provinces and territories

10.30 Comma with city plus state

10.31 Place-names with "Fort," "Mount," "Saint," and the like

Names of Countries

10.32 When to abbreviate country names

10.33 "US" versus United States

Addresses

10.34 Mailing addresses—postal versus standard abbreviations

10.35 Compass points in mailing addresses

Compass Points, Latitude, and Longitude

10.36 Compass points

10.37 "Latitude" and "longitude"

Designations of Time

10.38 Other discussions

10.39 Systems of chronology

10.40 Months

10.41 Days of the week

10.42 Time of day

Scholarly Abbreviations

10.43 Scholarly abbreviations

10.44 A few scholarly symbols

Biblical Abbreviations

10.45 Biblical abbreviations—additional resources

10.46 Books of the Bible in text and notes

10.47 Biblical abbreviations and short forms—an overview

10.48 The Old Testament

10.49 The Apocrypha

10.50 The New Testament

10.51 Versions and sections of the Bible

Technology and Science

10.52 Miscellaneous technical abbreviations

10.53 Statistics

The International System of Units

10.54 SI units

10.55 SI units—form

10.56 Base SI units

10.57 SI prefixes

10.58 Grams

10.59 Derived units expressed algebraically

10.60 Derived units with special names

10.61 SI units and abbreviations—spacing

10.62 Non-SI units accepted for use

Astronomy

10.63 Astronomy—additional resources

10.64 Celestial coordinates

10.65 Some other astronomical abbreviations

Chemical Elements

10.66 Naming conventions for chemical elements

US Measure

10.67 Periods with abbreviations of US measure

10.68 Plural forms for abbreviations of US measure

10.69 Length, area, and volume

10.70 Weight and capacity

10.71 Time

Business and Commerce

10.72 Commercial terms—some examples

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

10.1 ABBREVIATIONS--ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

This chapter provides guidance for using abbreviations and symbols in general and scholarly writing.

Index

It also offers some guidance in technical work, especially for the generalist editor confronted with

unfamiliar terms. For abbreviations not listed here, Chicago recommends Merriam-Webster's Collegiate

Dictionary (bibliog. 3.1); Dean Stahl and Karen Kerchelich, Abbreviations Dictionary (bibliog. 4.7); and

10.1:

the multivolume Acronyms, Initialisms, and Abbreviations Dictionary (bibliog. 4.7). Authors and editors

Abbreviationsâ

€”additional

of technical material will need to refer to more specialized manuals, starting with Scientific Style and

resources

Format (bibliog. 1.1).

10.2:

Acronyms,

initialisms,

contractions

10.3:

When to use

abbreviations

10.4:

Periods with

abbreviations

10.5:

Space or no space

between elements

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

10.2 ACRONYMS, INITIALISMS, CONTRACTIONS

List of Tables

The word acronym refers to terms based on the initial letters of their various elements and read as

Index

single words (AIDS, laser, NASA, scuba); initialism refers to terms read as a series of letters (AOL,

NBA, XML); and contraction refers to abbreviations that include the first and last letters of the full

word (Mr., amt.). (For the type of contractions normally formed with apostrophes, see 7.29.) The

10.1:

definitions are not perfect. For example, sometimes a letter in an initialism is formed not, as the term

Abbreviationsâ

€”additional

might imply, from an initial letter but rather from an initial sound (as the X in XML, for extensible

resources

markup language), or from the application of a number (W3C, for World Wide Web Consortium).

10.2:

Furthermore, an acronym and initialism are occasionally combined (JPEG), and the line between

Acronyms,

initialisms,

initialism and acronym is not always clear (FAQ, which can be pronounced either as a word or as a

contractions

series of letters). In this chapter the umbrella term abbreviation will be used for all three, as well as for

10.3:

When to use

shortened (i.e., abbreviated) forms (ibid., vol., prof., etc.), except where greater specificity is required.

abbreviations

(Occasionally, a symbol abbreviates a term, as in Â© for copyright. On the other hand, abbreviations for

10.4:

units are often referred to as symbols in SI usage; see 10.54--62.)

Periods with

abbreviations

10.5:

Space or no space

between elements

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

10.3 WHEN TO USE ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

Outside the area of science and technology, abbreviations and symbols are most appropriate in

Index

tabular matter, notes, bibliographies, and parenthetical references. Even in regular prose, a number of

expressions are almost always abbreviated and may be used without first spelling them out. Many of

these will be listed as main entries with pronunciation (rather than as abbreviations) in the latest

10.1:

edition of Webster's (e.g., DNA, GPS, HMO, HTML, IQ, JPEG, laser, Ms., NASA). Others, though in

Abbreviationsâ

€”additional

more or less common use (CGI, FDA, HVAC, MLA), should generally be spelled out at first

resources

occurrence--at least in formal text--as a courtesy to those readers who might not easily recognize

10.2:

them. The use of less familiar abbreviations should be limited to those terms that occur frequently

Acronyms,

initialisms,

enough to warrant abbreviation--roughly five times or more within an article or chapter--and the

contractions

terms must be spelled out on their first occurrence. (The abbreviation usually follows immediately, in

10.3:

When to use

parentheses, but it may be introduced in other ways; see examples. Such an abbreviation should not

abbreviations

be offered only once, never to be used again.) Writers and editors should monitor the number of

10.4:

different abbreviations used in a document; readers trying to keep track of a large number of

Periods with

abbreviations

abbreviations, especially unfamiliar ones, will benefit from a list of abbreviations (see 1.43, 2.21). For

10.5:

rules concerning the plural form of various abbreviations, see 7.14. For abbreviations preceded by a,

Space or no space

an, or the, see 7.44, 10.9.

between elements

Among recent recommendations of the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) are . . .

According to the weak law of large numbers (WLLN) . . .

The National Aeronautics and Space Administration was founded in 1958. Since its inception, NASA has . . .

The benefits of ERISA (Employee Retirement Income Security Act) are familiar to many.

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

10.4 PERIODS WITH ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

In using periods with abbreviations, Chicago recommends the following general guidelines in

Index

nontechnical settings. For the use of space between elements, see 10.5.

1. Use periods with abbreviations that end in a lowercase letter: p. (page), vol., e.g., i.e., etc., a.k.a.,

10.2:

a.m., p.m., Ms., Dr., et al. ( et is not an abbreviation; al. is). An exception may be made for the

Acronyms,

few academic degrees that end in a lowercase letter (e.g., DLitt, DMin); see 10.20 and rule 3.

initialisms,

contractions

2. Use periods for initials standing for given names: E. B. White; do not use periods for an entire

10.3:

name replaced by initials: JFK.

When to use

abbreviations

3. Use no periods with abbreviations that appear in full capitals, whether two letters or more and

even if lowercase letters appear within the abbreviation: VP, CEO, MA, MD, PhD, UK, US, NY,

10.4:

Periods with

IL ( but see rule 4).

abbreviations

4. In publications using traditional state abbreviations, use periods to abbreviate United States and

10.5:

Space or no space

its states and territories: U.S., N.Y., Ill. Note, however, that Chicago recommends using the two-

between elements

letter postal codes (and therefore US) wherever abbreviations are used; see 10.28. For Canadian

10.6:

provinces and territories, see 10.29. See also 14.286.

Capitals versus

lowercase for

acronyms and

Note that the British and the French (among others) omit periods from contractions (Dr, assn, Mme).

initialisms

Note also that a slash is occasionally used instead of periods (as in c/o or n/a) but more often denotes

per (see 6.107). Units of measure in nontechnical settings are usually spelled out. In scientific usage,

periods are generally omitted for abbreviated units of measure and other technical terms: see

10.52--71.

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

10.5 SPACE OR NO SPACE BETWEEN ELEMENTS

List of Tables

No space is left between the letters of initialisms and acronyms, whether lowercase or in capitals.

Index

Space is usually left between abbreviated words, unless an abbreviated word is used in combination

with a single-letter abbreviation. For personal names, see 10.12.

10.3:

RN

When to use

C-SPAN

abbreviations

YMCA

10.4:

Gov. Gen.

Periods with

abbreviations

Mng. Ed.

10.5:

Dist. Atty.

Space or no space

between elements

but

10.6:

Capitals versus

S.Dak. (but see 10.28)

lowercase for

S.Sgt.

acronyms and

initialisms

10.7:

Italic versus roman

type for

abbreviations

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

10.6 CAPITALS VERSUS LOWERCASE FOR ACRONYMS AND INITIALISMS

List of Tables

Initialisms tend to appear in all capital letters, even when they are not derived from proper nouns

Index

(HIV, VP, LCD). With frequent use, however, acronyms--especially those of five or more letters--will

sometimes become lowercase (scuba); those that are derived from proper nouns retain an initial

capital. Chicago generally prefers the all-capital form, unless the term is listed otherwise in Webster's.

10.4:

Periods with

NAFTA ( not Nafta)

abbreviations

10.5:

On the other hand, if the words in a spelled-out version of an acronym or initialism are not derived

Space or no space

between elements

from proper nouns or do not themselves constitute a proper noun (as in the official name of an

10.6:

organization), they should generally be lowercased, even when they appear alongside the abbreviated

Capitals versus

lowercase for

form.

acronyms and

initialisms

transmission-control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP)

10.7:

Italic versus roman

type for

abbreviations

10.8:

Small versus full-

size capitals for

acronyms and

initialisms

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

10.7 ITALIC VERSUS ROMAN TYPE FOR ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

Chicago italicizes abbreviations only if they stand for a term that would be italicized if spelled out--

Index

the title of a book or periodical, for example. Common Latin abbreviations are set in roman (see also

7.53).

10.5:

OED ( Oxford English Dictionary)

Space or no space

JAMA ( Journal of the American Medical Association)

between elements

ibid.

10.6:

etc.

Capitals versus

lowercase for

e.g.

acronyms and

i.e.

initialisms

10.7:

Italic versus roman

type for

abbreviations

10.8:

Small versus full-

size capitals for

acronyms and

initialisms

10.9:

"A," "an," or "the"

preceding an

abbreviation

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

10.8 SMALL VERSUS FULL-SIZE CAPITALS FOR ACRONYMS AND INITIALISMS

List of Tables

Some book designs call for small capitals rather than full-size capitals for acronyms and initialisms

Index

(e.g., NASA rather than NASA). Though such usage may be considered desirable for a book that

includes many acronyms and initialisms, Chicago does not generally recommend it. If small capitals

must be used, the decision of what to mark should be made by the editor, who should apply small

10.6:

capitals on the final manuscript (e.g., using a word processor's small capitals feature). In general, small

Capitals versus

lowercase for

capitals should be limited to acronyms or initialisms mentioned in running text. Avoid applying small

acronyms and

initialisms

capitals to such items as two-letter postal codes in notes or bibliographies or to roman numerals (e.g.,

following a personal name). Editors and typesetters should be aware that small capitals are not

10.7:

Italic versus roman

treated in the same way across all software and coding platforms: some applications use lowercase

type for

abbreviations

letters presented (or "styled") as small capitals, whereas in other systems small capitals are based on

10.8:

uppercase letters. See also 10.39, 10.42. For the use of small capitals for emphasis, see 7.48.

Small versus full-

size capitals for

acronyms and

initialisms

10.9:

"A," "an," or "the"

preceding an

abbreviation

10.10:

Ampersands

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

10.9 "A," "AN," OR "THE" PRECEDING AN ABBREVIATION

List of Tables

When an abbreviation follows an indefinite article, the choice of a or an is determined by the way the

Index

abbreviation would be read aloud. Acronyms are read as words and are rarely preceded by a, an, or

the ("member nations of NATO"), except when used adjectivally ("a NATO initiative"). Initialisms are

read as a series of letters and are often preceded by an article ("member nations of the EU"). See 10.2;

10.7:

see also 7.44.

Italic versus roman

type for

abbreviations

an HMO

10.8:

a UFO

Small versus full-

a NATO member

size capitals for

acronyms and

a LOOM parade

initialisms

an AA meeting

10.9:

a AA battery (pronounced "double A")

"A," "an," or "the"

an NAACP convention

preceding an

abbreviation

an NBA coach

10.10:

an HIV test

Ampersands

an MS symptom (a symptom of multiple sclerosis)

10.11:

Personal names

but

a MS by . . . (would be read as "a manuscript by . . .")

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

10.10 AMPERSANDS

List of Tables

No space is left on either side of an ampersand used within an initialism.

Index

R&D

Texas A&M

10.8:

Small versus full-

size capitals for

acronyms and

initialisms

10.9:

"A," "an," or "the"

preceding an

abbreviation

10.10:

Ampersands

10.11:

Personal names

10.12:

Initials in personal

names

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Personal Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

10.11 PERSONAL NAMES

List of Tables

Normally, abbreviations should not be used for given names. A signature, however, should be

Index

transcribed as the person wrote it.

Benj. Franklin

10.9:

Geo. D. Fuller

"A," "an," or "the"

Ch. Virolleaud

preceding an

abbreviation

10.10:

Ampersands

10.11:

Personal names

10.12:

Initials in personal

names

10.13:

Abbreviating titles

before names

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Personal Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

10.12 INITIALS IN PERSONAL NAMES

List of Tables

Initials standing for given names are followed by a period and a space. A period is normally used

Index

even if the middle initial does not stand for a name (as in Harry S. Truman).

Roger W. Shugg

10.10:

P. D. James

Ampersands

M. F. K. Fisher

10.11:

Personal names

If an entire name is abbreviated, space and periods are usually omitted.

10.12:

Initials in personal

FDR (Franklin Delano Roosevelt)

names

MJ (Michael Jordan)

10.13:

Abbreviating titles

but

before names

10.14:

H.D. (pen name for Hilda Doolittle, with periods but no space between initials)

Civil titles

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Personal Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

10.13 ABBREVIATING TITLES BEFORE NAMES

List of Tables

Many civil or military titles preceding a full name may be abbreviated. Preceding a surname alone,

Index

however, they should be spelled out. See also 8.18.

Rep. Dan Lipinski; Representative Lipinski

10.11:

Sen. Kirsten E. Gillibrand; Senator Gillibrand

Personal names

Rear Adm. Carol M. Pottenger; Rear Admiral Pottenger

10.12:

Initials in personal

names

10.13:

Abbreviating titles

before names

10.14:

Civil titles

10.15:

US military titles

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Personal Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

10.14 CIVIL TITLES

List of Tables

The following abbreviations, among others, may precede a full name where space is tight:

Index

Ald.

Assoc. Prof.

Asst. Prof.

10.12:

Initials in personal

Atty. Gen.

names

Fr. (father)

10.13:

Gov.

Abbreviating titles

before names

Insp. Gen.

Judge Adv. Gen.

10.14:

Civil titles

Pres.

Prof.

10.15:

US military titles

Sr. (sister)

10.16:

Supt.

Social titles

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Personal Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

10.15 US MILITARY TITLES

List of Tables

The US military omits periods in the official abbreviated forms of its ranks. The abbreviations for a

Index

given title may vary across branches. The army, for example, uses SSG for staff sergeant; the air force

and marines prefer SSgt. (In the examples below, such variants are not presented.) In general contexts,

however, including military history, traditional abbreviations--which tend not to vary across the

10.13:

armed forces--are preferred. The following very selective list merely illustrates the difference between

Abbreviating titles

before names

military usage and traditional forms. Where no traditional abbreviation is appropriate before a name,

10.14:

use the full form.

Civil titles

10.15:

ADM

Adm.

US military titles

A1C

Airman First Class

10.16:

Social titles

BG

Brig. Gen.

10.17:

CDR

Cdr.

French social titles

COL

Col.

CPT

Capt.

CWO

Chief Warrant Officer

GEN

Gen.

LT

Lt.

1LT

1st Lt.

2LT

2nd Lt.

LG

Lt. Gen.

LTC

Lt. Col.

MAJ

Maj.

MG

Maj. Gen.

MSG

M.Sgt. (master sergeant)

PO

Petty Officer

SGT

Sgt.

SSG

S.Sgt. (staff sergeant)

WO

Warrant Officer

For the latest official forms of rank insignia, consult the website of the US Department of Defense. In

addition, there are many reference books containing more detailed lists of abbreviations and terms,

some of which are published regularly. See, for example, Timothy Zurick, Army Dictionary and Desk

Reference (bibliog. 5).

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Personal Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

10.16 SOCIAL TITLES

List of Tables

Social titles are always abbreviated, whether preceding the full name or the surname only. (The

Index

spelled-out forms Mister or Doctor might be used without a name--as in direct address.)

Ms.

10.14:

Mrs.

Civil titles

Messrs.

10.15:

Mr.

US military titles

Dr. Jekyll

10.16:

Social titles

but

10.17:

Thank you, Doctor.

French social titles

10.18:

Social titles are routinely omitted in most prose, though a few periodicals in particular persist in

"Reverend" and

"Honorable"

using them. When an academic degree or professional designation follows a name, such titles are

always omitted.

Jennifer James, MD ( not Dr. Jennifer James, MD)

Similarly, the now somewhat archaic abbreviation Esq. (Esquire) is used only after a full name and

never when Mr. , Dr. , or the like precedes the name.

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Personal Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

10.17 FRENCH SOCIAL TITLES

List of Tables

Note the presence or absence of periods after the following French forms used with either a full name

Index

or a surname only. ( Mme and Mlle are considered contractions; in French usage, periods are often

omitted for all four titles.)

10.15:

M.

US military titles

MM.

10.16:

Mme

Social titles

Mlle

10.17:

French social titles

When Monsieur, Messieurs, Madame, or Mademoiselle is used without a name, in direct address, it is

10.18:

spelled out (and, in French usage, generally lowercased).

"Reverend" and

"Honorable"

10.19:

"Jr.," "Sr.," and the

like

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Personal Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

10.18 "REVEREND" AND "HONORABLE"

List of Tables

The abbreviations Rev. and Hon. are traditionally used before a full name when the does not precede

Index

the title. With the, such titles should be spelled out.

Rev. Sam Portaro; the Reverend Sam Portaro

10.16:

Hon. Henry M. Brown; the Honorable Henry M. Brown

Social titles

10.17:

With a last name only, such titles are normally omitted. The construction "Reverend So-and-So,"

French social titles

however, is common, especially in informal prose or speech.

10.18:

"Reverend" and

Rev. Jane Schaefer; Schaefer ( or Reverend Schaefer)

"Honorable"

the Honorable Patricia Birkholz; Birkholz

10.19:

"Jr.," "Sr.," and the

like

10.20:

Academic degrees

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Personal Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

10.19 "JR.," "SR.," AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

The abbreviations Jr. and Sr. , as well as roman or arabic numerals such as III or 3rd, after a person's

Index

name are part of the name and so are retained in connection with any titles or honorifics. Note that

these abbreviations are used only with the full name, never with the surname only. See also 6.47, 9.43.

10.17:

Jordan Balfence Jr. spoke first. After Mr. Balfence relinquished the podium, . . .

French social titles

Zayd Zephyr III, MBA, spoke last. In closing, Mr. Zephyr reiterated . . .

10.18:

"Reverend" and

"Honorable"

10.19:

"Jr.," "Sr.," and the

like

10.20:

Academic degrees

10.21:

Professional,

religious, and other

designations

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Personal Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

10.20 ACADEMIC DEGREES

List of Tables

Chicago recommends omitting periods in abbreviations of academic degrees (BA, DDS, etc.) unless

Index

they are required for reasons of tradition or consistency with, for example, a journal's established

style. In the following list of some of the more common degrees, periods are shown only where

uncertainty might arise as to their placement. Spelled-out terms, often capitalized in institutional

10.18:

settings (and on business cards and other promotional items), should be lowercased in normal prose.

"Reverend" and

"Honorable"

See also 8.28.

10.19:

"Jr.," "Sr.," and the

AB

artium baccalaureus (bachelor of arts)

like

AM

artium magister (master of arts)

10.20:

Academic degrees

BA

bachelor of arts

10.21:

BD

bachelor of divinity

Professional,

religious, and other

BFA

bachelor of fine arts

designations

BM

bachelor of music

10.22:

Some commonly

BS

bachelor of science

used generic

abbreviations

DB

divinitatis baccalaureus (bachelor of

divinity)

DD

divinitatis doctor (doctor of divinity)

DDS

doctor of dental surgery

DLitt or doctor litterarum (doctor of letters; doctor

DLit

of literature)

DMD

dentariae medicinae doctor (doctor of

dental medicine)

DMin

doctor of ministry

DO

doctor of osteopathy or osteopathic

physician

DVM

doctor of veterinary medicine

EdM

educationis magister (master of education)

JD

juris doctor (doctor of law)

LHD

litterarum humaniorum doctor (doctor of

humanities)

LittD

litterarum doctor (doctor of letters)

LLB

legum baccalaureus (bachelor of laws)

(LL.B.)

LLD

legum doctor (doctor of laws)

(LL.D.)

LLM

legum magister (master of laws)

(LL.M.)

MA

master of arts

MBA

master of business administration

MD

medicinae doctor (doctor of medicine)

MDiv

master of divinity

MFA

master of fine arts

MS

master of science

MSN

master of science in nursing

MSW

master of social welfare or master of social

work

PhB

philosophiae baccalaureus (bachelor of

philosophy)

PhD

philosophiae doctor (doctor of philosophy)

PhG

graduate in pharmacy

SB

scientiae baccalaureus (bachelor of science)

SM

scientiae magister (master of science)

STB

sacrae theologiae baccalaureus (bachelor

of sacred theology)

These designations are set off by commas when they follow a personal name.

David H. Pauker, JD, attended Northwestern University Law School.

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Personal Names and Titles

of Contents

List of Figures

10.21 PROFESSIONAL, RELIGIOUS, AND OTHER DESIGNATIONS

List of Tables

Abbreviations for many other designations, professional and otherwise, follow the pattern of

Index

academic degrees, for which Chicago recommends dispensing with periods. Spelled-out terms, often

capitalized in institutional settings, are lowercase unless they designate the proper name of an

organization. (See 10.20.)

10.19:

"Jr.," "Sr.," and the

like

CNM certified nurse midwife

10.20:

FAIA fellow of the American Institute of Architects

Academic degrees

FRS fellow of the Royal Society

10.21:

Professional,

JP

justice of the peace

religious, and other

LPN licensed practical nurse

designations

MP member of Parliament

10.22:

Some commonly

OFM Order of Friars Minor

used generic

abbreviations

OP

Ordo Praedicatorum (Order of Preachers)

10.23:

RN

registered nurse

Company names

SJ

Society of Jesus

These designations, like academic degrees, are set off by commas when they follow a personal name.

Joan Hotimlanska, LPN, will be working on the second floor.

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Firms and Companies

of Contents

List of Figures

10.22 SOME COMMONLY USED GENERIC ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

All of the abbreviations in the following list may be found in Webster's and other standard

Index

dictionaries. Use periods, or not, according to the recommendations in 10.4. See also 10.72.

Assoc.

10.20:

Bros.

Academic degrees

Co.

10.21:

Corp.

Professional,

Inc.

religious, and other

designations

LLC (limited liability company)

LLP (limited liability partnership)

10.22:

Some commonly

LP (limited partnership)

used generic

Ltd.

abbreviations

Mfg.

10.23:

Company names

PLC (public limited company)

RR (railroad)

10.24:

Associations and

Rwy. or Ry. (railway)

the like

Abbreviations of foreign-language terms omit the period if they are contractions (see 10.2).

Cia (Sp. compaÃ±ia)

Cie (Fr. compagnie)

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Firms and Companies

of Contents

List of Figures

10.23 COMPANY NAMES

List of Tables

Abbreviations and ampersands are appropriate in notes, bibliographies, tabular matter, and the like.

Index

See also 14.141.

Ginn & Co.

10.21:

JPMorgan Chase & Co.

Professional,

Moss Bros.

religious, and other

designations

Rand Corp.

10.22:

Some commonly

In running text, company names are best given in their full forms. It should be noted, however, that

used generic

some full forms include ampersands and abbreviations. If in doubt, especially with reference to

abbreviations

contemporary firms, look up the company name at a corporate website or other authoritative source.

10.23:

Company names

Such elements as Inc. , & Co. , and LLC may be omitted unless relevant to the context.

10.24:

Associations and

Brooks Brothers was purchased and later resold by Marks & Spencer.

the like

JPMorgan Chase operates in more than sixty countries.

10.25:

AT&T Corporation was once known as the American Telephone and Telegraph Company.

Broadcasting

companies

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Agencies and Organizations

of Contents

List of Figures

10.24 ASSOCIATIONS AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

Both in running text (preferably after being spelled out on first occurrence) and in tabular matter,

Index

notes, and so forth, the names of many agencies and organizations, governmental and fraternal, are

commonly abbreviated. Whether acronyms or initialisms (see 10.2), such abbreviations appear in full

capitals and without periods. For a, an, or the with abbreviations, see 10.9.

10.22:

Some commonly

AAUP

used generic

abbreviations

AFL-CIO

10.23:

ERISA

Company names

EU (European Union)

10.24:

HMO ( pl. HMOs)

Associations and

WHO

the like

WTO ( formerly GATT)

10.25:

Broadcasting

companies

10.26:

Names of saints

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Agencies and Organizations

of Contents

List of Figures

10.25 BROADCASTING COMPANIES

List of Tables

Call letters, often derived from the name of a broadcasting company, are always capitalized but do

Index

not take periods.

ABC

10.23:

CBS

Company names

HBO

10.24:

KFTV

Associations and

MTV

the like

NBC

10.25:

TBS

Broadcasting

companies

WFMT

10.26:

WTTW

Names of saints

10.27:

Personal names

with "Saint" or "St."

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Saints and Personal Names with "Saint" or "St."

of Contents

List of Figures

10.26 NAMES OF SAINTS

List of Tables

The word Saint is often abbreviated ( St. , pl. SS. ) before the name of a Christian saint; it should

Index

normally be spelled out in formal prose but need not be if space is at a premium. (But see 10.27.) The

choice for one or the other should be implemented consistently.

10.24:

Saint ( or St.) Teresa

Associations and

Saints ( or SS.) Francis of Paola and Francis of Sales

the like

10.25:

Broadcasting

companies

10.26:

Names of saints

10.27:

Personal names

with "Saint" or "St."

10.28:

US states and

territories

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Names and Titles >> Saints and Personal Names with "Saint" or "St."

of Contents

List of Figures

10.27 PERSONAL NAMES WITH "SAINT" OR "ST."

List of Tables

When Saint or St. forms part of a personal name, the bearer's usage is followed. See also 10.31.

Index

Augustus Saint-Gaudens

Muriel St. Clare Byrne

10.25:

Broadcasting

companies

10.26:

Names of saints

10.27:

Personal names

with "Saint" or "St."

10.28:

US states and

territories

10.29:

Canadian provinces

and territories

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Geographical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

10.28 US STATES AND TERRITORIES

List of Tables

In running text, the names of states, territories, and possessions of the United States should always be

Index

spelled out when standing alone and preferably (except for DC) when following the name of a city:

for example, "Lake Bluff, Illinois, was incorporated in 1895." In bibliographies, tabular matter, lists,

and mailing addresses, they are usually abbreviated. In all such contexts, Chicago prefers the two-

10.26:

letter postal codes to the conventional abbreviations. Note that if traditional abbreviations must be

Names of saints

used, some terms may not be subject to abbreviation. See also 10.4.

10.27:

Personal names

with "Saint" or "St."

AK

Alaska or Alas.

10.28:

AL

Ala.

US states and

territories

AR

Ark.

10.29:

AS

American Samoa

Canadian provinces

and territories

AZ

Ariz.

10.30:

CA

Calif.

Comma with city

plus state

CO

Colo.

CT

Conn.

DC

D.C.

DE

Del.

FL

Fla.

FM

Federated States of Micronesia

GA

Ga.

GU

Guam

HI

Hawaii

IA

Iowa

ID

Idaho

IL

Ill.

IN

Ind.

KS

Kans.

KY

Ky.

LA

La.

MA Mass.

MD Md.

ME

Maine

MH Marshall Islands

MI

Mich.

MN Minn.

MO Mo.

MP

Northern Mariana Islands

MS

Miss.

MT

Mont.

NC

N.C.

ND

N.Dak.

NE

Neb. or Nebr.

NH N.H.

NJ

N.J.

NM N.Mex.

NV

Nev.

NY

N.Y.

OH

Ohio

OK

Okla.

OR

Ore. or Oreg.

PA

Pa.

PR

P.R. or Puerto Rico

PW

Palau

RI

R.I.

SC

S.C.

SD

S.Dak.

TN

Tenn.

TX

Tex.

UT

Utah

VA

Va.

VI

V.I. or Virgin Islands

VT

Vt.

WA Wash.

WI

Wis. or Wisc.

WV W.Va.

WY Wyo.

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Geographical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

10.29 CANADIAN PROVINCES AND TERRITORIES

List of Tables

Canadian provinces and territories are normally spelled out in text (e.g., "Kingston, Ontario, is worth

Index

a visit") but may be abbreviated in bibliographies and the like--using the two-letter postal

abbreviations, which have the advantage of applying to both the English and French forms.

10.27:

AB Alberta

Personal names

with "Saint" or "St."

BC British Columbia or Colombie-Britannique

10.28:

MB Manitoba

US states and

territories

NB New Brunswick or Nouveau-Brunswick

10.29:

NL Newfoundland and Labrador or Terre-Neuve-et-

Canadian provinces

Labrador

and territories

NS Nova Scotia or Nouvelle-Ã‰cosse

10.30:

Comma with city

NT Northwest Territories or Territoires du Nord-

plus state

Ouest

10.31:

Place-names with

NU Nunavut

"Fort," "Mount,"

ON Ontario

"Saint," and the

like

PE Prince Edward Island or ÃŽle-du-Prince-Ã

‰douard

QC Quebec or QuÃ©bec

SK Saskatchewan

YT Yukon

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Geographical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

10.30 COMMA WITH CITY PLUS STATE

List of Tables

When following the name of a city, the names of states, provinces, and territories are enclosed in

Index

commas, whether they are spelled out (as in running text) or abbreviated (as in tabular matter or

lists). In an exception to the rule, no comma appears between the postal code and a zip code. See also

6.46, 6.17.

10.28:

US states and

Bedford, PA, and Jamestown, NY

territories

10.29:

but

Canadian provinces

and territories

Send the package to J. Sprocket, 3359 Fob Dr., Quartz, IL 60000.

10.30:

Comma with city

plus state

10.31:

Place-names with

"Fort," "Mount,"

"Saint," and the

like

10.32:

When to abbreviate

country names

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Geographical Terms

of Contents

List of Figures

10.31 PLACE-NAMES WITH "FORT," "MOUNT," "SAINT," AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

Generic terms as elements of geographic names should be abbreviated only where space is at a

Index

premium. San and Santa (e.g., San Diego, Santa Barbara) are never abbreviated. For French place-

names with Saint, see 11.29.

10.29:

Fort (Ft.) Myers

Canadian provinces

Mount (Mt.) Airy

and territories

Port (Pt.) Arthur

10.30:

Saint (St.) Louis

Comma with city

plus state

Saint (St.) Paul

10.31:

Place-names with

"Fort," "Mount,"

"Saint," and the

like

10.32:

When to abbreviate

country names

10.33:

"US" versus United

States

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Geographical Terms >> Names of Countries

of Contents

List of Figures

10.32 WHEN TO ABBREVIATE COUNTRY NAMES

List of Tables

Names of countries are spelled out in text but may be abbreviated in tabular matter, lists, and the

Index

like. Use discretion in forming the abbreviations and make sure they are defined below the table (or

in some fashion) if there is any possibility of confusion (see 3.74--78). The examples below reflect

entries in standard dictionaries (all are listed in Webster's, with the exception of Swed. , which is listed

10.30:

in American Heritage). In certain technical applications, it may be advisable to use either the two-letter

Comma with city

plus state

or three-letter standard abbreviations based on the English names of countries as defined by the

10.31:

International Organization for Standardization (ISO 3166-1, alpha-2 and alpha-3, respectively). For

Place-names with

these lists, consult the ISO website. For US, see 10.33.

"Fort," "Mount,"

"Saint," and the

like

Fr.

10.32:

Ger.

When to abbreviate

Isr.

country names

It.

10.33:

"US" versus United

Neth.

States

Russ.

10.34:

Sp.

Mailing addressesâ

Swed.

€”postal versus

standard

UAE (United Arab Emirates)

abbreviations

UK

Note that before reunification (in 1990) East Germany was generally known as the GDR (German

Democratic Republic) or DDR (Deutsche Demokratische Republik), and West Germany as the FRG

(Federal Republic of Germany) or BRD (Bundesrepublik Deutschland). The former Soviet Union was

abbreviated USSR (Union of Soviet Socialist Republics).

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Geographical Terms >> Names of Countries

of Contents

List of Figures

10.33 "US" VERSUS UNITED STATES

List of Tables

In running text, spell out United States as a noun; reserve US for the adjective form only (in which

Index

position the abbreviation is generally preferred). See also 10.4.

US dollars

10.31:

US involvement in China

Place-names with

"Fort," "Mount,"

but

"Saint," and the

like

China's involvement in the United States

10.32:

When to abbreviate

country names

10.33:

"US" versus United

States

10.34:

Mailing addressesâ

€”postal versus

standard

abbreviations

10.35:

Compass points in

mailing addresses

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Geographical Terms >> Addresses

of Contents

List of Figures

10.34 MAILING ADDRESSES--POSTAL VERSUS STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

Standard abbreviations preferred by the US Postal Service (first column) are in all caps and do not use

Index

periods; these forms are most appropriate for mailing addresses. In tabular matter and the like,

Chicago prefers the form of abbreviations presented in the second column. For those not listed here,

consult a dictionary. For a complete list of abbreviations preferred by the USPS, consult their website.

10.32:

In running text, spell out rather than abbreviate. See also 10.35.

When to abbreviate

country names

10.33:

AVE

Ave.

"US" versus United

BLDG

Bldg.

States

CT

Ct.

10.34:

Mailing addressesâ

DR

Dr.

€”postal versus

standard

EXPY

Expy.

abbreviations

HWY

Hwy.

10.35:

Compass points in

LN

Ln.

mailing addresses

PKWY

Pkwy.

10.36:

Compass points

PL

Pl.

PO Box

PO Box

RD

Rd.

RM

Rm.

RTE

Rte.

SQ

Sq.

ST

St.

STE

Ste. ( or Suite)

TER

Ter. ( or Terr.)

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Geographical Terms >> Addresses

of Contents

List of Figures

10.35 COMPASS POINTS IN MAILING ADDRESSES

List of Tables

Single-letter compass points accompanying a street name are normally followed by a period; two-

Index

letter ones are not. (The US Postal Service does not use periods for either; see 10.34; see also 10.4.)

Note that when used in an address, the abbreviations NE, NW, SE, and SW remain abbreviated even

in running text (there is no comma before them when they follow a street name). The N in the third

10.33:

example is a street name and not a compass point.

"US" versus United

States

1060 E. Prospect Ave.

10.34:

Mailing addressesâ

456 NW Lane St.

€”postal versus

I stayed in a building on N Street SW, close to the city center.

standard

abbreviations

A compass point that is the name (or part of the name) of a street or a place-name must never be

10.35:

Compass points in

abbreviated (e.g., South Ave., Northwest Hwy., South Shore Dr., West Bend, East Orange). For the use

mailing addresses

of numerals in addresses, see 9.52, 9.53.

10.36:

Compass points

10.37:

"Latitude" and

"longitude"

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Geographical Terms >> Compass Points, Latitude, and Longitude

of Contents

List of Figures

10.36 COMPASS POINTS

List of Tables

Points of the compass may be abbreviated as follows, without periods (but see 10.35). In formal,

Index

nontechnical text, however, these terms are usually spelled out.

N, E, S, W, NE, SE, SW, NW, NNE, ENE, ESE, etc.

10.34:

N by NE, NE by N, NE by E, etc.

Mailing addressesâ

€”postal versus

standard

abbreviations

10.35:

Compass points in

mailing addresses

10.36:

Compass points

10.37:

"Latitude" and

"longitude"

10.38:

Other discussions

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Geographical Terms >> Compass Points, Latitude, and Longitude

of Contents

List of Figures

10.37 "LATITUDE" AND "LONGITUDE"

List of Tables

In nontechnical contexts, the words latitude and longitude are never abbreviated in running text or

Index

when standing alone.

longitude 90° west

10.35:

the polar latitudes

Compass points in

mailing addresses

Global positioning coordinates are expressed in a variety of ways (though latitude is always given

10.36:

first). Some systems use a minus sign (or hyphen) to indicate south or west. Others use decimal

Compass points

minutes. The following three coordinates are equivalent. The comma is often omitted.

10.37:

"Latitude" and

"longitude"

36 25.217, −44 23.017

10.38:

N 36°25′13″, W 44°23′01″

Other discussions

N 36 25.217, W 44 23.017

10.39:

Systems of

In technical work, the abbreviations lat and long, usually without periods, may be used when part of a

chronology

coordinate. They can sometimes be dropped, since the compass point identifies the coordinate.

lat 42°15′09″ N, long 89°17′45″ W

lat 45°16′17″ S, long 116°40′18″ E

The chart showed shoal water at 19°29′59″ N, 107°45′36″ W.

Note that primes (′) and double primes (″), not quotation marks, are used. For greater detail, consult

Scientific Style and Format (bibliog. 1.1).

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Designations of Time

of Contents

List of Figures

10.38 OTHER DISCUSSIONS

List of Tables

For units of time (seconds, minutes, etc.), see 10.71. For numerical designations of dates and times of

Index

day, see 9.31, 9.34, 9.36, 9.38--41.

10.36:

Compass points

10.37:

"Latitude" and

"longitude"

10.38:

Other discussions

10.39:

Systems of

chronology

10.40:

Months

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Designations of Time

of Contents

List of Figures

10.39 SYSTEMS OF CHRONOLOGY

List of Tables

The following abbreviations are used in running text and elsewhere. Although these have

Index

traditionally appeared in small capitals (with or without periods), Chicago recommends full capitals

without periods, in keeping with the general guidelines in this chapter (see 10.4; see also 10.8). The

first four precede the year number; the others follow it. See also 9.35.

10.37:

"Latitude" and

"longitude"

AD anno Domini (in the year of [our] Lord)

10.38:

AH anno Hegirae (in the year of the Hegira); anno

Other discussions

Hebraico (in the Hebrew year)

10.39:

AM anno mundi (in the year of the world) (not to

Systems of

chronology

be confused with ante meridiem; see 10.42)

10.40:

AS

anno salutis (in the year of salvation)

Months

AUC ab urbe condita (from the founding of the city

10.41:

[Rome, in 753 BCE])

Days of the week

BC

before Christ

BCE before the Common Era

BP

before the present

CE

Common Era

MYA million years ago

YBP years before the present

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Designations of Time

of Contents

List of Figures

10.40 MONTHS

List of Tables

Where space restrictions require that the names of months be abbreviated, one of the following

Index

systems is often used. The second and third, which take no periods, are used respectively in computer

systems and indexes of periodical literature. In formal prose, Chicago prefers the first.

10.38:

Jan.

Jan

Ja

Other discussions

or

or

10.39:

Systems of

Feb.

Feb

F

chronology

or

or

10.40:

Months

Mar.

Mar

Mr

or

or

10.41:

Days of the week

Apr.

Apr

Ap

or

or

10.42:

Time of day

May

May

My

or

June

Jun

Je

or

or

July

Jul

Jl

or

or

Aug.

Aug

Ag

or

or

Sept.

Sep

S

or

or

Oct.

Oct

O

or

or

Nov.

Nov

N

or

or

Dec.

Dec

D

or

or

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Designations of Time

of Contents

List of Figures

10.41 DAYS OF THE WEEK

List of Tables

Where space restrictions require that days of the week be abbreviated, one of the following systems is

Index

often used. The second (common in computer code) and third use no periods. In formal prose,

Chicago recommends the first.

10.39:

Sun.

Sun

Su

Systems of

or

or

chronology

10.40:

Mon.

Mon

M

Months

or

or

10.41:

Days of the week

Tues.

Tue

Tu

or

or

10.42:

Time of day

Wed.

Wed

W

or

or

10.43:

Scholarly

abbreviations

Thurs.

Thu

Th

or

or

Fri.

Fri

F

or

or

Sat.

Sat

Sa

or

or

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Designations of Time

of Contents

List of Figures

10.42 TIME OF DAY

List of Tables

The following abbreviations are used in text and elsewhere. Though these sometimes appear in small

Index

capitals (with or without periods), Chicago prefers the lowercase form, with periods, as being the

most immediately intelligible. For further explanation and examples, see 9.38, 9.40. See also 10.4.

10.40:

a.m.

ante meridiem (before noon)

Months

m.

meridies (noon [rarely used])

10.41:

Days of the week

p.m.

post meridiem (after noon)

10.42:

Time of day

The abbreviations a.m. and p.m. should not be used with morning, afternoon, evening, night, or o'clock.

10.43:

(See also 7.85, section 1, under time.)

Scholarly

abbreviations

10:30 a.m. or ten thirty in the morning

10.44:

11:00 p.m. or eleven o'clock at night

A few scholarly

symbols

Time zones, where needed, are usually given in parentheses--for example, 4:45 p.m. (CST).

GMT

Greenwich mean time

EST

eastern standard time

EDT

eastern daylight time

CST

central standard time

CDT

central daylight time

MST

mountain standard time

MDT

mountain daylight time

PST

Pacific standard time

PDT

Pacific daylight time

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scholarly Abbreviations

of Contents

List of Figures

10.43 SCHOLARLY ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

Scholarly abbreviations and symbols such as those listed in this section are normally confined to

Index

bibliographic references, glossaries, and other scholarly apparatus. If used in running text, they

should be confined to parentheses or notes. Some can stand for several terms; only the terms likely to

be encountered in scholarly works (mainly in the humanities) and serious nonfiction are included

10.41:

here. The choice between different abbreviations for one term (e.g., L. and Lat. for Latin) depends on

Days of the week

the writer's preference, context, readership, and other factors; if in doubt, choose the longer form.

10.42:

Time of day

Note that Latin abbreviations are normally set in roman. Note also that ab, ad, et, and other Latin

10.43:

terms that are complete words take no periods. See also 10.4, 7.53. For terms used more commonly in

Scholarly

science and technology, see 10.52.

abbreviations

10.44:

A few scholarly

abbr.

abbreviated, -ion

symbols

ab init.

ab initio, from the beginning

10.45:

abl.

ablative

Biblical

abbreviationsâ

abr.

abridged, abridgment

€”additional

resources

acc.

accusative

act.

active

add.

addendum

ad inf.

ad infinitum

ad init. ad initium, at the beginning

ad int.

ad interim, in the intervening time

adj.

adjective

ad lib.

ad libitum, at will (often used without a

period)

ad loc.

ad locum, at the place

adv.

adverb

aet. or

aetatis, aged

aetat.

AFr.

Anglo-French

AN

Anglo-Norman

anon.

anonymous (see 14.79, 14.80)

app.

appendix

arch.

archaic

art.

article

AS

Anglo-Saxon

b.

born; brother

Bd.

Band (Ger.), volume

bib.

Bible, biblical

bibl.

bibliotheca, library

bibliog. bibliography, -er, -ical

biog.

biography, -er, -ical

biol.

biology, -ist, -ical

bk.

book

c.

century; chapter (in law citations)

c. or cop. copyright (see 10.44)

ca. or c. circa, about, approximately ( ca. preferred

for greater clarity)

Cantab. Cantabrigiensis, of Cambridge

cet. par. ceteris paribus, other things being equal

cf.

confer, compare ("see, by way of

comparison"; should not be used when

see alone is meant)

chap. or chapter

ch.

col.

color (best spelled out); column

colloq.

colloquial, -ly, -ism

comp.

compiler ( pl. comps.), compiled by

compar. comparative

con.

contra, against

conj.

conjunction; conjugation

cons.

consonant

constr.

construction

cont.

continued

contr.

contraction

corr.

corrected

cp.

compare (rarely used; cf. is far more

common)

d.

died; daughter

Dan.

Danish

dat.

dative

def.

definite; definition

dept.

department

deriv.

derivative

d.h.

das heisst, namely (used only in German

text)

d.i.

das ist, that is (used only in German text)

dial.

dialect

dict.

dictionary

dim.

diminutive

dist.

district

div.

division; divorced

do.

ditto

dram.

dramatis personae

pers.

Dr. u.

Druck und Verlag, printer and publisher

Vrl.

DV

Deo volente, God willing; Douay Version

(see 10.51)

ea.

each

ed.

editor ( pl. eds.), edition, edited by (never

add by after ed. : either "ed. Jane Doe" or

"edited by Jane Doe"; use eds. only after,

never before, the names of two or more

editors; see examples throughout

chapter 14)

EE

Early English

e.g.

exempli gratia, for example (not to be

confused with i.e. )

ellipt.

elliptical, -ly

ency. or encyclopedia

encyc.

eng.

engineer, -ing

Eng.

English

engr.

engraved, -ing

enl.

enlarged

eq.

equation ( pl. eqq. or eqs.; see also 10.44)

esp.

especially

et al.

et alii (or et alia), and others (normally used

of persons; no period after et)

etc.

et cetera, and so forth (normally used of

things)

et seq.

et sequentes, and the following

ex.

example ( pl. exx. or exs.)

f. or fem. feminine; female

f.

fÃ¼r (Ger.), for

fasc.

fascicle

ff.

and following (see 14.156)

fig.

figure

fl.

floruit, flourished (used with a date to

indicate the productive years of a

historical figure whose birth and death

dates are unknown)

fol.

folio

Fr.

French

fr.

from

fut.

future

f.v.

folio verso, on the back of the page

Gael.

Gaelic

gen.

genitive; genus

geog.

geography, -er, -ical

geol.

geology, -er, -ical

geom.

geometry, -ical

ger.

gerund

Ger. or

German

G.

Gk.

Greek

hist.

history, -ian, -ical

HQ

headquarters

ibid.

ibidem, in the same place (see 14.29)

id.

idem, the same (see 14.30)

i.e.

id est, that is (not to be confused with e.g. )

IE

Indo-European

ill.

illustrated, -ion, -or

imp. or imperative

imper.

incl.

including

indef.

indefinite

indic.

indicative

inf.

infra, below (best spelled out)

infin.

infinitive

in pr.

in principio, in the beginning

inst.

instant (this month); institute, -ion

instr.

instrumental

interj.

interjection

intrans. intransitive

introd. or introduction

intro.

irreg.

irregular

It.

Italian

L.

Latin; left (in stage directions)

l.

left; line ( pl. ll., but best spelled out to

avoid confusion with numerals 1 and 11)

lang.

language

Lat. or L. Latin

lit.

literally

loc.

locative

loc. cit. loco citato, in the place cited (best avoided;

see 14.31)

loq.

loquitur, he or she speaks

m.

male; married; measure ( pl. mm.)

m. or

masculine

masc.

marg.

margin, -al

math.

mathematics, -ical

MHG

Middle High German

mimeo. mimeograph, -ed

misc.

miscellaneous

MM

Maelzel's metronome

m.m.

mutatis mutandis, necessary changes being

made

Mod.E. Modern English

MS ( pl. manuscriptum (pl. manuscripta), manuscript

MSS)

mus.

museum; music, -al

n.

natus, born; note, footnote ( pl. nn.); noun

nat.

national; natural

NB, n.b. nota bene, take careful note (capitals are

illogical but often used for emphasis)

n.d.

no date; not determined

neg.

negative

neut.

neuter

no. ( pl.

number

nos.)

nom.

nominative

non obs. non obstante, notwithstanding

non seq. non sequitur, it does not follow

n.p.

no place; no publisher; no page

n.s.

new series

NS

New Style (dates)

ob.

obiit, died

obs.

obsolete

occas.

occasional, -ly

OE

Old English

OFr.

Old French

OHG

Old High German

ON

Old Norse

op. cit.

opere citato, in the work cited (best avoided;

see 14.31)

o.s.

old series

OS

Old Style (dates)

Oxon.

Oxoniensis, of Oxford

p.

page ( pl. pp.); past ( also pa.)

para. or paragraph (see 10.44)

par.

pass.

passive

pa. t.

past tense

path.

pathology, -ist, -ical

perf.

perfect

perh.

perhaps

pers.

person, -al

pers.

personal communication

comm.

pl.

plate (best avoided; see 3.9); plural

p.p.

past participle

ppl.

participle

PPS

post postscriptum, a later postscript

prep.

preposition

pres.

present

pron.

pronoun

pro tem. pro tempore, for the time being (often used

without a period)

prox.

proximo, next month

PS

postscriptum, postscript

pt.

part

pub.

publication, publisher, published by

QED

quod erat demonstrandum, which was to be

demonstrated

quar. or quarter, -ly

quart.

q.v.

quod vide, which see (used only in a cross-

reference after the term referred to; cf.

s.v. )

R.

rex, king; regina, queen; right (in stage

directions)

r.

right; recto; reigned

refl.

reflexive

repr.

reprint, -ed

rev.

review; revised, revised by, revision (never

add by after rev. : either "rev. Jane Doe"

or "revised by Jane Doe")

RIP

requiescat in pace, may he or she rest in

peace

s.

son; substantive, -ival

s.a.

sine anno, without year; sub anno, under the

year

sc.

scene; scilicet, namely; sculpsit, carved by

Sc. or

Scottish

Scot.

s.d.

sine die, without setting a day for

reconvening; stage direction

sd.

sound

sec.

section (see 10.44); secundum, according to

ser.

series

s.h.

speech heading

sing. or singular

sg.

s.l.

sine loco, without place (of publication)

s.n.

sine nomine, without name (of publisher)

sociol.

sociology, -ist, -ical

Sp.

Spanish

s.p.

speech prefix

st.

stanza

subj.

subject, -ive; subjunctive

subst. or substantive, -al

s.

sup.

supra, above

superl.

superlative

supp. or supplement

suppl.

s.v. ( pl. sub verbo, sub voce, under the word (used

s.vv.)

in a cross-reference before the term

referred to; cf. q.v. )

syn.

synonym, -ous

t.

tome (Fr.), tomo (Sp.), volume

techn.

technical, -ly

theol.

theology, -ian, -ical

t.p.

title page

trans.

translated by, translator(s) (never add by

after trans. : either "trans. Jane Doe" or

"translated by Jane Doe"); transitive

treas.

treasurer

TS

typescript

ult.

ultimatus, ultimate, last; ultimo, last month

univ.

university

usw.

und so weiter, and so forth (equivalent to

etc. ; used only in German text)

ut sup. ut supra, as above

v.

verse ( pl. vv.); verso; versus; vide, see

v. or vb. verb

v.i.

verbum intransitivum, intransitive verb; vide

infra, see below

viz.

videlicet, namely

voc.

vocative

vol.

volume

vs. or v. versus (in legal contexts use v. )

v.t.

verbum transitivum, transitive verb

yr.

year; your

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Scholarly Abbreviations

of Contents

List of Figures

10.44 A FEW SCHOLARLY SYMBOLS

List of Tables

The symbols below often appear in bibliographies and other scholarly apparatus rather than their

Index

equivalent abbreviations (see 10.43).

©

copyright

10.42:

=

equals, the same as (for examples, see

Time of day

10.49)

10.43:

Scholarly

¶ ( pl.

paragraph

abbreviations

¶¶)

10.44:

§ ( pl. §§) section

A few scholarly

symbols

10.45:

Biblical

abbreviations—

additional

resources

10.46:

Books of the Bible

in text and notes

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Biblical Abbreviations

of Contents

List of Figures

10.45 BIBLICAL ABBREVIATIONS--ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

For authoritative guidance in many biblical areas not covered here, consult The SBL Handbook of Style

Index

(bibliog. 1.1). For citing scriptural references in notes and bibliographies, see 14.252--55.

10.43:

Scholarly

abbreviations

10.44:

A few scholarly

symbols

10.45:

Biblical

abbreviationsâ

€”additional

resources

10.46:

Books of the Bible

in text and notes

10.47:

Biblical

abbreviations and

short formsâ€”an

overview

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Biblical Abbreviations

of Contents

List of Figures

10.46 BOOKS OF THE BIBLE IN TEXT AND NOTES

List of Tables

In running text, books of the Bible are generally spelled out. See also 9.27.

Index

The opening chapters of Ephesians constitute a sermon on love.

Jeremiah, chapters 42--44, records the flight of the Jews to Egypt.

According to Genesis 1:27, God created man in his own image.

10.44:

A few scholarly

symbols

In parenthetical citations or in notes, or where many such references appear in the text, abbreviations

10.45:

are appropriate.

Biblical

abbreviationsâ

€”additional

My concordance lists five instances of the word nourish: Gen. 47:12, Ruth 4:15, Isa. 44:14, Acts 7:21, and 1

resources

Tim. 4:6.

10.46:

Books of the Bible

in text and notes

10.47:

Biblical

abbreviations and

short formsâ€”an

overview

10.48:

The Old Testament

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Biblical Abbreviations

of Contents

List of Figures

10.47 BIBLICAL ABBREVIATIONS AND SHORT FORMS--AN OVERVIEW

List of Tables

For traditional abbreviations and commonly used shorter forms for books of the Bible, see 10.48,

Index

10.49, 10.50. (Note that the shorter forms have no periods.) The listing is alphabetical, both for easier

reference and because the order varies slightly in the Jewish, Protestant, and Roman Catholic versions

of the Bible. Alternative names for the same books are indicated by an equals sign (see 10.44).

10.45:

Biblical

abbreviationsâ

€”additional

resources

10.46:

Books of the Bible

in text and notes

10.47:

Biblical

abbreviations and

short formsâ€”an

overview

10.48:

The Old Testament

10.49:

The Apocrypha

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Biblical Abbreviations

of Contents

List of Figures

10.48 THE OLD TESTAMENT

List of Tables

See also 10.47.

Index

Amos or Am

Amos

1 Chron. or 1 Chr

1 Chronicles

10.46:

2 Chron. or 2 Chr

2 Chronicles

Books of the Bible

in text and notes

Dan. or Dn

Daniel

10.47:

Deut. or Dt

Deuteronomy

Biblical

abbreviations and

Eccles. or Eccl

Ecclesiastes

short formsâ€”an

overview

Esther or Est

Esther

10.48:

Exod. or Ex

Exodus

The Old Testament

Ezek. or Ez

Ezekiel

10.49:

The Apocrypha

Ezra or Ezr

Ezra

10.50:

Gen. or Gn

Genesis

The New

Testament

Hab. or Hb

Habakkuk

Hag. or Hg

Haggai

Hosea or Hos

Hosea

Isa. or Is

Isaiah

Jer. or Jer

Jeremiah

Job or Jb

Job

Joel or Jl

Joel

Jon. or Jon

Jonah

Josh. or Jo

Joshua

Judg. or Jgs

Judges

1 Kings or 1 Kgs

1 Kings

2 Kings or 2 Kgs

2 Kings

Lam. or Lam

Lamentations

Lev. or Lv

Leviticus

Mal. or Mal

Malachi

Mic. or Mi

Micah

Nah. or Na

Nahum

Neh. or Neh

Nehemiah

Num. or Nm

Numbers

Obad. or Ob

Obadiah

Prov. or Prv

Proverbs

Ps. ( pl. Pss.) or Ps ( pl. Psalms

Pss)

Ruth or Ru

Ruth

1 Sam. or 1 Sm

1 Samuel

2 Sam. or 2 Sm

2 Samuel

Song of Sol. or Sg

Song of Solomon (= Song of

Songs)

Zech. or Zec

Zechariah

Zeph. or Zep

Zephaniah

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Biblical Abbreviations

of Contents

List of Figures

10.49 THE APOCRYPHA

List of Tables

The books of the Apocrypha are accepted in Roman Catholic versions of the Bible, though not in

Index

Jewish and Protestant versions. Some are not complete in themselves but are continuations of books

listed in 10.48. Where no abbreviation is given, the full form should be used. See also 10.47.

10.47:

Bar. or Bar

Baruch

Biblical

abbreviations and

Ecclus.

Ecclesiasticus (= Sirach)

short formsâ€”an

overview

1 Esd.

1 Esdras

10.48:

2 Esd.

2 Esdras

The Old Testament

Jth. or Jdt

Judith

10.49:

The Apocrypha

1 Macc. or 1 Mc 1 Maccabees

10.50:

2 Macc. or 2 Mc 2 Maccabees

The New

Pr. of Man.

Prayer of Manasses (= Manasseh)

Testament

Sir. or Sir

Sirach (= Ecclesiasticus)

10.51:

Versions and

Sus.

Susanna

sections of the

Bible

Tob. or Tb

Tobit

Ws

Wisdom (= Wisdom of Solomon)

Wisd. of Sol.

Wisdom of Solomon (= Wisdom)

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Biblical Abbreviations

of Contents

List of Figures

10.50 THE NEW TESTAMENT

List of Tables

See also 10.47.

Index

Acts

Acts of the Apostles

Apoc.

Apocalypse (= Revelation)

10.48:

Col. or Col

Colossians

The Old Testament

1 Cor. or 1 Cor

1 Corinthians

10.49:

The Apocrypha

2 Cor. or 2 Cor

2 Corinthians

10.50:

Eph. or Eph

Ephesians

The New

Testament

Gal. or Gal

Galatians

10.51:

Heb. or Heb

Hebrews

Versions and

sections of the

James or Jas

James

Bible

John or Jn

John (Gospel)

10.52:

Miscellaneous

1 John or 1 Jn

1 John (Epistle)

technical

abbreviations

2 John or 2 Jn

2 John (Epistle)

3 John or 3 Jn

3 John (Epistle)

Jude

Jude

Luke or Lk

Luke

Mark or Mk

Mark

Matt. or Mt

Matthew

1 Pet. or 1 Pt

1 Peter

2 Pet. or 2 Pt

2 Peter

Phil. or Phil

Philippians

Philem. or Phlm

Philemon

Rev. or Rv

Revelation (= Apocalypse)

Rom. or Rom

Romans

1 Thess. or 1 Thes

1 Thessalonians

2 Thess. or 2 Thes

2 Thessalonians

1 Tim. or 1 Tm

1 Timothy

2 Tim. or 2 Tm

2 Timothy

Titus or Ti

Titus

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Biblical Abbreviations

of Contents

List of Figures

10.51 VERSIONS AND SECTIONS OF THE BIBLE

List of Tables

Versions and sections of the Bible are usually abbreviated in the form of initialisms, especially when

Index

they consist of more than one word.

Apoc.

Apocrypha

10.49:

ARV

American Revised Version

The Apocrypha

ASV

American Standard Version

10.50:

The New

AT

American Translation

Testament

AV

Authorized (King James) Version

10.51:

Versions and

CEV

Contemporary English Version

sections of the

Bible

DV

Douay Version

10.52:

ERV

English Revised Version

Miscellaneous

technical

EV

English version(s)

abbreviations

HB

Hebrew Bible

10.53:

JB

Jerusalem Bible

Statistics

LXX

Septuagint

MT

Masoretic Text

NAB

New American Bible

NEB

New English Bible

NJB

New Jerusalem Bible

NRSV New Revised Standard Version

NT

New Testament

OT

Old Testament

RSV

Revised Standard Version

RV

Revised Version

Syr.

Syriac

Vulg.

Vulgate

WEB

World English Bible

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science

of Contents

List of Figures

10.52 MISCELLANEOUS TECHNICAL ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

The following list, which cannot aim to be comprehensive, includes some abbreviations used in

Index

various branches of the physical and biological sciences and in technical writing. Some, such as PC

and DVD, are also in wide general use. Abbreviations used in highly specialized areas have generally

been omitted, as have most adjectival forms. Many of the abbreviations for units are identical to or

10.50:

compatible with those used in the International System of Units, or SI (see 10.54--62). Periods are

The New

Testament

omitted in any context (compare 10.4). The capitalization given below, based largely on current usage,

10.51:

sometimes departs from that used in Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary (see bibliog. 3.1). The first

Versions and

letter of abbreviations derived from proper names (e.g., A [ampere], V, Wb, and the C in °C) are

sections of the

Bible

usually capitalized (though the spelled-out term is lowercased--unless it follows the word "degree," as

10.52:

in "degree[s] Celsius"), as are the prefix letters for mega- (M), giga- (G), tera- (T), and so on (see 10.57).

Miscellaneous

technical

Plurals do not add an s (10 A, 5 ha). With few exceptions (mainly abbreviations with degree symbols),

abbreviations

a space usually appears between a numeral and an abbreviation (22 m but 36°C); see also 10.61. For

10.53:

units with repeated quantities, see 9.17. For statistical abbreviations, see 10.53. For traditional US units

Statistics

of measure, see 10.67--71. See also 9.16.

10.54:

SI units

A

ampere; adenine (in genetic code)

Å

angstrom

ac

alternating current

AF

audio frequency

Ah

ampere-hour

AM

amplitude modulation

ASCII

American Standard Code for Information

Interchange

atm

atmosphere, -ic

av or

avoirdupois

avdp

bar

bar (no abbreviation)

Bé or °Bé degree Baumé

bhp

brake horsepower

BMI

body mass index

bp

boiling point; base pair

bps

bits per second

Bps

bytes per second

Bq

becquerel

Btu

British thermal unit

C

coulomb; cytosine (in genetic code)

°C

degree Celsius

cal

calorie

Cal

kilocalorie (in nonscientific contexts; see also

kcal)

cc

cubic centimeter (in clinical contexts; see

also cm3)

cd

candela

CD

compact disc

cgs

centimeter-gram-second system (SI)

Ci

curie

cm

centimeter

cM

centimorgan

cm3

cubic centimeter (in scientific contexts; see

also cc)

cp

candlepower

CP

chemically pure

cps or

cycles per second

c/s

CPU

central processing unit

cu

cubic

d

day; deuteron

Da

dalton

dB

decibel

dc

direct current

DNS

domain name system

DOI

Digital Object Identifier (a registered

trademark)

DOS

disk operating system

dpi

dots per inch

DVD

digital versatile ( or video) disc

dyn

dyne

emf

electromotive force

erg

erg (no abbreviation)

eV

electron volt

F

farad

°F

degree Fahrenheit

FM

frequency modulation

fp

freezing point

FTP

file transfer protocol

g

gram; gas

G

guanine (in genetic code)

Gb

gigabit

GB

gigabyte

Gbps

gigabits per second

GeV

109 electron volts

GIF

graphic interchange format

GIS

geographic information system

GPS

global positioning system

Gy

gigayear; gray (joule per kilogram)

H

henry ( pl. henries)

h

hour; helion

ha

hectare

hp

horsepower

HTML

hypertext markup language

HTTP

hypertext transfer protocol

Hz

hertz

IP

Internet protocol

IR

infrared

IU

international unit

J

joule

JPEG

from Joint Photographic Experts Group (file

format)

K

kelvin (no degree symbol used); kilobyte

(in commercial contexts)

kat

katal

kb

kilobar (DNA); kilobase (RNA)

kb or

kilobit

kbit

KB or K kilobyte

Kbps

kilobits per second

kc

kilocycle

kcal

kilocalorie (in scientific contexts; see also

Cal)

KE

kinetic energy

kg

kilogram

kHz

kilohertz

kJ

kilojoule

km

kilometer

kmh or kilometers per hour

kmph

kn

knot (nautical mph)

kW

kilowatt

kWh

kilowatt-hour

L

liter (capitalized to avoid confusion with

numeral 1)

lm

lumen

lx

lux

m

meter

M

molar; metal

Mb

megabase; megabit

MB

megabyte

Mbps

megabits per second

Mc

megacycle

mCi

millicurie

MeV

million electron volts

mg

milligram

MIDI

musical instrument digital interface

mks

meter-kilogram-second system (SI)

mL

milliliter

mol

mole

mp

melting point

MPEG

from Moving Pictures Experts Group (file

format)

mpg

miles per gallon

mph

miles per hour

MP3

from MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (file format)

MP4

from MPEG-4 Part 14 (file format)

N

newton; number (often italic; see also 10.53)

neg

negative

nm

nanometer; nautical mile

Ω

ohm

OCR

optical character recognition

OS

operating system

Pa

pascal

pc

parsec

PC

personal computer

PDF

portable document format

PE

potential energy

pF

picofarad

pH

negative log of hydrogen ion concentration

(measure of acidity)

PNG

from portable network graphics (file

format)

pos

positive

ppb

parts per billion

ppm

parts per million

ppt

parts per trillion; precipitate

R

electrical resistance

°R

degree Réaumur

rad

radian

RAM

random-access memory

RF

radio frequency

ROM

read-only memory

rpm or revolutions per minute

r/min

s

second

S

siemens

SGML

standard generalized markup language

soln

solution

sp gr

specific gravity

sq

square

sr

steradian

std

standard

STP

standard temperature and pressure

Sv

sievert

t

metric ton (103 kg); triton (nucleus of

tritium)

T

tesla; thymine (in genetic code)

Tb

terabit

TB

terabyte

Tbps

terabits per second

TCP/IP transmission-control protocol/Internet

protocol

temp

temperature

U

uracil (in genetic code)

UCS

universal character set

URI

uniform resource identifier

URL

uniform resource locator

USB

universal serial bus

UV

ultraviolet

V

volt

W

watt

Wb

weber

wt

weight

w/v

weight per volume

w/w

weight per weight

XML

extensible markup language

y

year

Z

atomic number (often italic)

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science

of Contents

List of Figures

10.53 STATISTICS

List of Tables

The following abbreviations are used in statistical material, especially in tables. They are often

Index

italicized. See also 12.57, 12.58, and table 12.3.

ANCOVA

analysis of covariance

10.51:

ANOVA

analysis of variance

Versions and

sections of the

CI

confidence interval

Bible

CL

confidence limit

10.52:

Miscellaneous

CLT

central limit theorem

technical

abbreviations

df, DF, or dof degrees of freedom

10.53:

GLIM

generalized linear model

Statistics

IQR

interquartile range

10.54:

SI units

LS

least squares

10.55:

MLE

maximum likelihood estimate

SI unitsâ€”form

MS

mean square

N

number (of population)

n

number (of sample)

ns

not (statistically) significant

OLS

ordinary least squares

OR

odds ratio

p

probability

r

bivariate correlation coefficient

R

multivariate correlation coefficient

R 2

coefficient of determination

RMS

root mean square

sd or SD

standard deviation

se or SE

standard error

sem or SEM

standard error of the mean

SS

sum of squares

SSE

error sum of squares

SST

total sum of squares

WLLN

weak law of large numbers

or

mean value

Ï‡2

chi-square distribution

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> The International System of Units

of Contents

List of Figures

10.54 SI UNITS

List of Tables

The International System of Units ( SystÃ¨me international d'unitÃ©s, abbreviated internationally as SI)

Index

is an expanded version of the metric system. It is in general use among the world's scientists and in

many other areas. The following paragraphs discuss only the basics. For the latest official guidelines,

consult The International System of Units, a brochure published in English and French by the

10.52:

Bureau International des Poids et Mesures and available online. For further guidance, see Ambler

Miscellaneous

technical

Thompson and Barry N. Taylor, Guide for the Use of the International System of Units (bibliog. 2.4); and

abbreviations

Scientific Style and Format (bibliog. 1.1).

10.53:

Statistics

10.54:

SI units

10.55:

SI unitsâ€”form

10.56:

Base SI units

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> The International System of Units

of Contents

List of Figures

10.55 SI UNITS--FORM

List of Tables

No periods are used after any of the SI symbols for units, and the same symbols are used for both the

Index

singular and the plural. Most symbols are lowercased; exceptions are those that stand for units

derived from proper names (e.g., A, for ampere) and those that must be distinguished from similar

lowercased forms. All units are lowercased in their spelled-out form except for degree Celsius (Â°C).

10.53:

Statistics

10.54:

SI units

10.55:

SI unitsâ€”form

10.56:

Base SI units

10.57:

SI prefixes

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> The International System of Units

of Contents

List of Figures

10.56 BASE SI UNITS

List of Tables

There are seven fundamental, or base, SI units. Note that although weight and mass are usually

Index

measured in the same units, they are not interchangeable. Weight is a force due to gravity that

depends on an object's mass. Note also that no degree sign is used with the symbol K.

10.54:

QUANTITY

UNIT

SYMBOL

SI units

length

meter

m

10.55:

SI unitsâ€”form

mass

kilogram

kg

10.56:

time

second

s

Base SI units

electric current

ampere

A

10.57:

SI prefixes

thermodynamic temperature

kelvin

K

10.58:

amount of substance

mole

mol

Grams

luminous intensity

candela

cd

Not to be confused with the symbols for base units are the corresponding symbols for base quantities.

These symbols, which represent variable quantities, appear in italic type (e.g., l, length; m, mass; t,

time).

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> The International System of Units

of Contents

List of Figures

10.57 SI PREFIXES

List of Tables

Prefixes, representing a power of ten, are added to the name of a base unit to allow notation of very

Index

large or very small numerical values. The units so formed are called multiples and submultiples of SI

units. For example, a kilometer, or km, is equal to a thousand meters (or 103 m), and a millisecond, or

ms, is equal to one-thousandth of a second (or 10−3 s). The following prefixes, with their symbols, are

10.55:

used in the international system. Note that in three cases the final vowel of an SI prefix is omitted:

SI units—form

kΩ, kilohm ( not kiloohm); MΩ, megohm ( not megaohm); ha, hectare ( not hectoare).

10.56:

Base SI units

FACTOR PREFIX SYMBOL FACTOR PREFIX SYMBOL

10.57:

SI prefixes

1024

yotta

Y

10−1

deci

d

10.58:

1021

zetta

Z

10−2

centi

c

Grams

1018

exa

E

10−3

milli

m

10.59:

Derived units

1015

peta

P

10−6

micro µ

expressed

algebraically

1012

tera

T

10−9

nano

n

109

giga

G

10−12

pico

p

106

mega M

10−15

femto f

103

kilo

k

10−18

atto

a

102

hecto h

10−21

zepto z

101

deka

da

10−24

yocto y

These prefixes should not be used to indicate powers of two (as in the field of electrical technology, or

computing). If binary multiples must be used, the first two letters of the SI prefixes must be followed

by bi, to form kibi- (Ki), mebi- (Mi), gibi- (Gi), tebi- (Ti), pebi- (Pi), and exbi- (Ei). See also 9.11.

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> The International System of Units

of Contents

List of Figures

10.58 GRAMS

List of Tables

Although for historical reasons the kilogram rather than the gram was chosen as the base unit,

Index

prefixes are applied to the term gram--megagram (Mg), milligram (mg), nanogram (ng), and so forth.

10.56:

Base SI units

10.57:

SI prefixes

10.58:

Grams

10.59:

Derived units

expressed

algebraically

10.60:

Derived units with

special names

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> The International System of Units

of Contents

List of Figures

10.59 DERIVED UNITS EXPRESSED ALGEBRAICALLY

List of Tables

Derived units are expressed algebraically in terms of base units or other derived units (see also 10.60).

Index

DERIVED UNIT

IN TERMS OF SI BASE UNITS

square meter

m2

10.57:

cubic meter

m3

SI prefixes

10.58:

meter per second

m/s

Grams

meter per second squared

m/s2

10.59:

kilogram per cubic meter

kg/m3

Derived units

expressed

algebraically

10.60:

Derived units with

special names

10.61:

SI units and

abbreviationsâ

€”spacing

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> The International System of Units

of Contents

List of Figures

10.60 DERIVED UNITS WITH SPECIAL NAMES

List of Tables

Certain derived units have special names and symbols. Several of the most common--hertz (Hz), volt

Index

(V), watt (W), and so forth--are listed in 10.52. These are used in algebraic expressions to denote

further derived units. A few are listed below. Note the raised dot in the second expression.

10.58:

DERIVED UNIT

SYMBOL

IN TERMS OF SI BASE UNITS

Grams

joule per kelvin

J/K

m2 kg s−2 K−1

10.59:

Derived units

newton meter

N · m

m2 kg s−2

expressed

algebraically

newton per meter

N/m

kg s−2

10.60:

Derived units with

A derived unit can often be expressed in different ways. For example, the weber may be expressed

special names

either as Wb or, in another context, in terms of the volt second (V · s).

10.61:

SI units and

abbreviations—

spacing

10.62:

Non-SI units

accepted for use

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> The International System of Units

of Contents

List of Figures

10.61 SI UNITS AND ABBREVIATIONS--SPACING

List of Tables

Only numbers between 0.1 and 1,000 should be used to express the quantity of any SI unit. Thus

Index

12,000 meters is expressed as 12 km (not 12 000 m), and 0.003 cubic centimeters as 3 mm (not

3

0.003 cm3). (For the use of spaces rather than commas between groups of digits in SI units, see 9.56.)

In SI usage as in general usage, a space usually appears between the numeral and any abbreviation or

10.59:

symbol; however, contrary to general usage, SI usage stipulates a space before a percentage sign (%)

Derived units

expressed

or before a degree symbol used with a C (compare the advice toward the end of 10.52). SI usage also

algebraically

stipulates a space between expressions of degrees, minutes, and seconds (compare 10.37). Many

10.60:

publications do not observe these exceptions, and Chicago does not require them in its publications.

Derived units with

special names

22° 14′ 33″ but 22 °C

10.61:

SI units and

0.5 % ( not 0.5%)

abbreviations—

spacing

10.62:

Non-SI units

accepted for use

10.63:

Astronomy—

additional

resources

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> The International System of Units

of Contents

List of Figures

10.62 NON-SI UNITS ACCEPTED FOR USE

List of Tables

Certain widely used units such as liter (L, capitalized to avoid confusion with the numeral 1), metric

Index

ton (t), and hour (h) are not officially part of the international system but are accepted for use within

the system.

10.60:

Derived units with

special names

10.61:

SI units and

abbreviationsâ

€”spacing

10.62:

Non-SI units

accepted for use

10.63:

Astronomyâ

€”additional

resources

10.64:

Celestial

coordinates

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> Astronomy

of Contents

List of Figures

10.63 ASTRONOMY--ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

Astronomers and astrophysicists employ the international system of measure supplemented with

Index

special terminology and abbreviations. The paragraphs in this section offer a minimum of examples

for the generalist. Additional guidelines may be found at the website of the

International Astronomical Union.

10.61:

SI units and

abbreviationsâ

€”spacing

10.62:

Non-SI units

accepted for use

10.63:

Astronomyâ

€”additional

resources

10.64:

Celestial

coordinates

10.65:

Some other

astronomical

abbreviations

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> Astronomy

of Contents

List of Figures

10.64 CELESTIAL COORDINATES

List of Tables

Right ascension, abbreviated RA or α, is given in hours, minutes, and seconds (abbreviations set as

Index

superscripts) of sidereal time. Declination, abbreviated δ, is given in degrees, minutes, and seconds

(using the degree symbol, prime, and double prime) of arc north (marked + or left unmarked) or

south (marked −) of the celestial equator. Note the abbreviations (set as superscripts) and symbols

10.62:

used.

Non-SI units

accepted for use

14h6m7s

10.63:

Astronomy—

−49°8′22″

additional

resources

Decimal fractions of the basic units are indicated as shown.

10.64:

Celestial

h m s

coordinates

14 6 7 .2

+34°.26

10.65:

Some other

astronomical

abbreviations

10.66:

Naming

conventions for

chemical elements

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> Astronomy

of Contents

List of Figures

10.65 SOME OTHER ASTRONOMICAL ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

AU or ua astronomical unit (mean earth--sun

Index

distance)

lt-yr

light-year (9.46 Ã— 10 km)

12

pc

parsec (parallax second: 3.084 Ã—

10.63:

13

Astronomyâ

10 km)

€”additional

kpc

103 pc

resources

6

10.64:

Mpc

10 pc

Celestial

UT or

universal time

coordinates

UTC

10.65:

Some other

astronomical

abbreviations

10.66:

Naming

conventions for

chemical elements

10.67:

Periods with

abbreviations of US

measure

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> Chemical Elements

of Contents

List of Figures

10.66 NAMING CONVENTIONS FOR CHEMICAL ELEMENTS

List of Tables

The International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC) is the recognized body that

Index

formally approves element names. Each element bears a number (reflecting the number of protons in

its nucleus) as well as a name--as in "element 106," also known as seaborgium. This number is an

important identifier in cases where formal names are in dispute; between 1995 and 1997, for example,

10.64:

the American Chemical Society and IUPAC adopted different names for some of the same elements.

Celestial

coordinates

The differences were reconciled, and the list that follows reflects names and symbols approved by

10.65:

IUPAC. Names for undiscovered or unconfirmed elements (as of publication, 111, roentgenium, was

Some other

the last confirmed element) are provisionally assigned using Latin for the digits of their atomic

astronomical

abbreviations

number (e.g., ununbium, one-one-two, for element 112). The elements in the following list are

10.66:

arranged in alphabetical order by common name. If the symbol is based on a term other than the

Naming

conventions for

common name--for example, Sb ( stibium) for antimony--the term is added in parentheses. Although

chemical elements

the names of elements are always lowercased, the symbols all have an initial capital. No periods are

10.67:

used. In specialized works, the abbreviations commonly appear in text as well as in tables, notes, and

Periods with

abbreviations of US

so forth. See also 8.148, 8.149.

measure

10.68:

89

Ac

actinium

Plural forms for

abbreviations of US

13

Al

aluminum (US), aluminium (IUPAC)

measure

95

Am

americium

51

Sb

antimony ( stibium)

18

Ar

argon

33

As

arsenic

85

At

astatine

56

Ba

barium

97

Bk

berkelium

4

Be

beryllium

83

Bi

bismuth

107

Bh

bohrium

5

B

boron

35

Br

bromine

48

Cd

cadmium

20

Ca

calcium

98

Cf

californium

6

C

carbon

58

Ce

cerium

55

Cs

cesium

17

Cl

chlorine

24

Cr

chromium

27

Co

cobalt

29

Cu

copper

96

Cm

curium

110

Ds

darmstadtium

105

Db

dubnium

66

Dy

dysprosium

99

Es

einsteinium

68

Er

erbium

63

Eu

europium

100

Fm

fermium

9

F

fluorine

87

Fr

francium

64

Gd

gadolinium

31

Ga

gallium

32

Ge

germanium

79

Au

gold ( aurum)

72

Hf

hafnium

108

Hs

hassium

2

He

helium

67

Ho

holmium

1

H

hydrogen

49

In

indium

53

I

iodine

77

Ir

iridium

26

Fe

iron ( ferrum)

36

Kr

krypton

57

La

lanthanum

103

Lr

lawrencium

82

Pb

lead ( plumbum)

3

Li

lithium

71

Lu

lutetium

12

Mg

magnesium

25

Mn

manganese

109

Mt

meitnerium

101

Md

mendelevium

80

Hg

mercury ( hydrargyrum)

42

Mo

molybdenum

60

Nd

neodymium

10

Ne

neon

93

Np

neptunium

28

Ni

nickel

41

Nb

niobium

7

N

nitrogen

102

No

nobelium

76

Os

osmium

8

O

oxygen

46

Pd

palladium

15

P

phosphorus

78

Pt

platinum

94

Pu

plutonium

84

Po

polonium

19

K

potassium ( kalium)

59

Pr

praseodymium

61

Pm

promethium

91

Pa

protactinium

88

Ra

radium

86

Rn

radon

75

Re

rhenium

45

Rh

rhodium

111

Rg

roentgenium

37

Rb

rubidium

44

Ru

ruthenium

104

Rf

rutherfordium

62

Sm

samarium

21

Sc

scandium

106

Sg

seaborgium

34

Se

selenium

14

Si

silicon

47

Ag

silver ( argentum)

11

Na

sodium ( natrium)

38

Sr

strontium

16

S

sulfur

73

Ta

tantalum

43

Tc

technetium

52

Te

tellurium

65

Tb

terbium

81

Tl

thallium

90

Th

thorium

69

Tm

thulium

50

Sn

tin ( stannum)

22

Ti

titanium

74

W

tungsten ( wolfram)

112

Uub

ununbium

116

Uuh

ununhexium

118

Uuo

ununoctium

115

Uup

ununpentium

114

Uuq

ununquadium

117

Uus

ununseptium

113

Uut

ununtrium

92

U

uranium

23

V

vanadium

54

Xe

xenon

70

Yb

ytterbium

39

Y

yttrium

30

Zn

zinc

40

Zr

zirconium

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> US Measure

of Contents

List of Figures

10.67 PERIODS WITH ABBREVIATIONS OF US MEASURE

List of Tables

In the rare instances in which abbreviations for US units of measure are used in scientific copy, they

Index

are usually set without periods; in nonscientific contexts, periods are customary. See also 10.4.

10.65:

Some other

astronomical

abbreviations

10.66:

Naming

conventions for

chemical elements

10.67:

Periods with

abbreviations of US

measure

10.68:

Plural forms for

abbreviations of US

measure

10.69:

Length, area, and

volume

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> US Measure

of Contents

List of Figures

10.68 PLURAL FORMS FOR ABBREVIATIONS OF US MEASURE

List of Tables

Abbreviations of US units of measure, like their scientific counterparts, are identical in the singular

Index

and the plural. See also 10.71.

10 yd.

10.66:

5 lb.

Naming

8 sq. mi.

conventions for

chemical elements

Note that the unit of measure in such expressions as 0.5 yd. and 1.5 yd. is generally pronounced as if

10.67:

Periods with

it were plural (i.e., point five yards; one point five yards).

abbreviations of US

measure

10.68:

Plural forms for

abbreviations of US

measure

10.69:

Length, area, and

volume

10.70:

Weight and

capacity

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> US Measure

of Contents

List of Figures

10.69 LENGTH, AREA, AND VOLUME

List of Tables

In the following examples, note that the proper symbols for foot and inch are prime (′) and double

Index

prime (″), not the single (') and double (") quotation mark:

LENGTH

10.67:

in. or ″

inch

Periods with

abbreviations of US

ft. or ′

foot

measure

yd.

yard

10.68:

Plural forms for

rd.

rod

abbreviations of US

measure

mi.

mile

10.69:

AREA

Length, area, and

volume

sq. in.

square inch

10.70:

sq. ft.

square foot

Weight and

capacity

sq. yd.

square yard

10.71:

sq. rd.

square rod

Time

sq. mi.

square mile

VOLUME

cu. in.

cubic inch

cu. ft.

cubic foot

cu. yd.

cubic yard

There is no space in such expressions as the following (for 6 ft. 1 in. ):

6′1″

Exponents are sometimes used with abbreviations to designate area or volume, but only when no

ambiguity can occur.

425 ft.2 (= 425 sq. ft. not 425 ft. by 425 ft.)

638 ft.3 (= 638 cu. ft.)

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> US Measure

of Contents

List of Figures

10.70 WEIGHT AND CAPACITY

List of Tables

The US system comprises three systems of weight and mass: avoirdupois (the common system), troy

Index

(used mainly by jewelers), and apothecaries' measure. Although confusion is unlikely, an abbreviation

can, if necessary, be referred to the appropriate system thus: lb. av., lb. t., lb. ap. Also, the systems of

capacity measure used in the United States and the British Commonwealth differ (an American pint

10.68:

being more than three ounces smaller than a British pint, for example), but the same abbreviations are

Plural forms for

abbreviations of US

used.

measure

10.69:

WEIGHT OR MASS

Length, area, and

volume

gr.

grain

10.70:

s.

scruple

Weight and

capacity

dr.

dram

10.71:

dwt.

pennyweight

Time

oz.

ounce

10.72:

Commercial terms

lb. or #

pound

—some examples

cwt.

hundredweight

tn.

ton

DRY MEASURE

pt.

pint

qt.

quart

pk.

peck

bu.

bushel

LIQUID MEASURE

min. or

minim

fl. Dr. or f. ʒ

fluid dram

fl. oz. or f.

fluid ounce

gi.

gill

pt.

pint

qt.

quart

gal.

gallon

bbl.

barrel

As with length and so forth, abbreviations do not change in the plural.

12 gal.

3 pt.

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Technology and Science >> US Measure

of Contents

List of Figures

10.71 TIME

List of Tables

The following abbreviations, though not limited to the US system of measure, are used mainly in

Index

nontechnical contexts:

sec.

second

10.68:

min.

minute

Plural forms for

abbreviations of US

h. or hr.

hour

measure

d. or day

day

10.69:

Length, area, and

mo.

month

volume

yr.

year

10.70:

Weight and

capacity

In nontechnical writing, the plurals of these abbreviations, unlike those of length, area, weight, and

10.71:

the like, are often formed by adding an s.

Time

10.72:

5 secs.

Commercial termsâ

12 hrs. or 12 h.

€”some examples

15 yrs.

10: ABBREVIATIONS

Table

Chapter Contents >> Business and Commerce

of Contents

List of Figures

10.72 COMMERCIAL TERMS--SOME EXAMPLES

List of Tables

Like many other abbreviations in nonscientific contexts, periods for abbreviations of commercial

Index

terms are normally used in lowercased forms (see 10.4). See also 10.43--44, 10.67--71. For company

names, see 10.22.

10.68:

acct.

account, -ant

Plural forms for

abbreviations of US

agt.

agent

measure

a.k.a.

also known as

10.69:

Length, area, and

amt.

amount

volume

AP

amounts payable

10.70:

Weight and

APR

annual percentage rate

capacity

AR

amounts receivable

10.71:

ASAP

as soon as possible

Time

att.

attached, -ment

10.72:

Commercial termsâ

attn.

attention

€”some examples

a.v. or AV

ad valorem

bal.

balance

bbl.

barrel(s)

bcc

blind carbon copy or blind copy, -ies

bdl. or bdle.

bundle

bl.

bale(s)

BS

bill of sale

bu.

bushel(s)

c. or ct.

cent

cc

carbon copy or copy, -ies

c.l. or CL

carload

c/o

in care of

COD

cash on delivery

COLA

cost-of-living adjustment

CPI

consumer price index

CPM

cost per thousand ( mille)

cr.

credit, -or

ctn.

carton

cttee. or comm. committee

d/b/a

doing business as

dis.

discount

dist.

district

distr.

distributor, -ion

DJIA

Dow Jones Industrial Average

doz.

dozen

dr.

debtor

dstn.

destination

ea.

each

EEO

equal employment opportunity

EOE

equal opportunity employer

EOM

end of month

exec.

executive

f.a.s. or FAS

free alongside ship

f.o.b. or FOB

free on board

FY

fiscal year

GAAP

generally accepted accounting

principles

GL

general ledger

GM

general manager; genetically

modified

gro.

gross

inst.

instant (this month)

inv.

invoice

IPO

initial public offering

JIT

just in time

LBO

leveraged buyout

LCL

less-than-carload lot

LIFO

last in, first out

M and A or

mergers and acquisitions

M&A

mdse.

merchandise

mfg.

manufacturing

mfr.

manufacturer

mgmt.

management

mgr.

manager

MO

mail order; money order

msg.

message

mtg.

meeting

mtge.

mortgage

NA or n/a

not applicable; not available

NGO

nongovernmental organization

nt. wt.

net weight

OJT

on-the-job training

OS

operating system; out of stock

OTC

over the counter

P and H or

postage and handling

P&H

pd.

paid

pkg.

package

POE

port of embarkation; port of entry

POP

point of purchase

POS

point of sale; point of service

PP

parcel post

ppd.

postpaid; prepaid

pr.

pair

QA

quality assurance

Q&A

question and answer

QC

quality control

qtr.

quarter

qty.

quantity

registered trademark (see 8.152)

recd. or rec'd

received

S and H or S&H shipping and handling

SM

unregistered service mark

std.

standard

TBA

to be announced

TBD

to be determined

unregistered trademark (see 8.152)

treas.

treasurer, -y

ult.

ultimo (last month)

VAT

value-added tax

whsle.

wholesale

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

of Contents

Overview

List of Figures

11.1

Scope and organization

List of Tables

11.2

Unicode

Index

Titles and Other Proper Names

11.3

Capitalization of foreign titles

11.4

Punctuation of foreign titles

11.5

Italic versus roman type

11.6

Foreign titles with English translation

11.7

Translated titles

11.8

Foreign institutions

Languages Using the Latin Alphabet

11.9

Capitalization—English versus other languages

11.10 Punctuation—original language versus English context

11.11 Word division

11.12 Special characters

11.13 International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA)

African Languages

11.14 African capitalization and punctuation

11.15 African special characters

Albanian

11.16 Albanian capitalization

11.17 Albanian special characters

Croatian and Bosnian

11.18 Croatian and Bosnian capitalization

11.19 Croatian and Bosnian special characters

Czech

11.20 Czech capitalization

11.21 Czech special characters

Danish

11.22 Danish capitalization

11.23 Danish special characters

Dutch

11.24 Dutch capitalization

11.25 Dutch special characters

Finnish

11.26 Finnish capitalization

11.27 Finnish special characters

French

11.28 French—additional resources

11.29 French capitalization

11.30 Titles of French works

11.31 Spacing with French punctuation

11.32 French use of guillemets

11.33 Quotation marks in French

11.34 French dialogue

11.35 French suspension points and ellipses

11.36 French word division—vowels

11.37 French word division—consonants

11.38 French words containing apostrophes

11.39 French words best left undivided

11.40 French special characters

German

11.41 The new German orthography

11.42 German capitalization

11.43 German apostrophes

11.44 German quotation marks

11.45 German word division—vowels

11.46 German word division—consonants

11.47 German word division—compounds

11.48 German special characters

Hungarian

11.49 Hungarian capitalization

11.50 Hungarian special characters

Italian

11.51 Italian capitalization

11.52 Italian quotations and dialogue

11.53 Italian apostrophes

11.54 Italian suspension points and ellipses

11.55 Italian word division—vowels

11.56 Italian word division—consonants

11.57 Italian word division—words containing apostrophes

11.58 Italian special characters

Latin

11.59 Latin capitalization—titles of works

11.60 Latin word division—syllables

11.61 Latin word division—single consonants

11.62 Latin word division—multiple consonants

11.63 Latin word division—compounds

11.64 Latin special characters

Norwegian

11.65 Norwegian capitalization

11.66 Norwegian special characters

Polish

11.67 Polish capitalization

11.68 Polish word division

11.69 Polish special characters

Portuguese

11.70 Portuguese capitalization

11.71 Portuguese special characters

Romanian and Moldavian

11.72 Romanian and Moldavian capitalization

11.73 Romanian and Moldavian special characters

Serbian and Montenegrin

11.74 Serbian and Montenegrin capitalization

11.75 Serbian and Montenegrin special characters

Spanish

11.76 Spanish—additional resources

11.77 Spanish capitalization

11.78 Spanish question marks and exclamation points

11.79 Spanish guillemets and quotation marks

11.80 Spanish dialogue

11.81 Spanish suspension points and ellipses

11.82 Spanish word division—vowels

11.83 Spanish word division—consonants

11.84 Dividing Spanish compounds

11.85 Spanish special characters

Swedish

11.86 Swedish capitalization

11.87 Swedish special characters

Turkish and Azeri

11.88 Turkish spelling

11.89 Turkish and Azeri capitalization

11.90 Turkish and Azeri special characters

Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized)

11.91 Transliteration

11.92 Character sets for non-Latin alphabets

11.93 Proofreading copy in non-Latin alphabets—a warning

11.94 Diacritics—specialized versus general contexts

11.95 Italics versus roman for transliterated terms

Arabic

11.96 Arabic transliteration

11.97 The hamza and the ʿayn

11.98 Arabic spelling

11.99 The Arabic definite article

11.100 Arabic capitalization

11.101 Arabic word division

Chinese and Japanese

11.102 Chinese romanization

11.103 Exceptions to Pinyin

11.104 Apostrophes, hyphens, and tone marks in Chinese romanization

11.105 Some common Chinese names

11.106 Japanese romanization

11.107 Modified Hepburn system

11.108 Chinese and Japanese—capitalization and italics

11.109 Titles of Japanese and Chinese works

11.110 Inclusion of Chinese and Japanese characters

Hebrew

11.111 Hebrew transliteration systems

11.112 Diacritics in transliterated Hebrew

11.113 Hebrew prefixes

11.114 Hebrew capitalization and italics

11.115 Hebrew word division

11.116 Unromanized Hebrew phrases

11.117 A note on Hebrew vowels

Russian

11.118 Russian transliteration

11.119 Russian capitalization

11.120 Titles of Russian works

11.121 Russian quotations and dialogue

11.122 Russian suspension points

11.123 Russian uses of the dash

11.124 Russian word division—general

11.125 Combinations not to be divided in Cyrillic transliteration

11.126 Division between Russian consonants

11.127 Division of Russian words after prefixes or between parts

11.128 Division of Russian words after vowel or diphthong

South Asian Languages

11.129 South Asian special characters

Classical Greek

11.130 Transliterating Greek

11.131 Typesetting Greek

Breathings and Accents

11.132 Greek breathing marks

11.133 Greek accent marks

11.134 Unaccented Greek words

11.135 Greek vowels

Punctuation and Numbers

11.136 Greek punctuation

11.137 Greek numbers

Word Division

11.138 Greek word division—consecutive vowels

11.139 Greek word division—single consonants

11.140 Greek word division—two or more consonants

11.141 Greek word division—compound words

Old English and Middle English

11.142 Special characters in Old and Middle English

11.143 Ampersand and wynn

American Sign Language

11.144 Signed languages

11.145 Components of signs

11.146 Writing ASL

11.147 Glosses in ASL

11.148 Compound signs

11.149 Fingerspelling

11.150 Lexicalized signs

11.151 Handshapes

11.152 Transcriptions of signed sentences

11.153 Pronouns, possessives, and reference

11.154 Nonmanual signals

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

11.1 SCOPE AND ORGANIZATION

List of Tables

This chapter provides guidelines for presenting foreign-language text in English-language

Index

publications. These guidelines are general: authors or editors working with languages in which they

are not fluent should seek additional guidance from someone who is. More than two dozen languages

are covered, with those languages that commonly appear and those that present complex problems

11.1:

being treated most fully. The chapter begins with some typographic matters--capitalization, italics,

Scope and

organization

and so forth--that apply to most of the languages discussed (see 11.3--8). It then deals with languages

11.2:

using the Latin alphabet; transliterated (or romanized) languages; classical Greek; Old English and

Unicode

Middle English; and American Sign Language. Individual languages or groups of languages are

11.3:

presented in alphabetical order within their particular sections.

Capitalization of

foreign titles

11.4:

Punctuation of

foreign titles

11.5:

Italic versus roman

type

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

11.2 UNICODE

List of Tables

Many of the letters and symbols required by the world's languages are included in a widely used

Index

standard for character encoding called Unicode. The Unicode standard (published as a book of the

same name, by the Unicode Consortium; bibliog. 2.7), which is widely supported by modern

operating systems and browsers and many other applications (including many word processors) and

11.1:

is required by such standards as XML, assigns a unique identifying hexadecimal number (or code

Scope and

organization

point) and description to tens of thousands of characters. Even fonts with Unicode character mapping,

11.2:

however, typically support only a subset of the Unicode character set. For this reason, it is desirable to

Unicode

determine at the outset which characters will be needed for a publication. Table 11.1 lists special

11.3:

characters, with Unicode numbers and abbreviated descriptions, needed for each of the languages

Capitalization of

foreign titles

treated in this chapter that use the Latin alphabet. Table 11.2 lists special characters that may be

11.4:

needed for certain transliterated languages. For Russian (Cyrillic) and Greek characters, see

Punctuation of

tables 11.3, 11.4, and 11.5. Unicode numbers mentioned in text should be prefixed by U+ (e.g., U+00E0

foreign titles

for Ã ).

11.5:

Italic versus roman

type

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Other Proper Names

of Contents

List of Figures

11.3 CAPITALIZATION OF FOREIGN TITLES

List of Tables

For foreign titles of works, whether these appear in text, notes, or bibliographies, Chicago

Index

recommends a simple rule: capitalize only the words that would be capitalized in normal prose--first

word of title and subtitle and all proper nouns. That is, use sentence style (see 8.156). This rule applies

equally to titles using the Latin alphabet and to transliterated titles. For examples, see 14.107. For

11.1:

exceptions, see 14.193, 11.24, 11.42. For variations in French, see 11.30.

Scope and

organization

11.2:

Unicode

11.3:

Capitalization of

foreign titles

11.4:

Punctuation of

foreign titles

11.5:

Italic versus roman

type

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Other Proper Names

of Contents

List of Figures

11.4 PUNCTUATION OF FOREIGN TITLES

List of Tables

When a foreign title is included in an English-language context, the following changes are

Index

permissible: a period (or, more rarely, a semicolon) between title and subtitle may be changed to a

colon (and the first word of the subtitle may be capitalized); guillemets (Â« >>; see 11.32, 11.79) may

be changed to standard quotation marks; and any space between a word and a mark of punctuation

11.2:

that follows may be eliminated. Commas should not be inserted (even in a series or before dates) or

Unicode

deleted, nor should any other mark of punctuation be added or deleted. See also 8.163.

11.3:

Capitalization of

foreign titles

11.4:

Punctuation of

foreign titles

11.5:

Italic versus roman

type

11.6:

Foreign titles with

English translation

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Other Proper Names

of Contents

List of Figures

11.5 ITALIC VERSUS ROMAN TYPE

List of Tables

Titles of works in languages that use the Latin alphabet (including transliterated titles) are set in italic

Index

or roman type according to the principles set forth in 8.154--95--for example, books and periodicals

italic; poems and other short works roman.

11.3:

Stendhal's Le rouge et le noir was required reading in my senior year.

Capitalization of

We picked up a copy of the Neue ZÃ¼rcher Zeitung to read on the train.

foreign titles

She published her article in the Annales de dÃ©mographie historique.

11.4:

Strains of the German carol "Es ist ein' Ros' entsprungen" reached our ears.

Punctuation of

foreign titles

Miguel HernÃ¡ndez's poem "Casida del sediento" has been translated as "Lament of the Thirsting Man."

11.5:

Italic versus roman

type

11.6:

Foreign titles with

English translation

11.7:

Translated titles

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Other Proper Names

of Contents

List of Figures

11.6 FOREIGN TITLES WITH ENGLISH TRANSLATION

List of Tables

When the title of a foreign work is mentioned in text, an English gloss often follows in parentheses

Index

(see 6.93). If the translation has not been published, the English should be capitalized sentence-style

(as in the first example below; see 8.156) and should appear neither in italics nor within quotation

marks. A published translation, however, is capitalized headline-style (as in the second example; see

11.4:

8.157) and appears in italics or quotation marks depending on the type of work (see 8.154--95). For

Punctuation of

foreign titles

translations of foreign titles in notes and bibliographies, see 14.108. See also 11.7.

11.5:

Italic versus roman

Leonardo Fioravanti's Compendio de i secreti rationali (Compendium of rational secrets) became a best seller.

type

Proust's Ã€ la recherche du temps perdu ( Remembrance of Things Past) was the subject of her dissertation.

11.6:

Foreign titles with

English translation

11.7:

Translated titles

11.8:

Foreign institutions

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Other Proper Names

of Contents

List of Figures

11.7 TRANSLATED TITLES

List of Tables

Whether to use the original title of a foreign work or the translated title when discussing a work in

Index

text depends on context and readership. In a general work, titles that are widely known in their

English translation could be cited in English first, with the original following in parentheses; in some

cases, the original might be omitted entirely. Some authors prefer to cite all foreign titles in an English

11.5:

form, whether or not they have appeared in English translation. As long as the documentation makes

Italic versus roman

type

clear what has been published in English and what has not, translated titles standing in for the

11.6:

original may be capitalized headline-style and treated like other English-language titles (see 8.157,

Foreign titles with

8.161). See also 11.6.

English translation

11.7:

A Chinese textbook, Elementary Learning ( Xiao xue), has gained a wide following.

Translated titles

MoliÃ¨re's comedy The Miser may have drawn on an obscure, late-medieval French treatise, The Evils of

11.8:

Foreign institutions

Greed, recently discovered in an abandoned chÃ¢teau.

11.9:

Capitalizationâ

€”English versus

other languages

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Titles and Other Proper Names

of Contents

List of Figures

11.8 FOREIGN INSTITUTIONS

List of Tables

If given in the original language, names of foreign institutions and businesses are presented in roman

Index

type and capitalized according to the usage of the country concerned. Such usage may be difficult to

determine; if in doubt, opt for sentence-style capitalization (see 8.156). If translated, such names are

capitalized according to English usage.

11.6:

Foreign titles with

He is a member of the Société d'entraide des membres de l'ordre national de la Légion d'honneur.

English translation

He was comforted to learn of the Mutual Aid Society for Members of the National Order of the Legion of

11.7:

Translated titles

Honor.

11.8:

Foreign institutions

Original (or transliterated) names of institutions presented as glosses should not be italicized.

11.9:

Capitalization—

The number of cases adjudicated by the Supreme People's Court of the People's Republic of China

English versus

(Zhonghua renmin gongheguo zuigao renmin fayuan) has increased sharply.

other languages

11.10:

Punctuation—

original language

versus English

context

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet

of Contents

List of Figures

11.9 CAPITALIZATION--ENGLISH VERSUS OTHER LANGUAGES

List of Tables

Capitalization is applied to more classes of words in English than in any other Western language (but

Index

see 8.1). The remarks under "Capitalization" in the sections that follow suggest some of the ways other

languages differ from English in their use of capitals. Except where stated to the contrary, the

language in question is assumed to lowercase all adjectives (except those used as proper nouns), all

11.7:

pronouns, months, and days of the week. In addition, capitals are used more sparingly than in

Translated titles

English for names of offices, institutions, and so on. Translated terms, however, are subject to

11.8:

Foreign institutions

Chicago's recommendations for capitalization of names and terms (see chapter 8). For foreign

11.9:

personal names, see 8.7--17.

Capitalizationâ

€”English versus

other languages

11.10:

Punctuationâ

€”original language

versus English

context

11.11:

Word division

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet

of Contents

List of Figures

11.10 PUNCTUATION--ORIGINAL LANGUAGE VERSUS ENGLISH CONTEXT

List of Tables

The remarks in this chapter about punctuation point out the more obvious departures from what is

Index

familiar to English speakers. They apply to foreign-language contexts--books, articles, or lengthy

quotations wholly in a foreign language (as in the examples in 11.34). In English-language contexts

and translations of foreign-language works, English-style punctuation is generally used. For example,

11.8:

the tightly spaced suspension points (to indicate omissions or breaks in thought) common in French,

Foreign institutions

Italian, and Spanish publications should be converted to spaced periods in English publications. (For

11.9:

Capitalizationâ

ellipses, see 13.48--56.) English-style quotation marks will replace the guillemets or whatever is used

€”English versus

in the original, and em dashes used to introduce dialogue need not be followed by a space. One

other languages

exception is the punctuation at the beginning of Spanish questions and exclamations (see 11.78),

11.10:

Punctuationâ

which may be preserved if entire sentences are presented in Spanish (but omitted when the passage is

€”original language

versus English

translated).

context

11.11:

Word division

11.12:

Special characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet

of Contents

List of Figures

11.11 WORD DIVISION

List of Tables

Anyone who has ever read a book in English that was composed and printed in a non-English-

Index

speaking country knows how easy it is to err in word division when working with a language not

one's own. The following general rules, however, apply to foreign languages as well as to English: (1)

Single-syllable words should never be broken. (2) No words should be broken after one letter, nor

11.9:

should a single letter be carried over to another line (see also 7.37). (3) Hyphenated words and solid

Capitalizationâ

€”English versus

compounds should be broken at the hyphen or between elements, if at all possible. See also 7.32, 7.35;

other languages

for proper nouns, see 7.38. Specific rules for some of the languages covered in this chapter appear in

11.10:

the relevant sections below.

Punctuationâ

€”original language

versus English

context

11.11:

Word division

11.12:

Special characters

11.13:

International

Phonetic Alphabet

(IPA)

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet

of Contents

List of Figures

11.12 SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Foreign words, phrases, or titles that occur in an English-language work must include any special

Index

characters that appear in the original language. Those languages that use the Latin alphabet may

include letters with accents (diacritical marks), ligatures, and, in some cases, alphabetical forms that

do not normally occur in English. Table 11.1 lists the special characters that might be required for

11.10:

each language treated in this section. Many authors will have access to Unicode-compliant software

Punctuationâ

€”original language

(see 11.2) and will therefore be able to reproduce each of these characters without the addition of any

versus English

context

specialized fonts. Authors should nonetheless supply a list of special characters used within a

manuscript (see 2.15) to ensure the correct conversion to a particular font required for publication or,

11.11:

Word division

for electronic projects, to ensure compliance across systems that may not support Unicode. If type is

11.12:

to be reproduced from an author's hard copy, marginal clarifications may be needed for handwritten

Special characters

accents or special characters. In either case, use table 11.1 to correctly identify the character by name

11.13:

and Unicode number (e.g., for Ä or Ä‘, indicate "D with stroke [U+0110]" or "d with stroke [U+0111]").

International

Phonetic Alphabet

Such positive identification of special characters from manuscript through final proofreading stage is

(IPA)

crucial, as conversion problems are always possible and in some settings are inevitable. For diacritical

11.14:

African

marks used in transliteration, see 11.94.

capitalization and

punctuation

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet

of Contents

List of Figures

11.13 INTERNATIONAL PHONETIC ALPHABET (IPA)

List of Tables

Phonetic symbols using IPA notation are based on the Latin alphabet and are defined for Unicode (see

Index

11.2). For the latest version of the IPA alphabet, consult the website of the

International Phonetic Association. For additional information on the subject of phonetics, including

treatment of other systems of notation, consult Geoffrey K. Pullum and William A. Ladusaw, Phonetic

11.11:

Symbol Guide (bibliog. 5).

Word division

11.12:

Special characters

11.13:

International

Phonetic Alphabet

(IPA)

11.14:

African

capitalization and

punctuation

11.15:

African special

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> African Languages

of Contents

List of Figures

11.14 AFRICAN CAPITALIZATION AND PUNCTUATION

List of Tables

Most African languages--with the exception, most notably, of Arabic (11.96--101)--use the Latin

Index

alphabet and follow English capitalization and punctuation. The most widespread of these is Swahili,

spoken by many different ethnic groups in eastern and central Africa. Hausa, Fulfulde, Yoruba, Igbo,

Wolof, and Bambara are also spoken by millions, largely in western Africa; the same is true for

11.12:

Kikongo (or Kongo) and Lingala in the Congo-Zaire region and of Amharic and Somali in the Horn

Special characters

of Africa region. Amharic and other Ethiopian Semitic languages such as Tigrinya use the Ge'ez

11.13:

International

alphabet, not covered here. Xhosa and other "click" languages spoken in southern Africa do not follow

Phonetic Alphabet

English capitalization. The names of African languages themselves vary widely from ethnic group to

(IPA)

ethnic group and from region to region. It is now standard practice to capitalize the names of African

11.14:

African

languages in the traditional way--for example, Kiswahili rather than KiSwahili or KISwahili. Xhosa

capitalization and

punctuation

speakers refer to and spell their language "isiXhosa" but "Isixhosa" (sometimes "Isizhosa") is also

found in English-language publications.

11.15:

African special

characters

11.16:

Albanian

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> African Languages

of Contents

List of Figures

11.15 AFRICAN SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Swahili uses no additional letters or diacritics. Among the more than two thousand other African

Index

languages, however, many rely on diacritics and phonetic symbols to stand for sounds that cannot be

represented by letters or combinations of letters. Hausa, which is spoken by millions of people across

western Africa, requires the following special characters (see also table 11.1):

11.13:

International

Ɓ ɓ, Ɗ ɗ, Ƙ ƙ, Ƴ ƴ

Phonetic Alphabet

(IPA)

In Nigeria, both the upper and the lowercase y with a "hook" are represented instead with an

11.14:

African

apostrophe ( 'Y'y). Additional diacritics, too numerous to be listed here, may be needed in other

capitalization and

punctuation

African languages. Languages such as French, Portuguese, and Arabic that are used in Africa are

11.15:

dealt with in separate sections in this chapter.

African special

characters

11.16:

Albanian

capitalization

11.17:

Albanian special

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Albanian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.16 ALBANIAN CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9.

Index

11.14:

African

capitalization and

punctuation

11.15:

African special

characters

11.16:

Albanian

capitalization

11.17:

Albanian special

characters

11.18:

Croatian and

Bosnian

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Albanian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.17 ALBANIAN SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Since 1972 a single, unified Albanian orthography has been in use. The following special characters

Index

are needed for Albanian:

Ã‡ Ã§, Ã‹ Ã«

11.15:

African special

characters

11.16:

Albanian

capitalization

11.17:

Albanian special

characters

11.18:

Croatian and

Bosnian

capitalization

11.19:

Croatian and

Bosnian special

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Croatian and Bosnian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.18 CROATIAN AND BOSNIAN CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9.

Index

11.16:

Albanian

capitalization

11.17:

Albanian special

characters

11.18:

Croatian and

Bosnian

capitalization

11.19:

Croatian and

Bosnian special

characters

11.20:

Czech

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Croatian and Bosnian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.19 CROATIAN AND BOSNIAN SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

The former Serbo-Croatian language used both Latin and Cyrillic alphabets. The modern Bosnian and

Index

Croatian standard languages use only the Latin version of that same alphabet. The following special

characters are needed for Bosnian and Croatian (see also 11.74--75):

11.17:

Č č, Ć ć, Đ đ, Š š, Ž ž

Albanian special

characters

Although the substitution of dj for đ is sometimes seen (e.g., in informal correspondence), standard

11.18:

orthographic practice in all the successor languages of Serbo-Croatian distinguishes these two

Croatian and

Bosnian

consistently.

capitalization

11.19:

Croatian and

Bosnian special

characters

11.20:

Czech

capitalization

11.21:

Czech special

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Czech

of Contents

List of Figures

11.20 CZECH CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9.

Index

11.18:

Croatian and

Bosnian

capitalization

11.19:

Croatian and

Bosnian special

characters

11.20:

Czech

capitalization

11.21:

Czech special

characters

11.22:

Danish

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Czech

of Contents

List of Figures

11.21 CZECH SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Czech, a Slavic language written in the Latin alphabet, uses many diacritical marks to indicate sounds

Index

not represented by this alphabet.

Á á, Č č, Ď ď, É é, Ě ě, Í í, Ň ň, Ó ó, Ř ř, Š š, Ť ť, Ú ú, Ů ů, Ý ý, Ž ž

11.19:

Croatian and

Bosnian special

characters

11.20:

Czech

capitalization

11.21:

Czech special

characters

11.22:

Danish

capitalization

11.23:

Danish special

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Danish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.22 DANISH CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9. The polite personal pronouns De, Dem, and Deres (now used ever more rarely) and the

Index

familiar I are capitalized in Danish. Until the mid-twentieth century, common nouns were capitalized,

as in German, but they no longer are.

11.20:

Czech

capitalization

11.21:

Czech special

characters

11.22:

Danish

capitalization

11.23:

Danish special

characters

11.24:

Dutch

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Danish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.23 DANISH SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Danish has three additional alphabetic letters, which require special characters (see also table 11.1).

Index

Ã… Ã¥, Ã† Ã¦, Ã˜ Ã¸

11.21:

Czech special

characters

11.22:

Danish

capitalization

11.23:

Danish special

characters

11.24:

Dutch

capitalization

11.25:

Dutch special

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Dutch

of Contents

List of Figures

11.24 DUTCH CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9. For the capitalization of particles with personal names, see 8.10. Proper adjectives (as

Index

well as nouns) are capitalized as in English. When a word beginning with the diphthong ij is

capitalized, both letters are capitals: IJsland. When a single letter begins a sentence, it is lowercased,

but the next word is capitalized: 'k Heb niet . . .

11.22:

Danish

capitalization

11.23:

Danish special

characters

11.24:

Dutch

capitalization

11.25:

Dutch special

characters

11.26:

Finnish

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Dutch

of Contents

List of Figures

11.25 DUTCH SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Dutch requires no special characters.

Index

11.23:

Danish special

characters

11.24:

Dutch

capitalization

11.25:

Dutch special

characters

11.26:

Finnish

capitalization

11.27:

Finnish special

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Finnish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.26 FINNISH CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9.

Index

11.24:

Dutch

capitalization

11.25:

Dutch special

characters

11.26:

Finnish

capitalization

11.27:

Finnish special

characters

11.28:

Frenchâ

€”additional

resources

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Finnish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.27 FINNISH SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Finnish requires two umlauted vowels (see also table 11.1).

Index

Ä ä, Ö ö

Because Swedish is the second official language in Finland, the Finnish alphabet taught in schools and

11.25:

Dutch special

the standard keyboard used in Finland include the Swedish a with ring above (or overcircle).

characters

11.26:

Å å

Finnish

capitalization

11.27:

Finnish special

characters

11.28:

French—additional

resources

11.29:

French

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> French

of Contents

List of Figures

11.28 FRENCH--ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

As is the case with many languages, there is considerable variation in French publications with

Index

respect to capitalization and punctuation. For excellent advice, with frequent reference to the

Académie française and numerous examples from literature, consult the latest edition of Le bon usage,

known to many by the name of its original editor, Maurice Grevisse (bibliog. 5). Further guidance

11.26:

may be had at the website of the Académie française itself.

Finnish

capitalization

11.27:

Finnish special

characters

11.28:

French—additional

resources

11.29:

French

capitalization

11.30:

Titles of French

works

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> French

of Contents

List of Figures

11.29 FRENCH CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9. Generic words denoting roadways, squares, and the like are lowercased, whether used

Index

alone or with a specific name as part of an address. Only the proper name is capitalized.

le boulevard Saint-Germain

11.27:

la place de l'Opéra

Finnish special

13, rue des Beaux-Arts

characters

11.28:

In most geographical names, the generic word is lowercased and the modifying word capitalized.

French—additional

resources

la mer Rouge

11.29:

French

le pic du Midi

capitalization

11.30:

Names of buildings are usually capitalized.

Titles of French

works

l'Hôtel des Invalides

11.31:

le Palais du Louvre

Spacing with

French punctuation

In names of organizations and institutions, only the first substantive and any preceding modifier are

capitalized, but not the preceding article (except at the beginning of a sentence).

l'Académie française

la Légion d'honneur

le Grand Théâtre de Québec

In hyphenated names, both elements are capitalized.

la Comédie-Française

la Haute-Loire

Names of religious groups are usually lowercased.

un chrétien

des juifs

In names of saints, the word saint is lowercased. But when a saint's name is used as part of a place-

name or the name of a church or other institution, saint is capitalized and hyphenated to the following

element.

le supplice de saint Pierre

but

l'église de Saint-Pierre

Adjectives formed from proper nouns are usually lowercased.

une imagination baudelairienne

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> French

of Contents

List of Figures

11.30 TITLES OF FRENCH WORKS

List of Tables

French publications vary in the way they capitalize titles of works. Chicago recommends sentence-

Index

style capitalization (see 8.156), the rule followed by Grevisse, Le bon usage (see 11.3, 11.28). (An

exception may be made for titles of journals and periodicals, which are often capitalized headline-

style; see 14.193.) Note that a superscripted ordinal letter should remain in the superior position, as in

11.28:

the last example (cf. 14.96).

Frenchâ

€”additional

resources

L'Apollon de Bellac: PiÃ¨ce en un acte

11.29:

L'assommoir

French

L'exil et le royaume

capitalization

Les Rougon-Macquart

11.30:

Le pÃ¨re Goriot

Titles of French

works

Paris au XXe siÃ¨cle

11.31:

Spacing with

For another practice--in which the first substantive (noun or noun form) and any preceding article or

French punctuation

modifier are capitalized--consult French Review, PMLA, or Romanic Review (bibliog. 5). For punctuation

11.32:

in titles, see 11.4.

French use of

guillemets

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> French

of Contents

List of Figures

11.31 SPACING WITH FRENCH PUNCTUATION

List of Tables

In French typeset material, fixed thin spaces generally occur before colons, semicolons, question

Index

marks, and exclamation marks; between guillemets (Â« >>) and the text they enclose (see 11.32); and

after an em dash used to introduce dialogue (see 11.34). In electronic documents, fixed (i.e.,

nonbreaking) spaces are used to avoid stranding a mark at the beginning of a line. In an English

11.29:

context, where the typographic conventions of the publication as a whole should be observed, such

French

capitalization

spacing need not be duplicated. (If for any reason French spacing is required, however, it must be

11.30:

followed consistently and according to French practice for all marks.) See also 11.10.

Titles of French

works

11.31:

Spacing with

French punctuation

11.32:

French use of

guillemets

11.33:

Quotation marks in

French

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> French

of Contents

List of Figures

11.32 FRENCH USE OF GUILLEMETS

List of Tables

For quotation marks, the French use guillemets (« >>), often with a fixed thin space (or, especially in

Index

electronic documents, a regular nonbreaking space) to separate the guillemets from the quoted matter

(but see 11.10). In English-language publications, such spaces need not be used (see 11.31). Such tags

as écrit-il or dit-elle are often inserted within the quoted matter without additional guillemets. Only

11.30:

punctuation belonging to the quoted matter is placed within the closing guillemets; other punctuation

Titles of French

works

follows them.

11.31:

Spacing with

«Mission accomplie?>> a-t-il demandé.

French punctuation

En ce sens, «avec>> signifie «au moyen de>>.

11.32:

À vrai dire, Abélard n'avoue pas un tel rationalisme: «je ne veux pas être si philosophe, écrit-il, que je résiste

French use of

guillemets

à Paul, ni si aristotélicien que je me sépare du Christ>>.

11.33:

Quotation marks in

As in English, when a quotation (other than a block quotation) continues for more than one

French

paragraph, opening guillemets appear at the beginning of each additional paragraph. Closing

11.34:

guillemets appear only at the end of the last paragraph. See also 11.33.

French dialogue

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> French

of Contents

List of Figures

11.33 QUOTATION MARKS IN FRENCH

List of Tables

For quotations within quotations, double (or sometimes single) quotation marks are used. Formerly,

Index

additional guillemets were used, with opening guillemets repeated on each runover line. (Note that

when guillemets are used, if the two quotations end simultaneously, only one set of closing

guillemets appears.)

11.31:

Spacing with

Â«Comment peux-tu dire, "Montre-nous le pÃ¨re"?>>

French punctuation

11.32:

It should perhaps be noted that regular quotation marks are seen increasingly in French contexts in

French use of

guillemets

lieu of guillemets--especially in e-mail correspondence and other electronic settings. This usage is

11.33:

considered informal.

Quotation marks in

French

11.34:

French dialogue

11.35:

French suspension

points and ellipses

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> French

of Contents

List of Figures

11.34 FRENCH DIALOGUE

List of Tables

In dialogue, guillemets are often replaced by em dashes. In French publications, the dash is usually

Index

followed by a thin space; in English publications, the space is not necessary (see 11.31). Such dashes

are used before each successive speech but are not repeated at the end of a speech. To set off a

quotation within a speech, guillemets may be used.

11.32:

French use of

--Vous viendrez aussitÃ´t que possible? a-t-il demandÃ©.

guillemets

--Tout de suite.

11.33:

Quotation marks in

--Bien. Bonne chance!

French

11.34:

--Tu connais sans doute la parole Â«De l'abondance du cÅ“ur la bouche parle>>.

French dialogue

--Non, je ne la connais pas.

11.35:

French suspension

points and ellipses

11.36:

French word

divisionâ€”vowels

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> French

of Contents

List of Figures

11.35 FRENCH SUSPENSION POINTS AND ELLIPSES

List of Tables

The French often use suspension points to indicate interruptions or breaks in thought. In French

Index

practice, these dots are generally unspaced; in English contexts, they may be spaced in the manner of

English-style suspension points or ellipses (see 13.48--56). Suspension points are also used in lieu of

and so forth. See also 11.10.

11.33:

Quotation marks in

«Ce n'est pas que je n'aime plus l'Algérie . . . mon Dieu! un ciel! des arbres! . . . et le reste! . . . Toutefois, sept

French

ans de discipline . . .>>

11.34:

French dialogue

To indicate omissions, the French use unspaced dots enclosed in brackets, with thin spaces between

11.35:

French suspension

the brackets and the dots. In English contexts, the dots may be spaced in the manner of English-style

points and ellipses

ellipses (see 13.56).

11.36:

French word

«Oh, dit-elle avec un mépris écrasant, des changements intellectuels! [. . .]>>

division—vowels

Les deux amis se réunissaient souvent chez Luc [. . .].

11.37:

French word

division—

consonants

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> French

of Contents

List of Figures

11.36 FRENCH WORD DIVISION--VOWELS

List of Tables

In French, a word is divided after a vowel wherever possible. One-letter syllables at the ends or

Index

beginnings of lines should be avoided (see 11.11).

ache-ter ( not a-cheter)

11.34:

in-di-vi-si-bi-li-té

French dialogue

tri-age

11.35:

French suspension

Two or more vowels forming a single sound, or diphthong, are never broken.

points and ellipses

11.36:

écri-vain

French word

division—vowels

fouet-ter

Gau-guin

11.37:

French word

éloi-gner

division—

vieux

consonants

11.38:

French words

containing

apostrophes

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> French

of Contents

List of Figures

11.37 FRENCH WORD DIVISION--CONSONANTS

List of Tables

A division is normally made between two adjacent consonants, whether the same or different.

Index

der-riè-re

feuil-le-ter

ba-lan-cer

11.35:

French suspension

Mal-raux

points and ellipses

ob-jet

11.36:

par-ler

French word

division—vowels

but

11.37:

French word

qua-tre

division—

consonants

ta-bleau

11.38:

Groups of three adjacent consonants are normally divided after the first.

French words

containing

apostrophes

es-prit

11.39:

res-plen-dir

French words best

left undivided

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> French

of Contents

List of Figures

11.38 FRENCH WORDS CONTAINING APOSTROPHES

List of Tables

Division should never be made immediately after an apostrophe.

Index

jus-qu'au

au-jour-d'hui

11.36:

French word

divisionâ€”vowels

11.37:

French word

divisionâ

€”consonants

11.38:

French words

containing

apostrophes

11.39:

French words best

left undivided

11.40:

French special

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> French

of Contents

List of Figures

11.39 FRENCH WORDS BEST LEFT UNDIVIDED

List of Tables

Since there are as many syllables in French as there are vowels or diphthongs (even if some are

Index

unsounded except in poetry), the French break words that appear to English speakers to be of only

one syllable (e.g., fui-te, guer-re, sor-tent). French practice also permits division after one letter (e.g.,

Ã©-tait). In English-language publications, however, such breaks should be avoided, since they may

11.37:

confuse readers not fluent in French. Words of four or fewer letters should in any case be left

French word

divisionâ

undivided. See also 7.32.

€”consonants

11.38:

French words

containing

apostrophes

11.39:

French words best

left undivided

11.40:

French special

characters

11.41:

The new German

orthography

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> French

of Contents

List of Figures

11.40 FRENCH SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

French employs the following special characters (see also table 11.1):

Index

À à, Â â, Ç ç, É é, È è, Ê ê, Ë ë, Î î, Ï ï, Ô ô, Œ œ, Ù ù, Û û, Ü ü

Although French publishers often omit accents on capital letters (especially A) and may set the

11.38:

French words

ligature Œ as two separate letters ( OE), all the special characters needed for French--including

containing

apostrophes

capitalized forms--are available in most software and in most fonts, and they should appear where

needed in English works. This practice, advocated by the Académie française, is helpful to readers

11.39:

French words best

who may not be familiar with French typographic usage.

left undivided

11.40:

French special

characters

11.41:

The new German

orthography

11.42:

German

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> German

of Contents

List of Figures

11.41 THE NEW GERMAN ORTHOGRAPHY

List of Tables

The new rules for German orthography (including spelling and capitalization) adopted in 1998 and

Index

made mandatory in 2005 have been controversial. Some publications have continued to follow

traditional rules, or a combination of house style and traditional rules, whereas others have adopted

the new rules. Some book publishers honor the preference of their authors and, by a similar token, do

11.39:

not update spelling when reprinting older works. Material quoted from German should therefore

French words best

left undivided

reflect the spelling in the source. For principles and details of the new orthography, consult the latest

11.40:

edition of Duden: Die deutsche Rechtschreibung (bibliog. 5). The recommendations and examples in this

French special

section reflect the new orthography.

characters

11.41:

The new German

orthography

11.42:

German

capitalization

11.43:

German

apostrophes

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> German

of Contents

List of Figures

11.42 GERMAN CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

In German, all nouns and words used as nouns are capitalized, whether in ordinary sentences or in

Index

titles of works (see 11.3).

ein Haus

11.40:

die Weltanschauung

French special

das Sein

characters

Deutsch (the German language)

11.41:

eine Deutsche (a German woman)

The new German

orthography

etwas SchÃ¶nes

11.42:

German

Adjectives derived from proper names are generally lowercased. Exceptions include invariable

capitalization

adjectives ending in er (often referring to a city or region) and adjectives that themselves are part of a

11.43:

proper name. For further exceptions, consult Duden (see 11.41).

German

apostrophes

die deutsche Literatur

11.44:

German quotation

nordamerikanische Sprachen

marks

die platonischen Dialoge

but

eine berÃ¼hmte Berliner StraÃŸe

der Nahe Osten

der Deutsch-FranzÃ¶sische Krieg

The pronouns Sie, Ihr, and Ihnen, as polite second-person forms, are capitalized. As third-person

pronouns they are lowercased. The familiar second-person forms du, dich, dein, ihr, euch, and so on--

once routinely capitalized--are now lowercased.

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> German

of Contents

List of Figures

11.43 GERMAN APOSTROPHES

List of Tables

An apostrophe is used to denote the colloquial omission of e.

Index

wie geht's

was gibt's

hab' ich

11.41:

The new German

orthography

Although an apostrophe rarely appears before a genitive s, an apostrophe is used to denote the

11.42:

omission of the s after proper names ending in an s sound ( ce, s, ss, ÃŸ, tz, x, or z) or in a silent s, x, or

German

capitalization

z.

11.43:

German

Alice' Geburtstag

apostrophes

Jaspers' Philosophie

11.44:

Cixous' TheaterstÃ¼cke

German quotation

Leibniz' Meinung

marks

11.45:

German word

divisionâ€”vowels

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> German

of Contents

List of Figures

11.44 GERMAN QUOTATION MARKS

List of Tables

In German, quotations usually take reversed guillemets (>> «); split-level inverted quotation marks

Index

(„"); or, in Switzerland, regular guillemets (see 11.32). Other punctuation is placed outside the closing

quotation marks unless it belongs to the quoted matter.

11.42:

Eros bedeutet für sie primär >>zusammen-sein mit« und nicht >>anschauen«.

German

Denn: „An die Pferde", hieß es: „Aufgesessen!"

capitalization

11.43:

German

apostrophes

11.44:

German quotation

marks

11.45:

German word

division—vowels

11.46:

German word

division—

consonants

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> German

of Contents

List of Figures

11.45 GERMAN WORD DIVISION--VOWELS

List of Tables

In German, division is made after a vowel wherever possible. See also 11.11.

Index

Fa-brik

hü-ten

Bu-ße

11.43:

German

apostrophes

Two vowels forming a single sound, or diphthong, are never broken.

11.44:

German quotation

Lau-ne

marks

blei-ben

11.45:

German word

division—vowels

11.46:

German word

division—

consonants

11.47:

German word

division—

compounds

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> German

of Contents

List of Figures

11.46 GERMAN WORD DIVISION--CONSONANTS

List of Tables

Two or more adjacent consonants, whether the same or different, are divided before the last one

Index

unless they belong to different parts of a compound (see also 11.11).

klir-ren

11.44:

Was-ser

German quotation

Verwand-te

marks

Meis-ter

11.45:

German word

but

division—vowels

11.46:

Morgen-stern

German word

division—

The consonant combinations ch, ck, ph, sch, and th are not divided unless they belong to separate

consonants

syllables. (Until the 1998 spelling change, st was subject to this rule. The combination ck, on the other

11.47:

German word

hand, used to be changed at the end of a line to kk and divided between the k's.)

division—

compounds

Mäd-chen

11.48:

German special

Zu-cker

characters

Philo-so-phie

rau-schen

but

Klapp-hut

Häus-chen

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> German

of Contents

List of Figures

11.47 GERMAN WORD DIVISION--COMPOUNDS

List of Tables

Compound words should be divided between their component elements whenever possible (see also

Index

11.11).

Meeres-ufer

11.45:

mit-einander

German word

Rasier-apparat

division—vowels

Tür-angel

11.46:

German word

division—

consonants

11.47:

German word

division—

compounds

11.48:

German special

characters

11.49:

Hungarian

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> German

of Contents

List of Figures

11.48 GERMAN SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

For setting German in roman type (the old Gothic or Fraktur type having long been out of use), the

Index

eszett, or sharp s ( ß), and three umlauted vowels are needed (see also table 11.1).

Ä ä, Ö ö, ß, Ü ü

11.46:

German word

Although umlauted vowels are occasionally represented by omitting the accent and adding an e ( ae,

division—

consonants

Oe, etc.), the availability of umlauted characters in text-editing software makes such a practice

unnecessary. The eszett ( ß), also widely available, must not be confused with, or replaced by, the

11.47:

German word

Greek beta (β). In the new spelling it is replaced by ss in certain words. Consult a German dictionary

division—

compounds

published after 1998. In German-speaking areas of Switzerland, the eszett is rarely used.

11.48:

German special

characters

11.49:

Hungarian

capitalization

11.50:

Hungarian special

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Hungarian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.49 HUNGARIAN CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9.

Index

11.47:

German word

divisionâ

€”compounds

11.48:

German special

characters

11.49:

Hungarian

capitalization

11.50:

Hungarian special

characters

11.51:

Italian

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Hungarian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.50 HUNGARIAN SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Hungarian requires several varieties of accented vowels (see also table 11.1).

Index

Á á, É é, Í í, Ó ó, Ö ö, Ő ő, Ú ú, Ü ü, Ű ű

11.48:

German special

characters

11.49:

Hungarian

capitalization

11.50:

Hungarian special

characters

11.51:

Italian

capitalization

11.52:

Italian quotations

and dialogue

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Italian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.51 ITALIAN CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9. In Italian, a title preceding a proper name is normally lowercased.

Index

il commendatore Ugo Emiliano

la signora Rossi

11.49:

Hungarian

In commercial correspondence, the formal second-person pronouns are capitalized in both their

capitalization

nominative forms, Lei (singular) and Voi (plural), and their objective forms, La (accusative singular), Le

11.50:

(dative singular), and Vi (accusative and dative plural). The older singular and plural forms Ella ( Le,

Hungarian special

characters

La) and Loro ( Loro, Loro) are handled the same way. These pronouns are capitalized even in combined

11.51:

forms.

Italian

capitalization

Posso pregarLa di farmi una cortesia?

11.52:

Vorrei darLe una spiegazione.

Italian quotations

and dialogue

11.53:

Italian apostrophes

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Italian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.52 ITALIAN QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

List of Tables

Italian uses guillemets ( virgolette a caporale) to denote quoted matter, but usually without the space

Index

between guillemets and quoted text that appears in many French publications. Regular quotation

marks are also frequently used in Italian--sometimes as scare quotes (see 7.55) in the same text in

which guillemets are used for quotations. Note that the period is correctly placed after the closing

11.50:

caporali.

Hungarian special

characters

Â«Cosa pensi del fatto che io possa diventare "un qualcosa di imperial regio"? Questo non Ã¨ proprio

11.51:

Italian

possibile>>.

capitalization

11.52:

In dialogue, em dashes are sometimes used, as in French. The dash is used before each successive

Italian quotations

speech. Unlike French, however, another dash is used at the end of the speech if other matter follows

and dialogue

in the same paragraph. The spaces that typically surround the dashes in Italian texts need not be used

11.53:

Italian apostrophes

in English contexts (see 11.10).

11.54:

Italian suspension

--Avremo la neve,--annunziÃ² la vecchia.

points and ellipses

--E domani?--chiese Alfredo, voltandosi di scatto dalla finestra.

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Italian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.53 ITALIAN APOSTROPHES

List of Tables

An apostrophe is used to indicate the omission of a letter. A space should appear after an apostrophe

Index

that follows a vowel; after an apostrophe that follows a consonant, however, no space should appear.

po' duro

11.51:

de' malevoli

Italian

l'onda

capitalization

all'aura

11.52:

Italian quotations

and dialogue

11.53:

Italian apostrophes

11.54:

Italian suspension

points and ellipses

11.55:

Italian word

divisionâ€”vowels

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Italian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.54 ITALIAN SUSPENSION POINTS AND ELLIPSES

List of Tables

Italian, like French, uses suspension points to indicate interruptions or breaks in thought. To indicate

Index

omitted material (i.e., an ellipsis), the dots are enclosed in brackets. Though Italian typography

usually calls for unspaced dots, in English publications Chicago recommends spaced dots for

suspension points and ellipses (see 13.48--56). See also 11.10.

11.52:

Italian quotations

Voglio . . . quattro milioni.

and dialogue

Davvero? [. . .] Non ci avevo pensato.

11.53:

Italian apostrophes

11.54:

Italian suspension

points and ellipses

11.55:

Italian word

divisionâ€”vowels

11.56:

Italian word

divisionâ

€”consonants

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Italian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.55 ITALIAN WORD DIVISION--VOWELS

List of Tables

In Italian, division is made after a vowel wherever possible. One-letter syllables at the ends or

Index

beginnings of lines should be avoided (see 11.11).

acro-po-li ( not a-cropoli)

11.53:

mi-se-ra-bi-le

Italian apostrophes

ta-vo-li-no

11.54:

Italian suspension

Consecutive vowels are rarely divided, and two vowels forming a single sound, or diphthong, are

points and ellipses

never divided.

11.55:

Italian word

division—vowels

miei

pia-ga

11.56:

Italian word

Gio-van-ni

division—

Giu-sep-pe

consonants

pau-sa

11.57:

Italian word

gio-iel-lo

division—words

containing

apostrophes

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Italian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.56 ITALIAN WORD DIVISION--CONSONANTS

List of Tables

Certain consonant groups must never be broken: ch, gh, gli, gn, qu, sc, and r or l preceded by any

Index

consonant other than itself.

ac-qua-rio

11.54:

fi-glio

Italian suspension

la-ghi

points and ellipses

na-sce

11.55:

pa-dre

Italian word

division—vowels

rau-che

ri-flet-te-re

11.56:

Italian word

so-gna-re

division—

consonants

Three groups of consonants, however, may be divided: double consonants; the group cqu; and any

11.57:

Italian word

group beginning with l, m, n, or r.

division—words

containing

bab-bo

apostrophes

af-fre-schi

11.58:

Italian special

ac-qua

characters

cal-do

cam-po

com-pra

den-tro

par-te

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Italian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.57 ITALIAN WORD DIVISION--WORDS CONTAINING APOSTROPHES

List of Tables

Division should never be made immediately after an apostrophe (but see 11.53).

Index

dal-l'accusa

del-l'or-ga-no

quel-l'uomo

11.55:

Italian word

un'ar-te

division—vowels

l'i-dea

11.56:

Italian word

division—

consonants

11.57:

Italian word

division—words

containing

apostrophes

11.58:

Italian special

characters

11.59:

Latin capitalization

—titles of works

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Italian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.58 ITALIAN SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

In Italian, the following special characters are required (see also table 11.1):

Index

À à, È è, É é, Ì ì, Ò ò, Ù ù

Although the grave accent on capitalized vowels is sometimes dropped, in stressed final syllables it

11.56:

Italian word

must be retained to avoid confusion.

division—

consonants

CANTÒ (he sang)

11.57:

CANTO (I sing)

Italian word

division—words

containing

PAPÀ (daddy)

apostrophes

PAPA (pope)

11.58:

Italian special

characters

If an accented capital is not available, an apostrophe may be used in place of the accent on stressed

final (or single) vowels.

11.59:

Latin capitalization

—titles of works

E' (it is)

11.60:

E (and)

Latin word division

—syllables

PAPA' (daddy)

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Latin

of Contents

List of Figures

11.59 LATIN CAPITALIZATION--TITLES OF WORKS

List of Tables

In English-speaking countries, titles of ancient and medieval Latin works are capitalized in sentence

Index

style--that is, only the first word in the title or subtitle, proper nouns, and proper adjectives are

capitalized (see 8.156).

11.57:

De bello Gallico

Italian word

De viris illustribus

division—words

containing

Cur Deus homo?

apostrophes

11.58:

Renaissance and modern works or works in English with Latin titles are usually capitalized in the

Italian special

English fashion (i.e., headline style; see 8.157). (If there is any doubt about the era to which the title

characters

belongs, opt for sentence style.)

11.59:

Latin capitalization

—titles of works

Novum Organum

11.60:

Religio Medici

Latin word division

—syllables

11.61:

Latin word division

—single consonants

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Latin

of Contents

List of Figures

11.60 LATIN WORD DIVISION--SYLLABLES

List of Tables

A Latin word has as many syllables as it has vowels or diphthongs ( ae, au, ei, eu, oe, ui, and, in archaic

Index

Latin, ai, oi, ou) and should be divided between syllables (see also 11.11).

na-tu-ra

11.58:

cae-li-co-la

Italian special

in-no-cu-us

characters

11.59:

Latin capitalization

—titles of works

11.60:

Latin word division

—syllables

11.61:

Latin word division

—single consonants

11.62:

Latin word division

—multiple

consonants

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Latin

of Contents

List of Figures

11.61 LATIN WORD DIVISION--SINGLE CONSONANTS

List of Tables

When a single consonant occurs between two vowels, the word is divided before the consonant unless

Index

it is an x. Note that i and u sometimes act as consonants (and, when they do, are sometimes written

as j and v).

11.59:

Cae-sar

Latin capitalization

me-ri-di-es

—titles of works

in-iu-ri-or ( or in-ju-ri-or)

11.60:

Latin word division

but

—syllables

11.61:

lex-is

Latin word division

—single consonants

11.62:

Latin word division

—multiple

consonants

11.63:

Latin word division

—compounds

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Latin

of Contents

List of Figures

11.62 LATIN WORD DIVISION--MULTIPLE CONSONANTS

List of Tables

When two or more consonants come together, the word is divided before the last consonant, except

Index

for the combinations in the examples below.

om-nis

11.60:

cunc-tus

Latin word division

—syllables

The combinations ch, gu, ph, qu, and th are treated as single consonants and thus never separated.

11.61:

Latin word division

co-phi-nus

—single consonants

lin-gua

11.62:

Latin word division

ae-qua-lis

—multiple

consonants

The following consonant groups are never broken: bl, br, chl, chr, cl, cr, dl, dr, gl, gr, phl, phr, pl, pr, thl,

11.63:

thr, tl, and tr.

Latin word division

—compounds

pan-chres-tus

11.64:

Latin special

li-bris

characters

ex-em-pla

pa-tris

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Latin

of Contents

List of Figures

11.63 LATIN WORD DIVISION--COMPOUNDS

List of Tables

Compound words are first separated into their component elements; within each element the

Index

foregoing rules apply.

ab-rum-po

11.61:

ad-est

Latin word division

red-eo

—single consonants

trans-igo

11.62:

Latin word division

—multiple

consonants

11.63:

Latin word division

—compounds

11.64:

Latin special

characters

11.65:

Norwegian

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Latin

of Contents

List of Figures

11.64 LATIN SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Latin requires no special characters for setting ordinary copy. Elementary texts, however, usually

Index

mark the long vowels with a macron and, occasionally, the short vowels with a breve, as follows. (See

also table 11.1.)

11.62:

Ā ā, Ă ă, Ē ē, Ĕ ĕ, Ī ī, Ĭ ĭ, Ō ō, Ŏ ŏ, Ū ū, Ŭ ŭ

Latin word division

—multiple

consonants

11.63:

Latin word division

—compounds

11.64:

Latin special

characters

11.65:

Norwegian

capitalization

11.66:

Norwegian special

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Norwegian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.65 NORWEGIAN CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9. The polite personal pronouns De, Dem, and Deres (now used ever more rarely) are

Index

capitalized in Norwegian. Until the mid-twentieth century, common nouns were capitalized (as in

German), but they no longer are.

11.63:

Latin word

divisionâ

€”compounds

11.64:

Latin special

characters

11.65:

Norwegian

capitalization

11.66:

Norwegian special

characters

11.67:

Polish

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Norwegian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.66 NORWEGIAN SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Norwegian requires the same special characters as Danish (see also table 11.1).

Index

Ã… Ã¥, Ã† Ã¦, Ã˜ Ã¸

11.64:

Latin special

characters

11.65:

Norwegian

capitalization

11.66:

Norwegian special

characters

11.67:

Polish

capitalization

11.68:

Polish word division

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Polish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.67 POLISH CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9. In formal address the second-person plural pronoun PaÅ„stwo (you) is capitalized, as

Index

are related forms.

Czekam na TwÃ³j przyjazd. (I await your arrival.)

11.65:

Pozdrawiam CiÄ™! (Greetings to you!)

Norwegian

capitalization

11.66:

Norwegian special

characters

11.67:

Polish

capitalization

11.68:

Polish word division

11.69:

Polish special

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Polish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.68 POLISH WORD DIVISION

List of Tables

Division of Polish words is similar to that of transliterated Russian (see 11.118--28). Division normally

Index

follows syllabic structure.

kom-pli-ka-cja

11.66:

sta-ro-pol-ski

Norwegian special

characters

Note that the conjunction i (and) should never appear at the end of a line but must be carried over to

11.67:

the beginning of the next--a print nicety that need not be maintained in electronic publications (e.g.,

Polish

capitalization

by the use of a nonbreaking space after every instance of i to prevent a line break).

11.68:

Polish word division

11.69:

Polish special

characters

11.70:

Portuguese

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Polish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.69 POLISH SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Polish requires the following special characters (see also table 11.1):

Index

Ą ą, Ć ć, Ę ę, Ł ł, Ń ń, Ó ó, Ś ś, Ź ź, Ż ż

Since Ą, Ę, and Ń never occur at the beginning of a word, these capitalized forms would be needed

11.67:

Polish

only if an entire word were capitalized.

capitalization

11.68:

Polish word division

11.69:

Polish special

characters

11.70:

Portuguese

capitalization

11.71:

Portuguese special

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Portuguese

of Contents

List of Figures

11.70 PORTUGUESE CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9. Titles and nouns or adjectives denoting nationality are capitalized as in Spanish (see

Index

11.77).

11.68:

Polish word division

11.69:

Polish special

characters

11.70:

Portuguese

capitalization

11.71:

Portuguese special

characters

11.72:

Romanian and

Moldavian

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Portuguese

of Contents

List of Figures

11.71 PORTUGUESE SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Portuguese requires the following special characters (except that European Portuguese does not use Ü

Index

or ü):

À à, Á á, Â â, Ã ã, Ç ç, È è, É é, Ê ê, Ì ì, Í í, Ï ï, Ò ò, Ó ó, Ô ô, Õ õ, Ù ù, Ú ú, Ü ü

11.69:

Polish special

Accented capitals, sometimes dropped in Portuguese running text, should always be used when

characters

Portuguese is presented in an English context.

11.70:

Portuguese

capitalization

11.71:

Portuguese special

characters

11.72:

Romanian and

Moldavian

capitalization

11.73:

Romanian and

Moldavian special

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Romanian and Moldavian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.72 ROMANIAN AND MOLDAVIAN CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9.

Index

11.70:

Portuguese

capitalization

11.71:

Portuguese special

characters

11.72:

Romanian and

Moldavian

capitalization

11.73:

Romanian and

Moldavian special

characters

11.74:

Serbian and

Montenegrin

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Romanian and Moldavian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.73 ROMANIAN AND MOLDAVIAN SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Romanian and Moldavian are now both written using the same Latin orthography. The following

Index

special characters are needed for Romanian and Moldavian:

Â â, Ă ă, Î î, Ș ș, Ț ț

11.71:

Portuguese special

Note that Șș and Țț--Latin Ss and Tt with comma below--often appear instead with a cedilla, though

characters

the comma is correct. Ââ and Îî represent identical sounds but have different etymological origins.

11.72:

The use of Ââ has been restricted, eliminated, and reinstated in whole or in part during various

Romanian and

Moldavian

orthographic reforms. Writers and editors, therefore, should take care to determine whether a spelling

capitalization

is conditioned by the specific time when it was used or whether it is preferable to follow the current

11.73:

Romanian and

norm.

Moldavian special

characters

11.74:

Serbian and

Montenegrin

capitalization

11.75:

Serbian and

Montenegrin

special characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Serbian and Montenegrin

of Contents

List of Figures

11.74 SERBIAN AND MONTENEGRIN CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9.

Index

11.72:

Romanian and

Moldavian

capitalization

11.73:

Romanian and

Moldavian special

characters

11.74:

Serbian and

Montenegrin

capitalization

11.75:

Serbian and

Montenegrin

special characters

11.76:

Spanishâ

€”additional

resources

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Serbian and Montenegrin

of Contents

List of Figures

11.75 SERBIAN AND MONTENEGRIN SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

The former Serbo-Croatian language used both Latin and Cyrillic alphabets. In the modern

Index

Montenegrin standard language, both versions of that alphabet are official. In the modern Serbian

standard language, the Cyrillic version of that same alphabet is official. The following special

characters are needed when using the Latin version (see also 11.18--19):

11.73:

Romanian and

Ć ć, Č č, Đ đ, Š š, Ž ž

Moldavian special

characters

Although the substitution of dj for đ is sometimes seen (e.g., in informal correspondence), standard

11.74:

Serbian and

orthographic practice in all the successor languages of Serbo-Croatian distinguishes these two

Montenegrin

capitalization

consistently.

11.75:

Serbian and

Montenegrin

special characters

11.76:

Spanish—additional

resources

11.77:

Spanish

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Spanish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.76 SPANISH--ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

There is considerable variation in Spanish publications throughout the world with respect to

Index

capitalization, punctuation, and other matters. For further guidance, consult María Moliner,

Diccionario de uso del español (bibliog. 5). One may also consult the extensive resources at the website of

the Real Academia Española.

11.74:

Serbian and

Montenegrin

capitalization

11.75:

Serbian and

Montenegrin

special characters

11.76:

Spanish—additional

resources

11.77:

Spanish

capitalization

11.78:

Spanish question

marks and

exclamation points

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Spanish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.77 SPANISH CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9. In Spanish, a title preceding a proper name is normally lowercased. When abbreviated,

Index

however, titles are in uppercase.

el señor Jaime López

11.75:

la señora Lucía Moyado de Barba

Serbian and

doña Perfecta

Montenegrin

special characters

but

11.76:

Spanish—additional

el Sr. López

resources

11.77:

Nouns as well as adjectives denoting membership in nations are lowercased, but names of countries

Spanish

capitalization

are capitalized.

11.78:

Spanish question

los mexicanos

marks and

la lengua española

exclamation points

Inglaterra

11.79:

Spanish guillemets

and quotation

marks

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Spanish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.78 SPANISH QUESTION MARKS AND EXCLAMATION POINTS

List of Tables

A question or an exclamation in Spanish is preceded by an inverted question mark or exclamation

Index

point and followed by a regular mark.

¿Qué pasa, amigo?

11.76:

¡Olvídalo en ese caso!

Spanish—additional

resources

If a vocative or dependent construction precedes a question or exclamation, it is written as follows:

11.77:

Spanish

Amigo, ¿qué pasa?

capitalization

En ese caso, ¡olvídalo!

11.78:

Spanish question

marks and

Because the opening marks are so integral to Spanish punctuation, they should be retained even when

exclamation points

Spanish is being quoted in an English context (see 11.10).

11.79:

Spanish guillemets

and quotation

marks

11.80:

Spanish dialogue

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Spanish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.79 SPANISH GUILLEMETS AND QUOTATION MARKS

List of Tables

For quotation marks, Spanish traditionally uses guillemets (Â« >>). Only punctuation belonging to the

Index

quoted matter is placed within the closing guillemets; other punctuation follows them. Within a

quotation, em dashes may be used to set off words identifying the speaker. In Spanish publications,

the opening dash is usually preceded by a space; the closing dash is then followed by a space unless

11.77:

immediately followed by punctuation. In English contexts, such spaces need not be used (see also

Spanish

capitalization

11.10).

11.78:

Spanish question

Â«Vino el negocio a tanto--comenta SuÃ¡rez--, que ya andaban muchos tomados por el diablo>>.

marks and

exclamation points

In lexical studies, single quotation marks are used for glosses (see 7.50). It should also be noted that

11.79:

Spanish guillemets

English-style quotation marks rather than guillemets are increasingly encountered in Spanish

and quotation

publications, especially in electronic environments.

marks

11.80:

Spanish dialogue

11.81:

Spanish suspension

points and ellipses

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Spanish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.80 SPANISH DIALOGUE

List of Tables

In dialogue, an em dash (or, less frequently, a guillemet) introduces each successive speech. Any other

Index

matter that follows the quoted speech in the same paragraph should be preceded by a dash or a

comma. See also 11.79.

11.78:

--Esto es el arca de Noé, afirmó el estanciero.

Spanish question

--¿Por qué estas aquí todavía?--preguntó Juana alarmada.

marks and

exclamation points

11.79:

Spanish guillemets

and quotation

marks

11.80:

Spanish dialogue

11.81:

Spanish suspension

points and ellipses

11.82:

Spanish word

division—vowels

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Spanish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.81 SPANISH SUSPENSION POINTS AND ELLIPSES

List of Tables

In Spanish, as in French, suspension points are used to indicate interruptions or breaks in thought. In

Index

Spanish publications, these dots are generally unspaced; in English contexts, they may be spaced in

the manner of English-style suspension points or ellipses (see 13.48--56). To indicate omitted material

(that is, to serve as ellipses), the dots are enclosed in brackets. See also 11.10.

11.79:

Spanish guillemets

Hemos comenzado la vida juntos . . . quizá la terminaremos juntos también . . .

and quotation

marks

La personalidad más importante del siglo XIX es Domingo Faustino Sarmiento [. . .], llamado el hombre

11.80:

representante del intelecto sudamericano. [. . .] El gaucho [. . .] servía de tema para poemas, novelas,

Spanish dialogue

cuentos y dramas.

11.81:

Spanish suspension

points and ellipses

11.82:

Spanish word

division—vowels

11.83:

Spanish word

division—

consonants

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Spanish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.82 SPANISH WORD DIVISION--VOWELS

List of Tables

In Spanish, division is made after a vowel whenever possible. See also 11.11.

Index

ca-ra-co-les

mu-jer

re-cla-mo

11.80:

Spanish dialogue

se-ño-ri-ta

11.81:

Spanish suspension

Two or more vowels that form a single syllable (a diphthong or a triphthong) may not be divided.

points and ellipses

11.82:

cam-bias

Spanish word

fue-go

division—vowels

miau

11.83:

Spanish word

tie-ne

division—

viu-da

consonants

11.84:

If adjacent vowels belong to separate syllables, however, they are divided between syllables.

Dividing Spanish

compounds

ba-úl

cre-er

pa-ís

te-a-tro

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Spanish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.83 SPANISH WORD DIVISION--CONSONANTS

List of Tables

If two adjacent consonants form a combination that would generally not occur at the beginning of a

Index

Spanish word, the break is made between them.

ac-cio-nis-ta

11.81:

ad-ver-ten-cia

Spanish suspension

al-cal-de

points and ellipses

an-cho

11.82:

efec-to

Spanish word

division—vowels

is-leño

11.83:

Spanish word

The consonant groups bl, br, cl, cr, dr, fl, fr, gl, gr, pl, pr, and tr--all pairs that can occur at the

division—

beginning of Spanish words--are inseparable (unless each belongs to a different element of a

consonants

compound; see 11.84, 11.11).

11.84:

Dividing Spanish

compounds

ci-fra

11.85:

co-pla

Spanish special

im-po-si-ble

characters

le-pra

li-bro

ma-dre

ne-gro

no-ble

pa-tria

re-fle-jo

re-gla

se-cre-to

te-cla

Groups of three consonants not ending with one of the inseparable pairs listed above always have an

s in the middle. They are divided after the s.

cons-pi-rar

cons-ta

ins-tan-te

obs-cu-ro

obs-tan-te

Spanish ch and ll were long considered single characters, alphabetized as such, and never divided.

The Spanish Royal Academy has now declared that these combinations are to be alphabetized as two-

letter groups, and new publications have adopted this convention. Along with rr, however, they still

cannot be divided, since they represent single sounds. For details, consult Real Academia Española,

Ortografía de la lengua española (bibliog. 5).

ci-ga-rri-llo

mu-cha-cho

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Spanish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.84 DIVIDING SPANISH COMPOUNDS

List of Tables

Compound words are often but not always divided between their component parts.

Index

des-igual

in-Ãºtil

mal-es-tar

11.82:

Spanish word

trans-al-pi-no

divisionâ€”vowels

semi-es-fe-ra

11.83:

bien-aven-tu-ra-do

Spanish word

divisionâ

sub-lu-nar

€”consonants

sub-ra-yar

11.84:

Dividing Spanish

but

compounds

no-so-tros

11.85:

Spanish special

characters

11.86:

Swedish

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Spanish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.85 SPANISH SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Spanish employs the following special characters (see also table 11.1):

Index

Á á, É é, Í í, Ñ ñ, Ó ó, Ú ú, Ü ü

11.83:

Spanish word

division—

consonants

11.84:

Dividing Spanish

compounds

11.85:

Spanish special

characters

11.86:

Swedish

capitalization

11.87:

Swedish special

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Swedish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.86 SWEDISH CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9. In Swedish the second-person pronouns Ni and Er, traditionally capitalized in

Index

correspondence, are now lowercased in all contexts.

11.84:

Dividing Spanish

compounds

11.85:

Spanish special

characters

11.86:

Swedish

capitalization

11.87:

Swedish special

characters

11.88:

Turkish spelling

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Swedish

of Contents

List of Figures

11.87 SWEDISH SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Swedish requires the following special characters (see also table 11.1):

Index

Ã„ Ã¤, Ã… Ã¥, Ã– Ã¶

11.85:

Spanish special

characters

11.86:

Swedish

capitalization

11.87:

Swedish special

characters

11.88:

Turkish spelling

11.89:

Turkish and Azeri

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Turkish and Azeri

of Contents

List of Figures

11.88 TURKISH SPELLING

List of Tables

Modern Turkish has undergone a number of orthographic reforms since the original change to the

Index

Latin alphabet in 1928. Differences in the spellings of a name or word can therefore depend on the

time period. Writers and editors should take care to determine whether a spelling is conditioned by

the specific time when it was used or whether it is preferable to follow the current norm.

11.86:

Swedish

capitalization

11.87:

Swedish special

characters

11.88:

Turkish spelling

11.89:

Turkish and Azeri

capitalization

11.90:

Turkish and Azeri

special characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Turkish and Azeri

of Contents

List of Figures

11.89 TURKISH AND AZERI CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

See 11.3, 11.9. In Turkish, as in English, the names of months and days of the week are capitalized.

Index

Azeri is similar to Turkish except for the differences noted in 11.90.

11.87:

Swedish special

characters

11.88:

Turkish spelling

11.89:

Turkish and Azeri

capitalization

11.90:

Turkish and Azeri

special characters

11.91:

Transliteration

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Using the Latin Alphabet >> Turkish and Azeri

of Contents

List of Figures

11.90 TURKISH AND AZERI SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Turkish requires the following special characters:

Index

Â â, Ç ç, Ğ ğ, İ, ı, Ö ö, Ş ş, Û û, Ü ü

The Azeri (Azerbaijani) standard alphabet in use since 1992 is identical to Turkish except for the

11.88:

Turkish spelling

presence of Qq and Xx (lacking in Turkish), the absence of vowels with circumflex, and the addition

11.89:

of the schwa.

Turkish and Azeri

capitalization

Ç ç, Ə ə, Ğ ğ, İ, ı, Ö ö, Ş ş, Ü ü

11.90:

Turkish and Azeri

special characters

Note that there are dotted and undotted varieties of both the capital and the lowercase i. A dotted

lowercase i retains its dot when capitalized.

11.91:

Transliteration

11.92:

Character sets for

non-Latin

alphabets

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized)

of Contents

List of Figures

11.91 TRANSLITERATION

List of Tables

In nonspecialized works it is customary to transliterate--that is, convert to the Latin alphabet, or

Index

romanize--words or phrases from languages that do not use the Latin alphabet. These languages

include Arabic, Chinese, Hebrew, Japanese, Russian, and other living languages as well as ancient

languages such as Greek and Sanskrit. For discussion and illustration of scores of alphabets, see Peter

11.89:

T. Daniels and William Bright, eds., The World's Writing Systems (bibliog. 5). For alphabetic

Turkish and Azeri

capitalization

conversion, the most comprehensive resource is the Library of Congress publication ALA-LC

11.90:

Romanization Tables (bibliog. 5), available online. Do not attempt to transliterate from a language

Turkish and Azeri

unfamiliar to you.

special characters

11.91:

Transliteration

11.92:

Character sets for

non-Latin

alphabets

11.93:

Proofreading copy

in non-Latin

alphabetsâ€”a

warning

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized)

of Contents

List of Figures

11.92 CHARACTER SETS FOR NON-LATIN ALPHABETS

List of Tables

Modern word-processing software readily allows users to key in words in several of the non-Latin

Index

alphabets used in the languages mentioned in the previous paragraph--for example, Cyrillic, Greek,

and Hebrew. For a given alphabet, there may be a variety of character sets available in a variety of

typefaces, but authors who want to include such copy should opt for the correct Unicode characters if

11.90:

at all possible (see 11.2), after consulting their publisher. See also 2.15.

Turkish and Azeri

special characters

11.91:

Transliteration

11.92:

Character sets for

non-Latin

alphabets

11.93:

Proofreading copy

in non-Latin

alphabetsâ€”a

warning

11.94:

Diacriticsâ

€”specialized

versus general

contexts

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized)

of Contents

List of Figures

11.93 PROOFREADING COPY IN NON-LATIN ALPHABETS--A WARNING

List of Tables

Anyone unfamiliar with a language that uses a non-Latin alphabet should exercise extreme caution in

Index

proofreading even single words set in that alphabet. Grave errors can occur when similar characters

are mistaken for each other. If in doubt, editors should query the author; when referring to a given

character or diacritical mark, it may be advisable to consult the Unicode number and description (see

11.91:

11.2).

Transliteration

11.92:

Character sets for

non-Latin

alphabets

11.93:

Proofreading copy

in non-Latin

alphabetsâ€”a

warning

11.94:

Diacriticsâ

€”specialized

versus general

contexts

11.95:

Italics versus roman

for transliterated

terms

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized)

of Contents

List of Figures

11.94 DIACRITICS--SPECIALIZED VERSUS GENERAL CONTEXTS

List of Tables

Nearly all systems of transliteration require diacritics--including, in the languages discussed below,

Index

macrons, underdots, and overdots, to name just a few. Except in linguistic studies or other highly

specialized works, a system using as few diacritics as are needed to aid pronunciation is easier on

readers, publisher, and author. Most readers of a nonspecialized work on Hindu mythology, for

11.92:

example, will be more comfortable with Shiva than Śiva or with Vishnu than Vi u, though many

Character sets for

non-Latin

specialists would want to differentiate the Sh in Shiva from the sh in Vishnu as distinct Sanskrit

alphabets

letters. For nonspecialized works, the transliterated forms without diacritics that are listed in any of

11.93:

the latest editions of the Merriam-Webster dictionaries are usually preferred by readers and authors

Proofreading copy

in non-Latin

alike.

alphabets—a

warning

11.94:

Diacritics—

specialized versus

general contexts

11.95:

Italics versus roman

for transliterated

terms

11.96:

Arabic

transliteration

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized)

of Contents

List of Figures

11.95 ITALICS VERSUS ROMAN FOR TRANSLITERATED TERMS

List of Tables

Transliterated terms (other than proper names) that have not become part of the English language are

Index

italicized. If used throughout a work, a transliterated term may be italicized on first appearance and

then set in roman. Words listed in the dictionary are usually set in roman. See also 7.49--53.

11.93:

The preacher pointed out the distinction between agape and eros.

Proofreading copy

in non-Latin

but

alphabets—a

warning

Once the Greek words erōs and agapē had been absorbed into the English language, it became unnecessary to

11.94:

italicize them or to use the macrons.

Diacritics—

specialized versus

general contexts

11.95:

Italics versus roman

for transliterated

terms

11.96:

Arabic

transliteration

11.97:

The hamza and the

ʿayn

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Arabic

of Contents

List of Figures

11.96 ARABIC TRANSLITERATION

List of Tables

There is no universally accepted form for transliterating Arabic. One very detailed system may be

Index

found in the ALA-LC Romanization Tables (bibliog. 5). Another system is followed by the International

Journal of Middle East Studies (bibliog. 5). Having selected a system, an author should stick to it with as

few exceptions as possible. In the following examples, only the hamza (Ê¾) and the Ê¿ayn (Ê¿) are

11.94:

used (see 11.97). Letters with underdots and some of the other special characters used in

Diacriticsâ

€”specialized

transliteration from Arabic are included in table 11.2. (The Arabic alphabet may be found in the

versus general

contexts

alphabet table in Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary [bibliog. 3.1], among other sources.)

11.95:

Italics versus roman

for transliterated

terms

11.96:

Arabic

transliteration

11.97:

The hamza and the

Ê¿ayn

11.98:

Arabic spelling

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Arabic

of Contents

List of Figures

11.97 THE HAMZA AND THE ʿAYN

List of Tables

The hamza (ʾ) and the ʿayn (ʿ) frequently appear in transliterated Arabic words and names. Writers

Index

using hamzas or ʿayns must on every occurrence make it clear, by coding or by careful instructions to

the editor or typesetter, which of the two marks is intended. It should be noted that the Arabic

characters are not the same as the ones used for transliteration; see table 11.2 for the preferred

11.95:

Unicode characters for hamza and ʿayn in transliteration. The hamza is sometimes represented--

Italics versus roman

for transliterated

especially in nonspecialized works--by an apostrophe, as in Qur'an, and the ʿayn by a single opening

terms

quotation mark (‘ayn). (Since an ʿayn often occurs at the beginning of a word, a quotation mark must

11.96:

be used with caution.) Most transliteration systems drop the hamza when it occurs at the beginning of

Arabic

transliteration

a word (anzala not ʾanzala).

11.97:

The hamza and the

ʿayn

11.98:

Arabic spelling

11.99:

The Arabic definite

article

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Arabic

of Contents

List of Figures

11.98 ARABIC SPELLING

List of Tables

Isolated references in text to well-known persons or places should employ the forms familiar to

Index

English-speaking readers.

Avicenna ( not Ibn Sina)

11.96:

Damascus ( not Dimashq)

Arabic

Mecca ( not Makkah)

transliteration

11.97:

The hamza and the

Ê¿ayn

11.98:

Arabic spelling

11.99:

The Arabic definite

article

11.100:

Arabic

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Arabic

of Contents

List of Figures

11.99 THE ARABIC DEFINITE ARTICLE

List of Tables

Though there is considerable variation across publications, Chicago recommends joining the Arabic

Index

definite article, al, to a noun with a hyphen.

al-Islam

11.97:

al-Nafud

The hamza and the

Bahr al-Safi

Ê¿ayn

al-Qaeda ( or al-Qaida)

11.98:

Arabic spelling

In speech the sound of the l in al is assimilated into the sounds d, n, r, s, sh, t, and z. Where rendering

11.99:

the sound of the Arabic is important (for example, when transliterating poetry), the assimilations are

The Arabic definite

article

often shown, as in the examples below. In most other situations, the article-noun combination is

11.100:

written without indication of the elision, as above.

Arabic

capitalization

an-Nafud

11.101:

Bahr as-Safi

Arabic word

division

Some authors drop the a in al and replace it with an apostrophe when it occurs after a long syllable

(AbÅ« 'l-Muhallab). Some also drop the a when it occurs connected with a particle (wa 'l-layl).

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Arabic

of Contents

List of Figures

11.100 ARABIC CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

Since the Arabic alphabet does not distinguish between capital and lowercase letter forms, practice in

Index

capitalizing transliterated Arabic varies widely. Chicago recommends the practice outlined in 11.3:

capitalize only the first word and any proper nouns. This practice applies to titles of works as well as

to names of journals and organizations. Note that al, like the, is capitalized only at the beginning of a

11.98:

sentence or a title.

Arabic spelling

11.99:

Ê¿Abd al-Rahman al-Jabarti, Ê¿AjaÊ¾ib al-athar fi al-tarajim wa al-akhbar (The marvelous remains in

The Arabic definite

article

biography and history)

11.100:

Arabic

For citing and alphabetizing Arabic personal names, see 8.14, 16.76.

capitalization

11.101:

Arabic word

division

11.102:

Chinese

romanization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Arabic

of Contents

List of Figures

11.101 ARABIC WORD DIVISION

List of Tables

Breaking transliterated Arabic words or names at the ends of lines should be avoided wherever

Index

possible. If necessary, a break may be made after al or Ibn. A break may be made after two letters if

the second has an underdot (e.g., iá¹-baq). Breaks must never be made between the digraphs dh, gh, kh,

sh, or th unless both letters have underdots. Nor should breaks be made before or after a hamza.

11.99:

Aside from these niceties, the rules governing English word division may be followed (see 7.31--43).

The Arabic definite

article

11.100:

Arabic

capitalization

11.101:

Arabic word

division

11.102:

Chinese

romanization

11.103:

Exceptions to

Pinyin

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Chinese and Japanese

of Contents

List of Figures

11.102 CHINESE ROMANIZATION

List of Tables

The Hanyu Pinyin romanization system, introduced by the Chinese in the 1950s, has largely

Index

supplanted both the older Wade-Giles system and the place-name spellings of the Postal Atlas of China

(last updated in the 1930s), making Pinyin the standard system for romanizing Chinese. Representing

sounds of Chinese more explicitly, Pinyin has been widely accepted as the system for teaching

11.100:

Chinese as a second language. As of 2000, the Library of Congress issued new romanization

Arabic

capitalization

guidelines reflecting the conversion of its entire online catalog records for the Chinese collection to

11.101:

comply with Pinyin. Although a few scholars, long familiar with Wade-Giles or other older systems,

Arabic word

have not switched to Pinyin in their writings, Chicago joins librarians in urging that Pinyin now be

division

used in all scholarly writing about China or the Chinese language. (In some contexts it may be helpful

11.102:

Chinese

to the reader to add the Wade-Giles spelling of a name or term in parentheses following the first use

romanization

of the Pinyin spelling.) The ALA-LC Romanization Tables (bibliog. 5) available online from the Library

11.103:

of Congress should be used with caution by anyone unfamiliar with Chinese.

Exceptions to

Pinyin

11.104:

Apostrophes,

hyphens, and tone

marks in Chinese

romanization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Chinese and Japanese

of Contents

List of Figures

11.103 EXCEPTIONS TO PINYIN

List of Tables

Even where Pinyin is adopted, certain place-names, personal names, and other proper nouns long

Index

familiar in their older forms may be presented that way in English texts. Or, for greater consistency,

the old spelling may be added in parentheses after the Pinyin version. If in doubt, consult the latest

edition of Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary; names not listed there in older forms should be

11.101:

presented in Pinyin. Editors who wish to alter spellings should do so in consultation with the author.

Arabic word

division

11.102:

Chinese

romanization

11.103:

Exceptions to

Pinyin

11.104:

Apostrophes,

hyphens, and tone

marks in Chinese

romanization

11.105:

Some common

Chinese names

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Chinese and Japanese

of Contents

List of Figures

11.104 APOSTROPHES, HYPHENS, AND TONE MARKS IN CHINESE ROMANIZATION

List of Tables

Pinyin spellings often differ markedly from the older ones. Personal names are usually spelled

Index

without apostrophes or hyphens, but an apostrophe is sometimes used to avoid ambiguity when

syllables are run together (as in Xi'an to distinguish it from Xian), except in contexts where tone

marks are used. Note that the Pinyin romanization system of the Library of Congress does not include

11.102:

tone marks (the system of accents on certain vowels prescribed by the Hanyu Pinyin system of 1962).

Chinese

romanization

11.103:

Exceptions to

Pinyin

11.104:

Apostrophes,

hyphens, and tone

marks in Chinese

romanization

11.105:

Some common

Chinese names

11.106:

Japanese

romanization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Chinese and Japanese

of Contents

List of Figures

11.105 SOME COMMON CHINESE NAMES

List of Tables

Some names frequently encountered are listed below.

Index

Dynasties

WADE-GILES

PINYIN

11.103:

Chou

Zhou

Exceptions to

Pinyin

Ch'in

Qin

11.104:

Ch'ing

Qing

Apostrophes,

hyphens, and tone

Sung

Song

marks in Chinese

romanization

T'ang

Tang

11.105:

YÃ¼an

Yuan

Some common

Chinese names

Personal names

11.106:

Japanese

WADE-GILES

PINYIN

romanization

Fang Li-chih

Fang Lizhi

11.107:

Modified Hepburn

Hua Kuo-feng

Hua Guofeng

system

Lin Piao

Lin Biao

Lu HsÃ¼n

Lu Xun

Mao Tse-tung

Mao Zedong

Teng Hsiao-p'ing

Deng Xiaoping

The names Sun Yat-sen and Chiang Kai-shek, among a few others, usually retain the old spellings.

Geographical names

WADE-GILES

POSTAL ATLAS

PINYIN

Kuang-tung

Kwangtung

Guangdong

Pei-ching (Pei-p'ing)

Peking (Peiping)

Beijing

Shang-hai

Shanghai

Shanghai

Su-chou

Soochow

Suzhou

Ta-lien

Dairen

Dalian

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Chinese and Japanese

of Contents

List of Figures

11.106 JAPANESE ROMANIZATION

List of Tables

The Japanese language in its usual written form is a mixture of Chinese characters (called kanji in

Index

Japanese) and two kana syllabaries. (A syllabary is a series of written characters, each used to

represent a syllable.) Since romanized Japanese, rÅmaji, was introduced into Japan in the sixteenth

century, a number of systems of romanization have been developed. The one in most common use

11.104:

since the early part of the Meiji period (1868--1912) is the modified Hepburn (or hyÅjun) system. This

Apostrophes,

hyphens, and tone

system is used in KenkyÅ«sha's New Japanese--English Dictionary (bibliog. 3.2) and most other Japanese-

marks in Chinese

romanization

-English dictionaries (and is the basis of the Japanese romanization tables available online from the

Library of Congress); outside Japan, it is also used almost exclusively, notably in Asian collections in

11.105:

Some common

libraries throughout the world.

Chinese names

11.106:

Japanese

romanization

11.107:

Modified Hepburn

system

11.108:

Chinese and

Japaneseâ

€”capitalization

and italics

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Chinese and Japanese

of Contents

List of Figures

11.107 MODIFIED HEPBURN SYSTEM

List of Tables

In the modified Hepburn system (after James Curtis Hepburn, 1815--1911), an apostrophe is placed

Index

after a syllabic n that is followed by a vowel or y: Gen'e, San'yo. A macron is used over a long vowel

in all Japanese words except well-known place-names (e.g., Tokyo, Hokkaido, Kobe) and words such

as "shogun" and "daimyo" that have entered the English language and are thus not italicized. (When

11.105:

the pronunciation of such names or words is important to readers, however, macrons may be used:

Some common

Chinese names

Tōkyō, Hokkaidō, Kōbe, shōgun, daimyō.) Hyphens should be used sparingly: Meiji jidai-shi (or

11.106:

jidaishi) no shinkenkyū. Shinjuku-ku (or Shinjukuku) no meisho.

Japanese

romanization

11.107:

Modified Hepburn

system

11.108:

Chinese and

Japanese—

capitalization and

italics

11.109:

Titles of Japanese

and Chinese works

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Chinese and Japanese

of Contents

List of Figures

11.108 CHINESE AND JAPANESE--CAPITALIZATION AND ITALICS

List of Tables

Although capital letters do not exist in Japanese or Chinese, they are introduced in romanized

Index

versions of these languages where they would normally be used in English (see chapter 8). Personal

names and place-names are capitalized. In hyphenated names, only the first element is capitalized in

romanized Chinese, though both elements may be capitalized in Japanese. Common nouns and other

11.106:

words used in an English sentence are lowercased and italicized (see 7.49, 7.50). Names of

Japanese

romanization

institutions, schools of thought, religions, and so forth are capitalized if set in roman, lowercased if set

11.107:

in italics.

Modified Hepburn

system

Donglin Academy; the Donglin movement

11.108:

Buddhism, Taoism, feng shui [see 7.52], and other forms . . .

Chinese and

Japanese—

Under the Ming dynasty the postal service was administered by the Board of War ( bingbu) through a central

capitalization and

office in Beijing ( huitong guan).

italics

The heirs of the Seiyūkai and Minseitō are the Liberal and Progressive parties of Japan.

11.109:

It was Genrō Saionji (the genrō were the elder statesmen of Japan) who said . . . (note that genrō is both

Titles of Japanese

and Chinese works

singular and plural)

11.110:

Inclusion of

Chinese and

Japanese

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Chinese and Japanese

of Contents

List of Figures

11.109 TITLES OF JAPANESE AND CHINESE WORKS

List of Tables

As in English, titles of books and periodicals are italicized, and titles of articles are set in roman and

Index

enclosed in quotation marks (see 8.154--95). The first word of a romanized title is always capitalized,

as are many proper nouns (especially in Japanese).

11.107:

Chen Shiqi, Mingdai guan shougongye de yanjiu [Studies on government-operated handicrafts during the Ming

Modified Hepburn

dynasty], . . .

system

Hua Linfu, "Qingdai yilai Sanxia diqu shuihan zaihai de chubu yanjiu" [A preliminary study of floods and

11.108:

droughts in the Three Gorges region since the Qing dynasty], Zhongguo shehui kexue 1 (1999): 168--79.

Chinese and

Japanese—

Okamoto Yoshitomo, Jūrokuseiki Nichi-Ō kōtsūshi no kenkyū [Study of the intercourse between Japan and

capitalization and

Europe during the sixteenth century], . . .

italics

Akiyama Kenzō, "Goresu wa Ryūkyūjin de aru" [The Gores and the Ryūkyūans], Shigaku-Zasshi (or Shigaku

11.109:

Titles of Japanese

Zasshi) . . .

and Chinese works

11.110:

Inclusion of

Chinese and

Japanese

characters

11.111:

Hebrew

transliteration

systems

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Chinese and Japanese

of Contents

List of Figures

11.110 INCLUSION OF CHINESE AND JAPANESE CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Chinese and Japanese characters, immediately following the romanized version of the item they

Index

represent, are sometimes necessary to help readers identify references cited or terms used. They are

largely confined to bibliographies and glossaries. Where needed in running text, they may be

enclosed in parentheses. The advent of Unicode has made it easier for authors to include words in

11.108:

non-Latin alphabets in their manuscripts, but publishers need to be alerted of the need for special

Chinese and

Japanese—

characters in case particular fonts are needed for publication (see 11.2).

capitalization and

italics

Harootunian, Harry, and Sakai Naoki. "Nihon kenkyū to bunka kenkyū" .

Shisō 7

11.109:

Titles of Japanese

(July 1997): 4--53.

and Chinese works

Hua Linfu . "Qingdai yilai Sanxia diqu shuihan zaihai de chubu yanjiu"

11.110:

[A preliminary study of floods and droughts in the Three Gorges region since the Qing

Inclusion of

dynasty]. Zhongguo shehui kexue 1 (1999): 168--79.

Chinese and

Japanese

That year the first assembly of the national Diet was held and the Imperial Rescript on Education ( kyōiku

characters

chokugo ) was issued.

11.111:

Hebrew

transliteration

systems

11.112:

Diacritics in

transliterated

Hebrew

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Hebrew

of Contents

List of Figures

11.111 HEBREW TRANSLITERATION SYSTEMS

List of Tables

There are several acceptable romanization systems for Hebrew, including the one in the ALA-LC

Index

Romanization Tables (see bibliog. 5). Any such system may be used, but it is the author's responsibility

to use it consistently in a given work. (The Hebrew alphabet may be found in the alphabet table in

Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary [bibliog. 3.1], among other sources.)

11.109:

Titles of Japanese

and Chinese works

11.110:

Inclusion of

Chinese and

Japanese

characters

11.111:

Hebrew

transliteration

systems

11.112:

Diacritics in

transliterated

Hebrew

11.113:

Hebrew prefixes

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Hebrew

of Contents

List of Figures

11.112 DIACRITICS IN TRANSLITERATED HEBREW

List of Tables

In transliterated Hebrew, the following accents and characters are sometimes needed: underdots (Ḥḥ,

Index

Ḳḳ, Ṭṭ, Ṿṿ); macrons (Āā, Ēē, Īī, Ōō, Ūū); acute accents (Śś); hačeks, or carons ( , Ěě); and

superscript ə (ə). The ʾalef and the ʿayin may be represented in the same way as the Arabic hamza

and ʿayn (see 11.97 and table 11.2). In some systems, a prime (soft sign) may also be needed.

11.110:

Inclusion of

Chinese and

Japanese

characters

11.111:

Hebrew

transliteration

systems

11.112:

Diacritics in

transliterated

Hebrew

11.113:

Hebrew prefixes

11.114:

Hebrew

capitalization and

italics

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Hebrew

of Contents

List of Figures

11.113 HEBREW PREFIXES

List of Tables

In Hebrew, several prepositions, conjunctions, and articles appear as prefixes. Some authors use

Index

apostrophes or hyphens after these prefixes in romanized text and some do not. (In Hebrew, no such

marker is used.) Either approach is acceptable if used consistently.

11.111:

Hebrew

transliteration

systems

11.112:

Diacritics in

transliterated

Hebrew

11.113:

Hebrew prefixes

11.114:

Hebrew

capitalization and

italics

11.115:

Hebrew word

division

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Hebrew

of Contents

List of Figures

11.114 HEBREW CAPITALIZATION AND ITALICS

List of Tables

The Hebrew alphabet has no capital letters, and there is no universally used system for capitalizing

Index

romanized Hebrew. Writers may follow normal English usage--capitalizing proper names, book titles,

and so forth (see 11.3, 11.9). Some writers eschew capitalization altogether. As always, the author

must ensure internal consistency. For italics in romanized Hebrew, the normal English usage may

11.112:

also be followed (see 11.5).

Diacritics in

transliterated

Hebrew

11.113:

Hebrew prefixes

11.114:

Hebrew

capitalization and

italics

11.115:

Hebrew word

division

11.116:

Unromanized

Hebrew phrases

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Hebrew

of Contents

List of Figures

11.115 HEBREW WORD DIVISION

List of Tables

For romanized Hebrew, or Hebrew words incorporated into English, the principles set forth in

Index

7.31--43 may be followed. When a double consonant occurs at the point of division, one consonant

goes with each division.

11.113:

Rosh Ha-shana

Hebrew prefixes

Yom Kip-pur

11.114:

Hebrew

capitalization and

italics

11.115:

Hebrew word

division

11.116:

Unromanized

Hebrew phrases

11.117:

A note on Hebrew

vowels

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Hebrew

of Contents

List of Figures

11.116 UNROMANIZED HEBREW PHRASES

List of Tables

Hebrew is read from right to left. In English sentences that contain an unromanized Hebrew phrase,

Index

the Hebrew order is maintained within the sentence. (Modern operating systems can often handle a

mix of left-right and right-left input in the same context.)

11.114:

The first phrase in Lamentations is דדב הבשי הכיא (How she sits in solitude!).

Hebrew

capitalization and

italics

If a line break occurs within a Hebrew phrase, the words must still be read right to left on each line.

Thus, if the Hebrew phrase in the example above had to be broken, the Hebrew words would appear

11.115:

Hebrew word

to be in a different order.

division

11.116:

The first phrase in Lamentations is הבשי הכיא

Unromanized

Hebrew phrases

דדב (How she sits in solitude!).

11.117:

or

A note on Hebrew

vowels

The first phrase in Lamentations is הכיא

11.118:

דדב הבשי (How she sits in solitude!).

Russian

transliteration

As a safeguard, the author should highlight all the words in Hebrew phrases and furnish detailed

instructions on dealing with line breaks.

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Hebrew

of Contents

List of Figures

11.117 A NOTE ON HEBREW VOWELS

List of Tables

Most Hebrew vowels are not letters; they are marks attached to the letters, most of which are

Index

consonants. In Hebrew texts the vowel marks (as well as dots that modify the pronunciation of

consonants) rarely appear. Among texts in which the marks do appear are prayer books, printed

Bibles, and poetry.

11.115:

Hebrew word

division

11.116:

Unromanized

Hebrew phrases

11.117:

A note on Hebrew

vowels

11.118:

Russian

transliteration

11.119:

Russian

capitalization

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Russian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.118 RUSSIAN TRANSLITERATION

List of Tables

Of the many systems for transliterating Russian, the most important are summarized in table 11.3.

Index

Journals of Slavic studies generally prefer a "linguistic" system that makes free use of diacritics and

ligatures. In works intended for a general audience, however, diacritics and ligatures should be

avoided. For general use, Chicago recommends the system of the United States Board on Geographic

11.116:

Names. Regardless of the system followed, the name spellings in Merriam-Webster's Biographical

Unromanized

Hebrew phrases

Dictionary (bibliog. 4.1) and Merriam-Webster's Geographical Dictionary (bibliog. 4.2) should prevail.

11.117:

A note on Hebrew

Catherine the Great

vowels

Chekhov

11.118:

Dnieper River

Russian

transliteration

Moscow

Nizhniy ( or Nizhni) Novgorod

11.119:

Russian

Tchaikovsky

capitalization

11.120:

Titles of Russian

works

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Russian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.119 RUSSIAN CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

Capitalization conventions in Cyrillic are much like those of French and should be preserved in

Index

transliteration. Pronouns, days of the week, months, and most proper adjectives are lowercased.

Geographic designations are capitalized when they apply to formal institutions or political units but

otherwise lowercased.

11.117:

A note on Hebrew

Tverskaya guberniya

vowels

tverskoye zemstvo

11.118:

Russian

Moskovskiy universitet

transliteration

russkiy kompozitor

11.119:

Russian

capitalization

11.120:

Titles of Russian

works

11.121:

Russian quotations

and dialogue

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Russian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.120 TITLES OF RUSSIAN WORKS

List of Tables

Only the first word and any proper nouns are capitalized in titles.

Index

N. A. Kurakin, Lenin i Trotskiy

O. I. Skorokhodova, Kak ya vosprinimayu i predstavlyayu okruzhayushchiy mir [How I perceive and imagine the

external world]

11.118:

Russian

transliteration

Note that in the original Cyrillic, titles are set in ordinary type; the Cyrillic kursiv is used more

11.119:

sparingly than our italic and never for book titles. In transliterations, however, italic should be used.

Russian

capitalization

11.120:

Titles of Russian

works

11.121:

Russian quotations

and dialogue

11.122:

Russian suspension

points

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Russian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.121 RUSSIAN QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

List of Tables

Russian generally resembles French in its use of guillemets (Â« >>) for dialogue and quoted material

Index

and of dashes for dialogue (see 11.32, 11.34).

Â«Bozhe, bozhe, bozhe!>> govorit Boris.

11.119:

Russian

--S kem ya rabotayu?

capitalization

--S tovarishchem.

11.120:

--Kak my rabotayem?

Titles of Russian

works

--S interesom.

11.121:

To set off a quotation within a speech, guillemets may be used, as in French. For an example, see

Russian quotations

and dialogue

11.34.

11.122:

Russian suspension

points

11.123:

Russian uses of the

dash

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Russian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.122 RUSSIAN SUSPENSION POINTS

List of Tables

Suspension points are used as in French (see 11.35) to indicate interruptions or breaks in thought.

Index

Ya . . . vy . . . my tol'ko chto priyekhali.

In Russian, an exclamation point or a question mark often takes the place of one of the dots; this

11.120:

Titles of Russian

convention may be regularized to three dots in English publications.

works

11.121:

Mitya! . . . Gde vy byli? . . .

Russian quotations

and dialogue

11.122:

Russian suspension

points

11.123:

Russian uses of the

dash

11.124:

Russian word

divisionâ€”general

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Russian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.123 RUSSIAN USES OF THE DASH

List of Tables

A dash is sometimes inserted, with a space on either side, between subject and complement when the

Index

equivalent of is or are is omitted.

Moskva -- stolitsa Rossii.

11.121:

Russian quotations

Similarly, a dash, preceded and followed by a word space, is used in place of a verb omitted because

and dialogue

it would be identical to the preceding verb.

11.122:

Russian suspension

points

Ivan i Sonya poyedut v Moskvu poyezdom, Lev i Lyuba -- avtobusom.

11.123:

Russian uses of the

dash

11.124:

Russian word

divisionâ€”general

11.125:

Combinations not

to be divided in

Cyrillic

transliteration

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Russian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.124 RUSSIAN WORD DIVISION--GENERAL

List of Tables

Transliterated Russian should be divided according to the rules governing word division in the

Index

Cyrillic original. The rules in this section are adapted from the transliteration system of the United

States Board on Geographic Names.

11.122:

Russian suspension

points

11.123:

Russian uses of the

dash

11.124:

Russian word

divisionâ€”general

11.125:

Combinations not

to be divided in

Cyrillic

transliteration

11.126:

Division between

Russian consonants

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Russian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.125 COMBINATIONS NOT TO BE DIVIDED IN CYRILLIC TRANSLITERATION

List of Tables

Combinations representing single Cyrillic letters-- ch, kh, sh, shch, ts, ya, ye, yÃ«, yu, zh--should never

Index

be divided, nor should combinations of a vowel plus short i (or yod, transliterated y): ay, ey, yey, and

so on.

11.123:

Russian uses of the

dash

11.124:

Russian word

divisionâ€”general

11.125:

Combinations not

to be divided in

Cyrillic

transliteration

11.126:

Division between

Russian consonants

11.127:

Division of Russian

words after

prefixes or

between parts

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Russian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.126 DIVISION BETWEEN RUSSIAN CONSONANTS

List of Tables

Words may be divided between single consonants or between a consonant and a consonant

Index

combination.

ubor-ku

11.124:

chudes-nym

Russian word

mol-cha

divisionâ€”general

sred-stvo

11.125:

mor-skoy

Combinations not

to be divided in

Cyrillic

The following consonant combinations are not normally divided: bl, br, dr, dv, fl, fr, gl, gr, kl, kr, ml, pl,

transliteration

pr, sk, skr, skv, st, str, stv, tr, tv, vl, vr, zhd. They may, however, be divided if they fall across the

11.126:

Division between

boundary of a prefix and a root or other such units (e.g., ob-lech', ras-kol).

Russian consonants

11.127:

Division of Russian

words after

prefixes or

between parts

11.128:

Division of Russian

words after vowel

or diphthong

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Russian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.127 DIVISION OF RUSSIAN WORDS AFTER PREFIXES OR BETWEEN PARTS

List of Tables

Words may be divided after a prefix, but generally the prefix itself should not be divided.

Index

bes-poryadok

pere-stroyka

za-dat'

11.125:

Combinations not

pred-lozhit'

to be divided in

pro-vesti

Cyrillic

transliteration

obo-gnat'

11.126:

Division between

Compound words should be divided between parts.

Russian consonants

11.127:

radio-priyÃ«mnik

Division of Russian

gor-sovet

words after

prefixes or

kino-teatr

between parts

11.128:

Division of Russian

words after vowel

or diphthong

11.129:

South Asian special

characters

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> Russian

of Contents

List of Figures

11.128 DIVISION OF RUSSIAN WORDS AFTER VOWEL OR DIPHTHONG

List of Tables

Words may be divided after a vowel or a diphthong before a single (Cyrillic) consonant.

Index

Si-bir'

voy-na

Gorba-chev

11.126:

Division between

da-zhe

Russian consonants

11.127:

Division after a vowel may also be made before a consonant combination.

Division of Russian

words after

prefixes or

puteshe-stvennik

between parts

khi-trit'

11.128:

pro-stak

Division of Russian

ru-brika

words after vowel

or diphthong

11.129:

South Asian special

characters

11.130:

Transliterating

Greek

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) >> South Asian Languages

of Contents

List of Figures

11.129 SOUTH ASIAN SPECIAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Transliteration of the principal South Asian languages requires some or all of the following special

Index

characters (see also table 11.2):

11.127:

Division of Russian

Increasingly, however, writers using South Asian languages are employing a simplified style that

words after

prefixes or

does not use diacritics at all--for example, substituting sh for various s's, ignoring subscript dots for

between parts

dental consonants, and omitting macrons altogether.

11.128:

Division of Russian

words after vowel

or diphthong

11.129:

South Asian special

characters

11.130:

Transliterating

Greek

11.131:

Typesetting Greek

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Classical Greek

of Contents

List of Figures

11.130 TRANSLITERATING GREEK

List of Tables

Isolated Greek words and phrases in works not dealing with ancient Greece are usually transliterated.

Index

Table 11.4 shows the Greek alphabet (with Unicode numbers) and corresponding Latin-alphabet

letters. In transliteration, all Greek accents are omitted. The macron is used to distinguish the long

vowels eta ( ē) and omega ( ō) from the short vowels epsilon ( e) and omicron ( o). The iota subscript is

11.128:

transliterated by an i on the line, following the vowel it is associated with (ἀνθρώπῳ, anthrōpōi). The

Division of Russian

words after vowel

rough breathing is transliterated by h, which precedes a vowel or diphthong and follows the letter rho

or diphthong

(as in the English word rhythm). The smooth breathing is ignored, since it represents merely the

11.129:

absence of the h sound. If a diaeresis appears in the Greek, it also appears in transliteration.

South Asian special

characters

Transliterated Greek words or phrases are usually italicized unless the same words occur frequently,

11.130:

in which case they may be italicized at first mention and then set in roman.

Transliterating

Greek

11.131:

Typesetting Greek

11.132:

Greek breathing

marks

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Classical Greek

of Contents

List of Figures

11.131 TYPESETTING GREEK

List of Tables

Authors who need to present Greek should use a Unicode-enabled font if at all possible (see 11.2).

Index

Publishers need to make sure that a Greek font is available for publication; Greek may need to be set

in a slightly different size to make it visually match the surrounding type. Greek is normally not set

in italics. Extra white space must occasionally be added where more than one diacritic appears over a

11.129:

vowel.

South Asian special

characters

11.130:

Transliterating

Greek

11.131:

Typesetting Greek

11.132:

Greek breathing

marks

11.133:

Greek accent

marks

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Classical Greek >> Breathings and Accents

of Contents

List of Figures

11.132 GREEK BREATHING MARKS

List of Tables

When Greek is set in the Greek alphabet, every initial vowel or diphthong or rho must be marked

Index

with a breathing, either rough (῾, dasia) or smooth (᾿, psili). The breathing mark is placed over the

initial lowercase vowel (or the second vowel of a diphthong). It is placed to the left of capital letters.

Note that a single quotation mark cannot function as a breathing because it is the wrong size and

11.130:

does not sit close enough to the letter.

Transliterating

Greek

αὖτε

11.131:

Typesetting Greek

ἕτεραι

Ἕλλην

11.132:

Greek breathing

ἥβη

marks

Ἶρις

11.133:

ὑπέχω

Greek accent

marks

ὠκύς

ῥᾁδιος

11.134:

Unaccented Greek

words

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Classical Greek >> Breathings and Accents

of Contents

List of Figures

11.133 GREEK ACCENT MARKS

List of Tables

There are three Greek accent marks: acute, or oxia (á¿½); circumflex, or perispomeni, either tilde-

Index

shaped or rounded

, depending on the typeface; and grave, or varia (á¿¯). Accents in Greek

occur only over vowels. The circumflex occurs only on the two final syllables of a word. The grave

accent occurs only on the last syllable. Like breathings, accents are placed over lowercase vowels, over

11.131:

the second vowel of a diphthong, and to the left of capital vowels. A diaeresis is used to indicate that

Typesetting Greek

two successive vowels do not form a diphthong but are voiced separately (as in French naÃ¯f).

11.132:

Greek breathing

marks

11.133:

Greek accent

marks

11.134:

Unaccented Greek

words

11.135:

Greek vowels

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Classical Greek >> Breathings and Accents

of Contents

List of Figures

11.134 UNACCENTED GREEK WORDS

List of Tables

With two exceptions, all Greek words are marked with accents--usually one, occasionally two (see

Index

below). The first exception is a group of monosyllabic words called proclitics, which are closely

connected with the words following them. The proclitics are the forms of the definite article ὁ, ἡ, οἱ,

αἱ; the prepositions εἰς, ἐν, ἐκ (ἐξ); the conjunctions εἰ, ὡς; and the adverb οὐ (οὐκ, οὐχ). The second

11.132:

exception is a group called enclitics, short words pronounced as if part of the word preceding them.

Greek breathing

marks

Enclitics usually lose their accents (Ἀρταξερξής τε), and in certain circumstances the word preceding

11.133:

them gains a second accent (φοβεῖταί τις).

Greek accent

marks

11.134:

Unaccented Greek

words

11.135:

Greek vowels

11.136:

Greek punctuation

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Classical Greek >> Breathings and Accents

of Contents

List of Figures

11.135 GREEK VOWELS

List of Tables

Vowels complete with breathing marks and accents, in all combinations, are an integral part of every

Index

Greek font used in publishing. Each font, for example, should be able to provide, for lowercase eta, η,

ή, ῆ, ὴ, ἠ, ἡ, ἤ, ἢ, ἥ, ἣ, ἦ, ἧ, and, for uppercase eta, Η, Ἠ, Ἡ, Ἤ, Ἢ, Ἥ, Ἣ, Ἦ, Ἧ. Additional

symbols are needed for scholarly works dealing with ancient manuscripts or papyri. Consult the

11.133:

latest Unicode character charts for Greek alphabets.

Greek accent

marks

11.134:

Unaccented Greek

words

11.135:

Greek vowels

11.136:

Greek punctuation

11.137:

Greek numbers

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Classical Greek >> Punctuation and Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

11.136 GREEK PUNCTUATION

List of Tables

In Greek the period and comma are the same as in English; the colon and semicolon are both

Index

represented by a midlevel dot (Î‡); the question mark is represented by a semicolon. The apostrophe

(which looks almost like a smooth breathing mark) is used as an elision mark when the final vowel of

one word is elided before a second word beginning with a vowel. In English texts, quoted words or

11.134:

passages in the Greek alphabet, of whatever length, should not be enclosed in quotation marks.

Unaccented Greek

words

11.135:

Greek vowels

11.136:

Greek punctuation

11.137:

Greek numbers

11.138:

Greek word

divisionâ

€”consecutive

vowels

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Classical Greek >> Punctuation and Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

11.137 GREEK NUMBERS

List of Tables

Numbers, when not written out, are represented in ordinary Greek text by the letters of the alphabet,

Index

supplemented by three additional, obsolete Greek letters--stigma, koppa, and sampi: ϛʹ = 6, ϙʹ = 90, ϡʹ

= 900. The diacritical mark resembling a prime (and defined for Unicode as the Greek numeral sign,

U+0374) distinguishes the letters as numerals and is added to a sign standing alone or to the last sign

11.135:

in a series. For example, ριαʹ means 111. For thousands, the foregoing signs are used with a different

Greek vowels

diacritical mark (the Greek lower numeral sign, U+0375): ͵α = 1,000, ͵αριαʹ = 1,111, ͵βσκβʹ = 2,222. See

11.136:

Greek punctuation

table 11.5.

11.137:

Greek numbers

11.138:

Greek word division

—consecutive

vowels

11.139:

Greek word division

—single consonants

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Classical Greek >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

11.138 GREEK WORD DIVISION--CONSECUTIVE VOWELS

List of Tables

Diphthongs (αι, αυ, ει, ευ, ηυ, οι, ου, υι, ωυ) are never divided. But two consecutive vowels that do

Index

not form a diphthong are divided.

θε-ά-ο-µɑɩ

11.136:

υἱ-ός

Greek punctuation

παύ-ε-τε

11.137:

νε-ώς

Greek numbers

11.138:

Greek word division

—consecutive

vowels

11.139:

Greek word division

—single consonants

11.140:

Greek word division

—two or more

consonants

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Classical Greek >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

11.139 GREEK WORD DIVISION--SINGLE CONSONANTS

List of Tables

When a single consonant occurs between two vowels, the word is divided before the consonant.

Index

φω-νή

κε-φα-λίς

µέ-γα

11.137:

Greek numbers

δέ-δω-κεν

11.138:

µή-τηρ

Greek word division

—consecutive

vowels

11.139:

Greek word division

—single consonants

11.140:

Greek word division

—two or more

consonants

11.141:

Greek word division

—compound words

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Classical Greek >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

11.140 GREEK WORD DIVISION--TWO OR MORE CONSONANTS

List of Tables

If a consonant is doubled, or if a mute is followed by its corresponding aspirate (πφ, βφ, κχ, γχ, τθ,

Index

δθ), the word is divided after the first consonant.

θά-λɑσ-σα

11.138:

συγ-χαί-ρω

Greek word division

—consecutive

If the combination of two or more consonants begins with a liquid (λ, ρ) or a nasal (µ, ν), division is

vowels

made after the liquid or nasal.

11.139:

Greek word division

—single consonants

ἔµ-προ-σθεν

11.140:

( but before µν: µέ-µνηµαι)

Greek word division

—two or more

consonants

All other combinations of two or more consonants follow the division.

11.141:

Greek word division

πρᾶ-γµα

—compound words

βι-βλί-ον

11.142:

τέ-χνη

Special characters

δά-κτυ-λος

in Old and Middle

English

βα-θµóς

σκῆ-πτρον

αἰ-σχρóς

βά-κτρον

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Classical Greek >> Word Division

of Contents

List of Figures

11.141 GREEK WORD DIVISION--COMPOUND WORDS

List of Tables

Compound words are divided between parts; within each part the above rules apply. The commonest

Index

type of compound word begins with a preposition or a prefix.

ἀµφ-

11.139:

ἀν-

Greek word division

ἀπ-

—single consonants

ἀφ-

11.140:

ἐφ-

Greek word division

—two or more

κατ-

consonants

ὑπ-

11.141:

ὑφ-

Greek word division

ἐξ-έβαλον

—compound words

καθ-ίστηµι

11.142:

Special characters

δύσ-µορφος

in Old and Middle

English

11.143:

Ampersand and

wynn

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Old English and Middle English

of Contents

List of Figures

11.142 SPECIAL CHARACTERS IN OLD AND MIDDLE ENGLISH

List of Tables

Several Old English or Middle English letters not used in modern English occur in both lowercase

Index

and capital forms (see also table 11.1).

Ð

ð

Edh or eth

11.140:

Þ

þ

Thorn

Greek word division

—two or more

consonants

Both edh and thorn represent voiced or unvoiced th, as in them or three.

11.141:

Greek word division

—compound words

Yogh; occurs in Old English representing g as in good, y as in year, or gh

as in light and thought. Yogh sometimes occurs in Middle English

11.142:

Ȝ ȝ

Special characters

representing y as in year and gh as in light and thought, but normally not g

in Old and Middle

as in good.

English

11.143:

Æ æ Ligature; should not be printed as two letters in Old English names and

Ampersand and

text (Ælfric).

wynn

11.144:

Authors should use the correct Unicode characters for the ligature and for edh, thorn, and yogh, and

Signed languages

should provide their publisher with a list of these and any other special characters (see 11.2). For the

Latin small esh (ʃ), see 13.7.

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Old English and Middle English

of Contents

List of Figures

11.143 AMPERSAND AND WYNN

List of Tables

In Old English and Middle English texts a sort of stylized seven (the Tironian et) may be found for

Index

and, but the modern ampersand may be substituted for this. In Old English texts Ç· or Æ¿ (wynn) is

found for w; the modern w is often substituted for this.

11.141:

Greek word

divisionâ

€”compound words

11.142:

Special characters

in Old and Middle

English

11.143:

Ampersand and

wynn

11.144:

Signed languages

11.145:

Components of

signs

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> American Sign Language

of Contents

List of Figures

11.144 SIGNED LANGUAGES

List of Tables

The visual-gestural languages used by deaf people in different parts of the world are called signed

Index

languages. Signed languages are quite different from spoken languages (although there may be

regional effects of language contact), and a particular signed language may or may not share the

same national or geographic boundaries as spoken languages in the same locations. The individual

11.142:

elements of these languages are known as signs.

Special characters

in Old and Middle

English

11.143:

Ampersand and

wynn

11.144:

Signed languages

11.145:

Components of

signs

11.146:

Writing ASL

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> American Sign Language

of Contents

List of Figures

11.145 COMPONENTS OF SIGNS

List of Tables

Signs have five major articulatory components--handshape, location, orientation, movement, and (in

Index

some cases) distinctive nonmanual signals.

11.143:

Ampersand and

wynn

11.144:

Signed languages

11.145:

Components of

signs

11.146:

Writing ASL

11.147:

Glosses in ASL

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> American Sign Language

of Contents

List of Figures

11.146 WRITING ASL

List of Tables

Many formal systems for writing signed languages exist; however, none has been adopted for use by

Index

large numbers of deaf signers. This section offers an overview of some the most frequently employed

conventions for written transcription of signing. For additional resources, see Charlotte Baker-Shenk

and Dennis Cokely, American Sign Language: A Teacher's Resource Text on Grammar and Culture; and

11.144:

Clayton Valli, Ceil Lucas, and Kristin J. Mulrooney, Linguistics of American Sign Language: An

Signed languages

Introduction (bibliog. 5).

11.145:

Components of

signs

11.146:

Writing ASL

11.147:

Glosses in ASL

11.148:

Compound signs

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> American Sign Language

of Contents

List of Figures

11.147 GLOSSES IN ASL

List of Tables

The written-language transcription of a sign is called a gloss. Glosses are words from the spoken

Index

language written in small capital letters: WOMAN, SCHOOL, CAT. (Alternatively, regular capital letters

may be used.) When two or more written words are used to gloss a single sign, the glosses are

separated by hyphens. The translation is enclosed in double quotation marks.

11.145:

Components of

The sign for "a car drove by" is written as VEHICLE-DRIVE-BY.

signs

11.146:

One obvious limitation of the use of glosses from the spoken/written language to represent signs is

Writing ASL

that there is no one-to-one correspondence between the words or signs in any two languages.

11.147:

Glosses in ASL

11.148:

Compound signs

11.149:

Fingerspelling

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> American Sign Language

of Contents

List of Figures

11.148 COMPOUND SIGNS

List of Tables

Some combinations of signs have taken on a meaning separate from the meaning of the individual

Index

signs. Various typographical conventions are used to indicate these compounds, including a "close-

up" mark or a plus sign. Depending on the transcription system, the sign for "parents" might be

glossed as follows:

11.146:

Writing ASL

MOTHERâ€FATHER

11.147:

Glosses in ASL

or

11.148:

Compound signs

MOTHER+FATHER

11.149:

Fingerspelling

11.150:

Lexicalized signs

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> American Sign Language

of Contents

List of Figures

11.149 FINGERSPELLING

List of Tables

For proper nouns and other words borrowed from the spoken language, the signer may fingerspell

Index

the word, using the handshapes from a manual alphabet. (There are numerous fingerspelling

alphabets used by different signed languages, among them the American Manual Alphabet.)

Fingerspelled words may be transcribed in any of the following ways:

11.147:

Glosses in ASL

fs-JOHN

11.148:

Compound signs

or

11.149:

Fingerspelling

J-O-H-N

11.150:

or

Lexicalized signs

11.151:

j-o-h-n

Handshapes

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> American Sign Language

of Contents

List of Figures

11.150 LEXICALIZED SIGNS

List of Tables

Over time, some fingerspelled words have taken on the quality of distinct signs, either by omission of

Index

some of the individual letter signs or by a change in the orientation or movement of the letter signs.

These lexicalized signs are represented by the "pound" symbol (#): #WHAT, #BACK, #DO.

11.148:

Compound signs

11.149:

Fingerspelling

11.150:

Lexicalized signs

11.151:

Handshapes

11.152:

Transcriptions of

signed sentences

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> American Sign Language

of Contents

List of Figures

11.151 HANDSHAPES

List of Tables

Most of the handshapes of American Sign Language are described by the corresponding alphabetic or

Index

numerical handshape or a variation thereof. For example, APPLE is made with an X handshape;

CREATE is made with a 4 handshape; ANY is made with an Open A handshape; YELL is made with a

Bent 5 handshape. Handshapes without a clear relative in the fingerspelling or number system are

11.149:

labeled idiosyncratically according to the transcription system in use. For example, SARCASTIC is

Fingerspelling

made with the HORNS handshape; AIRPLANE is made with the ILY handshape. Handshapes for

11.150:

Lexicalized signs

signed languages that do not use the American Manual Alphabet are often described in relation to the

11.151:

ASL handshapes.

Handshapes

11.152:

Transcriptions of

signed sentences

11.153:

Pronouns,

possessives, and

reference

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> American Sign Language

of Contents

List of Figures

11.152 TRANSCRIPTIONS OF SIGNED SENTENCES

List of Tables

Signed sentences are written as a sequence of glosses, often with the spoken/written-language

Index

translation underneath in italics or quotation marks or both. (For examples, see 11.153, 11.154.)

Punctuation is generally omitted from sentence transcriptions (though not from the translations).

Some writers, however, add question marks and exclamation points, and a comma may be used to

11.150:

indicate a short pause in the sentence.

Lexicalized signs

11.151:

Handshapes

11.152:

Transcriptions of

signed sentences

11.153:

Pronouns,

possessives, and

reference

11.154:

Nonmanual signals

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> American Sign Language

of Contents

List of Figures

11.153 PRONOUNS, POSSESSIVES, AND REFERENCE

List of Tables

Pronouns are commonly transcribed either as IX (since these are frequently produced with the "index"

Index

finger) or as PRO. Either of these is followed by indication of person and sometimes number. A

similar convention is used with the possessive marker, sometimes glossed as POSS. There are varying

conventions about how to indicate person and number. Thus, a third-person singular pronoun in ASL

11.150:

(equivalent to English "he," "she," or "it") might be glossed as IX3p, IX-3p, or PRO.3. A second-person

Lexicalized signs

plural pronoun could be glossed as IX2p-pl. Subscripted indices are often used to show signs

11.151:

Handshapes

articulated in the same location or to indicate coreferential noun phrases. The following example

11.152:

indicates that he and his refer back to the same person:

Transcriptions of

signed sentences

IX 3p i LOSE POSS3p i HOUSE

11.153:

He lost his house.

Pronouns,

possessives, and

reference

11.154:

Nonmanual signals

11: FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

Chapter Contents >> American Sign Language

of Contents

List of Figures

11.154 NONMANUAL SIGNALS

List of Tables

Nonmanual gestures may be labeled based on anatomical behavior or grammatical interpretive

Index

function. These gestures, indicated by various abbreviations and terms, are typeset in a smaller font

followed by a half-point rule above the ASL sentence. For example, the label whq is commonly used to

refer to the facial expression that marks questions involving "who," "what," "when," "where," "how,"

11.150:

or "why." This expression consists of a cluster of features that include furrowed brows and slightly

Lexicalized signs

squinted eyes. In the example below, whq occurs over the entire question (i.e., the expression is

11.151:

Handshapes

articulated simultaneously with all of the manual signs over which the line extends). In the same

11.152:

example, the label rap hs indicates a rapid headshake that occurs simultaneously with the sign WHO.

Transcriptions of

Correct alignment is critical to an accurate transcription.

signed sentences

11.153:

Pronouns,

possessives, and

reference

11.154:

Nonmanual signals

11 : FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

of Contents

PDF Version >>

List of Figures

List of Tables

Index

11 : FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

of Contents

PDF Version >>

List of Figures

List of Tables

Index

11 : FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

of Contents

PDF Version >>

List of Figures

List of Tables

Index

11 : FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

of Contents

PDF Version >>

List of Figures

List of Tables

Index

11 : FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Table

of Contents

PDF Version >>

List of Figures

List of Tables

Index

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

of Contents

Overview

List of Figures

12.1

Additional resources

List of Tables

12.2

Tools

Index

Style of Mathematical Expressions

General Usage

12.3

Standards for mathematical copy

12.4

Consistency of notation

12.5

Words versus symbols in text

12.6

Concise expression

12.7

Sentence beginning with a mathematical symbol

12.8

Adjacent mathematical symbols

Signs and Symbols

12.9

Mathematical characters

12.10 Letters and diacritical marks

12.11 Italic letters and kerning

12.12 Letters and fonts

12.13 List of unusual characters

12.14 Special mathematical symbols

12.15 Signs for binary operations and relations

12.16 Basic spacing in mathematics

12.17 Functions

Punctuation

12.18 Mathematical expressions and punctuation

12.19 Elided lists

12.20 Elided operations and relations

Mathematical Expressions in Display

12.21 Displaying mathematical expressions

12.22 Qualifying clauses for displayed expressions

12.23 Breaking displayed expressions

Numeration

12.24 Numbering displayed mathematical expressions

12.25 Methods of numeration

Delimiters

12.26 Common delimiters

12.27 Functional notation

12.28 Set notation

12.29 Ordered set notation

12.30 Intervals

12.31 Delimiters denoting inner product

12.32 Binomial coefficients

12.33 Vertical bars

12.34 Single vertical bar

12.35 Cases

Subscripts and Superscripts

12.36 Simple subscripts and superscripts

12.37 Complex subscripts and superscripts

12.38 Alignment of subscripts and superscripts

Summations and Integrals

12.39 Summation sign

12.40 Product sign

12.41 Integral sign

12.42 Spacing around differentials

Radicals

12.43 Radical signs

12.44 Radical signs in text

Fractions

12.45 Fractions in text

12.46 Fractions in display

12.47 Fractions in subscripts and superscripts

12.48 Multiple and multilevel fractions

12.49 Rewriting fractions using exponents

Matrices and Determinants

12.50 Matrices

12.51 Determinants

Scalars, Vectors, and Tensors

12.52 Scalars, vectors, and tensors defined

12.53 Vector and tensor multiplication

12.54 Additional tensor notation

12.55 Dirac notation

Definitions, Theorems, and Other Formal Statements

12.56 Formal statements in text

Probability and Statistics

12.57 Probability

12.58 Means and standard deviations

12.59 Uncertainties

Preparation and Editing of Paper Manuscripts

12.60 Format of paper manuscripts

12.61 Setting from the author's hard copy

12.62 Marking italic type

12.63 Common abbreviations

12.64 Marking single letters in other type styles

12.65 Mathematics fonts

12.66 Marking subscripts and superscripts

12.67 Examples of marked copy

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

12.1 ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

This chapter is mainly intended to provide guidance to authors and editors working in the sciences

Index

who have occasional need to compose or edit mathematical expressions. Those who work exclusively

with mathematics should consult Ellen Swanson's Mathematics into Type and Donald Knuth's TeXbook,

among the other sources listed in bibliog. 2.4.

12.1:

Additional

resources

12.2:

Tools

12.3:

Standards for

mathematical copy

12.4:

Consistency of

notation

12.5:

Words versus

symbols in text

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

12.2 TOOLS

List of Tables

Many authors in mathematics and related quantitative fields prepare their manuscripts in LaTeX, a

Index

freely available, device-independent document markup and preparation system developed in the

1980s. In LaTeX, which is designed to work with the TeX typesetting system developed by Donald

Knuth, a properly coded manuscript will generate equation numbers, cross-references, and many

12.1:

other elements automatically. Manuscript editors working with LaTeX documents (generally on

Additional

resources

paper) should have some understanding of how the markup works to avoid, for example, marking

12.2:

unnecessary changes or instructions and to know when a particular change can be indicated globally.

Tools

A good place to start for more information is the LaTeX website. Manuscripts that include only the

12.3:

occasional in-line or displayed equation, on the other hand, are usually prepared using a word

Standards for

mathematical copy

processor's equation editor. For marking mathematical copy on paper manuscripts, see 12.60--67.

12.4:

Consistency of

notation

12.5:

Words versus

symbols in text

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> General Usage

of Contents

List of Figures

12.3 STANDARDS FOR MATHEMATICAL COPY

List of Tables

The author and editor should give careful attention to matters of style, usage, sense, meaning, clarity,

Index

accuracy, and consistency. Authors should use correct terminology and notation and should carefully

follow the conventions of their special fields, and editors should query any apparent typographical or

grammatical violations. As a general rule, mathematical copy, including displayed equations, should

12.1:

"read" as clearly and grammatically as any other kind of copy. The signs for simple mathematical

Additional

resources

operations and relations have direct verbal translations: a < b reads " a is less than b"; a > b reads " a is

12.2:

greater than b"; a + b = c reads " a plus b equals c." The translation is not always straightforward,

Tools

however, as is the case with df( x)/ dx, which means "the derivative of the function f of x with respect to

12.3:

x" and is not the quotient of two numbers df( x) and dx. Moreover, mathematical notation is often

Standards for

mathematical copy

abbreviated: the pair of inequalities a < b and b < c is usually written a < b < c. In mathematics it is also

12.4:

standard to read terms with indices, such as xi (" x sub i"), as plural or singular depending on the

Consistency of

context (e.g., "for a unique xi" and "for all the xi" are both grammatically correct). Use this convention

notation

wherever possible to avoid ugly mixtures of italic mathematics and roman "s" in forming a plural.

12.5:

Words versus

symbols in text

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> General Usage

of Contents

List of Figures

12.4 CONSISTENCY OF NOTATION

List of Tables

Notation should be consistent and unambiguous: the same symbol should denote the same thing

Index

whenever it occurs and not be used for more than one thing. Typographical distinctions should also

be made consistently; for example, if uppercase italic letters A, B, and C are used to denote sets and

lowercase italic letters x, y, and z to denote the elements of sets, then a, b, and c should not be used

12.2:

for sets at another place without good reason.

Tools

12.3:

Standards for

mathematical copy

12.4:

Consistency of

notation

12.5:

Words versus

symbols in text

12.6:

Concise expression

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> General Usage

of Contents

List of Figures

12.5 WORDS VERSUS SYMBOLS IN TEXT

List of Tables

In general, mathematical symbols may be used in text in lieu of words, and such statements as " x ≥ 0"

Index

should not be rewritten as " x is greater than or equal to zero." Nonetheless, symbols should not be

used as a shorthand for words if the result is awkward or ungrammatical. In the phrase

12.3:

the vectors r , …

1

, rn, ≠ 0,

Standards for

mathematical copy

the condition "≠ 0" is better expressed in words:

12.4:

Consistency of

notation

the nonzero vectors r , …

1

, rn

12.5:

Words versus

or

symbols in text

12.6:

the vectors r , …

1

, rn, all nonzero,

Concise expression

12.7:

depending on the emphasis desired. Moreover, logical symbols should generally not appear in text:

Sentence beginning

with a

mathematical

a minimum value of the function f on the interval [ a, b]

symbol

should be replaced by

there exists a minimum value of the function f on the interval [ a, b]

or

the function f has a minimum value on the interval [ a, b].

See also 12.7.

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> General Usage

of Contents

List of Figures

12.6 CONCISE EXPRESSION

List of Tables

Mathematical symbols should not be used superfluously. For example, in the first statement the

Index

symbol n is extraneous, as are the parentheses in the second statement:

There is no integer n between 0 and 1.

12.4:

This quantity is bounded above by the sum ( a + b).

Consistency of

notation

As a general rule, no letter standing for a mathematical object should be used only once. Symbols that

12.5:

Words versus

appear to be redundant may be qualified later in the same discussion, however, and editors should

symbols in text

never delete a symbol without explicit instruction from the author.

12.6:

Concise expression

12.7:

Sentence beginning

with a

mathematical

symbol

12.8:

Adjacent

mathematical

symbols

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> General Usage

of Contents

List of Figures

12.7 SENTENCE BEGINNING WITH A MATHEMATICAL SYMBOL

List of Tables

Mathematical symbols should not begin a sentence, especially if the preceding sentence ended with a

Index

symbol, since it may be difficult to tell where one sentence ends and another begins. For example, it is

difficult to read

12.5:

Assume that x S. S is countable.

Words versus

symbols in text

If a sentence starting with a symbol cannot easily be rephrased, the appropriate term for the symbol

12.6:

Concise expression

can be inserted in apposition at the beginning of the sentence:

12.7:

Sentence beginning

Assume that x S. The set S is countable.

with a

mathematical

symbol

If the sentences are closely related, a semicolon may be used to connect them:

12.8:

Adjacent

A function f is even if f(− x) = f( x); f is odd if f(− x) = − f( x).

mathematical

symbols

12.9:

Mathematical

characters

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> General Usage

of Contents

List of Figures

12.8 ADJACENT MATHEMATICAL SYMBOLS

List of Tables

Mathematical symbols in adjacent mathematical expressions should be separated by words or

Index

punctuation (or both), for the reasons discussed in 12.7:

Suppose that a = bq + r, where 0 â‰¤ r < b.

12.6:

Concise expression

12.7:

Sentence beginning

with a

mathematical

symbol

12.8:

Adjacent

mathematical

symbols

12.9:

Mathematical

characters

12.10:

Letters and

diacritical marks

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Signs and Symbols

of Contents

List of Figures

12.9 MATHEMATICAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

The smallest units of mathematical writing are mathematical signs and symbols, which include letters

Index

and numbers. Table 12.1 lists some of the standard mathematical characters and their verbal

translations. Unicode numbers are included, where applicable (see also 11.2), as are the LaTeX

commands for producing each character. (It should be noted that old-style figures [like this:

]

12.7:

should be avoided in mathematical contexts; lining figures [like this: 1938] should be used instead.

Sentence beginning

with a

See also 3.84, item 4.)

mathematical

symbol

12.8:

Adjacent

mathematical

symbols

12.9:

Mathematical

characters

12.10:

Letters and

diacritical marks

12.11:

Italic letters and

kerning

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Signs and Symbols

of Contents

List of Figures

12.10 LETTERS AND DIACRITICAL MARKS

List of Tables

Ordinary italic letters are used to represent various kinds of mathematical objects. The set of letters

Index

can be greatly extended by the use of diacritics (including accents), such as â, ã, ā, a, ȧ, ä, ă, and . All

such diacritics and additional characters are considered to be separate from the letters they modify,

rather than forming a single glyph. (Note that when an i or a j appears with a diacritical mark--e.g.,

12.8:

with an overbar or a circumflex--the dotless i or j should be used.) Double diacritics may also be

Adjacent

mathematical

used; for example, , and . These can, however, be difficult to center over a letter and, in

symbols

combination with capital letters, may interfere with descenders from the line above, so they should be

12.9:

Mathematical

avoided if possible. Marks over or beneath several letters or groups of letters--for example, overlines,

characters

underlines, overbraces, and underbraces--are frequently encountered in mathematics, as are other

12.10:

types of stacked expressions.

Letters and

diacritical marks

12.11:

Italic letters and

kerning

12.12:

Letters and fonts

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Signs and Symbols

of Contents

List of Figures

12.11 ITALIC LETTERS AND KERNING

List of Tables

Although italic letters are used to denote mathematical objects, mathematical expressions require

Index

special treatment in typesetting. In particular, contiguous italic letters must never be kerned. To this

end--and as a general aid to readability--fonts intended for mathematics are typically designed so that

italic letters are less slanted than they might otherwise be (and, therefore, unlikely to crowd or

12.9:

overlap other typeset elements). Contiguous letters that form an abbreviation--e.g., "Aut" for

Mathematical

characters

"automorphism group"--should be set roman; see also 12.17.

12.10:

Letters and

diacritical marks

12.11:

Italic letters and

kerning

12.12:

Letters and fonts

12.13:

List of unusual

characters

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Signs and Symbols

of Contents

List of Figures

12.12 LETTERS AND FONTS

List of Tables

The number of symbols can be extended by using letters from other alphabets, most often the Greek

Index

alphabet, and by representing letters from the Latin alphabet in other fonts and typefaces. Examples

of characters from four fonts and typefaces commonly used in mathematics are

12.10:

Letters and

diacritical marks

12.11:

Lowercase script characters are often not available, though they have been defined for the

Italic letters and

kerning

mathematical alphabets in Unicode (see also 11.2). See also 12.64 for marking fonts on paper

12.12:

manuscripts.

Letters and fonts

12.13:

List of unusual

characters

12.14:

Special

mathematical

symbols

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Signs and Symbols

of Contents

List of Figures

12.13 LIST OF UNUSUAL CHARACTERS

List of Tables

Before editing begins, it may be advisable, depending on the typesetter and the publisher's knowledge

Index

of the typesetter's resources, to prepare a list of unusual mathematical signs, symbols, and special

characters used in the manuscript. This is preferably done by the author but may be done by the

editor. In preparing an electronic manuscript, the author should make a list of any special,

12.11:

nonstandard fonts. A copy should be given to the publisher, who will check with the typesetter to

Italic letters and

kerning

make sure the necessary characters are available. If some are not, the author may be asked to use

12.12:

more accessible forms; if that is impossible, the typesetter must be asked to obtain or generate the

Letters and fonts

characters needed.

12.13:

List of unusual

characters

12.14:

Special

mathematical

symbols

12.15:

Signs for binary

operations and

relations

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Signs and Symbols

of Contents

List of Figures

12.14 SPECIAL MATHEMATICAL SYMBOLS

List of Tables

Many mathematical symbols have a reserved meaning: π stands for the number 3.14159265 . . . , e for

Index

the number 2.71828183 . . . , and i for the square root of --1. The symbols , , , , and Ø are used

in all mathematical disciplines. Double-struck (blackboard) symbols are reserved for familiar systems

of numbers:

+

N for the natural numbers, Z for the integers (Z is the same as N), Q for the rational

12.12:

numbers, R for the real numbers, and C for the complex numbers.

Letters and fonts

12.13:

List of unusual

characters

12.14:

Special

mathematical

symbols

12.15:

Signs for binary

operations and

relations

12.16:

Basic spacing in

mathematics

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Signs and Symbols

of Contents

List of Figures

12.15 SIGNS FOR BINARY OPERATIONS AND RELATIONS

List of Tables

Binary operations act as conjunctions to combine two mathematical expressions. Examples of binary

Index

operation signs are + (plus sign), − (minus sign), · (multiplication dot), × (multiplication cross), ÷

(division sign), / (solidus or slash), and ° (composition sign). Binary relations act as verbs and express a

relationship between two mathematical expressions. Examples of relation signs are = (equals), ≠ (does

12.13:

not equal), > (is greater than), and < (is less than).

List of unusual

characters

12.14:

Special

mathematical

symbols

12.15:

Signs for binary

operations and

relations

12.16:

Basic spacing in

mathematics

12.17:

Functions

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Signs and Symbols

of Contents

List of Figures

12.16 BASIC SPACING IN MATHEMATICS

List of Tables

Mathematics isn't simply read left to right in a machine-like manner, and one should be able to see

Index

the parts of an equation if it is properly set. Good mathematical spacing helps to indicate grouping:

things that are more closely related should be set more tightly than things that are less closely related.

Such spacing will vary according to the elements being set. In simple expressions, however, absolute

12.14:

spacing may be called for. Signs for binary operations (i.e., conjunctions); symbols of integration,

Special

mathematical

summation, or union; and signs for binary relations (i.e., verbs) are preceded and followed by

symbols

medium spaces:

12.15:

Signs for binary

operations and

relations

No space follows a binary operation or relation sign when it is modifying a symbol (i.e., used as an

12.16:

Basic spacing in

adjective):

mathematics

12.17:

Functions

12.18:

In subscripts and superscripts, no space precedes or follows operation or relation signs:

Mathematical

expressions and

punctuation

Commas used between coordinate points or in lists should be followed by a medium space (see

12.19). See also A.22.

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Signs and Symbols

of Contents

List of Figures

12.17 FUNCTIONS

List of Tables

For a list of abbreviated functions, see table 12.2. These abbreviations are followed by a thin space

Index

unless the argument is enclosed in delimiters, or fences (see 12.26), in which case they are usually

closed up to the opening delimiter:

12.15:

Signs for binary

operations and

relations

Limits are set as subscripts to the right of the abbreviation in text and below the abbreviation in

display:

12.16:

Basic spacing in

mathematics

12.17:

Functions

12.18:

Mathematical

expressions and

punctuation

12.19:

Elided lists

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Punctuation

of Contents

List of Figures

12.18 MATHEMATICAL EXPRESSIONS AND PUNCTUATION

List of Tables

Mathematical equations, whether run in with the text or displayed on a separate line, are

Index

grammatically part of the text in which they appear. Thus, equations must be edited not only for the

correct presentation of the mathematical characters but also for correct grammar in the sentence.

Punctuation of mathematical expressions requires special attention. For example, if several

12.16:

expressions (i.e., a "list" of expressions) appear in a single display, they should be separated by

Basic spacing in

mathematics

commas or semicolons. For example,

12.17:

Functions

12.18:

Mathematical

expressions and

punctuation

12.19:

Elided lists

Consecutive lines of a single multiline expression, however, should not be punctuated:

12.20:

Elided operations

and relations

Equations must carry ending punctuation if they end a sentence. All ending punctuation and the

commas and semicolons separating expressions should be aligned horizontally on the baseline, even

when preceded by constructs such as subscripts, superscripts, or fractions.

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Punctuation

of Contents

List of Figures

12.19 ELIDED LISTS

List of Tables

In elided lists, commas should come after each term in the list and after the ellipsis points if the list

Index

has a final term. For example,

12.17:

Functions

12.18:

Mathematical

The ellipsis points should be on the baseline when the terms of the list are separated by commas. Use

expressions and

a medium space after each comma.

punctuation

12.19:

Elided lists

12.20:

Elided operations

and relations

12.21:

Displaying

mathematical

expressions

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Punctuation

of Contents

List of Figures

12.20 ELIDED OPERATIONS AND RELATIONS

List of Tables

In elided sums or elided relations, the ellipsis points should be vertically centered between the

Index

operation or relation signs. For example,

12.18:

Mathematical

expressions and

punctuation

Multiplication is often signified by the juxtaposition of the factors without a multiplication sign

12.19:

between them. That is,

Elided lists

12.20:

Elided operations

and relations

When the multiplication sign is not explicit, the elided product may be denoted with ellipsis points

12.21:

either on the baseline or vertically centered:

Displaying

mathematical

expressions

12.22:

Qualifying clauses

The second alternative is commonly used in displays with built-up factors:

for displayed

expressions

If the multiplication dot is present, then ellipsis points should be on the baseline and not centered. For

example,

If the multiplication cross is present, then ellipsis points should be centered. For example,

Multiplication signs are always used when the factors need to be separated:

In some contexts (such as for numbers) the use of the multiplication cross rather than the dot is

merely a matter of preference, but in many other contexts (such as for vectors) multiplication dots and

crosses have completely different meanings and cannot be used interchangeably.

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Mathematical Expressions in Display

of Contents

List of Figures

12.21 DISPLAYING MATHEMATICAL EXPRESSIONS

List of Tables

Mathematical expressions should be displayed--that is, set on a separate line clear of text--if they are

Index

important to the exposition, if they are referenced, or if they are difficult to read or typeset in the

body of the text. If different mathematical expressions are displayed on the same line, the expressions

should be separated by spacing, together with words or punctuation:

12.19:

Elided lists

If a = b, then for all real numbers x,

12.20:

Elided operations

and relations

12.21:

If different mathematical expressions are displayed on separate consecutive lines, regardless of

Displaying

mathematical

whether there is an intervening word between two of the equations, each expression can usually be

expressions

centered:

12.22:

Qualifying clauses

for displayed

If a = b, then for all real numbers x,

expressions

12.23:

Breaking displayed

expressions

It should be noted that equals signs or other relation signs will not necessarily line up:

Some groups of displayed expressions, however, will be easier to read if they are lined up along an

equals sign or other relational sign--for example, if only one of the lines includes an expression to the

left of the equals sign or if all the expressions to the left of the equals sign are of the same length. For

an example, see the three-line displayed expression in the next paragraph (12.22).

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Mathematical Expressions in Display

of Contents

List of Figures

12.22 QUALIFYING CLAUSES FOR DISPLAYED EXPRESSIONS

List of Tables

Qualifying clauses may be presented in several ways. If the main expression is displayed, the

Index

qualifying clause may also be displayed (separated from the expression by an em space or more):

If f is a constant function, then

12.20:

Elided operations

and relations

12.21:

The qualifying clause may appear in the text, following the displayed main expression:

Displaying

mathematical

expressions

Suppose that the prime factorization of the integer a is given by

12.22:

Qualifying clauses

for displayed

expressions

where the pi are distinct prime numbers and ki > 0.

12.23:

Breaking displayed

expressions

The qualifying clause may appear in the text, preceding the displayed main expression:

12.24:

Numbering

For all real numbers a and b,

displayed

mathematical

expressions

And qualifying clauses may themselves include displayed expressions:

Suppose that assumptions 1 and 2 hold. Then a competitive equilibrium satisfies the following three

differential equations:

where

with initial conditions Ï‡(0) and Îº(0), and also satisfies the transversality condition

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Mathematical Expressions in Display

of Contents

List of Figures

12.23 BREAKING DISPLAYED EXPRESSIONS

List of Tables

Long mathematical expressions may break badly at the end of a line and thus may need to be

Index

displayed. Even in displayed form, however, some long expressions may not fit on one line. In such

cases, displayed expressions may be broken before a relation or operation sign. Examples of such

signs are

12.21:

Displaying

Operation signs (conjunctions): + − × ÷ ± ∪ ∩

mathematical

expressions

Relation signs (verbs): = ≠ > < ≥ ≤ → ≡

12.22:

Qualifying clauses

See table 12.1 for a more complete list. In displayed expressions, runover lines are aligned on the

for displayed

expressions

relation signs, which should be followed by thick spaces:

12.23:

Breaking displayed

expressions

12.24:

Numbering

displayed

If a runover line begins with an operation sign, the operation sign should be lined up with the first

mathematical

expressions

character to the right of the relation sign in the line above it, followed by a medium space:

12.25:

Methods of

numeration

For additional rules on breaking expressions, consult Ellen Swanson, Mathematics into Type

(bibliog. 2.4).

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Numeration

of Contents

List of Figures

12.24 NUMBERING DISPLAYED MATHEMATICAL EXPRESSIONS

List of Tables

Mathematical expressions that are referred to later in the text should be numbered or otherwise

Index

labeled. Displayed mathematical expressions that present important results are often numbered or

labeled, as are important steps in a calculation or proof. All numbered mathematical expressions must

be displayed. Displayed equations are usually centered on the line (without regard to the equation

12.22:

number or label). The number or label, enclosed in parentheses to prevent misreading, is usually put

Qualifying clauses

for displayed

at the right margin, but it may be placed at the left margin.

expressions

12.23:

Hence it is apparent that

Breaking displayed

expressions

12.24:

Numbering

displayed

In cross-references, display numbers or labels are enclosed in parentheses to match the marginal

mathematical

enumerations:

expressions

12.25:

Recalling equation (1.1), we may conclude that . . .

Methods of

numeration

or

12.26:

Common delimiters

Recalling (1.1), we may conclude that . . .

A range of equations is referred to by giving the first and last equation numbers, joined by an en

dash:

From equations (2)--(5) we obtain . . .

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Numeration

of Contents

List of Figures

12.25 METHODS OF NUMERATION

List of Tables

Displayed mathematical expressions may be numbered or labeled, as may definitions, theorems,

Index

lemmas, and other formal parts of the exposition. A simple numbering system offers a convenient and

space-saving method of cross-reference. In texts with many displayed equations, double or triple

numeration is usually preferred. In this system, the displayed expressions in each chapter are labeled

12.23:

with the chapter number first, followed by the section number (if any), followed by the statement

Breaking displayed

expressions

number, starting with number 1 (1.1.1, 1.1.2, . . . , 1.2.1, 1.2.2, . . . , etc.). If, on the other hand, single

12.24:

numeration is used (e.g., in a text with relatively few displayed equations), the displays are still

Numbering

usually numbered starting over with 1 in each chapter. It should be noted that definitions, theorems,

displayed

mathematical

lemmas, and so forth are usually numbered together, in a single sequence, and apart from displayed

expressions

equations (e.g., definition 4.1, lemma 4.2, lemma 4.3, proposition 4.4, corollary 4.5).

12.25:

Methods of

numeration

12.26:

Common delimiters

12.27:

Functional notation

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Delimiters

of Contents

List of Figures

12.26 COMMON DELIMITERS

List of Tables

Three sorts of symbols are commonly used to group mathematical expressions: parentheses (),

Index

brackets [], and braces {}. They are used in pairs, and their normal order is {[()]}. When necessary, the

sequence of delimiters can be extended by large parentheses, brackets, and braces as follows:

12.24:

Numbering

displayed

mathematical

In text, the braces are sometimes omitted from this sequence. Angle brackets, vertical bars, and double

expressions

vertical bars carry special mathematical significance and should not be used to supplement the

12.25:

sequence of common delimiters.

Methods of

numeration

12.26:

Common delimiters

12.27:

Functional notation

12.28:

Set notation

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Delimiters

of Contents

List of Figures

12.27 FUNCTIONAL NOTATION

List of Tables

In functional notation, nested pairs of parentheses are used instead of brackets or braces to indicate

Index

grouping:

12.25:

Methods of

numeration

12.26:

Common delimiters

12.27:

Functional notation

12.28:

Set notation

12.29:

Ordered set

notation

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Delimiters

of Contents

List of Figures

12.28 SET NOTATION

List of Tables

Braces are used to delimit the elements of a set, and other delimiters should not be substituted. For

Index

example,

12.26:

Common delimiters

denotes the set consisting of n objects a 1, a 2, . . . , an, and

12.27:

Functional notation

12.28:

Set notation

denotes the set of all elements x in a set D. In the second example (called "set-builder" notation), the

condition that defines the set follows the colon. A vertical bar is sometimes used instead of the colon

12.29:

Ordered set

to delimit the condition.

notation

12.30:

Intervals

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Delimiters

of Contents

List of Figures

12.29 ORDERED SET NOTATION

List of Tables

In ordered set notation, parentheses are used as delimiters. For example,

Index

( a, b)

denotes the ordered pair of objects a and b, where a is the first element in the pair and b is the second

12.27:

Functional notation

element. More generally,

12.28:

Set notation

12.29:

Ordered set

denotes the ordered n-tuple of objects a ,

1 a , . . . ,

2

an. This notation is standard, and other delimiters

notation

should not be substituted.

12.30:

Intervals

12.31:

Delimiters denoting

inner product

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Delimiters

of Contents

List of Figures

12.30 INTERVALS

List of Tables

In interval notation, parentheses are used to delimit an open interval, that is, one that does not

Index

include its endpoints; for example, ( a, b) denotes the set of all real numbers between a and b, not

including either a or b. Brackets are used to delimit a closed interval, that is, an interval that includes

its endpoints. The notation ( a, b] signifies the interval not including a but including b, while [ a, b)

12.28:

denotes the interval including a but not including b. Parentheses and brackets in interval notation

Set notation

should not be replaced with other delimiters. (According to an alternative convention, ] a, b[ denotes

12.29:

Ordered set

an open interval, [ a, b[ an interval that includes a but not b, etc. This should not be changed if the

notation

author has used it consistently.)

12.30:

Intervals

12.31:

Delimiters denoting

inner product

12.32:

Binomial

coefficients

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Delimiters

of Contents

List of Figures

12.31 DELIMITERS DENOTING INNER PRODUCT

List of Tables

Parentheses are sometimes used to denote the inner product of two vectors: ( u, w). Angle brackets are

Index

also used as notation for the inner product:

. See also 12.52--54.

12.29:

Ordered set

notation

12.30:

Intervals

12.31:

Delimiters denoting

inner product

12.32:

Binomial

coefficients

12.33:

Vertical bars

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Delimiters

of Contents

List of Figures

12.32 BINOMIAL COEFFICIENTS

List of Tables

The notation , " n choose k," is called the binomial coefficient and stands for the number of ways k

Index

objects can be chosen from among a collection of n objects. It is defined by

12.30:

Intervals

12.31:

where n and k are positive integers and the notation ! stands for the factorial function,

Delimiters denoting

inner product

12.32:

Binomial

coefficients

12.33:

Vertical bars

12.34:

Single vertical bar

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Delimiters

of Contents

List of Figures

12.33 VERTICAL BARS

List of Tables

Vertical bars serve several special purposes. The modulus or absolute value of x is denoted | x|. The

Index

notation | u| is used for the "length" of a vector u in a Euclidean vector space; this is sometimes called

the norm of u and written with a double vertical bar, || u||. Vertical bars are used to denote the

cardinal number of a set. The notation | A| can signify the determinant of a matrix A, which is also

12.31:

denoted det A.

Delimiters denoting

inner product

12.32:

Binomial

coefficients

12.33:

Vertical bars

12.34:

Single vertical bar

12.35:

Cases

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Delimiters

of Contents

List of Figures

12.34 SINGLE VERTICAL BAR

List of Tables

A single vertical bar with limits is used to denote the evaluation of a formula at a particular value of

Index

one of its variables. For example,

12.32:

Binomial

coefficients

12.33:

Vertical bars

12.34:

Single vertical bar

12.35:

Cases

12.36:

Simple subscripts

and superscripts

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Delimiters

of Contents

List of Figures

12.35 CASES

List of Tables

Displayed mathematical expressions that present a choice between alternatives may be grouped using

Index

a single brace and are punctuated as follows:

12.33:

Vertical bars

12.34:

Another acceptable style is

Single vertical bar

12.35:

Cases

12.36:

Simple subscripts

and superscripts

As a general rule, each alternative is equivalent to a clause in ordinary language and should be

12.37:

punctuated as such. If the alternatives are very long, they may be stated as separate equations:

Complex subscripts

and superscripts

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Subscripts and Superscripts

of Contents

List of Figures

12.36 SIMPLE SUBSCRIPTS AND SUPERSCRIPTS

List of Tables

Inferior and superior indices, exponents, and other subscript and superscript symbols occur very

Index

frequently in mathematical copy and are indispensable for concise expression in mathematics.

Examples are

12.34:

Single vertical bar

12.35:

Multiple indices are written without commas between them unless there is a possibility of confusion:

Cases

xij instead of xi,j, but x 1,2 if there is a possibility of confusing the subscripts "1, 2" and "12."

12.36:

Abbreviations or words that serve as labels in subscripts or superscripts are usually set in roman

Simple subscripts

and superscripts

type:

12.37:

Complex subscripts

x min,â€ƒ u av.

and superscripts

12.38:

Alignment of

subscripts and

superscripts

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Subscripts and Superscripts

of Contents

List of Figures

12.37 COMPLEX SUBSCRIPTS AND SUPERSCRIPTS

List of Tables

Subscripts and superscripts may themselves have subscripts and superscripts. For example,

Index

12.35:

Mathematical expressions may occur as subformulas in the superior or inferior positions. For

Cases

example,

12.36:

Simple subscripts

and superscripts

12.37:

Complex subscripts

and superscripts

12.38:

Alignment of

subscripts and

superscripts

12.39:

Summation sign

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Subscripts and Superscripts

of Contents

List of Figures

12.38 ALIGNMENT OF SUBSCRIPTS AND SUPERSCRIPTS

List of Tables

Subscripts and superscripts may be stacked

Index

or staggered

12.36:

Simple subscripts

and superscripts

12.37:

Complex subscripts

Because there are standard conventions for raising and lowering indices in some branches of

and superscripts

mathematics, most especially in tensor calculus, the relative position between superior and inferior

12.38:

Alignment of

indices must be respected. For example,

subscripts and

superscripts

12.39:

Summation sign

(the tensor arising from Tij by lowering its second index) and

12.40:

Product sign

(the tensor arising from Tij by lowering its first index) are different and must be clearly distinguished.

Neither should be written Ordinary punctuation marks carrying special meaning may occur in

subscripted or superscripted expressions. For instance,

have precise mathematical meanings and should not be changed. In tensor expressions, the symbol

R[ i, j] is not the same as R( i, j), and they should not be interchanged. See also 12.54.

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Summations and Integrals

of Contents

List of Figures

12.39 SUMMATION SIGN

List of Tables

The summation sign âˆ‘ is used to stand for a sum, finite or infinite, of terms. For example, the sums

Index

may be written

12.37:

Complex subscripts

and superscripts

12.38:

Alignment of

subscripts and

superscripts

respectively. The variable i in the expressions above is called the index of summation. The

12.39:

subformulas below and above the summation sign are called the limits of summation and indicate

Summation sign

where the summation begins and, if it is finite, ends. Summation limits are sometimes omitted if it is

12.40:

clear from the context what the limits are; for example, if all vectors are stated to be of size n and all

Product sign

matrices are of size n Ã— n, it is acceptable to write

12.41:

Integral sign

When a summation sign occurs in text, its limits are placed to the right of the summation sign to

avoid spreading the lines of text:

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Summations and Integrals

of Contents

List of Figures

12.40 PRODUCT SIGN

List of Tables

Product notation follows similar conventions. The products

Index

may be written

12.38:

Alignment of

subscripts and

superscripts

12.39:

Summation sign

respectively, and in text the limits are placed to the right of the product symbol to avoid spreading

12.40:

Product sign

lines:

12.41:

Integral sign

12.42:

Spacing around

differentials

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Summations and Integrals

of Contents

List of Figures

12.41 INTEGRAL SIGN

List of Tables

The integral sign âˆ« is used to denote two sorts of integrals, called definite and indefinite. The

Index

definite integral is the integral of a function f on an interval [ a, b]. This integral is denoted

12.39:

Summation sign

The numbers a and b are called the lower and upper limits of integration, and dx is called the element

12.40:

Product sign

of integration or the differential. The limits of integration are often placed to the right of the integral

sign in both text and display. The indefinite integral is denoted

12.41:

Integral sign

12.42:

Spacing around

differentials

without limits of integration. In more advanced texts the definite integral is written

12.43:

Radical signs

where D is the set of integration. For a function of two variables, it is common to denote an integral

over both variables by a double integral sign:

Triple integrals may be used if the integration is performed in three variables.

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Summations and Integrals

of Contents

List of Figures

12.42 SPACING AROUND DIFFERENTIALS

List of Tables

Thin spaces are placed before and after differentials:

Index

Differential expressions appearing in derivatives must be closed up to the slash:

12.40:

Product sign

dx/dt.

12.41:

Integral sign

12.42:

Spacing around

differentials

12.43:

Radical signs

12.44:

Radical signs in

text

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Radicals

of Contents

List of Figures

12.43 RADICAL SIGNS

List of Tables

The radical sign âˆš is used to denote the square root. A horizontal bar extends from the top of the

Index

radical sign to the end of the radicand:

12.41:

Integral sign

In display, the radical sign extends vertically to accommodate a built-up radicand:

12.42:

Spacing around

differentials

12.43:

Radical signs

The radical sign may be used to denote cube and higher-order roots. For these roots, a superscript-

12.44:

Radical signs in

sized number or letter is nested within the radical sign:

text

12.45:

Fractions in text

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Radicals

of Contents

List of Figures

12.44 RADICAL SIGNS IN TEXT

List of Tables

Radical signs can be used in text if the radicand is a simple expression: a = m + n . If the radicand is

Index

more complex or if the text design uses tight leading, radical signs can give the page a crowded look

or interfere with descending letters in the line above. One remedy is to substitute the appropriate

exponent, using delimiters to indicate the extent of the radicand. For example,

12.42:

Spacing around

differentials

12.43:

may be replaced by

Radical signs

12.44:

Radical signs in

text

12.45:

Fractions in text

12.46:

Fractions in display

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Fractions

of Contents

List of Figures

12.45 FRACTIONS IN TEXT

List of Tables

Fractions are set in text with a slash to separate the numerator and denominator:

Index

Some common numerical fractions may be set as case fractions (text-sized fractions with a horizontal

12.43:

Radical signs

bar):

12.44:

Radical signs in

text

12.45:

Fractions should be enclosed in parentheses if they are followed by a mathematical symbol or

Fractions in text

expression:

12.46:

Fractions in display

( a/b) x.

12.47:

Fractions in

For simple algebraic fractions in text, the slash should be used rather than the horizontal fraction bar.

subscripts and

superscripts

For example,

The slash connects only the two groups of symbols immediately adjacent to it. Thus, a + b/ c means

which should be written ( a + b)/ c.

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Fractions

of Contents

List of Figures

12.46 FRACTIONS IN DISPLAY

List of Tables

In displayed mathematical expressions, all fractions should be built up unless they are part of a

Index

numerator or denominator or in a subscript or superscript:

12.44:

Radical signs in

text

Fractions that include summation, product, or integral signs should always be displayed. For

12.45:

Fractions in text

example:

12.46:

Fractions in display

12.47:

Fractions in

subscripts and

superscripts

12.48:

If there are no built-up fractions in the display, common numerical fractions may be set as case

Multiple and

multilevel fractions

fractions:

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Fractions

of Contents

List of Figures

12.47 FRACTIONS IN SUBSCRIPTS AND SUPERSCRIPTS

List of Tables

Fractions in subscripts and superscripts should always use the slash, both in text and in display:

Index

12.45:

Fractions in text

12.46:

Fractions in display

12.47:

Fractions in

subscripts and

superscripts

12.48:

Multiple and

multilevel fractions

12.49:

Rewriting fractions

using exponents

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Fractions

of Contents

List of Figures

12.48 MULTIPLE AND MULTILEVEL FRACTIONS

List of Tables

If a mathematical expression contains more than one fraction, it should be displayed, and the

Index

horizontal bar should be used for the principal fraction sign:

12.46:

Fractions in display

12.47:

Fractions should preferably be limited to two levels:

Fractions in

subscripts and

superscripts

12.48:

Multiple and

multilevel fractions

Continued fractions, that is, expressions of the form a 1 + 1/ b 1, where b 1 = a 2 + 1/ b 2, b 2 = a +

3 1/ b ,

3 and

12.49:

Rewriting fractions

so on, are displayed:

using exponents

12.50:

Matrices

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Fractions

of Contents

List of Figures

12.49 REWRITING FRACTIONS USING EXPONENTS

List of Tables

There are times when it is desirable to represent the denominator of a fraction without using a

Index

fraction rule or a slash. This may be done by using delimiters followed by the exponent âˆ’1:

12.47:

Fractions in

subscripts and

If there is already an exponent in the denominator, it can be changed to its negative:

superscripts

12.48:

Multiple and

multilevel fractions

12.49:

Rewriting fractions

If an exponential expression, particularly in text, is very complex, it may be rewritten in a simpler

using exponents

form. An exponential term such as

12.50:

Matrices

12.51:

Determinants

can be rewritten using the abbreviation exp:

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Matrices and Determinants

of Contents

List of Figures

12.50 MATRICES

List of Tables

Matrices are arrays of terms displayed in rectangular arrangements of rows and columns and

Index

enclosed on the left and right by either large brackets or parentheses:

12.48:

Multiple and

multilevel fractions

12.49:

Rewriting fractions

using exponents

The notation should be consistent. The horizontal lists of entries are called the rows of the matrix, and

12.50:

Matrices

the vertical lists the columns. A matrix with m rows and n columns is called an m Ã— n matrix. A

12.51:

matrix consisting of a single row is called a row matrix or a row vector; a matrix consisting of a single

Determinants

column is a column matrix or a column vector. For example,

12.52:

Scalars, vectors,

and tensors

defined

are row and column matrices, respectively. The transpose of a matrix A, denoted AT, is the matrix

obtained by interchanging the rows and columns of A. For example,

is the transpose of the m Ã— n matrix given above. Column matrices such as

may be represented in text as ( a, b, c) T, col. ( a, b, c), or the column vector ( a, b, c), and a 2 Ã— n (for

small n) matrix may be set, for example, as . Most matrices and determinants are displayed,

however. In-line matrices cannot be broken on the line, and display matrices cannot be broken across

the column or page.

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Matrices and Determinants

of Contents

List of Figures

12.51 DETERMINANTS

List of Tables

If A is a square matrix, the determinant of A, denoted | A| or det A, is a function that assigns a

Index

specific number to the matrix A. If A is an n Ã— n matrix, the determinant of A is represented by

12.49:

Rewriting fractions

using exponents

12.50:

Matrices

12.51:

Vertical bars are used to distinguish the determinant of A from the matrix A. The Jacobian matrix has

Determinants

a reserved notation:

12.52:

Scalars, vectors,

and tensors

defined

12.53:

Vector and tensor

multiplication

Its determinant (usually referred to as the Jacobian) is denoted as

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Scalars, Vectors, and Tensors

of Contents

List of Figures

12.52 SCALARS, VECTORS, AND TENSORS DEFINED

List of Tables

Three basic quantities often encountered in scientific mathematical material are scalars, vectors, and

Index

tensors. Scalars, usually denoted by lowercase italic or Greek letters, are ordinary numbers and are

treated as such. Vectors are quantities that have direction as well as magnitude, and they are often

denoted by boldface letters or by an arrow diacritic to distinguish them from scalars:

12.50:

Matrices

12.51:

Determinants

Because authors do not always follow these conventions, editors should be prepared to query. A

12.52:

vector may be written as the sum of its components:

Scalars, vectors,

and tensors

defined

12.53:

Vector and tensor

multiplication

The circumflex over the e is used to denote a vector of length 1, called a unit vector. Tensors are

12.54:

multidimensional quantities that extend the vector concept. A scalar is a tensor of rank 0, and a vector

Additional tensor

is a tensor of rank 1.

notation

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Scalars, Vectors, and Tensors

of Contents

List of Figures

12.53 VECTOR AND TENSOR MULTIPLICATION

List of Tables

Vector and tensor multiplication employs a special notation that is relatively easy to identify in text.

Index

The inner or dot product of two vectors u and w is denoted u Â· w; the dot product is signified by the

boldface multiplication dot. The vector or cross product of two vectors u and w is denoted u Ã— w;

the cross product is signified by the boldface multiplication cross. The multiplication dot and

12.51:

multiplication cross are not interchangeable for vectors as they are for ordinary multiplication. The

Determinants

standard notation for the tensor product of tensors T and S is T âŠ— S. Index notation for vectors and

12.52:

Scalars, vectors,

tensors usually takes the following form:

and tensors

defined

12.53:

Vector and tensor

multiplication

12.54:

Additional tensor

notation

12.55:

Note the correspondence of the indices in these expressions (see 12.38 for discussion of index

Dirac notation

positioning). The Einstein convention has been used here, which implies summation over the repeated

index. Thus

unless otherwise stated.

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Scalars, Vectors, and Tensors

of Contents

List of Figures

12.54 ADDITIONAL TENSOR NOTATION

List of Tables

Two additional special notations are used to differentiate tensors. One is Ai,j, where the subscript

Index

comma indicates a coordinate (or "ordinary") derivative. The other is Ai;j, where the subscript

semicolon indicates the covariant derivative. See also 12.38.

12.52:

Scalars, vectors,

and tensors

defined

12.53:

Vector and tensor

multiplication

12.54:

Additional tensor

notation

12.55:

Dirac notation

12.56:

Formal statements

in text

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Scalars, Vectors, and Tensors

of Contents

List of Figures

12.55 DIRAC NOTATION

List of Tables

A special form of the inner product, used especially in physics, is the Dirac bracket notation,

Index

,

12.53:

which can also be used in combination with operators, as in

(which is not the same as

)

Vector and tensor

multiplication

or

. The combinations

are also used to denote dual vectors and vectors, respectively.

12.54:

Additional tensor

notation

12.55:

Dirac notation

12.56:

Formal statements

in text

12.57:

Probability

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Definitions, Theorems, and Other Formal Statements

of Contents

List of Figures

12.56 FORMAL STATEMENTS IN TEXT

List of Tables

For definitions, theorems, propositions, corollaries, lemmas, axioms, and rules, it is common practice

Index

to set the head in caps and small caps and the text (including symbolic expressions but not including

numerals, which are always set in roman) in italics, sometimes indented from the left margin.

Numbers for these statements, unlike those for equations, are not enclosed in parentheses, and in

12.54:

cross-references the numbers are also not enclosed.

Additional tensor

notation

DEFINITION. A permutation is a one-to-one transformation of a finite set into itself.

12.55:

Dirac notation

(In a definition, the term being defined is set in roman type in order to distinguish it from the rest of

12.56:

Formal statements

the text; alternatively, the term can be set in italics and the text in roman.)

in text

12.57:

THEOREM 1. The order of a finite subgroup is a multiple of the order of every one of its subgroups.

Probability

COROLLARY. If p and q are distinct prime numbers and a is an integer not divisible by either p or q, then

12.58:

Means and

standard deviations

LEMMA 2. The product of any two primitive polynomials is itself primitive.

AXIOM. Every set of nonnegative integers that contains at least one element contains a smallest element.

RULE 4.4. The length of a vertical segment joining two points is given by the difference of the ordinates of the

upper and the lower points.

The text of proofs, examples, remarks, demonstrations, and solutions is usually set in roman, with

only variables and other such letters in italics. The heads, however, are set in caps and small caps.

PROOF. Let A = B. Hence C = D.

SOLUTION. If y = 0, then x = 5.

Proofs of theorems often end with the abbreviation QED or a special symbol, â–¡ or â– .

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Probability and Statistics

of Contents

List of Figures

12.57 PROBABILITY

List of Tables

The notation Pr( A) or P( A) is used to denote the probability of an event A. The sample space, that is,

Index

the set of all possible outcomes of a given experiment, is usually denoted Î©. An event A is a subset

of the sample space: A âŠ† Î©. The elements of the sample space are usually denoted Ï‰. The

conditional probability of event A relative to event B--that is, the probability that event A occurs

12.55:

given that event B has occurred--is written

Dirac notation

12.56:

Formal statements

in text

Variance is denoted Var( X) and covariance is denoted Cov( X, Y). Both the variance and the

12.57:

Probability

covariance functions may be expressed with lowercase letters.

12.58:

Means and

standard deviations

12.59:

Uncertainties

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Probability and Statistics

of Contents

List of Figures

12.58 MEANS AND STANDARD DEVIATIONS

List of Tables

The population mean is often given a special symbol in statistics, Î¼( X). The sample mean is denoted

Index

by . In evaluating an expression, be careful not to substitute angle brackets,

, for an overbar, .

They can mean very different things. The population standard deviation (the most common measure

of dispersion) is denoted by Ïƒ (Greek lowercase sigma), and the sample standard deviation is more

12.56:

commonly denoted by s; sd or SD may be used to distinguish it from se or SE, for standard error. The

Formal statements

in text

arithmetic mean is most frequently written in physical sciences literature as

or AÌ„ and the

12.57:

cumulant as

. Several abbreviations are used in stochastic theory and probability theory without

Probability

special definition: a.e., almost everywhere; a.c., almost certainly; a.s., almost surely. See table 12.3 for

12.58:

statistical notation.

Means and

standard deviations

12.59:

Uncertainties

12.60:

Format of paper

manuscripts

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Style of Mathematical Expressions >> Probability and Statistics

of Contents

List of Figures

12.59 UNCERTAINTIES

List of Tables

Uncertainties in quantities are usually written with a plus or minus sign (Â±): 2.501 Â± 0.002 or, if

Index

there is an exponent, (6.157 Â± 0.07) Ã— 105 or 104.3Â±0.3. However, there are cases in which the

bounds rather than the range are given, and these may be unequal; hence,

12.57:

Probability

12.58:

Uncertainties may also be specified as se for standard error, 1 Ïƒ (or a larger multiple) or sd for

Means and

standard deviation. Finally, separation into random and systematic uncertainties is written as

standard deviations

12.59:

Uncertainties

12.60:

or 71.0 (random) (sys) for asymmetric bounds. When such expressions occur in an exponent, it

Format of paper

manuscripts

is preferable to write a separate expression for the exponent (see 12.49).

12.61:

Setting from the

author's hard copy

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Preparation and Editing of Paper Manuscripts

of Contents

List of Figures

12.60 FORMAT OF PAPER MANUSCRIPTS

List of Tables

Manuscripts for mathematical articles and books should be printed out one-sided and double-spaced,

Index

on 8Â½ Ã— 11--inch white paper, with 1Â¼-inch margins for text and 2-inch margins for display

work. The print quality should be 300 dots per inch or better. If handwritten equations or symbols are

to be inserted in the printout, allow generous space for them. Since the editor will need to provide

12.58:

instructions to the typesetter, there should be ample margins.

Means and

standard deviations

12.59:

Uncertainties

12.60:

Format of paper

manuscripts

12.61:

Setting from the

author's hard copy

12.62:

Marking italic type

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Preparation and Editing of Paper Manuscripts

of Contents

List of Figures

12.61 SETTING FROM THE AUTHOR'S HARD COPY

List of Tables

In the event that the publisher cannot use the electronic files prepared by the author, and to the extent

Index

that a manuscript shows all the necessary characters, symbols, and signs as they should appear, the

typesetter may simply be instructed to follow the author's hard copy. Any unusual characters not

achieved in the manuscript must be marked or identified. Authors should supply the highest-quality

12.59:

printout possible.

Uncertainties

12.60:

Format of paper

manuscripts

12.61:

Setting from the

author's hard copy

12.62:

Marking italic type

12.63:

Common

abbreviations

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Preparation and Editing of Paper Manuscripts

of Contents

List of Figures

12.62 MARKING ITALIC TYPE

List of Tables

The editor of a mathematical text should either underline all copy that is to be set in italics or give

Index

general instructions to the typesetter to set all single-letter mathematical objects in italics unless they

are marked otherwise. The general instructions to the typesetter should also specify italic type for

letters used in subscripts or superscripts. If italics have been used in the manuscript, the editor can

12.60:

instruct the typesetter to follow the copy.

Format of paper

manuscripts

12.61:

Setting from the

author's hard copy

12.62:

Marking italic type

12.63:

Common

abbreviations

12.64:

Marking single

letters in other

type styles

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Preparation and Editing of Paper Manuscripts

of Contents

List of Figures

12.63 COMMON ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

Abbreviations for common functions, geometric points, units of measurement, and chemical elements,

Index

which are set in roman type, should be marked as roman by the editor only where ambiguity could

occur. For a list of some frequently used abbreviations, see table 12.2.

12.61:

Setting from the

author's hard copy

12.62:

Marking italic type

12.63:

Common

abbreviations

12.64:

Marking single

letters in other

type styles

12.65:

Mathematics fonts

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Preparation and Editing of Paper Manuscripts

of Contents

List of Figures

12.64 MARKING SINGLE LETTERS IN OTHER TYPE STYLES

List of Tables

Special marking must be used when single letters representing mathematical objects are to be set in

Index

any typeface other than italics. A mathematical text may require the use of some roman letters,

usually to indicate properties different from those expressed by the same letters in italics. Underlining

is the standard method of indicating italics, but it can be used instead, with instructions to the

12.62:

typesetter, to indicate letters that are to be in roman. If, however, the editor does not use general

Marking italic type

instructions but underlines all letters to be set italic, then letters not underlined will be set, as implied,

12.63:

Common

in roman type. Double underlining is used to indicate small capitals. Wavy underlining is used for

abbreviations

boldface. Color codes are often used to indicate other typefaces. For example, red underlining or

12.64:

circling can be used for Fraktur, blue for script, green for sans serif, and so forth. The general

Marking single

letters in other

instructions to the typesetter must clearly explain the marking and coding system used. If a

type styles

photocopy must be made of the edited manuscript for estimating by the typesetter or for querying the

12.65:

author, avoid color coding.

Mathematics fonts

12.66:

Marking subscripts

and superscripts

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Preparation and Editing of Paper Manuscripts

of Contents

List of Figures

12.65 MATHEMATICS FONTS

List of Tables

Boldface, script, Fraktur, and sans serif are frequently used in mathematical expressions.

Index

12.63:

Double-struck, or blackboard, characters are often used for special mathematical symbols--for

Common

abbreviations

example, N, Z, Q, R, C (see 12.14).

12.64:

Marking single

letters in other

type styles

12.65:

Mathematics fonts

12.66:

Marking subscripts

and superscripts

12.67:

Examples of

marked copy

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Preparation and Editing of Paper Manuscripts

of Contents

List of Figures

12.66 MARKING SUBSCRIPTS AND SUPERSCRIPTS

List of Tables

As long as inferior and superior characters have been marked in a few places by the symbols âˆänd

Index

âˆ§ (see examples below), and new characters or symbols are identified when they first appear, a

typesetter should have no difficulty interpreting the manuscript. If the spatial relationship of terms is

not clearly shown in a typed or handwritten expression, the terms should be marked to avoid

12.63:

ambiguity. For example, given the copy

Common

abbreviations

12.64:

Marking single

letters in other

it may not be clear from the manuscript whether this means

type styles

12.65:

Mathematics fonts

12.66:

The expression should therefore be marked in one of the following ways for complete clarity:

Marking subscripts

and superscripts

12.67:

Examples of

marked copy

The examples above show the subscripts and superscripts aligned, or stacked. See 12.38 for discussion

and examples of staggered subscripts and superscripts.

12: MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Preparation and Editing of Paper Manuscripts

of Contents

List of Figures

12.67 EXAMPLES OF MARKED COPY

List of Tables

Figure 12.1 shows a page of a paper manuscript as marked initially by the author and then by the

Index

editor before being sent to the typesetter. The author's marks merely identify ambiguous symbols.

Figure 12.2 shows that same page set in type. Figure 12.3 shows the LaTeX source code that would

generate the first part of figure 12.2. Signs and symbols that could be misread by the typesetter should

12.63:

be clearly identified on a paper manuscript by marginal notations or in a separate list. For lists of

Common

abbreviations

symbols and special characters commonly used in mathematics, see table 12.1. Illegible handwriting

12.64:

and unidentifiable signs and symbols can reduce composition speed and result in time-consuming

Marking single

and costly corrections. Certain letters, numbers, and symbols can easily be misread, especially when

letters in other

type styles

Greek, Fraktur, script, and sans serif letters are handwritten rather than typed. Some of the characters

12.65:

that cause the most difficulty are shown in table 12.4.

Mathematics fonts

12.66:

Marking subscripts

and superscripts

12.67:

Examples of

marked copy

12 : MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 12.1

List of Figures

An example of typewritten and hand-marked mathematical copy. (Note that this page is not intended

List of Tables

to make mathematical sense but is merely meant to illustrate some of the issues that may arise in

Index

preparing mathematical copy.)

12 : MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 12.2

List of Figures

The page of manuscript shown in figure 12.1 set in type. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

12 : MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 12.3

List of Figures

LaTeX source listing that would generate a portion of the mathematical copy shown in figure 12.2.

List of Tables

PDF Version >>

Index

12 : MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

of Contents

PDF Version >>

List of Figures

List of Tables

Index

12 : MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

of Contents

PDF Version >>

List of Figures

List of Tables

Index

12 : MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

of Contents

PDF Version >>

List of Figures

List of Tables

Index

12 : MATHEMATICS IN TYPE

Table

of Contents

PDF Version >>

List of Figures

List of Tables

Index

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

of Contents

Overview

List of Figures

13.1

Scope of this chapter—and where else to look

List of Tables

13.2

Quotations and modern scholarship

13.3

Giving credit and seeking permission

Index

13.4

When to paraphrase rather than quote

13.5

When quotation and attribution is unnecessary

13.6

Ensuring accuracy of quotations

Permissible Changes to Quotations

13.7

Permissible changes to punctuation, capitalization, and spelling

13.8

Permissible changes to typography and layout

Quotations in Relation to Text

Run In or Set Off

13.9

Run-in versus block quotations

13.10 Choosing between run-in and block quotations

Assimilation into the Surrounding Text

13.11 Logical and grammatical assimilation

13.12 Integrating tenses and pronouns

Initial Capital or Lowercase Letter

13.13 Changing capitalization to suit syntax—an overview

13.14 Initial capital or lowercase—run-in quotations

13.15 Initial capital or lowercase—block quotations

13.16 Brackets to indicate a change in capitalization

Introductory Phrases and Punctuation

13.17 Colon preceding a quotation

13.18 Comma preceding a quotation

13.19 Period rather than colon preceding a quotation

Paragraphing

13.20 Block quotations of more than one paragraph

13.21 Block quotations beginning in text

13.22 Text following a block quotation

Poetry

13.23 Setting off poetry

13.24 Uniform indention for poetry

13.25 Long lines and runovers in poetry

13.26 Quotation marks in poems

13.27 Run-in poetry quotations

Quotation Marks

Double or Single

13.28 Quotations and "quotes within quotes"

13.29 Quotation marks in block quotations

Run-In Quotations of More Than One Paragraph

13.30 Quotation marks across paragraphs

13.31 Quotations within quotations across paragraphs

13.32 Running in more than one stanza of poetry

13.33 Running in letters

Quotation Marks Omitted

13.34 Epigraphs

13.35 Decorative initials ("drop caps" and raised initials)

13.36 Maxims, questions, and the like

Speech, Dialogue, and Conversation

13.37 Direct discourse

13.38 Single-word speech

13.39 Faltering or interrupted speech

13.40 Alternatives to quotation marks

13.41 Unspoken discourse

13.42 Numerals in direct discourse

13.43 Indirect discourse

Drama, Discussions and Interviews, and Field Notes

13.44 Drama

13.45 Shared lines and runover lines in verse drama

13.46 Discussions and interviews

13.47 Field notes

Ellipses

13.48 Ellipses defined

13.49 Danger of skewing meaning

13.50 When not to use ellipsis points

13.51 Ellipses with periods

13.52 Ellipses with other punctuation

13.53 Deliberately incomplete sentence

13.54 Whole or partial paragraphs omitted

13.55 Ellipsis points in poetry and verse drama

13.56 Bracketed ellipses

Interpolations and Clarifications

13.57 Missing or illegible words

13.58 Bracketed clarifications

13.59 "Sic"

13.60 "Italics added"

13.61 Interpolations requiring quotation marks

Citing Sources in Text

13.62 Use of parentheses with in-text citations

13.63 Full in-text citation

13.64 The use of "ibid." with subsequent in-text citations

13.65 Frequent reference to a single source cited in a note

Sources Following Run-In Quotations

13.66 Punctuation following source

13.67 Question mark or exclamation point preceding source

Sources Following Block Quotations

13.68 Punctuation preceding source

13.69 Parenthetical citations with poetry extracts

13.70 Shortened references to poetry extracts

Foreign-Language Quotations

13.71 Typographic style of foreign quotations

13.72 Whether translation is needed

13.73 Where to place translations

13.74 Source plus translation

13.75 Including original-language version in note

13.76 Crediting the translation

13.77 Adjusting translations

13.78 Editing translations

13.79 The sin of retranslation

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

13.1 SCOPE OF THIS CHAPTER--AND WHERE ELSE TO LOOK

List of Tables

This chapter offers recommendations for incorporating words quoted from other sources--and, to a

Index

lesser degree, for presenting speech and other forms of dialogue--in text. For the use of quotation

marks for purposes other than direct quotation, see the discussions throughout 7.47--76. For quotation

marks with titles of works, see the discussions in 8.154--95. For citing the sources of quotations,

13.1:

discussed only peripherally here, see chapters 14 and 15. For formatting block quotations in a

Scope of this

chapterâ€”and

manuscript, see 2.18, 2.19; for the manuscript editor's responsibilities regarding quoted material, see

where else to look

2.58. For quotation marks in relation to surrounding text and punctuation, see 6.6, 6.9--11.

13.2:

Quotations and

modern scholarship

13.3:

Giving credit and

seeking permission

13.4:

When to

paraphrase rather

than quote

13.5:

When quotation

and attribution is

unnecessary

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

13.2 QUOTATIONS AND MODERN SCHOLARSHIP

List of Tables

Few ideas spring up on their own, and the act of assimilating the words of others is central to

Index

modern scholarship. In the words of Jacques Barzun and Henry F. Graff, "Quoting other writers and

citing the places where their words are to be found are by now such common practices that it is

pardonable to look upon the habit as natural, not to say instinctive. It is of course nothing of the kind,

13.1:

but a very sophisticated act, peculiar to a civilization that uses printed books, believes in evidence,

Scope of this

1

chapterâ€”and

and makes a point of assigning credit or blame in a detailed, verifiable way." The observation holds

where else to look

true in a world where more and more ideas are created, published, shared, and archived

13.2:

electronically.

Quotations and

modern scholarship

13.3:

Giving credit and

seeking permission

1. The Modern Researcher, 5th ed. (Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1992), 273.

13.4:

When to

paraphrase rather

than quote

13.5:

When quotation

and attribution is

unnecessary

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

13.3 GIVING CREDIT AND SEEKING PERMISSION

List of Tables

Whether quoting, paraphrasing, or using others' ideas to advance their own arguments, authors

Index

should give explicit credit to the source of those words or ideas. This credit often takes the form of a

formal citation incorporated into a note or parenthetical reference. For a full discussion of

documentation, see chapters 14 and 15. In addition, written permission may be needed, especially for

13.1:

direct quotations, as follows: for more than a line or two of a poem or a song lyric in copyright; for

Scope of this

chapterâ€”and

prose quotations of, say, more than three paragraphs or for many short passages from a work in

where else to look

copyright; or for any excerpt from certain unpublished materials (letters, e-mail messages, and so

13.2:

forth). For more information about permissions, consult chapter 4, especially 4.69--91.

Quotations and

modern scholarship

13.3:

Giving credit and

seeking permission

13.4:

When to

paraphrase rather

than quote

13.5:

When quotation

and attribution is

unnecessary

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

13.4 WHEN TO PARAPHRASE RATHER THAN QUOTE

List of Tables

Authors drawing on the work of others to illustrate their arguments should first decide whether

Index

direct quotation or paraphrase will be more effective. Too many quotations with too little

commentary can pose a distraction, and readers may choose to skip over long or frequent quotations.

And in some cases, authors who notice an error in a passage they wish to quote should paraphrase

13.2:

the original, eliminating the error. For "silent correction," see 13.7 (item 5); for sic, see 13.59.

Quotations and

modern scholarship

13.3:

Giving credit and

seeking permission

13.4:

When to

paraphrase rather

than quote

13.5:

When quotation

and attribution is

unnecessary

13.6:

Ensuring accuracy

of quotations

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

13.5 WHEN QUOTATION AND ATTRIBUTION IS UNNECESSARY

List of Tables

Commonly known or readily verifiable facts, proverbs, and other familiar expressions can be stated

Index

without quotation or attribution unless the wording is taken directly from another source. Authors, of

course, must be absolutely sure of such facts, and editors should flag anything that seems suspicious

(see 13.6). No source need be cited for such statements as the following:

13.3:

Giving credit and

On April 14, 1865, a few days after Lee's surrender, Lincoln was assassinated.

seeking permission

No one can convince the young that practice makes perfect.

13.4:

When to

If reading maketh a full man, Henry is half-empty.

paraphrase rather

than quote

See also 6.51.

13.5:

When quotation

and attribution is

unnecessary

13.6:

Ensuring accuracy

of quotations

13.7:

Permissible changes

to punctuation,

capitalization, and

spelling

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

13.6 ENSURING ACCURACY OF QUOTATIONS

List of Tables

It is impossible to overemphasize the importance of meticulous accuracy in quoting from the works of

Index

others. Authors should check every direct quotation against the original or, if the original is

unavailable, against a careful transcription of the passage. This should be done before the manuscript

is submitted to the publisher. Though manuscript editors will often query apparent errors of

13.4:

transcription, they typically will not have access to an author's sources. Moreover, it takes far less

When to

paraphrase rather

time for authors to accurately transcribe quotations during the writing stage than for authors or

than quote

editors to go back to the original sources once a work is submitted for publication. See also 2.30,

13.5:

2.132.

When quotation

and attribution is

unnecessary

13.6:

Ensuring accuracy

of quotations

13.7:

Permissible changes

to punctuation,

capitalization, and

spelling

13.8:

Permissible changes

to typography and

layout

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Permissible Changes to Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.7 PERMISSIBLE CHANGES TO PUNCTUATION, CAPITALIZATION, AND SPELLING

List of Tables

Although in a direct quotation the wording should be reproduced exactly, the following changes are

Index

generally permissible to make a passage fit into the syntax and typography of the surrounding text.

See also 13.8.

13.5:

1. Single quotation marks may be changed to double, and double to single (see 13.28); punctuation

When quotation

relative to quotation marks should be adjusted accordingly (see 6.9). Guillemets and other types

and attribution is

unnecessary

of quotation marks in a foreign language may be changed to regular single or double quotation

13.6:

marks (see 13.71).

Ensuring accuracy

of quotations

2. The initial letter may be changed to a capital or a lowercase letter (see 13.13--16).

13.7:

3. A final period may be omitted or changed to a comma as required, and punctuation may be

Permissible changes

omitted where ellipsis points are used (see 13.48--56).

to punctuation,

capitalization, and

4. Original note reference marks (and the notes to which they refer) may be omitted unless

spelling

omission would affect the meaning of the quotation. If an original note is included, the

13.8:

quotation may best be set off as a block quotation (see 13.9), with the note in smaller type at the

Permissible changes

to typography and

end, or the note may be summarized in the accompanying text. Authors may, on the other hand,

layout

add note references of their own within quotations.

13.9:

Run-in versus block

5. Obvious typographic errors may be corrected silently (without comment or sic; see 13.59),

quotations

unless the passage quoted is from an older work or a manuscript source where idiosyncrasies of

spelling are generally preserved. If spelling and punctuation are modernized or altered for

clarity, readers must be so informed in a note, in a preface, or elsewhere.

6. In quoting from early printed documents, the archaic Latin Êƒ (small letter esh, Unicode

character U+0283, similar to the integral sign), used to represent a lowercase s at the beginning

or in the middle but never at the end of a word ("Such goodneÊƒs of your juÊƒtice, that our

Êƒoul . . ."), may be changed to a modern s. Similarly, Vanitie and Vncertaintie (a quoted title)

may be changed to Vanitie and Uncertaintie, but writers or editors without a strong background

in classical or Renaissance studies should generally be wary of changing u to v, i to j, or vice

versa. See also 11.61, 11.142--43.

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Permissible Changes to Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.8 PERMISSIBLE CHANGES TO TYPOGRAPHY AND LAYOUT

List of Tables

The following elements of typography and layout may be changed to assimilate a quotation to the

Index

surrounding text:

1. The typeface or font should be changed to agree with the surrounding text.

13.6:

2. Words in full capitals in the original may be set in small caps, if that is the preferred style for

Ensuring accuracy

the surrounding text. (See also 10.8.)

of quotations

3. In dialogue, names of speakers may be moved from a centered position to flush left.

13.7:

Permissible changes

4. Underlined words in a quoted manuscript may be printed as italics, unless the underlining

to punctuation,

capitalization, and

itself is considered integral to the source or otherwise worthy of reproducing.

spelling

5. In quoting correspondence, such matters as paragraph indention and the position of the

13.8:

salutation and signature may be adjusted.

Permissible changes

to typography and

layout

For paragraph indention in block quotations, see 13.20. For reproducing poetry extracts, see 13.23--27.

13.9:

For permissible changes to titles of books, articles, poems, and other works, see 8.163.

Run-in versus block

quotations

13.10:

Choosing between

run-in and block

quotations

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Run In or Set Off

of Contents

List of Figures

13.9 RUN-IN VERSUS BLOCK QUOTATIONS

List of Tables

Quoted text may be either run in to the surrounding text and enclosed in quotation marks, "like this,"

Index

or set off as a block quotation, or extract. Block quotations, which are not enclosed in quotation

marks, always start a new line. They are further distinguished from the surrounding text by being

indented (from the left and sometimes from the right) or set in smaller type or a different font from

13.7:

the text. These matters are normally decided by the publisher's designer or by journal style. Authors

Permissible changes

to punctuation,

preparing block quotations should simply use the indention feature of their word processors (see

capitalization, and

spelling

2.18). For poetry, see 13.23--27.

13.8:

Permissible changes

to typography and

layout

13.9:

Run-in versus block

quotations

13.10:

Choosing between

run-in and block

quotations

13.11:

Logical and

grammatical

assimilation

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Run In or Set Off

of Contents

List of Figures

13.10 CHOOSING BETWEEN RUN-IN AND BLOCK QUOTATIONS

List of Tables

In deciding whether to run in or set off a quotation, length is usually the deciding factor. In general, a

Index

short quotation, especially one that is not a full sentence, should be run in. A hundred words or more

(at least six to eight lines of text in a typical manuscript) can generally be set off as a block quotation.

Other criteria apply, however. A quotation of two or more paragraphs is best set off (see 13.20--22), as

13.8:

are quoted correspondence (if salutations, signatures, and such are included), lists, and any material

Permissible changes

to typography and

that requires special formatting. If many quotations of varying length occur close together, running

layout

them all in may make for easier reading. But where quotations are being compared or otherwise used

13.9:

as entities in themselves, it may be better to set them all as block quotations, however short. Poetry is

Run-in versus block

quotations

set off far more often than prose (see 13.23--27).

13.10:

Choosing between

run-in and block

quotations

13.11:

Logical and

grammatical

assimilation

13.12:

Integrating tenses

and pronouns

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Assimilation into the Surrounding Text

of Contents

List of Figures

13.11 LOGICAL AND GRAMMATICAL ASSIMILATION

List of Tables

In incorporating fragmentary quotations into a text, phrase the surrounding sentence in such a way

Index

that the quoted words fit into it logically and grammatically, quoting only as much of the original as

is necessary.

13.9:

The narrator's constant references to "malicious code and obsolete data" detract from a more fundamental

Run-in versus block

issue--that we are dumping "the burden of human history" onto computer hard drives. It is this vision of

quotations

the future that is most alarming: "If (when?) we run out of sources of electricity," she asks, "will we forget

13.10:

who we are?"

Choosing between

run-in and block

quotations

13.11:

Logical and

grammatical

assimilation

13.12:

Integrating tenses

and pronouns

13.13:

Changing

capitalization to

suit syntaxâ€”an

overview

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Assimilation into the Surrounding Text

of Contents

List of Figures

13.12 INTEGRATING TENSES AND PRONOUNS

List of Tables

In quoting verbatim, writers need to integrate tenses and pronouns into the new context.

Index

[ Original] Mr. Moll took particular pains to say to you, gentlemen, that these eleven people here are guilty

of murder; he calls this a cold-blooded, deliberate and premeditated murder.

13.10:

Choosing between

[ As quoted] According to Darrow, Moll had told the jury that the eleven defendants were "guilty of murder"

run-in and block

and had described the murder as "cold-blooded, deliberate and premeditated."

quotations

13.11:

Occasional adjustments to the original may be bracketed. This device should be used sparingly,

Logical and

grammatical

however.

assimilation

13.12:

Mr. Graham has resolutely ducked the issue, saying he won't play the game of rumormongering, even

Integrating tenses

though he has "learned from [his] mistakes."

and pronouns

13.13:

Changing

capitalization to

suit syntaxâ€”an

overview

13.14:

Initial capital or

lowercaseâ€”run-in

quotations

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Initial Capital or Lowercase Letter

of Contents

List of Figures

13.13 CHANGING CAPITALIZATION TO SUIT SYNTAX--AN OVERVIEW

List of Tables

Aside from proper nouns and some of the words derived from them (see 8.1), words in English

Index

publications are normally lowercased unless they begin a sentence (or, often, a line of poetry). To suit

this requirement, the first word in a quoted passage must often be adjusted to conform to the

surrounding text. In most types of works, this adjustment may be done silently, as such capitalization

13.11:

does not normally affect the significance of the quoted matter, which is assumed to have been taken

Logical and

grammatical

from another context. In some types of works, however, it may be obligatory to indicate the change

assimilation

by bracketing the initial quoted letter; for examples of this practice, appropriate to legal writing and

13.12:

some types of textual commentary, see 13.16.

Integrating tenses

and pronouns

13.13:

Changing

capitalization to

suit syntax—an

overview

13.14:

Initial capital or

lowercase—run-in

quotations

13.15:

Initial capital or

lowercase—block

quotations

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Initial Capital or Lowercase Letter

of Contents

List of Figures

13.14 INITIAL CAPITAL OR LOWERCASE--RUN-IN QUOTATIONS

List of Tables

When a quotation introduced midsentence forms a syntactical part of the sentence, it begins with a

Index

lowercase letter even if the original begins with a capital.

Benjamin Franklin admonishes us to "plough deep while sluggards sleep."

13.12:

Integrating tenses

With another aphorism he reminded his readers that "experience keeps a dear school, but fools will learn in

and pronouns

no other"--an observation as true today as then.

13.13:

Changing

When the quotation has a more remote syntactic relation to the rest of the sentence, the initial letter

capitalization to

suit syntax—an

remains capitalized.

overview

13.14:

As Franklin advised, "Plough deep while sluggards sleep."

Initial capital or

lowercase—run-in

quotations

His aphorism "Experience keeps a dear school, but fools will learn in no other" is a cogent warning to people

of all ages.

13.15:

Initial capital or

lowercase—block

On the other hand, if a quotation that is only a part of a sentence in the original forms a complete

quotations

sentence as quoted, a lowercase letter may be changed to a capital if appropriate. In the example that

13.16:

Brackets to

follows, "those" begins midsentence in the original (see 13.15).

indicate a change

in capitalization

Aristotle put it this way: "Those who are eminent in virtue usually do not stir up insurrections, always a

minority."

but

Aristotle believed that "those who are eminent in virtue usually do not stir up insurrections, always a

minority."

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Initial Capital or Lowercase Letter

of Contents

List of Figures

13.15 INITIAL CAPITAL OR LOWERCASE--BLOCK QUOTATIONS

List of Tables

The consideration of whether to lowercase a capital letter beginning a block quotation is exactly the

Index

same as it is for run-in quotations (see 13.14): the initial letter of a block quotation that is capitalized

in the original may be lowercased if the syntax demands it. In the following example, the quotation

from Aristotle in the Jowett translation (Modern Library) begins in the original with a capital letter

13.13:

and a paragraph indention. See also 13.20.

Changing

capitalization to

suit syntax—an

In discussing the reasons for political disturbances, Aristotle observes that

overview

13.14:

revolutions also break out when opposite parties, e.g. the rich and the people, are equally

Initial capital or

balanced, and there is little or no middle class; for, if either party were manifestly superior, the

lowercase—run-in

quotations

other would not risk an attack upon them. And, for this reason, those who are eminent in

13.15:

virtue usually do not stir up insurrections, always a minority. Such are the beginnings and

Initial capital or

causes of the disturbances and revolutions to which every form of government is liable. ( Politics

lowercase—block

quotations

5.4)

13.16:

Brackets to

On the other hand, the capital should be retained--or a lowercase letter should be changed to a

indicate a change

capital--if the syntax requires it. See also 13.17.

in capitalization

13.17:

In discussing the reasons for political disturbances, Aristotle makes the following observations:

Colon preceding a

quotation

Revolutions also break out when opposite parties, e.g. the rich and the people, are equally

balanced, and there is little or no middle class; . . .

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Initial Capital or Lowercase Letter

of Contents

List of Figures

13.16 BRACKETS TO INDICATE A CHANGE IN CAPITALIZATION

List of Tables

In some legal writing, textual commentary, and other contexts, it is considered obligatory to indicate

Index

any change in capitalization by brackets. This practice, easy enough to apply in any context but

unnecessary in most, must be practiced consistently throughout a work.

13.14:

According to article 6, section 6, she is given the power "[t]o extend or renew any existing indebtedness."

Initial capital or

lowercaseâ€”run-in

quotations

"[R]eal estates may be conveyed by lease and release, or bargain and sale," according to section 2 of the

Northwest Ordinance.

13.15:

Initial capital or

lowercaseâ€”block

Let us compare Aristotle's contention that "[i]nferiors revolt in order that they may be equal, and equals that

quotations

they may be superior" ( Politics 5.2), with his later observation that "[r]evolutions also break out when

13.16:

opposite parties, e.g. the rich and the people, are equally balanced" (5.4).

Brackets to

indicate a change

in capitalization

13.17:

Colon preceding a

quotation

13.18:

Comma preceding

a quotation

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Introductory Phrases and Punctuation

of Contents

List of Figures

13.17 COLON PRECEDING A QUOTATION

List of Tables

A formal introductory phrase, such as thus or as follows, is usually followed by a colon.

Index

The role of the author has been variously described. Henry Fielding, at the beginning of his History of Tom

Jones, defines it thus: "An author ought to consider himself, not as a gentleman who gives a private or

eleemosynary treat, but rather as one who keeps a public ordinary, at which all persons are welcome for

13.15:

Initial capital or

their money."

lowercaseâ€”block

quotations

13.16:

Brackets to

indicate a change

in capitalization

13.17:

Colon preceding a

quotation

13.18:

Comma preceding

a quotation

13.19:

Period rather than

colon preceding a

quotation

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Introductory Phrases and Punctuation

of Contents

List of Figures

13.18 COMMA PRECEDING A QUOTATION

List of Tables

When it is simply a matter of identifying a speaker, a comma is used after said, replied, asked, and

Index

similar verbs; a colon, though never wrong in such instances, should be used sparingly (e.g., to

introduce quotations that consist of more than one sentence).

13.16:

Garrett replied, "I hope you are not referring to me."

Brackets to

indicate a change

in capitalization

Fish writes, "What [the students] did was move the words out of a context (the faculty club door) in which

they had a literal and obvious meaning into another context (my classroom) in which the meaning was no

13.17:

Colon preceding a

less obvious and literal and yet was different."

quotation

13.18:

Comma preceding

a quotation

13.19:

Period rather than

colon preceding a

quotation

13.20:

Block quotations of

more than one

paragraph

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Introductory Phrases and Punctuation

of Contents

List of Figures

13.19 PERIOD RATHER THAN COLON PRECEDING A QUOTATION

List of Tables

Unless introduced by thus, as follows, or other wording that requires a colon, a block quotation may be

Index

preceded by a period rather than a colon. Such usage should be applied consistently.

He then took a clearly hostile position toward Poland, having characterized it as a Fascist state that

13.17:

oppressed the Ukrainians, the Belorussians, and others.

Colon preceding a

quotation

Under present conditions, suppression of that state will mean that there will be one less Fascist

13.18:

state. It will not be a bad thing if Poland suffers a defeat and thus enables us to include new

Comma preceding

territories and new populations in the socialist system.

a quotation

13.19:

Period rather than

colon preceding a

quotation

13.20:

Block quotations of

more than one

paragraph

13.21:

Block quotations

beginning in text

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Paragraphing

of Contents

List of Figures

13.20 BLOCK QUOTATIONS OF MORE THAN ONE PARAGRAPH

List of Tables

Quoted material of more than a paragraph, even if very brief, is best set off as a block quotation. (For

Index

a less desirable alternative, see 13.30.) A multiparagraph block quotation should generally reflect the

paragraph breaks of the original. But if the first paragraph quoted includes the beginning of that

paragraph, it need not start with a first-line paragraph indention. Subsequent paragraphs in the

13.18:

quotation should be indicated either by first-line paragraph indention or (less desirably) by extra line

Comma preceding

a quotation

space between the paragraphs (see also 13.22). The following example, from Jane Austen's Pride and

13.19:

Prejudice, includes four full paragraphs:

Period rather than

colon preceding a

quotation

He began to wish to know more of her, and as a step towards conversing with her himself, attended to her

conversation with others. His doing so drew her notice. It was at Sir William Lucas's, where a large party

13.20:

Block quotations of

were assembled.

more than one

"What does Mr. Darcy mean," said she to Charlotte, "by listening to my conversation with Colonel

paragraph

Forster?"

13.21:

"That is a question which Mr. Darcy only can answer."

Block quotations

beginning in text

"But if he does it any more I shall certainly let him know that I see what he is about. He has a very

13.22:

satirical eye, and if I do not begin by being impertinent myself, I shall soon grow afraid of him."

Text following a

block quotation

If the first part of the opening paragraph were to be omitted, it would still begin flush left. For ellipsis

points at the beginning of paragraphs, see 13.54.

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Paragraphing

of Contents

List of Figures

13.21 BLOCK QUOTATIONS BEGINNING IN TEXT

List of Tables

A long quotation may begin with a few words run in to the text. This device should be used only

Index

when text intervenes between the quoted matter in the text and its continuation.

"There is no safe trusting to dictionaries and definitions," observed Charles Lamb.

13.19:

Period rather than

We should more willingly fall in with this popular language, if we did not find brutality

colon preceding a

sometimes awkwardly coupled with valour in the same vocabulary. The comic writers . . . have

quotation

contributed not a little to mislead us upon this point. To see a hectoring fellow exposed and

13.20:

beaten upon the stage, has something in it wonderfully diverting. ("Popular Fallacies," Essays of

Block quotations of

more than one

Elia, 277)

paragraph

13.21:

"In short," says Crane, summarizing Gordon's philosophy,

Block quotations

beginning in text

there has been "almost a continual improvement" in all branches of human knowledge; . . .

13.22:

Text following a

A permissible alternative is to set off the entire quotation, enclosing the intervening words of text in

block quotation

brackets.

13.23:

Setting off poetry

There is no safe trusting to dictionaries and definitions [observed Charles Lamb]. We should

more willingly . . .

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Paragraphing

of Contents

List of Figures

13.22 TEXT FOLLOWING A BLOCK QUOTATION

List of Tables

If the text following a block quotation is a continuation of the paragraph that introduces the

Index

quotation, it begins flush left. If the resuming text begins a new paragraph, it receives a paragraph

indention. In works where all new paragraphs appear flush left, however, it may be necessary to

impose extra line spacing before new paragraphs following block quotations.

13.20:

Block quotations of

more than one

paragraph

13.21:

Block quotations

beginning in text

13.22:

Text following a

block quotation

13.23:

Setting off poetry

13.24:

Uniform indention

for poetry

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Poetry

of Contents

List of Figures

13.23 SETTING OFF POETRY

List of Tables

Two or more lines of verse are best set off as a block quotation (cf. 14.33). A poetry quotation, if

Index

isolated, is often visually centered on the page between the left and right margins (usually relative to

the longest line), but if two or more stanzas of the same poem appear on the same page, a uniform

indention from the left may work better (see 13.24). A half line to a full line of space should appear

13.21:

between stanzas. Within each piece or stanza, the indention pattern of the original should be

Block quotations

beginning in text

reproduced (but indention should be distinguished from runover lines; see 13.25). For placement of

13.22:

the source, see 13.69.

Text following a

block quotation

13.23:

Setting off poetry

13.24:

Uniform indention

for poetry

13.25:

Long lines and

runovers in poetry

If the quotation does not begin with a full line, space approximating the omitted part should be left.

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Poetry

of Contents

List of Figures

13.24 UNIFORM INDENTION FOR POETRY

List of Tables

Where all or most poetic quotations consist of blank verse (as in studies of Shakespeare) or are very

Index

long, uniform indention from the left margin usually works best (e.g., a left indention that matches

the one, if any, used for prose extracts).

13.22:

I have full cause of weeping, but this heart

Text following a

Shall break into a hundred thousand flaws

block quotation

Or ere I'll weep. O Fool! I shall go mad.

13.23:

Setting off poetry

13.24:

Uniform indention

for poetry

13.25:

Long lines and

runovers in poetry

13.26:

Quotation marks in

poems

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Poetry

of Contents

List of Figures

13.25 LONG LINES AND RUNOVERS IN POETRY

List of Tables

Runover lines (the remainder of lines too long to appear as a single line) are usually indented one em

Index

from the line above, as in the following quotation from Walt Whitman's "Song of Myself":

My tongue, every atom of my blood, form'd from this

13.23:

soil, this air,

Setting off poetry

Born here of parents born here from parents the same,

13.24:

and their parents the same,

Uniform indention

I, now thirty-seven years old in perfect health begin,

for poetry

Hoping to cease not till death.

13.25:

Long lines and

runovers in poetry

Runover lines, although indented, should be distinct from new lines deliberately indented by the poet

13.26:

(as in the Herbert poem quoted in 13.23). Generally, a unique and uniform indent for runovers will be

Quotation marks in

enough to accomplish this.

poems

13.27:

Run-in poetry

quotations

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Poetry

of Contents

List of Figures

13.26 QUOTATION MARKS IN POEMS

List of Tables

In a departure from its former practice, Chicago no longer recommends "clearing" quotation marks at

Index

the start of a line of poetry--that is, placing them outside the alignment of the poem, with lines left-

aligned as if the quotation marks were not there. Quotation marks at the start of a line should instead

be aligned with the other lines in the excerpt.

13.24:

Uniform indention

He holds him with his skinny hand.

for poetry

"There was a ship," quoth he.

13.25:

Long lines and

"Hold off! unhand me, grey-beard loon!"

runovers in poetry

Eftsoons his hand dropt he.

13.26:

Quotation marks in

poems

13.27:

Run-in poetry

quotations

13.28:

Quotations and

"quotes within

quotes"

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotations in Relation to Text >> Poetry

of Contents

List of Figures

13.27 RUN-IN POETRY QUOTATIONS

List of Tables

If space or context in the text or in a note requires that two or more lines be run in, the lines are

Index

separated by a slash, with one space on either side (in printed works, a thin space to an en space).

Andrew Marvell's praise of John Milton, "Thou has not missed one thought that could be fit, / And all that

13.25:

was improper does omit" ("On Paradise Lost"), might well serve as our motto.

Long lines and

runovers in poetry

For running in more than one stanza (to be avoided if at all possible), see 13.32.

13.26:

Quotation marks in

poems

13.27:

Run-in poetry

quotations

13.28:

Quotations and

"quotes within

quotes"

13.29:

Quotation marks in

block quotations

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Double or Single

of Contents

List of Figures

13.28 QUOTATIONS AND "QUOTES WITHIN QUOTES"

List of Tables

Quoted words, phrases, and sentences run into the text are enclosed in double quotation marks.

Index

Single quotation marks enclose quotations within quotations; double marks, quotations within these;

and so on. (The practice in the United Kingdom and elsewhere is often the reverse: single marks are

used first, then double, and so on.) When the material quoted consists entirely of a quotation within a

13.26:

quotation, only one set of quotation marks need be employed (usually double quotation marks). For

Quotation marks in

poems

permissible changes from single to double quotation marks and vice versa, see 13.7 (item 1); see also

13.27:

13.61. For dialogue, see 13.37. For technical uses of single quotation marks, see 7.50, 8.129.

Run-in poetry

quotations

"Don't be absurd!" said Henry. "To say that â€˜I mean what I say' is the same as â€˜I say what I mean' is to

13.28:

be as confused as Alice at the Mad Hatter's tea party. You remember what the Hatter said to her: â€˜Not the

Quotations and

"quotes within

same thing a bit! Why you might just as well say that "I see what I eat" is the same thing as "I eat what I

quotes"

see"!' "

13.29:

Quotation marks in

Note carefully not only the placement of the single and double closing quotation marks but also that

block quotations

of the exclamation points in relation to those marks in the example above. Question marks and

13.30:

Quotation marks

exclamation points are placed just within the set of quotation marks ending the element to which such

across paragraphs

terminal punctuation belongs. For the placement of other punctuation--commas, periods, question

marks, and so on--in relation to closing quotation marks, see 6.9--11.

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Double or Single

of Contents

List of Figures

13.29 QUOTATION MARKS IN BLOCK QUOTATIONS

List of Tables

Although material set off as a block quotation is not enclosed in quotation marks, quoted matter

Index

within the block quotation is enclosed in double quotation marks--in other words, treated as it would

be in text (see 13.28). An author or editor who changes a run-in quotation to a block quotation must

delete the opening and closing quotation marks and change any internal ones. The following

13.27:

examples illustrate the same material first in run-in form and then as a block quotation:

Run-in poetry

quotations

The narrator then breaks in: "Imagine Bart's surprise, dear reader, when Emma turned to him and said,

13.28:

Quotations and

contemptuously, â€˜What "promise"?' "

"quotes within

quotes"

The narrator then breaks in:

13.29:

Quotation marks in

Imagine Bart's surprise, dear reader, when Emma turned to him and said, contemptuously,

block quotations

"What â€˜promise'?"

13.30:

Quotation marks

across paragraphs

Similarly, converting a block quotation to a run-in quotation requires adding and altering quotation

13.31:

marks. For interpolations that include quoted matter, see 13.61.

Quotations within

quotations across

paragraphs

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Run-In Quotations of More Than One Paragraph

of Contents

List of Figures

13.30 QUOTATION MARKS ACROSS PARAGRAPHS

List of Tables

If quoted material of more than one paragraph cannot be set as a block quotation (which is normally

Index

much preferred; see 13.10), quotation marks are needed at the beginning of each paragraph but at the

end of only the final paragraph. (Note that each successive paragraph must begin on a new line, as in

the original.) The same practice is followed in dialogue when one speaker's remarks extend over more

13.28:

than one paragraph.

Quotations and

"quotes within

quotes"

13.29:

Quotation marks in

block quotations

13.30:

Quotation marks

across paragraphs

13.31:

Quotations within

quotations across

paragraphs

13.32:

Running in more

than one stanza of

poetry

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Run-In Quotations of More Than One Paragraph

of Contents

List of Figures

13.31 QUOTATIONS WITHIN QUOTATIONS ACROSS PARAGRAPHS

List of Tables

If a run-in quoted passage contains an interior quotation that runs for more than one paragraph, a

Index

single quotation mark appears at the beginning and end of the interior quotation, and both double

and single quotation marks appear before each new paragraph belonging to it. If the interior

quotation concludes at the same point as the including one, the single closing quotation mark

13.29:

precedes the double one.

Quotation marks in

block quotations

13.30:

Quotation marks

across paragraphs

13.31:

Quotations within

quotations across

paragraphs

13.32:

Running in more

than one stanza of

poetry

13.33:

Running in letters

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Run-In Quotations of More Than One Paragraph

of Contents

List of Figures

13.32 RUNNING IN MORE THAN ONE STANZA OF POETRY

List of Tables

A quotation that spans more than one stanza should be presented as an extract if at all possible (see

Index

13.23). If it must be run in to the text (set off by quotation marks), two slashes (//) should appear

between stanzas. For the use of the slash between run-in lines of poetry, see 13.27.

13.30:

Quotation marks

across paragraphs

13.31:

Quotations within

quotations across

paragraphs

13.32:

Running in more

than one stanza of

poetry

13.33:

Running in letters

13.34:

Epigraphs

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Run-In Quotations of More Than One Paragraph

of Contents

List of Figures

13.33 RUNNING IN LETTERS

List of Tables

A letter quoted in its entirety should be set off as a block quotation. In the undesirable event that it

Index

must be run in, it should carry opening quotation marks before the first line (including the salutation)

and before each paragraph. Closing marks appear only after the last line (often the signature). See

13.30.

13.31:

Quotations within

quotations across

paragraphs

13.32:

Running in more

than one stanza of

poetry

13.33:

Running in letters

13.34:

Epigraphs

13.35:

Decorative initials

("drop caps" and

raised initials)

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Quotation Marks Omitted

of Contents

List of Figures

13.34 EPIGRAPHS

List of Tables

Quotation marks are not used around epigraphs (quotations used as ornaments preceding a text

Index

rather than as illustration or documentation). Like block quotations, epigraphs receive a distinctive

typographic treatment--often being set in a smaller typeface and indented from the right or left, and

sometimes italicized. Treatment of sources, which are usually set on a separate line, also varies,

13.32:

though more than one epigraph used in the same work should receive consistent treatment. For more

Running in more

than one stanza of

on sources, see 13.68--70. See also 1.36.

poetry

13.33:

Oh, what a tangled web we weave,

Running in letters

When first we practice to deceive!

13.34:

--Sir Walter Scott

Epigraphs

13.35:

It is a truth universally acknowledged, that a single man in possession of a good fortune, must be in want of

Decorative initials

("drop caps" and

a wife.

raised initials)

Jane Austen, Pride and Prejudice

13.36:

Maxims, questions,

and the like

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Quotation Marks Omitted

of Contents

List of Figures

13.35 DECORATIVE INITIALS ("DROP CAPS" AND RAISED INITIALS)

List of Tables

When the first word of a chapter or section opens with a large raised or dropped initial letter, and the

Index

first words of the chapter or section consist of a run-in quotation, the opening quotation mark is often

omitted.

13.33:

Running in letters

13.34:

Epigraphs

13.35:

If the opening quotation mark is included, it should appear in the same size and with the same

Decorative initials

("drop caps" and

vertical alignment as the regular text.

raised initials)

13.36:

Maxims, questions,

and the like

13.37:

Direct discourse

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Quotation Marks Omitted

of Contents

List of Figures

13.36 MAXIMS, QUESTIONS, AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

Maxims, mottoes, rules, and other familiar expressions, sometimes enclosed in quotation marks, are

Index

discussed in 6.51 and 8.197. Questions that do not require quotation marks are discussed in 6.52 and

6.67.

13.34:

Epigraphs

13.35:

Decorative initials

("drop caps" and

raised initials)

13.36:

Maxims, questions,

and the like

13.37:

Direct discourse

13.38:

Single-word speech

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Speech, Dialogue, and Conversation

of Contents

List of Figures

13.37 DIRECT DISCOURSE

List of Tables

Direct discourse or dialogue is traditionally enclosed in quotation marks. A change in speaker is

Index

usually indicated by a new paragraph, as in the following excerpt from Huckleberry Finn:

"Ransomed? What's that?"

13.35:

"I don't know. But that's what they do. I've seen it in books; and so of course that's what we've got to do."

Decorative initials

"But how can we do it if we don't know what it is?"

("drop caps" and

raised initials)

"Why, blame it all, we've got to do it. Don't I tell you it's in the books? Do you want to go to doing

different from what's in the books, and get things all muddled up?"

13.36:

Maxims, questions,

and the like

If one speech (usually a particularly long one) occupies more than a paragraph, opening quotation

13.37:

marks are needed at the beginning of each new paragraph, with a closing quotation mark placed at

Direct discourse

the end of only the final paragraph (see also 13.30).

13.38:

Single-word speech

13.39:

Faltering or

interrupted speech

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Speech, Dialogue, and Conversation

of Contents

List of Figures

13.38 SINGLE-WORD SPEECH

List of Tables

Words such as yes, no, where, how, and why, when used singly, are not enclosed in quotation marks

Index

except in direct discourse. See also 6.68.

Ezra always answered yes; he could never say no to a friend.

13.36:

Please stop asking why.

Maxims, questions,

and the like

but

13.37:

Direct discourse

"Yes," he replied weakly.

Again she repeated, "Why?"

13.38:

Single-word speech

13.39:

Faltering or

interrupted speech

13.40:

Alternatives to

quotation marks

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Speech, Dialogue, and Conversation

of Contents

List of Figures

13.39 FALTERING OR INTERRUPTED SPEECH

List of Tables

Suspension points--also used to indicate an ellipsis--may be used to suggest faltering or fragmented

Index

speech accompanied by confusion or insecurity. In the examples below, note the relative positions of

the suspension points and other punctuation. (For the use of suspension points to indicate ellipses, see

13.48--56.)

13.37:

Direct discourse

"I . . . I . . . that is, we . . . yes, we have made an awful blunder!"

13.38:

"The ship . . . oh my God! . . . it's sinking!" cried Henrietta.

Single-word speech

"But . . . but . . . ," said Tom.

13.39:

Faltering or

interrupted speech

Interruptions or abrupt changes in thought are usually indicated by em dashes. See 6.84.

13.40:

Alternatives to

quotation marks

13.41:

Unspoken discourse

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Speech, Dialogue, and Conversation

of Contents

List of Figures

13.40 ALTERNATIVES TO QUOTATION MARKS

List of Tables

In some languages, em dashes are used to present dialogue; for examples, see 11.34, 11.52, 11.80,

Index

11.121. For the use of guillemets (Â« >>), see 11.32, 11.44, 11.52, 11.79, 11.121.

13.38:

Single-word speech

13.39:

Faltering or

interrupted speech

13.40:

Alternatives to

quotation marks

13.41:

Unspoken discourse

13.42:

Numerals in direct

discourse

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Speech, Dialogue, and Conversation

of Contents

List of Figures

13.41 UNSPOKEN DISCOURSE

List of Tables

Thought, imagined dialogue, and other interior discourse may be enclosed in quotation marks or not,

Index

according to the context or the writer's preference.

"I don't care if we have offended Morgenstern," thought Vera. "Besides," she told herself, "they're all fools."

13.39:

Faltering or

Why, we wondered, did we choose this route?

interrupted speech

13.40:

The following passage from James Joyce's Ulysses illustrates interior monologue and stream of

Alternatives to

consciousness without need of quotation marks:

quotation marks

13.41:

Unspoken discourse

Reading two pages apiece of seven books every night, eh? I was young. You bowed to yourself in the

mirror, stepping forward to applause earnestly, striking face. Hurray for the Goddamned idiot! Hray! No-

13.42:

Numerals in direct

one saw: tell no-one. Books you were going to write with letters for titles. Have you read his F?

discourse

13.43:

Indirect discourse

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Speech, Dialogue, and Conversation

of Contents

List of Figures

13.42 NUMERALS IN DIRECT DISCOURSE

List of Tables

In quoting directly from spoken sources (e.g., interviews, speeches, or dialogue from a film or a play),

Index

or when writing direct discourse for a drama or a work of fiction, numbers that might otherwise be

rendered as numerals can often be spelled out. This practice requires editorial discretion. Years can

usually be rendered as numerals, as can trade names that include numerals. And for dialogue that

13.40:

includes more than a few large numbers, it may be more practical to use numerals. See also 9.2, 9.7.

Alternatives to

quotation marks

Jarred's answer was a mix of rage and humiliation: "For the last time, I do not have seven hundred thirty-

13.41:

Unspoken discourse

seven dollars and eleven cents! I don't even have a quarter for the parking meter, for that matter."

13.42:

Numerals in direct

Like most proofreaders, she is a perfectionist. "I'm never happy with a mere ninety-nine and forty-four one-

discourse

hundredths percent."

13.43:

Indirect discourse

but

13.44:

Drama

"Do you prefer shopping at 7-Eleven or Circle K?"

"I didn't get around to reading Nineteen Eighty-Four until 1985," he finally admitted.

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Speech, Dialogue, and Conversation

of Contents

List of Figures

13.43 INDIRECT DISCOURSE

List of Tables

Indirect discourse, which paraphrases dialogue, takes no quotation marks. See also 6.52.

Index

Tom told Huck they had to do it that way because the books said so.

Very well, you say, but is there no choice?

13.41:

Unspoken discourse

13.42:

Numerals in direct

discourse

13.43:

Indirect discourse

13.44:

Drama

13.45:

Shared lines and

runover lines in

verse drama

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Drama, Discussions and Interviews, and Field Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

13.44 DRAMA

List of Tables

In plays, the speaker's name is usually set in a font distinct from the dialogue--caps and small caps,

Index

for example, or all small caps. The dialogue is not enclosed in quotation marks and is usually set in

flush-and-hang style, or hanging indention (the style most often used in bibliographies and indexes

and illustrated in the following examples).

13.42:

Numerals in direct

R. ROISTER DOISTER. Except I have her to my wife, I shall run mad.

discourse

M. MERYGREEKE. Nay, "unwise" perhaps, but I warrant you for "mad."

13.43:

Indirect discourse

Stage directions are usually italicized.

13.44:

Drama

ALGERNON. That is quite a different matter. She is my aunt. ( Takes plate from below. ) Have some bread and

13.45:

Shared lines and

butter. The bread and butter is for Gwendolen. Gwendolen is devoted to bread and butter.

runover lines in

JACK, advancing to table and helping himself. And very good bread and butter it is too.

verse drama

13.46:

Discussions and

interviews

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Drama, Discussions and Interviews, and Field Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

13.45 SHARED LINES AND RUNOVER LINES IN VERSE DRAMA

List of Tables

In quoted excerpts, any indention used to indicate a single line of verse shared between two speakers

Index

in a play should be replicated (as in the example below, where the line begun by Barnardo is finished

by Marcellus). Runover lines may be indicated as in poetry by an indention of one em or more from

the line above (see also 13.25).

13.43:

Indirect discourse

13.44:

Drama

13.45:

Shared lines and

runover lines in

verse drama

13.46:

Discussions and

interviews

13.47:

Field notes

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Drama, Discussions and Interviews, and Field Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

13.46 DISCUSSIONS AND INTERVIEWS

List of Tables

The transcription of a discussion or an interview is treated in much the same way as drama (see

Index

13.44). Interjections such as "laughter" are italicized and enclosed in brackets (rather than

parentheses). Paragraph indention is usually preferred to flush-and-hang style, though flush-and-

hang, which allows easier identification of the speaker, may work better if several speakers' names

13.44:

appear and the comments are relatively brief. Though speakers' names are usually followed by a

Drama

period, a colon may be used instead.

13.45:

Shared lines and

runover lines in

INTERVIEWER . You weren't thinking that this technology would be something you could use to connect

verse drama

to the Office of Tibet in New York or to different Tibet support groups in Europe?

13.46:

RESPONDENT . No. Nobody seemed to have anything to do with GreenNet in the Tibet world at that

Discussions and

interviews

time. That came much later. That's not really right. I specifically wasn't interested in connecting to the

community of Tibet martyrs and fellow sufferers [ laughs] and the emotional pathological there-but-for-the-

13.47:

Field notes

grace-of-god-go-I people.

13.48:

Ellipses defined

An author's previously unpublished transcriptions of interviews or discussions can usually be edited

for such matters as capitalization, spelling, and minor grammatical slips or elisions. If an author has

imposed more significant alterations, these should be explained in a note, a preface, or elsewhere.

Previously published transcriptions should be quoted as they appear in the original source.

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Quotation Marks >> Drama, Discussions and Interviews, and Field Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

13.47 FIELD NOTES

List of Tables

An author's transcriptions of unpublished field notes (the author's own or those of a colleague or

Index

assistant) pose a special case. Unlike quotations from published sources or transcriptions of

interviews, field notes need not be presented verbatim--whether they are presented as quotations or

woven into the text. Rather, they should be edited for consistency--with other notes and with the

13.45:

surrounding text--in matters of spelling, capitalization, punctuation, treatment of numbers, and so

Shared lines and

runover lines in

forth. And even if the author is in possession of signed releases, any otherwise anonymous subjects or

verse drama

informants should generally be presented under pseudonyms; a note should be appended to the text

13.46:

to indicate that this is the case. Editors should query authors if it is not clear that appropriate

Discussions and

interviews

provisions have been made.

13.47:

Field notes

13.48:

Ellipses defined

13.49:

Danger of skewing

meaning

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ellipses

of Contents

List of Figures

13.48 ELLIPSES DEFINED

List of Tables

An ellipsis is the omission of a word, phrase, line, paragraph, or more from a quoted passage. Such

Index

omissions are made of material that is considered irrelevant to the discussion at hand (or,

occasionally, to adjust for the grammar of the surrounding text). Chicago style is to indicate such

omissions by the use of three spaced periods (but see 13.51) rather than by another device such as

13.46:

asterisks. These points (or dots) are called ellipsis points when they indicate an ellipsis and

Discussions and

interviews

suspension points when they indicate suspended or interrupted thought (see 13.39). They must

13.47:

always appear together on the same line (through the use of nonbreaking spaces, available in most

Field notes

software applications), along with any following punctuation; if an ellipsis appears at the beginning

13.48:

of a line, any preceding punctuation (including a period) will appear at the end of the line above. If

Ellipses defined

they prefer, authors may prepare their manuscripts using the single-glyph three-dot ellipsis character

13.49:

Danger of skewing

on their word processors (Unicode 2026), usually with a space on either side; editors following

meaning

Chicago style will replace these with spaced periods.

13.50:

When not to use

ellipsis points

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ellipses

of Contents

List of Figures

13.49 DANGER OF SKEWING MEANING

List of Tables

Since quotations from another source have been separated from their original context, particular care

Index

needs to be exercised when eliding text to ensure that the sense of the original is not lost or

misrepresented. A deletion must not result in a statement alien to the original material. And in

general, ellipses should not be used to join two statements that are far apart in the original. Accuracy

13.47:

of sense and emphasis must accompany accuracy of transcription.

Field notes

13.48:

Ellipses defined

13.49:

Danger of skewing

meaning

13.50:

When not to use

ellipsis points

13.51:

Ellipses with

periods

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ellipses

of Contents

List of Figures

13.50 WHEN NOT TO USE ELLIPSIS POINTS

List of Tables

Ellipsis points are normally not used (1) before the first word of a quotation, even if the beginning of

Index

the original sentence has been omitted; or (2) after the last word of a quotation, even if the end of the

original sentence has been omitted, unless the sentence as quoted is deliberately incomplete (see

13.53).

13.48:

Ellipses defined

13.49:

Danger of skewing

meaning

13.50:

When not to use

ellipsis points

13.51:

Ellipses with

periods

13.52:

Ellipses with other

punctuation

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ellipses

of Contents

List of Figures

13.51 ELLIPSES WITH PERIODS

List of Tables

A period is added before an ellipsis to indicate the omission of the end of a sentence, unless the

Index

sentence is deliberately incomplete (see 13.53). Similarly, a period at the end of a sentence in the

original is retained before an ellipsis indicating the omission of material immediately following the

period. What precedes and, normally, what follows the four dots should be grammatically complete

13.49:

sentences as quoted, even if part of either sentence has been omitted. A complete passage from

Danger of skewing

meaning

Emerson's essay "Politics" reads:

13.50:

When not to use

The spirit of our American radicalism is destructive and aimless: it is not loving; it has no ulterior and

ellipsis points

divine ends; but is destructive only out of hatred and selfishness. On the other side, the conservative party,

13.51:

composed of the most moderate, able, and cultivated part of the population, is timid, and merely defensive

Ellipses with

periods

of property. It vindicates no right, it aspires to no real good, it brands no crime, it proposes no generous

policy, it does not build, nor write, nor cherish the arts, nor foster religion, nor establish schools, nor

13.52:

Ellipses with other

encourage science, nor emancipate the slave, nor befriend the poor, or the Indian, or the immigrant. From

punctuation

neither party, when in power, has the world any benefit to expect in science, art, or humanity, at all

13.53:

commensurate with the resources of the nation.

Deliberately

incomplete

sentence

The passage might be shortened as follows:

The spirit of our American radicalism is destructive and aimless. . . . On the other side, the conservative

party . . . is timid, and merely defensive of property. . . . It does not build, nor write, nor cherish the arts,

nor foster religion, nor establish schools.

Note that the first word after an ellipsis is capitalized if it begins a new grammatical sentence. Some

types of works require that such changes to capitalization be bracketed; see 13.16. See also 13.56.

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ellipses

of Contents

List of Figures

13.52 ELLIPSES WITH OTHER PUNCTUATION

List of Tables

Other punctuation appearing in the original text--a comma, a colon, a semicolon, a question mark, or

Index

an exclamation point--may precede or follow three (but never four) ellipsis points. Whether to

include the additional mark of punctuation depends on whether keeping it aids comprehension or is

required for the grammar of the sentence. Placement of the other punctuation depends on whether the

13.50:

omission precedes or follows the mark; when the omission precedes it, a nonbreaking space should be

When not to use

ellipsis points

used between the ellipsis and the mark of punctuation to prevent the mark from carrying over to the

13.51:

beginning of a new line (see 13.48). Note that this before-or-after distinction is usually not made with

Ellipses with

periods, where--without the aid of brackets (see 13.56)--it is likely to go unnoticed (see 13.51).

periods

13.52:

It does not build, . . . nor cherish the arts, nor foster religion.

Ellipses with other

punctuation

As to Endymion, was it a poem . . . to be treated contemptuously by those who had celebrated, with various

13.53:

Deliberately

degrees of complacency and panegyric, Paris, and Woman, and A Syrian Tale . . . ? Are these the men who

incomplete

. . . presumed to draw a parallel between the Rev. Mr. Milman and Lord Byron?

sentence

13.54:

When a species . . . increases inordinately in numbers in a small tract, epidemics . . . often ensue: and here

Whole or partial

paragraphs omitted

we have a limiting check independent of the struggle for life. But even some of these so-called epidemics

appear to be due to parasitic worms . . . : and here comes in a sort of struggle between the parasite and its

prey.

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ellipses

of Contents

List of Figures

13.53 DELIBERATELY INCOMPLETE SENTENCE

List of Tables

Three dots are used at the end of a quoted sentence that is deliberately left grammatically incomplete.

Index

Everyone knows that the Declaration of Independence begins with the sentence "When, in the course of

human events . . ." But how many people can recite more than the first few lines of the document?

13.51:

Ellipses with

Have you had a chance to look at the example beginning "The spirit of our American radicalism . . ."?

periods

13.52:

Note that no space intervenes between a final ellipsis point and a closing quotation mark.

Ellipses with other

punctuation

13.53:

Deliberately

incomplete

sentence

13.54:

Whole or partial

paragraphs omitted

13.55:

Ellipsis points in

poetry and verse

drama

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ellipses

of Contents

List of Figures

13.54 WHOLE OR PARTIAL PARAGRAPHS OMITTED

List of Tables

The omission of one or more paragraphs within a quotation is indicated by four ellipsis points at the

Index

end of the paragraph preceding the omitted part. (If that paragraph ends with an incomplete

sentence, only three points are used; see 13.53.) If the first part of a paragraph is omitted within a

quotation, a paragraph indention and three ellipsis points appear before the first quoted word. It is

13.52:

thus possible to use ellipsis points both at the end of one paragraph and at the beginning of the next,

Ellipses with other

punctuation

as illustrated in the following excerpt from Alexander Pope's "Letter to a Noble Lord":

13.53:

Deliberately

I should be obliged indeed to lessen this respect, if all the nobility . . . are but so many hereditary fools, if

incomplete

the privilege of lords be to want brains, if noblemen can hardly write or read. . . .

sentence

Were it the mere excess of your Lordship's wit, that carried you thus triumphantly over all the bounds of

13.54:

Whole or partial

decency, I might consider your Lordship on your Pegasus, as a sprightly hunter on a mettled horse. . . .

paragraphs omitted

. . . Unrivalled as you are, in making a figure, and in making a speech, methinks, my Lord, you may well

13.55:

give up the poor talent of making a distich.

Ellipsis points in

poetry and verse

drama

13.56:

Bracketed ellipses

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ellipses

of Contents

List of Figures

13.55 ELLIPSIS POINTS IN POETRY AND VERSE DRAMA

List of Tables

Omission of the end of a line of verse is indicated by four ellipsis points if what precedes them is a

Index

complete grammatical sentence, otherwise by three. The omission of a full line or of several

consecutive lines within a quoted poem or drama in verse is indicated by one line of widely spaced

dots approximately the length of the line above (or of the missing line, if that is determinable). See

13.53:

also 13.23--27.

Deliberately

incomplete

sentence

Type of the antique Rome! Rich reliquary

13.54:

Of lofty contemplation . . .

Whole or partial

(Edgar Allan Poe, "The Coliseum")

paragraphs omitted

13.55:

She would dwell on such dead themes, not as one who remembers,

Ellipsis points in

poetry and verse

But rather as one who sees.

drama

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.56:

Past things retold were to her as things existent,

Bracketed ellipses

Things present but as a tale.

13.57:

(Thomas Hardy, "One We Knew")

Missing or illegible

words

This royal throne of kings, this sceptred isle,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

This blessed plot, this earth, this realm, this England.

( Richard II, 2.1.40--50)

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Ellipses

of Contents

List of Figures

13.56 BRACKETED ELLIPSES

List of Tables

Especially in languages that make liberal use of suspension points, it is a common practice to bracket

Index

ellipses (see, e.g., 11.35; see also 11.10). In an English context where both ellipses and suspension

points are needed, the latter may be explained at each instance in a note (e.g., "suspension points in

original"); for more than a few such instances, authors may choose instead to bracket ellipses, but

13.54:

only after explaining such a decision in a note, a preface, or elsewhere. The rules for placing

Whole or partial

paragraphs omitted

bracketed ellipses are the same as the rules outlined in the rest of this section, with one exception--a

13.55:

period is placed before or after the ellipsis depending on its placement in the original. Compare the

Ellipsis points in

passage that follows to the passages in 13.51.

poetry and verse

drama

The spirit of our American radicalism is destructive and aimless [. . .]. On the other side, the conservative

13.56:

Bracketed ellipses

party [. . .] is timid, and merely defensive of property. [. . .] It does not build, nor write, nor cherish the arts,

13.57:

nor foster religion, nor establish schools.

Missing or illegible

words

Note that a space appears before an opening bracket; a space appears after a closing bracket except

13.58:

when a period, comma, or other mark of punctuation follows. Within brackets, the sequence is

Bracketed

clarifications

bracket-period-space-period-space-period-bracket. Nonbreaking spaces are needed only for the two

spaces between the periods within the brackets.

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Interpolations and Clarifications

of Contents

List of Figures

13.57 MISSING OR ILLEGIBLE WORDS

List of Tables

In reproducing or quoting from a document in which certain words are missing or illegible, an author

Index

may use ellipsis points (see 13.48--56), a bracketed comment or guess (sometimes followed by a

question mark), or both. If ellipsis points alone are used (useful for a passage with more than a few

lacunae), their function as a stand-in for missing or illegible words must be explained in the text or in

13.55:

a note. If a bracketed gloss comes from a different source, the source must be cited in a note or

Ellipsis points in

poetry and verse

elsewhere. See also 6.97.

drama

13.56:

If you will assure me of your . . . [illegible], I shall dedicate my life to your endeavor.

Bracketed ellipses

13.57:

She marched out of the door, headed for the [president's?] office.

Missing or illegible

words

A 2-em dash (see 6.90), sometimes in combination with an interpolated guess, may also be used for

13.58:

missing material. As with ellipsis points, this device should be used consistently and should be

Bracketed

clarifications

explained (in prefatory material or a note).

13.59:

"Sic"

I have great marvel that ye will so soon incline to every man his device and [counsel and ——] specially in

matters of small impor[tance ——] yea, and as [it is] reported [unto me——] causes as meseemeth th[a——]

nothing to [——]ne gentlewomen.

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Interpolations and Clarifications

of Contents

List of Figures

13.58 BRACKETED CLARIFICATIONS

List of Tables

Insertions may be made in quoted material to clarify an ambiguity, to provide a missing word or

Index

letters (see 13.57), to correct an error, or, in a translation, to give the original word or phrase where

the English fails to convey the exact sense. Such interpolations, which should be kept to a minimum

lest they irritate or distract readers, are enclosed in brackets (never in parentheses). See also 6.97,

13.56:

13.12.

Bracketed ellipses

13.57:

Marcellus, doubtless in anxious suspense, asks Barnardo, "What, has this thing [the ghost of Hamlet's father]

Missing or illegible

words

appear'd again tonight?"

13.58:

Bracketed

"Well," said she, "if Mr. L[owell] won't go, then neither will I."

clarifications

13.59:

Saha once remarked of Nehru that "his position in this country can be described by a phrase which

"Sic"

Americans use with respect to Abraham Lincoln [read: George Washington], â€˜first in war, first in peace.' "

13.60:

"Italics added"

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Interpolations and Clarifications

of Contents

List of Figures

13.59 "SIC"

List of Tables

Literally meaning "so," "thus," "in this manner," and traditionally set in italics, sic may be inserted in

Index

brackets following a word misspelled or wrongly used in the original. This device should be used

only where it is relevant to call attention to such matters (and especially where readers might

otherwise assume the mistake is in the transcription rather than the original) or where paraphrase or

13.57:

silent correction is inappropriate (see 13.4, 13.7 [item 5]).

Missing or illegible

words

In September 1862, J. W. Chaffin, president of the Miami Conference of Wesleyan Methodist Connection,

13.58:

Bracketed

urged Lincoln that "the confiscation law past [ sic] at the last session of Congress should be faithfully

clarifications

executed" and that "to neglect this national righteousness" would prove "disastrous to the American people."

13.59:

"Sic"

Sic should not be used merely to call attention to unconventional spellings, which should be explained

13.60:

(if at all) in a note or in prefatory material. Similarly, where material with many errors and variant

"Italics added"

spellings (such as a collection of informal letters) is reproduced as written, a prefatory comment or a

13.61:

Interpolations

note to that effect will make a succession of sic s unnecessary.

requiring quotation

marks

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Interpolations and Clarifications

of Contents

List of Figures

13.60 "ITALICS ADDED"

List of Tables

An author wishing to call particular attention to a word or phrase in quoted material may italicize it

Index

but must tell readers what has been done, by means of such formulas as "italics mine," "italics added,"

"emphasis added," or "emphasis mine." This information appears either in parentheses following the

quotation or in a source note to the quotation. If there are italics in the original of the passage quoted,

13.58:

the information is best enclosed in brackets and placed directly after the added italics. Consistency in

Bracketed

clarifications

method throughout a work is essential.

13.59:

"Sic"

You have watched the conduct of Ireland in the difficult circumstances of the last nine months, and that

13.60:

conduct I do not hesitate to risk saying on your behalf has evoked in every breast a responsive voice of

"Italics added"

sympathy, and an increased conviction that we may deal freely and yet deal prudently with our fellow-

13.61:

subjects beyond the Channel. Such is your conviction. (William Ewart Gladstone, October 1891; italics

Interpolations

added)

requiring quotation

marks

In reality not one didactic poet has ever yet attempted to use any parts or processes of the particular art

13.62:

Use of parentheses

which he made his theme, unless in so far as they seemed susceptible of poetic treatment, and only because

with in-text

they seemed so. Look at the poem of Cyder by Philips, of the Fleece by Dyer, or (which is a still weightier

citations

example) at the Georgics of Virgil,--does any of these poets show the least anxiety for the correctness of your

principles [my italics], or the delicacy of your manipulations, in the worshipful arts they affect to teach?

(Thomas De Quincey, "Essay on Pope")

Occasionally it may be important to point out that italics in a quotation were indeed in the original.

Here the usual phrase is "italics in the original" or, for example, "De Quincey's italics."

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Interpolations and Clarifications

of Contents

List of Figures

13.61 INTERPOLATIONS REQUIRING QUOTATION MARKS

List of Tables

Occasionally a bracketed or parenthetical interpolation that includes quotation marks appears in

Index

material already enclosed in quotation marks. In such cases, the double/single rule (see 13.28) does not

apply; the quotation marks within the brackets may remain double.

13.59:

"Do you mean that a double-headed calf ["two-headed calf" in an earlier version] has greater value than two

"Sic"

normal calves? That a freak of nature, even though it cannot survive, is to be more highly treasured for its

13.60:

rarity than run-of-the-mill creatures are for their potential use?"

"Italics added"

13.61:

Interpolations

requiring quotation

marks

13.62:

Use of parentheses

with in-text

citations

13.63:

Full in-text citation

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Citing Sources in Text

of Contents

List of Figures

13.62 USE OF PARENTHESES WITH IN-TEXT CITATIONS

List of Tables

If the source of a direct quotation is not given in a note, it is usually placed in the text in parentheses.

Index

Although the source normally follows a quotation, it may come earlier if it fits more smoothly into the

introductory text (as in the second example in 13.63). The examples in this section focus on full and

short forms of parenthetical citation that may be needed in shorter works with no notes or

13.60:

bibliography or to provide in-text citations to a frequently quoted work. The advice in this section on

"Italics added"

placement relative to surrounding text is applicable to both systems of citation recommended by

13.61:

Interpolations

Chicago: notes and bibliography (chapter 14) and author-date (chapter 15).

requiring quotation

marks

13.62:

Use of parentheses

with in-text

citations

13.63:

Full in-text citation

13.64:

The use of "ibid."

with subsequent in-

text citations

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Citing Sources in Text

of Contents

List of Figures

13.63 FULL IN-TEXT CITATION

List of Tables

An entire source may be given in parentheses immediately following a quotation, or some of the data

Index

may be worked into the text, with details confined to parentheses. See also 6.99. For more on the

proper form for full citations, see 14.18.

13.61:

"If an astronaut falls into a black hole, its mass will increase, but eventually the energy equivalent of that

Interpolations

extra mass will be returned to the universe in the form of radiation. Thus, in a sense, the astronaut will be

requiring quotation

marks

‘recycled' " (Stephen W. Hawking, A Brief History of Time: From the Big Bang to Black Holes [New York:

Bantam Books, 1988], 112).

13.62:

Use of parentheses

with in-text

In the preface to their revision of The Complete Plain Words by Sir Ernest Gowers (Penguin Books, 1986),

citations

Sidney Greenbaum and Janet Whitcut admit that "Gowers' frequent use of the first person pronoun ‘I'

13.63:

presents a difficulty for revisers," since Fraser, having decided to retain the "I," tried "to distinguish the ‘I' of

Full in-text citation

Gowers from the ‘I' of Fraser by listing in his preface the parts of the book that were wholly or mainly

13.64:

The use of "ibid."

written by each of the authors."

with subsequent in-

text citations

13.65:

Frequent reference

to a single source

cited in a note

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Citing Sources in Text

of Contents

List of Figures

13.64 THE USE OF "IBID." WITH SUBSEQUENT IN-TEXT CITATIONS

List of Tables

If a second passage from the same source is quoted close to the first and there is no intervening

Index

quotation from a different source, ibid. (set in roman) may be used in the second parenthetical

reference (e.g., "ibid., 114"); ibid. alone may be used if the reference is to the same page. Avoid

overusing ibid. : for more than the occasional repeated reference to the same source--as in an extended

13.62:

discussion of a work of fiction--only a parenthetical page number is necessary. If a quotation from

Use of parentheses

with in-text

another source has intervened, a shortened reference may be given (e.g., "Hawking, Brief History of

citations

Time, 114"). For more on shortened citations, see 14.24--31; for the use of ibid. in notes, see 14.29.

13.63:

Full in-text citation

13.64:

The use of "ibid."

with subsequent in-

text citations

13.65:

Frequent reference

to a single source

cited in a note

13.66:

Punctuation

following source

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Citing Sources in Text

of Contents

List of Figures

13.65 FREQUENT REFERENCE TO A SINGLE SOURCE CITED IN A NOTE

List of Tables

In a work containing notes, the full citation of a source may be given in a note at first mention, with

Index

subsequent citations made parenthetically in the text. This method is especially suited to literary

studies that use frequent quotations from a single source. In a study of Much Ado about Nothing, for

example, the note would list the edition and include wording such as "Text references are to act,

13.63:

scene, and line of this edition." A parenthetical reference to act 3, scene 4, lines 46--47, would then

Full in-text citation

appear as in the example below. In references to a work of fiction, page numbers alone may be given.

13.64:

The use of "ibid."

with subsequent in-

"Ye light o' love with your heels! then, if your husband have stables enough, you'll see he shall lack no

text citations

barns," says Beatrice (3.4.46--47).

13.65:

Frequent reference

Where a number of such sources (or different editions of a single source) are used in the same work,

to a single source

cited in a note

the title (or edition) may need to be indicated in the parenthetical references; it may be advisable to

13.66:

devise an abbreviation for each and to include a list of the abbreviations at the beginning or end of

Punctuation

following source

the work (see 14.54, 14.55). See also 14.260, 14.267, 14.43.

13.67:

Question mark or

exclamation point

preceding source

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Citing Sources in Text >> Sources Following Run-In Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.66 PUNCTUATION FOLLOWING SOURCE

List of Tables

After a run-in quotation, the source is usually given after the closing quotation mark, followed by the

Index

rest of the surrounding sentence (including any comma, semicolon, colon, or dash; but see 13.67) or

the final punctuation of that sentence.

13.64:

With his "Nothing will come of nothing; speak again" (1.1.92), Lear tries to draw from his youngest daughter

The use of "ibid."

an expression of filial devotion.

with subsequent in-

text citations

It has been more than a century since Henry Adams said: "Fifty years ago, science took for granted that the

13.65:

Frequent reference

rate of acceleration could not last. The world forgets quickly, but even today the habit remains of founding

to a single source

statistics on the faith that consumption will continue nearly stationary" ( Education, 493).

cited in a note

13.66:

Has it been more than a century since Henry Adams observed that "fifty years ago, science took for granted

Punctuation

following source

that the rate of acceleration could not last" ( Education, 493)?

13.67:

Question mark or

A parenthetical reference need not immediately follow the quotation as long as it is clear what it

exclamation point

belongs to. For examples, see 13.63 (second example), 13.65. See also 15.25.

preceding source

13.68:

Punctuation

preceding source

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Citing Sources in Text >> Sources Following Run-In Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.67 QUESTION MARK OR EXCLAMATION POINT PRECEDING SOURCE

List of Tables

When a quotation comes at the end of a sentence and is itself a question or an exclamation, that

Index

punctuation is retained within the quotation marks, and a period is still added after the closing

parentheses. (Compare the third example in 13.66.)

13.65:

And finally, in the frenzy of grief that kills him, Lear rails, "Why should a dog, a horse, a rat, have life, /

Frequent reference

And thou no breath at all?" (5.3.306--7).

to a single source

cited in a note

13.66:

Punctuation

following source

13.67:

Question mark or

exclamation point

preceding source

13.68:

Punctuation

preceding source

13.69:

Parenthetical

citations with

poetry extracts

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Citing Sources in Text >> Sources Following Block Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.68 PUNCTUATION PRECEDING SOURCE

List of Tables

The source of a block quotation is given in parentheses at the end of the quotation and in the same

Index

type size. The opening parenthesis appears after the final punctuation mark of the quoted material.

No period either precedes or follows the closing parenthesis. See also 6.99, 15.25.

13.66:

If you happen to be fishing, and you get a strike, and whatever it is starts off with the preliminaries of a

Punctuation

vigorous fight; and by and by, looking down over the side through the glassy water, you see a rosy golden

following source

gleam, the mere specter of a fish, shining below in the clear depths; and when you look again a sort of glory

13.67:

of golden light flashes and dazzles as it circles nearer beneath and around and under the boat; . . . and you

Question mark or

exclamation point

land a slim and graceful and impossibly beautiful three-foot goldfish, whose fierce and vivid yellow is

preceding source

touched around the edges with a violent red--when all these things happen to you, fortunate but bewildered

13.68:

fisherman, then you may know you have been fishing in the Galapagos Islands and have taken a Golden

Punctuation

preceding source

Grouper. (Gifford Pinchot, To the South Seas [Philadelphia: John Winston, 1930], 123)

13.69:

Parenthetical

Shortened references are treated in the same way as full ones. If a qualifier such as line, vol. , or p. is

citations with

required at the beginning of the shortened reference, it should be lowercased as with sources to run-

poetry extracts

in quotations.

13.70:

Shortened

references to

At last the fish came into sight--at first a mere gleam in the water, and then his full side. This was not even

poetry extracts

a distant cousin to the fish I thought I was fighting, but something else again entirely. (p. 142)

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Citing Sources in Text >> Sources Following Block Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.69 PARENTHETICAL CITATIONS WITH POETRY EXTRACTS

List of Tables

In order not to interfere with a poem's layout and overall presentation, parenthetical citations

Index

following poetry extracts are dropped to the line below the last line of the quotation. They may be

centered on the last letter of the longest line of the quotation or set flush with the left margin of the

poem; an additional line space may be added. Other positions are also possible (as in the examples in

13.67:

13.23 and 13.70), as long as consistency and clarity are preserved.

Question mark or

exclamation point

preceding source

Now more than ever seems it rich to die,

13.68:

To cease upon the midnight with no pain,

Punctuation

While thou art pouring forth thy soul abroad

preceding source

In such an ecstasy!

13.69:

(Keats, "Ode to a Nightingale," stanza 6)

Parenthetical

citations with

poetry extracts

13.70:

Shortened

references to

poetry extracts

13.71:

Typographic style

of foreign

quotations

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Citing Sources in Text >> Sources Following Block Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.70 SHORTENED REFERENCES TO POETRY EXTRACTS

List of Tables

Shortened references to poetry are treated the same way as full ones. A quotation from Edmund

Index

Spenser's The Faerie Queene, once the reader knows that reference is to book, canto, and stanza, might

appear thus:

13.68:

Who will not mercie unto others shew,

Punctuation

How can he mercy ever hope to have?

preceding source

(6.1.42)

13.69:

Parenthetical

citations with

poetry extracts

13.70:

Shortened

references to

poetry extracts

13.71:

Typographic style

of foreign

quotations

13.72:

Whether

translation is

needed

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Foreign-Language Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.71 TYPOGRAPHIC STYLE OF FOREIGN QUOTATIONS

List of Tables

Quotations in a foreign language that are incorporated into an English text are normally treated like

Index

quotations in English, set in roman type and run in or set off as block quotations according to their

length. They are punctuated as in the original except that quotation marks replace guillemets (or their

equivalents), and spacing relative to punctuation is adjusted to conform to the surrounding text (see

13.69:

11.10). For isolated words and phrases, see 7.49. For excerpts from the original language following an

Parenthetical

citations with

English translation, see 13.73.

poetry extracts

13.70:

The narrator's "treinta o cuarenta molinos de viento" become Quixote's "treinta, o pocos mÃ¡s, desaforados

Shortened

gigantes"--a numerical correspondence that lets the reader trust, at the very least, the hero's basic grasp of

references to

poetry extracts

reality.

13.71:

Typographic style

If em dashes are used for dialogue in the original (see 11.34, 11.52, 11.80, 11.121), they should be

of foreign

quotations

retained in a block quotation but may be replaced by quotation marks if only a phrase or sentence is

quoted.

13.72:

Whether

translation is

needed

13.73:

Where to place

translations

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Foreign-Language Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.72 WHETHER TRANSLATION IS NEEDED

List of Tables

Whether to provide translations of quoted passages depends on the linguistic abilities of the likely

Index

readers. For example, in a work to be read by classicists, Latin or Greek sources may be quoted freely

in the original. Or in a literary study of, say, Goethe, quotations from Goethe's work may be given in

the original German only. For a wider readership, translations should be furnished.

13.70:

Shortened

references to

poetry extracts

13.71:

Typographic style

of foreign

quotations

13.72:

Whether

translation is

needed

13.73:

Where to place

translations

13.74:

Source plus

translation

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Foreign-Language Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.73 WHERE TO PLACE TRANSLATIONS

List of Tables

A translation may follow the original in parentheses--or, as in 13.74, the original may follow a

Index

translation. Quotation marks need not be repeated for the parenthetical translation (or parenthetical

original, as the case may be); any internal quotation marks, however, should be included (as in the

second example). See also 6.93, 7.50. If a long sentence or more than one sentence appears in

13.71:

parentheses or brackets, as in the second example, closing punctuation of both the original and the

Typographic style

of foreign

translation should remain distinct.

quotations

13.72:

A line from Goethe, "Wer nie sein Brot mit Tränen aß" (Who never ate his bread with tears), comes to mind.

Whether

translation is

needed

À vrai dire, Abélard n'avoue pas un tel rationalisme: "je ne veux pas être si philosophe, écrit-il, que je résiste

à Paul, ni si aristotélicien que je me sépare du Christ." (As a matter of fact, Abelard admits no such

13.73:

Where to place

rationalism. "I do not wish to be so much of a philosopher," he writes, "that I resist Paul, nor so much of an

translations

Aristotelian that I separate myself from Christ.")

13.74:

Source plus

translation

13.75:

Including original-

language version in

note

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Foreign-Language Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.74 SOURCE PLUS TRANSLATION

List of Tables

When both a source and a translation are required in text, the source may be placed in parentheses,

Index

with the original (or translation, as the case may be) following, separated by a semicolon. The

following example quotes a thirteenth-century author writing in Middle Dutch. See also 13.66--67.

13.72:

Hadewijch insists that the most perfect faith is "unfaith," which endlessly stokes desire and endlessly

Whether

demands love from God. "Unfaith never allows desire to rest in any faith but always distrusts her, [feeling]

translation is

needed

that she is not loved enough" (letter 8:39; Ende ontrowe en laet gegherten niewers ghedueren in gheenre

trowen, sine mestrout hare altoes, datse niet ghenoech ghemint en es).

13.73:

Where to place

translations

If adding a translation or the original in text creates too much clutter, it may be placed in a note, in

13.74:

which case it is enclosed in quotation marks but not in parentheses or brackets (see 13.75).

Source plus

translation

13.75:

Including original-

language version in

note

13.76:

Crediting the

translation

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Foreign-Language Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.75 INCLUDING ORIGINAL-LANGUAGE VERSION IN NOTE

List of Tables

In many works, quotations from a foreign-language source need appear only in translation. Should

Index

the original be necessary, it can be placed in a note. If the parenthetical passage in the second example

in 13.73 were to appear in text without the French, as either a run-in or a block quotation, a note

could read as follows:

13.73:

Where to place

4. "À vrai dire, Abélard n'avoue pas un tel rationalisme: ‘je ne veux pas être si philosophe, écrit-il, que je

translations

résiste à Paul, ni si aristotélicien que je me sépare du Christ.' "

13.74:

Source plus

translation

See also 13.28.

13.75:

Including original-

language version in

note

13.76:

Crediting the

translation

13.77:

Adjusting

translations

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Foreign-Language Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.76 CREDITING THE TRANSLATION

List of Tables

When quoting a passage from a foreign language that requires a translation, authors should use a

Index

published English translation if one is available and give credit to the source of that translation,

including the title of the translation, the translator's name, relevant bibliographic details, and page

number (see 14.109). Authors providing their own translations should so state, in parentheses

13.74:

following the translation, in a note, or in the prefatory material--for example, "my translation" or

Source plus

translation

"Unless otherwise noted, all translations are my own." See also 11.6, 11.7.

13.75:

Including original-

language version in

note

13.76:

Crediting the

translation

13.77:

Adjusting

translations

13.78:

Editing translations

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Foreign-Language Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.77 ADJUSTING TRANSLATIONS

List of Tables

An author using a published translation may occasionally need to adjust a word or two. "Translation

Index

modified" or some such wording must then be added in parentheses or in a note (see also 13.60). In

addition, it is recommended that such modifications be indicated by square brackets (see 13.57, 13.58).

These devices should be used sparingly. If a published translation is unsuitable for the author's

13.75:

purpose, it should be abandoned and all quoted passages newly translated.

Including original-

language version in

note

13.76:

Crediting the

translation

13.77:

Adjusting

translations

13.78:

Editing translations

13.79:

The sin of

retranslation

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Foreign-Language Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.78 EDITING TRANSLATIONS

List of Tables

Quotations from published translations can be edited only with respect to the permissible changes

Index

described in 13.7. In new translations furnished by the author, however, capitalization, punctuation,

spelling, and idiom may be adjusted for consistency with the surrounding text.

13.75:

Including original-

language version in

note

13.76:

Crediting the

translation

13.77:

Adjusting

translations

13.78:

Editing translations

13.79:

The sin of

retranslation

13: QUOTATIONS AND DIALOGUE

Table

Chapter Contents >> Foreign-Language Quotations

of Contents

List of Figures

13.79 THE SIN OF RETRANSLATION

List of Tables

Never should a passage from a work originally published in English (or any other language, for that

Index

matter) be retranslated from a foreign-language version. For example, an author quoting from a

German study of Blackstone's Commentaries that quotes from Blackstone in German must track down

the original Blackstone passages in English and reproduce them. If unable to locate the original, the

13.75:

author must resort to paraphrase.

Including original-

language version in

note

13.76:

Crediting the

translation

13.77:

Adjusting

translations

13.78:

Editing translations

13.79:

The sin of

retranslation

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

Source Citations: An Overview

List of Figures

14.1

The purpose of source citations

List of Tables

14.2

Chicago's two systems of source citation

14.3

Other systems of source citation

Index

Considerations for Electronic Sources

14.4

Electronic resource identifiers

14.5

Uniform resource locators (URLs)

14.6

Digital Object Identifiers (DOIs)

14.7

Access dates

14.8

"Last modified" and other revision dates

14.9

Authority and permanence

14.10 Publications available in more than one medium

14.11 URLs and other such elements in relation to surrounding text

14.12 URLs or DOIs and line breaks

14.13 Source citation software

Notes and Bibliography: Basic Format, with Examples and Variations

14.14 Notes and bibliography—an overview

14.15 Basic structure of a note

14.16 Basic structure of a bibliography entry

14.17 Page numbers and other locators

14.18 Notes and bibliography—examples and variations

Notes

Note Numbers

14.19 Numbers in text versus numbers in notes

14.20 Sequencing of note numbers and symbols

14.21 Placement of note number

14.22 Note numbers with chapter and article titles and subheads

14.23 Multiple citations and multiple references

Shortened Citations

14.24 Purpose of shortened citations

14.25 Basic structure of the short form

14.26 Cross-reference to full citation

14.27 Short form for authors' names

14.28 Short form for titles

14.29 "Ibid."

14.30 "Idem"

14.31 "Op. cit." and "loc. cit."

Commentary and Quotations in Notes

14.32 Citations plus commentary

14.33 Quotation within a note

14.34 Substantive notes

14.35 Paragraphing within long notes

14.36 Footnotes that break across pages in a printed work

14.37 "See" and "cf."

Footnotes versus Endnotes

14.38 Footnotes and endnotes—an overview

14.39 Footnotes—pros and cons

14.40 Endnotes—pros and cons

14.41 Endnote placement

14.42 Running heads for endnotes

14.43 Special needs of endnotes

Two Sets of Notes

14.44 Endnotes plus footnotes

14.45 Footnotes plus author-date citations

14.46 Editor's or translator's notes plus author's notes

Unnumbered Notes

14.47 Unnumbered notes in relation to numbered notes

14.48 Notes keyed to text by line or page numbers

14.49 Unnumbered source notes

14.50 Unnumbered biographical notes and acknowledgments

Remedies for Excessive Annotation

14.51 Avoiding overlong notes

14.52 Several citations in one note

14.53 Parenthetical text references

14.54 Abbreviations for frequently cited works

14.55 List of abbreviations

Bibliographies

Overview

14.56 Relationship of bibliographies to notes

14.57 Format and placement of bibliography

14.58 Dividing a bibliography into sections

14.59 Kinds of bibliographies

Arrangement of Entries

14.60 Alphabetical order for bibliography entries

14.61 Single author versus several authors

14.62 Author with different coauthors

The 3-Em Dash for Repeated Names in a Bibliography

14.63 The 3-em dash and sorting—advice to authors

14.64 The 3-em dash for one repeated name

14.65 The 3-em dash for more than one repeated name

14.66 The 3-em dash for an institutional name

14.67 Alphabetical order for titles by the same author

Books

14.68 Books as a model for other sources

14.69 Elements to include when citing a book

14.70 Flexibility and consistency

14.71 Foreign bibliographic terms and abbreviations

Author's Name

14.72 Form of author's name

14.73 Authors preferring initials

14.74 Monarchs, saints, and the like

14.75 One author

14.76 Two or more authors (or editors)

14.77 Two or more authors (or editors) with same family name

14.78 Author's name in title

14.79 Anonymous works—unknown authorship

14.80 Anonymous works—known authorship

14.81 Pseudonyms—unknown authorship

14.82 Pseudonyms—known authorship

14.83 Pseudonyms rarely used

14.84 Cross-references for pseudonyms

14.85 Descriptive phrase as "author"

14.86 Alternative real names

14.87 Editor in place of author

14.88 Editor or translator in addition to author

14.89 "With the assistance of" and the like

14.90 Editor versus author

14.91 Authors of forewords and the like

14.92 Organization as author

Title

14.93 Additional discussion of titles

14.94 Italics for book titles

14.95 Capitalization of book titles

14.96 Some permissible changes to titles

14.97 Subtitles—the colon

14.98 Two subtitles

14.99 Use of "or" with double titles

14.100 "And other stories" and such

14.101 Dates in titles

14.102 Titles within titles

14.103 Italicized terms within titles

14.104 Quotation marks in titles

14.105 Question marks or exclamation points in book titles

14.106 Older titles and very long titles

14.107 Non-English titles

14.108 Translated title supplied by author or editor

14.109 Original plus published translation

14.110 Unpublished translation of title standing in for original

Chapters or Other Parts of a Book

14.111 Chapter in a single-author book

14.112 Contribution to a multiauthor book

14.113 Several contributions to the same book

14.114 Book-length work within a book

14.115 Chapter originally published elsewhere

14.116 Introductions, prefaces, afterwords, and the like

14.117 Letters in published collections

Edition

14.118 Editions other than the first

14.119 Reprint editions and modern editions

14.120 Microform editions

Multivolume Works

14.121 Volume numbers and page numbers

14.122 Citing a multivolume work as a whole

14.123 Citing a particular volume in a note

14.124 Citing a particular volume in a bibliography

14.125 Chapters and other parts of individual volumes

14.126 One volume in two or more books

14.127 Authors and editors of multivolume works

Series

14.128 Series titles, numbers, and editors

14.129 Series editor

14.130 Series or multivolume work?

14.131 Multivolume work within a series

14.132 "Old series" and "new series"

Facts of Publication

14.133 Place, publisher, and date

Place of Publication

14.134 Place and date only, for books published before 1900

14.135 Place—city

14.136 When to specify state, province, or country

14.137 Foreign city names

14.138 "No place"

Publisher's Name

14.139 Preferred form of publisher's name

14.140 Abbreviations and omissible parts of a publisher's name

14.141 "And" or ampersand in publisher's name

14.142 Foreign publishers' names

14.143 Publisher unknown or work privately published

14.144 Parent companies, imprints, and such

14.145 Joint imprint

14.146 Special academic imprint

14.147 Copublication

14.148 Distributed books

Date of Publication

14.149 Publication date—general

14.150 New impressions and renewal of copyright

14.151 Multivolume works published over more than one year

14.152 "No date"

14.153 "Forthcoming"

Page, Volume, and Other Locating Information

14.154 Arabic versus roman numerals

14.155 Ranges, or inclusive numbers

14.156 Using or avoiding "ff." and "passim"

14.157 Abbreviations for "page," "volume," and so on

14.158 When to omit "p." and "pp."

14.159 When to omit "vol."

14.160 Page and chapter numbers

14.161 Signed signatures

14.162 Folio editions

14.163 Line numbers

14.164 Citing numbered notes

14.165 Citing illustrations and tables

Electronic Books

14.166 Books downloaded from a library or bookseller

14.167 Books consulted online

14.168 Books on CD-ROM and other fixed media

14.169 Freely available electronic editions of older works

Periodicals

14.170 "Periodicals" defined

14.171 Information to be included

14.172 Journals versus magazines

14.173 Punctuation in periodical citations

14.174 Page numbers in periodical citations

Journals

14.175 Journal article—author's name

14.176 Journal article—title

14.177 Italics and quotation marks within article titles

14.178 Question marks or exclamation points in article titles

14.179 Title of journal

14.180 Journal volume, issue, and date

14.181 No volume number or date only

14.182 Forthcoming articles

14.183 Journal page references

14.184 Electronic journal articles—URL or DOI

14.185 Electronic journal articles—access dates

14.186 Article page numbers in relation to volume or issue numbers

14.187 Special issues

14.188 Supplements

14.189 Articles published in installments

14.190 Article appearing in two publications

14.191 Place where journal is published

14.192 Translated or edited article

14.193 Foreign-language article and journal titles

14.194 Translated article titles

14.195 New series for journal volumes

14.196 Short titles for articles

14.197 Abstract

14.198 Electronic enhancements to journal articles

Magazines

14.199 Citing magazines by date

14.200 Online magazine articles

14.201 Magazine article titles

14.202 Magazine departments

Newspapers

14.203 Newspaper citations—basic elements

14.204 Newspaper headlines

14.205 Regular columns

14.206 Citing in text rather than in a bibliography

14.207 Unsigned newspaper articles

14.208 Letters to the editor

14.209 Weekend supplements, magazines, and the like

14.210 Names of newspapers

14.211 Names of foreign newspapers

14.212 News services

14.213 News releases

Reviews

14.214 Reviews—elements of the citation

14.215 Book reviews

14.216 Reviews of plays, movies, television programs, concerts, and the like

14.217 Unsigned reviews

Interviews and Personal Communications

14.218 Interviews and personal communications—order of attribution

14.219 Unpublished interviews

14.220 Unattributed interviews

14.221 Published or broadcast interviews

14.222 Personal communications

14.223 Electronic mailing lists

Unpublished and Informally Published Material

Theses, Dissertations, Papers, and the Like

14.224 Theses and dissertations

14.225 Unpublished manuscripts

14.226 Lectures, papers presented at meetings, and the like

14.227 Poster papers

14.228 Working papers and other unpublished works

14.229 Preprints

14.230 Patents

14.231 Private contracts, wills, and such

Manuscript Collections

14.232 Overview and additional resources

14.233 Note forms versus bibliography entries

14.234 Specific versus generic titles for manuscript collections

14.235 Dates for manuscript collections

14.236 Folios, page numbers, and such for manuscript collections

14.237 "Papers" and "manuscripts"

14.238 Location of depositories

14.239 Collections of letters and the like

14.240 Examples of note forms for manuscript collections

14.241 Examples of bibliography entries for manuscript collections

14.242 Letters and the like in private collections

Websites and Blogs

14.243 Websites and blogs—overview

14.244 Titles for websites and blogs

14.245 Citations of website content

14.246 Citations of blog entries

Special Types of References

Dictionaries and Encyclopedias

14.247 Dictionaries and encyclopedias

14.248 Dictionaries and encyclopedias online

Pamphlets and the Like

14.249 Pamphlets, reports, and the like

14.250 Exhibition catalogs

14.251 Loose-leaf services

Scriptural References

14.252 Biblical references—additional resource

14.253 Bible chapter and verse

14.254 Versions of the Bible

14.255 Other sacred works

Classical Greek and Latin References

14.256 Where to cite classical references

14.257 Identifying numbers in classical references

14.258 Abbreviations in classical references

14.259 Punctuation in classical references

14.260 Citing specific editions of classical references

14.261 Titles of classical works and collections

14.262 Superscripts in classical references

14.263 Collections of inscriptions

14.264 Fragments of classical texts

14.265 Modern editions of the classics

14.266 Medieval references

Classic English Poems and Plays

14.267 Citing editions of classic English poems and plays

14.268 Short forms for citing classic English poems and plays

Musical Scores

14.269 Published scores

14.270 Unpublished scores

Databases

14.271 Library and other commercial databases

14.272 Scientific databases

Citations Taken from Secondary Sources

14.273 Citations taken from secondary sources

Audiovisual Materials

14.274 Audiovisual materials—elements to include

14.275 Discographies

Sound Recordings

14.276 Musical recordings

14.277 Recordings of literature, lectures, and such

Video Recordings

14.278 Slides and filmstrips

14.279 DVDs and videocassettes

14.280 Online multimedia

Legal and Public Documents

14.281 Recommended stylebooks

14.282 Legal and public documents online

14.283 Note form for legal-style citations

14.284 Typefaces in legal-style citations

14.285 Page numbers and other locators in legal-style citations

14.286 Abbreviations in legal-style citations

14.287 Short forms for legal-style citations

Cases and Court Decisions

14.288 Cases or court decisions—basic elements

14.289 United States Supreme Court decisions

14.290 Lower federal-court decisions

14.291 State- and local-court decisions

Constitutions

14.292 Constitutions

Legislative and Executive Documents

14.293 Legislative documents—abbreviations

14.294 Laws and statutes

14.295 Bills and resolutions

14.296 Hearings

14.297 Congressional reports and documents

14.298 Congressional debates since 1873

14.299 Records of congressional debates before 1873

14.300 State laws and municipal ordinances

14.301 Presidential documents

14.302 Treaties

14.303 Secondary sources and freestanding publications

14.304 Unpublished government documents

Canada

14.305 Canadian reference works

14.306 Canadian legal cases

14.307 Canadian statutes

14.308 Unpublished Canadian government documents

United Kingdom

14.309 UK reference works

14.310 UK legal cases

14.311 UK parliamentary publications

14.312 UK statutes

14.313 Publication of UK parliamentary debates

14.314 UK command papers

14.315 Unpublished UK government documents

International Entities

14.316 Intergovernmental bodies

14.317 International legal and public documents online

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Source Citations: An Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

14.1 THE PURPOSE OF SOURCE CITATIONS

List of Tables

Ethics, copyright laws, and courtesy to readers require authors to identify the sources of direct

Index

quotations or paraphrases and of any facts or opinions not generally known or easily checked (see

13.1--6). Conventions for documentation vary according to scholarly discipline, the preferences of

publishers and authors, and the needs of a particular work. Regardless of the convention being

14.1:

followed, the primary criterion of any source citation is sufficient information either to lead readers

The purpose of

source citations

directly to the sources consulted or, for materials that may not be readily available, to positively

14.2:

identify the sources used, whether these are published or unpublished, in printed or electronic form.

Chicago's two

systems of source

citation

14.3:

Other systems of

source citation

14.4:

Electronic resource

identifiers

14.5:

Uniform resource

locators (URLs)

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Source Citations: An Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

14.2 CHICAGO'S TWO SYSTEMS OF SOURCE CITATION

List of Tables

This chapter describes the first of Chicago's two systems of documentation, which uses a system of

Index

notes, whether footnotes or endnotes or both, and usually a bibliography. The notes allow space for

unusual types of sources as well as for commentary on the sources cited, making this system

extremely flexible. Because of this flexibility, the notes and bibliography system is preferred by many

14.1:

writers in literature, history, and the arts. Chicago's other system--which uses parenthetical author-

The purpose of

source citations

date references and a corresponding reference list as described in chapter 15--is nearly identical in

14.2:

content but differs in form. The author-date system is preferred for many publications in the sciences

Chicago's two

and social sciences but may be adapted for any work, sometimes with the addition of footnotes or

systems of source

citation

endnotes. For journals, the choice between systems is likely to have been made long ago; anyone

14.3:

writing for a journal should consult the specific journal's instructions to authors (and see 14.3).

Other systems of

source citation

14.4:

Electronic resource

identifiers

14.5:

Uniform resource

locators (URLs)

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Source Citations: An Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

14.3 OTHER SYSTEMS OF SOURCE CITATION

List of Tables

Among other well-known systems are those of the Modern Language Association and the American

Index

Psychological Association, both of which use variations of the author-date system (described in

chapter 15), and that of the American Medical Association. The AMA uses a numbered list of

references cited in the text by reference number; the text numbers appear as superior figures like note

14.1:

reference numbers. Guidelines and examples for these three systems are to be found in the manuals

The purpose of

source citations

of those associations. Scientific Style and Format, published by the Council of Science Editors (CSE),

14.2:

also furnishes useful guidelines on both the author-date system and numbered references (see

Chicago's two

bibliog. 1.1 for these and other style manuals). Many journals and serials--including some of those

systems of source

citation

published by the University of Chicago Press--either follow one of these styles or have their own

14.3:

styles, often based on or similar to the systems mentioned here and in 14.2. For legal and public

Other systems of

source citation

documents, Chicago recommends The Bluebook: A Uniform System of Citation, published by the Harvard

Law Review Association; see 14.281--317.

14.4:

Electronic resource

identifiers

14.5:

Uniform resource

locators (URLs)

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Source Citations: An Overview >> Considerations for Electronic Sources

of Contents

List of Figures

14.4 ELECTRONIC RESOURCE IDENTIFIERS

List of Tables

When citing electronic sources consulted online, Chicago recommends--as the final element in a

Index

citation that includes all the components described throughout this chapter and in chapter 15--the

addition of a URL or

1

DOI. Either

2

of these elements has the potential to lead readers directly to the

source cited, and authors are encouraged to record them as part of their source citations. Publishers,

14.2:

however, will have their own requirements, which may depend on the type of work and the uses to

Chicago's two

systems of source

which it will be put. For example, publishers of electronic journals may provide hyperlinks to cited

citation

electronic sources as a matter of course--a process that authors facilitate when they provide resource

14.3:

identifiers with their source citations. Publishers of printed books, on the other hand, may require a

Other systems of

source citation

URL or DOI only in citations of sources that may otherwise be difficult to locate. Authors are

14.4:

therefore advised to consult their publishers early in the publication process. The information in this

Electronic resource

identifiers

section--together with the examples of URLs and DOIs throughout this chapter--is intended to

provide guidance for those authors and publishers who wish to include them as part of their research

14.5:

Uniform resource

or publications or both. For citing electronic sources on fixed media such as CD-ROMs, see 14.166,

locators (URLs)

14.168, 14.276, 14.279.

14.6:

Digital Object

Identifiers (DOIs)

1. For more information about URLs, consult the website of the World Wide Web Consortium. See also 14.5.

2. For more information about DOIs, consult the websites of the International DOI Foundation and CrossRef. See also 14.6.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Source Citations: An Overview >> Considerations for Electronic Sources

of Contents

List of Figures

14.5 UNIFORM RESOURCE LOCATORS (URLS)

List of Tables

A uniform resource locator, or URL--for example, http://www.chicagomanualofstyle.org/--is designed

Index

to lead a reader directly to an Internet source. For URL syntax, see 14.11 and 14.12. For examples of

URLs in source citations, see 14.18 (under Journal Article), 14.167, 14.169, and throughout the

discussions on periodicals (14.170--217), interviews and personal communications (14.218--23),

14.3:

websites and blogs (14.243--46), audiovisual materials (14.274--80), and elsewhere. Note that it is

Other systems of

source citation

never sufficient simply to provide a URL (or other resource locator); as far as they can be determined,

14.4:

the full facts of publication should always be recorded first. Although a URL has the potential to lead

Electronic resource

readers directly to the source cited, it is also the most vulnerable element in a citation; the source to

identifiers

which a URL points is apt to move to a different location on the web or to disappear altogether.

14.5:

Uniform resource

Readers need to be able to judge the nature and authority of any source from the full facts of

locators (URLs)

publication as detailed throughout this chapter and chapter 15.

14.6:

Digital Object

Identifiers (DOIs)

14.7:

Access dates

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Source Citations: An Overview >> Considerations for Electronic Sources

of Contents

List of Figures

14.6 DIGITAL OBJECT IDENTIFIERS (DOIS)

List of Tables

One of a number of standards addressing the need for more reliable resource identifiers is that of the

Index

Digital Object Identifier (DOI). A DOI is a unique and permanent name assigned to a piece of

intellectual property such as a journal article or book (or a component thereof), in any medium in

which it is published. (The term "digital" refers to the identifier and not necessarily to the object.) A

14.4:

DOI consists of a prefix assigned by a DOI registration agency such as CrossRef and--following a

Electronic resource

identifiers

forward slash--a name assigned by the publisher. For example, 10.1086/529076 identifies the article

14.5:

entitled "Before Democracy: The Production and Uses of Common Sense," by Sophia Rosenfeld,

Uniform resource

published in the March 2008 issue of the Journal of Modern History. At a minimum, typing or pasting

locators (URLs)

the DOI into the DOI resolver available at the website of the International DOI Foundation or from

14.6:

Digital Object

CrossRef.org (or into a search engine that supports DOIs) will redirect you to a URL where the article

Identifiers (DOIs)

may be found. (Alternatively, appending a DOI to http://dx.doi.org/ in the address bar of an Internet

14.7:

browser will lead to the source. For example, http://dx.doi.org/10.1086/529076 will resolve to the

Access dates

Rosenfeld article mentioned above.) Authors should include DOIs rather than URLs for sources that

14.8:

"Last modified" and

make them readily available. The examples included throughout the discussion on journals

other revision

dates

(14.175--98) may be applied to other types of sources as necessary, including books (see 14.167,

14.248).

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Source Citations: An Overview >> Considerations for Electronic Sources

of Contents

List of Figures

14.7 ACCESS DATES

List of Tables

An access date--that is, the self-reported date on which an author consulted a source--is of limited

Index

value: previous versions will often be unavailable to readers; authors typically consult a source any

number of times over the course of days or months; and the accuracy of such dates, once recorded,

cannot readily be verified by editors or publishers. Chicago does not therefore require access dates in

14.5:

its published citations of electronic sources unless no date of publication or revision can be

Uniform resource

locators (URLs)

determined from the source (see 14.8). For such undated sources--or for any source that seems likely

14.6:

to change without notice--authors are encouraged, as an additional safeguard, to archive dated copies,

Digital Object

either as hard copy or in electronic form. Because some publishers in some disciplines--in particular,

Identifiers (DOIs)

research-intensive fields such as science and medicine-- do require access dates, authors should check

14.7:

Access dates

with their publishers early on, and it never hurts to record dates of access during research. (Students

14.8:

are typically required to include access dates for citations of online sources in their papers.) For

"Last modified" and

examples, see 14.185, 14.245, and 14.248.

other revision

dates

14.9:

Authority and

permanence

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Source Citations: An Overview >> Considerations for Electronic Sources

of Contents

List of Figures

14.8 "LAST MODIFIED" AND OTHER REVISION DATES

List of Tables

Some electronic documents will include a date on each page or screen indicating the last time the

Index

document was modified or revised. There are no accepted standards for this practice, and for

formally published material the date of publication is generally more important. A revision date

should be included, however, if it is presented as the de facto date of publication or is otherwise the

14.6:

only available date. Such dates may be particularly useful for citing wikis and other continuously

Digital Object

Identifiers (DOIs)

updated works. For an example, see 14.248.

14.7:

Access dates

14.8:

"Last modified" and

other revision

dates

14.9:

Authority and

permanence

14.10:

Publications

available in more

than one medium

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Source Citations: An Overview >> Considerations for Electronic Sources

of Contents

List of Figures

14.9 AUTHORITY AND PERMANENCE

List of Tables

Much as they do for printed publications, authors must weigh the authority of any electronic sources

Index

they choose to cite. Electronic content presented without formal ties to a publisher or sponsoring

body has the authority equivalent to that of unpublished or self-published material in other media.

Moreover, such content is far more likely to change without notice--or disappear altogether--than

14.7:

formally published materials. On the other hand, self-published material from an authority on a given

Access dates

subject--relatively inaccessible before the advent of blogs--may have a great deal of validity. Authors

14.8:

"Last modified" and

should note, moreover, that anything posted on the Internet is "published" in the sense of copyright

other revision

and must be treated as such for the purposes of complete citation and clearance of permissions, if

dates

relevant (see 4.2, 4.60--65).

14.9:

Authority and

permanence

14.10:

Publications

available in more

than one medium

14.11:

URLs and other

such elements in

relation to

surrounding text

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Source Citations: An Overview >> Considerations for Electronic Sources

of Contents

List of Figures

14.10 PUBLICATIONS AVAILABLE IN MORE THAN ONE MEDIUM

List of Tables

In many cases the contents of the print and electronic forms of the same publication are intended to

Index

be identical. Moreover, publishers are encouraged to note explicitly any differences between the two

(see 1.73). In practice, because there is always the potential for differences, intentional or otherwise,

authors should cite the version consulted. Chicago recommends including a URL or DOI to indicate

14.8:

that a work was consulted online; for other nonprint items, the medium should be indicated (e.g., CD-

"Last modified" and

other revision

ROM). Note, however, that alternate electronic formats offered by a single publisher from the same

dates

website--for example, PDF and HTML versions of the journal article mentioned in 14.6--do not

14.9:

constitute separate sources. The URL for each such version will generally differ, but the DOI will not.

Authority and

permanence

In fact, a DOI serves readers by pointing to each medium in which a work is published. (Though a

14.10:

print source may list a DOI, authors need not record it as part of their research unless their publisher

Publications

available in more

or discipline requires it.)

than one medium

14.11:

URLs and other

such elements in

relation to

surrounding text

14.12:

URLs or DOIs and

line breaks

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Source Citations: An Overview >> Considerations for Electronic Sources

of Contents

List of Figures

14.11 URLS AND OTHER SUCH ELEMENTS IN RELATION TO SURROUNDING TEXT

List of Tables

URLs, DOIs, e-mail addresses, and the like are unique strings that contain no spaces. URLs should be

Index

presented in full, beginning with the protocol (usually http, for hypertext transfer protocol, or ftp, for file

transfer protocol). Even if it follows a period, the first letter of the protocol (e.g., the h in http) is not

capitalized; likewise, doi preceding a DOI in a source citation is never capitalized. (In running text,

14.9:

avoid beginning a sentence with a URL or DOI; see also 8.186.) The capitalization of the remaining

Authority and

permanence

components varies; because some resource identifiers are case sensitive, they should not be edited for

14.10:

style (but see 14.244). A "trailing slash" (/), the last character in a URL pointing to a directory, is part

Publications

of the URL. Other punctuation marks that follow a URL or other such identifier will readily be

available in more

than one medium

perceived as belonging to the surrounding text. Citations that include such an element should

14.11:

therefore be punctuated normally. Though angle brackets or other "wrappers" are standard with e-

URLs and other

such elements in

mail addresses or URLs in some applications, these are unnecessary in the context of notes and

relation to

bibliographies or in running text (see also 6.8).

surrounding text

14.12:

URLs or DOIs and

line breaks

14.13:

Source citation

software

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Source Citations: An Overview >> Considerations for Electronic Sources

of Contents

List of Figures

14.12 URLS OR DOIS AND LINE BREAKS

List of Tables

In a printed work, if a URL or DOI has to be broken at the end of a line, the break should be made

Index

after a colon or a double slash (//); before a single slash (/), a tilde (~), a period, a comma, a hyphen, an

underline (_), a question mark, a number sign, or a percent symbol; or before or after an equals sign or

an ampersand. Such breaks help to signal that the URL or DOI has been carried over to the next line.

14.10:

A hyphen should never be added to a URL or DOI to denote a line break, nor should a hyphen that is

Publications

available in more

part of a URL or DOI appear at the end of a line. It is usually unnecessary to break URLs or DOIs in

than one medium

electronic publications (except in PDFs and other formats modeled on the printed page), and authors

14.11:

should avoid forcing them to break (with hard returns or other devices) in their manuscripts (see

URLs and other

such elements in

2.12). See also 7.42.

relation to

surrounding text

http://press-pubs.uchicago

14.12:

URLs or DOIs and

.edu/founders/

line breaks

14.13:

http://www.jstor.org/stable

Source citation

/2921689

software

14.14:

http://www.time.com/time/magazine/article/0,9171

Notes and

,920400,00.html

bibliographyâ€”an

overview

http://wardsix.blogspot.com/2008/07/two

-atlantic-essays.html

doi:10.1086

/ahr.113.3.752

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Source Citations: An Overview >> Considerations for Electronic Sources

of Contents

List of Figures

14.13 SOURCE CITATION SOFTWARE

List of Tables

A number of software programs promise to automate the task of formatting source citations. The best

Index

of these programs can help authors save time transcribing and organizing citations. Moreover, a

growing number of online documents include preformatted citations, sometimes designed to work in

conjunction with source citation software. The variety of sources typically cited in a scholarly work,

14.11:

however, nearly always precludes an acceptable result from software alone. Authors are therefore

URLs and other

such elements in

strongly encouraged to review their citations for consistency, accuracy, and completeness according

relation to

surrounding text

to the forms recommended in this chapter or chapter 15. Moreover, citations in manuscripts

submitted to publishers should be presented as ordinary text, stripped of any of the underlying codes

14.12:

URLs or DOIs and

(e.g., fields or hyperlinks) used in creating or organizing them. (An author's review should generally

line breaks

occur after this conversion to ordinary text.) See also 2.20.

14.13:

Source citation

software

14.14:

Notes and

bibliographyâ€”an

overview

14.15:

Basic structure of a

note

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes and Bibliography: Basic Format, with Examples and Variations

of Contents

List of Figures

14.14 NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY--AN OVERVIEW

List of Tables

In the system favored by many writers in the humanities, bibliographic citations are provided in

Index

notes, preferably supplemented by a bibliography. The notes, whether footnotes or endnotes, are

usually numbered and correspond to superscripted note reference numbers in the text (but see 14.48);

in electronic works, notes and note numbers are usually hyperlinked. If the bibliography includes all

14.12:

works cited in the notes, the notes need not duplicate the source information in full because readers

URLs or DOIs and

line breaks

can consult the bibliography for publication details and other information. In works with no

14.13:

bibliography or only a selected list, full details must be given in a note at first mention of any work

Source citation

cited; subsequent citations need only include a short form. For examples of the difference in format

software

between note citations and bibliography entries, see 14.18. For a detailed discussion of notes, see

14.14:

Notes and

14.19--55. For shortened references, see 14.24--31. For a detailed discussion of bibliographies, see

bibliographyâ€”an

overview

14.56--67.

14.15:

Basic structure of a

Full citation in a note:

note

14.16:

1. Newton N. Minow and Craig L. LaMay, Inside the Presidential Debates: Their Improbable Past and

Basic structure of a

Promising Future (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2008), 24--25.

bibliography entry

Shortened citation in a note:

8. Minow and LaMay, Presidential Debates, 138.

Entry in a bibliography:

Minow, Newton N., and Craig L. LaMay. Inside the Presidential Debates: Their Improbable Past and Promising

Future. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2008.

Note citations are styled much like running text, with authors' names in normal order and the

elements separated by commas or parentheses. In bibliographies, where entries are listed

alphabetically, the name of the first author is inverted, and the main elements are separated by

periods.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes and Bibliography: Basic Format, with Examples and Variations

of Contents

List of Figures

14.15 BASIC STRUCTURE OF A NOTE

List of Tables

A footnote or an endnote generally lists the author, title, and facts of publication, in that order.

Index

Elements are separated by commas; the facts of publication are enclosed in parentheses. Authors'

names are presented in standard order (first name first). Titles are capitalized headline-style (see

8.157), unless they are in a foreign language (see 11.3). Titles of larger works (e.g., books and journals)

14.13:

are italicized; titles of smaller works (e.g., chapters, articles) or unpublished works are presented in

Source citation

software

roman and enclosed in quotation marks (see 8.161). Such terms as editor/ edited by, translator/translated

14.14:

by, volume, and edition are abbreviated.

Notes and

bibliographyâ€”an

overview

14.15:

Basic structure of a

note

14.16:

Basic structure of a

bibliography entry

14.17:

Page numbers and

other locators

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes and Bibliography: Basic Format, with Examples and Variations

of Contents

List of Figures

14.16 BASIC STRUCTURE OF A BIBLIOGRAPHY ENTRY

List of Tables

In a bibliography entry the elements are separated by periods rather than by commas; the facts of

Index

publication are not enclosed in parentheses; and the first-listed author's name, according to which the

entry is alphabetized in the bibliography, is usually inverted (last name first). As in a note, titles are

capitalized headline-style unless they are in a foreign language; titles of larger works (e.g., books and

14.14:

journals) are italicized; and titles of smaller works (e.g., chapters, articles) or unpublished works are

Notes and

bibliographyâ€”an

presented in roman and enclosed in quotation marks. Noun forms such as editor, translator, volume,

overview

and edition are abbreviated, but verb forms such as edited by and translated by--abbreviated in a note--

14.15:

are spelled out in a bibliography. (Cf. 14.15.)

Basic structure of a

note

14.16:

Basic structure of a

bibliography entry

14.17:

Page numbers and

other locators

14.18:

Notes and

bibliographyâ

€”examples and

variations

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes and Bibliography: Basic Format, with Examples and Variations

of Contents

List of Figures

14.17 PAGE NUMBERS AND OTHER LOCATORS

List of Tables

In notes, where reference is usually to a particular passage in a book or journal, only the page

Index

numbers (often a single page number) pertaining to that passage are given. In bibliographies, no page

numbers are given for books; for easier location of journal articles or chapters or other sections of a

book, the beginning and ending page numbers of the entire article or chapter are given. Electronic

14.15:

sources do not always include page numbers (and some that do include them repaginate according to

Basic structure of a

note

user-defined text size). For such unpaginated works, it may be appropriate in a note to include a

14.16:

chapter or paragraph number (if available), a section heading, or a descriptive phrase that follows the

Basic structure of a

organizational divisions of the work. In citations of shorter electronic works presented as a single,

bibliography entry

searchable document, such locators may be unnecessary.

14.17:

Page numbers and

other locators

14.18:

Notes and

bibliographyâ

€”examples and

variations

14.19:

Numbers in text

versus numbers in

notes

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes and Bibliography: Basic Format, with Examples and Variations

of Contents

List of Figures

14.18 NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY--EXAMPLES AND VARIATIONS

List of Tables

The examples that follow are intended to provide an overview of the notes and bibliography style,

Index

featuring books and journal articles as models. Each example includes a numbered note and a

corresponding bibliography entry. Some examples also include a shortened form of the note, suitable

for subsequent citations of a source already cited in full. In practice, in works that include a

14.16:

bibliography that lists in full all sources cited, it is acceptable to use the shortened form in the notes

Basic structure of a

bibliography entry

even at first mention. For advice on constructing short forms for notes, see 14.24--31. For many more

14.17:

examples, consult the sections dealing with specific types of works throughout this chapter.

Page numbers and

other locators

BOOK WITH SINGLE AUTHOR OR EDITOR

14.18:

Notes and

For a book with a single author, invert the name in the bibliography but not in the notes. Punctuate

bibliography—

examples and

and capitalize as shown. Note the shortened form in the second note. Note also that actual page

variations

numbers cited are usually included in a note but not in a bibliography entry, unless the entry is for a

14.19:

Numbers in text

chapter, in which case the page range in which the item appears is included (see "Chapter in an

versus numbers in

Edited Book," below; see also 9.58--63).

notes

14.20:

1. Michael Pollan, The Omnivore's Dilemma: A Natural History of Four Meals (New York: Penguin, 2006), 99-

Sequencing of note

numbers and

-100.

symbols

18. Pollan, Omnivore's Dilemma, 3.

Pollan, Michael. The Omnivore's Dilemma: A Natural History of Four Meals. New York: Penguin, 2006.

A book with an editor in place of an author includes the abbreviation ed. ( editor; for more than one

editor, use eds. ). Note that the shortened form does not include ed.

1. Joel Greenberg, ed., Of Prairie, Woods, and Water: Two Centuries of Chicago Nature Writing (Chicago:

University of Chicago Press, 2008), 42.

33. Greenberg, Prairie, Woods, and Water, 326--27.

Greenberg, Joel, ed. Of Prairie, Woods, and Water: Two Centuries of Chicago Nature Writing. Chicago: University

of Chicago Press, 2008.

BOOK WITH MULTIPLE AUTHORS

For a book with two authors, note that only the first-listed name is inverted in the bibliography entry.

2. Geoffrey C. Ward and Ken Burns, The War: An Intimate History, 1941--1945 (New York: Knopf, 2007),

52.

Ward, Geoffrey C., and Ken Burns. The War: An Intimate History, 1941--1945. New York: Knopf, 2007.

For a book with three authors, adapt as follows:

15. Joyce Heatherton, James Fitzgilroy, and Jackson Hsu, Meteors and Mudslides: A Trip through . . .

Heatherton, Joyce, James Fitzgilroy, and Jackson Hsu. Meteors and Mudslides: A Trip through . . .

For a book with four or more authors, list all the authors in the bibliography entry. Word order and

punctuation are the same as for two or three authors. In the note, however, cite only the name of the

first-listed author, followed by et al. See also 14.76.

72. Dana Barnes et al., Plastics: Essays on American Corporate Ascendance in the 1960s . . .

101. Barnes et al., Plastics . . .

BOOK WITH AUTHOR PLUS EDITOR OR TRANSLATOR

In a book with an editor or translator in addition to the author, ed. or trans. in the note becomes

Edited by or Translated by in the bibliography entry. See also 14.88.

1. Gabriel García Márquez, Love in the Time of Cholera, trans. Edith Grossman (London: Cape, 1988), 242--

55.

18. García Márquez, Cholera, 33.

García Márquez, Gabriel. Love in the Time of Cholera. Translated by Edith Grossman. London: Cape, 1988.

CHAPTER IN AN EDITED BOOK

When citing a chapter or similar part of an edited book, include the chapter author; the chapter title,

in quotation marks; and the editor. Precede the title of the book with in. Note the location of the page

range for the chapter in the bibliography entry. See also 14.111--17.

1. Glenn Gould, "Streisand as Schwarzkopf," in The Glenn Gould Reader, ed. Tim Page (New York: Vintage,

1984), 310.

19. Gould, "Streisand as Schwarzkopf," 309.

Gould, Glenn. "Streisand as Schwarzkopf." In The Glenn Gould Reader, edited by Tim Page, 308--11. New

York: Vintage, 1984.

JOURNAL ARTICLE

Citations of journals include the volume and issue number and date of publication. The volume

number follows the italicized journal title in roman and with no intervening punctuation. A specific

page reference is included in the notes; the page range for an article is included in the bibliography.

In the full citation, page numbers are preceded by a colon. If a journal is paginated consecutively

across a volume or if the month or season appears with the year, the issue number may be omitted (as

in the second and third sets of examples below).

89. Walter Blair, "Americanized Comic Braggarts," Critical Inquiry 4, no. 2 (1977): 331--32.

111. Blair, "Americanized Comic Braggarts," 335.

Blair, Walter. "Americanized Comic Braggarts." Critical Inquiry 4, no. 2 (1977): 331--49.

The DOI in the following example indicates that the article was consulted online; it is preferred to a

URL (see also 14.5, 14.6). Note that DOI, so capitalized when mentioned in running text, is

lowercased and followed by a colon (with no space after) in source citations. Shortened citations for

subsequent references to an online source follow the forms for printed books and journals.

1. William J. Novak, "The Myth of the ‘Weak' American State," American Historical Review 113 (June 2008):

758, doi:10.1086/ahr.113.3.752.

3. Novak, "Myth," 770.

Novak, William J. "The Myth of the ‘Weak' American State." American Historical Review 113 (June 2008): 752--

72. doi:10.1086/ahr.113.3.752.

For articles that have not been assigned a DOI (or if the DOI cannot be determined), include a URL.

The URL in the following example--consulted through the academic journals archive JSTOR--was

listed along with the article as a more stable (and shorter) alternative to the URL that appeared in the

browser's address bar. For access dates (not shown here), see 14.185.

12. Wilfried Karmaus and John F. Riebow, "Storage of Serum in Plastic and Glass Containers May Alter

the Serum Concentration of Polychlorinated Biphenyls," Environmental Health Perspectives 112 (May 2004):

645, http://www.jstor.org/stable/3435987.

Karmaus, Wilfried, and John F. Riebow. "Storage of Serum in Plastic and Glass Containers May Alter the

Serum Concentration of Polychlorinated Biphenyls." Environmental Health Perspectives 112 (May 2004): 643-

-47. http://www.jstor.org/stable/3435987.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Note Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.19 NUMBERS IN TEXT VERSUS NUMBERS IN NOTES

List of Tables

Note reference numbers in text are set as superior (superscript) numbers. In the notes themselves,

Index

they are normally full size, not raised, and followed by a period. (In manuscripts, superscripted

numbers in both places--the typical default setting in the note-making feature of a word processor--

are perfectly acceptable.)

14.17:

Page numbers and

"Nonrestrictive relative clauses are parenthetic, as are similar clauses introduced by conjunctions indicating

other locators

time or place."1

14.18:

Notes and

bibliographyâ

1. William Strunk Jr. and E. B. White, The Elements of Style, 4th ed. (New York: Allyn and Bacon, 2000), 3.

€”examples and

variations

14.19:

Numbers in text

versus numbers in

notes

14.20:

Sequencing of note

numbers and

symbols

14.21:

Placement of note

number

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Note Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.20 SEQUENCING OF NOTE NUMBERS AND SYMBOLS

List of Tables

Notes, whether footnotes or endnotes, should be numbered consecutively, beginning with 1,

Index

throughout each article and for each new chapter--not throughout an entire book unless the text has

no internal divisions. Where only a handful of footnotes appear in an entire book or, perhaps, just

one in an article, symbols may be used instead of numbers. Usually an asterisk is enough, but if more

14.18:

than one note is needed on the same page, the sequence is * † ‡ §. For using a combination of numbers

Notes and

bibliography—

and symbols for two sets of notes, see 14.44--46. For notes to tables and other nontextual matter,

examples and

variations

which are usually handled independently of the notes to the text, see 3.74--78.

14.19:

Numbers in text

versus numbers in

notes

14.20:

Sequencing of note

numbers and

symbols

14.21:

Placement of note

number

14.22:

Note numbers with

chapter and article

titles and subheads

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Note Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.21 PLACEMENT OF NOTE NUMBER

List of Tables

A note number should generally be placed at the end of a sentence or at the end of a clause. The

Index

number normally follows a quotation (whether it is run in to the text or set as an extract). Relative to

other punctuation, the number follows any punctuation mark except for the dash, which it precedes.

1

14.19:

"This," wrote George Templeton Strong, "is what our tailors can do."

Numbers in text

versus numbers in

3

notes

The bias was apparent in the Shotwell series --and it must be remembered that Shotwell was a student of

Robinson's.

14.20:

Sequencing of note

numbers and

Though a note number normally follows a closing parenthesis, it may on rare occasion be more

symbols

appropriate to place the number inside the closing parenthesis--if, for example, the note applies to a

14.21:

Placement of note

specific term within the parentheses.

number

2

14.22:

(In an earlier book he had said quite the opposite.)

Note numbers with

chapter and article

titles and subheads

Men and their unions, as they entered industrial work, negotiated two things: young women would be laid

off once they married (the commonly acknowledged "marriage bar"1), and men would be paid a "family

14.23:

Multiple citations

wage."

and multiple

references

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Note Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.22 NOTE NUMBERS WITH CHAPTER AND ARTICLE TITLES AND SUBHEADS

List of Tables

In books, a note number should never appear within or at the end of a chapter title. A note that

Index

applies to an entire chapter should be unnumbered and is preferably placed at the foot of the first

page of the chapter, preceding any numbered notes (see 14.47--50). Some journals publishers, on the

other hand, prefer to tie such notes more explicitly to a particular article title by placing a note

14.20:

reference number (or symbol) with the title and the corresponding note. In a departure from previous

Sequencing of note

numbers and

recommendations, Chicago no longer objects to this practice with journal article titles. Moreover, the

symbols

occasional note reference appearing with a subhead within a book chapter or an article is now

14.21:

considered acceptable, though some editors will prefer to move it into the text that follows the

Placement of note

number

subhead.

14.22:

Note numbers with

chapter and article

titles and subheads

14.23:

Multiple citations

and multiple

references

14.24:

Purpose of

shortened citations

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Note Numbers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.23 MULTIPLE CITATIONS AND MULTIPLE REFERENCES

List of Tables

A note number cannot reappear out of sequence; the substance of a note that applies to more than

Index

one location must be repeated under a new note number. To avoid such repetition, especially for a

longer discursive note, a cross-reference may be used--though these must be checked carefully before

publication. (See also 14.24--31.)

14.21:

Placement of note

18. See note 3 above.

number

14.22:

Although more than one note reference should never appear at a single location (such as5, 6), a single

Note numbers with

chapter and article

note can contain more than one citation or comment (see 14.52). (A system of numbered references

titles and subheads

used by many medical publications, however, requires such multiple reference numbers; for more on

14.23:

Multiple citations

this system, consult the AMA Manual of Style [bibliog. 1.1].)

and multiple

references

14.24:

Purpose of

shortened citations

14.25:

Basic structure of

the short form

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Shortened Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

14.24 PURPOSE OF SHORTENED CITATIONS

List of Tables

To reduce the bulk of documentation in scholarly works that use footnotes or endnotes, subsequent

Index

citations of sources already given in full should be shortened whenever possible. The short form, as

distinct from an abbreviation, should include enough information to remind readers of the full title or

to lead them to the appropriate entry in the bibliography. (Some short forms are not covered here: for

14.22:

citing different chapters in the same work, see 14.113; for letters, see 14.117; for legal citations, see

Note numbers with

chapter and article

14.287. Other short forms may be patterned on the examples in this section.)

titles and subheads

14.23:

Multiple citations

and multiple

references

14.24:

Purpose of

shortened citations

14.25:

Basic structure of

the short form

14.26:

Cross-reference to

full citation

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Shortened Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

14.25 BASIC STRUCTURE OF THE SHORT FORM

List of Tables

The most common short form consists of the last name of the author and the main title of the work

Index

cited, usually shortened if more than four words, as in examples 4--6 below. For more on authors'

names, see 14.27. For more on short titles, see 14.28. For more on journal articles, see 14.196.

14.23:

1. Samuel A. Morley, Poverty and Inequality in Latin America: The Impact of Adjustment and Recovery

Multiple citations

(Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1995), 24--25.

and multiple

references

2. Regina M. Schwartz, "Nationals and Nationalism: Adultery in the House of David," Critical Inquiry 19,

no. 1 (1992): 131--32.

14.24:

Purpose of

3. Ernest Kaiser, "The Literature of Harlem," in Harlem: A Community in Transition, ed. J. H. Clarke (New

shortened citations

York: Citadel Press, 1964).

14.25:

4. Morley, Poverty and Inequality, 43.

Basic structure of

the short form

5. Schwartz, "Nationals and Nationalism," 138.

6. Kaiser, "Literature of Harlem," 189--90.

14.26:

Cross-reference to

full citation

14.27:

Short form for

authors' names

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Shortened Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

14.26 CROSS-REFERENCE TO FULL CITATION

List of Tables

When references to a particular source are far apart, readers encountering the short form may be

Index

helped by a cross-reference to the original note (especially in the absence of a full bibliography).

Repeating the full details in each new chapter, formerly a common practice in scholarly works, is

seldom necessary. These cross-references must be checked carefully before the work is published.

14.24:

Purpose of

95. Miller, Quest, 81 (see chap. 1, n. 4).

shortened citations

14.25:

Basic structure of

the short form

14.26:

Cross-reference to

full citation

14.27:

Short form for

authors' names

14.28:

Short form for

titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Shortened Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

14.27 SHORT FORM FOR AUTHORS' NAMES

List of Tables

Only the last name of the author, or of the editor or translator if given first in the full reference, is

Index

needed in the short form. Full names or initials are included only when authors with the same last

name must be distinguished from one another. Such abbreviations as ed. or trans. following a name in

the full reference are omitted in subsequent references. If a work has two or three authors, give the

14.25:

last name of each; for more than three, the last name of the first author followed by et al.

Basic structure of

the short form

1. Kathryn Petras and Ross Petras, eds., Very Bad Poetry . . .

14.26:

Cross-reference to

2. Joseph A. Bellizzi, H. F. Kruckeberg, J. R. Hamilton, and W. S. Martin, "Consumer Perceptions of

full citation

National, Private, and Generic Brands," . . .

14.27:

3. Petras and Petras, Very Bad Poetry . . .

Short form for

4. Bellizzi et al., "Consumer Perceptions," . . .

authors' names

14.28:

Short form for

titles

14.29:

"Ibid."

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Shortened Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

14.28 SHORT FORM FOR TITLES

List of Tables

The short title contains the key word or words from the main title. An initial A or The is usually

Index

omitted. The order of the words should not be changed (for example, Daily Notes of a Trip around the

World should be shortened not to World Trip but to Daily Notes or Around the World). Titles of four

words or fewer are seldom shortened. The short title is italicized or set in roman and quotation marks

14.26:

according to the way the full title appears.

Cross-reference to

full citation

The War Journal of Major Damon "Rocky" Gause

14.27:

Short form for

(Short title) War Journal

authors' names

14.28:

"A Brief Account of the Reconstruction of Aristotle's Protrepticus"

Short form for

(Short title) "Aristotle's Protrepticus"

titles

14.29:

Kriegstagebuch des Oberkommandos der Wehrmacht, 1940--1945

"Ibid."

(Short title) Kriegstagebuch

14.30:

"Idem"

In short titles in languages other than English, no word should be omitted that governs the case

ending of a word included in the short title. If in doubt, ask someone who knows the language.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Shortened Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

14.29 "IBID."

List of Tables

The abbreviation ibid. (from ibidem, "in the same place") usually refers to a single work cited in the

Index

note immediately preceding. It must never be used if the preceding note contains more than one

citation. It takes the place of the name(s) of the author(s) or editor(s), the title of the work, and as

much of the succeeding material as is identical. If the entire reference, including page numbers or

14.27:

other particulars, is identical, the word ibid. alone is used (as in note 7 below). The word ibid.

Short form for

authors' names

(italicized in this paragraph only because it is a word used as a word--see 7.58) is capitalized at the

14.28:

beginning of a note and followed by a period. To avoid a succession of ibid. notes, the content of notes

Short form for

6--8, 10, and 11 below might instead be placed parenthetically in the text in place of the note

titles

references (see 13.64).

14.29:

"Ibid."

5. Farmwinkle, Humor of the Midwest, 241.

14.30:

"Idem"

6. Ibid., 258--59.

7. Ibid.

14.31:

"Op. cit." and "loc.

8. Ibid., 333--34.

cit."

9. Losh, Diaries and Correspondence, 1:150.

10. Ibid., 2:35--36.

11. Ibid., 2:37--40.

Ibid. may also be used within one note in successive references to the same work.

8. Morris Birkbeck, "The Illinois Prairies and Settlers," in Prairie State: Impressions of Illinois, 1673--1967, by

Travelers and Other Observers, ed. Paul M. Angle (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1968), 62. "The soil of

the Big-prairie, which is of no great extent notwithstanding its name, is a rich, cool sand; that is to say, one

of the most desirable description" (ibid., 63).

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Shortened Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

14.30 "IDEM"

List of Tables

When several works by the same person are cited successively in the same note, idem ("the same,"

Index

sometimes abbreviated to id. ), has sometimes been used in place of the author's name. Except in legal

references, where the abbreviation id. is used in place of ibid. , the term is rarely used nowadays.

Chicago discourages the use of idem, recommending instead that the author's last name be repeated.

14.28:

Short form for

titles

14.29:

"Ibid."

14.30:

"Idem"

14.31:

"Op. cit." and "loc.

cit."

14.32:

Citations plus

commentary

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Shortened Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

14.31 "OP. CIT." AND "LOC. CIT."

List of Tables

Op. cit. ( opere citato, "in the work cited") and loc. cit. ( loco citato, "in the place cited"), used with an

Index

author's last name and standing in place of a previously cited title, are rightly falling into disuse.

Consider a reader's frustration on meeting, for example, "Wells, op. cit., 10" in note 95 and having to

search back to note 2 for the full source or, worse still, finding that two works by Wells have been

14.29:

cited. Chicago disallows both op. cit. and loc. cit. and instead uses the short-title form described in

"Ibid."

14.28.

14.30:

"Idem"

14.31:

"Op. cit." and "loc.

cit."

14.32:

Citations plus

commentary

14.33:

Quotation within a

note

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Commentary and Quotations in Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.32 CITATIONS PLUS COMMENTARY

List of Tables

When a note contains not only the source of a fact or quotation in the text but related substantive

Index

material as well, the source comes first. A period usually separates the citation from the commentary.

Such comments as "emphasis mine" are usually put in parentheses. See also 13.60.

14.30:

11. Shakespeare, Julius Caesar, act 3, sc. 1. Caesar's claim of constancy should be taken with a grain of salt.

"Idem"

12. Little, "Norms of Collegiality," 330 (my italics).

14.31:

"Op. cit." and "loc.

cit."

14.32:

Citations plus

commentary

14.33:

Quotation within a

note

14.34:

Substantive notes

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Commentary and Quotations in Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.33 QUOTATION WITHIN A NOTE

List of Tables

When a note includes a quotation, the source normally follows the terminal punctuation of the

Index

quotation. The entire source need not be put in parentheses, which involves changing existing

parentheses to brackets (see 6.99) and creating unnecessary clutter.

14.31:

14. One estimate of the size of the reading public at this time was that of Sydney Smith: "Readers are

"Op. cit." and "loc.

fourfold in number compared with what they were before the beginning of the French war. . . . There are

cit."

four or five hundred thousand readers more than there were thirty years ago, among the lower orders."

14.32:

Letters, ed. Nowell C. Smith (New York: Oxford University Press, 1953), 1:341, 343.

Citations plus

commentary

Long quotations should be set off as extracts in notes as they would be in text (see 13.10). In notes,

14.33:

Quotation within a

more than three lines of poetry should be set off (but see 13.23; see also 13.27).

note

14.34:

Substantive notes

14.35:

Paragraphing

within long notes

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Commentary and Quotations in Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.34 SUBSTANTIVE NOTES

List of Tables

Substantive, or discursive, notes may merely amplify the text and include no sources. Such notes may

Index

augment any system of documentation, including the author-date system (see chapter 15). When a

source is needed, it is treated as in the example in 14.33 or, if brief and already cited in full, may

appear parenthetically, as in the following example:

14.32:

Citations plus

1. Ernst Cassirer takes important notice of this in Language and Myth (59--62) and offers a searching

commentary

analysis of man's regard for things on which his power of inspirited action may crucially depend.

14.33:

Quotation within a

note

14.34:

Substantive notes

14.35:

Paragraphing

within long notes

14.36:

Footnotes that

break across pages

in a printed work

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Commentary and Quotations in Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.35 PARAGRAPHING WITHIN LONG NOTES

List of Tables

To avoid page makeup problems, very long footnotes should be avoided (see 14.39). No such bar

Index

exists for endnotes, however, and very long endnotes should be broken into multiple paragraphs as

an aid to reading. Authors and editors should first consider, however, whether such a note would be

more effective if shortened or at least partially incorporated into the text. See also 14.40.

14.33:

Quotation within a

note

14.34:

Substantive notes

14.35:

Paragraphing

within long notes

14.36:

Footnotes that

break across pages

in a printed work

14.37:

"See" and "cf."

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Commentary and Quotations in Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.36 FOOTNOTES THAT BREAK ACROSS PAGES IN A PRINTED WORK

List of Tables

When a footnote begins on one page and continues on the next, the break should be made in

Index

midsentence lest readers miss the end of the note; a short rule appears above the continued part (see

fig. 14.1). This advice applies only to the published form of a work (and is something that is generally

imposed at the typesetting stage). At the manuscript stage, authors and editors should let the note-

14.34:

making feature in their word-processing software determine any such breaks.

Substantive notes

14.35:

Paragraphing

within long notes

14.36:

Footnotes that

break across pages

in a printed work

14.37:

"See" and "cf."

14.38:

Footnotes and

endnotesâ€”an

overview

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Commentary and Quotations in Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.37 "SEE" AND "CF."

List of Tables

Notes are often used to invite readers to consult further resources. When doing so, authors should

Index

keep in mind the distinction between see and cf. , using cf. only to mean "compare" or "see, by way of

comparison." Neither term is italicized in notes (though see is italicized in indexes; see 16.22).

14.35:

22. For further discussion of this problem, see Jones, Conflict, 49.

Paragraphing

23. Others disagree with my position; cf. Fisher and Ury, Getting to Yes, 101--3.

within long notes

14.36:

Footnotes that

break across pages

in a printed work

14.37:

"See" and "cf."

14.38:

Footnotes and

endnotesâ€”an

overview

14.39:

Footnotesâ€”pros

and cons

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Footnotes versus Endnotes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.38 FOOTNOTES AND ENDNOTES--AN OVERVIEW

List of Tables

As their name suggests, footnotes appear at the foot of a page. In a journal, endnotes appear at the

Index

end of an article; in a book, at the end of a chapter or, more commonly, at the back of the book. (In

multiauthor books, where the notes may differ in kind and length, and where chapters may be

reprinted separately, they are usually placed at the end of the chapter to which they pertain.) At the

14.36:

manuscript stage, authors can work with whichever form seems most convenient, though notes

Footnotes that

break across pages

should be created with a word processor's note function to facilitate renumbering when notes are

in a printed work

added or deleted (see also 2.20). For footnotes to tables, see 2.28, 3.74--78. For notes in previously

14.37:

published material, see 2.42.

"See" and "cf."

14.38:

Footnotes and

endnotes—an

overview

14.39:

Footnotes—pros

and cons

14.40:

Endnotes—pros and

cons

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Footnotes versus Endnotes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.39 FOOTNOTES--PROS AND CONS

List of Tables

Readers of scholarly printed works usually prefer footnotes for ease of reference. This is especially

Index

true where the notes are closely integrated into the text and make interesting reading, or if immediate

knowledge of the sources is essential to readers. The limiting factor in printed works is page makeup-

-it can be difficult or impossible to fit a close succession of long footnotes onto the pages they pertain

14.37:

to, especially in an illustrated work (a basic requirement for all footnotes is that they at least begin on

"See" and "cf."

the page on which they are referenced). There is also the matter of appearance; a page consisting

14.38:

Footnotes and

almost exclusively of footnotes is daunting. For some remedies, see 14.51--55.

endnotes—an

overview

14.39:

Footnotes—pros

and cons

14.40:

Endnotes—pros and

cons

14.41:

Endnote placement

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Footnotes versus Endnotes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.40 ENDNOTES--PROS AND CONS

List of Tables

Endnotes, which pose no page makeup challenges beyond those of ordinary text, obviate many of the

Index

disadvantages of footnotes in printed works (see 14.39). Because of this flexibility, and because pages

free of footnotes are less intimidating to many readers, publishers' marketing and sales staff may

recommend endnotes in books directed to general as well as scholarly or professional readers.

14.38:

Nonetheless, because general readers may be disappointed to find a third or more of a book devoted

Footnotes and

endnotes—an

to endnotes, authors still need to aim for a healthy balance between text and notes (i.e., by limiting

overview

the temptation to include an excessive number of discursive notes). The main problem with endnotes

14.39:

is that of finding a particular note. This difficulty (usually not encountered in electronic texts, where

Footnotes—pros

and cons

text and notes are linked) can be ameliorated by informative running heads (see 14.42).

14.40:

Endnotes—pros and

cons

14.41:

Endnote placement

14.42:

Running heads for

endnotes

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Footnotes versus Endnotes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.41 ENDNOTE PLACEMENT

List of Tables

Endnotes to each chapter of a book are often best grouped in the end matter, following the text and

Index

any appendixes and preceding the bibliography if there is one (see 1.4). The main heading is simply

"Notes," and the group of notes to each chapter is introduced by a subhead bearing the chapter

number or title or both (see fig. 14.2). In a book that has a different author for each chapter, or whose

14.39:

chapters may be published separately, endnotes normally appear at the end of each chapter. In a

Footnotesâ€”pros

and cons

journal, they appear at the end of each article. In the latter two cases, a subhead "Notes" usually

14.40:

appears between text and notes (see fig. 14.3).

Endnotesâ€”pros

and cons

14.41:

Endnote placement

14.42:

Running heads for

endnotes

14.43:

Special needs of

endnotes

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Footnotes versus Endnotes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.42 RUNNING HEADS FOR ENDNOTES

List of Tables

Where endnotes are gathered at the back of a printed book and occupy more than two or three pages,

Index

running heads (both verso and recto) carrying the page numbers to which the notes pertain are a

boon to readers (see 1.14). To determine what text page numbers to use on a particular page of notes,

find the numbers of the first and last notes beginning on that page (disregarding a runover from a

14.40:

previous page) and locate the references to these notes in the text. The numbers of the first and last

Endnotesâ€”pros

and cons

pages on which these references appear in text are the numbers to use in the running head: for

14.41:

example, "Notes to Pages 123--125." The last number is not abbreviated; compare 9.60. (If, as

Endnote placement

occasionally happens, only one note appears on a page, use the singular: e.g., "Note to Page 23.")

14.42:

Since these running heads can be completed only when page proofs are available, the corrections are

Running heads for

endnotes

considered "alterations" (see 2.131), and the cost may be charged to the publisher. (Another option,

14.43:

less useful for readers but cheaper for the publisher, is to include running heads that simply read

Special needs of

"Notes to Chapter One," "Notes to Chapter Two," and so on; since readers are often unaware of the

endnotes

number of the chapter they are reading, chapter numbers must also appear in the running heads of

14.44:

Endnotes plus

the text itself.) When notes appear at the ends of chapters, note-related running heads are rarely

footnotes

necessary.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Footnotes versus Endnotes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.43 SPECIAL NEEDS OF ENDNOTES

List of Tables

Whereas footnote citations, because they appear so close to the text, can omit certain elements

Index

mentioned in the text, omitting them in endnotes risks irritating readers, who have to go back and

forth. For example, an author or title mentioned in the text need not be repeated in the footnote

citation, though it is often helpful to do so. In an endnote, however, the author (or at least the author's

14.41:

last name, unless it is obvious) and title should be repeated, since at least some readers may have

Endnote placement

forgotten whether the note number was 93 or 94 by the time they find it at the back of the work. It is

14.42:

Running heads for

particularly annoying to arrive at the right place in the endnotes only to find another "ibid." Such

endnotes

frustration can be further prevented by consolidating some of the endnote references, using the

14.43:

devices illustrated in the examples below.

Special needs of

endnotes

34. This and the preceding four quotations are all from Hamlet, act 1, sc. 4.

14.44:

Endnotes plus

87. Barbara Wallraff, Word Court: Wherein Verbal Virtue Is Rewarded, Crimes against the Language Are

footnotes

Punished, and Poetic Justice Is Done (New York: Harcourt, 2000), 34. Further citations of this work are given in

14.45:

the text.

Footnotes plus

author-date

citations

The device in the second example should be used only if the source is clear from the text, without

reference to the endnotes. See also 13.65.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Two Sets of Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.44 ENDNOTES PLUS FOOTNOTES

List of Tables

In a heavily documented work it is occasionally helpful to separate substantive notes from source

Index

citations. In such a case, the citation notes should be numbered and appear as endnotes. The

substantive notes, indicated by asterisks and other symbols, appear as footnotes. The first footnote on

each printed page is referenced by an asterisk. If more than one footnote begins on a page, the

14.42:

sequence of symbols is * † ‡ §. Should more than four such notes appear on the same page, the

Running heads for

endnotes

symbols are doubled for the fifth to the eighth notes: ** †† ‡‡ §§. See also 3.77.

14.43:

Special needs of

endnotes

14.44:

Endnotes plus

footnotes

14.45:

Footnotes plus

author-date

citations

14.46:

Editor's or

translator's notes

plus author's notes

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Two Sets of Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.45 FOOTNOTES PLUS AUTHOR-DATE CITATIONS

List of Tables

The rather cumbersome practice described in 14.44 may be avoided by the use of author-date

Index

citations for sources (see 14.2 and chapter 15) and numbered footnotes or endnotes for the substantive

comments. Moreover, the numbered notes can themselves contain parenthetical author-date citations

when necessary, adding to the flexibility of such a system. See also 15.30.

14.43:

Special needs of

endnotes

14.44:

Endnotes plus

footnotes

14.45:

Footnotes plus

author-date

citations

14.46:

Editor's or

translator's notes

plus author's notes

14.47:

Unnumbered notes

in relation to

numbered notes

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Two Sets of Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.46 EDITOR'S OR TRANSLATOR'S NOTES PLUS AUTHOR'S NOTES

List of Tables

In an edited or translated work that includes notes by the original author, any additional notes

Index

furnished by the editor or translator must be distinguished from the others. Most commonly, the

added notes are interspersed and consecutively numbered with the original notes but distinguished

from them either by appending "--Ed." or "--Trans." (following a period) at the end of the note or by

14.44:

enclosing the entire note, except the number, in square brackets. (An editor's or translator's comment

Endnotes plus

footnotes

can also be added as needed in square brackets within an original note; see 6.97.)

14.45:

Footnotes plus

14. Millicent Cliff was Norton Westermont's first cousin, although to the very last she denied it.--Ed.

author-date

citations

or

14.46:

Editor's or

21. [The original reads gesungen; presumably gesunken is meant.]

translator's notes

plus author's notes

Alternatively, if there are only a few added notes, these can be referenced by asterisks and other

14.47:

symbols and appear as footnotes; the original notes, numbered, then appear below them, as footnotes

Unnumbered notes

in relation to

(see fig. 14.4), or are treated as endnotes (see 14.38, 14.20). See also 14.48.

numbered notes

14.48:

Notes keyed to

text by line or

page numbers

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Unnumbered Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.47 UNNUMBERED NOTES IN RELATION TO NUMBERED NOTES

List of Tables

Footnotes without numbers or symbols always precede any numbered notes on the same printed

Index

page. They most often appear on the opening page of a chapter or other main division of a work. In a

work with endnotes in which an unnumbered footnote is not an option, an unnumbered endnote--to

be used with caution because it is easily missed--should appear immediately before note 1 to the

14.45:

relevant chapter. An example of such a note would be a note applying to a book epigraph (see 1.36),

Footnotes plus

author-date

which would precede the endnotes to the first chapter and appear under a heading "Epigraph." Notes

citations

to chapter epigraphs can be handled similarly. Source notes, biographical notes, and other

14.46:

unnumbered notes pertaining to an entire chapter or section--which appear as footnotes--are treated

Editor's or

translator's notes

in 14.49 and 14.50.

plus author's notes

14.47:

Unnumbered notes

in relation to

numbered notes

14.48:

Notes keyed to

text by line or

page numbers

14.49:

Unnumbered

source notes

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Unnumbered Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.48 NOTES KEYED TO TEXT BY LINE OR PAGE NUMBERS

List of Tables

In some works--translations and editions of the classics, for example, or books intended for a more

Index

general audience--it may be desirable to omit note numbers in the text. Any necessary notes may then

be keyed to the text by line or page number, or both, usually followed by the word or phrase being

annotated. (Line numbers are used as locators only if line numbers appear in the text.) Such notes

14.46:

may appear as footnotes or endnotes. The keywords may be distinguished from the annotation

Editor's or

translator's notes

typographically (e.g., with italics or boldface) and separated from the annotation by a colon or the use

plus author's notes

of brackets or other devices. Quotation marks, if used at all, should be reserved for keywords that are

14.47:

themselves direct quotations in the text. See figures 14.5, 14.6.

Unnumbered notes

in relation to

numbered notes

14.48:

Notes keyed to

text by line or

page numbers

14.49:

Unnumbered

source notes

14.50:

Unnumbered

biographical notes

and

acknowledgments

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Unnumbered Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.49 UNNUMBERED SOURCE NOTES

List of Tables

In anthologies and other collections of previously published material, or in largely new publications

Index

that contain one or more previously published chapters, the source of each reprinted piece may be

given in an unnumbered footnote on the first printed page of the chapter, preceding any numbered

footnotes. If the other notes are endnotes, the source note should remain a footnote, and it must do so

14.47:

if it carries a copyright notice. For material still in copyright, the note should include the original title,

Unnumbered notes

in relation to

publisher or journal, publication date, page numbers or other locators, and--very important--mention

numbered notes

of permission from the copyright owner to reprint. It may also include a copyright notice if requested.

14.48:

Some permissions grantors demand particular language in the source note. For exercising discretion

Notes keyed to

text by line or

versus acceding literally to the grantor's request, see 3.31, which deals with illustrations but applies

page numbers

equally to text. In many cases, wording can be adjusted for consistency as long as proper credit is

14.49:

Unnumbered

given. The following examples show various acceptable forms. See also 4.98.

source notes

14.50:

Reprinted with permission from Steven Shapin, The Scientific Revolution (Chicago: University of Chicago

Unnumbered

Press, 1996), 15--64.

biographical notes

and

acknowledgments

If an article or chapter is reprinted under a different title:

14.51:

Avoiding overlong

Originally published as "Manet in His Generation: The Face of Painting in the 1860s," Critical Inquiry 19, no.

notes

1 (1992): 22--69, Â© 1992 by The University of Chicago. All rights reserved. Reprinted by permission.

If an article or chapter has been revised:

Originally published in a slightly different form in The Metropolis in Modern Life, ed. Robert Moore Fisher

(New York: Doubleday, 1955), 125--48. Reprinted by permission of the author and the publisher.

If a work is in the public domain (such as government publications):

Reprinted from Ambler Thompson and Barry N. Taylor, Guide for the Use of the International System of Units

(SI) (Gaithersburg, MD: National Institute of Standards and Technology, 2008), 38--39.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Unnumbered Notes

of Contents

List of Figures

14.50 UNNUMBERED BIOGRAPHICAL NOTES AND ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

List of Tables

In journals or multiauthor works, a brief biographical note on the author or authors may appear as an

Index

unnumbered note on the first page of each article or chapter. Alternatively, some publications put

such notes at the end of the article or chapter. Such identifying notes are unnecessary when the work

includes a list of contributors with their affiliations. (See also 1.62, 1.20.)

14.48:

Notes keyed to

Alice Y. Kaplan teaches in the Department of Romance Studies at Duke University. She is the author of

text by line or

page numbers

Reproductions of Banality: Fascism, Literature, and French Intellectual Life (1986); RelevÃ© des sources et citations

14.49:

dans "Bagatelles pour un massacre" (1987); a memoir, French Lessons (1993); and The Collaborator: The Trial and

Unnumbered

Execution of Robert Brasillach (2000).

source notes

14.50:

Similarly, special acknowledgments may be given in an unnumbered note, sometimes appended to

Unnumbered

biographical notes

the biographical information.

and

acknowledgments

The authors gratefully acknowledge the assistance of Janni R. Blazer of the Chain and Fob Archive in the

14.51:

preparation of this chapter.

Avoiding overlong

notes

Michael Saler is assistant professor of history at the University of California, Davis. For their comments and

14.52:

Several citations in

assistance the author would like to thank T. W. Heyck, Norma Landau, D. L. LeMahieu, Fred Leventhal,

one note

Chun Li, Dianne Macleod, Peter Mandler, Paul Robinson, Peter Stansky, Meredith Veldman, Chris Waters,

and the Mabel Macleod Lewis Memorial Foundation.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Remedies for Excessive Annotation

of Contents

List of Figures

14.51 AVOIDING OVERLONG NOTES

List of Tables

Lengthy, discursive notes--especially footnotes--should be reduced or integrated into the text (see

Index

14.39). Notes presented as endnotes can generally accommodate lengthier commentary, but this

should be limited in a judicious manner (see 14.40). Complicated tabular material, lists, and other

entities not part of the text should be put in an appendix rather than in the footnotes (see 1.57). A

14.49:

parenthetical note in the text might read, for example, "For a list of institutions involved, see appendix

Unnumbered

source notes

A."

14.50:

Unnumbered

biographical notes

and

acknowledgments

14.51:

Avoiding overlong

notes

14.52:

Several citations in

one note

14.53:

Parenthetical text

references

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Remedies for Excessive Annotation

of Contents

List of Figures

14.52 SEVERAL CITATIONS IN ONE NOTE

List of Tables

The number of note references in a sentence or a paragraph can sometimes be reduced by grouping

Index

several citations in a single note. The citations are separated by semicolons and must appear in the

same order as the text material (whether works, quotations, or whatever) to which they pertain. Take

care to avoid any ambiguity as to what is documenting what.

14.50:

Unnumbered

Text:

biographical notes

and

acknowledgments

Only when we gather the work of several scholars--Walter Sutton's explications of some of Whitman's

14.51:

shorter poems; Paul Fussell's careful study of structure in "Cradle"; S. K. Coffman's close readings of

Avoiding overlong

notes

"Crossing Brooklyn Ferry" and "Passage to India"; and the attempts of Thomas I. Rountree and John Lovell,

dealing with "Song of Myself" and "Passage to India," respectively, to elucidate the strategy in "indirection"--

14.52:

1

Several citations in

do we begin to get a sense of both the extent and the specificity of Whitman's forms.

one note

14.53:

Note:

Parenthetical text

references

1. Sutton, "The Analysis of Free Verse Form, Illustrated by a Reading of Whitman," Journal of Aesthetics and

14.54:

Art Criticism 18 (December 1959): 241--54; Fussell, "Whitman's Curious Warble: Reminiscence and

Abbreviations for

frequently cited

Reconciliation," in The Presence of Walt Whitman, ed. R. W. B. Lewis (New York: Columbia University Press,

works

1962), 28--51; Coffman, " ‘Crossing Brooklyn Ferry': A Note on the Catalog Technique in Whitman's Poetry,"

Modern Philology 51 (May 1954): 225--32; Coffman, "Form and Meaning in Whitman's ‘Passage to India,' "

PMLA 70 (June 1955): 337--49; Rountree, "Whitman's Indirect Expression and Its Application to ‘Song of

Myself,' " PMLA 73 (December 1958): 549--55; and Lovell, "Appreciating Whitman: ‘Passage to India,' "

Modern Language Quarterly 21 (June 1960): 131--41.

In the example above, authors' given names are omitted in the note because they appear in the text.

For inclusion of names in endnotes versus footnotes, see 14.43.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Remedies for Excessive Annotation

of Contents

List of Figures

14.53 PARENTHETICAL TEXT REFERENCES

List of Tables

Another way to reduce the number of notes is to cite sources (usually in parentheses) in the text. A

Index

combination of Ibid. and page numbers for subsequent citations of the same source may be dealt with

in the same way--that is, cited in the text rather than in notes (see 14.29). For discussion and

examples, see 13.62--70.

14.51:

Avoiding overlong

notes

14.52:

Several citations in

one note

14.53:

Parenthetical text

references

14.54:

Abbreviations for

frequently cited

works

14.55:

List of

abbreviations

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Remedies for Excessive Annotation

of Contents

List of Figures

14.54 ABBREVIATIONS FOR FREQUENTLY CITED WORKS

List of Tables

A frequently mentioned work may be cited either parenthetically in text or in subsequent notes by

Index

means of an abbreviation, with full citation provided in a note at first mention. (This practice is more

helpful with footnotes than with endnotes.) See also 13.65, 14.55, 14.24--31.

14.52:

2. FranÃ§ois Furet, The Passing of an Illusion: The Idea of Communism in the Twentieth Century, trans.

Several citations in

Deborah Furet (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1999), 368 (hereafter cited in text as PI).

one note

14.53:

(Subsequent text references) "In this sense, the Second World War completed what the First had begun--the

Parenthetical text

references

domination of the great political religions over European public opinion," Furet points out ( PI, 360). But he

goes on to argue . . .

14.54:

Abbreviations for

frequently cited

An abbreviation differs from a short title (see 14.28) in that words may be abbreviated and the word

works

order changed.

14.55:

List of

abbreviations

3. Nathaniel B. Shurtleff, ed., Records of the Governor and Company of the Massachusetts Bay in New England

14.56:

(1628--86), 5 vols. (Boston, 1853--54), 1:126 (hereafter cited as Mass. Records).

Relationship of

4. Mass. Records, 2:330.

bibliographies to

notes

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Notes >> Remedies for Excessive Annotation

of Contents

List of Figures

14.55 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

Where many abbreviations of titles, manuscript collections, personal names, or other entities are used

Index

in a work--say, ten or more--they are best listed alphabetically in a separate section. In a book, the list

may appear in the front matter (if footnotes are used) or in the end matter preceding the endnotes (if

these are used). It is usually headed "Abbreviations" and should be included in the table of contents

14.53:

(see 1.4, 1.43). Where only a few abbreviations are used, these are occasionally listed as the first

Parenthetical text

references

section of the endnotes (see fig. 14.7) or at the head of the bibliography. Titles that are italicized in the

14.54:

notes or bibliography should be italicized in their abbreviated form in the list of abbreviations and

Abbreviations for

elsewhere.

frequently cited

works

14.55:

List of

abbreviations

14.56:

Relationship of

bibliographies to

notes

14.57:

Format and

placement of

bibliography

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Bibliographies >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

14.56 RELATIONSHIP OF BIBLIOGRAPHIES TO NOTES

List of Tables

Although not all annotated works require a bibliography, since full details can be given in the notes,

Index

an alphabetical bibliography serves a number of purposes. Specifically, a full biography that includes

all the sources cited in the text, in addition to providing an overview of the sources and therefore an

indication of the scope of an author's research, can serve as a convenient key to shortened forms of

14.54:

the notes (see 14.14, 14.24). In electronic publications, a full bibliography can significantly streamline

Abbreviations for

frequently cited

the process of creating links to works cited and, in turn, can enable publishers of those cited works to

works

identify and create "cited by" links.

14.55:

List of

abbreviations

14.56:

Relationship of

bibliographies to

notes

14.57:

Format and

placement of

bibliography

14.58:

Dividing a

bibliography into

sections

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Bibliographies >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

14.57 FORMAT AND PLACEMENT OF BIBLIOGRAPHY

List of Tables

A bibliography arranged in a single alphabetical list is the most common and usually the most reader-

Index

friendly form for a work with or without notes to the text. All sources to be included--books, articles,

dissertations, papers--are alphabetically arranged in a single list by the last names of the authors (or,

if no author or editor is given, by the title or a keyword readers are most likely to seek). In a printed

14.55:

work, a bibliography is normally placed at the end, preceding the index. In a multiauthor book or a

List of

abbreviations

textbook, each chapter may be followed by a brief bibliography. For an illustration, see figure 14.8; for

14.56:

the arrangement of entries, see 14.60--62. For division into sections, see 14.58.

Relationship of

bibliographies to

notes

14.57:

Format and

placement of

bibliography

14.58:

Dividing a

bibliography into

sections

14.59:

Kinds of

bibliographies

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Bibliographies >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

14.58 DIVIDING A BIBLIOGRAPHY INTO SECTIONS

List of Tables

A bibliography may occasionally be divided into sections--but only if doing so would make the

Index

reader's job significantly easier. Where readers need to refer frequently from notes to bibliography, a

continuous alphabetical list is far preferable, since in a subdivided bibliography the alphabetizing

starts over with each section. Rarely should books be separated from articles, since a book and an

14.56:

article by the same author are best listed close together. It may be appropriate to subdivide a

Relationship of

bibliographies to

bibliography (1) when it includes manuscript sources, archival collections, or other materials that do

notes

not fit into a straight alphabetical list; (2) when readers need to see at a glance the distinction between

14.57:

different kinds of works--for example, in a study of one writer, between works by the writer and

Format and

placement of

those about him or her; or (3) when the bibliography is intended primarily as a guide to further

bibliography

reading (as in this manual). When divisions are necessary, a headnote should appear at the beginning

14.58:

Dividing a

of the bibliography, and each section should be introduced by an explanatory subhead (see fig. 14.9).

bibliography into

No source should be listed in more than one section. For alphabetizing, see 14.60--62.

sections

14.59:

Kinds of

bibliographies

14.60:

Alphabetical order

for bibliography

entries

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Bibliographies >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

14.59 KINDS OF BIBLIOGRAPHIES

List of Tables

Though Chicago generally recommends a full bibliography for book-length works, any of the

Index

bibliography categories listed here may be suited to a particular type of work. (For reference lists, a

form of bibliography adapted to the author-date system, see 15.10--16.)

14.57:

1. Full bibliography. A full bibliography includes all works cited, whether in text or in notes,

Format and

other than personal communications (see 14.222). Some particularly relevant works the author

placement of

bibliography

has consulted may also be listed, even if not mentioned in the text. The usual heading is

14.58:

Bibliography, though Works Cited or Literature Cited may be used if no additional works are

Dividing a

bibliography into

included.

sections

2. Selected bibliography. If, for whatever reason, the author does not wish to list all works cited,

14.59:

the title must so indicate: either Selected Bibliography or (less frequently) Select Bibliography

Kinds of

bibliographies

may be used or, if the list is quite short, Suggested Readings or Further Readings. A headnote

14.60:

should explain the principles of selection. See figure 14.9.

Alphabetical order

3. Annotated bibliography. Generally more convenient for readers than a bibliographic essay (see

for bibliography

entries

next item) is an annotated bibliography. Annotations may simply follow the publication details

14.61:

(sometimes in brackets if only a few entries are annotated) or may start a new line, often with a

Single author

paragraph indention. See figure 14.10.

versus several

authors

4. Bibliographic essay. Less formal than an annotated bibliography is a bibliographic essay, in

which the author treats the literature discursively. Since works are not alphabetized, subject

divisions may freely be made (see 14.58). Such an essay may be particularly suited to certain

types of archival sources that do not easily lend themselves to an alphabetical list. It may be

included in addition to a bibliography, in which case it should come first. If works discussed in

the essay are listed in the bibliography, they may be given in shortened form (as in notes). If

there is no bibliography, the essay must include full facts of publication, whether or not the

titles also appear in the notes. For an illustration, see figure 14.11.

5. List of works by one author. A list of works by one author, usually titled Published Works [of

So-and-So] or Writings [of So-and-So], is most often arranged chronologically. If several titles

are listed for each year, the dates may appear as subheads.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Bibliographies >> Arrangement of Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

14.60 ALPHABETICAL ORDER FOR BIBLIOGRAPHY ENTRIES

List of Tables

The rules for alphabetizing index entries (see 16.56--93) apply also to a bibliography, with the

Index

modifications described in this section and in 14.63--67. As for index entries, Chicago recommends

the letter-by-letter system unless your publisher prefers the word-by-word system. Under the letter-

by-letter system, an entry for "FernÃ¡ndez, Angelines" would precede an entry for "FernÃ¡n GÃ³mez,

14.58:

Fernando"; under the word-by-word system, the opposite order would prevail. Note that word

Dividing a

bibliography into

processors, though they can provide a head start, are generally not capable of correctly sorting by

sections

either system. In addition to correcting any software-based errors and variations, authors may need

14.59:

to make adjustments for any entries beginning with a 3-em dash (see 14.63).

Kinds of

bibliographies

14.60:

Alphabetical order

for bibliography

entries

14.61:

Single author

versus several

authors

14.62:

Author with

different coauthors

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Bibliographies >> Arrangement of Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

14.61 SINGLE AUTHOR VERSUS SEVERAL AUTHORS

List of Tables

A single-author entry precedes a multiauthor entry beginning with the same name. Only the name of

Index

the first author is inverted.

Kogan, Herman. The First Century: The Chicago Bar Association, 1874--1974. Chicago: Rand McNally, 1974.

14.59:

Kogan, Herman, and Lloyd Wendt. Chicago: A Pictorial History. New York: Dutton, 1958.

Kinds of

bibliographies

14.60:

Alphabetical order

for bibliography

entries

14.61:

Single author

versus several

authors

14.62:

Author with

different coauthors

14.63:

The 3-em dash and

sortingâ€”advice to

authors

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Bibliographies >> Arrangement of Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

14.62 AUTHOR WITH DIFFERENT COAUTHORS

List of Tables

Successive entries by two or more authors in which only the first author's name is the same are

Index

alphabetized according to the coauthors' last names.

Brooks, Daniel R., and Deborah A. McLennan. The Nature of Diversity: An Evolutionary Voyage of Discovery.

14.60:

Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2002.

Alphabetical order

Brooks, Daniel R., and E. O. Wiley. Evolution as Entropy. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1986.

for bibliography

entries

14.61:

Single author

versus several

authors

14.62:

Author with

different coauthors

14.63:

The 3-em dash and

sortingâ€”advice to

authors

14.64:

The 3-em dash for

one repeated name

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Bibliographies >> The 3-Em Dash for Repeated Names in a Bibliography

of Contents

List of Figures

14.63 THE 3-EM DASH AND SORTING--ADVICE TO AUTHORS

List of Tables

The advice in this section, which explains how to use the 3-em dash to stand in for repeated

Index

bibliography entries under the same name, applies only to the final stages of a book or article.

Authors generally should not use the 3-em dash for repeated names until the final manuscript of the

bibliography has been produced. Among other potential pitfalls, 3-em dashes do not work in

14.61:

computerized sorts (i.e., all entries with 3-em dashes will line up in one place). Moreover, an

Single author

versus several

incorrectly applied dash may obscure an important detail--for example, the abbreviation ed. or trans.

authors

Often the best course is to leave this step up to the editor and concentrate on transcribing accurate,

14.62:

complete entries. See also 6.91.

Author with

different coauthors

14.63:

The 3-em dash and

sortingâ€”advice to

authors

14.64:

The 3-em dash for

one repeated name

14.65:

The 3-em dash for

more than one

repeated name

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Bibliographies >> The 3-Em Dash for Repeated Names in a Bibliography

of Contents

List of Figures

14.64 THE 3-EM DASH FOR ONE REPEATED NAME

List of Tables

For successive entries by the same author, editor, translator, or compiler, a 3-em dash (followed by a

Index

period or comma, depending on the presence of an abbreviation such as ed. ) replaces the name after

the first appearance. See also 14.67.

14.62:

Judt, Tony. A Grand Illusion? An Essay on Europe. New York: Hill and Wang, 1996.

Author with

———. Reappraisals: Reflections on the Forgotten Twentieth Century. New York: Penguin Press, 2008.

different coauthors

———, ed. Resistance and Revolution in Mediterranean Europe, 1939--1948. New York: Routledge, 1989.

14.63:

Squire, Larry R. "The Hippocampus and the Neuropsychology of Memory." In Neurobiology of the

The 3-em dash and

sorting—advice to

Hippocampus, edited by W. Seifert, 491--511. New York: Oxford University Press, 1983.

authors

———. Memory and Brain. New York: Oxford University Press, 1987.

14.64:

The 3-em dash for

one repeated name

14.65:

The 3-em dash for

more than one

repeated name

14.66:

The 3-em dash for

an institutional

name

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Bibliographies >> The 3-Em Dash for Repeated Names in a Bibliography

of Contents

List of Figures

14.65 THE 3-EM DASH FOR MORE THAN ONE REPEATED NAME

List of Tables

The 3-em dash can stand for the same two or more authors (or editors or translators, etc.) as in the

Index

previous entry, provided they are listed in the same order. Note that the second-listed work is

authored by (rather than edited by) Marty and Appleby; abbreviations for editor, translator, and so

forth cannot be replaced by the 3-em dash and must always be listed explicitly.

14.63:

The 3-em dash and

Marty, Martin E., and R. Scott Appleby, eds. Fundamentalisms Comprehended. Chicago: University of Chicago

sorting—advice to

authors

Press, 1995.

14.64:

———. The Glory and the Power: The Fundamentalist Challenge to the Modern World. Boston: Beacon Press, 1992.

The 3-em dash for

one repeated name

but

14.65:

The 3-em dash for

Comaroff, Jean, and John Comaroff, eds. Modernity and Its Malcontents: Ritual and Power in Postcolonial Africa.

more than one

Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1993.

repeated name

Comaroff, John, and Jean Comaroff. Of Revelation and Revolution. 2 vols. Chicago: University of Chicago

14.66:

Press, 1991--97.

The 3-em dash for

an institutional

name

14.67:

Alphabetical order

for titles by the

same author

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Bibliographies >> The 3-Em Dash for Repeated Names in a Bibliography

of Contents

List of Figures

14.66 THE 3-EM DASH FOR AN INSTITUTIONAL NAME

List of Tables

The 3-em dash may also be used for institutional or corporate authors. Note that identical titles must

Index

be repeated. See also 14.8.

Unicode Consortium. The Unicode Standard. Version 5.0. Edited by Julie D. Allen et al. Upper Saddle River,

14.64:

NJ: Addison-Wesley, 2007.

The 3-em dash for

â€”â€”â€” . The Unicode Standard. Version 5.1.0. Last updated December 16, 2008.

one repeated name

http://www.unicode.org/versions/Unicode5.1.0/.

14.65:

The 3-em dash for

more than one

repeated name

14.66:

The 3-em dash for

an institutional

name

14.67:

Alphabetical order

for titles by the

same author

14.68:

Books as a model

for other sources

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Bibliographies >> The 3-Em Dash for Repeated Names in a Bibliography

of Contents

List of Figures

14.67 ALPHABETICAL ORDER FOR TITLES BY THE SAME AUTHOR

List of Tables

In a bibliography (as opposed to a reference list; see 15.17), titles by the same author are normally

Index

listed alphabetically. An initial the, a, or an is ignored in the alphabetizing. Note that all works by the

same person (or by the same persons in the same order)--whether that person is editor, author,

translator, or compiler--appear together, regardless of the added abbreviation.

14.65:

The 3-em dash for

Ginger, Ray. The Bending Cross: A Biography of Eugene Victor Debs. New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers University

more than one

repeated name

Press, 1949.

14.66:

———. Six Days or Forever? Tennessee v. John Thomas Scopes. Chicago: Quadrangle Books, 1969.

The 3-em dash for

Monmonier, Mark. Coast Lines: How Mapmakers Frame the World and Chart Environmental Change. Chicago:

an institutional

name

University of Chicago Press, 2008.

———. From Squaw Tit to Whorehouse Meadow: How Maps Name, Claim, and Inflame. Chicago: University of

14.67:

Alphabetical order

Chicago Press, 2006.

for titles by the

Mulvany, Nancy C. "Copyright for Indexes, Revisited." ASI Newsletter 107 (November--December 1991): 11--

same author

13.

14.68:

Books as a model

———, ed. Indexing, Providing Access to Information--Looking Back, Looking Ahead: Proceedings of the 25th

for other sources

Annual Meeting of the American Society of Indexers. Port Aransas, TX: American Society of Indexers, 1993.

14.69:

———. "Software Tools for Indexing: What We Need." Indexer 17 (October 1990): 108--13.

Elements to include

when citing a book

A bibliography of works by a single author (Writings of So-and-So), however, is usually arranged

chronologically. (For an example, see section 2 in fig. 14.9.) Two or more titles published in any one

year are arranged alphabetically.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books

of Contents

List of Figures

14.68 BOOKS AS A MODEL FOR OTHER SOURCES

List of Tables

Much of the advice in the section on books will pertain to other sources as well. Their long history as

Index

a formal publication ensures, in particular, that the variations in author names (14.72--92) and titles

(14.93--110) will serve as a model for constructing documentary notes and bibliography entries for

many other types of sources. Rather than repeat this information for each type of source, then, cross-

14.66:

references will be provided in those sections to the appropriate paragraph(s) in this section on books

The 3-em dash for

an institutional

whenever applicable.

name

14.67:

Alphabetical order

for titles by the

same author

14.68:

Books as a model

for other sources

14.69:

Elements to include

when citing a book

14.70:

Flexibility and

consistency

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books

of Contents

List of Figures

14.69 ELEMENTS TO INCLUDE WHEN CITING A BOOK

List of Tables

A full reference must include enough information to enable an interested reader to locate the book.

Index

Most references contain at least some information not strictly needed for that purpose but potentially

helpful nonetheless. The elements listed below are included, where applicable, in full documentary

notes and bibliography entries. The order in which they appear will vary slightly according to type of

14.67:

book, and certain elements are sometimes omitted; such variation will be noted and illustrated in the

Alphabetical order

for titles by the

course of this chapter.

same author

14.68:

1. Author: full name of author(s) or editor(s) or, if no author or editor is listed, name of institution

Books as a model

for other sources

standing in their place

14.69:

2. Title: full title of the book, including subtitle if there is one

Elements to include

3. Editor, compiler, or translator, if any, if listed on title page in addition to author

when citing a book

4. Edition, if not the first

14.70:

Flexibility and

5. Volume: total number of volumes if multivolume work is referred to as a whole; individual

consistency

number if single volume of multivolume work is cited, and title of individual volume if

14.71:

applicable

Foreign

bibliographic terms

6. Series title if applicable, and volume number within series if series is numbered

and abbreviations

7. Facts of publication: city, publisher, and date

8. Page number or numbers if applicable

9. For electronic books consulted online, a URL or DOI, or, for other types of electronic books, an

indication of the medium consulted (e.g., DVD, CD-ROM); see 14.4--13

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books

of Contents

List of Figures

14.70 FLEXIBILITY AND CONSISTENCY

List of Tables

As long as a consistent style is maintained within any one work, logical and defensible variations on

Index

the style illustrated here are acceptable if agreed to by author and publisher. Such flexibility,

however, is rarely possible in journal publication, which calls for adherence to the established style of

the journal in question. See also 14.3.

14.68:

Books as a model

for other sources

14.69:

Elements to include

when citing a book

14.70:

Flexibility and

consistency

14.71:

Foreign

bibliographic terms

and abbreviations

14.72:

Form of author's

name

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books

of Contents

List of Figures

14.71 FOREIGN BIBLIOGRAPHIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

When books in a language other than English are cited in an English-language work, terms used for

Index

volume, edition, and so on may be translated--but only if the author or editor has a firm grasp of

bibliographic terms in the foreign language. It is often wiser to leave them in the original. "Ausgabe in

einem Band," for example, may be rendered as "one-volume edition" or simply left untranslated.

14.69:

Moreover, abbreviations such as "Bd." and "t." (German and French/Spanish equivalents of vol. ,

Elements to include

when citing a book

respectively) that are likely to have been recorded that way in a library catalog may best be left in

14.70:

that form. If in doubt, check a major catalog such as that of the Library of Congress or WorldCat.

Flexibility and

consistency

14.71:

Foreign

bibliographic terms

and abbreviations

14.72:

Form of author's

name

14.73:

Authors preferring

initials

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.72 FORM OF AUTHOR'S NAME

List of Tables

Authors' names are normally given as they appear on the title pages of their books. Certain

Index

adjustments, however, may be made to assist correct identification (unless they conflict with the style

of a particular journal or series). First names may be given in full in place of initials. If an author uses

his or her given name in one cited book and initials in another (e.g., "Mary L. Jones" versus "M. L.

14.70:

Jones"), the same form, preferably the fuller one, should be used in all references to that author. To

Flexibility and

consistency

assist alphabetization, middle initials should be given wherever known. Degrees and affiliations

14.71:

following names on a title page are omitted.

Foreign

bibliographic terms

and abbreviations

14.72:

Form of author's

name

14.73:

Authors preferring

initials

14.74:

Monarchs, saints,

and the like

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.73 AUTHORS PREFERRING INITIALS

List of Tables

For authors who always use initials, full names should not be supplied--for example, T. S. Eliot,

Index

M. F. K. Fisher, O. Henry (pseud.), P. D. James, C. S. Lewis, J. D. Salinger, H. G. Wells. Note that

space is added between initials. (Exceptions may be made for special cases like H.D.--the pen name

for Hilda Doolittle.) In some instances, a cross-reference may be appropriate (see 14.84). See also 10.12.

14.71:

Very rarely, a portion of an author's given name omitted on the title page is supplied in brackets in a

Foreign

bibliographic terms

bibliography entry. This practice should be limited to authors who may be known by both forms: for

and abbreviations

example, R. S. Crane may be listed as R[onald] S. Crane.

14.72:

Form of author's

name

14.73:

Authors preferring

initials

14.74:

Monarchs, saints,

and the like

14.75:

One author

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.74 MONARCHS, SAINTS, AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

Authors known only by their given names (i.e., and not by any surname) are listed and alphabetized

Index

by those names. Such titles as "King" or "Saint" are omitted.

Augustine. On Christian Doctrine. Translated by D. W. Robertson Jr. Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill, 1958.

14.72:

Elizabeth I. Collected Works. Edited by Leah S. Marcus, Janel Mueller, and Mary Beth Rose. Chicago:

Form of author's

University of Chicago Press, 2000.

name

14.73:

Authors preferring

initials

14.74:

Monarchs, saints,

and the like

14.75:

One author

14.76:

Two or more

authors (or editors)

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.75 ONE AUTHOR

List of Tables

In a note, the author's name is given in the normal order. In a bibliography, where names are

Index

arranged alphabetically, it is inverted (last name first). See also 14.18.

1. David Shields, The Thing about Life Is That One Day You'll Be Dead (New York: Alfred A. Knopf,

14.73:

2008).

Authors preferring

2. Roger Martin du Gard, Lieutenant-Colonel de Maumort, trans. Luc BrÃ©bion and Timothy Crouse

initials

(New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 2000).

14.74:

Monarchs, saints,

Martin du Gard, Roger. Lieutenant-Colonel de Maumort. Translated by Luc BrÃ©bion and Timothy Crouse.

and the like

New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 2000.

14.75:

One author

Shields, David. The Thing about Life Is That One Day You'll Be Dead. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 2008.

14.76:

Two or more

authors (or editors)

14.77:

Two or more

authors (or editors)

with same family

name

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.76 TWO OR MORE AUTHORS (OR EDITORS)

List of Tables

Two or three authors (or editors) of the same work are listed in the order used on the title page. In a

Index

bibliography, only the first author's name is inverted, and a comma must appear both before and after

the first author's given name or initials. Use the conjunction and (not an ampersand).

14.74:

5. Sue-Ellen Jacobs, Wesley Thomas, and Sabine Lang, eds., Two-Spirit People: Native American Gender

Monarchs, saints,

Identity, Sexuality, and Spirituality (Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1997), 32.

and the like

6. Steven D. Levitt and Stephen J. Dubner, Freakonomics: A Rogue Economist Explores the Hidden Side of

14.75:

Everything (New York: William Morrow, 2005), 20--21.

One author

7. Jacobs, Thomas, and Lang, Two-Spirit People, 65--71.

14.76:

Two or more

authors (or editors)

Jacobs, Sue-Ellen, Wesley Thomas, and Sabine Lang, eds. Two-Spirit People: Native American Gender Identity,

Sexuality, and Spirituality. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1997.

14.77:

Two or more

Levitt, Steven D., and Stephen J. Dubner. Freakonomics: A Rogue Economist Explores the Hidden Side of

authors (or editors)

Everything. New York: William Morrow, 2005.

with same family

name

For works by or edited by four to ten persons, all names are usually given in the bibliography. Word

14.78:

Author's name in

order and punctuation are the same as for two or three authors. In a note, only the name of the first

title

author is included, followed by et al. with no intervening comma.

4. Jeri A. Sechzer et al., eds., Women and Mental Health (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press,

1996), 243.

7. Sechzer et al., Women and Mental Health, 276.

For works with more than ten authors--more common in the natural sciences--Chicago recommends

the policy followed by the American Naturalist (see bibliog. 5): only the first seven should be listed in

the bibliography, followed by et al. (Where space is limited, the policy of the American Medical

Association may be followed: up to six authors' names are listed; if there are more than six, only the

first three are listed, followed by et al. )

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.77 TWO OR MORE AUTHORS (OR EDITORS) WITH SAME FAMILY NAME

List of Tables

When two or more authors (or editors) share the same family name, the name is repeated.

Index

3. Christopher Kendris and Theodore Kendris, 501 Spanish Verbs, 6th ed. (Hauppauge, NY: Barron's

Educational Series, 2007), 88.

47. Kendris and Kendris, 501 Spanish Verbs, 191--92.

14.75:

One author

14.76:

Two or more

authors (or editors)

14.77:

Two or more

authors (or editors)

with same family

name

14.78:

Author's name in

title

14.79:

Anonymous worksâ

€”unknown

authorship

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.78 AUTHOR'S NAME IN TITLE

List of Tables

When the author's name appears in the title or subtitle of a cited work (such as an autobiography), the

Index

note citation may begin with the title. The bibliography entry, however, should begin with the

author's name, even though it is repeated in the title. See also 14.87.

14.76:

5. Clapton: The Autobiography (New York: Broadway Books, 2007), 212.

Two or more

6. The Letters of George Meredith, ed. C. L. Cline, 3 vols. (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1970), 1:125.

authors (or editors)

7. Illumination and Night Glare: The Unfinished Autobiography of Carson McCullers, ed. Carlos L. Dews

14.77:

(Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1999), 44--45.

Two or more

authors (or editors)

with same family

Clapton, Eric. Clapton: The Autobiography. New York: Broadway Books, 2007.

name

McCullers, Carson. Illumination and Night Glare: The Unfinished Autobiography of Carson McCullers. Edited by

14.78:

Carlos L. Dews. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1999.

Author's name in

title

Meredith, George. The Letters of George Meredith. Edited by C. L. Cline. 3 vols. Oxford: Clarendon Press,

1970.

14.79:

Anonymous worksâ

€”unknown

authorship

14.80:

Anonymous worksâ

€”known

authorship

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.79 ANONYMOUS WORKS--UNKNOWN AUTHORSHIP

List of Tables

If the author or editor is unknown, the note or bibliography entry should normally begin with the

Index

title. An initial article is ignored in alphabetizing.

8. A True and Sincere Declaration of the Purpose and Ends of the Plantation Begun in Virginia, of the Degrees

14.77:

Which It Hath Received, and Means by Which It Hath Been Advanced (London, 1610).

Two or more

9. Stanze in lode della donna brutta (Florence, 1547).

authors (or editors)

with same family

name

Stanze in lode della donna brutta. Florence, 1547.

A True and Sincere Declaration of the Purpose and Ends of the Plantation Begun in Virginia, of the Degrees Which It

14.78:

Author's name in

Hath Received, and Means by Which It Hath Been Advanced. London, 1610.

title

14.79:

Although the use of Anonymous is generally to be avoided, it may stand in place of the author's name

Anonymous works—

unknown

in a bibliography in which several anonymous works need to be grouped. In such an instance,

authorship

Anonymous or Anon. (set in roman) appears at the first entry, and 3-em dashes (see 14.64) are used

14.80:

thereafter. (The dashes do not necessarily imply the same anonymous author.)

Anonymous works—

known authorship

Anonymous. Stanze in lode della donna brutta. Florence, 1547.

14.81:

Pseudonyms—

———. A True and Sincere Declaration of the Purpose and Ends of the Plantation Begun in Virginia, . . . 1610.

unknown

authorship

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.80 ANONYMOUS WORKS--KNOWN AUTHORSHIP

List of Tables

If the authorship is known or guessed at but was omitted on the title page, the name is included in

Index

brackets.

10. [Samuel Horsley], On the Prosodies of the Greek and Latin Languages (London, 1796).

14.78:

11. [Ebenezer Cook?], Sotweed Redivivus; or, The Planter's Looking-Glass, by "E. C.Gent" (Annapolis,

Author's name in

1730).

title

14.79:

[Cook, Ebenezer?]. Sotweed Redivivus; or, The Planter's Looking-Glass. By "E. C. Gent." Annapolis, 1730.

Anonymous works—

[Horsley, Samuel]. On the Prosodies of the Greek and Latin Languages. London, 1796.

unknown

authorship

14.80:

Anonymous works—

known authorship

14.81:

Pseudonyms—

unknown

authorship

14.82:

Pseudonyms—

known authorship

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.81 PSEUDONYMS--UNKNOWN AUTHORSHIP

List of Tables

If an author's real name is not known, pseud. (roman, in brackets) may follow the name. (In a text

Index

citation, pseud. is omitted.)

Centinel [pseud.]. Letters. In The Complete Anti-Federalist, edited by Herbert J. Storing. Chicago: University of

14.79:

Chicago Press, 1981.

Anonymous works—

unknown

authorship

14.80:

Anonymous works—

known authorship

14.81:

Pseudonyms—

unknown

authorship

14.82:

Pseudonyms—

known authorship

14.83:

Pseudonyms rarely

used

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.82 PSEUDONYMS--KNOWN AUTHORSHIP

List of Tables

A widely used pseudonym is generally treated as if it were the author's real name.

Index

Eliot, George. Middlemarch. Norton Critical Editions. New York: Norton, 1977.

Twain, Mark. The Prince and the Pauper: A Tale for Young People of All Ages. New York: Harper & Brothers,

1899.

14.80:

Anonymous works—

known authorship

The real name, if of interest to readers, may follow the pseudonym in brackets. See also 14.84.

14.81:

Pseudonyms—

Le Carré, John [David John Moore Cornwell]. The Quest for Karla. New York: Knopf, 1982.

unknown

authorship

Stendhal [Marie-Henri Beyle]. The Charterhouse of Parma. Trans. C. K. Scott-Moncrieff. New York: Boni and

Liveright, 1925.

14.82:

Pseudonyms—

known authorship

14.83:

Pseudonyms rarely

used

14.84:

Cross-references

for pseudonyms

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.83 PSEUDONYMS RARELY USED

List of Tables

If the author's real name is better known than the pseudonym, the real name should be used. If

Index

needed, the pseudonym may be included in brackets, followed by pseud.

BrontÃ«, Charlotte. Jane Eyre. London, 1847.

14.81:

or

Pseudonymsâ

€”unknown

authorship

BrontÃ«, Charlotte [Currer Bell, pseud.]. Jane Eyre. London, 1847.

14.82:

Pseudonymsâ

€”known

authorship

14.83:

Pseudonyms rarely

used

14.84:

Cross-references

for pseudonyms

14.85:

Descriptive phrase

as "author"

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.84 CROSS-REFERENCES FOR PSEUDONYMS

List of Tables

In some cases, a cross-reference from a real name to a pseudonym, or vice versa, may be desired.

Index

Italicize words like See.

Twain, Mark. See Clemens, Samuel.

14.82:

Pseudonyms—

If a bibliography includes two or more works published by the same author but under different

known authorship

pseudonyms, all may be listed under the real name followed by the appropriate pseudonym in

14.83:

brackets, with cross-references under the pseudonyms (see also 14.64). Alternatively, they may be

Pseudonyms rarely

used

listed under the pseudonyms, with a cross-reference at the real name to each pseudonym.

14.84:

Cross-references

Ashe, Gordon. See Creasey, John.

for pseudonyms

Creasey, John [Gordon Ashe, pseud.]. A Blast of Trumpets. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1976.

14.85:

——— [Anthony Morton, pseud.]. Hide the Baron. New York: Walker, 1978.

Descriptive phrase

as "author"

——— [Jeremy York, pseud.]. Death to My Killer. New York: Macmillan, 1966.

Morton, Anthony. See Creasey, John.

14.86:

Alternative real

York, Jeremy. See Creasey, John.

names

or

Ashe, Gordon [John Creasey]. A Blast of Trumpets. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1976.

Creasey, John. See Ashe, Gordon; Morton, Anthony; York, Jeremy.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.85 DESCRIPTIVE PHRASE AS "AUTHOR"

List of Tables

A descriptive phrase standing in place of the author is treated in much the same way as a pseudonym

Index

(see 14.81). An initial The or A may be omitted.

11. Cotton Manufacturer, An Inquiry into the Causes of the Present Long-Continued Depression in the

14.83:

Cotton Trade, with Suggestions for Its Improvement (Bury, UK, 1869), 4--5.

Pseudonyms rarely

used

Cotton Manufacturer. An Inquiry . . .

14.84:

Cross-references

for pseudonyms

14.85:

Descriptive phrase

as "author"

14.86:

Alternative real

names

14.87:

Editor in place of

author

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.86 ALTERNATIVE REAL NAMES

List of Tables

When a writer has published under different forms of his or her name, the works should be listed

Index

under the name used on the title page--unless the difference is merely the use of initials versus full

names (see 14.72). Cross-references are occasionally used.

14.84:

Doniger, Wendy. The Bedtrick: Tales of Sex and Masquerade. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2000.

Cross-references

â€”â€”â€” . See also O'Flaherty, Wendy Doniger.

for pseudonyms

14.85:

If a person discussed in the text publishes under a name not used in the text, a cross-reference may be

Descriptive phrase

as "author"

useful.

14.86:

Alternative real

Overstone, Lord. See Loyd, Samuel Jones.

names

14.87:

Editor in place of

author

14.88:

Editor or translator

in addition to

author

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.87 EDITOR IN PLACE OF AUTHOR

List of Tables

When no author appears on the title page, a work is listed by the name(s) of the editor(s), compiler(s),

Index

or translator(s). In full note citations and in bibliographies, the abbreviation ed. or eds. , comp. or comps. ,

or trans. follows the name, preceded by a comma. In shortened note citations and text citations, the

abbreviation is omitted.

14.85:

Descriptive phrase

3. Glenn Young, ed., The Best American Short Plays, 2002--2003 (New York: Applause, 2007), 94.

as "author"

4. Theodore Silverstein, trans., Sir Gawain and the Green Knight (Chicago: University of Chicago Press,

14.86:

Alternative real

1974), 34.

names

5. Young, Best American Short Plays, 97--98; Silverstein, Sir Gawain, 38.

14.87:

Editor in place of

Silverstein, Theodore, trans. Sir Gawain and the Green Knight. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1974.

author

Young, Glenn, ed. The Best American Short Plays, 2002--2003. New York: Applause, 2007.

14.88:

Editor or translator

On the other hand, certain well-known reference works may be listed by title rather than by editor;

in addition to

author

for an example, see 14.247.

14.89:

"With the

assistance of" and

the like

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.88 EDITOR OR TRANSLATOR IN ADDITION TO AUTHOR

List of Tables

The edited, compiled, or translated work of one author is normally listed with the author's name

Index

appearing first and the name(s) of the editor(s), compiler(s), or translator(s) appearing after the title,

preceded by edited by or ed. , compiled by or comp. , or translated by or trans. Note that the plural forms

eds. and comps. are never used in this position. Note also that edited by and the like are usually spelled

14.86:

out in bibliographies but abbreviated in notes. If a translator as well as an editor is listed, the names

Alternative real

names

should appear in the same order as on the title page of the original. When the title page carries such

14.87:

phrases as "Edited with an Introduction and Notes by" or "Translated with a Foreword by," the

Editor in place of

bibliographic or note reference can usually be simplified to "Edited by" or "Translated by." See also

author

14.78, 14.112, 14.109.

14.88:

Editor or translator

in addition to

6. Yves Bonnefoy, New and Selected Poems, ed. John Naughton and Anthony Rudolf (Chicago:

author

University of Chicago Press, 1995).

14.89:

7. Rigoberta MenchÃº, Crossing Borders, trans. and ed. Ann Wright (New York: Verso, 1999).

"With the

assistance of" and

8. Four Farces by Georges Feydeau, trans. Norman R. Shapiro (Chicago: University of Chicago Press,

the like

1970).

14.90:

10. Theodor W. Adorno and Walter Benjamin, The Complete Correspondence, 1928--1940, ed. Henri

Editor versus

Lonitz, trans. Nicholas Walker (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1999).

author

Adorno, Theodor W., and Walter Benjamin. The Complete Correspondence, 1928--1940. Edited by Henri Lonitz.

Translated by Nicholas Walker. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1999.

Bonnefoy, Yves. New and Selected Poems. Edited by John Naughton and Anthony Rudolf. Chicago: University

of Chicago Press, 1995.

Feydeau, Georges. Four Farces by Georges Feydeau. Translated by Norman R. Shapiro. Chicago: University of

Chicago Press, 1970.

MenchÃº, Rigoberta. Crossing Borders. Translated and edited by Ann Wright. New York: Verso, 1999.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.89 "WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF" AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

The title page of some edited books carries information that must be dealt with ad hoc. The usual

Index

formats, phrases, and abbreviations may not work. If a title page lists, for example, one editor,

followed in smaller type by "Associate Editor So-and-So" and "Assistant Editor So-and-So," the

secondary names may be included with such wording as "With the assistance of So-and-So and So-

14.87:

and-So" (or simply omitted). For ghostwritten books, with is usually sufficient.

Editor in place of

author

Chaucer Life-Records. Edited by Martin M. Crow and Clair C. Olson from materials compiled by John M.

14.88:

Editor or translator

Manly and Edith Rickert, with the assistance of Lilian J. Redstone et al. London: Oxford University Press,

in addition to

1966.

author

Cullen, John B. Old Times in the Faulkner Country. In collaboration with Floyd C. Watkins. Chapel Hill:

14.89:

University of North Carolina Press, 1961.

"With the

assistance of" and

Prather, Marla. Alexander Calder, 1898--1976. With contributions by Arnauld Pierre and Alexander S. C.

the like

Rower. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1998.

14.90:

Rodman, Dennis. Walk on the Wild Side. With Michael Silver. New York: Delacorte Press, 1997.

Editor versus

author

Schellinger, Paul, ed. Encyclopedia of the Novel. With the assistance of Christopher Hudson and Marijke

Rijsberman. 2 vols. Chicago: Fitzroy Dearborn, 1998.

14.91:

Authors of

Williams, Joseph M. Style: Toward Clarity and Grace. With two chapters coauthored by Gregory G. Colomb.

forewords and the

Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1995.

like

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.90 EDITOR VERSUS AUTHOR

List of Tables

Occasionally, when an editor or a translator is more important to a discussion than the original

Index

author, a book may be listed under the editor's name. (See also 14.88.)

Eliot, T. S., ed. Literary Essays. By Ezra Pound. New York: New Directions, 1953.

14.88:

Editor or translator

in addition to

author

14.89:

"With the

assistance of" and

the like

14.90:

Editor versus

author

14.91:

Authors of

forewords and the

like

14.92:

Organization as

author

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.91 AUTHORS OF FOREWORDS AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

Authors of forewords or introductions to books by other authors are included in notes and

Index

bibliography entries only if the foreword or introduction is of major significance.

Hayek, F. A. The Road to Serfdom. With a new introduction by Milton Friedman. Chicago: University of

14.89:

Chicago Press, 1994.

"With the

assistance of" and

For specific citation of a foreword or an introduction, see 14.116.

the like

14.90:

Editor versus

author

14.91:

Authors of

forewords and the

like

14.92:

Organization as

author

14.93:

Additional

discussion of titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.92 ORGANIZATION AS AUTHOR

List of Tables

If a publication issued by an organization, association, or corporation carries no personal author's

Index

name on the title page, the organization is listed as author in a bibliography, even if it is also given as

publisher. (But cf. 14.79.)

14.90:

University of Chicago Press. The Chicago Manual of Style. 16th ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2010.

Editor versus

World Health Organization. WHO Editorial Style Manual. Geneva: World Health Organization, 1993.

author

14.91:

Authors of

forewords and the

like

14.92:

Organization as

author

14.93:

Additional

discussion of titles

14.94:

Italics for book

titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.93 ADDITIONAL DISCUSSION OF TITLES

List of Tables

The section "Titles of Works" in chapter 8 (8.154--95), though focusing on the way titles of books as

Index

well as other materials are treated when mentioned in running text, is obviously relevant to

documentation and provides additional discussion and examples.

14.91:

Authors of

forewords and the

like

14.92:

Organization as

author

14.93:

Additional

discussion of titles

14.94:

Italics for book

titles

14.95:

Capitalization of

book titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.94 ITALICS FOR BOOK TITLES

List of Tables

Book titles and subtitles are italicized. For titles within titles, see 14.102.

Index

Gilbert, Elizabeth. Eat, Pray, Love: One Woman's Search for Everything across Italy, India, and Indonesia. New

York: Viking, 2006.

14.92:

Organization as

author

14.93:

Additional

discussion of titles

14.94:

Italics for book

titles

14.95:

Capitalization of

book titles

14.96:

Some permissible

changes to titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.95 CAPITALIZATION OF BOOK TITLES

List of Tables

English-language book titles and subtitles are capitalized headline-style. In headline style, the first

Index

and last words of title and subtitle and all other major words are capitalized. For a more detailed

definition and more examples, see 8.157. For hyphenated compounds in headline style, see 8.159. For

headlines in newspapers, see 14.204.

14.93:

Additional

The Fifth Miracle: The Search for the Origin and Meaning of Life

discussion of titles

How to Do It: Guides to Good Living for Renaissance Italians

14.94:

Italics for book

titles

For foreign-language titles, which are usually capitalized sentence-style, see 14.107.

14.95:

Capitalization of

book titles

14.96:

Some permissible

changes to titles

14.97:

Subtitlesâ€”the

colon

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.96 SOME PERMISSIBLE CHANGES TO TITLES

List of Tables

The spelling, hyphenation, and punctuation in the original title should be preserved, with the

Index

following exceptions: words in full capitals on the original title page (except for initialisms or

acronyms) should be set in upper- and lowercase; headline-style or sentence-style capitalization

should be applied as applicable; and, subject to editorial discretion, an ampersand may be changed to

14.94:

and. Numbers should remain spelled out or given as numerals according to the original ( Twelfth

Italics for book

th

titles

Century or 12th Century) unless there is a good reason to make them consistent (but 12 may be

14.95:

changed to 12th). For more on permissible changes to titles, including the addition of colons and

Capitalization of

commas (including serial commas), see 8.163. For older titles, see 14.106. See also 14.97.

book titles

14.96:

Some permissible

changes to titles

14.97:

Subtitlesâ€”the

colon

14.98:

Two subtitles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.97 SUBTITLES--THE COLON

List of Tables

A colon, also italicized, is used to separate the main title from the subtitle. A space follows the colon.

Index

The subtitle, like the title, always begins with a capital letter. See also 8.162, 8.163.

Weiss, Andrea. In the Shadow of the Magic Mountain: The Erika and Klaus Mann Story. Chicago: University of

14.95:

Chicago Press, 2008.

Capitalization of

book titles

Although in European bibliographic style a period often separates title from subtitle, English-

14.96:

language publications need not follow that convention for foreign titles. See also 14.107.

Some permissible

changes to titles

Fausts Himmelfahrt: Zur letzten Szene der TragÃ¶die

14.97:

Subtitlesâ€”the

colon

14.98:

Two subtitles

14.99:

Use of "or" with

double titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.98 TWO SUBTITLES

List of Tables

If, as occasionally happens, there are two subtitles in the original (an awkward contingency), a colon

Index

normally precedes the first and a semicolon the second. The second subtitle also begins with a capital.

Sereny, Gitta. Cries Unheard: Why Children Kill; The Story of Mary Bell. New York: Metropolitan Books / Henry

14.96:

Holt, 1999.

Some permissible

changes to titles

14.97:

Subtitlesâ€”the

colon

14.98:

Two subtitles

14.99:

Use of "or" with

double titles

14.100:

"And other stories"

and such

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.99 USE OF "OR" WITH DOUBLE TITLES

List of Tables

Old-fashioned double titles (or titles and subtitles) connected by or are traditionally separated by a

Index

semicolon, with a comma following or, and less traditionally but more simply by a single comma

preceding or. Chicago prefers the first form.

14.97:

England's Monitor; or, The History of the Separation

Subtitlesâ€”the

colon

or, less formally,

14.98:

Two subtitles

England's Monitor, or The History of the Separation

14.99:

Use of "or" with

double titles

14.100:

"And other stories"

and such

14.101:

Dates in titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.100 "AND OTHER STORIES" AND SUCH

List of Tables

Such tags as and other stories or and other poems are treated as part of the main title but usually

Index

separated from the title story, poem, essay, or whatever by a comma, even when such comma does

not appear on the title page. The first part of the title is not enclosed in quotation marks.

14.98:

34. Norman Maclean, A River Runs through It, and Other Stories (Chicago: University of Chicago Press,

Two subtitles

1976), 104.

14.99:

Use of "or" with

When the main title ends with a question mark or exclamation point, the comma is omitted. See also

double titles

14.105.

14.100:

"And other stories"

and such

26. Herrlee Glessner Creel, What Is Taoism? and Other Studies in Chinese Cultural History (Chicago:

14.101:

University of Chicago Press, 1970), 34.

Dates in titles

14.102:

Titles within titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.101 DATES IN TITLES

List of Tables

When not introduced by a preposition (e.g., "from 1920 to 1945"), dates in a title or subtitle are set off

Index

by commas, even if differentiated only by type style on the title page. If a colon has been used in the

original, however, it should be retained. (Note that commas should not be added to foreign titles

before dates.)

14.99:

Use of "or" with

Sundiata, Ibrahim. Brothers and Strangers: Black Zion, Black Slavery, 1914--1940. Durham, NC: Duke University

double titles

Press, 2003.

14.100:

"And other stories"

and such

14.101:

Dates in titles

14.102:

Titles within titles

14.103:

Italicized terms

within titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.102 TITLES WITHIN TITLES

List of Tables

Titles of long or short works appearing within an italicized title are enclosed in quotation marks,

Index

regardless of how such titles would appear alone. For a title within an article or a chapter title, see

14.177.

14.100:

22. Allen Forte, The Harmonistic Organization of "The Rite of Spring" (New Haven, CT: Yale University

"And other stories"

Press, 1978).

and such

23. Roland McHugh, Annotations to "Finnegans Wake" (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press,

14.101:

1980).

Dates in titles

14.102:

Quotation marks within a book title do not, of course, always denote another title.

Titles within titles

14.103:

24. "Race," Writing, and Difference, ed. Henry Louis Gates Jr. and Kwame Anthony Appiah (Chicago:

Italicized terms

within titles

University of Chicago Press, 1986).

14.104:

Quotation marks in

titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.103 ITALICIZED TERMS WITHIN TITLES

List of Tables

When terms normally italicized in running text, such as species names or names of ships or foreign

Index

words (but not titles of works; see 14.102), appear within an italicized title, they are set roman

("reverse italics"; see 8.171). When, however, such a term makes up the entire title, it should be

italicized. For an italicized term within an article or a chapter title, see 14.177.

14.101:

Dates in titles

Stafford, Edward Peary. The Big E: The Story of the USS Enterprise. New York: Random House, 1962.

14.102:

Van Wagenen, Gertrude, and Miriam E. Simpson. Postnatal Development of the Ovary in Homo sapiens and

Titles within titles

Macaca mulatta and Induction of Ovulation in the Macaque. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1973.

14.103:

Weigel, Detlef, and Jane Glazebrook. Arabidopsis: A Laboratory Manual. Cold Spring Harbor, NY: Cold

Italicized terms

within titles

Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2002.

14.104:

but

Quotation marks in

titles

Hume, Christine. Musca domestica. Boston: Beacon Press, 2000.

14.105:

Question marks or

exclamation points

in book titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.104 QUOTATION MARKS IN TITLES

List of Tables

A quotation used as a book title should be enclosed in quotation marks only if it appears that way in

Index

the source (i.e., on the title page or its equivalent). Headline-style capitalization should be used. See

also 8.160.

14.102:

Bruccoli, Matthew J., ed. "An Artist Is His Own Fault": John O'Hara on Writers and Writing. Carbondale:

Titles within titles

Southern Illinois University Press, 1977.

14.103:

Italicized terms

within titles

14.104:

Quotation marks in

titles

14.105:

Question marks or

exclamation points

in book titles

14.106:

Older titles and

very long titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.105 QUESTION MARKS OR EXCLAMATION POINTS IN BOOK TITLES

List of Tables

When a main title ends with a question mark or an exclamation point, no colon is added before any

Index

subtitle. When the question mark or exclamation point is within quotation marks, however, retain a

colon before the subtitle (see third example below). Any punctuation other than a period required by

the surrounding text, note, or bibliography entry should be retained (see fourth, fifth, and sixth

14.103:

examples). This slight departure from Chicago's former usage recognizes the syntactical independence

Italicized terms

within titles

of a title within a phrase or sentence (see 6.119).

14.104:

Quotation marks in

1. Yogi Berra, What Time Is It? You Mean Now? Advice for Life from the Zennest Master of Them All, with

titles

Dave Kaplan (New York: Simon & Schuster, 2002), 63.

14.105:

2. Alison Oram, Her Husband Was a Woman! Women's Gender-Crossing and British Popular Culture

Question marks or

exclamation points

(London: Routledge, 2007), 183.

in book titles

3. Edward Buscombe, "Injuns!": Native Americans in the Movies (London: Reaktion, 2006), 12.

14.106:

14. Buscombe, "Injuns! , " 114--15.

Older titles and

44. Berra, What Time Is It? , 55--56.

very long titles

66. Oram, Her Husband Was a Woman! , 184.

14.107:

Non-English titles

When a title ending with a question mark or an exclamation mark would normally be followed by a

period, the period is omitted; see 6.118.

Hornby, Nick. Vous descendez? Translated by Nicolas Richard. Paris: Plon, 2005.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.106 OLDER TITLES AND VERY LONG TITLES

List of Tables

Titles of works published in the eighteenth century or earlier may retain their original punctuation,

Index

spelling, and capitalization (except for whole words in capital letters, which should be given an initial

capital only). Very long titles may be shortened in a bibliography or a note, omissions being indicated

by three ellipsis dots within a title and four at the end (see 13.51).

14.104:

Quotation marks in

Escalante, Bernardino. A Discourse of the Navigation which the Portugales doe make to the Realmes and Provinces

titles

of the East Partes of the Worlde. . . . Translated by John Frampton. London, 1579.

14.105:

Question marks or

Ray, John. Observations Topographical, Moral, and Physiological: Made in a Journey Through part of the Low-

exclamation points

Countries, Germany, Italy, and France: with A Catalogue of Plants not Native of England . . . Whereunto is added

in book titles

A Brief Account of Francis Willughby, Esq., his Voyage through a great part of Spain. [London], 1673.

14.106:

Older titles and

very long titles

14.107:

Non-English titles

14.108:

Translated title

supplied by author

or editor

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.107 NON-ENGLISH TITLES

List of Tables

Sentence-style capitalization is strongly recommended for non-English titles (see 11.3). Capitalize the

Index

first word of a title or subtitle and any word that would be capitalized in the original language (e.g.,

Wahrheit, Sowjetunion, and Inquisición in examples 2 and 3). Writers or editors unfamiliar with the

usage of the language concerned, however, should not attempt to alter capitalization without expert

14.105:

help. For English forms of foreign cities, see 14.137.

Question marks or

exclamation points

in book titles

1. Danielle Maisonneuve, Jean-François Lamarche, and Yves St-Amand, Les relations publiques: Dans

14.106:

une société en mouvance (Sainte-Foy, QC: Presses de l'Université de Québec, 1998).

Older titles and

2. Gabriele Krone-Schmalz, In Wahrheit sind wir stärker: Frauenalltag in der Sowjetunion (Frankfurt am

very long titles

Main: Fischer Taschenbuch Verlag, 1992).

14.107:

3. Daniel Muñoz Sempere, La Inquisición española como tema literario: Política, historia y ficción en la crisis

Non-English titles

del antiguo régimen (Woodbridge, UK: Tamesis, 2008).

14.108:

Translated title

4. G. Martellotti et al., La letteratura italiana: Storia e testi, vol. 7 (Milan: Riccardo Ricciardi, 1955).

supplied by author

5. Ljiljana Piletić Stojanović, ed., Gutfreund i češki kubizam (Belgrade: Muzej savremene umetnosti,

or editor

1971).

14.109:

Original plus

published

translation

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.108 TRANSLATED TITLE SUPPLIED BY AUTHOR OR EDITOR

List of Tables

If an English translation of a title is needed, it follows the original title and is enclosed in brackets,

Index

without italics or quotation marks. It is capitalized sentence-style regardless of the bibliographic style

followed. (In running text, parentheses are used instead of brackets; see 11.6.) See also 14.110.

14.106:

7. Henryk Wereszycki, Koniec sojuszu trzech cesarzy [The end of the Three Emperors' League] (Warsaw:

Older titles and

PWN, 1977); includes a summary in German.

very long titles

14.107:

Pirumova, Nataliia Mikhailovna. Zemskoe liberal'noe dvizhenie: Sotsial'nye korni i evoliutsiia do nachala XX veka

Non-English titles

[The zemstvo liberal movement: Its social roots and evolution to the beginning of the twentieth century].

14.108:

Moscow: Izdatel'stvo "Nauka," 1977.

Translated title

supplied by author

or editor

14.109:

Original plus

published

translation

14.110:

Unpublished

translation of title

standing in for

original

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.109 ORIGINAL PLUS PUBLISHED TRANSLATION

List of Tables

A published translation is normally treated as illustrated in 14.88. If, for some reason, both the

Index

original and the translation need to be cited, either of the following forms may be used, depending on

whether the original or the translation is of greater interest to readers:

14.107:

Furet, FranÃ§ois. Le passÃ© d'une illusion. Paris: Ã‰ditions Robert Laffont, 1995. Translated by Deborah

Non-English titles

Furet as The Passing of an Illusion (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1999).

14.108:

Translated title

or

supplied by author

or editor

Furet, FranÃ§ois. The Passing of an Illusion. Translated by Deborah Furet. Chicago: University of Chicago

14.109:

Press, 1999. Originally published as Le passÃ© d'une illusion (Paris: Ã‰ditions Robert Laffont, 1995).

Original plus

published

translation

14.110:

Unpublished

translation of title

standing in for

original

14.111:

Chapter in a single-

author book

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

14.110 UNPUBLISHED TRANSLATION OF TITLE STANDING IN FOR ORIGINAL

List of Tables

In those rare instances when a title is given only in translation and no published translation of the

Index

work is cited, the original language must be specified.

8. N. M. Pirumova, The Zemstvo Liberal Movement: Its Social Roots and Evolution to the Beginning of the

14.108:

Twentieth Century [in Russian] (Moscow: Izdatel'stvo "Nauka," 1977).

Translated title

supplied by author

or editor

14.109:

Original plus

published

translation

14.110:

Unpublished

translation of title

standing in for

original

14.111:

Chapter in a single-

author book

14.112:

Contribution to a

multiauthor book

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Chapters or Other Parts of a Book

of Contents

List of Figures

14.111 CHAPTER IN A SINGLE-AUTHOR BOOK

List of Tables

When a specific chapter (or other titled part of a book) is cited in the notes, the author's name is

Index

followed by the title of the chapter (or other part), followed by in, followed by the title of the book.

The chapter title is enclosed in quotation marks. Either the inclusive page numbers (see 9.60) or the

chapter or part number is usually given also. In the bibliography, either the chapter or the book may

14.109:

be listed first. For a multiauthor work, see 14.112. See also 14.160.

Original plus

published

translation

1. Brendan Phibbs, "Herrlisheim: Diary of a Battle," in The Other Side of Time: A Combat Surgeon in

14.110:

World War II (Boston: Little, Brown, 1987), 117--63.

Unpublished

8. John Samples, "The Origins of Modern Campaign Finance Law," chap. 7 in The Fallacy of Campaign

translation of title

standing in for

Finance Reform (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2006).

original

33. Samples, "Campaign Finance Law," 30--31.

14.111:

Chapter in a single-

Phibbs, Brendan. "Herrlisheim: Diary of a Battle." In The Other Side of Time: A Combat Surgeon in World War

author book

II, 117--63. Boston: Little, Brown, 1987.

14.112:

Samples, John. "The Origins of Modern Campaign Finance Law." Chap. 7 in The Fallacy of Campaign Finance

Contribution to a

multiauthor book

Reform. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2006.

14.113:

or

Several

contributions to

the same book

Samples, John. The Fallacy of Campaign Finance Reform. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2006. See esp.

chap. 7, "The Origins of Modern Campaign Finance Law."

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Chapters or Other Parts of a Book

of Contents

List of Figures

14.112 CONTRIBUTION TO A MULTIAUTHOR BOOK

List of Tables

When one contribution to a multiauthor book is cited, the contributor's name comes first, followed by

Index

the title of the contribution in roman, followed by in (also roman), followed by the title of the book in

italics, followed by the name(s) of the editor(s). In a bibliography entry, the inclusive page numbers

are usually given also (as in the second example below). In notes and bibliographies, the contribution

14.110:

title is enclosed in quotation marks. For several contributions to the same book, see 14.113.

Unpublished

translation of title

standing in for

3. Anne Carr and Douglas J. Schuurman, "Religion and Feminism: A Reformist Christian Analysis," in

original

Religion, Feminism, and the Family, ed. Anne Carr and Mary Stewart Van Leeuwen (Louisville, KY:

14.111:

Westminster John Knox Press, 1996), 14.

Chapter in a single-

author book

Ellet, Elizabeth F. L. "By Rail and Stage to Galena." In Prairie State: Impressions of Illinois, 1673--1967, by

14.112:

Contribution to a

Travelers and Other Observers, edited by Paul M. Angle, 271--79. Chicago: University of Chicago Press,

multiauthor book

1968.

14.113:

Several

contributions to

the same book

14.114:

Book-length work

within a book

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Chapters or Other Parts of a Book

of Contents

List of Figures

14.113 SEVERAL CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE SAME BOOK

List of Tables

If two or more contributions to the same multiauthor book are cited, the book itself, as well as the

Index

specific contributions, may be listed in the bibliography. The entries for the individual contributions

may then cross-refer to the book's editor, thus avoiding clutter. In notes, details of the book may be

given the first time it is mentioned, with subsequent references in shortened form (see also 14.26).

14.111:

Chapter in a single-

4. William H. Keating, "Fort Dearborn and Chicago," in Prairie State: Impressions of Illinois, 1673--1967,

author book

by Travelers and Other Observers, ed. Paul M. Angle (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1967), 84--87.

14.112:

Contribution to a

27. Sara Clarke Lippincott, "Chicago," in Angle, Prairie State, 362--70.

multiauthor book

Draper, Joan E. "Paris by the Lake: Sources of Burnham's Plan of Chicago." In Zukowsky, Chicago

14.113:

Several

Architecture, 107--19.

contributions to

Harrington, Elaine. "International Influences on Henry Hobson Richardson's Glessner House." In Zukowsky,

the same book

Chicago Architecture, 189--207.

14.114:

Book-length work

Zukowsky, John, ed. Chicago Architecture, 1872--1922: Birth of a Metropolis. Munich: Prestel-Verlag in

within a book

association with the Art Institute of Chicago, 1987.

14.115:

Chapter originally

published

elsewhere

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Chapters or Other Parts of a Book

of Contents

List of Figures

14.114 BOOK-LENGTH WORK WITHIN A BOOK

List of Tables

If the cited part of a book would normally be italicized if published alone (see 8.161, 8.181), it too may

Index

be italicized.

3. Thomas Bernard, A Party for Boris, in Histrionics: Three Plays, trans. Peter K. Jansen and Kenneth

14.112:

Northcott (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1990).

Contribution to a

multiauthor book

14.113:

Several

contributions to

the same book

14.114:

Book-length work

within a book

14.115:

Chapter originally

published

elsewhere

14.116:

Introductions,

prefaces,

afterwords, and

the like

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Chapters or Other Parts of a Book

of Contents

List of Figures

14.115 CHAPTER ORIGINALLY PUBLISHED ELSEWHERE

List of Tables

When a chapter that was originally published as an article in a journal is cited, only the book version

Index

need be cited. If the original publication is of particular interest, details may be added to the entry in

the bibliography after such wording as "originally published as" (see 14.190, first example).

14.113:

Several

contributions to

the same book

14.114:

Book-length work

within a book

14.115:

Chapter originally

published

elsewhere

14.116:

Introductions,

prefaces,

afterwords, and

the like

14.117:

Letters in published

collections

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Chapters or Other Parts of a Book

of Contents

List of Figures

14.116 INTRODUCTIONS, PREFACES, AFTERWORDS, AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

If the reference is to a generic title such as introduction, preface, or afterword, that term (lowercased

Index

unless following a period) is added before the title of the book. See also 8.177.

1. Valerie Polakow, afterword to Lives on the Edge: Single Mothers and Their Children in the Other America

14.114:

(Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1993).

Book-length work

within a book

If the author of the introduction or other part is someone other than the main author of a book, that

14.115:

author comes first, and the author of the book follows the title. In a bibliography entry, include the

Chapter originally

published

page number range for the part cited, as shown in the second example below. See also 14.91.

elsewhere

14.116:

6. Francine Prose, introduction to Word Court: Wherein Verbal Virtue Is Rewarded, Crimes against the

Introductions,

Language Are Punished, and Poetic Justice Is Done, by Barbara Wallraff (New York: Harcourt, 2000).

prefaces,

afterwords, and

the like

Mansfield, Harvey, and Delba Winthrop. Introduction to Democracy in America, by Alexis de Tocqueville,

14.117:

xvii--lxxxvi. Translated and edited by Harvey Mansfield and Delba Winthrop. Chicago: University of

Letters in published

Chicago Press, 2000.

collections

14.118:

Editions other than

the first

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Chapters or Other Parts of a Book

of Contents

List of Figures

14.117 LETTERS IN PUBLISHED COLLECTIONS

List of Tables

A reference to a letter (or memorandum or similar communication) in a published collection begins

Index

with the names of the sender and the recipient, in that order, followed by a date and sometimes the

place where the communication was prepared. The word letter is unnecessary, but other forms, such

as reports or memoranda, should be specified. The title of the collection is given in the usual form for

14.115:

a book. For date forms, see 6.45, 9.32. For unpublished communications, see 14.222; see also 14.239.

Chapter originally

published

elsewhere

1. Adams to Charles Milnes Gaskell, Baden, 22 September 1867, in Letters of Henry Adams, 1858--1891,

14.116:

ed. Worthington Chauncey Ford (Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1930), 133--34.

Introductions,

2. EBW to Harold Ross, memorandum, 2 May 1946, in Letters of E. B. White, ed. Dorothy Lobrano

prefaces,

afterwords, and

Guth (New York: Harper & Row, 1976), 273.

the like

3. Adams to Gaskell, London, 30 March 1868, 141.

14.117:

Letters in published

Adams, Henry. Letters of Henry Adams, 1858--1891. Edited by Worthington Chauncey Ford. Boston:

collections

Houghton Mifflin, 1930.

14.118:

White, E. B. Letters of E. B. White. Edited by Dorothy Lobrano Guth. New York: Harper & Row, 1976.

Editions other than

the first

When it is necessary to include a single letter in a bibliography, it is listed under the writer's name

14.119:

Reprint editions

only.

and modern

editions

Jackson, Paulina. Paulina Jackson to John Pepys Junior, 3 October 1676. In The Letters of Samuel Pepys and His

Family Circle, edited by Helen Truesdell Heath, no. 42. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1955.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Edition

of Contents

List of Figures

14.118 EDITIONS OTHER THAN THE FIRST

List of Tables

When an edition other than the first is used or cited, the number or description of the edition follows

Index

the title in the listing. An edition number usually appears on the title page and is repeated, along with

the date of the edition, on the copyright page. Such wording as Second Edition, Revised and Enlarged is

abbreviated in notes and bibliographies simply as 2nd ed. ; Revised Edition (with no number) is

14.116:

abbreviated as rev. ed. Other terms are similarly abbreviated. Any volume number mentioned follows

Introductions,

prefaces,

the edition number. For the use of the word edition and Chicago's preferences, see 1.26. For inclusion

afterwords, and

the like

of the original date of an older work cited in a modern edition, see 14.119.

14.117:

Letters in published

1. Karen V. Harper-Dorton and Martin Herbert, Working with Children, Adolescents, and Their Families,

collections

3rd ed. (Chicago: Lyceum Books, 2002), 43.

14.118:

2. Florence Babb, Between Field and Cooking Pot: The Political Economy of Marketwomen in Peru, rev. ed.

Editions other than

(Austin: University of Texas Press, 1989), 199.

the first

3. Elizabeth Barrett Browning, Aurora Leigh: Authoritative Text, Backgrounds and Contexts, Criticism, ed.

14.119:

Margaret Reynolds, Norton Critical Editions (New York: Norton, 1996). All subsequent citations refer to

Reprint editions

and modern

this edition.

editions

14.120:

Strunk, William, Jr., and E. B. White. The Elements of Style. 4th ed. New York: Allyn and Bacon, 2000.

Microform editions

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Edition

of Contents

List of Figures

14.119 REPRINT EDITIONS AND MODERN EDITIONS

List of Tables

Books may be reissued in paperback by the original publisher or in paper or hardcover by another

Index

company. In bibliographic listings, if the original publication details--particularly the date--are

relevant, include them. If page numbers are mentioned, give the date of the edition cited unless

pagination is the same. The availability of a paperback or an electronic version (see 14.166), the

14.117:

addition of new material, or other such matters can be added as needed. Modern editions of Greek,

Letters in published

collections

Latin, and medieval classics are discussed in 14.256--66; modern editions of English classics in

14.118:

14.267--68; online editions of books in 14.166--69.

Editions other than

the first

22. Ernest Gowers, The Complete Plain Words, 3rd ed. (London: H.M. Stationery Office, 1986;

14.119:

Harmondsworth, UK: Penguin Books, 1987), 26. Citations refer to the Penguin edition.

Reprint editions

and modern

23. Jacques Barzun, Simple and Direct: A Rhetoric for Writers, rev. ed. (1985; repr., Chicago: University of

editions

Chicago Press, 1994), 152--53.

14.120:

Microform editions

Bernhardt, Peter. The Rose's Kiss: A Natural History of Flowers. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2002.

14.121:

First published 1999 by Island Press.

Volume numbers

Emerson, Ralph Waldo. Nature. 1836. Facsimile of the first edition, with an introduction by Jaroslav Pelikan.

and page numbers

Boston: Beacon, 1985.

Fitzgerald, F. Scott. The Great Gatsby. New York: Scribner, 1925. Reprinted with preface and notes by

Matthew J. Bruccoli. New York: Collier Books, 1992. Page references are to the 1992 edition.

National Reconnaissance Office. The KH-4B Camera System. Washington, DC: National Photographic

Interpretation Center, 1967. Now declassified and also available online,

http://www.fas.org/irp/imint/docs/kh-4_camera_system.htm.

Schweitzer, Albert. J. S. Bach. Translated by Ernest Newman. 2 vols. 1911. Reprint, New York: Dover, 1966.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Edition

of Contents

List of Figures

14.120 MICROFORM EDITIONS

List of Tables

Works issued commercially in microform editions, including dissertations, are treated much like

Index

books. The form of publication, when needed, is given after the facts of publication. (In the first

example below, the page number is to the printed text; the other numbers indicate the fiche and

frame, and the letter indicates the row.)

14.118:

Editions other than

5. Beatrice Farwell, French Popular Lithographic Imagery, 1815--1870, vol. 12, Lithography in Art and

the first

Commerce (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1997), text-fiche, p. 67, 3C12.

14.119:

Reprint editions

and modern

Tauber, Abraham. Spelling Reform in the United States. Ann Arbor, Mich.: University Microfilms, 1958.

editions

14.120:

Microform or other photographic processes used only to preserve printed material need not be

Microform editions

mentioned in a citation. The source is treated as it would be in its published version.

14.121:

Volume numbers

and page numbers

14.122:

Citing a

multivolume work

as a whole

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Multivolume Works

of Contents

List of Figures

14.121 VOLUME NUMBERS AND PAGE NUMBERS

List of Tables

In documentation, volume numbers are always given in arabic numerals, even if in the original work

Index

they appear in roman numerals or are spelled out. If the volume number is immediately followed by

a page number, the abbreviation vol. is omitted and a colon separates the volume number from the

page number with no intervening space. See the examples throughout this section.

14.119:

Reprint editions

and modern

editions

14.120:

Microform editions

14.121:

Volume numbers

and page numbers

14.122:

Citing a

multivolume work

as a whole

14.123:

Citing a particular

volume in a note

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Multivolume Works

of Contents

List of Figures

14.122 CITING A MULTIVOLUME WORK AS A WHOLE

List of Tables

When a multivolume work is cited as a whole, the total number of volumes is given after the title of

Index

the work (or, if an editor as well as an author is mentioned, after the editor's name). If the volumes

have been published over several years, the dates of the first and last volumes are given, separated by

an en dash (see 9.63). See also 14.78.

14.120:

Microform editions

Aristotle. Complete Works of Aristotle: The Revised Oxford Translation. Edited by J. Barnes. 2 vols. Bollingen

14.121:

Series. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1983.

Volume numbers

and page numbers

Byrne, Muriel St. Clare, ed. The Lisle Letters. 6 vols. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1981.

James, Henry. The Complete Tales of Henry James. Edited by Leon Edel. 12 vols. London: Rupert Hart-Davis,

14.122:

Citing a

1962--64.

multivolume work

as a whole

14.123:

Citing a particular

volume in a note

14.124:

Citing a particular

volume in a

bibliography

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Multivolume Works

of Contents

List of Figures

14.123 CITING A PARTICULAR VOLUME IN A NOTE

List of Tables

If a particular volume of a multivolume work is cited, the volume number and the individual volume

Index

title, if there is one, are given in addition to the general title. If volumes have been published in

different years, only the date of the cited volume is given.

14.121:

36. Muriel St. Clare Byrne, ed., The Lisle Letters (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1981), 4:243.

Volume numbers

37. The Complete Tales of Henry James, ed. Leon Edel, vol. 5, 1883--1884 (London: Rupert Hart-Davis,

and page numbers

1963), 32--33.

14.122:

Citing a

multivolume work

The different treatment of the volume numbers in the examples above is prescribed by logic: all six

as a whole

volumes of the Byrne work appeared in 1981 under the same title, whereas volume 5 of the James

14.123:

tales carries an additional title with a publication date not shared by all volumes in the set. See also

Citing a particular

volume in a note

14.127.

14.124:

Citing a particular

volume in a

bibliography

14.125:

Chapters and other

parts of individual

volumes

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Multivolume Works

of Contents

List of Figures

14.124 CITING A PARTICULAR VOLUME IN A BIBLIOGRAPHY

List of Tables

If only one volume of a multivolume work is of interest to readers, it may be listed alone in a

Index

bibliography in either of the following ways:

Pelikan, Jaroslav. The Christian Tradition: A History of the Development of Doctrine. Vol. 1, The Emergence of the

14.122:

Catholic Tradition (100--600). Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1971.

Citing a

multivolume work

or

as a whole

14.123:

Pelikan, Jaroslav. The Emergence of the Catholic Tradition (100--600). Vol. 1 of The Christian Tradition: A History

Citing a particular

of the Development of Doctrine. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1971.

volume in a note

14.124:

The publication date (or date range; see 14.122) should normally correspond to the last-mentioned

Citing a particular

volume in a

title. See also 14.126, 14.151.

bibliography

14.125:

Chapters and other

parts of individual

volumes

14.126:

One volume in two

or more books

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Multivolume Works

of Contents

List of Figures

14.125 CHAPTERS AND OTHER PARTS OF INDIVIDUAL VOLUMES

List of Tables

Specific parts of individual volumes of multivolume books are cited in the same way as parts of

Index

single-volume books.

38. "Buddhist Mythology," in Mythologies, ed. Yves Bonnefoy (Chicago: University of Chicago Press,

14.123:

1991), 2:893--95.

Citing a particular

volume in a note

For references to the entire chapter, a chapter number, if available, may replace page numbers; for

14.124:

example, "vol. 2, chap. 6."

Citing a particular

volume in a

bibliography

14.125:

Chapters and other

parts of individual

volumes

14.126:

One volume in two

or more books

14.127:

Authors and editors

of multivolume

works

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Multivolume Works

of Contents

List of Figures

14.126 ONE VOLUME IN TWO OR MORE BOOKS

List of Tables

Occasionally, if it is very long, a single volume of a multivolume work may be published as two or

Index

more physical books. The reference must then include book as well as volume number.

39. Donald Lach, Asia in the Making of Europe, vol. 2, bk. 3, The Scholarly Disciplines (Chicago:

14.124:

University of Chicago Press, 1977), 351.

Citing a particular

volume in a

Harley, J. B., and David Woodward, eds. The History of Cartography. Vol. 2, bk. 2, Cartography in the

bibliography

Traditional East and Southeast Asian Societies. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1994.

14.125:

Chapters and other

or

parts of individual

volumes

Harley, J. B., and David Woodward, eds. Cartography in the Traditional East and Southeast Asian Societies. Vol.

14.126:

2, bk. 2, of The History of Cartography. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1987--.

One volume in two

or more books

14.127:

Authors and editors

of multivolume

works

14.128:

Series titles,

numbers, and

editors

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Multivolume Works

of Contents

List of Figures

14.127 AUTHORS AND EDITORS OF MULTIVOLUME WORKS

List of Tables

Some multivolume works have both a general editor and individual editors or authors for each

Index

volume. When individual volumes are cited, the editor's (or translator's) name follows that part for

which he or she is responsible.

14.125:

40. Herbert Barrows, Reading the Short Story, vol. 1 of An Introduction to Literature, ed. Gordon N. Ray

Chapters and other

(Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1959).

parts of individual

volumes

41. The Variorum Edition of the Poetry of John Donne, ed. Gary A. Stringer, vol. 6, The "Anniversaries" and

the "Epicedes and Obsequies," ed. Gary A. Stringer and Ted-Larry Pebworth (Bloomington: Indiana

14.126:

One volume in two

University Press, 1995).

or more books

42. Orestes, trans. William Arrowsmith, in Euripides IV (unnumbered vol.), in The Complete Greek

14.127:

Tragedies, ed. David Grene and Richmond Lattimore (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1958), 185--

Authors and editors

of multivolume

288.

works

14.128:

Note the different capitalization and punctuation of edited by in the following alternative versions,

Series titles,

analogous to the treatment of a chapter in a multiauthor book (see 14.112). (Certain multivolume

numbers, and

editors

works may, for bibliographical purposes, more conveniently be treated as series; see 14.130.)

14.129:

Series editor

Donne, John. The Variorum Edition of the Poetry of John Donne. Edited by Gary A. Stringer. Vol. 6, "The

Anniversaries" and the "Epicedes and Obsequies," edited by Gary A. Stringer and Ted-Larry Pebworth.

Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1995.

or

Donne, John. The "Anniversaries" and the "Epicedes and Obsequies." Edited by Gary A. Stringer and Ted-Larry

Pebworth. Vol. 6 of The Variorum Edition of the Poetry of John Donne, edited by Gary A. Stringer.

Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1995.

Ray, Gordon N., ed. An Introduction to Literature. Vol. 1, Reading the Short Story, by Herbert Barrows. Boston:

Houghton Mifflin, 1959.

or

Barrows, Herbert. Reading the Short Story. Vol. 1 of An Introduction to Literature, edited by Gordon N. Ray.

Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1959.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Series

of Contents

List of Figures

14.128 SERIES TITLES, NUMBERS, AND EDITORS

List of Tables

Including a series title in a citation often helps readers decide whether to pursue a reference. But if

Index

books belonging to a series can be located without the series title, it may be omitted to save space

(especially in a footnote). If the series title is included, it is capitalized headline-style, but it is neither

italicized nor put in quotation marks or parentheses. The series editor is usually omitted, but see

14.126:

14.129, 14.130. Some series are numbered; many are not. The number (if any) follows the series title

One volume in two

or more books

with no intervening comma unless vol. or no. is used. These abbreviations may be omitted, however,

14.127:

unless both are needed in a single reference (see last example below), or unless a series editor or

Authors and editors

other notation intervenes (see 14.130, third example). For a foreign-language series, use sentence style

of multivolume

works

(see 11.3 and third example below).

14.128:

Series titles,

1. Gershon David Hundert, The Jews in a Polish Private Town: The Case of OpatÃ³w in the Eighteenth

numbers, and

editors

Century, Johns Hopkins Jewish Studies (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1992).

14.129:

Fowler, Melvin L. The Cahokia Atlas: A Historical Atlas of Cahokia Archaeology. Studies in Illinois Archaeology

Series editor

6. Springfield: Illinois Historic Preservation Agency, 1989.

14.130:

Series or

Grenier, Roger. Les larmes d'Ulysse. Collection l'un et l'autre. Paris: Gallimard, 1998.

multivolume work?

Wauchope, Robert. A Tentative Sequence of Pre-Classic Ceramics in Middle America. Middle American Research

Records, vol. 1, no. 14. New Orleans, LA: Tulane University, 1950.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Series

of Contents

List of Figures

14.129 SERIES EDITOR

List of Tables

The name of the series editor is usually omitted. When included, it follows the series title.

Index

Howell, Martha C. The Marriage Exchange: Property, Social Place, and Gender in Cities of the Low Countries, 1300-

-1550. Women in Culture and Society, edited by Catharine R. Stimpson. Chicago: University of Chicago

Press, 1998.

14.127:

Authors and editors

of multivolume

works

14.128:

Series titles,

numbers, and

editors

14.129:

Series editor

14.130:

Series or

multivolume work?

14.131:

Multivolume work

within a series

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Series

of Contents

List of Figures

14.130 SERIES OR MULTIVOLUME WORK?

List of Tables

Certain works may be treated bibliographically either as a multivolume work or as a series of

Index

volumes, depending on whether the emphasis is on the group of books as a whole (as in the first two

examples) or on single volumes (as in the second two).

14.128:

Boyer, John W., and Julius Kirshner, eds. Readings in Western Civilization. 9 vols. Chicago: University of

Series titles,

Chicago Press, 1986--87.

numbers, and

editors

Grene, David, and Richmond Lattimore, eds. The Complete Greek Tragedies. 9 vols. (unnumbered). Chicago:

University of Chicago Press, 1942--58.

14.129:

Series editor

Cochrane, Eric W., Charles K. Gray, and Mark Kishlansky. Early Modern Europe: Crisis of Authority. Readings

14.130:

in Western Civilization, edited by John W. Boyer and Julius Kirshner, vol. 6. Chicago: University of

Series or

Chicago Press, 1987.

multivolume work?

Euripides. Orestes. Translated by William Arrowsmith. In Euripides IV, edited by David Grene and Richmond

14.131:

Lattimore. The Complete Greek Tragedies. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1958.

Multivolume work

within a series

14.132:

"Old series" and

"new series"

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Series

of Contents

List of Figures

14.131 MULTIVOLUME WORK WITHIN A SERIES

List of Tables

If a book within a series consists of more than one volume, the number of volumes or the volume

Index

number (if reference is to a particular volume) follows the book title.

Ferrer Benimeli, José Antonio. Masonería, iglesia e ilustración. Vol. 1, Las bases de un conflicto (1700--1739). Vol.

14.129:

2, Inquisición: Procesos históricos (1739--1750). Publicaciones de la Fundación Universitaria Española,

Series editor

Monografías 17. Madrid, 1976.

14.130:

Series or

multivolume work?

14.131:

Multivolume work

within a series

14.132:

"Old series" and

"new series"

14.133:

Place, publisher,

and date

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Series

of Contents

List of Figures

14.132 "OLD SERIES" AND "NEW SERIES"

List of Tables

Some numbered series have gone on so long that, as with certain long-lived journals, numbering has

Index

started over again, preceded by n.s. (new series), 2nd ser. (second series), or some similar notation,

usually enclosed in commas. (A change of publisher may also be the occasion for a change in series

designation.) Books in the old series may be identified by o.s. , 1st ser. , or whatever complements the

14.130:

notation for the new series.

Series or

multivolume work?

3. Charles R. Boxer, ed. South China in the Sixteenth Century, Hakluyt Society Publications, 2nd ser.,

14.131:

Multivolume work

vol. 106 (London: Hakluyt, 1953).

within a series

14.132:

Palmatary, Helen C. The Pottery of MarajÃ³ Island, Brazil. Transactions of the American Philosophical Society,

"Old series" and

n.s., 39, pt. 3. Philadelphia: American Philosophical Society, 1950.

"new series"

14.133:

Place, publisher,

and date

14.134:

Place and date

only, for books

published before

1900

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication

of Contents

List of Figures

14.133 PLACE, PUBLISHER, AND DATE

List of Tables

Traditionally the facts of publication for books include the place (city), the publisher, and the date

Index

(year). These elements are put in parentheses in a note but not in a bibliography. A colon appears

between place and publisher. In a note or a bibliography, the date follows the publisher, preceded by

a comma. See also 14.18.

14.131:

Multivolume work

1. E. M. Forster, Howards End (London: Edward Arnold, 1910).

within a series

14.132:

Smith, Zadie. On Beauty. New York: Penguin Press, 2005.

"Old series" and

"new series"

14.133:

Place, publisher,

and date

14.134:

Place and date

only, for books

published before

1900

14.135:

Placeâ€”city

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Place of Publication

of Contents

List of Figures

14.134 PLACE AND DATE ONLY, FOR BOOKS PUBLISHED BEFORE 1900

List of Tables

For books published before 1900, it is acceptable to omit publishers' names and to include only the

Index

place and date of publication. A comma, not a colon, follows the place. See also 14.138, 14.143.

2. Oliver Goldsmith, The Vicar of Wakefield (Salisbury, 1766).

14.132:

"Old series" and

Cervantes Saavedra, Miguel de. El ingenioso hidalgo Don Quixote de la Mancha. 2 vols. Madrid, 1605--15.

"new series"

14.133:

Place, publisher,

and date

14.134:

Place and date

only, for books

published before

1900

14.135:

Placeâ€”city

14.136:

When to specify

state, province, or

country

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Place of Publication

of Contents

List of Figures

14.135 PLACE--CITY

List of Tables

The place to be included is the one that usually appears on the title page but sometimes on the

Index

copyright page of the book cited--the city where the publisher's main editorial offices are located.

Where two or more cities are given ("Chicago and London," for example, appears on the title page of

the print edition of this manual), only the first is normally included in the documentation.

14.133:

Place, publisher,

Berkeley: University of California Press

and date

Los Angeles: J. Paul Getty Trust Publications

14.134:

Place and date

New York: Macmillan

only, for books

New York: Oxford University Press

published before

1900

Oxford: Clarendon Press

14.135:

Placeâ€”city

14.136:

When to specify

state, province, or

country

14.137:

Foreign city names

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Place of Publication

of Contents

List of Figures

14.136 WHEN TO SPECIFY STATE, PROVINCE, OR COUNTRY

List of Tables

If the city of publication may be unknown to readers or may be confused with another city of the

Index

same name, the abbreviation of the state, province, or (sometimes) country is usually added.

Washington is traditionally followed by DC, but other major cities, such as Los Angeles and Baltimore,

need no state abbreviation. (For countries not easily abbreviated, spell out the name.) Chicago's

14.134:

preference is for the two-letter postal codes (IL, MA, etc.), but some publishers continue to prefer the

Place and date

only, for books

conventional state abbreviations (Ill., Mass., etc.). See 10.4, 10.28. For Canadian provinces and

published before

1900

territories, see 10.29.

14.135:

Placeâ€”city

Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press

Cambridge, MA: MIT Press

14.136:

When to specify

Cheshire, CT: Graphics Press

state, province, or

Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall

country

Harmondsworth, UK: Penguin Books

14.137:

Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press

Foreign city names

New Haven, CT: Yale University Press

14.138:

"No place"

Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press

Reading, MA: Perseus Books

Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution Press

Waterloo, ON: Wilfrid Laurier University Press

but

Cambridge: Cambridge University Press

When the publisher's name includes the state name, the abbreviation is not needed.

Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Place of Publication

of Contents

List of Figures

14.137 FOREIGN CITY NAMES

List of Tables

Current, commonly used English names for foreign cities should be used whenever such forms exist.

Index

Belgrade ( not Beograd)

Cologne ( not KÃ¶ln)

Mexico City ( not MÃ©xico)

14.135:

Placeâ€”city

Milan ( not Milano)

14.136:

Munich ( not MÃ¼nchen)

When to specify

Prague ( not Praha)

state, province, or

country

Rome ( not Roma)

The Hague ( not den Haag)

14.137:

Foreign city names

Turin ( not Torino)

Vienna ( not Wien)

14.138:

"No place"

14.139:

Preferred form of

publisher's name

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Place of Publication

of Contents

List of Figures

14.138 "NO PLACE"

List of Tables

For older works, when the place of publication is not known, the abbreviation n.p. (or N.p. if

Index

following a period) may be used before the publisher's name. If the place can be surmised, it may be

given with a question mark, in brackets. See also 14.134.

14.136:

(n.p.: Windsor, 1910)

When to specify

([Lake Bluff, IL?]: Vliet & Edwards, 1890)

state, province, or

country

14.137:

Foreign city names

14.138:

"No place"

14.139:

Preferred form of

publisher's name

14.140:

Abbreviations and

omissible parts of a

publisher's name

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Publisher's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.139 PREFERRED FORM OF PUBLISHER'S NAME

List of Tables

The publisher's name may be given either in full (e.g., as printed on the title page of the book) or in a

Index

somewhat abbreviated form. The shorter forms are preferred in most bibliographies (see 14.140). The

form should, however, reflect the publisher's name at the date of publication, not the current name if

the name has changed. Most publishers' names at the time of publication can be double-checked

14.137:

through any number of reputable sources, including the catalogs of the Library of Congress,

Foreign city names

WorldCat, and the Books in Print resources available through R. R. Bowker (see bibliog. 4.5). For

14.138:

"No place"

reprint and other editions, see 14.118--20.

14.139:

Preferred form of

publisher's name

14.140:

Abbreviations and

omissible parts of a

publisher's name

14.141:

"And" or ampersand

in publisher's name

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Publisher's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.140 ABBREVIATIONS AND OMISSIBLE PARTS OF A PUBLISHER'S NAME

List of Tables

In notes and bibliography, an initial The is omitted from a publisher's name, as are such abbreviations

Index

as Inc. , Ltd. , or S.A. following a name. Co. , & Co. , Publishing Co. , and the like are also omitted. Such

corporate features of a publisher's name--often subject to many changes over the years--are far less

important in leading a reader to the source consulted than the publication date, and attempting to

14.138:

include them will invariably lead to inconsistencies. A given name or initials preceding a family

"No place"

name, however, may be retained, as may terms such as Sons, Brothers, and so forth. Books is usually

14.139:

Preferred form of

retained (Basic Books, Riverhead Books). The word Press can sometimes be omitted (for example,

publisher's name

Pergamon Press and Ecco Press can be abbreviated to Pergamon and Ecco, but Free Press and New

14.140:

Press--whose names might be confusing without Press--must be given in full). Press should not be

Abbreviations and

omissible parts of a

omitted from the name of a university press because the university itself may issue publications

publisher's name

independent of its press. The word University may be abbreviated to Univ. if done consistently.

14.141:

"And" or ampersand

in publisher's name

Houghton Mifflin not Houghton Mifflin Co.

Little, Brown not Little, Brown & Co.

14.142:

Foreign publishers'

Macmillan not Macmillan Publishing Co.

names

Note that there is no comma in Houghton Mifflin, but there is one in Little, Brown. Likewise,

Harcourt, Brace has a comma, but Harcourt Brace Jovanovich does not. If in doubt, consult one of the

sources mentioned in 14.139.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Publisher's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.141 "AND" OR AMPERSAND IN PUBLISHER'S NAME

List of Tables

Either and or & may be used in a publisher's name, regardless of how it is rendered on the title page.

Index

It is advisable to stick to one or the other throughout a bibliography. Unless an ampersand is used in

a foreign publisher's name, the foreign word for and must be used.

14.139:

Duncker und Humblot or Duncker & Humblot

Preferred form of

Harper and Row or Harper & Row

publisher's name

14.140:

Abbreviations and

omissible parts of a

publisher's name

14.141:

"And" or ampersand

in publisher's name

14.142:

Foreign publishers'

names

14.143:

Publisher unknown

or work privately

published

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Publisher's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.142 FOREIGN PUBLISHERS' NAMES

List of Tables

No part of a foreign publisher's name should be translated, even though the city has been given in its

Index

English form.

Mexico City: Fondo de Cultura EconÃ³mica, 1981

14.140:

Munich: Delphin Verlag, 1983

Abbreviations and

Paris: Presses Universitaires de France, 1982

omissible parts of a

publisher's name

Note that abbreviations corresponding to Inc. or Ltd. (German GmbH, for example) are omitted (see

14.141:

"And" or ampersand

14.140). Capitalization of a publisher's name should follow the original unless the name appears in

in publisher's name

full capitals there; in that case, it should be capitalized headline-style; if in doubt about the correct

14.142:

capitalization, consult one of the sources mentioned in 14.139.

Foreign publishers'

names

14.143:

Publisher unknown

or work privately

published

14.144:

Parent companies,

imprints, and such

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Publisher's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.143 PUBLISHER UNKNOWN OR WORK PRIVATELY PUBLISHED

List of Tables

When the publisher is unknown, use just the place (if known) and date (see 14.134). Privately printed

Index

works should be cited with as much information as is known (e.g., Topeka, KS: privately printed,

1890 or, if applicable, Topeka, KS: printed by author, 1890).

14.141:

"And" or ampersand

in publisher's name

14.142:

Foreign publishers'

names

14.143:

Publisher unknown

or work privately

published

14.144:

Parent companies,

imprints, and such

14.145:

Joint imprint

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Publisher's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.144 PARENT COMPANIES, IMPRINTS, AND SUCH

List of Tables

When a parent company's name appears on the title page in addition to the publisher's name or

Index

imprint, only the latter need be used in a bibliographical listing (but see 14.146). For example, the title

page of a 1995 edition of Old New York: Four Novellas, by Edith Wharton, bears the imprint "Scribner

Paperback Fiction"; below that appears "Published by Simon & Schuster." (The cities listed are New

14.142:

York, London, Toronto, and Sydney.) The spine carries "Scribner Paperback Fiction" (but not Simon &

Foreign publishers'

names

Schuster). The copyright page gives an address for Simon & Schuster and further explains that (for

14.143:

the time being) Scribner Paperback Fiction is a trademark of Macmillan Library Reference USA. Such

Publisher unknown

complex arrangements are common in book publishing. Cite the work as follows:

or work privately

published

Wharton, Edith. Old New York: Four Novellas. New York: Scribner Paperback Fiction, 1995.

14.144:

Parent companies,

imprints, and such

If it is not clear which name to list, check with one of the catalogs listed in 14.139 to see which

14.145:

publisher is listed there, being careful to find the entry in the catalog that matches the facts of

Joint imprint

publication for the item in question. If this is not possible, or if it remains unclear which name to list,

14.146:

Special academic

include both, separated by a slash (/) with a space on either side.

imprint

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Publisher's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.145 JOINT IMPRINT

List of Tables

For books published jointly by a consortium and an individual member, the name of the consortium

Index

may be followed by that of the member, the two names separated by a slash (with space either side).

(To save space, however, it is acceptable to list only the name of the consortium.)

14.143:

MacDougall, Pauleena. The Penobscot Dance of Resistance: Tradition in the History of a People. Hanover, NH:

Publisher unknown

University Press of New England / University of New Hampshire Press, 2004.

or work privately

published

14.144:

Parent companies,

imprints, and such

14.145:

Joint imprint

14.146:

Special academic

imprint

14.147:

Copublication

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Publisher's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.146 SPECIAL ACADEMIC IMPRINT

List of Tables

Some academic publishers issue certain books through a special publishing division or under a

Index

special imprint. In such instances the imprint may be given after the publisher's name, separated by a

slash (with space on either side).

14.144:

Gray, Jason. Photographing Eden: Poems. Athens: Ohio University Press / Swallow Press, 2008.

Parent companies,

imprints, and such

In some cases, however, the wording of such an imprint should conform to language specified by the

14.145:

publisher (on the title page or elsewhere).

Joint imprint

14.146:

Buell, Lawrence. Emerson. Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 2003.

Special academic

imprint

14.147:

Copublication

14.148:

Distributed books

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Publisher's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.147 COPUBLICATION

List of Tables

When books are published simultaneously (or almost so) by two publishers, usually in different

Index

countries, only one publisher need be listed--the one that is more relevant to the users of the citation.

For example, if a book copublished by a British and an American publisher is listed in the

bibliography of an American publication, only the American publication details need be given. If for

14.145:

some reason (e.g., as a matter of historical interest), information is included for both publishers, a

Joint imprint

semicolon should be used as a separator. (Occasionally, the dates of publication will be different; in

14.146:

Special academic

such cases, record both.) For reprints, see 14.119.

imprint

14.147:

LÃ©vi-Strauss, Claude. The Savage Mind. Chicago: University of Chicago Press; London: Weidenfeld and

Copublication

Nicolson, 1962.

14.148:

Distributed books

14.149:

Publication dateâ

€”general

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Publisher's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

14.148 DISTRIBUTED BOOKS

List of Tables

For a book published by one company and distributed by another, the name on the title page should

Index

be used. Since distribution agreements are sometimes impermanent, the distributor's name is best

omitted unless essential to users of a bibliography.

14.146:

Willke, Helmut. Smart Governance: Governing the Global Knowledge Society. Frankfurt am Main: Campus

Special academic

Verlag, 2007. Distributed by University of Chicago Press.

imprint

14.147:

Wording on the title page such as "Published by arrangement with . . . ," if it is of particular interest,

Copublication

may be included in a similar manner.

14.148:

Distributed books

14.149:

Publication dateâ

€”general

14.150:

New impressions

and renewal of

copyright

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Date of Publication

of Contents

List of Figures

14.149 PUBLICATION DATE--GENERAL

List of Tables

For books, only the year, not the month or day, is included in the publication date. The date is found

Index

on the title page or, more commonly, on the copyright page. It is usually the same as the copyright

date. If two or more copyright dates appear in a book, the first being those of earlier editions or

versions, the most recent indicates the publication date. Chicago's books normally carry both

14.147:

copyright date and publication date on the copyright page. For any edition other than the first, both

Copublication

the edition and the date of that edition must be included in a listing (see 14.118--20).

14.148:

Distributed books

14. The Chicago Manual of Style, 16th ed. (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2010), 7.85; cf. 15th ed.

14.149:

Publication dateâ

(2003), 7.90.

€”general

Turabian, Kate L. A Manual for Writers of Term Papers, Theses, and Dissertations. 7th ed. Revised by Wayne C.

14.150:

New impressions

Booth, Gregory G. Colomb, and Joseph M. Williams. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2007.

and renewal of

copyright

14.151:

Multivolume works

published over

more than one

year

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Date of Publication

of Contents

List of Figures

14.150 NEW IMPRESSIONS AND RENEWAL OF COPYRIGHT

List of Tables

The publication date must not be confused with the date of a subsequent printing or a renewal of

Index

copyright. Such statements on the copyright page as "53rd impression" or "Copyright renewed 1980"

should be disregarded. For new editions as opposed to new impressions, see 1.26; for reprints, see

14.119.

14.148:

Distributed books

14.149:

Publication dateâ

€”general

14.150:

New impressions

and renewal of

copyright

14.151:

Multivolume works

published over

more than one

year

14.152:

"No date"

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Date of Publication

of Contents

List of Figures

14.151 MULTIVOLUME WORKS PUBLISHED OVER MORE THAN ONE YEAR

List of Tables

When an entire multivolume, multiyear work is cited, the range of dates is given (see 6.78). If the

Index

work has not yet been completed, the date of the first volume is followed by an en dash (with no

space between the en dash and the punctuation that follows; see 6.79). See also 9.63. If a single

volume is cited, only the date of that volume need appear. See also 14.121--27.

14.149:

Publication dateâ

78. The Collected Works of F. A. Hayek, vol. 9, Contra Keynes and Cambridge: Essays, Correspondence

€”general

(Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1995), 44--45.

14.150:

New impressions

and renewal of

Hayek, F. A. Contra Keynes and Cambridge: Essays, Correspondence. Vol. 9 of The Collected Works of F. A. Hayek.

copyright

Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1988--.

14.151:

Tillich, Paul. Systematic Theology. 3 vols. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1951--63.

Multivolume works

published over

more than one

year

14.152:

"No date"

14.153:

"Forthcoming"

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Date of Publication

of Contents

List of Figures

14.152 "NO DATE"

List of Tables

When the publication date of a printed work cannot be ascertained, the abbreviation n.d. takes the

Index

place of the year in the publication details. A guessed-at date may either be substituted (in brackets)

or added. See also 14.138.

14.150:

Boston, n.d.

New impressions

Edinburgh, [1750?] or Edinburgh, n.d., ca. 1750

and renewal of

copyright

A work for which no publisher, place, or date can be determined or reasonably guessed at should be

14.151:

Multivolume works

included in a bibliography only if accompanied by the location where a copy can be found (e.g., "Two

published over

more than one

copies in the Special Collections Department of the University of Chicago Library").

year

14.152:

"No date"

14.153:

"Forthcoming"

14.154:

Arabic versus

roman numerals

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Facts of Publication >> Date of Publication

of Contents

List of Figures

14.153 "FORTHCOMING"

List of Tables

When a book is under contract with a publisher and is already titled, but the date of publication is not

Index

yet known, forthcoming is used in place of the date. Although in press is sometimes used (strictly

speaking for a printed work that has already been typeset and paginated), Chicago recommends the

more inclusive term, which can also be used for nonprint media, for any work under contract. If page

14.151:

numbers are available, they should be given. Books not under contract are treated as unpublished

Multivolume works

published over

manuscripts (see 14.224--46).

more than one

year

91. Jane Q. Author, Book Title (Place: Publisher, forthcoming).

14.152:

92. John J. Writer, Another Book Title (Place: Publisher, forthcoming), 345--46.

"No date"

14.153:

Contributor, Anna. "Contribution." In Edited Volume, edited by Ellen Editor. Place: Publisher, forthcoming.

"Forthcoming"

14.154:

When a publication that cites a forthcoming title is reprinted, the citation need not be updated. For a

Arabic versus

roman numerals

revised edition, on the other hand, the citation can be updated to provide the final facts of publication,

14.155:

but only after direct quotations and other details have been checked for accuracy against the

Ranges, or inclusive

published source.

numbers

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Page, Volume, and Other Locating Information

of Contents

List of Figures

14.154 ARABIC VERSUS ROMAN NUMERALS

List of Tables

As the examples throughout this chapter (and chapter 15) suggest, arabic numerals should be used

Index

wherever possible in documentation--for volumes, chapters, and other divisions--regardless of the

way the numerals appear in the works cited, with the notable exception of pages numbered with

roman numerals in the original (usually lowercased, in the front matter of a book). Occasional

14.152:

exceptions are made, for example, in certain legal contexts (see 14.292).

"No date"

14.153:

21. See the article "Feathers," in Johnson's Universal Cyclopaedia, rev. ed. (New York: A. J. Johnson,

"Forthcoming"

1886), vol. 3.

14.154:

22. Jerome Kagan, "Introduction to the Tenth-Anniversary Edition," in The Nature of the Child (New

Arabic versus

roman numerals

York: Basic Books, 1994), xxii--xxiv.

14.155:

Ranges, or inclusive

numbers

14.156:

Using or avoiding

"ff." and "passim"

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Page, Volume, and Other Locating Information

of Contents

List of Figures

14.155 RANGES, OR INCLUSIVE NUMBERS

List of Tables

For Chicago's preferred style in expressing a range of pages, paragraphs, or similar divisions, see

Index

9.60. First and last numbers should be used rather than first number plus ff. (but see 14.156).

Chicago Manual of Style, 16th ed., 14.154--65.

14.153:

"Forthcoming"

14.154:

Arabic versus

roman numerals

14.155:

Ranges, or inclusive

numbers

14.156:

Using or avoiding

"ff." and "passim"

14.157:

Abbreviations for

"page," "volume,"

and so on

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Page, Volume, and Other Locating Information

of Contents

List of Figures

14.156 USING OR AVOIDING "FF." AND "PASSIM"

List of Tables

Only when referring to a section for which no final number can usefully be given should ff. ("and the

Index

following pages, paragraphs, etc.") be resorted to. Instead of the singular f. , the subsequent number

should be used (e.g., "140--41" not "140f."). Similarly, passim ("here and there") is to be discouraged

unless it follows a stated range of pages within which there are more than three or four precise

14.154:

references ("324--32 passim"). When used, ff. has no space between it and the preceding number and is

Arabic versus

roman numerals

followed by a period; passim, being a complete word, takes no period. Neither is italicized. (For passim

14.155:

in indexes, see 16.13.)

Ranges, or inclusive

numbers

14.156:

Using or avoiding

"ff." and "passim"

14.157:

Abbreviations for

"page," "volume,"

and so on

14.158:

When to omit "p."

and "pp."

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Page, Volume, and Other Locating Information

of Contents

List of Figures

14.157 ABBREVIATIONS FOR "PAGE," "VOLUME," AND SO ON

List of Tables

In citations, the words page, volume, and the like are usually abbreviated and often simply omitted (see

Index

14.158). The most commonly used abbreviations are p. (pl. pp. ), vol. , pt. , chap. , bk. , sec. , n. (pl. nn. ), no. , app. , and fig. ; for these and others, see chapter 10, especially 10.43. Unless following a period, all are

lowercased, and none is italicized unless an integral part of an italicized book title. All the

14.155:

abbreviations mentioned in this paragraph, except for p. and n. , form their plurals by adding s.

Ranges, or inclusive

numbers

A Cry of Absence, chap. 6

14.156:

Using or avoiding

A Dance to the Music of Time, 4 vols.

"ff." and "passim"

14.157:

Abbreviations for

"page," "volume,"

and so on

14.158:

When to omit "p."

and "pp."

14.159:

When to omit "vol."

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Page, Volume, and Other Locating Information

of Contents

List of Figures

14.158 WHEN TO OMIT "P." AND "PP."

List of Tables

When a number or a range of numbers clearly denotes the pages in a book, p. or pp. may be omitted;

Index

the numbers alone, preceded by a comma, are sufficient. Where the presence of other numerals

threatens ambiguity, p. or pp. may be added for clarity. (And if an author has used p. and pp.

consistently throughout a work, there is no need to delete them.) See also 14.159.

14.156:

Using or avoiding

Charlotte's Web, 75--76

"ff." and "passim"

14.157:

but

Abbreviations for

"page," "volume,"

Complete Poems of Michelangelo, p. 89, lines 135--36

and so on

14.158:

When to omit "p."

and "pp."

14.159:

When to omit "vol."

14.160:

Page and chapter

numbers

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Page, Volume, and Other Locating Information

of Contents

List of Figures

14.159 WHEN TO OMIT "VOL."

List of Tables

When a volume number is followed immediately by a page number, neither vol. nor p. or pp. is

Index

needed. The numbers alone are used, separated by a colon. A comma usually precedes the volume

number, except with periodicals (see 14.180; see also 14.181) and for certain types of classical

references (see 14.256--66). For more on volume numbers, see 14.121--27. For citing a particular

14.157:

volume, with and without the abbreviation vol. , see 14.123.

Abbreviations for

"page," "volume,"

and so on

The Complete Tales of Henry James, 10:122

14.158:

When to omit "p."

and "pp."

14.159:

When to omit "vol."

14.160:

Page and chapter

numbers

14.161:

Signed signatures

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Page, Volume, and Other Locating Information

of Contents

List of Figures

14.160 PAGE AND CHAPTER NUMBERS

List of Tables

Page numbers, needed for specific references in notes and parenthetical text citations, are usually

Index

unnecessary in bibliographies except when the piece cited is a part within a whole (see 14.111--17) or

a journal article (see 14.183). If the chapter or other section number is given, page numbers may be

omitted. The total page count of a book is not included in documentation. (Total page counts do,

14.158:

however, appear in headings to book reviews, catalog entries, and elsewhere. For book review

When to omit "p."

and "pp."

headings, see 1.92.)

14.159:

When to omit "vol."

14. Claire Kehrwald Cook, "Mismanaged Numbers and References," in Line by Line: How to Edit Your

14.160:

Own Writing (Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1985), 75--107.

Page and chapter

15. Nuala O'Faolain, Are You Somebody? The Accidental Memoir of a Dublin Woman (New York: Holt,

numbers

1996), chap. 17.

14.161:

Signed signatures

14.162:

Folio editions

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Page, Volume, and Other Locating Information

of Contents

List of Figures

14.161 SIGNED SIGNATURES

List of Tables

Some books printed before 1800 did not carry page numbers, but each signature (a group of

Index

consecutive pages) bore a letter, numeral, or other symbol (its "signature") to help the binder gather

them in correct sequence. In citing pages in books of this kind, the signature symbol is given first,

then the number of the leaf within the signature, and finally r ( recto, the front of the leaf) or v ( verso,

14.159:

the back of the leaf). Thus, for example, G6v identifies one page, G6r--7v a range of four pages.

When to omit "vol."

14.160:

Page and chapter

numbers

14.161:

Signed signatures

14.162:

Folio editions

14.163:

Line numbers

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Page, Volume, and Other Locating Information

of Contents

List of Figures

14.162 FOLIO EDITIONS

List of Tables

In some early books the signatures consisted of folios--one large sheet folded once. Each folio thus

Index

had two sheets, or four pages. The sheets were numbered only on the front, or recto, side. Page

citation therefore consists of sheet number plus r ( recto) or v ( verso)--for example, 176r, 231v, 232r--v;

or, if entire folios are cited, fol. 49, fols. 50--53. See also 14.161, 14.236.

14.160:

Page and chapter

numbers

14.161:

Signed signatures

14.162:

Folio editions

14.163:

Line numbers

14.164:

Citing numbered

notes

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Page, Volume, and Other Locating Information

of Contents

List of Figures

14.163 LINE NUMBERS

List of Tables

The abbreviations l. (line) and ll. (lines) can too easily be confused with the numerals 1 and 11 and so

Index

should be avoided. Line or lines should be used or, where it has been made clear that reference is to

lines, simply omitted (see 13.65).

14.161:

44. Ogden Nash, "Song for Ditherers," lines 1--4.

Signed signatures

14.162:

Folio editions

14.163:

Line numbers

14.164:

Citing numbered

notes

14.165:

Citing illustrations

and tables

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Page, Volume, and Other Locating Information

of Contents

List of Figures

14.164 CITING NUMBERED NOTES

List of Tables

Notes are cited with the abbreviation n or nn. The usage recommended here is also used for indexes

Index

(see 16.111, 16.112, 16.113). If the note cited is the only footnote on a particular page or is an

unnumbered footnote, the page number is followed by n alone.

14.162:

45. Anthony Grafton, The Footnote: A Curious History (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press,

Folio editions

1997), 72n, 80n.

14.163:

Line numbers

If there are other notes on the same page as the note cited, a number must be added. In this case the

14.164:

page number is followed by n or (if two or more consecutive notes are cited) nn, followed by the note

Citing numbered

notes

number (or numbers or, in rare cases, an asterisk or other symbol). No intervening space or

14.165:

punctuation is required.

Citing illustrations

and tables

46. Dwight Bolinger, Language: The Loaded Weapon (London: Longman, 1980), 192n23, 192n30, 199n14,

14.166:

201nn16--17.

Books downloaded

from a library or

47. Richard Rorty, Philosophical Papers (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1991), 1:15n29.

bookseller

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Page, Volume, and Other Locating Information

of Contents

List of Figures

14.165 CITING ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES

List of Tables

The abbreviation fig. may be used for figure, but table, map, plate, and other illustration forms are

Index

spelled out. The page number, if given, precedes the illustration number, with a comma between

them.

14.163:

50. Richard Sobel, ed., Public Opinion in US Foreign Policy: The Controversy over Contra Aid (Boston:

Line numbers

Rowman and Littlefield, 1993), 87, table 5.3.

14.164:

Citing numbered

notes

14.165:

Citing illustrations

and tables

14.166:

Books downloaded

from a library or

bookseller

14.167:

Books consulted

online

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Electronic Books

of Contents

List of Figures

14.166 BOOKS DOWNLOADED FROM A LIBRARY OR BOOKSELLER

List of Tables

The majority of electronically published books offered for download from a library or bookseller will

Index

have a printed counterpart. Because of the potential for differences, however, authors must indicate

that they have consulted a format other than print. This indication should be the last part of a full

citation that follows the recommendations for citing printed books as detailed throughout this section.

14.164:

See also 14.4--13.

Citing numbered

notes

Austen, Jane. Pride and Prejudice. New York: Penguin Classics, 2007. Kindle edition.

14.165:

Citing illustrations

Austen, Jane. Pride and Prejudice. New York: Penguin Classics, 2008. PDF e-book.

and tables

Austen, Jane. Pride and Prejudice. New York: Penguin Classics, 2008. Microsoft Reader e-book.

14.166:

Austen, Jane. Pride and Prejudice. New York: Penguin Classics, 2008. Palm e-book.

Books downloaded

from a library or

bookseller

The printed counterpart to the Penguin Classics e-book offerings would be cited as follows (note the

14.167:

different publication date):

Books consulted

online

Austen, Jane. Pride and Prejudice. New York: Penguin Classics, 2003.

14.168:

Books on CD-ROM

Each of the Penguin Classics editions (as the books' documentation makes clear) is based on the 1813

and other fixed

media

edition published by T. Egerton. Though such information is optional, it may be included as follows

(see 14.119):

Austen, Jane. Pride and Prejudice. London: T. Egerton, 1813. Reprint, New York: Penguin Classics, 2008. PDF

e-book.

Note that electronic formats do not always carry stable page numbers (e.g., pagination may depend

on text size), a factor that potentially limits their suitability as sources. In lieu of a page number,

include an indication of chapter or section or other locator. See also 14.17.

1. Jane Austen, Pride and Prejudice (New York: Penguin Classics, 2008), Microsoft Reader e-book, chap.

23. 14. Austen, Pride and Prejudice, chap. 24.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Electronic Books

of Contents

List of Figures

14.167 BOOKS CONSULTED ONLINE

List of Tables

When citing the online version of a book, include the URL--or, if available, DOI--as part of the citation

Index

(see 14.5, 14.6). The URL or DOI should be the last part of a full citation based on the principles

outlined throughout this section on citing books. Note the reference to section headings in lieu of

page numbers in notes 2 and 4 (see 14.17).

14.165:

Citing illustrations

1. Elliot Antokoletz, Musical Symbolism in the Operas of Debussy and Bartok (New York: Oxford

and tables

University Press, 2008), doi:10.1093/acprof:oso/9780195365825.001.0001.

14.166:

Books downloaded

2. Joseph Sirosh, Risto Miikkulainen, and James A. Bednar, "Self-Organization of Orientation Maps,

from a library or

Lateral Connections, and Dynamic Receptive Fields in the Primary Visual Cortex," in Lateral Interactions in

bookseller

the Cortex: Structure and Function, ed. Joseph Sirosh, Risto Miikkulainen, and Yoonsuck Choe (Austin, TX:

14.167:

UTCS Neural Networks Research Group, 1996), under "Dynamic Receptive Fields,"

Books consulted

online

http://nn.cs.utexas.edu/web-pubs/htmlbook96/.

3. Antokoletz, Musical Symbolism.

14.168:

Books on CD-ROM

4. Sirosh, Miikkulainen, and Bednar, "Self-Organization of Orientation Maps," under "Conclusion."

and other fixed

media

Antokoletz, Elliot. Musical Symbolism in the Operas of Debussy and Bartok. New York: Oxford University Press,

14.169:

2008. doi:10.1093/acprof:oso/9780195365825.001.0001.

Freely available

electronic editions

Sirosh, Joseph, Risto Miikkulainen, and James A. Bednar. "Self-Organization of Orientation Maps, Lateral

of older works

Connections, and Dynamic Receptive Fields in the Primary Visual Cortex." In Lateral Interactions in the

Cortex: Structure and Function, edited by Joseph Sirosh, Risto Miikkulainen, and Yoonsuck Choe. Austin,

TX: UTCS Neural Networks Research Group, 1996. http://nn.cs.utexas.edu/web-pubs/htmlbook96/.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Electronic Books

of Contents

List of Figures

14.168 BOOKS ON CD-ROM AND OTHER FIXED MEDIA

List of Tables

Citations of books on CD-ROM and other fixed media should carry an indication of the medium.

Index

1. The Chicago Manual of Style, 15th ed. (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2003), CD-ROM, 1.4.

Hicks, Rodney J. Nuclear Medicine: From the Center of Our Universe. Victoria, Austral.: ICE T Multimedia,

14.166:

Books downloaded

1996. CD-ROM.

from a library or

bookseller

14.167:

Books consulted

online

14.168:

Books on CD-ROM

and other fixed

media

14.169:

Freely available

electronic editions

of older works

14.170:

"Periodicals"

defined

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Books >> Electronic Books

of Contents

List of Figures

14.169 FREELY AVAILABLE ELECTRONIC EDITIONS OF OLDER WORKS

List of Tables

Books and other documents that have fallen out of copyright are often freely available online. Such

Index

sources, while convenient, are not necessarily authoritative. It may not be possible to tell, for example,

which edition was used to prepare the online text. When such information about a text is not

available--and even when it is--consider consulting a printed edition. In the James example below,

14.167:

Project Gutenberg notes that their text is based on the 1909 New York edition of The Ambassadors (see

Books consulted

online

14.119). For the Whitman example, though electronic page images of the first edition (discoloration

14.168:

and all) were consulted--amounting, in a way, to having consulted the printed book without having

Books on CD-ROM

handled it--it is still advisable to include a URL. See also 14.17.

and other fixed

media

1. Walt Whitman, Leaves of Grass (New York, 1855), 22,

14.169:

Freely available

http://www.whitmanarchive.org/published/LG/1855/whole.html.

electronic editions

2. Henry James, The Ambassadors (1909; Project Gutenberg, 1996), bk. 6, chap. 1,

of older works

ftp://ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext96/ambas10.txt.

14.170:

"Periodicals"

defined

James, Henry. The Ambassadors. Reprint of the 1909 New York edition, Project Gutenberg, 1996.

ftp://ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext96/ambas10.txt.

14.171:

Information to be

Whitman, Walt. Leaves of Grass. New York, 1855.

included

http://www.whitmanarchive.org/published/LG/1855/whole.html.

Note that there is no place of publication in the James note example. Such information is less likely to

accompany online works, and it may be dispensed with without the use of "n.p." (for "no place")

when it cannot be readily determined.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.170 "PERIODICALS" DEFINED

List of Tables

The word periodical is used here to include scholarly and professional journals, popular magazines,

Index

and newspapers. Periodicals are far more likely than books to be consulted in electronic form. Except

for the addition of a URL or DOI, the citation of an online periodical is the same as that

recommended for printed periodicals. (Some publishers may also require access dates for sources

14.168:

consulted online.) See examples of such information, and special considerations, under specific types

Books on CD-ROM

and other fixed

of periodicals. See also 14.4--13.

media

14.169:

Freely available

electronic editions

of older works

14.170:

"Periodicals"

defined

14.171:

Information to be

included

14.172:

Journals versus

magazines

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.171 INFORMATION TO BE INCLUDED

List of Tables

Citations of periodicals require some or all of the following data:

Index

1. Full name(s) of author or authors

2. Title and subtitle of article or column

14.169:

3. Title of periodical

Freely available

electronic editions

4. Issue information (volume, issue number, date, etc.)

of older works

5. Page reference (where appropriate)

14.170:

6. For online periodicals, a URL or, if available, a DOI (see 14.5, 14.6, 14.184)

"Periodicals"

defined

Indispensable for newspapers and most magazines is the specific date (month, day, and year). For

14.171:

Information to be

journals, the volume and year plus the month or issue number are usually cited. Additional data

included

make location easier. See also 14.70.

14.172:

Journals versus

magazines

14.173:

Punctuation in

periodical citations

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.172 JOURNALS VERSUS MAGAZINES

List of Tables

In this manual, journal is used for scholarly or professional periodicals available mainly by

Index

subscription (e.g., Library Quarterly, Journal of the American Medical Association). Journals are normally

cited by volume and date (see 14.180). Magazine is used here for the kind of weekly or monthly

periodical--professionally produced, sometimes specialized, but more accessible to general readers--

14.170:

that is available either by subscription or in individual issues at bookstores or newsstands or online

"Periodicals"

defined

(e.g., Scientific American, the New Yorker). Magazines are normally cited by date alone (see 14.199). If in

14.171:

doubt whether a particular periodical is better treated as a journal or as a magazine, use journal form

Information to be

if the volume number is easily located, magazine form if it is not.

included

14.172:

Journals versus

magazines

14.173:

Punctuation in

periodical citations

14.174:

Page numbers in

periodical citations

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.173 PUNCTUATION IN PERIODICAL CITATIONS

List of Tables

In notes, commas appear between author; title of article; title of magazine, newspaper, or journal; and

Index

URL or DOI (for sources consulted online). In bibliographies, periods replace these commas. For more

examples, see 14.18 and elsewhere in this chapter. Note that in is not used between the article title and

the journal title. ( In is used only with chapters or other parts of books; see 14.111, 14.112.)

14.171:

Information to be

1. Hope A. Olson, "Codes, Costs, and Critiques: The Organization of Information in Library Quarterly,

included

1931--2004," Library Quarterly 76, no. 1 (2006): 20, doi:10.1086/504343.

14.172:

Journals versus

34. Olson, "Codes, Costs, and Critiques," 22--23.

magazines

Olson, Hope A. "Codes, Costs, and Critiques: The Organization of Information in Library Quarterly, 1931--

14.173:

Punctuation in

2004." Library Quarterly 76, no. 1 (2006): 19--35. doi:10.1086/504343.

periodical citations

14.174:

Page numbers in

periodical citations

14.175:

Journal articleâ

€”author's name

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.174 PAGE NUMBERS IN PERIODICAL CITATIONS

List of Tables

In bibliography entries, the first and last pages of an article are given (for inclusive numbers, see 9.58,

Index

9.60). In notes and text citations, only specific pages need be cited (unless the article as a whole is

referred to). In some electronic formats, page numbers will be unavailable, in which case a section

heading or other locator may be appropriate (see 14.17).

14.172:

Journals versus

magazines

14.173:

Punctuation in

periodical citations

14.174:

Page numbers in

periodical citations

14.175:

Journal articleâ

€”author's name

14.176:

Journal articleâ

€”title

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.175 JOURNAL ARTICLE--AUTHOR'S NAME

List of Tables

Authors' names are normally given as they appear at the heads of their articles. Adjustments can be

Index

made, however, as indicated in 14.72. Most of the guidelines offered in 14.72--92 apply equally to

authors of journal articles. For the treatment of two or more authors, see 14.76.

14.173:

Punctuation in

periodical citations

14.174:

Page numbers in

periodical citations

14.175:

Journal articleâ

€”author's name

14.176:

Journal articleâ

€”title

14.177:

Italics and

quotation marks

within article titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.176 JOURNAL ARTICLE--TITLE

List of Tables

Titles of articles are set in roman (except for words or phrases that require italics, such as species

Index

names or book titles; see 14.177); they are usually capitalized headline-style and put in quotation

marks. As with a book, title and subtitle are separated by a colon. See also 8.154--95. For examples,

see 14.18 and the paragraphs below. For shortened forms of article titles, see 14.196.

14.174:

Page numbers in

Menjívar, Cecilia. "Liminal Legality: Salvadoran and Guatemalan Immigrants' Lives in the United States."

periodical citations

American Journal of Sociology 111, no. 4 (2006): 999--1037. doi:10.1086/499509.

14.175:

Journal article—

author's name

14.176:

Journal article—

title

14.177:

Italics and

quotation marks

within article titles

14.178:

Question marks or

exclamation points

in article titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.177 ITALICS AND QUOTATION MARKS WITHIN ARTICLE TITLES

List of Tables

Book titles and other normally italicized terms remain italicized within an article title. A term

Index

normally quoted is enclosed in single quotation marks (since it is already within double quotation

marks). Retain both double and single quotation marks, if any, in short citations. See also 8.163, 8.175.

14.175:

23. Judith Lewis, " ‘'Tis a Misfortune to Be a Great Ladie': Maternal Mortality in the British

Journal article—

Aristocracy, 1558--1959," Journal of British Studies 37, no. 1 (1998): 26--53,

author's name

http://www.jstor.org/stable/176034.

14.176:

44. Lewis, " ‘'Tis a Misfortune to Be a Great Ladie,' " 32.

Journal article—

title

Loften, Peter. "Reverberations between Wordplay and Swordplay in Hamlet." Aeolian Studies 2 (1989): 12--29.

14.177:

Italics and

quotation marks

within article titles

14.178:

Question marks or

exclamation points

in article titles

14.179:

Title of journal

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.178 QUESTION MARKS OR EXCLAMATION POINTS IN ARTICLE TITLES

List of Tables

As with book titles (see 14.105), when a main title ends with a question mark or an exclamation point,

Index

no colon is added before any subtitle unless the question mark or exclamation point is followed by a

closing quotation mark (as in the third example). Note the comma before the page number in the

shortened citations (second and fourth examples). This departure from Chicago's former usage aids

14.176:

readability and consistency; see 6.119.

Journal articleâ

€”title

1. C. Daniel Batson, "How Social Is the Animal? The Human Capacity for Caring," American

14.177:

Italics and

Psychologist 45 (March 1990): 336.

quotation marks

2. Batson, "How Social Is the Animal?," 337.

within article titles

3. Daniel Bertrand Monk, " â€˜Welcome to Crisis!': Notes for a Pictorial History of the Pictorial

14.178:

Histories of the Arab Israeli War of June 1967," Grey Room 7 (Spring 2002): 139,

Question marks or

exclamation points

http://www.jstor.org/stable/1262596.

in article titles

4. Monk, " â€˜Welcome to Crisis!,' " 140.

14.179:

Title of journal

When a title ending with a question mark or an exclamation mark would normally be followed by a

14.180:

period, however, the period is omitted; see 6.118.

Journal volume,

issue, and date

Abrams, Marshall. "How Do Natural Selection and Random Drift Interact?" Philosophy of Science 74

(December 2007): 666--79. doi:10.1086/525612.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.179 TITLE OF JOURNAL

List of Tables

Titles of journals are italicized and capitalized headline-style. They are usually given in full--except

Index

for the omission of an initial The--in notes and bibliographies (e.g., Journal of Business). With foreign-

language journals and magazines, an initial article should be retained (e.g., Der Spiegel). Occasionally

an initialism, such as PMLA, is the official title and is never spelled out. In some disciplines, especially

14.177:

in science and medicine, journal titles are routinely abbreviated (e.g., Plant Syst Evol), unless they

Italics and

quotation marks

consist of only one word (e.g., Science, Mind); see 15.44. Chicago recommends giving titles in full

within article titles

unless a particular publisher or discipline requires otherwise.

14.178:

Question marks or

exclamation points

in article titles

14.179:

Title of journal

14.180:

Journal volume,

issue, and date

14.181:

No volume number

or date only

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.180 JOURNAL VOLUME, ISSUE, AND DATE

List of Tables

Most journal citations include volume, issue number or month, and year. The volume number, set in

Index

roman, follows the title without intervening punctuation; arabic numerals are used even if the journal

itself uses roman numerals. The issue number may be omitted if pagination is continuous throughout

a volume or when a month or season precedes the year. Nonetheless, it is never wrong to include the

14.178:

issue number, and doing so can be a hedge against other errors. When the issue number is given, it

Question marks or

exclamation points

follows the volume number, separated by a comma and preceded by no. The year, sometimes

in article titles

preceded by an exact date, a month, or a season, appears in parentheses after the volume number (or

14.179:

issue number, if given). Seasons, though not capitalized in running text (see 8.87), are capitalized in

Title of journal

source citations. Months may be abbreviated or spelled in full (as here); seasons are best spelled out

14.180:

Journal volume,

(see also 10.40). Neither month nor season is necessary when the issue number is given, though it is

issue, and date

never incorrect to include it.

14.181:

No volume number

or date only

2. David Meban, "Temple Building, Primus Language, and the Proem to Virgil's Third Georgic,"

Classical Philology 103, no. 2 (2008): 153, doi:10.1086/591611.

14.182:

Forthcoming

18. Jeanette Kennett, "True and Proper Selves: Velleman on Love," Ethics 118 (January 2008): 215,

articles

doi:10.1086/523747.

23. Boyan Jovanovic and Peter L. Rousseau, "Specific Capital and Technological Variety," Journal of

Human Capital 2 (Summer 2008): 135, doi:10.1086/590066.

Jovanovic, Boyan, and Peter L. Rousseau. "Specific Capital and Technological Variety." Journal of Human

Capital 2 (Summer 2008): 129--52. doi:10.1086/590066.

Kennett, Jeanette. "True and Proper Selves: Velleman on Love." Ethics 118 (January 2008): 213--27.

doi:10.1086/523747.

Meban, David. "Temple Building, Primus Language, and the Proem to Virgil's Third Georgic." Classical

Philology 103, no. 2 (2008): 150--74. doi:10.1086/591611.

Where a span of months or seasons is given, use an en dash (e.g., September--December 2010);

consecutive months are sometimes indicated by a slash (March/April).

1. Dean Amadon, "Ecology and the Evolution of Some Hawaiian Birds," Evolution 1 (March--June

1947): 65--66, http://www.jstor.org/stable/2405404.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.181 NO VOLUME NUMBER OR DATE ONLY

List of Tables

When a journal uses issue numbers only, without volume numbers, a comma follows the journal title.

Index

Beattie, J. M. "The Pattern of Crime in England, 1660--1800." Past and Present, no. 62 (1974): 47--95.

When only a date is available, it becomes an indispensable element and should therefore not be

14.179:

Title of journal

enclosed in parentheses; a comma follows the journal title and the date.

14.180:

Journal volume,

Saberhagen, Kelvin. "Lake Superior Beluga?" Sturgeon Review, Winter 1928, 21--45.

issue, and date

14.181:

No volume number

or date only

14.182:

Forthcoming

articles

14.183:

Journal page

references

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.182 FORTHCOMING ARTICLES

List of Tables

If an article has been accepted for publication by a journal but has not yet appeared, forthcoming

Index

stands in place of the year and the page numbers. Any article not yet accepted should be treated as an

unpublished manuscript (see 14.228).

14.180:

4. Margaret M. Author, "Article Title," Journal Name 98 (forthcoming).

Journal volume,

issue, and date

Author, Margaret M. "Article Title." Journal Name 98 (forthcoming).

14.181:

No volume number

If an article is published by a journal electronically ahead of the official publication date, use the

or date only

posted publication date. In such cases, information about pagination may not yet be available.

14.182:

Forthcoming

articles

Black, Steven. "Changing Epidemiology of Invasive Pneumococcal Disease: A Complicated Story." Clinical

14.183:

Infectious Diseases 47. Published electronically July 14, 2008. doi:10.1086/590002.

Journal page

references

14.184:

Electronic journal

articlesâ€”URL or

DOI

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.183 JOURNAL PAGE REFERENCES

List of Tables

In citing a particular passage in a journal article, only the pages concerned are given. In references to

Index

the article as a whole (as in a bibliography), first and last pages are given.

4. Paul Thompson, "Democracy and Popular Power in Beijing," Radical America 22 (September--

14.181:

October 1988): 22.

No volume number

or date only

Gold, Ann Grodzins. "Grains of Truth: Shifting Hierarchies of Food and Grace in Three Rajasthani Tales."

14.182:

History of Religions 38, no. 2 (1998): 150--71.

Forthcoming

articles

Most electronic journals provide page numbers. Where this is not the case, another type of locator

14.183:

Journal page

such as a subheading may become appropriate in a note. None, however, is required. See also 14.17.

references

14.184:

15. Jamison, Shelly, "I(nternet) Do(mains): The New Rules of Selection," Culture Critique 3, no. 5 (2009),

Electronic journal

under "Park Avenue Revisited."

articlesâ€”URL or

DOI

14.185:

Electronic journal

articlesâ€”access

dates

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.184 ELECTRONIC JOURNAL ARTICLES--URL OR DOI

List of Tables

Many of the examples in this section include a URL or a DOI at the end of the citation. A DOI, if it is

Index

available, is preferable to a URL. If using a URL, use the address that appears in your browser's

address bar when viewing the article (or the abstract) unless a shorter, more stable form of the URL is

offered along with the electronic article. Note that a single DOI assigned to a journal article as a

14.182:

whole applies to that article in any medium, print or electronic. Nonetheless, unless their publisher or

Forthcoming

articles

discipline requires otherwise, authors need only include an article's DOI to indicate that an electronic

14.183:

version was cited. (Because the DOI points to all available formats simultaneously, it is not necessary

Journal page

to specify which electronic format was cited--e.g., PDF or HTML.) See also 14.4--13.

references

14.184:

4. Frank P. Whitney, "The Six-Year High School in Cleveland," School Review 37, no. 4 (1929): 268,

Electronic journal

articles—URL or

http://www.jstor.org/stable/1078814.

DOI

5. María de la Luz Inclán, "From the ¡Ya Basta! to the Caracoles: Zapatista Mobilization under

14.185:

Transitional Conditions," American Journal of Sociology 113, no. 5 (2008): 1318, doi:10.1086/525508.

Electronic journal

articles—access

dates

Inclán, María de la Luz. "From the ¡Ya Basta! to the Caracoles: Zapatista Mobilization under Transitional

Conditions." American Journal of Sociology 113, no. 5 (2008): 1316--50. doi:10.1086/525508.

14.186:

Article page

Whitney, Frank P. "The Six-Year High School in Cleveland." School Review 37, no. 4 (1929): 267--71.

numbers in relation

http://www.jstor.org/stable/1078814.

to volume or issue

numbers

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.185 ELECTRONIC JOURNAL ARTICLES--ACCESS DATES

List of Tables

Access dates are not required by Chicago in citations of formally published electronic sources, for the

Index

reasons discussed in 14.7. Some publishers and some disciplines, however, may require them. When

they are included, they should immediately precede the DOI or URL, separated from the surrounding

citation by commas in a note and periods in a bibliography entry. This departure from Chicago's

14.183:

earlier recommendation recognizes the increasing importance of uniform placement of URLs and

Journal page

references

DOIs in source citations.

14.184:

Electronic journal

1. Patrick G. P. Charles et al., "SMART-COP: A Tool for Predicting the Need for Intensive Respiratory

articlesâ€”URL or

or Vasopressor Support in Community-Acquired Pneumonia," Clinical Infectious Diseases 47 (August 1,

DOI

2008): 377, accessed July 17, 2008, doi:10.1086/589754.

14.185:

Electronic journal

3. Charles et al., "SMART-COP," 378--79.

articlesâ€”access

dates

Charles, Patrick G. P., Rory Wolfe, Michael Whitby, Michael J. Fine, Andrew J. Fuller, Robert Stirling,

14.186:

Alistair A. Wright, et al. "SMART-COP: A Tool for Predicting the Need for Intensive Respiratory or

Article page

Vasopressor Support in Community-Acquired Pneumonia." Clinical Infectious Diseases 47 (August 1, 2008):

numbers in relation

to volume or issue

375--84. Accessed July 17, 2008. doi:10.1086/589754.

numbers

14.187:

For citing articles credited to more than ten authors, see 14.76.

Special issues

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.186 ARTICLE PAGE NUMBERS IN RELATION TO VOLUME OR ISSUE NUMBERS

List of Tables

When page numbers immediately follow a volume number, separated only by a colon, no space

Index

follows the colon. But when parenthetical information intervenes, a space follows the colon. (This rule

applies to other types of volumes as well; see, e.g., 14.121.)

14.184:

Social Networks 14:213--29

Electronic journal

Critical Inquiry 19 (Autumn): 164--85

articlesâ€”URL or

DOI

When, as occasionally happens, the page number follows an issue number, a comma--not a colon--

14.185:

Electronic journal

should be used.

articlesâ€”access

dates

Diogenes, no. 25, 84--117.

14.186:

Article page

numbers in relation

to volume or issue

numbers

14.187:

Special issues

14.188:

Supplements

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.187 SPECIAL ISSUES

List of Tables

A journal issue (occasionally a double issue) devoted to a single theme is known as a special issue. It

Index

carries the normal volume and issue number (or numbers if a double issue). Such an issue may have

an editor and a title of its own. An article within the issue is cited as in the first example; a special

issue as a whole may be cited as in the second example.

14.185:

Electronic journal

42. Sassler, Sharon, "Learning to Be an â€˜American Lady'? Ethnic Variation in Daughters' Pursuits in

articlesâ€”access

dates

the Early 1900s," in "Emergent and Reconfigured Forms of Family Life," ed. Lora Bex Lempert and

14.186:

Marjorie L. DeVault, special issue, Gender and Society 14, no. 1 (2000): 201--2,

Article page

http://www.jstor.org/stable/190427.

numbers in relation

to volume or issue

numbers

Good, Thomas L., ed. "Non-Subject-Matter Outcomes of Schooling." Special issue, Elementary School Journal

99, no. 5 (1999).

14.187:

Special issues

14.188:

Supplements

14.189:

Articles published

in installments

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.188 SUPPLEMENTS

List of Tables

A journal supplement, unlike a special issue (see 14.187), is numbered separately from the regular

Index

issues of the journal. Like a special issue, however, it may have a title and author or editor of its own.

MacDonald, Glenn, and Michael S. Weisbach. "The Economics of Has-Beens." In "Papers in Honor of

14.186:

Sherwin Rosen," supplement, Journal of Political Economy 112, no. S1 (2004): S289--S310.

Article page

doi:10.1086/380948.

numbers in relation

to volume or issue

numbers

14.187:

Special issues

14.188:

Supplements

14.189:

Articles published

in installments

14.190:

Article appearing in

two publications

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.189 ARTICLES PUBLISHED IN INSTALLMENTS

List of Tables

Articles published in parts over two or more issues may be listed separately or in the same entry,

Index

depending on whether the part or the whole is cited.

68. George C. Brown, ed., "A Swedish Traveler in Early Wisconsin: The Observations of Fredrika

14.187:

Bremer," pt. 1, Wisconsin Magazine of History 61 (Summer 1978): 312.

Special issues

69. Ibid., pt. 2, Wisconsin Magazine of History 62 (Autumn 1978): 50.

14.188:

Supplements

Brown, George C., ed. "A Swedish Traveler in Early Wisconsin: The Observations of Fredrika Bremer." Pts. 1

14.189:

and 2. Wisconsin Magazine of History 61 (Summer 1978): 300--318; 62 (Autumn 1978): 41--56.

Articles published

in installments

14.190:

Article appearing in

two publications

14.191:

Place where

journal is published

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.190 ARTICLE APPEARING IN TWO PUBLICATIONS

List of Tables

Chapters in books have sometimes begun their lives as journal articles, or vice versa. Revisions are

Index

often made along the way. The version actually consulted should be cited in a note or text citation,

but annotation such as the following, if of specific interest to readers, may follow the citation. See also

14.49.

14.188:

Supplements

Previously published as "Article Title," Journal Title 20, no. 3 (2009): 345--62.

14.189:

Articles published

A slightly revised version appears in Book Title, ed. E. Editor (Place: Publisher, 2010), 15--30.

in installments

14.190:

Article appearing in

two publications

14.191:

Place where

journal is published

14.192:

Translated or

edited article

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.191 PLACE WHERE JOURNAL IS PUBLISHED

List of Tables

If a journal might be confused with another with a similar title, or if it might not be known to the

Index

users of a bibliography, add the name of the place or institution where it is published in parentheses

after the journal title.

14.189:

87. Diane-Dinh Kim Luu, "Diethylstilbestrol and Media Coverage of the â€˜Morning After' Pill," Lost

Articles published

in Thought: Undergraduate Research Journal (Indiana University South Bend) 2 (1999): 65--70.

in installments

14.190:

Garrett, Marvin P. "Language and Design in Pippa Passes." Victorian Poetry (West Virginia University) 13, no.

Article appearing in

two publications

1 (1975): 47--60.

14.191:

Place where

journal is published

14.192:

Translated or

edited article

14.193:

Foreign-language

article and journal

titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.192 TRANSLATED OR EDITED ARTICLE

List of Tables

A translated or edited article follows essentially the same style as a translated or edited book (see

Index

14.87, 14.88).

1. Arthur Q. Author, "Article Title," trans. So-and-So, Journal Title . . .

14.190:

Article appearing in

Author, Arthur Q. "Article Title." Edited by So-and-So. Journal Title . . .

two publications

14.191:

Place where

journal is published

14.192:

Translated or

edited article

14.193:

Foreign-language

article and journal

titles

14.194:

Translated article

titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.193 FOREIGN-LANGUAGE ARTICLE AND JOURNAL TITLES

List of Tables

Titles of foreign-language articles, like foreign book titles, are usually capitalized sentence-style (see

Index

8.156) but according to the conventions of the particular language (see 14.107). German, for example,

capitalizes common nouns in running text as well as in titles (see 11.42). Journal titles may either be

treated the same way or, if an author has done so consistently, be capitalized headline-style. An initial

14.191:

definite article ( Le, Der, etc.) should be retained, since it may govern the inflection of the following

Place where

journal is published

word. Months and the equivalents of such abbreviations as no. or pt. are usually given in English (but

14.192:

see 14.71).

Translated or

edited article

22. Dinda L. Gorlée, "¡Eureka! La traducción como un descubrimiento pragmático," Anuario filosófico

14.193:

29, no. 3 (1996): 1403.

Foreign-language

e

e

article and journal

23. Marcel Garaud, "Recherches sur les défrichements dans la Gâtine poitevine aux XI et XII siècles,"

titles

Bulletin de la Société des antiquaires de l'Ouest, 4th ser., 9 (1967): 11--27.

14.194:

Translated article

Note the capitalization of Société (the first word of an organization name) and Ouest (the West).

titles

Headline-style capitalization of the two journal titles would call for Anuario Filosófico and Bulletin de la

14.195:

New series for

Société des Antiquaires de l'Ouest.

journal volumes

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.194 TRANSLATED ARTICLE TITLES

List of Tables

If an English translation is added to a foreign-language article title, it is enclosed in brackets, without

Index

quotation marks, and capitalized sentence-style. If a title is given only in English translation,

however, the original language must be specified. See also 14.108, 14.110.

14.192:

1. W. Kern, "Waar verzamelde Pigafetta zijn Maleise woorden?" [Where did Pigafetta collect his

Translated or

Malaysian words?], Tijdschrift voor Indische taal-, land- en volkenkunde 78 (1938): 271--73.

edited article

14.193:

Chu Ching and Long Zhi. "The Vicissitudes of the Giant Panda, Ailuropoda melanoleuca (David)." [In

Foreign-language

article and journal

Chinese.] Acta Zoologica Sinica 29, no. 1 (1983): 93--104.

titles

14.194:

Translated article

titles

14.195:

New series for

journal volumes

14.196:

Short titles for

articles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.195 NEW SERIES FOR JOURNAL VOLUMES

List of Tables

New series in journal volumes are identified by n.s. (new series), 2nd ser. , and so forth, as they are for

Index

books (see 14.132). Note the comma between the series identifier and the volume number.

23. "Letter of Jonathan Sewall," Proceedings of the Massachusetts Historical Society, 2nd ser., 10 (January

14.193:

1896): 414.

Foreign-language

article and journal

Moraes, G. M. "St. Francis Xavier, Apostolic Nuncio, 1542--52." Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal

titles

Asiatic Society, n.s., 26 (1950): 279--313.

14.194:

Translated article

titles

14.195:

New series for

journal volumes

14.196:

Short titles for

articles

14.197:

Abstract

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.196 SHORT TITLES FOR ARTICLES

List of Tables

In subsequent references to journal articles, the author's last name and the main title of the article

Index

(often shortened) are most commonly used. In the absence of a full bibliography, however, the journal

title, volume number, and page number(s) may prove more helpful guides to the source. See also

14.177.

14.194:

Translated article

24. Pablo Cotler and Christopher Woodruff, "The Impact of Short-Term Credit on Microenterprises:

titles

Evidence from the Fincomun-Bimbo Program in Mexico," Economic Development and Cultural Change 56

14.195:

New series for

(July 2008): 831, doi:10.1086/588169.

journal volumes

26. Cotler and Woodruff, "Short-Term Credit," 840.

14.196:

Short titles for

or

articles

26. Cotler and Woodruff, Economic Development and Cultural Change 56:840.

14.197:

Abstract

14.198:

Electronic

enhancements to

journal articles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.197 ABSTRACT

List of Tables

An abstract is treated like a journal article, but the word abstract must be added.

Index

Hoover, Susan E., Junichi Kawada, Wyndham Wilson, and Jeffrey I. Cohen. "Oropharyngeal Shedding of

Epstein-Barr Virus in the Absence of Circulating B Cells." Abstract. Journal of Infectious Diseases 198

(August 1, 2008). doi:10.1086/589714.

14.195:

New series for

journal volumes

14.196:

Short titles for

articles

14.197:

Abstract

14.198:

Electronic

enhancements to

journal articles

14.199:

Citing magazines

by date

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Journals

of Contents

List of Figures

14.198 ELECTRONIC ENHANCEMENTS TO JOURNAL ARTICLES

List of Tables

Electronic-only enhancements to journal articles--including sound or video files and appendixes--can

Index

be cited in notes as follows:

3. "Ghost Dancing Music," Naraya no. 2, MP3 audio file, cited in Richard W. Stoffle et al., "Ghost

14.196:

Dancing the Grand Canyon," Current Anthropology 41, no. 1 (2000), doi:10.1086/300101.

Short titles for

11. "RNA/DNA Quantitation Methods," appendix A (online only), Daniel I. Bolnick and On Lee Lau,

articles

"Predictable Patterns of Disruptive Selection in Stickleback in Postglacial Lakes," American Naturalist 172

14.197:

(July 2008), doi:10.1086/587805.

Abstract

14.198:

See also 14.274--80.

Electronic

enhancements to

journal articles

14.199:

Citing magazines

by date

14.200:

Online magazine

articles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Magazines

of Contents

List of Figures

14.199 CITING MAGAZINES BY DATE

List of Tables

For the use of magazine as against journal, see 14.172. Many of the guidelines for citing journals apply

Index

to magazines also. Weekly or monthly (or bimonthly) magazines, even if numbered by volume and

issue, are usually cited by date only. The date, being an essential element in the citation, is not

enclosed in parentheses. While a specific page number may be cited in a note, the inclusive page

14.197:

numbers of an article may be omitted, since they are often widely separated by extraneous material.

Abstract

When page numbers are included, a comma rather than a colon separates them from the date of issue.

14.198:

Electronic

enhancements to

1. Beth Saulnier, "From Vine to Wine," Cornell Alumni Magazine, September/October 2008, 48.

journal articles

2. Jill Lepore, "Just the Facts, Ma'am: Fake Memoirs, Factual Fictions, and the History of History," New

14.199:

Yorker, March 24, 2008, 81.

Citing magazines

by date

See also 14.202 and the guidelines for newspapers (14.203--13).

14.200:

Online magazine

articles

14.201:

Magazine article

titles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Magazines

of Contents

List of Figures

14.200 ONLINE MAGAZINE ARTICLES

List of Tables

For magazine articles consulted online, include a URL (or DOI, if available) at the end of a citation.

Index

See also 14.4--13, 14.184.

1. Wendy Cole and Janice Castro, "Scientology's Largesse in Russia," Time, April 13, 1992,

14.198:

http://www.time.com/time/magazine/article/0,9171,975290,00.html.

Electronic

enhancements to

journal articles

14.199:

Citing magazines

by date

14.200:

Online magazine

articles

14.201:

Magazine article

titles

14.202:

Magazine

departments

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Magazines

of Contents

List of Figures

14.201 MAGAZINE ARTICLE TITLES

List of Tables

Titles of magazine articles are treated like titles of journal articles: they are capitalized headline-style,

Index

set in roman, and placed in quotation marks. See 14.176; see also 8.157.

1. Michael Frank, "La Concha Revival: San Juan's Tropical Modernist Gem Makes a Comeback,"

14.199:

Architectural Digest, August 2009, 103--4.

Citing magazines

by date

14.200:

Online magazine

articles

14.201:

Magazine article

titles

14.202:

Magazine

departments

14.203:

Newspaper

citationsâ€”basic

elements

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Magazines

of Contents

List of Figures

14.202 MAGAZINE DEPARTMENTS

List of Tables

Titles of regular departments in a magazine are capitalized headline-style but not put in quotation

Index

marks.

2. Rebecca Mead, "Isn't It Romantic?," Talk of the Town (Ink), New Yorker, July 21, 2008,

14.200:

http://www.newyorker.com/talk/2008/07/21/080721ta_talk_mead.

Online magazine

3. Debra Klein, Focus on Travel, Newsweek, April 17, 2000.

articles

14.201:

Wallraff, Barbara. Word Fugitives. Atlantic Monthly, July/August 2008.

Magazine article

titles

A department without a named author is best cited by the name of the magazine.

14.202:

Magazine

departments

Gourmet. Kitchen Notebook. May 2000.

14.203:

Newspaper

citationsâ€”basic

elements

14.204:

Newspaper

headlines

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Newspapers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.203 NEWSPAPER CITATIONS--BASIC ELEMENTS

List of Tables

The name of the author (if known) and the headline or column heading in a daily newspaper are

Index

cited much like the corresponding elements in magazines (see 14.199--202). The month (often

abbreviated), day, and year are the indispensable elements. Because a newspaper's issue of any given

day may include several editions, and items may be moved or eliminated in various editions, page

14.201:

numbers may usually be omitted (for an example of a page number in a citation, see 14.209). In a note

Magazine article

titles

or bibliographical entry, it may be useful to add "final edition," "Midwest edition," or some such

14.202:

identifier. If the paper is published in several sections, the section number or name may be given (e.g.,

Magazine

sec. 1). To cite an article consulted online, include the URL; in some cases, it may be advisable to

departments

shorten a particularly unwieldy URL to end after the first single forward slash (i.e., the slash that

14.203:

Newspaper

follows a domain extension such as .com).

citations—basic

elements

1. Editorial, Philadelphia Inquirer, July 30, 1990.

14.204:

2. Mike Royko, "Next Time, Dan, Take Aim at Arnold," Chicago Tribune, September 23, 1992.

Newspaper

headlines

3. Christopher Lehmann-Haupt, "Robert Giroux, Editor, Publisher and Nurturer of Literary Giants, Is

14.205:

Dead at 94," New York Times, September 6, 2008, New York edition.

Regular columns

4. "Pushcarts Evolve to Trendy Kiosks," Lake Forester (Lake Forest, IL), March 23, 2000.

5. Julie Bosman, "Jets? Yes! Sharks? ¡Sí! in Bilingual ‘West Side,' " New York Times, July 17, 2008,

http://www.nytimes.com/2008/07/17/theater/17bway.html.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Newspapers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.204 NEWSPAPER HEADLINES

List of Tables

Since headlines are often grammatical sentences, sentence-style capitalization is preferred in the

Index

headlines of many major newspapers. In documentation, however, Chicago recommends headline

style for citing headlines in notes and bibliographies for the sake of consistency with other titles. See

also 8.156, 8.157.

14.202:

Magazine

"Justices Limit Visiting Rights of Grandparents in Divided Case"

departments

14.203:

Headlines presented entirely in full capitals in the original are usually converted to upper- and

Newspaper

citationsâ€”basic

lowercase in documentation (but see 7.48).

elements

14.204:

Newspaper

headlines

14.205:

Regular columns

14.206:

Citing in text

rather than in a

bibliography

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Newspapers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.205 REGULAR COLUMNS

List of Tables

Many regular columns carry headlines as well as column titles. When such columns are cited, both

Index

may be used or, to save space, the column title alone.

5. Marguerite Fields, "Want to Be My Boyfriend? Please Define," Modern Love, New York Times, May

14.203:

4, 2008, http://www.nytimes.com/2008/05/04/fashion/04love.html.

Newspaper

citationsâ€”basic

or

elements

14.204:

5. Marguerite Fields, Modern Love, New York Times, May 4, 2008,

Newspaper

http://www.nytimes.com/2008/05/04/fashion/04love.html.

headlines

14.205:

Regular columns

14.206:

Citing in text

rather than in a

bibliography

14.207:

Unsigned

newspaper articles

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Newspapers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.206 CITING IN TEXT RATHER THAN IN A BIBLIOGRAPHY

List of Tables

Newspapers are more commonly cited in notes or parenthetical references than in bibliographies. A

Index

list of works cited need not list newspaper items if these have been documented in the text. No

corresponding entry in a bibliography would be needed for the following citation (nor would it be

necessary in such a case to include information about edition or, for an article consulted online, a

14.204:

URL):

Newspaper

headlines

In an article discussing the end of Favre's second-straight postretirement season--this time with the

14.205:

Regular columns

Minnesota Vikings--Pat Borzi reminds us that when it comes to the aging quarterback's uncertain prospects

for yet another season, "there is final, and there is Favre" ( New York Times, January 25, 2010).

14.206:

Citing in text

rather than in a

If, for some reason, a bibliography entry were included, it would appear as follows:

bibliography

14.207:

Borzi, Pat. "Retirement Discussion Begins Anew for Favre." New York Times, January 25, 2010.

Unsigned

newspaper articles

http://www.nytimes.com/2010/01/26/sports/football/26vikings.html?emc=eta1.

14.208:

Letters to the

editor

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Newspapers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.207 UNSIGNED NEWSPAPER ARTICLES

List of Tables

Unsigned newspaper articles or features are best dealt with in text or notes. But if a bibliography

Index

entry should be needed, the name of the newspaper stands in place of the author.

1. "In Texas, Ad Heats Up Race for Governor," New York Times, July 30, 2002.

14.205:

Regular columns

New York Times. "In Texas, Ad Heats Up Race for Governor." July 30, 2002.

14.206:

Citing in text

rather than in a

bibliography

14.207:

Unsigned

newspaper articles

14.208:

Letters to the

editor

14.209:

Weekend

supplements,

magazines, and the

like

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Newspapers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.208 LETTERS TO THE EDITOR

List of Tables

Published letters to the editor are treated generically, without headlines.

Index

6. Brian Sheridan, letter to the editor, Los Angeles Times, September 7, 2008.

14.206:

Citing in text

rather than in a

bibliography

14.207:

Unsigned

newspaper articles

14.208:

Letters to the

editor

14.209:

Weekend

supplements,

magazines, and the

like

14.210:

Names of

newspapers

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Newspapers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.209 WEEKEND SUPPLEMENTS, MAGAZINES, AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

Articles from Sunday supplements or other special sections are treated in the same way as magazine

Index

articles--that is, cited by date. They are usually dealt with in notes or parenthetical references rather

than in bibliographies. Citations of print editions may include a specific page reference (see 14.199).

14.207:

45. David Frum, "The Vanishing Republican Voter," New York Times Magazine, September 7, 2008,

Unsigned

New York edition, MM48.

newspaper articles

14.208:

Letters to the

editor

14.209:

Weekend

supplements,

magazines, and the

like

14.210:

Names of

newspapers

14.211:

Names of foreign

newspapers

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Newspapers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.210 NAMES OF NEWSPAPERS

List of Tables

An initial The is omitted (see 8.168). A city name, even if not part of the name of an American

Index

newspaper, should be added, italicized along with the official title. The name (usually abbreviated) of

the state or, in the case of Canada, province may be added in parentheses if needed. Odd cases may

call for special treatment.

14.208:

Letters to the

Chicago Tribune

editor

Hackensack (NJ) Record

14.209:

Weekend

Ottawa (IL) Daily Times

supplements,

Saint Paul (Alberta or AB) Journal

magazines, and the

like

but

14.210:

Names of

Oregonian (Portland, OR)

newspapers

14.211:

For such well-known national papers as the Wall Street Journal or the Christian Science Monitor, no city

Names of foreign

newspapers

name is added.

14.212:

News services

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Newspapers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.211 NAMES OF FOREIGN NEWSPAPERS

List of Tables

Names of cities not part of the titles of foreign newspapers may be added in parentheses after the

Index

title, not italicized. An initial The, omitted in English-language papers, is retained in titles of foreign-

language papers if the article is part of the name. Foreign newspaper names, like those of foreign

journals, are often capitalized headline-style. When in doubt, however, use sentence style.

14.209:

Weekend

Frankfurter Zeitung

supplements,

magazines, and the

La CrÃ³nica de Hoy (Mexico City)

like

Times (London)

14.210:

Guardian (Manchester)

Names of

newspapers

Le Monde

14.211:

Names of foreign

newspapers

14.212:

News services

14.213:

News releases

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Newspapers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.212 NEWS SERVICES

List of Tables

Names of news services, as opposed to newspapers, are capitalized but not italicized.

Index

the Associated Press (AP)

United Press International (UPI)

14.210:

Names of

1. Associated Press, "Afraid of Laundry? You Will Be after Reading This," USA Today, July 17, 2008,

newspapers

http://www.usatoday.com/news/topstories/2008-07-17-861610133_x.htm.

14.211:

Names of foreign

newspapers

14.212:

News services

14.213:

News releases

14.214:

Reviewsâ

€”elements of the

citation

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Newspapers

of Contents

List of Figures

14.213 NEWS RELEASES

List of Tables

A news release is treated like an article in a magazine (see 14.199--202), its title set in roman and

Index

placed in quotation marks.

6. National Transportation Safety Board, "NTSB Chairman Commends FAA on Major Advancement in

14.211:

Aviation Safety," news release, July 16, 2008, http://www.ntsb.gov/Pressrel/2008/080716.html.

Names of foreign

newspapers

14.212:

News services

14.213:

News releases

14.214:

Reviewsâ

€”elements of the

citation

14.215:

Book reviews

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Reviews

of Contents

List of Figures

14.214 REVIEWS--ELEMENTS OF THE CITATION

List of Tables

In citations of reviews, the elements are given in the following order:

Index

1. Name of reviewer if the review is signed

2. Title of the review, if any (a headline should be included only if needed for locating the review)

14.212:

3. The words review of, followed by the name of the work reviewed and its author (or composer,

News services

or director, or whomever) or sponsor (network, studio, label, etc.)

14.213:

4. Location and date (in the case of a performance)

News releases

5. The listing of the periodical in which the review appeared

14.214:

Reviewsâ

€”elements of the

If a review is included in a bibliography, it is alphabetized by the name of the reviewer or, if

citation

unattributed, by the name of the periodical (see 14.217). See also 14.215.

14.215:

Book reviews

14.216:

Reviews of plays,

movies, television

programs,

concerts, and the

like

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Reviews

of Contents

List of Figures

14.215 BOOK REVIEWS

List of Tables

Cite book reviews by author of the review and include book title and author(s) or editor(s). Follow

Index

applicable guidelines for citing periodicals.

1. Ben Ratliff, review of The Mystery of Samba: Popular Music and National Identity in Brazil, by

14.213:

Hermano Vianna, ed. and trans. John Charles Chasteen, Lingua Franca 9 (April 1999): B13--B14.

News releases

2. David Kamp, "Deconstructing Dinner," review of The Omnivore's Dilemma: A Natural History of Four

14.214:

Meals, by Michael Pollan, New York Times, April 23, 2006, Sunday Book Review,

Reviewsâ

http://www.nytimes.com/2006/04/23/books/review/23kamp.html.

€”elements of the

citation

Sorby, Angela. Review of Songs of Ourselves: The Uses of Poetry in America, by Joan Shelley Rubin. American

14.215:

Book reviews

Historical Review 113 (April 2008): 449--51. doi:10.1086/ahr.113.2.449.

14.216:

Reviews of plays,

movies, television

programs,

concerts, and the

like

14.217:

Unsigned reviews

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Reviews

of Contents

List of Figures

14.216 REVIEWS OF PLAYS, MOVIES, TELEVISION PROGRAMS, CONCERTS, AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

Reviews of plays, concerts, movies, and the like may include the name of a director in addition to any

Index

author, producer, sponsor, or performer, as applicable.

3. Ben Brantley, review of Our Lady of Sligo, by Sebastian Barry, directed by Max Stafford-Clark, Irish

14.214:

Repertory Theater, New York, New York Times, April 21, 2000, Weekend section.

Reviewsâ

4. Jon Pareles, review of Men Strike Back (VH1 television), New York Times, April 18, 2000, Living Arts

€”elements of the

citation

section.

5. David Denby, review of WALL-E, Disney/Pixar, New Yorker, July 21, 2008,

14.215:

Book reviews

http://www.newyorker.com/arts/critics/cinema/2008/07/21/080721crci_cinema_denby.

6. Pareles, review of Men Strike Back.

14.216:

Reviews of plays,

movies, television

Kozinn, Allan. Review of concert performance by Timothy Fain (violin) and Steven Beck (piano), 92nd Street

programs,

concerts, and the

Y, New York. New York Times, April 21, 2000, Weekend section.

like

14.217:

Unsigned reviews

14.218:

Interviews and

personal

communicationsâ

€”order of

attribution

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Periodicals >> Reviews

of Contents

List of Figures

14.217 UNSIGNED REVIEWS

List of Tables

Unsigned reviews are treated similarly to unsigned articles (see 14.207). If such a review must appear

Index

in the bibliography, it is listed under the name of the periodical.

34. Unsigned review of Geschichten der romanischen und germanischen Völker, by Leopold von Ranke,

14.215:

Ergänzungsblätter zur Allgemeinen Literatur-Zeitung, February 1828, nos. 23--24.

Book reviews

Ergänzungsblätter zur Allgemeinen Literatur-Zeitung. Unsigned review of Geschichten der romanischen und

14.216:

Reviews of plays,

germanischen Völker, by Leopold von Ranke. February 1828, nos. 23--24.

movies, television

programs,

concerts, and the

like

14.217:

Unsigned reviews

14.218:

Interviews and

personal

communications—

order of attribution

14.219:

Unpublished

interviews

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Interviews and Personal Communications

of Contents

List of Figures

14.218 INTERVIEWS AND PERSONAL COMMUNICATIONS--ORDER OF ATTRIBUTION

List of Tables

In whatever form interviews or personal communications exist--published, broadcast, preserved in

Index

audiovisual form, available online--the citation normally begins with the name of the person

interviewed or the person from whom the communication was received. The interviewer or recipient,

if mentioned, comes second.

14.216:

Reviews of plays,

movies, television

programs,

concerts, and the

like

14.217:

Unsigned reviews

14.218:

Interviews and

personal

communicationsâ

€”order of

attribution

14.219:

Unpublished

interviews

14.220:

Unattributed

interviews

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Interviews and Personal Communications

of Contents

List of Figures

14.219 UNPUBLISHED INTERVIEWS

List of Tables

Unpublished interviews are best cited in text or in notes, though they occasionally appear in

Index

bibliographies. Citations should include the names of both the person interviewed and the

interviewer; brief identifying information, if appropriate; the place or date of the interview (or both, if

known); and, if a transcript or recording is available, where it may be found. Permission to quote

14.217:

may be needed; see chapter 4.

Unsigned reviews

14.218:

7. Andrew Macmillan (principal adviser, Investment Center Division, FAO), in discussion with the

Interviews and

personal

author, September 1998.

communicationsâ

8. Benjamin Spock, interview by Milton J. E. Senn, November 20, 1974, interview 67A, transcript, Senn

€”order of

attribution

Oral History Collection, National Library of Medicine, Bethesda, MD.

9. Macmillan, discussion; Spock, interview.

14.219:

Unpublished

interviews

14.220:

Unattributed

interviews

14.221:

Published or

broadcast

interviews

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Interviews and Personal Communications

of Contents

List of Figures

14.220 UNATTRIBUTED INTERVIEWS

List of Tables

An interview with a person who prefers to remain anonymous or whose name the author does not

Index

wish to reveal may be cited in whatever form is appropriate in context. The absence of a name should

be explained (e.g., "All interviews were conducted in confidentiality, and the names of interviewees

are withheld by mutual agreement").

14.218:

Interviews and

10. Interview with health care worker, March 23, 2010.

personal

communicationsâ

€”order of

attribution

14.219:

Unpublished

interviews

14.220:

Unattributed

interviews

14.221:

Published or

broadcast

interviews

14.222:

Personal

communications

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Interviews and Personal Communications

of Contents

List of Figures

14.221 PUBLISHED OR BROADCAST INTERVIEWS

List of Tables

An interview that has already been published or broadcast is treated like an article in a periodical or a

Index

chapter in a book. Interviews consulted online should include a URL or similar identifier and, for

audiovisual materials, an indication of the medium (see 14.4--13). See also 14.277, 14.280.

14.219:

117. " Mil MÃ¡scaras: An Interview with Pulitzer-Winner Junot DÃaz ( The Brief Wondrous Life of Oscar

Unpublished

Wao)," by Matt Okie, Identitytheory.com, September 2, 2008,

interviews

http://www.identitytheory.com/interviews/okie_diaz.php.

14.220:

118. McGeorge Bundy, interview by Robert MacNeil, MacNeil/Lehrer NewsHour, PBS, February 7, 1990.

Unattributed

interviews

119. Darcey Steinke, interview by Sam Tanenhaus and Dwight Garner, New York Times Book Review,

14.221:

podcast audio, April 22, 2007, http://podcasts.nytimes.com/podcasts/2007/04/20/21bookupdate.mp3.

Published or

broadcast

Bellour, Raymond. "Alternation, Segmentation, Hypnosis: Interview with Raymond Bellour." By Janet

interviews

Bergstrom. Camera Obscura, nos. 3--4 (Summer 1979): 89--94.

14.222:

Personal

communications

If an interview is included or excerpted in the form of a direct quotation within an article or chapter

14.223:

by the interviewer, the interviewer's name may come first.

Electronic mailing

lists

120. Michael Fortun and Kim Fortun, "Making Space, Speaking Truth: The Institute for Policy Studies,

1963--1995" (includes an interview with Marcus Raskin and Richard Barnet), in Corporate Futures, ed.

George E. Marcus, Late Editions 5 (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1998), 257.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Interviews and Personal Communications

of Contents

List of Figures

14.222 PERSONAL COMMUNICATIONS

List of Tables

References to conversations (whether face-to-face or by telephone) or to letters, e-mail or text

Index

messages, and the like received by the author are usually run in to the text or given in a note. They

are rarely listed in a bibliography. For references to electronic mailing lists, see 14.223. See also 13.3.

14.220:

In a telephone conversation with the author on January 6, 2009, lobbyist Pat Fenshaw admitted that . . .

Unattributed

interviews

2. Constance Conlon, e-mail message to author, April 17, 2000.

14.221:

Published or

An e-mail address belonging to an individual should be omitted. Should it be needed in a specific

broadcast

interviews

context, it must be cited only with the permission of its owner. For breaking an e-mail address at the

14.222:

end of a line, see 7.42.

Personal

communications

14.223:

Electronic mailing

lists

14.224:

Theses and

dissertations

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Interviews and Personal Communications

of Contents

List of Figures

14.223 ELECTRONIC MAILING LISTS

List of Tables

To cite material from an electronic mailing list, include the name of the list, the date of the individual

Index

posting, and a URL where the archive can be found. Additional information such as a file name or

number may be appropriate. Citations of such material should generally be limited to text and notes.

14.221:

17. John Powell to Grapevine mailing list, April 23, 1998, no. 83,

Published or

http://www.electriceditors.net/grapevine/archives.php.

broadcast

interviews

18. Edela Fontane to LLTI@listserv.dartmouth.edu, June 2, 2008, no. 8865a, Language Learning and

Technology International Information Forum, http://listserv.dartmouth.edu/scripts/wa.exe?A0=LLTI.

14.222:

Personal

communications

14.223:

Electronic mailing

lists

14.224:

Theses and

dissertations

14.225:

Unpublished

manuscripts

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Theses, Dissertations, Papers, and the Like

of Contents

List of Figures

14.224 THESES AND DISSERTATIONS

List of Tables

Titles of unpublished works appear in quotation marks--not in italics. This treatment extends to

Index

theses and dissertations, which are otherwise cited like books. The kind of thesis, the academic

institution, and the date follow the title. Like the publication data of a book, these are enclosed in

parentheses in a note but not in a bibliography. If the document was consulted online, include a URL

14.222:

or, for documents retrieved from a commercial database, give the name of the database and, in

Personal

communications

parentheses, any identification number supplied or recommended by the database. For dissertations

14.223:

issued on microfilm, see 14.120. For published abstracts of dissertations, see 14.197.

Electronic mailing

lists

1. Ilya Vedrashko, "Advertising in Computer Games" (master's thesis, MIT, 2006), 59,

14.224:

http://cms.mit.edu/research/theses/IlyaVedrashko2006.pdf.

Theses and

dissertations

5. Vedrashko, "Advertising in Computer Games," 61--62.

14.225:

Unpublished

Choi, Mihwa. "Contesting Imaginaires in Death Rituals during the Northern Song Dynasty." PhD diss.,

manuscripts

University of Chicago, 2008. ProQuest (AAT 3300426).

14.226:

Lectures, papers

presented at

meetings, and the

like

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Theses, Dissertations, Papers, and the Like

of Contents

List of Figures

14.225 UNPUBLISHED MANUSCRIPTS

List of Tables

Titles of unpublished manuscripts, like the titles of other unpublished works, appear in quotation

Index

marks. (For manuscripts under contract but not yet published, see 14.153.) Include the words

unpublished manuscript and the date of the version consulted, if possible (for electronic files, a last-

saved or last-modified date may be appropriate). End the citation with an indication of format(s).

14.223:

Electronic mailing

1. Nora Bradburn, "Watch Crystals and the Mohs Scale" (unpublished manuscript, December 3, 2008),

lists

LaTeX and Excel files.

14.224:

Theses and

dissertations

Cotter, Cory. "The Weakest Link: The Argument for On-Wrist Band Welding." Unpublished manuscript, last

modified December 3, 2008. Microsoft Word file.

14.225:

Unpublished

manuscripts

14.226:

Lectures, papers

presented at

meetings, and the

like

14.227:

Poster papers

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Theses, Dissertations, Papers, and the Like

of Contents

List of Figures

14.226 LECTURES, PAPERS PRESENTED AT MEETINGS, AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

The sponsorship, location, and date of the meeting at which a speech was given or a paper presented

Index

follow the title. This information, like that following a thesis title, is put in parentheses in a note but

not in a bibliography.

14.224:

2. Stacy D'Erasmo, "The Craft and Career of Writing" (lecture, Northwestern University, Evanston, IL,

Theses and

April 26, 2000).

dissertations

14.225:

Teplin, Linda A., Gary M. McClelland, Karen M. Abram, and Jason J. Washburn. "Early Violent Death in

Unpublished

manuscripts

Delinquent Youth: A Prospective Longitudinal Study." Paper presented at the Annual Meeting of the

American Psychology-Law Society, La Jolla, CA, March 2005.

14.226:

Lectures, papers

presented at

A paper included in the published proceedings of a meeting may be treated like a chapter in a book

meetings, and the

like

(see 14.125). If published in a journal, it is treated as an article (see 14.175--98).

14.227:

Poster papers

14.228:

Working papers and

other unpublished

works

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Theses, Dissertations, Papers, and the Like

of Contents

List of Figures

14.227 POSTER PAPERS

List of Tables

Papers presented at poster sessions are treated like other unpublished papers.

Index

Rohde, Hannah, Roger Levy, and Andrew Kehler. "Implicit Causality Biases Influence Relative Clause

Attachment." Poster presented at the 21st CUNY Conference on Human Sentence Processing, Chapel Hill,

NC, March 2008.

14.225:

Unpublished

manuscripts

14.226:

Lectures, papers

presented at

meetings, and the

like

14.227:

Poster papers

14.228:

Working papers and

other unpublished

works

14.229:

Preprints

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Theses, Dissertations, Papers, and the Like

of Contents

List of Figures

14.228 WORKING PAPERS AND OTHER UNPUBLISHED WORKS

List of Tables

Most unpublished papers can be treated in much the same way as a dissertation or thesis (14.224) or a

Index

lecture, paper, or other presentation (14.226).

4. Deborah D. Lucki and Richard W. Pollay, "Content Analyses of Advertising: A Review of the

14.226:

Literature" (working paper, History of Advertising Archives, Faculty of Commerce, University of British

Lectures, papers

Columbia, Vancouver, 1980).

presented at

meetings, and the

like

Dyer, Lee, and Jeff Ericksen. "Complexity-Based Agile Enterprises: Putting Self-Organizing Emergence to

Work." CAHRS Working Paper 08-01, School of Industrial and Labor Relations, Center for Advanced

14.227:

Poster papers

Human Resource Studies, Cornell University, Ithaca, NY, 1980.

14.228:

http://digitalcommons.ilr.cornell.edu/cahrswp/473.

Working papers and

other unpublished

In the second example above the term working paper is part of a formal series title, therefore

works

capitalized (see 14.128--32). Unless the item is available online, it is sometimes useful to add photocopy

14.229:

Preprints

or otherwise indicate the form in which an unpublished document may be consulted.

14.230:

Patents

AlarcÃ³n, Salvador Florencio de. "Compendio de las noticias correspondientes a el real y minas San

Francisco de Aziz de RÃo Chico . . . de 20 de octobre [1771]." Photocopy, Department of Geography,

University of California, Berkeley.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Theses, Dissertations, Papers, and the Like

of Contents

List of Figures

14.229 PREPRINTS

List of Tables

Not being subject to peer review, preprints are treated as unpublished material. See also 1.106.

Index

Lein, Matthias. "Characterization of Agostic Interactions in Theory and Computation." Preprint, submitted

July 10, 2008. http://xxx.lanl.gov/abs/0807.1751.

14.227:

Poster papers

14.228:

Working papers and

other unpublished

works

14.229:

Preprints

14.230:

Patents

14.231:

Private contracts,

wills, and such

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Theses, Dissertations, Papers, and the Like

of Contents

List of Figures

14.230 PATENTS

List of Tables

Patents are cited under the names of the creators and dated by the year of filing.

Index

Iizuka, Masanori, and Hideki Tanaka. Cement admixture. US Patent 4,586,960, filed June 26, 1984, and

issued May 6, 1986.

14.228:

Working papers and

other unpublished

works

14.229:

Preprints

14.230:

Patents

14.231:

Private contracts,

wills, and such

14.232:

Overview and

additional

resources

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Theses, Dissertations, Papers, and the Like

of Contents

List of Figures

14.231 PRIVATE CONTRACTS, WILLS, AND SUCH

List of Tables

Private documents are occasionally cited in notes but rarely in bibliographies. More appropriately

Index

they are referred to in text (e.g., "Marcy T. Feldspar, in her will dated January 20, 1976, directed . . .")

or in notes. Capitalization is usually a matter of editorial discretion.

14.229:

4. Samuel Henshaw, will dated June 5, 1806, proved July 5, 1809, no. 46, box 70, Hampshire County

Preprints

Registry of Probate, Northampton, MA.

14.230:

5. Agreement to teach in the Publishing Program of the Graham School, University of Chicago, signed

Patents

by Jemma Granite, May 29, 2010.

14.231:

Private contracts,

wills, and such

14.232:

Overview and

additional

resources

14.233:

Note forms versus

bibliography

entries

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Manuscript Collections

of Contents

List of Figures

14.232 OVERVIEW AND ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

List of Tables

The 1987 edition of the Guide to the National Archives of the United States offers the following advice:

Index

"The most convenient citation for archives is one similar to that used for personal papers and other

historical manuscripts. Full identification of most unpublished material usually requires giving the

title and date of the item, series title (if applicable), name of the collection, and name of the

14.230:

depository. Except for placing the cited item first [in a note], there is no general agreement on the

Patents

sequence of the remaining elements in the citation. . . . Whatever sequence is adopted, however,

14.231:

Private contracts,

should be used consistently throughout the same work" (761). This advice has been extended by the

wills, and such

leaflet Citing Records in the National Archives of the United States (available at the

14.232:

National Archives and Records Administration website), which includes advice on citing textual and

Overview and

additional

nontextual records, including electronic records. See also bibliog. 4.5. It should be noted that citations

resources

of collections consulted online (which remain a relative rarity given the cost of digitizing the

14.233:

miscellaneous, nonstandard items typical of most manuscript collections) will usually be the same as

Note forms versus

bibliography

citations of physical collections, aside from the addition of a URL or DOI (see 14.4--13).

entries

14.234:

Specific versus

generic titles for

manuscript

collections

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Manuscript Collections

of Contents

List of Figures

14.233 NOTE FORMS VERSUS BIBLIOGRAPHY ENTRIES

List of Tables

In a note, the main element of a manuscript citation is usually a specific item (a letter, a

Index

memorandum, or whatever) and is thus cited first. In a bibliography, the main element is usually

either the collection in which the specific item may be found, the author(s) of the items in the

collection, or the depository for the collection. (Entries beginning with the name of the collection or

14.231:

the last name of the author--which sometimes overlap--tend to be easiest to locate in a bibliography.)

Private contracts,

wills, and such

38. James Oglethorpe to the Trustees, 13 January 1733, Phillipps Collection of Egmont Manuscripts,

14.232:

Overview and

14200:13, University of Georgia Library.

additional

39. Alvin Johnson, memorandum, 1937, file 36, Horace Kallen Papers, YIVO Institute for Jewish

resources

Research, New York.

14.233:

40. Revere's Waste and Memoranda Book (vol. 1, 1761--83; vol. 2, 1783--97), Revere Family Papers,

Note forms versus

bibliography

Massachusetts Historical Society, Boston.

entries

14.234:

Egmont Manuscripts. Phillipps Collection. University of Georgia Library.

Specific versus

Kallen, Horace. Papers. YIVO Institute for Jewish Research, New York.

generic titles for

manuscript

Revere Family Papers. Massachusetts Historical Society, Boston.

collections

14.235:

Specific items are not included in a bibliography unless only one item from a collection is cited. For

Dates for

more examples, see 14.240, 14.241.

manuscript

collections

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Manuscript Collections

of Contents

List of Figures

14.234 SPECIFIC VERSUS GENERIC TITLES FOR MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS

List of Tables

In notes and bibliographies, quotation marks are used only for specific titles (e.g., "Canoeing through

Index

Northern Minnesota"), but not for generic names such as report or minutes. Generic names of this kind

are capitalized if part of a formal heading actually appearing on the manuscript, lowercased if merely

descriptive. Compare 14.240, example notes 46--49.

14.232:

Overview and

additional

resources

14.233:

Note forms versus

bibliography

entries

14.234:

Specific versus

generic titles for

manuscript

collections

14.235:

Dates for

manuscript

collections

14.236:

Folios, page

numbers, and such

for manuscript

collections

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Manuscript Collections

of Contents

List of Figures

14.235 DATES FOR MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS

List of Tables

Names of months may be spelled out or abbreviated, as long as done consistently (see 10.40). If there

Index

are many references to specific dates, as in a collection of letters or diaries, the day-month-year form

(8 May 1945), used in some of the examples below, will reduce clutter. See also 6.45.

14.233:

Note forms versus

bibliography

entries

14.234:

Specific versus

generic titles for

manuscript

collections

14.235:

Dates for

manuscript

collections

14.236:

Folios, page

numbers, and such

for manuscript

collections

14.237:

"Papers" and

"manuscripts"

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Manuscript Collections

of Contents

List of Figures

14.236 FOLIOS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND SUCH FOR MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS

List of Tables

Older manuscripts are usually numbered by signatures only or by folios ( fol. , fols. ) rather than by

Index

page (see 14.161, 14.162). More recent ones usually carry page numbers; if needed, the abbreviations

p. and pp. should be used to avoid ambiguity. Some manuscript collections have identifying series or

file numbers, which may be included in a citation.

14.234:

Specific versus

generic titles for

manuscript

collections

14.235:

Dates for

manuscript

collections

14.236:

Folios, page

numbers, and such

for manuscript

collections

14.237:

"Papers" and

"manuscripts"

14.238:

Location of

depositories

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Manuscript Collections

of Contents

List of Figures

14.237 "PAPERS" AND "MANUSCRIPTS"

List of Tables

In titles of manuscript collections, the terms papers and manuscripts are synonymous. Both are

Index

acceptable, as are the abbreviations MS and (pl.) MSS. If it is necessary to distinguish a typescript or

computer printout from a handwritten document, the abbreviation TS may be used.

14.235:

Dates for

manuscript

collections

14.236:

Folios, page

numbers, and such

for manuscript

collections

14.237:

"Papers" and

"manuscripts"

14.238:

Location of

depositories

14.239:

Collections of

letters and the like

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Manuscript Collections

of Contents

List of Figures

14.238 LOCATION OF DEPOSITORIES

List of Tables

The location (city and state) of such well-known depositories as major university libraries is rarely

Index

necessary (see examples in 14.240).

University of Chicago Library

14.236:

Oberlin College Library

Folios, page

numbers, and such

for manuscript

collections

14.237:

"Papers" and

"manuscripts"

14.238:

Location of

depositories

14.239:

Collections of

letters and the like

14.240:

Examples of note

forms for

manuscript

collections

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Manuscript Collections

of Contents

List of Figures

14.239 COLLECTIONS OF LETTERS AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

A note citation of a letter starts with the name of the letter writer, followed by to, followed by the

Index

name of the recipient. Given names may be omitted if the identities of sender and recipient are clear

from the text. (Identifying material may be added if appropriate; see 14.219.) The word letter is

usually omitted--that is, understood--but other forms of communication (telegram, memorandum) are

14.237:

specified. If such other forms occur frequently in the same collection, it may be helpful to specify

"Papers" and

"manuscripts"

letters also. For capitalization and the use of quotation marks, see 14.234. For date form, see 6.45, 9.32.

14.238:

See also 14.117, 14.222, 14.242.

Location of

depositories

14.239:

Collections of

letters and the like

14.240:

Examples of note

forms for

manuscript

collections

14.241:

Examples of

bibliography

entries for

manuscript

collections

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Manuscript Collections

of Contents

List of Figures

14.240 EXAMPLES OF NOTE FORMS FOR MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS

List of Tables

Index

40. George Creel to Colonel House, 25 September 1918. Edward M. House Papers, Yale University

Library.

41. James Oglethorpe to the Trustees, 13 January 1733, Phillipps Collection of Egmont Manuscripts,

14200:13, University of Georgia Library (hereafter cited as Egmont MSS).

14.238:

42. Burton to Merriam, telegram, 26 January 1923, Charles E. Merriam Papers, University of Chicago

Location of

depositories

Library.

14.239:

43. Minutes of the Committee for Improving the Condition of the Free Blacks, Pennsylvania Abolition

Collections of

Society, 1790--1803, Papers of the Pennsylvania Society for the Abolition of Slavery, Historical Society of

letters and the like

Pennsylvania, Philadelphia (hereafter cited as Minutes, Pennsylvania Society).

14.240:

44. Hiram Johnson to John Callan O'Laughlin, 13 and 16 July 1916, 28 November 1916, O'Laughlin Papers,

Examples of note

forms for

Theodore Roosevelt Collection, Harvard College Library.

manuscript

45. Memorandum by Alvin Johnson, 1937, file 36, Horace Kallen Papers, YIVO Institute for Jewish

collections

Research, New York.

14.241:

46. Undated correspondence between French Strother and Edward Lowry, container 1-G/961 600, Herbert

Examples of

bibliography

Hoover Presidential Library, West Branch, IA.

entries for

47. Memorandum, "Concerning a Court of Arbitration," n.d., Philander C. Knox Papers, Manuscripts

manuscript

collections

Division, Library of Congress.

14.242:

48. Joseph Purcell, "A Map of the Southern Indian District of North America" [ca. 1772], MS 228, Ayer

Letters and the like

Collection, Newberry Library, Chicago.

in private

collections

49. Louis Agassiz, report to the Committee of Overseers . . . [28 December 1859], Overseers Reports,

Professional Series, vol. 2, Harvard University Archives.

50. Gilbert McMicken to Alexander Morris, 29 November 1881, Glasgow (Scotland), Document 1359, fol.

1r, Alexander Morris Papers, MG-12-84, Provincial Archives of Manitoba, Winnipeg.

The content of subsequent citations of other items in a cited manuscript collection (short forms) will

vary according to the proximity of the earlier notes, the use of abbreviations, and other factors.

Absolute consistency may occasionally be sacrificed to readers' convenience.

51. R. S. Baker to House, 1 November 1919, House Papers.

52. Thomas Causton to his wife, 12 March 1733, Egmont MSS, 14200:53.

53. Minutes, 15 April 1795, Pennsylvania Society.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Manuscript Collections

of Contents

List of Figures

14.241 EXAMPLES OF BIBLIOGRAPHY ENTRIES FOR MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS

List of Tables

The style of the first six examples below is appropriate if more than one item from a collection is cited

Index

in the text or notes. In the second and third examples, commas are added after the initials to avoid

misreading. See also 14.233.

14.239:

Egmont Manuscripts. Phillipps Collection. University of Georgia Library.

Collections of

House, Edward M., Papers. Yale University Library.

letters and the like

Merriam, Charles E., Papers. University of Chicago Library.

14.240:

Pennsylvania Society for the Abolition of Slavery. Papers. Historical Society of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia.

Examples of note

forms for

Strother, French, and Edward Lowry. Undated correspondence. Herbert Hoover Presidential Library, West

manuscript

Branch, IA.

collections

Women's Organization for National Prohibition Reform. Papers. Alice Belin du Pont files, Pierre S. du Pont

14.241:

Examples of

Papers. Eleutherian Mills Historical Library, Wilmington, DE.

bibliography

entries for

If only one item from a collection has been mentioned in text or in a note and is considered important

manuscript

collections

enough to include in a bibliography, the entry will begin with the item.

14.242:

Letters and the like

Dinkel, Joseph. Description of Louis Agassiz written at the request of Elizabeth Cary Agassiz. Agassiz

in private

collections

Papers. Houghton Library, Harvard University.

14.243:

Websites and

blogsâ€”overview

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Manuscript Collections

of Contents

List of Figures

14.242 LETTERS AND THE LIKE IN PRIVATE COLLECTIONS

List of Tables

Letters, memoranda, and such that have not been archived may be cited like other unpublished

Index

material. Information on the depository is replaced by such wording as "in the author's possession" or

"private collection," and the location is not mentioned.

14.240:

Examples of note

forms for

manuscript

collections

14.241:

Examples of

bibliography

entries for

manuscript

collections

14.242:

Letters and the like

in private

collections

14.243:

Websites and

blogsâ€”overview

14.244:

Titles for websites

and blogs

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Websites and Blogs

of Contents

List of Figures

14.243 WEBSITES AND BLOGS--OVERVIEW

List of Tables

For the purposes of this discussion, website refers to the collection of documents made available at a

Index

specific location on the World Wide Web by an individual or organization. (The term web page, on the

other hand, is used to refer to any one of the "pages," or subdocuments, that can be viewed within a

website.) Formal citations should normally be limited to the documents themselves--for example, the

14.241:

articles, books, and other published documents offered by the websites of university publishers and

Examples of

bibliography

other formal organizations and discussed elsewhere in this chapter. A weblog--or blog--is a category

entries for

manuscript

of website that has evolved to include a few more or less standard components, including dated

collections

entries and dated comments. Citations of blog entries and comments are therefore similar to citations

14.242:

of articles in periodicals (see 14.246).

Letters and the like

in private

collections

14.243:

Websites and

blogsâ€”overview

14.244:

Titles for websites

and blogs

14.245:

Citations of

website content

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Websites and Blogs

of Contents

List of Figures

14.244 TITLES FOR WEBSITES AND BLOGS

List of Tables

Websites should be referred to in text and notes by specific title (if any), by the name of the sponsor

Index

or author, or by a descriptive phrase. Some sites refer to themselves by their domain name (the first

part of a URL, following the double slash and ending in a domain-type indication such as .com, .edu,

or .org); such monikers, which are not case sensitive, are often shortened and capitalized in a logical

14.242:

way (e.g., www.nytimes.com becomes NYTimes.com; www.google.com becomes Google). Titles of websites

Letters and the like

in private

are generally set in roman without quotation marks and capitalized headline-style, but titles that are

collections

analogous to books or other types of publications may be styled accordingly. Titled sections or pages

14.243:

within a website should be placed in quotation marks. Specific titles of blogs--which are analogous to

Websites and

blogsâ€”overview

periodicals--should be set in italics; titles of blog entries (analogous to articles in a periodical) should

14.244:

be in quotation marks. For additional examples, see 8.186--87.

Titles for websites

and blogs

the website of the New York Times; the New York Times online; NYTimes.com

14.245:

The Chicago Manual of Style Online; "Chicago Style Q&A"

Citations of

website content

Google; Google Maps; the "Google Maps Help Center"

14.246:

The Becker-Posner Blog; "Should Dogs Get $8 Billion from the Helmsley Estate?," blog entry by Richard

Citations of blog

Posner, July 13, 2008

entries

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Websites and Blogs

of Contents

List of Figures

14.245 CITATIONS OF WEBSITE CONTENT

List of Tables

For original content from online sources other than the types of formally published documents

Index

discussed elsewhere in this chapter, include as much of the following as can be determined: the title

or a description of the page (see 14.244), the author of the content (if any), the owner or sponsor of

the site, and a URL. Also include a publication date or date of revision or modification (see 14.8); if no

14.243:

such date can be determined, include an access date (see 14.7). Citations of site content are best

Websites and

blogsâ€”overview

relegated to notes; in works with no notes, they may be included in the bibliography. Some editorial

14.244:

discretion will be required.

Titles for websites

and blogs

14. "WD2000: Visual Basic Macro to Assign Clipboard Text to a String Variable," revision 1.3,

14.245:

Microsoft Help and Support, last modified November 23, 2006, http://support.microsoft.com/kb/212730.

Citations of

website content

15. "Google Privacy Policy," last modified October 14, 2005, accessed July 19, 2008,

http://www.google.com/intl/en/privacypolicy.html.

14.246:

Citations of blog

16. "McDonald's Happy Meal Toy Safety Facts," McDonald's Corporation, accessed July 19, 2008,

entries

http://www.mcdonalds.com/corp/about/factsheets.html.

14.247:

17. Barack Obama's Facebook page, accessed July 19, 2008, http://www.facebook.com/barackobama.

Dictionaries and

encyclopedias

18. "Style Guide," Wikipedia, last modified July 18, 2008, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Style_guide.

Microsoft Corporation. "WD2000: Visual Basic Macro to Assign Clipboard Text to a String Variable."

Revision 1.3. Microsoft Help and Support. Last modified November 23, 2006.

http://support.microsoft.com/kb/212730.

If a site ceases to exist before publication, or if the information cited is modified or deleted, such

information should be included in the text or note.

As of July 18, 2008, Hefferman was claiming on her Facebook page that . . . (a claim that had disappeared

from her page by September 1, 2008) . . .

4. "Biography," on Pete Townshend's official website, accessed December 15, 2001,

http://www.petetownshend.co.uk/petet_bio.html (site discontinued).

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material >> Websites and Blogs

of Contents

List of Figures

14.246 CITATIONS OF BLOG ENTRIES

List of Tables

Citations of blog entries should include the author of the entry; the name of the entry, in quotation

Index

marks; the title or description of the blog (see 14.244); and a URL. Citations of a comment should start

with the identity of the commenter and the date of the comment (if a time stamp appears with the

comment), the words "comment on," and the citation information for the related entry. If the blog

14.244:

entry has been cited previously, use a shortened form; see 14.25. There is no need to add pseud. after

Titles for websites

and blogs

an apparently fictitious name of a commenter; it may be assumed that the identity of any commenter

14.245:

may be an alias. If known, the identity can be given in the text or in the citation (in square brackets;

Citations of

see 14.82). Blogs that are part of a larger publication should also include the name of that publication.

website content

Add the word blog in parentheses after the name of the blog (unless the word blog is part of the

14.246:

Citations of blog

name). Citations of blog entries are generally relegated to the notes; a frequently cited blog, however,

entries

may be included in the bibliography.

14.247:

Dictionaries and

encyclopedias

1. Mike Nizza, "Go Ahead, Annoy Away, an Australian Court Says," The Lede (blog), New York Times,

July 15, 2008, http://thelede.blogs.nytimes.com/2008/07/15/.

14.248:

Dictionaries and

2. SteveCO, comment on Nizza, "Go Ahead, Annoy Away."

encyclopedias

16. Matthew Lasar, "FCC Chair Willing to Consecrate XM-Sirius Union," Ars Technica (blog), June 16,

online

2008, http://arstechnica.com/news.ars/post/20080616-fcc-chair-willing-to-consecrate-xm-sirius-union.html.

19. AC, July 1, 2008 (10:18 a.m.), comment on Rhian Ellis, "Squatters' Rights," Ward Six (blog), June 30,

2008, http://wardsix.blogspot.com/2008/06/squatters-rights.html.

Ellis, Rhian, J. Robert Lennon, and Ed Skoog. Ward Six (blog). http://wardsix.blogspot.com/.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Dictionaries and Encyclopedias

of Contents

List of Figures

14.247 DICTIONARIES AND ENCYCLOPEDIAS

List of Tables

Well-known reference books, such as major dictionaries and encyclopedias, are normally cited in

Index

notes rather than in bibliographies. The facts of publication are often omitted, but the edition (if not

the first) must be specified. References to an alphabetically arranged work cite the item (not the

volume or page number) preceded by s.v. ( sub verbo, "under the word"; pl. s.vv. )

14.245:

Citations of

1. Encyclopaedia Britannica, 15th ed., s.v. "salvation."

website content

2. Oxford English Dictionary, 2nd ed. (CD-ROM, version 3.0), s.v. "hoot(e)nanny, hootananny."

14.246:

Citations of blog

3. Dictionary of American Biography, s.v. "Wadsworth, Jeremiah."

entries

14.247:

Certain reference works, however, may appropriately be listed with their publication details. (For

Dictionaries and

examples of how to cite individual entries by author, see 14.248.)

encyclopedias

14.248:

4. The Times Style and Usage Guide, comp. Tim Austin (London: Times Books, 2003), s.vv. "police

Dictionaries and

encyclopedias

ranks," "postal addresses."

online

5. MLA Style Manual and Guide to Scholarly Publishing, 3rd ed. (New York: Modern Language

14.249:

Association of America, 2008), 6.8.2.

Pamphlets, reports,

and the like

Diccionario de historia de Venezuela. 2nd ed. 4 vols. Caracas: FundaciÃ³n Polar, 1997.

Garner, Bryan A. Garner's Modern American Usage. New York: Oxford University Press, 2003.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Dictionaries and Encyclopedias

of Contents

List of Figures

14.248 DICTIONARIES AND ENCYCLOPEDIAS ONLINE

List of Tables

Online versions of encyclopedias should be cited like their printed corollaries. In addition, in the

Index

absence of a posted publication or revision date for the cited entry, supply an access date. If the article

includes a recommended form for the URL, include it; otherwise, include a short form of the URL (as

in the second example) from which interested readers may enter the search term. If a DOI for the

14.246:

article is available, use that instead. Well-known online reference works, such as major dictionaries

Citations of blog

entries

and encyclopedias, are normally cited, like their printed counterparts, in notes rather than in

14.247:

bibliographies. The facts of publication are often omitted, but signed entries may include the name of

Dictionaries and

the author. See also 14.5, 14.6.

encyclopedias

14.248:

1. Encyclopaedia Britannica Online, s.v. "Sibelius, Jean," accessed July 19, 2008,

Dictionaries and

encyclopedias

http://original.britannica.com/eb/article-9067596.

online

2. Grove Music Online, s.v. "Toscanini, Arturo," by David Cairns, accessed July 19, 2008,

14.249:

http://www.oxfordmusiconline.com/.

Pamphlets, reports,

and the like

3. Wikipedia, s.v. "Stevie Nicks," last modified July 19, 2008, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stevie_Nicks.

4. Merriam-Webster OnLine, s.v. "mondegreen," accessed July 19, 2008, http://www.merriam-

14.250:

Exhibition catalogs

webster.com/dictionary/mondegreen.

For certain reference works--particularly those with substantial, authored entries--it may be

appropriate to cite individual entries by author, much like contributions to a multiauthor book (see

14.112). Such citations may be included in a bibliography.

Baldwin, Olive, and Thelma Wilson. "Ann Catley (1745--1789)." In Oxford Dictionary of National Biography.

Oxford University Press, 2004--. Accessed October 8, 2009. doi:10.1093/ref:odnb/4895.

Isaacson, Melissa. "Bulls." In Encyclopedia of Chicago, edited by Janice L. Reiff, Ann Durkin Keating, and

James R. Grossman. Chicago Historical Society, 2005.

http://www.encyclopedia.chicagohistory.org/pages/184.html.

Masolo, Dismas. "African Sage Philosophy." In Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy. Stanford University, 1997--

. Article published February 14, 2006. http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/african-sage/.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Pamphlets and the Like

of Contents

List of Figures

14.249 PAMPHLETS, REPORTS, AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

Pamphlets, corporate reports, brochures, and other freestanding publications are treated essentially as

Index

books. Data on author and publisher may not fit the normal pattern, but sufficient information should

be given to identify the document. For special issues of journals, see 14.187. For access dates, see 14.7.

For the use of ampersands in company names, see 10.23.

14.247:

Dictionaries and

34. Hazel V. Clark, Mesopotamia: Between Two Rivers (Mesopotamia, OH: Trumbull County Historical

encyclopedias

Society, 1957).

14.248:

Dictionaries and

35. Lifestyles in Retirement, Library Series (New York: TIAA-CREF, 1996).

encyclopedias

36. Merrill Lynch & Co., 2008 Proxy Statement, accessed April 9, 2009,

online

http://www.ml.com/annualmeetingmaterials/2007/ar/pdfs/2008Proxy.pdf.

14.249:

Pamphlets, reports,

and the like

14.250:

Exhibition catalogs

14.251:

Loose-leaf services

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Pamphlets and the Like

of Contents

List of Figures

14.250 EXHIBITION CATALOGS

List of Tables

An exhibition catalog is often published as a book and is treated as such.

Index

Mary Cassatt: Modern Woman. Edited by Judith A. Barter. Chicago: Art Institute of Chicago, in association

with Harry N. Abrams, 1998. Published in conjunction with the exhibition of the same name, shown at

the Boston Museum of Fine Arts, the National Gallery in Washington, DC, and the Art Institute of

14.248:

Dictionaries and

Chicago.

encyclopedias

online

or, if space is tight,

14.249:

Pamphlets, reports,

Mary Cassatt: Modern Woman. Edited by Judith A. Barter. Chicago: Art Institute of Chicago, with Harry N.

and the like

Abrams, 1998. Exhibition catalog.

14.250:

Exhibition catalogs

A brochure--the kind often handed to visitors to an exhibition--may be treated similarly.

14.251:

Loose-leaf services

14.252:

Biblical

referencesâ

€”additional

resource

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Pamphlets and the Like

of Contents

List of Figures

14.251 LOOSE-LEAF SERVICES

List of Tables

Documentation of material obtained through loose-leaf services is handled like that of books.

Index

13. Commerce Clearing House, 1990 Standard Federal Tax Reports (Chicago: Commerce Clearing House,

1990), 20, 050.15.

14.249:

Pamphlets, reports,

and the like

14.250:

Exhibition catalogs

14.251:

Loose-leaf services

14.252:

Biblical

referencesâ

€”additional

resource

14.253:

Bible chapter and

verse

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Scriptural References

of Contents

List of Figures

14.252 BIBLICAL REFERENCES--ADDITIONAL RESOURCE

List of Tables

Any scholarly writer or editor working extensively with biblical material should consult the latest

Index

edition of The SBL Handbook of Style (bibliog. 1.1), which offers excellent advice and numerous

abbreviations.

14.250:

Exhibition catalogs

14.251:

Loose-leaf services

14.252:

Biblical

referencesâ

€”additional

resource

14.253:

Bible chapter and

verse

14.254:

Versions of the

Bible

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Scriptural References

of Contents

List of Figures

14.253 BIBLE CHAPTER AND VERSE

List of Tables

References to the Jewish or Christian scriptures usually appear in text citations or notes rather than in

Index

bibliographies. Parenthetical or note references to the Bible should include book (in roman and

usually abbreviated), chapter, and verse--never a page number. A colon is used between chapter and

verse. Note that the traditional abbreviations use periods but the shorter forms do not. For guidance

14.251:

on when to abbreviate and when not to, see 10.46. For full forms and abbreviations, see 10.48, 10.49,

Loose-leaf services

10.50.

14.252:

Biblical

referencesâ

Traditional abbreviations:

€”additional

resource

4. 1 Thess. 4:11, 5:2--5, 5:14.

14.253:

Bible chapter and

5. Heb. 13:8, 13:12.

verse

6. Gen. 25:19--36:43.

14.254:

Versions of the

Shorter abbreviations:

Bible

14.255:

7. 2 Sm 11:1--17, 11:26--27; 1 Chr 10:13--14.

Other sacred works

8. Jo 5:9--12; Mt 26:2--5.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Scriptural References

of Contents

List of Figures

14.254 VERSIONS OF THE BIBLE

List of Tables

Since books and numbering are not identical in different versions, it is essential to identify which

Index

version is being cited. For a work intended for general readers, the version should be spelled out, at

least on first occurrence. For specialists, abbreviations may be used throughout. For abbreviations of

versions, see 10.51.

14.252:

Biblical

6. 2 Kings 11:8 (New Revised Standard Version).

referencesâ

€”additional

7. 1 Cor. 6:1--10 (NRSV).

resource

14.253:

Bible chapter and

verse

14.254:

Versions of the

Bible

14.255:

Other sacred works

14.256:

Where to cite

classical references

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Scriptural References

of Contents

List of Figures

14.255 OTHER SACRED WORKS

List of Tables

References to the sacred and revered works of other religious traditions may, according to context, be

Index

treated in a manner similar to those of biblical or classical works. Citations of transliterated texts

should indicate the name of the version or translator. The Koran (or Qur'an) is set in roman, and

citations of its sections use arabic numerals and colons (e.g., Koran 19:17--21). Such collective terms as

14.253:

the Vedas or the Upanishads are normally capitalized and set in roman, but particular parts are

Bible chapter and

verse

italicized (e.g., the Rig-Veda or the Brihad-Aranyaka Upanishad). For authoritative usage, consult History

14.254:

of Religions, an international journal for comparative historical studies (bibliog. 5).

Versions of the

Bible

14.255:

Other sacred works

14.256:

Where to cite

classical references

14.257:

Identifying

numbers in

classical references

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Classical Greek and Latin References

of Contents

List of Figures

14.256 WHERE TO CITE CLASSICAL REFERENCES

List of Tables

Classical primary source references are ordinarily given in text or notes. They are included in a

Index

bibliography only when the reference is to information or annotation supplied by a modern author

(see 14.260, 14.265).

14.254:

The eighty days of inactivity reported by Thucydides (8.44.4) for the Peloponnesian fleet at Rhodes,

Versions of the

terminating before the end of Thucydides's winter (8.60.2--3), suggests . . .

Bible

14.255:

Other sacred works

14.256:

Where to cite

classical references

14.257:

Identifying

numbers in

classical references

14.258:

Abbreviations in

classical references

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Classical Greek and Latin References

of Contents

List of Figures

14.257 IDENTIFYING NUMBERS IN CLASSICAL REFERENCES

List of Tables

The numbers identifying the various parts of classical works--books, sections, lines, and so on--remain

Index

the same in all editions, whether in the original language or in translation. (In poetry, line content

may vary slightly from the original in some translations.) Arabic numerals are used. Where letters

also are used, they are usually lowercased but may be capitalized if the source being cited uses

14.255:

capitals. Page numbers are omitted except in references to introductions, notes, and the like supplied

Other sacred works

by a modern editor or to specific translations. See also 14.259, 14.264.

14.256:

Where to cite

classical references

1. Ovid, Amores 1.7.27.

14.257:

2. Aristotle, Metaphysics 3.2.996b5--8; Plato, Republic 360e--361b.

Identifying

numbers in

classical references

14.258:

Abbreviations in

classical references

14.259:

Punctuation in

classical references

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Classical Greek and Latin References

of Contents

List of Figures

14.258 ABBREVIATIONS IN CLASSICAL REFERENCES

List of Tables

Abbreviations of authors' names as well as of works, collections, and so forth are used extensively in

Index

classical references. The most widely accepted standard for abbreviations is the list included in The

Oxford Classical Dictionary (bibliog. 5). When abbreviations are used, these rather than ibid. should be

used in succeeding references to the same work. (Abbreviations are best avoided when only two

14.256:

letters are omitted, and they must not be used when more than one writer could be meant--Hipponax

Where to cite

classical references

or Hipparchus, Aristotle or Aristophanes.)

14.257:

Identifying

3. Thuc. 2.40.2--3.

numbers in

4. Pindar, Isthm. 7.43--45.

classical references

14.258:

Abbreviations in

classical references

14.259:

Punctuation in

classical references

14.260:

Citing specific

editions of classical

references

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Classical Greek and Latin References

of Contents

List of Figures

14.259 PUNCTUATION IN CLASSICAL REFERENCES

List of Tables

In a departure from earlier recommendations, Chicago recommends placing a comma between the

Index

name of a classical author (abbreviated or not) and the title of a work. No punctuation intervenes,

however, between title and identifying number (or between author and number when the author is

standing in for the title). Numerical divisions are separated by periods with no space following each

14.257:

period. Commas are used between two or more references to the same source, semicolons between

Identifying

numbers in

references to different sources, and en dashes between continuing numbers. If such abbreviations as

classical references

bk. or sec. are needed for clarity, commas separate the different elements.

14.258:

Abbreviations in

classical references

5. Aristophanes, Frogs 1019--30.

6. Cic., Verr. 1.3.21, 2.3.120; Caes., B Gall. 6.19; Tac., Germ. 10.2--3.

14.259:

Punctuation in

7. Hdt. 7.1.2.

classical references

8. Sappho, Invocation to Aphrodite, st. 1, lines 1--6.

14.260:

Citing specific

editions of classical

references

14.261:

Titles of classical

works and

collections

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Classical Greek and Latin References

of Contents

List of Figures

14.260 CITING SPECIFIC EDITIONS OF CLASSICAL REFERENCES

List of Tables

Details of the edition used, along with translator (if any) and the facts of publication, should be either

Index

specified the first time a classical work is cited or given elsewhere in the scholarly apparatus. If

several editions are used, the edition (or an abbreviation) should accompany each citation. Although

many classicists will recognize a well-known edition merely from the last name of the editor or

14.258:

translator, a full citation, at least in the bibliography, should be furnished as a courtesy.

Abbreviations in

classical references

8. Epictetus, Dissertationes, ed. Heinrich Schenkl (Stuttgart: Teubner, 1916).

14.259:

Punctuation in

9. Herodotus, The History, trans. David Grene (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1987).

classical references

10. Solon (Edmonds's numbering) 36.20--27.

14.260:

Citing specific

editions of classical

references

14.261:

Titles of classical

works and

collections

14.262:

Superscripts in

classical references

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Classical Greek and Latin References

of Contents

List of Figures

14.261 TITLES OF CLASSICAL WORKS AND COLLECTIONS

List of Tables

Titles of works and published collections are italicized whether given in full or abbreviated (see

Index

14.258). Latin and transliterated Greek titles are capitalized sentence-style (see 8.156, 11.3, 11.59).

11. Cato's uses of pater familias in Agr. (2.1, 2.7, 3.1, 3.2) are exclusively in reference to estate management.

14.259:

For the diligens pater familias in Columella, see Rust. 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 5.6.37, 9.1.6, 12.21.6.

Punctuation in

12. Scholia graeca in Homeri Odysseam, ed. Wilhelm Dindorf (Oxford, 1855; repr. 1962).

classical references

13. Patrologiae cursus completus, series graeca (Paris: Migne, 1857--66).

14.260:

Citing specific

editions of classical

references

14.261:

Titles of classical

works and

collections

14.262:

Superscripts in

classical references

14.263:

Collections of

inscriptions

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Classical Greek and Latin References

of Contents

List of Figures

14.262 SUPERSCRIPTS IN CLASSICAL REFERENCES

List of Tables

In classical references, a superior figure is sometimes used immediately after the title of a work (or its

Index

abbreviation), and preceding any other punctuation, to indicate the number of the edition.

14. Stolz-Schmalz, Lat. Gram. 5 (rev. Leumann-Hoffmann; Munich, 1928), 390--91.

2

14.260:

15. AusgewÃ¤hlte KomÃ¶dien des T. M. Plautus , vol. 2 (1883).

Citing specific

editions of classical

references

In former practice, the letters accompanying numerals in citations of classical works (see 14.257)

sometimes appeared as superscripts (e.g., 3.2.996b5--8).

14.261:

Titles of classical

works and

collections

14.262:

Superscripts in

classical references

14.263:

Collections of

inscriptions

14.264:

Fragments of

classical texts

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Classical Greek and Latin References

of Contents

List of Figures

14.263 COLLECTIONS OF INSCRIPTIONS

List of Tables

Arabic numerals are used in references to volumes in collections of inscriptions. Periods follow the

Index

volume and inscription numbers, and further subdivisions are treated as in other classical references.

16. IG 22.3274. Inscriptiones graecae, vol. 2, 2nd ed., inscription no. 3274]

14.261:

17. IG Rom. 3.739.9--10. [ IG Rom. = Inscriptiones graecae ad res romanas pertinentes]

Titles of classical

18. POxy. 1485. Oxyrhynchus papyri, document no. 1485]

works and

collections

Some collections are cited only by the name of the editor. Since the editor's name here stands in place

14.262:

Superscripts in

of a title, no comma is needed.

classical references

14.263:

19. Dessau 6964.23--29. H. Dessau, ed., Inscriptiones latinae selectae]

Collections of

inscriptions

14.264:

Fragments of

classical texts

14.265:

Modern editions of

the classics

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Classical Greek and Latin References

of Contents

List of Figures

14.264 FRAGMENTS OF CLASSICAL TEXTS

List of Tables

Fragments of classical texts (some only recently discovered) are not uniformly numbered. They are

Index

published in collections, and the numbering is usually unique to a particular edition. Two numbers

separated by a period usually indicate fragment and line. The editor's name, often abbreviated in

subsequent references, must therefore follow the number.

14.262:

Superscripts in

20. Empedocles, frag. 115 Diels-Kranz.

classical references

21. Anacreon, frag. 2.10 Diehl.

14.263:

Collections of

22. Hesiod, frag. 239.1 Merkelbach and West.

inscriptions

23. Anacreon, frag. 5.2 D.

14.264:

24. Hesiod, frag. 220 M.-W.

Fragments of

classical texts

In citations of two or more editions of the same set of fragments, either parentheses or an equals sign

14.265:

may be used.

Modern editions of

the classics

25. Pindar, frag. 133 Bergk (frag. 127 Bowra).

14.266:

Medieval

references

or

26. Pindar, frag. 133 Bergk = 127 Bowra.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Classical Greek and Latin References

of Contents

List of Figures

14.265 MODERN EDITIONS OF THE CLASSICS

List of Tables

When Greek, Latin, or medieval classics are cited by page number, the edition must be specified, and

Index

the normal rules for citing books are followed. See also 14.260.

35. Propertius, Elegies, ed. and trans. G. P. Goold, Loeb Classical Library 18 (Cambridge, MA: Harvard

14.263:

University Press, 1990), 45.

Collections of

inscriptions

Aristotle. Complete Works of Aristotle: The Revised Oxford Translation. Edited by J. Barnes. 2 vols. Bollingen

14.264:

Series. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1983.

Fragments of

Maimonides. The Code of Maimonides, Book 5: The Book of Holiness. Edited by Leon Nemoy. Translated by

classical texts

Louis I. Rabinowitz and Philip Grossman. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1965.

14.265:

Modern editions of

the classics

14.266:

Medieval

references

14.267:

Citing editions of

classic English

poems and plays

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Classical Greek and Latin References

of Contents

List of Figures

14.266 MEDIEVAL REFERENCES

List of Tables

The form for classical references may equally well be applied to medieval works.

Index

27. Augustine, De civitate Dei 20.2.

28. Augustine, The City of God, trans. John Healey (New York: Dutton, 1931), 20.2.

29. Beowulf, lines 2401--7.

14.264:

Fragments of

30. Abelard, Epistle 17 to HeloÃ¯se (Migne, PL 180.375c--378a).

classical texts

31. Sir Gawain and the Green Knight, trans. Theodore Silverstein (Chicago: University of Chicago Press,

14.265:

1974), pt. 3, p. 57.

Modern editions of

the classics

14.266:

Medieval

references

14.267:

Citing editions of

classic English

poems and plays

14.268:

Short forms for

citing classic

English poems and

plays

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Classic English Poems and Plays

of Contents

List of Figures

14.267 CITING EDITIONS OF CLASSIC ENGLISH POEMS AND PLAYS

List of Tables

Classic English poems and plays can often be cited by book, canto, and stanza; stanza and line; act,

Index

scene, and line; or similar divisions. Publication facts can then be omitted. For frequently cited works-

-especially those of Shakespeare, where variations can occur in wording, line numbering, and even

scene division--the edition is normally specified in the first note reference or in the bibliography. The

14.265:

edition must be mentioned if page numbers are cited (see 14.265).

Modern editions of

the classics

1. Chaucer, "Wife of Bath's Prologue," Canterbury Tales, fragment 3, lines 105--14.

14.266:

Medieval

2. Spenser, The Faerie Queene, bk. 2, canto 8, st. 14.

references

3. Milton, Paradise Lost, bk. 1, lines 83--86.

14.267:

4. King Lear, ed. David Bevington et al. (New York: Bantam Books, 2005), 3.2.49--60. References are to

Citing editions of

act, scene, and line.

classic English

poems and plays

Dryden, John. Dramatic Essays. Everyman's Library. New York: Dutton, 1912.

14.268:

Short forms for

Shakespeare, William. Hamlet. Edited by Ann Thompson and Neil Taylor. Arden Shakespeare, 3rd ser.

citing classic

London: Thomson Learning, 2006.

English poems and

plays

14.269:

Published scores

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Classic English Poems and Plays

of Contents

List of Figures

14.268 SHORT FORMS FOR CITING CLASSIC ENGLISH POEMS AND PLAYS

List of Tables

A citation may be shortened by omitting act, line, and the like, as long as the system used has been

Index

explained. Arabic numerals are used, separated by periods. In immediately succeeding references, it is

usually safer to repeat all the numbers. The author's name may be omitted if clear from the text. For

citing sources in text, see 13.65, 14.54, 14.55.

14.266:

Medieval

5. Pope, Rape of the Lock, 3.28--29.

references

6. Lear (Bevington), 4.1.1--9, 4.1.18--24.

14.267:

Citing editions of

7. "Wife of Bath's Prologue," 115--16.

classic English

poems and plays

14.268:

Short forms for

citing classic

English poems and

plays

14.269:

Published scores

14.270:

Unpublished scores

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Musical Scores

of Contents

List of Figures

14.269 PUBLISHED SCORES

List of Tables

Published musical scores are treated in much the same way as books.

Index

1. Giuseppe Verdi, Il corsaro ( melodramma tragico in three acts), libretto by Francesco Maria Piave, ed.

Elizabeth Hudson, 2 vols., The Works of Giuseppe Verdi, ser. 1, Operas (Chicago: University of Chicago

Press; Milan: G. Ricordi, 1998).

14.267:

Citing editions of

classic English

Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus. Sonatas and Fantasies for the Piano. Prepared from the autographs and earliest

poems and plays

printed sources by Nathan Broder. Rev. ed. Bryn Mawr, PA: Theodore Presser, 1960.

14.268:

Schubert, Franz. "Das Wandern (Wandering)," Die schÃ¶ne MÃ¼llerin (The Maid of the Mill). In First Vocal

Short forms for

citing classic

Album (for high voice). New York: G. Schirmer, 1895.

English poems and

plays

In the last example above, the words and titles are given in both German and English in the score

14.269:

itself. See also 14.108.

Published scores

14.270:

Unpublished scores

14.271:

Library and other

commercial

databases

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Musical Scores

of Contents

List of Figures

14.270 UNPUBLISHED SCORES

List of Tables

Unpublished scores are treated in the same way as other unpublished material in manuscript

Index

collections (see 14.232--42).

2. Ralph Shapey, "Partita for Violin and Thirteen Players," score, 1966, Special Collections, Joseph

14.268:

Regenstein Library, University of Chicago.

Short forms for

citing classic

English poems and

plays

14.269:

Published scores

14.270:

Unpublished scores

14.271:

Library and other

commercial

databases

14.272:

Scientific databases

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Databases

of Contents

List of Figures

14.271 LIBRARY AND OTHER COMMERCIAL DATABASES

List of Tables

When citing items such as news or journal articles obtained through a third-party commercial

Index

database that archives and offers such material whether by subscription or otherwise, follow the

recommendations in the sections on the applicable publication type. In addition, include a URL, but

only if the database includes a recommended stable or persistent form with the document (as in the

14.269:

third example). Otherwise, include the name of the database and, in parentheses, any identification

Published scores

number provided with the source (as in the second and fourth examples). For items that do not

14.270:

Unpublished scores

include a publication or revision date, include an access date. For theses and dissertations, see 14.224.

14.271:

Library and other

2. Beth Daley, "A Tale of a Whale: Scientists, Museum Are Eager to Study, Display Rare Creature,"

commercial

Boston Globe, June 11, 2002, third edition, LexisNexis Academic.

databases

3. Encyclopedia of Animals, s.v. "emperor penguin," accessed June 21, 2008, EBSCO Animals

14.272:

(9500100510).

Scientific databases

4. William Maiben, "A Tombeau for John Lennon, 1940--1980," Perspectives of New Music 19, nos. 1/2

14.273:

Citations taken

(Autumn 1980--Summer 1981): 533, http://www.jstor.org/stable/832614.

from secondary

sources

Howard, David H. "Hospital Quality and Selective Contracting: Evidence from Kidney Transplantation."

Forum for Health Economics and Policy 11, no. 2 (2008). PubMed Central (PMC2600561).

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Databases

of Contents

List of Figures

14.272 SCIENTIFIC DATABASES

List of Tables

In the sciences especially, it has become customary to cite databases by listing, at a minimum, the

Index

name of the database, a descriptive phrase or record locator (such as a data marker or accession

number) indicating the part of the database being cited or explaining the nature of the reference, an

access date, and a URL. In bibliographies, list under the name of the database.

14.270:

Unpublished scores

1. NASA/IPAC Extragalactic Database (object name IRAS F00400+4059; accessed October 6, 2009),

14.271:

http://nedwww.ipac.caltech.edu/.

Library and other

commercial

2. GenBank (for RP11-322N14 BAC [accession number AC017046]; accessed October 6, 2009),

databases

http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/Genbank/.

14.272:

Scientific databases

GenBank (for RP11-322N14 BAC [accession number AC017046]; accessed October 6, 2009).

14.273:

http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/Genbank/.

Citations taken

NASA/IPAC Extragalactic Database (object name IRAS F00400+4059; accessed October 6, 2009).

from secondary

sources

http://nedwww.ipac.caltech.edu/.

14.274:

Audiovisual

materialsâ

€”elements to

include

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Special Types of References >> Citations Taken from Secondary Sources

of Contents

List of Figures

14.273 CITATIONS TAKEN FROM SECONDARY SOURCES

List of Tables

To cite a source from a secondary source ("quoted in . . .") is generally to be discouraged, since

Index

authors are expected to have examined the works they cite. If an original source is unavailable,

however, both the original and the secondary source must be listed.

14.271:

1. Louis Zukofsky, "Sincerity and Objectification," Poetry 37 (February 1931): 269, quoted in Bonnie

Library and other

Costello, Marianne Moore: Imaginary Possessions (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1981), 78.

commercial

databases

14.272:

Scientific databases

14.273:

Citations taken

from secondary

sources

14.274:

Audiovisual

materialsâ

€”elements to

include

14.275:

Discographies

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Audiovisual Materials

of Contents

List of Figures

14.274 AUDIOVISUAL MATERIALS--ELEMENTS TO INCLUDE

List of Tables

Documentation of a recording usually includes some or all of the following pieces of information: the

Index

name of the composer, writer, performer, or other person primarily responsible for the content; the

title, in italics or quotation marks, as applicable (see 8.192); the name of the recording company or

publisher; any identifying number of the recording; indication of medium (compact disc,

14.272:

audiocassette, audiovisual file, etc.); and the copyright date or date of production or performance.

Scientific databases

Recordings consulted online should include a URL or DOI (see 14.5, 14.6). Supplementary

14.273:

Citations taken

information, such as the number of discs in an album and the duration of the recording, as applicable,

from secondary

may also be given.

sources

14.274:

Audiovisual

materialsâ

€”elements to

include

14.275:

Discographies

14.276:

Musical recordings

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Audiovisual Materials

of Contents

List of Figures

14.275 DISCOGRAPHIES

List of Tables

Discographies are specialized bibliographies that list audiovisual materials such as audio recordings,

Index

video recordings, and multimedia packages. For advice on discographies, consult Suzanne E. Thorin

and Carole Franklin Vidali, The Acquisition and Cataloging of Music and Sound Recordings (bibliog. 5).

For an example, see figure 14.12.

14.273:

Citations taken

from secondary

sources

14.274:

Audiovisual

materialsâ

€”elements to

include

14.275:

Discographies

14.276:

Musical recordings

14.277:

Recordings of

literature, lectures,

and such

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Audiovisual Materials >> Sound Recordings

of Contents

List of Figures

14.276 MUSICAL RECORDINGS

List of Tables

For the typographic treatment of musical compositions in running text, see 8.188--92. Those

Index

guidelines, however, do not necessarily apply to recordings when listed in a discography (see

fig. 14.12), bibliography, or note. Symphony or sonata, for example, is capitalized when part of the title

of a recording. If the conductor or performer is the focus of the recording or is more relevant to the

14.274:

discussion than the composer, either one may be listed first. For the date, include the date of the

Audiovisual

materialsâ

recording, the copyright date or published date included with the recording, or both. If a date cannot

€”elements to

include

be determined from the recording (a common problem with some LPs and other older media), consult

a library catalog or other resource; citations without a date are generally unacceptable. If no date can

14.275:

Discographies

be found, use "n.d." (for no date).

14.276:

Musical recordings

1. The Fireside Treasury of Folk Songs, vol. 1, orchestra and chorus dir. Mitch Miller, Golden Record

14.277:

A198:17A--B, 1958, 33â…“ rpm.

Recordings of

2. New York Trumpet Ensemble, with Edward Carroll (trumpet) and Edward Brewer (organ), Art of

literature, lectures,

and such

the Trumpet, recorded at the Madeira Festival, June 1--2, 1981, Vox/Turnabout, PVT 7183, 1982, compact

disc.

14.278:

Slides and

3. Richard Strauss, Don Quixote, with Emanuel Feuermann (violoncello) and the Philadelphia

filmstrips

Orchestra, conducted by Eugene Ormandy, recorded February 24, 1940, Biddulph LAB 042, 1991,

compact disc.

4. Billie Holiday, vocal performance of "I'm a Fool to Want You," by Joel Herron, Frank Sinatra, and

Jack Wolf, recorded February 20, 1958, with Ray Ellis, on Lady in Satin, Columbia CL 1157, 33â…“ rpm.

Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus. Don Giovanni. Orchestra and Chorus of the Royal Opera House, Covent

Garden. Sir Colin Davis. With Ingvar Wixell, Luigi Roni, Martina Arroyo, Stuart Burrows, Kiri Te

Kanawa, et al. Recorded May 1973. Philips 422 541-2, 1991, 3 compact discs.

Pink Floyd. Atom Heart Mother. Capitol CDP 7 46381 2, 1990, compact disc. Originally released in 1970.

Rubinstein, Artur. The Chopin Collection. RCA Victor/BMG 60822-2-RG, 1991, 11 compact discs. Recorded

1946, 1958--67.

Weingartner, Felix von (conductor). 150 Jahre Wiener Philharmoniker. Preiser Records, PR90113 (mono), 1992,

compact disc. Recorded in 1936. Includes Beethoven's Symphony no. 3 in E-flat Major and Symphony no.

8 in F Major.

Recordings are usually listed in a separate discography (see fig. 14.12) rather than in a bibliography. If

included in a bibliography, they are best grouped under an appropriate subhead (see 14.58).

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Audiovisual Materials >> Sound Recordings

of Contents

List of Figures

14.277 RECORDINGS OF LITERATURE, LECTURES, AND SUCH

List of Tables

Recordings of drama, prose or poetry readings, lectures, and the like are treated much the same as

Index

musical recordings. Facts of publication, where needed, follow the style for print media. For electronic

sources, include information about the medium; online sources should include a URL or similar

identifier (see 14.4--13). See also 14.280.

14.275:

Discographies

1. Dylan Thomas, Under Milk Wood, performed by Dylan Thomas et al., Caedmon TC-2005, 1953,

14.276:

33â…“ rpm, 2 LPs.

Musical recordings

2. Harry S. Truman, "First Speech to Congress," April 16, 1945, transcript and Adobe Flash audio,

14.277:

18:13, Miller Center of Public Affairs, University of Virginia,

Recordings of

literature, lectures,

http://millercenter.org/scripps/archive/speeches/detail/3339.

and such

3. Calvin Coolidge, "Equal Rights" (speech), copy of an undated 78 rpm disc, ca. 1920, Library of

14.278:

Congress, "American Leaders Speak: Recordings from World War I and the 1920 Election, 1918--1920,"

Slides and

RealAudio and WAV formats, http://memory.loc.gov/ammem/nfhtml/nforSpeakers01.html.

filmstrips

4. Eleanor Roosevelt, "Is America Facing World Leadership?," convocation speech, Ball State Teacher's

14.279:

DVDs and

College, May 6, 1959, radio broadcast, Windows Media Audio, 47:46,

videocassettes

http://libx.bsu.edu/cdm4/item_viewer.php?CISOROOT=/ElRoos&CISOPTR=0&CISOBOX=1&REC=2.

Auden, W. H. Selected Poems. Read by the author. Spoken Arts 7137, 1991. Audiocassette.

Schlosser, Eric. Fast Food Nation: The Dark Side of the All-American Meal. Read by Rick Adamson. New York:

Random House Audible, 2004. Audiobook, 8 compact discs; 9 hrs.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Audiovisual Materials >> Video Recordings

of Contents

List of Figures

14.278 SLIDES AND FILMSTRIPS

List of Tables

Citations of slides and filmstrips should indicate creator (if credited), title, publisher, date, and

Index

information about the medium.

1. Louis J. Mihalyi, Landscapes of Zambia, Central Africa (Santa Barbara, CA: Visual Education, 1975), 35

14.276:

mm slides, 40 frames.

Musical recordings

The Greek and Roman World. Chicago: Society for Visual Education, 1977. Filmstrip, 44 min.

14.277:

Recordings of

literature, lectures,

and such

14.278:

Slides and

filmstrips

14.279:

DVDs and

videocassettes

14.280:

Online multimedia

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Audiovisual Materials >> Video Recordings

of Contents

List of Figures

14.279 DVDS AND VIDEOCASSETTES

List of Tables

Citations of video recordings, like citations of sound recordings, will vary according to the nature of

Index

the material. Any facts relevant to identifying the item should be included. Indexed scenes are treated

as chapters and cited by title or by number. Ancillary material, such as critical commentary, is cited

by author and title. Note that in the Monty Python example, the citation is of material original to the

14.277:

2001 edition, so the original release date of the film (1975) is omitted.

Recordings of

literature, lectures,

and such

7. Michael Curtis and Gregory S. Malins, "The One with the Princess Leia Fantasy," Friends, season 3,

14.278:

episode 1, directed by Gail Mancuso, aired September 19, 1996 (Burbank, CA: Warner Home Video,

Slides and

2003), DVD.

filmstrips

8. "Crop Duster Attack," North by Northwest, directed by Alfred Hitchcock (1959; Burbank, CA: Warner

14.279:

Home Video, 2000), DVD.

DVDs and

videocassettes

Cleese, John, Terry Gilliam, Eric Idle, Terry Jones, and Michael Palin. "Commentaries." Disc 2. Monty Python

14.280:

Online multimedia

and the Holy Grail, special ed. DVD. Directed by Terry Gilliam and Terry Jones. Culver City, CA:

Columbia Tristar Home Entertainment, 2001.

14.281:

Recommended

Handel, George Frideric. Messiah. Atlanta Symphony Orchestra and Chamber Chorus, Robert Shaw.

stylebooks

Performed December 19, 1987. Ansonia Station, NY: Video Artists International, 1988. Videocassette

(VHS), 141 min.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Audiovisual Materials >> Video Recordings

of Contents

List of Figures

14.280 ONLINE MULTIMEDIA

List of Tables

Citations of online multimedia must thoroughly identify the material cited by incorporating the

Index

elements discussed and exemplified throughout this section; it is never enough simply to cite an

electronic file name or URL, though this information should be included as well. If no date can be

determined from the source, include the date the material was last accessed. (See also 14.4--13.) If the

14.278:

material is a recording of a speech or other performance, or if it is a digital version of a published

Slides and

filmstrips

source, include information about the original performance or source. Whether to list information

14.279:

about the original or the digitized copy first will depend on the information available and is usually

DVDs and

up to the author. Include an indication of the source type (e.g., "video") and length. Note the

videocassettes

idiosyncratic capitalization and spacing in the second example, preserved as an aid to identifying the

14.280:

Online multimedia

source; this approach, if used at all, should be reserved for sources that have no ties to any publishing

14.281:

body (and any outright errors should be indicated in the text or note; see also 13.59). See also 14.277,

Recommended

14.198. For an example of a podcast, see 14.221.

stylebooks

14.282:

1. A. E. Weed, At the Foot of the Flatiron (American Mutoscope and Biograph Co., 1903), 35 mm film,

Legal and public

documents online

from Library of Congress, The Life of a City: Early Films of New York, 1898--1906, MPEG video, 2:19,

http://lcweb2.loc.gov/ammem/papr/nychome.html.

2. "HOROWITZ AT CARNEGIE HALL 2-Chopin Nocturne in Fm Op.55," YouTube video, 5:53, from a

performance televised by CBS on September 22, 1968, posted by "hubanj," January 9, 2009,

http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cDVBtuWkMS8.

Harwood, John. "The Pros and Cons of Biden." New York Times video, 2:00. August 23, 2008.

http://video.on.nytimes.com/?fr_story=a425c9aca92f51bd19f2a621fd93b5e266507191.

Pollan, Michael. "Michael Pollan Gives a Plant's-Eye View." Filmed March 2007. TED video, 17:31. Posted

February 2008. http://www.ted.com/index.php/talks/michael_pollan_gives_a_plant_s_eye_view.html.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.281 RECOMMENDED STYLEBOOKS

List of Tables

Citations in predominantly legal works generally follow one of two guides: (1) The Bluebook: A

Index

Uniform System of Citation, published by the Harvard Law Review Association and available online

(with a subscription); or (2) the ALWD Citation Manual: A Professional System of Citation, prepared and

published by the Association of Legal Writing Directors and Darby Dickerson (see bibliog. 1.1). For

14.279:

Canada, see 14.305. The Bluebook is the most widely used citation guide; its conventions predominate

DVDs and

videocassettes

in law reviews. The ALWD Citation Manual differs in some elements and aims to be somewhat

14.280:

simpler. Chicago recommends using one of these systems for citing legal and public documents--

Online multimedia

including cases, constitutions, statutes, and other government documents--even in works with a

14.281:

predominantly nonlegal subject matter. This departure from Chicago's previous recommendations

Recommended

stylebooks

recognizes the ubiquity of these systems in legal publications, commercial databases, and government

14.282:

archives. Any editor working extensively with legal and public documents should have one of these

Legal and public

manuals on hand. Most of the examples of legal-style citations in this section are based on The

documents online

Bluebook (exceptions are made for secondary sources and certain unpublished government documents;

14.283:

Note form for

see 14.303, 14.304, 14.308, 14.315).

legal-style citations

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.282 LEGAL AND PUBLIC DOCUMENTS ONLINE

List of Tables

The Bluebook includes specific recommendations for citing electronic sources. In general, however, for

Index

citations to cases, constitutions and statutes, and other such materials, print sources are preferred.

Sources consulted through commercial databases such as Westlaw or LexisNexis may also be cited;

these are treated like print sources but with the addition of the database name and any identification

14.280:

number (or, in the case of constitutions and statutes, information about the currency of the database).

Online multimedia

For examples, see 14.288. The Bluebook also provides advice for citing Internet sources, including

14.281:

Recommended

documents available from government archives outside the United States. In general, such citations

stylebooks

should follow the format for printed sources with the addition of a URL. Access dates ("last visited" in

14.282:

Bluebook parlance) are recommended only for undated documents. This advice is similar to Chicago's

Legal and public

documents online

recommendations (see 14.4--13). For examples, see 14.317. Authors who need to cite more than a few

14.283:

electronic sources in Bluebook style should consult that manual. For documents in a national archive,

Note form for

any citations to electronic versions should generally be limited to those made available by the archive

legal-style citations

itself or through a commercial database.

14.284:

Typefaces in legal-

style citations

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.283 NOTE FORM FOR LEGAL-STYLE CITATIONS

List of Tables

Almost all legal works use notes for documentation and few use bibliographies. The examples in this

Index

section, based on the recommendations in The Bluebook, are accordingly given in note form only. Any

work so cited need not be listed in a bibliography. Works using the author-date style (chapter 15) and

citing only a handful of legal and public documents may limit those citations to the text, using

14.281:

citation sentences and clauses that include the same information as footnotes, as suggested in The

Recommended

stylebooks

Bluebook; those with more than a very few legal-style citations, however, may need to supplement the

14.282:

author-date system with footnotes or endnotes. See 15.54--55.

Legal and public

documents online

14.283:

Note form for

legal-style citations

14.284:

Typefaces in legal-

style citations

14.285:

Page numbers and

other locators in

legal-style citations

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.284 TYPEFACES IN LEGAL-STYLE CITATIONS

List of Tables

In Bluebook style, italics are used for titles of articles and chapters (a major difference from nonlegal

Index

usage), uncommon words or phrases in languages other than English (but not such well-known terms

as de facto or habeas corpus), certain introductory signals indicating a cross-reference (such as See),

subsequent case history (such as cert. denied; see 14.290), and procedural phrases (such as In re). Italics

14.282:

are also used for case names mentioned in running text. All other material, including case names in

Legal and public

documents online

citations (but see 14.288), is presented in roman. In formal Bluebook style, caps and small caps are used

14.283:

for the titles of books and their authors and for the names of periodicals and newspapers. The

Note form for

examples in this section use a simpler style advocated by some law reviews, substituting upper- and

legal-style citations

lowercase roman type for caps and small caps. It should be noted that the examples in this section are

14.284:

Typefaces in legal-

limited to legal and public documents. Though Bluebook-style citations to books, articles, and other

style citations

types of secondary sources may be appropriate in works with predominantly legal subject matter,

14.285:

these are not covered here (but see 14.303).

Page numbers and

other locators in

legal-style citations

14.286:

Abbreviations in

legal-style citations

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.285 PAGE NUMBERS AND OTHER LOCATORS IN LEGAL-STYLE CITATIONS

List of Tables

In Bluebook style, for most authorities the first page number is cited, following the name of the

Index

authority (usually abbreviated) and usually with no intervening punctuation; references to specific

page numbers follow the first page number, separated by a comma. Some authorities are cited by

section (Â§) or paragraph (Â¶) number; references to specific pages within such sections follow a

14.283:

comma and are preceded by at.

Note form for

legal-style citations

14.284:

Typefaces in legal-

style citations

14.285:

Page numbers and

other locators in

legal-style citations

14.286:

Abbreviations in

legal-style citations

14.287:

Short forms for

legal-style citations

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.286 ABBREVIATIONS IN LEGAL-STYLE CITATIONS

List of Tables

Most abbreviations in The Bluebook use periods or apostrophes. In citations (but not in running text),

Index

Bluebook style uses 2d and 3d rather than 2nd and 3rd and capitalizes abbreviations like No. and Sess.

Works that otherwise follow Chicago style--which differs on some of these points (see, e.g., 10.4)--

should, for legal citations, follow the style of the examples in this section, which illustrate Bluebook

14.284:

style. The following example cites a decision by the United States Court of Appeals for the Seventh

Typefaces in legal-

style citations

Circuit, reported in volume 206 of the Federal Reporter, third series, beginning on page 752, with the

14.285:

citation specifically referring to footnote 1 on that page. For more abbreviations, consult The Bluebook.

Page numbers and

other locators in

legal-style citations

1. NLRB v. Somerville Constr. Co., 206 F.3d 752, 752 n.1 (7th Cir. 2000).

14.286:

Abbreviations in

It should be noted that in running text, most terms should be spelled out--including terms such as

legal-style citations

chapter, part, article, section, paragraph, and so forth (but, in case names, not v. or common abbreviations

14.287:

such as Co. and Inc. ). See also 8.79, 8.81.

Short forms for

legal-style citations

14.288:

Cases or court

decisionsâ€”basic

elements

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.287 SHORT FORMS FOR LEGAL-STYLE CITATIONS

List of Tables

The Bluebook allows certain short forms for subsequent citations to the same source. In general, it

Index

limits this use to those items that have been cited within the previous five notes. Short forms include

case names reduced to the name of only one party (usually the plaintiff or the nongovernmental

party); statutes and legislative documents identified only by name or document and section numbers;

14.285:

treaties identified only by name (or sometimes a short form thereof); and the use of id. (in italics).

Page numbers and

other locators in

Cases are the most readily shortened forms; examples are included in the section that treats them

legal-style citations

(14.288--91). Works that cite only a few legal documents may be better off using the full form for each

14.286:

citation. See also 14.24--31.

Abbreviations in

legal-style citations

14.287:

Short forms for

legal-style citations

14.288:

Cases or court

decisionsâ€”basic

elements

14.289:

United States

Supreme Court

decisions

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Cases and Court Decisions

of Contents

List of Figures

14.288 CASES OR COURT DECISIONS--BASIC ELEMENTS

List of Tables

Case names, including the abbreviation v. , are set roman in notes; short forms in subsequent citations

Index

are italicized (as are case names mentioned in running text). Full citations include volume number

(arabic), abbreviated name of the reporter, the ordinal series number of the reporter (if applicable), the

abbreviated name of the court (if not specified by the reporter) and the date together in parentheses,

14.286:

and other relevant information (see 14.291). A single page number designates the opening page of a

Abbreviations in

legal-style citations

decision; an additional number designates an actual page cited. In a shortened citation, at is used to

14.287:

cite a particular page (example 18); absence of at implies reference to the decision as a whole (example

Short forms for

19). See also 14.287.

legal-style citations

14.288:

16. United States v. Christmas, 222 F.3d 141, 145 (4th Cir. 2000).

Cases or court

decisionsâ€”basic

17. Profit Sharing Plan v. Mbank Dallas, N.A., 683 F. Supp. 592 (N.D. Tex. 1988).

elements

18. Christmas, 222 F.3d at 145.

14.289:

19. Profit Sharing Plan, 683 F. Supp. 592.

United States

Supreme Court

decisions

When a commercial electronic database is cited, include the docket number, name of the database,

14.290:

and any identifying date and number supplied by the database. References to page or screen numbers

Lower federal-

are preceded by an asterisk. Short forms may include only the database identifier. See also 14.282.

court decisions

20. McNamee v. Dep't of the Treasury, No. 05-6151-CV, 2007 U.S. App. LEXIS 12016 (2d Cir. May 23,

2007).

21. Horn v. Pub. Water Supply Dist. No. 8, No. WD 63889, 2005 WL 119835 (Mo. Ct. App. Jan. 21, 2005).

22. McNamee, 2007 U.S. App. LEXIS 12016, at *5.

23. Horn, 2005 WL 119835, at *3.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Cases and Court Decisions

of Contents

List of Figures

14.289 UNITED STATES SUPREME COURT DECISIONS

List of Tables

All Supreme Court decisions are published in the United States Supreme Court Reports (abbreviated

Index

U.S.) and are preferably cited to that reporter. Cases not yet published therein may be cited to the

Supreme Court Reporter (S. Ct.), which publishes decisions more quickly. Because the court's name is

identified by the reporter, it is not repeated before the date.

14.287:

Short forms for

24. AT&T Corp. v. Iowa Utils. Bd., 525 U.S. 366 (1999).

legal-style citations

25. Brendlin v. California, 127 S. Ct. 2400 (2007).

14.288:

Cases or court

26. AT&T, 525 U.S. at 366--67.

decisionsâ€”basic

elements

14.289:

United States

Supreme Court

decisions

14.290:

Lower federal-

court decisions

14.291:

State- and local-

court decisions

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Cases and Court Decisions

of Contents

List of Figures

14.290 LOWER FEDERAL-COURT DECISIONS

List of Tables

Lower federal-court decisions are usually cited to the Federal Reporter (F.) or to the Federal Supplement

Index

(F. Supp.). If relevant, the Supreme Court's grant or denial of certiorari may be indicated.

27. United States v. Dennis, 183 F. 201 (2d Cir. 1950).

14.288:

28. City of Las Vegas v. Walsh, 124 P.3d 203 (Nev. 2005), cert. denied, 547 U.S. 1071 (2006).

Cases or court

29. Eaton v. IBM Corp., 925 F. Supp. 487 (S.D. Tex. 1996).

decisionsâ€”basic

elements

30. Dennis, 183 F. at 202.

31. Walsh, 124 P.3d at 215.

14.289:

United States

Supreme Court

decisions

14.290:

Lower federal-

court decisions

14.291:

State- and local-

court decisions

14.292:

Constitutions

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Cases and Court Decisions

of Contents

List of Figures

14.291 STATE- AND LOCAL-COURT DECISIONS

List of Tables

Decisions of state and local courts are cited much like federal-court decisions. If both the official and

Index

the commercial reporters are cited, they are separated by a comma. If the court's name is identified

unambiguously by the reporter, it is not repeated before the date. If a case was decided in a lower

court, the abbreviated court name appears before the date. Note that a space is used after a two- or

14.289:

three-letter abbreviated reporter name--"Cal. 2d" ( California Reports, second series)--but not after

United States

Supreme Court

initialisms like "A." or "N.Y.S." in "A.2d" ( Atlantic Reporter) or "N.Y.S.2d" ( New York Supplement).

decisions

14.290:

32. Williams v. Davis, 27 Cal. 2d 746 (1946).

Lower federal-

33. Id. at 747.

court decisions

34. Henningsen v. Bloomfield Motors, Inc., 32 N.J. 358, 161 A.2d 69 (1960).

14.291:

State- and local-

35. Stambovsky v. Ackley, 572 N.Y.S.2d 672 (App. Div. 2007).

court decisions

36. Williams, 27 Cal. 2d 746.

14.292:

Constitutions

14.293:

Legislative

documentsâ

€”abbreviations

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Constitutions

of Contents

List of Figures

14.292 CONSTITUTIONS

List of Tables

In citations to constitutions, the article and amendment numbers appear in roman numerals; other

Index

subdivision numbers are in arabic. (For nonlegal style see 9.29.) In Bluebook style the name of the

constitution is capitalized; other abbreviations are lowercased.

14.290:

37. U.S. Const. art. I, Â§ 4, cl. 2.

Lower federal-

38. U.S. Const. amend. XIV, Â§ 2.

court decisions

39. Ariz. Const. art. VII, Â§ 5.

14.291:

40. Ark. Const. of 1868, art. III, Â§ 2 (superseded 1874).

State- and local-

court decisions

14.292:

Constitutions

14.293:

Legislative

documentsâ

€”abbreviations

14.294:

Laws and statutes

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Legislative and Executive Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.293 LEGISLATIVE DOCUMENTS--ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

Abbreviations for United States legislative documents include "Cong." (Congress), "H." (House), "S."

Index

(Senate), and other standard abbreviations for such terms as document, session, resolution, and so

forth. Unless it is not clear from the context, "U.S." may be omitted. For lists of abbreviations and

many examples, consult The Bluebook. See also 14.286.

14.291:

State- and local-

court decisions

14.292:

Constitutions

14.293:

Legislative

documentsâ

€”abbreviations

14.294:

Laws and statutes

14.295:

Bills and

resolutions

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Legislative and Executive Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.294 LAWS AND STATUTES

List of Tables

Bills or joint resolutions that have been signed into law--"public laws," or statutes--are first published

Index

separately, as slip laws, and then collected in the annual bound volumes of the United States Statutes at

Large (abbreviated in legal style as Stat.), where they are referred to as session laws. Later they are

incorporated into the United States Code (U.S.C.).

14.292:

Constitutions

17. Homeland Security Act of 2002, Pub. L. No. 107-296, 116 Stat. 2135 (2002).

14.293:

18. Homeland Security Act of 2002, 6 U.S.C. Â§ 101 (2002).

Legislative

documentsâ

€”abbreviations

14.294:

Laws and statutes

14.295:

Bills and

resolutions

14.296:

Hearings

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Legislative and Executive Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.295 BILLS AND RESOLUTIONS

List of Tables

Congressional bills (proposed laws) and resolutions are published in pamphlet form (slip bills). In

Index

citations, bills or resolutions originating in the House of Representatives are abbreviated "H.R." or

"H.R. Res.," and those originating in the Senate, "S." or "S. Res." The title of the bill (if there is one) is

followed by the bill number, the congressional session, a section number (if relevant), and the year of

14.293:

publication in parentheses. Authors wishing to cite a bill that has since been enacted should cite it as

Legislative

documentsâ

a statute (see 14.294).

€”abbreviations

14.294:

16. Homeland Security Act of 2002, H.R. 5005, 107th Cong. (2002).

Laws and statutes

14.295:

Bills and

resolutions

14.296:

Hearings

14.297:

Congressional

reports and

documents

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Legislative and Executive Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.296 HEARINGS

List of Tables

Records of testimony given before congressional committees are usually published with titles, which

Index

should be cited in full and set in italics. The relevant committee should be listed as part of the title.

Note that Before--which Chicago would normally lowercase in a title (see 8.157)--is capitalized

according to Bluebook style, which capitalizes prepositions of more than four letters. Include the

14.294:

number of the Congress, the page number cited (if any), the date in parentheses, and the speaker's

Laws and statutes

name, title, and affiliation in parentheses. Note that The Bluebook does not require a session number

14.295:

Bills and

for citations to House Reports published as of the 60th Congress, where an odd-numbered year

resolutions

indicates a first session and an even year a second session.

14.296:

Hearings

11. Homeland Security Act of 2002: Hearings on H.R. 5005, Day 3, Before the Select Comm. on Homeland

14.297:

Security, 107th Cong. 203 (2002) (statement of David Walker, Comptroller General of the United States).

Congressional

reports and

documents

14.298:

Congressional

debates since 1873

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Legislative and Executive Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.297 CONGRESSIONAL REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

List of Tables

In Bluebook style, numbered reports and documents are cited by the number of Congress, which is

Index

joined to the document number by a hyphen. House and Senate reports are abbreviated "H.R. Rep."

or "S. Rep."; documents are cited to "H.R. Doc." or "S. Doc." A specific page reference, if needed, is

added following at. The year of the report or document is placed in parentheses. Additional

14.295:

information (e.g., to indicate a conference report) follows the year, in parentheses. If not mentioned in

Bills and

resolutions

text, a title and author (if any) may be included in the citation.

14.296:

Hearings

8. Select Comm. on Homeland Security, Homeland Security Act of 2002, H.R. Rep. No. 107-609, pt. 1

14.297:

(2002).

Congressional

9. H.R. Rep. No. 106-661, at 9 (2000) (Conf. Rep.).

reports and

documents

10. S. Doc. No. 77-148, at 2--5 (1941).

14.298:

Congressional

debates since 1873

14.299:

Records of

congressional

debates before

1873

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Legislative and Executive Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.298 CONGRESSIONAL DEBATES SINCE 1873

List of Tables

Since 1873, congressional debates have been published by the government in the Congressional Record.

Index

Daily issues are bound in paper biweekly and in permanent volumes (divided into parts) yearly.

Since material may be added, deleted, or modified when the final volumes are prepared, pagination

will vary between the different editions. Whenever possible, citation should be made to the

14.296:

permanent volumes. Note that, following Bluebook style, italics are not used for the name of the

Hearings

publication. The page number (preceded by "H" or "S," for House or Senate, in the daily edition) is

14.297:

Congressional

followed by the date, which is placed in parentheses. If the identity of a speaker is necessary, include

reports and

it in parentheses.

documents

14.298:

16. 147 Cong. Rec. 19,000 (2001).

Congressional

debates since 1873

17. 148 Cong. Rec. S10,491 (daily ed. Oct. 16, 2002) (statement of Sen. Dodd).

14.299:

Records of

congressional

debates before

1873

14.300:

State laws and

municipal

ordinances

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Legislative and Executive Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.299 RECORDS OF CONGRESSIONAL DEBATES BEFORE 1873

List of Tables

Until 1873, congressional debates were privately printed in Annals of the Congress of the United States

Index

(covering the years 1789--1824; also known by other names), Register of Debates (1824--37), and

Congressional Globe (1833--73). In citing the date, refer to the year covered rather than the date of

publication. Note that the Globe is normally cited by session, whereas the Annals and Debates are cited

14.297:

by volume number. As with citations to the Congressional Record, the titles are abbreviated and not

Congressional

reports and

italicized.

documents

14.298:

5. Cong. Globe, 39th Cong., 2d Sess. 39 (1866).

Congressional

6. 42 Annals of Cong. 1697 (1824).

debates since 1873

7. 3 Reg. Deb. 388 (1827).

14.299:

Records of

congressional

debates before

1873

14.300:

State laws and

municipal

ordinances

14.301:

Presidential

documents

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Legislative and Executive Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.300 STATE LAWS AND MUNICIPAL ORDINANCES

List of Tables

The titles of state codes (compilations) for laws and municipal ordinances are set in roman type. A

Index

name is included in parentheses where necessary to indicate the version of a code cited. The date

following a code (or the version of a code) indicates the year the volume was updated or

supplemented to include the law being cited. Form of citation will vary by state. The date a specific

14.298:

law was passed may be included in parentheses at the end of the citation. For an exhaustive

Congressional

debates since 1873

treatment of state-by-state variations, consult The Bluebook.

14.299:

Records of

41. Ohio Rev. Code Ann. Â§ 3566 (West 2000).

congressional

42. An Act Guaranteeing Governmental Independence, Ky. Rev. Stat. Ann. Â§ 520.020 (LexisNexis 1985)

debates before

1873

(passed Jan. 3, 1974).

14.300:

State laws and

municipal

ordinances

14.301:

Presidential

documents

14.302:

Treaties

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Legislative and Executive Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.301 PRESIDENTIAL DOCUMENTS

List of Tables

Presidential proclamations, executive orders, vetoes, addresses, and the like are published in the

Index

Weekly Compilation of Presidential Documents (Weekly Comp. Pres. Doc.) and in the Public Papers of the

Presidents of the United States (Pub. Papers). Proclamations and executive orders are also carried in the

daily Federal Register (Fed. Reg.) and then published in title 3 of the Code of Federal Regulations (C.F.R.).

14.299:

Records of

25. Proclamation No. 8214, 73 Fed. Reg. 1439 (Jan. 8, 2008).

congressional

debates before

26. Exec. Order No. 11,609, 3 C.F.R. 586 (1971--75).

1873

14.300:

Some executive orders and proclamations become part of the United States Code and are best so cited.

State laws and

municipal

For more examples, consult The Bluebook.

ordinances

14.301:

Presidential

documents

14.302:

Treaties

14.303:

Secondary sources

and freestanding

publications

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Legislative and Executive Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.302 TREATIES

List of Tables

The texts of treaties signed before 1950 are published in United States Statutes at Large; the unofficial

Index

citation is to the Treaty Series (T.S.) or the Executive Agreement Series (E.A.S.), each of which assigns a

number to a treaty covered. Those signed in 1950 and later appear in United States Treaties and Other

International Agreements (U.S.T., 1950--), or Treaties and Other International Acts Series (T.I.A.S., 1945--),

14.300:

which also assigns a number. Treaties involving more than two nations may be found in the United

State laws and

municipal

Nations Treaty Series (U.N.T.S., 1946--) or, from 1920 to 1946, in the League of Nations Treaty Series

ordinances

(L.N.T.S., 1920--46). These and other sources are listed in The Bluebook. Titles of treaties are set in

14.301:

roman and capitalized headline-style (recall that The Bluebook capitalizes prepositions of more than

Presidential

documents

four letters). An exact date indicates the date of signing and is therefore preferable to a year alone,

14.302:

which may differ from the year the treaty was published in one of the works above. Page numbers

Treaties

are given where relevant.

14.303:

Secondary sources

and freestanding

34. Treaty Banning Nuclear Weapon Tests in the Atmosphere, in Outer Space and Under Water, U.S.-

publications

U.K.-U.S.S.R., Aug. 5, 1963, 14 U.S.T. 1313.

14.304:

35. Convention Concerning Military Service, Den.-Italy, July 15, 1954, 250 T.I.A.S. 3516, at 45.

Unpublished

government

documents

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Legislative and Executive Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.303 SECONDARY SOURCES AND FREESTANDING PUBLICATIONS

List of Tables

For the generalist citing legal and public documents that appear in secondary sources or as

Index

freestanding publications, Bluebook style should generally not be followed. Moreover, any source that

is analogous to a secondary source--including not just books or articles but also pamphlets and other

titled publications--can be cited by title and author (if any) rather than in an abbreviated form. The

14.301:

following examples are not meant to be exhaustive. Those who are required to follow Bluebook style

Presidential

documents

should consult that manual, whose recommendations differ.

14.302:

Treaties

1. Journals of the Continental Congress, 1774--1789, ed. Worthington C. Ford et al. (Washington, DC, 1904--

14.303:

37), 15:1341.

Secondary sources

2. JCC 25:863.

and freestanding

publications

3. House Miscellaneous Document no. 210, 53d Cong., 2d sess., in Compilation of the Messages and Papers of the

Presidents, 1789--1897, ed. J. D. Richardson (Washington, DC: Government Printing Office, 1907), 4:16.

14.304:

Unpublished

4. Public Papers of the Presidents of the United States: Herbert Hoover, 1929--1933, 4 vols. (Washington, DC:

government

Government Printing Office, 1974--77), 1:134.

documents

5. Median Gross Rent by Counties of the United States, 1970, prepared by the Geography Division in

14.305:

cooperation with the Housing Division, Bureau of the Census (Washington, DC, 1975).

Canadian reference

works

6. US Department of the Treasury, Report of the Secretary of the Treasury Transmitting a Report from the

Register of the Treasury of the Commerce and Navigation of the United States for the Year Ending the 30th of June,

1850, 31st Cong., 2d sess., House Executive Document 8 (Washington, DC, 1850--51).

7. Ralph I. Straus, Expanding Private Investment for Free World Economic Growth, special report prepared at

the request of the Department of State, April 1959, 12.

8. Illinois General Assembly, Law Revision Commission, Report to the 80th General Assembly of the State of

Illinois (Chicago, 1977), 14--18.

Unlike most of the legal-style citations discussed elsewhere in this section, public documents

published in secondary sources or as freestanding works may be suitable for inclusion in a

bibliography.

Continental Congress. Journals of the Continental Congress, 1774--1789. Edited by Worthington C. Ford et al.

34 vols. Washington, DC, 1904--37.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Legislative and Executive Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

14.304 UNPUBLISHED GOVERNMENT DOCUMENTS

List of Tables

For general guidelines and many examples that can be adapted to government documents, see

Index

14.232--42. Most unpublished documents of the United States government are housed in the National

Archives and Records Administration (NARA) in Washington, DC, or in one of its branches. All,

including films, photographs, and sound recordings as well as written materials, are cited by record

14.302:

group (RG) number. A list of the record groups and their numbers is given in the Guide to the National

Treaties

Archives of the United States, augmented by the leaflet Citing Records in the National Archives of the

14.303:

Secondary sources

United States (available at the National Archives website), which includes advice on citing its

and freestanding

electronic records (see bibliog. 4.5). Names of specific documents are given in quotation marks.

publications

14.304:

40. Senate Committee on the Judiciary, "Lobbying," file 71A-F15, RG 46, National Archives.

Unpublished

government

41. National Archives Branch Depository, Suitland, MD, Records of the National Commission on Law

documents

Observance and Enforcement, RG 10.

14.305:

Canadian reference

works

14.306:

Canadian legal

cases

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Canada

of Contents

List of Figures

14.305 CANADIAN REFERENCE WORKS

List of Tables

The major reference work for citing Canadian public documents and legal cases in a Canadian context

Index

is the Canadian Guide to Uniform Legal Citation, edited and published (in English and French) by the

Carswell/McGill Law Journal (see bibliog. 1.1). Also valuable are Douglass T. MacEllven, Michael J.

McGuire, Neil A. Campbell, and John N. Davis, Legal Research Handbook, 5th edition (bibliog. 5);

14.303:

Canadian Almanac and Directory (bibliog. 4.4); and Gerald L. Gall, F. Pearl Eliadis, and France Allard,

Secondary sources

and freestanding

The Canadian Legal System, 5th edition (bibliog. 5). Authors citing more than a few Canadian

publications

authorities should consult one of these works. Additional resources may be found online through

14.304:

LexUM, a service provided through the University of Montreal. For citing the occasional example in a

Unpublished

government

US context, The Bluebook (see 14.281) provides some recommendations and examples.

documents

14.305:

Canadian reference

works

14.306:

Canadian legal

cases

14.307:

Canadian statutes

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Canada

of Contents

List of Figures

14.306 CANADIAN LEGAL CASES

List of Tables

The following examples illustrate Bluebook style. The basic elements are similar to those used in US

Index

law citations; the date is enclosed in square brackets, followed by the volume number if pertinent, the

abbreviated name of the reporter, and the page number. Canadian Supreme Court cases since 1876

are cited to Supreme Court Reports (S.C.R.); cases after 1974 should include the volume number of the

14.304:

reporter. Federal court cases are cited to Federal Courts Reports (F.C., 1971--) or Exchequer Court Reports

Unpublished

government

(Ex. C.R., 1875--1971). Cases not found in any of these sources are cited to Dominion Law Reports

documents

(D.L.R.). Add "Can." in parentheses if it is not clear from the context or the citation.

14.305:

Canadian reference

works

10. Robertson v. Thomson Corp., [2006] 2 S.C.R. 363 (Can.).

11. Boldy v. Royal Bank of Canada, [2008] F.C. 99.

14.306:

Canadian legal

cases

14.307:

Canadian statutes

14.308:

Unpublished

Canadian

government

documents

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Canada

of Contents

List of Figures

14.307 CANADIAN STATUTES

List of Tables

Federal statutes appear in the Revised Statutes of Canada (R.S.C.), a consolidation that is published

Index

every fifteen or twenty years; in the interim they are cited as session laws in the annual Statutes of

Canada (S.C.). Citation elements are similar to US statutes: the name of the act, the abbreviated name

of the compilation, chapter number (in R.S.C. , the chapter number includes the initial letter of the

14.305:

name of the act), section number if applicable, and publication date. Add "Can." in parentheses if it is

Canadian reference

works

not clear from the context or the citation.

14.306:

Canadian legal

12. Companies' Creditors Arrangement Act, R.S.C., ch. C-36, s. 5 (1985) (Can.).

cases

13. Canada Elections Act, 2000 S.C., ch. 9.

14.307:

Canadian statutes

14.308:

Unpublished

Canadian

government

documents

14.309:

UK reference works

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> Canada

of Contents

List of Figures

14.308 UNPUBLISHED CANADIAN GOVERNMENT DOCUMENTS

List of Tables

The Library and Archives Canada (LAC) houses the unpublished records of the federal government,

Index

both individually written and institutional, as well as historically significant documents from the

private sector. The guide to the entire LAC collections is available online, as are the archives for each

province and territory. For citing unpublished materials, see the guidelines and examples in

14.306:

14.232--42.

Canadian legal

cases

14.307:

Canadian statutes

14.308:

Unpublished

Canadian

government

documents

14.309:

UK reference works

14.310:

UK legal cases

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> United Kingdom

of Contents

List of Figures

14.309 UK REFERENCE WORKS

List of Tables

The catalogs of the National Archives (the official archive for England, Wales, and the central UK

Index

government), available online, extend to the documents of the former Public Record Office, the

Historical Manuscripts Commission, the Office of Public Sector Information, and Her Majesty's

Stationery Office (HMSO), among others. The UK Parliament also makes its catalogs available online.

14.307:

Printed guides include the Guide to the Contents of the Public Record Office; Frank Rodgers, A Guide to

Canadian statutes

British Government Publications; and John E. Pemberton, ed., The Bibliographic Control of Official

14.308:

Unpublished

Publications (all in bibliog. 4.5). For citing UK legal and public documents in a US context, The Bluebook

Canadian

(see 14.281) provides an overview.

government

documents

14.309:

UK reference works

14.310:

UK legal cases

14.311:

UK parliamentary

publications

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> United Kingdom

of Contents

List of Figures

14.310 UK LEGAL CASES

List of Tables

In Bluebook style, the basic elements in citations to UK legal cases are similar to those used in US law

Index

citations: the name of the case, in roman (cases involving the Crown use the abbreviation "R" for Rex

or Regina); the date, which is enclosed in parentheses when the volumes of the reporter are numbered

cumulatively, or in square brackets when the year is essential to locating the case (there is either no

14.308:

volume number or the volumes for each year are numbered anew, not cumulatively); the abbreviated

Unpublished

Canadian

name of the reporter; and the opening page of the decision. If the court is not apparent from the name

government

documents

of the reporter, or if the jurisdiction is not clear from context, include either or both, as necessary, in

parentheses. Until recently, the courts of highest appeal in the United Kingdom (except for criminal

14.309:

UK reference works

cases in Scotland) had been the House of Lords (H.L.) and the Judicial Committee of the Privy

14.310:

Council (P.C.). In 2005, the Supreme Court of the United Kingdom was established. In 2009 it assumed

UK legal cases

the jurisdiction of the Appellate Committee of the House of Lords and the devolution jurisdiction of

14.311:

the Judicial Committee of the Privy Council. Most cases are cited to the applicable report in the Law

UK parliamentary

publications

Reports, among these the Appeal Cases (A.C.), Queen's (King's) Bench (Q.B., K.B.), Chancery (Ch.),

14.312:

Family (Fam.), and Probate (P.) reports. For other reports applicable to cases dating back to AD 1094,

UK statutes

consult The Bluebook.

10. R v. Dudley and Stephens, (1884) 14 Q.B.D. 273 (D.C.).

11. Regal (Hastings) Ltd. v. Gulliver and Ors, [1967] 2 A.C. 134 (H.L.) (Eng.).

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> United Kingdom

of Contents

List of Figures

14.311 UK PARLIAMENTARY PUBLICATIONS

List of Tables

Parliamentary publications include all materials issued by both houses of Parliament, the House of

Index

Commons (H.C.) and the House of Lords (H.L.): journals of both houses (sometimes abbreviated CJ

and LJ); votes and proceedings; debates; bills, reports, and papers; and statutes.

14.309:

UK reference works

14.310:

UK legal cases

14.311:

UK parliamentary

publications

14.312:

UK statutes

14.313:

Publication of UK

parliamentary

debates

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> United Kingdom

of Contents

List of Figures

14.312 UK STATUTES

List of Tables

More often cited in notes than in bibliographies, the Acts of Parliament are identified by title (in

Index

roman), year (also include the regnal year for statutes enacted before 1963), and chapter number (c.

for chapter; arabic numeral for national number, lowercase roman for local). Monarchs' names in

regnal-year citations are abbreviated as follows: Car. (Charles), Edw., Eliz., Geo., Hen., Jac. (James),

14.310:

Phil. & M., Rich., Vict., Will., W. & M. The year precedes the name; the monarch's ordinal, if any,

UK legal cases

follows it (15 Geo. 6), both in arabic numerals. An ampersand is used between regnal years and

14.311:

UK parliamentary

between names of dual monarchs (1 & 2 W. & M.). The Bluebook advises including the jurisdiction if it

publications

is not clear from the context or the citation (example 8).

14.312:

UK statutes

7. Act of Settlement, 1701, 12 & 13 Will. 3, c. 2.

14.313:

8. Consolidated Fund Act, 1963, c. 1 (Eng.).

Publication of UK

parliamentary

9. Manchester Corporation Act, 1967, c. xl.

debates

14.314:

The three chief compilations of statutory material for the United Kingdom are the following:

UK command

papers

The Statutes of the Realm. Statutes from 1235 through 1948, with the exception of the years 1642--

60.

Acts and Ordinances of the Interregnum, ed. C. H. Firth and R. S. Rait, 3 vols. (London, 1911).

Statutes for the years 1642--60.

Public General Acts and Measures, published annually since 1831 by HMSO.

An additional source is the UK Statute Law Database, which has been available to the public since

2006 and is published with authority of the British Crown; the Statute Law Database draws on The

Statutes of the Realm and its official revisions.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> United Kingdom

of Contents

List of Figures

14.313 PUBLICATION OF UK PARLIAMENTARY DEBATES

List of Tables

Before 1909, debates from both houses were published together; since then they have been published

Index

in separate series.

Hansard Parliamentary Debates, 1st series (1803--20)

14.311:

Hansard Parliamentary Debates, 2d series (1820--30)

UK parliamentary

Hansard Parliamentary Debates, 3d series (1830--91)

publications

Parliamentary Debates, 4th series (1892--1908)

14.312:

Parliamentary Debates, Commons, 5th series (1909--80)

UK statutes

Parliamentary Debates, Commons, 6th series (1980/81--)

14.313:

Parliamentary Debates, Lords, 5th series (1909--)

Publication of UK

parliamentary

debates

In Bluebook style, cite the volume number and series and include the year and column number. In the

14.314:

third example, H.C. stands for House of Commons. (In the first two examples, no such indication is

UK command

papers

necessary.)

14.315:

Unpublished UK

1. 249 Parl. Deb. (3d ser.) (1879) 611--27.

government

2. 13 Parl. Deb. (4th ser.) (1893) 1273.

documents

3. 407 Parl. Deb., H.C. (5th ser.) (1944--45) 425--46.

Although no longer the official name, Hansard (less often, Hansard's) is still sometimes used in

citations to all series of parliamentary debates. Such usage is best avoided, however.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> United Kingdom

of Contents

List of Figures

14.314 UK COMMAND PAPERS

List of Tables

Command papers are so called because they originate outside Parliament and are ostensibly

Index

presented to Parliament "by command of Her [His] Majesty." The different abbreviations for

"command" indicate the series and must not be altered. No s is added to the plural (Cmnd. 3834,

3835).

14.312:

UK statutes

No. 1 to No. 4222 (1833--69)

14.313:

C. 1 to C. 9550 (1870--99)

Publication of UK

parliamentary

Cd. 1 to Cd. 9239 (1900--1918)

debates

Cmd. 1 to Cmd. 9889 (1919--56)

14.314:

Cmnd. 1--9927 (1956--86)

UK command

Cm. 1-- (1986--)

papers

14.315:

Command papers may consist of a pamphlet or several volumes. If not clear from the context, the

Unpublished UK

government

author of the report is included. Dates may include a month or just a year.

documents

14.316:

4. HM Treasury, The Basle Facility and the Sterling Area, 1968, Cmnd. 3787, at 15--16.

Intergovernmental

5. First Interim Report of the Committee on Currency and Foreign Exchanges after the War, 1918, Cd.

bodies

9182.

6. Review Body on Doctors' and Dentists' Remuneration, Thirteenth Report, 1983, Cmnd. 8878.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> United Kingdom

of Contents

List of Figures

14.315 UNPUBLISHED UK GOVERNMENT DOCUMENTS

List of Tables

For general guidelines and many examples, which can be adapted to government documents, see

Index

14.232--42. The main depositories for unpublished government documents in the United Kingdom are

the National Archives (NA) and the British Library (BL), both in London. Their catalogs are available

online through the websites of the National Archives and the British Library. (The British Library is a

14.313:

division of the British Museum; before it was called the British Library, citations to documents housed

Publication of UK

parliamentary

therein used the abbreviation BM.) References usually include such classifications as Admiralty

debates

(Adm.), Chancery (C), Colonial Office (CO), Exchequer (E), Foreign Office (FO), or State Papers (SP)

14.314:

as well as the collection and volume numbers and, where relevant, the folio or page number(s).

UK command

papers

Among important collections in the British Library are the Cotton Manuscripts (with subdivisions

14.315:

named after Roman emperors, e.g., Cotton MSS, Caligula [Calig.] D.VII), the Harleian Manuscripts,

Unpublished UK

government

the Sloane Manuscripts, and the Additional Manuscripts (Add. or Addit.).

documents

14.316:

10. Patent Rolls, 3 Rich. 2, pt. 1, m. 12d (Calendar of Patent Rolls, 1377--1381, 470).

Intergovernmental

11. Hodgson to Halifax, 22 Feb. 1752, NA, CO 137:48.

bodies

12. Clarendon to Lumley, 16 Jan. 1869, NA, FO Belgium/133, no. 6.

14.317:

13. [Henry Elsynge], "The moderne forme of the Parliaments of England," BL, Add. MSS 26645.

International legal

and public

14. Minutes of the General Court, 17 Apr. 1733, 3:21, BL, Add. MSS 25545.

documents online

15. Letter of a Bristol Man, BL, Add. MSS 33029:152--55.

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> International Entities

of Contents

List of Figures

14.316 INTERGOVERNMENTAL BODIES

List of Tables

The Bluebook outlines the main reporters for international courts (such as the International Court of

Index

Justice), commissions, and tribunals. Also included are abbreviations for intergovernmental bodies

such as the United Nations (and its principal organs), the European Union, and those devoted to

specific areas such as human rights, trade, and health. The basic elements of citations to international

14.313:

law cases are similar to those used in US law citations (see 14.288--91); for examples, consult The

Publication of UK

parliamentary

Bluebook. (In addition to intergovernmental bodies, The Bluebook covers about three dozen foreign

debates

jurisdictions.) For treaties, see 14.302.

14.314:

UK command

papers

14.315:

Unpublished UK

government

documents

14.316:

Intergovernmental

bodies

14.317:

International legal

and public

documents online

14: DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Legal and Public Documents >> International Entities

of Contents

List of Figures

14.317 INTERNATIONAL LEGAL AND PUBLIC DOCUMENTS ONLINE

List of Tables

The United Nations makes many of its documents available online (in English)--including those

Index

published by the General Assembly and the Security Council and dating back to the first General

Assembly in 1946. The Bluebook provides guidance primarily for citing documents in the Official

Records, but it considers the United Nations website an acceptable alternative. Many of the

14.313:

documents published by the United Nations and other intergovernmental bodies are issued in the

Publication of UK

parliamentary

form of reports. In general, list by the authorizing body (and the author or editor where appropriate),

debates

the topic or title of the paper, and the date. Series and publication numbers, place of publication, and

14.314:

a page reference may be included. Abbreviations may be used in notes and, to avoid duplication, in

UK command

papers

bibliographies (UN = United Nations, LoNP = League of Nation Papers, WTO = World Trade

14.315:

Organization, and so forth). Include a URL as the final element in the citation (see 14.4--13).

Unpublished UK

government

documents

1. United Nations Security Council (SC), Resolution 7, "The Spanish Question," June 26, 1946,

http://www.un.org/documents/sc/res/1946/scres46.htm.

14.316:

Intergovernmental

2. SC, Resolution 1731, "The Situation in Liberia," Â¶ 4(a), Dec. 20, 2006,

bodies

http://www.un.org/Docs/sc/unsc_resolutions06.htm.

14.317:

3. UN General Assembly, Resolution 45/1, "Admission of the Principality of Lichtenstein to Membership in

International legal

and public

the United Nations," Sept. 18, 1990, http://www.un.org/Depts/dhl/res/resa45.htm.

documents online

14 : DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 14.1

List of Figures

A page of text with footnotes; the first note is continued from the previous page (with a short rule

List of Tables

above it). See 14.36. PDF Version >>

Index

14 : DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 14.2

List of Figures

A page of endnotes, with a subhead introducing the notes to a new chapter and a running head

List of Tables

showing the text pages on which the notes are referenced. See 14.41, 14.42. PDF Version >>

Index

14 : DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 14.3

List of Figures

Chapter endnotes (first page of notes only), prefaced by the subhead "Notes." See 14.41. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

14 : DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 14.4

List of Figures

Translator's footnote referenced by an asterisk, followed by author's numbered notes. Notes

List of Tables

referenced by symbols always precede numbered notes, regardless of the order in which the symbols

Index

and numbers appear in the text. See 14.46.

14 : DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 14.5

List of Figures

Footnotes keyed to line numbersâ€”a device best used with verse. (With prose, the notes cannot be

List of Tables

numbered until the text has been typeset.) See 14.48. PDF Version >>

Index

14 : DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 14.6

List of Figures

Endnotes keyed to page numbers, with key phrases italicized. See 14.48. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

14 : DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 14.7

List of Figures

A short list of abbreviations preceding endnotes. See 14.55. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

14 : DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 14.8

List of Figures

The first page of a bibliography for a book. See 14.57. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

14 : DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 14.9

List of Figures

The opening page of a bibliography divided into sections, with an author's note explaining the

List of Tables

principle of selection. See 14.58, 14.59. PDF Version >>

Index

14 : DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 14.10

List of Figures

Part of the first section of an annotated bibliography. See 14.59. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

14 : DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 14.11

List of Figures

Part of the first section of a bibliographic essay. See 14.59. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

14 : DOCUMENTATION I: NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 14.12

List of Figures

The first page of a discography. See 14.275. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

of Contents

Overview

List of Figures

15.1

The scope of this chapter

List of Tables

15.2

Uniform treatment in author-date references and notes and bibliography

15.3

Notes and bibliography entries as models for author-date references

Index

15.4

Considerations for electronic sources

Author-Date References: Basic Format, with Examples and Variations

15.5

The author-date system—overview

15.6

Basic structure of a reference list entry

15.7

Basic structure of an in-text citation

15.8

Page numbers and other locators

15.9

Author-date references—examples and variations

Reference Lists and Text Citations

Reference Lists

15.10 Function and placement of reference lists

15.11 Alphabetical arrangement of reference list entries

15.12 Authors' names in reference list entries

15.13 Titles in reference list entries

15.14 Placement of dates in reference list entries

15.15 Abbreviations in reference list entries

15.16 Single author versus several authors—reference list order

The 3-Em Dash for Repeated Names in a Reference List

15.17 Chronological order for repeated names in a reference list

15.18 The 3-em dash with edited, translated, or compiled works

15.19 Reference list entries with same author(s), same year

Text Citations

15.20 Agreement of text citation and reference list entry

15.21 Text citations—basic form

15.22 Page and volume numbers or other specific locators in text citations

15.23 Additional material in text citations

15.24 Text citations in relation to surrounding text and punctuation

15.25 Text citations in relation to direct quotations

15.26 Several references to the same source

15.27 Syntactic considerations with text citations

15.28 Text citations of works with more than three authors

15.29 Multiple text references

15.30 Author-date system with notes

Author-Date References: Special Cases

15.31 Items not necessarily covered in chapter 14

Books

Author's Name

15.32 Anonymous works—unknown authorship

15.33 Anonymous works—known authorship

15.34 Pseudonyms in author-date references

15.35 Editor in place of author in text citations

15.36 Organization as author in author-date references

Title

15.37 Cross-references to other titles in reference lists

Edition, Volume, or Collection

15.38 Reprint editions and modern editions—more than one date

15.39 Multivolume works published over more than one year

15.40 Letters in published collections

Facts of Publication

15.41 "No date" in author-date references

15.42 "Forthcoming" in author-date references

Periodicals

15.43 Publications preferring initials for authors' names

15.44 Publications preferring abbreviations for journal titles

15.45 Publications preferring sentence-style capitalization for titles

15.46 Parentheses with issue number

15.47 Newspapers and magazines in reference lists

Unpublished and Informally Published Material

15.48 Unpublished interviews and personal communications

15.49 Manuscript collections in the author-date style

15.50 Patents or other documents cited by more than one date

15.51 Access dates with website content

Citations Taken from Secondary Sources

15.52 "Quoted in" in author-date references

Audiovisual Materials

15.53 Citing audiovisual materials in author-date format

Legal and Public Documents

15.54 Using notes for legal and public documents

15.55 Citing legal and public documents in text

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

15.1 THE SCOPE OF THIS CHAPTER

List of Tables

This chapter describes the second of Chicago's two systems of documentation, which uses

Index

parenthetical author-date references and a corresponding reference list. Because this system is similar

in many respects to the notes and bibliography system discussed in chapter 14, much of the

information from that chapter is not repeated here. For an introduction to source citations in general,

15.1:

including a discussion of systems other than the two recommended by Chicago, readers are

The scope of this

chapter

encouraged to consult the overview in chapter 14 (14.1--13).

15.2:

Uniform treatment

in author-date

references and

notes and

bibliography

15.3:

Notes and

bibliography

entries as models

for author-date

references

15.4:

Considerations for

electronic sources

15.5:

The author-date

systemâ€”overview

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

15.2 UNIFORM TREATMENT IN AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES AND NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

List of Tables

In a departure from previous editions of this manual, Chicago now recommends a uniform treatment

Index

for the main elements of citation in both of its systems of documentation. In particular, the forms

recommended in chapter 14 for authors' names (full names rather than initials) and titles of works

(headline-style capitalization and use of quotation marks and italics) are now identical in the author-

15.1:

date system, as are recommendations regarding the use of abbreviations. Other differences remain

The scope of this

chapter

unchanged--namely, the author-date system's use of parenthetical text citations rather than citations in

15.2:

notes and, in the bibliography (called a reference list), a different placement for the year of

Uniform treatment

publication. For the use of notes with the author-date system, see 15.30.

in author-date

references and

notes and

bibliography

15.3:

Notes and

bibliography

entries as models

for author-date

references

15.4:

Considerations for

electronic sources

15.5:

The author-date

systemâ€”overview

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

15.3 NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY ENTRIES AS MODELS FOR AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

List of Tables

Most of the examples in chapter 14 are readily adapted to the author-date style--in almost all cases by

Index

a different ordering or arrangement of elements. Most reference list entries are identical to entries in a

bibliography except for the position of the year of publication, which in a reference list follows the

author's name. Unlike bibliography entries (see 14.59), each entry in the reference list must correspond

15.1:

to a work cited in the text. Text citations differ from citations in notes by presenting only the author's

The scope of this

chapter

last name and the year of publication, followed by a page number or other locator, if any. This

15.2:

chapter, by focusing on these and other differences, will allow readers to adapt any of the examples in

Uniform treatment

chapter 14 to the author-date system.

in author-date

references and

notes and

bibliography

15.3:

Notes and

bibliography

entries as models

for author-date

references

15.4:

Considerations for

electronic sources

15.5:

The author-date

systemâ€”overview

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

15.4 CONSIDERATIONS FOR ELECTRONIC SOURCES

List of Tables

For a detailed discussion of URLs and DOIs, access dates and revision dates, and other considerations

Index

for citing electronic sources, see 14.4--13. For most electronic sources, Chicago recommends the

addition of a URL or DOI following the full facts of publication. For examples in the author-date

style, see 15.9, under Journal Article. For more examples, see 14.167, 14.169, and throughout the

15.2:

discussions on periodicals (14.170--217) and elsewhere in chapter 14. Some citations will require an

Uniform treatment

in author-date

access date; for examples, see 14.245, 14.248, and 15.51.

references and

notes and

bibliography

15.3:

Notes and

bibliography

entries as models

for author-date

references

15.4:

Considerations for

electronic sources

15.5:

The author-date

systemâ€”overview

15.6:

Basic structure of a

reference list entry

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Basic Format, with Examples and Variations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.5 THE AUTHOR-DATE SYSTEM--OVERVIEW

List of Tables

The author-date system is used by many in the physical, natural, and social sciences and is

Index

recommended by Chicago for works in those areas. Sources are cited in the text, usually in

parentheses, by the author's last (family) name, the publication date of the work cited, and a page

number if needed. Full details appear in the reference list--usually titled "References" or "Works

15.3:

Cited"--in which the year of publication appears immediately after the author's name (see fig. 15.1).

Notes and

bibliography

This arrangement makes it easy to follow a text citation to the corresponding full source in the

entries as models

for author-date

reference list. (In electronic works, text entries may be hyperlinked to their corresponding reference

references

list entries.)

15.4:

Considerations for

Text citations:

electronic sources

15.5:

As legal observers point out, much dispute resolution transpires outside the courtroom but in the "shadow

The author-date

systemâ€”overview

of the law" (Mnookin and Kornhauser 1979). . . . Here we empirically demonstrate that workers' and

15.6:

regulatory agents' understandings of discrimination and legality emerge not only in the shadow of the law

Basic structure of a

but also, as Albiston (2005) suggests, in the "shadow of organizations."

reference list entry

15.7:

Reference list entries:

Basic structure of

an in-text citation

Albiston, Catherine R. 2005. "Bargaining in the Shadow of Social Institutions: Competing Discourses and

Social Change in the Workplace Mobilization of Civil Rights." Law and Society Review 39 (1): 11--47.

Mnookin, Robert, and Lewis Kornhauser. 1979. "Bargaining in the Shadow of the Law: The Case of Divorce."

Yale Law Journal 88 (5): 950--97.

For more examples of text citations and reference list entries, see 15.9. For a detailed discussion of

reference lists, see 15.10--16 and 15.17--19. For text citations, see 15.20--30.

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Basic Format, with Examples and Variations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.6 BASIC STRUCTURE OF A REFERENCE LIST ENTRY

List of Tables

In a reference list entry, the year of publication is the second element, following the author's name.

Index

Otherwise, a reference list entry is structured like an entry in a bibliography (see 14.16): the elements

are separated by periods, and the first-listed author's name, according to which the entry is

alphabetized in the reference list, is usually inverted (last name first). Titles are capitalized headline-

15.4:

style unless they are in a foreign language (see 8.157, 11.3); titles of larger works such as books and

Considerations for

electronic sources

journals are italicized; and titles of smaller works such as journal articles are presented in roman and

15.5:

enclosed in quotation marks (see 8.161). Noun forms such as editor, translator, volume, and edition are

The author-date

abbreviated, but verb forms such as edited by and translated by are spelled out.

systemâ€”overview

15.6:

Basic structure of a

reference list entry

15.7:

Basic structure of

an in-text citation

15.8:

Page numbers and

other locators

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Basic Format, with Examples and Variations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.7 BASIC STRUCTURE OF AN IN-TEXT CITATION

List of Tables

In the author-date system, a citation in the text usually appears in parentheses and includes only the

Index

first two elements in a reference list--the author and the year of publication (hence the name of the

system), with no intervening punctuation. In addition, a page number or other locator may be added,

following a comma. Terms such as editor or translator, abbreviated in a reference list, are not included

15.5:

in a text citation.

The author-date

systemâ€”overview

15.6:

Basic structure of a

reference list entry

15.7:

Basic structure of

an in-text citation

15.8:

Page numbers and

other locators

15.9:

Author-date

referencesâ

€”examples and

variations

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Basic Format, with Examples and Variations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.8 PAGE NUMBERS AND OTHER LOCATORS

List of Tables

In text citations, where reference is usually to a particular passage in a book or journal, only the page

Index

number(s) pertaining to that passage are given. In reference lists, no page numbers are given for

books; for easier location of journal articles or chapters or other sections of a book, the beginning and

ending page numbers of the entire article or chapter are given. Electronic sources do not always

15.6:

include page numbers (and some that do include them repaginate according to user-defined font

Basic structure of a

reference list entry

sizes). For such works without fixed pagination, it may be appropriate in text to cite a chapter or

15.7:

paragraph number (if available), a section heading, or a descriptive phrase that follows the

Basic structure of

organizational divisions of the work. For examples, see 15.22. For citations of shorter electronic works

an in-text citation

presented as a single, searchable document, such locators may be unnecessary.

15.8:

Page numbers and

other locators

15.9:

Author-date

referencesâ

€”examples and

variations

15.10:

Function and

placement of

reference lists

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Basic Format, with Examples and Variations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.9 AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES--EXAMPLES AND VARIATIONS

List of Tables

The examples that follow are intended to provide an overview of the author-date system, featuring

Index

books and journal articles as models. Each example includes a reference list entry and a

corresponding text citation. For the sake of consistency, text citations are presented in parentheses,

though they do not always appear that way in practice (see 15.27). For more examples, consult the

15.7:

sections dealing with specific types of works throughout this chapter.

Basic structure of

an in-text citation

BOOK WITH SINGLE AUTHOR OR EDITOR

15.8:

Page numbers and

other locators

For a book with a single author, invert the name in the reference list; in the text, include only the last

15.9:

name. Punctuate and capitalize as shown. To cite a specific passage, a page number or range is

Author-date

included in a text citation (separated from the year by a comma) but not in a reference list, unless the

references—

examples and

entry is for a chapter, in which case the page range on which the item appears is included (see

variations

"Chapter in an Edited Book," below; see also 9.58--63).

15.10:

Function and

placement of

Pollan, Michael. 2006. The Omnivore's Dilemma: A Natural History of Four Meals. New York: Penguin.

reference lists

15.11:

(Pollan 2006, 99--100)

Alphabetical

arrangement of

reference list

A book with an editor in place of an author includes the abbreviation ed. ( editor; for more than one

entries

editor, use eds. ). Note that the text citation does not include ed.

Greenberg, Joel, ed. 2008. Of Prairie, Woods, and Water: Two Centuries of Chicago Nature Writing. Chicago:

University of Chicago Press.

(Greenberg 2008, 42)

BOOK WITH MULTIPLE AUTHORS

For a book with two authors, only the first-listed name is inverted in the reference list.

Ward, Geoffrey C., and Ken Burns. 2007. The War: An Intimate History, 1941--1945. New York: Knopf.

(Ward and Burns 2007, 52)

For a book with three authors, adapt as follows:

Heatherton, Joyce, James Fitzgilroy, and Jackson Hsu. 2008. Meteors and Mudslides: A Trip through . . .

(Heatherton, Fitzgilroy, and Hsu 2008, 188--89)

For a book with four or more authors, include all the authors in the reference list entry (see also

14.76). Word order and punctuation are the same as for two or three authors. In the text, however,

cite only the last name of the first-listed author, followed by et al. (see also 15.28).

(Barnes et al. 2008, 118--19)

BOOK WITH AUTHOR PLUS EDITOR OR TRANSLATOR

In the reference list, do not abbreviate Edited by or Translated by. See also 14.88.

García Márquez, Gabriel. 1988. Love in the Time of Cholera. Translated by Edith Grossman. London: Cape.

(García Márquez 1988, 242--55)

CHAPTER IN AN EDITED BOOK

In citations of a chapter or similar part of an edited book, include the chapter author; the chapter title,

in quotation marks; and the editor. Precede the title of the book with In. Note the location of the page

range for the chapter in the reference list entry. See also 14.111--17.

Gould, Glenn. 1984. "Streisand as Schwarzkopf." In The Glenn Gould Reader, edited by Tim Page, 308--11.

New York: Vintage.

(Gould 1984, 310)

JOURNAL ARTICLE

Citations of journals include the volume and issue number and date of publication. The volume

number follows the italicized journal title in roman and with no intervening punctuation. A specific

page reference is included in the text; the page range for an article is included in the reference list,

preceded by a colon. The issue number often appears in parentheses (as in the first pair of examples

below). If a journal is paginated consecutively across a volume or if the month or season is included

in the reference list entry, however, the issue number (or month or season) may be omitted (as in the

second and third pairs of examples).

Blair, Walter. 1977. "Americanized Comic Braggarts." Critical Inquiry 4 (2): 331--49.

(Blair 1977, 331--32)

For citations of journals consulted online, Chicago recommends the inclusion of a DOI or a URL; the

DOI is preferred to a URL (see 14.5, 14.6). Note that DOI, so capitalized when mentioned in running

text, is lowercased and followed by a colon (with no space after) in source citations.

Novak, William J. 2008. "The Myth of the ‘Weak' American State." American Historical Review 113:752--72.

doi:10.1086/ahr.113.3.752.

(Novak 2008, 758)

When no DOI has been provided along with the article at the site where it is consulted (even if one

has been assigned), include a URL. The URL in the following example--consulted through the online

journals archive JSTOR--was listed along with the article as a more stable (and shorter) alternative to

the URL that appeared in the browser's address bar:

Karmaus, Wilfried, and John F. Riebow. 2004. "Storage of Serum in Plastic and Glass Containers May Alter

the Serum Concentration of Polychlorinated Biphenyls." Environmental Health Perspectives 112 (May): 643--

47. http://www.jstor.org/stable/3435987.

(Karmaus and Riebow 2004, 645)

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Reference Lists

of Contents

List of Figures

15.10 FUNCTION AND PLACEMENT OF REFERENCE LISTS

List of Tables

In the author-date system, the reference list is the prime vehicle for documentation. The text citations

Index

(see 15.20--30) are merely pointers to the full list. A reference list, like other types of bibliographies

(see 14.59), is normally placed at the end of a work, preceding the index, if there is one. In a

multiauthor book, a textbook, or a journal article, each chapter or article may be followed by its own

15.8:

reference list, in which case the list is preceded by a subhead such as References or Literature Cited.

Page numbers and

other locators

15.9:

Author-date

referencesâ

€”examples and

variations

15.10:

Function and

placement of

reference lists

15.11:

Alphabetical

arrangement of

reference list

entries

15.12:

Authors' names in

reference list

entries

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Reference Lists

of Contents

List of Figures

15.11 ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT OF REFERENCE LIST ENTRIES

List of Tables

A reference list is always arranged alphabetically (except in a numbered reference system; see 14.3)

Index

and should generally not be divided into sections. (Types of sources that are not readily adapted to

author-date style are often better cited in notes; see, for example, 15.54--55.) All sources are listed by

the last names of the authors (or, if no author or editor is given, by the title or by a keyword readers

15.9:

are most likely to seek). Rules for alphabetizing an index (see 16.56--93) apply also to a reference list,

Author-date

referencesâ

with the modifications described in 14.61, 14.62, and 15.17--19. For an illustration, see figure 15.1.

€”examples and

variations

15.10:

Function and

placement of

reference lists

15.11:

Alphabetical

arrangement of

reference list

entries

15.12:

Authors' names in

reference list

entries

15.13:

Titles in reference

list entries

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Reference Lists

of Contents

List of Figures

15.12 AUTHORS' NAMES IN REFERENCE LIST ENTRIES

List of Tables

In a reference list as in a bibliography, use the form of authors' names as they appear on the title page

Index

or at the head of an article or chapter, with the exceptions noted in 14.72--92; see also 14.175. This

treatment brings Chicago's author-date system into conformity with the style recommended for notes

and bibliographies in chapter 14. Some publications, especially in the natural sciences, use initials

15.10:

rather than full given names (see 15.43). Where this practice is followed, an exception should be made

Function and

placement of

where two authors share the same initials and last name. For text citations, see 15.21.

reference lists

15.11:

Alphabetical

arrangement of

reference list

entries

15.12:

Authors' names in

reference list

entries

15.13:

Titles in reference

list entries

15.14:

Placement of dates

in reference list

entries

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Reference Lists

of Contents

List of Figures

15.13 TITLES IN REFERENCE LIST ENTRIES

List of Tables

Titles and subtitles of books and articles in reference lists should be treated according to the rules set

Index

forth in 8.154--95 (see also 11.3). This is also the treatment recommended for titles in chapter 14,

bringing Chicago's author-date system into conformity with the style for notes and bibliographies. It

is recognized, however, that some publications--particularly journals in the natural sciences--prefer

15.11:

sentence-style treatment for titles (see 8.156), tend not to use quotation marks or italics, and

Alphabetical

arrangement of

abbreviate journal titles (see 15.44).

reference list

entries

15.12:

Authors' names in

reference list

entries

15.13:

Titles in reference

list entries

15.14:

Placement of dates

in reference list

entries

15.15:

Abbreviations in

reference list

entries

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Reference Lists

of Contents

List of Figures

15.14 PLACEMENT OF DATES IN REFERENCE LIST ENTRIES

List of Tables

Because the text citations consist of the last name of the author or authors (or that of the editor or

Index

translator) and the year of publication, the year in the reference list appears directly after the name,

not with the publication details. This arrangement facilitates easy lookup of reference list entries.

15.12:

Choi, Stephen J., and G. Mitu Gulati. 2008. "Bias in Judicial Citations: A Window into the Behavior of

Authors' names in

Judges?" Journal of Legal Studies 37 (January): 87--129. doi:10.1086/588263.

reference list

entries

Heinrich, Larissa. 2008. The Afterlife of Images: Translating the Pathological Body between China and the West.

Durham, NC: Duke University Press.

15.13:

Titles in reference

list entries

15.14:

Placement of dates

in reference list

entries

15.15:

Abbreviations in

reference list

entries

15.16:

Single author

versus several

authorsâ

€”reference list

order

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Reference Lists

of Contents

List of Figures

15.15 ABBREVIATIONS IN REFERENCE LIST ENTRIES

List of Tables

Chicago's primary recommendations for the use of abbreviations in reference lists are now identical to

Index

the recommendations for bibliographies outlined in chapter 14. Spell out such phrases as edited by or

translated by, which are capitalized if following a period. On the other hand, noun forms such as editor

( ed. ), and translator ( trans. ) are always abbreviated in reference lists, as are such standard

15.13:

bibliographical terms as volume ( vol. ), number ( no. ), and so forth. Abbreviations may be used with

Titles in reference

list entries

greater frequency as long as they are used consistently. For example, University may be abbreviated to

15.14:

Univ. , and months given with journal citations may be abbreviated (see 10.40). See also 15.43, 15.44.

Placement of dates

in reference list

entries

15.15:

Abbreviations in

reference list

entries

15.16:

Single author

versus several

authorsâ

€”reference list

order

15.17:

Chronological order

for repeated names

in a reference list

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Reference Lists

of Contents

List of Figures

15.16 SINGLE AUTHOR VERSUS SEVERAL AUTHORS--REFERENCE LIST ORDER

List of Tables

As in a bibliography, a single-author entry precedes a multiauthor entry beginning with the same

Index

name. Only the first author's name is inverted. Successive entries by two or more authors in which

only the first author's name is the same are alphabetized according to the coauthors' last names

(regardless of how many coauthors there are).

15.14:

Placement of dates

Edelman, Lauren B. 1992. "Legal Ambiguity and Symbolic Structures: Organizational Mediation of Civil

in reference list

entries

Rights Law." American Journal of Sociology 97 (6): 1531--76.

15.15:

Edelman, Lauren B., Sally Riggs Fuller, and Iona Mara-Drita. 2001. "Diversity Rhetoric and the

Abbreviations in

Managerialization of the Law." American Journal of Sociology 106 (6): 1589--641.

reference list

entries

Edelman, Lauren B., and S. M. Petterson. 1999. "Symbols and Substance in Organizational Response to Civil

Rights Law." Research in Social Stratification and Mobility 17:107--35.

15.16:

Single author

Edelman, Lauren B., Christopher Uggen, and Howard S. Erlanger. 1999. "The Endogeneity of Legal

versus several

Regulation: Grievance Procedures as Rational Myth." American Journal of Sociology 105 (2): 406--54.

authorsâ

€”reference list

order

15.17:

Chronological order

for repeated names

in a reference list

15.18:

The 3-em dash

with edited,

translated, or

compiled works

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> The 3-Em Dash for Repeated Names in a Reference List

of Contents

List of Figures

15.17 CHRONOLOGICAL ORDER FOR REPEATED NAMES IN A REFERENCE LIST

List of Tables

For successive entries by the same author(s), translator(s), editor(s), or compiler(s), a 3-em dash

Index

replaces the name(s) after the first appearance. The entries are arranged chronologically by year of

publication in ascending order, not alphabetized by title (as in a bibliography; see 14.67). Undated

works designated n.d. or forthcoming follow all dated works (see 15.41, 15.42). See also 14.63.

15.15:

Abbreviations in

Schuman, Howard, and Jacqueline Scott. 1987. "Problems in the Use of Survey Questions to Measure Public

reference list

entries

Opinion." Science 236:957--59.

15.16:

———. 1989. "Generations and Collective Memories." American Sociological Review 54:359--81.

Single author

versus several

Note that the 3-em dash cannot stand in for the same two or more authors as in the previous entry if

authors—reference

list order

they appear in a different order. The following two entries are alphabetized as if they are by two

15.17:

different sets of authors:

Chronological order

for repeated names

in a reference list

Comaroff, Jean, and John Comaroff, eds. 1993. Modernity and Its Malcontents: Ritual and Power in Postcolonial

Africa. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

15.18:

The 3-em dash

Comaroff, John, and Jean Comaroff. 1991--97. Of Revelation and Revolution. 2 vols. Chicago: University of

with edited,

Chicago Press.

translated, or

compiled works

15.19:

Reference list

entries with same

author(s), same

year

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> The 3-Em Dash for Repeated Names in a Reference List

of Contents

List of Figures

15.18 THE 3-EM DASH WITH EDITED, TRANSLATED, OR COMPILED WORKS

List of Tables

The 3-em dash replaces the preceding name or names only, not an added ed. , trans. , comp. , or

Index

whatever. The chronological order is maintained, regardless of the added abbreviation.

Woodward, David. 1977. The All-American Map: Wax Engraving and Its Influence on Cartography. Chicago:

15.16:

University of Chicago Press.

Single author

———, ed. 1987. Art and Cartography: Six Historical Essays. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

versus several

authors—reference

———. 1996. Catalogue of Watermarks in Italian Printed Maps, ca. 1540--1600. Chicago: University of Chicago

list order

Press.

15.17:

Chronological order

Woodward is the author of the first and third items, editor of the second.

for repeated names

in a reference list

15.18:

The 3-em dash

with edited,

translated, or

compiled works

15.19:

Reference list

entries with same

author(s), same

year

15.20:

Agreement of text

citation and

reference list entry

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> The 3-Em Dash for Repeated Names in a Reference List

of Contents

List of Figures

15.19 REFERENCE LIST ENTRIES WITH SAME AUTHOR(S), SAME YEAR

List of Tables

Two or more works by the same author in the same year must be differentiated by the addition of a,

Index

b, and so forth (regardless of whether they were authored, edited, compiled, or translated), and are

listed alphabetically by title. Text citations consist of author and year plus letter.

15.17:

Fogel, Robert William. 2004a. The Escape from Hunger and Premature Death, 1700--2100: Europe, America, and

Chronological order

the Third World. New York: Cambridge University Press, 2004.

for repeated names

in a reference list

———. 2004b. "Technophysio Evolution and the Measurement of Economic Growth." Journal of Evolutionary

Economics 14 (2): 217--21. doi:10.1007/s00191-004-0188-x.

15.18:

The 3-em dash

with edited,

(Fogel 2004b, 218)

translated, or

compiled works

(Fogel 2004a, 45--46)

15.19:

Reference list

When works by the same two or more authors list their names in a different order, then a, b, and so

entries with same

forth cannot be used. See 15.17.

author(s), same

year

15.20:

Agreement of text

citation and

reference list entry

15.21:

Text citations—

basic form

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Text Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.20 AGREEMENT OF TEXT CITATION AND REFERENCE LIST ENTRY

List of Tables

For each author-date citation in the text, there must be a corresponding entry in the reference list

Index

under the same name and date. It is the author's responsibility to ensure such agreement as well as

the accuracy of the reference (see 2.29). Among other things, specific page references to a journal

article, when given in a text citation, must fall within the range of pages given for the article in the

15.18:

reference list entry. Manuscript editors can help authors by cross-checking text citations and reference

The 3-em dash

with edited,

lists and rectifying or querying any discrepancies or omissions (see 2.60).

translated, or

compiled works

15.19:

Reference list

entries with same

author(s), same

year

15.20:

Agreement of text

citation and

reference list entry

15.21:

Text citationsâ

€”basic form

15.22:

Page and volume

numbers or other

specific locators in

text citations

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Text Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.21 TEXT CITATIONS--BASIC FORM

List of Tables

An author-date citation in running text or at the end of a block quotation consists of the last (family)

Index

name of the author, followed by the year of publication of the work in question. In this context, author

may refer not only to one or more authors or an institution but also to one or more editors,

translators, or compilers. No punctuation appears between author and date. Abbreviations such as ed.

15.19:

or trans. are omitted. See also 15.22.

Reference list

entries with same

author(s), same

Text citations:

year

15.20:

(Woodward 1987)

Agreement of text

citation and

(Schuman and Scott 1987)

reference list entry

15.21:

References:

Text citationsâ

€”basic form

Schuman, Howard, and Jacqueline Scott. 1987. "Problems in the Use of Survey Questions to Measure Public

15.22:

Opinion." Science 236:957--59.

Page and volume

numbers or other

Woodward, David, ed. 1987. Art and Cartography: Six Historical Essays. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

specific locators in

text citations

Where two or more works by different authors with the same last name are listed in a reference list,

15.23:

the text citation must include an initial (or two initials or a given name if necessary).

Additional material

in text citations

Text citations:

(C. Doershuk 2010)

(J. Doershuk 2009)

References:

Doershuk, Carl. 2010. . . .

Doershuk, John. 2009. . . .

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Text Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.22 PAGE AND VOLUME NUMBERS OR OTHER SPECIFIC LOCATORS IN TEXT CITATIONS

List of Tables

When a specific page, section, equation, or other division of the work is cited, it follows the date,

Index

preceded by a comma. When a volume as a whole is referred to, without a page number, vol. is used.

For volume plus page, only a colon is needed. The n in the Fischer and Siple example below indicates

"note" (see 14.164). The last example shows how one might cite a section of a work that contains no

15.20:

page or section numbers or other numerical signposts--the case for some electronic documents (see

Agreement of text

citation and

15.8).

reference list entry

15.21:

(Piaget 1980, 74)

Text citationsâ

(LaFree 2010, 413, 417--18)

€”basic form

(Johnson 1979, sec. 24)

15.22:

Page and volume

(Fowler and Hoyle 1965, eq. 87)

numbers or other

(GarcÃa 1987, vol. 2)

specific locators in

text citations

(GarcÃa 1987, 2:345)

(Barnes 1998, 2:354--55, 3:29)

15.23:

Additional material

(Fischer and Siple 1990, 212n3)

in text citations

(Hellman 1998, under "The Battleground")

15.24:

Text citations in

Some journals omit page numbers in citations of other journal articles except when citing a direct

relation to

surrounding text

quotation.

and punctuation

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Text Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.23 ADDITIONAL MATERIAL IN TEXT CITATIONS

List of Tables

The parentheses that enclose a text citation may also include a comment, separated from the citation

Index

by a semicolon.

(Mandolan 2009; t-tests are used here)

15.21:

Text citationsâ

€”basic form

15.22:

Page and volume

numbers or other

specific locators in

text citations

15.23:

Additional material

in text citations

15.24:

Text citations in

relation to

surrounding text

and punctuation

15.25:

Text citations in

relation to direct

quotations

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Text Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.24 TEXT CITATIONS IN RELATION TO SURROUNDING TEXT AND PUNCTUATION

List of Tables

Except at the end of block quotations (see 15.25), author-date citations are usually placed just before a

Index

mark of punctuation. See also 15.27.

Recent literature has examined long-run price drifts following initial public offerings (Ritter 1991; Loughran

15.22:

and Ritter 1995), stock splits (Ikenberry, Rankine, and Stice 1996), seasoned equity offerings (Loughran and

Page and volume

Ritter 1995), and equity repurchases (Ikenberry, Lakonishok, and Vermaelen 1995).

numbers or other

specific locators in

text citations

Where the author's name appears in the text, it need not be repeated in the parenthetical citation.

15.23:

Note that the date should immediately follow the author's name, even if the name is used in the

Additional material

possessive. This slight departure from advice in earlier editions of the manual serves the logic and

in text citations

economy of the author-date style.

15.24:

Text citations in

relation to

Fiorina et al. (2005) and Fischer and Hout (2006) reach more or less the same conclusions. In contrast,

surrounding text

and punctuation

Abramowitz and Saunders (2005) suggest that the mass public is deeply divided between red states and

blue states and between churchgoers and secular voters.

15.25:

Text citations in

relation to direct

Tufte's (2001) excellent book on chart design warns against a common error.

quotations

15.26:

Several references

to the same source

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Text Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.25 TEXT CITATIONS IN RELATION TO DIRECT QUOTATIONS

List of Tables

Although citation of a source normally follows a direct quotation, it may precede the quotation--

Index

especially if such a placement allows the date to appear with the author's name.

As Edward Tufte points out, "A graphical element may carry data information and also perform a design

15.23:

function usually left to non-data-ink" (2001, 139).

Additional material

in text citations

or

15.24:

Text citations in

As Edward Tufte (2001, 139) points out, "A graphical element may carry data information and also perform

relation to

a design function usually left to non-data-ink."

surrounding text

and punctuation

When the source of a block quotation is given in parentheses at the end of the quotation, the opening

15.25:

Text citations in

parenthesis appears after the final punctuation mark of the quoted material. No period either precedes

relation to direct

or follows the closing parenthesis.

quotations

15.26:

If you happen to be fishing, and you get a strike, and whatever it is starts off with the preliminaries of a

Several references

to the same source

vigorous fight; and by and by, looking down over the side through the glassy water, you see a rosy golden

15.27:

gleam, the mere specter of a fish, shining below in the clear depths; and when you look again a sort of glory

Syntactic

of golden light flashes and dazzles as it circles nearer beneath and around and under the boat; . . . and you

considerations with

text citations

land a slim and graceful and impossibly beautiful three-foot goldfish, whose fierce and vivid yellow is

touched around the edges with a violent red--when all these things happen to you, fortunate but bewildered

fisherman, then you may know you have been fishing in the Galapagos Islands and have taken a Golden

Grouper. (Pinchot 1930, 123)

See also 13.68--70.

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Text Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.26 SEVERAL REFERENCES TO THE SAME SOURCE

List of Tables

When the same page (or page range) in the same source is cited more than once in one paragraph, the

Index

parenthetical citation can be placed after the last reference or at the end of the paragraph (but

preceding the final period). When referring to different pages in the same source, however, include a

full parenthetical citation at the first reference; subsequent citations need only include page numbers.

15.24:

Text citations in

Complexion figures prominently in Morgan's descriptions. When Jasper compliments his mother's choice of

relation to

surrounding text

car (a twelve-cylinder Mediterranean roadster with leather and wood-grained interior), "his cheeks blotch

and punctuation

indignantly, painted by jealousy and rage" (Chaston 2000, 47). On the other hand, his mother's mask never

15.25:

changes, her "even-tanned good looks" (56), "burnished visage" (101), and "air-brushed confidence" (211)

Text citations in

relation to direct

providing the foil to the drama in her midst.

quotations

15.26:

Several references

to the same source

15.27:

Syntactic

considerations with

text citations

15.28:

Text citations of

works with more

than three authors

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Text Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.27 SYNTACTIC CONSIDERATIONS WITH TEXT CITATIONS

List of Tables

An author-date citation is a form of bibliographic shorthand that corresponds to a fully cited work; it

Index

does not refer to a person. Note how, in the examples in 15.24 and 15.25, the wording distinguishes

between authors and works. A locution such as "in Smith 2009," though technically proper, is usually

best avoided except as part of a parenthetical citation. Reword--for example, "Smith's (1999) study

15.25:

indicates that . . ." Note that square brackets should be used in parenthetical text references that

Text citations in

relation to direct

require additional parentheses, as in the second example (see 6.99).

quotations

15.26:

There are at least three works that satisfy the criteria outlined in Smith's (1999) study (see Rowen 2006;

Several references

Bettelthorp 2004a; Choi 2008).

to the same source

15.27:

These processes have, in turn, affected the way many Latin Americans are treated in the United States (see,

Syntactic

considerations with

e.g., Haviland [2003, 767] on how US courts disregard the existence of indigenous languages and

text citations

"reluctantly" make allowance only for Spanish in translation services).

15.28:

Text citations of

works with more

than three authors

15.29:

Multiple text

references

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Text Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.28 TEXT CITATIONS OF WORKS WITH MORE THAN THREE AUTHORS

List of Tables

For more than three authors (or in some science publications, more than two), only the name of the

Index

first author is used, followed by et al. (and others). Note that et al. is not italicized in text citations.

(Schonen et al. 2009)

15.26:

According to the data collected by Schonen et al. (2009), . . .

Several references

to the same source

If a reference list includes another work of the same date that would also be abbreviated as "Schonen

15.27:

et al." but whose coauthors are different persons or listed in a different order, the text citations must

Syntactic

considerations with

distinguish between them. In such cases, the first two authors (or the first three) should be cited,

text citations

followed by et al.

15.28:

Text citations of

works with more

(Schonen, Baker, et al. 2009)

than three authors

(Schonen, Brooks, et al. 2009)

15.29:

Multiple text

Alternatively, a shortened title, enclosed in commas, may be added. In the following examples, et al.

references

refers to different coauthors, so a, b, and so on cannot be used (see 15.19):

15.30:

Author-date system

with notes

(Schonen et al., "Tilting at Windmills," 2009)

(Schonen et al., "Gasoline Farmers," 2009)

For treatment of multiple authors in a bibliography or reference list, see 14.76, 15.9.

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Text Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.29 MULTIPLE TEXT REFERENCES

List of Tables

Two or more references in a single parenthetical citation are separated by semicolons. The order in

Index

which they are given may depend on what is being cited, and in what order, or it may reflect the

relative importance of the items cited. If neither criterion applies, alphabetical or chronological order

may be appropriate. Unless the order is prescribed by a particular journal style, the decision is the

15.27:

author's.

Syntactic

considerations with

text citations

(Armstrong and Malacinski 1989; Beigl 1989; Pickett and White 1985)

15.28:

Text citations of

Additional works by the same author(s) are cited by date only, separated by commas except where

works with more

than three authors

page numbers are required.

15.29:

Multiple text

(Whittaker 1967, 1975; Wiens 1989a, 1989b)

references

(Wong 1999, 328; 2000, 475; GarcÃa 1998, 67)

15.30:

Author-date system

with notes

15.31:

Items not

necessarily covered

in chapter 14

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Reference Lists and Text Citations >> Text Citations

of Contents

List of Figures

15.30 AUTHOR-DATE SYSTEM WITH NOTES

List of Tables

Where footnotes or endnotes are used to supplement the author-date system, source citations within

Index

notes are treated in the same way as in text (see fig. 15.2).

10. James Wilson has noted that "no politician ever lost votes by denouncing the bureaucracy" (1989, 235).

15.28:

Yet little is actually ever done to bring major reforms to the system.

Text citations of

works with more

For the use of notes with legal-style citations, see 15.54. For more on footnotes and endnotes, see

than three authors

14.19--55.

15.29:

Multiple text

references

15.30:

Author-date system

with notes

15.31:

Items not

necessarily covered

in chapter 14

15.32:

Anonymous worksâ

€”unknown

authorship

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases

of Contents

List of Figures

15.31 ITEMS NOT NECESSARILY COVERED IN CHAPTER 14

List of Tables

The majority of examples in chapter 14 can be adapted to the author-date system with relative ease

Index

(see 15.3). This section focuses on special cases not necessarily covered there or for which a suitable

author-date form may not be apparent.

15.29:

Multiple text

references

15.30:

Author-date system

with notes

15.31:

Items not

necessarily covered

in chapter 14

15.32:

Anonymous worksâ

€”unknown

authorship

15.33:

Anonymous worksâ

€”known

authorship

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

15.32 ANONYMOUS WORKS--UNKNOWN AUTHORSHIP

List of Tables

If the author or editor is unknown, the reference list entry should normally begin with the title. An

Index

initial article is ignored in alphabetizing. Text citations may refer to a short form of the title but must

include the first word (other than an initial article). See also 14.79.

15.30:

Stanze in lode della donna brutta. 1547. Florence.

Author-date system

A True and Sincere Declaration of the Purpose and Ends of the Plantation Begun in Virginia, of the Degrees Which It

with notes

Hath Received, and Means by Which It Hath Been Advanced. 1610. London.

15.31:

Items not

necessarily covered

( True and Sincere Declaration 1610)

in chapter 14

( Stanze in lode della donna brutta 1547) or ( Stanze 1547)

15.32:

Anonymous worksâ

€”unknown

authorship

15.33:

Anonymous worksâ

€”known

authorship

15.34:

Pseudonyms in

author-date

references

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

15.33 ANONYMOUS WORKS--KNOWN AUTHORSHIP

List of Tables

As in notes and bibliographies (see 14.80), bracket a name in reference lists and text citations if the

Index

authorship is known or guessed at but was omitted on the title page.

[Cook, Ebenezer?]. 1730. Sotweed Redivivus; or, The Planter's Looking-Glass. By "E. C. Gent." Annapolis.

15.31:

[Horsley, Samuel]. 1796. On the Prosodies of the Greek and Latin Languages. London.

Items not

necessarily covered

([Horsley] 1796)

in chapter 14

([Cook?] 1730)

15.32:

Anonymous worksâ

€”unknown

authorship

15.33:

Anonymous worksâ

€”known

authorship

15.34:

Pseudonyms in

author-date

references

15.35:

Editor in place of

author in text

citations

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

15.34 PSEUDONYMS IN AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

List of Tables

For indicating pseudonyms in reference lists, see 14.81, 14.82, 14.83, 14.84. Text citations should refer

Index

to the first-listed name and will omit the indication pseud.

Centinel [pseud.]. 1981. Letters. In The Complete Anti-Federalist, edited by Herbert J. Storing. Chicago:

15.32:

University of Chicago Press.

Anonymous worksâ

Stendhal [Marie-Henri Beyle]. 1925. The Charterhouse of Parma. Translated by C. K. Scott-Moncrieff. New

€”unknown

authorship

York: Boni and Liveright.

15.33:

(Stendhal 1925)

Anonymous worksâ

€”known

(Centinel 1981)

authorship

15.34:

See also 14.85, 14.86.

Pseudonyms in

author-date

references

15.35:

Editor in place of

author in text

citations

15.36:

Organization as

author in author-

date references

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

15.35 EDITOR IN PLACE OF AUTHOR IN TEXT CITATIONS

List of Tables

For works listed by editor(s) or compiler(s) or translator(s) in a reference list, abbreviations such as ed.

Index

or eds. , comp. or comps. , or trans. following the name are omitted in text citations.

Silverstein, Theodore, trans. 1974. Sir Gawain and the Green Knight. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

15.33:

Soltes, Ori Z., ed. 1999. Georgia: Art and Civilization through the Ages. London: Philip Wilson.

Anonymous worksâ

€”known

(Silverstein 1974)

authorship

(Soltes 1999)

15.34:

Pseudonyms in

author-date

references

15.35:

Editor in place of

author in text

citations

15.36:

Organization as

author in author-

date references

15.37:

Cross-references to

other titles in

reference lists

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Books >> Author's Name

of Contents

List of Figures

15.36 ORGANIZATION AS AUTHOR IN AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

List of Tables

If a publication issued by an organization, association, or corporation carries no personal author's

Index

name on the title page, the organization may be listed as author in the reference list, even if it is also

given as publisher. To facilitate shorter parenthetical text citations, the organization may be listed

under an abbreviation, in which case the entry must be alphabetized under that abbreviation (rather

15.34:

than the spelled-out name) in the reference list.

Pseudonyms in

author-date

references

BSI (British Standards Institution). 1985. Specification for Abbreviation of Title Words and Titles of Publications.

15.35:

London: BSI.

Editor in place of

ISO (International Organization for Standardization). 1997. Information and Documentation--Bibliographic

author in text

citations

References. Part 2, Electronic Documents or Parts Thereof. ISO 690-2. New York: American National

Standards Institute.

15.36:

Organization as

author in author-

(BSI 1985)

date references

(ISO 1997)

15.37:

Cross-references to

other titles in

reference lists

15.38:

Reprint editions

and modern

editionsâ€”more

than one date

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Books >> Title

of Contents

List of Figures

15.37 CROSS-REFERENCES TO OTHER TITLES IN REFERENCE LISTS

List of Tables

To avoid repeating information, individual contributions to an edited volume may include cross-

Index

references to an entry for the volume as a whole. Note that cross-references to other titles in the

reference list take the form of text citations but without any parentheses.

15.35:

Draper, Joan E. 1987. "Paris by the Lake: Sources of Burnham's Plan of Chicago." In Zukowsky 1987, 107--19.

Editor in place of

Harrington, Elaine. 1987. "International Influences on Henry Hobson Richardson's Glessner House." In

author in text

citations

Zukowsky 1987, 189--207.

Zukowsky, John, ed. 1987. Chicago Architecture, 1872--1922: Birth of a Metropolis. Munich: Prestel-Verlag in

15.36:

Organization as

association with the Art Institute of Chicago.

author in author-

date references

This approach is best used only if more than a few individual contributions to the same volume are

15.37:

Cross-references to

cited or if the volume itself is also cited in the text. Otherwise, include full publication details in the

other titles in

entry for each individual contribution. See also 14.112.

reference lists

15.38:

Draper, Joan E. 1987. "Paris by the Lake: Sources of Burnham's Plan of Chicago." In Chicago Architecture,

Reprint editions

and modern

1872--1922: Birth of a Metropolis, edited by John Zukowsky, 107--19. Munich: Prestel-Verlag in association

editionsâ€”more

with the Art Institute of Chicago.

than one date

15.39:

Multivolume works

published over

more than one

year

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Books >> Edition, Volume, or Collection

of Contents

List of Figures

15.38 REPRINT EDITIONS AND MODERN EDITIONS--MORE THAN ONE DATE

List of Tables

When citing a reprint or modern edition in the author-date system, it is sometimes desirable to

Index

include the original date of publication. Whether or not any information about the original publication

is included, the original date is listed first, in parentheses. If the pagination of the original edition does

not match that of the reprint, indicate the edition cited.

15.36:

Organization as

Austen, Jane. (1813) 2003. Pride and Prejudice. London: T. Egerton. Reprint, New York: Penguin Classics.

author in author-

date references

Citations refer to the Penguin edition.

15.37:

Darwin, Charles. (1859) 1964. On the Origin of Species. Facsimile of the first edition, with an introduction by

Cross-references to

Ernest Mayr. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

other titles in

reference lists

Maitland, Frederic W. (1898) 1998. Roman Canon Law in the Church of England. Reprint, Union, NJ: Lawbook

Exchange.

15.38:

Reprint editions

and modern

The parentheses are rendered as square brackets in the in-text citation (see 6.99).

editions—more

than one date

(Austen [1813] 2003)

15.39:

Multivolume works

(Darwin [1859] 1964)

published over

(Maitland [1898] 1998)

more than one

year

For more than one work by the same author, the first date determines placement in the reference list

15.40:

Letters in published

(see 15.17).

collections

Maitland, Frederic W. (1898) 1998. Roman Canon Law in the Church of England. Reprint, Union, NJ: Lawbook

Exchange.

———. (1909) 1926. Equity, Also the Forms of Action at Common Law: Two Courses of Lectures. Edited by A. H.

Chaytor and W. J. Whittaker. Reprint, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

When the original date is less important to the discussion, use the date of the modern source. The

date of original publication may be included at the end of the reference list entry but need not be.

Trollope, Anthony. 1977. The Claverings. With a new introduction by Norman Donaldson. New York: Dover.

First published 1866--67.

———. 1983. He Knew He Was Right. 2 vols. in one. New York: Dover. First published 1869.

(Trollope 1977)

(Trollope 1983)

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Books >> Edition, Volume, or Collection

of Contents

List of Figures

15.39 MULTIVOLUME WORKS PUBLISHED OVER MORE THAN ONE YEAR

List of Tables

When an entire multivolume, multiyear work is cited, the range of dates is given. In a reference list,

Index

the date for an individual volume should be included in addition to the range for the work as a

whole. If the work has not yet been completed, the date of the first volume is followed by an en dash

(with no space between the en dash and the punctuation that follows). In text citations of volumes

15.37:

listed individually in the reference list, the volume number is not included with references to specific

Cross-references to

other titles in

page numbers. See also 14.121--27. For en dashes with numbers, see 6.78, 6.79, 9.63.

reference lists

15.38:

Hayek, F. A. 1995. Contra Keynes and Cambridge: Essays, Correspondence. Vol. 9 of The Collected Works of F. A.

Reprint editions

Hayek. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1988--.

and modern

editionsâ€”more

Tillich, Paul. 1951--63. Systematic Theology. 3 vols. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

than one date

15.39:

(Tillich 1951--63, 1:133)

Multivolume works

(Hayek 1995, 124--25)

published over

more than one

year

15.40:

Letters in published

collections

15.41:

"No date" in

author-date

references

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Books >> Edition, Volume, or Collection

of Contents

List of Figures

15.40 LETTERS IN PUBLISHED COLLECTIONS

List of Tables

In the author-date system, letters in published collections should be cited by the date of the collection.

Index

The dates of individual correspondence should be woven into the text. The material in the examples

to 14.117 could be cited as follows:

15.38:

Adams, Henry. 1930. Letters of Henry Adams, 1858--1891. Edited by Worthington Chauncey Ford. Boston:

Reprint editions

Houghton Mifflin.

and modern

editionsâ€”more

White, E. B. 1976. Letters of E. B. White. Edited by Dorothy Lobrano Guth. New York: Harper & Row.

than one date

15.39:

In a letter to Charles Milnes Gaskell from London, March 30, 1868 (Adams 1930, 141), Adams wrote . . .

Multivolume works

published over

White (1976, 273) sent Ross an interoffice memo on May 2, 1946, pointing out that . . .

more than one

year

15.40:

Letters in published

collections

15.41:

"No date" in

author-date

references

15.42:

"Forthcoming" in

author-date

references

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Books >> Facts of Publication

of Contents

List of Figures

15.41 "NO DATE" IN AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

List of Tables

When the publication date of a printed work cannot be ascertained, the abbreviation n.d. takes the

Index

place of the year in the reference list entry and text citations. Though it follows a period in the

reference list, n.d. remains lowercased to avoid conflation with the author's name; in text citations, it is

preceded by a comma. A guessed-at date may be substituted (in brackets). See also 14.138, 15.51.

15.39:

Multivolume works

Nano, Jasmine L. [1750?] Title of Work . . .

published over

more than one

â€”â€”â€” . n.d. Title of Another Work . . .

year

15.40:

(Nano [1750?])

Letters in published

(Nano, n.d.)

collections

15.41:

"No date" in

author-date

references

15.42:

"Forthcoming" in

author-date

references

15.43:

Publications

preferring initials

for authors' names

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Books >> Facts of Publication

of Contents

List of Figures

15.42 "FORTHCOMING" IN AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

List of Tables

Like n.d. (see 15.41), forthcoming can stand in place of the date in author-date references to books

Index

under contract with a publisher and already titled but for which the date of publication is not yet

known. If page numbers are available, they should be given as needed. Books not under contract are

treated as unpublished manuscripts (see 14.225). In text citations, forthcoming is preceded by a comma.

15.40:

See also 14.153.

Letters in published

collections

Faraday, Carry. Forthcoming. "Protean Photography." In Seven Trips beyond the Asteroid Belt, edited by James

15.41:

"No date" in

Oring. Cape Canaveral, FL: Launch Press.

author-date

references

(Faraday, forthcoming)

15.42:

"Forthcoming" in

author-date

references

15.43:

Publications

preferring initials

for authors' names

15.44:

Publications

preferring

abbreviations for

journal titles

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

15.43 PUBLICATIONS PREFERRING INITIALS FOR AUTHORS' NAMES

List of Tables

The reference lists in some journals (especially in the natural sciences) always use initials instead of

Index

given names. When periods are used, space appears between them (Wells, H. G.); when periods are

omitted, as in some journals' styles, no comma intervenes between last name and initials, and no

space appears between the initials (Wells HG).

15.41:

"No date" in

author-date

references

15.42:

"Forthcoming" in

author-date

references

15.43:

Publications

preferring initials

for authors' names

15.44:

Publications

preferring

abbreviations for

journal titles

15.45:

Publications

preferring

sentence-style

capitalization for

titles

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

15.44 PUBLICATIONS PREFERRING ABBREVIATIONS FOR JOURNAL TITLES

List of Tables

In many publications in the sciences, journal titles are abbreviated (often with periods omitted) unless

Index

they consist of only one word. Standard abbreviations for scientific journals may be found in BIOSIS

Serial Sources (bibliog. 5) and through PubMed, a service of the US National Library of Medicine

(bibliog. 4.5), among other reference works. For a partial list of standard abbreviations of frequently

15.42:

used journal title words, see the latest edition of Scientific Style and Format or the AMA Manual of Style

"Forthcoming" in

author-date

(bibliog. 1.1).

references

15.43:

Publications

preferring initials

for authors' names

15.44:

Publications

preferring

abbreviations for

journal titles

15.45:

Publications

preferring

sentence-style

capitalization for

titles

15.46:

Parentheses with

issue number

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

15.45 PUBLICATIONS PREFERRING SENTENCE-STYLE CAPITALIZATION FOR TITLES

List of Tables

Especially in the natural sciences, many publications that use a version of the author-date style prefer

Index

sentence-style capitalization for all titles (except, usually, the titles of journals, which are often

abbreviated; see 15.44). In sentence style, only the first word in a title or a subtitle and any proper

names are capitalized (see 8.156). In addition, works that prefer this style may eschew quotation

15.43:

marks for chapter or article titles (sometimes dispensing also with italics for book titles). Though

Publications

preferring initials

Chicago now recommends headline style and the use of quotation marks or italics in both its systems

for authors' names

of documentation, these forms can be readily adapted to other, sparer systems.

15.44:

Publications

preferring

abbreviations for

journal titles

15.45:

Publications

preferring

sentence-style

capitalization for

titles

15.46:

Parentheses with

issue number

15.47:

Newspapers and

magazines in

reference lists

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

15.46 PARENTHESES WITH ISSUE NUMBER

List of Tables

As discussed elsewhere (e.g., 15.9, under Journal Article; see also 14.180), the issue number may be

Index

omitted if pagination is continuous throughout a volume or when a month or season is included.

When volume and issue number alone are used, the issue number is placed in parentheses. When

only an issue number is used, it is not enclosed in parentheses.

15.44:

Publications

Meyerovitch, Eva. 1959. "The Gnostic Manuscripts of Upper Egypt." Diogenes, no. 25: 84--117.

preferring

abbreviations for

Morasse, SÃ©bastien, Helga Guderley, and Julian J. Dodson. 2008."Paternal Reproductive Strategy

journal titles

Influences Metabolic Capacities and Muscle Development of Atlantic Salmon ( Salmo salar L.) Embryos."

15.45:

Physiological and Biochemical Zoology 81 (4): 402--13. doi:10.1086/589012.

Publications

preferring

sentence-style

capitalization for

titles

15.46:

Parentheses with

issue number

15.47:

Newspapers and

magazines in

reference lists

15.48:

Unpublished

interviews and

personal

communications

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Periodicals

of Contents

List of Figures

15.47 NEWSPAPERS AND MAGAZINES IN REFERENCE LISTS

List of Tables

It is usually sufficient to cite newspaper and magazines articles entirely within the text--a strategy

Index

that is identical in form in both systems of citation. See 14.206. If, for some reason, a reference list

entry is needed, the year of publication is separated from the month and day (if any).

15.45:

Carey, Benedict. 2008. "For the Brain, Remembering Is Like Reliving." New York Times, September 4.

Publications

http://www.nytimes.com/2008/09/05/science/05brain.html.

preferring

sentence-style

Kauffman, Stanley. 1989. Review of A Dry White Season (film), directed by Euzhan Palcy. New Republic,

capitalization for

October 9, 24--25.

titles

15.46:

Parentheses with

issue number

15.47:

Newspapers and

magazines in

reference lists

15.48:

Unpublished

interviews and

personal

communications

15.49:

Manuscript

collections in the

author-date style

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material

of Contents

List of Figures

15.48 UNPUBLISHED INTERVIEWS AND PERSONAL COMMUNICATIONS

List of Tables

In a parenthetical citation, the terms personal communication (or pers. comm. ), unpublished data, and the

Index

like may be used after the name(s) of the person(s) concerned, following a comma. Reference list

entries are unneeded, though each person cited must be fully identified elsewhere in the text. Initials

may be used for first names. The abbreviation et al. should be avoided in such citations.

15.46:

Parentheses with

(Julie Cantor, pers. comm.)

issue number

(A. P. MÃ¸ller, unpublished data; C. R. Brown and M. B. Brown, unpublished data)

15.47:

Newspapers and

magazines in

reference lists

15.48:

Unpublished

interviews and

personal

communications

15.49:

Manuscript

collections in the

author-date style

15.50:

Patents or other

documents cited by

more than one

date

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material

of Contents

List of Figures

15.49 MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS IN THE AUTHOR-DATE STYLE

List of Tables

When citing manuscript collections in the author-date style, it is unnecessary to use n.d. (no date) in

Index

place of the date. Dates of individual items should be mentioned in the text, when applicable.

Egmont Manuscripts. Phillipps Collection. University of Georgia Library.

15.47:

Kallen, Horace. Papers. YIVO Institute for Jewish Research, New York.

Newspapers and

magazines in

Oglethorpe wrote to the trustees on January 13, 1733 (Egmont Manuscripts), to say . . .

reference lists

15.48:

Alvin Johnson, in a memorandum prepared sometime in 1937 (Kallen Papers, file 36), observed that . . .

Unpublished

interviews and

personal

If only one item from a collection has been mentioned in the text, however, the entry may begin with

communications

the writer's name (if known). In such a case, the use of n.d. may become appropriate. See also 15.41.

15.49:

Manuscript

collections in the

Dinkel, Joseph. n.d. Description of Louis Agassiz written at the request of Elizabeth Cary Agassiz. Agassiz

author-date style

Papers. Houghton Library, Harvard University.

15.50:

Patents or other

(Dinkel, n.d.)

documents cited by

more than one

date

15.51:

Access dates with

website content

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material

of Contents

List of Figures

15.50 PATENTS OR OTHER DOCUMENTS CITED BY MORE THAN ONE DATE

List of Tables

Cite patents and other documents that include more than one date as follows (note that the year of

Index

issue is repeated to avoid ambiguity):

Iizuka, Masanori, and Hideki Tanaka. 1986. Cement admixture. US Patent 4,586,960, filed June 26, 1984, and

15.48:

issued May 6, 1986.

Unpublished

interviews and

personal

communications

15.49:

Manuscript

collections in the

author-date style

15.50:

Patents or other

documents cited by

more than one

date

15.51:

Access dates with

website content

15.52:

"Quoted in" in

author-date

references

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Unpublished and Informally Published Material

of Contents

List of Figures

15.51 ACCESS DATES WITH WEBSITE CONTENT

List of Tables

To cite an undated online document in a reference list, use an access date rather than n.d. (no date).

Index

See also 14.7, 14.245, 15.41.

Evanston Public Library Board of Trustees. 2008. "Evanston Public Library Strategic Plan, 2000--2010: A

15.49:

Decade of Outreach." Evanston Public Library. Accessed July 19. http://www.epl.org/library/strategic-

Manuscript

plan-00.html.

collections in the

author-date style

(Evanston Public Library 2008)

15.50:

Patents or other

documents cited by

more than one

date

15.51:

Access dates with

website content

15.52:

"Quoted in" in

author-date

references

15.53:

Citing audiovisual

materials in

author-date format

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Citations Taken from Secondary Sources

of Contents

List of Figures

15.52 "QUOTED IN" IN AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

List of Tables

If an original source is unavailable, and "quoted in" must be resorted to, mention the original author

Index

and date in the text, and cite the secondary source in the reference list entry. The text citation would

include the words "quoted in."

15.50:

Costello, Bonnie. 1981. Marianne Moore: Imaginary Possessions. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

Patents or other

documents cited by

more than one

In Louis Zukofsky's "Sincerity and Objectification," from the February 1931 issue of Poetry magazine (quoted

date

in Costello 1981) . . .

15.51:

Access dates with

website content

15.52:

"Quoted in" in

author-date

references

15.53:

Citing audiovisual

materials in

author-date format

15.54:

Using notes for

legal and public

documents

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Audiovisual Materials

of Contents

List of Figures

15.53 CITING AUDIOVISUAL MATERIALS IN AUTHOR-DATE FORMAT

List of Tables

Chicago recommends a more comprehensive approach to dating audiovisual materials than in

Index

previous editions of the manual (see 14.274, 14.276). Though citations in the author-date system have

therefore become somewhat easier to format, it is often more appropriate to list such materials in

running text and group them in a separate section or discography; see 14.275. Older sources are more

15.51:

likely to have been consulted in the form of a digital copy; though authors should cite the format

Access dates with

website content

consulted, it is generally useful to give information about the original source, if available. Moreover,

15.52:

the date of the original recording should be privileged in the citation. Whom to list as "author"

"Quoted in" in

depends on the focus of the citation and is a matter of authorial discretion.

author-date

references

Coolidge, Calvin. [1920?] "Equal Rights" (speech). Copy of 78 rpm disc in RealAudio and WAV formats from

15.53:

Citing audiovisual

the Library of Congress, "American Leaders Speak: Recordings from World War I and the 1920 Election,

materials in

1918--1920." http://memory.loc.gov/ammem/nfhtml/nforSpeakers01.html.

author-date format

Holiday, Billie. 1958. "I'm a Fool to Want You" (vocal performance). By Joel Herron, Frank Sinatra, and Jack

15.54:

Using notes for

Wolf. Recorded February 20, with Ray Ellis. On Lady in Satin, Columbia CL 1157, 33â…“ rpm.

legal and public

Pink Floyd. 1970. Atom Heart Mother. Capitol CDP 7 46381 2, 1990, compact disc.

documents

Weingartner, Felix von (conductor). 1936. 150 Jahre Wiener Philharmoniker. Preiser Records, PR90113 (mono),

15.55:

1992, compact disc. Includes Beethoven's Symphony no. 3 in E-flat Major and Symphony no. 8 in F

Citing legal and

public documents

Major.

in text

(Coolidge [1920?])

(Holiday 1958)

(Pink Floyd 1970)

(Weingartner 1936)

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Legal and Public Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

15.54 USING NOTES FOR LEGAL AND PUBLIC DOCUMENTS

List of Tables

Almost all legal works use notes for documentation and few use bibliographies. Any work using the

Index

author-date style that needs to do more than mention the occasional source in the text should

therefore use supplementary footnotes or endnotes; see 15.30. This advice does not extend to

documents that are cited in secondary sources or as freestanding works (see 14.303), since these are

15.51:

readily adaptable to the author-date system (see 15.3). For a full discussion of legal and public

Access dates with

website content

documents, including examples, see 14.281--317.

15.52:

"Quoted in" in

author-date

references

15.53:

Citing audiovisual

materials in

author-date format

15.54:

Using notes for

legal and public

documents

15.55:

Citing legal and

public documents

in text

15: DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Author-Date References: Special Cases >> Legal and Public Documents

of Contents

List of Figures

15.55 CITING LEGAL AND PUBLIC DOCUMENTS IN TEXT

List of Tables

Works with only a handful of citations to legal and public documents may be able to limit these to

Index

the text, using the forms detailed in 14.281--317. Note that in legal style, parentheses within

parentheses are used (see also 6.95).

15.51:

In NLRB v. Somerville Constr. Co. (206 F.3d 752 (7th Cir. 2000)), the court ruled that . . .

Access dates with

website content

In the Congressional Record for that day (147 Cong. Rec. 19,000 (2001)), Senator Conrad Burns was reported as

15.52:

saying that . . .

"Quoted in" in

author-date

references

In order to avoid such awkward constructions in the text, however, Chicago advises using notes for

15.53:

citations to legal and public documents whenever possible (see 14.283).

Citing audiovisual

materials in

author-date format

15.54:

Using notes for

legal and public

documents

15.55:

Citing legal and

public documents

in text

15 : DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 15.1

List of Figures

Part of a reference list for a journal article in the social sciences. See 15.5, 15.6, 15.10--16. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

15 : DOCUMENTATION II: AUTHOR-DATE REFERENCES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 15.2

List of Figures

A sample of text with both parenthetical text citations and a footnote. See 15.30. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

16: INDEXES

Table

of Contents

Overview

List of Figures

16.1

The back-of-the-book index as model

List of Tables

16.2

Why index?

16.3

Who should index a work?

Index

16.4

The indexer and deadlines

16.5

The role of software in indexing

16.6

Single versus multiple indexes

16.7

Embedded indexes

16.8

Resources for indexers

Components of an Index

Main Headings, Subentries, and Locators

16.9

Main headings for index entries

16.10 Index subentries

16.11 Initial lowercase letters in main headings

16.12 Initial lowercase letters in subheadings

16.13 Locators in indexes

16.14 Inclusive numbers in indexes

Cross-References

16.15 Cross-references in indexesâ€”general principles

16.16 "See" references and "double posting"

16.17 "See" references following a main heading

16.18 "See" references following a subheading

16.19 "See" references to a subheading

16.20 "See also" references

16.21 Correspondence between cross-references and headings

16.22 Italics for "see," "see also," and so forth

16.23 Generic cross-references

Run-In versus Indented Indexes

16.24 Flush-and-hang formatting for indexes

16.25 Run-in style for indexes

16.26 Indented style for indexes

16.27 Sub-subentries in run-in indexes

16.28 Sub-subentries in indented indexes

General Principles of Indexing

16.29 Style and usage in the index relative to the work

16.30 Choosing indexing terms

16.31 Terms that should not be indexed

Indexing Proper Names and Variants

16.32 Choosing between variant names

16.33 Indexing familiar forms of personal names

16.34 Indexing pseudonyms

16.35 Indexing persons with the same name

16.36 Indexing married women's names

16.37 Indexing monarchs, popes, and the like

16.38 Indexing princes, dukes, and other titled persons

16.39 Clerical titles in index entries

16.40 Academic titles and degrees in index entries

16.41 "Jr.," "Sr.," "III," and the like in index entries

16.42 Indexing saints

16.43 Indexing persons whose full names are unknown

16.44 Indexing incomplete names or names alluded to in text

16.45 Indexing confusing names

16.46 Indexing abbreviations and acronyms

Indexing Titles of Publications and Other Works

16.47 Typographic treatment for indexed titles of works

16.48 Indexing newspaper titles

16.49 Indexing magazine and journal titles

16.50 Indexing authored titles of works

16.51 Indexing English-language titles beginning with an article

16.52 Indexing foreign-language titles beginning with an article

16.53 Indexing titles beginning with a preposition

16.54 Indexing titles ending with a question mark or exclamation point

16.55 Subtitles in index entries

Alphabetizing

16.56 Alphabetizing main headingsâ€”the basic rule

16.57 Computerized sorting

Letter by Letter or Word by Word?

16.58 Two systems of alphabetizingâ€”an overview

16.59 The letter-by-letter system

16.60 The word-by-word system

16.61 The two systems compared

General Rules of Alphabetizing

16.62 Alphabetizing items with the same name

16.63 Alphabetizing initials versus spelled-out names

16.64 Alphabetizing abbreviations

16.65 Alphabetizing headings beginning with numerals

16.66 Alphabetizing similar headings containing numerals

16.67 Alphabetizing accented letters

Subentries

16.68 Alphabetical order of subentries

16.69 Numerical order of subentries

16.70 Chronological order of subentries

Personal Names

16.71 Indexing names with particles

16.72 Indexing compound names

16.73 Indexing names with "Mac" or "Mc"

16.74 Indexing names with "O' "

16.75 Indexing names with "Saint"

Foreign Personal Names

16.76 Indexing Arabic names

16.77 Indexing Burmese names

16.78 Indexing Chinese names

16.79 Indexing Hungarian names

16.80 Indexing Indian names

16.81 Indexing Indonesian names

16.82 Indexing Japanese names

16.83 Indexing Portuguese names

16.84 Indexing Spanish names

16.85 Indexing Thai names

16.86 Indexing Vietnamese names

16.87 Indexing other Asian names

Names of Organizations and Businesses

16.88 Omission of article in indexed names of organizations

16.89 Indexing personal names as corporate names

Names of Places

16.90 Indexing names beginning with "Mount," "Lake," and such

16.91 Indexing names beginning with the definite article

16.92 Indexing names beginning with foreign definite articles

16.93 Indexing names of places beginning with "Saint"

Punctuating Indexes: A Summary

16.94 Comma in index entries

16.95 Colon in index entries

16.96 Semicolon in index entries

16.97 Period in index entries

16.98 Parentheses in index headings

16.99 Em dash in index entries

16.100 En dash in index entries

The Mechanics of Indexing

Before Indexing Begins: Tools and Decisions

16.101 Schedule for indexing

16.102 Indexing from page proofs

16.103 Publisher's indexing preferences

16.104 Indexing tools

16.105 Using the electronic files to index

16.106 Formatting index entries

16.107 Indexing the old-fashioned way

When to Begin

16.108 Preliminary indexing work

What Parts of the Work to Index

16.109 Indexing the text, front matter, and back matter

16.110 Indexing footnotes and endnotes

16.111 Endnote locators in index entries

16.112 Footnote locators in index entries

16.113 Indexing notes spanning more than one printed page

16.114 Indexing parenthetical text citations

16.115 Indexing authors' names for an author index

16.116 Indexing illustrations, tables, charts, and such

Marking Proofs and Preparing Entries

16.117 Beginning to highlight and enter terms

16.118 Deciding how many terms to mark

16.119 How to mark index entries

16.120 Planning index subentries

16.121 Recording inclusive numbers for index terms

16.122 Typing and modifying index entries

16.123 Alphabetizing entries as part of the indexing process

16.124 Final check of indexed proofs

16.125 Noting errors during indexing

Editing and Refining the Entries

16.126 Refining the terms for main headings

16.127 Main entries versus subentries

16.128 When to furnish subentries

16.129 How to phrase subheadings

16.130 Checking cross-references against edited index headings

Submitting the Index

16.131 Index submission format

Editing an Index Compiled by Someone Else

16.132 What to do with a very bad index

16.133 Index-editing checklist

16.134 Instructions for typesetting the index

Typographical Considerations for Indexes

16.135 Type size and column width for indexes

16.136 Ragged right-hand margin for indexes

16.137 Index indention

16.138 Fixing bad breaks in indexes

16.139 Adding "continued" lines in an index

16.140 Making typographic distinctions in index entries

Examples of Indexes

16.141 A run-in index with italicized references to figures and tables

16.142 An indented index with run-in sub-subentries

16.143 An indented index with indented sub-subentries and highlighted definitions

16.144 An index of first lines

16.145 An index with authors, titles, and first lines combined

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

16.1 THE BACK-OF-THE-BOOK INDEX AS MODEL

List of Tables

This chapter offers basic guidelines for preparing and editing an index. Much of the advice--modeled

Index

on the requirements for a back-of-the-book index for a printed-and-bound scholarly monograph--

applies also to indexes for journals and other types of works. General principles of indexing are

covered, as are the specifics of Chicago's preferred style in matters of typography, alphabetizing, and

16.1:

the like.

The back-of-the-

book index as

model

16.2:

Why index?

16.3:

Who should index a

work?

16.4:

The indexer and

deadlines

16.5:

The role of

software in

indexing

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

16.2 WHY INDEX?

List of Tables

In this age of search engines, the question "Why index?" is frequently asked. For a printed-and-bound

Index

book, the answers are clear. A good index gathers all the key terms and subjects (grouping many of

the former under the conceptual and thematic umbrella of the latter), sorts them alphabetically,

provides cross-references to and from related terms, and includes specific page numbers or other

16.1:

locators. This painstaking intellectual labor serves readers of any book-length text, whether it is

The back-of-the-

book index as

published on paper or online. An index, a highly organized, detailed counterpart to a table of contents

model

and other navigational aids, is also insurance--in searchable texts--against fruitless queries and

16.2:

unintended results.

Why index?

16.3:

Who should index a

work?

16.4:

The indexer and

deadlines

16.5:

The role of

software in

indexing

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

16.3 WHO SHOULD INDEX A WORK?

List of Tables

The ideal indexer sees the work as a whole, understands the emphasis of the various parts and their

Index

relation to the whole, and knows--or guesses--what readers of the particular work are likely to look

for and what headings they will think of. The indexer should be widely read, scrupulous in handling

detail, analytically minded, well acquainted with publishing practices, and capable of meeting almost

16.1:

impossible deadlines. Although authors know better than anyone else their subject matter and the

The back-of-the-

book index as

audience to whom the work is addressed, not all can look at their work through the eyes of a

model

potential reader. Nor do many authors have the technical skills, let alone the time, necessary to

16.2:

prepare a good index that meets the publisher's deadline. Some authors produce excellent indexes.

Why index?

Others would do better to enlist the aid of a professional indexer.

16.3:

Who should index a

work?

16.4:

The indexer and

deadlines

16.5:

The role of

software in

indexing

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

16.4 THE INDEXER AND DEADLINES

List of Tables

Most book indexes have to be made between the time page proofs are issued and the time they are

Index

returned to the typesetter--usually about four weeks. (For an illustration of how indexing fits into the

overall publishing process for books, see 2.2.) An author preparing his or her own index will have to

proofread as well as index the work in that short time span. Good indexing requires reflection; the

16.2:

indexer needs to stop frequently and decide whether the right choices have been made. A

Why index?

professional indexer, familiar with the publisher's requirements, may be better equipped for such

16.3:

Who should index a

reflection. For journals that publish a volume index (see 1.103), the indexer may have several months

work?

to prepare a preliminary index, adding entries as new issues of the journal arrive. The final issue in

16.4:

the volume is typically indexed from page proofs, however, and the indexer may have as little as a

The indexer and

deadlines

week to work on the last issue and prepare the final draft of the index.

16.5:

The role of

software in

indexing

16.6:

Single versus

multiple indexes

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

16.5 THE ROLE OF SOFTWARE IN INDEXING

List of Tables

A concordance--or a complete list of terms (typically minus articles, propositions, and other irrelevant

Index

elements), with page references--can be produced for any manuscript by any number of word-

processing programs. Such concordances are mainly unhelpful; in fact, the assumption that an index

rather than a concordance can be generated from an electronic document without significant human

16.3:

intervention is false. Most indexes for publications destined for print are produced from scratch,

Who should index a

work?

typically from paginated page proofs, either electronic or hard copy, generated by a page-layout

16.4:

program. Word processors are typically used in entering and editing terms and locators in a separate

The indexer and

document and can provide rudimentary help in the process of sorting entries and managing cross-

deadlines

references. Dedicated word processors for indexers can automate many of the formatting and cross-

16.5:

The role of

referencing tasks particular to indexing and are a good investment especially for professional

software in

indexing

indexers (see 16.104). See also 16.7.

16.6:

Single versus

multiple indexes

16.7:

Embedded indexes

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

16.6 SINGLE VERSUS MULTIPLE INDEXES

List of Tables

A single, comprehensive index--one that includes concepts and names of persons and other subjects--

Index

is recommended for most works. Certain publications, however, such as journals and lengthy

scientific works that cite numerous authors of other studies, may include an index of named authors

(see 16.115) in addition to a subject index. An anthology may include an author-and-title index, and a

16.4:

collection of poetry or hymns may have an index of first lines as well as an index of titles. It is

The indexer and

deadlines

generally an advantage if two or more indexes appearing in one work are visually distinct from one

16.5:

another so that users know immediately where they are. In a biological work, for example, the

The role of

headings in the index of names will all be in roman type and will begin with capital letters, and there

software in

indexing

will be no subentries, whereas most of the headings in the general subject index will begin lowercase

16.6:

and many subentries will appear; and if there is a taxonomic index, many headings will be in italics.

Single versus

multiple indexes

Separate running heads should be used, indicating the title of each index (e.g., Index of Names, Index

of Subjects).

16.7:

Embedded indexes

16.8:

Resources for

indexers

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

16.7 EMBEDDED INDEXES

List of Tables

An embedded index consists of key terms anchored with underlying codes to particular points in the

Index

text of an electronic publication. These terms can facilitate a reader's queries to a search engine in

much the same way that a good subject index gathers keywords under subject headings to increase

the chances that a reader will be led only to the relevant areas of a text. For example, a search for the

16.5:

word "because" in a properly coded online encyclopedia might lead to those passages that discuss the

The role of

software in

Beatles' Abbey Road song "Because" rather than to every instance of the omnipresent conjunction. The

indexing

principles of selection for embedded indexes are similar to those for traditional back-of-the-book

16.6:

indexes. In fact, some publishers anchor traditional back-of-the-book indexes to the files that drive

Single versus

multiple indexes

their print publications in order to facilitate hyperlinked and page-independent indexes for

16.7:

concurrent or future electronic editions.

Embedded indexes

16.8:

Resources for

indexers

16.9:

Main headings for

index entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

16.8 RESOURCES FOR INDEXERS

List of Tables

For greatly expanded coverage of the present guidelines, along with alternative methods, consult the

Index

second edition of Nancy Mulvany's Indexing Books (bibliog. 2.5). Anyone likely to prepare a number of

indexes should acquire that work. For further reference, see Hans H. Wellisch, Indexing from A to Z,

and Linda K. Fetters, Handbook of Indexing Techniques (bibliog. 2.5).

16.6:

Single versus

multiple indexes

16.7:

Embedded indexes

16.8:

Resources for

indexers

16.9:

Main headings for

index entries

16.10:

Index subentries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Main Headings, Subentries, and Locators

of Contents

List of Figures

16.9 MAIN HEADINGS FOR INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

The main heading of an index entry is normally a noun or noun phrase--the name of a person, a

Index

place, an object, or an abstraction. An adjective alone should almost never constitute a heading; it

should rather be paired with a noun to form a noun phrase. A noun phrase is sometimes inverted to

allow the keyword--the word a reader is most likely to look under--to appear first. The heading is

16.7:

typically followed by page (or paragraph) numbers (see 16.13) and sometimes a cross-reference (see

Embedded indexes

16.15--23). For capitalization, see 16.11.

16.8:

Resources for

indexers

agricultural collectivization, 143--

16.9:

46, 198

Main headings for

Aron, Raymond, 312--14

index entries

Bloomsbury group, 269

16.10:

Brest-Litovsk, Treaty of, 61, 76, 85

Index subentries

Cold War, 396--437

16.11:

Communist Party (American), 425

Initial lowercase

letters in main

Communist Party (British), 268

headings

imperialism, American, 393, 403

police, Soviet secret. See Soviet

secret police

war communism, 90, 95, 125

World War I, 34--61

Yalta conference, 348, 398

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Main Headings, Subentries, and Locators

of Contents

List of Figures

16.10 INDEX SUBENTRIES

List of Tables

An entry that requires more than five or six locators (page or paragraph numbers) is usually broken

Index

up into subentries to spare readers unnecessary excursions. A subentry, like an entry, consists of a

heading (usually referred to as a subheading), page references, and, rarely, cross-references.

Subheadings often form a grammatical relationship with the main heading, whereby heading and

16.8:

subheading combine into a single phrase, as in the first example below. Other subheadings form

Resources for

indexers

divisions or units within the larger category of the heading, as in the second example. Both kinds can

16.9:

be used within one index. See also 16.127. For sub-subentries, see 16.27, 16.28.

Main headings for

index entries

capitalism: and American pro-

16.10:

Sovietism, 273, 274; bourgeoisie

Index subentries

as symbol of, 4, 13; as creation

16.11:

of society, 7; Khrushchev on

Initial lowercase

letters in main

burying, 480; student protests

headings

against, 491, 493

16.12:

Native American peoples:

Initial lowercase

letters in

Ahualucos, 140--41;

subheadings

Chichimecs, 67--68; Huastecs,

154; Toltecs, 128--36; Zapotecs,

168--72

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Main Headings, Subentries, and Locators

of Contents

List of Figures

16.11 INITIAL LOWERCASE LETTERS IN MAIN HEADINGS

List of Tables

The first word of a main heading is normally capitalized only if capitalized in text--a proper noun (as

Index

in the second example in 16.10), a genus name, the title of a work, and so on. Traditionally, all main

headings in an index were capitalized. Chicago recommends this practice only where the subentries

are so numerous that capitalized main headings make for easier navigation. Indexes in the sciences,

16.9:

however, should generally avoid initial capitals because the distinction between capitalized and

Main headings for

index entries

lowercased terms in the text may be crucial.

16.10:

Index subentries

16.11:

Initial lowercase

letters in main

headings

16.12:

Initial lowercase

letters in

subheadings

16.13:

Locators in indexes

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Main Headings, Subentries, and Locators

of Contents

List of Figures

16.12 INITIAL LOWERCASE LETTERS IN SUBHEADINGS

List of Tables

Subheadings are always lowercased unless, as in the second example in 16.10, the keyword is

Index

capitalized in text (a proper noun, a genus name, the title of a work, etc.).

16.10:

Index subentries

16.11:

Initial lowercase

letters in main

headings

16.12:

Initial lowercase

letters in

subheadings

16.13:

Locators in indexes

16.14:

Inclusive numbers

in indexes

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Main Headings, Subentries, and Locators

of Contents

List of Figures

16.13 LOCATORS IN INDEXES

List of Tables

In a printed work, locators are usually page numbers, though they can also be paragraph numbers (as

Index

in this manual), section numbers, or the like. When discussion of a subject continues for more than a

page, paragraph, or section, the first and last numbers (inclusive numbers) are given: 34--36 (if pages),

10.36--41 (if paragraphs), and so on (see 16.14). The abbreviations ff. or et seq. should never be used in

16.11:

an index. Scattered references to a subject over several pages or sections are usually indicated by

Initial lowercase

letters in main

separate locators (34, 35, 36; or 8.18, 8.20, 8.21). Though the term passim has often been used to indicate

headings

scattered references over a number of not necessarily sequential pages or sections (e.g., 78--88 passim),

16.12:

individual locators are preferred. For use of the en dash, see 6.78.

Initial lowercase

letters in

subheadings

16.13:

Locators in indexes

16.14:

Inclusive numbers

in indexes

16.15:

Cross-references in

indexesâ€”general

principles

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Main Headings, Subentries, and Locators

of Contents

List of Figures

16.14 INCLUSIVE NUMBERS IN INDEXES

List of Tables

Publishers vary in their preferences for the form of inclusive numbers (also known as continuing

Index

numbers). Although the simplest and most foolproof system is to give the full form of numbers

everywhere (e.g., 234--235), Chicago prefers its traditional system (presented below), which is efficient

and unambiguous. The system is followed in all examples in this chapter. Whichever form is used in

16.12:

the text should be used in the index as well.

Initial lowercase

letters in

subheadings

FIRST NUMBER

SECOND NUMBER

EXAMPLES

16.13:

Less than 100

Use all digits

3--10

Locators in indexes

71--72

16.14:

Inclusive numbers

96--117

in indexes

100 or multiples of 100

Use all digits

100--104

16.15:

1100--1113

Cross-references in

indexesâ€”general

101 through 109,

Use changed part only

101--8

principles

201 through 209, etc.

808--33

16.16:

1103--4

"See" references

and "double

110 through 199,

Use two digits unless more are

321--28

posting"

210 through 299, etc.

needed to include all changed

498--532

parts

1087--89

1496--500

11564--615

12991--3001

Roman numerals are always given in full--for example, xxv--xxviii, cvi--cix. For use of the en dash

between numerals, see 6.78; see also 9.58, 9.59.

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Cross-References

of Contents

List of Figures

16.15 CROSS-REFERENCES IN INDEXES--GENERAL PRINCIPLES

List of Tables

Cross-references are of two main kinds-- see references and see also references. Both are treated

Index

differently according to whether they refer to a main heading or to a subheading. See and see also are

set in italics (but see 16.22). Cross-references should be used with discretion; an overabundance,

besides irritating the reader, may signal the need for consolidation of entries.

16.13:

Locators in indexes

16.14:

Inclusive numbers

in indexes

16.15:

Cross-references in

indexesâ€”general

principles

16.16:

"See" references

and "double

posting"

16.17:

"See" references

following a main

heading

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Cross-References

of Contents

List of Figures

16.16 "SEE" REFERENCES AND "DOUBLE POSTING"

List of Tables

See references direct a reader from, for example, an informal term to a technical one, a pseudonym to

Index

a real name, an inverted term to a noninverted one. They are also used for variant spellings,

synonyms, aliases, abbreviations, and so on. The choice of the term under which the full entry

appears depends largely on where readers are most likely to look. See references should therefore be

16.14:

given only where the indexer believes many readers might otherwise miss the full entry. Further, the

Inclusive numbers

in indexes

indexer and anyone editing an index must make certain that no see reference merely leads to another

16.15:

see reference (a "blind cross-reference"). If, on the other hand, the entry to which the see reference

Cross-references in

refers is about the same length as the see reference itself, it is often more useful to omit the see

indexesâ€”general

principles

reference and simply give the page numbers under both headings. Such duplication (or "double

16.16:

posting") will save readers a trip.

"See" references

and "double

posting"

FBI (Federal Bureau of

Investigation), 145--48

16.17:

"See" references

Federal Bureau of Investigation,

following a main

145--48

heading

16.18:

rather than

"See" references

following a

Federal Bureau of Investigation.

subheading

See FBI

See also 16.46.

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Cross-References

of Contents

List of Figures

16.17 "SEE" REFERENCES FOLLOWING A MAIN HEADING

List of Tables

When a see reference follows a main heading, as it usually does, it is preceded by a period and See is

Index

capitalized. If two or more see references are needed, they are arranged in alphabetical order and

separated by semicolons. They reflect the capitalization and word order of the main heading.

16.15:

adolescence. See teenagers; youth

Cross-references in

American Communist Party. See

indexesâ€”general

principles

Communist Party (American)

baking soda. See sodium

16.16:

"See" references

bicarbonate

and "double

Clemens, Samuel. See Twain,

posting"

Mark

16.17:

"See" references

de Kooning, Willem. See Kooning,

following a main

Willem de

heading

Den Haag ('s Gravenhage). See

16.18:

Hague, The

"See" references

following a

Lunt, Mrs. Alfred. See Fontanne,

subheading

Lynn

16.19:

Mormons. See Latter-day Saints,

"See" references to

Church of Jesus Christ of

a subheading

Roman Catholic Church. See

Catholicism

The Hague. See Hague, The

Turwyn. See Terouenne

universities. See Harvard

University; Princeton

University; University of

Chicago

van Gogh, Vincent. See Gogh,

Vincent van

Virgin Queen. See Elizabeth I

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Cross-References

of Contents

List of Figures

16.18 "SEE" REFERENCES FOLLOWING A SUBHEADING

List of Tables

When a see reference follows a subheading, it is put in parentheses and see is lowercased.

Index

statistical material, 16, 17, 89;

coding of, for typesetter ( see

typesetting); proofreading, 183

16.16:

"See" references

and "double

This usage applies to both run-in and indented indexes, and to sub-subentries. See 16.27, 16.28.

posting"

16.17:

"See" references

following a main

heading

16.18:

"See" references

following a

subheading

16.19:

"See" references to

a subheading

16.20:

"See also"

references

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Cross-References

of Contents

List of Figures

16.19 "SEE" REFERENCES TO A SUBHEADING

List of Tables

Most see references are to a main entry, as in the examples in 16.17. When a cross-reference directs

Index

readers to a subentry under another main heading, see under may be used.

lace making. See under Bruges

16.17:

Pride and Prejudice. See under

"See" references

Austen, Jane

following a main

heading

An alternative, to be used when a see under reference might fail to direct readers to the right spot, is

16.18:

"See" references

to drop the word under and add the wording of the subheading, following a colon. (Although a

following a

comma is sometimes used, a colon is preferred.) The wording of the cross-reference must correspond

subheading

to that of the relevant subheading so that readers can find it quickly.

16.19:

"See" references to

a subheading

lace making. See Bruges: lace

16.20:

making

"See also"

Pride and Prejudice. See Austen,

references

Jane: Pride and Prejudice

16.21:

Correspondence

between cross-

references and

headings

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Cross-References

of Contents

List of Figures

16.20 "SEE ALSO" REFERENCES

List of Tables

See also references are placed at the end of an entry when additional information can be found in

Index

another entry. In run-in indexes, they follow a period; in indented indexes, they appear on a separate

line (see 16.26). See is capitalized, and both words are in italics. If the cross-reference is to a subentry

under another main heading, the words see also under may be used. If two or more see also references

16.18:

are needed, they are arranged in alphabetical order and separated by semicolons. As with see

"See" references

following a

references, see also references must never lead to a see reference.

subheading

16.19:

copyright, 95--100. See also

"See" references to

permission to reprint; source

a subheading

notes

16.20:

"See also"

Maya: art of, 236--43; cities of,

references

178; present day, 267. See also

16.21:

under YucatÃ¡n

Correspondence

between cross-

references and

If see also under does not work in a particular context--for example, when one of the see also references

headings

is to a main entry and another to a subentry--the word under should be dropped and the wording of

16.22:

the subentry added after a colon.

Italics for "see,"

"see also," and so

forth

Maya: art of, 236--43; cities of,

178. See also Mexican art;

YucatÃ¡n: Maya

When a see also reference comes at the end of a subentry--a rare occurrence, and somewhat

distracting--it is put in parentheses and see is lowercased.

equality: as bourgeois ideal, 5--6,

7; contractual quality, 13; in

democracy's definition, 24 ( see

also democracy); League of the

Rights of Man debate on, 234--

35

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Cross-References

of Contents

List of Figures

16.21 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN CROSS-REFERENCES AND HEADINGS

List of Tables

All cross-referenced headings (and subheadings, if used) should generally be cited in full, with

Index

capitalization, inversion, and punctuation exactly as in the heading referred to. But a long heading

may occasionally be shortened if no confusion results. For example, in an index with frequent

references to Beethoven, " See also Beethoven, Ludwig van" could be shortened to " See also Beethoven"

16.19:

if done consistently.

"See" references to

a subheading

16.20:

"See also"

references

16.21:

Correspondence

between cross-

references and

headings

16.22:

Italics for "see,"

"see also," and so

forth

16.23:

Generic cross-

references

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Cross-References

of Contents

List of Figures

16.22 ITALICS FOR "SEE," "SEE ALSO," AND SO FORTH

List of Tables

The words see, see under, and see also are normally italicized. But if what follows (e.g., a book title or a

Index

foreign word) is in italics, the words are preferably set in roman to distinguish them from the rest of

the cross-reference. This is not necessary when they follow italics.

16.20:

Austen, Jane. See Pride and

"See also"

Prejudice

references

16.21:

but

Correspondence

between cross-

Pride and Prejudice. See Austen,

references and

headings

Jane

16.22:

Italics for "see,"

"see also," and so

forth

16.23:

Generic cross-

references

16.24:

Flush-and-hang

formatting for

indexes

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Cross-References

of Contents

List of Figures

16.23 GENERIC CROSS-REFERENCES

List of Tables

Both see and see also references may include generic references; that is, they may refer to a type of

Index

heading rather than to several specific headings. The entire cross-reference is then set in italics.

public buildings. See names of

16.21:

individual buildings

Correspondence

sacred writings, 345--46, 390--401,

between cross-

references and

455--65. See also specific titles

headings

16.22:

When generic cross-references accompany specific cross-references, the former are placed last, even if

Italics for "see,"

out of alphabetic order. The conjunction and is normally used, following a semicolon (even if the

"see also," and so

forth

generic cross-reference follows only one other cross-reference).

16.23:

Generic cross-

dogs, 35--42. See also American

references

Kennel Club; shelters; and

16.24:

individual breed names

Flush-and-hang

formatting for

indexes

16.25:

Run-in style for

indexes

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Run-In versus Indented Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.24 FLUSH-AND-HANG FORMATTING FOR INDEXES

List of Tables

Indexes are generally formatted in flush-and-hang (or hanging-indention) style. The first line of each

Index

entry, the main heading, is set flush left, and any following lines are indented. When there are

subentries, a choice must be made between run-in and indented styles (see 16.25, 16.26). In print

publications (and electronic works modeled on the printed page), indexes are usually set in multiple

16.22:

columns. In manuscripts, however, columns should not be used (see 16.131).

Italics for "see,"

"see also," and so

forth

16.23:

Generic cross-

references

16.24:

Flush-and-hang

formatting for

indexes

16.25:

Run-in style for

indexes

16.26:

Indented style for

indexes

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Run-In versus Indented Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.25 RUN-IN STYLE FOR INDEXES

List of Tables

In run-in style, the subentries follow the main entry and one another without starting a new line.

Index

They are separated by semicolons. If the main heading is immediately followed by subentries, it is

separated from them by a colon (see first example below). If it is immediately followed by locators,

these are preceded by a comma and followed by a semicolon (see second example below). Further

16.23:

examples of run-in entries may be seen in 16.10, 16.20, 16.141.

Generic cross-

references

coordinate systems: Cartesian, 14;

16.24:

Flush-and-hang

distance within, 154--55; time

formatting for

dilation and, 108--14. See also

indexes

inertial systems; moving

16.25:

systems

Run-in style for

indexes

Sabba da Castiglione, Monsignor,

16.26:

209, 337; on cosmetics, 190; on

Indented style for

whether to marry, 210--11; on

indexes

wives' proper behavior, 230--

16.27:

40, 350

Sub-subentries in

run-in indexes

Chicago and many other scholarly publishers generally prefer run-in style because it requires less

space. It works best, however, when there is only one level of subentry (but see 16.27). For the

examples above in indented style, see 16.26.

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Run-In versus Indented Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.26 INDENTED STYLE FOR INDEXES

List of Tables

In indented style (also known as stacked style), each subentry begins a new line and is indented

Index

(usually one em). No colon appears before the first subheading, and subentries are not separated by

semicolons. Runover lines must therefore be further indented (usually two ems) to distinguish them

clearly from subentries; whether runover lines belong to the main entry or to subentries, their

16.24:

indention should be the same. (Indention is always measured from the left margin, not from the first

Flush-and-hang

formatting for

word in the line above.) See also cross-references belonging to the entry as a whole appear at the end

indexes

of the list of subentries (as shown in the first example below). A see or see also reference belonging to a

16.25:

specific subentry is placed in parentheses at the end of the subentry, as in run-in indexes (see 16.18,

Run-in style for

indexes

16.20). See also 16.23.

16.26:

Indented style for

coordinate systems

indexes

Cartesian, 14

16.27:

distance within, 154--55

Sub-subentries in

run-in indexes

time dilation and, 108--14

See also inertial systems; moving

16.28:

Sub-subentries in

systems

indented indexes

Sabba da Castiglione, Monsignor,

209, 337

on cosmetics, 190

on whether to marry, 210--11

on wives' proper behavior, 230--

40, 350

Indented style is usually preferred in scientific works and reference works (such as this manual). It is

particularly useful where sub-subentries are required (see 16.28).

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Run-In versus Indented Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.27 SUB-SUBENTRIES IN RUN-IN INDEXES

List of Tables

If more than a handful of sub-subentries are needed in an index, the indented format rather than the

Index

run-in type should be chosen. A very few, however, can be accommodated in a run-in index or,

better, avoided by repeating a keyword (see example A). If repetition will not work, subentries

requiring sub-subentries can be indented, each starting a new line but preceded by an em dash flush

16.25:

with the margin; the sub-subentries are then run in (see example B). Em dashes are not used where

Run-in style for

indexes

only one level of subentry is needed.

16.26:

Indented style for

Example A (run-in index: sub-subentries avoided)

indexes

16.27:

Inuits: language, 18; pottery, 432--

Sub-subentries in

run-in indexes

37; tradition of, in Alaska, 123;

tradition of, in California, 127

16.28:

Sub-subentries in

indented indexes

Example B (run-in index: subentries requiring sub-subentries indented with em dash, sub-subentries

16.29:

run in)

Style and usage in

the index relative

to the work

Argos: cremation at, 302; and

Danaos of Egypt, 108; Middle

Helladic, 77; shaft graves at, 84

Arkadia, 4; Early Helladic, 26, 40;

Mycenaean, 269, 306

armor and weapons

--attack weapons (general): Early

Helladic and Cycladic, 33;

Mycenaean, 225, 255, 258--60;

from shaft graves, 89, 98--100;

from tholos tombs, 128, 131,

133

--body armor: cuirass, 135--36,

147, 152, 244, 258, 260, 311;

greaves, 135, 179, 260; helmets,

101, 135, 147, 221, 243, 258

--bow and arrow, 14, 99, 101, 166,

276

Asine: Early Helladic, 29, 36;

Middle Helladic, 74;

Mycenaean town and trade,

233, 258, 263; tombs at, 300

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Components of an Index >> Run-In versus Indented Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.28 SUB-SUBENTRIES IN INDENTED INDEXES

List of Tables

In an indented index, sub-subentries are best run in (see example A below). If, in a particular index,

Index

running them in makes the index hard to use, they have to be indented more deeply than the

subentries (example B). When the first method is used, runover lines need not be indented more than

the standard two ems, already a fairly deep indention. When the second is used, runover lines have to

16.26:

be indented three ems, which may result in some very short lines. See also 16.142, 16.143.

Indented style for

indexes

Example A (indented index: run-in sub-subentries)

16.27:

Sub-subentries in

run-in indexes

nutritional analysis of bamboo,

16.28:

72--81

Sub-subentries in

digestible energy, 94--96, 213--14,

indented indexes

222

16.29:

Style and usage in

inorganic constituents: minerals,

the index relative

81, 83--85, 89; silica ( see silica

to the work

levels in bamboo); total ash, 73,

16.30:

79, 80, 91, 269, 270

Choosing indexing

terms

methods used, 72--73

organic constituents, 73--79, 269,

270; amino acids, 75--76, 86, 89;

amino acids compared with

other foods, 77; cellulose, 73,

78, 269, 270; crude protein, 73--

75, 80, 89--91, 213, 269, 270;

standard proximate analysis of,

78--80; vitamin C, 78, 79

Example B (indented index: sub-subentries indented)

nutritional analysis of bamboo,

72--81

digestible energy, 94--96, 213--14,

222

inorganic constituents

minerals, 81, 83--85, 89

silica ( see silica levels in bamboo)

total ash, 73, 79, 80, 91, 269, 270

methods used, 72--73

organic constituents, 73--79, 269,

270

amino acids, 75--76, 86, 89

amino acids compared with other

foods, 77

cellulose, 73, 78, 269, 270

crude protein, 73--75, 80, 89--91,

213, 269, 270

standard proximate analysis of,

78--80

vitamin C, 78, 79

If sub-sub-subentries are required (which heaven forbid!), style B must be used, and they must be run

in.

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> General Principles of Indexing

of Contents

List of Figures

16.29 STYLE AND USAGE IN THE INDEX RELATIVE TO THE WORK

List of Tables

Each index is a tool for one particular work. By the time the index is prepared, the style used in the

Index

work has long been determined, and the index must reflect that style. If British spelling has been used

throughout the text, it must be used in the index. Shakspere in the text calls for Shakspere in the

index. Hernando Cortez should not be indexed as CortÃ©s. Older geographical terms should not be

16.27:

altered to their present form (Constantinople to Istanbul, Siam to Thailand, etc.). The use of accents

Sub-subentries in

run-in indexes

and other diacritical marks must be observed exactly as in the text (SchÃ¶nberg not Schoenberg). Only

16.28:

in the rare instance in which readers might not find information sought should a cross-reference be

Sub-subentries in

given. Any terms italicized or enclosed in quotation marks in the text should be treated similarly in

indented indexes

the index. If inclusive numbers are given in full in the text (see 16.14; see also 9.61), that style should

16.29:

Style and usage in

be used in the index.

the index relative

to the work

16.30:

Choosing indexing

terms

16.31:

Terms that should

not be indexed

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> General Principles of Indexing

of Contents

List of Figures

16.30 CHOOSING INDEXING TERMS

List of Tables

The wording for all headings should be concise and logical. As far as possible, terms should be

Index

chosen according to the author's usage. If, for example, the author of a philosophical work uses essence

to mean being, the main entry should be under essence, possibly with a cross-reference from being. If

the terms are used interchangeably, the indexer must choose one; in this case a cross-reference is

16.28:

imperative. An indexer relatively unfamiliar with the subject matter may find it useful to ask the

Sub-subentries in

indented indexes

author for a brief list of terms that must appear in the index, though such terms will usually suggest

16.29:

themselves as the indexer proceeds through the proofs. Common sense is the best guide. For journals,

Style and usage in

terms may have been established in advance, either by a predetermined list of keywords within the

the index relative

to the work

discipline or by previous journal indexes (see 1.104). See also 16.21.

16.30:

Choosing indexing

terms

16.31:

Terms that should

not be indexed

16.32:

Choosing between

variant names

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> General Principles of Indexing

of Contents

List of Figures

16.31 TERMS THAT SHOULD NOT BE INDEXED

List of Tables

Although proper names are an important element in most indexes, there are times when they should

Index

be ignored. In a work on the history of the automobile in the United States, for example, an author

might write, "After World War II small sports cars like the British MG, often owned by returning

veterans, began to make their appearance in college towns like Northampton, Massachusetts, and

16.29:

Ann Arbor, Michigan." An indexer should resist the temptation to index these place-names; the two

Style and usage in

the index relative

towns mentioned have nothing to do with the theme of the work. The MG sports car, on the other

to the work

hand, should be indexed, given the subject of the work. Similarly, names or terms that occur in

16.30:

passing references and scene-setting elements that are not essential to the theme of a work need not

Choosing indexing

terms

be indexed. (An exception might be made if certain readers of a publication would be likely to look

16.31:

for their own names in the index. Occasional vanity entries are not forbidden.)

Terms that should

not be indexed

16.32:

Choosing between

variant names

16.33:

Indexing familiar

forms of personal

names

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Proper Names and Variants

of Contents

List of Figures

16.32 CHOOSING BETWEEN VARIANT NAMES

List of Tables

When proper names appear in the text in more than one form, or in an incomplete form, the indexer

Index

must decide which form to use for the main entry and which for the cross-reference (if any) and

occasionally must furnish identifying information not given in the text. Few indexes need to provide

the kind of detail found in biographical or geographical dictionaries, though reference works of that

16.30:

kind will help in decision making.

Choosing indexing

terms

16.31:

Terms that should

not be indexed

16.32:

Choosing between

variant names

16.33:

Indexing familiar

forms of personal

names

16.34:

Indexing

pseudonyms

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Proper Names and Variants

of Contents

List of Figures

16.33 INDEXING FAMILIAR FORMS OF PERSONAL NAMES

List of Tables

The full form of personal names should be indexed as they have become widely known. (Any variant

Index

spelling preferred in the text, however, must likewise be preferred in the index; see 16.29.) Note that

brackets are used in the following examples to distinguish Chicago's editorial glosses from

parenthetical tags such as those in some of the examples in 16.34, 16.35, 16.36, 16.37, and 16.38, which

16.31:

would actually appear in a published index.

Terms that should

not be indexed

Cervantes, Miguel de [ not

16.32:

Choosing between

Cervantes Saavedra, Miguel

variant names

de]

16.33:

Fisher, M. F. K. [ not Fisher, Mary

Indexing familiar

Frances Kennedy]

forms of personal

names

London, Jack [ not London, John

16.34:

Griffith]

Indexing

Poe, Edgar Allan [ not Poe, E. A.,

pseudonyms

or Poe, Edgar A.]

16.35:

Indexing persons

with the same

But in a work devoted to, say, M. F. K. Fisher or Cervantes, the full form of the name should appear

name

in the index.

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Proper Names and Variants

of Contents

List of Figures

16.34 INDEXING PSEUDONYMS

List of Tables

Persons who have used pseudonyms or other professional names are usually listed under their real

Index

names. If the pseudonym has become a household word, however, it should be used as the main

entry, with the real name in parentheses if it is relevant to the work; a cross-reference is seldom

necessary.

16.32:

Choosing between

Ã†. See Russell, George William

variant names

Ouida. See RamÃ©e, Marie

16.33:

Indexing familiar

Louise de la

forms of personal

RamÃ©e, Marie Louise de la

names

(pseud. Ouida)

16.34:

Russell, George William (pseud.

Indexing

pseudonyms

Ã†)

16.35:

but

Indexing persons

with the same

name

MoliÃ¨re (Jean-Baptiste Poquelin)

Monroe, Marilyn (Norma Jean

16.36:

Indexing married

Baker)

women's names

Twain, Mark (Samuel Langhorne

Clemens)

Voltaire (FranÃ§ois-Marie

Arouet)

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Proper Names and Variants

of Contents

List of Figures

16.35 INDEXING PERSONS WITH THE SAME NAME

List of Tables

Persons with the same name should be distinguished by a middle initial (if either has one) or by a

Index

parenthetical tag.

Campbell, James

16.33:

Campbell, James B.

Indexing familiar

Field, David Dudley (clergyman)

forms of personal

names

Field, David Dudley (lawyer)

Pitt, William (the elder)

16.34:

Indexing

Pitt, William (the younger)

pseudonyms

16.35:

In works that include many persons with the same last name (often a family name), parenthetical

Indexing persons

identifications are useful. For example, in Two Lucky People, by Milton Friedman and Rose D.

with the same

name

Friedman (University of Chicago Press, 1998), the following identifications appear:

16.36:

Indexing married

Friedman, David (son of MF and

women's names

RDF)

16.37:

Friedman, Helen (sister of MF)

Indexing monarchs,

popes, and the like

Friedman, Janet (daughter of MF

and RDF)

Friedman, Milton (MF)

Friedman, Rose Director (RDF)

Friedman, Sarah Ethel Landau

(mother of MF)

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Proper Names and Variants

of Contents

List of Figures

16.36 INDEXING MARRIED WOMEN'S NAMES

List of Tables

A married woman who is known variously by her birth name or by her married name, depending on

Index

context, should be indexed by her birth name unless the married name is the more familiar. A

married woman who uses both birth and married names together is usually indexed by her married

name (unless the two names are hyphenated). Parenthetical clarifications or cross-references may be

16.34:

supplied as necessary.

Indexing

pseudonyms

Marinoff, Fania (Mrs. Carl Van

16.35:

Indexing persons

Vechten)

with the same

Sutherland, Joan (Mrs. Richard

name

Bonynge)

16.36:

Van Vechten, Fania. See Marinoff,

Indexing married

women's names

Fania

16.37:

but

Indexing monarchs,

popes, and the like

Besant, Annie (nÃ©e Wood)

16.38:

Indexing princes,

Browning, Elizabeth Barrett

dukes, and other

Clinton, Hillary Rodham

titled persons

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Proper Names and Variants

of Contents

List of Figures

16.37 INDEXING MONARCHS, POPES, AND THE LIKE

List of Tables

Monarchs, popes, and others who are known by their official names, often including a roman

Index

numeral, should be indexed under the official name. Identifying tags may be omitted or expanded as

appropriate in a particular work.

16.35:

Anne, Queen

Indexing persons

Benedict XVI (pope)

with the same

name

Elizabeth II (queen)

16.36:

Indexing married

women's names

16.37:

Indexing monarchs,

popes, and the like

16.38:

Indexing princes,

dukes, and other

titled persons

16.39:

Clerical titles in

index entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Proper Names and Variants

of Contents

List of Figures

16.38 INDEXING PRINCES, DUKES, AND OTHER TITLED PERSONS

List of Tables

Princes and princesses are usually indexed under their given names. Dukes, earls, and the like are

Index

indexed under the title. A cross-reference may be needed where a title differs from a family name.

Charles, Prince of Wales

16.36:

Cooper, Anthony Ashley. See

Indexing married

Shaftesbury, 7th Earl of

women's names

Shaftesbury, 7th Earl of (Anthony

16.37:

Ashley Cooper)

Indexing monarchs,

popes, and the like

William, Prince

16.38:

Indexing princes,

Unless necessary for identification, the titles Lord and Lady are best omitted from an index, since their

dukes, and other

use with given names is far from simple. Sir and Dame, while easier to cope with, are also

titled persons

unnecessary in most indexes. Brackets are used here to denote Chicago's editorial glosses (see 16.33).

16.39:

Clerical titles in

index entries

Churchill, Winston [ or Churchill,

16.40:

Sir Winston]

Academic titles

Hess, Myra [ or Hess, Dame Myra]

and degrees in

index entries

Thatcher, Margaret [even if

referred to as Lady Thatcher in

text]

But in a work dealing with the nobility, or a historical work such as The Lisle Letters (University of

Chicago Press, 1981), from which the following examples are taken, titles may be an appropriate or

needed element in index entries. The last two examples illustrate distinctions for which expert advice

may be needed.

Arundell, Sir John

Audley, Thomas Lord

Grey, Lady Jane ["Lady Jane

Grey" in text]

Whethill, Elizabeth (Muston),

Lady ["Lady Whethill" in text]

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Proper Names and Variants

of Contents

List of Figures

16.39 CLERICAL TITLES IN INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

Like titles of nobility, such abbreviations as Rev. or Msgr. should be used only when necessary for

Index

identification (see 16.38).

Cranmer, Thomas (archbishop of

16.37:

Canterbury)

Indexing monarchs,

Councell, George E. (rector of the

popes, and the like

Church of the Holy Spirit)

16.38:

Jaki, Rev. Stanley S.

Indexing princes,

dukes, and other

Manniere, Msgr. Charles L.

titled persons

16.39:

Clerical titles in

index entries

16.40:

Academic titles

and degrees in

index entries

16.41:

"Jr.," "Sr.," "III,"

and the like in

index entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Proper Names and Variants

of Contents

List of Figures

16.40 ACADEMIC TITLES AND DEGREES IN INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

Academic titles such as Professor and Doctor, used before a name, are not retained in indexing, nor are

Index

abbreviations of degrees such as PhD or MD.

16.38:

Indexing princes,

dukes, and other

titled persons

16.39:

Clerical titles in

index entries

16.40:

Academic titles

and degrees in

index entries

16.41:

"Jr.," "Sr.," "III,"

and the like in

index entries

16.42:

Indexing saints

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Proper Names and Variants

of Contents

List of Figures

16.41 "JR.," "SR.," "III," AND THE LIKE IN INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

Abbreviations such as Jr. are retained in indexing but are placed after the given name and preceded

Index

by a comma.

King, Martin Luther, Jr.

16.39:

Stevenson, Adlai E., III

Clerical titles in

index entries

16.40:

Academic titles

and degrees in

index entries

16.41:

"Jr.," "Sr.," "III,"

and the like in

index entries

16.42:

Indexing saints

16.43:

Indexing persons

whose full names

are unknown

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Proper Names and Variants

of Contents

List of Figures

16.42 INDEXING SAINTS

List of Tables

Saints are indexed under their given names unless another name is equally well or better known.

Index

Parenthetical identifications or cross-references (as well as discretion) may be needed. See also 16.75.

Aquinas. See Thomas Aquinas,

16.40:

Saint

Academic titles

Borromeo, Saint Charles

and degrees in

index entries

Catherine of Siena, Saint

Chrysostom, Saint John

16.41:

"Jr.," "Sr.," "III,"

Thomas, Saint (the apostle)

and the like in

Thomas Aquinas, Saint

index entries

16.42:

Indexing saints

16.43:

Indexing persons

whose full names

are unknown

16.44:

Indexing

incomplete names

or names alluded

to in text

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Proper Names and Variants

of Contents

List of Figures

16.43 INDEXING PERSONS WHOSE FULL NAMES ARE UNKNOWN

List of Tables

Persons referred to in the work by first or last names only should be parenthetically identified if the

Index

full name is unavailable.

John (Smith's shipmate on Stella)

16.41:

Thaxter (family physician)

"Jr.," "Sr.," "III,"

and the like in

index entries

16.42:

Indexing saints

16.43:

Indexing persons

whose full names

are unknown

16.44:

Indexing

incomplete names

or names alluded

to in text

16.45:

Indexing confusing

names

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Proper Names and Variants

of Contents

List of Figures

16.44 INDEXING INCOMPLETE NAMES OR NAMES ALLUDED TO IN TEXT

List of Tables

Even if only an epithet or a shortened form of a name is used in the text, the index should give the

Index

full form.

TEXT

INDEX

16.42:

the lake

Michigan, Lake

Indexing saints

the bay

San Francisco Bay

16.43:

Indexing persons

the Village

Greenwich Village

whose full names

are unknown

the Great Emancipator

Lincoln, Abraham

16.44:

Indexing

incomplete names

or names alluded

to in text

16.45:

Indexing confusing

names

16.46:

Indexing

abbreviations and

acronyms

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Proper Names and Variants

of Contents

List of Figures

16.45 INDEXING CONFUSING NAMES

List of Tables

When the same name is used of more than one entity, identifying tags should be provided.

Index

New York (city) or New York

City

New York (state) or New York

16.43:

Indexing persons

State

whose full names

are unknown

16.44:

Indexing

incomplete names

or names alluded

to in text

16.45:

Indexing confusing

names

16.46:

Indexing

abbreviations and

acronyms

16.47:

Typographic

treatment for

indexed titles of

works

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Proper Names and Variants

of Contents

List of Figures

16.46 INDEXING ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

List of Tables

Organizations that are widely known under their abbreviations should be indexed and alphabetized

Index

according to the abbreviations. Parenthetical glosses, cross-references, or both should be added if the

abbreviations, however familiar to the indexer, may not be known to all readers of the particular

work. Lesser-known organizations are better indexed under the full name, with a cross-reference from

16.44:

the abbreviation if it is used frequently in the work. See also 16.16.

Indexing

incomplete names

or names alluded

EEC (European Economic

to in text

Community)

16.45:

MLA. See Modern Language

Indexing confusing

names

Association

NATO

16.46:

Indexing

abbreviations and

acronyms

16.47:

Typographic

treatment for

indexed titles of

works

16.48:

Indexing newspaper

titles

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Titles of Publications and Other Works

of Contents

List of Figures

16.47 TYPOGRAPHIC TREATMENT FOR INDEXED TITLES OF WORKS

List of Tables

Titles of newspapers, books, journals, stories, poems, artwork, musical compositions, and such should

Index

be treated typographically as they appear in text--whether italicized, set in roman and enclosed in

quotation marks, or simply capitalized (see also 8.154--95).

16.45:

Indexing confusing

names

16.46:

Indexing

abbreviations and

acronyms

16.47:

Typographic

treatment for

indexed titles of

works

16.48:

Indexing newspaper

titles

16.49:

Indexing magazine

and journal titles

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Titles of Publications and Other Works

of Contents

List of Figures

16.48 INDEXING NEWSPAPER TITLES

List of Tables

English-language newspapers should be indexed as they are generally known, whether or not the city

Index

of publication appears on the masthead. The name is italicized, as in text, and The is omitted. If

necessary, a city of publication may be added in parentheses following the title.

16.46:

Chicago Sun-Times

Indexing

Christian Science Monitor

abbreviations and

acronyms

Cleveland Plain Dealer

New York Times

16.47:

Typographic

Times (London)

treatment for

Wall Street Journal

indexed titles of

works

For foreign-language newspapers, any article ( Le, Die, etc.) normally follows the name, separated by a

16.48:

Indexing newspaper

comma (but see 16.52). The city of publication may be added parenthetically, following the title.

titles

16.49:

Monde, Le (Paris)

Indexing magazine

and journal titles

Prensa, La (Buenos Aires)

SÃ¼ddeutsche Zeitung, Die

16.50:

Indexing authored

titles of works

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Titles of Publications and Other Works

of Contents

List of Figures

16.49 INDEXING MAGAZINE AND JOURNAL TITLES

List of Tables

Magazines and journals are indexed in the same way as newspapers (see 16.48). The is omitted in

Index

English-language publications, but the article is included, following the name, in foreign ones (but see

16.52).

16.47:

JAMA ( Journal of the American

Typographic

Medical Association)

treatment for

indexed titles of

New England Journal of Medicine

works

Spiegel, Der

16.48:

Time

Indexing newspaper

titles

16.49:

Indexing magazine

and journal titles

16.50:

Indexing authored

titles of works

16.51:

Indexing English-

language titles

beginning with an

article

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Titles of Publications and Other Works

of Contents

List of Figures

16.50 INDEXING AUTHORED TITLES OF WORKS

List of Tables

A published work, a musical composition, or a piece of art that merits its own main entry should also

Index

be indexed under the name of its creator, often as a subentry. The main heading is followed by the

creator's name in parentheses (except in an index in which all titles cited have the same creator).

16.48:

Look Homeward, Angel (Wolfe), 34-

Indexing newspaper

-37

titles

Wolfe, Thomas: childhood, 6--8;

16.49:

early literary influences on, 7--

Indexing magazine

and journal titles

10; Look Homeward, Angel, 34--

16.50:

37; and Maxwell Perkins, 30--

Indexing authored

41

titles of works

16.51:

Several works by a single creator are sometimes treated as subentries under a new main heading,

Indexing English-

language titles

following a main entry on the creator. This device is best employed when many works as well as

beginning with an

many topics are listed. Separate main entries may also be included for the works.

article

16.52:

Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus, 49--

Indexing foreign-

language titles

51, 55--56; early musical

beginning with an

compositions of, 67--72, 74--80;

article

to Italy with father, 85--92;

Salzburg appointment, 93--95;

in Vienna, 98--105

Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus,

works of: La clemenza di Tito,

114; Don Giovanni, 115;

Idomeneo, 105--6; Jupiter

Symphony, 107; The Magic

Flute, 111--13; The Marriage of

Figaro, 109--12

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Titles of Publications and Other Works

of Contents

List of Figures

16.51 INDEXING ENGLISH-LANGUAGE TITLES BEGINNING WITH AN ARTICLE

List of Tables

In titles beginning with A, An, or The, the article is traditionally placed at the end of the title,

Index

following a comma, when the title forms a main heading. When such a title occurs as a subheading, it

appears in its normal position in a run-in index, where inversion would be clumsy and unnecessary,

but is inverted in an indented index for easier alphabetic scanning.

16.49:

Indexing magazine

Professor and the Madman, The

and journal titles

(Winchester), 209--11

16.50:

Indexing authored

Winchester, Simon: Pacific Rising,

titles of works

190--95; The Professor and the

16.51:

Madman, 209--11; The River at

Indexing English-

the Center of the World, 211--15

language titles

beginning with an

article

Winchester, Simon

16.52:

Pacific Rising, 190--95

Indexing foreign-

Professor and the Madman, The,

language titles

beginning with an

209--11

article

River at the Center of the World,

16.53:

The, 211--15

Indexing titles

beginning with a

preposition

See also 16.56.

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Titles of Publications and Other Works

of Contents

List of Figures

16.52 INDEXING FOREIGN-LANGUAGE TITLES BEGINNING WITH AN ARTICLE

List of Tables

Since initial articles in foreign titles sometimes modify the following word, they are usually retained

Index

in an index. In publications intended for a general audience, especially those that mention only a few

such titles, it is acceptable to list the titles in the index exactly as they appear in the text, without

inversion and alphabetized according to the article.

16.50:

Indexing authored

Eine kleine Nachtmusik (Mozart), 23

titles of works

La bohÃ¨me (Puccini), 211

16.51:

Indexing English-

language titles

In a more specialized work, or any work intended for readers who are likely to be well versed in the

beginning with an

article

languages of any foreign titles mentioned in the text, the titles may be inverted as they are in English

(see 16.51). According to this practice, the articles follow the rest of the title in main headings but

16.52:

Indexing foreign-

remain, as in English titles, in their normal position in run-in subheadings. In both positions, the

language titles

beginning with an

articles are ignored in alphabetizing.

article

16.53:

bohÃ¨me, La (Puccini), 211

Indexing titles

clemenza de Tito, La (Mozart), 22

beginning with a

preposition

kleine Nachtmusik, Eine (Mozart),

23

16.54:

Indexing titles

Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus: La

ending with a

clemenza de Tito, 22; Eine kleine

question mark or

exclamation point

Nachtmusik, 23

trovatore, Il (Verdi), 323

but

"Un deux trois" (Luboff), 47

[alphabetize under U]

An indexer unfamiliar with the language of a title should make sure that the article is indeed an

article and not a number (see last example above). French un and une, for example, and German ein

and eine can mean one as well as a.

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Titles of Publications and Other Works

of Contents

List of Figures

16.53 INDEXING TITLES BEGINNING WITH A PREPOSITION

List of Tables

Unlike articles, prepositions beginning a title always remain in their original position and are never

Index

dropped, whether in English or foreign titles--nor are they ignored in alphabetizing.

For Whom the Bell Tolls

16.51:

Por quiÃ©n doblan las campanas

Indexing English-

language titles

beginning with an

article

16.52:

Indexing foreign-

language titles

beginning with an

article

16.53:

Indexing titles

beginning with a

preposition

16.54:

Indexing titles

ending with a

question mark or

exclamation point

16.55:

Subtitles in index

entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Titles of Publications and Other Works

of Contents

List of Figures

16.54 INDEXING TITLES ENDING WITH A QUESTION MARK OR EXCLAMATION POINT

List of Tables

A question mark or exclamation point at the end of an indexed title should be followed by a comma

Index

wherever a comma is called for by the syntax of the heading. This slight departure from previous

editions of the manual favors logic over aesthetic considerations. See also 16.94, 6.119.

16.52:

Carver, Raymond, 23--27, 101,

Indexing foreign-

143--44; "Are You a Doctor?,"

language titles

beginning with an

25; Will You Please Be Quiet,

article

Please? , 25--27, 143. See also

16.53:

Iowa Writers' Workshop

Indexing titles

beginning with a

preposition

16.54:

Indexing titles

ending with a

question mark or

exclamation point

16.55:

Subtitles in index

entries

16.56:

Alphabetizing main

headingsâ€”the

basic rule

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Indexing Titles of Publications and Other Works

of Contents

List of Figures

16.55 SUBTITLES IN INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

Subtitles of books or articles are omitted both in main headings and in subheadings unless essential

Index

for identification.

16.53:

Indexing titles

beginning with a

preposition

16.54:

Indexing titles

ending with a

question mark or

exclamation point

16.55:

Subtitles in index

entries

16.56:

Alphabetizing main

headingsâ€”the

basic rule

16.57:

Computerized

sorting

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing

of Contents

List of Figures

16.56 ALPHABETIZING MAIN HEADINGS--THE BASIC RULE

List of Tables

To exploit the virtues of alphabetizing and thus ease the way for readers, the first word in a main

Index

heading should always determine the location of the entry. This principle occasionally entails

inversion of the main heading. Thus, for example, A Tale of Two Cities is inverted as Tale of Two Cities,

A and alphabetized under T, where readers would be inclined to look first. See also 16.9, 16.51, 16.52.

16.54:

For subentries, see 16.68--70.

Indexing titles

ending with a

question mark or

exclamation point

16.55:

Subtitles in index

entries

16.56:

Alphabetizing main

headingsâ€”the

basic rule

16.57:

Computerized

sorting

16.58:

Two systems of

alphabetizingâ€”an

overview

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing

of Contents

List of Figures

16.57 COMPUTERIZED SORTING

List of Tables

Few computerized sorting options--and none of the standard options available with ordinary word

Index

processors--can perfectly conform to either system of alphabetization as described here. Some

dedicated indexing programs, on the other hand, have been specially programmed to sort according

to the letter-by-letter or word-by-word system in conformance with the detailed guidelines presented

16.55:

in this section. Those using a word processor to create their indexes will have to edit the finished

Subtitles in index

entries

product for the glitches and inconsistencies that invariably remain. See also 16.104, 16.67.

16.56:

Alphabetizing main

headingsâ€”the

basic rule

16.57:

Computerized

sorting

16.58:

Two systems of

alphabetizingâ€”an

overview

16.59:

The letter-by-

letter system

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Letter by Letter or Word by Word?

of Contents

List of Figures

16.58 TWO SYSTEMS OF ALPHABETIZING--AN OVERVIEW

List of Tables

The two principal modes of alphabetizing--or sorting--indexes are the letter-by-letter and the word-by-

Index

word systems. A choice between the two should be made before indexing begins, though occasionally

an indexer will find, as indexing progresses, that a change from one to the other is appropriate. (Such

a change would of course need to be applied to the entire index.) Dictionaries are arranged letter by

16.56:

letter, library catalogs word by word (though online catalogs can often be sorted by other criteria, such

Alphabetizing main

headingsâ€”the

as format or availability). Chicago, most university presses, and many other publishers have

basic rule

traditionally preferred the letter-by-letter system but will normally not impose it on a well-prepared

16.57:

index that has been arranged word by word. In an index including many open compounds starting

Computerized

sorting

with the same word, the word-by-word system may be easier for users (the word-by-word system is

16.58:

customary in telephone directories). Both systems have their advantages and disadvantages, and few

Two systems of

alphabetizingâ€”an

users are confused by either. Most people simply scan an alphabetic block of an index until they find

overview

what they are looking for. The indexer must understand both systems, however, and the following

16.59:

paragraphs offer guidelines for each. For a fuller discussion, consult Nancy Mulvany, Indexing Books

The letter-by-

letter system

(bibliog. 2.5).

16.60:

The word-by-word

system

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Letter by Letter or Word by Word?

of Contents

List of Figures

16.59 THE LETTER-BY-LETTER SYSTEM

List of Tables

In the letter-by-letter system, alphabetizing continues up to the first parenthesis or comma; it then

Index

starts again after the punctuation point. Spaces and all other punctuation marks are ignored. Both

open and hyphenated compounds such as New York or self-pity are treated as single words. The order

of precedence is one word, word followed by a parenthesis, word followed by a comma, then

16.57:

(ignoring spaces and other punctuation) word followed by a number, and word followed by letters.

Computerized

sorting

The index to this manual, in accordance with Chicago's traditional preference, is arranged letter by

16.58:

letter.

Two systems of

alphabetizingâ€”an

overview

16.59:

The letter-by-

letter system

16.60:

The word-by-word

system

16.61:

The two systems

compared

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Letter by Letter or Word by Word?

of Contents

List of Figures

16.60 THE WORD-BY-WORD SYSTEM

List of Tables

In the word-by-word system, alphabetizing continues only up to the end of the first word (counting

Index

hyphenated compounds as one word), using subsequent words only when additional headings begin

with the same word. As in the letter-by-letter system, alphabetizing continues up to the first

parenthesis or comma; it then starts again after the punctuation point. The order of precedence is one

16.58:

word, word followed by a parenthesis, word followed by a comma, word followed by a space, then

Two systems of

alphabetizingâ€”an

(ignoring other punctuation) word followed by a number, and word followed by letters.

overview

16.59:

The letter-by-

letter system

16.60:

The word-by-word

system

16.61:

The two systems

compared

16.62:

Alphabetizing items

with the same

name

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Letter by Letter or Word by Word?

of Contents

List of Figures

16.61 THE TWO SYSTEMS COMPARED

List of Tables

In both systems a parenthesis or comma (in that order) interrupts the alphabetizing, and other

Index

punctuation marks (hyphens, slashes, quotation marks, periods, etc.) are ignored. The columns below

illustrate the similarities and differences between the systems.

16.59:

LETTER BY LETTER

WORD BY WORD

The letter-by-

letter system

NEW (Neighbors Ever Watchful) NEW (Neighbors Ever Watchful)

16.60:

NEW (Now End War)

NEW (Now End War)

The word-by-word

system

New, Arthur

New, Arthur

16.61:

New, Zoe

New, Zoe

The two systems

compared

new-12 compound

New Deal

16.62:

newborn

new economics

Alphabetizing items

newcomer

New England

with the same

name

New Deal

new math

16.63:

new economics

New Thorndale

Alphabetizing

initials versus

newel

new town

spelled-out names

New England

New Year's Day

"new-fangled notions"

new-12 compound

Newfoundland

newborn

newlyweds

newcomer

new math

newel

new/old continuum

"new-fangled notions"

news, lamentable

Newfoundland

News, Networks, and the Arts

newlyweds

newsboy

new/old continuum

news conference

news, lamentable

newsletter

News, Networks, and the Arts

News of the World (Queen)

news conference

news release

News of the World (Queen)

newt

news release

NEWT (Northern Estuary Wind

newsboy

Tunnel)

New Thorndale

newsletter

new town

newt

New Year's Day

NEWT (Northern Estuary Wind

Tunnel)

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> General Rules of Alphabetizing

of Contents

List of Figures

16.62 ALPHABETIZING ITEMS WITH THE SAME NAME

List of Tables

When a person, a place, and a thing have the same name, they are arranged in normal alphabetical

Index

order.

hoe, garden

16.60:

Hoe, Robert

The word-by-word

system

London, England

16.61:

London, Jack

The two systems

compared

Common sense must be exercised. If Amy London and Carolyn Hoe were to appear in the same

16.62:

Alphabetizing items

index as illustrated above, adjustments in the other entries would be needed.

with the same

name

garden hoe

16.63:

hoe. See garden hoe

Alphabetizing

initials versus

Hoe, Carolyn

spelled-out names

Hoe, Robert

16.64:

Alphabetizing

London (England)

abbreviations

London, Amy

London, Jack

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> General Rules of Alphabetizing

of Contents

List of Figures

16.63 ALPHABETIZING INITIALS VERSUS SPELLED-OUT NAMES

List of Tables

Initials used in place of a given name come before any spelled-out name beginning with the same

Index

letter.

Oppenheimer, J. Robert

16.61:

Oppenheimer, James N.

The two systems

Oppenheimer, K. T.

compared

Oppenheimer, Katharine S.

16.62:

Alphabetizing items

with the same

name

16.63:

Alphabetizing

initials versus

spelled-out names

16.64:

Alphabetizing

abbreviations

16.65:

Alphabetizing

headings beginning

with numerals

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> General Rules of Alphabetizing

of Contents

List of Figures

16.64 ALPHABETIZING ABBREVIATIONS

List of Tables

Acronyms, initialisms, and most abbreviations are alphabetized as they appear, not according to their

Index

spelled-out versions, and are interspersed alphabetically among entries. See also 16.46, 16.75.

faculty clubs

16.62:

FBI

Alphabetizing items

Feely, John

with the same

name

LBJ. See Johnson, Lyndon B.

NATO

16.63:

Alphabetizing

North Pole

initials versus

NOW (National Organization for

spelled-out names

Women)

16.64:

Alphabetizing

abbreviations

16.65:

Alphabetizing

headings beginning

with numerals

16.66:

Alphabetizing

similar headings

containing

numerals

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> General Rules of Alphabetizing

of Contents

List of Figures

16.65 ALPHABETIZING HEADINGS BEGINNING WITH NUMERALS

List of Tables

Isolated entries beginning with numerals are alphabetized as though spelled out. (For numerals

Index

occurring in the middle of a heading, see 16.61, 16.66.)

1984 (Orwell) [ alphabetized as

16.63:

nineteen eighty-four]

Alphabetizing

125th Street [ alphabetized as one

initials versus

spelled-out names

hundred twenty-fifth street]

10 Downing Street [ alphabetized as

16.64:

Alphabetizing

ten downing street]

abbreviations

16.65:

If many numerals occur in an index, they may be listed together in numerical order at the beginning

Alphabetizing

of the index, before the A s.

headings beginning

with numerals

16.66:

Alphabetizing

similar headings

containing

numerals

16.67:

Alphabetizing

accented letters

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> General Rules of Alphabetizing

of Contents

List of Figures

16.66 ALPHABETIZING SIMILAR HEADINGS CONTAINING NUMERALS

List of Tables

When two or more similar headings with numerals occur together, they are ordered numerically,

Index

regardless of how they would be spelled out.

Henry III

16.64:

Henry IV

Alphabetizing

Henry V

abbreviations

16.65:

L7

Alphabetizing

headings beginning

L44

with numerals

L50

16.66:

Alphabetizing

section 9

similar headings

section 44

containing

numerals

section 77

16.67:

Alphabetizing

The L entries above would be placed at the beginning of the L section. See also 16.61.

accented letters

16.68:

Alphabetical order

of subentries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> General Rules of Alphabetizing

of Contents

List of Figures

16.67 ALPHABETIZING ACCENTED LETTERS

List of Tables

Words beginning with or including accented letters are alphabetized as though they were unaccented.

Index

(Note that this rule is intended for English-language indexes that include some foreign words. The

alphabetizing practices of other languages are not relevant in such instances.)

16.65:

Ubeda

Alphabetizing

Ãœber den Gipfel

headings beginning

with numerals

Ubina

16.66:

Alphabetizing

Schoenberg

similar headings

Schomberg

containing

numerals

SchÃ¶nborn

16.67:

Alphabetizing

This system, more than adequate for most English-language indexes, may need to be supplemented

accented letters

by more comprehensive systems for indexes that contain many terms in other languages. The

16.68:

Unicode Consortium has developed extensive specifications and recommendations for sorting (or

Alphabetical order

of subentries

collating) the characters used in many of the world's languages. For more information, refer to the

16.69:

latest version of the Unicode Collation Algorithm, published by the Unicode Consortium (bibliog. 5). See

Numerical order of

also 11.2.

subentries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Subentries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.68 ALPHABETICAL ORDER OF SUBENTRIES

List of Tables

Introductory articles, prepositions, and conjunctions are disregarded in alphabetizing subentries (but

Index

see 16.53), whether the subentries are run in or indented. To preserve the alphabetic logic of the

keywords, avoid substantive introductory words at the beginnings of subheadings (e.g., " relations

with," " views on").

16.66:

Alphabetizing

Churchill, Winston: as anti-

similar headings

containing

Fascist, 369; on Curzon line,

numerals

348, 379; and de Gaulle, 544n4

16.67:

Alphabetizing

In indented style, where alphabetizing functions more visually, it may be better to dispense with such

accented letters

introductory words or to invert the headings, amplifying them as needed. The subheadings from the

16.68:

Alphabetical order

first example could be edited for a run-in index as follows:

of subentries

16.69:

Churchill, Winston

Numerical order of

anti-Fascism of, 369

subentries

Curzon line, views on, 348, 379

16.70:

Chronological order

de Gaulle, relations with, 544n4

of subentries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Subentries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.69 NUMERICAL ORDER OF SUBENTRIES

List of Tables

Occasional subentries demand numerical order even if others in the same index (but not the same

Index

entry) are alphabetized.

Daley, Richard J. (mayor): third

16.67:

term, 205; fourth term, 206--7

Alphabetizing

flora, alpine: at 1,000-meter level,

accented letters

46, 130--35; at 1,500-meter

16.68:

level, 146--54; at 2,000-meter

Alphabetical order

of subentries

level, 49, 164--74

16.69:

Numerical order of

subentries

16.70:

Chronological order

of subentries

16.71:

Indexing names

with particles

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Subentries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.70 CHRONOLOGICAL ORDER OF SUBENTRIES

List of Tables

In a run-in index, the subentries for the subject of a biography may be arranged chronologically rather

Index

than alphabetically so as to provide a quick summary of the subject's career and to avoid, for

example, a subheading "death of" near the beginning of the entry. This system should be used with

caution, however, and only when the biographical and chronological logic is obvious from the

16.68:

subentries.

Alphabetical order

of subentries

16.69:

Numerical order of

subentries

16.70:

Chronological order

of subentries

16.71:

Indexing names

with particles

16.72:

Indexing compound

names

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.71 INDEXING NAMES WITH PARTICLES

List of Tables

In alphabetizing family names containing particles, the indexer must consider the individual's

Index

personal preference (if known) as well as traditional and national usages. Merriam-Webster's

Biographical Dictionary (bibliog. 4.1) is an authoritative guide for well-known persons long deceased;

library catalogs and encyclopedias are far broader in scope. Cross-references are often advisable (see

16.69:

16.17). Note the wide variations in the following list of actual names arranged alphabetically as they

Numerical order of

subentries

might appear in an index. See also 8.5, 16.76, 16.84.

16.70:

Chronological order

Beauvoir, Simone de

of subentries

Ben-Gurion, David

16.71:

Costa, Uriel da

Indexing names

with particles

da Cunha, Euclides

D'Amato, Alfonse

16.72:

Indexing compound

de Gaulle, Charles

names

di Leonardo, Micaela

16.73:

Keere, Pieter van den

Indexing names

Kooning, Willem de

with "Mac" or "Mc"

La Fontaine, Jean de

Leonardo da Vinci

Medici, Lorenzo de'

Van Rensselaer, Stephen

Charles de Gaulle is a good example of the opportunity for occasional editorial discretion: Webster's

and the Library of Congress, for example, list the French statesman under "Gaulle"; the entry in

American Heritage is under "de Gaulle"--the usage normally preferred by Chicago.

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.72 INDEXING COMPOUND NAMES

List of Tables

Compound family names, with or without hyphens, are usually alphabetized according to the first

Index

element (but see 16.36). See also 8.6, 8.11, 16.83, 16.84.

Lloyd George, David

16.70:

Mies van der Rohe, Ludwig

Chronological order

Sackville-West, Victoria

of subentries

Teilhard de Chardin, Pierre

16.71:

Indexing names

with particles

16.72:

Indexing compound

names

16.73:

Indexing names

with "Mac" or "Mc"

16.74:

Indexing names

with "O' "

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.73 INDEXING NAMES WITH "MAC" OR "MC"

List of Tables

Names beginning with Mac or Mc are alphabetized letter by letter, as they appear.

Index

Macalister, Donald

MacAlister, Paul

Macauley, Catharine

16.71:

Indexing names

Macmillan, Harold

with particles

Madison, James

16.72:

McAllister, Ward

Indexing compound

names

McAuley, Catherine

McMillan, Edwin M.

16.73:

Indexing names

with "Mac" or "Mc"

16.74:

Indexing names

with "O' "

16.75:

Indexing names

with "Saint"

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.74 INDEXING NAMES WITH "O' "

List of Tables

Names beginning with O' are alphabetized as if the apostrophe were missing.

Index

Onassis, Aristotle

O'Neill, Eugene

Ongaro, Francesco dall'

16.72:

Indexing compound

names

16.73:

Indexing names

with "Mac" or "Mc"

16.74:

Indexing names

with "O' "

16.75:

Indexing names

with "Saint"

16.76:

Indexing Arabic

names

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.75 INDEXING NAMES WITH "SAINT"

List of Tables

A family name in the form of a saint's name is alphabetized letter by letter as the name is spelled,

Index

whether Saint, San, St. , or however. A cross-reference may be useful if Saint and St. are far apart in an

index. See also 16.42, 16.93.

16.73:

Sainte-Beuve, Charles-Augustin

Indexing names

Saint-Gaudens, Augustus

with "Mac" or "Mc"

Saint-SaÃ«ns, Camille

16.74:

San Martin, JosÃ© de

Indexing names

with "O' "

St. Denis, Ruth

16.75:

St. Laurent, Louis Stephen

Indexing names

with "Saint"

16.76:

Indexing Arabic

names

16.77:

Indexing Burmese

names

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Foreign Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.76 INDEXING ARABIC NAMES

List of Tables

Modern Arabic names consisting of one or more given names followed by a surname present no

Index

problem.

Himsi, Ahmad Hamid

16.74:

Sadat, Anwar

Indexing names

with "O' "

Arabic surnames prefixed by al or el (the) are alphabetized under the element following the particle;

16.75:

the article is treated like de in French names.

Indexing names

with "Saint"

Hakim, Tawfiq al-

16.76:

Indexing Arabic

Jamal, Muhammad Hamid al-

names

16.77:

Names beginning with Abu, Abd, and Ibn, elements as integral to the names as Mc or Fitz, are

Indexing Burmese

alphabetized under those elements.

names

16.78:

Abu Zafar Nadvi, Syed

Indexing Chinese

names

Ibn Saud, Abdul Aziz

Context and readership may suggest cross-references. For example, in an index to a work likely to

have readers unfamiliar with Arabic names, a cross-reference may be useful (i.e., "al-Farabi. See

Farabi, al-").

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Foreign Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.77 INDEXING BURMESE NAMES

List of Tables

Burmese persons are usually known by a given name of one or more elements and should be indexed

Index

under the first element. If the name is preceded in text by a term of respect ( U, Daw, etc.), that term

either is omitted or follows in the index.

16.75:

Aung San Suu Kyi [alphabetize

Indexing names

under A]

with "Saint"

Thant, U [alphabetize under T]

16.76:

Indexing Arabic

names

16.77:

Indexing Burmese

names

16.78:

Indexing Chinese

names

16.79:

Indexing Hungarian

names

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Foreign Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.78 INDEXING CHINESE NAMES

List of Tables

Chinese names should be indexed as spelled in the work, whether in the pinyin or the Wade-Giles

Index

system. Cross-references are needed only if alternative forms are used in the text. Since the family

name precedes the given name in Chinese usage, names are not inverted in the index, and no comma

is used.

16.76:

Indexing Arabic

Li Bai [pinyin; alphabetize under

names

L]

16.77:

Indexing Burmese

Mao Tse-tung [Wade-Giles;

names

alphabetize under M]

16.78:

Indexing Chinese

Persons of Chinese ancestry or origin who have adopted the Western practice of giving the family

names

name last are indexed with inversion and a comma.

16.79:

Indexing Hungarian

names

Kung, H. H.

Tsou, Tang

16.80:

Indexing Indian

names

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Foreign Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.79 INDEXING HUNGARIAN NAMES

List of Tables

In Hungarian practice the family name precedes the given name--for example, Bartók Béla, Molnár

Index

Ferenc. In English contexts, however, such names are usually inverted; in an index they are therefore

reinverted, with a comma added.

16.77:

Bartók, Béla

Indexing Burmese

Molnár, Ferenc

names

16.78:

Family names beginning with an initial should be indexed under the initial (see also 8.13).

Indexing Chinese

names

É. Kiss, Katalin

16.79:

Indexing Hungarian

names

16.80:

Indexing Indian

names

16.81:

Indexing Indonesian

names

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Foreign Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.80 INDEXING INDIAN NAMES

List of Tables

Modern Indian names generally appear with the family name last and are indexed accordingly. As

Index

with all names, the personal preference of the individual as well as usage should be observed.

Gandhi, Mohandas Karamchand

16.78:

Krishna Menon, V. K.

Indexing Chinese

Narayan, R. K.

names

16.79:

Indexing Hungarian

names

16.80:

Indexing Indian

names

16.81:

Indexing Indonesian

names

16.82:

Indexing Japanese

names

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Foreign Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.81 INDEXING INDONESIAN NAMES

List of Tables

Usage varies. Some Indonesians (especially Javanese) use only a single, given name. Others use more

Index

than one name; even though the given name comes first, these are often indexed like Chinese names,

with no inversion or punctuation (see third and fourth examples). Indonesians with Muslim names

and certain others whose names may include a title or an honorific are indexed by the final element,

16.79:

with inversion. The indexer must therefore ascertain how a person's full name is referred to in text

Indexing Hungarian

names

and which part of the name is used for a short reference.

16.80:

Indexing Indian

Habibi, B. J.

names

Hatta, Mohammed

16.81:

Marzuki Darusman

Indexing Indonesian

names

Pramoedya Ananta Toer

Suharto

16.82:

Indexing Japanese

Sukarno

names

Suryokusumo, Wiyono

16.83:

Indexing

Portuguese names

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Foreign Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.82 INDEXING JAPANESE NAMES

List of Tables

In Japanese usage the family name precedes the given name; names are therefore not inverted in the

Index

index, and no comma is used. If the name is westernized, as it often is by authors writing in English,

the family name comes last. The indexer must therefore make certain which practice is followed in the

text so that the family name always appears first in the index.

16.80:

Indexing Indian

Tajima Yumiko [alphabetize

names

under T]

16.81:

Indexing Indonesian

Yoshida Shigeru [alphabetize

names

under Y]

16.82:

Indexing Japanese

but

names

Kurosawa, Noriaki [referred to in

16.83:

Indexing

text as Noriaki Kurosawa]

Portuguese names

16.84:

Indexing Spanish

names

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Foreign Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.83 INDEXING PORTUGUESE NAMES

List of Tables

The Portuguese, unlike the Spanish (see below), index surnames by the last element. This does not

Index

include the designations Filho (son), Neto (grandson), and JÃºnior, which always follow the second

family name.

16.81:

CÃ¢mara JÃºnior, JosÃ© Mattoso

Indexing Indonesian

JucÃ¡ Filho, CÃ¢ndido

names

Martins, Luciana de Lima

16.82:

Silva Neto, Serafim da

Indexing Japanese

names

Vasconcellos, J. Leite de

16.83:

Indexing

Where both Portuguese and Spanish names appear in the same context, cross-references may be

Portuguese names

necessary.

16.84:

Indexing Spanish

names

16.85:

Indexing Thai

names

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Foreign Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.84 INDEXING SPANISH NAMES

List of Tables

In Spain and in some Latin American countries a double family name is often used, of which the first

Index

element is the father's family name and the second the mother's birth name ( her father's family name).

The two names are sometimes joined by y (and). Such compound names are alphabetized under the

first element. Cross-references will often be needed, especially if the person is generally known under

16.82:

the second element or if the indexer is uncertain where to place the main entry. Webster's is a good

Indexing Japanese

names

guide for persons listed there. Where many Spanish names appear, an indexer not conversant with

16.83:

Spanish or Latin American culture should seek help.

Indexing

Portuguese names

García Lorca, Federico

16.84:

Lorca, Federico García. See García

Indexing Spanish

names

Lorca, Federico

Ortega y Gasset, José

16.85:

Indexing Thai

Sánchez Mendoza, Juana

names

16.86:

When the particle de appears in a Spanish name, the family name, under which the person is indexed,

Indexing

Vietnamese names

may be either the preceding or the following name (depending in part on how a person is known). If

it is not clear from the text and the name is not in Webster's or otherwise widely known, a cross-

reference will be needed.

Balboa, Vasco Núñez de

Esquivel de Sánchez, María

Fernández de Navarrete, Juan

Fernández de Oviedo, Gonzalo

Traditionally, a married woman replaced her mother's family name with her husband's (first) family

name, sometimes preceded by de. Her name should be alphabetized, however, by the first family

name (her father's).

Mendoza de Peña, María Carmen

[woman's name after marriage]

Mendoza Salinas, María Carmen

[woman's name before

marriage]

Peña Montalvo, Juan Alberto

[husband's name]

In telephone directories and elsewhere, some women appear under the husband's family name, but

this is not a recommended bibliographic or indexing practice. Many modern women in Spanish-

speaking countries no longer take the husband's family name. See also 8.11.

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Foreign Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.85 INDEXING THAI NAMES

List of Tables

Although family names are used in Thailand, Thais are normally known by their given names, which

Index

come first, as in English names. The name is often alphabetized under the first name, but practice

varies. Seek expert help.

16.83:

Sarit Thanarat [ or Thanarat, Sarit]

Indexing

Sivaraksa, Sulak [ or Sulak

Portuguese names

Sivaraksa]

16.84:

Supachai Panitchpakdi

Indexing Spanish

names

16.85:

Indexing Thai

names

16.86:

Indexing

Vietnamese names

16.87:

Indexing other

Asian names

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Foreign Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.86 INDEXING VIETNAMESE NAMES

List of Tables

Vietnamese names consist of three elements, the family name being the first. Since Vietnamese

Index

persons are usually referred to by the last part of their given names (Premier Diem, General Giap),

they are best indexed under that form.

16.84:

Diem, Ngo Dinh [ cross-reference

Indexing Spanish

under Ngo Dinh Diem]

names

Giap, Vo Nguyen [ cross-reference

16.85:

under Vo Nguyen Giap]

Indexing Thai

names

16.86:

Indexing

Vietnamese names

16.87:

Indexing other

Asian names

16.88:

Omission of article

in indexed names

of organizations

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Foreign Personal Names

of Contents

List of Figures

16.87 INDEXING OTHER ASIAN NAMES

List of Tables

Throughout Asia, many names derive from Arabic, Chinese, the European languages, and other

Index

languages, regardless of where the bearers of the names were born. In the Philippines, for example,

names follow a Western order, giving precedence to the family name, though the names themselves

may be derived from local languages. In some parts of Asia, titles denoting status form part of a

16.85:

name as it appears in written work and must be dealt with appropriately. When the standard

Indexing Thai

names

reference works do not supply an answer, query the author.

16.86:

Indexing

Vietnamese names

16.87:

Indexing other

Asian names

16.88:

Omission of article

in indexed names

of organizations

16.89:

Indexing personal

names as corporate

names

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Names of Organizations and Businesses

of Contents

List of Figures

16.88 OMISSION OF ARTICLE IN INDEXED NAMES OF ORGANIZATIONS

List of Tables

In indexing organizations whose names begin with the (which would be lowercased in running text),

Index

the article is omitted.

Sutherland Group

16.86:

University of Chicago

Indexing

Vietnamese names

16.87:

Indexing other

Asian names

16.88:

Omission of article

in indexed names

of organizations

16.89:

Indexing personal

names as corporate

names

16.90:

Indexing names

beginning with

"Mount," "Lake,"

and such

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Names of Organizations and Businesses

of Contents

List of Figures

16.89 INDEXING PERSONAL NAMES AS CORPORATE NAMES

List of Tables

When used as names of businesses or other organizations, full personal names are not inverted, and

Index

the corporate name is alphabetized under the first name or initials. An organization widely known by

the family name, however, should be indexed under that name. In both instances, cross-references

may be appropriate.

16.87:

Indexing other

A. G. Edwards & Sons, Inc.

Asian names

[alphabetize under A]

16.88:

Omission of article

Penney, J. C. See J. C. Penney

in indexed names

Company, Inc.

of organizations

Saphir, Kurt. See Kurt Saphir

16.89:

Pianos, Inc.

Indexing personal

names as corporate

names

but

16.90:

John G. Shedd Aquarium. See

Indexing names

beginning with

Shedd Aquarium

"Mount," "Lake,"

and such

A personal name and the name of that person's company should be indexed separately.

16.91:

Indexing names

beginning with the

Morgan, Junius S., 39, 42--44; J. S.

definite article

Morgan & Company, 45--48

J. S. Morgan & Company, 45--48.

See also Morgan, Junius S.

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Names of Places

of Contents

List of Figures

16.90 INDEXING NAMES BEGINNING WITH "MOUNT," "LAKE," AND SUCH

List of Tables

Proper names of mountains, lakes, and so forth that begin with a generic name are usually inverted

Index

and alphabetized under the nongeneric name.

Geneva, Lake

16.88:

Japan, Sea of

Omission of article

McKinley, Mount

in indexed names

of organizations

Names of cities or towns beginning with topographic elements, as well as islands known as "Isle of

16.89:

Indexing personal

. . . ," are alphabetized under the first element.

names as corporate

names

Isle of Pines

16.90:

Isle of Wight

Indexing names

beginning with

Lake Geneva, WI

"Mount," "Lake,"

Mount Vernon, NY

and such

Valley Forge

16.91:

Indexing names

beginning with the

definite article

16.92:

Indexing names

beginning with

foreign definite

articles

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Names of Places

of Contents

List of Figures

16.91 INDEXING NAMES BEGINNING WITH THE DEFINITE ARTICLE

List of Tables

Aside from a very few cities such as The Hague (unless the Dutch form Den Haag is used; see 16.92) or

Index

The Dalles, where The is part of the formal name and thus capitalized, an initial the used informally

with place-names is omitted in indexing. See also 8.44.

16.89:

Bronx

Indexing personal

Hague, The

names as corporate

names

Loop (Chicago's downtown)

Netherlands

16.90:

Indexing names

Ozarks

beginning with

Philippines

"Mount," "Lake,"

and such

16.91:

Indexing names

beginning with the

definite article

16.92:

Indexing names

beginning with

foreign definite

articles

16.93:

Indexing names of

places beginning

with "Saint"

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Names of Places

of Contents

List of Figures

16.92 INDEXING NAMES BEGINNING WITH FOREIGN DEFINITE ARTICLES

List of Tables

Names of places beginning with El, Le, La, and such, whether in English- or non-English-speaking

Index

countries, are alphabetized according to the article.

Den Haag

16.90:

El Dorado

Indexing names

El Paso

beginning with

"Mount," "Lake,"

La Crosse

and such

La Mancha

16.91:

Le Havre

Indexing names

Les Baux-de-Provence

beginning with the

definite article

Los Alamos

16.92:

Indexing names

beginning with

foreign definite

articles

16.93:

Indexing names of

places beginning

with "Saint"

16.94:

Comma in index

entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Alphabetizing >> Names of Places

of Contents

List of Figures

16.93 INDEXING NAMES OF PLACES BEGINNING WITH "SAINT"

List of Tables

Names of places beginning with Saint, Sainte, St. , or Ste. should be indexed as they appear in the text-

Index

-that is, abbreviated only if abbreviated in text. Like personal names, they are alphabetized as they

appear. Cross-references may be appropriate (e.g., "Saint. See St.," or vice versa). Note that French

hyphenates place-names with Saint. See also 10.31, 11.29.

16.91:

Indexing names

Saint-Cloud (in France)

beginning with the

definite article

Sainte-Foy

16.92:

Saint-Luc

Indexing names

St. Cloud (in Florida)

beginning with

foreign definite

Ste.-Anne-de-BeauprÃ©

articles

St. Louis

16.93:

St. Vincent Island

Indexing names of

places beginning

with "Saint"

16.94:

Comma in index

entries

16.95:

Colon in index

entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuating Indexes: A Summary

of Contents

List of Figures

16.94 COMMA IN INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

In both run-in and indented indexes, when a main heading is followed immediately by locators

Index

(usually page or paragraph numbers; see 16.13), a comma appears before the first locator. Commas

appear between locators. Commas are also used when a heading is an inversion or when a main

heading is qualified, without subentries. The second example illustrates three uses of the comma. For

16.92:

the role of commas in alphabetizing, see 16.61.

Indexing names

beginning with

foreign definite

lighthouses, early history of, 40--

articles

42

16.93:

Sabba da Castiglione, Monsignor,

Indexing names of

places beginning

209, 337; on cosmetics, 190, 195,

with "Saint"

198

16.94:

Comma in index

entries

16.95:

Colon in index

entries

16.96:

Semicolon in index

entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuating Indexes: A Summary

of Contents

List of Figures

16.95 COLON IN INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

In a run-in index, when a main heading is followed immediately by subentries, a colon appears before

Index

the first subheading. In an indented index, no punctuation is used after the main heading. A colon is

also used in a cross-reference to a subentry. See also 16.20.

16.93:

Maya: art of, 236--43; cities of,

Indexing names of

178. See also YucatÃ¡n: Maya

places beginning

with "Saint"

Maya

16.94:

Comma in index

art of, 236--43

entries

cities of, 178

16.95:

See also YucatÃ¡n: Maya

Colon in index

entries

16.96:

Semicolon in index

entries

16.97:

Period in index

entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuating Indexes: A Summary

of Contents

List of Figures

16.96 SEMICOLON IN INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

When subentries or sub-subentries are run in, they are separated by semicolons. Cross-references, if

Index

more than one, are also separated by semicolons.

astronomy: Galileo's works on,

16.94:

20--21, 22--23, 24; skills needed

Comma in index

in, 548--49. See also Brahe,

entries

Tycho; comets; Flamsteed, John

16.95:

Colon in index

entries

16.96:

Semicolon in index

entries

16.97:

Period in index

entries

16.98:

Parentheses in

index headings

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuating Indexes: A Summary

of Contents

List of Figures

16.97 PERIOD IN INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

In a run-in index a period is used only before See (or See under) or See also (or See also under). In an

Index

indented index a period is used only before See. When a see or see also reference in parentheses follows

a subheading or a subentry in either a run-in or an indented index, no period is used. No period

follows the final word of any entry. For examples, see 16.17, 16.20, 16.19, 16.143.

16.95:

Colon in index

entries

16.96:

Semicolon in index

entries

16.97:

Period in index

entries

16.98:

Parentheses in

index headings

16.99:

Em dash in index

entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuating Indexes: A Summary

of Contents

List of Figures

16.98 PARENTHESES IN INDEX HEADINGS

List of Tables

Parentheses enclose identification or supplementary information. For the role of parentheses in

Index

alphabetizing, see 16.61.

Charles I (king of England)

16.96:

Charles I (king of Portugal)

Semicolon in index

Of Human Bondage (Maugham)

entries

16.97:

Period in index

entries

16.98:

Parentheses in

index headings

16.99:

Em dash in index

entries

16.100:

En dash in index

entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuating Indexes: A Summary

of Contents

List of Figures

16.99 EM DASH IN INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

For use of the em dash in run-in indexes that require occasional sub-subentries, see example B in

Index

16.27.

16.97:

Period in index

entries

16.98:

Parentheses in

index headings

16.99:

Em dash in index

entries

16.100:

En dash in index

entries

16.101:

Schedule for

indexing

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Punctuating Indexes: A Summary

of Contents

List of Figures

16.100 EN DASH IN INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

The en dash is used for page ranges and all other inclusive locators (e.g., "dogs, 135--42"). For

Index

abbreviating inclusive numbers in indexes, see 16.14. See also 6.78, the index to this manual, and

examples throughout this chapter.

16.98:

Parentheses in

index headings

16.99:

Em dash in index

entries

16.100:

En dash in index

entries

16.101:

Schedule for

indexing

16.102:

Indexing from page

proofs

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Before Indexing Begins: Tools and Decisions

of Contents

List of Figures

16.101 SCHEDULE FOR INDEXING

List of Tables

Anyone making an index for the first time should know that the task is intensive and time-

Index

consuming. An index for a three-hundred-page book could take as much as three weeks' work or

more. See also 16.4.

16.99:

Em dash in index

entries

16.100:

En dash in index

entries

16.101:

Schedule for

indexing

16.102:

Indexing from page

proofs

16.103:

Publisher's indexing

preferences

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Before Indexing Begins: Tools and Decisions

of Contents

List of Figures

16.102 INDEXING FROM PAGE PROOFS

List of Tables

For a printed work, the indexer must have in hand a clean and complete set of proofs before

Index

beginning to index. Some indexers prefer also to have a PDF version of the proofs so that they can

search for specific terms (see 16.105). For a journal volume, the work may begin when the first issue

to be indexed has been paginated, and it may continue for several months, until page proofs for the

16.100:

final issue in the volume have been generated. For an electronic work, unless the index is produced

En dash in index

entries

by coding the electronic files, a printout showing both content and locators may be required. See also

16.101:

16.108, 16.117--25.

Schedule for

indexing

16.102:

Indexing from page

proofs

16.103:

Publisher's indexing

preferences

16.104:

Indexing tools

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Before Indexing Begins: Tools and Decisions

of Contents

List of Figures

16.103 PUBLISHER'S INDEXING PREFERENCES

List of Tables

Before beginning work, the indexer should know the publisher's preferences in such matters as

Index

alphabetizing, run-in or indented style, inclusive numbers, handling of numeric headings, and the

like (all matters dealt with in earlier sections of this chapter). For a journal volume index, the style is

likely to be well established, and the indexer must follow that style. If the publisher requests an index

16.101:

of a particular length, the indexer should adjust the normal editing time accordingly. See also 16.131.

Schedule for

indexing

16.102:

Indexing from page

proofs

16.103:

Publisher's indexing

preferences

16.104:

Indexing tools

16.105:

Using the

electronic files to

index

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Before Indexing Begins: Tools and Decisions

of Contents

List of Figures

16.104 INDEXING TOOLS

List of Tables

The dedicated indexing programs used by many professional indexers automate such tasks as cross-

Index

referencing and the collation of entries and subentries and include special options for alphabetizing--

for example, to exclude certain words or characters and to conform to either the letter-by-letter or

word-by-word system (see 16.58). Such programs, however, tend to require more learning time than

16.102:

most authors can afford (see 16.4). Fortunately, an index can be prepared according to the guidelines

Indexing from page

proofs

in this chapter by simply entering terms and locators into a separate document using an ordinary

16.103:

word processor--though cross-references and alphabetizing, in particular, will need to be checked

Publisher's indexing

manually throughout the process (see 16.57; see also 16.5). For the latest information about tools for

preferences

indexing, consult the website of the American Society for Indexing.

16.104:

Indexing tools

16.105:

Using the

electronic files to

index

16.106:

Formatting index

entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Before Indexing Begins: Tools and Decisions

of Contents

List of Figures

16.105 USING THE ELECTRONIC FILES TO INDEX

List of Tables

Publishers' policies vary as to whether they can agree to supply indexers with page proofs in

Index

electronic form. Some publishers may agree to provide a searchable PDF--which can be helpful in

double-checking that additional instances of particular terms have not been overlooked. Some

indexers may prefer also to highlight and refer to the PDF rather than a paper copy as they create the

16.103:

index. It should be noted, however, that an index cannot be automatically "generated" from a PDF

Publisher's indexing

preferences

and that there is no substitute for rereading the whole work. See also 16.5, 16.119.

16.104:

Indexing tools

16.105:

Using the

electronic files to

index

16.106:

Formatting index

entries

16.107:

Indexing the old-

fashioned way

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Before Indexing Begins: Tools and Decisions

of Contents

List of Figures

16.106 FORMATTING INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

Consult with the publisher up front to determine whether a run-in or indented index is required (see

Index

16.24--28) and whether there are any other specific requirements. Format the manuscript accordingly,

using a flush-and-hang style (see 16.24). See also 16.131.

16.104:

Indexing tools

16.105:

Using the

electronic files to

index

16.106:

Formatting index

entries

16.107:

Indexing the old-

fashioned way

16.108:

Preliminary

indexing work

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Before Indexing Begins: Tools and Decisions

of Contents

List of Figures

16.107 INDEXING THE OLD-FASHIONED WAY

List of Tables

Before the advent of word processors (and their cutting-and-pasting and sorting functions), indexers

Index

used to handwrite or type preliminary entries and subentries on 3″ × 5″ index cards, then alphabetize

and edit the cards, and finally type the index, while further refining it, on 8½″ × 11″ sheets. For

details, consult Nancy Mulvany, Indexing Books (bibliog. 2.5), or the thirteenth or fourteenth edition of

16.105:

this manual (no longer in print but available in large libraries). The procedures described in the

Using the

electronic files to

following sections can be adapted to the index-card method.

index

16.106:

Formatting index

entries

16.107:

Indexing the old-

fashioned way

16.108:

Preliminary

indexing work

16.109:

Indexing the text,

front matter, and

back matter

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> When to Begin

of Contents

List of Figures

16.108 PRELIMINARY INDEXING WORK

List of Tables

Although some planning can be done at the manuscript stage, most indexes are prepared as soon as a

Index

work is in final, paginated form, or "page proofs." It is crucial, in fact, that indexing not begin until

pagination is final. For indexes in which the locators are paragraph or section numbers rather than

page numbers, however, earlier iterations of the final or near-final manuscript can often be used to get

16.106:

a head start. Authors who are not preparing their own indexes may compile a list of important terms

Formatting index

entries

for the indexer, but doing much more is likely to cause duplication or backtracking.

16.107:

Indexing the old-

fashioned way

16.108:

Preliminary

indexing work

16.109:

Indexing the text,

front matter, and

back matter

16.110:

Indexing footnotes

and endnotes

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> What Parts of the Work to Index

of Contents

List of Figures

16.109 INDEXING THE TEXT, FRONT MATTER, AND BACK MATTER

List of Tables

The entire text of a book or journal article, including substantive content in notes (see 16.110), should

Index

be indexed. Much of the front matter, however, is not indexable--title page, dedication, epigraphs, lists

of illustrations and tables, and acknowledgments. A preface, or a foreword by someone other than the

author of the work, may be indexed if it concerns the subject of the work and not simply how the

16.107:

work came to be written. A true introduction, whether in the front matter or, more commonly, in the

Indexing the old-

fashioned way

body of the work, is always indexed (for introduction versus preface, see 1.42). Book appendixes

16.108:

should be indexed if they contain information that supplements the text, but not if they merely

Preliminary

reproduce documents that are discussed in the text (the full text of a treaty, for example, or a

indexing work

questionnaire). Appendixes to journal articles are indexed as part of the articles. Glossaries,

16.109:

Indexing the text,

bibliographies, and other such lists are usually not indexed.

front matter, and

back matter

16.110:

Indexing footnotes

and endnotes

16.111:

Endnote locators in

index entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> What Parts of the Work to Index

of Contents

List of Figures

16.110 INDEXING FOOTNOTES AND ENDNOTES

List of Tables

Notes, whether footnotes or endnotes, should be indexed only if they continue or amplify discussion

Index

in the text (substantive notes). Notes that merely contain source citations documenting statements in

the text (reference notes) need not be indexed.

16.108:

Preliminary

indexing work

16.109:

Indexing the text,

front matter, and

back matter

16.110:

Indexing footnotes

and endnotes

16.111:

Endnote locators in

index entries

16.112:

Footnote locators

in index entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> What Parts of the Work to Index

of Contents

List of Figures

16.111 ENDNOTE LOCATORS IN INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

Endnotes in printed works are referred to by page, the letter n (for note), and--extremely important--

Index

the note number, with no internal space (334n14). If two or more consecutive notes are referred to,

two n's and an en dash are used (e.g., 334nn14--16). Nonconsecutive notes on the same page are

treated separately (334n14, 334n16, 334n19). Occasionally, when reference to a note near the end of

16.109:

one chapter of a book is followed by reference to a note near the beginning of the next,

Indexing the text,

front matter, and

nonchronological order will result (334n19, 334n2). To avoid the appearance of error, the chapter

back matter

number may be added in parentheses after the lower note number.

16.110:

Indexing footnotes

and endnotes

cats, 334n19, 334n2 (chap. 9),

335n5

16.111:

Endnote locators in

index entries

16.112:

Footnote locators

in index entries

16.113:

Indexing notes

spanning more

than one printed

page

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> What Parts of the Work to Index

of Contents

List of Figures

16.112 FOOTNOTE LOCATORS IN INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

Footnotes in a printed work are generally referred to in the same way as endnotes. When a footnote is

Index

the only one on the page, however, the note number (or symbol, if numbers are not used) may be

omitted (156n). Note numbers should never be omitted when several notes appear on the same page.

If there is indexable material in a text passage and in a related footnote, only the page number need

16.110:

be given. But if the text and the footnote materials are not connected, both text and note should be

Indexing footnotes

and endnotes

cited (156, 156n, 278, 278n30).

16.111:

Endnote locators in

index entries

16.112:

Footnote locators

in index entries

16.113:

Indexing notes

spanning more

than one printed

page

16.114:

Indexing

parenthetical text

citations

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> What Parts of the Work to Index

of Contents

List of Figures

16.113 INDEXING NOTES SPANNING MORE THAN ONE PRINTED PAGE

List of Tables

For endnotes or footnotes that continue onto another page, normally only the first page number is

Index

given. But if the reference is specifically to a part of a note that appears on the second page, the

second page number should be used. Referring to a succession of notes, however, may require

inclusive page numbers (e.g., 234--35nn19--23).

16.111:

Endnote locators in

index entries

16.112:

Footnote locators

in index entries

16.113:

Indexing notes

spanning more

than one printed

page

16.114:

Indexing

parenthetical text

citations

16.115:

Indexing authors'

names for an

author index

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> What Parts of the Work to Index

of Contents

List of Figures

16.114 INDEXING PARENTHETICAL TEXT CITATIONS

List of Tables

Documentation given as parenthetical author-date citations in text is not normally indexed unless the

Index

citation documents an otherwise unattributed statement in the text (see 16.110). Any author discussed

in text should be indexed. In some fields it is customary to index every author named in the text;

check with the publisher on the degree of inclusiveness required. See also 16.115.

16.112:

Footnote locators

in index entries

16.113:

Indexing notes

spanning more

than one printed

page

16.114:

Indexing

parenthetical text

citations

16.115:

Indexing authors'

names for an

author index

16.116:

Indexing

illustrations,

tables, charts, and

such

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> What Parts of the Work to Index

of Contents

List of Figures

16.115 INDEXING AUTHORS' NAMES FOR AN AUTHOR INDEX

List of Tables

Author indexes are more common in disciplines that use a variation of the author-date system (see

Index

chapter 15). Since most authors are cited in text by last name and date only, full names must be

sought in the reference list. Occasional discrepancies between text and reference list, not caught in

editing, have to be sorted out or queried, adding to the time it takes to create an author index. Is

16.113:

L. W. Dinero, cited on page 345, the same person as Lauren Dinero, discussed on page 456? If so,

Indexing notes

spanning more

should she be indexed as Dinero, Lauren W.? (Answer: only if all or most authors are indexed with

than one printed

page

full first names--a situation that may be determined by the reference list.) Where a work by two or

more authors is cited in text, the indexer must determine whether each author named requires a

16.114:

Indexing

separate entry. Should Jones, Smith, and Black share one index entry, or should three entries appear?

parenthetical text

citations

And what about Jones et al.? Chicago recommends the following procedure: Make separate entries for

16.115:

each author whose name appears in text. Do not index those unfortunates whose names are concealed

Indexing authors'

under et al. in text.

names for an

author index

16.116:

TEXT CITATIONS

INDEX ENTRIES

Indexing

(Jones, Smith, and Black 1999)

Black, M. X., 366

illustrations,

tables, charts, and

(SÃ¡nchez et al. 2001)

Cruz, M. M., 435

such

(SÃ¡nchez, Cruz, et al. 2002)

Jones, E. J., 366

16.117:

Beginning to

SÃ¡nchez, J. G., 435, 657

highlight and enter

terms

Smith, R. A., 366

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> What Parts of the Work to Index

of Contents

List of Figures

16.116 INDEXING ILLUSTRATIONS, TABLES, CHARTS, AND SUCH

List of Tables

Illustrative matter may be indexed if it is of particular importance to the discussion, especially when

Index

such items are not listed in or after the table of contents. References to illustrations may be set in

italics (or boldface, if preferred); a headnote should then be inserted at the beginning of the index (see

16.141 for an example). Such references usually follow in page order.

16.114:

Indexing

reptilian brain, 199, 201--3, 202,

parenthetical text

citations

341, 477, 477--81

16.115:

Indexing authors'

Alternatively, references to tables may be denoted by t, to figures by f, plates by pl, or whatever

names for an

author index

works (all set in roman, with no space following the page number). Add an appropriate headnote

(e.g., "The letter t following a page number denotes a table"). If the number of an illustration is

16.116:

Indexing

essential, it is safer to use table, fig. , and so on, with no comma following the page number.

illustrations,

tables, charts, and

such

authors and printers, 88 table 5,

16.117:

89--90, 122--25, 122 fig. 7

Beginning to

titi monkeys, 69, 208t, 209t, 210f

highlight and enter

terms

16.118:

Deciding how many

terms to mark

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Marking Proofs and Preparing Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.117 BEGINNING TO HIGHLIGHT AND ENTER TERMS

List of Tables

After a perusal of the table of contents and the work as a whole, an indexer should begin highlighting

Index

terms to be used as main headings or subheadings. This is normally done by hand-marking a set of

proofs. Inexperienced indexers are advised to mark the proofs--at least in the early stages--with the

same kind of detail as is illustrated in figure 16.1. Most indexers prefer to mark one section (or

16.115:

chapter or journal issue) at a time and--using a word processor or dedicated indexing software (see

Indexing authors'

names for an

16.104)--to enter and alphabetize the marked terms in that section before going on to the next section.

author index

The notes belonging to the section, even if endnotes, should be checked and, if necessary, indexed at

16.116:

the same time (see 16.110). As the indexer becomes more skilled in marking the proofs, less

Indexing

illustrations,

underlining and fewer marginal notes may suffice.

tables, charts, and

such

16.117:

Beginning to

highlight and enter

terms

16.118:

Deciding how many

terms to mark

16.119:

How to mark index

entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Marking Proofs and Preparing Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.118 DECIDING HOW MANY TERMS TO MARK

List of Tables

The number of terms to mark on any one printed page obviously depends on the kind of work being

Index

indexed. As a very rough guide, an average of five references per text page in a book will yield a

modest index (one-fiftieth the length of the text), whereas fifteen or more will yield a fairly long

index (about one-twentieth the length of the text or more). If the publisher has budgeted for a strictly

16.116:

limited number of pages, the indexer should work accordingly. Remember that it is always easier to

Indexing

illustrations,

drop entries than to add them; err on the side of inclusiveness. See also 16.30, 16.31, 16.103, 16.109--16.

tables, charts, and

such

16.117:

Beginning to

highlight and enter

terms

16.118:

Deciding how many

terms to mark

16.119:

How to mark index

entries

16.120:

Planning index

subentries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Marking Proofs and Preparing Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.119 HOW TO MARK INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

To visualize the method advocated here, suppose you are indexing a chapter from Wayne Booth's For

Index

the Love of It (University of Chicago Press, 1999), a consideration of work and play and work as play

(see fig. 16.1). You have read through the chapter once and now have to go back and select headings

and subheadings for indexing this particular section (of which only the first paragraphs are shown

16.117:

here). You decide that the whole section (pp. 54--56) will have to be indexed under both work and

Beginning to

highlight and enter

play, so you mark the section head as shown. (On the marked proofs, a colon separates a proposed

terms

principal heading from a proposed subheading.) Going down the page, you underline Bliss Perry

16.118:

(which will of course be inverted--Perry, Bliss--as a heading; similarly for the other personal names).

Deciding how many

terms to mark

You also underline amateur and professional (modifying them to the plural). In the second paragraph,

16.119:

you underline work and love, with proposed subheads, and Churchill (noting the first name in the

How to mark index

entries

margin). You decide to index Chicago Symphony Orchestra--which in another work might be tangential

but here ties in with the book's major subtheme of musical performance and appreciation--and also

16.120:

Planning index

mark politicians, with proposed subhead. You underline Huizinga (adding "Johan" in the margin) and

subentries

the work Homo Ludens, which might also be a subheading under "Huizinga, Johan." In the note, you

16.121:

Recording inclusive

mark two names (supplying a first name for Pater), one title, and one additional term (see also

numbers for index

16.110).

terms

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Marking Proofs and Preparing Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.120 PLANNING INDEX SUBENTRIES

List of Tables

For each term marked, you should make an effort to write in a modification--a word or phrase that

Index

narrows the application of the heading, hence a potential subentry. Although some such modifications

may eventually be dropped, they should be kept on hand in case they are needed. Otherwise you

may end up with some headings that are followed by nothing but a long string of numbers, which

16.118:

makes for an all but useless index entry. The modifications can be altered and added to as the

Deciding how many

terms to mark

indexing proceeds.

16.119:

How to mark index

entries

16.120:

Planning index

subentries

16.121:

Recording inclusive

numbers for index

terms

16.122:

Typing and

modifying index

entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Marking Proofs and Preparing Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.121 RECORDING INCLUSIVE NUMBERS FOR INDEX TERMS

List of Tables

If a text discussion extends over more than one page, section, or paragraph, both beginning and

Index

ending numbers--which will depend on what locator system is being used (see 16.13)--must be written

in. See also 16.14.

16.119:

How to mark index

entries

16.120:

Planning index

subentries

16.121:

Recording inclusive

numbers for index

terms

16.122:

Typing and

modifying index

entries

16.123:

Alphabetizing

entries as part of

the indexing

process

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Marking Proofs and Preparing Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.122 TYPING AND MODIFYING INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

Most entries at this stage will include three elements: a heading, a modification (or provisional

Index

subentry), and a locator (page or paragraph number). While typing, you will probably modify some

of the headings and add, delete, or alter subheadings and locators. After typing each entry, read it

carefully against the page proofs--in particular, checking that the page numbers or other locators are

16.120:

correct. You are unlikely to have time to read your final index manuscript against the marked-up

Planning index

subentries

proofs, though you should certainly retain the proofs for reference until the work has been published.

16.121:

See also 16.106.

Recording inclusive

numbers for index

terms

16.122:

Typing and

modifying index

entries

16.123:

Alphabetizing

entries as part of

the indexing

process

16.124:

Final check of

indexed proofs

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Marking Proofs and Preparing Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.123 ALPHABETIZING ENTRIES AS PART OF THE INDEXING PROCESS

List of Tables

Many indexers alphabetize as they type; others let their software do it, intervening as necessary. By

Index

this time the indexer should have decided whether to use the letter-by-letter or the word-by-word

system (see 16.58--61). If the system chosen proves unsatisfactory for the particular work as the index

proceeds, a switch can be made if the publisher agrees. See also 16.57.

16.121:

Recording inclusive

numbers for index

terms

16.122:

Typing and

modifying index

entries

16.123:

Alphabetizing

entries as part of

the indexing

process

16.124:

Final check of

indexed proofs

16.125:

Noting errors

during indexing

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Marking Proofs and Preparing Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.124 FINAL CHECK OF INDEXED PROOFS

List of Tables

After typing all the entries, read quickly through the marked-up proofs once again to see whether

Index

anything indexable has been omitted. You may find some unmarked items that seemed peripheral at

the time but now, in the light of themes developed in later chapters, declare themselves to be

significant. Or you may have missed major items. Now is the time to remedy all omissions.

16.122:

Typing and

modifying index

entries

16.123:

Alphabetizing

entries as part of

the indexing

process

16.124:

Final check of

indexed proofs

16.125:

Noting errors

during indexing

16.126:

Refining the terms

for main headings

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Marking Proofs and Preparing Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.125 NOTING ERRORS DURING INDEXING

List of Tables

Although not engaged to proofread, the indexer has to read carefully and usually finds a number of

Index

typographical errors and minor inconsistencies. If indexing a book (rather than a journal volume,

most of which will already have been published), keep track of all such errors and send a list to the

publisher (who will be very grateful) when, or before, submitting the index.

16.123:

Alphabetizing

entries as part of

the indexing

process

16.124:

Final check of

indexed proofs

16.125:

Noting errors

during indexing

16.126:

Refining the terms

for main headings

16.127:

Main entries versus

subentries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Editing and Refining the Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.126 REFINING THE TERMS FOR MAIN HEADINGS

List of Tables

The assembled entries must now be edited to a coherent whole. You have to make a final choice

Index

among synonymous or closely related terms-- agriculture, farming, or crop raising; clothing, costume, or

dress; life, existence, or being--and, if you think necessary, prepare suitable cross-references to reflect

those choices. For journals, the terms may have been established in the indexes for previous volumes

16.124:

and should be retained.

Final check of

indexed proofs

16.125:

Noting errors

during indexing

16.126:

Refining the terms

for main headings

16.127:

Main entries versus

subentries

16.128:

When to furnish

subentries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Editing and Refining the Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.127 MAIN ENTRIES VERSUS SUBENTRIES

List of Tables

You also have to decide whether certain items are best treated as main entries or as subentries under

Index

another heading. Where will readers look first? In a work dealing with schools of various kinds, such

terms as kindergarten, elementary school, middle school, and public school should constitute separate

entries; in a work in which those terms appear but are not the primary subject matter, they may better

16.125:

be treated as subentries under school. An index with relatively few main entries but masses of

Noting errors

during indexing

subentries is unhelpful as a search tool. Furthermore, in an indented index an excessively long string

16.126:

of subentries may begin to look like a set of main entries, so that users lose their way alphabetically.

Refining the terms

Promote subentries to main entries and use the alphabet to its best advantage.

for main headings

16.127:

Main entries versus

subentries

16.128:

When to furnish

subentries

16.129:

How to phrase

subheadings

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Editing and Refining the Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.128 WHEN TO FURNISH SUBENTRIES

List of Tables

Main headings unmodified by subentries should not be followed by more than five or six locators. If,

Index

for example, the draft index of a work on health care includes an entry like the first example below, it

should be broken up into a number of subentries, such as those in the second example, to lead

readers quickly to the information sought. The extra space needed is a small price to pay for their

16.126:

convenience.

Refining the terms

for main headings

hospitals, 17, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 29-

16.127:

Main entries versus

-31, 33, 35, 36, 38, 42, 91--92,

subentries

94, 95, 96, 98, 101, 111--14, 197

16.128:

hospitals: administration of, 22,

When to furnish

96; and demand for patient

subentries

services, 23, 91--92; efficiency

16.129:

How to phrase

of, 17, 29--31, 33, 111--14;

subheadings

finances of, 28, 33, 36, 38, 42,

16.130:

95, 112; and length of patient

Checking cross-

stay, 35, 94, 98, 101, 197;

references against

edited index

quality control in, 22--25, 31

headings

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Editing and Refining the Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.129 HOW TO PHRASE SUBHEADINGS

List of Tables

Subheadings should be as concise and informative as possible and begin with a keyword likely to be

Index

sought. A, an, and the are omitted whenever possible. Example A below, not to be emulated, shows

poorly worded and rambling subheadings. Example B shows greatly improved subentries that

conserve space. Example C adds sub-subentries, making for quicker reference but requiring more

16.127:

space (see 16.27, 16.28). For arrangement of subentries, see 16.68--70.

Main entries versus

subentries

Example A ( not to be emulated)

16.128:

When to furnish

subentries

house renovation

16.129:

balancing heating system, 65

How to phrase

building permit required, 7

subheadings

called "rehabbing," 8

16.130:

Checking cross-

correcting overloaded electrical

references against

circuits, 136

edited index

headings

how wallboard is finished, 140--

44

16.131:

Index submission

installing ready-made fireplace,

format

191--205

painting outside of house adds

value, 11

plumbing permit required, 7

removing paint from doors and

woodwork, 156--58

repairing dripping faucets, 99--

100

replacing clogged water pipes,

125--28

replacing old wiring, 129--34

separate chimney required for

fireplace, 192

straightening sagging joists, 40--

42

termite damage to sills a problem,

25

three ways to deal with broken

plaster, 160--62

violations of electrical code

corrected, 135

what is involved in, 5

Example B (improvement with fairly inclusive subentries)

house renovation, 5, 8

electrical repairs, 129--34, 135, 136

fireplace, installing, 191--205

heating system, balancing, 65

legal requirements, 7, 135, 192

painting and decorating, 11, 156--

58

plaster repair, 160--62

plumbing repairs, 99--100, 125--28

structural problems, 25, 40--42

wallboard, finishing, 140--44

Example C (improvement with sub-subentries)

house renovation, 5, 8

electrical repairs: circuit overload,

136; code violations, 135; old

wiring, 129--34

heating system: balancing, 65;

fireplace installation, 191--205

legal requirements: electrical

code, 135; permits, 7; separate

chimney for fireplace, 192

painting and decorating: painting

exterior, 11; stripping

woodwork, 156--58

plumbing repairs: clogged water

pipes, 125--28; dripping

faucets, 99--100

structural problems: sagging

joists, 40--42; termite damage,

25

wall and ceiling repairs: broken

plaster, 160--62; wallboard,

finishing, 140--44

If it looks as though an index is going to require a great many sub-subentries, the indexer should

check with the publisher before proceeding.

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Editing and Refining the Entries

of Contents

List of Figures

16.130 CHECKING CROSS-REFERENCES AGAINST EDITED INDEX HEADINGS

List of Tables

As a final or near-final step in editing the index, make sure that all cross-references match the edited

Index

headings. See also 16.15--23.

16.128:

When to furnish

subentries

16.129:

How to phrase

subheadings

16.130:

Checking cross-

references against

edited index

headings

16.131:

Index submission

format

16.132:

What to do with a

very bad index

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Mechanics of Indexing >> Submitting the Index

of Contents

List of Figures

16.131 INDEX SUBMISSION FORMAT

List of Tables

Having carefully proofread the draft and checked alphabetical order and all cross-references,

Index

punctuation, and capitalization to ensure consistency--and having produced an index of the required

length, if one has been specified--you will now send the final draft to the publisher. If the publisher

requires a printout, allow margins of at least one inch both left and right, and leave the text

16.129:

unjustified. Do not format the index in columns. Use hard returns only at the end of each entry and,

How to phrase

subheadings

for an indented-style index (see 16.26), at the end of each subentry. Use single line spacing, and apply

16.130:

hanging indents using your software's indention feature (see 16.24; see also 2.22). Do not impose end-

Checking cross-

of-line hyphenation (see 2.12). If there is more than one index, give each an appropriate title (Author

references against

edited index

Index, Subject Index, etc.) and save each in a separate file. To avert disaster, keep a copy of the final

headings

draft that you send to the publisher, as well as your marked-up proofs, until the work has been

16.131:

Index submission

published. Send the publisher a list of any errors you have found (see 16.125).

format

16.132:

What to do with a

very bad index

16.133:

Index-editing

checklist

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Editing an Index Compiled by Someone Else

of Contents

List of Figures

16.132 WHAT TO DO WITH A VERY BAD INDEX

List of Tables

Editing a well-prepared index can be a pleasure. Little work should be needed. A poorly prepared

Index

one, however, presents serious problems. As an editor, you cannot remake a really bad index. If an

index cannot be repaired, you have two choices: omit it or have a new one made by another indexer

(at additional cost)--thereby delaying publication.

16.130:

Checking cross-

references against

edited index

headings

16.131:

Index submission

format

16.132:

What to do with a

very bad index

16.133:

Index-editing

checklist

16.134:

Instructions for

typesetting the

index

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Editing an Index Compiled by Someone Else

of Contents

List of Figures

16.133 INDEX-EDITING CHECKLIST

List of Tables

Editing an index requires some or all of the following steps, not necessarily in the order given here.

Index

Note that it is not necessary to check every heading and every locator against the work--which would

take forever--but it is necessary to read the index carefully and to refer to the page proofs (or final

electronic version) from time to time.

16.131:

Index submission

format

1. Check headings--in both the main entries and subentries--for alphabetical order.

2. Check the spelling, capitalization, and font (i.e., italics or roman) of each heading, consulting the

16.132:

What to do with a

page proofs if in doubt.

very bad index

3. Check punctuation--commas, colons, semicolons, en dashes, etc.--for proper style and

16.133:

consistency (see 16.94--100).

Index-editing

checklist

4. Check cross-references to make sure they go somewhere and that headings match (see 16.21).

16.134:

Make sure they are needed; if only a few locators are involved, substitute these for the see

Instructions for

typesetting the

reference (see 16.16). Ensure that the placement of all cross-references within entries is

index

consistent.

16.135:

5. Add cross-references you believe are necessary.

Type size and

column width for

6. Check to make sure there are no false locators such as "193--93" or "12102" (and figure out

indexes

whether these may be the product of a typo) and make sure the locators to each main heading

and subheading are in ascending order.

7. Check subentries for consistency of order, whether alphabetical or chronological. See 16.68--70.

8. If some entries seem overanalyzed (many subentries with only one locator or, worse, with the

same locator), try to combine some of them if it can be done without sacrificing their

usefulness. If subheadings are more elaborately worded than necessary, try to simplify them.

9. If awkward or unnecessary sub-subentries appear, correct them by adding appropriate repeated

subentries or by adjusting punctuation (see 16.27, 16.28).

10. Look for long strings of unanalyzed locators and break them up, if possible, with subentries

(see 16.10, 16.129).

11. Evaluate the accuracy of locators by a random check of five to ten entries. If more than one

error shows up, consult the author or the indexer; every locator may have to be rechecked.

12. If the index needs trimming, delete any entries (and cross-references thereto) that you know

from your work on the book are trivial, such as references to persons or places used only as

examples of something. But be careful. You may offend someone or let yourself in for a lot of

work. A handful of unnecessary entries, if they are very short, does not mar an otherwise good

index.

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Editing an Index Compiled by Someone Else

of Contents

List of Figures

16.134 INSTRUCTIONS FOR TYPESETTING THE INDEX

List of Tables

At this stage the publisher will have prepared specifications for typesetting the index, and few further

Index

instructions are needed. To avoid problems, a brief note such as the following (for an indented index

to a book) may be prefixed to the index manuscript after consulting the detailed specifications:

16.132:

Set two columns, flush and

What to do with a

hang, ragged right; indent

very bad index

subentries one em; indent

16.133:

runovers two ems; preserve en

Index-editing

checklist

dashes between continuing

16.134:

numbers; leave one line space

Instructions for

between alphabetical blocks.

typesetting the

index

Set headnote across both

columns. See publisher's design

16.135:

Type size and

specifications for size and

column width for

measure.

indexes

16.136:

For an example of a headnote, see 16.141.

Ragged right-hand

margin for indexes

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Typographical Considerations for Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.135 TYPE SIZE AND COLUMN WIDTH FOR INDEXES

List of Tables

In print works, indexes are usually set in smaller type than the body of the work, often two sizes

Index

smaller. That is, if the body copy is set in ten-on-twelve-point type, and the extracts, bibliography,

and appendixes in nine-on-eleven, the index will probably be set in eight-on-ten. Indexes are usually

set in two columns; with a type page twenty-seven picas wide, the index columns will each be

16.133:

thirteen picas, with a one-pica space between them. In large-format print works, however, the index

Index-editing

checklist

may be set in three or even four columns.

16.134:

Instructions for

typesetting the

index

16.135:

Type size and

column width for

indexes

16.136:

Ragged right-hand

margin for indexes

16.137:

Index indention

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Typographical Considerations for Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.136 RAGGED RIGHT-HAND MARGIN FOR INDEXES

List of Tables

For very short lines, such as those in an index, justifying the text usually results in either gaping word

Index

spaces or excessive hyphenation, making for difficult reading. Chicago therefore sets all indexes

without justification ("ragged right").

16.134:

Instructions for

typesetting the

index

16.135:

Type size and

column width for

indexes

16.136:

Ragged right-hand

margin for indexes

16.137:

Index indention

16.138:

Fixing bad breaks

in indexes

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Typographical Considerations for Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.137 INDEX INDENTION

List of Tables

All runover lines are indented, whether the subentries are run in or indented. In indexes with

Index

indented subentries (see 16.26), runover lines have to be indented more deeply than the subentries; all

runovers, whether from a main entry or a subentry (or even a sub-subentry, should these too be

indented), should be indented equally from the left margin. Thus, in an indented index the subentries

16.135:

may be indented one em, the sub-subentries two ems, and the runovers for all entries three ems. (For

Type size and

column width for

avoiding sub-subentries, see 16.27, 16.28.) All these matters, however, must be determined before type

indexes

is set.

16.136:

Ragged right-hand

margin for indexes

16.137:

Index indention

16.138:

Fixing bad breaks

in indexes

16.139:

Adding "continued"

lines in an index

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Typographical Considerations for Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.138 FIXING BAD BREAKS IN INDEXES

List of Tables

The final, typeset index should be checked for bad breaks. A line consisting of only one or two page

Index

numbers should not be left at the top of a column, for example. A single line at the end of an

alphabetic section (followed by a blank line) should not head a column, nor should a single line at the

beginning of an alphabetic section remain at the foot of a column. Blemishes like these are eliminated

16.136:

by rebreaking entries or transposing lines from one column to another, by adding to the white space

Ragged right-hand

margin for indexes

between alphabetic sections, and sometimes by lengthening or shortening all columns on facing pages

16.137:

by one line.

Index indention

16.138:

Fixing bad breaks

in indexes

16.139:

Adding "continued"

lines in an index

16.140:

Making typographic

distinctions in

index entries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Typographical Considerations for Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.139 ADDING "CONTINUED" LINES IN AN INDEX

List of Tables

If an entry breaks at the foot of the last column on a right-hand page (a recto) and resumes at the top

Index

of the following left-hand page (a verso), the main heading should be repeated, followed by the word

continued in parentheses, above the carried-over part of the index.

16.137:

ingestive behavior ( continued)

Index indention

network of causes underlying, 68;

16.138:

physiology of, 69--70, 86--87; in

Fixing bad breaks

rat, 100; in starfish, 45, 52--62

in indexes

16.139:

In an indented index with indented sub-subentries it may be necessary to repeat a subentry if the

Adding "continued"

lines in an index

subentry has been broken.

16.140:

Making typographic

house renovation ( continued)

distinctions in

index entries

structural problems ( continued)

termite damage, 25--27

16.141:

A run-in index with

warped overhangs, 46--49

italicized

references to

figures and tables

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Typographical Considerations for Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.140 MAKING TYPOGRAPHIC DISTINCTIONS IN INDEX ENTRIES

List of Tables

A complicated index can sometimes be made easier to read by using different type styles or fonts. If,

Index

for example, names of writers need to be distinguished from names of literary characters, one or the

other might be set in caps and small caps. Page references to illustrations might be in italic type (see

16.116) and references to the principal treatment of a subject in boldface. If devices of this kind are

16.138:

used, a headnote to the index must furnish a key (see 16.141, 16.143).

Fixing bad breaks

in indexes

16.139:

Adding "continued"

lines in an index

16.140:

Making typographic

distinctions in

index entries

16.141:

A run-in index with

italicized

references to

figures and tables

16.142:

An indented index

with run-in sub-

subentries

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Examples of Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.141 A RUN-IN INDEX WITH ITALICIZED REFERENCES TO FIGURES AND TABLES

List of Tables

Run-in indexes are the most economical of the five formats exemplified in this section. Note the italic

Index

page references and the headnote explaining their use. Boldface could also be used for that purpose

(see 16.143). For more examples and further discussion, see 16.25, 16.27, 16.94--100. See also 16.68,

16.140.

16.139:

Adding "continued"

Page numbers in italics refer to

lines in an index

figures and tables.

16.140:

Making typographic

distinctions in

Abbot, George, 241--42

index entries

ABC, printing of, 164

16.141:

abridgment: cases of, 246n161; as

A run-in index with

italicized

offense, 455--56, 607; of

references to

Philosophical Transactions,

figures and tables

579n83; restrictions on, 226,

16.142:

227; works as, 302--3, 316, 316--

An indented index

with run-in sub-

17

subentries

Abridgement (Croke), 302--3

16.143:

Abridgment (Rolle), 316, 316--17

An indented index

absolutism: absence of in

with indented sub-

subentries and

England, 48; arbitrary

highlighted

government and, 251--52,

definitions

252n182; Cromwell and, 273--

74; Hobbes and, 308; patronage

and, 24; property and, 253, 255;

royal authorship of laws and,

312, 317, 336n29; royal

prerogative and, 251, 253--54

AcadÃ©mie Royale des Sciences

(France), 436, 491n91, 510, 554

If occasional sub-subentries are required in a run-in index, you may resort to the style illustrated in

16.27, example B, using em dashes.

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Examples of Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.142 AN INDENTED INDEX WITH RUN-IN SUB-SUBENTRIES

List of Tables

For further examples and discussion, see 16.28. See also 16.68.

Index

American black bear

compared with giant panda:

activity, 216--17; habitat, 211--

16.140:

Making typographic

12; home range, 219; litter size,

distinctions in

221; movement patterns of

index entries

males, 124--26, 219

16.141:

A run-in index with

delayed implantation in, 191

italicized

reproductive flexibility of, 221

references to

figures and tables

See also bears

amino acid content of bamboo,

16.142:

An indented index

75--76, 86, 89; compared with

with run-in sub-

other foods, 77

subentries

artificial insemination, 179

16.143:

Ascaris schroederi, 162

An indented index

with indented sub-

Asiatic black bear

subentries and

constructing sleeping nests, 140

highlighted

definitions

giant panda serologically close to,

16.144:

228

An index of first

See also bears

lines

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Examples of Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.143 AN INDENTED INDEX WITH INDENTED SUB-SUBENTRIES AND HIGHLIGHTED DEFINITIONS

List of Tables

Note the deep indention for runover lines (see 16.137). A boldface page number indicates that the

Index

term is defined on that page (explained in a headnote at the beginning of the index). Italics could also

be used for that purpose (see 16.141). For further discussion and examples, see 16.28. See also 16.68,

16.140.

16.141:

A run-in index with

Page numbers for definitions are in

italicized

references to

boldface.

figures and tables

16.142:

brightness temperatures, 388, 582,

An indented index

589, 602

with run-in sub-

subentries

bright rims, 7, 16, 27--28 ( see also

16.143:

nebular forms)

An indented index

B stars, 3, 7, 26--27, 647

with indented sub-

subentries and

bulbs (in nebulae). See nebular

highlighted

forms

definitions

cameras, electronic, 492, 499

16.144:

carbon flash, 559

An index of first

lines

Cassiopeia A (3C461). See radio

sources; supernovae

16.145:

An index with

catalogs

authors, titles, and

of bright nebulae, 74

first lines combined

of dark nebulae, 74, 120

Lundmark, 121

Lynds, 123

Schoenberg, 123

Herschel's (of nebulae), 119

of planetary nebulae, 484--85, 563

Perek-Kohoutek, 484, 563

Vorontsov-Velyaminov, 484

of reflection nebulae, 74

3C catalog of radio sources,

revised, 630

central stars. See planetary

nebulae

Cerenkov radiation, 668, 709

chemical composition, 71. See also

abundances; and names of

individual elements

If occasional sub-sub-subentries are essential (they should be avoided if at all possible), they must be

run in to the sub-subentries in the same way as sub-subentries are run in at 16.28, example A.

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Examples of Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.144 AN INDEX OF FIRST LINES

List of Tables

Unless all the poems, hymns, or songs indexed have very short lines, indexes of this kind are often set

Index

full measure (rather than in multiple columns) for easier reading. Letter-by-letter alphabetizing is

normally used. Note that lines beginning with A, An, or The are alphabetized under A or T.

16.141:

After so long an absence, 295

A run-in index with

A handful of red sand, from the

italicized

references to

hot clime, 108

figures and tables

An old man in a lodge within a

16.142:

park, 315

An indented index

Beautiful valley! through whose

with run-in sub-

subentries

verdant meads, 325

16.143:

From this high portal, where

An indented index

upsprings, 630

with indented sub-

subentries and

O'er all the hill-tops, 617

highlighted

Of Prometheus, how undaunted,

definitions

185

16.144:

O hemlock tree! O hemlock tree!

An index of first

lines

how faithful are thy branches,

614

16.145:

An index with

There is no flock, however

authors, titles, and

watched and tended, 107

first lines combined

The young Endymion sleeps

Endymion's sleep, 316

16: INDEXES

Table

Chapter Contents >> Examples of Indexes

of Contents

List of Figures

16.145 AN INDEX WITH AUTHORS, TITLES, AND FIRST LINES COMBINED

List of Tables

To distinguish the elements, authors' names may be set in caps and small caps, titles of poems in

Index

italics, and first lines in roman type, sentence style, without quotation marks. If needed, a headnote to

this effect could be furnished. Letter-by-letter alphabetizing should be used.

16.141:

Cermak, it was, who entertained

A run-in index with

so great astonishment, 819

italicized

references to

Certain she was that tigers

figures and tables

fathered him, 724

16.142:

CHESTERVILLE , NORA M., 212

An indented index

Come, you whose loves are dead,

with run-in sub-

subentries

394

16.143:

Coming Homeward Out of Spain, 73

An indented index

Commemorate me before you

with indented sub-

subentries and

leave me, Charlotte, 292

highlighted

Complaint of a Lover Rebuked, 29

definitions

COMPTON, WILBER C., 96

16.144:

Confound you, Marilyn,

An index of first

lines

confound you, 459

16.145:

An index with

In a general index, poem titles would be set in roman and enclosed in quotation marks, as in text or

authors, titles, and

notes (see 8.179, 8.180).

first lines combined

16 : INDEXES

Table

of Contents

FIGURE 16.1

List of Figures

Sample page of proof from Wayne Booth's For the Love of It, marked up for indexing. See 16.117--25.

List of Tables

PDF Version >>

Index

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

of Contents

Overview

List of Figures

A.1

Understanding the process

List of Tables

A.2

Divisions of labor

A.3

Terminology

Index

A.4

Preparing for more than print

A.5

The journals publishing model

Markup

General Principles

A.6

What is markup?

A.7

Semantic and functional markup

A.8

Document type definitions

A.9

Style sheets

A.10

Metadata

XML

A.11

What is XML?

A.12

SGML, HTML, XMLâ€”a brief history

A.13

Why XML?

A.14

XML elements and attributes

A.15

XML character references

Design

A.16

Mapping markup to design

A.17

Some limitations of style sheets

A.18

Determining length

A.19

Design specifications for printed works

A.20

Design specifications for web-based works

A.21

Picas, points, and pixels

A.22

Em spaces, en spaces, and so forth

The Electronic Workflow

Introduction

A.23

Converting marked-up manuscripts for production

A.24

Steps in an XML workflow

A.25

Where does proofreading fit in?

A.26

Cyclical workflow for web-based publications

When Should XML Be Introduced into the Process?

A.27

Who applies the markup?

A.28

Author's final manuscript converted to XML before editing

A.29

Edited manuscript converted for typesetting

A.30

XML added to files after typesetting

Source Files

A.31

XML source files

A.32

Illustrations

A.33

Tables

A.34

Mathematical expressions

Options for Presenting Content

A.35

Print

A.36

Web

A.37

Converting XML to HTML

A.38

E-book formats

A.39

Additional publishing options

A.40

Digital rights management strategies

Print Technologies

A.41

Electronic markup and print

A.42

The role of PDF in the print process

A.43

Preliminary presswork, or "prepress"

A.44

Paper selection

A.45

Paper sizes

A.46

Paper and the environment

A.47

Offset printing

A.48

Digital printing

A.49

Folded and gathered sheets (F&Gs)

A.50

Binding

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

A.1 UNDERSTANDING THE PROCESS

List of Tables

This appendix, which is intended to give authors and editors an overview of the production process

Index

and the technologies involved, begins where the discussion of manuscript editing in chapter 2 ends.

Production--of a book or a journal article, for publication in electronic or printed form--generally

begins once an edited manuscript is considered final. Many of the details of what subsequently

A.1:

happens to the edited manuscript depend on the hardware and software that are used to turn it into a

Understanding the

process

finished publication. Authors and editors do not necessarily need to understand production processes

A.2:

in all their detail, but anyone who works with designers, typesetters, information technology

Divisions of labor

specialists, and other production personnel should have a basic understanding of what they do. For

A.3:

more detailed coverage of production processes, consult the sources listed in the bibliography,

Terminology

sections 2.6 and 2.7.

A.4:

Preparing for more

than print

A.5:

The journals

publishing model

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

A.2 DIVISIONS OF LABOR

List of Tables

Though most of the physical aspects of producing a publication are now accomplished with software,

Index

publishing has become if anything more complex than it once was. And, whereas many of the

traditional divisions of labor are still firmly in place, new tasks--particularly in information

technology--have been added to the mix. Designers still create a typographic and visual format for a

A.1:

work that is appropriate for the content of that work in a particular medium. Production controllers

Understanding the

process

continue to coordinate the efforts of in-house staff and vendors to ensure timely publication, within

A.2:

budget, and adherence to acceptable manufacturing and electronic publication standards. Meanwhile,

Divisions of labor

editors and authors--once their main roles are done--continue to play a key role in reviewing a

A.3:

publication at various stages of production. But, increasingly, programmers and other IT specialists

Terminology

have come to play an important role, developing and maintaining systems for document conversion

A.4:

Preparing for more

and typesetting as well as many other aspects of electronic publication. In fact, much of the discussion

than print

below--especially of electronic markup and other more technical aspects of production--assumes the

A.5:

indispensable role of IT specialists in the production process.

The journals

publishing model

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

A.3 TERMINOLOGY

List of Tables

Many design and production terms are derived from the technologies and processes used before the

Index

advent of computers. The word leading--synonymous with line spacing--once referred to actual strips

of metal inserted between lines of type. The term font once referred to a specific size and cut (e.g.,

twelve-point italic) of a particular type family, or typeface (once literally the surface, or face, of a piece

A.1:

of type); now that type is rendered and scaled by software, the terms are often used interchangeably.

Understanding the

process

Similarly, the terms typesetting and composition have become interchangeable, both referring to the

A.2:

process of arranging words and images on a screen more or less as they are intended to appear in

Divisions of labor

published form. Even the term markup, which now often refers to the tags used in XML (extensible

A.3:

markup language) and other markup languages to describe the structure and label the components of

Terminology

an electronic document, has its antecedent in pencil markup on paper typescripts and proof. For

A.4:

Preparing for more

definitions of these terms and others used throughout this discussion, see appendix B.

than print

A.5:

The journals

publishing model

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

A.4 PREPARING FOR MORE THAN PRINT

List of Tables

If computers have become the primary tool in the production of virtually all published works, they

Index

have also increasingly come to play a role in how readers find, buy, read, and share publications.

Publishers face a growing demand for electronic versions of the books and journals they produce--

whether as web-based publications or in an e-book format or for full-text storage in searchable

A.2:

electronic archives. It is to the advantage of publishers, then, to tailor their production processes to

Divisions of labor

allow for the delivery of any work in any format--electronic or printed--ideally from a single set of

A.3:

Terminology

source files. XML--which, as an open standard for electronic markup, is available to any publisher--

A.4:

provides the most promising means to date for achieving such flexibility. Moreover, any manuscript

Preparing for more

that has been consistently marked up with one of the methods described in chapter 2 (see 2.78--80)

than print

can become part of an XML production workflow. This appendix assumes that even those who do not

A.5:

The journals

work with XML might benefit from an introduction to XML and a more general consideration of

publishing model

electronic markup languages.

A.6:

What is markup?

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Overview

of Contents

List of Figures

A.5 THE JOURNALS PUBLISHING MODEL

List of Tables

The XML workflow outlined below grows in part out of the experience of publishers of scholarly

Index

journals, many of whom have had to respond to a demand for simultaneous print and electronic

publication that dates to the 1990s. A journal, because it tends to maintain the same format from issue

to issue, is particularly well suited to an XML workflow. Once implemented, the same sets of tags

A.3:

and the same procedures (some of which have been developed specifically for the scholarly

Terminology

publishing industry and enjoy broad support) can be reused and refined as necessary, leading to

A.4:

Preparing for more

certain economies of scale. Book publishers can streamline their production processes to

than print

accommodate a similar, if less straightforward, approach, but the decision to adopt an XML workflow

A.5:

may ultimately be based on the demand for electronic book formats. On the other hand, publishers of

The journals

publishing model

web-based works such as the online edition of this manual can benefit from the fact that XML was

A.6:

initially designed to facilitate HTML presentations (see A.12). For a discussion of print technologies,

What is markup?

which have changed little in recent years, see A.41--50.

A.7:

Semantic and

functional markup

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Markup >> General Principles

of Contents

List of Figures

A.6 WHAT IS MARKUP?

List of Tables

Markup comprises the labels or annotations that are applied to a manuscript or other document in

Index

order to identify its structure and its components. There are four basic ways to apply markup, and

these techniques are described in chapter 2 from the point of view of the manuscript editor. Briefly,

they include markup by pencil on paper; generic markup in a word processor, which is similar to

A.4:

paper markup except that it is typed into the document (see 2.78); word-processing styles (see 2.79);

Preparing for more

than print

and markup in a formal language such as XML (see 2.80). All of these share a fundamental purpose:

A.5:

to identify each element of a manuscript, from chapter numbers to chapter titles, subheads,

The journals

paragraphs for running text and block quotations, emphasized text, entries in a bibliography, and so

publishing model

forth. Markup, in the most basic sense, allows a typesetter to interpret a manuscript and--design

A.6:

What is markup?

specifications in hand--format it for publication as an article, book, or other type of publication.

A.7:

Semantic and

functional markup

A.8:

Document type

definitions

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Markup >> General Principles

of Contents

List of Figures

A.7 SEMANTIC AND FUNCTIONAL MARKUP

List of Tables

A formal markup language describes the structure of a document and identifies its components. This

Index

type of markup is sometimes referred to as semantic markup because it names the parts of a

document rather than describing their appearance. To take one example, though the title Origin of

Species might be distinguished from the surrounding text by italics, more meaningful markup would

A.5:

label it as a book title. Such markup would not only differentiate book titles from other types of

The journals

publishing model

italicized text (such as names of species or emphasized terms) but would allow them to be presented

A.6:

in something other than the customary italics if desired--for example, boldface or underscored. In fact,

What is markup?

matters of presentation--the appearance of the text--are best defined in a separate document called a

A.7:

style sheet (see A.9). On the other hand, markup doesn't ultimately need to be associated with any

Semantic and

functional markup

typographic characteristic or other type of formatting. It can be purely functional. For example, the

A.8:

title Origin of Species might be tagged to include the keyword evolution--facilitating queries to search

Document type

engines in an electronic publication (see 16.8). Moreover, some markup may have formatting or

definitions

functionality associated with it in one medium but not another. For example, markup that determines

A.9:

Style sheets

hyperlinked text--graphically distinct and clickable in an electronic document--may not be evident on

the printed page.

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Markup >> General Principles

of Contents

List of Figures

A.8 DOCUMENT TYPE DEFINITIONS

List of Tables

The formal definition of a document's structure--among other things, the names of all of its elements

Index

and the rules that govern their markup--is encoded in a document type definition (DTD) or other

schema. The process of creating a DTD is roughly analogous to the one that a designer follows to

identify and design each element of a book. But DTDs--which take considerable time and expertise to

A.6:

develop--must also be programmed to define every possible relationship among the elements in order

What is markup?

to establish rules about the document's structure. For example, a DTD may require that any element

A.7:

Semantic and

tagged as a "list" contain at least two "items," or that any "image" tag point to the name of a file in a

functional markup

specific directory. Marked-up documents can be analyzed with the help of parsing programs to make

A.8:

sure they conform to a specific DTD, allowing for the ready identification and correction of some

Document type

definitions

kinds of tagging errors. Once developed, a DTD can be reused for similar documents of the same

A.9:

type--for example, book-length monographs or articles in a scholarly journal. Many organizations use

Style sheets

industry-standard DTDs for publishing and archiving their articles or books. For example, certain

A.10:

journal publishers rely on the family of DTDs developed for the National Library of Medicine (which

Metadata

also includes a DTD for books).

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Markup >> General Principles

of Contents

List of Figures

A.9 STYLE SHEETS

List of Tables

While a DTD describes the structure of the tagged elements in a formally marked-up document, a

Index

style sheet provides the formatting specifications that define and automate their presentation--that is,

how they look on the screen or on the page. (For a different meaning of style sheet, see 2.52.) A

formally marked-up document published in more than one medium--for example, print and HTML--

A.7:

will need a different style sheet for each in order to specify typefaces, layouts, and other features

Semantic and

functional markup

appropriate to each medium. Meanwhile, the document itself--its markup plus text and any

A.8:

illustrations or other components--does not need to be altered for either presentation. This separation

Document type

of content from presentation--though it is never perfect (see A.17)--is one of the primary benefits of an

definitions

XML-based production workflow (see A.24). Style sheets are prepared (generally by IT specialists in

A.9:

Style sheets

collaboration with designers) in one of several programming languages, such as CSS (cascading style

A.10:

sheets), which can be used to describe how the components of an HTML document look and function

Metadata

in a particular browser or how the document prints on a laser printer. Another language, XSL

A.11:

(extensible style sheet language), not only defines presentation but also enables the conversion of

What is XML?

XML documents to other formats, including HTML. Vendors of e-book formats generally have their

own style sheets, and any style sheet may be reused or adapted for similar types of documents.

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Markup >> General Principles

of Contents

List of Figures

A.10 METADATA

List of Tables

Metadata--or data about data--is a part of any marked-up document. Publishers generally include

Index

certain types of bibliographic metadata--for example, creator, title, publication date, description, and

keywords--some or all of which may be displayed within (or alongside) their publications. Such

metadata is a lot like the information that once resided in a library's card-catalog system and can

A.8:

facilitate discovery by search engines. More specific categories of metadata may be appropriate

Document type

definitions

depending on the publication. For example, file format descriptions, language(s) of publication, and

A.9:

security level (to specify who can access the content) may be encoded in a document as needed. With

Style sheets

the help of software, metadata can be derived, or extracted, from the markup of a publication before,

A.10:

during, and after production for a variety of purposes. For example, metadata about a document's

Metadata

revision status can help track the versions of a document through the proofreading and testing stages.

A.11:

What is XML?

Other types of metadata--for example, the DOIs of journal articles in a reference list--can facilitate

A.12:

linking of source citations to information about the actual location of the texts to which they refer (see

SGML, HTML, XMLâ

also 14.6). For more information on metadata, including information about best practices, consult the

€”a brief history

website of the Dublin Core Metadata Initiative, an organization responsible for developing standards

related to electronic resource description.

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Markup >> XML

of Contents

List of Figures

A.11 WHAT IS XML?

List of Tables

XML (an abbreviation for extensible markup language) is a detailed specification for defining and

Index

marking up the logical structure of any type of document--in other words, it is a metalanguage that

provides rules for naming and defining the parts of a document and their relationship to each other.

It has been in development since the mid-1990s by various working groups of the World Wide Web

A.9:

Consortium (W3C). XML is an open standard, meaning it is available for free to the general public

Style sheets

through the website of the W3C. As described in 2.80, XML markup requires that each element in a

A.10:

Metadata

document, including the document as a whole, be enclosed between a pair of opening and closing

A.11:

tags. XML does not contain a standard set of tags; rather, it allows users to create unique tags

What is XML?

customized for any type of document: chapters, journal articles, catalog entries, database records, and

A.12:

so forth. For examples of XML markup, see figures A.1 and A.2.

SGML, HTML, XMLâ

€”a brief history

A.13:

Why XML?

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Markup >> XML

of Contents

List of Figures

A.12 SGML, HTML, XML--A BRIEF HISTORY

List of Tables

XML traces its origins to SGML, which stands for standard generalized markup language. SGML

Index

became an international standard in 1986, defined by the International Organization for

Standardization as ISO 8879, after which it became the primary specification according to which many

publishers marked up and maintained electronic versions of their documents. Such a standard was

A.10:

originally developed to ensure that governments and other organizations could maintain electronic

Metadata

archives that would be relatively impervious to changes in technology. Like XML, SGML is a

A.11:

What is XML?

metalanguage--in the case of SGML, a comprehensive set of rules not just for naming and defining the

A.12:

parts of a document but for developing other, related markup languages. One such language is

SGML, HTML, XMLâ

HTML (hypertext markup language), which was introduced in the early 1990s as a set of presentation

€”a brief history

tags for preparing documents for web browsers. HTML tags (often in conjunction with a style sheet;

A.13:

Why XML?

see A.9) work much like typesetting codes for print publications, determining how a document will

A.14:

appear, not on the page, but on the screen. Soon after the introduction of HTML, XML was developed

XML elements and

as a refinement of SGML that would make it easier to prepare documents for use on the web.

attributes

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Markup >> XML

of Contents

List of Figures

A.13 WHY XML?

List of Tables

As outlined in A.12, XML was initially developed as a simplified version of SGML that would

Index

facilitate conversion to HTML for publishing on the web. As electronic formats have proliferated,

some publishers have found it advantageous to use XML as the basis of their publications in order to

make them available for other purposes, such as electronic archives and various e-book formats. Like

A.11:

SGML but unlike HTML, XML can be adapted to describe any type of document and does not

What is XML?

depend on any specific software or format. This flexibility can facilitate the presentation of content in

A.12:

SGML, HTML, XMLâ

ways that were not possible at initial publication--a potential hedge against changing technologies. To

€”a brief history

take an early example, HTML for tables did not exist in the early 1990s; tables on the web were

A.13:

presented only as static images rather than as text. Publishers who at that time were using SGML to

Why XML?

tag such things as the arrangement of cells into rows and columns were prepared to regenerate full-

A.14:

XML elements and

text HTML tables in their web publications as this functionality became available in later versions of

attributes

HTML (but see A.33). A similar phenomenon is taking place for mathematical expressions marked up

A.15:

in MathML (mathematical markup language, an application of XML) that cannot be displayed by all

XML character

references

web browsers. See also A.34.

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Markup >> XML

of Contents

List of Figures

A.14 XML ELEMENTS AND ATTRIBUTES

List of Tables

An XML document, simply stated, consists of elements and attributes. An element is really just a

Index

specific part of the document--in other words, any part that has been labeled with a pair of XML tags.

Elements might include such items as document title, section headings, paragraphs, titles of works,

terms marked for emphasis (and destined to be italicized or otherwise distinguished from the

A.12:

surrounding text), names of authors, and cross-references. An XML attribute is included inside the

SGML, HTML, XMLâ

€”a brief history

opening tag for an XML element and provides additional information about that element. For

A.13:

example, a document may include various lists, each tagged with a pair of "list" tags. These lists could

Why XML?

be further distinguished from each other by attributes that identify the type of list--"ordered" versus

A.14:

"unordered," for example. An associated style sheet would recognize the attributes and format the

XML elements and

attributes

two kinds of lists differently--for example, the "ordered list" as a list numbered with arabic numerals

A.15:

starting at 1 and the "unordered list" as a bulleted list (see also A.9). Another type of attribute might

XML character

specify a URL for a textual element to facilitate the creation of a hyperlink.

references

A.16:

Mapping markup to

design

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Markup >> XML

of Contents

List of Figures

A.15 XML CHARACTER REFERENCES

List of Tables

An XML character reference is a plain-text placeholder for a special character that may be unavailable

Index

in a particular software program or from a particular input device (e.g., a keyboard). Character

references are set off from the surrounding text by an ampersand and a semicolon. By default, XML

supports references defined by the Unicode standard. For example, a multiplication sign (defined by

A.13:

Unicode as U+00D7) can be represented in XML as the character reference &#x00D7; (the #x signals

Why XML?

the hexadecimal Unicode code point). In a program that interprets the XML document, the character

A.14:

XML elements and

reference would display as a multiplication sign (Ã—). Alternatively, character references can consist

attributes

of names taken from other ISO standard character sets--for example, &eacute; or &alpha; (which

A.15:

resolve to Ã© and Î±, respectively)--when these are specified in the DTD (see A.8). (Some special

XML character

references

characters that may not display properly for all users may need to be rendered as images; see A.34.)

A.16:

For more on Unicode, see chapter 11 (esp. 11.2).

Mapping markup to

design

A.17:

Some limitations of

style sheets

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Design

of Contents

List of Figures

A.16 MAPPING MARKUP TO DESIGN

List of Tables

In the most basic sense, markup describes the structure and content of a work, whereas a design

Index

determines how it looks--either on the printed page or on a screen. Whatever method has been used

to mark up an edited manuscript--generic codes (electronic or on paper), software-generated style

tags, or XML--each element must correspond to a particular design specification. In some cases,

A.14:

editors work with designers to identify the design elements before a manuscript is submitted for

XML elements and

attributes

production. For projects that are intended for publication in both print and on the web, two different

A.15:

designs with corresponding sets of design specifications will be necessary. If XML or other formal

XML character

markup is used, the design specifications are usually encoded for production in electronic style sheets

references

(see A.9). (The design of dust jackets, paperback covers, and packaging for electronic storage media--

A.16:

Mapping markup to

which requires some technical and marketing considerations beyond the scope of this appendix--is not

design

covered here. For works covering these topics, see sections 2.6 and 2.7 of the bibliography.)

A.17:

Some limitations of

style sheets

A.18:

Determining length

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Design

of Contents

List of Figures

A.17 SOME LIMITATIONS OF STYLE SHEETS

List of Tables

Electronic style sheets, as described in A.9, provide a means of rendering a formally marked-up

Index

document according to a set of design specifications, but they cannot predict certain factors that

might affect the published document's appearance, such as where line and page breaks will fall. When

used to produce printed publications, style sheets are usually supplemented with a publisher's

A.15:

preferred set of rules for composition and page makeup (see fig. A.3). As with conventionally typeset

XML character

references

print publications, these rules direct typesetters to make small adjustments in a page-layout program

A.16:

to fix such things as loose lines and uneven facing pages and to reposition images to fit the available

Mapping markup to

space. Additional adjustments may be necessary to achieve precise alignment in tables or other

design

textual environments with complex layouts (see A.33). Such tweaks made in the files for the printed

A.17:

Some limitations of

publication will not be reflected either in the style sheets or in the tagged source files (see A.31--34)

style sheets

for any electronic version and may be difficult to achieve online without resorting to images. For

A.18:

most types of electronic publications, however, publishers have come to accept inevitable variations in

Determining length

spacing and other aspects of presentation that might depend on a particular browser or device and

A.19:

Design

that cannot be controlled for in a style sheet.

specifications for

printed works

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Design

of Contents

List of Figures

A.18 DETERMINING LENGTH

List of Tables

For printed books, publishers will often specify a target page count (usually for a specific, often

Index

standard, trim size--e.g., 6â€³ Ã— 9â€³), taking into account the length of the manuscript. Designers

must figure out type sizes, spacing, and margins that will result in a book that comes close to this

target. The traditional way to determine this is to start by getting a character count, or castoff, and

A.16:

dividing this count by the target number of characters per printed page. Since each category of text

Mapping markup to

design

will likely be given its own set of type characteristics, the designer needs not just a total character

A.17:

count for the work but a count broken down by type of material (e.g., text, extracts, appendix, notes,

Some limitations of

and bibliography). Some designers will prefer instead to look at the entire manuscript in a page-

style sheets

layout program, where decisions about type sizes and layout can be made and the resulting page

A.18:

Determining length

count determined at the same time. For the most accurate result, it is best to use the final, edited

A.19:

manuscript. Whatever method is used, it is important also to account for illustrations, tables, and

Design

other nontextual material. For journals, which have fixed designs and page allotments, the total

specifications for

printed works

number of articles must be adjusted to fill each issue. For electronic-only publications, length is less

A.20:

of a consideration from a production standpoint, though it is always an editorial and design

Design

specifications for

consideration.

web-based works

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Design

of Contents

List of Figures

A.19 DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS FOR PRINTED WORKS

List of Tables

A complete design for a book or other work should include full type specifications and representative

Index

layouts for all the various categories of text. Common elements might include the front (or

preliminary) matter; a chapter opening page; two or more facing pages showing primary textual

elements such as running text, extracts, subheads, footnotes, illustrations, running heads, and folios;

A.17:

and the back (or end) matter (including, as relevant, the appendix, endnotes, glossary, bibliography,

Some limitations of

style sheets

and index). See figure A.4 for an example of a partial text design for a printed book showing

A.18:

marginal type specifications. Before typesetting, the final, edited manuscript is checked by the editor

Determining length

against the design specifications to make sure that each element has been properly accounted for. If

A.19:

an electronic style sheet will be used to encode these specifications for typesetting, it must also

Design

specifications for

include every element in every possible context that might signal a design change (see also A.9).

printed works

A.20:

Design

specifications for

web-based works

A.21:

Picas, points, and

pixels

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Design

of Contents

List of Figures

A.20 DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS FOR WEB-BASED WORKS

List of Tables

In addition to identifying every element of the work in every context--as for a print publication--the

Index

design for an electronic work must identify any additional elements required for the presentation,

including such things as navigational elements, additional copyright statements, and help screens.

Some of these elements, such as error messages and titles in browsers, will be generated by a

A.18:

particular web browser or other program, and the degree of control that a designer has over their

Determining length

appearance may be limited. In fact, designs for electronic works are not like those for print.

A.19:

Design

Specifications for print assume fixed layouts and predictable results; those for electronic works must

specifications for

take into account the technical limitations of particular software programs and devices at the time of

printed works

publication. Therefore, though the design for an electronic work might start with a set of

A.20:

Design

specifications like those for print, some of the details may need to be adjusted closer to the

specifications for

web-based works

publication date, during the proofreading and testing stages (see 2.133--36).

A.21:

Picas, points, and

pixels

A.22:

Em spaces, en

spaces, and so

forth

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Design

of Contents

List of Figures

A.21 PICAS, POINTS, AND PIXELS

List of Tables

For printed works, type sizes and line spacing are measured in points. The dimensions of the type

Index

page--the area occupied by the running head, the text proper, the footnotes (if any), and the page

number (or folio)--are measured in picas. A pica is approximately one-sixth of an inch; there are

twelve points in a pica. Type specifications for the screen may be given in the same dimensions used

A.19:

for print; alternatively, pixels may be specified for type sizes and line spacing. (A pixel is the smallest

Design

specifications for

element making up an image on the screen; for a resolution of 72 pixels per inch measured

printed works

horizontally or vertically, a pixel is equal to a point.) Another option is to specify type size and line

A.20:

spacing in relative terms--for example, as a percentage of a web browser's default size for a particular

Design

specifications for

category of type. All of these dimensions have been incorporated into the language of electronic style

web-based works

sheets such as CSS (see A.9). See also appendix B (for these and other terms related to size and

A.21:

Picas, points, and

spacing) and figure A.4.

pixels

A.22:

Em spaces, en

spaces, and so

forth

A.23:

Converting marked-

up manuscripts for

production

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Design

of Contents

List of Figures

A.22 EM SPACES, EN SPACES, AND SO FORTH

List of Tables

Sometimes designers will specify a particular space between two elements--for example, between

Index

single and double quotation marks, where a thin space may be called for (see 6.11). Such spaces are

usually specified relative to the size of the type in question. Some of the more common specifications-

-including the em space, on which all of them are based--are as follows:

A.20:

Design

specifications for

UNIT

DEFINITION

UNICODE NUMBER

web-based works

em space

the width of a capital M in a given font at a given size

2003

A.21:

Picas, points, and

en space

half the size of an em

2002

pixels

thick space

one-third of an em

2004

A.22:

medium (or mid) space one-fourth of an em

2005

Em spaces, en

spaces, and so

thin space

a fifth (or sometimes a sixth) of an em

2009

forth

hair space

thinner than a thin space

200A

A.23:

Converting marked-

up manuscripts for

All of these distinctions can be achieved for the printed page in page-layout or typesetting programs.

production

They can also be specified in a limited way in electronic style sheets--for example, as an instruction to

A.24:

Steps in an XML

increase (or decrease) the spacing between all the letters or words in a particular type of paragraph.

workflow

To date, however, though these spaces have been defined for Unicode, they are not available in many

fonts, limiting their usefulness in electronic documents and publications. See also

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Electronic Workflow >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

A.23 CONVERTING MARKED-UP MANUSCRIPTS FOR PRODUCTION

List of Tables

Many manuscripts are imported directly from word-processing software to a desktop publishing

Index

platform such as QuarkXPress or Adobe's InDesign or one of a number of typesetting systems used

by commercial vendors of publishing services. Such conversions have typically involved replacing

generic typesetting codes or word-processing styles with corresponding codes used by the typesetting

A.21:

system. Many of these same applications can now use XML tags in addition to their own systems of

Picas, points, and

pixels

markup (though not without increasing the complexity of the workflow; see A.25, A.31). Manuscripts

A.22:

not tagged in XML are increasingly being converted to XML in order to take advantage of its

Em spaces, en

downstream flexibility (e.g., for publishing a printed book on the web or in various e-book formats

spaces, and so

forth

for which XML may be a requirement). See also A.27--30.

A.23:

Converting marked-

up manuscripts for

production

A.24:

Steps in an XML

workflow

A.25:

Where does

proofreading fit in?

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Electronic Workflow >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

A.24 STEPS IN AN XML WORKFLOW

List of Tables

Publishers who introduce XML into the process at an early stage can make it the basis of their entire

Index

production workflow. Such a workflow, which is determined by the principles of markup discussed

in the previous sections, might be summarized very briefly as follows:

A.22:

1. XML tags are added to a manuscript in conformance with a DTD (see A.8). This can be done

Em spaces, en

before or after the manuscript editing stage (see A.27--30).

spaces, and so

forth

2. Meanwhile, any artwork is scanned and converted as necessary to the recommended file

A.23:

formats and resolutions for publication in print and electronic formats. XML tags that indicate

Converting marked-

up manuscripts for

the correct versions of each publication-ready file must be included in the manuscript. These are

production

similar to generic figure-placement callouts in an edited manuscript (see 2.27).

A.24:

3. The XML-tagged file--that is, the marked-up manuscript from step 1--can be converted to a

Steps in an XML

workflow

variety of formats and, in conjunction with the artwork from step 2, typeset for print, on the

A.25:

one hand, and, on the other, used as the basis of one or more electronic formats. In each case, a

Where does

particular style sheet determines what the presentation will look like (see A.9).

proofreading fit in?

A.26:

For an illustration of such a workflow, see figure A.5. For a broader outline of the publishing process--

Cyclical workflow

for web-based

one that factors in editing and proofreading stages--see 2.2.

publications

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Electronic Workflow >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

A.25 WHERE DOES PROOFREADING FIT IN?

List of Tables

In any workflow, the final output--whether print or electronic--needs to be proofread, as detailed in

Index

chapter 2 (see 2.97--136). For simultaneous print and electronic publication, there are a number of options for doing this. Especially for longer works, it can be expedient to proofread the work as it is

typeset for print first. Corrections made during the proofreading process are incorporated into the

A.23:

XML file used for typesetting. Then, the corrected XML (including any index produced during the

Converting marked-

up manuscripts for

proofreading stage) can be converted to HTML, e-book formats, and any other electronic version

production

using a range of style sheets and conversion programs. This saves the trouble of having to proofread

A.24:

print and electronic versions from scratch simultaneously, though the electronic versions still need to

Steps in an XML

workflow

be carefully reviewed and tested (see 2.133--36). Alternatively, the print and electronic versions can be

A.25:

produced and proofread simultaneously, an option especially suited to shorter works such as journal

Where does

proofreading fit in?

articles.

A.26:

Cyclical workflow

for web-based

publications

A.27:

Who applies the

markup?

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Electronic Workflow >> Introduction

of Contents

List of Figures

A.26 CYCLICAL WORKFLOW FOR WEB-BASED PUBLICATIONS

List of Tables

Like the traditional workflow followed for print publications before the advent of computerized

Index

typesetting, the electronic workflow described above, which focuses on print publications and

electronic books and journals, is essentially linear. Web-based publications that require the

development and implementation of functional and navigational features generally follow a different

A.24:

model--one that allows for technological design, engineering, testing, release, and maintenance of the

Steps in an XML

workflow

website itself, apart from the content that will be presented on the site. Web-development workflows

A.25:

tend to be cyclical, allowing for the refinement of features to improve usability and to optimize the

Where does

presentation. While a full discussion of this process is beyond the scope of this appendix, authors,

proofreading fit in?

editors, designers, and other publishing professionals who become involved in web-based projects

A.26:

Cyclical workflow

should be prepared to adapt to the processes and requirements of that environment.

for web-based

publications

A.27:

Who applies the

markup?

A.28:

Author's final

manuscript

converted to XML

before editing

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Electronic Workflow >> When Should XML Be Introduced into the Process?

of Contents

List of Figures

A.27 WHO APPLIES THE MARKUP?

List of Tables

To date, few editors and even fewer authors work directly with XML markup. Most of the coding that

Index

goes into such markup--not to mention the DTDs, style sheets, and converters that are used to

implement it--requires an immersion in software and programming that is generally the arena of IT

specialists. Thus, it usually falls to the publisher or one of its vendors to apply the XML. This can be

A.25:

done at various points in the production process, each with its benefits and costs, as discussed below.

Where does

proofreading fit in?

Meanwhile, IT specialists are also typically responsible for developing DTDs (or ensuring compliance

A.26:

with existing or standard DTDs), writing style sheets (or making modifications to existing style

Cyclical workflow

sheets), and coordinating the systems that allow a publisher to maintain an archive of the latest

for web-based

publications

versions of the electronic files used to publish every version of every work in its inventory.

A.27:

Who applies the

markup?

A.28:

Author's final

manuscript

converted to XML

before editing

A.29:

Edited manuscript

converted for

typesetting

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Electronic Workflow >> When Should XML Be Introduced into the Process?

of Contents

List of Figures

A.28 AUTHOR'S FINAL MANUSCRIPT CONVERTED TO XML BEFORE EDITING

List of Tables

There are advantages to introducing XML markup to a manuscript before it is edited. Manuscript

Index

editors are in many ways closest to the content; they are therefore in a good position to ensure the

quality of the markup. A publisher may invest in XML tools that facilitate traditional and new editing

tasks by allowing editors who have little knowledge of XML syntax to modify content and structure

A.26:

without invalidating the underlying code. Such an approach is especially suited to a journal

Cyclical workflow

for web-based

publisher, where each article can be marked up in essentially the same manner and according to the

publications

same DTD and style sheet for each issue. Book publishers, on the other hand, might develop sets of

A.27:

templates that correspond to different types of books.

Who applies the

markup?

A.28:

Author's final

manuscript

converted to XML

before editing

A.29:

Edited manuscript

converted for

typesetting

A.30:

XML added to files

after typesetting

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Electronic Workflow >> When Should XML Be Introduced into the Process?

of Contents

List of Figures

A.29 EDITED MANUSCRIPT CONVERTED FOR TYPESETTING

List of Tables

Typesetters who have converted their internal processes to use XML will usually convert generic

Index

word-processing files to XML when they get them. Manuscript editors can help this along, using

word-processor styles or generic tagging in a consistent manner even if they do not use XML. Some

publishers further facilitate this process by providing editors with word-processing style templates

A.27:

that map to XML tags for a specific document type such as a book or journal article.

Who applies the

markup?

A.28:

Author's final

manuscript

converted to XML

before editing

A.29:

Edited manuscript

converted for

typesetting

A.30:

XML added to files

after typesetting

A.31:

XML source files

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Electronic Workflow >> When Should XML Be Introduced into the Process?

of Contents

List of Figures

A.30 XML ADDED TO FILES AFTER TYPESETTING

List of Tables

There are two scenarios for adding XML to files after the typesetting of a print publication is

Index

completed: (1) the typesetter's electronic files are used to create the XML (for example, by deriving

XML from a program such as QuarkXPress or Adobe's InDesign); or (2) XML is derived from PDF

files--either those that are required to print the work or, in the case of older works for which there are

A.28:

no suitable electronic files, those that are obtained from scanning printed pages. Publishers who do

Author's final

manuscript

this need to implement quality-assurance procedures (QA) to test the resulting XML, much as is done

converted to XML

before editing

for any new electronic publication. See also 2.133--36.

A.29:

Edited manuscript

converted for

typesetting

A.30:

XML added to files

after typesetting

A.31:

XML source files

A.32:

Illustrations

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Electronic Workflow >> Source Files

of Contents

List of Figures

A.31 XML SOURCE FILES

List of Tables

XML source files comprise the XML text files and any electronic files for illustrations or audiovisual

Index

materials that, in conjunction with style sheets, converters, and an array of software programs, can be

rendered in published form in a variety of media. As the basis of an electronic workflow, these files

should accurately reflect the content of a published work, including any subsequent changes thereto.

A.29:

For example, if it is necessary to correct an error in the text of an HTML version of a journal article or

Edited manuscript

converted for

a chapter in a book, it is not enough to make the correction in the HTML file; the correction must also

typesetting

be made in the corresponding XML source file to ensure that it will be reflected in any future

A.30:

versions of the work generated from that source. If extensive corrections are required, it may be

XML added to files

after typesetting

better to make them in the source files and then reconvert them to HTML. Any changes to the way

A.31:

the content is presented, on the other hand, are usually made in a style sheet or, for some types of

XML source files

adjustments in printed works, with a page-layout or typesetting program (see A.9, A.17).

A.32:

Illustrations

A.33:

Tables

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Electronic Workflow >> Source Files

of Contents

List of Figures

A.32 ILLUSTRATIONS

List of Tables

Electronic versions of files for such nontext items as illustrations or audiovisual materials may be

Index

needed in various sizes (thumbnails, medium resolution, high resolution, low bit rate, high bit rate,

etc.) to allow for optimal presentation in various media. All of these versions should be derived either

from high-resolution bitmapped graphics in a lossless format such as TIFF (e.g., for photographic

A.30:

images) or from vector-based graphics (e.g., for line art created in a program such as Adobe

XML added to files

after typesetting

Illustrator). The richer the source, the higher the level of quality not only in print but on the screen,

A.31:

where image files are typically down-sampled (i.e., prepared at a lower resolution) and compressed

XML source files

for faster downloading and rendering. Moreover, it should be noted that once information is

A.32:

discarded from a file (e.g., using a lossy compression format such as JPEG), it cannot be recovered.

Illustrations

And, though resolution requirements for the screen are lower than those for print, the original, high-

A.33:

Tables

quality source files should always be retained, as they are more likely to meet requirements for

A.34:

republishing the work in alternative formats in the future. Many publishers provide authors with

Mathematical

guidelines for preparing and submitting artwork; Chicago makes detailed guidelines available on its

expressions

books and journals websites. See also

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Electronic Workflow >> Source Files

of Contents

List of Figures

A.33 TABLES

List of Tables

Tables are generally marked up and included as part of the XML source files with the rest of the text.

Index

In online publications, the HTML tables derived from this markup are sometimes supplemented by

image files or PDF versions of the same (often derived from pages typeset for print). Though not

strictly necessary, this can be desirable because, to date, HTML table markup does not include layout

A.31:

options sufficient to achieve all of the typesetting niceties discussed in chapter 3, such as certain types

XML source files

of character alignment within a column. Meanwhile, the character data in the rough-hewn HTML

A.32:

Illustrations

tables derived from XML can be useful--for example, the data can be cut and pasted or otherwise

A.33:

exported into spreadsheets and other tools for efficient verification of results. It is important to keep

Tables

track of each version of a table: any correction must not only be made in the XML source file but also

A.34:

reflected in any published version of the table.

Mathematical

expressions

A.35:

Print

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> The Electronic Workflow >> Source Files

of Contents

List of Figures

A.34 MATHEMATICAL EXPRESSIONS

List of Tables

Although XML may be used to typeset math--tagged using MathML--complex, built-up mathematical

Index

expressions are not generally rendered for online publications directly from MathML or XML-based

HTML. Though browser support for MathML continues to improve, math in web publications is

typically presented using bitmapped images, which can be derived from typeset pages when they are

A.32:

available. Otherwise, the images must be derived from math-editing tools in word-processing

Illustrations

applications such as Microsoft Word or LaTeX (see 12.2). As with tables, it is important to make sure

A.33:

Tables

that the MathML in the source file reflects any changes or adjustments made to the embedded images.

A.34:

Mathematical

expressions

A.35:

Print

A.36:

Web

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Options for Presenting Content

of Contents

List of Figures

A.35 PRINT

List of Tables

Print remains the preferred medium for many types of publications. From the standpoint of a typical

Index

publisher's electronic workflow, however, it has become one option among several. For a discussion

of the technologies of printing, including considerations for paper selection and binding, see A.41--50.

A.33:

Tables

A.34:

Mathematical

expressions

A.35:

Print

A.36:

Web

A.37:

Converting XML to

HTML

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Options for Presenting Content

of Contents

List of Figures

A.36 WEB

List of Tables

Two standards have emerged for presenting publications on the web: full-text web presentations and

Index

PDF (portable document format). Full-text presentations, usually in HTML (or XHTML; see A.37), are

especially common for journals, particularly those in the scientific, technical, and medical fields (so-

called STM publications), and for reference works. Such presentations, by taking advantage of all the

A.34:

textual and audiovisual functionality of modern browsers, are extremely flexible. On the other hand,

Mathematical

expressions

they are costly, requiring a lot of maintenance to adapt to changing technologies and evolving

A.35:

standards. PDF, because it presents fixed layouts and typefaces that match the printed page, is easier

Print

to produce and maintain, especially as a supplement to print. In fact, printed publications generally

A.36:

must be submitted to the printer as PDF files, and optimizing these files for electronic publication is a

Web

relatively straightforward process (e.g., using a PDF-creation program such as Adobe Acrobat).

A.37:

Converting XML to

Journals that publish on the web typically provide PDF versions of their articles accompanied either

HTML

by full-text HTML versions or, to facilitate search engines and other services, by HTML metadata

A.38:

(sometimes accompanied by an abstract). See also A.10.

E-book formats

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Options for Presenting Content

of Contents

List of Figures

A.37 CONVERTING XML TO HTML

List of Tables

To create a full-text web presentation, the XML source files must be converted to HTML. As noted in

Index

A.12, HTML is a set of tags that function much like typesetting codes for web presentations. Usually

in conjunction with CSS (see A.9), it tells a browser how to format and display content and facilitates

linking. XML files are converted, or transformed, to HTML using scripts, often in XSLT (extensible

A.35:

stylesheet language transformations), a language that allows XML to be converted to a variety of

Print

formats. If you are reading this online, you are viewing XHTML (HTML defined as an application of

A.36:

Web

XML) derived from XML source files for the purpose of web presentation.

A.37:

Converting XML to

HTML

A.38:

E-book formats

A.39:

Additional

publishing options

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Options for Presenting Content

of Contents

List of Figures

A.38 E-BOOK FORMATS

List of Tables

Publishers have an increasing number of options for offering content in an e-book format. For works

Index

also published in print, PDF-based e-books are the most straightforward. More sophisticated e-book

formats include International Digital Publishing Forum's EPUB, DAISY (digital accessible information

system, a format for digital talking books), and such proprietary formats as Microsoft Reader (LIT)

A.36:

and Amazon Kindle (AZW). Conversion to each of these formats can be facilitated by XML-encoded

Web

source files (see A.31--34).

A.37:

Converting XML to

HTML

A.38:

E-book formats

A.39:

Additional

publishing options

A.40:

Digital rights

management

strategies

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Options for Presenting Content

of Contents

List of Figures

A.39 ADDITIONAL PUBLISHING OPTIONS

List of Tables

Book chapters, journal articles, and even smaller components of a complete publication can be

Index

presented and sold on their own, separately from the publication in which they originally appeared.

This has always been true of print publications--for example, the University of Chicago Press offers an

offprint of the indexing chapter that appears in this manual--but digital technology has greatly

A.37:

expanded the possibilities for such derivative works. For example, a medical publisher might group

Converting XML to

HTML

together all the articles that, according to their metadata, are about Tamiflu-resistant flu strains and

A.38:

sell them as a new publication. Such "virtual" publications can be assembled automatically from a

E-book formats

publisher's source files or they can be curated by content experts--or some combination of the two

A.39:

strategies. Electronic content can also be sold in smaller pieces. Journal articles are often published

Additional

publishing options

one at a time, when they are ready--in advance of, or independently of, the print publication. This

A.40:

approach facilitates the way readers tend to find articles: thanks to search engines and citation-linking

Digital rights

networks such as CrossRef, much of the traffic coming into journal sites goes directly to single

management

strategies

articles.

A.41:

Electronic markup

and print

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Options for Presenting Content

of Contents

List of Figures

A.40 DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES

List of Tables

Publishers who present their content in electronic form face challenges from those who might attempt

Index

to copy and redistribute electronic materials in violation of copyright law. To ensure that copyright

holders and publishers are fairly compensated for their intellectual property, on the one hand, while

providing content to readers in an easily accessible manner, on the other, publishers can employ a

A.38:

number of strategies. These strategies--which include technologies such as encrypted passwords, user-

E-book formats

authentication schemes, and digital watermarks--are collectively referred to as digital rights

A.39:

Additional

management (DRM). Essentially, DRM can be seen as the intersection between copyright law,

publishing options

distribution models, and technology. Some of the legal aspects of electronic distribution and licensing

A.40:

are discussed in chapter 4 (see 4.56, 4.57, 4.60 [especially Electronic rights and Rights for educational

Digital rights

management

use], 4.61, 4.62). The technological aspects of DRM will depend on the software used to implement it

strategies

and on the medium of publication. For a detailed overview of these considerations and others,

A.41:

consult The Columbia Guide to Digital Publishing (bibliog. 2.7).

Electronic markup

and print

A.42:

The role of PDF in

the print process

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Print Technologies

of Contents

List of Figures

A.41 ELECTRONIC MARKUP AND PRINT

List of Tables

The principles of electronic markup occupy a central place in the production of publications intended

Index

for print. The advantages of applying XML before or during typesetting, as outlined above--even if a

book or journal is initially intended only for print distribution--can be central to a goal of being

prepared to republish the same content in electronic form or to make it available to electronic

A.39:

archives and search engines. The difference is that for print, the product is physical. Whereas the

Additional

publishing options

appearance of an electronic publication might vary depending on the device and software used to

A.40:

view it, a printed book or journal is a unique artifact with a permanent design. The physical aspects

Digital rights

of the production of printed works--the details of which have changed little since the last edition of

management

strategies

this manual--are the subject of this section.

A.41:

Electronic markup

and print

A.42:

The role of PDF in

the print process

A.43:

Preliminary

presswork, or

"prepress"

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Print Technologies

of Contents

List of Figures

A.42 THE ROLE OF PDF IN THE PRINT PROCESS

List of Tables

To date, most printed publications rely on PDF (portable document format) to display the final

Index

publication on-screen before it is sent to the printer. PDF presents fonts, images, layout, and

pagination exactly as they will appear on the printed page. This makes it an essential tool in the

proofing process. After a book or article is typeset, first proof is generated as PDF and supplied to

A.40:

authors, editors, and indexers either as a printout or for on-screen review. One or more rounds of

Digital rights

management

revised proof can be offered in the same manner. Moreover, PDF tends to obviate the need to review

strategies

printer's proof--what was once commonly referred to as bluelines--because the files used by the

A.41:

printer are typically the same as those generated by the typesetter. Nonetheless, the PDF files

Electronic markup

and print

themselves must be print-ready. Among other things, it is important to check that the latest versions

A.42:

of files are present; that they are properly and consistently named; that any specialized fonts have

The role of PDF in

the print process

been embedded or otherwise included; that any images have been provided as high-resolution files

appropriate for printing; and that all specifications regarding paper, trim size, resolution, and so forth

A.43:

Preliminary

have been provided. See also 2.100--106.

presswork, or

"prepress"

A.44:

Paper selection

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Print Technologies

of Contents

List of Figures

A.43 PRELIMINARY PRESSWORK, OR "PREPRESS"

List of Tables

The prepress phase includes all the steps that a printer takes from the time it receives the final files

Index

(and any other materials, such as artwork, needed for printing) to the time the publication is put on

press, or printed. These days, the final electronic files received by the printer that have been reviewed

by the typesetter, designer, and others at the publisher need no further review. But for works in

A.41:

which the reproduction quality of the illustrations is critical, the printer may supply a high-quality

Electronic markup

and print

proof that can be checked for contrast and quality and, if applicable, color.

A.42:

The role of PDF in

the print process

A.43:

Preliminary

presswork, or

"prepress"

A.44:

Paper selection

A.45:

Paper sizes

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Print Technologies

of Contents

List of Figures

A.44 PAPER SELECTION

List of Tables

Paper comes in varying weights, sizes, shades, coatings, and degrees of opacity and smoothness (i.e.,

Index

finish). In consultation with the printer or a paper merchant, the publisher must determine which type

of paper best suits a particular publication and which will print on and run through a given printing

press most efficiently. Other considerations include cost, availability, and durability of the paper.

A.42:

Publications printed on acid-free paper have a longer life expectancy than those that are not, and they

The role of PDF in

the print process

may carry a notice on the copyright page indicating their compliance with the durability standards of

A.43:

the American National Standards Institute (see 1.34). For environmental considerations, see A.46.

Preliminary

presswork, or

"prepress"

A.44:

Paper selection

A.45:

Paper sizes

A.46:

Paper and the

environment

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Print Technologies

of Contents

List of Figures

A.45 PAPER SIZES

List of Tables

Paper is manufactured to standard roll and sheet sizes. Because printing presses and bindery

Index

equipment are set up to accommodate these roll and sheet sizes with minimal waste of paper,

publishers usually find it most economical to choose one of a handful of corresponding trim sizes for

their books and journals--in the United States, these are 5½ × 8½ inches, 6⅛ × 9¼ inches, 7 × 10 inches,

A.43:

and 8½ × 11 inches. Publications requiring a nonstandard trim size will generally cost more. Note that

Preliminary

presswork, or

the dimensions for the type page (that part of the page occupied by the text, the running head, and

"prepress"

the folio, if any) must leave adequate margins for the given trim size and, if required, allow for

A.44:

illustrations to bleed.

Paper selection

A.45:

Paper sizes

A.46:

Paper and the

environment

A.47:

Offset printing

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Print Technologies

of Contents

List of Figures

A.46 PAPER AND THE ENVIRONMENT

List of Tables

Environmental issues have come to play a significant role in paper selection. Most works can be

Index

printed on recycled paper, generally a combination of virgin fiber and pre- and postconsumer

wastepaper. Using papers certified by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) is another way to

minimize environmental impacts. FSC is a nonprofit organization widely regarded as ensuring the

A.44:

best practices in forest management. Publishers who use recycled and FSC-certified papers not only

Paper selection

contribute to the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions but also minimize the negative impact on

A.45:

Paper sizes

endangered forests and forest-dependent communities. Also important are the bleaching methods

A.46:

used to make papers, which employ varying amounts of chlorine and chlorine derivatives, the use of

Paper and the

which contributes to the formation of dioxins and other hazardous substances. Processed chlorine-free

environment

(PCF) papers are recycled papers that have been produced with no chlorine or derivatives beyond

A.47:

Offset printing

what may have been used originally to produce the recovered wastepaper. A totally chlorine-free

A.48:

(TCF) process can be used on virgin fibers. Elemental chlorine-free (ECF) and enhanced ECF papers

Digital printing

are bleached using a chlorine derivative (chlorine dioxide) in order to minimize hazardous by-

products but are less safe than TCF or PCF papers. Publishers wishing to learn more about the

environmental impact of paper purchasing should seek the advice of the Forest Stewardship Council.

Additional resources include the US-based Green Press Initiative and the Canadian-based Canopy.

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Print Technologies

of Contents

List of Figures

A.47 OFFSET PRINTING

List of Tables

The most common method for producing books is through offset printing, or offset lithography. This

Index

process involves the transfer of images (text, illustrations, and any other marks that will be distinct

from the background color of the page) from metal plates to paper through an intermediate cylinder.

The images are usually imposed directly onto the photosensitive plates using the typesetter's

A.45:

electronic files (referred to as computer-to-plate technology, or CTP) or, using an older process, by

Paper sizes

contact with film negatives (also typically generated from the typesetter's files). Ink is applied to each

A.46:

Paper and the

plate, and the inked images are offset onto the paper through the rubber-blanketed intermediate

environment

cylinder (see fig. A.6). The printing press itself may be either sheet-fed, using sheets of paper that

A.47:

have been precut, or web-fed, using rolls of paper that will be folded and trimmed at the end of the

Offset printing

printing stage.

A.48:

Digital printing

A.49:

Folded and

gathered sheets

(F&Gs)

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Print Technologies

of Contents

List of Figures

A.48 DIGITAL PRINTING

List of Tables

In digital printing, images are printed directly onto paper through ink jets or thermal transfer using

Index

either powder- or liquid-based toners. The quality of the reproduction is typically not as high as that

achieved through the offset process (though the gap has closed), but digital printing makes it

economically viable to print small quantities of a publication on demand (as few as one), preferably

A.46:

from archived electronic files, and can reduce the publisher's cost of warehousing unsold stock.

Paper and the

environment

Digital printing also makes it feasible to customize each copy. Short-run digital copies of books can be

A.47:

bound either as hardcover or paperback editions.

Offset printing

A.48:

Digital printing

A.49:

Folded and

gathered sheets

(F&Gs)

A.50:

Binding

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Print Technologies

of Contents

List of Figures

A.49 FOLDED AND GATHERED SHEETS (F&GS)

List of Tables

Before binding can begin, the press sheets, or printed sheets, that emerge from the printing press must

Index

be folded and trimmed. A press sheet has printed pages on both sides, and when it is folded in half,

and then in half again--continuing until only one page is showing--all the pages fall into proper

sequence in a process known as imposition (see fig. A.7). The folded sheet, called a signature, usually

A.46:

consists of thirty-two pages, but this number may vary depending on the bulk and flexibility of the

Paper and the

environment

paper and the size of the offset printing press. When all the signatures have been gathered in the

A.47:

proper order, they are referred to as folded and gathered sheets, or F&Gs. The F&Gs can then be

Offset printing

bound in either hardcover or paperback format. (Publishers should, if possible, review the first set of

A.48:

F&Gs for completeness, accuracy, and proper order; see 2.104.)

Digital printing

A.49:

Folded and

gathered sheets

(F&Gs)

A.50:

Binding

APPENDIX A: PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

Chapter Contents >> Print Technologies

of Contents

List of Figures

A.50 BINDING

List of Tables

Binding hardcover books typically requires sewing the signatures together, usually by either Smyth

Index

sewing or side sewing (see fig. A.8). An alternative method, adhesive binding, involves notching or

fraying the folded edges and then applying adhesive to the signatures to hold them together. Smyth-

or side-sewn books may have a sturdier binding and hold up better over time, but adhesive binding,

A.46:

which is faster and less costly, is often just as strong, thanks to improved polyurethane-based

Paper and the

environment

adhesives. Meanwhile, the hardcover case is fashioned by the application of cover material (such as

A.47:

cloth, synthetic fabric, leather, or paper) to boards. The case is then affixed to the body of the book

Offset printing

through the application of glue to the endpapers, and a dust jacket may be wrapped around the case.

A.48:

Paperback books are almost always adhesive-bound through one of three methods: perfect, notch, or

Digital printing

burst binding (see fig. A.9). In the perfect-binding method, about an eighth of an inch is mechanically

A.49:

Folded and

roughened off the spine of the tightly gathered F&Gs, reducing them to a series of separate pages.

gathered sheets

The roughened spine is then coated with a flexible glue, and a paper cover is wrapped around the

(F&Gs)

pages. In the other two methods, the spine is either scored by a series of notches (notch binding) or

A.50:

Binding

perforated (burst binding) and then force-fed with glue. Unlike perfect binding, these methods

prevent the loss of part of the back margin and ensure that signatures remain intact, reducing the risk

of pages coming loose. For paperbound books of higher quality, the signatures can be sewn and the

covers (sometimes with flaps) then affixed, as with adhesive-bound books; this style of binding is

known as flexibinding or limp binding. See also 1.66--71.

A : PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE A.1

List of Figures

An example of XML markup in a graphical interface, showing two numbered paragraphs from the

List of Tables

section on periods in chapter 6 of this manual. Compare figure A.2. PDF Version >>

Index

A : PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE A.2

List of Figures

Another view of figure A.1, showing the XML markup as plain text. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

A : PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE A.3

List of Figures

Sample set of rules for composition and page makeup. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

A : PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE A.4

List of Figures

Sample design specifications for a book, showing a chapter-opening page and a page for an index. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

A : PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE A.5

List of Figures

A simplified XML workflow, in which an XML-tagged book manuscript is used as the basis of print,

List of Tables

e-book, and web versions of the publication. Any artwork is processed and converted as appropriate

Index

and integrated into each version before publication.

A : PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE A.6

List of Figures

Principle of offset printing. A plate is wrapped around and fastened to the plate cylinder. Water

List of Tables

applied by the dampening rollers adheres only to the background area of the plate; ink applied by the

Index

inking rollers adheres only to the dry image of the type on the plate. As the plate cylinder revolves, it

transfers the ink to the rubber blanket of the blanket cylinder, which in turn transfers (or offsets) it

onto the paper, which is held in place by the impression cylinder.

A : PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE A.7

List of Figures

A sheet consisting of sixteen printed pages. After being folded, the pages fall into proper numerical

List of Tables

sequence. PDF Version >>

Index

A : PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE A.8

List of Figures

Two methods of sewing used in binding. In Smyth sewing the sheets are stitched individually

List of Tables

through the fold; in side sewing they are stitched from the side, close to the spine. The black

Index

rectangles printed on the folds in both methods help the binder recognize whether a signature is

missing, duplicated, out of order, or upside down.

A : PRODUCTION AND DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Table

of Contents

FIGURE A.9

List of Figures

Three methods of adhesive binding: perfect, notch, and burst binding. PDF Version >>

List of Tables

Index

APPENDIX B: GLOSSARY

Table

of Contents

This glossary focuses on key terms related to the typography, design, and production of both print

List of Figures

and electronic works. Many of these terms are too specialized to be treated in the text of the manual;

List of Tables

for terms not covered here that may be defined within the text, consult the index. For additional

sources that treat publishing terminology, consult section 2 of the bibliography.

Index

AA. An abbreviation for author's alteration. See also alteration.

adhesive binding. A method of binding that employs glue instead of stitching to hold the pages or

signatures together and is widely used for journals and paperback books. Three types of

adhesive binding are currently used: perfect binding, notch binding, and burst binding. Contrast

case binding; flexibinding.

alteration. A change from the manuscript copy introduced in proof, as distinguished from a

correction made to eliminate a typesetter's or printer's error. See also AA; DA; EA.

arabic numerals. The familiar digits used in arithmetical computation. In many type fonts arabic

numerals are available in two forms: lining, or aligning (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0), and old style

, abbreviated OS and characterized by ascenders and descenders. Contrast

roman numerals.

artwork. Illustrative material (photographs, drawings, maps, and so forth) intended for

reproduction.

ascender. The portion of a lowercase letter that extends above the x-height, as in b and d. Contrast

descender; see also arabic numerals.

ASCII file. See plain-text file.

back margin. The inner margin of a page; that is, the margin along the binding side of the page.

See also gutter.

baseline. In type, an imaginary common line that all capital letters, x-heights, and lining arabic

numerals rest on.

beta testing. The final checking of a computer application (such as a website) before it is released.

Such testing is ideally carried out under normal operating conditions by users who are not

directly involved in developing the application.

binding. (1) A covering for the pages of a publication, using such materials as leather, cloth, and

paper. (2) The process by which such a covering is attached. See also adhesive binding;

case binding; flexibinding.

bitmap. A digital representation of an image consisting of an array of pixels, in rows and columns,

that can be saved to a file. Each pixel in the grid of the bitmap contains information about the

color value of its position, which is used, for example, to display an image on a monitor or print

it to a page. Compare vector graphic.

blanket. In offset printing, the resilient rubber covering of the blanket cylinder, which receives the

ink impression from the plate cylinder and offsets it onto the paper.

blind embossing. See embossing.

blind folio. See folio.

blind stamping. See stamping.

block quotation. Quoted material set off typographically from the text (see 13.9). Also called

extract. Contrast run in.

bluelines. An abbreviation for blueline proof; also called blues or (in Europe and Asia) ozalids. A

type of photographic proof generated by a printing firm either from repro or from the

typesetter's electronic files. See also digital proof.

boards. Stiffening material used in binding to form the foundation of the cover; formerly wood,

now generally a paper product such as binder's board (the finest quality), pasted board (often

used in case binding), or chipboard (low quality). Redboard is used for flexible bindings. The

bare board is sheathed in one of a variety of cover materials.

body text. The running text of a work, as distinguished from the display text used for chapter

openings, subheads, and so forth.

boldface. Type that has a darker and heavier appearance than standard type (as in the entries in

this list of key terms).

broadside. Designed to be read or viewed normally when the publication is turned ninety degrees.

In University of Chicago Press practice, the left side of a broadside table or illustration is at the

bottom of the page. Because most publications are longer than they are wide, broadside images

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

Z

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

zero (0), 9.19, 9.21, 9.40--41

zip codes, 10.30. See also addresses, mailing; postal codes

zoological terminology

domestic breeds, 8.128

scientific names: authorities on, 8.118; author names in, 8.123; divisions higher than genus, 8.125; English derivatives from taxonomic system, 8.126; genus, species, and subspecies, 8.119--21; unspecified species and varieties, 8.122

vernacular names, 8.127--29

See also scientific and technical terminology

are usually landscape, but not all landscape images are broadside. See also landscape.

browser. See web browser.

bulk. The thickness of paper measured in number of pages per inch; also used loosely to indicate

the thickness of a publication, excluding the cover.

burst binding. A type of adhesive binding in which the untrimmed spine is perforated and force-

fed with glue.

caps. An abbreviation for capital letters. See also small caps.

case. A hard cover or binding made by a case-making machine or by hand and usually printed,

stamped, or labeled before being glued to the gathered endpapers that are attached to the

signatures. A case that is covered entirely by one type of material is a one-piece case; a case in

which the spine is covered by one type of material and the front and back cover boards by

another (often in a different color) is a three-piece case.

case binding. A method of encasing a book in a rigid cover, or case. The gathered signatures can

be Smyth sewn or side sewn together or adhesive-bound; endpapers are glued to the first and

last signatures; a hinge of heavy gauze (the super) is glued to the spine of the sewn signatures;

and the case is secured to the book by being glued to the flaps of the super and to both

endpapers. Contrast adhesive binding; flexibinding.

castoff. An estimate of the space, or number of printed pages, that a manuscript will occupy when

typeset.

character. A letter, numeral, symbol, or mark of punctuation.

character count. An approximate measure of the length of a manuscript made by multiplying the

number of characters and spaces in an average line by the number of lines in the manuscript.

The "character count" feature of many word-processing programs can also provide such a total.

character encoding. A set of machine-readable numbers or other elements--or code points--that

correspond to a set of alphanumeric characters and symbols such that they can be interpreted

by a computer. See also Unicode.

character reference. A plain-text placeholder defined for a markup language such as SGML,

HTML, or XML and used to refer to a special character that is unavailable in a particular

character encoding or from a particular input device such as a keyboard. See also A.15.

clothbound. Bound with a rigid cover, usually cloth wrapped around boards. Contrast paperback.

CMYK. An abbreviation for the basic colors used in process color printing--cyan (C), magenta (M),

and yellow (Y), plus black (K)--to approximate all the colors in the spectrum.

code. A generic marker that identifies a particular type of text throughout a manuscript. A code is

usually associated with a set of formatting instructions specified by the designer and followed

by the typesetter. See also tag.

colophon. A statement, usually at the back of a publication (as in this manual), about the materials,

processes, and individuals or companies involved in its preparation, production, and

manufacturing. The term is also used to refer to a publisher's logo as it often appears on the title

page and spine of a book.

color printing. See process color printing.

color separation. (1) The analysis of color copy for reproduction in terms of the three process

colors (plus black) to be used in printing; separation is achieved by shooting through filters or

by electronic scanning. (2) A film negative or positive, or a digital file, so produced for

preparation of the printing plate. See also process color printing.

comp. An abbreviation for comprehensive layout, as for a dust jacket, and also for composition or

compositor.

compositor. See typesetter.

computer-to-plate (CTP) technology. A process in which print-ready electronic files are imposed

directly onto offset printing plates, thus eliminating the need for an intermediate stage

involving film.

contact proof. A photographic proof used to show the reproduction quality of an image. Also

called velox.

continuous tone. An image, such as a photograph, with gradations of tone from dark to light, in

contrast to an image formed of pure blacks and whites, such as a pen-and-ink drawing. See also

halftone.

cover. The two hinged parts of a binding, front and back, and the center panel, or spine, that joins

them; also the four surfaces making up the covers in this sense, when used to carry printed

matter. See also dust jacket.

crop. To cut down an illustration, such as a photograph, to improve the appearance of the image

by removing extraneous areas.

CSS. An abbreviation for cascading style sheets. A style sheet language used to define the

presentation of a document marked up in HTML or another formal markup language.

cyan. A greenish blue, one of the three primary colors (plus black) used in process color printing.

See also CMYK.

DA. An abbreviation for designer's alteration. See also alteration.

descender. The portion of a lowercase letter that extends below the x-height, as in g and p.

Contrast ascender; see also arabic numerals.

die. See stamping.

digital printing. A type of printing in which the transfer of electronic images to paper is

accomplished with ink-jet or laser printers. Contrast offset printing.

digital proof. A type of proof generated directly from electronic files and typically output on a

laser printer. See also bluelines.

display type. Type used for title pages, chapter openings, subheads, and so on, usually

distinguished from the type used for body text by a different, often larger font. See also

body text.

DOI. An abbreviation for Digital Object Identifier, a unique alphanumeric string (e.g.,

10.1086/597483) assigned to a publication or other unit of intellectual property. As a digital

identifier, a DOI also provides a means of looking up the current location(s) of such an object on

the Internet.

DRM. An abbreviation for digital rights management. Refers to a system designed to protect

copyrighted electronic works from unauthorized use, copying, or distribution. See also A.40.

drop cap. An uppercase character set in a type size larger than the text and "dropped," or nested,

into lines of text, usually as the first character in the opening paragraph of a chapter or other

section of text.

drop folio. See folio.

DTD. An abbreviation for document type definition. In a markup language such as XML, a set of

rules about the structure of a document that dictate the relationship among different tags and

allowable text or elements within specified tags. Also called schema. See also tag.

dust jacket. Also called jacket. A protective wrapping, usually made of paper, for a clothbound

book; its flaps, which fold around the front and back covers, usually carry promotional copy. See

also cover.

EA. An abbreviation for editor's alteration. See also alteration.

ECF. An abbreviation for elemental chlorine-free. Refers to paper bleached with a chlorine derivative

that releases hazardous substances, including dioxin, into the environment. Contrast PCF; TCF.

edition. (1) A publication in its original form, or any subsequent reissue of the publication in

which its content is significantly revised. (2) More informally, a term used to refer to each

format in which a publication appears (for example, a book published in both cloth and

paperback bindings, or a journal published in both electronic and print forms). However, the

designation second edition would not be applied to the secondary format, or to a second or

subsequent impression of the publication, in the absence of significant content changes. See also

1.26; impression; reprint.

em. A unit of type measurement equal to the point size of the type in question; for example, a six-

point em is six points wide. See also point.

embossing. Forming an image in relief (that is, a raised image) on a surface such as a case or a

paper cover or dust jacket. If the process does not involve metallic leaf or ink, it is called blind

embossing. See also stamping.

em dash. A short typographical rule measuring the width of an em. See also 6.82--89.

en. A unit of type measurement half the size of an em.

en dash. A short typographical rule measuring the width of an en. See also 6.78--81.

endpapers. Folded sheets pasted or, rarely, sewn to the first and last signatures of a book; the free

leaves are then pasted to the inside of the front and back covers to secure the book within the

covers. Sometimes endpapers feature printed text or illustrations. Also called endsheets.

EPS. An abbreviation for encapsulated PostScript. A type of file used to encode graphics so they can

be embedded in a larger PostScript file.

extract. See block quotation.

F&Gs. See folded and gathered sheets.

figure. An illustration printed with the text (hence also called a text figure), as distinguished from a

plate, which is printed separately. More generally, figure is used to refer to any illustration in a

published work, including charts (but not tables).

file. A block of digital information with a unique name and location in a computer system or

external storage medium (such as a disk) that can be accessed and manipulated by users of the

system or by the system itself. Programs, documents, and images are all examples of data

stored in files.

flaps. See dust jacket.

flexibinding. Also called limp binding. A method of binding in which the pages or signatures are

sewn together and the lightweight cover (sometimes with flaps) is then affixed, as in adhesive

binding. The result is a publication that is lighter and less bulky than a casebound book but

sturdier and more flexible than an adhesive-bound paperback. Contrast adhesive binding;

case binding.

flush. Even, as with typeset margins. Lines that are set flush left are aligned vertically along the

left-hand margin; lines set flush right are aligned along the right-hand margin. Contrast

ragged right.

flush-and-hang style. A copy-setting style in which the first line of each paragraph begins flush

left and subsequent, or runover, lines are indented (as in this list of key terms). Also referred to

as hanging indention or hanging indent.

folded and gathered sheets. Also called F&Gs or sheets. The collection of all printed signatures in a

publication, folded into imposed page sequence and gathered for binding. See also signature.

folio. A page number, often placed at the outside of the running head at the top of the page. If it is

placed consistently at the bottom of the page, the number is a foot folio; if it is placed at the

bottom of the page on display pages only, it is a drop folio. A folio counted in numbering pages

but not printed (as on the title page) is a blind folio; any folio printed is an expressed folio.

font. A complete assortment of a given size and style of type, usually including capitals, small

capitals, and lowercase together with numerals, punctuation marks, ligatures, and the

commonly used symbols and accents. The italic of a typeface is considered a part of the

equipment of a font of type but is often spoken of as a separate font. Often used as a synonym

for typeface.

foot folio. See folio.

four-color process. See process color printing.

FTP. An abbreviation for file transfer protocol. The protocol, or set of instructions and syntax, for

moving files between computers on the Internet.

gallery. A section of illustrations grouped on consecutive pages rather than scattered throughout

the text.

galley proof. Proof showing typeset material but without final pagination. The term, an

anachronism, once referred to the long, narrow columns of type, or "galleys," prepared by a

printer before pages were composed, by hand. See also page proof.

GIF. An abbreviation for graphic interchange format. A file format for compressing and storing

bitmapped graphics that contain line art or text for viewing on-screen. See also PNG; compare

JPEG.

gutter. The two inner margins (back margins) of facing pages of a book or journal.

hairline rule. A very thin rule--whose width is variously defined as one-quarter point, one-half

point, or one-fifth of an em.

halftone. An image formed by breaking up a continuous-tone image, such as a photograph, into a

pattern of dots of varying sizes. When printed, the dots, though clearly visible through a

magnifying glass, merge to give an illusion of continuous tone to the naked eye.

halftone screen. A grid used in the halftone process to break an image up into dots. The fineness

of the screen is denoted in terms of lines per inch, as in a 133-line screen.

hanging indention. See flush-and-hang style.

hard copy. A paper copy of text, artwork, or other material, as opposed to a copy that has been

stored in digital form.

hardcover binding. See case binding.

head margin. The top margin of a page.

HTML. An abbreviation for hypertext markup language. A specific set of tags used to describe the

structure of hypertext documents that make up most web pages. Web browsers interpret these

tags to display text and graphics. HTML is an application of SGML.

HTTP. An abbreviation for hypertext transfer protocol. The protocol, or set of instructions and

syntax, for retrieving files on the Internet and for enabling links between such files.

hypertext. The organization of digital information into associations connected by links. In a

hypertext environment, objects such as text and images can contain links to other objects in the

same file or in external files, which users can choose to follow. See also HTML; HTTP.

impression. (1) The inked image on the paper created during a single cycle of a press; the speed of

a sheet-fed printing press is given in terms of impressions per hour. (2) A single printing of a

publication; that is, all the copies printed at a given time. See also 1.26; edition; reprint.

indent. To set a line of type so that it begins or ends inside the normal margin. In paragraph

indention the first line is indented from the left margin and the following lines are set full

measure. In hanging indention (also referred to as flush and hang) the first line is set full measure

and the following lines are indented. See also flush-and-hang style.

Internet. A global, public network of computers and computer networks that communicate using

TCP/IP (transmission control protocol/Internet protocol).

italic. A slanted type style suggestive of cursive writing ( like this). Contrast roman.

jacket. See dust jacket.

JPEG. An abbreviation for Joint Photographic Experts Group. A file format commonly used to

compress and store bitmapped graphics that contain photographic and other continuous-tone

images for viewing on-screen. Compare GIF and PNG.

justified. Spaced out to a specified measure, as with printed lines, so that left and right margins

are aligned. Contrast ragged right.

kern. The part of a letter that extends beyond the edge of the type body and overlaps the adjacent

character, as the j in adjacent or the T in To.

kerning. The selective adjustment of space between particular characters (called "letterspacing") to

improve appearance or ease of reading.

landscape. Having a greater dimension in width than in length, as with an image or a document.

Contrast portrait; see also broadside.

layout. A designer's plan of how the published material, including illustrative content, should

appear.

leading. Also called line spacing. The visual space between lines of type, usually measured in

points from baseline to baseline. This word, derived from the element lead, rhymes with

"heading."

letterspacing. See kerning.

ligature. A single character formed by joining two characters, such as , , or . Older, more

decorative forms (such as --a c joined to a t by a loop) are known as quaint characters.

line art. Copy for reproduction that contains only solid blacks and whites, such as a pen-and-ink

drawing. Contrast continuous tone.

line spacing. See leading.

lining numbers. See under arabic numerals.

lowercase. The uncapitalized letters of a font. Contrast uppercase.

macro. A sequence of operations that is defined for reuse in a computer program. In word

processing, a macro can be used to perform complex or repetitive tasks. Short for

macroinstruction.

makeup. Arranging of type lines and illustrations into page form.

margin. The white space surrounding the printed area of a page, including the back, or gutter,

margin; the head, or top, margin; the fore-edge, or outside, margin; and the tail, foot, or bottom,

margin. Contrast type page.

markup. (1) A sequence of characters, often called tags or codes, that indicate the logical structure of

a manuscript or provide instructions for formatting it. (2) The insertion of such tags in an

electronic manuscript; also, traditionally, editing and coding a paper manuscript.

MathML. An application of XML for tagging mathematical expressions.

measure. The length of the line (usually in picas) in which type is set. Full measure refers to copy

set the full width of the type page. Narrow measure refers to a block of copy (such as a long

quotation) indented from one or both margins to distinguish it from surrounding full-measure

copy, or to copy set in short lines for multicolumn makeup.

metadata. Data about data. The metadata for a given publication may include, among other things,

copyright information, an ISBN or ISSN, a volume or issue number, and keywords--including

the title and creator of the work and a description. Metadata is a component of markup

languages such as SGML, HTML, and XML.

notch binding. A type of adhesive binding in which the untrimmed spine is notched and force-fed

with glue.

OCR. An abbreviation for optical character recognition. A technology that converts images of text (as

from a scan of a printed page) into character data that can be manipulated like any other digital

text.

offprint. An article, chapter, or other excerpt from a larger work issued as a separate unit.

offset printing. Also called offset lithography. The most common type of printing used for books

and journals. The pages to be printed are transferred either photographically or through

computer-to-plate technology to a thin, flexible metal plate, curved to fit one of the revolving

cylinders of a printing press. The image on this plate is then transferred to, or offset onto, the

paper by means of a rubber blanket on another cylinder. Contrast digital printing.

old-style numbers. See under arabic numerals.

opacity. The measurement of transparency of paper. The higher a paper's opacity, the less

tendency there is for text and images printed on one side of a sheet to show through to the

other side.

orphan. The first line of a paragraph stranded at the bottom of a page or column. An orphan can

be avoided by changes in wording or spacing to the text that precedes it. Contrast widow.

overlay. A hinged flap of paper or transparent plastic covering a piece of artwork. It may be there

merely to protect the work (and sometimes includes instructions), or it may bear type or other

artwork intended for reproduction along with what lies underneath.

page proof. Proof showing typeset material that has been paginated to reflect the placement of

text, illustrations, and other design elements. Some publications may require one or more stages

of revised page proof for checking corrections.

paperback. Bound with a cover stock rather than a cloth-and-board cover. Also called paperbound.

Contrast clothbound.

pattern matching. In word processing, a search or search-and-replace operation that uses a formal

syntax to find every instance of a specified string of text or "pattern" and, conditionally, replace

it with a different string. In computer programming, such patterns are known as regular

expressions.

PCF. An abbreviation for process chlorine-free. Refers to recycled papers bleached without using

chlorine or chlorine derivatives beyond what may have been used originally to produce the

recovered wastepaper. Contrast ECF; compare TCF.

PDF. An abbreviation for portable document format. An Adobe Systems file format--and now a

formal, open standard (ISO 32000)--for stable, device-independent delivery of electronic

documents. Preserving such elements as fonts, formatting, and pagination, PDF is used not only

as the basis for many printed publications but also as a format for electronic publications,

including many journal articles and e-books. See also PostScript (PS).

PE. An abbreviation for printer's error. See also printer's error (PE).

perfect binding. A type of adhesive binding that involves mechanically roughening off about an

eighth of an inch from the spine of the folded and gathered sheets. This treatment produces a

surface of intermingled fibers to which an adhesive is applied, and a cover (usually paper) is

wrapped around the pages.

pica. A unit of type measurement equal to twelve points (approximately one-sixth of an inch).

pixel. See resolution.

plain-text file. An informal term for a file that contains data encoded using only letters, numerals,

punctuation marks, spaces, returns, line breaks, and tabs with no additional formatting or

special characters. Plain-text files are often referred to as ASCII files, although newer encoding

schemes may be used, and other kinds of data (such as XML) can also be stored as plain-text

files.

plate. (1) An image-bearing surface that, when inked, will produce one whole page or several

pages of printed matter at a time. (2) A printed illustration, usually of high quality and

produced on special paper, pasted or bound into a publication; when so printed, plates are

numbered separately from other illustrations.

PNG. An abbreviation for portable network graphic. A file format for compressing and storing

bitmapped graphics that contain line art or text for viewing on-screen. See also GIF; compare

JPEG.

point. (1) The basic unit of type measurement--0.01384 (approximately one seventy-second) of an

inch. (2) A unit used in measuring paper products employed in printing and binding--0.001

inches.

portable document format. See PDF.

portrait. Having a greater dimension in length than in width, as with an image or a document.

Contrast landscape.

PostScript (PS). An Adobe Systems programming language used to describe pages (in terms of

trim size, font, placement of graphics, and so forth) and to tell output devices how to render the

data. Portable Document Format (PDF), a descendant of PostScript, is somewhat more flexible.

See also PDF.

prepress. The processes undertaken by a printing firm between the receipt of the electronic files

and any other materials from the publisher (or its typesetter) and the printing of the

publication.

preprint. Part of a book or journal printed and distributed or posted online before publication for

promotional purposes or, in time-sensitive fields such as science and medicine, to mitigate the

delay of publication schedules. See also offprint.

press sheet. Also called printed sheet or running sheet. In offset printing, a large sheet of paper that

emerges from the press with pages printed on both sides, each side printed from a single plate.

The sheet must then be folded so that the pages fall into proper sequence. See also signature.

presswork. The actual printing of a publication, as distinguished from composition, which

precedes it, and binding, which follows.

printer's error (PE). An error made by the typesetter (or compositor), as distinguished from an

alteration made in proof by the author, editor, or designer.

process color printing. The halftone reproduction of full-color artwork or photographs using

several plates (usually four), each printing a different color. Each plate is made with a halftone

screen. Process colors are cyan, magenta, and yellow, plus black (CMYK). See also

halftone screen.

proof. The printed copy made from electronic files, plates, negatives, or positives and used to

examine and correct a work's text, illustrations, and design elements before final printing. A

publication may involve several stages of proof; see bluelines; contact proof; digital proof;

galley proof; page proof; repro.

protocol. A standard set of instructions and syntax that define the rules by which documents are

shared between computers over a network. See also FTP; HTTP; Internet.

PS. See PostScript (PS).

ragged right. Set with an uneven right-hand margin, as with printed lines. Contrast justified.

recto. The front side of a leaf; in a book or journal, a right-hand page. To start recto is to begin on a

recto page, as a preface or an index normally does. Contrast verso.

redline. In word processing, a document in which changes (additions and deletions) are shown, or

"tracked," by the application of text attributes such as strikethrough, underlining, boldface, or

color. Often used as a verb: to redline. Also called legal blackline.

reprint. A publication in its second or subsequent printing, or impression. A reprint may include

corrections or new material or both and may be published in a format different from the

original printing (for example, as a paperback rather than a clothbound book). The extent of the

changes usually determines whether the reprint is considered a new edition of the publication.

See also edition; impression.

repro. An abbreviation for reproduction copy. A type of photographic proof generated by the

typesetter that reflects the changes made in page proof. Many typesetters now provide final

laser proof, generated from the electronic files, instead of repro.

resolution. (1) The number of pixels per unit of measure used to form an image. In the United

States, image resolution is calculated per inch; the more pixels per inch, the higher the quality

of the image. (2) The number of actual dots per unit of measure at which an image or page is

output, usually by a printer or an image-setting device. In the United States, output resolution

is usually expressed per inch; the more dots per inch, the higher the quality of the output.

roman. The primary type style (like this), as distinguished from italic ( like this).

roman numerals. Numerals formed from traditional combinations of roman letters, either capitals

(I, II, III, IV, etc.) or lowercase (i, ii, iii, iv, etc.). Contrast arabic numerals.

run in. (1) To merge a paragraph or line with the preceding one. (2) To set quoted matter

continuously with text rather than setting it off as a block quotation.

running heads. Copy set at the top of printed pages, usually containing the title of the publication

or chapter, chapter number, or other information. Such copy is sometimes placed at the bottom

of the pages, in which case it is referred to as running feet.

runover. (1) The continuation of a heading, figure legend, or similar copy onto an additional line.

(2) In flush-and-hang material, all lines after the first line of a particular item. (3) Text that is

longer than intended, running onto another page, or reset material that is longer than the

material it was meant to replace.

saddle stitching. Also called saddle wiring. A method of binding that involves inserting thread or

staples through the folds of gathered sheets, as in pamphlets and magazines.

sans serif. A typeface with no serifs (like this). See also serif.

scale. To calculate (after cropping) the proportions and finish size of an illustration and the

amount of reduction or enlargement needed to achieve this size.

scan. To produce a digital bitmap of an image (text or graphics) using a device that senses

alternating patterns of light and dark and of color. The resolution and scaling percentage of the

desired output should be considered before the image is scanned.

schema. See DTD.

screen. A halftone screen; also the dot pattern in the printed image produced by such a screen.

serif. A short, light line projecting from the top or bottom of a main stroke of a letter; originally, in

handwritten letters, a beginning or finishing stroke of the pen. See also sans serif.

sewing. The process of stitching signatures together as part of binding. See also side sewing;

Smyth sewing.

SGML. An abbreviation for standard generalized markup language, an international standard for

constructing sets of tags. SGML is not a specific set of tags but a system for defining vocabularies

of tags (the names of the tags and what they mean) and using them to encode documents. See

also tag; XML.

sheet-fed press. A printing press using paper in sheet form. Contrast web-fed press.

sidehead. A subhead that (1) lies partly outside the margin of the text and is set on a line of its

own; (2) lies wholly outside the text margin; or (3) begins a paragraph and is continuous with

the text. A subhead of the third sort is sometimes called a run-in sidehead. See also run in.

side sewing. In binding, a method of sewing that involves stitching the signatures from the side,

close to the spine, before attaching the case. Libraries typically rebind books in this manner. A

side-sewn book is more durable than a Smyth-sewn book but will not open flat. See also

Smyth sewing.

signature. A press sheet as folded, ready for binding. A signature is usually thirty-two pages but

may be only sixteen, eight, or even four pages if the paper stock is very heavy, or sixty-four

pages if the paper is thin enough to permit additional folding. The size of the press also affects

the size of the signature. See also folded and gathered sheets; press sheet.

small caps. An abbreviation for small capitals. Capital letters set at the x-height of a font (LIKE

THIS), usually for display.

Smyth sewing. A method of sewing that involves stitching the signatures individually through the

fold before binding them. A Smyth-sewn book has the advantage of lying flat when open,

unlike a side-sewn or perfect-bound book. See also perfect binding; side sewing.

spec. An abbreviation for specification (plural specs or spex)--as in design specs. See A.16--22.

spine. The "back" of a bound publication; that is, the center panel of the binding, hinged on each

side to the two covers, front and back, and visible when the book or journal is shelved.

Typically the title of the publication is printed on the spine. Also called the backbone.

spread. Two facing pages, a verso and a recto.

stamping. Imprinting the spine of a case and sometimes the front cover with hard metal dies.

Stamping may involve ink, foil, or other coloring material; if it does not, it is called blind

stamping. See also embossing.

stub. The left-hand column of a table. See 3.49--67.

style sheet. (1) A set of programming instructions that, in conjunction with a markup language

such as XML or HTML, determine how a document is presented on a screen, on a printed page,

or in another medium such as speech. (2) A record of terms kept by a manuscript editor to

document particular usages for a specific manuscript (see 2.52). See also CSS.

subhead. A heading, or title, for a section within a chapter or an article. Subheads are usually set

in type differing in some way from that of the text; for example, in boldface, all capitals, caps

and small caps, or upper- and lowercase italic. See also sidehead.

subscript. A small numeral, letter, fraction, or symbol that prints partly below the baseline, usually

in mathematical material or chemical formulas.

superscript. A small numeral, letter, fraction, or symbol that prints partly above the x-height, often

in mathematical or tabular material or to indicate a footnote or endnote.

tag. (1) In SGML and languages derived from SGML, a generic marker used to specify and (when

paired) delimit an element in the structure of a document. The process of adding tags to a

manuscript is known as tagging or markup. (2) More informally, a synonym for code. See also

code; markup; SGML; XML.

TCF. An abbreviation for totally chlorine-free. Refers to paper bleached without using chlorine or

chlorine derivatives. Contrast ECF; compare PCF.

thin space. A very small space, defined as one-fifth (or sometimes one-sixth) of an em, added

between characters. See A.22.

thumbnail. A miniature rendition of a page or an image. In electronic publications, a thumbnail is

often used to indicate a link to a larger electronic object.

TIFF. An abbreviation for tagged image file format. A file format developed by Aldus and Microsoft

and used to store bitmapped graphics, including scanned line art, halftones, and color images.

trim size. The dimensions, usually in inches, of a full page in a printed publication, including the

margins.

typeface. A collection of fonts with common design or style characteristics. A typeface may

include roman, italic, boldface, condensed, and other fonts. The various typefaces are

designated by name: Baskerville, Caslon, and Times Roman, for example. See also font.

type page. The area of a typeset page occupied by the type image, from the running head to the

last line of type on the page or the folio, whichever is lower, and from the inside margin to the

outside margin, including any area occupied by sideheads.

typesetter. A person, firm, facility, or machine that prepares books, articles, or other documents

for publication. The term, now somewhat of an anachronism, has its origins in the composing--

or "setting"--of individual pieces of type, by hand, and binding them together to make

individual pages. Also called compositor.

type styles. See boldface; italic; roman.

Unicode. A system of character encoding developed by the Unicode Consortium and incorporated

into the ISO standard for universal multiple-octet coded characters (ISO/IEC 10646). See 11.2.

See also character encoding.

unjustified. See ragged right.

uppercase. The capital letters of a font. Contrast lowercase.

URL. An abbreviation for uniform resource locator, or the address used to locate a document on the

Internet (e.g., http://www.press.uchicago.edu/).

vector graphic. A digital representation of an image defined by shapes such as lines and curves

rather than by pixels. Line art is typically created, edited, and scaled as a vector graphic.

Contrast bitmap.

verso. The back side of a leaf; in a book or journal, a left-hand page. Contrast recto.

web browser. A computer program designed to access information on the Internet or on a local

network. See also HTML; web page.

web-fed press. A printing press using paper in roll form. Contrast sheet-fed press.

web page. A virtual document delivered via the World Wide Web and viewed in a web browser.

website. A collection of closely related and hyperlinked web pages maintained by an individual or

organization.

widow. A short, paragraph-ending line appearing at the top of a page. Widows should be avoided

when possible by changes in wording or spacing that either remove the line or lengthen it.

Contrast orphan.

wiki. A website designed to allow visitors to edit and contribute content.

World Wide Web. Also called the web. The Internet's most widely used information-retrieval

service. The World Wide Web uses hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP) to allow users to request

and retrieve documents (web pages and multimedia objects) from other computers on the

Internet.

x-height. In type, a vertical dimension equal to the height of the lowercase letters (such as x)

without ascenders or descenders.

XHTML. An application of XML for producing HTML that conforms to the rules established for a

particular XML-based document. See also HTML.

XML. An abbreviation for extensible markup language. A subset of the SGML standard, used for

structuring documents and data on the Internet. See also SGML.

XSL. An abbreviation for extensible style sheet language. A family of style sheet languages used to

define the presentation of XML documents and their conversion, or transformation, into other

formats such as HTML (using XSLT, extensible style sheet transformations).

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

Works on Writing and Editing

List of Figures

1.1

Style

List of Tables

1.2

Grammar and Usage

1.3

Research and Writing

Index

Works on Publishing

2.1

Manuscript Editing and Proofreading

2.2

Illustrations

2.3

Rights and Permissions

2.4

Mathematics

2.5

Indexing

2.6

Design

2.7

Production

2.8

The Publishing Industry

Dictionaries

3.1

English Dictionaries

3.2

Foreign-Language Dictionaries

General Reference Works

4.1

Biography

4.2

Geography

4.3

Encyclopedias

4.4

Almanacs and Yearbooks

4.5

Guides to Books, Periodicals, and Other Sources

4.6

Quotations

4.7

Abbreviations

Miscellaneous Works Cited in Text

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

1: Works on Writing and Editing

List of Figures

The works listed here are a starting point for writers, editors, and others involved in publishing who

List of Tables

would like more information about topics covered in this manual. The list includes all the works cited

Index

in the text as further resources along with other useful references. Although some make

recommendations that diverge from those of this manual, they reflect the specific demands of

different disciplines and the evolving traditions of writing, editing, and publishing. As with all

reference sources, readers should carefully evaluate their suitability for a given purpose.

1.1 Style

The ACS Style Guide: Effective Communication of Scientific Information. 3rd ed. Edited by Anne M. Coghill and

Lorrin R. Garson. Washington, DC: American Chemical Society, 2006.

AIP Style Manual. 4th ed. New York: American Institute of Physics, 1990. Also available at

http://www.aip.org/pubservs/style/4thed/toc.html.

ALWD Citation Manual: A Professional System of Citation. 3rd ed. Edited by the Association of Legal Writing

Directors and Darby Dickerson. New York: Aspen, 2006.

AMA Manual of Style: A Guide for Authors and Editors. 10th ed. Edited by Cheryl Iverson. New York: Oxford

University Press, 2007. Also available at http://www.amamanualofstyle.com/.

ASM Style Manual for Journals and Books. Washington, DC: American Society for Microbiology, 1991.

The Associated Press Stylebook and Briefing on Media Law. 44th ed. Edited by Darrell Christian, Sally Jacobsen,

and David Minthorn. New York: Associated Press, 2009. Also available at

http://www.apstylebook.com/.

The Bluebook: A Uniform System of Citation. 18th ed. Cambridge, MA: Harvard Law Review Association, 2005.

Also available at http://www.legalbluebook.com/.

Canadian Guide to Uniform Legal Citation. 6th ed. In English and French. Toronto, ON: Carswell/McGill Law

Journal, 2006.

Catholic News Service. CNS Stylebook on Religion: Reference Guide and Usage Manual. 3rd ed. Washington, DC:

Catholic News Service, 2006.

The Complete Guide to Citing Government Information Resources: A Manual for Writers and Librarians. Rev. ed.

Edited by Diane L. Garner and Diane H. Smith. Bethesda, MD: Congressional Information Service for

the Government Documents Round Table, American Library Association, 1993.

CSE Manual. See Scientific Style and Format

Editing Canadian English. 2nd ed. Prepared for the Editors' Association of Canada / Association canadienne

des réviseurs by Catherine Cragg, Barbara Czarnecki, Iris Hossé Phillips, Katharine Vanderlinden, and

Sheila Protti. Toronto, ON: Macfarlane Walter and Ross, 2000.

Garner, Bryan A. The Elements of Legal Style. 2nd ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 2002.

Holoman, D. Kern. Writing about Music: A Style Sheet. 2nd ed. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2008.

ISO (International Organization for Standardization). Information and Documentation—Bibliographic References.

Part 2, Electronic Documents or Parts Thereof. ISO 690-2. New York: American National Standards

Institute, 1997. Under revision.

Lipson, Charles. Cite Right: A Quick Guide to Citation Styles—MLA, APA, Chicago, the Sciences, Professions, and

More. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2006.

MHRA Style Guide: A Handbook for Authors, Editors, and Writers of Theses. 2nd ed. London: Modern

Humanities Research Association, 2008. Also available at http://www.mhra.org.uk/.

Microsoft Manual of Style for Technical Publications. 3rd ed. Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press, 2004.

MLA Style Manual and Guide to Scholarly Publishing. 3rd ed. New York: Modern Language Association of

America, 2008.

The New York Public Library Writer's Guide to Style and Usage. New York: HarperCollins, 1994.

The New York Times Manual of Style and Usage. Rev. ed. Edited by Allan M. Siegal and William G. Connolly.

New York: Three Rivers Press, 1999.

The Oxford Style Manual. Edited by Robert Ritter. New York: Oxford University Press, 2003. Combines The

Oxford Guide to Style and The Oxford Dictionary for Writers and Editors.

Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association. 6th ed. Washington, DC: American Psychological

Association, 2009.

Reporting on Religion 2: A Stylebook on Religion's Best Beat. Edited by Diane Connolly and Debra L. Mason.

Westerville, OH: Religion Newswriters, 2007.

Sabin, William A. The Gregg Reference Manual: A Manual of Style, Grammar, Usage, and Formatting. 10th ed.

Boston: McGraw-Hill, 2005. Also available online at http://www.gregg.com/.

The SBL Handbook of Style: For Ancient Near Eastern, Biblical, and Early Christian Studies. Edited by Patrick H.

Alexander. Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1999. Also available at

http://www.sbl-site.org/publications/publishingwithsbl.aspx.

Scientific Style and Format: The CSE Manual for Authors, Editors, and Publishers. 7th ed. Compiled by the Style

Manual Committee of the Council of Science Editors. Reston, VA: Council of Science Editors in

cooperation with the Rockefeller University Press, 2006.

Strunk, William, Jr., and E. B. White. The Elements of Style. 4th ed. Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2000.

Style Manual for Political Science. Rev. ed. Washington, DC: American Political Science Association Committee

on Publications, 2006.

The Times Style and Usage Guide. Rev. ed. Compiled by Tim Austin. London: Times Books, 2003.

Turabian, Kate L. A Manual for Writers of Research Papers, Theses, and Dissertations: Chicago Style for Students

and Researchers. 7th ed. Revised by Wayne C. Booth, Gregory G. Colomb, Joseph M. Williams, and

University of Chicago Press editorial staff. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2007.

———. Student's Guide to Writing College Papers. 4th ed. Revised by Gregory G. Colomb, Joseph M. Williams,

and the University of Chicago Press editorial staff. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2010.

United States Government Printing Office Style Manual. 30th ed. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office,

2008. Also available at http://www.gpoaccess.gov/stylemanual/index.html.

The University of Chicago Manual of Legal Citation. 2nd ed. Edited by the University of Chicago Law Review.

2000. An updated version is available at http://lawreview.uchicago.edu/.

US Geological Survey. Suggestions to Authors of the Reports of the United States Geological Survey. 7th ed.

Revised and edited by Wallace R. Hansen. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office, 1991. Also

available at http://www.nwrc.usgs.gov/lib/lib_sta.htm.

Walker, Janice R., and Todd Taylor. The Columbia Guide to Online Style. 2nd ed. New York: Columbia

University Press, 2006.

The Wall Street Journal Guide to Business Style and Usage. Edited by Paul R. Martin. London: Free Press, 2002.

Words into Type. 3rd ed. Based on studies by Marjorie E. Skillin, Robert M. Gay, and other authorities.

Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1974.

1.2 Grammar and Usage

Aitchison, James. Cassell Dictionary of English Grammar. 2nd ed. London: Cassell, 2001.

Baron, Dennis. Grammar and Gender. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1986.

Bernstein, Theodore M. The Careful Writer: A Modern Guide to English Usage. New York: Atheneum, 1965.

———. Miss Thistlebottom's Hobgoblins: The Careful Writer's Guide to the Taboos, Bugbears, and Outmoded Rules

of English Usage. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1971.

Burchfield, Robert W. Unlocking the English Language. New York: Hill and Wang, 1991.

Copperud, Roy H. American Usage and Style: The Consensus. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1980.

Ebbitt, Wilma R., and David R. Ebbitt. Index to English. 8th ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 1990.

The Elements of Internet Style: The New Rules of Creating Valuable Content for Today's Readers. Rev. ed. of E-

What? Alexandria, VA: EEI Press; New York: Allworth Press, 2007.

Follett, Wilson. Modern American Usage: A Guide. Revised by Erik Wensberg. New York: Hill and Wang,

1998.

Fowler, H. W. A Dictionary of Modern English Usage. 2nd ed. Revised and edited by Sir Ernest Gowers.

Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1965. (See also Fowler's Modern English Usage.)

Fowler's Modern English Usage. 3rd ed. rev. Edited by R. W. Burchfield. New York: Oxford University Press,

2004.

Garner, Bryan A. Garner's Modern American Usage. New York: Oxford University Press, 2003.

Gordon, Karen Elizabeth. The Deluxe Transitive Vampire: The Ultimate Handbook of Grammar for the Innocent,

the Eager, and the Doomed. New York: Pantheon, 1993.

———. The New Well-Tempered Sentence: A Punctuation Handbook for the Innocent, the Eager, and the Doomed.

New York: Ticknor and Fields, 1993.

Gowers, Ernest. The Complete Plain Words. Edited by Sidney Greenbaum and Janet Whitcut. Boston: David R.

Godine, 1988.

Greenbaum, Sydney. Oxford English Grammar. New York: Oxford University Press, 1996.

Hale, Constance. Sin and Syntax: How to Craft Wickedly Effective Prose. New York: Broadway Books, 1999.

Hale, Constance, and Jessie Scanlon, eds. Wired Style: Principles of English Usage in the Digital Age. Rev. ed.

New York: Broadway Books, 1999.

Johnson, Edward D. The Handbook of Good English. New York: Pocket Books, 1991.

Maggio, Rosalie. Talking about People: A Guide to Fair and Accurate Language. Phoenix: Oryx Press, 1997.

Merriam-Webster's Dictionary of English Usage. Springfield, MA: Merriam-Webster, 1994.

O'Conner, Patricia T. Woe Is I: The Grammarphobe's Guide to Better English in Plain English. 3rd ed. New York:

Riverhead Books, 2009.

The Oxford Dictionary of English Grammar. Edited by Sylvia Chalker and Edmund Weiner. New York: Oxford

University Press, 1998.

Palmer, Frank. Grammar. 2nd ed. New York: Penguin, 1984.

Schwartz, Marilyn. Guidelines for Bias-Free Writing. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1995.

Trask, R. L. Language: The Basics. 2nd ed. New York: Routledge, 1999.

Trimble, John R. Writing with Style: Conversations on the Art of Writing. 2nd ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ:

Prentice Hall, 2002.

Wallraff, Barbara. Word Court: Wherein Verbal Virtue Is Rewarded, Crimes against the Language Are Punished, and

Poetic Justice Is Done. New York: Harcourt, 2000.

Walsh, Bill. Lapsing into a Comma: A Curmudgeon's Guide to the Many Things That Can Go Wrong in Print—and

How to Avoid Them. Chicago: Contemporary Books, 2000.

Williams, Joseph M. Style: Toward Clarity and Grace. With two chapters coauthored by Gregory G. Colomb.

Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1995.

Zinsser, William. On Writing Well: The Classic Guide to Writing Nonfiction. 7th ed. New York: HarperCollins,

2006.

1.3 Research and Writing

Barzun, Jacques, and Henry F. Graff. The Modern Researcher. 6th ed. Belmont, CA: Thomson/Wadsworth,

2004.

Becker, Howard S. Writing for Social Scientists: How to Start and Finish Your Thesis, Book, or Article. 2nd ed.

Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2007.

Booth, Wayne C., Gregory G. Colomb, and Joseph M. Williams. The Craft of Research. 3rd ed. Chicago:

University of Chicago Press, 2008.

Cook, Claire Kehrwald. Line by Line: How to Improve Your Own Writing. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1985.

Day, Robert A., and Barbara Gastel. How to Write and Publish a Scientific Paper. 6th ed. Westport, CT:

Greenwood Press, 2006.

Germano, William. From Dissertation to Book. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2005.

Harman, Eleanor, Ian Montagnes, Siobhan McMenemy, and Chris Bucci, eds. The Thesis and the Book: A Guide

for First-Time Academic Authors. 2nd ed. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2003.

Lanham, Richard A. Revising Prose. 5th ed. New York: Pearson Longman, 2007.

Lerner, Betsy. The Forest for the Trees: An Editor's Advice to Writers. New York: Riverhead Books, 2000.

Lipson, Charles. How to Write a BA Thesis: A Practical Guide from Your First Ideas to Your Finished Paper.

Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2005.

Luey, Beth, ed. Revising Your Dissertation: Advice from Leading Editors. Updated ed. Berkeley: University of

California Press, 2007.

McMillan, Victoria E. Writing Papers in the Biological Sciences. 4th ed. Boston: Bedford/St. Martin's, 2006.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

2: Works on Publishing

List of Figures

The works listed here are a starting point for writers, editors, and others involved in publishing who

List of Tables

would like more information about topics covered in this manual. The list includes all the works cited

Index

in the text as further resources along with other useful references. Although some make

recommendations that diverge from those of this manual, they reflect the specific demands of

different disciplines and the evolving traditions of writing, editing, and publishing. As with all

reference sources, readers should carefully evaluate their suitability for a given purpose.

2.1 Manuscript Editing and Proofreading

Anderson, Laura. McGraw-Hill's Proofreading Handbook. 2nd ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2006.

Butcher, Judith, Caroline Drake, and Maureen Leach. Butcher's Copy-Editing: The Cambridge Handbook for

Editors, Copy-Editors, and Proofreaders. 4th ed. New York: Cambridge University Press, 2006. Also

available as an e-book.

Copyediting. Bimonthly newsletter published by McMurry, Inc. Also available at

http://www.copyediting.com/.

Einsohn, Amy. The Copyeditor's Handbook: A Guide for Book Publishing and Corporate Communications. 2nd ed.

Berkeley: University of California Press, 2006.

Judd, Karen. Copyediting: A Practical Guide. 3rd ed. Menlo Park, CA: Crisp Learning, 2001.

Lyon, Jack M. Microsoft Word for Publishing Professionals. West Valley City, UT: Editorium, 2008.

Norton, Scott. Developmental Editing: A Handbook for Freelancers, Authors, and Publishers. Chicago: University

of Chicago Press, 2009.

Saller, Carol Fisher. The Subversive Copy Editor: Advice from Chicago (or, How to Negotiate Good Relationships

with Your Writers, Your Colleagues, and Yourself). Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2009.

Smith, Peggy. Mark My Words: Instruction and Practice in Proofreading. 3rd ed. Alexandria, VA: EEI Press,

1997.

Stainton, Elsie Myers. The Fine Art of Copyediting. 2nd ed. New York: Columbia University Press, 2002.

Stoughton, Mary. The Copyeditor's Guide to Substance and Style. 3rd ed. Alexandria, VA: EEI Press, 2006.

2.2 Illustrations

Briscoe, Mary Helen. Preparing Scientific Illustrations: A Guide to Better Posters, Presentations, and Publications.

2nd ed. New York: Springer-Verlag, 1996.

CBE Scientific Illustration Committee. Illustrating Science: Standards for Publication. Bethesda, MD: Council of

Biology Editors, 1988.

Monmonier, Mark. Mapping It Out: Expository Cartography for the Humanities and Social Sciences. Chicago:

University of Chicago Press, 1993.

Ross, Ted. The Art of Music Engraving and Processing: A Complete Manual, Reference, and Text Book on Preparing

Music for Reproduction and Print. Miami: Hansen Books, 1970.

Tufte, Edward R. Envisioning Information. Cheshire, CT: Graphics Press, 1990.

———. The Visual Display of Quantitative Information. 2nd ed. Cheshire, CT: Graphics Press, 2001.

———. Visual Explanations: Images and Quantities, Evidence and Narrative. Cheshire, CT: Graphics Press, 1997.

Zweifel, Frances W. A Handbook of Biological Illustration. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1988.

2.3 Rights and Permissions

Bielstein, Susan M. Permissions, a Survival Guide: Blunt Talk about Art as Intellectual Property. Chicago:

University of Chicago Press, 2006.

Fischer, Mark A., E. Gabriel Perle, and John Taylor Williams. Perle and Williams on Publishing Law. 3rd ed.

Gaithersburg, MD: Aspen Law and Business, 1999.

Goldstein, Paul. Goldstein on Copyright. 3rd ed. New York: Aspen, 2005. Loose-leaf updates.

Kaufman, Roy S. Publishing Forms and Contracts. New York: Oxford University Press, 2008.

Kirsch, Jonathan. Kirsch's Handbook of Publishing Law. Los Angeles: Acrobat Books, 1996.

Nimmer, Melville. Cases and Materials on Copyright and Other Aspects of Entertainment Litigation, Including

Unfair Competition, Defamation, Privacy. 7th ed. Newark, NJ: LexisNexis Matthew Bender, 2006.

———. Nimmer on Copyright. Rev. ed. 11 vols. Newark, NJ: LexisNexis Matthew Bender, 2005. Loose-leaf

updates.

Nimmer, Melville, and Paul Edward Gellner, eds. International Copyright Law and Practice. Newark, NJ:

LexisNexis Matthew Bender, 2004. Loose-leaf updates.

Patry, William F. Copyright Law and Practice. Washington, DC: Bureau of National Affairs, 1994. Annual

supplements.

———. The Fair Use Privilege in Copyright Law. 2nd ed. Washington, DC: Bureau of National Affairs, 1995.

Strong, William S. The Copyright Book: A Practical Guide. 5th ed. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1999.

2.4 Mathematics

Clapham, Christopher, and James Nicholson. Concise Dictionary of Mathematics. 3rd ed. New York: Oxford

University Press, 2005.

Higham, Nicholas J. Handbook of Writing for the Mathematical Sciences. 2nd ed. Philadelphia: Society for

Industrial and Applied Mathematics, 1998.

The International System of Units (SI). 8th ed. Sèvres: Bureau International des Poids et Mesures, 2006. Also

available at http://www.bipm.org/en/si/si_brochure/.

Knuth, Donald E. The TeXbook. Boston: Addison-Wesley, 2000.

Lamport, Leslie. LaTeX: A Document Preparation System; User's Guide and Reference Manual. 2nd ed. Reading,

MA: Addison-Wesley, 1999.

A Manual for Authors of Mathematical Papers. 8th ed. Providence, RI: American Mathematical Society, 1990.

Mittelbach, Frank, and Michel Goossens. The LaTeX Companion. 2nd ed. Boston: Addison-Wesley, 2004.

Spivak, Michael. The Joy of TeX: A Gourmet Guide to Typesetting with the AMS-TeXMacro Package. 2nd ed.

Providence, RI: American Mathematical Society, 1990.

Steenrod, Norman E., Paul R. Halmos, Menahem M. Schiffer, and Jean A. Dieudonné. How to Write

Mathematics. Providence, RI: American Mathematical Society, 1981.

Swanson, Ellen. Mathematics into Type. Updated edition by Arlene O'Sean and Antoinette Schleyer.

Providence, RI: American Mathematical Society, 1999.

Thompson, Ambler, and Barry N. Taylor. Guide for the Use of the International System of Units (SI).

Gaithersburg, MD: National Institute of Standards and Technology, 2008. Also available at

http://physics.nist.gov/Pubs/SP811/.

2.5 Indexing

Ament, Kurt. Indexing: A Nuts-and-Bolts Guide for Technical Writers. Norwich, NY: William Andrew, 2001.

Booth, Pat F. Indexing: The Manual of Good Practice. Munich: K. G. Saur, 2001.

Browne, Glenda, and Jon Jermey. The Indexing Companion. Melbourne: Cambridge University Press, 2007.

Fetters, Linda K. Handbook of Indexing Techniques: A Guide for Beginning Indexers. 3rd ed. Corpus Christi, TX:

FimCo Books, 2001.

Mulvany, Nancy. Indexing Books. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2005.

Wellisch, Hans H. Indexing from A to Z. 2nd ed. New York: H. W. Wilson, 1995.

2.6 Design

Bringhurst, Robert. The Elements of Typographic Style. 3rd ed. Point Roberts, WA: Hartley and Marks, 2004.

Chappell, Warren, and Robert Bringhurst. A Short History of the Printed Word. 2nd ed. Point Roberts, WA:

Hartley and Marks, 1999.

Dowding, Geoffrey. Finer Points in the Spacing and Arrangement of Type. Rev. ed. Point Roberts, WA: Hartley

and Marks, 1995.

Gill, Eric. An Essay on Typography. Boston: David R. Godine, 1988.

Hendel, Richard. On Book Design. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1998.

Hochuli, Jost, and Robin Kinross. Designing Books: Practice and Theory. Rev. ed. London: Hyphen Press, 2003.

Johnston, Edward. Writing and Illuminating and Lettering. 1946; repr., New York: Dover, 1995.

Lynch, Patrick J., and Sarah Horton. Web Style Guide: Basic Design Principles for Creating Web Sites. 3rd ed.

New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 2009.

McLean, Ruari. The Thames and Hudson Manual of Typography. New York: Thames and Hudson, 1992.

Tschichold, Jan. The Form of the Book: Essays on the Morality of Good Design. Point Roberts, WA: Hartley and

Marks, 1995.

———. The New Typography. New ed. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2006.

Williamson, Hugh. Methods of Book Design. 3rd ed. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1983.

2.7 Production

Bann, David. The All New Print Production Handbook. New York: Watson-Guptill, 2007.

Beach, Mark, and Eric Kenly. Getting It Printed. 4th ed. Cincinnati: HOW Design Books, 2004.

The Bookman's Glossary. 6th ed. Edited by Jean Peters. New York: R. R. Bowker, 1983.

Burdett, Eric. The Craft of Bookbinding. Newton Abbot, UK: David and Charles, 1978.

The Columbia Guide to Digital Publishing. Edited by William E. Kasdorf. New York: Columbia University

Press, 2003.

Dreyfus, John. Into Print: Selected Writings on Printing History, Typography, and Book Production. Boston: D. R.

Godine, 1995.

Eckersley, Richard, Richard Angstadt, Charles M. Ellertson, Richard Hendel, Naomi B. Pascal, and Anita

Walker Scott. Glossary of Typesetting Terms. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1994.

Extensible Markup Language (XML). 5th ed. Edited by Tim Bray, Jean Paoli, C. M. Sperberg-McQueen, Eve

Maler, and François Yergeau. World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) recommendation, November 26,

2008. Available at http://www.w3.org/TR/xml/.

Friedl, Jeffrey E. F. Mastering Regular Expressions. 3rd ed. Sebastopol, CA: O'Reilly, 2006.

Glaister, Geoffrey Ashall. Encyclopedia of the Book. 2nd ed. New Castle, DE: Oak Knoll Press, 2001.

Hackos, JoAnn, and Dawn Stevens. Standards for Online Communication. New York: John Wiley, 1997.

Kinross, Robin, Jaap van Triest, and Karel Martens, eds. Karel Martens: Printed Matter. 2nd ed. London:

Hyphen Press, 2002.

Lee, Marshall. Bookmaking: Editing, Design, Production. 3rd ed. New York: Norton, 2004.

National Information Standards Organization. Journal Article Versions (JAV): Recommendations of the

NISO/ALPSP JAV Technical Working Group. In partnership with the Association of Learned and

Professional Society Publishers. April 2008. Available at

http://www.niso.org/publications/rp/RP-8-2008.pdf.

Pocket Pal: A Graphic Arts Production Handbook. 19th ed. Memphis, TN: International Paper Company, 2003.

Rogondino, Michael, and Pat Rogondino. Process Color Manual: 24,000 CMYK Combinations for Design,

Prepress, and Printing. San Francisco: Chronicle Books, 2000.

Romano, Frank J. Pocket Guide to Digital Prepress. Albany, NY: Delmar Thomson Learning, 1995.

Unicode Consortium. The Unicode Standard. Version 5.0. Edited by Julie D. Allen, Joe Becker, Richard Cook,

Mark Davis, Michael Everson, Asmus Freytag, John H. Jenkins, et al. Upper Saddle River, NJ:

Addison-Wesley, 2007. Available at http://www.unicode.org/.

XML. See Extensible Markup Language.

XML.com: XML from the Inside Out. O'Reilly Media. http://www.xml.com/.

2.8 The Publishing Industry

Derricourt, Robin. An Author's Guide to Scholarly Publishing. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1996.

Germano, William. Getting It Published: A Guide for Scholars and Anyone Else Serious about Serious Books. 2nd

ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2008.

Greco, Albert N. The Book Publishing Industry. 2nd ed. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum, 2005.

ILMP (International Literary Market Place). Medford, NJ: Information Today. Published annually. Also

available at http://www.literarymarketplace.com/lmp/us/index_us.asp.

Journal of Electronic Publishing. Published quarterly by the University of Michigan Library.

http://www.journalofelectronicpublishing.org/.

Journal of Scholarly Publishing. Published quarterly by the University of Toronto Press. Also available at

http://www.utpjournals.com/jsp/jsp.html.

LMP (Literary Market Place). Medford, NJ: Information Today. Published annually. Also available at

http://www.literarymarketplace.com/lmp/us/index_us.asp.

Luey, Beth. Handbook for Academic Authors. 5th ed. New York: Cambridge University Press, 2009.

Rabiner, Susan, and Alfred Fortunato. Thinking Like Your Editor: How to Write Great Serious Nonfiction—and

Get It Published. New York: W. W. Norton, 2002.

Suzanne, Claudia. This Business of Books: A Complete Overview of the Industry from Concept through Sales. 4th

ed. Tustin, CA: WC Publishing, 2003.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

3: Dictionaries

List of Figures

The works listed here are a starting point for writers, editors, and others involved in publishing who

List of Tables

would like more information about topics covered in this manual. The list includes all the works cited

Index

in the text as further resources along with other useful references. Although some make

recommendations that diverge from those of this manual, they reflect the specific demands of

different disciplines and the evolving traditions of writing, editing, and publishing. As with all

reference sources, readers should carefully evaluate their suitability for a given purpose.

3.1 English Dictionaries

American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language. 4th ed. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 2000.

Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary. 11th ed. Springfield, MA: Merriam-Webster, 2003. Also available at

http://www.merriam-webster.com/.

New Oxford American Dictionary. 2nd ed. Edited by Erin McKean. New York: Oxford University Press, 2005.

Also available at http://www.oxfordamericandictionary.com/.

Oxford English Dictionary. 2nd ed. 20 vols. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1989. Also available at

http://www.oed.com/.

Random House Webster's College Dictionary with CD-ROM. New York: Random House Reference, 2005.

Roget's II: The New Thesaurus. 3rd ed. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1995.

Roget's 21st Century Thesaurus in Dictionary Form. 3rd ed. Edited by Barbara Ann Kipfer. New York: Delta

Trade Paperbacks, 2005.

Shorter Oxford English Dictionary. 6th ed. 2 vols. New York: Oxford University Press, 2007.

Webster's New World College Dictionary. 4th ed. Cleveland: Webster's New World, 2001.

Webster's Third New International Dictionary of the English Language, Unabridged. Springfield, MA: Merriam-

Webster, 1993. Also available at http://www.merriam-webster.com/.

3.2 Foreign-Language Dictionaries

ABC Chinese--English Comprehensive Dictionary. Edited by John DeFrancis. Honolulu: University of Hawaii

Press, 2003.

Cassell's Italian Dictionary. Compiled by Piero Rebora, Francis M. Guercio, and Arthur L. Hayward. New

York: John Wiley, 1994.

KenkyÅ«sha's New Japanese--English Dictionary. 5th ed. Tokyo: KenkyÅ«sha, 2003.

Larousse French--English, English--French Dictionary. New ed. Edited by Janice McNeillie. Paris: Larousse,

2007.

Minjung's Essence English--Korean Dictionary. 10th ed. Elizabeth, NJ: Hollym International Corp., 2008.

Oxford English--Arabic Dictionary of Current Usage. Edited by N. S. Doniach. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1972.

Oxford German Dictionary: German--English, English--German. 3rd ed. Edited by Werner Scholze-Stubenrecht,

J. B. Sykes, M. Clark, and O. Thyen. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008.

Oxford-Hachette French Dictionary. 4th ed. Edited by Marie-HÃ©lÃ¨ne CorrÃ©ard et al. Oxford: Oxford

University Press, 2007.

Oxford Latin Dictionary. Combined ed. Edited by P. G. W. Glare. New York: Oxford University Press, 1982.

Oxford-Paravia Italian Dictionary. 2nd ed. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2006.

Oxford Russian Dictionary. 4th ed. Edited by Marcus Wheeler, Boris Unbegaun, Paul Falla, and Della

Thompson. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2007.

Oxford Spanish Dictionary. 4th ed. Edited by Beatriz Galimberti Jarman and Roy Russell. Oxford: Oxford

University Press, 2008.

The University of Chicago Spanish Dictionary. 5th ed. Edited by David Pharies. Chicago: University of Chicago

Press, 2002.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

4: General Reference Works

List of Figures

The works listed here are a starting point for writers, editors, and others involved in publishing who

List of Tables

would like more information about topics covered in this manual. The list includes all the works cited

Index

in the text as further resources along with other useful references. Although some make

recommendations that diverge from those of this manual, they reflect the specific demands of

different disciplines and the evolving traditions of writing, editing, and publishing. As with all

reference sources, readers should carefully evaluate their suitability for a given purpose.

4.1 Biography

American Men and Women of Science. 25th ed. Edited by Katherine H. Nemeh. Farmington Hills, MI:

Thomson/Gale, 2008.

American National Biography. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000--. Updated quarterly.

http://www.anb.org/.

Burke's Peerage, Baronetage, and Knightage. 107th ed. Multiple vols. London: Burke's Peerage, 1826--.

Canadian Who's Who. Toronto: University of Toronto Press. Published annually, with semiannual

supplements.

Concise Dictionary of National Biography: From Earliest Times to 1985. 3 vols. Oxford: Oxford University Press,

1992.

Dictionary of American Biography. 11 vols. New York: Scribner's, 1995. Supplements.

Dictionary of Canadian Biography. 14 vols. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1966--. Supplements.

Directory of American Scholars. 10th ed. 6 vols. Detroit: Gale Group, 2002.

International Who's Who. London: Europa. Published annually.

Marquis Who's Who on the Web. New Providence, NJ: Marquis Who's Who. Continually updated.

http://www.marquiswhoswho.com/.

Merriam-Webster's Biographical Dictionary. Springfield, MA: Merriam-Webster, 1995.

Oxford Dictionary of National Biography. 60 vols. Prepared under various editors. New York: Oxford

University Press, 1885--2004. Also available at http://www.oxforddnb.com/.

Who's Who: An Annual Biographical Dictionary. New York: St. Martin's Press. Published annually.

Who's Who in America. Chicago: A. N. Marquis. Published biennially. See also Marquis Who's Who on the Web.

4.2 Geography

Cambridge World Gazetteer: A Geographical Dictionary. Edited by David Munro. New York: Cambridge

University Press, 1990.

Columbia Gazetteer of North America. Edited by Saul B. Cohen. New York: Columbia University Press, 2000.

Merriam-Webster's Geographical Dictionary. 3rd ed. Springfield, MA: Merriam-Webster, 1997.

Omni Gazetteer of the United States of America. Edited by Frank R. Abate. Detroit: Omnigraphics, 1991.

Oxford Atlas of the World. 16th ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 2009.

The Times Comprehensive Atlas of the World. 12th ed. London: Times Books, 2007.

The World Factbook. Washington, DC: Central Intelligence Agency. Continually updated.

https://www.cia.gov/library/publications/the-world-factbook/.

4.3 Encyclopedias

Britannica Concise Encyclopaedia. Rev. ed. Chicago: Encyclopaedia Britannica, 2006.

Canadian Encyclopedia. 2000 ed. Toronto: McClelland and Stewart, 1999. Also available at

http://www.thecanadianencyclopedia.com/.

Columbia Encyclopedia. 6th ed. New York: Columbia University Press, 2000.

Encyclopedia Americana. 30 vols. Danbury, CT: Scholastic Library, 2006.

The New Encyclopaedia Britannica. 15th ed. 32 vols. Chicago: Encyclopaedia Britannica, 2007. Also available at

http://www.britannica.com/.

Wikipedia: The Free Encyclopedia. San Francisco: Wikimedia Foundation. http://en.wikipedia.org/.

4.4 Almanacs and Yearbooks

Canadian Almanac and Directory. Toronto: Grey House. Published annually.

Encyclopedia Britannica, Inc. Time Almanac. New York: Time Home Entertainment. Published annually.

The Europa World of Learning. London: Routledge. Published annually. Also available at

http://www.worldoflearning.com/.

Europa World Year Book. London: Europa. Published annually. Also available at

http://www.europaworld.com/pub/.

New York Times Almanac. New York: Penguin Group. Published annually.

The Statesman's Yearbook. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan. Published annually. Also available at

http://www.statesmansyearbook.com/public/.

Whitaker's Almanack. London: Stationery Office. Published annually.

World Almanac and Book of Facts. New York: World Almanac Books. Published annually.

4.5 Guides to Books, Periodicals, and Other Sources

ABI/Inform Complete. Ann Arbor, MI: ProQuest Information and Learning. http://www.proquest.com/.

Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules. 2nd ed. Chicago: American Library Association; Ottawa: Canadian Library

Association; London: Chartered Institute of Library and Information Professionals, 2002. Loose-leaf

update, 2005.

Ashley, Lowell E. Cataloging Musical Moving Image Material: A Guide to the Bibliographical Control of

Videorecordings and Films of Musical Performances and Other Music-Related Moving Image Material.

Canton, MA: Music Library Association, 1996.

Australian Books in Print. Melbourne: D. W. Thorpe. Published annually.

Bibliographic Index. New York: H. W. Wilson. Published semiannually. Also available, as Bibliographic Index

Plus. at http://www.hwwilson.com/databases/biblio.htm.

Book Review Digest. New York: H. W. Wilson. Published monthly, except for February and July, with annual

cumulations. Also available, as Book Review Digest Plus. at

http://www.hwwilson.com/databases/brdig.htm.

Book Review Index. Detroit: Gale Research Company. Published monthly, with quarterly and annual

cumulation.

Books in Print. New York: R. R. Bowker. Published annually. Also available at http://www.booksinprint.com/.

Bowker's British Books in Print. New Providence, NJ: R. R. Bowker. Published annually. From 1988 to 2003

titled Whitaker's Books in Print: The Reference Catalogue of Current Literature; before 1988 titled British

Books in Print.

Canadian Books in Print. Toronto: University of Toronto Press. Published annually.

Catalog of U.S. Government Publications. Washington, DC: GPO Access. http://catalog.gpo.gov/.

Dissertation Abstracts International. Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfilms International. Published monthly

with annual cumulation.

Guide to Reference. 12th ed. Edited by Bob Kieft. Chicago: American Library Association, 2008.

http://www.guidetoreference.org/.

Guide to the Contents of the Public Record Office. 3 vols. London: Her Majesty's Stationery Office, 1963--1968.

Guide to the National Archives of the United States. Washington, DC: Archives, 1987. Also available at

http://www.archives.gov/.

Guide to U.S. Government Publications. Edited by Donna Batten. Formerly known as Andriot. Detroit: Gale

Research Company. Updated annually.

Humanities Index. New York: H. W. Wilson. Published quarterly with annual cumulation. Also available at

http://www.hwwilson.com/.

Index Islamicus. Leiden: Brill. Published quarterly with quinquennial cumulation. Also available at

http://www.indexislamicus.com/.

Library of Congress Subject Headings. Washington, DC: Library of Congress Cataloging Distribution Service.

Published annually. Also available at http://classweb.loc.gov/.

Livres disponibles [French books in print]. Paris: Cercle de la librairie, 1977--2004.

The New Walford Guide to Reference Resources. 9th ed. 3 vols. London: Facet, 2005--10.

New York Times Index. New York: New York Times Company. Annual cumulations.

PAIS International in Print. New York: Public Affairs Information Service. Published monthly, with every

fourth issue being cumulative.

Pemberton, John E., ed. The Bibliographic Control of Official Publications. New York: Pergamon, 1982.

Periodical Title Abbreviations. 17th ed. Vol. 1, by abbreviation. Vol. 2, by title. Detroit: Thomson/Gale, 2007.

PubMed. Bethesda, MD: US National Library of Medicine. http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/.

Reader's Guide to Periodical Literature. New York: H. W. Wilson. Published annually. Also available at

http://www.hwwilson.com/.

Rodgers, Frank. A Guide to British Government Publications. New York: H. W. Wilson, 1980.

Schmeckebier, Laurence F., and Roy B. Eastin. Government Publications and Their Use. 2nd ed. Washington,

DC: Brookings Institution, 1969.

Science Citation Index. Philadelphia: Institute for Scientific Information. Published bimonthly with annual

cumulations. Also available at http://scientific.thomson.com/.

Social Science Index. New York: H. W. Wilson. Published quarterly with annual cumulation. Also available at

http://www.hwwilson.com/.

UKOP: Catalogue of United Kingdom Official Publications. London: Chadwyck-Healey. Continually updated.

http://www.ukop.co.uk/.

Ulrich's International Periodicals Directory. New York: R. R. Bowker. Published annually. Supplemented

quarterly by Ulrich's Update. Also available at http://www.ulrichsweb.com/.

Verzeichnis Lieferbarer BÃ¼cher [German books in print]. Frankfurt am Main: Verlag der BuchhÃ¤ndler-

Vereinigung. Published annually. Also available at http://www.vlb.de/.

4.6 Quotations

Bartlett, John. Bartlett's Familiar Quotations: A Collection of Passages, Phrases, and Proverbs Traced to Their

Sources in Ancient and Modern Literature. 17th ed. Edited by Justin Kaplan. Boston: Little, Brown, 2002.

Crystal, David, and Hilary Crystal. Words on Words: Quotations about Language and Languages. Chicago:

University of Chicago Press, 2000.

The Oxford Dictionary of Quotations. 7th ed. Edited by Elizabeth Knowles. Oxford: Oxford University Press,

2009.

4.7 Abbreviations

Acronyms, Initialisms, and Abbreviations Dictionary: A Guide to Acronyms, Abbreviations, Contractions, Alphabetic

Symbols, and Similar Condensed Appellations. 39th ed. 4 vols. Edited by Bohdan Romanenchuk. Detroit:

Thomson/Gale, 2008.

Davis, Neil M. Medical Abbreviations: 30,000 Conveniences at the Expense of Communication and Safety. 14th ed.

Warminster, PA: Neil M. Davis Associates, 2009.

Department of Defense Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms: Includes US Acronyms and Abbreviations and

NATO Terms (English Only). Washington, DC: Joint Chiefs of Staff, 1998. Amended version available at

http://www.dtic.mil/doctrine/dod_dictionary/.

Jablonski, Stanley. Jablonski's Dictionary of Medical Acronyms and Abbreviations. 6th ed. Philadelphia: Saunders,

2008.

Stahl, Dean, and Karen Kerchelich. Abbreviations Dictionary. 10th ed. Originated by Ralph De Sola. Boca

Raton, FL: CRC Press, 2001.

Webster's Guide to Abbreviations. Springfield, MA: Merriam-Webster, 1985.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Table

of Contents

5: Miscellaneous Works Cited in Text

List of Figures

The works listed here are a starting point for writers, editors, and others involved in publishing who

List of Tables

would like more information about topics covered in this manual. The list includes all the works cited

Index

in the text as further resources along with other useful references. Although some make

recommendations that diverge from those of this manual, they reflect the specific demands of

different disciplines and the evolving traditions of writing, editing, and publishing. As with all

reference sources, readers should carefully evaluate their suitability for a given purpose.

ALA-LC Romanization Tables: Transliteration Schemes for Non-Roman Scripts. Compiled and edited by Randall

K. Barry. Washington, DC: Library of Congress, 1997. Also available at

http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/roman.html.

American Naturalist. Journal published monthly by the University of Chicago Press for the American Society

of Naturalists. http://www.journals.uchicago.edu/toc/an/current.

Baker-Shenk, Charlotte, and Dennis Cokely. American Sign Language: A Teacher's Resource Text on Grammar

and Culture. Washington, DC: Gallaudet University Press, 1991.

BIOSIS Serial Sources. Philadelphia: BIOSIS. Published annually through 2005. Current titles available at

http://scientific.thomson.com/.

Daniels, Peter T., and William Bright, eds. The World's Writing Systems. New York: Oxford University Press,

1996.

Duden: Die deutsche Rechtschreibung. 24th ed. Vol. 1. Mannheim: Dudenverlag, 2006.

French Review. Journal published bimonthly by the American Association of Teachers of French.

Gall, Gerald L., F. Pearl Eliadis, and France Allard. The Canadian Legal System. 5th ed. Scarborough, ON:

Carswell, 2004.

Grevisse, Maurice. Le bon usage: Grammaire française. 14th ed. Edited by André Goosse. Paris: Duculot, 2008.

History of Religions. Journal published quarterly by the University of Chicago Press.

http://www.journals.uchicago.edu/toc/hr/current.

Horticulture. Magazine published ten times a year by F+W Publications.

HUGO Gene Nomenclature Database. http://www.genenames.org/.

International Code of Botanical Nomenclature (Vienna Code). Prepared and edited by John McNeill et al. Regnum

vegetabile 146. Königstein, Germany: Koeltz, 2006. Also available at http://ibot.sav.sk/icbn/main.htm.

International Code of Zoological Nomenclature. 4th ed. London: International Trust for Zoological

Nomenclature, 1999. Also available at http://www.iczn.org/iczn/index.jsp.

International Journal of Middle East Studies. Journal published quarterly by Cambridge University Press for the

Middle East Studies Association of North America. Also available at

http://www.jstor.org/journals/00207438.html.

MacEllven, Douglass T., Michael J. McGuire, Neil A. Campbell, and John N. Davis. Legal Research Handbook.

5th ed. Markham, ON: LexisNexis Butterworths, 2003.

Moliner, María. Diccionario de uso del español. 3rd ed. Madrid: Gredos, 2007.

Mouse Genome Database. Mouse Genome Informatics. http://www.informatics.jax.org/.

The New Grove Dictionary of Music and Musicians. 2nd ed. 29 vols. Edited by Stanley Sadie. New York: Grove,

2001. Also available at http://www.oxfordmusiconline.com/.

The Oxford Classical Dictionary. 3rd ed. rev. Edited by Simon Hornblower and Anthony Spawforth. Oxford:

Oxford University Press, 2003.

Physical Review Letters. Published semimonthly by the American Physical Society. http://prl.aps.org/.

PMLA. Journal published bimonthly by the Modern Language Association of America.

http://www.mla.org/pmla.

Pullum, Geoffrey K., and William A. Ladusaw. Phonetic Symbol Guide. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of

Chicago Press, 1996.

Raymond, Eric S. The New Hacker's Dictionary. 3rd ed. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1996.

Real Academia Española. Ortografía de la lengua española. Madrid: Espasa, 1999. Also available at

http://www.rae.es/.

Romanic Review. Journal published quarterly by the Columbia University Department of Romance

Languages.

Thorin, Suzanne E., and Carole Franklin Vidali. The Acquisition and Cataloging of Music and Sound Recordings:

A Glossary. Canton, MA: Music Library Association, 1984.

Unicode Collation Algorithm. By Mark Davis and Ken Whistler. Unicode Technical Standard no. 10. Unicode

Consortium, 2008. http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr10/tr10-18.html.

USP Dictionary of USAN and International Drug Names. Rockville, MD: US Pharmacopeial Convention.

Revised annually. Available at http://www.usp.org/products/dictionary/.

Valli, Clayton, Ceil Lucas, and Kristin J. Mulrooney. Linguistics of American Sign Language: An Introduction.

4th ed. Washington, DC: Gallaudet University Press, 2005.

Wertheim, Eric. The Naval Institute Guide to Combat Fleets of the World: Their Ships, Aircraft, and Systems. 15th

ed. Annapolis, MD: Naval Institute Press, 2007.

Zurick, Timothy. Army Dictionary and Desk Reference. 3rd ed. Mechanicsburg, PA: Stackpole Books, 2004.

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

A

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

a and an

abbreviations and, 7.44, 10.9

acronyms and, 10.9

appropriate use of, 5.72, 5.220, 7.44

coordinate nouns and, 5.73

disregarded in alphabetizing, 14.67, 16.51--52, 16.56, 16.68, 16.88

as indefinite articles, 5.68, 5.70--71

meaning affected by, 5.73--74, 5.76

in proper names, 16.88

in titles, 14.67, 16.51--52, 16.56

when to drop from titles in running text, 8.167--68

which to use, a vs. an, 5.72

See also articles (definite and indefinite)

AAs (author's alterations), 2.67, 2.131--32, p. 891

abbreviations, general, 10.1

a, an, or the, which to use, 7.44, 10.9

alphabetizing of, 1.43, 14.55, 16.64, 16.93, fig. 1.8, fig. 14.7

chart labels, 3.43--44

commas with: academic and professional designations, 10.4, 10.16, 10.20--21; addresses, mailing, 6.46, 10.28, 10.30; e.g. and i.e. , 5.220; etc. and et al. , 6.20; Inc. , Ltd. , and such, 6.48; Jr. , Sr. , and such, 6.47

compound, 6.80

definitions and uses, 10.2--3

after first occurrence of spelled-out version, 1.43, 10.24

frequently cited works, 13.65, 14.54--55, fig. 14.7

indexing of: acronyms, 16.46, 16.49, 16.64; periodical titles, 16.49

journal titles, 14.179, 15.13, 15.44, 16.49

lists of: alphabetizing, 1.43, 14.55, 16.64, fig. 1.8, fig. 14.7; cross-checking, 2.29; format and placement, 1.43, 2.21, fig. 1.8; for frequently cited works, 13.65, 14.54--55, fig. 14.7

numbers with, 9.16--17

plurals of, 7.14

publication details, 1.21

punctuation with: ampersands, 6.21, 10.10; commas ( see under commas with, above); hyphens vs. en dashes for compound, 6.80; periods with or not, 10.4; slashes, 6.107; surrounding text and, 6.117

short title compared with, 14.54

spelled out: capitals vs. lowercase, 10.6; guidance on, 10.3; marking manuscript for, 2.90; marking proofs for, 2.126

typographic considerations: capitals vs. lowercase, 10.6; italic vs. roman type, 10.7; line breaks, 7.40; small vs. full-size capitals,

10.8, 10.24, 10.39, 10.42; space or no space, 10.5

word division, 7.40

See also acronyms; contractions; initialisms

abbreviations, specific

Bible: books, Apocrypha, 10.49; books, New Testament, 10.50; books, Old Testament, 10.48; books, citing in text and notes, 10.46;

resources on, 10.45; sections and versions of, 10.51; short forms, 10.47

binary systems, 9.11

business and commerce, 10.22--23, 10.72

in documentation of: classical references, 14.258--59, 14.264, 14.266; dictionary and encyclopedia entries, 14.247--48; editor, translator, and such, 15.6, 15.15; English poems and plays (short forms), 14.268; frequently cited works, 13.65, 14.54--55, fig.

14.7; journal titles, 14.179, 15.13, 15.44; legal-style citations ( see below); organization names, 15.36; publishers' names,

14.139--40

file formats (e.g., HTTP), 7.76

genus, subspecies, and such, 8.120--23

geographical terms: avenue, street, and such, 10.34; Canadian provinces and territories, 10.29; city plus state, comma with, 10.30;

compass points, 10.35--36; country names, 10.32; latitude and longitude, 10.37; place-names with Fort, Saint, and such,

10.31; US, when to use, 10.33; US states and territories, 10.4, 10.28

legal-style citations, 14.286; cases and court decisions, 14.288--91, 14.306; constitutions, 14.292

mathematical expressions, 12.17, 12.63, table 12.2

names and titles: academic and professional designations, 10.4, 10.16, 10.20--21; agencies and organizations, 10.24--25; author names, 1.18; civil titles, 10.13--14; firms and companies, 10.22--23; given names, 10.11; initials, 10.12; military, 10.15; Rev.

and Hon. , 10.18; Saint, St. , and such, 10.26--27, 10.31, 11.29, 16.75, 16.90, 16.93; social, 10.16--17

page, volume, and such, 14.157

Rev. and Hon. , 10.18

scholarly words, 10.43

scientific and technical: astronomical and astrophysical, 10.64--65; chemical elements, 10.66; latitude and longitude, 10.37;

miscellaneous technical, list of, 10.52; periods omitted, 10.4; resources, 10.1; SI units, 10.52, 10.54--62; statistics, 10.53; US

measurements, 10.67--71

states and territories (US), 10.4, 10.28

stub column of tables, 3.60

time designations: a.m. and p.m. , 9.38--40, 10.42; chronology systems, 9.35, 9.63, 10.39; days of the week, 10.41; months, 10.40;

numerical, 9.31, 9.34, 9.36, 9.38--41; time of day, 10.42; units (seconds, minutes, etc.), 10.71

time zones, 8.89, 10.42

See also postal codes; and under specific abbreviations (e.g., Jr. ["Junior"])

abridgements

copyright issues, 4.14, 4.69

editing materials from, 2.58

abstractions, 8.36, 8.93

abstracts

copyright issues and, 4.60

description, 1.88, 1.90

documentation of, 14.197

hyperlinks to, 1.83, fig. 1.11

submitted with manuscript, 2.3

academic concerns

course names, 8.85

degrees and affiliations: abbreviations, 10.4, 10.16, 10.20--21; of author, 1.49, 1.88, 1.94; capitalization, 8.28, 10.20--21; in contributors' list, 1.62, fig. 1.10; indexing of, 16.40; omitted in documentation of works, 14.72; use of, 1.18, 1.20

honors and awards, 8.30, 8.82

institutions and departments: capitalization, 8.67, 8.84; in documentation of dissertations, theses, lectures, and such, 14.224,

14.226; place-names with, 6.46, 6.81; special imprints of, 14.146 ( see also institutions; universities)

letter grades, 7.60

student status terms, 8.28

subjects and disciplines: authorities in specific, 8.118; specific course names, 8.85; spellings peculiar to, 7.2; treatment of names,

8.84--85

titles and offices, 8.27, 8.29

See also lectures and lecture series; universities

accents. See diacritical marks; special characters

access dates

online journal articles, 14.7, 14.185

online legal and public documents, 14.282

online reference works, 14.248

undated online documents, 15.51

acknowledgments

on copyright page, 1.19, 1.30--31, fig. 1.1, figs. 1.3--4

of data sources, 3.75

of grants and subventions, 1.19, 1.31, 1.40, fig. 1.1

illustration credits in, 3.29

in journals, 1.85, 1.88

material appropriate for, 1.42

and indexing, 16.109

of permissions, 4.98--99

in preface, 1.40

references to, 8.177

separate section for, 1.41

in table notes, 3.75

in unnumbered notes, 14.50

acronyms

a, an, or the, which to use, 7.44, 10.9

capitalization of, 10.6

definition and use, 10.2, 10.14

disease and medical terms, 8.143

indexing of, 16.46, 16.49, 16.64

journal titles, 14.179, 15.13, 15.44, 16.49

small vs. full-size capitals for, 10.8, 10.24

space omitted in, 10.5

See also abbreviations; initialisms

active voice, 5.18, 5.104, 5.115, 5.188

acts and treaties

documentation of, 14.287, 14.302

treatment in text, 8.65, 8.79--80

See also legal documents; public documents

AD ( anno Domini), and such, 9.35, 9.63, 10.39

additions and insertions

marking manuscript for, 2.91--92

marking proofs for, 2.122, 2.124, fig. 2.6

stetting or reversal of, 2.127

address, spoken. See dialogue; direct address; speech; speeches

addresses, e-mail, 14.11

hyperlinks to, 1.114

hyphenation issues, 6.77

line breaks in, 7.42

punctuation of, 6.8

See also addresses, mailing; URLs (uniform resource locators)

addresses, mailing

abbreviations: avenue, street, and such, 10.34; city plus state, comma with, 10.30; compass points, 10.35; provinces and territories (Canada), 10.29; states and territories (US), 10.28

compass points in, 10.35

numbers in, 9.51--53

publishers', 1.18--19, 1.21

treatment in text, 6.46, 10.28, 10.30

See also addresses, e-mail; compass points and directions; geographical terminology

adjectives, 5.66--94

adverbs compared with, 5.156

articles as limiting adjectives: articles defined, 5.68; a vs. an, 5.72; coordinate nouns with, 5.73; definite, 5.69, 5.73; indefinite,

5.70--71; meaning affected by, 5.73--74, 5.76; omitted, 5.76; as pronoun substitute, 5.77; zero (implicit), 5.75

avoiding biases in uses, 5.230

coinage of, 8.59

compound, 6.80

dates as, 5.82

definitions, 5.66

degrees: comparative, 5.84, 5.86; equal and unequal comparisons, 5.87; positive or absolute, 5.83; superlative, 5.85--86; uncomparable, 5.88

derivations: from legislative bodies, 8.61; from place-names (e.g., Californian), 5.67, 8.44; from proper names, 8.59--60

ethnic and national group names with, 8.37

functional variations of, 5.92--94

idiomatic uses, 5.75

infinitives as, 5.105

as interjections, 5.210

irregular, 5.86

nouns as/as nouns, 5.22, 5.25, 5.92, 5.226, 7.25

participles and participial phrases as, 5.89, 5.109

position: basic rules, 5.78; dates and, 5.82; meaning affected by, 5.74, 5.76; when modifying pronoun, 5.80; after possessive pronoun, 5.79; predicate, 5.78, 5.81

predicate, 5.78, 5.81

prepositional phrase as, 5.173, 5.175

pronominal, 5.65

pronouns and, 5.29, 5.47, 5.65, 5.77, 5.79--80

proper, 5.67

punctuation: commas, 5.90, 6.33--34; dates in text, 5.82; hyphenation, 5.91, 6.80

repeated, 6.34

sex-specific labels as, 5.226

special types: coordinate, 5.90, 6.33; participial, 5.89, 5.109; phrasal (compound modifier), 5.78, 5.91, 7.81

as verbs, 5.93

administrative bodies, 8.62, 11.8. See also business and commerce; governmental entities; institutions; organizations

adverbs, 5.153--68

adjectives compared with, 5.156

as conjunctions, 5.202

definition, 5.153

degrees: comparative, 5.160; intensifiers, 5.164; irregular, 5.162; positive, 5.159; superlative, 5.161; uncomparable, 5.163

flat, 5.157

formation of, 5.154--55

infinitives as, 5.105

as interjections, 5.210

introductory phrases, 6.36

-ly ending, 5.91, 5.154, 5.160--61, 5.167, 7.82

nouns as, 5.24--25, 5.154

participial phrases as, 5.109

phrasal and compound, 5.158, 6.36, 7.82

position: intransitive verbs modified by, 5.166; linking verbs and, 5.167; meaning affected by, 5.165; placement considerations,

5.165; in verb phrases, 5.168

prepositional phrases: as, 5.173, 5.175; compared with, 5.100, 5.156, 5.180; replaced by, 5.186

punctuation with, 6.25, 6.36, 6.55

sentences beginning with, 5.207

simple, 5.157

suffixes, 5.154--55

transitional ( however, therefore, and such), 5.207, 6.25, 6.55

verb phrases modified by, 5.102

See also infinitives; participles and participial phrases

advertisements in journals, 1.72, 1.78, 1.82

African languages, 11.14--15. See also Arabic language

afterwords, 1.26, 1.52, 14.91, 14.116

agents, literary, 4.18

age terms, hyphenation guide, 7.85

ah, 6.37

AH ( anno Hegirae), and such, 9.35, 9.63, 10.39

aircraft, 8.2, 8.115--16. See also vehicles and vessels

a.k.a. , 10.72

Albanian language, 11.16--17

alignment

checking facing pages for, 2.114

marking proofs for, 2.124

of subscripts and superscripts, 12.21--22, 12.38

tables: cells, 3.68--72, figs. 3.19--21; decimal points, 3.70, 3.84, fig. 3.13, figs. 3.15--16, fig. 3.20

See also lists; margins; tables

all rights reserved, 1.19, 1.22, 4.40, figs. 1.1--4

alphabetizing, 16.56, 16.62--67

abbreviations and abbreviations lists, 1.43, 14.55, 16.64, 16.93, fig. 1.8, fig. 14.7

accented letters (diacritical marks and special characters), 16.29, 16.67

bibliographies, 2.60, 14.57, 14.60--62, 14.64--65, 14.67, fig. 14.8

business names, 16.88--89

compound words, 16.59--60, 16.72, 16.84

computerized sorting options, 16.5, 16.57, 16.104, 16.123

cross-references, 16.17, 16.20

dates, 16.65

elements to disregard in, 14.67, 16.48, 16.51--52, 16.56, 16.68, 16.88, 16.91

foreign words, 16.67

glossaries, 1.60

indexes: main headings, 16.56; subentries, 16.68

letter-by-letter: basics of, 16.58--59; bibliographies, example of, 14.60; word-by-word compared, 16.61, 16.123

names: abbreviations and acronyms, 16.64; basic rules, 16.71--76; compound, 16.72; foreign, 16.67, 16.76--87; initials vs. spelled-out, 16.63, 16.79; list of contributors, 1.62, fig. 1.10; Mac or Mc with, 16.73; monarchs, popes, and such, 16.37; nobility, titles, and such, 16.38, 16.66; numerals in (e.g., Henry III), 16.66; O' with, 16.74; with particles, 16.71, 16.84; personal, as corporate names, 16.89; Saint, St. , and such, 16.75, 16.93; same, of person, place, and thing, 16.62

names, foreign personal, 16.76--87; Arabic, 16.76; Asian, generally, 16.87; Burmese, 16.77; Chinese, 16.78; Hungarian, 16.79;

Indian, 16.80; Indonesian, 16.81; Japanese, 16.82; Portuguese, 16.83; Spanish, 16.84; Thai, 16.85; Vietnamese, 16.86

numerals, 16.65--66

organization names, 16.46, 16.88--89

place-names, 16.90--93

punctuation and, 16.59--61

reference lists, 2.60, 14.61--62, 15.11, fig. 15.1

titles of nobility and such, 16.66

titles of works, 16.48--49, 16.51--52, 16.56

word-by-word: basics of, 16.58, 16.60; bibliographies, example of, 14.60; letter-by-letter compared, 16.61, 16.123

alphabets

character sets for Latin, 11.12, table 11.1

character sets for non-Latin, 11.92, 11.110, tables 11.2--11.4

dictionary tables of, 11.96, 11.111

in mathematical expressions, 12.12

modernizing archaic letters, 13.7

proofreading copy in non-Latin, 11.92

See also Arabic language; Cyrillic alphabet; Greek language; Hebrew language; International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA);

Latin alphabet; letters (alphabet); transliteration; Unicode standard; and names of other languages

alterations

author's (AAs), 2.67, 2.131--32, p. 891

definition, p. 891

designer's (DAs), 2.131, p. 894

editor's (EAs), 2.131--32, p. 894

printer's errors (PEs) and, 2.131, p. 900

a.m. and p.m. , 9.38--40, 10.42

American Indians, 7.9, 8.37

American Medical Association (AMA), 10.7, 14.3, 14.76

American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 1.34, A.44

American Psychological Association (APA), 3.46, 3.78, 14.3

American Sign Language (ASL), 11.144--54

Deaf and deaf, 8.42

fingerspelling in, 6.77, 11.149

resources on, 11.146

signed languages, defined, 11.144

signs: components of, 11.145; compound, 11.148; glosses of, 11.147--54; handshapes, 11.151; lexicalized, 11.150; nonmanual,

11.154; pronouns, possessives, and reference, 11.153

transcriptions and writing of, 11.146--54

American Society for Indexing (ASI), 16.104

ampersands

changed to and, 8.163

in company names, 10.23

initialisms with, 10.10

in Old and Middle English, 11.143

in publishers' names, 14.141

serial comma omitted before, 6.21

spacing with, 10.10

in URLs and e-mail addresses, 7.42

See alsoand; conjunctions

and

ampersand changed to, 8.163

appropriate use of, 5.220

between with, 6.78, 9.59

both with, 5.195, 5.214

coordinate adjectives separated by, 5.90

in generic cross-references of indexes, 16.23

or with, 5.220

pronoun and antecedent with, 5.32--34

in publisher's name, 14.141

punctuation with, 6.18, 6.28--29

sentences beginning with, 5.206

serial commas and, 6.18--19

slash instead of, 6.104

two or more authors (or editors) in documentation, 14.76

See also ampersands; conjunctions

and if, 6.32

and/or, 5.220

and other stories, 14.100

and so forth or and the like, 6.20, 11.35

angle brackets

in generic markup, 2.15, 2.27, 2.78

for less than and more than, 3.81

in mathematical expressions, 6.102, 12.26, 12.28, 12.31, 12.55, 12.58

with URLs, 6.8, 14.11

in XML, 6.102, fig. A.2

See also brackets

animals

domestic breeds, 8.128

scientific names: authorities on, 8.118; author names in, 8.123; divisions higher than genus, 8.125; English derivatives from taxonomic system, 8.126; genus, species, and subspecies, 8.119--21; unspecified species and varieties, 8.122

vernacular names, 8.127--29

See also scientific and technical terminology

animations, 1.100, 2.4. See also audiovisual materials

Annals of the Congress of the United States, 14.299

annotated bibliographies, 14.59, fig. 14.10

annotations

as copyrightable, 4.5

excessive, 2.59, 14.51--55

See also documentation; notes

announcements in journals, 1.83, 1.85, 1.93

anonymity of research subjects, 13.47

anonymous works

abbreviation of anonymous, 10.43

copyright of, 4.24

documentation of: known authorship, 14.80, 15.33; unattributed interviews, 14.220; unknown authorship, 14.79, 15.32

use of anonymous, 14.79

ANSI (American National Standards Institute), 1.34

anthologies

author-and-title index of, 16.6

as collective works, 4.8

copyright issues and, 4.55, 4.60, 4.90

editorial additions bracketed in, 6.97

material copyrightable in, 4.5

permissions and fees for, 4.101

unnumbered source notes in, 3.31, 14.49

See also collected works; compilations; derivative works; previously published materials

aphorisms. See figures of speech; maxims

Apocrypha

abbreviations of books, 10.49

capitalization, 8.105

See also Bible

apostrophes, 6.113--15

in foreign languages: African languages, 11.15; Chinese, 11.104; French, 11.38; German, 11.43; Hebrew, 11.113; Italian, 11.53,

11.57--58; Japanese, 11.107

and manuscript cleanup, 2.77

marking on manuscript, 2.91

marking on proofs, 2.129

other punctuation with: generally, 6.115; periods or commas, 6.115; single closing quotation mark, 6.9

in plurals: abbreviations, 7.14; letters as letters, 7.14, 7.59--61; noun coinages, 7.13; proper nouns, 7.8; words in quotation marks,

7.12

in possessives: basic use, 5.50; compounds, 7.23; for . . . sake expressions, 7.20; general rule, 7.15; genitive case, 7.24; gerunds,

7.26; italicized or quoted words, 7.28; nouns, proper, 7.16--18; nouns ending in eez sound, 7.18; nouns plural in form, singular in meaning, 7.19; nouns used attributively, 7.25; of, 7.27; two nouns as unit, 7.22; words ending in unpronounced s,

7.17

"smart," 6.114, 7.29

uses, other, 6.113; abbreviated decades (e.g., '70s), 9.34; abbreviated years, 9.31; contractions, 7.29; hamza vs., 11.97;

inappropriate, 5.47, 5.50, 6.114, 7.60; nouns, genitive, 5.12, 5.19--20

appendixes

chronologies as, 1.58, fig. 1.9

content and format of, 1.57

figures or illustrations in, numbering of, 3.11

indexing of, 16.109

multiple, 1.47

note materials moved to, 14.51

numbering of, 8.178

online alternative to, 1.57

part title for, 1.47

references to, 8.177

running heads for, 1.13

web-based publications, 1.117

as work made for hire, 4.10

appositives, 5.21, 6.23, 6.51

Arabic language, 11.96--101

capitalization, 11.100

definite article, al, 11.99

hamza and Ê¿ayn, 11.97, 11.101, 11.112, table 11.2

names: alphabetizing, 16.76; treatment, 8.14

spelling, 11.98

transliteration, 11.99; resources on, 11.96

word division, 11.101

arabic numerals

building and apartment numbers, 9.53

Chicago's preference for, 9.66

columns in tables, 3.54

definition, p. 891

documentation and references: chapters, figures, and such, 8.178, 14.154; classical Greek and Latin references, 14.256--66; parts of poems and plays, 8.182, 14.267--68; ranges (inclusive), 9.60--61, 14.155; volume numbers of multivolume works, 14.121--27;

when to use, 14.154

highways and streets, 9.51--52

illustrations, 3.12, fig. 3.7

line breaks and, 7.39

manuscript page numbers, 1.4, 1.7, 1.45--46, 2.35

numbered divisions in publications and documents, 9.27--29

roman numerals compared with, table 9.1

spelled out: alternative rule, 9.3; beginning a sentence, 9.5; Chicago's general rule, 9.2; consistency, readability, and flexibility,

9.7; direct discourse, 13.42; fractions, 9.14--15; hundreds, thousands, and hundred thousands (round numbers), 9.4; hyphens with, 7.85; marking manuscript for, 2.90; marking proofs for, 2.126; ordinals, 9.6; physical quantities, 9.13; to vs. en dash with, 9.59

See also inclusive (or continuing) numbers; numbers; roman numerals

archaeology, 7.2, 9.35

archival practices, 1.107, 2.86--87. See also backup copies

archives

electronic sources, 14.282

unpublished government documents, 14.232, 14.304, 14.308

See also legal documents; legal-style citations; letters (correspondence); manuscript collections; public documents;

unpublished and informally published materials

articles (definite and indefinite)

a vs. an, 5.72

abbreviations and, 7.44, 10.9

acronyms and, 7.44, 10.9

in alphabetizing, disregarded, 14.67, 16.48, 16.51--52, 16.56, 16.68, 16.88, 16.91

appropriate use of, 5.72, 5.220, 7.44

in Arabic, 11.99, 16.76

in blog titles, 8.187

celestial bodies and, 8.137

coordinate nouns with, 5.73

definite, 5.69, 5.71, 5.73, 16.91--92

definition, 5.68

dropping of, 5.76, 8.167--68, 14.28, 14.179, 14.210

earth with, 8.139

in foreign names for places and structures, 8.58

gender indicated by, 5.14

implicit, 5.75

indefinite, 5.70--71

indexing: articles disregarded, 16.48, 16.51--52, 16.56, 16.68, 16.88, 16.91; first lines, 16.144; organization and business names,

16.88; personal and foreign names, 16.76, 16.91--92; place-names, 16.91--92; in subentries, 16.51, 16.68, 16.129; titles of newspapers and periodicals, 16.48--49; titles of works, 16.51--52, 16.56

as limiting adjectives: articles defined, 5.68; a vs. an, 5.72; coordinate nouns with, 5.73; definite, 5.69, 5.73; indefinite, 5.70--71;

indefinite, in specific reference, 5.71; meaning affected by, 5.74, 5.76; omitted, 5.76; as pronoun substitute, 5.77; zero (implicit), 5.75

meaning affected by, 5.73--74, 5.76

names with: articles disregarded in alphabetizing, 16.88; capitalized or not, 8.67, 8.69; publisher's, in documentation, 14.140;

titles and the, 8.20, 8.29, 8.35, 10.18

newspaper and periodical titles beginning with, 8.168, 14.179, 14.210, 16.48--49

organization and business names with, 8.67, 16.88

place-names with, 8.58, 16.91--92

preceding mass noun followed by prepositional phrase, 5.9

as pronoun substitute, 5.77

in titles in running text, 8.167--68

zero (implicit), 5.75

See alsoa and an; the

articles (journal)

abstracts of, 1.88, 1.90

copyright lines in, 1.97

corrections to, 1.105

endnotes in, 14.38, 14.41

first-page information, 1.88, 1.97, 1.98

illustrations and tables in, 1.99--100

"in press" versions, 1.73

making changes to after submission, 2.5

note referring to entire, 1.48, 14.22

photocopying of, 1.97, 4.88--91

publishing agreement for, 4.55--58, fig. 4.2

subheads in, 1.91

substantive editing of, 2.47--48

table of contents in, 1.83

titles: editing of, 2.55; note reference numbers and, 14.22; proofreading of, 2.110, 2.130; quotation marks for, 8.161, 8.175

unique identifiers for, 1.74

See also abstracts; articles, documentation of; articles, electronic; chapters; journals; offprints

articles, documentation of, 14.171--72

abstracts, 14.197

access dates, 14.7, 14.185

authors' names, 14.175, 15.12, 15.43

authors' names, initials, 15.43

basic examples and variations, 14.18, 15.9

electronic enhancements to articles, 14.198

foreign-language considerations, 14.179, 14.193

forthcoming articles, 14.182

installments of (several parts), 14.189

newspaper and magazine articles, 15.47

no volume number, or date only, 14.181

page numbers, 14.183, 14.186

papers presented at meetings, 14.226

place of publication, 14.191

preprints, 14.229

previously published articles, 14.190

special issues, 14.187

supplements, 14.188

titles of articles, 14.176--78; question marks and exclamation points in, 14.178; sentence-style capitalization, when to use, 15.45;

shortened citations, 14.25, 14.28, 14.196; translated titles, 14.192, 14.194

URLs and DOIs, 1.74, 14.18, 14.184, 14.198, 15.9

volume, issue, and date, 14.180, 14.186, 15.46

See also journals: titles

articles, electronic

abstracts of, 1.83

copyright lines, 1.97

forthcoming, 14.182

home pages for, 1.79, 1.82

hyperlinks within, 1.83, 1.89

maintaining context of, 1.80

options for publishing, A.39

page-numbering, 1.76

preprints, 1.73, 1.106, 14.229

in printed journal's table of contents, 1.83

publication history of, 1.98

table of contents for, 1.83, fig. 1.11

as version of record, 1.105

web-based publication of, 1.111

See also articles (journal); articles, documentation of; journals, electronic; preprints

art styles and movements, 8.78. See also cultural movements and styles

artwork

author's inventory of, 3.17

commissioned, 3.32

continuous-tone, 3.3, figs. 3.1--2

copyright issues, 4.15, 4.94

covers and jackets: credit lines, 1.70, 1.78; fair use of, 4.83; permissions, 4.94--97

creators' names, indexing of, 16.50

credit lines for, 1.70, 1.78, 3.32

cropping, scaling, and shading, 3.19

definition, p. 891

dimensions of original, noted, 3.27

fair use of, 4.83

identification for publisher, 3.16

permissions for, 4.94--97

prints vs. scans, 2.24

professionally created scans, 3.15

publisher's check and inventory of, 3.18

redrawn by publisher, 3.20

submission to publisher, 3.3--4, 3.15--17

titles of: cartoons, 8.194; exhibition catalogs, 8.195, 14.250; indexing, 16.50; paintings, statues, and such, 8.193

use of term, 3.1

in XML workflow, fig. A.5

See also captions; illustrations

as, as if, 5.181, 5.201

ascender, defined, p. 891

ASCII file (plain-text file), defined, p. 899

Asian names

Burmese, 16.77

Chinese, 8.15, 11.105, 11.108, 16.78

Indian, 16.80

Indonesian, 8.17, 16.81

Japanese, 8.16, 11.107--8, 16.82

other, 8.17, 16.87

Thai, 16.85

Vietnamese, 16.86

See also South Asian languages

ASL. See American Sign Language (ASL)

as--so, so--as, 5.195, 5.214

associations. See organizations

asterisks

for footnotes, 14.20, 14.44, 14.46, fig. 14.4

in legal-style citations, 14.288

in tables, 3.77--78, fig. 3.22

for text breaks, 1.56, 2.8

astronomical and astrophysical terminology

abbreviations in, 10.64--65

celestial bodies, 8.137--41, 10.64

descriptive terms, 8.141

earth, 8.139

Myr and Gyr, 9.10

resources on, 8.136, 10.63

sun and moon, 8.140

See also scientific and technical terminology; metric system

as well as, 5.133, 5.201, 6.18

attribution

fair-use doctrine and, 4.69, 4.71, 4.85, 4.98--99

moral right of, 4.15

See also credits and credit lines; documentation; permissions

audiobooks, 14.277. See also audiovisual materials; sound recordings

audiovisual materials

abbreviations for terms (e.g., DVD and MIDI), 10.52

animations, 1.100, 2.4

archival practices for, 1.107

contributions to, as work made for hire, 4.10

discographies, 14.275, fig. 14.12

documentation of: author-date references, 15.53; basic elements to include, 14.274; books downloaded, 14.166; CD-ROMS, 14.166,

14.168; discographies, 14.275, fig. 14.12; DVDs and videocassettes, 14.279; electronic enhancements, 14.198; literary and lecture recordings and such, 14.277; musical recordings, 14.276; online multimedia, 14.280; podcasts, 8.187, 14.221; radio,

8.185, 14.221; slides and filmstrips, 14.278; sound recordings, 14.276--77; video recordings, 14.278--80

electronic journals that include, 1.100

subdivision of copyright for, 4.33

subsidiary rights for, 4.60

titles of, 8.192

video clips and files, 1.100, 1.107, 2.4

See also movies and film; musical works; sound recordings; television and television programs

author-and-title index, 16.6

author-date reference system

agreement of text citations and reference lists, 15.20

audiovisual materials, 15.53

authors' names: anonymous works, 15.32--33; different authors with same last name, 15.21; editor in place of author, 15.6, 15.15,

15.18, 15.35; examples and variations, 15.9; more than three authors, in-text citations, 15.28; more than three authors, reference list, 15.9, 15.12; organizations as, 15.36; proper form of name to use, 15.12, 15.43; pseudonyms, 15.34; single vs.

several, order for, 15.16; 3-em dash for, 15.17--19

author's responsibility for cross-checking, 2.29, 15.20

basic format, 15.1, 15.5, fig. 15.1; authors' names ( see above); examples and variations, 15.9; in-text citation structure, 15.7,

15.21; page numbers and locators, 15.8; reference list entry structure, 15.6, 15.21

cross-references, 15.37

disciplines that use, 14.2

edition, volume, or collection, 15.38--40

electronic sources, 15.4; access dates, 15.51; locators for, 15.8

examples and variations, 15.9

legal and public documents, 15.54--55

legal-style citations, 14.283

multiauthor books, 15.10

notes and bibliography entries as models for, 14.1--13, 15.1, 15.3

notes used with, 14.45, 15.30, fig. 15.2

periodicals: abbreviated journal titles, 15.13, 15.44; initials for authors' given names, 15.43; issue number in parentheses, 15.46;

newspapers and magazines, 15.47; sentence-style capitalization for titles of works, 15.45

publication date: basic structure and punctuation, 15.6, 15.9, 15.12, 15.24; editions with multiple, 15.38; forthcoming, 15.17,

15.42; letters in published collections, 15.40; multivolume works published over several years, 15.39; "no date," 15.41;

references arranged by, 15.17--19

secondary sources, quotations from, 15.52

syntactic considerations with, 15.27

titles of books, 15.37

unpublished and informally published materials, 15.48--51

websites and web pages, 15.4, 15.8, 15.51

See also documentation; reference lists; text citations; titles of works in documentation; and specific materials to document authors

academic degrees and affiliations, 1.49, 1.88, 1.94

accuracy of, 2.7, 2.53, 13.6

alterations on proofs (AAs), 2.67, 2.131--32, p. 891

backup copies of manuscript as responsibility of, 2.4, 2.37

biographical notes ( see biographical notes)

copyright ( see copyright)

field notes of, 13.47

financial assistance for, 1.31, 1.40

illustration credits and, 3.30, 3.32 ( see also credits and credit lines)

indexing as responsibility of, 2.2, 2.67, 16.3--4, 16.104, 16.108

interviews by, 13.46 ( see also interviews and discussions)

notes of, 14.46

own work used by, 4.62, 4.71

papers in collection of, 14.242

permissions as responsibility of, 3.28, 4.68--87, 13.3 ( see also permissions)

previous publications on copyright page, 1.17

proofreading as responsibility of, 2.97--99

publication process and schedule for, 2.2, A.2, figs. 2.1--2

royalties, 4.36, 4.51, 4.53, 4.60, 4.63, 4.100

warranties made by, 4.68

websites of, 1.106, 1.114

See also authors' names; author's review of copyedited manuscript; contributors; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors;

proofreading; publishing agreement

author's alterations (AAs), 2.67, 2.131--32, p. 891

authorship, in copyright. See copyright

authors' names

abbreviations of, 1.18

alternative forms of, 14.86

in books and periodicals: book review and book notes sections, 1.92; chapter opening page, 1.49; copyright notice, 4.41; covers and jackets, 1.66, 1.67, 1.68; epigraphs, 1.36; forewords and introductions, 1.39; journals and journal articles, 1.77, 1.83, 1.88,

1.94, fig. 1.11; multiauthor volumes, 1.37, 1.62, 16.115, fig. 1.10; running heads, 1.77; in table of contents, 1.37, 1.83, fig.

1.11; title page, 1.18

cross-checking of, 2.29

documentation, author-date references: anonymous works, 15.32--33; basic form, 15.12; chronological order for single author with

multiple titles, 14.67; different authors with same last name, 15.21; editor in place of author, 15.6, 15.15, 15.18, 15.35;

examples and variations, 15.9; initials vs. full names, 14.73, 15.12, 15.43; more than three authors, in-text citations, 15.28;

more than three authors, reference list, 15.9; organizations as authors, 15.36; proper form of name to use, 15.12, 15.43;

pseudonyms, 15.34; same author, same year, 15.19, 15.28; single vs. several authors, order for, 15.16; 3-em dashes and,

2.13, 6.91, 15.17--19

documentation, notes and bibliography: ad hoc handling of unusual cases, 14.89; alphabetical order, 14.57, 14.60--62, 14.65,

14.67, fig. 14.8; alternative real names, 14.86; anonymous works, 14.79--80; authors preferring initials, 14.73; in classical references, 14.258--59; descriptive phrase as "author," 14.85; different coauthors with, 14.62; editor in place of author,

14.87; editor or translator in addition to author, 14.88; editor vs. author, 14.90; examples and variations, 14.18; in forewords, prefaces, and such, 14.91, 14.116; form of, generally, 14.72; in journal articles, 14.175--76; in magazine articles, 14.202; in magazine departments, 14.202; monarchs, saints, and such, as authors, 14.74, 16.42; in multivolume works, 14.122--24,

14.126--27; in newspaper articles, 14.203, 14.205--7; organization as, 14.66, 14.92; pseudonyms and cross-references,

14.81--84; punctuation of, 6.20, 14.63; in reference work entries, 14.247--48; repeated names, 14.64--67; in reviews,

14.214--16; shortened forms, 14.25--27, 14.196; single author, 14.75; single vs. several authors, 14.61; 3-em dashes and,

2.13, 6.91, 14.63--67, 14.79; in title of work, 14.78; two or more authors (or editors), 14.76; two or more authors (or editors) with same family name, 14.77; "with the assistance of" and such, 14.89

hyperlinks from, 1.114

index of, 16.6, 16.115, 16.145

initials vs. full version of, 1.18, 14.25--27, 14.73, 15.12, 15.43

proofreading of, 2.105, 2.130

in scientific names, 8.123

uniform treatment across documentation systems, 15.2

See also anonymous works; contributors; pseudonyms and pseudonymous works

author's review of copyedited manuscript, 2.2, 2.67--69, 2.85, 2.97

communications and queries from manuscript editor, 2.53--54, 2.57--58, 2.61, 2.66, 2.83, 2.89, fig. 2.4; bias-free language issues,

5.224; cover letter and instructions, 2.67, 2.81; early contact, 2.65; on paper manuscripts, 2.89; sample of editing, 2.65

version of record, 2.84

See also markings, editorial; redlining (tracking and showing changes)

automobiles, 8.116. See also vehicles and vessels

auxiliary verbs. See under verbs

awards and prizes

announcements of, 1.93

civic, 8.82

military, 8.114

names: periodical titles in, 8.170; treatment of, 8.30

axes, x and y, 3.42, 3.49, fig. 3.8

Azeri language, 11.88--90

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

B

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

back margin, defined, p. 891

back matter, 1.4, 1.57--65

abbreviations lists, 1.43, fig. 1.8

acknowledgments, 1.41

added later in production process, 1.8

appendixes, 1.53

bibliographies or reference lists, 1.61

chronologies, 1.58, fig. 1.9

colophons, 1.64

contributors lists, 1.62, fig. 1.10

editor's notes, 1.44

electronic publications, 1.117

endnotes, 1.59

glossaries, 1.60

illustration credits, 3.29

indexable material in, 16.109

indexes, 1.63

pagination of, 1.4, 1.7--8

recto vs. verso for elements, 1.4

running heads for, 1.13--14

in table of contents, 1.37

in web-based publications, 1.117

See also many of the above elements under their own headings

backup copies

author's, 2.5, 2.37

editor's and publisher's, 2.75, 2.77, 2.86

See also archival practices

bar codes, 1.66, 1.71, 1.78

baseline, defined, p. 891

battles, campaigns, wars, and such, 8.112--13

BC, AD, and such, 9.35, 9.63, 10.39

because, 5.201

Berne Convention, 4.2, 4.29, 4.38

beta testing, defined, p. 891

between . . . and, 6.78, 9.59

be-verbs ( be, is, are, was, etc.)

contractions with, 5.103

forms and tenses of, 5.98, 5.151--52

as linking verbs, 5.43, 5.99

noun or pronoun following, 5.17

bi-, 5.220

bias-free language, 5.221--30

advice for achieving, 5.225

avoiding biases other than gender, 5.223, 5.230

avoiding gender bias, 5.34, 5.222, 5.45--46, 5.226--29

editor's attention to, 2.48, 5.224

Bible

abbreviations, 10.47; of Bible and biblical, 10.43; books of Bible, 10.46, 10.48--50; chapter and verse, 14.253; resources on, 10.45,

14.252; versions and sections of Bible, 10.51, 14.254

books of, 8.104, 10.46--50

capitalization of, 8.102

in Hebrew language, 11.116--17

named parts of (e.g., Sermon on the Mount), 8.106

versions and sections of, 8.103, 8.105, 10.51, 14.254

See also biblical citations

biblical citations

abbreviations in, 10.45--51

chapter and verse, 14.253

punctuation of, 6.60, 9.27

resources on, 14.252

versions of Bible in, 14.254

See also Bible

bibliographic essays, 14.59, fig. 14.11

bibliographies, 14.56--67

alphabetical arrangement of entries: authors with different coauthors, 14.62, 14.65; authors with multiple works, 14.64, 14.67;

example of, fig. 14.8; letter-by-letter vs. word-by-word, 14.60; readability of, 14.57; single vs. several authors, 14.61

authors' names ( see authors' names)

editing and checking, 2.29, 2.53, 2.77, 2.60--61

format: flush-and-hang style (hanging indention), 1.61, 2.11, 2.22, fig. 14.8; headnotes, 14.58, fig. 14.9; placement and example,

14.57, fig. 14.8; 3-em dashes and, 2.13, 6.91, 14.63--67, 14.79

hyperlinks in, 1.102

notes in relation to, 14.56

and indexing, 16.109

reference lists compared with, 14.67, 15.3

references to, 8.177

sections in, 14.58, 14.276, fig. 14.9

special types: annotated, 14.59, fig. 14.10; bibliographic essays, 14.59, fig. 14.11; discographies, 14.275, fig. 14.12; single-author,

14.67

styling of entries, 14.16--18

3-em dashes in, 2.13, 6.91, 14.63--67, 14.79

as work made for hire, 4.10

works appropriate for inclusion, 2.60

See also documentation; note numbers; notes; notes and bibliography system; reference lists; titles of works in documentation; and specific types of sources

billion, 5.220

bills, legislative, 14.295. See also laws and statutes; legislation

binary systems, 9.11

binding, A.50

definition, p. 891

types: adhesive, fig. A.9; burst, p. 892; case or hardcover, p. 892; limp or flexi-, p. 895; notch, p. 898; perfect, p. 899; saddle stitched, p. 902; sewn, fig. A.8

biographical notes

components of, 1.17, 1.20

of contributors, 1.49, 1.62, 1.94, 14.50, fig. 1.10

on copyright page, 1.19, fig. 1.1, figs. 1.3--4

on covers or jackets, 1.67--68

of editors, compilers, and such, 1.20

proofreading of, 2.105

in unnumbered notes, 14.50

bitmap, defined, A.32, p. 891

blind (unexpressed) folios, 1.5--7, 1.45, 1.48, 3.6

block quotations

capitalization in, 13.13--16

coding of, example, 2.71

definition, p. 892

generic markup of, 2.78

manuscript preparation guidelines for, 2.18--19

note references or notes within, 13.7

in notes, 14.33

paragraphing of, 13.20--22, 13.54

of poetry: format, 13.23; generic markup, 2.78; indention, 13.24; long lines and runovers, 13.25; manuscript preparation guidelines for, 2.19; parenthetical citations in, 13.69--70; quotation marks in poems, 13.26; vs. run-in, 13.10

proofreading of, 2.110

punctuation in: brackets, 13.12, 13.16; colons, 6.61, 6.63, 13.17; commas, 6.50, 13.18; ellipsis points, 13.54; periods, 13.19; quotation marks, 13.26

quotation beginning or continued in text, 13.21--22

run-in: vs. block quotations, 13.9--10; of more than one stanza, 13.32; slashes for line breaks, 6.109

text citations for, 13.68--70

See also documentation; text citations

blogs and blog entries

documentation of, 14.243--46

treatment in text, 8.187

See also hyperlinks; URLs (uniform resource locators); web-based publications; websites and web pages

Bluebook, The (Harvard Law Review Association), 14.3, 14.281--87

bluelines, defined, p. 892

blurb, author's. See biographical notes

boats. See vehicles and vessels

body text, defined, p. 892

boldface

definition, p. 892

in manuscript, 2.14

marking manuscript for, 2.94

marking proofs for, 2.110, 2.128

in relation to surrounding text, 6.3

uses: dynamics in music writing, 7.71; indexes, 16.140--41, 16.143

book-club rights, 4.60

book notes section, 1.92. See also reviews

books

back matter: acknowledgments, 1.41; appendixes, 1.57; bibliographies and reference lists, 1.61; chronologies, 1.58, fig. 1.9; colophons, 1.64; endnotes, 1.59; glossaries, 1.60; indexes, 1.63; list of contributors, 1.49, 1.62, 1.94, 2.38, 14.50, fig. 1.10

determining length of, A.18

divisions of, 1.4, 1.47; for letters and diaries, 1.51; pagination of, 1.7; for poetry, 1.50; running heads in, 1.11; in table of contents, 1.37, fig. 1.5 ( see also parts of, below)

documentation of, examples and variations, 14.14--18, 15.9

documentation of, notes and bibliography: author's name, 14.72--92; chapters and other parts of, 14.111--17; edition, 14.118--20;

electronic books, 14.166--69; elements to include, 14.69; flexibility and consistency, 14.70; foreign bibliographic terms and abbreviations, 14.71; as model for other materials, 14.68; multivolume works, 14.121--27; page, volume, and such,

14.154--65; series, 14.128--32; title, 14.93--110

documentation of, author-date reference system, 15.32--41

electronic and print compared, 1.2

front matter: acknowledgments, 1.41; author's signature, 1.40; copyright page, 1.19--34, figs. 1.1--4; epigraph, 1.36; foreword,

1.39; frontispiece, 1.17, 1.38; half title page, 1.116; introduction appropriate to, 1.42; list of illustrations and tables, 1.38,

figs. 1.6--7; lists of abbreviations, 1.43, fig. 1.8; prefaces, 1.40; publisher's, translator's, and editor's notes, 1.44; series title page, 1.116; table of contents, 1.37, fig. 1.5; title page, 1.16--18

ISBN of, 1.13, 1.19, 1.32, 1.71

page numbers in, 1.5--8, 1.45, 9.27--29, 14.154

parts of, 1.4; appendixes, 1.57; back matter, 1.4, 1.7; chapter openings, 1.7, 1.48; chapters, 1.48; concluding elements, 1.52; dedication, 1.6, 1.35; epigraphs, 1.36; front matter, 1.4, 1.6; galleries, 1.5; generic terms for, 3.5, 8.177; illustrations and tables, 1.7, 1.38; introductions, 1.42, 1.46; recto and verso pages, 1.4, 1.48, 1.50; second half title, 1.7, 1.45; subheads,

1.53--56; table of contents, 1.37, fig. 1.5 ( see also many of the above elements under their own headings)

publication process and schedule, 2.2, A.2, figs. 2.1--2

running heads in, 1.9--15

signatures in, 1.40, 14.161

See also books, electronic; covers of journals and paperback books; electronic publications; documentation; hardcover books;

publications in multiple formats; titles of works; web-based publications

books, electronic

documentation of: CD-ROMs and fixed media, 14.166, 14.168; consulted online, 14.167, 14.169; downloaded from library or bookseller, 14.166

electronic and print compared, 1.2

ISBN of, 4.60

options for publishing as, A.38

readers, 14.166

style sheets of, A.9

See also electronic publications; publications in multiple formats; web-based publications

Bosnian language, 11.18--19

botanical terminology

cultivated varieties (cultivars), 8.129

domestic breeds, 8.128

example of illustration, fig. 3.3

scientific names: authorities on, 8.118; author names, 8.123; divisions higher than genus, 8.125; English derivatives from taxonomic system, 8.126; genus, species, and subspecies, 8.119--21; hybrids, 8.124; unspecified species and varieties, 8.122

vernacular names, 8.127--29

See also scientific and technical terminology

both--and, 5.195, 5.214

braces in mathematical expressions, 6.102, 12.26, 12.28. See also brackets

brackets, 6.97--102

angle brackets: for generic markup, 2.15, 2.27, 2.78; for less than and more than, 3.81; in mathematical expressions, 6.102,

12.26, 12.28, 12.31, 12.55, 12.58; for URLs, 6.8, 14.11; in XML, 6.102, fig. A.2

Dirac bracket notation, 12.55

in documentation: for author's name, 14.73, 14.80; for foreign-language titles, 14.108, 14.110; within parentheses, 15.27, 15.38;

for pseudonyms, 14.81--84, 15.34; for publication details, surmised, 14.138, 14.152

generic markup within, 2.78

italic vs. roman type, 6.5

other punctuation with, 6.101; commas, 6.53; ellipsis points, 13.56; exclamation points, 6.73--74; parentheses, 6.95, 15.27,

15.38; periods, 6.13; question marks, 6.70; suspension points, 11.54

other uses: glosses or translations, 6.93; interpolations and clarifications, 6.97, 13.57--59, 13.61; missing or illegible words, 13.57;

within parentheses, 6.95, 6.99; phonetics, 6.100; quotations, 13.12, 13.16, 13.46; with sic, 13.59; in translated text, 6.93,

6.98; URLs, 6.8, 14.11

in relation to surrounding text, 6.5

See also parentheses; punctuation

brand names

capitalization, 8.68, 8.153, 8.152

in computer writing, 7.76

drugs, 8.145

generic terms for, 8.152

See also trademarks

breathing marks, 11.130, 11.132

bridges and such, 8.55

British style

billion in, 5.220

contractions, 10.4

dates, 6.45

decimal places, 9.20

double consonants in past indicative, 5.138

parentheses within parentheses, 6.95

past tense and past participle, 5.98

quotation marks, 6.9, 13.28

spelling, 7.3, 16.29

titles of nobility, 8.31

which and that, 6.22

See also European style; United Kingdom

broadcast networks, channels, and such, 8.185, 10.5, 10.25

broadside

definition, p. 892

for tables, 2.112, 3.84--85

brochures. See pamphlets, brochures, and reports

buildings, 8.56

apartment numbers and, 9.53

names of: French, 11.29; in periodical titles, 8.170

religious, 8.100, 9.49

schools, 8.67

bullets, 2.32, 6.124--25

Burmese names, 16.77

burst binding, defined, p. 892

business and commerce

abbreviations used in, 10.22--23, 10.72

in documentation: corporate features omitted from names in, 14.140, 14.142; databases, 14.271--72; imprints, parent companies, and such, 14.144--48; news services, 14.212; private contracts and such, 14.231; reports, brochures, and such, 14.249

generic terms vs. proper names, 7.76

names: abbreviations of, 10.22--23, 10.25; alphabetizing of, 16.88--89; ampersands in, 10.23; articles in, 8.67, 16.88;

capitalization of, 8.67--68; foreign-language, 11.8; Inc. , Ltd. , and such with, 6.48, 10.22--23; indexing of, 16.46, 16.88--89;

punctuation of, 6.117; spelled out in running text, 10.23; unusual names (e.g., eBay), 8.68, 8.153

titles and offices in, 8.26

See also governmental entities; institutions; organizations

but

punctuation with, 6.28--29, 6.41

sentences beginning with, 5.206, 5.220

bylaws, 9.29. See also legal documents

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

C

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

ca. ("circa"), 7.53, 10.43

calendar designations. See dates

call letters, 10.25

callouts (illustrations and tables)

cross-checking of, 2.29, 2.62--63, 3.16

definition and format, 2.23, 2.27, 3.8

in electronic file cleanup, 2.77

placement, 3.8

calls for papers, 1.85, 1.93

can, could, and may, 5.143, 5.220

Canada

courts, 14.306

currency, 9.22

First Peoples, 8.37

legal documents: legal cases, 14.306; resources and reference works on, 14.281, 14.305; statutes, 14.307; unpublished government documents, 14.308

numbers: billion, 5.220; decimal places, 9.20

provinces and territories: abbreviations, 10.29; when to include in documentation, 14.136

Canadian Supreme Court, 14.306

capitalization

of abbreviations, 2.21, 10.6, 10.52

academic concerns, 8.28, 8.67, 8.84, 10.20--21

of acronyms and initialisms, 10.6

of Bible books and such, 8.102, 10.6, 10.46--51

of brand names, 8.152

of computer terms, 7.73--76

consistency in text and illustrations, 2.63

of cultural movements and styles, 8.59--60, 8.78

in documentation, 8.166, 14.18, 14.95; author-date references, 15.6--9, 15.45, fig. 15.1; book titles and subtitles, 8.157, 8.162,

14.95, 14.97--98; classical references, 14.261; foreign-language article and journal titles, 14.193; journal article titles,

14.176; journal titles, 14.179; magazine article titles, 14.201; magazine departments, 14.202; newspaper headlines, 14.204;

newspaper names, 14.211; news services, 14.212; and other stories and such, 14.100; specific vs. generic titles for manuscript collections, 14.234; website and blog titles, 14.244 ( see also under titles of works in documentation)

editor's note on, 1.44

ellipsis points and, 13.51

for emphasizing words, 7.48

foreign languages, 11.5--9, 14.193; Arabic, 11.100; Azeri, 11.89; Chinese, 11.108; Danish, 11.22; Dutch, 11.24; French, 11.29--30;

German, 7.52, 11.41--42; Hebrew, 11.114; Italian, 11.51; Japanese, 11.108; Latin, 11.59; Norwegian, 11.65; Polish, 11.67;

Portuguese, 11.70; Russian, 11.119; Spanish, 11.77; Swedish, 11.86; Turkish, 11.89

of generic term with two or more proper names, 8.52, 8.55

of geographical terms: compass points and terms, 8.45--46; continents, countries, cities, oceans, and such, 5.67, 8.44, 8.52;

popular names and epithets for, 8.47; real vs. metaphorical names, 8.49; regions, 8.46, 8.53; urban areas, 8.48

in glossaries, 2.21

in illustration labels and keys, 3.20

in indexes: cross-references, 16.17, 16.20; main heading and subentries, 16.9--12, 16.17

of interjections and exclamations, 7.45

in lists, 2.21, 6.124--25

marking manuscript for, 2.94

marking proofs for, 2.128

of names, 8.1--2; businesses, 8.67--68; institutions, 8.67, 8.84; museums, institutions, and such, 8.67, 8.84; particles with, 8.5,

8.7--10; personal, 8.3--6; popes, 8.25; reverend, honorable, and such, 8.25, 8.31--32; unusual capitalization in, 8.68, 8.153;

words derived from, 8.59--60

of nouns: common, 5.5; proper, 5.6

permissible changes to, 8.163, 13.7--8, 14.96

of political divisions, 8.50--51

questions within another sentence, 6.52

quotations: changes in, 13.13, 13.16; initial capital or lowercase letter, 13.14--15; in titles of works, 8.160

sparing use of ("down" style), 8.1, 8.46

of subheads, 1.54, 2.56, 8.156

in tables, 3.52, 3.57

technical abbreviations, 10.52

of trademarks, 8.152

URLs, DOIs, and such in text, 8.68, 14.11--12

of words for Platonic ideas (e.g., Truth), 8.93

See also capital letters; headline-style capitalization; lowercase letters; sentence-style capitalization

capital letters

drop caps, 13.35, p. 894

full, 7.48; abbreviations for avenue, street, and such, 10.34; compass points in addresses, 10.35; and emphasis, 7.48; era abbreviations, 9.35, 9.63, 10.39; letters as shapes, 7.63; letters as words, plurals of, 7.14; letters standing for names, 7.62; musical elements, 7.67--68, 7.70; preferred to small caps, 9.35, 10.8, 10.24, 10.39, 10.42, 14.284; scholastic letter grades,

7.60

initial, decorative, 13.35

plurals of, 7.14, 7.60

small: emphasizing words, 7.48; full caps preferred to, 9.35, 10.8, 10.24, 10.39, 10.42, 14.284; glosses in ASL, 11.147--54; in indexes, 16.140, 16.145; in mathematical copy, 12.56; after ornamental text break, 1.56; proofreading and marking proofs,

2.110, 2.128

See also letters (alphabet)

captions, 3.21--28

capitalization, punctuation, and spacing, 3.21--24, 3.29

for charts, 3.43

credit lines in: author as source of illustration, 3.30; material from agency, 3.35, 4.95--97; material in public domain, 3.34;

material obtained free of charge, 3.33; material that requires permission, 3.31; material that was adapted, 3.36; material that was commissioned, 3.32, 4.69; placement at end, 3.29; source and permission, 3.28

definition, 3.7

electronic enhancements noted in, 3.26

examples of, fig. 3.1, figs. 3.3--5

formal titles of works in, 3.22

journal cover, inside, 1.78

locators (e.g., above, left) in, 3.24

manuscript and editorial concerns: cross-checking, 2.29; editing, 2.63; generic markup, 2.78; guidelines for authors, 2.3, 2.23;

proofreading, 2.112; separate file for, 2.23, 3.18; working numbers, 2.25, 3.13

original dimensions noted in, 3.27

separating illustration number from, 3.23

shortened for lists of illustrations, 3.39

syntax of, 3.21

carets, 2.91, 2.129

cartoons, 8.194

cascading style sheets (CSS), A.9, A.21, A.37, p. 894

case, defined, p. 892

case binding, defined, p. 892

castoff, defined, p. 893

Cataloging-in-Publication (CIP) data, 1.19, 1.33, fig. 1.1, figs. 1.3--4

catalogs

archival (UK), 14.309, 14.315

astronomical, 8.138

exhibitions, 8.195, 14.250

foreign names, 14.71

libraries, 8.195, 11.102, 14.139, 14.250

musical, 8.191, 14.275

cc, 10.72

CD-ROMs

documentation of, 14.166, 14.168

ISBN for, 1.32

subsidiary rights for, 4.60

CE, BCE, and such, 9.35, 9.63, 10.39

celestial bodies, 8.137--41, 10.64

centuries

first vs. later decades of, 9.34

numerical designations for, 8.70

spelled out and lowercased, 9.33

See also historical and cultural terminology

cf. ("compare"), 10.43, 14.37

chapter numbers, 1.48

arabic numerals for, 8.178, 14.154

chap. with, 14.157

consecutive, across parts of book, 1.47

generic markup of, 2.78

in index locators, 16.111

in notes, 14.160

pagination and, 9.27

proofreading of, 2.110

in running heads for endnotes, 1.14, 14.42

chapters

abbreviation of term, 10.43, 14.157

appendixes at end of, 1.57

conclusions as, 1.52

cross-references to, in multiauthor volumes, 15.37

decorative initials for first word, 13.35

division into, 1.48

documentation of, 14.18, 15.9; chapter endnotes, 14.38, 14.41, fig. 14.3; chapter in multiauthor book, 14.112; chapter in multivolume work, 14.125; chapter in single-author book, 14.111; chapter originally published elsewhere, 14.115, fig. 1.4; several contributions to same book, 14.113

endnotes for each, 14.38, 14.41, fig. 14.3

epigraphs at opening of, 1.36

multiple authors of, 1.49

naming of, 1.46

note referring to entire, 1.48, 2.20, 14.22

numbering of, 1.47--48, 1.52, 8.178

offprints of, 1.48

openers of, 1.36, 1.45, 1.48, 13.35

pagination of, 1.7, 1.45, 1.48

publishing agreement for, 4.53, 4.59, fig. 4.1

reference lists or bibliographies for each, 14.57, 15.10

references to, 2.32, 8.178, 15.37

running heads for, 1.11, 1.15

in table of contents, 1.37, fig. 1.5

unnumbered source notes for, 1.48, 3.31, 14.49

as works made for hire, 4.53

See also articles (journal); articles, documentation of; chapter numbers; chapter titles

chapter titles, 1.48

editing, 2.55

generic markup, 2.78

manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.16

note reference numbers and, 1.48, 2.20, 14.22

proofreading, 2.110, 2.130

in quotation marks, 8.161

in table of contents, 1.37, fig. 1.5

character, defined, p. 893

character count, defined, p. 893

character encoding, defined, p. 893

character reference, defined, p. 893

characters, fictional, 5.123, 8.34, 8.36. See also dialogue; literary works

characters, special. See diacritical marks; special characters

charts and graphs

as alternative to table, 3.47

appropriate use and definition of, 3.40

axes and curves in, 3.42, 3.49, fig. 3.8

consistency: of style, 3.41; with text, 2.63

credit line for commissioned, 3.32

examples of, figs. 3.8--10

fair use of, 4.84

genealogical and pedigree, 3.45, fig. 3.10

indexing of, 16.116

labels on, 3.43--44

as line art, 3.4, 3.40

preparation of electronic files, 3.42

symbols or patterns used in, 3.25, figs. 3.8--9

titles of, 3.43

See also illustrations; tables

chemical terminology

abbreviations, 10.64

laws and theories, 8.147

mass number, 8.149

metric units, 8.151

names and symbols, 8.148, 10.66

resources on, 8.146, 10.66

Chinese language

capitalization and italics, 11.108

characters of, 11.110

names: alphabetizing, 16.78; common, list of, 11.105; treatment, 8.15, 11.108

titles of works, 11.109

transliteration, 11.102--4

See also Pinyin system; Wade-Giles system

chronological order

in bibliographies and reference lists, 2.60, 14.67, 15.17

for index subentries, 16.70

for letters and diaries, 1.51

chronologies, 1.58, fig. 1.9

Church, church, 8.97, 8.100. See also religions and religious concerns

CIP (Cataloging-in-Publication) data, 1.19, 1.33, fig. 1.1, figs. 1.3--4

circa, 7.53, 10.43

circling

editorial marking, 2.90--91, 2.121, 2.124--26

infinity symbol, 1.34

proofreader's marking, 2.118

citation. See documentation

citation management software, 1.83, 14.13

cities and towns

administrative agencies and departments, 8.62

judicial bodies, 8.63, 14.291

laws and ordinances, 14.300, 14.312

legislative bodies, 8.61

names: in addresses, punctuation of, 6.46, 10.28, 10.30; alphabetizing, 16.90--93; capitalization, 5.67, 8.44, 8.52; English forms of foreign cities, 14.137; Fort, Mount, Saint, and such, 10.31, 11.29, 16.90, 16.93; as locations of manuscript collections,

14.238; in newspaper names, 14.210--11, 16.48; on title page, 1.18

numbered divisions of, 9.47

See also civil and civic concerns; governmental entities; place of publication

civil and civic concerns

awards and honors, 8.30, 8.82

committee minutes and such, 14.240

holidays, 8.88

public places and structures: buildings and monuments, 8.56; foreign names for, 8.58; rooms, offices, and such, 8.57; thoroughfares and such, 8.55

titles and offices, 8.18, 8.21, 10.13--14

See also cities and towns; governmental entities

class, socioeconomic, 8.40. See also peoples

classical works

abbreviations in, 14.258--59, 14.264, 14.266

capitalization of, 14.261

documentation: abbreviations, 14.258; authors' names, 14.258--59; collections of inscriptions, 14.263; editions, 14.119, 14.260,

14.262, 14.265, 14.267; editors' names, 14.260, 14.263--65; electronic editions, 14.169; English poems and plays, 14.267--68;

fragments of texts, 14.264; Greek and Latin references, 14.256--66; identifying numbers in, 14.257; medieval references,

14.266; modern editions of, 14.265; poems and plays, 14.260, 14.267--68; punctuation in, 14.259; reprint editions, 14.119;

specific editions, 14.260, 14.262, 14.267; superscripts in, 14.262; text citations, 14.256; titles of, 14.257, 14.259, 14.261;

translators' names, 14.260, 14.265--66

introductions to, 1.46

medieval references, special characters in, 7.46, 11.142--43

Old and Middle English, 7.46, 11.142--43

resources on, 14.258

See also Greek language, including classical; Latin language

clauses

adverbial, 6.25, 6.36, 6.55

dependent, 6.30--32

independent, 6.28--29, 6.54--57

as nouns, 5.25

parallel structure in, 5.212

personal pronoun as subject of, 5.42

punctuation of, 5.21, 6.22--23, 6.26, 6.28--32, 6.54--57

relative, 6.22

restrictive and nonrestrictive, 5.21, 6.22--23, 6.26

See also conjunctions; phrases

clerical titles

indexing of, 16.39

terms of respect (e.g., Rev.), 8.25, 8.32, 10.18

See also religions and religious concerns

climate, named events of, 8.76

close-up mark, 2.122, fig. 2.6

clothbound, defined, p. 893

CMYK, defined, p. 893

Code of Federal Regulations, 14.301

codes

computer, 2.59--60, 2.78--79

currency, 9.22, 9.24

definition, p. 893

legal, 14.300--301

for typefaces, 12.64

type specifications, 2.71

zip, 10.30

See also bar codes; codes and coding; postal codes; Unicode standard

codes and coding

in cleanup process, 2.36, 2.59--60, 2.77--79

list of, 2.74

in markup process, 2.55--56, 2.70--71, 2.78, 2.96, 6.102

mathematical example of, 12.67, figs. 12.1--3

See also codes; markings, editorial; markup tags and languages; production and digital technology;

XML (extensible markup language)

coinages, 7.13, 8.59

collected works

classical inscriptions as, 14.263

documentation of, 15.38--40

titles of separate works in, 8.176

See also compilations; derivative works; edited works; previously published materials

collections. See manuscript collections; public documents; unpublished and informally published materials

collective works

contributions to, as work made for hire, 4.10

copyright of, 4.8, fig. 1.4

definition, 4.8

publishing agreement for contributors to, 4.53, fig. 4.1

colloquialisms, 7.29, 7.57, 7.59. See also figures of speech; maxims

colons, 6.59--65

capitalization and, 6.61

common misuses of, 6.65

em dashes instead of, 6.82

marking manuscript for, 2.90

other punctuation with: ellipsis points, 13.52; parentheses, 6.96; quotation marks, 6.10, 6.63

spacing and, 2.9, 2.11, 6.60, 14.121, 14.125, 14.159, 14.186

uses: appropriate, 6.59; after as follows and other introductory phrases, 6.62; in biblical citations, 14.253--54; in double or multiple numeration, 1.55; in formal direct address, 6.64; in indexes, 16.19--20, 16.25, 16.95; introducing run-in lists, 6.123;

with publication details, 6.64, 14.186; introducing quotations or speech, 6.61, 6.63, 13.17; in ratios, 6.60; between titles and subtitles, 1.18, 8.162, 14.97; between volume and page numbers, 14.121, 14.125, 14.159, 14.186

when to omit, 14.178

See also punctuation; semicolons

colophons (logos)

on covers or jackets, 1.66--68

definition, p. 893

on title page, 1.18

colophons (publication details), defined, 1.64, p. 893

color

continuous tone vs. halftone images, 3.3, 3.6, figs. 3.1--2, p. 894

in editing paper-only manuscripts, 2.88

in electronic journals, 1.100

for ethnic groups, 8.39

hyphenation guide on, 7.85

illustrations in, 1.5, 2.34, 3.15

for journal covers, 1.78

for proofreading marks, 2.120

of punctuation, in relation to surrounding text, 6.3

color separation, defined, p. 893

columns

avoiding multiple, 2.21

in indexes, 1.63, 16.24, 16.135, 16.138

in vertical lists, 6.124

See also magazines; newspapers; tables

command papers (UK), 14.314

commas, 6.16--53

with abbreviations: academic and professional designations, 10.4, 10.16, 10.20--21; addresses, mailing, 6.46, 10.28, 10.30; e.g.

and i.e. , 5.220; etc. and et al. , 6.20; Inc. , Ltd. , and such, 6.48; Jr. , Sr. , and such, 6.47

with clauses: adverbial, 6.25, 6.55; dependent, 6.30--32; independent, 6.28--29; relative, 6.22; restrictive and nonrestrictive,

5.21, 6.22--23, 6.26

in documentation: and other stories and such, 14.100; classical references, 14.259; magazine dates and page numbers, 14.199; or with double titles, 14.99; page and issue numbers, 14.186; titles of works, 6.17, 14.99, 14.101; titles of works with question marks or exclamation points, 14.178

em dashes instead of, 6.82, 6.86

marking manuscript for, 2.90

marking proofs for, 2.129

other punctuation with: apostrophes, 6.115; brackets, 6.53; ellipsis points, 13.52; exclamation points, 6.119; parentheses, 6.53,

6.96; question marks, 6.52, 6.119; quotation marks, 6.9, 6.50

other uses: addresses, 6.46, 10.28, 10.30; adverbial phrases, 6.36; and if, that if, and such, 6.32; appositives, 5.21, 6.23;

compound predicates, 6.29; conjunctions joining independent clauses, 6.28; coordinate adjectives, 5.90, 6.33--34; dates,

5.82, 6.17, 6.45; decimal places in non-US styles, 9.20; direct address, 6.38; editorial interpolations, 6.53; elision indicated by, 6.49; homonyms, 6.44; however, therefore, indeed, and such, 6.25; including, 6.27; indexes, 16.25, 16.94; interjections,

5.208, 6.37; introductory phrases, 6.35--36; main clause and, 6.31; maxims and proverbs, 6.51; the more, the less, and such,

6.42; "not" phrases, 6.40--41; numbers, 9.55, 9.62; pairs of commas, 6.17; parenthetical elements, 6.24--27, 6.31, 6.43;

participial phrases, 6.35; place-names, 6.46; preceding main clause, 6.30; questions, 6.52; quotations, 6.50, 13.18; run-in list items separated by, 6.123; such as, 6.27; that is, namely, for example, and such, 6.43, 6.65; which vs. that and, 6.22

pairs of, 6.17

parentheses compared with, 6.92

vs. semicolons, 6.19

serial: argument for using, 6.18; etc. and et al. with, 6.20; omitted with ampersands, 6.21; semicolons instead of commas, 6.19

when to omit, 6.119, 14.105

See also punctuation

commercial terms and abbreviations, 10.72

common expressions. See figures of speech; maxims

common-law copyright, 4.2, 4.15, 4.19, 4.22, 4.25

communications. See interviews and discussions; personal communications

comp, defined, p. 893

companies. See business and commerce; organizations

comparison/degrees, 5.201. See also adjectives: degrees; adverbs: degrees

compass points and directions

abbreviations, 10.36

in addresses and geographical terms, 10.35--36

capitalization, 8.45--46

hyphenation guide on, 7.85

latitude and longitude, 10.37

compilations, 2.40

illustrations in, 2.44

notes in, 2.42

permissible changes to, 2.41, 2.58, 13.7--8

permissions for, 4.101

source notes for, 2.43

as work made for hire, 4.10

See also collected works; compilers; derivative works; edited works; previously published materials

compiled by, when to abbreviate or spell out, 10.43, 14.87--88, 15.13, 15.35

compilers

abbreviation of term in documentation, 10.43, 14.87--88, 15.18, 15.35

in addition to author, 14.88

biographical notes on, 1.20

copyright and, 4.8

notes on changes, 2.41

permissions as responsibility of, 4.101

in place of author, 14.87, 15.35

3-em dash for, 14.64--65

when to abbreviate or spell out term, 10.43, 14.87--88, 15.18, 15.35

See also compilations; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors

compositors and composition. See design and production; production and digital technology; typesetters and typesetting;

typographic considerations

compounds

adjectives as, 6.80

adverbs as, 5.158, 7.82

alphabetizing of, 16.59--60, 16.72, 16.84

in ASL, 11.148

bias-free language and, 5.228

capitalization in titles of works, 8.159

closed compounds, trend toward, 7.79

definitions of, 7.78

en dashes in, 6.80

ethnic group names, 8.38

foreign languages: French, 11.29; German, 11.46--47; Greek, 11.141; Latin, 11.63; Spanish, 11.84

hyphenation: appropriate use, 7.77, 7.79; en dashes, when to use, 6.80; guide for, 7.85; multiple hyphens, 7.83; omission of part of expression, 7.84; personal names, 8.6; readability issues, 7.80; and word breaks, 2.109

-ly and, 7.82

modifiers before or after noun, 7.81

names, proper, 16.72

omission of second part of, 7.84

parallel structure and, 5.212

person pronouns ( -self forms), 5.48--49

plurals of, 7.7

possessives of, 7.23

pronouns, relative, 5.62

readability of, 7.80

resources on, 7.1

types of, 7.78

word division and, 2.109, 7.31--43, 7.80, 11.46--47

See also hyphens and hyphenation; prefixes; suffixes; word division

computer software

alternative licensing arrangements for, 4.57

conversion errors, 2.77, 2.110

digital rights management (DRM) and, A.40

publisher's manuscript preparation guidelines and, 2.7

specific types: for citations, 1.83, 14.13; for artwork, 3.4, 3.15, A.32; for indexing, 16.5, 16.57, 16.104, 16.123; for mathematical copy, 12.2, 12.9, A.13, A.34, table 12.1; noted for electronic files, 2.4, 14.225; for typesetting and desktop publishing, A.23

See also computer terminology; databases; production and digital technology; redlining (tracking and showing changes);

Unicode standard; word processing

computer terminology, 7.72--76

abbreviations for, 10.52

application-specific variations in, 7.72

binary systems, 9.11

capitalization, 7.73--76

font in, 7.75

keyboard combinations and shortcuts, 7.74

macros (macroinstructions), 2.76, p. 898

computer-to-plate (CTP) technology, defined, p. 893

concert reviews, 14.214, 14.216

conclusions, format of, 1.52

concordance, defined, 16.5

conferences

announcements of, 1.85, 1.93

names of, 8.69

papers presented at, 14.226

places of, 14.226--28

poster papers at, 14.227

See also proceedings of conferences and symposia; speeches; unpublished and informally published materials; working papers

conflicts of interest, 1.88

Congress, congressman, 8.21

Congressional Globe, 14.299

Congressional Record, 14.298

conjunctions, 5.192--207

adverbs as, 5.202

as and as if as, 5.181

beginning a sentence with, 5.206--7

compound predicates joined by, 6.29

definition, 5.192

however, beginning a sentence with, 5.207

independent clauses and, 6.28, 6.57

in index subentries, 16.68

as interjections, 5.210

prepositions compared with, 5.180

punctuation with, 6.18--19, 6.28--29, 6.32, 6.57

quotations in text and, 6.50

relative pronouns as, 5.203

types: adversative (contrasting), 5.197; coordinating, 5.194; copulative (additive), 5.196; correlative, 5.195, 5.214; disguised,

5.205; disjunctive (separative), 5.198; expletive, 5.204; final (illative), 5.199; simple vs. compound, 5.193; subordinating,

5.200--201

in vertical lists, 6.125

See alsoand; but; or

constitutions and amendments, 8.79, 9.29, 14.292

contact proof, defined, p. 893

continents, 5.67, 8.44, 8.52

continued lines, 3.85, 16.139, fig. 3.25

continuous tone, defined, p. 894

contractions

apostrophes in, 7.29

definition and use, 5.102--3, 10.2

non-US style, 10.4

possessives vs., 5.50

contracts, private, 14.231

contracts, publication. See publishing agreement

contributors

biographical notes, 1.49, 1.62, 1.94, 14.50, fig. 1.10

chapters of, as works made for hire, 4.53

cross-checking names of, 2.29

information for, 1.84

journal submission by, 1.78, 1.82, 1.84, 2.1, 2.3, 2.33

lists of: biographical notes vs., 14.50; format and placement of, 1.49, 1.62, 1.94, fig. 1.10; volume editor's responsibility for, 2.38

publishing agreement for, 2.39, 4.53, 4.55--57, fig. 4.1

See also authors' names; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors

conversation. See dialogue; direct address; speech

copy, types of, 2.107

copyediting. See manuscript editing; manuscript editors

copyright, 4.2--49

accuracy and candor in process, 4.48

alternatives to, 4.57

assignment or licensing of, 4.33--37

authorship varieties: collective works, 4.8; individual and joint authors, 4.7, 4.12; "life plus seventy" rule, 4.22, 4.24--25; original owner, 1.22, 4.6, 4.11, 4.41; rights of, 4.13--18; varieties of, 4.7--12; works made for hire, 4.9--12, 4.23

benefits of registering, 4.49

changes in, 1.24

deposit requirements, 4.46

digital rights management and, A.40

dual system of, 4.19

duration: jointly authored works, 4.22; lengthened in 1978, 4.20; for works created after 1977, 4.22--24; for works created before 1978, 4.19, 4.25--29

extensive paraphrasing under, 4.82

of foreign works, 4.28--29, 4.33

law relevant to, 4.2, 4.10, 4.19, 4.25

material covered by, 4.3, 4.5

for new editions, 4.27

of online materials, 4.2, 14.9

ownership of, 1.22, 4.6, 4.7--18, 4.30--31, 4.41

preregistration, 4.49

of previously published materials, 2.43

of public-domain works, 4.21

publisher's responsibilities for, 4.31

"reasonable effort" to correct mistakes, 4.45

registration of, 4.4, 4.47

renewal of, 1.24, 4.19, 4.26, 4.30--32, 4.40, 14.150

subsidiary rights: author's electronic use of own works, 4.62; author's retention of, 4.18; basic rights vs., 4.17; categories of, 4.60; economic considerations, 4.61--62, 4.65; electronic-rights licensing, 4.61; Public Access Policy and, 4.64; university licenses,

4.63 ( see also subsidiary rights)

symbol for, 1.22, 4.40, 10.44

termination of transfers under, 4.37

works ineligible for, 4.11

See also copyright notice; copyright page, contents of; credits and credit lines; fair-use doctrine; intellectual property rights;

licenses for copyrighted works; permissions; publishing agreement

Copyright Act (and amendments), 1.19, 4.2, 4.20, 4.88--90

Copyright Clearance Center (CCC), 1.74, 1.97, 4.91

copyright lines, journals

components of, 1.97

for individual articles, 1.74, 1.97

ISSN in, 1.97

placement of, 1.78, 1.88

copyright management information, 4.15

copyright notice

components, 1.22, 4.40--45, fig. 1.2

different regimes of, 4.2, 4.39

mistakes in, 4.45

necessity for, 4.26

in notes, unnumbered, 3.31, 14.49

old rules, removed, 4.38

placement of, 1.19, 4.42, figs. 1.1--4

types of material: derivative works, 4.44; electronic publications, 1.97; government-produced works, 4.43; journals, 1.74, 1.78,

1.88, 1.97, 4.42; photocopied material, 4.89--90

copyright page, contents of

acknowledgments, 1.19, 1.30--31

author's previous publications, 1.17

biographical notes, 1.20

changes and renewals, 1.24

CIP data, 1.19, 1.33, fig. 1.1, figs. 1.3--4

copyright dates of previous editions, 1.23

copyright notice, 1.22, 4.40

country of printing, 1.19, 1.27

credits, 1.30, 1.70, 3.29, 4.71

editions, 1.23, 1.25--26, 14.118

examples, figs. 1.1--4

grant information, 1.31, 1.40

impression, 1.23--25, 1.28

ISBN, 1.32

pagination omitted from, 1.6

paper durability statement, 1.19, 1.34

permissions, 1.30, 4.71

proofreading of, 2.130

publication date, 1.21--22, 1.25, 14.149

publisher's address, 1.19, 1.21

publishing history, 1.25

running heads omitted from, 1.10

translation information, 1.29, fig. 1.3

See also copyright notice

corporations. See business and commerce; organizations

Council of Science Editors (CSE), 14.3

counties, judicial bodies of, 8.63

countries

adjectives from names, 5.67, 8.44

regions of, 8.46, 8.53

when to abbreviate names, 10.32--33

when to include in documentation, 14.136

See also cities and towns; governmental entities; states (US); and specific countries

courses of study, 8.85

courtesy, in credit lines, 3.32--33, 3.36, 4.98

courts

Canadian, 14.306

international, 14.316

names and terms, treatment in text, 8.63

UK courts, 14.310

US federal, 14.290

US state and local, 14.291

US Supreme Court, 14.289

See also legal cases; legal-style citations; public documents

cover, defined, p. 894

covers of journals and paperback books

artwork: credit lines, 1.70, 1.78; fair use of, 4.83; permissions, 4.94--97

author's previous publications, 1.17

biographical information, 1.20

colophons (logos), 1.66--68

country of printing, 1.27

credit lines, 1.70, 1.78

endpapers, 1.68

gatefolds or French flaps, 1.67

ISBNs and bar codes, 1.32, 1.66, 1.71, 1.78

journal covers and spine, description of, 1.78, 1.108

promotional copy (marketing) on, 1.67--68

proofreading of, 2.105--6, 2.130

See also hardcover books: jackets

Creative Commons, 4.57

credits and credit lines

for author as source, 3.30

fair-use doctrine and, 4.77, 4.85

format of, 4.98

importance of, 4.69, 4.71

placement of, 1.30, 3.29, 4.98, 14.49; copyright page, 1.30; cover or jacket artwork, 1.70, 1.78

proofreading of, 2.105

source and permissions, 3.28, 4.98

types of material: adapted material, 3.36; agency material, 3.35, 4.95--97; commissioned material, 3.32, 4.69; cover or jacket artwork, 1.70, 1.78; illustrations, 3.28--36; obtained free of charge, 3.33; public-domain work, 3.34; translations of quoted materials, 13.76; works that require permission, 3.31

See also permissions; source lines and notes

criminal cases. See legal cases

Croatian language, 11.18--19

crop, defined, p. 894

CrossRef (database), 1.117, 14.6, A.39

cross-references, in bibliographies and reference lists

alternative real names, 14.86

authors preferring initials, 14.73

pseudonyms, 14.84

several chapters from same book, 15.37

cross-references, in indexes

accuracy, 16.130

alphabetizing of, 16.17, 16.20

and used with generic, 16.23

appropriate use of, 16.15, 16.20, 16.76, 16.84, 16.126

blind, 16.16

capitalization of, 16.17, 16.20

checking and editing, 16.130, 16.133

double posting vs., 16.16

generic, 16.23

in indented style, 16.26, 16.28

italics in, 16.15, 16.20, 16.22--23

for names, 16.36, 16.38, 16.42, 16.46, 16.71, 16.76, 16.78, 16.84, 16.89

for organization and business names, 16.88--89

placement and punctuation of, 16.17--20, 16.26, 16.95--98

in run-in style, 16.25

" see also" and " see also under," 16.20--23, 16.26

" see" and " see under," 16.16--19, 16.26

shortened, 16.21

single vs. multiple indexes and, 16.6

subentries and, 16.10, 16.18--20

cross-references, in text

cf. and see, 14.37

checking and editing, 2.29, 2.32, 2.57

mathematical copy, 12.24--25

mathematical definitions, theorems, and such, 12.56

notes and citations, 14.23, 14.26

proofreading, 2.130

specific page numbers, 2.32, 2.57

web-based publications, 1.113--14

CSS (cascading style sheets), A.9, A.21, A.37, p. 894

cultural movements and styles

descriptive designations, 8.71

period names, 8.72--73

treatment in text, 8.59--60, 8.78

See also historical and cultural terminology

curly braces in mathematical expressions, 6.102, 12.26, 12.28. See also brackets

currency

British and other non-US, 9.23--24

dates with, 9.26

dollar symbol in non-US, 9.22

K abbreviation in, 9.25

large amounts of, 9.25

noun phrases for, 5.25

resources on, 9.22

words vs. symbols and numerals for, 9.21

See also bar codes

curves

in graphs, 3.42, 3.49, fig. 3.8

letters describing (e.g., S curve), 7.63

cyan, defined, p. 894

Cyrillic alphabet

capitalization and, 11.119

character sets, 11.92, table 11.3

languages using, 11.18, 11.75

titles of works, 11.120

transliteration, 11.118, table 11.3

word division and, 11.124--28

See also Russian language

Czech language, 11.20--21

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

D

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

daggers and double daggers (symbols), 3.77

dangling terms

gerunds, 5.113

infinitives, 5.107

participles, 5.112

Danish language, 11.22--23

DAs (designer's alterations), 2.131, p. 894

dashes

length of, compared, 6.75

marking manuscript for, 2.93

parentheses compared with, 6.92

preceding epigraph source, 1.36, 13.34

typing, in manuscript preparation, 2.13

See also em dashes; en dashes; hyphens and hyphenation; punctuation; 3-em dashes; 2-em dashes

databases

in documentation: of cases and court decisions, 14.288; of legal and public documents, 14.282, 14.312; library and commercial databases, 14.271; scientific databases, 14.272

online: copyright issues and, 4.46, 4.55--56, 4.60; electronic-rights licensing and, 4.61; in place of index, 1.104; search for copyright owner via, 4.75; web-based project documented in, 2.136; web-based works cross-referenced via, 1.117

dates

abbreviations: days of the week, 10.41; months, 10.40; years, 9.31, 9.63

adjectival use of, 5.82

all-numeral style, 6.45, 6.106, 9.36--37

alphabetizing of, 16.65

avoiding ambiguity in, 6.106, 9.36

centuries, 8.70, 9.33--34

currency with, 9.26

days of the week, 8.87, 10.41

decades, 9.34

in documentation: access dates, 14.7, 14.185, 14.248, 14.282, 15.51; of committee minutes, memoranda, and such, 8.183,

14.240--41; of DVDs and videocassettes, 14.279; of journals, 14.180--81; of magazines, 14.199; of manuscript collections,

14.234; of newspapers, 14.203, 14.205--9; of patents, 14.230; of periodicals, 14.171; of sound recordings, 14.276--77; of unpublished materials, 14.225--28, 14.304, 14.308; of websites and blogs, 14.244--46; years, in reference lists, 15.12

fiscal year (FY), 6.105, 9.63

in foreword, 1.39

holidays, 8.88

incomplete, 6.79

months, 8.87, 9.32, 10.40, 14.80

numbers for: decades, 9.34; eras, 9.35, 9.63; ISO all-numeral style, 9.37; month and day, 9.32; month-day-year and other forms,

6.45, 6.106, 9.36--37; year abbreviated, 9.31; year alone, 9.30

periods: centuries, 8.70, 9.33--34; cultural, 8.73; decades, 9.34; descriptive designations, 8.71; eras, 9.35, 9.63, 10.39;

geological, 8.134; numerical designations for, 8.70; traditional names for, 8.72

in preface, 1.40

punctuation: commas, 5.82, 6.17, 6.45, 14.199; en dashes, 6.78--79; hyphens, 9.37; slashes, 6.105--6

in titles of works, 14.101

uncertain, 6.66

unknown date of death, 6.79

work period known (fl.), 10.43

years: abbreviated (e.g., '76), 9.31; inclusive range of, 9.58, 9.63; incomplete range of, 6.79; placement in reference lists, 15.12;

plurals of, 7.14; sentence beginning with, 9.5; slash with two-year spans, 6.105; uncertain, 6.66; unknown date of death,

6.79; words vs. numerals for, 9.30; work period known (fl.), 10.43

See also publication date; time

days of the week, 8.87, 10.41. See also dates

dead (foul) copy or proofs, 2.102, 2.107

deadlines

indexing, 16.4, 16.101

proofreading, 2.99

publication schedule, 2.2, A.2, figs. 2.1--2

Deaf, deaf, 8.42

debates, documentation of

governmental bodies, 8.61, 8.64

UK parliamentary, 14.313

US congressional, 14.298--99

decades, 9.34

decimal points

in celestial coordinates, 10.64

dex ( decimal exponent), 9.12

in double and multiple numeration, 1.55

with millions, billions, and so forth, 9.8, 9.25

in monetary amounts, 9.21, 9.23--26

number of places in, non-US style, 9.20

in tables, alignment of, 3.70, 3.84, fig. 3.13, figs. 3.15--16, fig. 3.20

in twenty-four-hour system, 9.40--41

use of zero and, 9.19

See also fractions

dedications

format and placement of, 1.6, 1.35

omitted in indexing, 16.109

running heads omitted from page, 1.10

definite article. See articles (definite and indefinite)

definitions

highlighted in index, 16.143

mathematical, 12.56

numbering of, 12.25

punctuation of, 7.50

See also dictionaries; glossaries

degrees (academic). See academic concerns: degrees and affiliations

degrees (measurement), abbreviations for, 10.52--53, 10.55. See also

International System of Units (SystÃ¨me international d'unitÃ©s, SI); measurement, US; metric system

deities, 8.90--91, 8.94. See also religions and religious concerns; religious works

deletions

marking manuscript for, 2.91--92, 2.121, fig. 2.6

stetting or reversal of, 2.127

departments

administrative type, 8.62

capitalization, 14.202

in magazines, 8.175, 14.202

See also academic concerns: institutions and departments

derivative works

copyright issues and, 4.30, 4.44

electronic works created with addition of hyperlinks, video data, and such, 4.60

license to make, 4.33

material copyrightable in, 4.5

public-domain work in, 4.21

publishing options for, A.39--40

relicensing of, 4.30

rights of copyright owner and, 4.14

See also collected works; compilations; edited works; previously published materials

descender, defined, p. 894

design and production

em spaces, en spaces, and such, A.22

of journals, 1.78, 1.108, 1.110

length determinations, A.18

manuscript preparation: checklist, 2.74; markup, 2.55--56, 2.70--71, 2.78, 2.96, 6.102; pagination, 2.72; running heads, 2.73;

type specifications, 2.71

mapping markup to, A.16

picas, points, and pixels, A.21, pp. 899, 900

printed works, specifications, 1.64, A.19, fig. A.4

style sheets, A.9, A.17, fig. A.3

terminology in, A.3

of web-based publications, specifications, 1.112, 2.135, A.20

See also illustrations; print technologies; production and digital technology; typesetters and typesetting; typographic considerations

designer's alterations (DAs), 2.131, p. 894

developmental editing, 2.45

dex ( decimal exponent), 9.12

diacritical marks

alphabetizing and, 16.29, 16.67

author's list of, 2.3, 11.12, 12.13

in foreign languages, 11.2, 11.12, tables 11.1--5 ( see also specific languages)

manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.3, 2.15, 11.12, 12.13

in mathematical expressions, 12.10, 12.13

proofreading, 2.110, 2.129

software and fonts for, 2.15

transliterations, specialized vs. general contexts, 11.94

XML character references for, A.15

See also diphthongs; ligatures; symbols, specific; Unicode standard

diaeresis (Greek), 11.130, 11.133

diagrams

genealogical, 3.45

text references and callouts for, 2.27

wording of, 2.63

See also charts and graphs; illustrations

dialect, 5.23, 5.218, 10.43

dialogue

alternatives to quotation marks in, 13.40

dialect in, 5.218

direct discourse, 13.37, 13.42

in drama, 13.44--45

fair use and, 4.80

faltering or interrupted, 6.16, 6.84, 13.39, 13.48

in field notes, 13.47

flush-and-hang style in, 13.44--45

in foreign-language materials: French, 11.34--35; Italian, 11.52; Russian, 11.121; Spanish, 11.78--81

indirect discourse, 13.43

interjections in, 5.208

in interviews and discussions, 13.46

numerals in, 13.42

paragraphing of, 13.30--33

permissible changes to, 13.8

punctuation of: colon preceding, 6.61, 6.63; ellipsis and suspension points, 13.39, 13.51--56; em dashes, 6.88, 13.39; quotation marks, 13.30--33, 13.37--43

single-word speech, 13.38

titles and offices of people in, 8.19

unspoken discourse, 13.41

See also direct address; quotations; speech

diaries, chronological order of, 1.51. See also letters (correspondence); manuscript collections

dictionaries

abbreviations in, 10.1, 10.32

as alphabetizing guides, 16.71

alphabetizing letter-by-letter in, 16.58

for alphabet tables, 11.96, 11.111

biographical, 7.38, 8.3, 16.71, 16.84

contractions in, 7.29

documentation of, 14.247--48

for forms of address, 8.32

geographical, 7.38, 8.43

music, 7.66, 8.188

noun coinages, plurals of, 7.13

online versions, 1.111, 1.113, 1.114, 7.5, 7.66

organizing principle of, 1.116

for plant and animal names, 8.118, 8.127

plural forms in, 7.5--9, 7.13

problematic words and, 5.220

recommended, 2.51, 2.109, 5.220, 7.1--2

running heads in, 1.12

supplements to, 7.4

for technical abbreviations, 10.52

word division and, 7.31

See also encyclopedias; reference works

die copy, 2.105

Digital Library Federation, 1.107

Digital Object Identifiers. See DOIs (Digital Object Identifiers)

digital printing, defined, A.48, p. 894

digital proofs, defined, p. 894

digital rights management (DRM), A.40, p. 894

digital technology. See production and digital technology

diphthongs

capitalization, 11.24

foreign languages: Dutch, 11.24; French, 11.36; German, 11.45; Greek, 11.138; Italian, 11.55; Latin, 11.60; Russian, 11.128;

Spanish, 11.82

never divided, 7.34, 11.36, 11.45, 11.82, 11.138

Dirac bracket notation, 12.55

direct address

numerals in, 13.42

punctuation: colons, 6.64; commas, 6.38; quotation marks, 13.37--39

titles and offices of people in, 8.19, 10.17

See also dialogue; quotations; speech

directions. See compass points and directions

direct quotations. See block quotations; direct address; quotations; run-in quotations

disciplines and subjects

capitalization for course names, 8.85

as descriptive titles for persons, 8.29

spellings peculiar to, 7.2

treatment of names, 8.84--85

See also academic concerns; scholarly works, generally

discographies, 14.275, fig. 14.12

discussions. See dialogue; direct address; interviews and discussions; personal communications; speech; transcriptions

diseases, infections, procedures, and such, 8.143--44

display

pages, 1.6, 1.10--11, 1.15

type and punctuation, 6.14, p. 894

dissertations and theses

abstracts of, 14.197; documentation of, 14.224; lectures and papers treated as, 14.226; microform editions, 14.120; URLs, 14.224;

working papers treated as, 14.228

titles of, in text, 8.184

distance, abbreviations for, 10.52. See also measurement, US; metric system; physical quantities

distribution

contract concerning, 4.50

copyright owner's right of, 4.13

documentation of, 14.148

license for, 4.33

subsidiary rights to, 4.60

ditto marks, 3.60, 10.43

division of words. See word division

divisions of books. See books: divisions of

documentation

basic elements, 14.69

basic systems, 14.2--3

books as model for other materials, 14.68

editing of, 2.60--61

flexibility and consistency, 2.61, 14.70

purpose of, 14.1

remedies for excessive: abbreviations for frequently cited works, 14.54--55, fig. 14.7; avoiding overlong notes, 14.51; combining notes, 14.52; text citations, 14.53

resources on, 14.3

shortened citations ( see shortened citations)

source citation software, 1.83, 14.13

unusual cases in, 14.89

See also author-date reference system; bibliographies; credits and credit lines; notes; notes and bibliography system;

reference lists; source lines and notes; and specific items to document (e.g., books; newspapers)

document comparison software, 2.82, 2.85

document type definitions (DTDs), A.8--9, A.27, p. 894. See also codes and coding; markup tags and languages; tags;

XML (extensible markup language)

DOIs (Digital Object Identifiers), 1.74, 14.4, 14.6, 14.10, 15.4, p. 894

in documentation: of books, 14.167; of dictionary and encyclopedia entries, 14.248; of journal articles, 14.18, 14.184--85, 15.9

International DOI Foundation, 14.6

for journal articles, 1.79, 1.97

as metadata, A.10

treatment in text, 14.11--12; when to capitalize, 14.18

See also URLs (uniform resource locators)

dollars. See currency

double posting, 16.16 ( see also cross-references, in indexes)

"down" style (capitalization), 8.1, 8.46

drama

divisions of, 8.182

documentation of: classical works, 14.260, 14.267--68; frequently cited works, 13.65, 14.54; reviews, 14.214, 14.216; short forms for, 14.268

ellipsis points in, 13.55

quotation of, 13.44--45, 13.55

titles of, 8.181

See also classical works; dialogue; speech

drawings. See artwork; charts and graphs; illustrations; line art

DRM (digital rights management), A.40, p. 894

drop caps, 13.35, p. 894

drop folios, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.48

drug names, 8.145

DTDs. See document type definitions (DTDs)

dust jackets, 1.69, p. 894. See also covers of journals and paperback books; hardcover books: jackets

Dutch language, 8.10, 11.24--25

DVDs, documentation of, 14.279. See also audiovisual materials

dynasties, 9.46, 11.105

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

E

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

each, 5.32, 5.64, 5.220

earth

continents and oceans, 5.67, 8.44, 8.52

when to capitalize, 8.139

See also compass points and directions; geographical terminology

EAs (editor's alterations), 2.131--32, p. 894

East, eastern, 8.45--46

e-books. See books, electronic; electronic publications

economic terminology and periods

financial, abbreviations of, 10.72

organizations, alliances, and such, 8.65, 8.69

unofficial groups, 8.40--41, 8.66

See also business and commerce; institutions; organizations

edited by

on title page, 1.18

when to abbreviate or spell out, 14.15--16, 14.88, 14.127, 15.6, 15.15

edited works, 4.53, fig. 4.1. See also collected works; compilations; derivative works; editors; multiauthor volumes

editing, types of, 1.109, 2.45--48. See also manuscript editing

editions

abbreviation of term, 14.15--16, 14.118, 15.6, 15.15

copyright issues, 1.25, 4.5, 4.27

on copyright page, 1.19, 1.23, 1.25, fig. 1.2

definition and preferences concerning, 1.26, p. 895

documentation of: in classical references, 14.260, 14.262, 14.267; of copublications, 14.147; of dictionaries and encyclopedias,

14.247; of electronic books, 14.166--69; folio, page citation for, 14.162, 14.236; microform, 14.120; of newspapers, 14.203;

other than first, 14.118; publication date, 14.149; reprint and modern, 14.119; reprint and modern, more than one date, 15.38

facsimile, 1.46

impression compared with, 1.23, 1.26

number of, 1.18, 1.67

preface for new, 1.40

publishing agreement on subsequent, 4.51

styling of titles, 8.174

editorial board, list of, 1.78, 1.81

editorial interpolations and additions, 6.53, 6.66, 6.73, 6.97

editorials, 1.96. See also letters to the editor

editorial style of journal, 1.109, 2.61

editorial we, 5.45

editors

abbreviation of term, 10.43, 14.15--16, 14.64--65, 14.87--88, 15.6, 15.15

anthology permissions and, 4.101

biographical notes on, 1.20

collective works and copyright ownership of, 4.8

interpolations, clarifications, and additions of, 6.97, 13.57--61

of journals, 1.78, 1.83, 1.85, 1.96

manuscript preparation guidelines for, 2.38--39

notes of, 1.44, 1.88, 14.46

preface by, 1.40

publishing agreement and, 4.53, 4.58

web-based publications and, 1.112

See also authors; editors' names; manuscript editors; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors; multiauthor volumes

editor's alterations (EAs), 2.131--32, p. 894

editors' names

on covers or jackets, 1.66, 1.67, 1.68

in documentation, 14.18, 15.9; abbreviation of term, 14.15--16, 14.64--65, 14.87--88, 15.6, 15.15, 15.18; in addition to author,

14.88; author vs., 14.90; of book reviews, 14.215; of classical references, 14.260, 14.263--65; of journal supplements, 14.188;

of multivolume works, 14.122--23, 14.126--27; omission of editor in text citations, 15.7; in place of author, 14.87, 15.35; of series of volumes, 14.128--29; of special issues of journals, 14.187; text citations, 15.35

form of, 1.18

in multiauthor volumes, 1.62

proofreading of, 2.130

shortened citation of, 14.25--27

See also authors' names

educational use of materials

author's own work in electronic format, 4.62

copyright issues, 4.60

customized course packs, 4.90

fair-use doctrine, 4.88--91

e.g.

i.e. compared with, 5.220

meaning of, 10.43

punctuation with, 6.43

roman type for, 10.7

either--or, 5.32--34, 5.195, 5.214

electronic files

archival practices for, 1.107

backups of, 2.37, 2.75, 2.77, 2.86

cleaning up, 2.36, 2.50, 2.60, 2.76--77

conversion of, A.28--29

as copyrightable, 4.3

creating separate vs. single, 2.33

directory considerations, 2.34

document comparison software, 2.82, 2.85

edited manuscript sent as, 2.68

illustrations and tables, preparation of: artwork, prints vs. scans, 2.24; digital files, 3.15, A.32; identified for publisher, 3.16; notes and source notes, 2.28; numbering of, 2.25--26; preparation of charts, 3.42; preparation of tables, 3.46; separate files for each component, 2.23, 2.33, 3.16; submission to publisher, 3.3--4, 3.15; text references and callouts, 2.27; in XML workflow,

A.24, fig. A.5

indexer's use of, 16.102, 16.105

index submitted as, 16.131

for mathematical copy, 12.2

MP3 audio files, 10.52, 14.198, 14.221

naming of, 2.34, 2.75

numbering pages in, 2.35

password-protection of, 2.84

prepress proofs generated from, 2.104, A.43

slashes in names and paths, 6.110

terminology for, 7.76, 14.225

version control, 2.5, 2.84

See also keyboarding; manuscript editing; PDF (portable document format) files; redlining (tracking and showing changes);

word processing

electronic mailing lists, 14.223. See also e-mail; URLs (uniform resource locators)

electronic publications, 1.2

authority and permanence of, 14.9

copyright: authors' use of own, 4.62; deposit requirements, 4.46; new editions, 1.26; relevant law, 4.2, 4.10; right of public display, 4.13; rights, 4.33; rights licensing, in publishing agreement, 4.61; subsidiary rights, 4.60; transfers of rights, 4.55

documentation of, 15.4; access dates, 14.7, 14.185, 14.248; CD-ROMs and fixed media, 14.166, 14.168; consulted online, 14.167;

downloaded from library or bookseller, 14.166; editions of older works, 14.169; examples of, 14.18, 15.9; identifiers for,

14.4--6, 14.11--12, 14.170--71; "last modified" and other revision dates, 14.8; page numbers and other locators, 14.17; "print"

elements in, 1.116; source citation software and, 1.83, 14.13; versions in other media, 14.10

ISBNs for, 1.32

periodicals as, 14.170--71

production process considerations, A.4

proofing and testing of, 2.133--36

submission requirements for, 2.4

text and other components: embedded indexes, 1.117, 16.7, 16.102, A.7; illustrations, 1.100, 3.8, 3.37, A.32; mathematical expressions, A.34; notes, 14.14; running heads, 1.11; tables, 1.99, 3.47, 3.74, A.33

titles of, 8.186--87

unique identifiers for (URLs and DOIs), 1.74, 14.18, 14.184, 14.198, 15.9

See also articles, electronic; books, electronic; DOIs (Digital Object Identifiers); hyperlinks; journals, electronic; online media;

URLs (uniform resource locators); web-based publications

elisions, 6.49, 12.19--20. See also ellipsis points

ellipses, defined, 13.48. See also ellipsis points

ellipsis points, 13.48--56

cleanup process and, 2.77

danger of skewed meaning with, 13.49

definition and use, 13.48

editing of, 2.58, 13.48

foreign-language uses: French, 11.35; Italian, 11.54; Spanish, 11.81

other punctuation with, 13.52; adjustments to, 13.7, 13.53; brackets, 13.56; periods, 13.51; in poetry and verse drama, 13.55;

whole or partial paragraphs omitted, 13.54

spacing of, 11.54, 13.48

suspension points converted to, 11.10, 11.35

uses, other: in deliberately incomplete sentences, 13.53; in drama, 13.55; in mathematical expressions, 12.19--20; for partial or whole paragraphs, 13.54; in poetry, 13.55; in quotations, 13.7, 13.51--56; shortening very long titles, 14.106; in table cells,

3.65, fig. 3.15, fig. 3.18

when not to use, 13.50

See also suspension points

em, defined, p. 895

e-mail

addresses, 14.11; hyperlinks to, 1.114; hyphenation issues, 6.77; line breaks, 7.42; punctuation with, 6.8

documentation of: mailing list materials, 14.223; messages and personal communications, 14.222, 15.48

em dashes, 6.82--89

in cleanup process, 2.77

definition, p. 895

in foreign languages: French, 11.31, 11.34; other punctuation with, 11.10; for quotations, 13.71; Russian, 11.121, 11.123; Spanish,

11.79--80

keyboarding for manuscript, 2.13

length of, 6.75

marking manuscript for, 2.93

marking proofs for, 2.129

other punctuation with, 6.84, 6.87, 11.10

uses, other: in indexes, 16.27, 16.99; instead of commas, parentheses, or colons, 6.82, 6.86; instead of quotation marks, 6.88; to set off "not" phrase, 6.41; between subject and pronoun, 6.83; in subtitles, 8.162; for sudden breaks, 6.84, 13.39; for table cells with no data, 3.65, fig. 3.15; before that is, namely, for example, and such, 6.43, 6.85

See also dashes; en dashes; hyphens and hyphenation; 3-em dashes; 2-em dashes

emphasis

added to original quotation, 13.60

capitals for, 7.48

italics for, 7.47, 7.54

in notes, 14.32

quotation marks for, 7.57

scare quotes for, 7.55, 11.52, 14.102

so-called and, 7.56

for words used as words, 7.58

em spaces

in design specifications, A.22

marking for, 2.123

in runover lines of index, 16.28

encyclopedias

documentation of, 14.247--48

entries in, as work made for hire, 4.10

See also dictionaries; reference works

en dashes, 6.78--81

accurate use of, 2.13

definition, p. 895

length of, 6.75

marking manuscript for, 2.93

marking proofs for, 2.129

punctuation and spacing with, 6.79

slash instead of, 6.105

uses: in compound adjectives, 6.80; in harmonic progressions, 7.69; in inclusive dates, 6.78--79, 14.122, 14.151; in inclusive numbers, 3.81, 6.78, 9.27, 9.34, 9.58, 16.100; in indexes, 16.100; as minus sign, 6.81; in musical pitch series, 7.67; for place-names within institutional names, 6.46; as to, 6.78; for unfinished number range, 6.79; when not to use, 9.59

See also dashes; em dashes; hyphens and hyphenation; inclusive (or continuing) numbers

end matter. See back matter

endnotes

basic approach, 14.38, 14.40

editing of, 2.59

footnotes used with, 14.44--46, fig. 14.4

footnotes vs., 14.38--43, figs. 14.2--3

format and examples of, 1.59, 14.41, figs. 14.2--3

keyed to line or page numbers, 14.48, fig. 14.6

length considerations for, 14.51

manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.20

numbering of, 14.19--23

in previously published materials, 2.42

running heads: checking proofs for, 2.111; definition and importance, 1.9; description of, 1.14, 1.59, 14.42; example of, fig. 14.2;

preparation of, 2.73

special needs of, 14.43

See also footnotes; notes; shortened citations

endpapers, defined, 1.68, p. 895

English language

abbreviation of English, 10.43

Old and Middle, 7.46, 11.142--43

See also British style; classical works

en spaces, in design specifications, A.22

environmental issues in publishing, A.46

enzyme names, 8.132

epigraphs

fair use and, 4.80

format and placement of, 1.36, 13.34

notes to, 1.36, 1.48, 14.47

omitted in indexing, 16.109

pagination omitted from page, 1.6

as part of chapter displays, 1.48

quotation marks omitted from, 13.34

running heads omitted from page, 1.10

epilogues, 1.52

epithets, 8.33--34, 8.47

equals signs

in genealogical tables, 3.45, fig. 3.10

scholarly use of, 10.44

in URLs and e-mail addresses, 7.42

See also mathematical expressions

equal-space mark, 2.122

equation. See mathematical expressions

eras, 9.35, 9.63, 10.39. See also periods of time

errata

books, 1.65, 2.104

journals, 1.86--87, 1.105

errors

avoiding of, 2.53, 2.105, 13.5

correction of, 1.28

elimination of, 2.2

in file conversion, 2.77, 2.110

indexer's notation of, 16.125

in prepress proofs, 2.104, A.43

proofreading for, 2.108

in quotations, 13.7

responsibility assigned for, 2.131--32

See also alterations; errata; permissible changes to quoted materials; proofreading

eszett, 11.48

et al.

appropriate use of, 5.220

in documentation: author-date references, 15.24, 15.28; four or more authors, 14.76; shortened citations, 14.27

indexing authors' names and, 16.115

meaning of, 10.43

punctuation with, 6.20, 6.117, 10.4

roman type for, 7.53

etc. ( et cetera)

appropriate use of, 5.220

meaning of, 10.43

punctuation with, 6.20

roman type for, 10.7

ethnic groups, 7.9, 8.37--38. See also countries; peoples

et seq. , 10.43, 16.13

Europe

currency, 9.21, 9.24

resources on EU, 14.316

European style

all-numeral dates, 9.36--37

decimal places, 9.20

metric units, spelling of, 8.151

numerals with sovereigns, 9.42

space between digits, 9.56

twenty-four-hour system of time, 9.40--41

See also British style

events

historical, 8.74

natural phenomena, 8.76

religious, 8.88, 8.107, 8.109

speeches, 8.75

sporting, 8.77

every, 5.32

exclamation points, 6.71--74

marking proofs for, 2.129

other punctuation with: brackets, 6.73--74; commas, 6.119; ellipsis points, 13.52; em dashes, 6.87; parentheses, 6.74, 6.96; periods, 6.118; question marks, 6.120; quotation marks, 6.10, 6.74, 13.28, 13.67

uses: appropriate, 6.71; direct question, 6.72; editorial protest or amusement, 6.73; inverted, in Spanish works, 11.10, 11.78;

sentence or phrase with oh and ah, 6.37; in titles of works, 6.118--19, 14.78, 14.100, 14.105, 16.54

See also interjections and exclamations; punctuation

exhibitions, 8.195, 14.250

exponents

abbreviations with, 10.69

dex ( decimal exponent), 9.12

rewriting fractions using, 12.49

See also mathematical expressions

expression, defined in copyright, 4.5

extracts. See block quotations

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

F

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

facsimile edition, 1.46

fact-checking, 2.53, 13.5

fair-use doctrine

Chicago's guidelines for, 4.87

general rules, 4.79

legal overview, 4.77

photocopying and, 1.97, 4.88--91

and specific materials: attribution of, 4.85, 4.98--99; charts, tables, and graphs, 4.84; epigraphs, 4.80; interior monologues, 4.80;

paraphrasing of, 4.82, 13.4; pictorial and graphic, 4.83; unpublished works, 4.81

statements on, 1.78

validity of "rules of thumb," 4.78

when permissions are unnecessary, 4.86

See also acknowledgments; credits and credit lines; permissible changes to quoted materials; source lines and notes

F&Gs (folded and gathered proofs), 2.104, A.49, A.7, p. 896

federal court decisions. See legal cases; legal-style citations; public documents

Federal Register, 14.301

ff. , 10.43, 14.156, 16.13

fiction

characters in, 5.123, 8.34, 8.36

copyright registration forms for, 4.47

subsidiary rights for motion pictures, 4.60

trademark protection and, 4.16

See also dialogue; literary works

field notes, 13.47

figures (figs.)

abbreviation of term, 10.43, 14.157, 14.165

definition, p. 895

documentation of, 14.165

text references to, 3.9

use of term, 3.1, 3.5, 3.23

See also artwork; captions; illustrations; numbers

figures of speech

quotation marks omitted from, 13.5, 13.36

treatment of, 7.57, 7.59, 8.197

files, defined, p. 895. See also computer software; electronic files

file transfer protocol (FTP), 14.11--12, p. 896

film. See audiovisual materials; movies and film; online media

filmstrips, documentation of, 14.278

financial terminology, 10.72. See also business and commerce; currency; economic terminology and periods; institutions; organizations

Finnish language, 11.26--27

first lines

indexes of, 16.6, 16.144--45

references to, 8.180

fiscal year (FY), 6.105, 9.63

fl. ( floruit), 10.43

fl ( flush left), 2.124

flexibinding, defined, p. 895

flush, defined, p. 896

flush-and-hang style (hanging indention)

for bibliographies, 1.61, 2.22, fig. 14.8

definition, p. 896

for glossaries, 2.21

for indexes, 16.24, 16.106, 16.131

for lists of abbreviations, 2.21

for play (dialogue) excerpts, 13.44--45

for reference lists, 1.61, 2.22

runover lines in, 2.11, 2.22

for vertical lists, 6.124

See also indented style (indexes); run-in style (indexes)

flush left or right

marking manuscript for, 2.95

marking proofs for, 2.124

See also margins

flyleaf, 1.68

folded and gathered proofs (F&Gs), 2.104, A.49, fig. A.7, p. 896

folios

definition, p. 896

folio editions, 14.162, 14.236

manuscript collections, 14.236

See also page numbers (folios)

fonts (typefaces)

cautions concerning, 2.15

in cleanup process, 2.77

definition, pp. 896, 902

design specifications for, A.21

history of terms, A.3

marking proofs for changes to, 2.128

old Gothic or Fraktur type, 11.48, 12.64--65, 12.67

permissible changes to, 13.8

proofreading of, 2.110, 2.128

sans serif, p. 902

serif, p. 902

See also boldface; italics; roman (type)

footnotes

author-date references with, 14.45

basic approach, 14.38--39

checking on proofs, 2.130

editing of, 2.59

endnotes used with, 14.44--46, fig. 14.4

endnotes vs., 14.38--43, figs. 14.2--3

keyed to line or page numbers, 14.48, fig. 14.5

length considerations, 14.35--36, 14.51, fig. 14.1

manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.20

numbering of, 14.19--23

in previously published materials, 2.42

pros and cons of, 14.39

for tables, 2.28, 3.74--78, fig. 3.14, fig. 3.22, fig. 3.24

unnumbered, 1.49, 14.47

See also endnotes; notes; shortened citations

foreign-language materials

capitalization, 11.3, 11.6--7, 11.59, 14.107, 14.193

copyright for, 4.28--29, 4.33, 4.60, 4.70

in documentation: bibliographic terms, 14.71; English forms of cities (place of publication), 14.137; journal articles, 14.192--94;

newspaper names, 14.211; publisher's name, 14.142; series titles, 14.128; titles of works ( see titles of works, below) English context considered, 11.4, 11.10

IPA notation, 11.13

permissible changes to, 8.163, 8.167, 11.4, 11.10, 13.7, 13.77--78

punctuation: brackets, 14.108; em dashes, 6.88; exclamation points, 11.78, 11.122; guillemets, 11.4, 11.10; question marks,

11.78, 11.122, 11.136; quotation marks, 6.9; suspension points, 11.10, 11.35, 11.54, 11.81, 11.122

quotations from, 13.71; original-language version in note, 13.75; retranslation caution, 13.79; translation adjusted, 13.77;

translation credited, 13.76; translation edited, 13.78; translation plus source, 13.74; typographic style of, 13.71; where to place translation, 13.73; whether to include translation, 13.72

special characters, generally, 11.2, 11.12, tables 11.1--5

titles of works: brackets for, 14.108; capitalization, 11.3, 11.6--7, 11.59, 14.107, 14.193--94; cautions about shortening, 2.73;

indexing of, 16.48--49, 16.52--53; italic vs. roman type, 11.5, 11.30, 11.59, 11.109, 11.120, 14.108--10; original plus published translation, 14.109; original spelling preserved, 8.163; permissible changes to, 8.163, 11.4, 11.10; translated title supplied by author or editor, 14.108; unpublished translation of title standing for original, 14.110; use of original vs. translated

title, 11.7

titles of works, specific languages: Chinese, 11.109; French, 11.30; Japanese, 11.109; Latin, 11.59; Russian, 11.120

See also diacritical marks; diphthongs; foreign-language names; foreign words and phrases; guillemets; ligatures; symbols, specific;

Unicode standard; and specific languages

foreign-language names

personal: indexing of, 16.76--87; particles with, 8.5; treatment in English context, 8.7--17

personal, by group: Arabic, 8.14; Asian, generally, 16.87; Burmese, 16.77; Chinese, 8.15, 11.103, 11.105, 11.108, 16.78; Dutch,

8.10; French, 8.7; German, 8.8; Hungarian, 8.13, 16.79; Indian, 16.80; Indonesian, 8.17, 16.81; Italian, 8.9; Japanese, 8.16,

11.107--8, 16.82; Portuguese, 8.8, 16.83; Russian, 8.12; Spanish, 8.11, 16.84; Thai, 16.85; Vietnamese, 16.86

proper names, other: companies and businesses, 10.22; definite articles in place-names, 16.92; English forms of city names, 14.137;

generic term in geographic names, 8.54; institutions, 11.8; newspaper names, 14.211; nouns, roman for, 7.51; places and structures, 8.58; publisher's names, 14.142

foreign rights, 4.28--29, 4.33, 4.60, 4.70

foreign words and phrases

alphabetizing of, 16.67, 16.92

bibliographic terms, 14.71

first use of, 7.49, 7.54, 11.95

generic terms in geographic names, 8.54

glossaries of, 1.60

glosses or translations for, 6.93, 7.50

italics for unfamiliar words, 7.49--50, 7.52

ligatures in, 7.46

as mottoes, 8.197

plurals of, 7.11

punctuation: brackets, 6.93; parentheses and quotation marks, 6.93, 7.50, 7.55

roman type: familiar words, 7.52; Latin words, 7.49--50, 7.52--7.53; proper nouns, 7.51

word division: general principles, 11.11; Arabic, 11.101; French, 11.36--39; German, 11.45--47; Greek, 11.138--41; Hebrew,

11.115; Italian, 11.55--57; Latin, 11.60--63; Polish, 11.68; Russian, 11.124--28; Spanish, 11.82--84; two-letter word endings,

7.37

forewords

appropriate use of, 5.220

documentation of, 14.91, 14.116

editor's, 1.40

format of, 1.39

indexing of, 16.109

material appropriate for, 1.42

mentioned on covers or jackets, 1.67

references to, 8.177

as work made for hire, 4.10

for example, 6.43, 6.56, 6.65, 6.85

formatting manuscript for submission. See manuscript preparation guidelines for authors

forms of address, 6.64, 8.32, 10.16--17. See also dialogue; direct address; speech

Fort

abbreviations of, 10.31

French place-names with, 11.29

indexing of, 16.90, 16.93

forthcoming

appropriate use of term, 8.184, 14.153

in notes and bibliographies, 14.182

in reference lists, 15.17, 15.42

foul (dead) copy or proofs, 2.102, 2.107

fr ( flush right), 2.124

fractions

case, 12.45

hyphenation of, 7.85

mathematical copy: in display, 12.46; multiple and multilevel, 12.48; rewritten with exponents, 12.49; subscripts and superscripts,

12.47; in text, 12.45

simple, 9.14--15

slash with, 6.108, 12.45, 12.47

symbols for, 6.108

whole numbers with, 9.15

See also decimal points

Fraktur type, 11.48, 12.64--65, 12.67

France, currency, 9.24. See also French language

French flaps (gatefolds), 1.67

French language, 11.28--40

abbreviations, 10.17, 10.43

capitalization, 11.29--30

decimal places, 9.20

dialogue, 11.34

ligatures, 7.46

proper names, 8.7, 11.29

punctuation: em dashes, 11.34; guillemets, 11.32; periods omitted from contractions, 10.4; quotation marks, 11.33; spacing with,

11.31--32; suspension points and ellipses, 11.35

resources on, 11.28, 11.30

Saint in place-names, 11.29

social titles, 10.17

special characters, 11.40

titles of works: capitalization, 11.30; indexing of, 16.48, 16.52

word division: consonants, 11.37; vowels, 11.36; words best not divided, 11.39; words with apostrophes, 11.38

frontispiece

caption for, 3.22

pagination and use, 1.17, 1.38

front matter, 1.4, 1.16--44

abbreviations list in, 1.43, fig. 1.8

acknowledgments, 1.85

biographical notes, 1.17, 1.20

chronologies, 1.58, fig. 1.9

contributors list, 1.62

copyright information ( see copyright notice; copyright page)

dedication, 1.35

editing of, 2.54

editorials, 1.96

in electronic journals, 1.81--86

epigraph and epigraph source, 1.36

foreword, 1.39

frontispiece, 1.17, 1.38, 3.22

illustrations list, 1.38, 3.37, figs. 1.6--7

indexing of, 16.109

information for contributors, 1.84

introduction appropriate to, 1.42

pagination of, 1.4, 1.6, 1.8, 1.17

preface, 1.40

publisher's, translator's, and editor's notes, 1.44

running heads, 1.10, 1.15

series title, 1.4, 1.17

special issue noted, 1.78, 1.83, 1.85

table of contents, 1.37, 1.83, fig. 1.5

title page, 1.16--18

of web-based publications, 1.115

See also many of the above elements under their own headings

FTP (file transfer protocol), 14.11--12, p. 896

full caps (capitals)

abbreviations for avenue, street, and such, 10.34

abbreviations for eras, 9.35, 9.63, 10.39

compass points in addresses, 10.35

computer keys and menu items, 7.73--74

and emphasis, 7.48

letters as shapes, 7.63

letters as words, plurals of, 7.14

letters standing for names, 7.62

musical elements, 7.67--68, 7.70

preferred to small caps, 9.35, 10.8, 10.24, 10.39, 10.42, 14.284

scholastic letter grades, 7.60

See also capital letters

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

G

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

galleries

definition, p. 896

list of illustrations in, 3.38

manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.25

noted in table of contents, 1.37, 1.38, fig. 1.7

numbering illustrations in, 3.14

placement of, 3.6

plates in, 3.5

unpaginated, 1.5, 3.6, fig. 1.7

galley proofs, 2.101, p. 896

gatefolds (French flaps), 1.67

gender

definition of noun gender, 5.14

pronouns: antecedents of different genders, 5.34; of indeterminate gender, 5.45; it, third-person singular, 5.41

when to use language for specific, 5.229

See also bias-free language

genealogical charts, 3.45, fig. 3.10. See also charts and graphs

generic markup, 2.55--56, 2.70--71, 2.78, 2.96, 6.102. See also markup tags and languages

genetics, 8.130--32

genitives

definition and uses of, 5.12, 5.19--20

form of, 5.39

possessives, 7.24

prepositional phrase replaced by, 5.187

pronoun and gender in, 5.41

See also possessives

genus and species

abbreviation of genus name, 8.120

authorities on, 8.118

author names and, 8.123

divisions higher than genus, 8.125

English derivatives from, 8.126

italics for, 8.2, 8.119, 8.171

plant hybrids, 8.124

subspecies and varieties, 8.121

unspecified species and varieties, 8.122

geographical terminology

abbreviation of geography, 10.43

abbreviations: avenue, street, and such, 10.34; Canadian provinces and territories, 10.29; city plus state, comma with, 10.30;

compass points, 10.35--36; country names, 10.32; latitude and longitude, 10.37; place-names with Fort, Saint, and such,

10.31, 11.29, 16.90, 16.93; US, when to use, 10.33; US states and territories, 10.28

continents, countries, cities, oceans, and such, 5.67, 8.44, 8.52

foreign terms for, 8.54, 11.29

generic terms for, 8.53

generic terms with proper names, 8.52, 8.55, 11.59

real vs. metaphorical names, 8.49

regions, 8.46, 8.53

urban areas, 8.48

See also compass points and directions; place-names

geological terminology

abbreviation of geology, 10.43

formal vs. generic, 8.134

resources on, 8.133

stratigraphy, 8.135

German language, 11.41--48

articles (parts of speech), 16.52

billion, 5.220

capitalization, 7.52, 11.41--42, 14.193

names, 8.8

new orthography of, 11.41

nouns, 7.52, 11.42

punctuation, 11.43--44

special characters, 11.48

titles of works, indexing of, 16.48, 16.52

word division: compounds, 11.47; consonants, 11.46; vowels, 11.45

Germany

currency, 9.24

formerly GDR (German Democratic Republic) and FRG (Federal Republic of Germany), 10.32

See also German language

gerunds

dangling, 5.113

definition, 5.110

as nouns, 5.25

participles compared with, 5.111

possessives with, 7.26

word division, 7.36

See also participles and participial phrases

ghostwritten books, documentation of, 14.89

GIF, defined, p. 896

glossaries

format and alphabetizing, 1.60, 2.21

and indexing, 16.109

punctuation, 2.21

references to, 8.177

in web-based publications, 1.114

glosses

ASL signs, 11.147--54

foreign-language titles and words, 6.93, 7.50, 7.55, 11.6--7

names in indexes, 16.34--39, 16.42--46, 16.62, 16.98

See also interpolations and clarifications; parenthetical elements; translations and translated works

governmental entities

abbreviations of, 10.24--25

acts and treaties of, 8.65, 8.79--80, 14.287, 14.302

administrative, 8.62

capitalization of, 8.51, 8.64

courts: basic elements in documentation, 14.288; Canadian, 14.306; international, 14.316; names and terms, treatment in text,

8.63; UK courts, 14.310; US federal, 14.290; US state and local, 14.291; US Supreme Court, 14.289

judicial, 8.63

legislative and deliberative, 8.61, 14.293--96

loose-leaf services of, 14.251

numbers for successive governing bodies, 9.46

programs of, 8.65, 8.74, 8.79

public-domain works produced by, 4.19, 4.43, 4.64

titles and offices of people, 8.18, 8.21

See also cities and towns; civil and civic concerns; countries; institutions; laws and statutes; legal cases; legislation;

presidential documents; public documents; states (US); unpublished and informally published materials

Government Printing Office (GPO), 9.22, 14.303

grades, scholastic, 7.60

grammar

definitions, 5.1

parts of speech, 5.3

parts of speech, abbreviations of, 10.43

schools of thought, 5.2

"usage" compared with, 5.216

See also adjectives; adverbs; conjunctions; interjections and exclamations; nouns; prepositions; pronouns; verbs; word usage

grants and subventions, 1.19, 1.31, fig. 1.1

graphs, fair use of, 4.84. See also charts and graphs

Great Britain. See British style; United Kingdom

Greek language, including classical, 11.130--41

abbreviation of Greek, 10.43

breathings and accents: accent marks, 11.130, 11.133; breathing marks, 11.130, 11.132; unaccented words, 11.134; on vowels,

11.130, 11.135

character sets for, 11.92, 11.130--31, table 11.4

numbers, 11.137, table 11.5

punctuation, 11.136

resources on, 11.130

typesetting issues, 11.131

word division: compounds, 11.141; consecutive vowels, 11.138; single consonants, 11.139; two or more consonants, 11.140

See also classical works

guillemets

permissible changes to, 11.4, 11.10

spacing with, 11.31--32, 11.52

uses: French, 11.31--35; German, 11.44; Italian, 11.52; Russian, 11.121; Spanish, 11.79

gutter, defined, p. 896

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

H

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

hairline rule, defined, p. 896

hair space, defined, A.22

half titles

content of, 1.16

editing of, 2.54

pagination of, 1.6--7, 1.16

placement in book, 1.4

proofreading of, 2.130

running heads omitted from, 1.10

second half title, 1.7, 1.45

halftones, 3.3, 3.6, figs. 3.1--2, p. 896

halftone screen, defined, p. 896

hanging indention. See flush-and-hang style

Hansard Parliamentary Debates (UK), 14.313

Hanyu Pinyin system. See Pinyin system

hard copy, defined, p. 897

hardcover books

clothbound covers: definition, p. 893; description of, 1.66; endpapers, 1.68; proofreading of, 2.105, 2.130

jackets (dust jackets), 1.69, p. 894; artwork, 1.70, 1.78, 4.96--97; author's previous publications, 1.17; biographical information,

1.20; country of printing, 1.27; credit lines for artwork, 1.70, 1.78; ISBN and bar codes, 1.32, 1.66, 1.71; proofreading of,

2.105, 2.130

See also covers of journals and paperback books

Hausa language, 11.14--15

have, has, had, 5.126--27, 5.145

he, him, his, 5.45--47, 5.50, 5.222

headings

alphabetizing, 16.56, 16.65--66

for letters and diaries, 1.51

with note numbers, 14.22

proofreading of, 2.110, 2.130

punctuation in, 6.14

See also subheads; index entries

headlines, 7.48, 14.204--5

headline-style capitalization, 8.157--58, 8.166

book titles, 14.95

foreign-language, 11.6--7, 11.30, 11.59

hyphenated compounds, rules and examples, 8.159, 11.29

instrumental works, 8.190

newspapers, 14.204

notices, signs, and mottoes, 8.196--97

for quotations in titles, 14.104

series titles, 8.2, 8.174, 14.128

subheads, 2.56

table titles, 3.52--53

titles in captions, 3.21--22

translated title, 14.110

unpublished titles, 8.184

website titles, 8.186

See also sentence-style capitalization

head margin, defined, p. 897

headnotes

for bibliographies with sections, 14.58, fig. 14.9

for indexes, 16.116, 16.140--41, 16.143

for previously published materials, 2.43

heaven, hell, and such, 8.108

Hebrew language, 11.111--17

capitalization and italics, 11.114

character sets for, 11.92

diacritics, 11.112

prefixes, 11.113

transliteration systems, 11.111

unromanized phrases in, 11.116

vowels in, 11.117

word division, 11.115

he or she, him or her, 5.46--50, 5.220, 5.225

her, hers, 5.46--50

herself, 5.48--49

highways and interstates

abbreviations of, 10.34

names of, 8.55, 11.29

numbers of, 9.51--52

See also addresses, mailing

himself, 5.48--49

historic, historical, 5.220, 7.44

historical and cultural terminology

abbreviations, 10.43

academic subjects, lectures, and such, 8.84--86

acts, treaties, and government programs, 8.65, 8.74, 8.79--80, 14.287, 14.302

awards, 8.82, 8.114

events: historical, 8.74; meteorological and other natural phenomena, 8.76; religious, 8.88, 8.107, 8.109; speeches, 8.75; sporting,

8.77

movements and styles: capitalization, 8.59--60; coinage of adjectives for, 8.59; treatment in text, 8.59--60, 8.78

oaths and pledges, 8.83

periods: centuries, 8.70, 9.33--34; cultural, 8.73; decades, 9.34; descriptive designations, 8.71; eras, 9.35, 9.63, 10.39; numerical designations, 8.70; traditional names, 8.72

See also economic terminology and periods; legal cases; political terminology

holidays, 8.88

home pages. See websites and web pages

Honorable, Hon. , 8.31--32, 10.18

honors and honorifics, 8.30--32. See also titles and offices

horticultural terminology. See botanical terminology

however, 5.207, 6.25, 6.55

HTML

corrections in, A.31

definition, p. 897

electronic journals in, 1.72

standards for, A.36--37

tables in, A.33

web-based publications, 1.111

XML and, A.5, A.12--13, A.37

HTTP (hypertext transfer protocol), 14.11--12, p. 897

humanities style. See documentation; notes and bibliography system

Hungarian language, 8.13, 11.49--50, 16.79

hybrids, plant, 8.124

hyperlinks, 1.114

added to printed work, 4.60

to citations and outside resources, 1.102

description of, 1.89

between errata and text, 1.86

full bibliography useful in creating, 14.56

to illustrations, 1.100, 3.8

in journals, generally, 1.79, 1.82, 1.89, 1.102, 14.4

markup for, A.7

to notes, 14.14

and tables, 1.99

and tables of contents, 1.82, 1.83, fig. 1.11

testing of, 2.134--35

thumbnail sketches and, 4.83

See also DOIs (Digital Object Identifiers); e-mail; URLs (uniform resource locators)

hypertext, defined, p. 897. See also HTTP (hypertext transfer protocol)

hyphens and hyphenation

abbreviations with, 10.5

appropriate use of, 7.77

capitalization issues, 8.159, 11.29

in compound words, 5.91, 7.31--43, 7.77--85; adverbs ending in -ly, 7.82; en dash vs. hyphen, 6.80; guide to, 7.85; headline-style titles, 8.159, 11.29; and line breaks, 2.109; multiple hyphens, 7.83; nationalities, hyphens not used, 8.38; before or after noun, 7.81; second part unexpressed, 7.84; trend toward closed, 7.79; types of compounds, 7.78

dashes compared with, 6.75

en dash vs., in compound adjectives, 6.80

foreign languages: Chinese, 11.104; French, 11.29; Hebrew, 11.113; Japanese, 11.107

guide to, 7.85

manuscript and editorial concerns: cleanup process, 2.77; guidelines for authors, 2.12; marking manuscript, 2.93; marking proofs,

2.129; proofreading, 2.102, 2.109, 2.113; soft vs. hard hyphens, 2.93; stacks of, 2.109, 2.113, 7.43; typographic considerations, 7.43; word division, 7.35

personal names with, 8.6

readability as key to, 7.80, 7.83, 7.85

URLs, DOIs, and such in text, 2.12, 6.77, 7.42, 14.11--12

uses, other: all-numeral dates, 6.45, 6.106, 9.36--37; Arabic article al, 11.99; double or multiple numeration, 1.55; fractions, simple, 9.14; keyboard combinations and shortcuts, 7.74; music writing, 7.67; noun plus numeral or enumerator, 7.85, 9.13; phrasal adjectives, 5.91; separators (numbers and letters), 6.77

See also compounds; dashes; em dashes; en dashes; punctuation; 3-em dashes; 2-em dashes

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

I

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

I (pronoun)

antecedent absent, 5.28

appropriate use of, 5.220

as first-person singular, 5.38

misuse of, 5.36

than with, 5.179

ibid.

meaning of, 10.43

roman type for, 7.53, 10.7

uses: notes, 14.29; shortened citations, 14.29; text citations, 13.64

ice age, 8.73, 8.134

id. ( idem), 10.43, 14.30, 14.287

idioms, prepositional, 5.189--90. See also dialect; movements and styles

i.e.

e.g. compared with, 5.220

meaning of, 10.43

punctuation with, 6.43

roman type for, 10.7

if, 5.121. See also conjunctions

if--then, 5.195, 5.214

if--whether, 5.220

illustrations, 3.3--45

acquisition of: adapted material, 3.36; commercial agency material, 3.35, 4.95--97; commissioned material, 3.32; material obtained free of charge, 3.33; previously published material, 2.44; public-domain material, 3.34; published work needing permission, 3.31; works made for hire, 3.32, 4.10, 4.69

definition, 3.1

documentation of, 14.165

electronic enhancements noted for, 3.26

electronic files, preparation of: artwork, prints vs. scans, 2.24; digital files, 3.15, A.32; identified for publisher, 3.16; numbering of, 2.25; preparation of charts, 3.42; separate files for each component, 2.23, 2.33, 3.16; submission to publisher, 2.3--4,

3.3--4, 3.15--17; text references and callouts, 2.27

examples of, figs. 3.1--10

fair use of, 4.83

galleries: list of illustrations in, 3.38; manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.25; noted in table of contents, 1.37--38, fig. 1.7; numbering illustrations in, 3.14; placement of, 3.6; plates in, 3.5; unpaginated, 1.5, 3.6, fig. 1.7

indexing of, 16.116, 16.140--41

manuscript and editorial concerns: cleanup process, 2.77; cross-checking, 2.29; editing of, 2.63; guidelines for authors, 2.23--2.25,

2.27, 3.15--20; inventory of artwork, 3.16--18; markup, A.32; placement, 2.59, 3.8; proofreading, 2.104, 2.112; text references and callouts, 2.23, 2.27, 2.29, 2.62--63, 3.8--9, 3.16

numbering: arabic numerals for, 3.12, fig. 3.7; continuous vs. separate, 3.10; conventions of, 2.25; double or multiple numeration,

1.55, 3.11; in galleries, 3.14; separating caption from, 3.23; text references to, 3.9; working (temporary) numbers, 3.13

original dimensions noted for, 3.27

pagination of, 1.7, 1.38, 2.112

parts, identification of, 3.12, 3.24, fig. 3.7

plates: definition, 3.5; indexing of, 16.116; lists of, 1.38, fig. 1.7; numbering of, 2.25; text references to, 3.9; use of term, 3.23

references to numbered, 8.178

reproduction of: continuous tone vs. halftone type, 3.3, 3.6, figs. 3.1--2, p. 894; cropping, scaling, and shading, 3.19; previously published material, 2.44; prints vs. scans for, 2.24; professionally created scans, 3.15; publisher's redrawing of, 3.20

running heads and, 1.15, 2.112

symbols or patterns used in, 3.25, figs. 3.8--9

tables compared with, 3.2

types: color, 1.5, 2.34, 3.15; continuous tone, 3.3, figs. 3.1--2; line art, 3.4, 3.20, 3.40, figs. 3.3--4, fig. 3.6; musical examples,

3.4, fig. 3.5; text figures and plates as, 3.5

unnumbered, 3.13, fig. 3.3

as works made for hire, 3.32, 4.10, 4.69

See also artwork; captions; charts and graphs; credits and credit lines; lists of illustrations and tables; tables

image agencies, 3.35, 4.95--97

images. See artwork; illustrations

impressions

copyright dates of, 1.19, 1.23--25, fig. 1.1

definition, 1.26, p. 897

edition compared with, 1.23, 1.26

numbering of, 1.28, figs. 1.1--2

and publication date, 14.150

See also reprints

imprints

definition, 1.18

types, 14.144--46

See also publisher's name

Inc. , 6.48, 10.22, 10.23, 14.140, 14.142

including, 6.27, 10.43

inclusive (or continuing) numbers

abbreviating and condensing, 9.60--61, 16.14

with abbreviations and symbols, 9.17

appropriate use of, 16.13, 16.121

commas with, 9.62

in documentation, 14.111--13, 14.155

en dashes, when not to use, 9.59

en dashes, when to use, 3.81, 6.78--79, 9.27, 9.34, 9.58, 16.100

vs. ff. , 14.155

index locators, 16.13--14, 16.29, 16.100, 16.113, 16.121

page numbers, chapter numbers, and such, 9.27, 14.111--13, 14.155

repeated quantities and, 9.17

in tables, 3.81

in titles of works, 9.63

unfinished ranges of, 6.79

words between, 9.59

years, 9.58, 9.63

See also numbers

indefinite article. See articles (definite and indefinite)

indented style (indexes)

continued lines, 16.139

cross-references, 16.26, 16.28

description, 16.26

examples, 16.28, 16.129, 16.142--43

indention guidelines, 16.137

keyboarding of, 16.131

punctuation in, 16.26, 16.28

runover lines, 16.28, 16.137

sub- and sub-subentries, 16.26, 16.28, 16.68, 16.142--43

indention

in cleanup process, 2.77

definition of indent, p. 897

flush-and-hang format, 16.24, 16.106, 16.131

marking space for, 2.95, 2.123

proofreading for, 2.110

of quotations: interviews and discussions, 13.46; permissible changes to, 13.8; play excerpts, 13.44--45; poetry extracts, 2.19,

13.24; prose extracts, 2.18

of vertical lists, 2.11, 6.124

See also block quotations; flush-and-hang style; indented style (indexes); margins; quotations; tables

index cards, 16.107

index entries

cross-references: accuracy of, 16.130; alphabetizing, 16.17, 16.20; and used with generic, 16.23; appropriate use of, 16.15, 16.20,

16.76, 16.84, 16.126; blind, 16.16; capitalization, 16.17, 16.20; checking and editing, 16.130, 16.133; double posting vs.,

16.16; generic, 16.23; in indented style, 16.26, 16.28; italics in, 16.15, 16.20, 16.22--23; for names, 16.36, 16.38, 16.42,

16.46, 16.71, 16.76, 16.78, 16.84, 16.89; for organization and business names, 16.88--89; placement and punctuation,

16.17--20, 16.26, 16.95--98; in run-in style, 16.25; " see also" and " see also under" type, 16.20--23, 16.26; " see" and " see under" type, 16.16--19, 16.26; shortened, 16.21; single vs. multiple indexes and, 16.6; subentries and, 16.10, 16.18--20

examples: authors' names, 16.115; first lines, 16.144--45; highlighted definitions, 16.143; indented style for subentries, 16.27;

indented style with indented sub-subentries, 16.28, 16.143; indented style with run-in sub-subentries, 16.28, 16.129, 16.142;

run-in style with italicized references, 16.141; run-in style with sub-subentries, 16.27; run-in subentries, 16.27

locators: appropriate use of, 16.13; chapter numbers with, 16.111; ff. with, 16.13; inclusive (or continuing), 16.13--14, 16.29,

16.100, 16.113, 16.121; italics and boldface for, 16.116, 16.140--41, 16.143; long strings of, 16.120, 16.127--28; with main headings, 16.9; across multiple volumes, 1.8; for notes, 14.164, 16.109--13, 16.117; number per entry, 16.120, 16.128;

number per page, 16.118; pagination final for, 16.108; paragraph numbers as, 16.13, 16.108; punctuation of, 16.94, 16.100;

for scattered entries, 16.13; for subentries, 16.10

main headings: alphabetizing, 16.56 ( see also alphabetizing); appropriate choices for, 16.126--29; checking of, 16.133; cross-references following, 16.17; definition and use, 16.9; headings beginning with numerals, 16.65; initial lowercase letters,

16.11; inversion and, 16.9, 16.56; noun or noun phrase for, 16.9; similar headings with numerals, 16.66; subentries vs.,

16.127; title beginning with article as, 16.48--49, 16.51--52, 16.56; typing and modifying, 16.122

punctuation: cross-references, 16.17--20, 16.26, 16.95--98; indented styles, 16.26, 16.28; inversions, 16.94; locators, 16.94,

16.100; parenthetical elements, 16.18, 16.20, 16.34--39, 16.42--46, 16.62, 16.98, 16.111, 16.139; run-in style, 16.25,

16.27; sub- and sub-subentries, 16.27--28, 16.95--96

sub- and sub-subentries: alphabetizing, 16.68 ( see also alphabetizing); appropriate choices for, 16.127--29; articles in, 16.51,

16.68, 16.129; checking, 16.133; chronological order, 16.70; cross-reference placement and, 16.18--20, 16.26; definition and use, 16.10; indention, 16.137; initial lowercase letters in, 16.12; main headings vs., 16.127; marking proofs for, 16.120;

numerical order, 16.69; phrasing of, 16.129; punctuation, 16.27--28, 16.95--96; run-in vs. indented style, 16.24--28,

16.141--43; typing and modifying, 16.122; when to use, 16.120, 16.128

See also alphabetizing; indexes; indexing

indexes

author's responsibility for, 2.2, 2.67, 16.3--4, 16.104, 16.108

continued lines, 16.139

deadlines for, 2.2, 16.4, 16.101

editing of, 2.64, 16.124, 16.126--30, 16.132--34

flush-and-hang format, 16.24, 16.106, 16.131

headnotes for, 16.116, 16.140--41, 16.143

length of, 16.103, 16.118, 16.133

order of multiple indexes, 1.63

placement of, 1.63

proofreading of, 2.103

publisher's preferences in format and length, 16.103, 16.106

quality of, 16.132

references to, 8.177

repagination issues, 2.115

run-in vs. indented styles, 16.24--28

running heads for, 1.13, 16.6

single vs. multiple indexes, 16.6, 16.115, 16.131

submission format of, 16.131

types: author-and-title, for anthologies, 16.6; authors' names, 16.6, 16.115, 16.145; embedded, 1.117, 16.7, 16.102, A.7; first lines, 16.6, 16.144--45; journals, 1.102--4, 16.4, 16.6, 16.30, 16.126; multivolume works, 1.8; single vs. multiple, 16.6,

16.115, 16.131; web-based publications, 1.117

typographical considerations: bad breaks, 7.33, 16.138; continued lines, 16.139; distinguishing different types of entries and locators, 16.116, 16.140--41, 16.143; instructions for typesetting, 16.134; margins, 16.136; repagination, 2.115; running heads, 1.13, 16.6; separate vs. consecutive pagination in multivolume works, 1.8; type size and column width, 1.63, 16.135

value of, 16.2

as works made for hire, 4.10

See also alphabetizing; index entries; indexing

indexing

appropriate material for (what to index), 16.109--16

articles, definite and indefinite: in first lines, 16.144; in organization and business names, 16.88; in personal and foreign names,

16.76, 16.91--92; in place-names, 16.91--92; in subentries, 16.51, 16.68, 16.129; titles of newspapers and periodicals beginning with, 16.48--49; titles of works beginning with, 16.51--52, 16.56; when to disregard, 16.48, 16.51--52, 16.56,

16.68, 16.88, 16.91

from first proofs, 2.101, 2.103, 2.115

mechanics: alphabetizing, 16.56, 16.68, 16.90--93 ( see also alphabetizing); checking cross-references, 16.130; computer software,

16.5, 16.57, 16.104, 16.123; editing and refining entries, 16.124, 16.126--30; editing someone else's index, 16.132--33;

keyboarding entries, 16.106--7, 16.122--23, 16.131; marking proofs, 16.117--21, fig. 16.1; noting errors in text, 16.125;

pagination issues, 2.101, 2.103, 2.115, 16.108; preliminary indexing, 16.108; preparation, 16.101--7; publisher's preferences and, 16.103, 16.106; submitting index, 16.131; typesetting instructions, 16.134; what to index, 16.31, 16.109--16

names, proper: abbreviations and acronyms as, 16.46, 16.64; academic titles and degrees in, 16.40; articles at beginning of, 16.76,

16.91--92; clerical titles, 16.39; compound, 16.72; cross-references for, 16.36, 16.38, 16.42, 16.46, 16.71, 16.76, 16.78,

16.84, 16.89; familiar forms of, 16.33, 16.71; foreign, 16.67, 16.76--87; Fort, Mount, Saint, and such, 16.90, 16.93; glosses (parenthetical information) for, 16.34--39, 16.42--46, 16.62, 16.98; hyphens in, 16.72; incomplete or unknown, 16.43--44;

initials vs. spelled-out, 16.63, 16.79; Jr. , Sr. , III, and such with, 16.41; Mac, Mc with, 16.73; as main entry, 16.9; married women's, 16.36; monarchs, popes, and such, 16.37; nobility, titles, and such, 16.38, 16.66; numerals in (e.g., Henry III),

16.66; organizations and businesses, 16.46, 16.88--89; O' with, 16.74; particles with, 16.71, 16.84; passing mentions of,

16.31; person, place, and thing with same name, 16.35, 16.45, 16.62; personal, 16.71--76; personal, as corporate names,

16.89; place-name, old vs. present form, 16.29; place-name, from shortened form in text, 16.44; pseudonyms, 16.34; Saint, St. , and such, 16.75, 16.93; saints (e.g., Saint Francis), 16.42; variants of, 16.32

notes, foot- or end-, 14.164, 16.109--13, 16.117

publication process and schedules, 2.2, 16.4, 16.101

punctuation, basic rules, 16.94--100

resources on, 16.8, 16.71, 16.84

term choices: considerations in, 16.4; editing of, 16.124, 16.126--30; marking proofs for, 16.117--20, fig. 16.1; material considered in, 16.109--16; noun or noun phrase as, 16.9; passing mentions omitted, 16.31; reflective of text, 16.29--30; style and usage,

16.29; type of material and, 16.118

titles of publications and works: article at beginning of, 16.48--49, 16.51--52, 16.56; with authors, 16.50; authors, first lines, and titles, 16.145; foreign-language, 16.48--49, 16.52--53; periodicals, 16.48--49; preposition at beginning of, 16.53; question mark or exclamation at end of, 16.54; separate index of titles, 16.6; in specialized works, 16.52; subtitles omitted, 16.55;

typographic treatment of, 16.47

See also alphabetizing; index entries; indexes

India, names in, 16.80

Indonesia, names in, 8.17, 16.81

infinitives

as adjectives and adverbs, 5.105

dangling, 5.107

definition, 5.104

gerunds as, 5.110

as nouns, 5.25

personal pronoun as subject of, 5.42

split, 5.106, 5.168

information technology specialists, A.2, A.27--30

initialisms

a, an, or the, which to use, 7.44, 10.9

ampersands in, 10.10

capitals vs. lowercase for, 10.6

definition and use, 10.2, 10.24

for disease and medical terms, 8.143

for journal titles, 14.179, 15.13, 15.44, 16.49

plurals of, 7.14

small vs. full-size capitals for, 10.8, 10.24

space omitted in, 10.5

for television and radio networks, 8.185, 10.5, 10.25

for versions and sections of Bible, 10.51

See also abbreviations; acronyms

initials

decorative, in text, 13.35

in and as names: in author's preface, 1.40; in documentation of works, 14.73, 15.12, 15.43; for hyphenated given name, 8.7;

punctuation and spacing of, 7.62, 8.4, 10.4, 10.12; spelled-out vs. initials, 16.63, 16.79, 16.115; word division and, 7.38

spacing of, 7.62, 8.4, 10.4, 10.12, 14.73

in press, 1.73, 8.184, 14.153. See alsoforthcoming

inscriptions, collections of, 14.263

insertions. See additions and insertions

institutions

church as, 8.97

names: academic, 6.46; as authors, 14.66; capitalization, 8.67, 8.84; in documentation of dissertations, theses, lectures, and such,

14.224, 14.226; foreign-language, 11.8, 11.29; place-names within, 6.46, 6.81; possessive form of, 7.19; unusual names,

8.68, 8.153

titles and offices in, 8.24, 8.26--27

See also academic concerns; business and commerce; governmental entities; organizations; universities

intellectual property rights

basic vs. subsidiary, 4.17--18

derivative works and performance, 4.14

originality, 4.3, 4.5, 4.68

public display, 4.13, 4.33

reproduction and distribution, 4.13--14, 4.33, 4.50, 4.60

subdivision of, 4.33

trademark protection, 4.16

See also copyright; subsidiary rights

interior monologues, 4.80, 13.41. See also dialogue; speech

interjections and exclamations, 5.208--11

abbreviation of interjection, 10.43

capitalization, 7.45

definition, 5.208, 5.211

functional variation and, 5.210

as informal and colloquial, 5.209

punctuation with, 5.208, 6.37

in quotations of interviews and discussions, 13.46

spelling of, 7.30

See also exclamation points

International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

archival practices, 1.107

country name abbreviations, 10.32

currency codes, 9.22

ISBNs, 1.32

SGML standard, A.12

standard date format, 6.106, 9.37

International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA), 11.13

International Standard Book Number (ISBN)

on copyright page, 1.19, 1.32, fig. 1.1

on covers and jackets, 1.71

for electronic books, 4.60

hyphenation of, 6.77

International ISBN Agency, 1.71

proofreading of, 2.105

United States ISBN Agency, 1.71

International Standard Serial Number (ISSN), 1.19, 1.74, 1.78, 1.97

International System of Units (SystÃ¨me international d'unitÃ©s, SI)

abbreviations: base quantities and units, 10.56; derived units expressed algebraically, 10.59; derived units with special names,

10.60; form of, 10.55; grams, 10.58; non-SI units, 10.62; prefixes, 10.57; spacing, 10.61; symbols for, 10.2

American vs. European spellings, 8.151

mega-, giga-, tera-, and other prefixes, 9.10--11, 10.52, 10.57

resources on, 9.56, 10.54

spaces and spacing, 9.56, 10.61

See also metric system

Internet

abbreviations of related terms, 10.52

definition, p. 897

images from, 3.15

protocol, 14.11--12, p. 901

treatment of term, 7.76

See also addresses, e-mail; blogs and blog entries; electronic publications; hyperlinks; URLs (uniform resource locators);

web-based publications; websites and web pages

interpolations and clarifications, 13.57--61

additions and insertions, 13.58

emphasis added to original quotation, 13.60

missing or illegible words, 13.57

punctuation for: brackets, 6.97, 13.57--59, 13.61; quotation marks, 13.61; 2-em dashes, 13.57

sic, 6.5, 6.73, 7.53, 13.59

See also permissible changes to quoted materials

interrogatives

comma with, 6.52

conjunctions and, 5.201--3

contractions in, 5.102

exclamations as, 6.72

indirect, 5.201, 6.68

pronouns and, 5.52--53

question mark with, 6.66--67, 6.70

requests reframed as, 6.69

within sentences, 6.52, 6.61, 6.67--68

See also question marks

interviews and discussions

by authors, 13.46

documentation of: order of attribution, 14.218; published or broadcast interviews, 14.221; unattributed interviews, 14.220;

unpublished interviews, 14.219, 15.48

punctuation of quotations, 6.50, 13.18, 13.46

See also dialogue; direct address; personal communications; speech; transcriptions

in-text citations. See block quotations; parenthetical elements; text citations

introductions

documentation of, 14.91, 14.116

indexing of, 16.109

to journal special issues, 1.96

location and format of, 1.42, 1.45--47

to parts of text, 1.37, 1.47

for previously published materials, 2.43

references to, 8.177

inversion of names

bibliographies and reference lists: first author's name only, 14.61, 14.76; single author, 14.75

indexes: foreign personal names, 16.76--87; main headings, 16.9, 16.56; personal names, 16.9, 16.94; place-names, 16.90;

punctuation of, 16.94

inversion of titles beginning with articles, 16.48--49, 16.51--52, 16.56

ISBN. See International Standard Book Number (ISBN)

ISO. See International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

ISSN (International Standard Serial Number), 1.19, 1.74, 1.78, 1.97

issue numbers

documentation of, 14.180--81, 14.186, 15.46

numerals for, 9.28, 14.180

Italian language, 11.51--58

abbreviation of Italian, 10.43

capitalization, 11.51

punctuation: apostrophes, 11.53, 11.57--58; guillemets and quotation marks, 11.52; suspension points and ellipses, 11.54

quotations and dialogue, 11.52

special characters, 11.58

treatment of names, 8.9

word division: consonants, 11.56; vowels, 11.55; words with apostrophes, 11.57

italics

added to original quotation, 13.60

definition, p. 897

within italicized titles, reversed, 8.171, 14.103

marking manuscript for, 2.94

marking proofs for, 2.128

plurals of words in, 7.11

possessives and terms in, 7.28

proofreading of, 2.110

and punctuation, 6.2, 6.5

for titles and subtitles, 8.2, 8.161, 8.166, 14.94; blogs, 8.187; books, 14.94, 14.103, 14.177; cartoons and comic strips, 8.194;

legal cases in text, 8.81; legal-style citations, 14.284; long poems, 8.179; movies and television, 8.185; newspapers,

14.210--11; operas and long musical compositions, 8.189; paintings, statues, and such, 8.193; pamphlets and reports, 8.183;

photographs, 8.193; plays, 8.181; separate works gathered into collected works, 8.176

vs. underlining, in manuscript preparation, 2.14

uses, other: abbreviations of italicized terms, 2.21; base quantities, 10.56; emphasizing words, 7.47, 7.54, 13.60; first occurrence of foreign terms, 7.49--50, 7.54; foreign terms, 7.49--50, 7.52, 7.54, 11.95; gene names, 8.131; genus and species,

8.119--21, 8.171; glossary terms, 2.21; in index cross-references, 16.15, 16.20, 16.22--23; in index references to illustrations, 16.116, 16.140; for letters as letters (e.g., a), 7.59, 10.7; locators (e.g., above, left) in captions, 3.24; mathematical copy, 12.10--12, 12.56, 12.62; music dynamics, 7.71; N, n, in tables, 3.70, 3.73, 3.83, fig. 3.20; rhyme schemes, 7.65; sic, 6.5, 6.73, 7.53, 13.59; statistical material in tables, 10.53, 12.57--58, table 12.3; totals (in tables), 3.61, fig. 3.15; words and phrases used as words, 7.58

See also foreign-language materials; foreign words and phrases

Italy, currency, 9.24. See also Italian language

it is I, it is me, 5.220

its, it's, 2.108, 5.47, 5.50, 5.220

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

J

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

jackets of books. See covers of journals and paperback books; hardcover books: jackets

Japan, currency of, 9.24

Japanese language

capitalization and italics, 11.108

characters of, 11.110

diacritical marks, 11.107

names: alphabetizing, 16.82; treatment, 8.16, 11.107--8

resources on, 11.106

titles of works, 11.109

transliteration (Hepburn system), 11.106--7

jargon. See dialect; slang and jargon

Javanese names, 16.81

Jewish Bible. See Bible

joint works, 4.7, 4.12, 4.51

journals, 1.72--117

as collective works, 4.8

components: abstracts, 1.88, 1.90; acknowledgments, 1.85, 1.93; announcements, 1.83, 1.85, 1.93; articles and other text,

1.87--98; book review and book notes sections, 1.92; copyright lines, 1.97; covers, 1.78, 1.81; editorials, 1.96; electronic-only features listed, 1.73; front matter, 1.81--86; hyperlinks, 1.102; illustrations, 1.78, 1.99--100; indexes, 1.102--4, 16.4, 16.6,

16.30, 16.126; letters to the editor, 1.95; majors and minors, 1.87; masthead, 1.78, 1.81; pagination, 1.76; running heads or feet, 1.77; subheads, 1.91; table of contents, 1.78, 1.83, 1.86, fig. 1.11; tables, 1.99, 3.58, 3.62, 3.70, 3.84; volume numbers, 1.83, fig. 1.11

contributors: biographical notes, 1.94, 14.50; communications with, 2.65; information for, 1.84; list of, 1.94; manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.1, 2.33; publishing agreement, 4.55--58, fig. 4.2; submission requirements, 1.78, 1.82, 2.3

copyright of, 1.74, 1.78, 1.88, 1.97, 4.42

definition, 14.172

design, 1.78, 1.108, 1.110

documentation style in, 1.101--2, 14.2, 14.70

editorial policy, 1.78, 1.84

editorial style, 1.109, 2.46, 2.61, 14.70

electronic and print formats for, 1.72--73, 3.26

errata and corrections, 1.86, 1.105

foreign-language, 14.192--94

identified by volume and date, 1.74

ISSN, 1.19, 1.74, 1.78, 1.97

new series of, 14.195

online-only material, 1.107

organizing principle, 1.75

papers presented at meeting as articles in, 14.226

production schedule, 2.99, A.5, fig. 2.2

proofreading of, 2.99, 2.130

publishing agreement, 4.55--58, fig. 4.2

redesign, 1.110

special issues, 1.78, 1.83, 1.85, 1.96, 14.187

subscription information, 1.78, 1.81, 1.104

subsidiary rights, 4.60

supplements, 14.188

symposia proceedings as, 4.59

titles, 8.166, 14.179; a and an, when to drop in running text, 8.167; abbreviations and initialisms of, 14.179, 15.13, 15.44, 16.49;

foreign-language considerations, 14.179; indexing of, 16.49; initial the in, 8.168; italicized terms within, 8.171; italics and capitalization, 14.176, 14.179; magazine, journal, review, and such, 8.169; in names of awards and prizes, 8.170; series and editions, 8.174, 14.195; shortened, 15.13, 15.44; similar names, 14.191; subjects compared with, 8.172

trademark protection, 4.16

treatment of term, 8.169

version control, 1.105

volume, defined, 1.75

volume editor's responsibilities, 2.38--39

work made for hire in, 4.10

XML workflow of, A.5

See also abstracts; articles (journal); contributors; covers of journals and paperback books; journals, electronic; and many of the

above elements under their own headings

journals, electronic

components: errata and corrections, 1.86, 1.105; front matter, 1.82; home pages, 1.79, 1.82; hyperlinks, 1.79, 1.82, 1.89, 1.102,

14.4; illustrations, 1.100; indexes, 1.104; pagination, 1.76; running heads, 1.77; table of contents, 1.83, fig. 1.11; tables,

1.99; unique identifiers for, 1.74

considerations for, 1.111--17

copyright, 1.74, 1.97

design changes, 1.110

documentation of: access dates, 14.7, 14.185; page references, 14.183; URLs and DOIs, 1.74, 14.18, 14.184, 14.198, 15.9 ( see also

articles, documentation of)

DTDs for, A.8

formats, 1.72

maintaining context of, 1.80

material not applicable to print, 1.107

noting difference between print and, 1.73, 3.26

preprints, 1.73

standards for, A.36--37

version control, 1.105

See also articles, electronic; hyperlinks

JPEG, defined, A.32, p. 897

Jr. ("Junior")

indexing of, 16.41

line breaks and, 7.38

punctuation and spacing, 6.47, 10.19

JSTOR (academic journals archive), 14.18

judicial bodies

basic elements in documentation, 14.288

Canadian courts, 14.306

international courts, 14.316

names and terms, treatment in text, 8.63

numbered divisions of, 9.47

UK courts, 14.310

US courts, 14.289--91

See also legal cases; legal-style citations; public documents

justification

indexes, 16.131, 16.136

manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.10

marking proofs for, 2.124

words in table columns, 3.71, fig. 3.19

See also margins

justified, defined, p. 897

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

K

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

K, 9.25

kern, defined, p. 897

kerning, 12.11, p. 897

keyboarding, combinations and shortcuts, 7.74. See also computer software; electronic files;

manuscript editing: electronic editing mechanics; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors; word processing

keys, computer, 7.73

keys, musical, 7.70

keys to illustrations (legends)

capitalization and consistency, 3.20

captions compared with, 3.21

definition, 3.7

letters in, 3.7, 3.12, 3.24, figs. 3.6--7

See also labels

keywords

in abstracts, 1.90

context-sensitive searching for, 1.104, 1.113, 1.117

in journal indexes, 16.30, 16.126

in shortened running heads, 2.73

kinship names, 8.35

Koran (QurÊ¾an), 8.102, 11.97, 14.255

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

L

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

l. (line) and ll. (lines), 14.163

labels

captions compared with, 3.21

in charts, abbreviations, 3.43--44

in illustrations and keys, 3.7, 3.12, 3.24, figs. 3.3--4, figs. 3.6--7

marked on line art to be redrawn, 3.20

of x and y axes, 3.42, 3.49, fig. 3.8

See also keys to illustrations (legends)

labor unions, 8.69, 9.50

landscape, defined, p. 897

LaTeX, 12.2, 12.9, A.34, fig. 12.3, table 12.1

Latin alphabet

IPA notation, 11.13

languages using, generally, 11.9--11

Unicode and special characters, 11.2, 11.12, table 11.1

See also transliteration; and specific languages

Latin language, 11.59--64

abbreviations in, 10.7, 10.43

capitalization, 11.59

for provisional chemical elements, 10.66

roman type for terms in, 7.53

special characters, 11.2, 11.12, 11.64, table 11.1

titles of works in, 11.59

word division: compounds, 11.63; consonants, 11.61--62; syllables, 11.60

See also classical works; genus and species; scientific and technical terminology

latitude, 10.37. See also compass points and directions

laws and statutes

bills and resolutions compared, 14.295

Canadian, 14.306--7

short forms for names, 14.287

UK, 14.312

US federal, 14.294

US state and municipal, 14.300

See also legal documents; public documents

laws and theories

mathematical, 12.56

schools of thought, 8.78

scientific, 8.147

See also philosophical terms and movements; scientific and technical terminology

layout, defined, p. 897

leaders (several spaced periods), 3.62, fig. 3.16. See also ellipsis points; suspension points

leading

definition, 2.122, p. 898

history of term, A.3

least, 5.85--87, 5.161

leaves, book, 1.3. See also folios; page numbers (folios)

lectures and lecture series

documentation of, 14.226, 14.277, 14.280

treatment in text, 8.86

See also speeches

legal cases

documentation: abbreviations, 14.286; basic elements, 14.288; Canadian cases, 14.306; italics, 14.284; notes and text citations,

15.54--55; short forms, 14.287; UK courts, 14.310; US courts, 14.289--91

treatment in text, 8.81

legal documents

Canada: legal cases, 14.306; resources and reference works on, 14.281, 14.305; statutes, 14.307; unpublished, 14.308

contracts, wills, and such, 14.231

international entities, 14.316--17

numbered divisions in, 9.29

online resources, 14.317

United Kingdom: command papers, 14.314; legal cases, 14.310; online sources, 14.309; parliamentary debates, 14.313;

parliamentary publications, 14.311; resources and reference works on, 14.281, 14.309; statutes, 14.312; unpublished, 14.315

United States: abbreviations, 14.293; bills and resolutions, 14.295; congressional reports and documents, 14.297; debates before 1873, 14.299; debates since 1873, 14.298; generalist and secondary source writing about, 14.303; hearings, 14.296; laws and statutes, 14.294; municipal ordinances, 14.300; notes and text citations, 15.54--55; state laws, 14.300; unpublished, 14.304

See also laws and statutes; legal cases; legal-style citations

legal-style citations

abbreviations in, 14.286

cases and court decisions, 14.288--91, 14.306, 14.310

constitutions, 14.292

note form, 14.283

page numbers and locators, 14.285

resources and stylebooks on, 14.3, 14.281--82

short forms, 14.287

typefaces, 14.284

when not to use, 14.303

See also courts; laws and statutes; legal cases; legal documents

legends, defined, 3.7. See also captions; keys to illustrations (legends)

legislation

abbreviations, 14.293

bills and resolutions, 14.295

debates on, 14.298--99

formal and generic names for, 8.79--80

generalist and secondary source writing about, 14.303

hearings on, 14.296

published text of, 14.294--95

short forms for names, 14.287

state, 14.300

See also acts and treaties; laws and statutes; public documents

legislative and deliberative bodies

abbreviations of, 14.293, 14.295

hearings of, 14.296

names and terms for, 8.61

See also laws and statutes; legislation; public documents

length (measurement). See International System of Units (SystÃ¨me international d'unitÃ©s, SI); measurement, US; metric system

length (publications)

books, A.18

indexes, 16.103, 16.118, 16.133

notes, 14.35--36, 14.51, fig. 14.1

running heads, 2.73

table titles, 3.52--53

less, 5.84, 5.86--87, 5.160, 6.42

less, fewer, 5.220

letters (alphabet)

archaic, 13.7

hyphens to separate, 6.77

illustration parts designated by, 3.7, 3.12, 3.24, figs. 3.3--4, figs. 3.6--7

as letters, 7.59

in lists and outlines, 6.94, 6.123, 6.126

marking spacing changes between, 2.122

for multiple appendixes, 1.57

in music writing, 7.67--71

names of (spelled-out pronunciations), 7.64

for notes applying to parts of tables, 3.77

plurals of, 7.14, 7.59--61

possessives of, 7.16

in rhyme schemes, 7.65

in run-in lists, 6.123

as scholastic grades, 7.60

as shapes (e.g., S curve), 7.63

spellings for, 7.64

standing for proper names (e.g., Aâ€”â€”), 7.62

See also alphabetizing; alphabets; capital letters; diacritical marks; initialisms; initials

letters (correspondence)

chronological order, 1.51

copyright issues, 4.19

documentation of: approach and resources, 14.232, 14.239; date forms, 6.45, 9.32; examples, 14.240--41; "private collection" or

"author's possession" and such, 14.242; published collections, 14.117, 15.40; shortened citations, 14.117; unpublished collections, 14.222

editorial clarifications to, 13.58

missing or illegible words, 13.57

multiple paragraphs quoted, 13.33

permissible changes, 13.7--8

permissions for use, 4.74, 4.76

sic in, 13.59

See also manuscript collections; personal communications

letters to the editor, 1.95, 14.208. See also editorials

LexisNexis, 8.153, 14.271, 14.282, 14.288

libel, 4.51, 4.68

libraries, 14.271, 16.58. See also archival practices; manuscript collections

Library of Congress, 1.33, 4.46. See also Cataloging-in-Publication (CIP) data

licenses for copyrighted works

alternative arrangements for, 4.57

electronic works, 4.60--62

exclusive vs. nonexclusive, 4.34

goals of parties to, 4.35

handling requests for, 4.66

payment for, 4.36

rights file as record of, 4.67

subsidiary rights and, 4.17, 4.33

termination of, 4.37

universities' claim to, 4.63

See also copyright; intellectual property rights; permissions; publishing agreement; subsidiary rights

"life plus seventy" rule, 4.22, 4.24--25

ligatures, 7.46, 11.40, 11.142, p. 898

like, as, 5.181, 5.220

line art

charts and graphs as, 3.4, 3.40

definition, p. 898

examples of, figs. 3.3--4, fig. 3.6

publisher's redrawing of, 3.20

See also illustrations

line editing. See manuscript editing

line numbers

avoiding use of l. , ll. , 14.163

edition number with, 14.267

footnotes keyed to, fig. 14.5

format of, 14.163

frequent references to single source, 13.65

as locators, 14.48

punctuation of, 9.55

lines (rules)

above continued footnotes, 14.36, fig. 14.1

avoided in illustrations, 3.19

in tables, 3.50, 3.55--56, 3.72, 3.84, figs. 3.13--14, fig. 3.16

lines (text)

blank, 1.56, 2.8, 2.95

in cleanup process, 2.77

indention, symbol for, 2.123

marking manuscript for, 2.95

proofreading of, 2.113--14

spacing in manuscript, 2.6, 2.8, 2.18--21, 2.88

as text break, 1.56, 2.8

See also justification; leading; spaces and spacing

links. See hyperlinks

lists, 6.121--26

abbreviations and ampersands in, 10.3, 10.23--24, 10.28, 14.141

as alternative to tables, 3.51

elided in mathematical expressions, 12.19

format, 2.21

placement of, 1.43, 2.59, fig. 1.8

as quoted material, 13.10

run-in: punctuation and format, 6.94, 6.123; vertical compared with, 6.122; word division in, 7.41

stub entries as, in tables, 3.58

titles and offices of people in, 8.19

vertical: punctuation and format, 2.11, 6.124--26; vs. run-in, 6.122--23

See also bibliographies; contributors: lists of; lists of abbreviations; lists of illustrations and tables; outlines; reference lists

lists of abbreviations

alphabetizing, 1.43, 14.55, 16.64, fig. 1.8, fig. 14.7

cross-checking, 2.29

format and placement, 1.43, 2.21, fig. 1.8

for frequently cited works, 13.65, 14.54--55, fig. 14.7

lists of illustrations and tables

appropriate use of, 1.38, 3.37

artwork inventory linked to, 3.17

captions shortened for, 3.39

for electronic works, 1.100

format and placement, 1.38, 3.29, 3.37, figs. 1.6--7

for galleries, 3.38

numbering of, 3.11, 3.14

proofreading of, 2.112

See also credits and credit lines

literary agents, 4.18

literary works

characters in, 5.123, 8.34, 8.36

copyright registration forms for, 4.47

cultural terms for (e.g., deconstruction), 8.78

dialect in, 5.218

fair use of, 4.79--80, 4.82

frequent reference to single, 13.65, 14.54

sound recordings of, 14.277

titles: indexing of, 16.50, 16.98; numbers for sequels, 9.44

trademark protection and, 4.16

See also block quotations; classical works; fiction; plays; poetry; quotations; titles of works

literature cited. See documentation

loc. cit. , 10.43, 14.31

locators

in captions (e.g., above, left), 3.24

in classical references ( see classical works: documentation)

in documentation, generally, 14.14, 14.17, 15.8, 15.22

in electronic works: accession numbers for databases, 14.224, 14.272; section headings as, 14.17, 14.174; URLs and DOIs, 14.184

( see also hyperlinks)

in index entries ( see index entries: locators)

in legal-style citations, 14.285

See also page numbers (folios)

logo, publisher's, 1.18, 1.66--68

longitude, 10.37. See also compass points and directions

lowercase letters

abbreviations ending with, 10.4

for chart labels, 3.43

definition, p. 898

"down" style, 8.1, 8.46

for foreword, index, and such, 8.177--78

for generations, 8.41

in index entries, 16.9--12

for kinship terms, 8.35

marking manuscript for, 2.94

marking proofs for, 2.128

for musical elements, 7.68, 7.70

for names like eBay, 8.68, 8.153

for physical characteristics, 8.39, 8.42

for socioeconomic class, 8.40

words with nonliteral meanings but derived from proper names, 8.60

See also sentence-style capitalization

Ltd. , 6.48, 10.22, 14.140, 14.142

-ly, words ending in

adjectives with, 5.155

adverbs with, 5.91, 5.154, 5.157, 5.160--61

hyphenation not needed with, 7.81--82

lyrics, fair-use doctrine and, 4.80. See also musical works

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

M

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

Mac, Mc, 16.73

macroinstructions (macros), 2.76, p. 898

magazines

copyright notice, 4.42

definition, 14.172

documentation of, 14.171--72; article titles, 14.201; dates, 14.199; newspaper, 14.209; online articles, 14.200; page numbers,

14.199; regular departments, 8.175, 14.202; in text or reference lists, 15.47

indexing names of, 16.49

treatment of term, 8.169

See also journals; newspapers; periodicals

mailing addresses

abbreviations: avenue, street, and such, 10.34; city plus state, comma with, 10.30; compass points in, 10.35; provinces and territories (Canada), 10.29; states and territories (US), 10.28

numbers in, 9.51--53

publisher's, 1.18--19, 1.21

punctuation in running text, 6.46, 10.28, 10.30

See also compass points and directions; e-mail; geographical terminology

mailing lists, electronic, 14.223

main headings. See under index entries

majors and minors (periodicals), 1.87

manuscript

abbreviation of term, 7.44, 10.43, 14.237

conversion of files, A.28--29

estimating book length from, A.18

making changes after submission, 2.5, 2.6

numbering pages of, 2.35

paper for, 2.6

version of record, 2.5, 2.84

See also electronic files; manuscript collections; manuscript editing; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors;

markings, editorial; word processing

manuscript collections

abbreviations of, 14.55, fig. 14.7

documentation of, 14.225, 14.232; author-date references, 15.49; collections of letters and such, 14.239--42; dates for, 14.235;

folios, page numbers, and such, 14.236; locations of depositories, 14.238; note forms vs. bibliographic entries, 14.233,

14.240--41; one vs. several items cited from a collection, 14.241; papers and manuscripts (terms), 14.237; "private collection"

or "author's possession" and such, 14.242; resources on, 14.232; specific vs. generic collection titles, 14.234

noncopyright restrictions on, 4.76

quotations from: editorial clarifications in, 13.58; missing or illegible words, 13.57; multiple paragraphs, 13.33; permissible changes, 13.7--8; permissions for, 4.74, 4.76; sic, use of, 13.59

titles of, 8.184, 14.234, 14.237

See also letters (correspondence); unpublished and informally published materials

manuscript editing, 2.45--96

basics, 2.1; author queries, 2.57--58, 2.61, 2.66, 2.83, fig. 2.4; author's review, 2.67--69, 2.85; dictionary and reference works,

2.51; errors and fact-checking, 2.53, 2.105, 13.5; estimating time for, 2.49; manuscript vs. developmental editing, 2.45;

mechanical editing, 1.109, 2.45, 2.46; stages of editing, 2.50; style sheet, 2.52, fig. 2.3; substantive editing, 2.45, 2.47--48;

volume editor's responsibilities, 2.38--39

checking consistency and format: cross-checking, 2.29--32; en dash, 2.13; note citations against reference lists and bibliographies,

2.29, 2.60--61, 15.20; permissions against manuscript, 4.72; style sheet, 2.52, fig. 2.3; subhead hierarchy, 2.56; text citations against reference lists, 2.29, 2.60--61, 15.20; titles and subtitles against table of contents, 2.55

electronic editing mechanics: backup copies, 2.37, 2.75, 2.77, 2.86; cleaning up files, 2.36, 2.50, 2.60, 2.76--77; document comparison software, 2.82, 2.85; final checks and preparation, 2.86; global changes, 2.66, 2.77; markup, 2.55--56, 2.70--71,

2.78--80, 2.96, 6.102, A.29; software-generated styles, 2.79; version control, 2.5, 2.84 ( see also

redlining [tracking and showing changes]; word processing)

paper-only: author queries, 2.89; conventions of, 2.88; example, fig. 2.5; keeping a clean copy, 2.87; manuscript format considerations for, 2.6, 2.8; mathematical copy, 12.60--67, figs. 12.1--2; note renumbering, 2.59; style sheet for, 2.52, fig.

2.3 ( see also markings, editorial)

preparing final manuscript for production: checklist for, 2.74; final checks in, 2.86; markup and type specifications, 2.55--56,

2.70--71, 2.78, 2.96, 6.102; pagination, 2.72; running heads, 2.73

specific parts: captions, 2.63; cross-references, 2.57; front matter, 2.54; illustrations and placement, 2.63; indexes, 2.64,

16.132--34; mathematical copy, 12.1--2, 12.13, 12.60--67; notes, text citations, bibliographies, and reference lists, 2.59--61;

quotations and previously published material, 2.58, 13.6; subheads, 2.56; tables ( see below); titles of parts, chapters, and articles, 2.55

tables: adjusting and checking, 2.29, 3.79, 3.84, figs. 3.23--24; basic approach, 2.62; continued lines and repeated column heads,

3.85, fig. 3.25; N, n, 3.70, 3.73, 3.83, fig. 3.20; number ranges, 3.81; percent, percentage, 3.80; signs and symbols in,

3.80--82

See also manuscript editors; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors; production and digital technology

manuscript editors

communications with authors: bias-free language issues, 5.224; checking author's changes, 2.69; comments and queries on

manuscript, 2.53--54, 2.57--58, 2.61, 2.66, 2.83, 2.89, fig. 2.4; cover letter and instructions, 2.67, 2.81; early contact, 2.65;

edited manuscript and, 2.68, 2.85; permissions double-checked, 4.72; sample of editing, 2.65; sending edited manuscript,

2.68, 2.85

discretion and flexibility, 2.45, 2.48, 2.56, 2.61

post-proofreading tasks of, 2.98

production process role, 2.2, A.2

schedule for editing, 2.49

software knowledge, 2.76

See also manuscript editing

manuscript preparation guidelines for authors, 2.1, 2.3--44

basics: accuracy and consistency, 2.7, 2.53, 13.6; changes after submission, 2.5, 2.6; checklist, 2.3; indexing as responsibility of authors, 2.2, 2.67, 16.3--4, 16.104, 16.108; letter to publisher, 2.14, 2.36; list of special characters, 2.3, 2.15, 11.12, 12.13;

proofreading before submission, 2.97; publication process and schedule for, 2.2, A.2, figs. 2.1--2; submission requirements,

2.3--6, 2.35

cross-checking tasks: checklist of, 2.29; cross-references, 2.32; quotations, 2.30, 13.6; URLs, 2.31

electronic files: accuracy and consistency, 2.7, 2.78; backups, 2.5, 2.37; embedded and hidden comments removed, 2.36; naming,

2.34; numbering pages in, 2.35; separate vs. single, 2.33; source citation coding removed, 14.13 ( see also electronic files)

formatting: abbreviations list, 2.21; bibliographies and reference lists, 2.22; chapter and other titles, 2.16; glossaries, 1.60, 2.21;

hyphens and dashes, 2.12--13; italics, underline, and boldface, 2.14; justification and margins, 2.10; keyboarding,

combinations and shortcuts, 7.74; notes, 2.20; ordinal numbers (e.g., 122nd), 9.6; poetry and prose extracts (block

quotations), 2.18--19; publisher's guidelines, 2.7; spaces, tabs, and hard returns within paragraphs, 2.11, 2.18--19; spacing between lines, 2.6, 2.8; spacing between words, 2.9, 2.11; special characters, 2.3, 2.15, 11.12, 12.13; subheads, 2.17 ( see also electronic files)

illustrations and tables: artwork, prints vs. scans, 2.24; identification and inventory of artwork, 3.16--17; notes and source notes,

2.28; numbering of, 2.25--26; preparation of tables, 3.46; separate files for each component, 2.23, 2.33; submission to publisher, 3.3--4, 3.15; text references and callouts for, 2.23, 2.27, 2.29, 2.62--63, 3.8--9, 3.16 ( see also illustrations;

tables)

special types of works: compilations and previously published materials, 2.40--44; multiauthor volumes or journals, 2.38--39

See also author's review of copyedited manuscript; mathematical copy; permissions; proofreading; version control

maps

callouts for, 2.27

credit lines for, 3.32

keys to, 3.7

lists of, 1.38

numbering of, 3.10

place-names on, 2.57, 3.20

preparation for reproduction, 3.20

symbols or patterns used in, 3.25

as works made for hire, 4.10

See also illustrations

marginal comments, 2.90

margins

back margin and gutter, pp. 891, 896

in cleanup process, 2.77

definition, p. 898

head margin, p. 897

justification: definition, p. 897; flush left (ragged right), 2.10, 3.71, fig. 3.19, p. 901; indexes, 16.131, 16.136; marking proofs for,

2.124; words in table columns, 3.71, fig. 3.19

manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.10

marking proofs for, 2.124

markings, editorial, 2.87--88, fig. 2.5

author queries, 2.53--54, 2.57--58, 2.61, 2.66, 2.83, 2.89, fig. 2.4

capitalizing and lowercasing, 2.94

circling, 2.90--91, 2.121, 2.124--26

close-up mark, 2.122, fig. 2.6

dashes and hyphens, 2.93

em spaces, 2.123

indention and spacing, 2.95

insertions, deletions, and substitutions, 2.91, 2.121--22, 2.124, 2.127

italics and boldface marks, 2.94

keeping a clean copy, 2.87

marking or coding elements, 2.96

markup, 2.71

note renumbering, 2.59

position or alignment changes, 2.124

punctuation changes, 2.92

"run in," 2.123

style sheet for, 2.52, fig. 2.3

See also codes and coding; proofreader's marks

markup tags and languages

abbreviations of, 10.52

brief history of, A.12

conversion of, A.23

converting generic to XML, A.27--30

definition, A.6, p. 898

general principles: document type definitions (DTDs), A.8; metadata, A.10; semantic and functional uses, A.7; style sheets, A.9,

A.17, fig. A.3

mapping to design specifications, A.16

print technologies and, A.41

standard practices and archival issues, 1.107

tables checked for, 3.84

types: formal languages, 2.80; generic, 2.55--56, 2.70--71, 2.78, 2.96, 6.102; software-generated styles, 2.79; XML, A.11--15,

figs. A.1--2

use of term, A.3

workflow outline, A.5, A.24, fig. A.5

See also generic markup; HTML; SGML; XML

masthead, journal, 1.78

mathematical copy

abbreviations: in mathematical expressions, 12.17, 12.63, table 12.2; of mathematics, 10.43; statistics, 10.53, 12.57--58, table

12.3

formal statements of definitions, theorems, and such, 12.56

in letters to the editor, 1.95

manuscript preparation: author's role in, 12.13, 12.60; computer software for, 12.2; examples of, 12.67, figs. 12.1--3; fonts and diacriticals, 12.10--13, 12.65; format, 12.60; kerning, 12.11; LaTeX, 12.2, 12.9, A.34, table 12.1; marking subscripts and superscripts, 12.66; special marking of typeface, 12.64

markup of, A.13, A.34

probabilities, correlations, and such, 9.19

radical signs in, 12.44

resources on, 12.1--2, 12.23

sentences beginning with mathematical symbols, 12.7

symbols, 12.9, tables 12.1, 12.4; angle brackets, 6.102, 12.26, 12.28, 12.31, 12.55, 12.58; braces, 6.102, 12.26, 12.28; slashes,

6.108, 12.45, 12.47; true angle brackets for mathematical notation, 12.55; words vs., 12.5

See also decimal points; fractions; International System of Units (SystÃ¨me international d'unitÃ©s, SI); measurement, US;

metric system; scientific and technical works

mathematical expressions

abbreviations in, 12.17, 12.63, table 12.2

breaks in, 12.23

centering, 12.21

computer software for, 12.2, 12.9, A.13, A.34, table 12.1

consistency of notation, 12.4

definitions, theorems, and such, 12.25, 12.56

delimiters: binomial coefficients, 12.32; cases, 12.35; common, 12.26; functional notation, 12.27; functions enclosed by, 12.17;

inner product denoted by, 12.31; intervals, 12.30; radicals in text, 12.44; rewriting fractions using exponents, 12.49; set notation, 12.28--29; vertical bars, 12.33--34

determinants in, 12.51

in display, 12.21; alternative cases, 12.35; fractions, 12.46--49; line breaks, 12.23; numbering of, 12.24--25; qualifying clauses,

12.22; radicals, 12.43--44

elided lists, operations, and relations, 12.19--20

markup of, A.13, A.34

matrices in, 12.50

means in, 12.58

numeration systems for, 1.55, 12.24--25

operations and relations, 12.20, 12.23

probability and statistics, 12.57--59, table 12.3

proofreading of, 2.110

punctuation with, 6.102, 12.18--20, 12.26, 12.28

qualifying clauses in, 12.22

radical signs, 12.43--44

scalars, vectors, and tensors: additional tensor notation, 12.54; definitions, 12.52; Dirac bracket notation, 12.55; placement and punctuation, 12.38; vector and tensor multiplication, 12.53

signs and symbols, 12.9, tables 12.1, 12.4: angle brackets, 6.102, 12.26, 12.28, 12.31, 12.55, 12.58; binary operations and relations, 12.15; brackets and parentheses, 12.17--18, 12.20, 12.22--24, 12.26--32, 12.35, 12.38, 12.45, 12.50, 12.54;

conciseness of, 12.6; consistency of, 12.4; differentials, spacing around, 12.42; fonts and diacriticals in, 12.10--13, 12.65;

functions, 12.17, table 12.2; integrals, 12.41; multiplication, 12.20; operations and relations, 12.23; products, 12.40; radicals,

12.43--44; sentences and, 12.7; special, 12.13--14; summations, 12.39; verbal translations of, 12.3; vertical bars, 12.18,

12.22, 12.33--34, 12.46, 12.51; words vs., 12.5

spacing in, 12.8, 12.16, 12.21, 12.42

standard deviations in, 12.58

standards for, 12.3

statistical material, 10.53, 12.57--58, table 12.3

subscripts and superscripts: alignment, 12.21--22, 12.38; complex, 12.37; determinants, 12.51; in fractions, 12.49; fractions in,

12.47; marking, 12.66; simple, 12.36; spacing, 12.16; uncertainties expressed as, 12.59; vector and tensor multiplication,

12.53

summations and integrals, 12.39--42

in tables, 3.82

uncertainties, 12.59

See also decimal points; fractions

MathML, A.13, A.34, p. 898

matrix (table), 3.66, figs. 3.17--18

maxims, 6.51, 7.57, 8.197, 13.5, 13.36. See also figures of speech

may, might, 5.143, 5.146, 5.220

Mc, Mac, 16.73

me, 5.36, 5.55, 5.179, 5.220

means, notation of, 10.53, 12.58, table 12.3. See also tables

measure, defined, p. 898

measurement, US

dividing numerals with, 7.40

in general contexts, 9.13

length, area, and volume, 10.69

periods with, 10.67

physical quantities, 9.13--17

plurals of, 10.68

repeated quantities, 9.17

simple fractions, 9.14

time, 10.71

weight and capacity, 10.70

whole numbers plus fractions, 9.15

See also decimal points; fractions; International System of Units (SystÃ¨me international d'unitÃ©s, SI); mathematical expressions;

metric system

mechanical editing, 1.109, 2.45, 2.46. See also manuscript editing

medical terminology

diseases, procedures, and such, 8.143

drugs, 8.145

infections, 8.144

resources on, 8.142

medieval works, 7.46, 11.142--43, 14.266. See also classical works

meetings. See conferences; proceedings of conferences and symposia; speeches; unpublished and informally published materials;

working papers

memoranda

documentation of, 14.117, 14.240, 14.242

treatment in text, 8.183

See also pamphlets, brochures, and reports

metadata, A.10, A.36, A.38, p. 898

meteorological phenomena, 8.76

metric system

abbreviations in, 10.52, 10.54--62

dividing numerals with abbreviations, 7.40

US vs. European spellings, 8.151

See also International System of Units (SystÃ¨me international d'unitÃ©s, SI)

Mexico, currency, 9.22

microform editions, 4.60, 14.120

mid-, 7.83, 7.85

Middle English, 7.46, 11.142--43

military terminology, 8.18

armies, battalions, and such, 8.111, 9.48

battles and campaigns, 8.113

medals and awards, 8.114

numbered military units, 9.48

resources on, 10.15

ships and other craft, 8.2, 8.115

titles and ranks: abbreviation of, 10.13, 10.15; treatment in text, 8.18, 8.23--24

twenty-four-hour system, 9.40--41

wars and revolutions, 8.112

minus signs, 2.129, 6.81

Modern Language Association, 14.3

Moldavian language, 11.72--73

monarchs. See sovereigns and other rulers

money

British and other non-US, 9.23--24

dates with currency, 9.26

dollar symbol in non-US currencies, 9.22

K abbreviation in, 9.25

large amounts of, 9.25

noun phrases for, 5.25

resources on, 9.22

words vs. symbols and numerals for, 9.21

See also bar codes

Montenegrin language, 11.74--75

month-day-year vs. day-month-year forms, 6.45, 6.106, 9.36--37. See also dates; time

months

abbreviations, 10.40

capitalization, 8.87

dates in text, 9.32

in documentation, 14.80

See also dates

monuments, 8.56. See also sculpture

mood, of verbs, 5.117--20, 5.141

moon, 8.140

more, 5.84, 5.86--87, 5.160, 6.42

mosques, 8.56, 8.100

most, 5.85--87, 5.161

motion pictures. See audiovisual materials; movies and film

mottoes. See figures of speech; maxims

Mount and mountains, 8.52, 8.54, 10.31, 16.90

movements and styles, 8.78

capitalization, 8.59--60

coinage of adjectives for, 8.59

descriptive designations for, 8.71

period names, 8.72--73

See also economic terminology and periods; historical and cultural terminology; political terminology

movies and film

characters in, writing about, 5.123

contributions to, as work made for hire, 4.10

documentation of: author-date references, 15.53; DVDs and videocassettes, 14.279; filmstrips, 14.278; online, 14.280; reviews,

14.214, 14.216

right of public performance and, 4.14

sequels to, 9.44

subsidiary rights and, 4.60

titles of, 8.185

See also audiovisual materials; television and television programs

MP3 audio files, 10.52, 14.198, 14.221

multiauthor volumes

authors' names in, 1.49, 1.62, 1.94, 2.29, 16.115, fig. 1.10

components: appendixes, 1.57; biographical notes ( see biographical notes); contributors ( see contributors); illustrations, numbering of, 3.11; notes, 1.59; table of contents, 1.37--38; unnumbered source notes, 3.31, 14.49

documentation: bibliographies for each chapter, 14.57; biographical notes, 14.50; cross-references for chapters, 15.37; endnotes for each chapter, 14.38, 14.41, fig. 14.3; particular chapter in, 14.18, 14.112, 15.9; placement of reference lists in, 15.10;

shortened citations for multiple chapters, 14.113; unnumbered source notes in, 3.31, 14.49

editor's responsibilities, 2.29, 2.38--39

publishing agreement for, 4.53, 4.59, fig. 4.1

symposium proceedings as, 4.59

See also manuscript preparation guidelines for authors; previously published materials

multimedia, electronic. See audiovisual materials; electronic publications; online media; publications in multiple formats

multiplication signs

mathematical expressions, 12.20

plant hybrids, 8.124

Unicode character for, A.15, table 12.1

multivolume works

components: acknowledgments, 1.41; pagination, 1.8; titles and volume numbers, 8.173

consistent style across, 2.46, 2.56

documentation of: authors' and editors' names, 14.127; chapters and parts of individual volumes, 14.125; one volume in two or more

books (or parts), 14.126; particular volume in bibliography, 14.124; particular volume in note, 14.123; published over several years, 14.122--24, 14.151, 15.39; within series, 14.131; series compared with, 14.130; volume and page numbers, 14.121;

work as whole, 14.122

See also series of volumes; volumes and volume numbers

municipalities

administrative agencies and departments, 8.62

judicial bodies, 8.63, 14.291

laws and ordinances, 14.300, 14.312

legislative bodies, 8.61

names: in addresses, punctuation, 6.46, 10.28, 10.30; alphabetizing, 16.90--93; capitalization, 5.67, 8.44, 8.52; English forms of foreign cities, 14.137; Fort, Mount, Saint, and such in, 10.31, 11.29, 16.90, 16.93; location of manuscript collections, 14.238;

in newspaper names, 14.210--11, 16.48; on title page, 1.18

titles and offices, 8.18, 8.21, 10.13--14

See also civil and civic concerns; governmental entities; place of publication

museums, 4.94, 8.67

musical group names, 8.67

musical works

documentation of: performances, 14.214, 14.216, 14.280, 15.53; published scores, 14.269; recordings, 14.276; unpublished scores,

14.270

fair-use doctrine and, 4.80

indexes of first lines of songs, 16.6, 16.144--45

titles: indexing of, 16.50; instrumental works, 8.190; operas, songs, and such, 8.189; opus numbers, 8.191; recordings, 8.192;

resources on, 8.188

See also audiovisual materials; sound recordings

music writing

abbreviations for terms in, 10.52

letters used: chords, 7.69; dynamics, 7.71; major and minor keys, 7.70; musical pitches, 7.67; octaves, 7.68

musical examples in, 3.4, fig. 3.5

resources on, 7.66

titles of works: indexing of, 16.50; instrumental works, 8.190; operas, songs, and such, 8.189; opus numbers, 8.191; recordings,

8.192; resources on, 8.188

my and mine, 5.47, 5.50

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

N

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

N, n, in tables, 3.70, 3.73, 3.83, fig. 3.20

n. , nn. (note, notes), 14.157, 14.164, 16.111--12

n/a (not applicable), 3.65

namely, 6.43, 6.56, 6.65, 6.85

names, personal

abbreviations: academic and professional designations, 10.4, 10.16, 10.20--21; author names, 1.18; civil titles, 10.13--14; given names, 10.11; initials, 10.12; list of, 14.55, fig. 14.7; Jr. , Sr. , III, and such with, 6.47, 7.38, 10.19, 16.41; military, 10.15;

punctuation and spacing, 10.12; Rev. and Hon. , 10.18; social, 10.16--17

alphabetizing, basic rules, 16.71--76 ( see also alphabetizing)

alternative spellings indicated, 6.104

articles in, 16.76, 16.91--92

capitalization, 8.4

clerical titles with, 16.39

consistency in spelling, 8.3

deities and such, 8.90--91, 8.94

epithets, 8.33--34

familiar forms, 11.98, 11.118, 14.73, 16.33, 16.71

hyphenated and extended, 8.6, 16.36, 16.72

incomplete or unknown, 16.43--44

indexing ( see under indexing)

initials ( see initials)

kinship terms and, 8.35

letters standing for, 7.62

in list of contributors, 1.62, fig. 1.10

Mac or Mc in, 16.73

married women's, 8.11, 16.36

monarchs, popes, and such, 16.37

nobility, titles, and such, 16.38, 16.66

non-English: in English context, 8.7--17; indexing of, 16.67, 16.76--87; particles with, 8.5, 11.24

nonliteral use, 8.60

numerals with, 9.42--43, 16.66

O' in, 16.74

particles with, 8.5, 8.7--10, 16.71, 16.84

patronymic, 8.12

personal usage preferences, 8.3--4

personifications, 8.36

as phrasal adjectives, 5.91

plurals of, 7.8, 7.10

possessive forms of, 7.16--18, 7.21

pseudonyms, 14.81--84, 15.34, 16.34

resources on, 7.38, 8.3, 16.71, 16.84

Saint, St. , and such, 10.26--27, 10.31, 16.75, 16.93

saints (e.g., Saint Francis), 8.92, 10.26, 14.74, 16.42

2-em dash to indicate omitted, 6.90

word division, 7.38

words derived from, 8.59--60

See also authors' names; contributors; editors' names; titles and offices; translators' names

names, proper

abbreviations: agencies and organizations, 10.24--25; firms and companies, 10.22--23; indexing of, 16.46

articles in, 16.88

associations, 8.69

beginning with lowercase letter, 8.68, 8.153

brand names and trademarks, 4.16, 7.76, 8.68, 8.145, 8.152--53

broadcast networks, channels, and such, 8.185, 10.5, 10.25

continents, countries, cities, oceans, and such, 5.67, 8.44, 8.52

disease names, 8.143

epithets, 8.47

foreign names, 7.51, 8.54, 8.58, 11.29

Fort, Mount, Saint, and such in, 10.31, 11.29, 16.90, 16.93

governmental bodies, 8.61--64

in historical period designations, 8.70--72

hyphens in, 16.72

indexing ( see under indexing)

laws and theories (e.g., Boyle's law), 8.147

mountains, rivers, and such, 8.52, 8.54, 10.31, 16.90

newspapers and periodicals, 7.11, 16.48--49

numbers with, 9.42--50

personal ( see names, personal)

political and economic organizations, and such, 8.65, 8.69

political divisions (national, state, city), 1.27, 8.50--51

popular names for places, 8.47

possessives of, 7.19, 7.25

public places and monuments, 8.55--58

real vs. metaphorical, 8.49, 8.108

regions, 8.46, 8.53

religious, 8.90--92

ships and other craft, 8.2, 8.115--17

variants of, 16.32

word division, 7.38

words derived from, 5.67, 8.1, 8.44, 8.46, 8.59--60

See also business and commerce: names; institutions: names; names, personal; organizations: names; place-names

National Information Standards Organization (NISO), 1.34, 1.105. See also International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

nationality, terms for, 8.37--38. See also countries; peoples

nations. See countries; governmental entities; nationality

Native Americans, 7.9, 8.37

natural phenomena, named events, 8.76

n.d. (no data), 3.65

n.d. (no date), 10.43, 14.152, 14.276, 15.17, 15.41

neither--nor, 5.32--34, 5.195, 5.214

Netherlands. See Dutch language

networks, broadcast, 8.185, 10.5, 10.25. See also television and television programs

new series ( n.s. ), 10.43, 14.132, 14.195

newspapers

copyright issues, 4.8, 4.10

documentation of: in author-reference system, 15.47; basic information needed, 14.171, 14.203; headlines and headline-style in,

14.204; letters to the editor, 14.208; names of foreign papers, 14.211; names of papers, 14.210; news services, 14.212; online multimedia, 14.280; regular columns, 14.205; in text vs. bibliography, 14.206; unsigned articles, 14.207; weekend supplements, magazines, and such, 14.209

names: as author, 14.207; city name in, 14.210--11, 16.48; foreign-language, 14.211; indexing of, 16.48; initial the in, 8.168,

14.210--11; italics for, 14.210; as part of building or award names, 8.170; plurals of, 7.11

news releases, 14.213

news services, 14.212

New Testament

books listed, 10.50

capitalization, 8.105

See also Bible

New Zealand, currency, 9.22

nicknames, 8.33--34, 8.47

9/11 (September 11, 2001), 9.36

no, 5.32, 5.65, 6.39

no. (musical works), 8.190

nobility

alphabetizing names of, 16.66

indexing names of, 16.38, 16.66

resources on, 8.31

titles in text, 8.31

See also sovereigns and other rulers

no data ( n.d. ), 3.65

no date ( n.d. ), 10.43, 14.152, 14.276, 15.17, 15.41

"no derivatives" clause, 4.57

noncommercial clause, 4.57

none, 5.32, 5.64, 5.65, 5.220

noon and midnight, 9.39

no place ( n.p. ), 10.43, 14.138, 14.169

North, northern, 8.45--46

Norwegian language, 11.65--66

not, 5.102, 6.40--41

notch binding, defined, p. 898

note numbers

basic format, 14.15

keyed to line or page numbers, 14.48, figs. 14.5--6

multiple citations and references, 14.23

placement of, 14.21--22, 14.48

and punctuation, 14.21

reducing number of, 14.52

renumbering of, 2.59

sequencing of numbers and symbols, 14.20, 14.44, 14.47, fig. 14.4

single or several consecutive, 14.164

symbols instead of, 14.20, 14.44, 14.47, fig. 14.4

in tables, 2.28, 3.76--77

in text vs. in notes, 14.19

volume and pages numbers with, 14.164

notes, 14.19--55

abbreviation of term, 14.157, 14.164, 16.111--12

abbreviations and ampersands in, 10.3, 10.23--24, 10.28, 10.46--51

added to quotations, 13.7

author-date reference system with, 14.45, 15.30, fig. 15.2

authors' names ( see authors' names)

biblical citations in, 10.46--51, 14.253--54

bibliographies in relation to, 14.56

citations plus commentary in, 14.32

converted in cleanup process, 2.77

cross-checking of, 2.29

cross-references to, 14.23

editing of, 2.59, 2.60--61

of editor or translator plus author, 14.46, fig. 14.4

electronic enhancements cited in, 14.198

foot- plus end-, 14.44--46, fig. 14.4

foot- vs. end-, 14.38--43, fig. 14.2, fig. 14.3

format of, 1.59

frequent reference to single source, 13.65

generic markup of, 2.78

indexing of, 14.164, 16.109--13, 16.117

keyed to line or page numbers, 14.48, figs. 14.5--6

manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.20

multiple citations in single, 14.23, 14.52

numbering: multiple citations and references, 14.23; placement of, 14.21; sequencing of numbers and symbols, 14.20, 14.44,

14.47, fig. 14.4; in tables, 2.28, 3.76--77; in text vs. in notes, 14.19; with titles and subheads, 14.22; unnumbered notes in relation to, 14.47

original-language quotations in, 13.75

page, volume, and other locating information: abbreviations for page, volume, and such, 14.157; arabic vs. roman numerals, 14.154;

ff. and passim, 14.156; folio editions, 14.162; illustrations and tables, 14.165; line numbers, 14.163; numbered notes, 14.164;

page and chapter numbers, 14.160; ranges (inclusive numbers), 14.111--13, 14.155; signed signatures, 14.161; specific pages,

14.174; when to omit p. and pp. , 14.158; when to omit vol. , 14.159

paragraphing in, 14.35

part title for, 1.47

in previously published materials, 2.42

proofreading, 14.36, fig. 14.1

publication facts ( see publication details)

quotation within note, 14.33

quotations with original references to, 13.7

referenced in text citations, 15.22

remedies for excessive: abbreviations for frequently cited works, 14.54--55, fig. 14.7; avoiding overlong, 14.51; several citations in single, 14.52; text citations, 14.53

scholarly symbols in, 10.44

see and cf. in, 14.37

substantive (or discursive) type of, 14.34, 14.44, 16.110

for tables ( see under tables)

titles of works in ( see titles of works in documentation)

unnumbered: acknowledgments in, 14.50; biographical notes in, 1.49, 14.50; for epigraphs, 1.36, 1.48, 14.47; keyed to text by line or page numbers, 14.48, figs. 14.5--6; numbered notes in relation to, 14.20, 14.44, 14.47, fig. 14.4; referring to entire chapter, 1.48, 14.22; source notes in, 1.49, 14.47, 14.49

in web-based publications, 1.117

See also documentation; endnotes; footnotes; notes and bibliography system; and specific materials to document

notes and bibliography system

basic format: bibliography entry, 14.16; books as model for other materials, 14.68; elements to include, 14.69; examples and variations, 14.18; flexibility and consistency, 14.70; notes, 14.15; page numbers and other locators, 14.17

disciplines that use, 14.2

examples and variations, 14.18

flexibility of, 14.1

relationship of notes and bibliographies in, 14.56

See also bibliographies; documentation; notes; shortened citations; titles of works in documentation; and specific materials to document

not only--but also, 5.195, 5.214

nouns, 5.4--25

adjective pronoun as modifier, 5.65

adjectives as, 5.22, 5.25, 5.92, 5.226, 7.25

adverbs as, 5.24--25, 5.154

agreement of personal pronoun with, 5.40

appositive, 5.21

articles with coordinate, 5.73

attributive, 5.22

case: definition, 5.12; function of, 5.16; genitive, 5.12, 5.19--20; nominative, 5.17; objective (accusative), 5.18

coinages, 7.13

definitions: generally, 5.4; common (concrete, abstract, and collective), 5.5; count, 5.7; mass (noncount), 5.8; noun-equivalents and substantives, 5.10; proper, 5.6

em dash between pronoun and introductory, 6.83

functional variations of, 5.22--25

gerunds as, 5.25

indexing of, 16.9, 16.62

as interjections (exclamatory), 5.210

mass noun with prepositional phrase, 5.9

non-noun words and phrases as, 5.25

plurals: alternative forms, 7.6; compounds, 7.7; numbers, 7.14, 9.54; proper, 7.8; with singular meaning, 7.19; standard forms, 7.5

possessives, 7.15 ( see also possessives)

prepositional phrase as, 5.173

properties: case, 5.12; gender, 5.14; list of, 5.11; number, 5.13, 5.130--31; person, 5.15

series of, and articles, 5.73

titles of works as singular, 8.164

verbs as, 5.23

See also names, personal; names, proper; place-names; pronouns

noun-to-verb transitions, 5.23

n.p. (no place, no publisher, no page), 10.43, 14.138, 14.169

n.s. (new series), 10.43, 14.132, 14.195

n th degree, 9.6. See also ordinal numbers

numbering

appendixes, 1.57

captions, 2.25, 3.13

chapters, 1.47--48, 1.52, 8.178

double or multiple, 1.55, 2.25--26, 3.11, 3.51, 12.25

of lists, 6.94

manuscript pages in electronic file, 2.35

of mathematical expressions, 12.24--25

paragraphs, 1.116

sections and subsections, 1.55, 1.116, 16.13

subhead considerations, 1.55

See also chapter numbers; illustrations; issue numbers; note numbers; numbers; page numbers (folios); pagination; tables

numbers

abbreviations and symbols with, 9.16--17

addresses and thoroughfares, 9.51--53

alignment, in tables, 3.70, 3.84, fig. 3.13, figs. 3.15--16, fig. 3.20

alphabetizing in indexes, 16.65--66

a or an with, 7.44

basic principles, 9.1--2; alternative rule, 9.3; consistency, flexibility, and readability, 9.1, 9.7, 9.13--14, 9.19

commas between digits, 9.55

dates: all-numeral style, 6.45, 6.106, 9.36--37; centuries, 8.70, 9.33--34; decades, 9.34; eras, 9.35, 9.63; month and day, 9.32;

periods, 8.70; year abbreviated, 9.31; year alone, 9.30

editorial uses: chart labels, 3.44; divisions in publications and documents, 9.27--29; indexes, 16.65--66; lists, 6.94, 6.123--26;

notes applying to specific parts of table, 3.77; outlines, 6.94, 6.126

full style, 9.61

Greek, 11.137, table 11.5

hundreds, thousands, and hundred thousands, 9.4, 9.55

hyphenation guide, 7.85

hyphens to separate, 6.77

inclusive (or continuing) ( see inclusive [or continuing] numbers)

large, 9.8--12

line breaks and, 7.39

million, billion (US vs UK), 9.8

in names and titles: military units, 9.48; monarchs, popes, and such, 9.42; personal names, 9.43, 10.19; places of worship, 9.49;

political and judicial divisions, 9.47; sequels, 9.44; successive governments and dynasties, 9.46; unions and lodges, 9.50;

vehicles and vessels, 9.45

nd, th, and rd in ordinals (e.g., 122nd), 9.6

old-style, avoided in tabular matter, 3.84

physical quantities: abbreviations and symbols, 9.16--17, 10.52, 10.69--70; repeated quantities, 9.17; simple fractions, 9.14;

spelled out, 9.13; whole numbers plus fractions, 9.15

plurals of, 7.14, 9.54

possessive forms of, 7.16

ranges ( see inclusive [or continuing] numbers)

resources on, 9.1

sentence beginning with, 9.5

sequencing of symbols and, 14.20, 14.44, 14.47, fig. 14.4

space between digits, 9.56

spelled out: alternative rule, 9.3; consistency, readability, and flexibility, 9.7; direct discourse, 13.42; fractions, 9.14--15; general rule, 9.2; hundreds, thousands, and hundred thousands (round numbers), 9.4; hyphens with, 7.85; marking manuscript for,

2.90; marking proofs for, 2.126; to with inclusive numbers, 9.59; number beginning a sentence, 9.5; ordinals, 9.6; physical quantities, 9.13

in titles of works, 14.96

uses, other: binary systems, 9.11; decimal fractions, 9.19--20; dex with, 9.12; historical periods, 8.70; mass, in chemical terms,

8.149; mega-, giga-, tera-, and such, 9.10--11, 10.52, 10.57; monetary amounts, 9.21--26; ordinals, 9.6; percentages, 9.18;

powers of ten, 9.9; telephone numbers, 6.77

See also arabic numerals; chapter numbers; currency; decimal points; fractions; inclusive (or continuing) numbers;

International System of Units (SystÃ¨me international d'unitÃ©s, SI); issue numbers; line numbers; mathematical expressions;

measurement, US; metric system; note numbers; numbering; ordinal numbers; page numbers (folios); roman numerals;

subscripts; superscripts; volumes and volume numbers

number sign, 3.77, 14.12

numerals. See arabic numerals; numbering; numbers; roman numerals

numerical order, subentries in, 16.69

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

O

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

O' , 16.74

O and oh, 6.37, 7.45

oaths, 8.83

oceans, 5.67, 8.44, 8.52

o'clock, 9.38--39, 10.42

OCR (optical character recognition), 2.40, 10.52, p. 898

of, 7.24, 7.27

offprints, 1.48, A.39, p. 898

offset printing

continuous-tone images in, 3.3, figs. 3.1--2

definition, p. 898

description, A.47, fig. A.6

of-genitive, 5.20, 5.187

of whom, of which, 5.60--61

Old English, 7.46, 11.142--43

old series ( o.s. ), 14.132

Old Testament

books listed, 10.48

capitalization, 8.105

See also Bible

online media

documentation of: audiovisual materials, generally, 14.274; books, 14.167, 14.169; dictionaries and encyclopedias, 14.247--48;

legal and public documents, 14.282; multimedia, 14.280; sound recordings, 14.277

titles of, 8.186--87

See also electronic publications

only, 5.182

op. (musical works), 8.191

op. cit. , 10.43, 14.31

open-source model, 4.57

operas, 8.189. See also musical works

optical character recognition (OCR), 2.40, 10.52, p. 898

or

in double titles of works, 8.165, 14.99

pronoun and antecedent with, 5.32--34

punctuation with, 6.28, 6.43

slash instead of, 6.104

See also conjunctions

ordinal numbers, 9.6

day of the month as, 9.32

in foreign languages, 11.30

in legal-style citations, 14.286

numbered streets, 9.52

permissible changes to, 14.96

personal names with, 9.43, 10.19

successive governments and dynasties, 9.46

styling of, 9.6

organizations

abbreviations used in, list of, 10.72

names: abbreviations, 10.24; acronyms, 16.64; articles in, 8.67, 16.88; as authors, 14.92, 15.36; in documentation, 14.92, 15.36;

foreign-language, 11.8, 11.29; indexing of, 16.46, 16.64, 16.88--89; numbered branches of, 9.50; periodical titles in, 8.170;

place-names within, 6.46, 6.81; possessives of, 7.19; treatment in text, 8.61--69

political and economic organizations and movements, 8.65--66, 8.69

titles and offices in, 8.24, 8.26

See also business and commerce; governmental entities; institutions

original expression and originality, 4.3, 4.5, 4.68. See also intellectual property rights

ornaments for text break, 1.56

orphans (lines), 2.113, p. 899

"orphan works" problem, 4.75

o.s. ( old series), 14.132

outlines

basic principles, 6.121

parts of a book, 1.4

publishing process, 2.2, fig. 2.1, fig. 2.2

punctuation and format, 6.94, 6.126

See also lists

Oxford comma, 6.18--21. See also commas

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

P

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

p. , pp. , 10.43, 14.157--58

page

abbreviation of term, 10.43, 14.157--58

bad breaks in, 16.138

checking overall appearance, 2.113--14

design specifications, A.18, figs. A.3--4

See also page numbers (folios); pagination; proofs

page numbers (folios)

appropriate use of, 1.5, 9.27

blind or unexpressed, 1.5--7, 1.45, 1.48, 3.6

cross-checking text citations and reference lists for, 2.29, 15.20

cross-references to specific pages within same text, 2.32, 2.57

in documentation, 14.14--17, 15.8; agreement of text citations and reference lists, 15.20; arabic vs. roman numerals, 14.154;

block quotations, 15.25; chapters and contributions accompanied by, 14.111--13; electronic books, 14.166--69; ff. and passim,

14.156; ibid. with, in shortened citations, 14.29; inclusive, 14.111--13, 14.155; legal-style citations, 14.285, 14.288; magazine articles, 14.199; multiple references to same source, 15.26; multivolume works, 14.121, 14.123, 14.125--27; in notes, 14.160;

p. and pp. , 14.157--58; periodicals, 14.174, 14.183; placement of, 15.22; reprint and modern editions, 14.119; volume and note numbers with (e.g., 10:122), 14.159, 14.164, 14.186

drop, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.48

"dummy," 1.76

inclusive range of, 3.81, 6.78, 9.27, 9.34, 9.58, 14.111--13, 14.155, 16.100

location of, 1.5

of manuscript, 2.35

in multivolume works, 1.8

proofreading of, 2.111, 2.130

in running heads for endnotes, 1.14, 1.59, 2.73, 2.111, 14.42, fig. 14.2

in table of contents, 1.37, fig. 1.5

in web-based publications, 1.116

See also inclusive (or continuing) numbers; locators

page proof, defined, p. 899. See also proofs

pagination

basic guidelines for, 1.5--8

blind or unexpressed, 1.5--7, 1.45, 1.48, 3.6

determining page 1, 1.45

of final manuscript for production, 2.72

of folio editions, 14.162

index preparation and, 16.108

journals, 1.76

multivolume works, 1.8

parts of books: appendixes, 1.57; back matter, 1.4, 1.7; chapter openings, 1.7, 1.48; concluding elements, 1.52; dedication, 1.6,

1.35; epigraphs, 1.36; front matter, 1.4, 1.6; galleries, illustrations and tables, 1.7, 1.38, 2.112; introduction in front matter,

1.42; introduction in main text, 1.46; part-title page with text, 1.7; second half title, 1.7, 1.45; text and back matter, 1.4,

1.7, 1.46

proofreading for correct, 2.111--12

recto pages: always odd-numbered, 1.3, 1.5; beginning of gallery, 3.6; definition, p. 901; index's first page, 1.63; journal's first page, 1.76; in offprint planning, 1.48; parts of book starting on, 1.4, 1.48, 1.50; running heads for, 1.10, 1.11, 1.14

in signed signatures, 14.161

specified on final manuscript for production, 2.72--73

verso pages: always even-numbered, 1.3, 1.5; blank after half title, 1.17; definition, p. 904; journal's last page, 1.76; page after second half title, 1.45; parts of book starting on, 1.4; running heads for, 1.10, 1.11, 1.14; series information on, 1.17

See also page numbers (folios)

paintings, 8.193. See also artwork

pamphlets, brochures, and reports, 14.249

art exhibition catalogs, 14.250

congressional reports and such, 14.297

in manuscript collections, 14.240--41

in private collections, 14.242

in published collections, 14.117

titles of, 8.183

paper

environmental issues, A.46

opacity, p. 899

selection and standards, 1.34, A.44

sizes of, A.45

trim size, p. 903

See also photocopying

paperback rights, 4.60

paperbacks, 4.60, p. 899. See also covers of journals and paperback books

paper durability statement, 1.19, 1.34, fig. 1.1, figs. 1.3--4

paper-only editing. See manuscript editing: paper-only

papers, unpublished, 14.226--27. See also unpublished and informally published materials

paragraph mark, 2.95, 2.123, 10.44

paragraphs

conjunction at beginning of, 5.206

marking manuscript for, 2.95

marking proofs for, 2.123

notes with multiple, 14.35

numbering of, 1.116

numbers of, as locators, 14.155, 16.13, 16.108

quotations: block, 13.20--22, 13.54; ellipsis points at beginning of, 13.54; partial or whole paragraphs omitted, 13.54; quotation marks for direct discourse, 13.37; run-in, 13.30--31

software-generated styles, 2.79

symbols for, 2.95, 2.123, 10.44

paragraph style, in indexes. See run-in style (indexes)

parallel structure, 5.212

auxiliary verbs and, 5.215

lists and outlines, 6.121

paired joining terms and, 5.214

prepositions and, 5.213

subheads, 2.56

paraphrasing, 4.82, 13.4

parentheses, 6.92--96

em dashes instead of, 6.82

italic vs. roman type, 6.5

marking proofs for, 2.129

other punctuation with, 6.96; brackets, 6.95, 6.99; commas, 6.53, 6.96; exclamation points, 6.74, 6.96; periods, 6.13; question marks, 6.70

in relation to surrounding text, 6.5

uses: abbreviations, first use of, 10.3; brand names, 8.145; clarifying use of italics or emphasis, 13.60; documentation of journal articles, 14.173, 14.180--85, 15.46; enclosing numbers or letters in lists, 6.94, 6.123; glosses or translations, 7.50;

mathematical expressions, 12.26--27, 12.29; multiple sets of parentheses, 6.95, 6.99; note reference numbers and, 14.21;

table titles and heads, 3.53--54, fig. 3.12; telephone numbers, 6.77; text citations for quotations, 13.62--70; translations of quotations, 13.73--74

See also glosses; parenthetical elements; punctuation; text citations

parenthetical elements

indexes: chapter numbers in note citations, 16.111; continued lines, 16.139; cross-references, 16.18, 16.20; names with,

16.34--39, 16.42--46, 16.62, 16.98

punctuation of, 6.24--27, 6.31, 6.43, 13.62

quotations, sources for: block quotations, 13.68--70; foreign-language materials, 13.71--79; frequent references to single source,

13.65; full citation for, 13.63; ibid. with, 13.64; punctuation of, 13.62; run-in quotations, 13.66--67

scholarly abbreviations in, 10.43

in table titles and heads, 3.53--54, fig. 3.12

See also text citations

Parliament (UK), 14.310--13

participles and participial phrases

as adjectives, 5.89, 5.109

adverbs as, 5.109

be-verbs with, 5.151

dangling, 5.112

disguised conjunctions as, 5.205

formation of, 5.108--9, 5.136, 5.139

gerunds compared with, 5.111

as nouns, 5.25

past, 5.89, 5.139

prepositions and, 5.171

present, 5.136

punctuation of, 6.35

word division, 7.36

See also gerunds

particles

names with: capitalization, 8.5, 8.7--10; foreign names with, 8.7--9, 11.24, 11.99; indexing, 16.71, 16.84

in phrasal verbs, 5.100

in prepositional adverbs, 5.156

parties, political, 8.65

parts and part titles

articles, stories, chapters, and such, 8.175, 8.178

collected works, 8.176

division into, 1.47, fig. 1.5

documentation of, 14.154, 14.157

editing of, 2.55

forewords, prefaces, and such, 8.177

introductions to, 1.37

in letters and diaries, 1.51

manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.16

numerals for, 9.27

pagination, 1.4, 1.7, 1.45

part-title page with text, 1.7

in poetry, 1.50

references to, 8.177--78

running heads in, 1.11, 1.15

second half title, 1.7, 1.45

in table of contents, 1.37, fig. 1.5

See also chapters

parts of books. See books: parts of

Party/ party, 8.65

passim, 7.53, 14.156, 16.13

passive voice, 5.104, 5.115, 5.188

patents, 14.230, 15.50

pattern matching, p. 899

PDF (portable document format) files

definition, p. 899

e-books as, A.38

edited manuscript sent as, 2.68, 2.84

electronic journals as, 1.72

indexer's use of, 16.102, 16.105

manuscript submission via, 2.5

prepress proofs as, 2.104, A.43

print process and, A.42

stable page numbers in, 1.116

web-based publications as, A.36

XML and, A.30

pedigree charts, 3.45, fig. 3.10. See also charts and graphs

peoples

class, 8.40

colors designating, 8.39

compound nationalities, 8.38

descriptive titles for, 8.29

epithets and nicknames, 8.33--34

ethnic and national groups, 7.9, 8.37--38

generations, 8.41

kinship names, 8.35

personifications, 8.36

physical characteristics, 8.42

See also bias-free language; names, personal; titles and offices

per, vs. slash, 6.107

percent, percentage, 3.80, 9.18

perfect binding, defined, p. 899

performance works, audiovisual

documentation of, 14.214, 14.216, 14.280, 15.53

rights and, 4.14, 4.60

periodicals

copyright registration forms for, 4.47

definition, 14.170

documentation of: abbreviated journal titles, 14.179, 15.13, 15.44; basic information needed, 14.171; initials for authors' given names, 15.43; issue number in parentheses, 15.46; journals vs. magazines, 14.172; magazines, 14.199--202, 15.47;

newspapers, 15.47; page numbers in citations, 14.174; punctuation in citations, 14.173; reviews, 14.214--17; sentence-style capitalization for titles of works, 15.45

ISSN for, 1.19, 1.74, 1.78, 1.97

regular departments or columns, 8.175, 14.202

serial rights, 4.60

titles: abbreviations of, 10.7, 16.49; articles and features within, 8.175; indexing of, 16.49; initial the in, 8.168; italics for, 8.161;

magazine, journal, review, and such, 8.169; as part of building or award names, 8.170; sentence-style capitalization, 15.45;

treatment in text, 8.166

volume, issue, and page numbers in, 9.28

See also journals; magazines; newspapers; reviews

periods (punctuation), 6.12--15

abbreviations with, 5.220, 10.4, 10.20, 10.22

marking manuscript for, 2.90

marking proofs for, 2.129

other punctuation with: brackets, 6.13; closing quotation marks, 6.9; ellipsis points, 13.51; exclamation points, 6.118; parentheses,

6.13, 6.96; question marks, 6.118; 3-em dashes (in bibliography), 6.91

permissible changes to, 11.4, 13.7

single space after, 2.9, 2.11, 6.7

uses, 6.12; captions, 3.21, 3.23; colon vs., preceding quotation, 13.19; double or multiple numeration, 1.55, 2.25--26, 3.11, 3.51,

12.25; indexes, 16.97; initials of personal names, 7.62, 8.4, 10.4, 10.12; outlines and lists, 6.124--26; publishing history on copyright page, 1.25; run-in subheads, 2.17; US measure, 10.67

when to omit, 6.14, 6.117, 14.105, 14.178

See also ellipsis points; punctuation; suspension points; URLs (uniform resource locators)

periods of time

cultural, 8.73

decades, 9.34

descriptive designations, 8.71

eras, 9.35, 9.63, 10.39

geological, 8.134

numerical designations, 8.70

traditional period names, 8.72

See also dates; time

permissible changes to quoted materials

basic approach, 2.41

capitalization, 8.163, 13.7--8, 14.96

cautions about, 2.41, 2.58

foreign-language materials, 8.163, 11.4, 11.10

initial a, an, or the, 8.167

punctuation, 8.163, 11.4, 11.10, 13.7, 13.28--29, 14.96

spelling, 13.7

titles of works, 8.163, 8.167, 11.4, 11.10, 14.96

translations and, 13.77--78

typography and layout, 13.8

See also interpolations and clarifications

permissions, 4.1

acknowledgment of, 1.40, 3.31, 4.98--99, 14.49

vs. attribution alone, 4.85--86

author's and editor's responsibilities for, 2.3, 2.38, 4.68, 13.2--3

on copyright page, 1.19, 1.30, 4.71, fig. 1.4

definition, 4.17

digital rights management and, A.40

fees and record keeping, 4.72, 4.91--92, 4.94, 4.97, 4.100--101

manuscript and editorial concerns, 2.3, 2.63

obtaining permissions: archives' restrictions, 4.76; automating process of, 4.91; basic principles, 4.69--71, 4.92; beyond immediate use, 4.71, 4.73; communications on, 4.92--97; missing copyright owner, 4.75; "orphan works" problem, 4.75; sample letters,

4.93, fig. 4.3

publisher's handling of, 4.66--67

signed releases and field notes, 13.47

special types of material: archival material, 4.76; author's previously published material, 4.62, 4.71; compilations, 4.101;

illustrations, 3.18, 3.28, 3.29, 3.31, 4.94--97; interviews, 14.219--20; unpublished works, 4.74, 4.76

US Supreme Court on, 4.86

See also acknowledgments; copyright; credits and credit lines; fair-use doctrine; source lines and notes

personal communications, 14.218, 14.222--23, 15.48

personifications, 5.41, 8.36

PEs (printer's errors), 2.131, p. 900

Philippines, names in, 16.87

philosophical terms and movements, 7.55, 8.78, 8.93

phonetics, 6.100, 7.50, 11.13

photocopy, use of term, 14.228

photocopying

cautions about, 2.6, 2.40, 2.89

classroom and educational use, 4.60, 4.88, 4.90

copyright issues, 4.17, 4.34, 4.55, 4.60, 4.62, 4.88, 4.90

fair-use doctrine and, 1.97, 4.88--91

of illustrations as record, 3.18

by libraries, 4.89

of manuscript, 2.6, 2.68, 2.88

process and fees for, 1.97

See also print-on-demand titles

photographs

callouts for, 2.27

commissioned, 3.32

copyright registration forms for, 4.47

fair use of, 4.83

halftones, 3.3, 3.6, figs. 3.1--2, p. 896

permissions and credit lines for, 3.28--29, 3.32, 4.94--97

previously published, 2.44

reproduction-quality prints, 2.24

titles of, 8.193

See also illustrations

photomicrographs, 3.27

phrases

adjectives and, 5.78, 5.91, 7.81

adverbs and, 5.154, 5.158, 6.36, 7.82

articles as affecting meaning of, 5.74

interjected, 6.41--42

introductory, 6.35--36

monetary amounts, as nouns, 5.25

parallel structure in, 5.212

parenthetical and descriptive, 6.24--27

punctuation: colons, 6.62; commas, 6.24--27, 6.30--31, 6.35--36, 6.40--42; periods, 6.12; quotation marks, 7.57

restrictive and nonrestrictive, 5.21, 6.22--23, 6.26

used as words, 7.58

verbs and, 5.100, 5.168, 5.177

See also clauses; conjunctions; parenthetical elements; prepositions

physical characteristics, 8.42

physical quantities

abbreviations and symbols, 9.16--17, 10.52, 10.69--70

repeated quantities, 9.17

simple fractions, 9.14

spelled out, 9.13

whole numbers plus fractions, 9.15

See also International System of Units; measurement, US; metric system

physical science terminology

chemical names and symbols, 8.148, 10.66

laws and theories, 8.147

mass number, 8.149

metric units, 8.151

radiations, 8.150

resources on, 8.146

See also scientific and technical terminology

pica, defined, A.21, p. 899

Pinyin system

alphabetizing, 8.15, 16.78

apostrophes, hyphens, and tone marks, 11.104

common names, list of, 11.105

exceptions to, 11.103

widespread use of, 11.102

See also Chinese language; Wade-Giles system

pixel (resolution), A.21, p. 901

place, conjunctions as indicating, 5.201--2

place-names

adjectival use of, 5.67, 8.44

alphabetizing of, 16.90--93

continents, countries, cities, oceans, and such, 5.67, 8.44, 8.52

in documentation: manuscript collection depositories, 14.238; meetings and conferences, 14.226--28

in foreword, 1.39

Fort, Mount, Saint, and such, 10.31, 11.29, 16.90, 16.93

indexing: alphabetizing, 16.90--93; definite article with, 16.91--92; Fort, Mount, Saint, and such, 16.90, 16.93; old vs. present forms, 16.29; person or thing with same, 16.62; from shortened form in text, 16.44; two places with same name, 16.45

institutional names with, 6.46, 6.81

on maps, 2.57, 3.20

old vs. present forms, 16.29

plurals of, 7.8, 7.10

political divisions, 8.50--51

popular names and epithets, 8.47

possessives of, 7.16--19

public places and structures, 8.55--58

and punctuation, 6.17, 6.46

real vs. metaphorical names, 8.49

regions, 8.46, 8.53

resources on, 8.43

urban areas, 8.48

word division, 7.38

See also geographical terminology; maps; place of publication

place of publication

basic format, 14.133

books published before 1900, 14.134

city in, 14.135

country of printing vs., 1.27

English names for foreign city names, 14.137

journals, 14.191

"no place," 10.43, 14.138, 14.169

online works without, 14.169

state, province, or country, when to specify, 14.136

surmised, 14.138

plagiarism, 4.68, 4.85

plain-text file, defined, p. 899

planets, 8.137--41. See also earth

plants

cultivated varieties (cultivars), 8.129

domestic breeds, 8.128

scientific names: authorities on, 8.118; author names, 8.123; divisions higher than genus, 8.125; English derivatives from taxonomic system, 8.126; genus, species, and subspecies, 8.119--21; hybrids, 8.124; unspecified species and varieties, 8.122

vernacular names, 8.127--29

See also scientific and technical terminology

plates

definitions, 3.5, p. 900

indexing of, 16.116

lists of, 1.38, fig. 1.7

numbering, 2.25

text references to, 3.9

when to use or omit term, 3.23

See also credits and credit lines; galleries; illustrations

Platonic ideas, 8.93

plays

divisions of, 8.182

documentation of: classical works, 14.260, 14.267--68; frequently cited works, 13.65, 14.54; reviews, 14.214, 14.216; short forms,

14.268

ellipsis points in verse drama, 13.55

quotation of, 13.44--45, 13.55

titles of, 8.181

See also classical works; dialogue; speech

pledges, 8.83

plurals

abbreviations, 7.14, 10.52, 14.157

alternative forms, 7.6

letters (alphabet), 7.14, 7.59--61

Native American group names, 7.9

nouns: coinages, 7.13; compound, 7.7; proper, 7.8--11; singular sense with, 7.19

numbers, 7.14, 9.54

phrasal adjectives and, 5.91

resources on, 7.1

singular form for, 7.10

standard forms, 7.5

technical abbreviations, 10.52

topographical divisions, 8.52

units of measure: less than zero, 9.19; time (e.g., seconds), 10.71; US measurements, 10.68, 10.70

words in quotation marks, 7.12

words or phrases in italics, 7.11

plus sign, 7.68, 7.74

p.m. and a.m. , 9.38--40, 10.42

PNG, defined, p. 900

podcasts, 8.187, 14.221

poetry

abbreviations in (e.g., v. for verse), 10.43

documentation: classical works, 14.260, 14.267--68; editions in, 14.257; short forms for, 14.268; sound recordings of, 14.277; text citations for, 13.69--70

fair use of, 4.79--80

first lines: indexes of, 16.6, 16.144--45; references to, 8.180

format of books of, 1.50, 8.179

interjections in, 5.208

proofreading of, 2.110

quotations from: ellipsis points and, 13.55; format, 13.23; generic markup, 2.78; indention, 13.24; long lines and runovers, 13.25;

manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.19; in notes, 14.33; parenthetical citations for, 13.69--70; quotation marks in poems,

13.26; run-in vs. block, 13.10; run in to text, 13.23, 13.26--27; running in of more than one stanza, 13.32; slashes for line breaks, 6.109

rhyme schemes, 7.65

terms (e.g., canto, stanza), 8.182

titles of poems, 8.179

See also classical works

point, defined, A.21, p. 900. See also ellipsis points; periods (punctuation); suspension points

Polish language, 11.67--69

political terminology

divisions (empire, republic, ward, and such), 8.50

geographical entities in, 8.47

organizations, parties, alliances, and such, 8.65, 8.69, 9.47

unofficial groups and movements, 8.66

See also governmental entities

popes, 8.25, 9.42, 16.37

portable document format (PDF) files. See PDF (portable document format) files

portrait, defined, p. 900

Portuguese language

capitalization, 11.70

names: alphabetizing of, 16.83; treatment of, 8.8

special characters, 11.71

possessives, 7.15--28

adjectives after, 5.79

vs. attributive form, 7.25

basic rule and exceptions, 7.15, 7.19--21

of compounds, 7.23

consistency in forms of, 7.17

definition and uses of, 5.19

for . . . sake expressions, 7.20

genitive with, 7.24

with gerunds, 7.26

has, have to denote, 5.145

of italicized words, 7.28

joint and separate possession, 7.22

of with, 7.27

of letters, 7.16

in names of diseases, 8.143

of proper nouns, 7.16--21, 7.25

of nouns plural in form, singular in meaning, 7.19

of numbers, 7.16

prepositions and, 7.27

of pronouns: adjectives after, 5.79; formation of, 5.64; personal, 5.47--50

of quoted words, 7.28

of words ending in unpronounced s, 7.17

See also genitives

Postal Atlas system, 11.102, 11.105

postal codes

abbreviations: avenue, street, and such, 10.34; Canadian provinces and territories, 10.29; compass points, 10.35; US states and territories, 10.28

punctuation with, 6.46, 10.28, 10.30

when to include in documentation, 14.136

zip code with, 10.30

See also addresses, mailing

poster papers, 14.227. See also unpublished and informally published materials

PostScript (PS), defined, p. 900

pound sign (#), 3.77, 14.12

predicates

adjective, 5.78, 5.81

as linking verbs, 5.99

nominative, 5.17

prepositional phrases and, 5.175

punctuation of compound, 6.29

prefaces

author's and editor's, order for, 1.40

documentation of, 14.116

editorial method explained in, 1.44

foreword compared with, 5.220

illustration credits in, 3.29

indexing of, 16.109

material appropriate for, 1.42

multiauthor volumes and, 2.38

new, noted on title page, 1.26

references to, 8.177

running heads for, 1.10

second or subsequent editions or reprintings, 1.40

prefixes

Arabic names with, 8.14, 16.76

definition, 7.78

division of words with, 7.35

Greek language, 11.141

Hebrew language, 11.113

hyphenation: for compound, 6.80, 7.79, 8.159; guide to, 7.85; multiple hyphens, 7.83; omission of part of expression, 7.84;

readability, 7.80; resources on, 7.77

mid- as, 7.83

numerical expressions with, 9.8, 9.10--11, 10.52, 10.58

Russian language, 11.126--27

in SI units, 9.11, 10.57

words formed with, 7.78

prehistoric cultural periods, 8.73

preliminary pages. See front matter

prepositions, 5.169--91

adverbs and, 5.100, 5.156, 5.173, 5.175, 5.180, 5.186

appropriate use of, 5.191

complex, 5.172

definitions, 5.169, 5.173, 5.180

ending sentence with, 5.176

functional variation, 5.180

of-genitive, 5.20, 5.187

idiomatic uses, 5.189--91

in indexing, 16.53, 16.68

like, 5.181

limiting use of, 5.183--88

mass noun followed by, 5.9

nouns used as adjectives, 5.22

parallel structure of, 5.213

personal pronouns and, 5.42, 5.179

prepositional phrases: active voice to eliminate, 5.188; adverbs and, 5.173, 5.175, 5.180, 5.186; avoiding overuse of, 5.183;

clashing (repeated), 5.177; cutting and replacing unnecessary, 5.184--87; definition, 5.173; elliptical, 5.178; function, 5.174;

pronoun affected by, 5.179

simple and compound, examples, 5.170

as verbs, 5.100, 5.156, 5.177

prepress (preliminary presswork), 2.104, A.43, p. 900

preprints

definition, 1.73, 1.106, p. 900

documentation of, 14.229

pagination, 1.76

President, president, 8.18, 8.20--21, 8.27

presidential documents

orders and proclamations, 14.301

programs, 8.74

speeches, 8.75

treaties, 8.65, 8.79--80, 14.287, 14.302

press sheets, 2.104, A.49, fig. A.7, p. 900

presswork, defined, p. 900

previously published materials

of authors, on copyright page, 1.17, fig. 1.4

compilations, 2.40; illustrations, 2.44; notes in, 2.42; permissible changes to, 2.41, 2.58, 13.7--8; permissions for, 4.101;

preparation of, 2.40; source notes for, 2.43; as work made for hire, 4.10

documentation of, 14.49, 14.115, 14.190

editing of, 2.58

unnumbered source notes in, 3.31, 14.49

See also collected works; derivative works; edited works

price, 1.92, 1.97. See also bar codes; currency

print and electronic publishing model, 1.2, 2.80, A.5, A.25, fig. A.5. See also publications in multiple formats

printer's errors (PEs), 2.131, p. 900

print-on-demand titles, 1.28, A.39

print technologies

digital printing, A.48, p. 894

electronic markup and, A.41

environmental issues, A.46

folded and gathered sheets (F&Gs), 2.104, A.49, fig. A.7, p. 896

offset lithography, A.47, fig. A.6

paper selection, A.44

paper sizes, A.45

prepress (preliminary presswork) in, 2.104, A.43, p. 900

role of PDFs in, A.42

sheet-fed press, p. 902

terminology in, 1.26, A.3

web-fed press, p. 904

See also binding; production and digital technology

prizes and awards

announcements of, 1.93

civil, 8.82

military, 8.114

names of: periodical titles in, 8.170; treatment of, 8.30

probability

mathematical copy and expressions, 9.19, 10.53, 12.57--59, table 12.3

punctuation in tables, 3.78, fig. 3.22

proceedings of conferences and symposia

as collective works, 4.8

details in front matter, 1.17

documentation of, 14.226

publishing agreement for, 4.53, 4.59, fig. 4.1

table of contents, 1.38

See also conferences; multiauthor volumes; special issues, journal

process color printing, defined, p. 900

production and digital technology

design: em spaces, en spaces, and such, A.22; length determinations, A.18; mapping markup to, A.16; picas, points, and pixels,

A.21; specifications, A.19--20, fig. A.4; style sheets, A.9, A.17, fig. A.3 ( see also design and production)

markup tags and languages, generally, A.6--10

print technologies: binding, A.50, figs. A.8--9; digital printing, A.48; electronic markup and, A.41; environmental issues, A.46;

folded and gathered sheets (F&Gs), 2.104, A.49, fig. A.7, p. 896; offset lithography, A.47, fig. A.6; paper selection, A.44;

paper sizes, A.45; prepress (preliminary presswork) in, 2.104, A.43; role of PDFs in, A.42; terminology in, 1.26, A.3

publishing format options, A.39; converting XML to HTML, A.37; digital rights management and, A.40; e-book formats, A.38; print,

A.35; web, A.36

resources on, A.1

workflow, A.1; converting marked-up manuscripts, A.23; divisions of labor, A.2; outline, A.5, A.24, fig. A.5; preparing for multiple formats, A.4; proofreading, A.25; source files, A.31--34; style sheets and, A.9, A.17, fig. A.3; terminology, A.3; web-based cycles, A.26; XML in, A.11--15, A.27--30

See also markup tags and languages; XML (extensible markup language)

production controllers, A.2

professional titles, abbreviations, 10.16, 10.20--21

programs, names of, 8.65, 8.74. See also conferences; governmental entities; pamphlets, brochures, and reports

programs, software. See computer software

prologues. See introductions

pronouns, 5.26--65

adjectives and, 5.29, 5.47, 5.65, 5.77, 5.79--80

antecedents: absent, 5.28; adjective as, 5.29; definition and agreement, 5.27, 5.30; demonstrative pronoun, 5.51; different genders, 5.34; multiple, 5.33; pronoun number and, 5.31--32; relative pronoun, 5.57--58

article as substitute for, 5.77

bias-free language issues and, 5.47, 5.222, 5.225, 5.227

case of, 5.12, 5.35--36

classes: adjective, 5.47, 5.65; demonstrative (deictic), 5.51; indefinite, 5.64; interrogative, 5.52--53; list of, 5.37; personal ( see personal, below); relative ( see relative, below)

compound, 5.48

conjunctions with, 5.192

contractions vs. possessive, 5.50

definition and uses of, 5.26--29

demonstrative (deictic), 5.51

distributive, 5.64

em dash between introductory noun and, 6.83

gender bias and, 5.47

for God or Jesus, 8.94

indefinite, 5.64

integration of quoted material into text and, 13.12

as interjections, 5.210

interrogative, 5.52--53

for named natural events, 8.76

personal: agreement of noun with, 5.40; case of, 5.42--44; changes in form (nominative, objective, genitive), 5.39; compound ( -

self forms), 5.48--49; form of, 5.38; gender and, 5.41, 5.47; after linking verb, 5.43; misuse of, 5.36; possessive, 5.47--50;

rules of, 5.42--44; singular they, 5.47; special uses of, 5.45; after than or as, 5.44

personal, in foreign languages: Danish, 11.22; German, 11.42; Italian, 11.51; Norwegian, 11.65; Polish, 11.67; Swedish, 11.86

possessive, 5.47--50

prepositional phrases and, 5.179

properties: antecedents of different genders, 5.34; case of, 5.12, 5.35--36; list of, 5.30; multiple antecedents, 5.33; number and antecedent, 5.31--32; number and verb, 5.130--31

reflexive and intensive, 5.49

relative: antecedent of, 5.57--58; case with, 5.55; compound, 5.62; as conjunctions, 5.203; definition, 5.54; after one, 5.59; positional nuances, 5.56; possessive forms of, 5.60; whose and of which, 5.61; who vs. whom, 5.63

-self forms of, 5.48--49

for ships and other craft, 8.117

singular "they," 5.47

proofreader's marks, 2.116--29

capitalization changes, 2.128

circling comments and instructions, 2.118

conventions in, 2.116

deletions, 2.121, 2.127

examples, figs. 2.6--7

for extensive changes, 2.119

font changes, 2.128

items to be spelled out, 2.126

legibility, 2.120

paragraph and indention changes, 2.95, 2.123

placement of, 2.117

position or alignment (justification) changes, 2.95, 2.124

punctuation changes, 2.121, 2.129

spacing between letters or words, 2.122

stet, 2.127

transposition of items, 2.125

See also markings, editorial

proofreading, 2.97--136

approach to, 2.1

assigning responsibility for errors in, 2.131--32

definition, 2.97

double-checking in, 2.130

editor's style sheet for, 2.108--9

examples, figs. 2.6--7

extensive changes after, 2.119

indexer's assistance in, 16.125

process and checks: comparing copy with proofs, 2.86, 2.107; illustrations and tables, 2.112; master set and routing of corrected version, 2.100; overall appearance, 2.113; page numbers, 2.111; queries and instructions in, 2.113, 2.115, 2.116, 2.118;

quotations, 2.110; running heads, 2.73, 2.111; for sense, 2.115; spelling errors, 2.108; stages of proof, 2.100--106; text alignment on page, 2.114; typeface and font, 2.110; word breaks and hyphenation, 2.109, 7.33

responsibility for, 2.39, 2.98

revised proofs, 2.102

schedule for, 2.2, 2.99, A.25

specific types of material: compilations, 2.40; copy in non-Latin alphabets, 11.93; electronic publications, 2.133--36

standard for, 2.116

See also proofreader's marks; proofs

proofs

definition, p. 900

digital, p. 894

of index, 2.103, 16.122

indexing from, 16.101--2, 16.105, 16.108, 16.117--25

marking, for indexing, 16.117--21, fig. 16.1

running heads for endnotes, 2.111

stages: book cover and jacket, 2.105; F&Gs, 2.104, A.49, fig. A.7, p. 896; first pages and "galley" proofs, 2.101; index, 2.103,

16.122; journal cover, 2.106; master set maintained, 2.100; prepress and press, 2.104, A.43; revised, 2.102

See also proofreader's marks; proofreading

proper nouns

capitalization, 5.6

definition, 7.6

foreign languages, 7.51

plurals, 7.8--11

possessives, 7.16--21, 7.25

word division and, 7.38

See also names, personal; names, proper

protocol (Internet), 14.11--12, p. 901. See also FTP (file transfer protocol); HTTP (hypertext transfer protocol)

proverbs (maxims), 6.51, 7.57, 8.197, 13.5, 13.36. See also figures of speech

provinces, Canadian, 14.136

pseudonyms and pseudonymous works

abbreviation of term, 14.81

copyright, 4.24

documentation: author-date references, 15.34; cross-references for, 14.84; descriptive phrase treated as author, 14.85; known authorship, 14.82; rarely used pseudonym, 14.83; unknown authorship, 14.81

of human research subjects, 13.47

indexing of, 16.34

Public Access Policy (NIH), 4.64

publication agreement. See publishing agreement

publication date

in book review and book notes sections, 1.92

documentation, author-date references: basic structure and punctuation, 15.6, 15.9, 15.12, 15.24; letters in published collections,

15.40; multivolume works published over several years, 15.39; "no date," 15.41, 15.51; references arranged by, 15.17--19;

reprint and modern editions, more than one date, 15.38

documentation, notes and bibliography: basic format, 14.133, 14.149; books published before 1900, 14.134; multivolume works published over several years, 14.122, 14.151; new impressions and renewal of copyright, 14.150; "no date," 14.152;

punctuation in, 6.60, 14.186; specific volume of multivolume works, 14.123

forthcoming, 8.184, 14.153, 14.182, 15.17, 15.42

identification of, 1.26

location in works: copyright notice, 1.22, 4.40; copyright page or title page, 1.18--19, 1.21--22, 1.25; journals, 1.78, 1.83

"no date" ( n.d. ), 10.43, 14.152, 14.276, 15.17, 15.41

publication details

abbreviations in, 1.21

absence of, 14.152

basic formats, 14.133, 14.149, 15.6, 15.9, 15.12, 15.24

in book review and book notes sections, 1.92

for classical references, 14.260, 14.262, 14.267

country of printing, 1.27

of electronic works, 1.79, 1.98

form of work (e.g., text-fiche), 14.120

in journals, 1.78, 1.83

See also copyright; documentation; editions; place of publication; publication date; publisher's name

publications in multiple formats

articles electronically published before print versions, 14.182

considerations in, 1.111

copyright issues, 1.26, 4.33, 4.60, A.40

differences among versions, 1.73

digital rights management and, A.40

documentation considerations, 14.10, 14.182, 14.184, 14.198

embedded indexes for, 1.117, 16.7, 16.102, A.7

illustrations: electronic enhancements noted in print versions, 3.26; markup of, A.32; printed text references to online-only, 3.9

ISBNs for, 1.32

mathematical expressions, A.13, A.34

options: additional options, A.39; converting XML to HTML, A.37; digital rights management and, A.40; e-book formats, A.38; print,

A.35; web, A.36

production process and workflow: basic outline, A.5, A.24, fig. A.5; considerations in, A.4; conversion of files, A.23; cyclical nature of, A.26; formal markup languages, 2.80; proofreading, A.25; source files, A.31--34; style sheets for, A.9, A.17, fig. A.3; tables in, A.33; XML applied, A.27--30

See also design and production; DOIs (Digital Object Identifiers); electronic files; production and digital technology;

XML (extensible markup language)

public display, copyright and, 4.13--14, 4.33

public documents

acts and treaties, 8.65, 8.79--80, 14.287, 14.302

in author-date references, 15.54--55

bills and resolutions, 14.295

Canadian, 14.136, 14.281, 14.305--8

congressional debates and hearings, 14.297--99

constitutions, 8.79, 9.29, 14.292

courts, 14.288--91, 14.306, 14.310, 14.316

generalist and secondary source writing about, 14.303

hearings, 14.296--97

international entities, 14.316--17

loose-leaf services, 14.251

municipal ordinances, 14.300, 14.312

online, 14.282, 14.312

presidential, 14.301

resources on, 14.281, 14.305, 14.309

short forms for names, 14.287

unpublished, 14.304, 14.308, 14.315

See also laws and statutes; legal cases; legal-style citations; legislation; presidential documents; United Kingdom; United States

public-domain works

definition, 4.26

derivative works based on, 4.21

determining whether a work is, 4.22--24

documentation of, 14.49

foreign works as, 4.28

government-produced, 4.19, 4.43, 4.64

illustrations, 3.34

quotations from, 4.69

when works become, 4.19--20

public laws. See laws and statutes; legislation

public places and structures

buildings and monuments, 8.56

foreign names for, 8.58

rooms, offices, and such, 8.57

thoroughfares and such, 8.55

publishers

address, 1.18--19, 1.21

archival practices of, 1.107

as author, 14.92

copublications, 14.147

digital rights management strategies, A.40

distribution arrangements, 14.148

fair-use "rules of thumb" and, 4.78

grants for, 1.31

joint imprints, 14.145

logos, 1.18, 1.66--68

main editorial offices, 14.135

manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.7

notes on text, 1.44

parent companies, imprints, and such, 14.144

permissions from out-of-business, 4.75

right to make copies and distribute works, 4.13

See also copyright; publication details; publisher's name; publishers' websites; publishing agreement

publisher's name

documentation of: abbreviations and omissible parts of name, 14.139--40, 14.142; and or ampersand in, 14.141; basic format,

14.133; changes in and resources on, 14.139; copublications, 14.147; distributed books, 14.148; foreign names, 14.142;

imprints, parent companies, and such, 1.18, 14.144--46; preferred form, 14.139; unknown or privately published work, 14.143;

when to omit, 14.134

location in works: book review and book notes sections, 1.92; copyright notice, 4.41; covers and jackets, 1.66, 1.67, 1.68; edition details, 1.25; journals, 1.78; title page, 1.18

See also publishers; publishers' websites

publishers' websites

fair-use guidelines on, 4.87

journal information on, 1.57

journals searchable on, 1.104

permissions process facilitated by, 4.91

public-domain rules on, 4.21

URL on copyright page, 1.21

publishing agreement

author's alterations limited by, 2.132

author's responsibilities: fair use, 4.77--87; permissions, 4.69--76; warranties, 4.68

basic provisions, 4.51

copyright owner's rights and, 4.13--18

examples of, figs. 4.1--2

foreign rights and, 4.60

illustrations noted in, 3.15

journal and symposia contributions: alternative licensing arrangements, 4.57; basics, 4.53, 4.59; editors and, 4.58; less than full rights, 4.56; transfers of rights, 4.55

multiauthor volumes and, 2.39

new books: basic book-contract provisions, 4.51; edited works, 4.53, fig. 4.1; option clauses, 4.52; other contracts for special kinds of works, 4.54

noncommercial or no derivatives clauses, 4.57

publisher's responsibilities: copyright tasks, 4.31; rights and permissions requests, 4.66--67; subsidiary rights, 4.17--18, 4.60--65

rights to reproduction and distribution, 4.50

subsidiary rights: author's electronic use of own works, 4.62; author's retention of, 4.18; basic rights vs., 4.17; categories of, 4.60; economic considerations, 4.61--62, 4.65; electronic-rights licensing, 4.61; granting permissions for, 4.66--67; Public Access Policy and, 4.64; university licenses, 4.63

See also copyright; intellectual property rights; licenses for copyrighted works; permissions

publishing schedule

basic schedule, 2.2, A.2, figs. 2.1--2

indexing, 16.4, 16.101

journals, 2.99, A.5, fig. 2.2

manuscript editing, 2.49

proofreading, 2.99, A.25

punctuation

author queries about, 2.66

basic approach to, in relation to surrounding text, 6.1--8

cleanup process and, 2.77

English vs. other language contexts, 11.10

fonts, color, and, 6.2--6

and italics, 6.2

marking manuscript for, 2.90--92, 2.92

marking proofs for, 2.121, 2.129

multiple marks at same place, 6.116--20, table 6.1

permissible changes to, 8.163, 11.4, 11.10, 13.7, 13.28--29, 14.96

of URLs, DOIs, and such in text, 6.8, 14.11--12

See also abbreviations; brackets; colons; commas; dashes; ellipsis points; exclamation points; guillemets;

hyphens and hyphenation; parentheses; periods (punctuation); question marks; quotation marks; quotations; semicolons;

slash and slashes; suspension points; typographic considerations

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

Q

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

quantities. See International System of Units (SystÃ¨me international d'unitÃ©s, SI); measurement, US; metric system; numbers;

physical quantities; scientific and technical terminology

queens. See sovereigns and other rulers

queries. See author's review of copyedited manuscript

question marks, 6.66--70

in documentation: article titles, 14.178; place of publication, surmised, 14.138; text citations, 13.67

vs. exclamation mark, 6.72

inverted, in Spanish works, 11.10, 11.78

marking proofs for, 2.129

other punctuation with, 6.70, 14.178; brackets, 6.70; commas, 6.25, 6.119; ellipsis points, 13.52; em dashes, 6.87; exclamation points, 6.120; parentheses, 6.70, 6.96; periods, 6.118; quotation marks, 6.10, 6.70

in relation to surrounding text, 6.70

in titles of works, 6.118--19, 14.100, 14.105, 16.54

uses, other: editorial doubt, 6.66, 14.138; indirect questions, 6.68; interpolation for missing or illegible words, 13.57; requests as questions, 6.69; within sentences, 6.67--68

when to omit, 6.68--69

See also interrogatives; punctuation

quotation marks

alternatives to, 6.88, 13.40

basic approach, 8.2

"clearing," in poetry, 13.26

closing, 6.9--11, table. 6.1

directional or "smart," 6.112

double or single, 7.50, 7.55, 13.28--29, 13.31 ( see also single, below)

editing of, 2.58

em dashes instead of, 6.88

marking manuscript for, 2.77

marking proofs for, 2.129

other punctuation with, 6.9--11, 6.111, table 6.1; colons, 6.10, 6.63; commas, 6.9, 6.50; ellipses, 13.39; em dashes, 6.84;

exclamation points, 6.10, 6.74, 13.28; parentheses, 6.96; periods, 6.9; question marks, 6.70; quotation marks (single and double), 8.175, 13.28--29; semicolons, 6.10

paragraphing issues, 13.20--22, 13.30--33, 13.54

permissible changes to, 13.7

plurals of words in, 7.12

possessives and terms in, 7.28

primes and double primes compared with, 10.37

in relation to surrounding text, 6.6, 6.50--51

"scare," 7.55, 11.52, 14.102

single: in article titles, 14.177; for definitions, 7.50; double next to, 6.11, 8.175; double vs., 7.50, 7.55, 13.28--29, 13.31; foreign words and phrases, 7.50; horticultural cultivars, 8.129

speech, dialogue, and conversation: alternatives to quotation marks, 13.40; dialogue and quoted matter, 13.9--10, 13.17--19,

13.28--47; direct discourse, 13.37, 13.42; discussions and interviews, 13.46; drama, 13.44--45; indirect discourse, 13.43;

single-word speech, 13.38; unspoken discourse, 13.41

uses, other: article titles, 8.175, 14.176--77, 14.201; block quotations, 13.20--22, 13.54; chapter titles, 14.111--13; common expressions and figures of speech, 7.57; in computer writing, 7.75; conference or speech titles, 8.69; episodes and segments in television and radio, 8.185; epithets and nicknames, 8.33; field notes, 13.47; first lines of poems, 8.180; foreign-language materials, 11.32--33, 11.44, 11.52, 11.79; interpolations, 13.61; news releases, 14.213; poetry, 8.179--80, 13.26; run-in quotations, 13.30--33; so-called and, 7.56; songs and shorter musical compositions, 8.189; source citation placement and,

13.66--67; titles of works, 8.161, 14.102, 14.104; titles within titles, 8.171, 14.102; unpublished materials, 14.224--26,

14.304; website sections and blog entries, 8.187, 14.244; words and phrases used as words, 7.58

when to omit, 13.34--36, 13.43

See also guillemets; punctuation; quotations

quotations

basic principles: accuracy critical to, 2.7, 13.6; attribution and fair use, 4.60, 4.69, 4.71, 4.85; commonly known facts and expressions, 13.5; credit and permission for, 13.3; danger of skewed meaning, 13.49--50; in modern scholarship, 13.2;

paraphrase vs. quotation, 4.82, 13.4; resources on, 13.1

capitalization, 13.13--16

in context of original, 4.77, 4.79

cross-checking of, 2.30, 13.6

documentation in text: block quotations, 13.68--70, 15.25; errors in original source, 13.7, 13.59; foreign-language materials ( see below); frequent references to single source, 13.65; full citation for, 13.63; ibid. in, 13.64; parentheses with, 13.62;

placement of, 13.69; run-in quotations, 13.66--67

editing and author queries about, 2.58, 2.66

editorial additions to, 6.97, 13.58; for added italics or emphasis, 13.60; errors and, 13.7; missing or illegible words, 13.57;

quotation marks for, 13.61; sic, 6.5, 6.73, 7.53, 13.59; square brackets for, 6.97, 13.57--59, 13.61

errors in original source, 13.7, 13.59

foreign-language materials: French, 11.32--33; original-language version in note, 13.75; retranslation issue, 13.79; Russian,

11.121; translation credited, 13.76; translations adjusted, 13.77; translations edited, 13.78; translations plus source, 13.74;

typographic style of, 13.71; where to place translations, 13.73; whether translation is needed, 13.72

foreign terms in, 6.93

length of, 13.10

original spelling in, 7.3

paragraphing: block quotations, 13.20--22, 13.54; run-in quotations, 13.30--33

paraphrasing vs., 4.82, 13.4

permissible changes ( see permissible changes to quoted materials)

poetry, 13.23--27

punctuation: brackets, 6.93, 6.97, 13.16, 13.57--59; closing quotation marks, 6.9--11; colons, 6.61, 6.63, 13.17; commas, 6.50,

13.18; ellipsis points, 13.7, 13.48--56, 13.54; periods, 13.19; quotation marks ( see quotation marks); slashes, 13.27; when to omit quotation marks, 13.34--36

quotations within quotations, 13.28--29

relation to text: assimilation of quotations into text, 13.11--12; initial capital or lowercase letter, 13.13--16, 13.14--15;

introductory phrases before, 13.17--19; paragraphing issues, 13.20--22, 13.30--33, 13.54; poetry, 13.23--27

run-in vs. block, 13.9--10

sic with, 6.5, 6.73, 7.53, 13.59

in titles of works, 8.160, 14.104

See also block quotations; dialogue; direct address; documentation; ellipsis points; epigraphs; fair-use doctrine; guillemets;

interpolations and clarifications; maxims; permissible changes to quoted materials; poetry; punctuation; quotation marks;

run-in quotations; speech

quoted in, 15.52

QurÊ¾an (Koran), 8.102, 11.97, 14.255

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

R

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

race, 8.38--39. See also peoples

radiations, 8.150

radio and radio programs, 8.185, 14.221

ragged right, defined, p. 901. See also justification; margins

ranges (numbers). See inclusive (or continuing) numbers

ratios, 6.60

recto pages

always odd-numbered pages, 1.3, 1.5

beginning of gallery, 3.6

definition, p. 901

first journal page, 1.76

first page of index, 1.63

in folio editions, 14.162

in offprint planning, 1.48

parts of book starting on, 1.4, 1.48, 1.50

proofreading for correct use of, 2.111--12

running heads for, 1.10, 1.11, 1.14

in signed signatures, 14.161

specified on final manuscript for production, 2.72--73

See also page numbers (folios); pagination; verso pages

redline, defined, p. 901

redlining (tracking and showing changes)

author's review of, 2.68

conventions of, 2.14, 2.81

document comparison software compared with, 2.82, 2.85

example of, fig. 2.4

explained in cover letter, 2.67

final check of, 2.86

removed before submission of manuscript, 2.36

when not to use, 2.77, 2.81

See also manuscript editing; word processing

reference lists

authors' names ( see authors' names)

basic format, 15.5--6, 15.21, fig. 15.1; examples and variations, 15.9; flush-and-hang style, 1.61, 2.22; function and placement,

15.10; page numbers and locators, 15.8

bibliographies compared with, 14.67, 15.3

in cleanup process, 2.77

cross-checking of, 2.29

cross-references to other titles in, 15.37

editing of, 2.60--61

hyperlinks in, 1.102

in multiauthor books, 15.10

order of entries: alphabetical, 14.61--62, 15.11, fig. 15.1; chronological, 14.67, 15.17; same-author, same-year works, 15.19;

single vs. several authors, 15.16; works with multiple publication dates, 15.38

publication details: editions with multiple, 15.38; forthcoming works, 15.17, 15.42; letters in published collections, 15.40;

multivolume works published over several years, 15.39; "no date," 15.17, 15.41

scholarly symbols in, 10.44

secondary sources quoted, 15.52

text citations checked against, 15.20

3-em dash: chronological order for repeated names, 15.17; with edited, translated, or compiled works, 15.18; with same author,

same year, 15.19

See also author-date reference system; bibliographies; documentation; text citations; titles of works in documentation

reference works

documentation of, 14.247--48

for manuscript editing, 2.51

web-based, 1.111--17, 14.248, A.36--37

See also catalogs; dictionaries; encyclopedias

regions, national and world, 8.46, 8.53. See also geographical terminology; place-names; political terminology

religions and religious concerns

buildings, 8.97, 8.100, 9.49

concepts: generic vs. religious, 8.98, 8.107; heaven, hell, and such, 8.108; Platonic ideas, 8.93

events: holidays, 8.88; services and rites, 8.109; theologically important (e.g., the Exodus), 8.107

groups: Church and church, 8.97; councils, synods, and such, 8.101; denominations, sects, orders, and movements, 8.96; jurisdictions and divisions of, 8.99; major religions, 8.95

names and titles, 8.18, 8.25; abbreviations for designations, 10.21; alternatives to God, 8.91; deities, 8.90; in foreign languages,

11.29; indexing of, 16.37, 16.39; kinship terms for clergy, 8.35; numbered places of worship, 9.49; numerals with, 9.42, 9.49;

popes and such, 8.25, 9.42, 16.37; pronouns for, 8.94; prophets, 8.92; Reverend, Rev. , and such, 8.25, 8.32, 10.18, 16.39

objects of, 8.110

See also Bible; biblical citations; QurÊ¾an; religious works

religious works

documentation of: chapter and verse, 14.253; resources on, 14.252, 14.255; versions of the Bible, 14.254

Qur'an (Koran), 8.102, 11.97, 14.255

treatment in text: books and sections of the Bible, 8.104; concepts, 8.93, 8.98, 8.108; doctrines and principles, 8.107; other names and versions for bibles, 8.103; prayers, creeds, and such, 8.104; scriptures, 8.102

Upanishads, 8.102, 14.255

See also religions and religious concerns; Bible; biblical citations

reports. See pamphlets, brochures, and reports

reprint rights, in publishing agreement, 4.55, 4.60

reprints

copyright dates of, 1.23--26

definition, p. 901

edition compared with, 1.23, 1.26

editorial additions in, 6.97

identification number of, 1.28, figs. 1.1--2

introduction for, 1.46

preface for, 1.40

unnumbered footnote on source of, 1.49

See also impressions

repro, defined, p. 901

reproduction, copyright and, 4.13, 4.33, 4.50, 4.60. See also photocopying

resolution (pixels), A.21, p. 901

resolutions, 14.295. See also legislation; United States Congress

restrictive and nonrestrictive clauses, 5.21, 6.22--23, 6.26

Reverend, Rev.

abbreviation, 10.18, 10.43

capitalization, 8.25, 8.32

indexing of, 16.39

reverse italics, 8.171

reviews

basic format, 1.92

documentation of: elements needed, 14.214; reviews of books, 14.215; reviews of plays, movies, concerts, and such, 14.216;

unsigned reviews, 14.217

quoted on paperback covers, 1.67

revised and expanded, 1.26

revised edition. See editions

revised proofs, 2.100, 2.102

revolutions, 8.112

rhyme schemes, 7.65

rights. See copyright; intellectual property rights; publishing agreement; subsidiary rights

rivers, 8.52--54

roads and thoroughfares

abbreviations of, 10.34

names of, 8.55, 11.29

numbers of, 9.51--52

See also addresses, mailing

roman (type)

article and chapter titles in, 8.161

definition, p. 901

familiar foreign terms, 7.52

italicized terms within titles, 8.171, 14.103

journal and magazine article titles in documentation, 14.176, 14.201

references to foreword, index, and such, 8.177--78

Romanian language, 11.72--73

romanization. See transliteration

roman numerals, 9.64, 9.66

arabic numerals compared with, table 9.1

capitals: enzyme names, 8.132; personal names, 9.43; sequels, 9.44; sovereigns and such, 9.42; vessels and such, 9.45

definition, p. 901

in documentation, when to use, 14.154

full style for inclusive ranges, 9.60, 16.14

musical chords, 7.69

pagination: back matter added later, 1.8; front matter, 1.4, 1.6, 1.8

subtrahends (back counters), 9.65

See also arabic numerals; numbers

rooms, offices, and such, 8.57

royalties, author's

contract concerning, 4.51, 4.63

failure to pay, 4.36

multiauthor works, 4.53

paperbacks, 4.60

permissions fees from, 4.100

royalty. See nobility; sovereigns and other rulers

rulers. See sovereigns and other rulers

rules (lines)

above continued footnotes, 14.36, fig. 14.1

avoided in illustrations, 3.19

in tables, 3.50, 3.55--56, 3.72, 3.84, figs. 3.13--14, fig. 3.16

run in, defined, p. 901

run-in lists, 6.94, 6.122--23, 7.41

run-in quotations

block vs., 13.9--10

capitalization, 13.13--14, 13.16

citations for, 13.66--67

converting block quotations to, 13.29

initial capital or lowercase letter, 13.14

logical and grammatical assimilation into text, 13.11--12

multiple paragraphs in, 13.30--32

in notes, 14.33

poetry, 13.23, 13.26--27

punctuation: brackets, 13.16; colons, 13.17; commas, 13.18; quotation marks, 13.28; slash, 13.27

See also text citations

run-in style (indexes)

continued lines, 16.139

cross-references, 16.25

description, 16.25

examples, 16.141

flush-and-hang format, 16.24, 16.106, 16.131

indention guidelines, 16.137

sub- and sub-subentries, 16.15, 16.27

See also flush-and-hang style

running feet, 1.9, 1.77

running heads

choice of content for, 1.12, 2.73

definition, 1.9, p. 901

omission of, 1.11, 1.15, 1.48, 2.112

preparation of manuscript for production, 2.73

proofreading of, 2.111

shortening of, 2.73

specific instances: appendixes, 1.13; back matter, 1.13; electronic works, 1.11, 1.77; endnotes, 1.14, 1.59, 2.73, 2.111, 14.42, fig.

14.2; front matter, 1.10, 1.13; illustrations and, 1.15, 2.112; indexes, 1.13, 16.6; journals, 1.77; tables and, 1.15, 2.112,

3.84, 3.85; text, 1.11; web-based publications, 1.116

runover, defined, p. 901

runover lines

definition, p. 901

hanging indention of, 2.11

indexes, 16.25--28, 16.137, 16.141

outlines, 6.126

poetry extracts, 2.19, 13.25

stub column (tables), 3.59

verse drama quotations, 13.45

vertical lists, 6.124

Russian language, 11.118--28

alphabet (Cyrillic), table 11.3

capitalization, 11.119

names: familiar forms, 11.118; treatment in text, 8.12

punctuation, 11.121--23

quotations and dialogue, 11.121

resources on, 11.118

titles of works, 11.120

transliteration, 11.118, table 11.3

word division: generally, 11.124; combinations not to be divided, 11.125; consonants, 11.126; after prefixes or between parts,

11.127; after vowel or diphthong, 11.128

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

S

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

Saint, St. , and such

abbreviations of, 10.26--27, 10.31, 16.93

alphabetizing of, 16.75, 16.93

personal names with, 10.27, 16.75, 16.93

place-names with, 10.31, 11.29, 16.90, 16.93

when to spell out, 10.26

See also saints

saints

as authors, 14.74

indexing names of, 16.42

treatment in text, 8.92, 10.26, 14.74

Sanskrit letters, 11.94

sans serif, defined, p. 902

scale, defined, p. 902

scan, defined, p. 902

"scare quotes," 7.55, 11.52, 14.102

schedules. See publishing schedule

schemas. See document type definitions (DTDs)

scholarly works, generally

abbreviations and symbols used in, 7.53, 10.43--44

anonymity of research subjects in, 13.47

books and journals as core, 1.1--2

conflicts of interest noted in, 1.88

fair-use tradition in, 4.60, 4.80

licensing revenue as supporting, 4.62

retaining original meaning of quotations, 13.49

role of quotations in, 13.2

role of source citations in, 14.1

schools

building names, 8.67

of thought, 8.78

scientific and technical terminology, 10.54--62

abbreviations, resources, 10.1

authorities and style guides for, 8.118, 8.127, 8.130, 8.133, 8.136, 8.142, 8.146, 14.3

See also International System of Units (SystÃ¨me international d'unitÃ©s, SI); measurement, US; metric system; and names of specific disciplines (e.g., chemical terminology)

scientific and technical works

authorities and style guides for, 8.118, 8.127, 8.130, 8.133, 8.136, 8.142, 8.146, 14.3

author's warranties on, 4.68

documentation of: access dates for URLs in, 14.7, 14.185; author-date references preferred, 14.3, 15.5; databases, 14.272; et al.

in, 14.76; initials for authors' given names, 15.12, 15.43; numbered reference system in, 14.23; titles of works in sentence-style capitalization, 8.166, 15.13, 15.45

illustrations: numbering of, 2.25, 3.11; photomicrographs as, 3.27

indexes for, 1.103--4, 16.6, 16.11, 16.26

journals: abstracts, 1.88, 1.90; letters to the editor, 1.95

manuscript circulation of drafts, 1.106

numbers, generally, 9.3

sections and subsections in, 1.55

standards for web-based, A.36--37

subhead levels in, 1.54

tables in, 3.47

titles: abbreviations of journal, 15.13, 15.44; sentence-style capitalization, 8.166, 15.13, 15.45

See also computer terminology; mathematical copy; mathematical expressions

screen, defined, p. 902

scriptural references, 8.102--3. See also religious works

sculpture, 8.56, 8.193

search engines

electronic journals, 1.72, 1.104

indexes compared with, 16.2, 16.7

web-based publications, 1.112--13

seasons, 8.87, 14.180. See also dates

secondary sources, 14.273, 14.303, 15.52

section mark, 3.77, 10.44

sections and subsections

abbreviations of section, 10.43, 14.157

bibliographies, cautions about, 14.58, fig. 14.9

newspapers, 14.203

numbering of, 1.55, 1.116, 16.13

openings, decorative initials for, 13.35

reference lists, cautions about, 15.11

symbol for, 3.77, 10.44

use of term, 1.47

see, 14.37, 16.22. See also cross-references

self-published materials, 14.9

semicolons, 6.54--58

in documentation: more than one subtitle, 14.98; or with double titles and, 14.99; in text citations with additional material, 15.23

other punctuation with: closing quotation marks, 6.10; ellipsis points, 13.52; parentheses, 6.96

serial comma replaced by, 6.19, 6.58

uses: in complex series, 6.19, 6.58; before conjunction, 6.57; before however, therefore, indeed, and such, 6.55; independent clauses, 6.54--57; indexes, 16.17, 16.25, 16.96; lists, 6.123, 6.125; before that is, namely, for example, and such, 6.43, 6.56

See also colons; punctuation

sentences

beginning with: conjunctions, 5.206--7; mathematical symbols, 12.7; number, 9.5; percentage, 9.18; year, 9.30; yes or no, 6.39,

13.38

complex series in, 6.58

deliberately incomplete, 13.53

ellipsis points after complete, 13.51

elliptical construction of, 6.49

list format and, 6.123--24

mathematical expressions and, 12.7, 12.18

parallel structure in, 5.212--15

in parentheses, 6.13, 6.24, 6.96

pauses or breaks, 6.16, 6.84, 11.10 ( see also interjections and exclamations)

preposition at end of, 5.176

questions within, 6.52, 6.61, 6.67--68

series of related, 6.59, 6.61

types of (declarative and imperative), 6.12, 6.69

URLs within, 6.8

See also clauses; words

sentence-style capitalization, 8.156

titles of works: basic principles and examples, 8.156; foreign-language, 11.3, 11.5--7, 14.107--9, 14.193; French publications,

11.30; Latin works, 11.59; periodicals preferring article titles in, 15.45; translations, 14.194

uses: captions, 3.21; chart titles, 3.43; first lines of poems, 8.180; foreign institutions, 11.8; subheads, 1.54; tables, 3.52--53, 3.57

See also headline-style capitalization

September 11, 2001, 9.36

sequels, numbers for, 9.44

Serbian language, 11.74--75

serial commas, 6.18--21. See also commas

serial publications, copyright registration forms for, 4.47. See also periodicals

serial rights, first or second, 4.60

series of elements in sentence

ampersands and, 6.21

colons to introduce, 6.59, 6.65

commas within, 6.18--21, 8.163

em dash and, 6.83

semicolons within, 6.19, 6.58, 6.123

series of lectures. See lectures and lecture series

series of volumes

documentation of, 14.128; editors, 14.128--29; multivolume works compared with, 14.130; multivolume work within, 14.131; "old series" and "new series," 14.132, 14.195; titles and numbers, 14.128

ISBN for, 1.32

titles of series: in book review and book notes sections, 1.92; capitalized but not italicized, 8.2, 8.174, 14.128; on covers or jackets, 1.67; in front matter, 1.4, 1.17; proofreading of, 2.105; working paper as part of, 14.228

See also multivolume works; volumes and volume numbers

serif, defined, p. 902

SGML, A.12--13, p. 902

shall, should

forms and tenses of, 5.125, 5.128, 5.149

ought compared with, 5.148, 5.220

s/he, 5.47, 5.222, 5.227

she, her, and hers, 5.46--50

ships and other craft, 8.2, 8.115--17. See also vehicles and vessels

shortened citations, 14.24--31

abbreviated title compared with, 14.54

authors' names, 14.27

basic approach, 14.24--25

chapters, 14.113

cross-reference to full citation, 14.26

ibid. in, 14.29

idem, op. cit. , loc. cit. discouraged, 14.30--31

letters in published collections, 14.117

multiple chapters from same book, 14.26, 14.113

in notes, 14.43

poetry extracts, 13.70

subsequent text citations, 13.64--65

titles, 14.25, 14.28, 14.106, 14.196

SI. See International System of Units (SystÃ¨me international d'unitÃ©s, SI); metric system

sic, 6.5, 6.73, 7.53, 13.59

signatures (book), 3.6, 14.161, p. 902

signatures (name), 1.40, 10.11

signed languages, defined, 11.144. See also American Sign Language (ASL)

signs, quotation of, 8.196. See also symbols, general

Sir, Dame, 8.31--32, 16.38

slang and jargon

adjective-to-verb transitions in, 5.93

grammar vs., 5.216

interjections and exclamations as, 5.209, 5.211

noun-to-verb transitions in, 5.23

simple adverbs in, 5.157

they as singular, 5.47

they without antecedent, 5.28

treatment of, 7.57

See also dialect; figures of speech; word usage

slant. See slash and slashes

slash and slashes, 6.103--10

in abbreviations, 6.107, 10.4

alternatives signified by, 6.104

in dates, 6.105--6

in fractions, 6.108, 12.45, 12.47

marking manuscript for, 2.94

between poetry lines, 6.109, 13.27, 13.32

in two-year spans, 6.105

in URLs, DOIs, and such, 6.110, 14.11--12

See also punctuation

slides, documentation of, 14.278. See also audiovisual materials

small caps (capitals)

definition, p. 902

emphasizing words, 7.48

full caps preferred to, 9.35, 10.8, 10.24, 10.39, 10.42, 14.284

glosses in ASL, 11.147--54

indexes, 16.140, 16.145

mathematical copy, 12.56

after ornamental text break, 1.56

proofreading and marking proofs for, 2.110, 2.128

See also capital letters

so, 5.206, 6.28, 13.59

so-called, 7.56

social titles, 10.16--17

socioeconomic terminology. See peoples

software. See computer software

solidus. See slash and slashes

songs, 8.189. See also musical works

sort, sorts, 5.51

sound recordings

contributions to, as work made for hire, 4.10

discographies, 14.275, fig. 14.12

documentation of, 14.276--77, 15.53

titles of, 8.192

See also audiovisual materials

source citation software, 1.83, 14.13

source lines and notes

editing of, 2.58, 2.63, 2.66

epigraphs, 1.36, 1.48, 14.47

fair-use doctrine and, 4.85

format, 3.75

illustrations, 2.63, 3.29

importance of, 4.69, 4.71

poetry extracts, 2.19

previously published materials, 2.43

tables, 2.28, 3.75

unnumbered notes for, 1.49, 14.47, 14.49

See also credits and credit lines; documentation

South, southern, 8.45--46

South Asian languages, 11.129

sovereigns and other rulers

Arabic rulers of older times, 8.14

as authors, 14.74

indexing of, 16.37, 16.64, 16.98

numerals for, 9.42

titles of, 8.22

UK legal cases and, 14.310

See also nobility

Soviet Union, former, 10.32

sp, 2.90

sp. , spp. , 8.122

spacecraft, 8.116, 9.45. See also vehicles and vessels

spaces and spacing

abbreviations and, 10.5, 10.12, 10.69

ampersands with, 10.10

in cleanup process, 2.77

after colon, 2.9, 14.121

decimal places, 9.20

design specifications on, A.22

double quotation marks, 6.11

ellipsis or suspension points, 11.54, 13.48, 13.51--56

em spaces, A.22; in impression number, 1.28; marking for, 2.123; runover lines of indented-style index, 16.28

en spaces, A.22

foreign-language materials and quotations, 11.31--32, 11.79--81, 13.71--79

indexes: omitted in note numbers, 16.111--12; runover lines, indented style, 16.28; submission format, 16.131

initials, 7.62, 8.4, 10.4, 10.12, 14.73

marking manuscript for, 2.95

marking proofs for, 2.122

mathematical expressions, 12.8, 12.16, 12.21, 12.42

numbers, between digits, 9.56

within paragraphs, 2.11

parentheses, back to back, 6.96

after punctuation, 2.9, 6.7, 6.12, 6.60, 14.121

between sentences, 2.9

SI units and abbreviations, 10.61

slashes for line breaks in poetry, 6.109

slash in open compound, 6.104

technical abbreviations, 10.52

thin, A.22, p. 903

vertical lists, 6.124

between words and sentences, 2.9, 2.11

See also leading; lines (text); margins

Spanish language, 11.76--85

abbreviation of Spanish, 10.43

capitalization, 11.77

dialogue, 11.80

names: alphabetizing, 16.84; treatment of, 8.11

punctuation: em dashes, 11.80; guillemets and quotation marks, 11.79--80; question marks and exclamation points, inverted,

11.10, 11.78; suspension points and ellipses, 11.81

resources on, 11.76, 11.83

special characters, 11.85

word division: compounds, 11.84; consonants, 11.83; vowels, 11.82

speakers' names, 13.8, 13.37, 13.44, 13.46, 14.298. See also dialogue; drama; lectures and lecture series; speech

spec (specification), defined, p. 903

special characters

alphabetizing and, 16.29, 16.67

author's list of, 2.3, 11.12, 12.13

foreign languages: generally, 11.2, 11.12, tables 11.1--5; African languages, 11.15; Albanian, 11.17; Arabic, 11.97, 11.101; Azeri,

11.90; Bosnian, 11.19; Croatian, 11.19; Czech, 11.21; Danish, 11.23; Finnish, 11.27; French, 11.40; German, 11.48; Greek,

11.130, 11.132--35; Hebrew, 11.112; Hungarian, 11.50; Italian, 11.58; Japanese, 11.107; Latin, 11.64; Moldavian, 11.73;

Montenegrin, 11.75; Norwegian, 11.65; Old and Middle English, 11.142; Polish, 11.69; Portuguese, 11.71; Romanian, 11.73;

Serbian, 11.75; South Asian languages, 11.129; Spanish, 11.85; Swedish, 11.87; Turkish, 11.90

manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.3, 2.15, 11.12, 12.13

mathematical expressions, 12.10, 12.13, table 12.1

proofreading and marking proofs, 2.110, 2.129

software or special fonts, 2.15

transliterations, specialized vs. general contexts, 11.94

XML character references for, A.15

See also diphthongs; ligatures; mathematical expressions; symbols, specific; Unicode standard

special issues, journal

components, 1.78, 1.83, 1.85, 1.96

documentation, 14.187

species. See genus and species

speech

direct discourse, 13.37, 13.42

discussions and interviews, 13.46

faltering or interrupted speech, 13.39

field notes, 13.47

indirect discourse, 13.43

numerals in direct discourse, 13.42

pause, interruption, or faltering, 6.16, 6.84, 13.39, 13.48

play excerpts, 13.44--45

punctuation: colons, 6.61, 6.63, 13.17; commas, 13.18; ellipsis and suspension points, 13.39, 13.51--56; em dashes, 13.39;

quotation marks, 13.37--43

single-word speech, 13.38

unspoken discourse, 13.41

See also dialogue; direct address; quotations

speeches

documentation of, 14.226, 14.280, 14.301, 15.53

online media, 14.280

presidential, 14.301

transcripts, 8.184

treatment of names and titles, 8.69, 8.75, 8.184

See also lectures and lecture series

spelling

of alphabet letters, 7.64

author queries about, 2.66

common errors of, 2.108

in computer writing, 7.76

consistency, 2.63, 2.86

contractions, 7.29

discipline-specific, 7.2

editor's note on, 1.44

foreign language reforms in, 11.41, 11.89

in indexes, 16.29, 16.33, 16.71

interjections, 7.30

metric units, 8.151

non-US, 7.3

permissible changes, 13.7

personal names, 14.73, 16.33, 16.71; foreign, 11.98, 11.118

proofreading of, 2.108

resources on, 7.1

retaining original in quotations, 7.3

sic and, 13.59

US vs. British, 8.151, 16.29

See also plurals; possessives; word division; and specific languages

spell-out mark, 2.126

spine and spine copy, 1.66--68, 1.78

definition, p. 903

spiritual leaders. See clerical titles; religions and religious concerns

split infinitives, 5.106, 5.168. See also infinitives

sports concerns

events, 8.77

numbers (e.g., batting averages), 9.19

teams and organizations, 8.67, 8.69

square brackets. See brackets

Sr. ("Senior")

indexing of, 16.41

line breaks and, 7.38

punctuation and spacing, 6.47, 10.19

stage directions, 13.44

stamping, defined, p. 903

standard deviations, notation of, 10.53, 12.58, table 12.3. See also tables

states (US)

abbreviations and postal codes, 10.4, 10.28

in addresses, punctuation, 6.46, 10.28, 10.30

constitutions, 8.79, 14.292

laws, 14.300

when to capitalize, 8.50

when to include in documentation, 14.136

statistics

abbreviations in, 10.53, table 12.3

mathematical expressions of, 12.57--59, table 12.3

means and standard deviations, 10.53, 12.58, table 12.3

probability, 12.57

See also mathematical copy; mathematical expressions

statutes. See laws and statutes

stet, 2.85, 2.127

stock agencies, material from, 3.35, 4.95--97

stratigraphy, 8.135. See also geological terminology

stream of consciousness, 13.41

streets, avenues, and such

abbreviation of terms, 10.34

compass points with names of, 10.35

numbers of, 9.52

treatment of names, 8.55

See also addresses, mailing; compass points and directions; highways and interstates; roads and thoroughfares

stub column

definition, p. 903

uses, 3.57--62, 3.68, fig. 3.13, figs. 3.15--18, fig. 3.21

See also tables

style

definition, 2.46

mechanical editing for, 1.109, 2.45--46

style sheets (editorial)

definition, p. 903

manuscript editing, 2.52, fig. 2.3

proofreader's use of, 2.108--9

style sheets (electronic), A.9, A.17, A.37, p. 903

subentries. See index entries: sub- and sub-subentries

subheads

appropriate use, 1.53

capitalization, 1.54, 2.56, 8.156

cross-checking of, 2.29

definition, p. 903

editing of, 2.56

first sentence after, 1.53

generic markup of, 2.78

levels, placement, and typographic style, 1.54

manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.17

note reference numbers and, 14.22

numbers with or instead of, 1.55

period at end omitted, 2.17

proofreading of, 2.110, 2.130

run-in, 1.54

as running heads, 1.12

sidehead, p. 902

specific uses: appendix, 1.57; endnotes, 1.59; journal articles, 1.91; list of illustrations, fig. 1.6; stub entries with (tables), 3.58;

table of contents, 1.37

subscripts

chemical symbols, 8.148

definition, p. 903

mathematical expressions: alignment, 12.21--22, 12.38; complex, 12.37; determinants, 12.51; in fractions, 12.49; fractions in,

12.47; marking, 12.66; simple, 12.36; spacing, 12.16; uncertainties expressed as, 12.59; vector and tensor multiplication,

12.53

musical octaves, 7.68

See also superscripts

subsidiary rights

author's electronic use of own works, 4.62

author's retention of, 4.18

basic rights vs., 4.17

categories of, 4.60

economic considerations, 4.61--62, 4.65

electronic-rights licensing, 4.61

foreign, 4.60, 4.70

granting permissions for, 4.66--67

moral, 4.15

Public Access Policy and, 4.64

translation, 4.60

university licenses, 4.63

See also copyright; intellectual property rights; permissions

substantive editing, 2.45, 2.47--48

subtitles

basic approach, 8.166

capitalization, 8.157, 8.162, 14.95, 14.97--98

cross-checking of, 2.29

documentation of, 14.94--99

editing of, 2.55

indexing principle on, 16.55

italics for book, 14.94--95

or as connecting, 8.165

permissible changes to, 8.163, 11.4

placement: chapters, 1.48; half-title, 1.16; omitted on clothbound covers, 1.66; paperback covers, 1.67, 1.68; title page, 1.18

punctuation: colons, 8.162, 14.97; semicolons, 8.165, 14.98

with sequel numbers, 9.44

two or more, 8.165, 14.98--99

such as, 6.27

suffixes

adjectives with: comparative forms, 5.84--87; list of, 5.66; phrasal, 7.81

adverbs with: comparative forms, 5.160--61; forms with or without, 5.154--55

bias-free language and, 5.228

division of words with, 7.35

and hyphenation, 7.79--80, 7.85

pronouns: personal ( -self forms), 5.48--49; relative ( -ever), 5.62--63

resources on, 7.77

See also compounds

sun, 8.140

superscripts

celestial coordinates, 10.64

classical references, 14.262

definition, p. 903

mathematical expressions: alignment, 12.21--22, 12.38; complex, 12.37; determinants, 12.51; in fractions, 12.49; fractions in,

12.47; marking, 12.66; simple, 12.36; spacing, 12.16; uncertainties expressed as, 12.59; vector and tensor multiplication,

12.53

musical octaves, 7.68

note reference numbers, 14.14, 14.19

See also subscripts

supplements

dictionaries, 7.4

journals, 14.188

newspapers, 14.209

suspension points

brackets with, 13.56

converted to spaced periods (ellipsis points), 11.10, 11.35

definition and use, 13.39, 13.48

faltering or interrupted speech, 13.39, 13.48

foreign-language uses, 11.10; French, 11.35; Italian, 11.54; Russian, 11.122; Spanish, 11.81

spacing of, 11.54, 13.48

See also ellipsis points

s.v. ( sub verbo), 1.116, 10.43, 14.247--48

Swahili language, 11.14--15

Swedish language, 11.27, 11.86--87

syllabary, defined, 11.106

symbols, general

a or an with, 7.44

editing, in tables, 3.80--82

in illustrations or captions, 3.7, 3.25, fig. 3.6, fig. 3.8, fig. 3.9

as labels, 3.7, 3.44, fig. 3.6

as note references, 14.20, 14.44, 14.47, fig. 14.4

for notes applying to specific parts of table, 3.77

numbers with, 9.16--17

for page numbers to be supplied later, 2.32

in stub column of tables, 3.60

See also markings, editorial; mathematical expressions; proofreader's marks; special characters

symbols, specific

alignment, vertical and horizontal, 2.124

ampersands (&) ( see ampersands)

angle brackets ( see angle brackets)

asterisks ( see asterisks)

bullets, 2.32, 6.124--25

carets, 2.91, 2.129

celestial coordinates, 10.64

chemical, 8.148--49, 10.66

circled infinity (paper durability), 1.34

copyediting ( see markings, editorial)

copyright, 1.22, 4.40, 10.44

currency, 9.21--26

daggers and double daggers, 3.77

degrees, 9.16, 10.37, 10.64

delete mark, 2.121, fig. 2.6

em space, 2.123

equal space, 2.122

eszett (ÃŸ) compared with Greek beta (Î²), 11.48

genes and enzymes, 8.131--32

less than, more than, 3.81

mathematical ( see mathematical expressions: signs and symbols)

measurement units, 9.17

monetary, 9.21--26

multiplication crosses (dimensions), 3.27

multiplication sign, 8.124, 12.20

number sign (or pound sign, #), 3.77, 14.12

ohm, 10.52, 10.57

ornamental text breaks, 1.56

paragraph, 2.95, 2.123, 10.44

percent, 3.80, 9.18

phonetic, 7.59

plant hybrids, 8.124

plus sign, 7.68, 7.74

position or alignment changes, 2.95, 2.124

pound (ASL), 11.150

pound sterling, 9.21, 9.23--24

primes and double primes, 9.16--17, 10.37, 10.64, 10.69, 11.137, 12.36

on proofs ( see proofreader's marks)

radiations, 8.150

scholarly, 10.44

section, 3.77, 10.44

SI, 10.56--57, 10.60--61

space, 2.95, 2.122

spell-out mark, 2.126

technical, 10.52

trademarks, 8.152

transpose, 2.92, 2.125

vertical bars, 12.18, 12.22, 12.33--34, 12.46, 12.51

wynn (Old English), 11.143

symposia. See conferences; lectures and lecture series; proceedings of conferences and symposia; speeches;

unpublished and informally published materials; working papers

syntax

captions, 3.21

parallel structure in, 5.212--15

stub entries of tables, 3.57

text citations, considerations with, 15.27

SystÃ¨me international d'unitÃ©s (SI). See International System of Units

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

T

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

table of contents

abbreviations list noted in, 1.43

chapters with different authors in, 1.37

components of, 1.37, fig. 1.5

for electronic works, 1.81, 1.83, fig. 1.11

errata noted in, 1.65, 1.86

example, fig. 1.5

format of, 1.83

galleries noted in, 1.37--38, fig. 1.7

journals, 1.78, 1.82--83, fig. 1.11

multiauthor volumes, 2.38

pagination, 1.37

permissions process and, 4.101

placement of, 1.37, 1.78

proofreading of, 2.110, 2.130

running heads after first page of, 1.10

subheads in or not, 1.37

web-based publications, 1.113, 1.115

tables, 3.46--85, figs. 3.11--25

abbreviations and ampersands in, 3.54, 3.60, 3.65

alignment in, 3.68--72

appropriate use of, 3.47

basic structure, 3.49, fig. 3.11

body and cells: alignment and formatting, 3.68--72, figs. 3.19--21; empty, 3.63, 3.65, fig. 3.15, fig. 3.17; multiple values in single, 3.67, fig. 3.13; numbers in, 3.70; rows of, 3.70, fig. 3.19; words in, 3.71

broadside, 2.112, 3.84--85

callouts to, 2.27

checking and adjusting, 3.84

columns: alignment of, 3.68--72, fig. 3.19; continued lines and repeated heads of, 3.85, fig. 3.25; data in, 3.64; empty cells, 3.63,

3.65, fig. 3.15, fig. 3.17; heads of, 3.54--56, 3.69, figs. 3.13--14; in matrix, 3.66, figs. 3.17--18; multiple values in single cells, 3.67; stub, 3.57--62, 3.68, fig. 3.13, figs. 3.15--18, fig. 3.21; totals, averages, and means, 3.72, fig. 3.21

consistency in and across, 3.48, 3.57, 3.72, 3.79

continued lines in, 3.85, fig. 3.25

definition, 3.2

documentation of, 14.165

editing, 2.62; adjusting and checking, 2.29, 3.79, 3.84, figs. 3.23--24; cleanup process for, 2.77; continued lines and repeated column heads, 3.85, fig. 3.25; N, n, 3.70, 3.73, 3.83, fig. 3.20; number ranges, 3.81; signs and symbols in, 3.80--82

electronic files: preparation of tables, 3.46; separate files for each component, 2.23, 2.33, 3.16; submission to publisher, 3.3--4,

3.15

in electronic publications, 1.99

fair use of, 4.84

heads: alignment, 3.69; cut-in, 3.56, fig. 3.14; format, 3.54; parenthetical information in, fig. 3.12; repeated, 3.85, fig. 3.25;

rules to separate, 3.50; signs and symbols in, 3.82; spanner, 3.55, fig. 3.13, fig. 3.16; stub, 3.57

indention in, 3.59, 3.61, 3.72, fig. 3.15, fig. 3.21

indexing of, 16.116, 16.141

lists of, 1.38, 3.37, fig. 1.6

manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.3, 2.20, 2.23, 2.26--27

markup of, A.13, A.33

matrixes, 3.66, figs. 3.17--18

"not applicable" and "no data available" in, 3.65

notes and source notes, 3.75; contents of, 3.53, 3.64; description, 2.28; numbered separately from text, 2.20; order and placement, 3.74; shortened references in, 3.75; on significance (probability) levels, 3.78, fig. 3.22; to specific parts of table,

3.74, 3.77; to whole table, 3.74, 3.76

numbering of, 1.55, 2.26, 3.51--52, 3.54

number ranges in, 3.81

pagination and, 1.7

placement of, 2.59

preparation of, 3.46

proofreading of, 2.112, 2.124

punctuation: significance (probability) levels, 3.78, fig. 3.22; stub entries, 3.57--58; title and number, 3.52

references to numbered, 8.178

rules in, 3.50, 3.55--56, figs. 3.13--14

running heads and, 1.15, 2.112, 3.84--85

runover lines in, 3.59

signs and symbols in, 3.80--82

stub column and entries, 3.57--62, 3.68, fig. 3.13, figs. 3.15--18

text references to, 3.51

titles of, 3.52--54, fig. 3.12

totals in, 3.50, 3.61, 3.72--73, figs. 3.15--16, fig. 3.21

See also captions; illustrations; lists of illustrations and tables

tabs, 2.11, 2.77. See also margins

tags

definition, p. 903

formal markup, 2.80

in manuscript editing, 2.55, 2.78--79

See also codes and coding; markup tags and languages; production and digital technology; XML (extensible markup language)

taxonomic indexes, 16.6

technical writing. See computer terminology; scientific and technical terminology; scientific and technical works

technology. See audiovisual materials; computer software; computer terminology; mathematical copy;

production and digital technology; scientific and technical works

telephone conversations. See personal communications

telephone numbers, 6.77

television and television programs

broadcast networks, 8.185, 10.5, 10.25

interviews on, 14.221

reviews of, 14.214, 14.216

titles of programs and episodes, 8.185

temperature, abbreviations and degree symbol, 9.16, 10.37, 10.52, 10.55, 10.64

territories, 10.4, 10.28--29, 14.136. See also geographical terminology

tests (examinations), 4.10

text. See books; electronic publications; journals; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors

textbooks, 1.9, 4.70, 4.72, 4.100

text citations

abbreviations in, 10.3, 13.65, 14.54

abbreviations listed for, 14.55

additional material in, 15.23

agreement of reference list entries with, 15.20

authors' names: anonymous works and, 15.32--33; different authors with same last name, 15.21; editor in place of, 15.35; et al. in citation and/or text, 15.24, 15.28; more than three, 15.28; not repeated in citation if in text already, 15.24; organization as,

15.36; pseudonyms as, 15.34; same author, same year, 15.19, 15.28 ( see also authors' names)

basic approach: examples and variations, 15.9; format, 15.5, 15.7, 15.21, fig. 15.1; function, 15.10; order within citation, 15.29;

page, volume numbers, and other locators in, 15.8, 15.22; page numbers only in, 15.26; placement in text, 15.24--26

biblical citations in, 10.46--51, 14.253--54

classical Greek and Latin references in, 14.256

indexing and, 16.6, 16.114--15

multiple references in single citation, 15.29

multiple references to same source, 15.26

newspapers in, 14.206

publication facts in, 15.17, 15.24, 15.39--42

punctuation: brackets, 15.27, 15.38; commas, 15.7, 15.9, 15.22, 15.28, 15.29, 15.41, 15.42; parentheses, 13.62--70; semicolons,

15.23, 15.27, 15.29

reducing notes by using, 14.53

in relation to surrounding text, 15.24--25

syntactic considerations with, 15.27

year plus a, b, c in, 15.19, 15.28

See also author-date reference system; block quotations; documentation; reference lists; titles of works in documentation

text references to illustrations and tables. See callouts (illustrations and tables)

Thai names, 16.85

than, 5.179, 5.201

that

appropriate use of, 5.220

in phrasal conjunction (e.g., provided that), 5.193

preposition with, 5.169

as pronoun, 5.51, 5.54, 5.58

punctuation with, 6.22

quotations following, 6.50

in subordinating conjunctions, 5.201

which vs., 5.220, 6.22

that if, 6.32

that is, 6.43, 6.56, 6.65, 6.85

the

alphabetizing, the disregarded in, 14.67, 16.48, 16.91

Arabic equivalent of, 16.76

in blog titles, 8.187

celestial bodies and, 8.137

coordinate nouns and, 5.73

definition of articles, 5.68--69

earth and, 8.139

with epithets, 8.33

with ethnic and national group names, 8.37

in foreign names for places and structures, 8.58

implicit, 5.75

indexing: disregarded, 16.48--49, 16.91; first lines, 16.144; organization and business names, 16.88; place-names, 16.91

in journal titles, 14.179

meaning affected by, 5.74, 5.76

in place-names, 8.58, 16.91

in publisher's names, 14.140

with Rev. and Hon. , 10.18

in titles in running text, 8.167--68

titles of people preceded by, 8.20, 8.29, 8.35, 10.18

See also articles (definite and indefinite)

their, theirs, 5.47, 5.50, 5.220

their, they're, there, 5.50, 5.220

theorems, numbering of, 12.25

theories. See laws and theories

therefore, 6.25, 6.55

theses. See dissertations and theses

they

antecedents and, 5.28

as singular, 5.47, 5.222, 5.227

special uses of, 5.45

thin space, defined, A.22, p. 903

3-em dashes

in bibliographies, for repeated names, 6.91, 14.64--67

and computer sorting, 14.63

keyboarding for manuscript, 2.13

length of, 6.75

in reference lists, for repeated names, 15.17--19

thumbnails, 4.83, p. 903

thus, 13.17, 13.59

TIFF, defined, A.32, p. 903

time

abbreviations: a.m. and p.m. , 9.38--40, 10.42; days of the week, 10.41; eras, 9.35, 9.63, 10.39; months, 10.40; noon and midnight, 9.39; numerical designations, 9.31, 9.34, 9.36, 9.38--41; time of day, 10.42; time zones, 10.42; units (seconds, minutes, etc.), 10.71; word division and, 7.40

chronology systems, 9.35, 9.63, 10.39

of day: abbreviation, 10.42; en dashes with, 6.78; noon and midnight, 9.39; numerals vs. words, 9.38; seconds and dates included with, 9.41; twenty-four-hour system, 9.40--41

hyphenation of expressions, 7.85

periods: cultural, 8.73; decades, 9.34; descriptive designations, 8.71; eras, 9.35, 9.63, 10.39; geological, 8.134; numerical designations, 8.70; traditional period names, 8.72

spelled out, 9.38

time zones, 8.89, 10.42

See also dates

title page

across two pages, 1.17

author of foreword on, 1.39

authors', editors', and translators' names on, 1.18, 14.86

edition number on, 1.18, 1.26, 14.118

journal special issue, 1.85

multiauthor volumes, 2.38

new preface noted on, 1.26

pagination omitted from, 1.6

permissible changes to title when citing, 8.163, 14.96

proofreading of, 2.130

publication date on, 14.149

publisher's name on, 1.18, 14.135

running heads omitted from, 1.10

titles and offices

abbreviations ( see abbreviations)

academic, 8.27--29 ( see also academic concerns)

in apposition (before name), 8.20, 8.29, 8.35

Arabic rulers of older times, 8.14

basic rule and exceptions, 8.18--19

civic and academic honors, 8.30

civil, 8.18, 8.21, 10.13--14

descriptive, 8.29

"down" style of, 8.1

honorifics, 8.32

military and quasi-military, 8.18, 8.23--24

names replaced by, 8.18--19

nobility, dukes, and such: alphabetizing, 16.66; indexing, 16.38; treatment in text, 8.31

organizational and corporate, 8.26

religious: abbreviations, 10.18; indexing, 16.39; treatment in text, 8.25, 8.32

saints, 8.92, 10.26, 14.74, 16.42

social, 10.16--17

sovereigns, popes, and such: indexing, 16.37; treatment in text, 8.22

titles of works, 8.154--55, 8.166

abbreviations of, 10.7

alphabetizing of, 16.48--49, 16.51--52, 16.56

articles (definite and indefinite) at beginning of, 8.167--68, 16.48--49, 16.51--52, 16.56

articles (journal) and parts of books, 8.175--78

artworks and exhibitions, 8.193--95

in award and building names, 8.170

blogs and blog entries, 8.187

book review and book notes sections, 1.92

books and periodicals, 8.166--74

capitalization: basic principles, 8.155, 8.166; double titles connected by or, 8.165; foreign works, 11.3, 11.5--9; headline-style principles and examples, 8.157--58; hyphenated compounds in headline-style, 8.159; quotations in titles, 8.160; sentence-style principles and examples, 8.156; subtitles, 8.157, 8.162

in captions, 3.21--22

conferences, meetings, or speeches, 8.69

cross-checking of, 2.29

documentation ( see titles of works in documentation)

double titles connected by or, 8.165

electronic publications, 8.186--87

in epigraph source, 1.36

foreign-language materials ( see under foreign-language materials)

inclusive years in, 9.63

indexing ( see under indexing)

italicized terms within, 8.171

italics for, 8.161, 8.166

movies, television, and radio, 8.185

multivolume works, 8.173

musical works, 8.188--92

original spelling preserved, 8.163

pamphlets and reports, 8.183

permissible changes to, in citations, 8.163, 8.167, 11.4, 11.10

plurals of, 7.11

poems and plays, 8.179--82

possessives of, 7.28

proofreading of, 2.105, 2.130

punctuation: colons, 1.18, 8.162; commas, 6.17; double titles connected by or, 8.165; exclamation points, 6.118--19, 16.54;

italics or quotation marks, 8.2, 8.161; question marks, 6.118--19, 16.54; quotations in titles, 8.160; in relation to surrounding text, 8.164

as running heads, 1.11, 1.77

in running text, 8.164

sequels, 9.44

series and editions, 8.2, 8.174

shortening of, 8.166

subject compared with, 8.172

subtitles, 8.157, 8.162

titles within titles, 8.171

trademark protection of, 4.16

unpublished works, 8.184

websites and web pages, 8.186

See also bibliographies; chapter titles; covers of journals and paperback books; half titles; reference lists; title page

titles of works in documentation

author-date references: anonymous works, 15.32--33; capitalization, 15.13; cross-references, 15.37; examples and variations,

15.9; sentence-style capitalization, 15.45

notes and bibliography system: abbreviations of, 14.55, fig. 14.7; alphabetical order for works of single author, 14.67; anonymous works, 14.79--80; author's name in title, 14.78; capitalization, 14.95, 14.97--98, 14.193; chapters and contributions including,

14.111--13; classical references, 14.257, 14.261; dates in, 14.101; double titles connected by or, 14.99; electronic publications, 14.166--69; exclamation points in, 14.100, 14.105; italicized terms within, 14.103; italics for, 14.94, 14.103,

14.177; magazine articles, 14.201; manuscript collections, 14.233--34; non-English, 14.107, 14.193; older and very long titles,

14.106; or with double titles, 14.99; and other stories and such with, 14.100; pamphlets and reports, 14.240--41; permissible changes to, 14.96; question marks in, 14.100, 14.105; quotation marks within, 14.102, 14.104; in reviews, 14.214--17; series and editions, 14.128; subtitles, 14.94--95, 14.97--98; titles within titles, 14.102; translated titles, 14.108--10

uniform treatment across documentation systems, 15.2

to

en dash for, 6.78

in infinitive, 5.104--7

tone marks, 11.104

totals, in tables, 3.50, 3.61, 3.72--73, figs. 3.15--16, fig. 3.21

tracking. See redlining (tracking and showing changes)

trade books, defined, 4.18

trademarks

capitalization and symbols, 8.152

copyright issues and, 4.16

lowercase letters beginning, 8.68, 8.153

See also brand names

trains, 8.116. See also vehicles and vessels

transcriptions, 10.11, 13.6, 13.46--47

translated by, when to abbreviate or spell out, 14.15--16, 14.88, 15.6, 15.15

translation rights, 4.60

translations and translated works

copyright of, 1.19, 1.29, 4.14, fig. 1.3

credit for, 13.76

documentation of: foreign-language article and journal titles, 14.108--10, 14.193--94; translated articles, 14.192

editing of, 2.58, 13.78

glosses or translations of terms, 6.93, 6.98, 7.50, 7.55

notes on, 1.44

punctuation, 6.93, 6.98

quotations: adjusting translations, 13.77; credit for translation, 13.76; editing translations, 13.78; original-language version in note, 13.75; retranslation, 13.79; source plus translation, 13.74; typographic style of, 13.71; where to place translations,

13.73; whether translation is needed, 13.72

retranslation, 13.79

titles of works: headline vs. sentence style for, 11.6; non-English titles, 14.107; original plus published translation, 14.109; original vs. translated, 11.7; translated title supplied by author or editor, 14.108; unpublished translation of title standing for original,

14.110

as works made for hire, 4.10

translations of foreign terms

capitalization, 11.9

glosses, 6.93, 6.98, 7.50, 7.55

punctuation, 11.10

word division, 11.11

translators

abbreviation of term, 10.43, 14.15--16, 14.64--65, 14.87--88, 15.6, 15.15, 15.18

notes of, 1.44, 14.46, fig. 14.4

See also editors; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors

translators' names

on covers or jackets, 1.67

documentation of: abbreviation of term, 10.43, 14.15--16, 14.64--65, 14.87--88, 15.6, 15.15, 15.18; author plus, 14.88; author vs., 14.90; classical references, 14.260, 14.265--66; examples and variations, 14.18, 15.9; name in place of author, 15.35;

omission of term in text citations, 15.7; in shortened citations, 14.25--27

on title page, 1.18

transliteration

character sets for non-Latin alphabets, 11.92, 11.110

citing religious works in, 14.255

diacritical marks in, 11.94

italics vs. roman type for terms in, 11.95

proofreading copy in non-Latin alphabets, 11.93

resources, 11.91, 11.96, 11.102, 11.106, 11.111, 11.118

of titles of works and institutions, 11.3--8

Unicode characters, tables 11.2--3

See also Arabic language; Chinese language; Hebrew language; Japanese language; Russian language; South Asian languages

transportation concerns. See business and commerce; highways and interstates; vehicles and vessels

transpose mark, 2.92, 2.125

treaties and acts

documentation, 14.287, 14.302

treatment in text, 8.65, 8.79--80

See also legal documents; legislation; public documents

Turkish language, 11.88--90

2-em dashes

length of, 6.75

with letters standing for names (e.g., Aâ€”â€”), 7.62

for missing or illegible words, 13.57

for omitted personal names, 6.90

typefaces. See fonts (typefaces)

type page, defined, p. 904

typesetters and typesetting

adjusting and checking tables (checklist), 3.84, figs. 3.23--24

checklist for manuscript preparation for design, 2.74

computer software for, A.23

definition of typesetter, p. 904

errors assigned to, 2.131

indexes and, 16.134

instructions to: on electronic manuscript, 2.78; on page proofs, 2.113, 2.115, 2.116, 2.118; on paper manuscript, 2.90

musical examples prepared by, 3.4, fig. 3.5

See also codes and coding; design and production; production and digital technology; typographic considerations

type size

appendixes, 1.57

bibliographies and reference lists, 1.61

endnotes, 1.59

indexes, 1.63, 16.135

title and subtitle, 1.18

type specifications

books, 2.70--71

checking proofs for, 2.113

journals, 1.108, 1.110

style sheets for, A.9, A.17, A.37, fig. A.3

See also design and production; typesetters and typesetting

type styles. See boldface; capital letters; fonts (typefaces); italics; roman (type)

typographic considerations

abbreviations, 10.8

captions, 3.9, 3.21--24, 3.29

concluding elements, 1.52

digital artwork submission, 3.15

epigraphs, 13.34

foreword, 1.39

Greek language, 11.131

illustration numbers, 3.9

illustrations, 3.19

indexes, 1.63, 16.6, 16.47, 16.115, 16.131, 16.135--40

journals, 1.78

line and word breaks, 7.31--43

list format, 6.122

majors and minors in journals, 1.87

mathematical copy, 12.60--67

music writing, 7.66--71

ornaments for text break, 1.56

preface, 1.40

publisher's, translator's, and editor's notes, 1.44

punctuation, fonts, and relation to surrounding text, 6.2--6

special characters and foreign alphabets, 11.1--2, 11.12

subheads, 1.54

table of contents and lists of illustrations, 1.38

tables, 3.48, 3.52, 3.58, 3.84

word division, 7.33, 7.43

See also design and production; production and digital technology

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

U

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

undated works, when to use n.d. (no date), 10.43, 14.152, 14.276, 15.17, 15.41. See also access dates; publication date

underlining, 2.14, 2.94, 13.8

Unicode Consortium, 16.67

Unicode standard, 2.15

character sets for non-Latin alphabets, 11.92, 11.110

definition of Unicode, p. 904

en dash and minus sign distinguished, 6.81

foreign alphabets and special characters, 11.2, 11.12, 11.131, tables 11.1--5

mathematical signs and symbols, 12.9, table 12.1

"smart" apostrophes, 6.114

"smart" quotation marks, 6.112

spaces defined in, A.22

special characters with Latin alphabet, table 11.1

transliterations, tables 11.2 and 11.3

XML character references and, A.15

uniform resource locators. See URLs (uniform resource locators)

United Kingdom

command papers, 14.314

courts, 14.310

currency, 9.21, 9.23, 9.26

legal cases, 14.310

legal resources and reference works on, 14.281, 14.309

legislative bodies, 14.309--13

millions, billions, and trillions in, 9.8, 9.25

Parliament of, 14.309--13

statutes, 14.312

unpublished documents, 14.315

See also British style

United Nations, 8.61, 14.302, 14.316, 14.317

United States

laws and statutes, 4.2, 4.10, 4.19, 4.25, 14.294, 14.300

possessive form of, 7.19

US, when to use, 10.33

See also governmental entities; public documents

United States Code (U.S.C.), 14.294, 14.301

United States Congress

abbreviations for, 14.293, 14.295

bills and resolutions, 14.295

copyright provisos of, 4.25, 4.39

debates before 1873, 14.299

debates since 1873, 14.298

documents and reports, 14.297

fair use and, 4.90

hearings, 14.296

members, 8.18, 8.21

numbered electoral districts, 9.47

numbers for successive terms and sessions, 9.46

presidential vetoes, 14.301

terms for, 8.61

See also acts and treaties; laws and statutes; legal documents; legislation

United States Constitution

legal-style citation of, 14.292

names for parts of, 8.79

numbered divisions of, 9.29

United States Copyright Office

deposit and registration with, 4.4, 4.46--49

fair use and, 4.90

online services and forms of, 4.47

search of records, 4.26, 4.75

See also copyright

United States courts

lower federal, 14.290

state and local, 14.291

Supreme Court, 14.289

United States House of Representatives

documents, bills, and resolutions of (e.g., "H.R."), 14.293, 14.295

members of, 8.21

terms for, 8.61

See also United States Congress

United States Patent and Trademark Office, 8.152, 14.230, 15.50

United States Postal Service, 10.28, 10.30, 10.34--35. See also postal codes

United States Senate

documents, bills, and resolutions of (e.g., "S"), 14.293, 14.295

members of, 8.18, 8.21

terms for, 8.61

See also United States Congress

United States Supreme Court, 4.86, 14.289

United States vs. US, which to use, 10.33

Universal Product Code. See bar codes

universities

abbreviation of term, 10.43, 14.140

nonexclusive licenses claimed by, 4.63

in publisher's name, 14.140

special imprints of, 14.146

student status terms, 8.28

See also academic concerns

unpublished and informally published materials

copyright duration for, 4.25

definitions, 14.153

documentation of: article not yet accepted, 14.182; contracts, wills, and such, 14.231; format noted for electronic, 14.225;

government and public, 14.304, 14.308, 14.315; interviews and personal communications, 14.219, 15.48; lectures and papers presented at meetings, 14.226; manuscript collections, 14.232--42, 15.49; musical works, 14.270; patents, 14.230, 15.50;

poster papers, 14.227; theses, dissertations, working papers, and such, 14.224--29; US legislative documents, 14.304; websites and blogs, 14.243--46, 15.51

fair use of, 4.81

permission to use, 4.74

titles of, 8.184

See also blogs and blog entries; dissertations and theses; interviews and discussions; legal documents; letters (correspondence);

manuscript collections; personal communications; public documents; websites and web pages

Upanishads, 8.102, 14.255

uppercase, defined, p. 904. See also capitalization; capital letters

URLs (uniform resource locators), 14.4--5, 15.4, p. 904

abbreviation of, 10.52

authority and permanence, 14.9

cross-checking of, 2.29, 2.31

DOIs vs., 14.184

listed in print journals, 1.78

manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.3, 2.12, 7.42

publisher's, on copyright page, 1.21

treatment in text: capitalization, 8.68; hyphenation, 2.12, 6.77, 7.42, 14.11--12; line breaks, 2.12, 7.42, 14.12; punctuation, 6.8,

14.11--12; slashes, 6.110; syntax, 14.11--12

in web-based publications, 1.114

as website identifier, 8.186

See also access dates; DOIs (Digital Object Identifiers); electronic publications

usage. See word usage

US vs. United States, which to use, 10.33

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

V

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

v. , 8.81, 14.288

var. , 8.122

vector graphic, defined, p. 904

vehicles and vessels

names, 8.2, 8.115--17

numbers, 9.45

verbs, 5.95--152

active or passive voice, 5.18, 5.104, 5.115, 5.188

adjectives as, 5.93

auxiliary (modal or helping): can, 5.143; contractions with, 5.103; definition, 5.101, 5.142; do, 5.144; have, 5.145; may, might,

5.146; must, 5.147; ought, 5.148; parallel structure in, 5.215; shall, should, 5.149; will, would, 5.150

be-verbs ( be, is, are, was, were, been, being, and am): contractions with, 5.103; forms and tenses, 5.98, 5.151--52; as linking verbs, 5.43, 5.99; noun or pronoun following, 5.17

conjugation: definition, 5.134; imperative, 5.141; past indicative, 5.124, 5.138; past participles, 5.98, 5.139; past subjunctive,

5.140; present participles, 5.136; present subjunctive, 5.137; verb stem (present indicative), 5.123, 5.135; voice and progressive conjugation, 5.116

for count nouns, 5.7

definitions: action and nonaction, 5.95; auxiliary verbs, 5.101, 5.142; conjugation, 5.134; contractions, 5.103; ergative, 5.97;

linking (copula or connecting), 5.43, 5.99, 5.167; phrasal, 5.100; phrases of auxiliary plus principal verbs, 5.102, 5.168;

principal and auxiliary (modal), 5.101, 5.142; regular and irregular, 5.98; tenses, 5.122; transitive and intransitive, 5.18, 5.96,

5.115, 5.166

-ed vs. -t for past tense and past participle, 5.98

finite, 5.35, 5.131

indefinite pronouns and, 5.64

integration of quoted material into text and, 13.12

as interjections, 5.210

with measurements, 10.68

nouns and, 5.8--9, 5.18, 5.23

participles and gerunds, 5.108--13

personal pronouns and, 5.42--43

phrasal adjectives following, 5.91

properties: active and passive voice, 5.115; agreement in person and number, 5.131, 5.132; imperative mood, 5.119, 5.141, 5.225;

indicative mood, 5.118, 5.121; list of, 5.114; misleading connectives, 5.133; mood, 5.117--20; number, 5.130--31, 5.132;

person, 5.129, 5.131; predicate nominative and, 5.132; progressive conjugation and voice, 5.116; subjunctive mood,

5.120--21; tenses ( see below)

in references to works, 5.123, 8.164

singular vs. plural, 5.64

tenses: definition, 5.122; future, 5.125; future perfect, 5.128; past, 5.98, 5.124, 5.137, 5.138--40; past indicative, 5.124, 5.138;

past perfect (pluperfect), 5.127, 5.140; present, 5.123, 5.135--36; present indicative, 5.123, 5.135; present perfect, 5.126

See also adverbs; infinitives

vernacular names, 8.127--29

version control

archival practices and, 1.107

in author's review of electronic manuscript, 2.84

corrections to journal articles, 1.105

manuscript submission requirements, 2.5

multiauthor volume contributions, 2.38

preprints and, 1.106

verso pages

always even-numbered pages, 1.3, 1.5

blank after half-title, 1.17

definition, p. 904

in folio editions, 14.162

journal's last page, 1.76

page after second half title, 1.45

parts of book starting on, 1.4, 1.17

proofreading for correct use of, 2.111--12

running heads for, 1.10, 1.11, 1.14

in signed signatures, 14.161

specified on final manuscript for production, 2.72--73

See also page numbers (folios); pagination; recto pages

vertical bars in mathematical expressions, 12.18, 12.22, 12.33--34, 12.46, 12.51

vertical lists

punctuation and format, 2.11, 6.124--26

run-in compared with, 6.122, 6.123

video blogs, 8.187

video data, 4.60

video recordings

clips and files, 1.100, 1.107, 2.4

documentation, 14.278--80

Vietnamese names, 16.86

virgule. See slash and slashes

viz. , 10.43

voice (active or passive), 5.18, 5.104, 5.115, 5.188

volume editor. See editors; editors' names; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors; multiauthor volumes

volumes and volume numbers

abbreviations of volume, 10.43, 10.69, 14.15--16, 14.121, 14.157--58, 15.6, 15.15

documentation of: arabic numerals for, 9.28, 14.154, 14.180; journals, 14.180--81; multivolume works, 14.121--27; page and note numbers with, 14.159, 14.164, 14.186; text citations, 15.22; when to omit vol., 14.158

front matter in series of volumes, 1.17

identification of, 1.78

multivolume works and treatment of, 8.173

pagination in, 1.76

See also journals; multivolume works; series of volumes

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

W

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

Wade-Giles system

alphabetizing, 8.15, 16.78

common names, list of, 11.105

Pinyin favored over, 11.102

See also Chinese language; Pinyin system

wars, revolutions, battles, and such, 8.112--13

we, you, they, 5.45

web (term), 7.76

web-based publications

cyclical workflow in, A.26

design specifications for, A.20

digital rights management and, A.40

functional features, 1.112, 1.114

HTML vs. PDF for, A.36

navigation as organizing principle for, 1.113

note-taking capabilities with, 1.112

production process considerations, A.4

proofing and testing of, 2.133--36

revision dates on, 14.8

suitability for medium, 1.111

text and other components: end-of-line hyphenation, 7.43; folios, running heads, and such, 1.116; front matter, 1.115; hyperlinks,

1.114; indexes, notes, and back matter, 1.117

See also electronic publications; HTML; publications in multiple formats

web browser, defined, p. 904

web-fed press, defined, p. 904

websites and web pages

of authors, 1.106, 1.114

copyright of, 4.2, 14.9

definitions, 14.243, p. 904

documentation of: access dates for, 14.7; author-date references, 15.51; basic approach, 14.243; site discontinued before publication, 14.245; titles, 14.244

of electronic journals, 1.79, 1.82--83

legal and public documents on, 14.317

permissions processing via, 4.91

photographic permissions via, 4.95

posting copies of published works, 4.90

preprints on, 1.106

publishers', 1.21, 1.57, 1.104, 4.21, 4.87, 4.91

revision dates for continually updated, 14.8, A.10

titles of, 8.2, 8.186--87, 14.244

See also blogs and blog entries; electronic publications; HTML; hyperlinks; URLs (uniform resource locators);

web-based publications

well, 5.208, 6.39

West, western, 8.45--46

whether, 5.201, 5.220, 6.50

which

preposition with, 5.169

as pronoun, 5.28, 5.52--54, 5.57--58, 5.60--62

punctuation of, 6.22

that vs., 5.220, 6.22

who, whom, whose, 5.28, 5.52--56, 5.58, 5.60--63, 5.169, 5.220, 6.68

whoever, whomever, whichever, whatever, 5.62--63, 5.220

whose, who's, 5.50, 5.220

why, 5.201, 5.208, 6.68

widows (lines), 2.113--14, p. 904

wiki, defined, p. 904

will, would, 5.103, 5.125, 5.128, 5.137, 5.150

wills, documentation of, 14.231

wire frames (design mockups), 2.135

word division, 7.31--43

abbreviated units of measure, 7.40

basic rules, 7.31, 11.11

compounds, prefixes, and suffixes, 2.109, 7.35

diphthongs never divided, 7.34, 11.36, 11.45, 11.82, 11.138

foreign words: generally, 11.11; Arabic, 11.101; French, 11.36--39; German, 11.45--47; Greek, 11.138--41; Hebrew, 11.115;

Italian, 11.55--57; Latin, 11.60--63; Polish, 11.68; Russian, 11.124--28; Spanish, 11.82--84

-ing ending, 7.36

numerals, 7.39--40

pronunciation as basis for, 7.33

proofreading for bad breaks, 2.109, 7.33

proper nouns and personal names, 7.38

run-in lists, 7.41

two-letter runovers, 7.37

typographic considerations, 7.33, 7.43

URLs and e-mail addresses, 7.42

after vowel, 7.34, 7.38

words not appropriate for, 7.32, 11.39

word processing

alphabetizing options, 16.5, 16.57, 16.104

commenting functions, 2.36, 2.81, 2.83

document comparison, 2.82, 2.85

formatting codes, 2.59--60, 2.78--79

global changes, 2.66, 2.77

hyphenation function, 2.12

indention, 2.11, 2.18, 2.19, 2.22, 13.9

keyboarding, combinations and shortcuts, 7.74

macroinstructions (macros), 2.76, p. 898

note function, 2.20, 2.83, 14.38

pattern-matching strategies, 2.77

special characters, 2.15, 11.92, 11.110

spell checking, 2.108

styles, 2.17, 2.79

3-em dashes and sorting functions, 14.63

See also manuscript editing; redlining (tracking and showing changes)

word-processing software. See computer software

words

coinages of, 7.13, 8.59

emphasizing particular, 7.47--48, 7.54--58, 11.52, 13.60, 14.102

en dash to connect, 6.78, 6.80--81

italicized on first use, 7.49, 7.54, 11.95

missing or illegible in original source, 13.57

numerals vs., 9.2--3

phonetic transcription of, 6.100

problematic, list of, 5.220

scare quotes for, 7.55, 11.52, 14.102

so-called with, 7.56

spacing between, 2.9, 2.11, 2.122

2-em dash to indicate omitted, 6.90

words and letters used as, 7.58--65

See also compounds; foreign words and phrases; hyphens and hyphenation; sentences; word division; word usage

word usage, 5.216--20

dialect and, 5.23, 5.218

good usage vs. common usage, 5.220

grammar compared with, 5.216

myths and misunderstandings, 5.168, 5.176, 5.206

preposition usage, 5.191

problematic words and phrases, list of, 5.220

traditional view of, 5.219

See also bias-free language; British style; European style; grammar; slang and jargon; and specific parts of speech working papers, 14.228. See also unpublished and informally published materials

works cited lists, 15.5. See also reference lists

works made for hire

contributors' chapters as, 4.53

copyright issues, 4.9--12, 4.23, 4.37

credit line for, 3.32

employer as author of, 4.9

illustrations as, 3.32, 4.69

world, parts of

compass points and terms, 8.45--46

continents, countries, cities, oceans, and such, 5.67, 8.44, 8.52

political divisions, 8.50--51

popular names and epithets for, 8.47

real vs. metaphorical names, 8.49

regions, 8.46, 8.53

urban areas, 8.48

See also place-names

world rights, 4.70

World Wide Web, defined, p. 904

World Wide Web Consortium (W3C), A.11

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

X

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

x-height, p. 904

Xhosa language, 11.14--15

XHTML, A.37, p. 904

XML (extensible markup language), A.11, p. 905

character references in, A.15

design specifications and, A.16

elements and attributes, A.14; examples, figs. A.1--2

as formal markup language, 2.80

generic markup compared, 2.78

origins of, A.12

production workflow, A.13, A.24; conversion of files, A.23; outline, A.5, A.24, fig. A.5; steps preceding, A.25--26; style sheets and, A.9, A.17, fig. A.3; XML applied in, A.27--30

source files: corrections in, A.31; illustrations, A.32; mathematical expressions, A.13, A.34; tables, A.13, A.33

after typesetting, A.30

See also markup tags and languages; production and digital technology

XSL (extensible style sheet language), A.9, p. 905

XSLT (extensible style sheet language transformations), A.37

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

Y

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

years

abbreviated (e.g., '76), 9.31

inclusive range of, 9.58, 9.63

incomplete range, 6.79

placement in reference lists, 15.12

plurals of, 7.14

sentence beginning with, 9.5

slash with two-year spans, 6.105

uncertain, 6.66

unknown date of death, 6.79

words vs. numerals for, 9.30

work period known (fl.), 10.43

See also dates; publication date; time

you, your, yours, and you're, 5.28, 5.45, 5.47, 5.50, 5.220

INDEX

Table

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

of Contents

List of Figures

Z

List of Tables

References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page

Index

numbers in the online edition link directly to terms in the glossary (appendix B ).

zero (0), 9.19, 9.21, 9.40--41

zip codes, 10.30. See also addresses, mailing; postal codes

zoological terminology

domestic breeds, 8.128

scientific names: authorities on, 8.118; author names in, 8.123; divisions higher than genus, 8.125; English derivatives from taxonomic system, 8.126; genus, species, and subspecies, 8.119--21; unspecified species and varieties, 8.122

vernacular names, 8.127--29

See also scientific and technical terminology

FIGURES

Table

1 Books and Journals

of Contents

1.1 A typical copyright page

List of Figures

1.2 Copyright notice of a second edition

1.3 The copyright page of a translation

List of Tables

1.4 A copyright page acknowledging earlier publication of certain chapters

1.5 Table of contents showing front matter, introduction, parts, chapters, back matter, and location of photo gallery

Index

1.6 Partial list of illustrations, with subheads for figures and tables

1.7 Partial list of illustrations showing numbers, titles, and placement of unpaginated plates

1.8 A list of abbreviations

1.9 Opening page of a chronology

1.10 Partial list of contributors to an edited collection

1.11 Table of contents for an issue of an online scholarly journal

2 Manuscript Preparation, Manuscript Editing, and Proofreading

2.1 Sample design and production schedule for a printed book

2.2 Sample production schedule for a quarterly journal published in both print and electronic forms

2.3 Manuscript editor's style sheet

2.4 A manuscript page illustrating the principles of on-screen revision marks (redlining) and author queries

2.5 An example of a hand-marked manuscript page

2.6 Proofreaders' marks

2.7 Marked proofs

3 Illustrations and Tables

3.1 A halftone image of an original photo

3.2 Detail of figure 3.1 showing the halftone dot pattern

3.3 A line drawing with descriptive labels

3.4 A line drawing with figure number and caption

3.5 A musical example

3.6 A figure consisting of a photograph and a line drawing

3.7 Another composite figure, whose parts are identified in the caption

3.8 A bar chart (also called a bar graph)

3.9 A graph with symbols identified in the caption

3.10 A genealogical chart

3.11 A four-column table with three column headings, three stub headings, and nine data cells

3.12 A four-column table with two levels of stub headings

3.13 A four-column table with a spanner head across the second and third columns

3.14 A four-column table with two cut-in heads across three columns

3.15 A four-column table with Total appearing in italics

3.16 An eleven-column table with three levels of column heads

3.17 A seven-column matrix

3.18 An eight-column matrix

3.19 A three-column table with no stub headings

3.20 A three-column table in which values are aligned on the decimal point except for N values

3.21 A five-column table with subtotals and total

3.22 A four-column table with notes on significance, or probability, levels ( p)

3.23 A three-column table doubled into two columns

3.24 An eight-column table with numbers replacing column heads to reduce width

3.25 A six-column table with repeated column heads and "continued" indication following a page break

4 Rights, Permissions, and Copyright Administration

4.1 Agreement, or consent, for publication of an article or a chapter commissioned as a contribution to a collective work

4.2 Agreement for publication of a journal article

4.3 Suggestions for a letter seeking permission to reprint material in a scholarly book

12 Mathematics in Type

12.1 An example of typewritten and hand-marked mathematical copy

12.2 The page of manuscript shown in figure 12.1 set in type

12.3 LaTeX source listing that would generate a portion of the mathematical copy shown in figure 12.2

14 Documentation I: Notes and Bibliography

14.1 A page of text with footnotes

14.2 A page of endnotes

14.3 Chapter endnotes (first page)

14.4 Translator's footnote referenced by an asterisk, followed by author's numbered notes

14.5 Footnotes keyed to line numbers

14.6 Endnotes keyed to page numbers

14.7 A short list of abbreviations preceding endnotes

14.8 The first page of a bibliography for a book

14.9 The opening page of a bibliography divided into sections

14.10 Part of the first section of an annotated bibliography

14.11 Part of the first section of a bibliographic essay

14.12 The first page of a discography

15 Documentation II: Author-Date References

15.1 Part of a reference list for a journal article in the social sciences

15.2 A sample of text with both parenthetical text citations and a footnote

16 Indexes

16.1 Sample page of proof, marked up for indexing

Appendix A Production and Digital Technology

A.1 An example of XML markup in a graphical interface

A.2 Another view of figure A.1, showing the XML markup as plain text

A.3 Sample set of rules for composition and page makeup

A.4 Sample design specifications for a book

A.5 A simplified XML workflow

A.6 Principle of offset printing

A.7 A sheet consisting of sixteen printed pages

A.8 Two methods of sewing used in binding

A.9 Three methods of adhesive binding

TABLES

Table

6 Punctuation

of Contents

6.1 Punctuation relative to closing quotation marks and parentheses or brackets

List of Figures

9 Numbers

List of Tables

9.1 Roman and arabic numerals

Index

11 Foreign Languages

11.1 Special characters (and Unicode numbers) for languages using the Latin alphabet

11.2 Special characters (and Unicode numbers) for transliterated Arabic, Hebrew, Japanese, and South Asian languages

11.3 Russian alphabet (and Unicode numbers) and romanization

11.4 Greek alphabet (and Unicode numbers) and romanization

11.5 Greek numerals

12 Mathematics in Type

12.1 Common mathematical signs and symbols (with Unicode numbers and LaTeX commands)

12.2 Standard abbreviated notations in mathematical copy

12.3 Statistical notation

12.4 Potentially ambiguous mathematical symbols

Document Outline

- front_1

- cmoscoverimage-small3

- front

- isbn_0226104036_pref

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Preface

- about16

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): What's New in the 16th Edition

- isbn_0226104036_ack

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Acknowledgments

- contents

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Contents

- allsec_1

- ch01_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 1 Contents

- ch01_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.1: Books and journals as the core of scholarly publishing

- ch01_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.2: Electronic publishing

- ch01_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.3: Rectos and versos

- ch01_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.4: Outline of divisions and parts of a book

- ch01_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.5: Pages and folios

- ch01_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.6: Roman numerals for front matter

- ch01_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.7: Arabic numbers for text and back matter

- ch01_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.8: Separate versus consecutive pagination across more than one volume

- ch01_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.9: Running heads defined

- ch01_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.10: Running heads for front matter

- ch01_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.11: Running heads for text

- ch01_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.12: Subheads as running heads

- ch01_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.13: Running heads for back matter

- ch01_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.14: Running heads for endnotes

- ch01_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.15: Omission of running heads

- ch01_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.16: Half title

- ch01_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.17: Series title or frontispiece

- ch01_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.18: Title page

- ch01_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.19: Components of a copyright page

- ch01_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.20: Biographical note

- ch01_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.21: Publisher's address

- ch01_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.22: Copyright notice

- ch01_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.23: Copyright dates of previous editions

- ch01_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.24: Copyright renewal or other changes

- ch01_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.25: Publishing history

- ch01_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.26: What constitutes a new edition?

- ch01_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.27: Country of printing

- ch01_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.28: Impression number

- ch01_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.29: Indication of original-language edition for translations

- ch01_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.30: Acknowledgments, permissions, and other credits

- ch01_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.31: Acknowledgment of grants

- ch01_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.32: International Standard Book Number (ISBN)

- ch01_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.33: Cataloging-in-Publication (CIP) data

- ch01_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.34: Paper durability statement

- ch01_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.35: Dedication

- ch01_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.36: Epigraph and epigraph source

- ch01_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.37: Table of contents

- ch01_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.38: List of illustrations or tables

- ch01_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.39: Foreword

- ch01_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.40: Preface and acknowledgments

- ch01_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.41: Separate acknowledgments

- ch01_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.42: Introduction belonging to front matter

- ch01_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.43: List of abbreviations

- ch01_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.44: Publisher's, translator's, and editor's notes

- ch01_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.45: Determining page 1

- ch01_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.46: Introduction belonging to main text

- ch01_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.47: Division into parts

- ch01_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.48: Division into chapters

- ch01_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.49: Division into chapters by multiple authors

- ch01_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.50: Divisions for poetry

- ch01_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.51: Divisions for letters and diaries

- ch01_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.52: Concluding elements

- ch01_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.53: Subheadsâ€”general principles

- ch01_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.54: Subhead levels and placement

- ch01_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.55: Numbered subheads

- ch01_sec056

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.56: Ornamental or typographic breaks in text

- ch01_sec057

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.57: Appendixes

- ch01_sec058

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.58: Chronology

- ch01_sec059

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.59: Endnotes

- ch01_sec060

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.60: Glossary

- ch01_sec061

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.61: Bibliography or reference list

- ch01_sec062

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.62: List of contributors

- ch01_sec063

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.63: Index

- ch01_sec064

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.64: Colophon

- ch01_sec065

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.65: Errata

- ch01_sec066

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.66: Clothbound covers

- ch01_sec067

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.67: Paperback covers

- ch01_sec068

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.68: Endpapers

- ch01_sec069

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.69: Dust jackets

- ch01_sec070

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.70: Credit lines for cover art

- ch01_sec071

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.71: ISBN and bar codes on covers

- ch01_sec072

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.72: Print and electronic formats for journals

- ch01_sec073

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.73: Noting differences between print and electronic versions

- ch01_sec074

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.74: Unique identifiers for electronic journals

- ch01_sec075

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.75: Volume as organizing principle

- ch01_sec076

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.76: Page numbers for journals

- ch01_sec077

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.77: Running heads or running feet in journals

- ch01_sec078

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.78: Covers for printed journals

- ch01_sec079

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.79: Home pages for electronic journals

- ch01_sec080

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.80: Maintaining the context of electronic articles

- ch01_sec081

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.81: Front matter in printed journals

- ch01_sec082

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.82: Front matter and home pages for electronic journals

- ch01_sec083

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.83: Journal table of contents

- ch01_sec084

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.84: Information for contributors

- ch01_sec085

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.85: Acknowledgments, announcements, and calls for papers

- ch01_sec086

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.86: Journals errata

- ch01_sec087

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.87: Majors and minors

- ch01_sec088

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.88: Article title, authorship, and other first-page information

- ch01_sec089

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.89: Hyperlinks within electronic articles

- ch01_sec090

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.90: Article abstracts

- ch01_sec091

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.91: Article subheads

- ch01_sec092

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.92: Book review and book notes sections

- ch01_sec093

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.93: Journal announcements

- ch01_sec094

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.94: Journal contributors

- ch01_sec095

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.95: Letters to the editor

- ch01_sec096

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.96: Journal editorials

- ch01_sec097

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.97: Journal copyright lines

- ch01_sec098

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.98: Publication history for electronic-first articles

- ch01_sec099

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.99: Tables in journal articles

- ch01_sec100

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.100: Illustrations in journal articles

- ch01_sec101

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.101: Notes or author-date citations in journals

- ch01_sec102

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.102: Links to citations and to outside resources

- ch01_sec103

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.103: Indexes to printed volumes

- ch01_sec104

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.104: Electronic indexes and indexed searches

- ch01_sec105

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.105: Corrections to journal articles

- ch01_sec106

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.106: Preprints

- ch01_sec107

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.107: Material not available in print

- ch01_sec108

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.108: Journal design

- ch01_sec109

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.109: Editorial style

- ch01_sec110

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.110: Redesign

- ch01_sec111

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.111: Suitability for the web

- ch01_sec112

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.112: Functional features

- ch01_sec113

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.113: Navigation as the primary organizing principle for web-based publications

- ch01_sec114

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.114: Hyperlinks

- ch01_sec115

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.115: "Front matter" for web-based publications

- ch01_sec116

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.116: Folios, running heads, and other "print" elements

- ch01_sec117

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 1.117: Indexes, notes, and other "back matter"

- ch01_fig01

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 1.1

- ch01_fig02

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 1.2

- ch01_fig03

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 1.3

- ch01_fig04

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 1.4

- ch01_fig05

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 1.5

- ch01_fig06

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 1.6

- ch01_fig07

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 1.7

- ch01_fig08

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 1.8

- ch01_fig09

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 1.9

- ch01_fig10

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 1.10

- ch01_fig11

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 1.11

- ch02_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 2 Contents

- ch02_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.1: Overview—authors, manuscript editors, and proofreaders

- ch02_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.2: Process outline—from approved manuscript to published work

- ch02_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.3: Elements to be furnished

- ch02_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.4: Submitting electronic manuscripts

- ch02_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.5: Later changesâ€”version control

- ch02_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.6: Submitting paper-only manuscripts

- ch02_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.7: Publishers' manuscript-preparation guidelines

- ch02_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.8: Line spacing

- ch02_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.9: Word spacingâ€”one space or two?

- ch02_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.10: Justification and margins

- ch02_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.11: Spaces, tabs, and hard returns within paragraphs

- ch02_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.12: Hyphenation

- ch02_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.13: Dashes

- ch02_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.14: Italics, underline, and boldface

- ch02_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.15: Special characters

- ch02_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.16: Chapter and other titles

- ch02_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.17: Subheads

- ch02_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.18: Prose extracts

- ch02_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.19: Poetry extracts

- ch02_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.20: Footnotes and endnotes

- ch02_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.21: Glossaries and lists of abbreviations

- ch02_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.22: Bibliographies and reference lists

- ch02_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.23: Separate files for illustrations, captions, and tables

- ch02_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.24: Prints of artwork versus scans

- ch02_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.25: Numbering illustrations

- ch02_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.26: Numbering tables

- ch02_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.27: Text references and callouts to tables and illustrations

- ch02_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.28: Table notes and source notes

- ch02_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.29: Items to cross-check

- ch02_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.30: Checking quotations

- ch02_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.31: Checking URLs

- ch02_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.32: Checking cross-references

- ch02_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.33: Creating separate files

- ch02_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.34: Naming files

- ch02_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.35: Numbering manuscript pages

- ch02_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.36: Embedded comments and revision marks

- ch02_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.37: Backing up the final manuscript

- ch02_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.38: Volume editor's manuscript preparation responsibilities

- ch02_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.39: Additional responsibilities of the volume editor

- ch02_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.40: Preparing previously published material

- ch02_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.41: Permissible changes to published material

- ch02_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.42: Footnotes or endnotes in previously published material

- ch02_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.43: Source notes for previously published material

- ch02_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.44: Reproducing previously published illustrations

- ch02_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.45: Manuscript editing as opposed to developmental editing

- ch02_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.46: Mechanical editing

- ch02_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.47: Substantive editing

- ch02_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.48: Discretion in substantive editing

- ch02_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.49: Estimating editing time

- ch02_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.50: Stages of editing

- ch02_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.51: Choosing a dictionary and other reference works

- ch02_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.52: Keeping a style sheet

- ch02_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.53: Fact-checking

- ch02_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.54: Editing front matter

- ch02_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.55: Editing part titles and chapter or article titles

- ch02_sec056

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.56: Editing subheads

- ch02_sec057

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.57: Editing cross-references

- ch02_sec058

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.58: Editing quotations and previously published material

- ch02_sec059

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.59: Editing notes

- ch02_sec060

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.60: Editing note citations, bibliographies, and reference lists

- ch02_sec061

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.61: Flexibility in citation style

- ch02_sec062

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.62: Editing tables

- ch02_sec063

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.63: Checking illustrations and their placement and editing captions

- ch02_sec064

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.64: Editing indexes

- ch02_sec065

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.65: Establishing early contact with authors

- ch02_sec066

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.66: Writing author comments and queries

- ch02_sec067

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.67: Writing a cover letter to the author

- ch02_sec068

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.68: Sending the edited manuscript to the author

- ch02_sec069

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.69: Checking the author's final changes

- ch02_sec070

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.70: Ensuring correct markup

- ch02_sec071

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.71: Type specifications and hand markup

- ch02_sec072

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.72: Ensuring correct pagination

- ch02_sec073

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.73: Preparing running heads

- ch02_sec074

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.74: A production checklist

- ch02_sec075

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.75: Making backup copies

- ch02_sec076

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.76: Preparing to make a clean, unedited copy

- ch02_sec077

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.77: Cleaning up electronic files

- ch02_sec078

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.78: Generic markup for electronic manuscripts

- ch02_sec079

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.79: Software-generated styles

- ch02_sec080

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.80: Formal markup languages

- ch02_sec081

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.81: Tracking and showing changes (redlining)

- ch02_sec082

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.82: Document comparison software

- ch02_sec083

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.83: Inserting author queries on electronic manuscripts

- ch02_sec084

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.84: Retaining the version of record

- ch02_sec085

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.85: The author's review of the edited manuscript

- ch02_sec086

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.86: Preparing a final electronic manuscript

- ch02_sec087

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.87: Keeping a clean copy of paper manuscripts

- ch02_sec088

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.88: Marking manuscripts on paper

- ch02_sec089

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.89: Marking author queries on paper manuscripts

- ch02_sec090

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.90: Three uses for circling

- ch02_sec091

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.91: Inserting, deleting, and substituting

- ch02_sec092

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.92: Adding, deleting, or transposing punctuation

- ch02_sec093

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.93: Marking dashes and hyphens

- ch02_sec094

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.94: Capitalizing, lowercasing, and marking for italics or boldface

- ch02_sec095

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.95: Marking paragraph indention, flush left or right, and vertical spacing

- ch02_sec096

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.96: Marking, or coding, elements on a paper manuscript

- ch02_sec097

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.97: What is proofreading?

- ch02_sec098

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.98: Who should proofread?

- ch02_sec099

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.99: Proofreading schedule

- ch02_sec100

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.100: Keeping a record of each proofreading stage

- ch02_sec101

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.101: First proofs and "galley" proofs

- ch02_sec102

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.102: Revised proofs

- ch02_sec103

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.103: Index proofs

- ch02_sec104

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.104: Prepress and press proofs

- ch02_sec105

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.105: Book cover and jacket proofs

- ch02_sec106

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.106: Journal cover proofs

- ch02_sec107

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.107: Proofreading against copy

- ch02_sec108

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.108: Proofreading for spelling errors

- ch02_sec109

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.109: Checking word breaks

- ch02_sec110

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.110: Checking typeface and font

- ch02_sec111

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.111: Checking and proofreading page numbers and running heads

- ch02_sec112

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.112: Checking and proofreading illustrations and tables

- ch02_sec113

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.113: Checking overall appearance

- ch02_sec114

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.114: Checking facing pages for text alignment

- ch02_sec115

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.115: Proofreading for sense

- ch02_sec116

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.116: Proofreaders' marks

- ch02_sec117

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.117: Where to mark proofs

- ch02_sec118

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.118: Circling comments and instructions

- ch02_sec119

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.119: Communicating extensive changes

- ch02_sec120

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.120: Making marks legible

- ch02_sec121

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.121: Marking copy for deletion

- ch02_sec122

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.122: Adding or deleting space between letters or words

- ch02_sec123

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.123: Indicating changes to paragraphing or indention

- ch02_sec124

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.124: Indicating adjustments to position or alignment (justification)

- ch02_sec125

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.125: Marking items to be transposed

- ch02_sec126

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.126: Marking items to be spelled out

- ch02_sec127

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.127: Using "stet" to revert corrections or deletions

- ch02_sec128

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.128: Marking changes to capitalization and font

- ch02_sec129

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.129: Indicating changes to punctuation and accents

- ch02_sec130

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.130: Double-checking proofs

- ch02_sec131

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.131: Assigning responsibility for errors on proofs

- ch02_sec132

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.132: Author's alterations (AAs) versus editor's alterations (EAs)

- ch02_sec133

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.133: Checklist for proofing electronic publications

- ch02_sec134

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.134: Testing web-based publications

- ch02_sec135

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.135: Documentation for testing

- ch02_sec136

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 2.136: Communicating changes to web-based publications

- ch02_fig01

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 2.1

- ch02_fig02

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 2.2

- ch02_fig03

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 2.3

- ch02_fig04

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 2.4

- ch02_fig05

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 2.5

- ch02_fig06

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 2.6

- ch02_fig07

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 2.7

- ch03_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 3 Contents

- ch03_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.1: Illustrations defined

- ch03_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.2: Tables defined

- ch03_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.3: Continuous tone versus halftone

- ch03_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.4: Line art

- ch03_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.5: Text figures and plates

- ch03_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.6: Galleries

- ch03_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.7: Captions, legends, keys, and labels

- ch03_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.8: Placement of illustrations relative to text

- ch03_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.9: Text references to numbered illustrations

- ch03_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.10: Continuous versus separate numbering of illustrations

- ch03_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.11: Double numeration of illustrations

- ch03_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.12: Identifying the parts of an illustration

- ch03_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.13: Working numbers for unnumbered illustrations

- ch03_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.14: Numbering illustrations in a gallery

- ch03_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.15: Submitting artwork to the publisher

- ch03_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.16: Identifying artwork for the publisher

- ch03_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.17: Author's inventory of artwork

- ch03_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.18: Publisher's inventory of artwork

- ch03_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.19: Cropping and scaling and shading

- ch03_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.20: Artwork to be redrawn by the publisher

- ch03_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.21: Syntax, punctuation, and capitalization

- ch03_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.22: Formal titles in captions

- ch03_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.23: Separating illustration numbers from captions

- ch03_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.24: Using locators in captions

- ch03_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.25: Identifying symbols or patterns used in figures

- ch03_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.26: Identifying electronic enhancements in captions

- ch03_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.27: Including original dimensions in captions

- ch03_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.28: Sources and permissions

- ch03_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.29: Placement of credit lines

- ch03_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.30: Crediting author as source of illustration

- ch03_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.31: Crediting material that requires permission

- ch03_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.32: Crediting commissioned material

- ch03_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.33: Crediting material obtained free of charge

- ch03_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.34: Crediting material in the public domain

- ch03_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.35: Crediting agency material

- ch03_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.36: Crediting adapted material

- ch03_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.37: When to include a list of illustrations

- ch03_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.38: Listing illustrations from a gallery

- ch03_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.39: Shortening captions for a list of illustrations

- ch03_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.40: What is a chart?

- ch03_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.41: Consistency among charts

- ch03_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.42: Axes and curves in graphs

- ch03_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.43: Chart titles and labels

- ch03_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.44: Abbreviations in labels

- ch03_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.45: Genealogical and pedigree charts

- ch03_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.46: Table preparation

- ch03_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.47: Use of tables

- ch03_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.48: Consistency among tables

- ch03_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.49: Table structure and use

- ch03_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.50: Horizontal and vertical rules

- ch03_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.51: Numbering tables

- ch03_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.52: Table titles

- ch03_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.53: Parenthetical information in table titles

- ch03_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.54: Column heads

- ch03_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.55: Spanner heads

- ch03_sec056

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.56: Cut-in heads

- ch03_sec057

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.57: Stub entries

- ch03_sec058

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.58: Stub entries with subheads

- ch03_sec059

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.59: Runover lines in stub columns

- ch03_sec060

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.60: Abbreviations in stub columns

- ch03_sec061

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.61: Totals

- ch03_sec062

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.62: Using leaders with stub entries

- ch03_sec063

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.63: Table body and cells

- ch03_sec064

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.64: Column data

- ch03_sec065

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.65: Empty cells

- ch03_sec066

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.66: Matrixes

- ch03_sec067

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.67: Presenting multiple values in a single cell

- ch03_sec068

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.68: Alignment of rows

- ch03_sec069

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.69: Alignment of column heads

- ch03_sec070

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.70: Alignment of numbers within columns

- ch03_sec071

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.71: Alignment of columns consisting of words

- ch03_sec072

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.72: Format for totals, averages, and means

- ch03_sec073

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.73: When to use totals

- ch03_sec074

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.74: Order and placement of notes to tables

- ch03_sec075

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.75: Acknowledging data in source notes to tables

- ch03_sec076

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.76: Notes applying to the whole table

- ch03_sec077

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.77: Notes to specific parts of a table

- ch03_sec078

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.78: Notes on significance levels

- ch03_sec079

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.79: Editing table content

- ch03_sec080

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.80: "Percent" versus "percentage"

- ch03_sec081

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.81: Number ranges

- ch03_sec082

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.82: Signs and symbols in tables

- ch03_sec083

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.83: "N" versus "n"

- ch03_sec084

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.84: Adjusting and checking tables

- ch03_sec085

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 3.85: Indicating "continued" and specifying repeating column heads

- ch03_fig01

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.1

- ch03_fig02

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.2

- ch03_fig03

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.3

- ch03_fig04

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.4

- ch03_fig05

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.5

- ch03_fig06

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.6

- ch03_fig07

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.7

- ch03_fig08

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.8

- ch03_fig09

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.9

- ch03_fig10

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.10

- ch03_fig11

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.11

- ch03_fig12

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.12

- ch03_fig13

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.13

- ch03_fig14

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.14

- ch03_fig15

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.15

- ch03_fig16

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.16

- ch03_fig17

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.17

- ch03_fig18

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.18

- ch03_fig19

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.19

- ch03_fig20

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.20

- ch03_fig21

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.21

- ch03_fig22

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.22

- ch03_fig23

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.23

- ch03_fig24

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.24

- ch03_fig25

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 3.25

- ch04_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 4 Contents

- ch04_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.1: The scope of this chapter

- ch04_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.2: Relevant law

- ch04_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.3: How copyright comes into being

- ch04_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.4: Registration and notice not required

- ch04_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.5: Original expression

- ch04_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.6: Author the original owner

- ch04_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.7: Individual and joint authors

- ch04_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.8: Collective works

- ch04_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.9: Employer as author

- ch04_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.10: The three categories of work made for hire

- ch04_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.11: Ineligible works

- ch04_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.12: Joint authorship

- ch04_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.13: Rights of reproduction, distribution, and display

- ch04_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.14: Derivative work and performance rights

- ch04_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.15: Moral rightsâ€”integrity of copyright management information

- ch04_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.16: Trademark protection of titles and other elements

- ch04_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.17: Basic versus subsidiary rights

- ch04_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.18: Author retention of subsidiary rights

- ch04_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.19: Copyright duration before 1978

- ch04_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.20: Lengthening of copyright duration in 1978

- ch04_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.21: Uses of public-domain works

- ch04_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.22: "Life plus seventy"

- ch04_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.23: Works made for hire

- ch04_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.24: Anonymous and pseudonymous works

- ch04_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.25: Pre-1978 unpublished works

- ch04_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.26: Pre-1978 published US works

- ch04_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.27: New copyright for new editions

- ch04_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.28: Pre-1978 published foreign works

- ch04_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.29: Definition of "foreign"

- ch04_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.30: Benefits of renewal

- ch04_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.31: Renewal by the author

- ch04_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.32: Renewal if the author is deceased

- ch04_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.33: Subdividing a copyright

- ch04_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.34: Exclusive versus nonexclusive licenses

- ch04_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.35: Goals of the parties to a license

- ch04_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.36: Payment

- ch04_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.37: Termination of transfers

- ch04_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.38: Changes to the rules

- ch04_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.39: Three different regimes

- ch04_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.40: Three elements of the notice

- ch04_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.41: Name used in the notice

- ch04_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.42: Placement of notice

- ch04_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.43: United States government materials

- ch04_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.44: Notice on derivative works

- ch04_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.45: Correcting mistakes

- ch04_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.46: Deposit requirements

- ch04_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.47: Registration forms and fees

- ch04_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.48: Need for accuracy and candor

- ch04_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.49: Benefits of registration

- ch04_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.50: Basic rights

- ch04_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.51: Basic book-contract provisions

- ch04_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.52: Option clauses

- ch04_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.53: Edited works

- ch04_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.54: Other contracts

- ch04_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.55: Transfers of rights

- ch04_sec056

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.56: Less than full rights

- ch04_sec057

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.57: New alternative licensing arrangements

- ch04_sec058

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.58: Journal editors

- ch04_sec059

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.59: Symposium proceedings

- ch04_sec060

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.60: Categories

- ch04_sec061

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.61: Electronic-rights licensing

- ch04_sec062

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.62: Authors' electronic use of their own works

- ch04_sec063

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.63: University licenses

- ch04_sec064

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.64: The NIH Public Access Policy

- ch04_sec065

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.65: Economic considerations

- ch04_sec066

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.66: Handling permission requests

- ch04_sec067

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.67: The rights file

- ch04_sec068

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.68: Author's warranties

- ch04_sec069

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.69: General principles

- ch04_sec070

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.70: Author's role in obtaining permissions

- ch04_sec071

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.71: Author's own work

- ch04_sec072

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.72: Fees and record keeping

- ch04_sec073

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.73: Permissions beyond the immediate use

- ch04_sec074

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.74: Unpublished works

- ch04_sec075

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.75: The missing copyright owner

- ch04_sec076

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.76: Noncopyright restrictions on archives

- ch04_sec077

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.77: Overview of the legal doctrine

- ch04_sec078

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.78: Validity of "rules of thumb"

- ch04_sec079

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.79: A few general rules

- ch04_sec080

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.80: Epigraphs and interior monologues

- ch04_sec081

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.81: Unpublished works

- ch04_sec082

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.82: Paraphrasing

- ch04_sec083

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.83: Pictorial and graphic materials

- ch04_sec084

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.84: Charts, tables, and graphs

- ch04_sec085

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.85: Importance of attribution

- ch04_sec086

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.86: Unnecessary permissions

- ch04_sec087

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.87: Chicago's fair-use guidelines

- ch04_sec088

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.88: The Copyright Act

- ch04_sec089

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.89: Library photocopying

- ch04_sec090

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.90: Educational photocopying

- ch04_sec091

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.91: Digitizing and automating the permissions process

- ch04_sec092

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.92: Information required

- ch04_sec093

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.93: Sample permissions letters

- ch04_sec094

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.94: Rights holders

- ch04_sec095

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.95: Stock agencies and image archives

- ch04_sec096

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.96: Information required

- ch04_sec097

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.97: Fees

- ch04_sec098

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.98: Credit lines

- ch04_sec099

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.99: Acknowledgments sections

- ch04_sec100

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.100: Responsibility for payment

- ch04_sec101

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 4.101: Anthologies

- ch04_fig01

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 4.1

- ch04_fig02

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 4.2

- ch04_fig03

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 4.3

- ch05_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 5 Contents

- ch05_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.1: Grammar defined

- ch05_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.2: Schools of grammatical thought

- ch05_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.3: Parts of speech

- ch05_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.4: Nouns generally

- ch05_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.5: Common nouns

- ch05_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.6: Proper nouns

- ch05_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.7: Count nouns

- ch05_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.8: Mass nouns

- ch05_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.9: Mass noun followed by a prepositional phrase

- ch05_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.10: Noun-equivalents and substantives

- ch05_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.11: Noun properties

- ch05_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.12: Noun case

- ch05_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.13: Noun number

- ch05_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.14: Noun gender

- ch05_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.15: Noun person

- ch05_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.16: Function of case

- ch05_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.17: Common case, nominative function

- ch05_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.18: Common case, objective function

- ch05_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.19: Genitive case

- ch05_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.20: The "of"-genitive

- ch05_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.21: Appositives defined; use

- ch05_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.22: Nouns as adjectives

- ch05_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.23: Nouns as verbs

- ch05_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.24: Adverbial functions

- ch05_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.25: Other functional shifts

- ch05_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.26: Pronouns defined

- ch05_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.27: Antecedents of pronouns

- ch05_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.28: Pronouns without antecedents

- ch05_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.29: Adjective as antecedent

- ch05_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.30: Four properties of pronouns

- ch05_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.31: Pronoun number and antecedent

- ch05_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.32: Exceptions regarding pronoun number

- ch05_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.33: Pronoun with multiple antecedents

- ch05_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.34: Antecedents of different genders

- ch05_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.35: Pronoun case

- ch05_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.36: Nominative case misused for objective

- ch05_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.37: Six classes of pronouns

- ch05_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.38: Form of personal pronoun

- ch05_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.39: Changes in form

- ch05_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.40: Agreement of pronoun with noun

- ch05_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.41: Pronoun and gender

- ch05_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.42: Personal pronoun case

- ch05_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.43: Pronoun case after linking verb

- ch05_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.44: Pronoun case after "than" or "as . . . as"

- ch05_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.45: Special uses of personal pronouns

- ch05_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.46: The singular "they"

- ch05_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.47: Possessive pronouns

- ch05_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.48: Compound personal pronouns; -self forms

- ch05_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.49: Reflexive and intensive pronouns

- ch05_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.50: Possessive pronouns versus contractions

- ch05_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.51: Demonstrative pronouns defined

- ch05_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.52: Interrogative pronouns defined

- ch05_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.53: Referent of interrogative pronouns

- ch05_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.54: Relative pronouns defined

- ch05_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.55: Case with relative pronouns

- ch05_sec056

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.56: Positional nuances with relative pronouns

- ch05_sec057

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.57: Antecedent of relative pronoun

- ch05_sec058

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.58: Omitted antecedent of relative pronoun

- ch05_sec059

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.59: Relative pronoun after "one"

- ch05_sec060

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.60: Possessive forms of relative pronouns

- ch05_sec061

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.61: "Whose" and "of which"

ch05_sec062

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.62: Compound relative pronouns

ch05_sec063

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.63: "Who" versus "whom"

ch05_sec064

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.64: Indefinite pronouns

ch05_sec065

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.65: Adjective pronouns

ch05_sec066

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.66: Adjectives defined

ch05_sec067

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.67: Proper adjectives

ch05_sec068

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.68: Articles defined

ch05_sec069

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.69: Definite article

ch05_sec070

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.70: Indefinite article

ch05_sec071

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.71: Indefinite article in specific reference

ch05_sec072

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.72: Choosing "a" or "an"

ch05_sec073

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.73: Articles with coordinate nouns

ch05_sec074

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.74: Effect of article on meaning

ch05_sec075

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.75: Zero article

ch05_sec076

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.76: Omitted article

ch05_sec077

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.77: Article as pronoun substitute

ch05_sec078

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.78: Basic rules

ch05_sec079

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.79: After possessive pronoun

ch05_sec080

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.80: Adjective modifying pronoun

ch05_sec081

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.81: Predicate adjective

ch05_sec082

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.82: Dates as adjectives

ch05_sec083

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.83: Three adjectival degrees

ch05_sec084

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.84: Comparative adjectives

ch05_sec085

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.85: Superlative adjectives

ch05_sec086

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.86: Forming comparatives and superlatives

ch05_sec087

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.87: Equal and unequal comparisons

ch05_sec088

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.88: Uncomparable adjectives

ch05_sec089

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.89: Participial adjectives

ch05_sec090

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.90: Coordinate adjectives

ch05_sec091

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.91: Phrasal adjectives

ch05_sec092

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.92: Adjectives as nouns

ch05_sec093

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.93: Adjectives as verbs

ch05_sec094

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.94: Other parts of speech functioning as adjectives

ch05_sec095

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.95: Verbs generally

ch05_sec096

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.96: Transitive and intransitive verbs

ch05_sec097

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.97: Ergative verbs

ch05_sec098

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.98: Regular and irregular verbs

ch05_sec099

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.99: Linking verbs

ch05_sec100

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.100: Phrasal verbs

ch05_sec101

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.101: Principal and auxiliary verbs

ch05_sec102

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.102: Verb phrases

ch05_sec103

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.103: Contractions

ch05_sec104

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.104: Infinitives defined

ch05_sec105

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.105: Uses of the infinitive

ch05_sec106

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.106: Split infinitive

ch05_sec107

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.107: Dangling infinitive

ch05_sec108

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.108: Forming participles

ch05_sec109

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.109: Participial phrases

ch05_sec110

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.110: Gerunds

ch05_sec111

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.111: Distinguishing between participles and gerunds

ch05_sec112

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.112: Dangling participles

ch05_sec113

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.113: Dangling gerunds

ch05_sec114

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.114: Five properties of verbs

ch05_sec115

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.115: Active and passive voice

ch05_sec116

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.116: Progressive conjugation and voice

ch05_sec117

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.117: Mood

ch05_sec118

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.118: Indicative mood

ch05_sec119

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.119: Imperative mood

ch05_sec120

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.120: Subjunctive mood

ch05_sec121

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.121: Indicative instead of subjunctive

ch05_sec122

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.122: Tenses generally

ch05_sec123

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.123: Present tense

ch05_sec124

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.124: Past tense

ch05_sec125

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.125: Future tense

ch05_sec126

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.126: Present perfect tense

ch05_sec127

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.127: Past perfect tense

ch05_sec128

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.128: Future perfect tense

ch05_sec129

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.129: Person

ch05_sec130

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.130: Number

ch05_sec131

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.131: Agreement in person and number

ch05_sec132

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.132: False attraction to predicate nominative

ch05_sec133

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.133: Misleading connectives: "as well as," "along with," "together with," and so forth

ch05_sec134

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.134: Conjugation defined

ch05_sec135

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.135: Verb stem (present indicative)

ch05_sec136

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.136: Forming present participles

ch05_sec137

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.137: Present subjunctive

ch05_sec138

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.138: Past indicative

ch05_sec139

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.139: Forming past participles

ch05_sec140

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.140: Past subjunctive

ch05_sec141

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.141: Imperative

ch05_sec142

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.142: Auxiliary verbs defined

ch05_sec143

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.143: "Can"

ch05_sec144

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.144: "Do"

ch05_sec145

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.145: "Have"

ch05_sec146

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.146: "May" and "might"

ch05_sec147

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.147: "Must"

ch05_sec148

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.148: "Ought"

ch05_sec149

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.149: "Shall" and "should"

ch05_sec150

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.150: "Will" and "would"

ch05_sec151

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.151: Forms of "be"-verbs

ch05_sec152

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.152: Conjugation of "be"-verbs

ch05_sec153

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.153: Adverbs defined

ch05_sec154

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.154: Adverbs with suffixes

ch05_sec155

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.155: Adverbs without suffixes

ch05_sec156

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.156: Adverbs distinguished from adjectives

ch05_sec157

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.157: Simple and flat adverbs

ch05_sec158

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.158: Phrasal and compound adverbs

ch05_sec159

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.159: Three adverbial degrees

ch05_sec160

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.160: Comparative forms

ch05_sec161

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.161: Superlative forms

ch05_sec162

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.162: Irregular adverbs

ch05_sec163

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.163: Uncomparable adverbs

ch05_sec164

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.164: Intensifiers

ch05_sec165

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.165: Placement of adverbs

ch05_sec166

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.166: Adverbs modifying intransitive verbs

ch05_sec167

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.167: Adverbs and linking verbs

ch05_sec168

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.168: Adverb within a verb phrase

ch05_sec169

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.169: Prepositions defined

ch05_sec170

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.170: Simple and compound prepositions

ch05_sec171

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.171: Participial prepositions

ch05_sec172

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.172: Phrasal prepositions

ch05_sec173

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.173: Prepositional phrases defined

ch05_sec174

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.174: Prepositional function

ch05_sec175

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.175: Placement of prepositional phrases

ch05_sec176

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.176: Ending a sentence with a preposition

ch05_sec177

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.177: Clashing prepositions

ch05_sec178

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.178: Elliptical prepositional phrases

ch05_sec179

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.179: Effect of prepositional phrase on pronoun

ch05_sec180

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.180: Prepositions and functional variation

ch05_sec181

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.181: Use and misuse of "like"

ch05_sec182

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.182: Use and misuse of "only"

ch05_sec183

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.183: Avoiding overuse of prepositions

ch05_sec184

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.184: Cutting prepositional phrases

ch05_sec185

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.185: Cutting unnecessary prepositions

ch05_sec186

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.186: Replacing prepositional phrases with adverbs

ch05_sec187

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.187: Replacing prepositional phrases with genitives

ch05_sec188

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.188: Using active voice to eliminate prepositions

ch05_sec189

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.189: Idiomatic uses of prepositions

ch05_sec190

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.190: Shifts in prepositional idiom

ch05_sec191

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.191: List of words and the prepositions construed with them

ch05_sec192

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.192: Conjunctions defined

ch05_sec193

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.193: Simple versus compound conjunctions

ch05_sec194

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.194: Coordinating conjunctions

ch05_sec195

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.195: Correlative conjunctions

ch05_sec196

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.196: Copulative conjunctions

ch05_sec197

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.197: Adversative conjunctions

ch05_sec198

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.198: Disjunctive conjunctions

ch05_sec199

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.199: Final conjunctions

ch05_sec200

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.200: Subordinating conjunctions

ch05_sec201

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.201: Special uses of subordinating conjunctions

ch05_sec202

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.202: Adverbs as conjunctions

ch05_sec203

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.203: Relative pronouns as conjunctions

ch05_sec204

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.204: Expletive conjunctions

ch05_sec205

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.205: Disguised conjunctions

ch05_sec206

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.206: Beginning a sentence with a conjunction

ch05_sec207

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.207: Beginning a sentence with "however"

ch05_sec208

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.208: Interjections defined

ch05_sec209

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.209: Interjections as informal and colloquial

ch05_sec210

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.210: Interjections and functional variation

ch05_sec211

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.211: Words that are exclusively interjections

ch05_sec212

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.212: Parallel structure generally

ch05_sec213

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.213: Prepositions and parallel structure

ch05_sec214

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.214: Paired joining terms and parallel structure

ch05_sec215

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.215: Auxiliary verbs and parallel structure

ch05_sec216

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.216: Grammar versus usage

ch05_sec217

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.217: Standard Written English

ch05_sec218

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.218: Dialect

ch05_sec219

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.219: Focus on tradition

ch05_sec220

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.220: Good usage versus common usage

ch05_sec221

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.221: Maintaining credibility

ch05_sec222

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.222: Gender bias

ch05_sec223

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.223: Other biases

ch05_sec224

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.224: Bias and the editor's responsibility

ch05_sec225

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.225: Nine techniques for achieving gender neutrality

ch05_sec226

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.226: Sex-specific labels as adjectives

ch05_sec227

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.227: Gender-neutral singular pronouns

ch05_sec228

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.228: Problematic suffixes

ch05_sec229

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.229: Necessary gender-specific language

ch05_sec230

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 5.230: Avoiding other biased language

ch06_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 6 Contents

ch06_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.1: The role of punctuation and the scope of this chapter

ch06_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.2: Punctuation and italics

ch06_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.3: Punctuation and boldface or color

ch06_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.4: Punctuation and fontâ€”aesthetic considerations

ch06_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.5: Parentheses and brackets in relation to surrounding text

ch06_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.6: Quotation marks in relation to surrounding text

ch06_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.7: Punctuation and spaceâ€”one space or two?

ch06_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.8: Punctuation with URLs and e-mail addresses

ch06_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.9: Periods and commas in relation to closing quotation marks

ch06_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.10: Other punctuation in relation to closing quotation marks

ch06_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.11: Single quotation marks next to double quotation marks

ch06_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.12: Use of the period

ch06_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.13: Periods in relation to parentheses and brackets

ch06_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.14: When to omit a period

ch06_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.15: Periods in ellipses and suspension points

ch06_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.16: Use of the comma

ch06_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.17: Commas in pairs

ch06_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.18: Serial commas

ch06_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.19: Using semicolons instead of commas in a series

ch06_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.20: Commas with "etc." and "et al."

ch06_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.21: Omitting serial commas before ampersands

ch06_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.22: Restrictive and nonrestrictive clausesâ€”"which" versus "that"

ch06_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.23: Restrictive and nonrestrictive appositives

ch06_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.24: Commas with parenthetical elements

ch06_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.25: Commas with "however," "therefore," "indeed," and so forth

ch06_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.26: Commas with restrictive and nonrestrictive phrases

ch06_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.27: Commas with "such as" and "including"

ch06_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.28: Commas with independent clauses joined by conjunctions

ch06_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.29: Commas with compound predicates

ch06_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.30: Comma preceding main clause

ch06_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.31: Comma following main clause

ch06_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.32: "And if," "that if," and the like

ch06_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.33: Commas with coordinate adjectives

ch06_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.34: Commas with repeated adjectives

ch06_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.35: Commas with introductory participial phrases

ch06_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.36: Commas with introductory adverbial phrases

ch06_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.37: Commas with "oh" and "ah"

ch06_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.38: Commas with direct address

ch06_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.39: "Yes," "no," and the like

ch06_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.40: Commas with "not" phrases

ch06_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.41: Commas with "not . . . but," "not only . . . but," and the like

ch06_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.42: Commas with "the more," "the less," and so on

ch06_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.43: Commas with "that is," "namely," "for example," and similar expressions

ch06_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.44: Commas between homonyms

ch06_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.45: Commas with dates

ch06_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.46: Commas with addresses and place-names in text

ch06_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.47: "Jr.," "Sr.," and the like

ch06_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.48: "Inc.," "Ltd.," and the like

ch06_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.49: Commas to indicate elision

ch06_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.50: Commas with quotations

ch06_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.51: Commas with maxims and proverbs

ch06_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.52: Commas with questions

ch06_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.53: Commas relative to parentheses and brackets

ch06_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.54: Use of the semicolon

ch06_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.55: Semicolons with "however," "therefore," "indeed," and the like

ch06_sec056

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.56: Semicolons with "that is," "for example," "namely," and the like

ch06_sec057

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.57: Semicolons before a conjunction

ch06_sec058

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.58: Semicolons in a complex series

ch06_sec059

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.59: Use of the colon

ch06_sec060

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.60: Space after colon

ch06_sec061

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.61: Lowercase or capital letter after a colon

ch06_sec062

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.62: Colons with "as follows" and other introductory phrases

ch06_sec063

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.63: Colons to introduce speech or quotations

ch06_sec064

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.64: Colons with formal direct address

ch06_sec065

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.65: Some common misuses of colons

ch06_sec066

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.66: Use of the question mark

ch06_sec067

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.67: Question mark within a sentence

ch06_sec068

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.68: Indirect questions

ch06_sec069

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.69: Requests as questions

ch06_sec070

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.70: Question marks in relation to surrounding text and punctuation

ch06_sec071

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.71: Use of the exclamation point

ch06_sec072

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.72: Exclamation rather than question

ch06_sec073

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.73: Exclamation point as editorial protest or amusement

ch06_sec074

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.74: Exclamation points with quotation marks, parentheses, or brackets

ch06_sec075

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.75: Hyphens and dashes compared

ch06_sec076

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.76: Hyphens in compound words

ch06_sec077

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.77: Hyphens as separators

ch06_sec078

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.78: En dash as "to"

ch06_sec079

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.79: En dash with an unfinished number range

ch06_sec080

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.80: En dashes with compound adjectives

ch06_sec081

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.81: Other uses for the en dash

ch06_sec082

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.82: Em dashes instead of commas, parentheses, or colons

ch06_sec083

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.83: Em dash between noun and pronoun

ch06_sec084

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.84: Em dashes to indicate sudden breaks

ch06_sec085

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.85: Em dashes with "that is," "namely," "for example," and similar expressions

ch06_sec086

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.86: Em dashes in place of commas

ch06_sec087

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.87: Em dashes with other punctuation

ch06_sec088

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.88: Em dashes in lieu of quotation marks

ch06_sec089

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.89: Em dashes in indexes

ch06_sec090

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.90: 2-em dash

ch06_sec091

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.91: 3-em dash

ch06_sec092

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.92: Use of parentheses

ch06_sec093

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.93: Parentheses for glosses or translations

ch06_sec094

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.94: Parentheses to enclose numbers or letters

ch06_sec095

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.95: Parentheses within parentheses

ch06_sec096

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.96: Parentheses with other punctuation

ch06_sec097

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.97: Use of square brackets

ch06_sec098

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.98: Square brackets in translated text

ch06_sec099

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.99: Square brackets for parentheses within parentheses

ch06_sec100

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.100: Square brackets in phonetics

ch06_sec101

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.101: Square brackets with other punctuation

ch06_sec102

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.102: Angle brackets and braces

ch06_sec103

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.103: Other names for the slash

ch06_sec104

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.104: Slashes to signify alternatives

ch06_sec105

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.105: Slashes with two-year spans

ch06_sec106

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.106: Slashes with dates

ch06_sec107

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.107: Slashes in abbreviations

ch06_sec108

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.108: Slashes as fraction bars

ch06_sec109

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.109: Slashes to show line breaks in quoted poetry

ch06_sec110

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.110: Slashes in URLs and other paths

ch06_sec111

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.111: Quotation marks relative to other punctuation and text

ch06_sec112

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.112: Typographer's or "smart" quotation marks

ch06_sec113

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.113: Use of the apostrophe

ch06_sec114

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.114: "Smart" apostrophes

ch06_sec115

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.115: Apostrophes relative to other punctuation

ch06_sec116

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.116: Likely combinations

ch06_sec117

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.117: Abbreviation-ending periods with other punctuation

ch06_sec118

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.118: Periods with question marks or exclamation points

ch06_sec119

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.119: Commas with question marks or exclamation points

ch06_sec120

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.120: Question mark with exclamation point

ch06_sec121

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.121: Lists and outlinesâ€”general principles

ch06_sec122

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.122: Run-in versus vertical lists

ch06_sec123

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.123: Run-in lists

ch06_sec124

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.124: Vertical lists—punctuation and format

ch06_sec125

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.125: Vertical lists punctuated as a sentence

ch06_sec126

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 6.126: Vertical lists with subdivided items (outlines)

ch06_tab01

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Table 6.1. Punctuation relative to closing quotation marks and parentheses or brackets

ch07_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 7 Contents

ch07_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.1: Recommended dictionaries

ch07_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.2: Spellings peculiar to particular disciplines

ch07_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.3: Non-US spelling

ch07_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.4: Supplementing the dictionary

ch07_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.5: Standard plural forms

ch07_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.6: Alternative plural forms

ch07_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.7: Plurals of compound nouns

ch07_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.8: Plurals of proper nouns

ch07_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.9: Plural form for Native American group names

ch07_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.10: Singular form used for the plural

ch07_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.11: Plural form of italicized words

ch07_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.12: Plural form for words in quotation marks

ch07_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.13: Plurals of noun coinages

ch07_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.14: Plurals for letters, abbreviations, and numerals

ch07_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.15: Possessive form of most nouns

ch07_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.16: Possessive of proper nouns, letters, and numbers

ch07_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.17: Possessive of words and names ending in unpronounced "s"

ch07_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.18: Possessive of names like "Euripides"

ch07_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.19: Possessive of nouns plural in form, singular in meaning

ch07_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.20: "For . . . sake" expressions

ch07_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.21: An alternative practice for words ending in "s"

ch07_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.22: Joint versus separate possession

ch07_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.23: Compound possessives

ch07_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.24: Possessive with genitive

ch07_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.25: Possessive versus attributive forms

ch07_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.26: Possessive with gerund

ch07_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.27: Possessive with "of"

ch07_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.28: Possessive with italicized or quoted terms

ch07_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.29: Contractions

ch07_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.30: Interjections

ch07_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.31: Dictionary word division

ch07_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.32: Words that should not be divided

ch07_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.33: Dividing according to pronunciation

ch07_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.34: Dividing after a vowel

ch07_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.35: Dividing compounds, prefixes, and suffixes

ch07_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.36: Dividing words ending in "ing"

ch07_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.37: Two-letter word endings

ch07_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.38: Dividing proper nouns and personal names

ch07_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.39: Dividing numerals

ch07_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.40: Dividing numerals with abbreviated units of measure

ch07_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.41: Division in run-in lists

ch07_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.42: Dividing URLs and e-mail addresses

ch07_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.43: Hyphenation and appearance

ch07_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.44: "A" and "an"

ch07_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.45: "O" and "oh"

ch07_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.46: When to use ligatures

ch07_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.47: Italics for emphasis

ch07_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.48: Capitals for emphasis

ch07_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.49: Italics for unfamiliar foreign words and phrases

ch07_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.50: Parentheses and quotation marks for foreign words and phrases

ch07_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.51: Proper nouns

ch07_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.52: Roman for familiar foreign words

ch07_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.53: Roman for Latin words and abbreviations

ch07_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.54: Italics for key terms

ch07_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.55: "Scare quotes"

ch07_sec056

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.56: "So-called"

ch07_sec057

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.57: Common expressions and figures of speech

ch07_sec058

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.58: Words and phrases used as words

ch07_sec059

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.59: Letters as letters

ch07_sec060

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.60: Scholastic grades

ch07_sec061

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.61: Plurals of letters

ch07_sec062

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.62: Letters standing for names

ch07_sec063

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.63: Letters as shapes

ch07_sec064

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.64: Names of letters

ch07_sec065

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.65: Rhyme schemes

ch07_sec066

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.66: Suggested reference for music publishing

ch07_sec067

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.67: Musical pitches

ch07_sec068

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.68: Octaves

ch07_sec069

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.69: Chords

ch07_sec070

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.70: "Major" and "minor"

ch07_sec071

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.71: Dynamics

ch07_sec072

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.72: Application-specific variations

ch07_sec073

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.73: Capitalization for keys and menu items

ch07_sec074

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.74: Keyboard combinations and shortcuts

ch07_sec075

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.75: Distinguishing words to be typed and other elements

ch07_sec076

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.76: Terms like "web" and "Internet"

ch07_sec077

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.77: To hyphenate or not to hyphenate

ch07_sec078

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.78: Some definitions

ch07_sec079

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.79: The trend toward closed compounds

ch07_sec080

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.80: Hyphens and readability

ch07_sec081

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.81: Compound modifiers before or after a noun

ch07_sec082

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.82: Adverbs ending in "ly"

ch07_sec083

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.83: Multiple hyphens

ch07_sec084

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.84: Omission of part of a hyphenated expression

ch07_sec085

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 7.85: Hyphenation guide for compounds and words formed with prefixes

ch08_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 8 Contents

ch08_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.1: Chicago's preference for the "down" style

ch08_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.2: Italics and quotation marks

ch08_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.3: Personal namesâ€”additional resources

ch08_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.4: Capitalization of personal names

ch08_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.5: Names with particles

ch08_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.6: Hyphenated and extended names

ch08_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.7: French names

ch08_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.8: German and Portuguese names

ch08_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.9: Italian names

ch08_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.10: Dutch names

ch08_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.11: Spanish names

ch08_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.12: Russian names

ch08_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.13: Hungarian names

ch08_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.14: Arabic names

ch08_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.15: Chinese names

ch08_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.16: Japanese names

ch08_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.17: Other Asian names

ch08_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.18: Titles and officesâ€”the general rule

ch08_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.19: Exceptions to the general rule

ch08_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.20: Titles used in apposition

ch08_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.21: Civil titles

ch08_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.22: Titles of sovereigns and other rulers

ch08_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.23: Military titles

ch08_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.24: Quasi-military titles

ch08_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.25: Religious titles

ch08_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.26: Corporate and organizational titles

ch08_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.27: Academic titles

ch08_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.28: Other academic designations

ch08_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.29: Descriptive titles

ch08_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.30: Civic and academic honors

ch08_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.31: Titles of nobility

ch08_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.32: Honorifics

ch08_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.33: Epithets (or nicknames) and bynames

ch08_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.34: Epithets as names of characters

ch08_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.35: Kinship names

ch08_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.36: Personifications

ch08_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.37: Ethnic and national groups and associated adjectives

ch08_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.38: Compound nationalities

ch08_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.39: Color

ch08_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.40: Class

ch08_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.41: Generation

ch08_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.42: Physical characteristics

ch08_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.43: Names of placesâ€”additional resources

ch08_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.44: Continents, countries, cities, oceans, and such

ch08_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.45: Points of the compass

ch08_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.46: Regions of the world and national regions

ch08_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.47: Popular place-names or epithets

ch08_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.48: Urban areas

ch08_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.49: Real versus metaphorical names

ch08_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.50: Political divisionsâ€”capitalization

ch08_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.51: Governmental entities

ch08_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.52: Mountains, rivers, and the like

ch08_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.53: Generic terms for geographic entities

ch08_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.54: Foreign terms for geographic entities

ch08_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.55: Thoroughfares and the like

ch08_sec056

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.56: Buildings and monuments

ch08_sec057

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.57: Rooms, offices, and such

ch08_sec058

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.58: Foreign names for places and structures

ch08_sec059

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.59: When to capitalize

ch08_sec060

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.60: When not to capitalize

ch08_sec061

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.61: Legislative and deliberative bodies

ch08_sec062

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.62: Administrative bodies

ch08_sec063

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.63: Judicial bodies

ch08_sec064

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.64: Government entities that are lowercased

ch08_sec065

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.65: Organizations, parties, alliances, and so forth

ch08_sec066

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.66: Adherents of unofficial political groups and movements

ch08_sec067

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.67: Institutions and companiesâ€”capitalization

ch08_sec068

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.68: Names with unusual capitalization

ch08_sec069

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.69: Associations, unions, and the like

ch08_sec070

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.70: Numerical designations for periods

ch08_sec071

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.71: Descriptive designations for periods

ch08_sec072

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.72: Traditional period names

ch08_sec073

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.73: Cultural periods

ch08_sec074

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.74: Historical events and programs

ch08_sec075

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.75: Speeches

ch08_sec076

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.76: Meteorological and other natural phenomena

ch08_sec077

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.77: Sporting events

ch08_sec078

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.78: Movements and stylesâ€”capitalization

ch08_sec079

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.79: Formal names of acts, treaties, and so forth

ch08_sec080

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.80: Generic terms for pending legislation

ch08_sec081

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.81: Legal cases mentioned in text

ch08_sec082

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.82: Capitalization for names of awards and prizes

ch08_sec083

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.83: Lowercase for oaths and pledges

ch08_sec084

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.84: Academic subjects

ch08_sec085

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.85: Courses of study

ch08_sec086

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.86: Lectures

ch08_sec087

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.87: Days of the week, months, and seasons

ch08_sec088

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.88: Holidays

ch08_sec089

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.89: Time and time zones

ch08_sec090

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.90: Deities

ch08_sec091

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.91: Alternative names

ch08_sec092

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.92: Prophets and the like

ch08_sec093

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.93: Platonic ideas

ch08_sec094

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.94: Pronouns referring to religious figures

ch08_sec095

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.95: Major religions

ch08_sec096

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.96: Denominations, sects, orders, and religious movements

ch08_sec097

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.97: "Church" as institution

ch08_sec098

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.98: Generic versus religious terms

ch08_sec099

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.99: Religious jurisdictions

ch08_sec100

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.100: Buildings

ch08_sec101

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.101: Councils, synods, and the like

ch08_sec102

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.102: Scriptures

ch08_sec103

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.103: Other names and versions for bibles

ch08_sec104

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.104: Books of the Bible

ch08_sec105

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.105: Sections of the Bible

ch08_sec106

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.106: Prayers, creeds, and such

ch08_sec107

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.107: Religious events and concepts

ch08_sec108

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.108: Heaven, hell, and so on

ch08_sec109

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.109: Services and rites

ch08_sec110

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.110: Objects

ch08_sec111

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.111: Armies, battalions, and such

ch08_sec112

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.112: Wars and revolutions

ch08_sec113

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.113: Battles and campaigns

ch08_sec114

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.114: Medals and awards

ch08_sec115

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.115: Ships and other named vessels

ch08_sec116

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.116: Other vehicle names

ch08_sec117

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.117: Pronouns referring to vessels

ch08_sec118

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.118: Scientific styleâ€”additional resources

ch08_sec119

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.119: Genus and specific epithet

ch08_sec120

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.120: Abbreviation of genus name

ch08_sec121

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.121: Subspecies and varieties

ch08_sec122

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.122: Unspecified species and varieties

ch08_sec123

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.123: Author names

ch08_sec124

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.124: Plant hybrids

ch08_sec125

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.125: Higher divisions

ch08_sec126

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.126: English derivatives

ch08_sec127

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.127: Plants and animalsâ€”additional resources

ch08_sec128

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.128: Domestic animals and horticultural categories

ch08_sec129

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.129: Horticultural cultivars

ch08_sec130

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.130: Genetic nomenclatureâ€”additional resources

ch08_sec131

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.131: Genes

ch08_sec132

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.132: Enzymes

ch08_sec133

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.133: Geological termsâ€”additional resources

ch08_sec134

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.134: Formal versus generic geological terms

ch08_sec135

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.135: Stratigraphy

ch08_sec136

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.136: Astronomical termsâ€”additional resources

ch08_sec137

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.137: Celestial bodies

ch08_sec138

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.138: Catalog names for celestial objects

ch08_sec139

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.139: "Earth"

ch08_sec140

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.140: "Sun" and "moon"

ch08_sec141

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.141: Descriptive terms

ch08_sec142

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.142: Medical termsâ€”additional resources

ch08_sec143

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.143: Diseases, procedures, and such

ch08_sec144

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.144: Infections

ch08_sec145

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.145: Drugs

ch08_sec146

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.146: Physical and chemical termsâ€”additional resources

ch08_sec147

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.147: Laws and theories

ch08_sec148

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.148: Chemical names and symbols

ch08_sec149

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.149: Mass number

ch08_sec150

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.150: Radiations

ch08_sec151

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.151: Metric units

ch08_sec152

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.152: Trademarks

ch08_sec153

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.153: Names like eBay and iPod

ch08_sec154

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.154: Treatment of titles in text and notesâ€”overview

ch08_sec155

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.155: Capitalization of titles of worksâ€”general principles

ch08_sec156

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.156: Principles and examples of sentence-style capitalization

ch08_sec157

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.157: Principles of headline-style capitalization

ch08_sec158

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.158: Examples of headline-style capitalization

ch08_sec159

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.159: Hyphenated compounds in headline-style titles

ch08_sec160

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.160: Titles containing quotations

ch08_sec161

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.161: Italics versus quotation marks for titles

ch08_sec162

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.162: Subtitle capitalization

ch08_sec163

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.163: Permissible changes to titles

ch08_sec164

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.164: Titles in relation to surrounding text

ch08_sec165

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.165: Double titles connected by "or"

ch08_sec166

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.166: Treatment of book and periodical titles

ch08_sec167

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.167: An initial "a," "an," or "the" in book titles

ch08_sec168

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.168: An initial "the" in periodical titles

ch08_sec169

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.169: "Magazine" and other descriptive terms

ch08_sec170

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.170: Periodical titles in awards, buildings, and so forth

ch08_sec171

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.171: Italicized terms and titles within titles

ch08_sec172

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.172: Title not interchangeable with subject

ch08_sec173

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.173: Multivolume works

ch08_sec174

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.174: Series and editions

ch08_sec175

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.175: Articles, stories, chapters, and so on

ch08_sec176

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.176: Collected works

ch08_sec177

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.177: Terms like "foreword," "preface," and so on

ch08_sec178

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.178: Numbered chapters, parts, and so on

ch08_sec179

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.179: Titles of poems

ch08_sec180

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.180: Poems referred to by first line

ch08_sec181

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.181: Titles of plays

ch08_sec182

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.182: Divisions of plays or poems

ch08_sec183

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.183: Titles of freestanding publications

ch08_sec184

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.184: Titles of unpublished works

ch08_sec185

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.185: Titles of movies and television and radio programs and series

ch08_sec186

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.186: Websites and web pages

ch08_sec187

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.187: Blogs and blog entries

ch08_sec188

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.188: Musical worksâ€”additional resources

ch08_sec189

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.189: Operas, songs, and the like

ch08_sec190

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.190: Instrumental works

ch08_sec191

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.191: Opus numbers

ch08_sec192

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.192: Recordings

ch08_sec193

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.193: Paintings, statues, and such

ch08_sec194

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.194: Cartoons

ch08_sec195

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.195: Exhibitions and such

ch08_sec196

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.196: Signs and notices

ch08_sec197

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 8.197: Mottoes

ch09_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 9 Contents

ch09_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.1: Overview and additional resources

ch09_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.2: Chicago's general ruleâ€”zero through one hundred

ch09_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.3: An alternative ruleâ€”zero through nine

ch09_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.4: Hundreds, thousands, and hundred thousands

ch09_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.5: Number beginning a sentence

ch09_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.6: Ordinals

ch09_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.7: Consistency and flexibility

ch09_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.8: Millions, billions, and so forth

ch09_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.9: Powers of ten

ch09_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.10: "Mega-," "giga-," "tera-," and so forth

ch09_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.11: Binary systems

ch09_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.12: Use of "dex"

ch09_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.13: Physical quantities in general contexts

ch09_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.14: Simple fractions

ch09_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.15: Whole numbers plus fractions

ch09_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.16: Abbreviations and symbols

ch09_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.17: Units for repeated quantities

ch09_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.18: Percentages

ch09_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.19: Decimal fractions and use of the zero

ch09_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.20: Decimal placesâ€”European practice

ch09_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.21: Words versus monetary symbols and numerals

ch09_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.22: Non-US currencies using the dollar symbol

ch09_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.23: British currency

ch09_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.24: Other currencies

ch09_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.25: Large monetary amounts

ch09_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.26: Currency with dates

ch09_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.27: Page numbers, chapter numbers, and so forth

ch09_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.28: Volume, issue, and page numbers for periodicals

ch09_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.29: Numbered divisions in legal instruments

ch09_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.30: The year alone

ch09_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.31: The year abbreviated

ch09_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.32: Month and day

ch09_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.33: Centuries

ch09_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.34: Decades

ch09_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.35: Eras

ch09_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.36: All-numeral dates and other brief forms

ch09_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.37: ISO style for dates

ch09_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.38: Numerals versus words for time of day

ch09_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.39: Noon and midnight

ch09_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.40: The twenty-four-hour system

ch09_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.41: Seconds and dates included

ch09_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.42: Numerals for monarchs, popes, and so forth

ch09_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.43: Numerals with personal names

ch09_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.44: Numbers for sequels

ch09_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.45: Vehicle and vessel numbers

ch09_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.46: Successive governments

ch09_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.47: Numbered political and judicial divisions

ch09_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.48: Numbered military units

ch09_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.49: Numbered places of worship

ch09_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.50: Unions and lodges

ch09_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.51: Numbered highways

ch09_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.52: Numbered streets

ch09_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.53: Building and apartment numbers

ch09_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.54: Plural numbers

ch09_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.55: Comma between digits

ch09_sec056

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.56: Space between digits

ch09_sec057

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.57: Numbered lists and outline style

ch09_sec058

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.58: When to use the en dash

ch09_sec059

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.59: When not to use the en dash

ch09_sec060

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.60: Abbreviating, or condensing, inclusive numbers

ch09_sec061

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.61: Alternative systems for inclusive numbers

ch09_sec062

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.62: Inclusive numbers with commas

ch09_sec063

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.63: Inclusive years

ch09_sec064

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.64: Roman numeralsâ€”general principles

ch09_sec065

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.65: The advent of subtrahends (back counters)

ch09_sec066

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 9.66: Chicago's preference for arabic rather than roman numerals

ch09_tab01

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Table 9.1. Roman and arabic numerals

ch10_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 10 Contents

ch10_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.1: Abbreviationsâ€”additional resources

ch10_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.2: Acronyms, initialisms, contractions

ch10_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.3: When to use abbreviations

ch10_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.4: Periods with abbreviations

ch10_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.5: Space or no space between elements

ch10_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.6: Capitals versus lowercase for acronyms and initialisms

ch10_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.7: Italic versus roman type for abbreviations

ch10_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.8: Small versus full-size capitals for acronyms and initialisms

ch10_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.9: "A," "an," or "the" preceding an abbreviation

ch10_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.10: Ampersands

ch10_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.11: Personal names

ch10_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.12: Initials in personal names

ch10_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.13: Abbreviating titles before names

ch10_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.14: Civil titles

ch10_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.15: US military titles

ch10_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.16: Social titles

ch10_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.17: French social titles

ch10_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.18: "Reverend" and "Honorable"

ch10_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.19: "Jr.," "Sr.," and the like

ch10_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.20: Academic degrees

ch10_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.21: Professional, religious, and other designations

ch10_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.22: Some commonly used generic abbreviations

ch10_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.23: Company names

ch10_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.24: Associations and the like

ch10_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.25: Broadcasting companies

ch10_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.26: Names of saints

ch10_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.27: Personal names with "Saint" or "St."

ch10_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.28: US states and territories

ch10_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.29: Canadian provinces and territories

ch10_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.30: Comma with city plus state

ch10_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.31: Place-names with "Fort," "Mount," "Saint," and the like

ch10_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.32: When to abbreviate country names

ch10_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.33: "US" versus United States

ch10_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.34: Mailing addressesâ€”postal versus standard abbreviations

ch10_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.35: Compass points in mailing addresses

ch10_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.36: Compass points

ch10_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.37: "Latitude" and "longitude"

ch10_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.38: Other discussions

ch10_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.39: Systems of chronology

ch10_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.40: Months

ch10_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.41: Days of the week

ch10_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.42: Time of day

ch10_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.43: Scholarly abbreviations

ch10_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.44: A few scholarly symbols

ch10_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.45: Biblical abbreviationsâ€”additional resources

ch10_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.46: Books of the Bible in text and notes

ch10_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.47: Biblical abbreviations and short formsâ€”an overview

ch10_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.48: The Old Testament

ch10_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.49: The Apocrypha

ch10_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.50: The New Testament

ch10_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.51: Versions and sections of the Bible

ch10_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.52: Miscellaneous technical abbreviations

ch10_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.53: Statistics

ch10_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.54: SI units

ch10_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.55: SI unitsâ€”form

ch10_sec056

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.56: Base SI units

ch10_sec057

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.57: SI prefixes

ch10_sec058

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.58: Grams

ch10_sec059

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.59: Derived units expressed algebraically

ch10_sec060

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.60: Derived units with special names

ch10_sec061

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.61: SI units and abbreviations—spacing

ch10_sec062

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.62: Non-SI units accepted for use

ch10_sec063

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.63: Astronomyâ€”additional resources

ch10_sec064

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.64: Celestial coordinates

ch10_sec065

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.65: Some other astronomical abbreviations

ch10_sec066

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.66: Naming conventions for chemical elements

ch10_sec067

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.67: Periods with abbreviations of US measure

ch10_sec068

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.68: Plural forms for abbreviations of US measure

ch10_sec069

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.69: Length, area, and volume

ch10_sec070

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.70: Weight and capacity

ch10_sec071

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.71: Time

ch10_sec072

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 10.72: Commercial termsâ€”some examples

ch11_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 11 Contents

ch11_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.1: Scope and organization

ch11_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.2: Unicode

ch11_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.3: Capitalization of foreign titles

ch11_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.4: Punctuation of foreign titles

ch11_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.5: Italic versus roman type

ch11_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.6: Foreign titles with English translation

ch11_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.7: Translated titles

ch11_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.8: Foreign institutions

ch11_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.9: Capitalizationâ€”English versus other languages

ch11_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.10: Punctuationâ€”original language versus English context

ch11_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.11: Word division

ch11_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.12: Special characters

ch11_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.13: International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA)

ch11_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.14: African capitalization and punctuation

ch11_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.15: African special characters

ch11_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.16: Albanian capitalization

ch11_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.17: Albanian special characters

ch11_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.18: Croatian and Bosnian capitalization

ch11_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.19: Croatian and Bosnian special characters

ch11_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.20: Czech capitalization

ch11_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.21: Czech special characters

ch11_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.22: Danish capitalization

ch11_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.23: Danish special characters

ch11_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.24: Dutch capitalization

ch11_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.25: Dutch special characters

ch11_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.26: Finnish capitalization

ch11_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.27: Finnish special characters

ch11_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.28: French—additional resources

ch11_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.29: French capitalization

ch11_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.30: Titles of French works

ch11_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.31: Spacing with French punctuation

ch11_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.32: French use of guillemets

ch11_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.33: Quotation marks in French

ch11_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.34: French dialogue

ch11_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.35: French suspension points and ellipses

ch11_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.36: French word division—vowels

ch11_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.37: French word division—consonants

ch11_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.38: French words containing apostrophes

ch11_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.39: French words best left undivided

ch11_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.40: French special characters

ch11_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.41: The new German orthography

ch11_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.42: German capitalization

ch11_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.43: German apostrophes

ch11_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.44: German quotation marks

ch11_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.45: German word division—vowels

ch11_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.46: German word division—consonants

ch11_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.47: German word division—compounds

ch11_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.48: German special characters

ch11_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.49: Hungarian capitalization

ch11_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.50: Hungarian special characters

ch11_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.51: Italian capitalization

ch11_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.52: Italian quotations and dialogue

ch11_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.53: Italian apostrophes

ch11_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.54: Italian suspension points and ellipses

ch11_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.55: Italian word division—vowels

ch11_sec056

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.56: Italian word division—consonants

ch11_sec057

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.57: Italian word division—words containing apostrophes

ch11_sec058

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.58: Italian special characters

ch11_sec059

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.59: Latin capitalization—titles of works

ch11_sec060

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.60: Latin word division—syllables

ch11_sec061

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.61: Latin word division—single consonants

ch11_sec062

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.62: Latin word division—multiple consonants

ch11_sec063

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.63: Latin word division—compounds

ch11_sec064

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.64: Latin special characters

ch11_sec065

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.65: Norwegian capitalization

ch11_sec066

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.66: Norwegian special characters

ch11_sec067

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.67: Polish capitalization

ch11_sec068

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.68: Polish word division

ch11_sec069

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.69: Polish special characters

ch11_sec070

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.70: Portuguese capitalization

ch11_sec071

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.71: Portuguese special characters

ch11_sec072

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.72: Romanian and Moldavian capitalization

ch11_sec073

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.73: Romanian and Moldavian special characters

ch11_sec074

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.74: Serbian and Montenegrin capitalization

ch11_sec075

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.75: Serbian and Montenegrin special characters

ch11_sec076

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.76: Spanish—additional resources

ch11_sec077

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.77: Spanish capitalization

ch11_sec078

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.78: Spanish question marks and exclamation points

ch11_sec079

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.79: Spanish guillemets and quotation marks

ch11_sec080

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.80: Spanish dialogue

ch11_sec081

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.81: Spanish suspension points and ellipses

ch11_sec082

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.82: Spanish word division—vowels

ch11_sec083

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.83: Spanish word division—consonants

ch11_sec084

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.84: Dividing Spanish compounds

ch11_sec085

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.85: Spanish special characters

ch11_sec086

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.86: Swedish capitalization

ch11_sec087

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.87: Swedish special characters

ch11_sec088

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.88: Turkish spelling

ch11_sec089

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.89: Turkish and Azeri capitalization

ch11_sec090

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.90: Turkish and Azeri special characters

ch11_sec091

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.91: Transliteration

ch11_sec092

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.92: Character sets for non-Latin alphabets

ch11_sec093

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.93: Proofreading copy in non-Latin alphabetsâ€”a warning

ch11_sec094

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.94: Diacritics—specialized versus general contexts

ch11_sec095

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.95: Italics versus roman for transliterated terms

ch11_sec096

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.96: Arabic transliteration

ch11_sec097

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.97: The hamza and the ʿayn

ch11_sec098

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.98: Arabic spelling

ch11_sec099

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.99: The Arabic definite article

ch11_sec100

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.100: Arabic capitalization

ch11_sec101

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.101: Arabic word division

ch11_sec102

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.102: Chinese romanization

ch11_sec103

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.103: Exceptions to Pinyin

ch11_sec104

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.104: Apostrophes, hyphens, and tone marks in Chinese romanization

ch11_sec105

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.105: Some common Chinese names

ch11_sec106

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.106: Japanese romanization

ch11_sec107

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.107: Modified Hepburn system

ch11_sec108

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.108: Chinese and Japanese—capitalization and italics

ch11_sec109

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.109: Titles of Japanese and Chinese works

ch11_sec110

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.110: Inclusion of Chinese and Japanese characters

ch11_sec111

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.111: Hebrew transliteration systems

ch11_sec112

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.112: Diacritics in transliterated Hebrew

ch11_sec113

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.113: Hebrew prefixes

ch11_sec114

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.114: Hebrew capitalization and italics

ch11_sec115

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.115: Hebrew word division

ch11_sec116

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.116: Unromanized Hebrew phrases

ch11_sec117

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.117: A note on Hebrew vowels

ch11_sec118

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.118: Russian transliteration

ch11_sec119

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.119: Russian capitalization

ch11_sec120

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.120: Titles of Russian works

ch11_sec121

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.121: Russian quotations and dialogue

ch11_sec122

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.122: Russian suspension points

ch11_sec123

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.123: Russian uses of the dash

ch11_sec124

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.124: Russian word divisionâ€”general

ch11_sec125

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.125: Combinations not to be divided in Cyrillic transliteration

ch11_sec126

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.126: Division between Russian consonants

ch11_sec127

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.127: Division of Russian words after prefixes or between parts

ch11_sec128

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.128: Division of Russian words after vowel or diphthong

ch11_sec129

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.129: South Asian special characters

ch11_sec130

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.130: Transliterating Greek

ch11_sec131

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.131: Typesetting Greek

ch11_sec132

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.132: Greek breathing marks

ch11_sec133

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.133: Greek accent marks

ch11_sec134

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.134: Unaccented Greek words

ch11_sec135

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.135: Greek vowels

ch11_sec136

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.136: Greek punctuation

ch11_sec137

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.137: Greek numbers

ch11_sec138

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.138: Greek word division—consecutive vowels

ch11_sec139

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.139: Greek word division—single consonants

ch11_sec140

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.140: Greek word division—two or more consonants

ch11_sec141

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.141: Greek word division—compound words

ch11_sec142

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.142: Special characters in Old and Middle English

ch11_sec143

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.143: Ampersand and wynn

ch11_sec144

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.144: Signed languages

ch11_sec145

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.145: Components of signs

ch11_sec146

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.146: Writing ASL

ch11_sec147

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.147: Glosses in ASL

ch11_sec148

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.148: Compound signs

ch11_sec149

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.149: Fingerspelling

ch11_sec150

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.150: Lexicalized signs

ch11_sec151

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.151: Handshapes

ch11_sec152

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.152: Transcriptions of signed sentences

ch11_sec153

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.153: Pronouns, possessives, and reference

ch11_sec154

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 11.154: Nonmanual signals

ch11_tab01

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Table 11.1. Special characters (and Unicode numbers) for languages using the Latin alphabet

ch11_tab02

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Table 11.2. Special characters (and Unicode numbers) for transliterated Arabic, Hebrew, Japanese, and South Asian languages

ch11_tab03

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Table 11.3. Russian alphabet (and Unicode numbers) and romanization

ch11_tab04

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Table 11.4. Greek alphabet (and Unicode numbers) and romanization

ch11_tab05

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Table 11.5. Greek numerals

ch12_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 12 Contents

ch12_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.1: Additional resources

ch12_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.2: Tools

ch12_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.3: Standards for mathematical copy

ch12_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.4: Consistency of notation

ch12_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.5: Words versus symbols in text

ch12_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.6: Concise expression

ch12_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.7: Sentence beginning with a mathematical symbol

ch12_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.8: Adjacent mathematical symbols

ch12_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.9: Mathematical characters

ch12_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.10: Letters and diacritical marks

ch12_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.11: Italic letters and kerning

ch12_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.12: Letters and fonts

ch12_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.13: List of unusual characters

ch12_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.14: Special mathematical symbols

ch12_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.15: Signs for binary operations and relations

ch12_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.16: Basic spacing in mathematics

ch12_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.17: Functions

ch12_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.18: Mathematical expressions and punctuation

ch12_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.19: Elided lists

ch12_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.20: Elided operations and relations

ch12_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.21: Displaying mathematical expressions

ch12_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.22: Qualifying clauses for displayed expressions

ch12_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.23: Breaking displayed expressions

ch12_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.24: Numbering displayed mathematical expressions

ch12_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.25: Methods of numeration

ch12_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.26: Common delimiters

ch12_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.27: Functional notation

ch12_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.28: Set notation

ch12_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.29: Ordered set notation

ch12_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.30: Intervals

ch12_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.31: Delimiters denoting inner product

ch12_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.32: Binomial coefficients

ch12_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.33: Vertical bars

ch12_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.34: Single vertical bar

ch12_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.35: Cases

ch12_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.36: Simple subscripts and superscripts

ch12_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.37: Complex subscripts and superscripts

ch12_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.38: Alignment of subscripts and superscripts

ch12_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.39: Summation sign

ch12_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.40: Product sign

ch12_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.41: Integral sign

ch12_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.42: Spacing around differentials

ch12_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.43: Radical signs

ch12_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.44: Radical signs in text

ch12_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.45: Fractions in text

ch12_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.46: Fractions in display

ch12_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.47: Fractions in subscripts and superscripts

ch12_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.48: Multiple and multilevel fractions

ch12_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.49: Rewriting fractions using exponents

ch12_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.50: Matrices

ch12_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.51: Determinants

ch12_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.52: Scalars, vectors, and tensors defined

ch12_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.53: Vector and tensor multiplication

ch12_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.54: Additional tensor notation

ch12_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.55: Dirac notation

ch12_sec056

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.56: Formal statements in text

ch12_sec057

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.57: Probability

ch12_sec058

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.58: Means and standard deviations

ch12_sec059

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.59: Uncertainties

ch12_sec060

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.60: Format of paper manuscripts

ch12_sec061

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.61: Setting from the author's hard copy

ch12_sec062

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.62: Marking italic type

ch12_sec063

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.63: Common abbreviations

ch12_sec064

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.64: Marking single letters in other type styles

ch12_sec065

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.65: Mathematics fonts

ch12_sec066

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.66: Marking subscripts and superscripts

ch12_sec067

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 12.67: Examples of marked copy

ch12_fig01

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 12.1

ch12_fig02

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 12.2

ch12_fig03

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 12.3

ch12_tab01

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Table 12.1. Common mathematical signs and symbols (with Unicode numbers and LaTeX commands)

ch12_tab02

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Table 12.2. Standard abbreviated notations in mathematical copy

ch12_tab03

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Table 12.3. Statistical notation

ch12_tab04

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Table 12.4. Potentially ambiguous mathematical symbols

ch13_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 13 Contents

ch13_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.1: Scope of this chapterâ€”and where else to look

ch13_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.2: Quotations and modern scholarship

ch13_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.3: Giving credit and seeking permission

ch13_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.4: When to paraphrase rather than quote

ch13_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.5: When quotation and attribution is unnecessary

ch13_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.6: Ensuring accuracy of quotations

ch13_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.7: Permissible changes to punctuation, capitalization, and spelling

ch13_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.8: Permissible changes to typography and layout

ch13_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.9: Run-in versus block quotations

ch13_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.10: Choosing between run-in and block quotations

ch13_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.11: Logical and grammatical assimilation

ch13_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.12: Integrating tenses and pronouns

ch13_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.13: Changing capitalization to suit syntax—an overview

ch13_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.14: Initial capital or lowercase—run-in quotations

ch13_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.15: Initial capital or lowercase—block quotations

ch13_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.16: Brackets to indicate a change in capitalization

ch13_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.17: Colon preceding a quotation

ch13_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.18: Comma preceding a quotation

ch13_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.19: Period rather than colon preceding a quotation

ch13_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.20: Block quotations of more than one paragraph

ch13_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.21: Block quotations beginning in text

ch13_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.22: Text following a block quotation

ch13_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.23: Setting off poetry

ch13_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.24: Uniform indention for poetry

ch13_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.25: Long lines and runovers in poetry

ch13_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.26: Quotation marks in poems

ch13_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.27: Run-in poetry quotations

ch13_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.28: Quotations and "quotes within quotes"

ch13_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.29: Quotation marks in block quotations

ch13_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.30: Quotation marks across paragraphs

ch13_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.31: Quotations within quotations across paragraphs

ch13_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.32: Running in more than one stanza of poetry

ch13_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.33: Running in letters

ch13_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.34: Epigraphs

ch13_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.35: Decorative initials ("drop caps" and raised initials)

ch13_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.36: Maxims, questions, and the like

ch13_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.37: Direct discourse

ch13_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.38: Single-word speech

ch13_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.39: Faltering or interrupted speech

ch13_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.40: Alternatives to quotation marks

ch13_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.41: Unspoken discourse

ch13_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.42: Numerals in direct discourse

ch13_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.43: Indirect discourse

ch13_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.44: Drama

ch13_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.45: Shared lines and runover lines in verse drama

ch13_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.46: Discussions and interviews

ch13_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.47: Field notes

ch13_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.48: Ellipses defined

ch13_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.49: Danger of skewing meaning

ch13_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.50: When not to use ellipsis points

ch13_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.51: Ellipses with periods

ch13_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.52: Ellipses with other punctuation

ch13_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.53: Deliberately incomplete sentence

ch13_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.54: Whole or partial paragraphs omitted

ch13_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.55: Ellipsis points in poetry and verse drama

ch13_sec056

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.56: Bracketed ellipses

ch13_sec057

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.57: Missing or illegible words

ch13_sec058

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.58: Bracketed clarifications

ch13_sec059

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.59: "Sic"

ch13_sec060

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.60: "Italics added"

ch13_sec061

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.61: Interpolations requiring quotation marks

ch13_sec062

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.62: Use of parentheses with in-text citations

ch13_sec063

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.63: Full in-text citation

ch13_sec064

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.64: The use of "ibid." with subsequent in-text citations

ch13_sec065

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.65: Frequent reference to a single source cited in a note

ch13_sec066

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.66: Punctuation following source

ch13_sec067

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.67: Question mark or exclamation point preceding source

ch13_sec068

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.68: Punctuation preceding source

ch13_sec069

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.69: Parenthetical citations with poetry extracts

ch13_sec070

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.70: Shortened references to poetry extracts

ch13_sec071

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.71: Typographic style of foreign quotations

ch13_sec072

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.72: Whether translation is needed

ch13_sec073

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.73: Where to place translations

ch13_sec074

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.74: Source plus translation

ch13_sec075

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.75: Including original-language version in note

ch13_sec076

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.76: Crediting the translation

ch13_sec077

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.77: Adjusting translations

ch13_sec078

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.78: Editing translations

ch13_sec079

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 13.79: The sin of retranslation

ch14_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 14 Contents

ch14_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.1: The purpose of source citations

ch14_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.2: Chicago's two systems of source citation

ch14_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.3: Other systems of source citation

ch14_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.4: Electronic resource identifiers

ch14_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.5: Uniform resource locators (URLs)

ch14_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.6: Digital Object Identifiers (DOIs)

ch14_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.7: Access dates

ch14_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.8: "Last modified" and other revision dates

ch14_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.9: Authority and permanence

ch14_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.10: Publications available in more than one medium

ch14_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.11: URLs and other such elements in relation to surrounding text

ch14_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.12: URLs or DOIs and line breaks

ch14_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.13: Source citation software

ch14_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.14: Notes and bibliographyâ€”an overview

ch14_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.15: Basic structure of a note

ch14_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.16: Basic structure of a bibliography entry

ch14_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.17: Page numbers and other locators

ch14_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.18: Notes and bibliography—examples and variations

ch14_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.19: Numbers in text versus numbers in notes

ch14_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.20: Sequencing of note numbers and symbols

ch14_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.21: Placement of note number

ch14_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.22: Note numbers with chapter and article titles and subheads

ch14_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.23: Multiple citations and multiple references

ch14_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.24: Purpose of shortened citations

ch14_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.25: Basic structure of the short form

ch14_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.26: Cross-reference to full citation

ch14_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.27: Short form for authors' names

ch14_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.28: Short form for titles

ch14_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.29: "Ibid."

ch14_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.30: "Idem"

ch14_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.31: "Op. cit." and "loc. cit."

ch14_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.32: Citations plus commentary

ch14_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.33: Quotation within a note

ch14_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.34: Substantive notes

ch14_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.35: Paragraphing within long notes

ch14_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.36: Footnotes that break across pages in a printed work

ch14_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.37: "See" and "cf."

ch14_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.38: Footnotes and endnotes—an overview

ch14_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.39: Footnotes—pros and cons

ch14_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.40: Endnotes—pros and cons

ch14_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.41: Endnote placement

ch14_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.42: Running heads for endnotes

ch14_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.43: Special needs of endnotes

ch14_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.44: Endnotes plus footnotes

ch14_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.45: Footnotes plus author-date citations

ch14_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.46: Editor's or translator's notes plus author's notes

ch14_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.47: Unnumbered notes in relation to numbered notes

ch14_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.48: Notes keyed to text by line or page numbers

ch14_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.49: Unnumbered source notes

ch14_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.50: Unnumbered biographical notes and acknowledgments

ch14_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.51: Avoiding overlong notes

ch14_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.52: Several citations in one note

ch14_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.53: Parenthetical text references

ch14_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.54: Abbreviations for frequently cited works

ch14_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.55: List of abbreviations

ch14_sec056

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.56: Relationship of bibliographies to notes

ch14_sec057

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.57: Format and placement of bibliography

ch14_sec058

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.58: Dividing a bibliography into sections

ch14_sec059

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.59: Kinds of bibliographies

ch14_sec060

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.60: Alphabetical order for bibliography entries

ch14_sec061

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.61: Single author versus several authors

ch14_sec062

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.62: Author with different coauthors

ch14_sec063

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.63: The 3-em dash and sortingâ€”advice to authors

ch14_sec064

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.64: The 3-em dash for one repeated name

ch14_sec065

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.65: The 3-em dash for more than one repeated name

ch14_sec066

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.66: The 3-em dash for an institutional name

ch14_sec067

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.67: Alphabetical order for titles by the same author

ch14_sec068

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.68: Books as a model for other sources

ch14_sec069

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.69: Elements to include when citing a book

ch14_sec070

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.70: Flexibility and consistency

ch14_sec071

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.71: Foreign bibliographic terms and abbreviations

ch14_sec072

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.72: Form of author's name

ch14_sec073

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.73: Authors preferring initials

ch14_sec074

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.74: Monarchs, saints, and the like

ch14_sec075

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.75: One author

ch14_sec076

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.76: Two or more authors (or editors)

ch14_sec077

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.77: Two or more authors (or editors) with same family name

ch14_sec078

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.78: Author's name in title

ch14_sec079

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.79: Anonymous works—unknown authorship

ch14_sec080

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.80: Anonymous works—known authorship

ch14_sec081

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.81: Pseudonyms—unknown authorship

ch14_sec082

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.82: Pseudonyms—known authorship

ch14_sec083

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.83: Pseudonyms rarely used

ch14_sec084

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.84: Cross-references for pseudonyms

ch14_sec085

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.85: Descriptive phrase as "author"

ch14_sec086

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.86: Alternative real names

ch14_sec087

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.87: Editor in place of author

ch14_sec088

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.88: Editor or translator in addition to author

ch14_sec089

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.89: "With the assistance of" and the like

ch14_sec090

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.90: Editor versus author

ch14_sec091

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.91: Authors of forewords and the like

ch14_sec092

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.92: Organization as author

ch14_sec093

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.93: Additional discussion of titles

ch14_sec094

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.94: Italics for book titles

ch14_sec095

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.95: Capitalization of book titles

ch14_sec096

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.96: Some permissible changes to titles

ch14_sec097

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.97: Subtitlesâ€”the colon

ch14_sec098

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.98: Two subtitles

ch14_sec099

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.99: Use of "or" with double titles

ch14_sec100

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.100: "And other stories" and such

ch14_sec101

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.101: Dates in titles

ch14_sec102

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.102: Titles within titles

ch14_sec103

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.103: Italicized terms within titles

ch14_sec104

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.104: Quotation marks in titles

ch14_sec105

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.105: Question marks or exclamation points in book titles

ch14_sec106

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.106: Older titles and very long titles

ch14_sec107

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.107: Non-English titles

ch14_sec108

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.108: Translated title supplied by author or editor

ch14_sec109

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.109: Original plus published translation

ch14_sec110

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.110: Unpublished translation of title standing in for original

ch14_sec111

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.111: Chapter in a single-author book

ch14_sec112

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.112: Contribution to a multiauthor book

ch14_sec113

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.113: Several contributions to the same book

ch14_sec114

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.114: Book-length work within a book

ch14_sec115

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.115: Chapter originally published elsewhere

ch14_sec116

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.116: Introductions, prefaces, afterwords, and the like

ch14_sec117

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.117: Letters in published collections

ch14_sec118

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.118: Editions other than the first

ch14_sec119

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.119: Reprint editions and modern editions

ch14_sec120

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.120: Microform editions

ch14_sec121

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.121: Volume numbers and page numbers

ch14_sec122

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.122: Citing a multivolume work as a whole

ch14_sec123

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.123: Citing a particular volume in a note

ch14_sec124

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.124: Citing a particular volume in a bibliography

ch14_sec125

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.125: Chapters and other parts of individual volumes

ch14_sec126

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.126: One volume in two or more books

ch14_sec127

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.127: Authors and editors of multivolume works

ch14_sec128

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.128: Series titles, numbers, and editors

ch14_sec129

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.129: Series editor

ch14_sec130

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.130: Series or multivolume work?

ch14_sec131

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.131: Multivolume work within a series

ch14_sec132

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.132: "Old series" and "new series"

ch14_sec133

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.133: Place, publisher, and date

ch14_sec134

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.134: Place and date only, for books published before 1900

ch14_sec135

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.135: Placeâ€”city

ch14_sec136

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.136: When to specify state, province, or country

ch14_sec137

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.137: Foreign city names

ch14_sec138

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.138: "No place"

ch14_sec139

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.139: Preferred form of publisher's name

ch14_sec140

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.140: Abbreviations and omissible parts of a publisher's name

ch14_sec141

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.141: "And" or ampersand in publisher's name

ch14_sec142

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.142: Foreign publishers' names

ch14_sec143

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.143: Publisher unknown or work privately published

ch14_sec144

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.144: Parent companies, imprints, and such

ch14_sec145

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.145: Joint imprint

ch14_sec146

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.146: Special academic imprint

ch14_sec147

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.147: Copublication

ch14_sec148

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.148: Distributed books

ch14_sec149

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.149: Publication dateâ€”general

ch14_sec150

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.150: New impressions and renewal of copyright

ch14_sec151

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.151: Multivolume works published over more than one year

ch14_sec152

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.152: "No date"

ch14_sec153

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.153: "Forthcoming"

ch14_sec154

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.154: Arabic versus roman numerals

ch14_sec155

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.155: Ranges, or inclusive numbers

ch14_sec156

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.156: Using or avoiding "ff." and "passim"

ch14_sec157

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.157: Abbreviations for "page," "volume," and so on

ch14_sec158

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.158: When to omit "p." and "pp."

ch14_sec159

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.159: When to omit "vol."

ch14_sec160

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.160: Page and chapter numbers

ch14_sec161

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.161: Signed signatures

ch14_sec162

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.162: Folio editions

ch14_sec163

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.163: Line numbers

ch14_sec164

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.164: Citing numbered notes

ch14_sec165

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.165: Citing illustrations and tables

ch14_sec166

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.166: Books downloaded from a library or bookseller

ch14_sec167

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.167: Books consulted online

ch14_sec168

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.168: Books on CD-ROM and other fixed media

ch14_sec169

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.169: Freely available electronic editions of older works

ch14_sec170

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.170: "Periodicals" defined

ch14_sec171

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.171: Information to be included

ch14_sec172

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.172: Journals versus magazines

ch14_sec173

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.173: Punctuation in periodical citations

ch14_sec174

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.174: Page numbers in periodical citations

ch14_sec175

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.175: Journal articleâ€”author's name

ch14_sec176

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.176: Journal article—title

ch14_sec177

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.177: Italics and quotation marks within article titles

ch14_sec178

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.178: Question marks or exclamation points in article titles

ch14_sec179

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.179: Title of journal

ch14_sec180

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.180: Journal volume, issue, and date

ch14_sec181

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.181: No volume number or date only

ch14_sec182

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.182: Forthcoming articles

ch14_sec183

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.183: Journal page references

ch14_sec184

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.184: Electronic journal articles—URL or DOI

ch14_sec185

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.185: Electronic journal articlesâ€”access dates

ch14_sec186

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.186: Article page numbers in relation to volume or issue numbers

ch14_sec187

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.187: Special issues

ch14_sec188

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.188: Supplements

ch14_sec189

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.189: Articles published in installments

ch14_sec190

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.190: Article appearing in two publications

ch14_sec191

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.191: Place where journal is published

ch14_sec192

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.192: Translated or edited article

ch14_sec193

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.193: Foreign-language article and journal titles

ch14_sec194

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.194: Translated article titles

ch14_sec195

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.195: New series for journal volumes

ch14_sec196

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.196: Short titles for articles

ch14_sec197

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.197: Abstract

ch14_sec198

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.198: Electronic enhancements to journal articles

ch14_sec199

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.199: Citing magazines by date

ch14_sec200

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.200: Online magazine articles

ch14_sec201

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.201: Magazine article titles

ch14_sec202

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.202: Magazine departments

ch14_sec203

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.203: Newspaper citations—basic elements

ch14_sec204

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.204: Newspaper headlines

ch14_sec205

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.205: Regular columns

ch14_sec206

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.206: Citing in text rather than in a bibliography

ch14_sec207

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.207: Unsigned newspaper articles

ch14_sec208

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.208: Letters to the editor

ch14_sec209

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.209: Weekend supplements, magazines, and the like

ch14_sec210

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.210: Names of newspapers

ch14_sec211

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.211: Names of foreign newspapers

ch14_sec212

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.212: News services

ch14_sec213

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.213: News releases

ch14_sec214

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.214: Reviewsâ€”elements of the citation

ch14_sec215

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.215: Book reviews

ch14_sec216

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.216: Reviews of plays, movies, television programs, concerts, and the like

ch14_sec217

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.217: Unsigned reviews

ch14_sec218

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.218: Interviews and personal communicationsâ€”order of attribution

ch14_sec219

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.219: Unpublished interviews

ch14_sec220

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.220: Unattributed interviews

ch14_sec221

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.221: Published or broadcast interviews

ch14_sec222

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.222: Personal communications

ch14_sec223

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.223: Electronic mailing lists

ch14_sec224

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.224: Theses and dissertations

ch14_sec225

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.225: Unpublished manuscripts

ch14_sec226

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.226: Lectures, papers presented at meetings, and the like

ch14_sec227

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.227: Poster papers

ch14_sec228

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.228: Working papers and other unpublished works

ch14_sec229

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.229: Preprints

ch14_sec230

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.230: Patents

ch14_sec231

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.231: Private contracts, wills, and such

ch14_sec232

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.232: Overview and additional resources

ch14_sec233

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.233: Note forms versus bibliography entries

ch14_sec234

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.234: Specific versus generic titles for manuscript collections

ch14_sec235

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.235: Dates for manuscript collections

ch14_sec236

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.236: Folios, page numbers, and such for manuscript collections

ch14_sec237

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.237: "Papers" and "manuscripts"

ch14_sec238

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.238: Location of depositories

ch14_sec239

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.239: Collections of letters and the like

ch14_sec240

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.240: Examples of note forms for manuscript collections

ch14_sec241

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.241: Examples of bibliography entries for manuscript collections

ch14_sec242

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.242: Letters and the like in private collections

ch14_sec243

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.243: Websites and blogsâ€”overview

ch14_sec244

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.244: Titles for websites and blogs

ch14_sec245

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.245: Citations of website content

ch14_sec246

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.246: Citations of blog entries

ch14_sec247

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.247: Dictionaries and encyclopedias

ch14_sec248

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.248: Dictionaries and encyclopedias online

ch14_sec249

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.249: Pamphlets, reports, and the like

ch14_sec250

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.250: Exhibition catalogs

ch14_sec251

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.251: Loose-leaf services

ch14_sec252

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.252: Biblical referencesâ€”additional resource

ch14_sec253

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.253: Bible chapter and verse

ch14_sec254

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.254: Versions of the Bible

ch14_sec255

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.255: Other sacred works

ch14_sec256

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.256: Where to cite classical references

ch14_sec257

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.257: Identifying numbers in classical references

ch14_sec258

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.258: Abbreviations in classical references

ch14_sec259

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.259: Punctuation in classical references

ch14_sec260

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.260: Citing specific editions of classical references

ch14_sec261

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.261: Titles of classical works and collections

ch14_sec262

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.262: Superscripts in classical references

ch14_sec263

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.263: Collections of inscriptions

ch14_sec264

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.264: Fragments of classical texts

ch14_sec265

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.265: Modern editions of the classics

ch14_sec266

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.266: Medieval references

ch14_sec267

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.267: Citing editions of classic English poems and plays

ch14_sec268

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.268: Short forms for citing classic English poems and plays

ch14_sec269

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.269: Published scores

ch14_sec270

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.270: Unpublished scores

ch14_sec271

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.271: Library and other commercial databases

ch14_sec272

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.272: Scientific databases

ch14_sec273

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.273: Citations taken from secondary sources

ch14_sec274

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.274: Audiovisual materialsâ€”elements to include

ch14_sec275

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.275: Discographies

ch14_sec276

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.276: Musical recordings

ch14_sec277

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.277: Recordings of literature, lectures, and such

ch14_sec278

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.278: Slides and filmstrips

ch14_sec279

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.279: DVDs and videocassettes

ch14_sec280

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.280: Online multimedia

ch14_sec281

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.281: Recommended stylebooks

ch14_sec282

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.282: Legal and public documents online

ch14_sec283

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.283: Note form for legal-style citations

ch14_sec284

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.284: Typefaces in legal-style citations

ch14_sec285

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.285: Page numbers and other locators in legal-style citations

ch14_sec286

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.286: Abbreviations in legal-style citations

ch14_sec287

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.287: Short forms for legal-style citations

ch14_sec288

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.288: Cases or court decisionsâ€”basic elements

ch14_sec289

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.289: United States Supreme Court decisions

ch14_sec290

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.290: Lower federal-court decisions

ch14_sec291

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.291: State- and local-court decisions

ch14_sec292

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.292: Constitutions

ch14_sec293

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.293: Legislative documentsâ€”abbreviations

ch14_sec294

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.294: Laws and statutes

ch14_sec295

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.295: Bills and resolutions

ch14_sec296

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.296: Hearings

ch14_sec297

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.297: Congressional reports and documents

ch14_sec298

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.298: Congressional debates since 1873

ch14_sec299

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.299: Records of congressional debates before 1873

ch14_sec300

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.300: State laws and municipal ordinances

ch14_sec301

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.301: Presidential documents

ch14_sec302

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.302: Treaties

ch14_sec303

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.303: Secondary sources and freestanding publications

ch14_sec304

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.304: Unpublished government documents

ch14_sec305

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.305: Canadian reference works

ch14_sec306

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.306: Canadian legal cases

ch14_sec307

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.307: Canadian statutes

ch14_sec308

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.308: Unpublished Canadian government documents

ch14_sec309

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.309: UK reference works

ch14_sec310

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.310: UK legal cases

ch14_sec311

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.311: UK parliamentary publications

ch14_sec312

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.312: UK statutes

ch14_sec313

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.313: Publication of UK parliamentary debates

ch14_sec314

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.314: UK command papers

ch14_sec315

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.315: Unpublished UK government documents

ch14_sec316

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.316: Intergovernmental bodies

ch14_sec317

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 14.317: International legal and public documents online

ch14_fig01

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 14.1

ch14_fig02

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 14.2

ch14_fig03

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 14.3

ch14_fig04

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 14.4

ch14_fig05

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 14.5

ch14_fig06

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 14.6

ch14_fig07

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 14.7

ch14_fig08

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 14.8

ch14_fig09

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 14.9

ch14_fig10

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 14.10

ch14_fig11

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 14.11

ch14_fig12

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 14.12

ch15_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 15 Contents

ch15_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.1: The scope of this chapter

ch15_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.2: Uniform treatment in author-date references and notes and bibliography

ch15_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.3: Notes and bibliography entries as models for author-date references

ch15_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.4: Considerations for electronic sources

ch15_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.5: The author-date systemâ€”overview

ch15_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.6: Basic structure of a reference list entry

ch15_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.7: Basic structure of an in-text citation

ch15_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.8: Page numbers and other locators

ch15_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.9: Author-date references—examples and variations

ch15_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.10: Function and placement of reference lists

ch15_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.11: Alphabetical arrangement of reference list entries

ch15_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.12: Authors' names in reference list entries

ch15_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.13: Titles in reference list entries

ch15_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.14: Placement of dates in reference list entries

ch15_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.15: Abbreviations in reference list entries

ch15_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.16: Single author versus several authorsâ€”reference list order

ch15_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.17: Chronological order for repeated names in a reference list

ch15_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.18: The 3-em dash with edited, translated, or compiled works

ch15_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.19: Reference list entries with same author(s), same year

ch15_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.20: Agreement of text citation and reference list entry

ch15_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.21: Text citationsâ€”basic form

ch15_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.22: Page and volume numbers or other specific locators in text citations

ch15_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.23: Additional material in text citations

ch15_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.24: Text citations in relation to surrounding text and punctuation

ch15_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.25: Text citations in relation to direct quotations

ch15_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.26: Several references to the same source

ch15_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.27: Syntactic considerations with text citations

ch15_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.28: Text citations of works with more than three authors

ch15_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.29: Multiple text references

ch15_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.30: Author-date system with notes

ch15_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.31: Items not necessarily covered in chapter 14

ch15_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.32: Anonymous worksâ€”unknown authorship

ch15_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.33: Anonymous worksâ€”known authorship

ch15_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.34: Pseudonyms in author-date references

ch15_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.35: Editor in place of author in text citations

ch15_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.36: Organization as author in author-date references

ch15_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.37: Cross-references to other titles in reference lists

ch15_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.38: Reprint editions and modern editions—more than one date

ch15_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.39: Multivolume works published over more than one year

ch15_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.40: Letters in published collections

ch15_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.41: "No date" in author-date references

ch15_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.42: "Forthcoming" in author-date references

ch15_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.43: Publications preferring initials for authors' names

ch15_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.44: Publications preferring abbreviations for journal titles

ch15_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.45: Publications preferring sentence-style capitalization for titles

ch15_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.46: Parentheses with issue number

ch15_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.47: Newspapers and magazines in reference lists

ch15_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.48: Unpublished interviews and personal communications

ch15_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.49: Manuscript collections in the author-date style

ch15_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.50: Patents or other documents cited by more than one date

ch15_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.51: Access dates with website content

ch15_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.52: "Quoted in" in author-date references

ch15_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.53: Citing audiovisual materials in author-date format

ch15_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.54: Using notes for legal and public documents

ch15_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 15.55: Citing legal and public documents in text

ch15_fig01

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 15.1

ch15_fig02

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 15.2

ch16_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter 16 Contents

ch16_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.1: The back-of-the-book index as model

ch16_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.2: Why index?

ch16_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.3: Who should index a work?

ch16_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.4: The indexer and deadlines

ch16_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.5: The role of software in indexing

ch16_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.6: Single versus multiple indexes

ch16_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.7: Embedded indexes

ch16_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.8: Resources for indexers

ch16_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.9: Main headings for index entries

ch16_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.10: Index subentries

ch16_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.11: Initial lowercase letters in main headings

ch16_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.12: Initial lowercase letters in subheadings

ch16_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.13: Locators in indexes

ch16_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.14: Inclusive numbers in indexes

ch16_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.15: Cross-references in indexesâ€”general principles

ch16_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.16: "See" references and "double posting"

ch16_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.17: "See" references following a main heading

ch16_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.18: "See" references following a subheading

ch16_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.19: "See" references to a subheading

ch16_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.20: "See also" references

ch16_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.21: Correspondence between cross-references and headings

ch16_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.22: Italics for "see," "see also," and so forth

ch16_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.23: Generic cross-references

ch16_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.24: Flush-and-hang formatting for indexes

ch16_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.25: Run-in style for indexes

ch16_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.26: Indented style for indexes

ch16_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.27: Sub-subentries in run-in indexes

ch16_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.28: Sub-subentries in indented indexes

ch16_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.29: Style and usage in the index relative to the work

ch16_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.30: Choosing indexing terms

ch16_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.31: Terms that should not be indexed

ch16_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.32: Choosing between variant names

ch16_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.33: Indexing familiar forms of personal names

ch16_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.34: Indexing pseudonyms

ch16_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.35: Indexing persons with the same name

ch16_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.36: Indexing married women's names

ch16_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.37: Indexing monarchs, popes, and the like

ch16_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.38: Indexing princes, dukes, and other titled persons

ch16_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.39: Clerical titles in index entries

ch16_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.40: Academic titles and degrees in index entries

ch16_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.41: "Jr.," "Sr.," "III," and the like in index entries

ch16_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.42: Indexing saints

ch16_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.43: Indexing persons whose full names are unknown

ch16_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.44: Indexing incomplete names or names alluded to in text

ch16_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.45: Indexing confusing names

ch16_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.46: Indexing abbreviations and acronyms

ch16_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.47: Typographic treatment for indexed titles of works

ch16_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.48: Indexing newspaper titles

ch16_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.49: Indexing magazine and journal titles

ch16_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.50: Indexing authored titles of works

ch16_sec051

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.51: Indexing English-language titles beginning with an article

ch16_sec052

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.52: Indexing foreign-language titles beginning with an article

ch16_sec053

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.53: Indexing titles beginning with a preposition

ch16_sec054

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.54: Indexing titles ending with a question mark or exclamation point

ch16_sec055

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.55: Subtitles in index entries

ch16_sec056

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.56: Alphabetizing main headingsâ€”the basic rule

ch16_sec057

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.57: Computerized sorting

ch16_sec058

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.58: Two systems of alphabetizingâ€”an overview

ch16_sec059

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.59: The letter-by-letter system

ch16_sec060

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.60: The word-by-word system

ch16_sec061

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.61: The two systems compared

ch16_sec062

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.62: Alphabetizing items with the same name

ch16_sec063

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.63: Alphabetizing initials versus spelled-out names

ch16_sec064

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.64: Alphabetizing abbreviations

ch16_sec065

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.65: Alphabetizing headings beginning with numerals

ch16_sec066

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.66: Alphabetizing similar headings containing numerals

ch16_sec067

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.67: Alphabetizing accented letters

ch16_sec068

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.68: Alphabetical order of subentries

ch16_sec069

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.69: Numerical order of subentries

ch16_sec070

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.70: Chronological order of subentries

ch16_sec071

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.71: Indexing names with particles

ch16_sec072

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.72: Indexing compound names

ch16_sec073

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.73: Indexing names with "Mac" or "Mc"

ch16_sec074

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.74: Indexing names with "O' "

ch16_sec075

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.75: Indexing names with "Saint"

ch16_sec076

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.76: Indexing Arabic names

ch16_sec077

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.77: Indexing Burmese names

ch16_sec078

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.78: Indexing Chinese names

ch16_sec079

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.79: Indexing Hungarian names

ch16_sec080

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.80: Indexing Indian names

ch16_sec081

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.81: Indexing Indonesian names

ch16_sec082

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.82: Indexing Japanese names

ch16_sec083

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.83: Indexing Portuguese names

ch16_sec084

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.84: Indexing Spanish names

ch16_sec085

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.85: Indexing Thai names

ch16_sec086

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.86: Indexing Vietnamese names

ch16_sec087

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.87: Indexing other Asian names

ch16_sec088

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.88: Omission of article in indexed names of organizations

ch16_sec089

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.89: Indexing personal names as corporate names

ch16_sec090

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.90: Indexing names beginning with "Mount," "Lake," and such

ch16_sec091

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.91: Indexing names beginning with the definite article

ch16_sec092

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.92: Indexing names beginning with foreign definite articles

ch16_sec093

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.93: Indexing names of places beginning with "Saint"

ch16_sec094

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.94: Comma in index entries

ch16_sec095

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.95: Colon in index entries

ch16_sec096

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.96: Semicolon in index entries

ch16_sec097

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.97: Period in index entries

ch16_sec098

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.98: Parentheses in index headings

ch16_sec099

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.99: Em dash in index entries

ch16_sec100

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.100: En dash in index entries

ch16_sec101

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.101: Schedule for indexing

ch16_sec102

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.102: Indexing from page proofs

ch16_sec103

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.103: Publisher's indexing preferences

ch16_sec104

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.104: Indexing tools

ch16_sec105

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.105: Using the electronic files to index

ch16_sec106

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.106: Formatting index entries

ch16_sec107

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.107: Indexing the old-fashioned way

ch16_sec108

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.108: Preliminary indexing work

ch16_sec109

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.109: Indexing the text, front matter, and back matter

ch16_sec110

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.110: Indexing footnotes and endnotes

ch16_sec111

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.111: Endnote locators in index entries

ch16_sec112

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.112: Footnote locators in index entries

ch16_sec113

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.113: Indexing notes spanning more than one printed page

ch16_sec114

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.114: Indexing parenthetical text citations

ch16_sec115

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.115: Indexing authors' names for an author index

ch16_sec116

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.116: Indexing illustrations, tables, charts, and such

ch16_sec117

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.117: Beginning to highlight and enter terms

ch16_sec118

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.118: Deciding how many terms to mark

ch16_sec119

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.119: How to mark index entries

ch16_sec120

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.120: Planning index subentries

ch16_sec121

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.121: Recording inclusive numbers for index terms

ch16_sec122

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.122: Typing and modifying index entries

ch16_sec123

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.123: Alphabetizing entries as part of the indexing process

ch16_sec124

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.124: Final check of indexed proofs

ch16_sec125

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.125: Noting errors during indexing

ch16_sec126

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.126: Refining the terms for main headings

ch16_sec127

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.127: Main entries versus subentries

ch16_sec128

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.128: When to furnish subentries

ch16_sec129

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.129: How to phrase subheadings

ch16_sec130

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.130: Checking cross-references against edited index headings

ch16_sec131

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.131: Index submission format

ch16_sec132

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.132: What to do with a very bad index

ch16_sec133

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.133: Index-editing checklist

ch16_sec134

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.134: Instructions for typesetting the index

ch16_sec135

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.135: Type size and column width for indexes

ch16_sec136

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.136: Ragged right-hand margin for indexes

ch16_sec137

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.137: Index indention

ch16_sec138

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.138: Fixing bad breaks in indexes

ch16_sec139

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.139: Adding "continued" lines in an index

ch16_sec140

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.140: Making typographic distinctions in index entries

ch16_sec141

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.141: A run-in index with italicized references to figures and tables

ch16_sec142

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.142: An indented index with run-in sub-subentries

ch16_sec143

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.143: An indented index with indented sub-subentries and highlighted definitions

ch16_sec144

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.144: An index of first lines

ch16_sec145

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) 16.145: An index with authors, titles, and first lines combined

ch16_fig01

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure 16.1

allapp_1

- app01_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Chapter A Contents

- app01_sec001

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.1: Understanding the process

- app01_sec002

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.2: Divisions of labor

- app01_sec003

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.3: Terminology

- app01_sec004

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.4: Preparing for more than print

- app01_sec005

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.5: The journals publishing model

- app01_sec006

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.6: What is markup?

- app01_sec007

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.7: Semantic and functional markup

- app01_sec008

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.8: Document type definitions

- app01_sec009

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.9: Style sheets

- app01_sec010

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.10: Metadata

- app01_sec011

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.11: What is XML?

- app01_sec012

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.12: SGML, HTML, XMLâ€”a brief history

- app01_sec013

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.13: Why XML?

- app01_sec014

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.14: XML elements and attributes

- app01_sec015

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.15: XML character references

- app01_sec016

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.16: Mapping markup to design

- app01_sec017

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.17: Some limitations of style sheets

- app01_sec018

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.18: Determining length

- app01_sec019

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.19: Design specifications for printed works

- app01_sec020

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.20: Design specifications for web-based works

- app01_sec021

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.21: Picas, points, and pixels

- app01_sec022

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.22: Em spaces, en spaces, and so forth

- app01_sec023

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.23: Converting marked-up manuscripts for production

- app01_sec024

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.24: Steps in an XML workflow

- app01_sec025

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.25: Where does proofreading fit in?

- app01_sec026

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.26: Cyclical workflow for web-based publications

- app01_sec027

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.27: Who applies the markup?

- app01_sec028

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.28: Author's final manuscript converted to XML before editing

- app01_sec029

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.29: Edited manuscript converted for typesetting

- app01_sec030

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.30: XML added to files after typesetting

- app01_sec031

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.31: XML source files

- app01_sec032

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.32: Illustrations

- app01_sec033

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.33: Tables

- app01_sec034

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.34: Mathematical expressions

- app01_sec035

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.35: Print

- app01_sec036

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.36: Web

- app01_sec037

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.37: Converting XML to HTML

- app01_sec038

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.38: E-book formats

- app01_sec039

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.39: Additional publishing options

- app01_sec040

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.40: Digital rights management strategies

- app01_sec041

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.41: Electronic markup and print

- app01_sec042

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.42: The role of PDF in the print process

- app01_sec043

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.43: Preliminary presswork, or "prepress"

- app01_sec044

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.44: Paper selection

- app01_sec045

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.45: Paper sizes

- app01_sec046

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.46: Paper and the environment

- app01_sec047

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.47: Offset printing

- app01_sec048

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.48: Digital printing

- app01_sec049

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.49: Folded and gathered sheets (F&Gs)

- app01_sec050

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.) Appendix A.50: Binding

- app01_fig01

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure A.1

- app01_fig02

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure A.2

- app01_fig03

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure A.3

- app01_fig04

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure A.4

- app01_fig05

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure A.5

- app01_fig06

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure A.6

- app01_fig07

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure A.7

- app01_fig08

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure A.8

- app01_fig09

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figure A.9

end_1.pdf

- app02

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Appendix B

- bib_toc

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Bibliography

- bib1

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Bibliography Works on Writing and Editing

- bib2

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Bibliography Works on Publishing

- bib3

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Bibliography Dictionaries

- bib4

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Bibliography General Reference Works

- bib5

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Bibliography Miscellaneous Works Cited in Text

- indexA

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index A

- indexB

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index B

- indexC

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index C

- indexD

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index D

- indexE

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index E

- indexF

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index F

- indexG

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index G

- indexH

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index H

- indexI

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index I

- indexJ

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index J

- indexK

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index K

- indexL

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index L

- indexM

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index M

- indexN

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index N

- indexO

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index O

- indexP

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index P

- indexQ

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index Q

- indexR

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index R

- indexS

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index S

- indexT

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index T

- indexU

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index U

- indexV

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index V

- indexW

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index W

- indexX

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index X

- indexY

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index Y

- indexZ

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index Z

- figures

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Figures

- tables

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Tables

- A9RA338.tmp

- Local Disk

- The Chicago Manual of Style (16th Ed.): Index Z

Table of Contents

Table

Preface

List of Figures

Acknowledgments

List of Tables

Part One: The Publishing Process

Index

Manuscript Preparation, Manuscript Editing, and Proofreading

Illustrations and Tables

Rights, Permissions, and Copyright Administration

Part Two: Style and Usage

Punctuation

Spelling, Distinctive Treatment of Words, and Compounds

Names and Terms

Numbers

Abbreviations

Foreign Languages

Mathematics in Type

Quotations and Dialogue

Part Three: Documentation

Documentation II: Author-Date References

Indexes

Appendix A: Production and Digital Technology

Appendix B: Glossary

Bibliography

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

1.10

1.11

1.12

1.13

1.14

1.15

1.16

1.17

1.18

1.19

1.20

1.21

1.22

1.23

1.24

1.25

Table of Contents

Table

Preface

List of Figures

Acknowledgments

List of Tables

Part One: The Publishing Process

Index

Manuscript Preparation, Manuscript Editing, and Proofreading

Illustrations and Tables

Rights, Permissions, and Copyright Administration

Part Two: Style and Usage

Punctuation

Spelling, Distinctive Treatment of Words, and Compounds

Names and Terms

Numbers

Abbreviations

Foreign Languages

Mathematics in Type

Quotations and Dialogue

Part Three: Documentation

Documentation II: Author-Date References

Indexes

Appendix A: Production and Digital Technology

Appendix B: Glossary

Bibliography

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

1.10

1.11

1.12

1.13

1.14

1.15

1.16

1.17

1.18

1.19

1.20

1.21

1.22

1.23

1.24

1.25